International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.B: Reciprocal Space

INT E R NAT I ONAL T AB L E S FOR C RYST AL L OGR APHY International Tables for Crystallography Volume A: Space-Group...

Author: Uri Shmueli

406 downloads 2252 Views 7MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

INT E R NAT I ONAL T AB L E S FOR C RYST AL L OGR APHY

International Tables for Crystallography Volume A: Space-Group Symmetry Editor Theo Hahn First Edition 1983, Fourth Edition 1995 Corrected Reprint 1996 Volume B: Reciprocal Space Editor U. Shmueli First Edition 1993, Corrected Reprint 1996 Second Edition 2001 Volume C: Mathematical, Physical and Chemical Tables Editors A. J. C. Wilson and E. Prince First Edition 1992, Corrected Reprint 1995 Second Edition 1999

Forthcoming volumes Volume D: Physical Properties of Crystals Editor A. Authier Volume E: Subperiodic Groups Editors V. Kopsky and D. B. Litvin Volume F: Crystallography of Biological Macromolecules Editors M. G. Rossmann and E. Arnold Volume A1: Maximal Subgroups of Space Groups Editors H. Wondratschek and U. Mu¨ller

INTERNATIONAL TABLES FOR CRYSTALLOGRAPHY

Volume B RECIPROCAL SPACE

Edited by U. SHMUELI Second Edition

Published for

T HE I NT E RNAT IONAL UNION OF C RYST AL L OGR APHY by

KL UW E R ACADE MIC PUBLISHERS DORDRE CHT /BOST ON/L ONDON

2001

A C.I.P. Catalogue record for this book is available from the Library of Congress ISBN 0-7923-6592-5 (acid-free paper)

Published by Kluwer Academic Publishers, P.O. Box 17, 3300 AA Dordrecht, The Netherlands Sold and distributed in North, Central and South America by Kluwer Academic Publishers, 101 Philip Drive, Norwell, MA 02061, USA In all other countries, sold and distributed by Kluwer Academic Publishers, P.O. Box 322, 3300 AH Dordrecht, The Netherlands

Technical Editor: N. J. Ashcroft First published in 1993 Second edition 2001 # International Union of Crystallography 2001 Short extracts may be reproduced without formality, provided that the source is acknowledged, but substantial portions may not be reproduced by any process without written permission from the International Union of Crystallography Printed in Great Britain by Alden Press, Oxford

Contributing authors E. Arnold: CABM & Rutgers University, 679 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, New Jersey 08854-5638, USA. [2.3] M. I. Aroyo: Faculty of Physics, University of Sofia, bulv. J. Boucher 5, 1164 Sofia, Bulgaria. [1.5] A. Authier: Laboratoire de Mine´ralogie-Cristallographie, Universite´ P. et M. Curie, 4 Place Jussieu, F-75252 Paris CEDEX 05, France. [5.1] G. Bricogne: MRC Laboratory of Molecular Biology, Hills Road, Cambridge CB2 2QH, England, and LURE, Baˆtiment 209D, Universite´ Paris-Sud, 91405 Orsay, France. [1.3] P. Coppens: Department of Chemistry, Natural Sciences & Mathematics Complex, State University of New York at Buffalo, Buffalo, New York 142603000, USA. [1.2] J. M. Cowley: Arizona State University, Box 871504, Department of Physics and Astronomy, Tempe, AZ 85287-1504, USA. [2.5.1, 2.5.2, 4.3, 5.2] R. Diamond: MRC Laboratory of Molecular Biology, Hills Road, Cambridge CB2 2QH, England. [3.3] D. L. Dorset: ExxonMobil Research and Engineering Co., 1545 Route 22 East, Clinton Township, Annandale, New Jersey 08801, USA. [2.5.7, 4.5.1, 4.5.3] F. Frey: Institut fu¨r Kristallographie und Mineralogie, Universita¨t, Theresienstrasse 41, D-8000 Mu¨nchen 2, Germany. [4.2] C. Giacovazzo: Dipartimento Geomineralogico, Campus Universitario, I-70125 Bari, Italy. [2.2] J. K. Gjùnnes: Institute of Physics, University of Oslo, PO Box 1048, N-0316 Oslo 3, Norway. [4.3] P. Goodman† [2.5.3, 5.2] R. W. Grosse-Kunstleve: Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, 1 Cyclotron Road, Mailstop 4-230, Berkeley, CA 94720, USA. [1.4] J.-P. Guigay: European Synchrotron Radiation Facility, BP 220, F-38043 Grenoble, France. [5.3] T. Haibach: Laboratory of Crystallography, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology, CH-8092 Zurich, Switzerland. [4.6] S. R. Hall: Crystallography Centre, University of Western Australia, Nedlands 6907, WA, Australia. [1.4] H. Jagodzinski: Institut fu¨r Kristallographie und Mineralogie, Universita¨t, Theresienstrasse 41, D-8000 Mu¨nchen 2, Germany. [4.2] †

R. E. Marsh: The Beckman Institute–139–74, California Institute of Technology, 1201 East California Blvd, Pasadena, California 91125, USA. [3.2] R. P. Millane: Whistler Center for Carbohydrate Research, and Computational Science and Engineering Program, Purdue University, West Lafayette, Indiana 47907-1160, USA. [4.5.1, 4.5.2] A. F. Moodie: Department of Applied Physics, Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology, 124 La Trobe Street, Melbourne, Victoria 3000, Australia. [5.2] P. S. Pershan: Division of Engineering and Applied Science and The Physics Department, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA 02138, USA. [4.4] S. Ramaseshan: Raman Research Institute, Bangalore 560 080, India. [2.4] M. G. Rossmann: Department of Biological Sciences, Purdue University, West Lafayette, Indiana 47907, USA. [2.3] D. E. Sands: Department of Chemistry, University of Kentucky, Chemistry–Physics Building, Lexington, Kentucky 40506-0055, USA. [3.1] M. Schlenker: Laboratoire Louis Neél du CNRS, BP 166, F-38042 Grenoble CEDEX 9, France. [5.3] V. Schomaker† [3.2] U. Shmueli: School of Chemistry, Tel Aviv University, 69 978 Tel Aviv, Israel. [1.1, 1.4, 2.1] W. Steurer: Laboratory of Crystallography, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology, CH-8092 Zurich, Switzerland. [4.6] B. K. Vainshtein† [2.5.4, 2.5.5, 2.5.6] M. Vijayan: Molecular Biophysics Unit, Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore 560 012, India. [2.4] D. E. Williams: Department of Chemistry, University of Louisville, Louisville, Kentucky 40292, USA. [3.4] B. T. M. Willis: Chemical Crystallography Laboratory, University of Oxford, 9 Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3PD, England. [4.1] A. J. C. Wilson† [2.1] H. Wondratschek: Institut fu¨r Kristallographie, Universita¨t, D-76128 Karlsruhe, Germany. [1.5] B. B. Zvyagin: Institute of Ore Mineralogy (IGEM), Academy of Sciences of Russia, Staromonetny 35, 109017 Moscow, Russia. [2.5.4] †

Deceased.

v

Deceased.

Contents PAGE

Preface (U. Shmueli)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

xxv

Preface to the second edition (U. Shmueli) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

xxv

PART 1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

1

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2

1.1.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2

1.1.2. Reciprocal lattice in crystallography

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

3

1.1. Reciprocal space in crystallography (U. Shmueli)

1.1.3. Fundamental relationships 1.1.3.1. 1.1.3.2. 1.1.3.3. 1.1.3.4.

Basis vectors .. .. .. .. Volumes .. .. .. .. .. .. Angular relationships .. .. Matrices of metric tensors

1.1.4. Tensor-algebraic formulation

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

3 3 4 4

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

5

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

5 5 5 6

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

7

1.1.5.1. Transformations of coordinates .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.1.5.2. Example .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

7 8

1.1.6. Some analytical aspects of the reciprocal space .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

8

1.1.6.1. Continuous Fourier transform .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.1.6.2. Discrete Fourier transform .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.1.6.3. Bloch’s theorem .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

8 8 9

1.1.4.1. 1.1.4.2. 1.1.4.3. 1.1.4.4.

Conventions .. Transformations Scalar products Examples .. ..

1.1.5. Transformations

.. .. .. ..

1.2. The structure factor (P. Coppens)

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

10

1.2.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

10

1.2.2. General scattering expression for X-rays .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

10

1.2.3. Scattering by a crystal: definition of a structure factor

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

10

1.2.4. The isolated-atom approximation in X-ray diffraction

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

10

1.2.5. Scattering of thermal neutrons .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

11

1.2.5.1. Nuclear scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.2.5.2. Magnetic scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

11 11

1.2.6. Effect of bonding on the atomic electron density within the spherical-atom approximation: the kappa formalism 1.2.7. Beyond the spherical-atom description: the atom-centred spherical harmonic expansion

..

11

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

14

1.2.7.1. Direct-space description of aspherical atoms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.2.7.2. Reciprocal-space description of aspherical atoms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 1.2.7.1. Real spherical harmonic functions (x, y, z are direction cosines) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 1.2.7.2. Index-picking rules of site-symmetric spherical harmonics (Kara & Kurki-Suonio, 1981) .. .. .. .. Table 1.2.7.3. ‘Kubic Harmonic’ functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 1.2.7.4. Closed-form expressions for Fourier transform of Slater-type functions (Avery & Watson, 1977; Coppens, 1990) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.2.8. Fourier transform of orbital products

.. .. .. .. .. & ..

19

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

17

1.2.8.1. One-centre orbital products .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.2.8.2. Two-centre orbital products .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 1.2.8.1. Products of complex spherical harmonics as defined by equation (1.2.7.2a). .. .. .. .. .. Table 1.2.8.2. Products of real spherical harmonics as defined by equations (1.2.7.2b) and (1.2.7.2c) .. .. Table 1.2.8.3. Products of two real spherical harmonic functions ylmp in terms of the density functions equation (1.2.7.3b) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. dlmp ..

.. .. .. .. .. Su ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. defined .. .. ..

14 15 12 15 16

.. .. .. .. by ..

18 18 20 20 21

1.2.9. The atomic temperature factor .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

18

1.2.10. The vibrational probability distribution and its Fourier transform in the harmonic approximation .. .. .. .. .. ..

18

1.2.11. Rigid-body analysis

19

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

vii

CONTENTS Table 1.2.11.1. The arrays Gijkl and Hijkl to be used in the observational equations Uij Gijkl Lkl Hijkl Skl Tij [equation (1.2.11.9)] .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.2.12. Treatment of anharmonicity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.2.12.1. The Gram–Charlier expansion .. .. .. .. 1.2.12.2. The cumulant expansion .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.2.12.3. The one-particle potential (OPP) model .. 1.2.12.4. Relative merits of the three expansions .. .. Table 1.2.12.1. Some Hermite polynomials (Johnson &

.. .. .. .. ..

22 22 23 23 22

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

23

1.2.14. Conclusion .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

24

1.3. Fourier transforms in crystallography: theory, algorithms and applications (G. Bricogne) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

25

1.2.13. The generalized structure factor

1.3.1. General introduction

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Levy,

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1974; Zucker

.. .. .. .. &

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Schulz, 1982)

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

21 22

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

25

1.3.2. The mathematical theory of the Fourier transformation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

25

1.3.2.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2. Preliminary notions and notation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2.1. Metric and topological notions in Rn .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2.2. Functions over Rn 1.3.2.2.3. Multi-index notation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2.4. Integration, Lp spaces .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2.5. Tensor products. Fubini’s theorem .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2.6. Topology in function spaces .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2.6.1. General topology .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.2.6.2. Topological vector spaces .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3. Elements of the theory of distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.1. Origins .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.2. Rationale .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.3. Test-function spaces .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.3.1. Topology on E .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.3.2. Topology on Dk .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.3.3. Topology on D .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.3.4. Topologies on E m ; Dkm ; Dm .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.4. Definition of distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.5. First examples of distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.6. Distributions associated to locally integrable functions 1.3.2.3.7. Support of a distribution .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.8. Convergence of distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.9. Operations on distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.9.1. Differentiation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.9.2. Integration of distributions in dimension 1 1.3.2.3.9.3. Multiplication of distributions by functions 1.3.2.3.9.4. Division of distributions by functions .. .. 1.3.2.3.9.5. Transformation of coordinates .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.9.6. Tensor product of distributions .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.3.9.7. Convolution of distributions .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4. Fourier transforms of functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2. Fourier transforms in L1 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.1. Linearity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.2. Effect of affine coordinate transformations 1.3.2.4.2.3. Conjugate symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.4. Tensor product property .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.5. Convolution property .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.6. Reciprocity property .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.7. Riemann–Lebesgue lemma .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.8. Differentiation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.9. Decrease at infinity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.2.10. The Paley–Wiener theorem .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.3. Fourier transforms in L2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.3.1. Invariance of L2 1.3.2.4.3.2. Reciprocity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

viii

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

25 26 26 26 27 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 32 32 33 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 36 36

CONTENTS 1.3.2.4.3.3. Isometry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.3.4. Eigenspace decomposition of L2 .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.3.5. The convolution theorem and the isometry 1.3.2.4.4. Fourier transforms in S .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.4.1. Definition and properties of S .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.4.2. Gaussian functions and Hermite functions 1.3.2.4.4.3. Heisenberg’s inequality, Hardy’s theorem 1.3.2.4.4.4. Symmetry property .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.5. Various writings of Fourier transforms .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.4.6. Tables of Fourier transforms .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. property .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

36 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 38 38

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

38 38 39 39 39 39 39 40 40 40

1.3.2.6. Periodic distributions and Fourier series .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.1. Terminology .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.2. Zn -periodic distributions in Rn .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.3. Identification with distributions over Rn =Zn .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.4. Fourier transforms of periodic distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.5. The case of non-standard period lattices .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.6. Duality between periodization and sampling .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.7. The Poisson summation formula .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.8. Convolution of Fourier series .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.9. Toeplitz forms, Szego¨’s theorem .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.9.1. Toeplitz forms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.9.2. The Toeplitz–Caratheódory–Herglotz theorem .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.9.3. Asymptotic distribution of eigenvalues of Toeplitz forms 1.3.2.6.9.4. Consequences of Szego¨’s theorem .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.10. Convergence of Fourier series .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1 1.3.2.6.10.1. Classical L theory .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.10.2. Classical L2 theory .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.6.10.3. The viewpoint of distribution theory .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

40 40 41 41 41 42 42 42 43 43 43 43 43 44 44 44 45 45

1.3.2.7. The discrete Fourier transformation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.7.1. Shannon’s sampling theorem and interpolation formula .. .. .. 1.3.2.7.2. Duality between subdivision and decimation of period lattices .. 1.3.2.7.2.1. Geometric description of sublattices .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.7.2.2. Sublattice relations for reciprocal lattices .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.7.2.3. Relation between lattice distributions .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.7.2.4. Relation between Fourier transforms .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.7.2.5. Sublattice relations in terms of periodic distributions 1.3.2.7.3. Discretization of the Fourier transformation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.7.4. Matrix representation of the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) .. 1.3.2.7.5. Properties of the discrete Fourier transform .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

45 45 46 46 46 46 47 47 47 49 49

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

49

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

49 50 50 51 51 51 52 52 53 53 53

1.3.2.5. Fourier transforms of tempered distributions .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.5.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.5.2. S as a test-function space .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.5.3. Definition and examples of tempered distributions 1.3.2.5.4. Fourier transforms of tempered distributions .. 1.3.2.5.5. Transposition of basic properties .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.5.6. Transforms of -functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.5.7. Reciprocity theorem .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.5.8. Multiplication and convolution .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.2.5.9. L2 aspects, Sobolev spaces .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

1.3.3. Numerical computation of the discrete Fourier transform 1.3.3.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.2. One-dimensional algorithms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.2.1. The Cooley–Tukey algorithm .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.2.2. The Good (or prime factor) algorithm .. 1.3.3.2.2.1. Ring structure on Z=N Z .. .. 1.3.3.2.2.2. The Chinese remainder theorem 1.3.3.2.2.3. The prime factor algorithm .. 1.3.3.2.3. The Rader algorithm .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.2.3.1. N an odd prime .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.2.3.2. N a power of an odd prime .. 1.3.3.2.3.3. N a power of 2 .. .. .. .. ..

ix

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

CONTENTS 1.3.3.2.4. The Winograd algorithms

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

1.3.3.3. Multidimensional algorithms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.3.1. The method of successive one-dimensional transforms .. 1.3.3.3.2. Multidimensional factorization .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.3.2.1. Multidimensional Cooley–Tukey factorization 1.3.3.3.2.2. Multidimensional prime factor algorithm .. 1.3.3.3.2.3. Nesting of Winograd small FFTs .. .. .. 1.3.3.3.2.4. The Nussbaumer–Quandalle algorithm .. .. 1.3.3.3.3. Global algorithm design .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.3.3.3.1. From local pieces to global algorithms .. 1.3.3.3.3.2. Computer architecture considerations .. .. 1.3.3.3.3.3. The Johnson–Burrus family of algorithms .. 1.3.4. Crystallographic applications of Fourier transforms

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

54

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

55 55 55 55 56 56 57 57 57 58 58

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

58

1.3.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2. Crystallographic Fourier transform theory .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1. Crystal periodicity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.1. Period lattice, reciprocal lattice and structure factors .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.2. Structure factors in terms of form factors .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.3. Fourier series for the electron density and its summation .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.4. Friedel’s law, anomalous scatterers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.5. Parseval’s identity and other L2 theorems .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.6. Convolution, correlation and Patterson function .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.7. Sampling theorems, continuous transforms, interpolation .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.8. Sections and projections .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.9. Differential syntheses .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.1.10. Toeplitz forms, determinantal inequalities and Szego¨’s theorem 1.3.4.2.2. Crystal symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.1. Crystallographic groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.2. Groups and group actions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.3. Classification of crystallographic groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.4. Crystallographic group action in real space .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.5. Crystallographic group action in reciprocal space .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.6. Structure-factor calculation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.7. Electron-density calculations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.8. Parseval’s theorem with crystallographic symmetry .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.9. Convolution theorems with crystallographic symmetry .. .. .. 1.3.4.2.2.10. Correlation and Patterson functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

58 59 59 59 60 60 60 61 61 61 62 63 63 64 64 64 66 67 68 68 69 69 70 70

1.3.4.3. Crystallographic discrete Fourier transform algorithms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.1. Historical introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.2. Defining relations and symmetry considerations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.3. Interaction between symmetry and decomposition .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.4. Interaction between symmetry and factorization .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.4.1. Multidimensional Cooley–Tukey factorization .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.4.2. Multidimensional Good factorization .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.4.3. Crystallographic extension of the Rader/Winograd factorization 1.3.4.3.5. Treatment of conjugate and parity-related symmetry properties .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.5.1. Hermitian-symmetric or real-valued transforms .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.5.2. Hermitian-antisymmetric or pure imaginary transforms .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.5.3. Complex symmetric and antisymmetric transforms .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.5.4. Real symmetric transforms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.5.5. Real antisymmetric transforms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.5.6. Generalized multiplexing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6. Global crystallographic algorithms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6.1. Triclinic groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6.2. Monoclinic groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6.3. Orthorhombic groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6.4. Trigonal, tetragonal and hexagonal groups .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6.5. Cubic groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6.6. Treatment of centred lattices .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.3.6.7. Programming considerations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

71 71 72 73 73 74 76 76 79 79 80 80 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 83 83 83

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

84

1.3.4.4. Basic crystallographic computations

x

CONTENTS 1.3.4.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.2. Fourier synthesis of electron-density maps .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.3. Fourier analysis of modified electron-density maps .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.3.1. Squaring .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.3.2. Other non-linear operations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.3.3. Solvent flattening .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.3.4. Molecular averaging by noncrystallographic symmetries 1.3.4.4.3.5. Molecular-envelope transforms via Green’s theorem .. 1.3.4.4.4. Structure factors from model atomic parameters .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.5. Structure factors via model electron-density maps .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.6. Derivatives for variational phasing techniques .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7. Derivatives for model refinement .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.1. The method of least squares .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.2. Booth’s differential Fourier syntheses .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.3. Booth’s method of steepest descents .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.4. Cochran’s Fourier method .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.5. Cruickshank’s modified Fourier method .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.6. Agarwal’s FFT implementation of the Fourier method .. 1.3.4.4.7.7. Lifchitz’s reformulation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.8. A simplified derivation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.7.9. Discussion of macromolecular refinement techniques .. 1.3.4.4.7.10. Sampling considerations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.4.8. Miscellaneous correlation functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.5. Related applications .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.5.1. Helical diffraction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.5.1.1. Circular harmonic expansions in polar coordinates .. .. 1.3.4.5.1.2. The Fourier transform in polar coordinates .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.5.1.3. The transform of an axially periodic fibre .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.5.1.4. Helical symmetry and associated selection rules .. .. .. 1.3.4.5.2. Application to probability theory and direct methods .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.5.2.1. Analytical methods of probability theory .. .. .. .. .. 1.3.4.5.2.2. The statistical theory of phase determination .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

84 84 84 84 84 84 85 86 86 86 87 88 88 88 89 89 90 90 91 91 92 92 92 93 93 93 93 93 93 94 94 96

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

99

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

99

1.4. Symmetry in reciprocal space (U. Shmueli, S. R. Hall and R. W. Grosse-Kunstleve) 1.4.1. Introduction (U. Shmueli)

1.4.2. Effects of symmetry on the Fourier image of the crystal (U. Shmueli) 1.4.2.1. 1.4.2.2. 1.4.2.3. 1.4.2.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

Point-group symmetry of the reciprocal lattice .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Relationship between structure factors at symmetry-related points of the reciprocal Symmetry factors for space-group-specific Fourier summations .. .. .. .. .. .. Symmetry factors for space-group-specific structure-factor formulae .. .. .. ..

1.4.3. Structure-factor tables (U. Shmueli) 1.4.3.1. 1.4.3.2. 1.4.3.3. 1.4.3.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

99 99 101 101

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

102

Some general remarks .. .. .. .. .. Preparation of the structure-factor tables Symbolic representation of A and B .. Arrangement of the tables .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

1.4.4. Symmetry in reciprocal space: space-group tables (U. Shmueli)

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

xi

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

106 107

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

Appendix 1.4.1. Comments on the preparation and usage of the tables (U. Shmueli) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Appendix 1.4.2. Space-group symbols for numeric and symbolic computations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

104 104 104 105 105 106

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

A1.4.2.1. Introduction (U. Shmueli, S. R. Hall and R. W. Grosse-Kunstleve) A1.4.2.2. Explicit symbols (U. Shmueli) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. A1.4.2.3. Hall symbols (S. R. Hall and R. W. Grosse-Kunstleve) .. .. .. .. A1.4.2.3.1. Default axes .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. A1.4.2.3.2. Example matrices .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table A1.4.2.1. Explicit symbols .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

104

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

102 102 102 103

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. lattices

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

1.4.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.4.4.2. Arrangement of the space-group tables .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.4.4.3. Effect of direct-space transformations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.4.4.4. Symmetry in Fourier space .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.4.4.5. Relationships between direct and reciprocal Bravais lattices .. .. .. .. Table 1.4.4.1. Correspondence between types of centring in direct and reciprocal

.. .. .. ..

.. .. lattice .. .. .. ..

99

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

107 108 112 114 114 109

CONTENTS Table Table Table Table Table Table

.. .. .. .. .. ..

112 112 113 113 113 115

Appendix 1.4.3. Structure-factor tables (U. Shmueli) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

120

Table Table Table Table Table Table Table

A1.4.2.2. A1.4.2.3. A1.4.2.4. A1.4.2.5. A1.4.2.6. A1.4.2.7. A1.4.3.1. A1.4.3.2. A1.4.3.3. A1.4.3.4. A1.4.3.5. A1.4.3.6. A1.4.3.7.

Lattice symbol L .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Translation symbol T .. .. .. .. .. .. Rotation matrices for principal axes .. .. Rotation matrices for face-diagonal axes Rotation matrix for the body-diagonal axis Hall symbols .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Plane groups .. .. .. .. .. Triclinic space groups .. .. Monoclinic space groups .. Orthorhombic space groups Tetragonal space groups .. Trigonal and hexagonal space Cubic space groups .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. groups .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

120 120 121 123 126 137 144

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

150

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

150

Appendix 1.4.4. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (U. Shmueli) Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space

.. .. .. .. .. ..

1.5. Crystallographic viewpoints in the classification of space-group representations (M. I. Aroyo and H. Wondratschek)

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. ..

162

1.5.1. List of symbols .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

162

1.5.2. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

162

1.5.3. Basic concepts

162

1.5.3.1. 1.5.3.2. 1.5.3.3. 1.5.3.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

Representations of finite groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Space groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Representations of the translation group T and the reciprocal lattice .. .. Irreducible representations of space groups and the reciprocal-space group

.. .. .. ..

162 163 164 165

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

165

1.5.4.1. Fundamental regions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.5.4.2. Minimal domains .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.5.4.3. Wintgen positions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 1.5.4.1. Conventional coefficients ki T of k expressed by the adjusted coefficients kai of IT A for the different Bravais types of lattices in direct space .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 1.5.4.2. Primitive coefficients kpi T of k from CDML expressed by the adjusted coefficients kai of IT A for the different Bravais types of lattices in direct space .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

165 166 167

1.5.4. Conventions in the classification of space-group irreps

1.5.5. Examples and conclusions

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

1.5.5.1. Examples .. .. .. .. 1.5.5.2. Results .. .. .. .. .. 1.5.5.3. Parameter ranges .. .. 1.5.5.4. Conclusions .. .. .. Table 1.5.5.1. The k-vector types Table 1.5.5.2. The k-vector types Table 1.5.5.3. The k-vector types Table 1.5.5.4. The k-vector types

Appendix 1.5.1. Reciprocal-space groups G .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

176

References

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

178

PART 2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

189

2.1. Statistical properties of the weighted reciprocal lattice (U. Shmueli and A. J. C. Wilson)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

190

2.1.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

190

2.1.2. The average intensity of general reflections .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

190

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

190 191 191 191

2.1.3. The average intensity of zones and rows .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

191

2.1.3.1. Symmetry elements producing systematic absences .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.3.2. Symmetry elements not producing systematic absences .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.3.3. More than one symmetry element .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

191 192 192

xii

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

168 168 169 171 172 168 170 172 174

Mathematical background .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Physical background .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. An approximation for organic compounds .. .. .. Effect of centring .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

167

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.1.2.1. 2.1.2.2. 2.1.2.3. 2.1.2.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. and Ia3d for the space groups Im3m .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. for the space groups Im3 and Ia3 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. for the space groups I4=mmm, I4=mcm, I41 =amd and I41 =acd for the space groups Fmm2 and Fdd2 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

167

.. .. .. ..

CONTENTS Table 2.1.3.1. Intensity-distribution effects of symmetry elements causing systematic absences .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.1.3.2. Intensity-distribution effects of symmetry elements not causing systematic absences .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.1.3.3. Average multiples for the 32 point groups (modified from Rogers, 1950) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.4. Probability density distributions – mathematical preliminaries .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.4.1. 2.1.4.2. 2.1.4.3. 2.1.4.4. 2.1.4.5.

Characteristic functions .. .. .. The cumulant-generating function The central-limit theorem .. .. Conditions of validity .. .. .. .. Non-independent variables .. ..

2.1.5. Ideal probability density distributions

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

192 193 194 195 195

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

195

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

2.1.7.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.7.2. Mathematical background .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.7.3. Application to centric and acentric distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.7.4. Fourier versus Hermite approximations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.1.7.1. Some even absolute moments of the trigonometric structure factor Table 2.1.7.2. Closed expressions for 2k [equation (2.1.7.11)] for space groups of

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

210

2.2.1. List of symbols and abbreviations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

210

2.2.2. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

210

2.2.3. Origin specification

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

210

origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for centrosymmetric primitive space groups .. origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for noncentrosymmetric primitive space groups origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for centrosymmetric non-primitive space groups origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for noncentrosymmetric non-primitive space .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

211 212 214

Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed groups

2.2.4. Normalized structure factors

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.2.3.1. 2.2.3.2. 2.2.3.3. 2.2.3.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

203 204 205 205 206 208 208 207

Table Table Table Table

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.2. Direct methods (C. Giacovazzo)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

203

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

2.1.8. Non-ideal distributions: the Fourier method .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

199 199 200 203 201 203

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

2.1.8.1. General representations of p.d.f.’s of jEj by Fourier series .. 2.1.8.2. Fourier–Bessel series .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.8.3. Simple examples .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.8.4. A more complicated example .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.8.5. Atomic characteristic functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.8.6. Other non-ideal Fourier p.d.f.’s .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.8.7. Comparison of the correction-factor and Fourier approaches Table 2.1.8.1. Atomic contributions to characteristic functions for pjEj

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. low symmetry

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

199

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

2.1.7. Non-ideal distributions: the correction-factor approach .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

197 197 198 198

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

197

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

Distributions of sums and averages Distribution of ratios .. .. .. .. .. Intensities scaled to the local average The use of normal approximations ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

195 196 196 196 196 196 197

2.1.6.1. 2.1.6.2. 2.1.6.3. 2.1.6.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.1.6. Distributions of sums, averages and ratios

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

192

.. .. .. .. ..

2.1.5.1. Ideal acentric distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.5.2. Ideal centric distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.5.3. Effect of other symmetry elements on the ideal acentric and centric 2.1.5.4. Other ideal distributions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.5.5. Relation to distributions of I .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.1.5.6. Cumulative distribution functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.1.5.1. Some properties of gamma and beta distributions .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

191 192 193

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.2.4.1. Definition of normalized structure factor .. .. .. .. .. 2.2.4.2. Definition of quasi-normalized structure factor .. .. .. 2.2.4.3. The calculation of normalized structure factors .. .. .. 2.2.4.4. Probability distributions of normalized structure factors Table 2.2.4.1. Moments of the distributions (2.2.4.4) and (2.2.4.5)

215 216 216 217 217

2.2.5. Phase-determining formulae .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

217

Inequalities among structure factors .. .. .. .. .. .. Probabilistic phase relationships for structure invariants Triplet relationships .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Triplet relationships using structural information .. ..

xiii

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

215

.. .. .. .. ..

2.2.5.1. 2.2.5.2. 2.2.5.3. 2.2.5.4.

.. .. .. .. ..

214

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

217 218 218 219

CONTENTS 2.2.5.5. Quartet phase relationships .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.2.5.6. Quintet phase relationships .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.2.5.7. Determinantal formulae .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.2.5.8. Algebraic relationships for structure seminvariants .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.2.5.9. Formulae estimating one-phase structure seminvariants of the first rank 2.2.5.10. Formulae estimating two-phase structure seminvariants of the first rank Table 2.2.5.1. List of quartets symmetry equivalent to 1 in the class mmm

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

220 222 223 224 224 225 222

2.2.6. Direct methods in real and reciprocal space: Sayre’s equation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

225

2.2.7. Scheme of procedure for phase determination

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

227

2.2.8. Other multisolution methods applied to small molecules .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

228

Table 2.2.8.1. Magic-integer sequences for small numbers of phases (n) together with the number of sets produced and the root-mean-square error in the phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

229

2.2.9. Some references to direct-methods packages

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.2.10. Direct methods in macromolecular crystallography .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.2.10.1. 2.2.10.2. 2.2.10.3. 2.2.10.4.

Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Ab initio direct phasing of proteins .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Integration of direct methods with isomorphous replacement techniques Integration of anomalous-dispersion techniques with direct methods .. 2.2.10.4.1. One-wavelength techniques .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.2.10.4.2. The SIRAS, MIRAS and MAD cases .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

231 231 232 232 233 233

2.3. Patterson and molecular-replacement techniques (M. G. Rossmann and E. Arnold) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

235

2.3.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

235

2.3.2. Interpretation of Patterson maps

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. solutions; enantiomorphic solutions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

235 235 236 237 238 236

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

238

2.3.3. Isomorphous replacement difference Pattersons

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

2.3.2.1. Simple solutions in the triclinic cell. Selection of the origin .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.2.2. Harker sections .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.2.3. Finding heavy atoms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.2.4. Superposition methods. Image detection .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.2.5. Systematic computerized Patterson vector-search procedures. Looking for rigid bodies .. Table 2.3.2.1. Coordinates of Patterson peaks for C 2 H 6 Cl2 Cu2 N 2 projection .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.3.2.2. Square matrix representation of vector interactions in a Patterson of a crystal asymmetric units each containing N atoms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.3.2.3. Position of Harker sections within a Patterson .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.3.1. 2.3.3.2. 2.3.3.3. 2.3.3.4. 2.3.3.5. 2.3.3.6. 2.3.3.7.

.. .. .. .. .. ..

231

.. .. .. .. .. ..

2.3.1.1. Background .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.1.2. Limits to the number of resolved vectors .. .. .. .. 2.3.1.3. Modifications: origin removal, sharpening etc. .. .. 2.3.1.4. Homometric structures and the uniqueness of structure 2.3.1.5. The Patterson synthesis of the second kind .. .. .. Table 2.3.1.1. Matrix representation of Patterson peaks .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

230

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. with M crystallographic .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

238 239 239 240 241 239

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

242

Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Finding heavy atoms with centrosymmetric projections Finding heavy atoms with three-dimensional methods .. Correlation functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Interpretation of isomorphous difference Pattersons .. Direct structure determination from difference Pattersons Isomorphism and size of the heavy-atom substitution ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

242 242 243 243 244 245 245

2.3.4. Anomalous dispersion .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

246

2.3.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.4.2. The Ps u function .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.4.3. The position of anomalous scatterers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

246 246 247

2.3.5. Noncrystallographic symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

248

2.3.5.1. Definitions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.5.2. Interpretation of Pattersons in the presence of noncrystallographic symmetry .. Table 2.3.5.1. Possible types of vector searches .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.3.5.2. Orientation of the glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase molecular cell .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. the orthorhombic .. .. .. .. .. ..

250

2.3.6. Rotation functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

250

xiv

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. twofold axis in .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

239 240

248 249 250

CONTENTS 2.3.6.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.6.2. Matrix algebra .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.6.3. Symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.6.4. Sampling, background and interpretation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.6.5. The fast rotation function .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.3.6.1. Different types of uses for the rotation function .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.3.6.2. Eulerian symmetry elements for all possible types of space-group rotations Table 2.3.6.3. Numbering of the rotation function space groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.3.6.4. Rotation function Eulerian space groups .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

250 252 253 254 255 251 254 254 256

2.3.7. Translation functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

258

2.3.7.1. 2.3.7.2. 2.3.7.3. 2.3.7.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Position of a noncrystallographic element relating two unknown structures .. .. .. .. .. Position of a known molecular structure in an unknown unit cell .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Position of a noncrystallographic symmetry element in a poorly defined electron-density map

2.3.8. Molecular replacement

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

260 261 262 261

2.3.9. Conclusions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

262

2.3.9.1. Update

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

260

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

258 259 259 260

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

2.3.8.1. Using a known molecular fragment .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.8.2. Using noncrystallographic symmetry for phase improvement .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.3.8.3. Equivalence of real- and reciprocal-space molecular replacement .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.3.8.1. Molecular replacement: phase refinement as an iterative process .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.4. Isomorphous replacement and anomalous scattering (M. Vijayan and S. Ramaseshan)

262

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

264

2.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

264

2.4.2. Isomorphous replacement method .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

264

2.4.2.1. Isomorphous replacement and isomorphous addition .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.2.2. Single isomorphous replacement method .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.2.3. Multiple isomorphous replacement method .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

264 265 265

2.4.3. Anomalous-scattering method

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.4.3.1. Dispersion correction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.3.2. Violation of Friedel’s law .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.3.3. Friedel and Bijvoet pairs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.3.4. Determination of absolute configuration .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.3.5. Determination of phase angles .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.3.6. Anomalous scattering without phase change .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.3.7. Treatment of anomalous scattering in structure refinement .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.4.3.1. Phase angles of different components of the structure factor in space group P222

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

265 266 267 267 268 268 268 267

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

269

Protein heavy-atom derivatives .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Determination of heavy-atom parameters .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Refinement of heavy-atom parameters .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Treatment of errors in phase evaluation: Blow and Crick formulation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Use of anomalous scattering in phase evaluation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Estimation of r.m.s. error .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Suggested modifications to Blow and Crick formulation and the inclusion of phase information from other sources Fourier representation of anomalous scatterers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

269 269 270 271 272 273 274 274

2.4.4. Isomorphous replacement and anomalous scattering in protein crystallography 2.4.4.1. 2.4.4.2. 2.4.4.3. 2.4.4.4. 2.4.4.5. 2.4.4.6. 2.4.4.7. 2.4.4.8.

2.4.5. Anomalous scattering of neutrons and synchrotron radiation. The multiwavelength method

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

265

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

274

2.4.5.1. Neutron anomalous scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.4.5.2. Anomalous scattering of synchrotron radiation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

275 275

2.5. Electron diffraction and electron microscopy in structure determination (J. M. Cowley, P. Goodman, B. K. Vainshtein, B. B. Zvyagin and D. L. Dorset) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

276

2.5.1. Foreword (J. M. Cowley) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

276

2.5.2. Electron diffraction and electron microscopy (J. M. Cowley) 2.5.2.1. 2.5.2.2. 2.5.2.3. 2.5.2.4. 2.5.2.5.

Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. The interactions of electrons with matter .. .. .. Recommended sign conventions .. .. .. .. .. Scattering of electrons by crystals; approximations Kinematical diffraction formulae .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

xv

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

277

.. .. .. .. ..

277 278 279 280 281

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

CONTENTS 2.5.2.6. Imaging with electrons .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.2.7. Imaging of very thin and weakly scattering objects .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.2.8. Crystal structure imaging .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.2.9. Image resolution .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.2.10. Electron diffraction in electron microscopes .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.5.2.1. Standard crystallographic and alternative crystallographic sign conventions for electron diffraction

.. .. .. .. .. ..

282 283 284 284 285 280

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

285

2.5.3.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.1.1. CBED .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.1.2. Zone-axis patterns from CBED .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.2. Background theory and analytical approach .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.2.1. Direct and reciprocity symmetries: types I and II .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.2.2. Reciprocity and Friedel’s law .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.2.3. In-disc symmetries .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.2.4. Zero-layer absences .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.3. Pattern observation of individual symmetry elements .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.4. Auxiliary tables .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.5. Space-group analyses of single crystals; experimental procedure and published examples .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.5.1. Stages of procedure .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.5.2. Examples .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.6. Use of CBED in study of crystal defects, twins and non-classical crystallography .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.7. Present limitations and general conclusions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.5.3.8. Computer programs available .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.5.3.1. Listing of the symmetry elements relating to CBED patterns under the classifications of ‘vertical’ (I), ‘horizontal’ (II) and combined or roto-inversionary axes .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.5.3.2. Diagrammatic illustrations of the actions of five types of symmetry elements (given in the last column in Volume A diagrammatic symbols) on an asymmetric pattern component, in relation to the centre of the pattern at K00 0, shown as ‘ ’, or in relation to the centre of a diffraction order at K0g 0, shown as ‘+’ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.5.3.3. Diffraction point-group tables, giving whole-pattern and central-beam pattern symmetries in terms of BESR diffraction-group symbols and diperiodic group symbols .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 2.5.3.4. Tabulation of principal-axis CBED pattern symmetries against relevant space groups given as IT A numbers Table 2.5.3.5. Conditions for observation of GS bands for the 137 space groups exhibiting these extinctions .. .. .. .. ..

285 285 286 286 286 287 287 288 288 289 291 291 292 292 295 295

2.5.4. Electron-diffraction structure analysis (EDSA) (B. K. Vainshtein and B. B. Zvyagin) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

306

2.5.3. Space-group determination by convergent-beam electron diffraction (P. Goodman)

2.5.4.1. 2.5.4.2. 2.5.4.3. 2.5.4.4.

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

2.5.7. Direct phase determination in electron crystallography (D. L. Dorset) 2.5.7.1. 2.5.7.2. 2.5.7.3. 2.5.7.4. 2.5.7.5. 2.5.7.6. 2.5.7.7.

Problems with ‘traditional’ phasing techniques .. .. Direct phase determination from electron micrographs Probabilistic estimate of phase invariant sums .. .. The tangent formula .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Density modification .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Convolution techniques .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Maximum entropy and likelihood .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

xvi

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

320 321 322 323 324 324 325

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

320

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

315 316 317 317 318 318 318 319

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

315

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

2.5.6. Three-dimensional reconstruction (B. K. Vainshtein) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. case

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

310 311 312 312 313

The object and its projection .. .. .. .. .. Orthoaxial projection .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Discretization .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Methods of direct reconstruction .. .. .. .. The method of back-projection .. .. .. .. .. The algebraic and iteration methods .. .. .. Reconstruction using Fourier transformation Three-dimensional reconstruction in the general

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

2.5.6.1. 2.5.6.2. 2.5.6.3. 2.5.6.4. 2.5.6.5. 2.5.6.6. 2.5.6.7. 2.5.6.8.

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

290 296 298

310

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

288

2.5.5. Image reconstruction (B. K. Vainshtein) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. defocus .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

286

306 306 308 309

Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. Thin weak phase objects at optimal An account of absorption .. .. Thick crystals .. .. .. .. .. .. Image enhancement .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

2.5.5.1. 2.5.5.2. 2.5.5.3. 2.5.5.4. 2.5.5.5.

Introduction .. .. .. .. .. The geometry of ED patterns Intensities of diffraction beams Structure analysis .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

CONTENTS 2.5.7.8. Influence of multiple scattering on direct electron crystallographic structure analysis

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

325

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

327

PART 3. DUAL BASES IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHIC COMPUTING .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

347

3.1. Distances, angles, and their standard uncertainties (D. E. Sands)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

348

3.1.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

348

3.1.2. Scalar product

References

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

348

3.1.3. Length of a vector .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

348

3.1.4. Angle between two vectors

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

348

3.1.5. Vector product .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

349

3.1.6. Permutation tensors

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

349

3.1.7. Components of vector product .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

349

3.1.8. Some vector relationships

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

349

3.1.8.1. Triple vector product .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.1.8.2. Scalar product of vector products .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.1.8.3. Vector product of vector products .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

349 349 349

3.1.9. Planes .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

349

3.1.10. Variance–covariance matrices .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

350

3.1.11. Mean values

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

351

3.1.12. Computation

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

352

3.2. The least-squares plane (R. E. Marsh and V. Schomaker)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

353

3.2.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

353

3.2.2. Least-squares plane based on uncorrelated, isotropic weights

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

353

3.2.2.1. Error propagation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.2.2.2. The standard uncertainty of the distance from an atom to the plane .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

353 355

3.2.3. The proper least-squares plane, with Gaussian weights

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

355

3.2.3.1. Formulation and solution of the general Gaussian plane .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.2.3.2. Concluding remarks .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

356 358

Appendix 3.2.1 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

358

3.3. Molecular modelling and graphics (R. Diamond)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

360

3.3.1. Graphics .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

360

3.3.1.1. Coordinate systems, notation and standards .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.1.1. Cartesian and crystallographic coordinates .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.1.2. Homogeneous coordinates .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.1.3. Notation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.1.4. Standards .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.2. Orthogonal (or rotation) matrices .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.2.1. General form .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.2.2. Measurement of rotations and strains from coordinates 3.3.1.2.3. Orthogonalization of impure rotations .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.2.4. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors of orthogonal matrices .. 3.3.1.3. Projection transformations and spaces .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.1. Definitions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.2. Translation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.3. Rotation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.4. Scale .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.5. Windowing and perspective .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.6. Stereoviews .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.7. Viewports .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.8. Compound transformations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.9. Inverse transformations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.10. The three-axis joystick .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.11. Other useful rotations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.3.12. Symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

xvii

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

360 360 360 361 361 361 361 364 367 367 367 367 368 368 368 368 370 370 371 372 372 373 373

CONTENTS 3.3.1.4. Modelling transformations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.4.1. Rotation about a bond .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.4.2. Stacked transformations .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.5. Drawing techniques .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.5.1. Types of hardware .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.1.5.2. Optimization of line drawings .. .. .. 3.3.1.5.3. Representation of surfaces by lines .. 3.3.1.5.4. Representation of surfaces by dots .. .. 3.3.1.5.5. Representation of surfaces by shading 3.3.1.5.6. Advanced hidden-line and hidden-surface 3.3.2. Molecular modelling, problems and approaches

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. algorithms

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

373 373 373 374 374 375 375 375 375 376

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

377

3.3.2.1. Connectivity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.2.1.1. Connectivity tables .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.2.1.2. Implied connectivity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.2.2. Modelling methods .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.2.2.1. Methods based on conformational variables .. 3.3.2.2.2. Methods based on positional coordinates .. .. 3.3.2.2.3. Approaches to the problem of multiple minima 3.3.3. Implementations

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

lattice sums (D. E. Williams) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

385

3.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

385

3.4.2. Definition and behaviour of the direct-space sum

385

n

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

380 380 380 381 381 381 381 381 381 381 381 381 382 382 382 382 382 383 383 383 384 384 384 384 384 384

3.4. Accelerated convergence treatment of R

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

380

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

377 377 377 377 378 379 379

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

3.3.3.1. Systems for the display and modification of retrieved data 3.3.3.1.1. ORTEP .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.2. Feldmann’s system .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.3. Lesk & Hardman software .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.4. GRAMPS .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.5. Takenaka & Sasada’s system .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.6. MIDAS .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.7. Insight .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.8. PLUTO .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.1.9. MDKINO .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2. Molecular-modelling systems based on electron density 3.3.3.2.1. CHEMGRAF .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.2. GRIP .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.3. Barry, Denson & North’s systems .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.4. MMS-X .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.5. Texas A&M University system .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.6. Bilder .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.7. Frodo .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.8. Guide .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.9. HYDRA .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.2.10. O .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.3. Molecular-modelling systems based on other criteria .. 3.3.3.3.1. Molbuild, Rings, PRXBLD and MM2/MMP2 3.3.3.3.2. Script .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.3.3. CHARMM .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.3.3.3.4. Commercial systems .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 3.4.2.1. Untreated lattice-sum results for the Coulombic energy (n 1) of sodium chloride (kJ mol 1 ; A˚); the lattice constant is taken as 5.628 A˚ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 3.4.2.2. Untreated lattice-sum results for the dispersion energy (n 6) of crystalline benzene (kJ mol 1 ; A˚ ) .. .. ..

3.4.3. Preliminary description of the method

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

3.4.4. Preliminary derivation to obtain a formula which accelerates the convergence of an R

n

385 386 385

sum over lattice points X(d)

386

3.4.5. Extension of the method to a composite lattice .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

388

3.4.6. The case of n 1 (Coulombic lattice energy)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

389

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

389

3.4.7. The cases of n 2 and n 3

3.4.8. Derivation of the accelerated convergence formula via the Patterson function .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

389

3.4.9. Evaluation of the incomplete gamma function

390

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

xviii

CONTENTS 3.4.10. Summation over the asymmetric unit and elimination of intramolecular energy terms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

390

3.4.11. Reference formulae for particular values of n .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

390

3.4.12. Numerical illustrations

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Accelerated-convergence results for the Coulombic sum (n 1) of sodium chloride (kJ mol 1 ; A˚ ): the direct sum plus the constant term .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. The reciprocal-lattice results (kJ mol 1 ; A˚ ) for the Coulombic sum (n 1) of sodium chloride .. .. .. .. Accelerated-convergence results for the dispersion sum (n 6) of crystalline benzene (kJ mol 1 ; A˚); the figures shown are the direct-lattice sum plus the two constant terms .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. The reciprocal-lattice results (kJ mol 1 ; A˚ ) for the dispersion sum (n 6) of crystalline benzene .. .. .. Approximate time (s) required to evaluate the dispersion sum (n 6) for crystalline benzene within 0:001 kJ mol 1 truncation error .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

391

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

393

PART 4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

399

4.1. Thermal diffuse scattering of X-rays and neutrons (B. T. M. Willis)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

400

4.1.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

400

4.1.2. Dynamics of three-dimensional crystals

400

Table 3.4.12.1. Table 3.4.12.2. Table 3.4.12.3. Table 3.4.12.4. Table 3.4.12.5. References

4.1.2.1. 4.1.2.2. 4.1.2.3. 4.1.2.4.

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

Equations of motion .. .. .. .. .. .. Quantization of normal modes. Phonons Einstein and Debye models .. .. .. .. Molecular crystals .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

402

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

404

4.1.5. Phonon dispersion relations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

405

4.1.5.1. Measurement with X-rays .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.1.5.2. Measurement with neutrons .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.1.5.3. Interpretation of dispersion relations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

405 405 405

4.1.6. Measurement of elastic constants

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

4.2. Disorder diffuse scattering of X-rays and neutrons (H. Jagodzinski and F. Frey) 4.2.1. Scope of this chapter

.. .. .. ..

392

401 402 402 402

4.1.4. Scattering of neutrons by thermal vibrations

.. .. .. ..

392 392

.. .. .. ..

4.1.3. Scattering of X-rays by thermal vibrations

.. .. .. ..

391 392

406

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

407

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

407

4.2.2. Summary of basic scattering theory

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

408

4.2.3. General treatment .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

410

4.2.3.1. Qualitative interpretation of diffuse scattering 4.2.3.1.1. Fourier transforms .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.3.1.2. Applications .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.3.2. Guideline to solve a disorder problem .. .. .. 4.2.4. Quantitative interpretation

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

4.2.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.2. One-dimensional disorder of ordered layers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.2.1. Stacking disorder in close-packed structures .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.3. Two-dimensional disorder of chains .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.3.1. Scattering by randomly distributed collinear chains .. .. .. 4.2.4.3.2. Disorder within randomly distributed collinear chains .. .. .. 4.2.4.3.2.1. General treatment .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.3.2.2. Orientational disorder .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.3.2.3. Longitudinal disorder .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.3.3. Correlations between different almost collinear chains .. .. 4.2.4.4. Disorder with three-dimensional correlations (defects, local ordering and 4.2.4.4.1. General formulation (elastic diffuse scattering) .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.4.2. Random distribution .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.4.3. Short-range order in multi-component systems .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.4.4. Displacements: general remarks .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.4.5. Distortions in binary systems .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.4.6. Powder diffraction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.4.7. Small concentrations of defects .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

xix

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. clustering) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

410 410 411 418 420 420 421 423 425 425 427 427 427 428 429 429 429 431 432 432 433 435 435

CONTENTS 4.2.4.4.8. Cluster method .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.4.9. Comparison between X-ray and neutron methods 4.2.4.4.10. Dynamic properties of defects .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.5. Orientational disorder .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.5.1. General expressions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.5.2. Rotational structure (form) factor .. .. .. .. .. 4.2.4.5.3. Short-range correlations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

435 435 436 436 436 437 438

4.2.5. Measurement of diffuse scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

438

4.3. Diffuse scattering in electron diffraction (J. M. Cowley and J. K. Gjùnnes) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

443

4.3.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

443

4.3.2. Inelastic scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

444

4.3.3. Kinematical and pseudo-kinematical scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

445

4.3.4. Dynamical scattering: Bragg scattering effects .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

445

4.3.5. Multislice calculations for diffraction and imaging

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

447

4.3.6. Qualitative interpretation of diffuse scattering of electrons .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

447

4.4. Scattering from mesomorphic structures (P. S. Pershan) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

449

4.4.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

449

Table 4.4.1.1. Some of the symmetry properties of the series of three-dimensional phases described in Fig. 4.4.1.1 .. .. .. Table 4.4.1.2. The symmetry properties of the two-dimensional hexatic and crystalline phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

449 450

4.4.2. The nematic phase .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

451

Table 4.4.2.1. Summary of critical exponents from X-ray scattering studies of the nematic to smectic-A phase transition .. 4.4.3. Smectic-A and smectic-C phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

453 453

4.4.3.1. Homogeneous smectic-A and smectic-C phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.4.3.2. Modulated smectic-A and smectic-C phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.4.3.3. Surface effects .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

453 455 455

4.4.4. Phases with in-plane order

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

4.4.4.1. Hexatic phases in two dimensions .. .. .. 4.4.4.2. Hexatic phases in three dimensions .. .. 4.4.4.2.1. Hexatic-B .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.4.4.2.2. Smectic-F, smectic-I .. .. .. .. 4.4.4.3. Crystalline phases with molecular rotation 4.4.4.3.1. Crystal-B .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.4.4.3.2. Crystal-G, crystal-J .. .. .. .. 4.4.4.4. Crystalline phases with herringbone packing 4.4.4.4.1. Crystal-E .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.4.4.4.2. Crystal-H, crystal-K .. .. .. ..

457 458 458 458 460 460 462 462 462 463

4.4.5. Discotic phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

463

4.4.6. Other phases

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

463

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

464

4.4.7.1. Phases with intermediate molecular tilt: smectic-L, crystalline-M,N .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.4.7.2. Nematic to smectic-A phase transition .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

464 464

4.5. Polymer crystallography (R. P. Millane and D. L. Dorset) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

466

4.5.1. Overview (R. P. Millane and D. L. Dorset) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

466

4.5.2. X-ray fibre diffraction analysis (R. P. Millane) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

466

4.5.2.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.2. Fibre specimens .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.3. Diffraction by helical structures .. .. .. 4.5.2.3.1. Helix symmetry .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.3.2. Diffraction by helical structures 4.5.2.3.3. Approximate helix symmetry .. 4.5.2.4. Diffraction by fibres .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.4.1. Noncrystalline fibres .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.4.2. Polycrystalline fibres .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.4.3. Random copolymers .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

xx

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

456

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

4.4.7. Notes added in proof to first edition

.. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

466 467 467 467 468 469 469 469 469 470

CONTENTS 4.5.2.4.4. Partially crystalline fibres

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

4.5.2.5. Processing diffraction data .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6. Structure determination .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6.1. Overview .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6.2. Helix symmetry, cell constants and space-group symmetry 4.5.2.6.3. Patterson functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6.4. Molecular model building .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6.5. Difference Fourier synthesis .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6.6. Multidimensional isomorphous replacement .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6.7. Other techniques .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.2.6.8. Reliability .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

472 474 474 475 475 476 477 478 479 480

4.5.3. Electron crystallography of polymers (D. L. Dorset) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

481

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. in the

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. form

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

471

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

4.5.3.1. Is polymer electron crystallography possible? .. .. 4.5.3.2. Crystallization and data collection .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.3.3. Crystal structure analysis .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.5.3.4. Examples of crystal structure analyses .. .. .. .. Table 4.5.3.1. Structure analysis of poly- -methyl-l-glutamate

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

481 481 482 483 483

4.6. Reciprocal-space images of aperiodic crystals (W. Steurer and T. Haibach) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

486

4.6.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

486

4.6.2. The n-dimensional description of aperiodic crystals

487

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

4.6.2.1. Basic concepts .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.2.2. 1D incommensurately modulated structures .. .. .. .. 4.6.2.3. 1D composite structures .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.2.4. 1D quasiperiodic structures .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.2.5. 1D structures with fractal atomic surfaces .. .. .. .. Table 4.6.2.1. Expansion of the Fibonacci sequence Bn n L L ! LS .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. by ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. repeated .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. action of the .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. substitution rule .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. : ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. S ! L, .. .. ..

487 487 489 490 493

4.6.3. Reciprocal-space images .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

494

491

4.6.3.1. Incommensurately modulated structures (IMSs) 4.6.3.1.1. Indexing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.1.2. Diffraction symmetry .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.1.3. Structure factor .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

494 495 495 496

4.6.3.2. Composite structures (CSs) .. 4.6.3.2.1. Indexing .. .. .. 4.6.3.2.2. Diffraction symmetry 4.6.3.2.3. Structure factor ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

497 498 498 498

4.6.3.3. Quasiperiodic structures (QSs) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.1. 3D structures with 1D quasiperiodic order .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.1.1. Indexing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.1.2. Diffraction symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.1.3. Structure factor .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.1.4. Intensity statistics .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.1.5. Relationships between structure factors at symmetry-related points of the Fourier image .. 4.6.3.3.2. Decagonal phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.2.1. Indexing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.2.2. Diffraction symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.2.3. Structure factor .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.2.4. Intensity statistics .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.2.5. Relationships between structure factors at symmetry-related points of the Fourier image .. 4.6.3.3.3. Icosahedral phases .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.3.1. Indexing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.3.2. Diffraction symmetry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.3.3. Structure factor .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.3.4. Intensity statistics .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.3.3.3.5. Relationships between structure factors at symmetry-related points of the Fourier image .. Table 4.6.3.1. 3D point groups of order k describing the diffraction symmetry and corresponding 5D decagonal space groups with reflection conditions (see Rabson et al., 1991) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Table 4.6.3.2. 3D point groups of order k describing the diffraction symmetry and corresponding 6D decagonal space groups with reflection conditions (see Levitov & Rhyner, 1988; Rokhsar et al., 1988) .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

498 498 499 499 500 501 501 503 505 505 506 507 508 509 511 512 512 513 514

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

xxi

507 514

CONTENTS 4.6.4. Experimental aspects of the reciprocal-space analysis of aperiodic crystals .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.4.1. Data-collection strategies .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4.6.4.2. Commensurability versus incommensurability .. 4.6.4.3. Twinning and nanodomain structures .. .. .. .. Table 4.6.4.1. Intensity statistics of the Fibonacci chain 1 .. .. .. .. .. .. and 0 sin = 2 A˚ References

.. .. .. .. .. .. for a .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. total .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1000 .. .. ..

516 517 517

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

519

PART 5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS

.. .. .. of ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 161 322 .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. reflections with .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1000 hi .. .. .. ..

516

516

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

533

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

534

5.1.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

534

5.1.2. Fundamentals of plane-wave dynamical theory .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

534

5.1. Dynamical theory of X-ray diffraction (A. Authier)

5.1.2.1. 5.1.2.2. 5.1.2.3. 5.1.2.4. 5.1.2.5. 5.1.2.6.

Propagation equation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Wavefields .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Boundary conditions at the entrance surface Fundamental equations of dynamical theory Dispersion surface .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Propagation direction .. .. .. .. .. ..

5.1.3. Solutions of plane-wave dynamical theory 5.1.3.1. 5.1.3.2. 5.1.3.3. 5.1.3.4. 5.1.3.5. 5.1.3.6. 5.1.3.7.

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

534 535 536 536 536 537

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

538

Departure from Bragg’s law of the incident wave .. .. .. .. .. .. Transmission and reflection geometries .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Middle of the reflection domain .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Deviation parameter .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Pendello¨sung and extinction distances .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Solution of the dynamical theory .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Geometrical interpretation of the solution in the zero-absorption case 5.1.3.7.1. Transmission geometry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.3.7.2. Reflection geometry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

538 538 539 539 539 540 540 540 541

5.1.4. Standing waves .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

541

5.1.5. Anomalous absorption

541

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

5.1.6. Intensities of plane waves in transmission geometry

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

5.1.6.1. Absorption coefficient .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.2. Boundary conditions for the amplitudes at the entrance surface – intensities of the reflected and refracted waves 5.1.6.3. Boundary conditions at the exit surface .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.3.1. Wavevectors .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.3.2. Amplitudes – Pendello¨sung .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.4. Reflecting power .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.5. Integrated intensity .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.5.1. Non-absorbing crystals .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.5.2. Absorbing crystals .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.6.6. Thin crystals – comparison with geometrical theory .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

5.1.7. Intensity of plane waves in reflection geometry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.7.1. Thick crystals .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.7.1.1. Non-absorbing crystals 5.1.7.1.2. Absorbing crystals .. 5.1.7.2. Thin crystals .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.7.2.1. Non-absorbing crystals 5.1.7.2.2. Absorbing crystals ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. ..

545 545 545 546 546 546 547

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

548

5.1.8.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.8.2. Borrmann triangle .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.1.8.3. Spherical-wave Pendello¨sung .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

548 548 549

Appendix 5.1.1 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

550

A5.1.1.1. Dielectric susceptibility – classical derivation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. A5.1.1.2. Maxwell’s equations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. A5.1.1.3. Propagation equation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

550 550 551

xxii

.. .. .. .. .. ..

541 542 542 542 543 543 544 544 545 545

.. .. .. .. .. ..

5.1.8. Real waves

.. .. .. .. .. ..

541

CONTENTS A5.1.1.4. Poynting vector .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

551

5.2. Dynamical theory of electron diffraction (A. F. Moodie, J. M. Cowley and P. Goodman) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

552

5.2.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

552

5.2.2. The defining equations

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

552

5.2.3. Forward scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

552

5.2.4. Evolution operator .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

552

5.2.5. Projection approximation – real-space solution .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

553

5.2.6. Semi-reciprocal space .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

553

5.2.7. Two-beam approximation

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

553

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

554

5.2.9. Translational invariance .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

554

5.2.10. Bloch-wave formulations

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

555

5.2.8. Eigenvalue approach

5.2.11. Dispersion surfaces

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

555

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

555

5.2.13. Born series .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

555

5.2.14. Approximations

556

5.2.12. Multislice

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

5.3. Dynamical theory of neutron diffraction (M. Schlenker and J.-P. Guigay)

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

557

5.3.1. Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

557

5.3.2. Comparison between X-rays and neutrons with spin neglected .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

557

5.3.2.1. 5.3.2.2. 5.3.2.3. 5.3.2.4. 5.3.2.5.

The neutron and its interactions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Scattering lengths and refractive index .. .. .. .. .. Absorption .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Differences between neutron and X-ray scattering .. .. Translating X-ray dynamical theory into the neutron case

5.3.3. Neutron spin, and diffraction by perfect magnetic crystals 5.3.3.1. 5.3.3.2. 5.3.3.3. 5.3.3.4. 5.3.3.5.

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

557 557 558 558 558

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

558

Polarization of a neutron beam and the Larmor precession in a uniform magnetic field .. Magnetic scattering by a single ion having unpaired electrons .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Dynamical theory in the case of perfect ferromagnetic or collinear ferrimagnetic crystals The dynamical theory in the case of perfect collinear antiferromagnetic crystals .. .. .. The flipping ratio .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

558 559 560 561 561

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

561

5.3.5. Effect of external fields on neutron scattering by perfect crystals .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

562

5.3.4. Extinction in neutron diffraction (non-magnetic case)

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ..

5.3.6. Experimental tests of the dynamical theory of neutron scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

562

5.3.7. Applications of the dynamical theory of neutron scattering .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

563

5.3.7.1. 5.3.7.2. 5.3.7.3. 5.3.7.4.

.. .. .. ..

563 563 563 564

.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

565

Author index .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

571

Subject index .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

580

References

Neutron optics .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Measurement of scattering lengths by Pendello¨sung effects Neutron interferometry .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Neutron diffraction topography and other imaging methods

xxiii

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

.. .. .. ..

Preface By Uri Shmueli The purpose of Volume B of International Tables for Crystallography is to provide the user or reader with accounts of some well established topics, of importance to the science of crystallography, which are related in one way or another to the concepts of reciprocal lattice and, more generally, reciprocal space. Efforts have been made to extend the treatment of the various topics to include X-ray, electron, and neutron diffraction techniques, and thereby do some justice to the inclusion of the present Volume in the new series of International Tables for Crystallography. An important crystallographic aspect of symmetry in reciprocal space, space-group-dependent expressions of trigonometric structure factors, already appears in Volume I of International Tables for X-ray Crystallography, and preliminary plans for incorporating this and other crystallographic aspects of reciprocal space in the new edition of International Tables date back to 1972. However, work on a volume of International Tables for Crystallography, largely dedicated to the subject of reciprocal space, began over ten years later. The present structure of Volume B, as determined in the years preceding the 1984 Hamburg congress of the International Union of Crystallography (IUCr), is due to (i) computer-controlled production of concise structure-factor tables, (ii) the ability to introduce many more aspects of reciprocal space – as a result of reducing the effort of producing the above tables, as well as their volume, and (iii) suggestions by the National Committees and individual crystallographers of some additional interesting topics. It should be pointed out that the initial plans for the present Volume and Volume C (Mathematical, Physical and Chemical Tables, edited by Professor A. J. C. Wilson), were formulated and approved during the same period.

The obviously delayed publication of Volume B is due to several reasons. Some minor delays were caused by a requirement that potential contributors should be approved by the Executive Committee prior to issuing relevant invitations. Much more serious delays were caused by authors who failed to deliver their contributions. In fact, some invited contributions had to be excluded from this first edition of Volume B. Some of the topics here treated are greatly extended, considerably updated or modern versions of similar topics previously treated in the old Volumes I, II, and IV. Most of the subjects treated in Volume B are new to International Tables. I gratefully thank Professor A. J. C. Wilson, for suggesting that I edit this Volume and for sharing with me his rich editorial experience. I am indebted to those authors of Volume B who took my requests and deadlines seriously, and to the Computing Center of Tel Aviv University for computing facilities and time. Special thanks are due to Mrs Z. Stein (Tel Aviv University) for skilful assistance in numeric and symbolic programming, involved in my contributions to this Volume. I am most grateful to many colleagues–crystallographers for encouragement, advice, and suggestions. In particular, thanks are due to Professors J. M. Cowley, P. Goodman and C. J. Humphreys, who served as Chairmen of the Commission on Electron Diffraction during the preparation of this Volume, for prompt and expert help at all stages of the editing. The kind assistance of Dr J. N. King, the Executive Secretary of the IUCr, is also gratefully acknowledged. Last, but certainly not least, I wish to thank Mr M. H. Dacombe, the Technical Editor of the IUCr, and his staff for the skilful and competent treatment of the variety of drafts and proofs out of which this Volume arose.

Preface to the second edition By Uri Shmueli The first edition of Volume B appeared in 1993, and was followed by a corrected reprint in 1996. Although practically all the material for the second edition was available in early 1997, its publication was delayed by the decision to translate all of Volume B, and indeed all the other volumes of International Tables for Crystallography, to Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML) and thus make them available also in an electronic form suitable for modern publishing procedures. During the preparation of the second edition, most chapters that appeared in the first edition have been corrected and/or revised, some were rather extensively updated, and five new chapters were added. The overall structure of the second edition is outlined below. After an introductory chapter, Part 1 presents the reader with an account of structure-factor formalisms, an extensive treatment of the theory, algorithms and crystallographic applications of Fourier methods, and treatments of symmetry in reciprocal space. These are here enriched with more advanced aspects of representations of space groups in reciprocal space. In Part 2, these general accounts are followed by detailed expositions of crystallographic statistics, the theory of direct methods, Patterson techniques, isomorphous replacement and anomalous scattering, and treatments of the role of electron

microscopy and diffraction in crystal structure determination. The latter topic is here enhanced by applications of direct methods to electron crystallography. Part 3, Dual Bases in Crystallographic Computing, deals with applications of reciprocal space to molecular geometry and ‘best’plane calculations, and contains a treatment of the principles of molecular graphics and modelling and their applications; it concludes with the presentation of a convergence-acceleration method, of importance in the computation of approximate lattice sums. Part 4 contains treatments of various diffuse-scattering phenomena arising from crystal dynamics, disorder and low dimensionality (liquid crystals), and an exposition of the underlying theories and/or experimental evidence. The new additions to this part are treatments of polymer crystallography and of reciprocal-space images of aperiodic crystals. Part 5 contains introductory treatments of the theory of the interaction of radiation with matter, the so-called dynamical theory, as applied to X-ray, electron and neutron diffraction techniques. The chapter on the dynamical theory of neutron diffraction is new. I am deeply grateful to the authors of the new contributions for making their expertise available to Volume B and for their

xxv

PREFACE excellent collaboration. I also take special pleasure in thanking those authors of the first edition who revised and updated their contributions in view of recent developments. Last but not least, I wish to thank all the authors for their contributions and their patience, and am grateful to those authors who took my requests seriously. I hope that the updating and revision of future editions will be much easier and more expedient, mainly because of the new format of International Tables. Four friends and greatly respected colleagues who contributed to the second edition of Volume B are no longer with us. These are Professors Arthur J. C. Wilson, Peter Goodman, Verner Schomaker and Boris K. Vainshtein. I asked Professors Michiyoshi Tanaka, John Cowley and Douglas Dorset if they were prepared to answer queries related to the contributions of the late Peter Goodman and Boris K. Vainshtein to Chapter 2.5. I am most grateful for their prompt agreement.

This editorial work was carried out at the School of Chemistry and the Computing Center of Tel Aviv University. The facilities they put at my disposal are gratefully acknowledged on my behalf and on behalf of the IUCr. I wish to thank many colleagues for interesting conversations and advice, and in particular Professor Theo Hahn with whom I discussed at length problems regarding Volume B and International Tables in general. Given all these expert contributions, the publication of this volume would not have been possible without the expertise and devotion of the Technical Editors of the IUCr. My thanks go to Mrs Sue King, for her cooperation during the early stages of the work on the second edition of Volume B, while the material was being collected, and to Dr Nicola Ashcroft, for her collaboration during the final stages of the production of the volume, for her most careful and competent treatment of the proofs, and last but not least for her tactful and friendly attitude.

xxvi

International Tables for Crystallography (2006). Vol. B, Chapter 1.1, pp. 2–9.

1.1. Reciprocal space in crystallography BY U. SHMUELI where h, k and l are relatively prime integers (i.e. not having a common factor other than 1 or 1), known as Miller indices of the lattice plane, x, y and z are the coordinates of any point lying in the plane and are expressed as fractions of the magnitudes of the basis vectors a, b and c of the direct lattice, respectively, and n is an integer denoting the serial number of the lattice plane within the family of parallel and equidistant hkl planes, the interplanar spacing being denoted by dhkl ; the value n 0 corresponds to the hkl plane passing through the origin. Let r xa yb zc and rL ua vb wc, where u, v, w are any integers, denote the position vectors of the point xyz and a lattice point uvw lying in the plane (1.1.2.3), respectively, and assume that r and rL are different vectors. If the plane normal is denoted by N, where N is proportional to the vector product of two in-plane lattice vectors, the vector form of the equation of the lattice plane becomes

1.1.1. Introduction The purpose of this chapter is to provide an introduction to several aspects of reciprocal space, which are of general importance in crystallography and which appear in the various chapters and sections to follow. We first summarize the basic definitions and briefly inspect some fundamental aspects of crystallography, while recalling that they can be usefully and simply discussed in terms of the concept of the reciprocal lattice. This introductory section is followed by a summary of the basic relationships between the direct and associated reciprocal lattices. We then introduce the elements of tensor-algebraic formulation of such dual relationships, with emphasis on those that are important in many applications of reciprocal space to crystallographic algorithms. We proceed with a section that demonstrates the role of mutually reciprocal bases in transformations of coordinates and conclude with a brief outline of some important analytical aspects of reciprocal space, most of which are further developed in other parts of this volume.

N r

The notion of mutually reciprocal triads of vectors dates back to the introduction of vector calculus by J. Willard Gibbs in the 1880s (e.g. Wilson, 1901). This concept appeared to be useful in the early interpretations of diffraction from single crystals (Ewald, 1913; Laue, 1914) and its first detailed exposition and the recognition of its importance in crystallography can be found in Ewald’s (1921) article. The following free translation of Ewald’s (1921) introduction, presented in a somewhat different notation, may serve the purpose of this section: To the set of ai , there corresponds in the vector calculus a set of ‘reciprocal vectors’ bi , which are defined (by Gibbs) by the following properties: 1:1:2:1

ai bi 1,

1:1:2:2

s

h a h,

where i and k may each equal 1, 2 or 3. The first equation, (1.1.2.1), says that each vector bk is perpendicular to two vectors ai , as follows from the vanishing scalar products. Equation (1.1.2.2) provides the norm of the vector bi : the length of this vector must be chosen such that the projection of bi on the direction of ai has the length 1=ai , where ai is the magnitude of the vector ai . . ..

1:1:2:5

h b k,

h c l,

1:1:2:6

where h s s0 is the diffraction vector, and h, k and l are integers corresponding to orders of diffraction from the three-dimensional lattice (Lipson & Cochran, 1966). The diffraction vector thus has to satisfy a condition that is analogous to that imposed on the normal to a lattice plane. The next relevant aspect to be commented on is the Fourier expansion of a function having the periodicity of the crystal lattice. Such functions are e.g. the electron density, the density of nuclear matter and the electrostatic potential in the crystal, which are the operative definitions of crystal structure in X-ray, neutron and electron-diffraction methods of crystal structure determination. A Fourier expansion of such a periodic function may be thought of as a superposition of waves (e.g. Buerger, 1959), with wavevectors related to the interplanar spacings dhkl , in the crystal lattice. Denoting the wavevector of a Fourier wave by g (a function of hkl), the phase of the Fourier wave at the point r in the crystal is given by 2g r, and the triple Fourier series corresponding to the expansion of the periodic function, say G(r), can be written as P Gr Cg exp 2ig r, 1:1:2:7

The consequences of equations (1.1.2.1) and (1.1.2.2) were elaborated by Ewald (1921) and are very well documented in the subsequent literature, crystallographic as well as other. As is well known, the reciprocal lattice occupies a rather prominent position in crystallography and there are nearly as many accounts of its importance as there are crystallographic texts. It is not intended to review its applications, in any detail, in the present section; this is done in the remaining chapters and sections of the present volume. It seems desirable, however, to mention by way of an introduction some fundamental geometrical, physical and mathematical aspects of crystallography, and try to give a unified demonstration of the usefulness of mutually reciprocal bases as an interpretive tool. Consider the equation of a lattice plane in the direct lattice. It is shown in standard textbooks (e.g. Buerger, 1941) that this equation is given by

g

1:1:2:3

where C(g) are the amplitudes of the Fourier waves, or Fourier

2 Copyright © 2006 International Union of Crystallography

s0 rL n,

where s0 and s are the wavevectors of the incident and scattered beams, respectively, and n is an arbitrary integer. Since rL ua vb wc, where u, v and w are unrestricted integers, equation (1.1.2.5) is equivalent to the equations of Laue:

and

hx ky lz n,

1:1:2:4

For equations (1.1.2.3) and (1.1.2.4) to be identical, the plane normal N must satisfy the requirement that N rL n, where n is an (unrestricted) integer. Let us now consider the basic diffraction relations (e.g. Lipson & Cochran, 1966). Suppose a parallel beam of monochromatic radiation, of wavelength , falls on a lattice of identical point scatterers. If it is assumed that the scattering is elastic, i.e. there is no change of the wavelength during this process, the wavevectors of the incident and scattered radiation have the same magnitude, which can conveniently be taken as 1=. A consideration of path and phase differences between the waves outgoing from two point scatterers separated by the lattice vector rL (defined as above) shows that the condition for their maximum constructive interference is given by

1.1.2. Reciprocal lattice in crystallography

ai bk 0 for i 6 k

rL 0 or N r N rL :

1.1. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY We shall, in what follows, abandon all the temporary notation used above and write the reciprocal-lattice vector as

coefficients, which are related to the experimental data. Numerous examples of such expansions appear throughout this volume. The permissible wavevectors in the above expansion are restricted by the periodicity of the function G(r). Since, by definition, Gr Gr rL , where rL is a direct-lattice vector, the right-hand side of (1.1.2.7) must remain unchanged when r is replaced by r rL . This, however, can be true only if the scalar product g rL is an integer. Each of the above three aspects of crystallography may lead, independently, to a useful introduction of the reciprocal vectors, and there are many examples of this in the literature. It is interesting, however, to consider the representation of the equation v rL n,

h ha kb lc or h h 1 a 1 h2 a 2 h3 a 3

or, in matrix notation, 0 1 0 1 A u UVW @ B A abc@ v A n, C w or

10 1 u Aa Ab Ac @ A @ v A n: UVW B a B b B c Ca Cb Cc w

3 P

hi ai ,

1:1:2:13

i1

and denote the direct-lattice vectors by rL ua vb wc, as above, or by r L u1 a1 u 2 a2 u3 a3

1:1:2:8

3 P

ui ai :

1:1:2:14

i1

The representations (1.1.2.13) and (1.1.2.14) are used in the tensoralgebraic formulation of the relationships between mutually reciprocal bases (see Section 1.1.4 below).

which is common to all three, in its most convenient form. Obviously, the vector v which stands for the plane normal, the diffraction vector, and the wavevector in a Fourier expansion, may still be referred to any permissible basis and so may rL , by an appropriate transformation. Let v UA V B W C, where A, B and C are linearly independent vectors. Equation (1.1.2.8) can then be written as UA V B W C ua vb wc n,

1:1:2:12

1.1.3. Fundamental relationships We now present a brief derivation and a summary of the most important relationships between the direct and the reciprocal bases. The usual conventions of vector algebra are observed and the results are presented in the conventional crystallographic notation. Equations (1.1.2.1) and (1.1.2.2) now become

1:1:2:9

a b a c b a b c c a c b 0

1:1:2:10

1:1:3:1

and a a b b c c 1,

0

1:1:3:2

respectively, and the relationships are obtained as follows. 1:1:2:11 1.1.3.1. Basis vectors It is seen from (1.1.3.1) that a must be proportional to the vector product of b and c,

The simplest representation of equation (1.1.2.8) results when the matrix of scalar products in (1.1.2.11) reduces to a unit matrix. This can be achieved (i) by choosing the basis vectors ABC to be orthonormal to the basis vectors abc, while requiring that the components of rL be integers, or (ii) by requiring that the bases ABC and abc coincide with the same orthonormal basis, i.e. expressing both v and rL , in (1.1.2.8), in the same Cartesian system. If we choose the first alternative, it is seen that: (1) The components of the vector v, and hence those of N, h and g, are of necessity integers, since u, v and w are already integral. The components of v include Miller indices; in the case of the lattice plane, they coincide with the orders of diffraction from a threedimensional lattice of scatterers, and correspond to the summation indices in the triple Fourier series (1.1.2.7). (2) The basis vectors A, B and C are reciprocal to a, b and c, as can be seen by comparing the scalar products in (1.1.2.11) with those in (1.1.2.1) and (1.1.2.2). In fact, the bases ABC and abc are mutually reciprocal. Since there are no restrictions on the integers U, V and W, the vector v belongs to a lattice which, on account of its basis, is called the reciprocal lattice. It follows that, at least in the present case, algebraic simplicity goes together with ease of interpretation, which certainly accounts for much of the importance of the reciprocal lattice in crystallography. The second alternative of reducing the matrix in (1.1.2.11) to a unit matrix, a transformation of (1.1.2.8) to a Cartesian system, leads to non-integral components of the vectors, which makes any interpretation of v or rL much less transparent. However, transformations to Cartesian systems are often very useful in crystallographic computing and will be discussed below (see also Chapters 2.3 and 3.3 in this volume).

a Kb c, and, since a a 1, the proportionality constant K equals 1=a b c. The mixed product a b c can be interpreted as the positive volume of the unit cell in the direct lattice only if a, b and c form a right-handed set. If the above condition is fulfilled, we obtain bc ca ab a , b , c 1:1:3:3 V V V and analogously b c c a a b , b , c , 1:1:3:4 a V V V where V and V are the volumes of the unit cells in the associated direct and reciprocal lattices, respectively. Use has been made of the fact that the mixed product, say a b c, remains unchanged under cyclic rearrangement of the vectors that appear in it. 1.1.3.2. Volumes The reciprocal relationship of V and V follows readily. We have from equations (1.1.3.2), (1.1.3.3) and (1.1.3.4) a b a b 1: VV If we make use of the vector identity c c

3

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 0 1 A B C D A CB D A DB C, 1:1:3:5 aa ab ac B C G @ba bb bcA 1:1:3:11 and equations (1.1.3.1) and (1.1.3.2), it is seen that V 1=V . ca cb cc 0 1 2 ab cos

ac cos a 1.1.3.3. Angular relationships B C 1:1:3:12 @ ba cos bc cos A: b2 The relationships of the angles , , between the pairs of 2 ca cos cb cos c vectors (b, c), (c, a) and (a, b), respectively, and the angles , , between the corresponding pairs of reciprocal basis vectors, can be obtained by simple vector algebra. For example, we This is the matrix of the metric tensor of the direct basis, or briefly the direct metric. The corresponding reciprocal metric is given by have from (1.1.3.3): 0 1 (i) b c b c cos , with a a a b a c ca sin ab sin B C G @b a b b b c A 1:1:3:13 b and c V V c a c b c c 0 1 and (ii) a b cos a c cos a2 B C @ b a cos b2 b c cos A: 1:1:3:14 c a a b : b c c a cos c b cos c2 V2 If we make use of the identity (1.1.3.5), and compare the two The matrices G and G are of fundamental importance in crystallographic computations and transformations of basis vectors expressions for b c , we readily obtain and coordinates from direct to reciprocal space and vice versa. cos cos cos cos : 1:1:3:6 Examples of applications are presented in Part 3 of this volume and in the remaining sections of this chapter. sin sin It can be shown (e.g. Buerger, 1941) that the determinants of G Similarly, and G equal the squared volumes of the direct and reciprocal unit cells, respectively. Thus, cos cos cos cos 1:1:3:7 sin sin det G a b c2 V 2 1:1:3:15 and

and cos

cos cos cos : sin sin

det G a b c 2 V 2 ,

1:1:3:8

and a direct expansion of the determinants, from (1.1.3.12) and (1.1.3.14), leads to

The expressions for the cosines of the direct angles in terms of those of the reciprocal ones are analogous to (1.1.3.6)–(1.1.3.8). For example, cos

1:1:3:16

V abc1

cos cos cos : sin sin

cos2

cos2

cos2

2 cos cos cos 1=2

1:1:3:17

and V a b c 1

1.1.3.4. Matrices of metric tensors

where

0 1 x x @ y A, z

cos2 1:1:3:18

The following algorithm has been found useful in computational applications of the above relationships to calculations in reciprocal space (e.g. data reduction) and in direct space (e.g. crystal geometry). (1) Input the direct unit-cell parameters and construct the matrix of the metric tensor [cf. equation (1.1.3.12)]. (2) Compute the determinant of the matrix G and find the inverse matrix, G 1 ; this inverse matrix is just G , the matrix of the metric tensor of the reciprocal basis (see also Section 1.1.4 below). (3) Use the elements of G , and equation (1.1.3.14), to obtain the parameters of the reciprocal unit cell. The direct and reciprocal sets of unit-cell parameters, as well as the corresponding metric tensors, are now available for further calculations. Explicit relations between direct- and reciprocal-lattice parameters, valid for the various crystal systems, are given in most textbooks on crystallography [see also Chapter 1.1 of Volume C (Koch, 1999)].

1:1:3:9

and can be written in matrix form as jrj xT Gx1=2 ,

cos2

2 cos cos cos 1=2 :

Various computational and algebraic aspects of mutually reciprocal bases are most conveniently expressed in terms of the metric tensors of these bases. The tensors will be treated in some detail in the next section, and only the definitions of their matrices are given and interpreted below. Consider the length of the vector r xa yb zc. This is given by jrj xa yb zc xa yb zc1=2

cos2

1:1:3:10

xT xyz

and

4

1.1. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY where km is the Kronecker symbol which equals 1 when k m and equals zero if k 6 m, and by comparison with (1.1.4.2) we have

1.1.4. Tensor-algebraic formulation The present section summarizes the tensor-algebraic properties of mutually reciprocal sets of basis vectors, which are of importance in the various aspects of crystallography. This is not intended to be a systematic treatment of tensor algebra; for more thorough expositions of the subject the reader is referred to relevant crystallographic texts (e.g. Patterson, 1967; Sands, 1982), and other texts in the physical and mathematical literature that deal with tensor algebra and analysis. Let us first recall that symbolic vector and matrix notations, in which basis vectors and coordinates do not appear explicitly, are often helpful in qualitative considerations. If, however, an expression has to be evaluated, the various quantities appearing in it must be presented in component form. One of the best ways to achieve a concise presentation of geometrical expressions in component form, while retaining much of their ‘transparent’ symbolic character, is their tensor-algebraic formulation.

xm x0k Tkm ,

where Tkm a0k am is an element of the required transformation matrix. Of course, the same transformation could have been written as xm Tkm x0k ,

xm xn Tpm Tqn x0p x0q ;

Qmn Tpm Tqn Q0pq :

a a ,b a ,c a : 2

1.1.4.3. Scalar products The expression for the scalar product of two vectors, say u and v, depends on the bases to which the vectors are referred. If we admit only the covariant and contravariant bases defined above, we have four possible types of expression: I u ui ai , v vi ai u v ui v j ai aj ui v j gij , II u ui a , v vi a i

III u u ai , v vi a i

since both i and j conform to the convention. Such repeating indices are often called dummy indices. The implied summation over repeating indices is also often used even when the indices are at the same level and the coordinate system is Cartesian; there is no distinction between contravariant and covariant quantities in Cartesian frames of reference (see Chapter 3.3). (iii) Components (coordinates) of vectors referred to the covariant basis are written as contravariant quantities, and vice versa. For example,

1:1:4:8

i

u v ui vj ai a j ui vj ij ui vi ,

1:1:4:9

IV u ui a , v v ai i

i

u v ui v j ai aj ui v j ji ui vi :

1:1:4:10

(i) The sets of scalar products gij ai aj (1.1.4.7) and gij a a j (1.1.4.8) are known as the metric tensors of the covariant (direct) and contravariant (reciprocal) bases, respectively; the corresponding matrices are presented in conventional notation in equations (1.1.3.11) and (1.1.3.13). Numerous applications of these tensors to the computation of distances and angles in crystals are given in Chapter 3.1. (ii) Equations (1.1.4.7) to (1.1.4.10) furnish the relationships between the covariant and contravariant components of the same vector. Thus, comparing (1.1.4.7) and (1.1.4.9), we have i

r xa yb zc x1 a1 x2 a2 x3 a3 xi ai h ha kb lc h1 a1 h2 a2 h3 a3 hi ai : 1.1.4.2. Transformations A familiar concept but a fundamental one in tensor algebra is the transformation of coordinates. For example, suppose that an atomic position vector is referred to two unit-cell settings as follows:

vi v j gij :

1:1:4:11

Similarly, using (1.1.4.8) and (1.1.4.10) we obtain the inverse relationship

1:1:4:1

vi vj gij :

and r x0k a0k :

1:1:4:7

i

u v ui vj ai a j ui vj gij ,

j

r x k ak

1:1:4:6

3

Subscripted quantities are associated in tensor algebra with covariant, and superscripted with contravariant transformation properties. Thus the basis vectors of the direct lattice are represented as covariant quantities and those of the reciprocal lattice as contravariant ones. (ii) Summation convention: if an index appears twice in an expression, once as subscript and once as superscript, a summation over this index is thereby implied and the summation sign is omitted. For example, PP i x Tij x j will be written xi Tij x j i

1:1:4:5

the same transformation law applies to the components of a contravariant tensor of rank two, the components of which are referred to the primed basis and are to be transformed to the unprimed one:

We shall adhere to the following conventions: (i) Notation for direct and reciprocal basis vectors: a a1 , b a2 , c a3 1

1:1:4:4

where Tkm am a0k . A tensor is a quantity that transforms as the product of coordinates, and the rank of a tensor is the number of transformations involved (Patterson, 1967; Sands, 1982). E.g. the product of two coordinates, as in the above example, transforms from the a0 basis to the a basis as

1.1.4.1. Conventions

1:1:4:3

1:1:4:2

1:1:4:12

The corresponding relationships between covariant and contravariant bases can now be obtained if we refer a vector, say v, to each of the bases

Let us multiply both sides of (1.1.4.1) and (1.1.4.2), on the right, by the vectors am , m = 1, 2, or 3, i.e. by the reciprocal vectors to the basis a1 a2 a3 . We obtain from (1.1.4.1)

v v i ai v k ak ,

xk ak am xk km xm ,

and make use of (1.1.4.11) and (1.1.4.12). Thus, e.g.,

5

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES vi ai vk gik ai vk ak : Hence ak gik ai

1:1:4:13

ak gik ai :

1:1:4:14

and, similarly, ij

(iii) The tensors gij and g are symmetric, by definition. (iv) It follows from (1.1.4.11) and (1.1.4.12) or (1.1.4.13) and (1.1.4.14) that the matrices of the direct and reciprocal metric tensors are mutually inverse, i.e. 0 1 1 0 11 12 13 1 g11 g12 g13 g g g @ g21 g22 g23 A @ g21 g22 g23 A, 1:1:4:15 31 32 33 g31 g32 g33 g g g and their determinants are mutually reciprocal. 1.1.4.4. Examples There are numerous applications of tensor notation in crystallographic calculations, and many of them appear in the various chapters of this volume. We shall therefore present only a few examples. (i) The (squared) magnitude of the diffraction vector h hi ai is given by 4 sin2 jhj hi hj gij : 2 2

Fig. 1.1.4.1. Derivation of the general expression for the rotation operator. The figure illustrates schematically the decompositions and other simple geometrical considerations required for the derivation outlined in equations (1.1.4.22)–(1.1.4.28).

This is a typical application of reciprocal space to ordinary directspace computations. (iv) We wish to derive a tensor formulation of the vector product, along similar lines to those of Chapter 3.1. As with the scalar product, there are several such formulations and we choose that which has both vectors, say u and v, and the resulting product, u v, referred to a covariant basis. We have

1:1:4:16

This concise relationship is a starting point in a derivation of unitcell parameters from experimental data. (ii) The structure factor, including explicitly anisotropic displacement tensors, can be written in symbolic matrix notation as Fh

N P j1

fi exp h b j h exp2ih r j , T

T

u v ui ai v j aj

1:1:4:17

ui v j ai aj :

If we make use of the relationships (1.1.3.3) between the direct and reciprocal basis vectors, it can be verified that

where b j is the matrix of the anisotropic displacement tensor of the jth atom. In tensor notation, with the quantities referred to their natural bases, the structure factor can be written as Fh1 h2 h3

N P j1

f j exp hi hk ikj exp2ihi xi j ,

ai aj V ekij ak ,

1:1:4:20

where V is the volume of the unit cell and the antisymmetric tensor ekij equals 1, 1, or 0 according as kij is an even permutation of 123, an odd permutation of 123 or any two of the indices kij have the same value, respectively. We thus have

1:1:4:18

and similarly concise expressions can be written for the derivatives of the structure factor with respect to the positional and displacement parameters. The summation convention applies only to indices denoting components of vectors and tensors; the atom subscript j in (1.1.4.18) clearly does not qualify, and to indicate this it has been surrounded by parentheses. (iii) Geometrical calculations, such as those described in the chapters of Part 3, may be carried out in any convenient basis but there are often some definite advantages to computations that are referred to the natural, non-Cartesian bases (see Chapter 3.1). Usually, the output positional parameters from structure refinement are available as contravariant components of the atomic position vectors. If we transform them by (1.1.4.11) to their covariant form, and store these covariant components of the atomic position vectors, the computation of scalar products using equations (1.1.4.9) or (1.1.4.10) is almost as efficient as it would be if the coordinates were referred to a Cartesian system. For example, the right-hand side of the vector identity (1.1.3.5), which is employed in the computation of dihedral angles, can be written as Ai C i Bk Dk

1:1:4:19

u v V ekij ui v j ak Vglk ekij ui v j al ,

1:1:4:21

since by (1.1.4.13), a g al . (v) The rotation operator. The general formulation of an expression for the rotation operator is of interest in crystal structure determination by Patterson techniques (see Chapter 2.3) and in molecular modelling (see Chapter 3.3), and another well known crystallographic application of this device is the derivation of the translation, libration and screw-motion tensors by the method of Schomaker & Trueblood (1968), discussed in Part 8 of Volume C (IT C, 1999) and in Chapter 1.2 of this volume. A digression on an elementary derivation of the above seems to be worthwhile. Suppose we wish to rotate the vector r, about an axis coinciding with the unit vector k, through the angle and in the positive sense, i.e. an observer looking in the direction of k will see r rotating in the clockwise sense. The vectors r, k and the rotated (target) vector r0 are referred to an origin on the axis of rotation (see Fig. 1.1.4.1). Our purpose is to express r0 in terms of r, k and by a general vector k

Ai Di Bk C k :

6

lk

1.1. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY If all the vectors are referred to a Cartesian basis, that is three orthogonal unit vectors, the direct and reciprocal metric tensors reduce to a unit tensor, there is no difference between covariant and contravariant quantities, and equation (1.1.4.31) reduces to

formula, and represent the components of the rotated vectors in coordinate systems that might be of interest. Let us decompose the vector r and the (target) vector r0 into their components which are parallel k and perpendicular ? to the axis of rotation: r rk r?

1:1:4:22

r0 r0k r0? :

1:1:4:23

R ij ki kj 1

1:1:4:32

where all the indices have been taken as subscripts, but the summation convention is still observed. The relative simplicity of (1.1.4.32), as compared to (1.1.4.31), often justifies the transformation of all the vector quantities to a Cartesian basis. This is certainly the case for any extensive calculation in which covariances of the structural parameters are not considered.

and

It can be seen from Fig. 1.1.4.1 that the parallel components of r and r0 are rk r0k kk r

cos ij cos eipj kp sin ,

1:1:4:24 1.1.5. Transformations

and thus r? r

kk r:

1:1:4:25

1.1.5.1. Transformations of coordinates It happens rather frequently that a vector referred to a given basis has to be re-expressed in terms of another basis, and it is then required to find the relationship between the components (coordinates) of the vector in the two bases. Such situations have already been indicated in the previous section. The purpose of the present section is to give a general method of finding such relationships (transformations), and discuss some simplifications brought about by the use of mutually reciprocal and Cartesian bases. We do not assume anything about the bases, in the general treatment, and hence the tensor formulation of Section 1.1.4 is not appropriate at this stage. Let

Only a suitable expression for r0? is missing. We can find this by decomposing r0? into its components (i) parallel to r? and (ii) parallel to k r? . We have, as in (1.1.4.24), r? r? 0 k r? k r? 0 0 r? r r : 1:1:4:26 jr? j jr? j ? jk r? j jk r? j ? We observe, using Fig. 1.1.4.1, that jr0? j jr? j jk r? j and k r? k r,

r

and, further,

r

r0? k r? k r0? r? jr? j2 sin ,

1:1:4:27

uk 1ck 1 cl 2 uk 2ck 2 cl 2, uk 1Gkl 12 uk 2Gkl 22,

l 1, 2, 3 1:1:5:3

l 1, 2, 3,

1:1:5:4

where Gkl 12 ck 1 cl 2 and Gkl 22 ck 2 cl 2. Similarly, if we choose the basis vectors cl 1, l = 1, 2, 3, as the multipliers of (1.1.5.1) and (1.1.5.2), we obtain uk 1Gkl 11 uk 2Gkl 21,

l 1, 2, 3,

1:1:5:5

where Gkl 11 ck 1 cl 1 and Gkl 21 ck 2 cl 1. Rewriting (1.1.5.4) and (1.1.5.5) in symbolic matrix notation, we have

cos ji x j cos Vgim empj k p x j sin , 1:1:4:29

uT 1G12 uT 2G22,

or briefly

1:1:5:6

leading to

1:1:4:30

uT 1 uT 2fG22G12 1 g

where R ij k i kj 1

1:1:5:2

or

1:1:4:28

The above general expression can be written as a linear transformation by referring the vectors to an appropriate basis or bases. We choose here r x j aj , r0 x0i ai and assume that the components of k are available in the direct and reciprocal bases. If we make use of equations (1.1.4.9) and (1.1.4.21), (1.1.4.28) can be written as

x0i R ij x j ,

uj 2cj 2

be the given and required representations of the vector r, respectively. Upon the formation of scalar products of equations (1.1.5.1) and (1.1.5.2) with the vectors of the second basis, and employing again the summation convention, we obtain

and equations (1.1.4.23), (1.1.4.25) and (1.1.4.27) lead to the required result

x0i k i k j x j 1

3 P

j1

since the unit vector k is perpendicular to the plane containing the vectors r? and r0? . Equation (1.1.4.26) now reduces to

cos r cos k r sin :

1:1:5:1

and

and

r0 kk r1

uj 1cj 1

j1

r0? r? jr? j2 cos

r0? r? cos k r sin

3 P

and cos ji cos Vgim empj k p sin

1:1:4:31

uT 2 uT 1fG12G22 1 g,

is a matrix element of the rotation operator R which carries the vector r into the vector r0 . Of course, the representation (1.1.4.31) of R depends on our choice of reference bases.

1:1:5:7

and uT 1G11 uT 2G21,

7

1:1:5:8

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES X 1 X axis of the Cartesian system thus coincides with a directlattice vector, and the X 2 Y axis is parallel to a vector in the reciprocal lattice. Since the basis in (1.1.5.12) is a Cartesian one, the required transformations are given by equations (1.1.5.10) as

leading to uT 1 uT 2fG21G11 1 g and uT 2 uT 1fG11G21 1 g: 1:1:5:9 Equations (1.1.5.7) and (1.1.5.9) are symbolic general expressions for the transformation of the coordinates of r from one representation to the other. In the general case, therefore, we require the matrices of scalar products of the basis vectors, G(12) and G(22) or G(11) and G(21) – depending on whether the basis ck 2 or ck 1, k = 1, 2, 3, was chosen to multiply scalarly equations (1.1.5.1) and (1.1.5.2). Note, however, the following simplifications. (i) If the bases ck 1 and ck 2 are mutually reciprocal, each of the matrices of mixed scalar products, G(12) and G(21), reduces to a unit matrix. In this important special case, the transformation is effected by the matrices of the metric tensors of the bases in question. This can be readily seen from equations (1.1.5.7) and (1.1.5.9), which then reduce to the relationships between the covariant and contravariant components of the same vector [see equations (1.1.4.11) and (1.1.4.12) above]. (ii) If one of the bases, say ck 2, is Cartesian, its metric tensor is by definition a unit tensor, and the transformations in (1.1.5.7) reduce to uT 1 uT 2G12

xi X k T 1 ik and X i xk Tki ,

1:1:5:13

where ak ei , k, i = 1, 2, 3, form the matrix of the scalar products. If we make use of the relationships between covariant and contravariant basis vectors, and the tensor formulation of the vector product, given in Section 1.1.4 above (see also Chapter 3.1), we obtain 1 Tk1 gki ui jrL j 1 Tk2 hk 1:1:5:14 jr j V Tk3 ekip ui gpl hl : jrL jjr j Note that the other convenient choice, e1 / r and e2 / rL , interchanges the first two columns of the matrix T in (1.1.5.14) and leads to a change of the signs of the elements in the third column. This can be done by writing ekpi instead of ekip , while leaving the rest of Tk3 unchanged. Tki

1

1.1.6. Some analytical aspects of the reciprocal space

and uT 2 uT 1G12:

1.1.6.1. Continuous Fourier transform

1:1:5:10

Of great interest in crystallographic analyses are Fourier transforms and these are closely associated with the dual bases examined in this chapter. Thus, e.g., the inverse Fourier transform of the electron-density function of the crystal R r exp2ih r d3 r, 1:1:6:1 Fh

The transformation matrix is now the mixed matrix of the scalar products, whether or not the basis ck 1, k = 1, 2, 3, is also Cartesian. If, however, both bases are Cartesian, the transformation can also be interpreted as a rigid rotation of the coordinate axes (see Chapter 3.3). It should be noted that the above transformations do not involve any shift of the origin. Transformations involving such shifts, notably the symmetry transformations of the space group, are treated rather extensively in Volume A of International Tables for Crystallography (1995) [see e.g. Part 5 there (Arnold, 1983)].

cell

where r is the electron-density function at the point r and the integration extends over the volume of a unit cell, is the fundamental model of the contribution of the distribution of crystalline matter to the intensity of the scattered radiation. For the conventional Bragg scattering, the function given by (1.1.6.1), and known as the structure factor, may assume nonzero values only if h can be represented as a reciprocal-lattice vector. Chapter 1.2 is devoted to a discussion of the structure factor of the Bragg reflection, while Chapters 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3 discuss circumstances under which the scattering need not be confined to the points of the reciprocal lattice only, and may be represented by reciprocal-space vectors with non-integral components.

1.1.5.2. Example This example deals with the construction of a Cartesian system in a crystal with given basis vectors of its direct lattice. We shall also require that the Cartesian system bears a clear relationship to at least one direction in each of the direct and reciprocal lattices of the crystal; this may be useful in interpreting a physical property which has been measured along a given lattice vector or which is associated with a given lattice plane. For a better consistency of notation, the Cartesian components will be denoted as contravariant. The appropriate version of equations (1.1.5.1) and (1.1.5.2) is now r x i ai

1.1.6.2. Discrete Fourier transform The electron density r in (1.1.6.1) is one of the most common examples of a function which has the periodicity of the crystal. Thus, for an ideal (infinite) crystal the electron density r can be written as

1:1:5:11

r r ua vb wc,

and r X k ek ,

1:1:5:12

1:1:6:2

and, as such, it can be represented by a three-dimensional Fourier series of the form P r Cg exp 2ig r, 1:1:6:3

where the Cartesian basis vectors are: e1 rL =jrL j, e2 r =jr j and e3 e1 e2 , and the vectors rL and r are given by

g

rL ui ai and r hk ak ,

where the periodicity requirement (1.1.6.2) enables one to represent all the g vectors in (1.1.6.3) as vectors in the reciprocal lattice (see also Section 1.1.2 above). If we insert the series (1.1.6.3) in the

where ui and hk , i, k = 1, 2, 3, are arbitrary integers. The vectors rL and r must be mutually perpendicular, rL r ui hi 0. The

8

1.1. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY integrand of (1.1.6.1), interchange the order of summation and integration and make use of the fact that an integral of a periodic function taken over the entire period must vanish unless the integrand is a constant, equation (1.1.6.3) reduces to the conventional form 1X r Fh exp 2ih r, 1:1:6:4 V h

the form of a plane wave times a function with the periodicity of the Bravais lattice.

Thus r expik rur,

1:1:6:5

ur rL ur

1:1:6:6

where

where V is the volume of the unit cell in the direct lattice and the summation ranges over all the reciprocal lattice. Fourier transforms, discrete as well as continuous, are among the most important mathematical tools of crystallography. The discussion of their mathematical principles, the modern algorithms for their computation and their numerous applications in crystallography form the subject matter of Chapter 1.3. Many more examples of applications of Fourier methods in crystallography are scattered throughout this volume and the crystallographic literature in general.

and k is the wavevector. The proof of Bloch’s theorem can be found in most modern texts on solid-state physics (e.g. Ashcroft & Mermin, 1975). If we combine (1.1.6.5) with (1.1.6.6), an alternative form of the Bloch theorem results: r rL expik rL r: In the important case where the wavefunction i.e.

1:1:6:7 is itself periodic,

r rL r, we must have expik rL 1. Of course, this can be so only if the wavevector k equals 2 times a vector in the reciprocal lattice. It is also seen from equation (1.1.6.7) that the wavevector appearing in the phase factor can be reduced to a unit cell in the reciprocal lattice (the basis vectors of which contain the 2 factor), or to the equivalent polyhedron known as the Brillouin zone (e.g. Ziman, 1969). This periodicity in reciprocal space is of prime importance in the theory of solids. Some Brillouin zones are discussed in detail in Chapter 1.5.

1.1.6.3. Bloch’s theorem It is in order to mention briefly the important role of reciprocal space and the reciprocal lattice in the field of the theory of solids. At the basis of these applications is the periodicity of the crystal structure and the effect it has on the dynamics (cf. Chapter 4.1) and electronic structure of the crystal. One of the earliest, and still most important, theorems of solid-state physics is due to Bloch (1928) and deals with the representation of the wavefunction of an electron which moves in a periodic potential. Bloch’s theorem states that:

Acknowledgements I wish to thank Professor D. W. J. Cruickshank for bringing to my attention the contribution of M. von Laue (Laue, 1914), who was the first to introduce general reciprocal bases to crystallography.

The eigenstates of the one-electron Hamiltonian h h2 =2mr2 Ur, where U(r) is the crystal potential and Ur rL Ur for all rL in the Bravais lattice, can be chosen to have

9


1.2. The structure factor BY P. COPPENS 1.2.1. Introduction

1.2.3. Scattering by a crystal: definition of a structure factor

The structure factor is the central concept in structure analysis by diffraction methods. Its modulus is called the structure amplitude. The structure amplitude is a function of the indices of the set of scattering planes h, k and l, and is defined as the amplitude of scattering by the contents of the crystallographic unit cell, expressed in units of scattering. For X-ray scattering, that unit is the scattering by a single electron 2:82 10 15 m, while for neutron scattering by atomic nuclei, the unit of scattering length of 10 14 m is commonly used. The complex form of the structure factor means that the phase of the scattered wave is not simply related to that of the incident wave. However, the observable, which is the scattered intensity, must be real. It is proportional to the square of the scattering amplitude (see, e.g., Lipson & Cochran, 1966). The structure factor is directly related to the distribution of scattering matter in the unit cell which, in the X-ray case, is the electron distribution, time-averaged over the vibrational modes of the solid. In this chapter we will discuss structure-factor expressions for X-ray and neutron scattering, and, in particular, the modelling that is required to obtain an analytical description in terms of the features of the electron distribution and the vibrational displacement parameters of individual atoms. We concentrate on the most basic developments; for further details the reader is referred to the cited literature.

In a crystal of infinite size, r is a three-dimensional periodic function, as expressed by the convolution crystal r

PPP unit cell r r

na

mb

where n, m and p are integers, and is the Dirac delta function. Thus, according to the Fourier convolution theorem, ^ AS Ffrg PPP ^ unit cell rgFfr ^ Ff

mb

pcg, 1:2:3:2

kb

lc : 1:2:3:3

na

n m p

which gives ^ unit cell rg AS Ff

PPP S h k

ha

l

Expression (1.2.3.3) is valid for a crystal with a very large number of unit cells, in which particle-size broadening is negligible. Furthermore, it does not account for multiple scattering of the beam within the crystal. Because of the appearance of the delta function, (1.2.3.3) implies that S H with H ha kb lc . The first factor in (1.2.3.3), the scattering amplitude of one unit cell, is defined as the structure factor F: ^ unit cell rg FH Ff

1.2.2. General scattering expression for X-rays The total scattering of X-rays contains both elastic and inelastic components. Within the first-order Born approximation (Born, 1926) it has been treated by several authors (e.g. Waller & Hartree, 1929; Feil, 1977) and is given by the expression 2 P R Itotal S Iclassical n exp2iS rj 0 dr , 1:2:2:1

R

unit cell r exp2iH r

To a reasonable approximation, the unit-cell density can be described as a superposition of isolated, spherical atoms located at rj . P 1:2:4:1 unit cell r atom; j r r rj :

where Iclassical is the classical Thomson scattering of an X-ray beam by a free electron, which is equal to e2 =mc2 2 1 cos2 2=2 for an unpolarized beam of unit intensity, is the n-electron spacewavefunction expressed in the 3n coordinates of the electrons located at rj and the integration is over the coordinates of all electrons. S is the scattering vector of length 2 sin =. The coherent elastic component of the scattering, in units of the scattering of a free electron, is given by R P Icoherent; elastic S 0 exp2iS rj j 0 drj2 : 1:2:2:2

j

Substitution in (1.2.3.4) gives FH

P ^ atom; j gFfr ^ Ff j

rj g

P

fj exp2iH rj

j

1:2:4:2a

j

If integration is performed over all coordinates but those of the jth electron, one obtains after summation over all electrons R Icoherent; elastic S j r exp2iS r drj2 , 1:2:2:3

or Fh, k, l

P

fj exp 2ihxj kyj lzj

j

where r is the electron distribution. The scattering amplitude AS is then given by R AS r exp2iS r dr 1:2:2:4a

P

fj fcos 2hxj kyj lzj

j

i sin 2hxj kyj lzj g:

or

1:2:4:2b

fj S, the spherical atomic scattering factor, or form factor, is the Fourier transform of the spherically averaged atomic density j r, in which the polar coordinate r is relative to the nuclear position. fj S can be written as (James, 1982)

1:2:2:4b

where F^ is the Fourier transform operator.


dr: 1:2:3:4

1.2.4. The isolated-atom approximation in X-ray diffraction

n

^ AS Ffrg,

pc, 1:2:3:1

n m p

1.2. THE STRUCTURE FACTOR

Z fj S

the scattering length is essentially real and independent of the energy of the incoming neutron. In either case, b is independent of the Bragg angle , unlike the X-ray form factor, since the nuclear dimensions are very small relative to the wavelength of thermal neutrons. The scattering length is not the same for different isotopes of an element. A random distribution of isotopes over the sites occupied by that element leads to an incoherent contribution, such that effectively total coherent incoherent . Similarly for nuclei with non-zero spin, a spin incoherent scattering occurs as the spin states are, in general, randomly distributed over the sites of the nuclei. For free or loosely bound nuclei, the scattering length is modified by bfree M=m Mb, where M is the mass of the nucleus and m is the mass of the neutron. This effect is of consequence only for the lightest elements. It can, in particular, be of significance for hydrogen atoms. With this in mind, the structure-factor expression for elastic scattering can be written as P 1:2:4:2d FH bj; coherent exp 2ihxj kyj lzj

j r exp2iS r dr atom

Z Z2 Z1 j r exp2iSr cos #r2 sin # dr d# d' 0 '0 r0

Zr

sin 2Sr 4r j r dr 2Sr

Zr 4r2 j rj0 2Sr dr

2

0

0

h j0 i,

1:2:4:3

where j0 2Sr is the zero-order spherical Bessel function. j r represents either the static or the dynamic density of atom j. In the former case, the effect of thermal motion, treated in Section 1.2.9 and following, is not included in the expression. When scattering is treated in the second-order Born approximation, additional terms occur which are in particular of importance for X-ray wavelengths with energies close to absorption edges of atoms, where the participation of free and bound excited states in the scattering process becomes very important, leading to resonance scattering. Inclusion of such contributions leads to two extra terms, which are both wavelength- and scattering-angledependent: fj S, fj 0 S fj0 S, ifj00 S, :

j

by analogy to (1.2.4.2b). 1.2.5.2. Magnetic scattering The interaction between the magnetic moments of the neutron and the unpaired electrons in solids leads to magnetic scattering. The total elastic scattering including both the nuclear and magnetic contributions is given by ^ 2, jFHj2 jFN H QH lj 1:2:5:1a

1:2:4:4

The treatment of resonance effects is beyond the scope of this chapter. We note however (a) that to a reasonable approximation the S-dependence of j0 and j00 can be neglected, (b) that j0 and j00 are not independent, but related through the Kramers–Kronig transformation, and (c) that in an anisotropic environment the atomic scattering factor becomes anisotropic, and accordingly is described as a tensor property. Detailed descriptions and appropriate references can be found in Materlick et al. (1994) and in Section 4.2.6 of IT C (1999). The structure-factor expressions (1.2.4.2) can be simplified when the crystal class contains non-trivial symmetry elements. For example, when the origin of the unit cell coincides with a centre of symmetry x, y, z ! x, y, z the sine term in (1.2.4.2b) cancels when the contributions from the symmetry-related atoms are added, leading to the expression N=2 P

FH 2

fj cos 2hxj kyj lzj ,

total

^ describes the polarization vector for the where the unit vector l neutron spin, FN H is given by (1.2.4.2b) and Q is defined by Z mc b b exp2iH r dr: Q H Mr H 1:2:5:2a eh Mr is the vector field describing the electron-magnetization b is a unit vector parallel to H. distribution and H Q is thus proportional to the projection of M onto a direction orthogonal to H in the plane containing M and H. The magnitude of this projection depends on sin , where is the angle between Q and H, which prevents magnetic scattering from being a truly threedimensional probe. If all moments Mr are collinear, as may be achieved in paramagnetic materials by applying an external field, and for the maximum signal (H orthogonal to M), (1.2.5.2a) becomes Z mc Q MH Mr exp2iH r dr 1:2:5:2b eh

1:2:4:2c

j1

where the summation is over the unique half of the unit cell only. Further simplifications occur when other symmetry elements are present. They are treated in Chapter 1.4, which also contains a complete list of symmetry-specific structure-factor expressions valid in the spherical-atom isotropic-temperature-factor approximation.

and (1.2.5.1a) gives jFj2total jFN H

MHj2

1:2:5:1b

and

1.2.5. Scattering of thermal neutrons

jFj2total jFN H MHj2

1.2.5.1. Nuclear scattering

for neutrons parallel and antiparallel to MH, respectively.

The scattering of neutrons by atomic nuclei is described by the atomic scattering length b, related to the total cross section total by the expression total 4b2 . At present, there is no theory of nuclear forces which allows calculation of the scattering length, so that experimental values are to be used. Two types of nuclei can be distinguished (Squires, 1978). In the first type, the scattering is a resonance phenomenon and is associated with the formation of a compound nucleus (consisting of the original nucleus plus a neutron) with an energy close to that of an excited state. In the second type, the compound nucleus is not near an excited state and

1.2.6. Effect of bonding on the atomic electron density within the spherical-atom approximation: the kappa formalism A first improvement beyond the isolated-atom formalism is to allow for changes in the radial dependence of the atomic electron distribution.

11

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table 1.2.7.1. Real spherical harmonic functions (x, y, z are direction cosines)

l

Symbol

C*

Angular function, clmp †

0

00

1

1

11 11 10

1 1 1

9 x= y ; z

20

1=2

3z2

2

3

4

5

1

1 9 > > =

21 21 22 22

3 3 6 6

30

1=2

5z3

31 31

3=2 3=2

x5z2 y5z2

32 32

15 15

x2 y2 z 2xyz

33 33

15 15

40

1=8

35z4

41 41

5=2 5=2

x7z3 y7z3

42 42

15=2 15=2

x2 y2 7z2 1 2xy7z2 1

43 43

105 105

x3 3xy2 z y3 3x2 yz

44 44

105 105

x4 6x2 y2 y4 4x3 y 4xy3

50

1=8

63z5

x2

xz yz y2 =2 > > ; xy 3z 1 1

Normalization for wavefunctions, Mlmp ‡

Normalization for density functions, Llmp §

Expression

Numerical value

Expression

Numerical value

1=2

1=4

0.28209

1=4

0.07958

3=41=2

0.48860

1=

0.31831

5=161=2

0.31539

p 3 3 8

0.20675

15=41=2

1.09255

3=4

0.75

7=161=2

0.37318

10 13

0.24485

21=321=2

0.45705

105=161=2

1.44531

1

1

35=321=2

0.59004

4=3

0.42441

9=2561=2

0.10579

**

0.06942

45=321=2

0.66905

45=641=2

0.47309

315=321=2

1.77013

5=4

1.25

315=2561=2

0.62584

15=32

0.46875

11=2561=2

0.11695

—

0.07674

165=2561=2

0.45295

—

0.32298

1155=641=2

2.39677

—

1.68750

385=5121=2

0.48924

—

0.34515

3465=2561=2

2.07566

—

1.50000

693=5121=2

0.65638

—

0.50930

ar{

14 5

4

1

0.32033

x3 3xy2 y3 3x2 y

30z2 3 3z 3z

70z3

735 p 512 7 196 p 105 7 p 4136 28 7

0.47400

0.33059

15z

51 51

15=8

21z4 21z4

52 52

105=2

3z3 zx2 y2 2xy3z3 z

53 53

105=2

9z2 9z2

54 54

945

zx4 6x2 y2 y4 z4x3 y 4xy3

55 55

945

x5 10x3 y2 5xy4 5x4 y 10x2 y3 y5

14z2 1x 14z2 1y

1x3 3xy2 13x2 y y3

Such changes may be due to electronegativity differences which lead to the transfer of electrons between the valence shells of different atoms. The electron transfer introduces a change in the screening of the nuclear charge by the electrons and therefore

affects the radial dependence of the atomic electron distribution (Coulson, 1961). A change in radial dependence of the density may also occur in a purely covalent bond, as, for example, in the H2 molecule (Ruedenberg, 1962). It can be expressed as

12

1.2. THE STRUCTURE FACTOR Table 1.2.7.1. Real spherical harmonic functions (x, y, z are direction cosines) (cont.)

l 6

7

Symbol

Angular function, clmp †

C*

315z4 105z2 30z3 5zx 3 30z 5zy

1=16

231z6

61 61

21=8

33z5 33z5

62 62

105=8

33z4 18z2 1x2 y2 2xy33z4 18z2 1

63 63

315=2

11z3 11z3

64 64

945=2

11z2 1x4 6x2 y2 y4 11z2 14x3 y 4xy3

65 65

10395

zx5 10x3 y2 5xy4 z5x4 y 10x2 y3 y5

66 66

10395

70

1=16

x6

5

Expression

Numerical value

Expression

Numerical value

1=2

0.06357

—

0.04171

273=2561=2

0.58262

—

0.41721

1365=20481=2

0.46060

—

0.32611

1365=5121=2

0.92121

—

0.65132

819=10241=2

0.50457

—

0.36104

9009=5121=2

2.36662

—

1.75000

3003=20481=2

0.68318

—

0.54687

15=10241=2

0.06828

—

0.04480

105=40961=2

0.09033

—

0.06488

315=20481=2

0.22127

—

0.15732

315=40961=2

0.15646

—

0.11092

3465=10241=2

1.03783

—

0.74044

3465=40961=2

0.51892

—

0.37723

45045=20481=2

2.6460

—

2.00000

6435=40961=2

0.70716

—

0.58205

15x4 y2 15x2 y4 y6 6x y 20x3 y3 6xy5

5

429z7

Normalization for density functions, Llmp §

13=1024

60

3zx3 3xy2 3z3x2 y 3y

Normalization for wavefunctions, Mlmp ‡

693z5 315z3

35z

71 71

7=16

429z6 429z6

72 72

63=8

143z5 110z3 15zx2 y2 2xy143z5 110z3 15z

73 73

315=8

143z4 143z4

74 74

3465=2

13z3 3zx4 6x2 y2 y4 13z3 3z4x3 y 4xy3

75 75

10395=2

13z3 13z3

76 76

135135

zx6 15x4 y2 15x2 y4 y6 z6x5 y 20x3 y3 6xy5

77 77

135135

x7 21x5 y2 35x3 y4 7xy6 7x6 y 35x4 y3 21x2 y5 y7

495z4 135z2 495z4 135z2

5x 5y

66z2 3x3 3xy2 66z2 33x2 y y3

1x5 10x3 y2 5xy4 15x4 y 10x2 y3 y5

m' * Common factor such that Clm clmp Pml cos cos sin m' : † x sin cos ', y sin sin ', z cos . ‡ As defined by ylmp Mlmp clmp where clmp are Cartesian functions. § Paturle & Coppens (1988), as defined by dlmp Llmp clmp where clmp are Cartesian functions. { ar = arctan (2). p ** Nang f14A5 14A5 20A3 20A3 6A 6A 2g 1 where A 30 480=701=2 .

0valence r 3 valence r

1:2:6:1

The corresponding structure-factor expression is P FH fPj; core fj; core H Pj; valence fj; valence H=g

(Coppens et al., 1979), where 0 is the modified density and is an expansion/contraction parameter, which is > 1 for valence-shell contraction and < 1 for expansion. The 3 factor results from the normalization requirement. The valence density is usually defined as the outer electron shell from which charge transfer occurs. The inner or core electrons are much less affected by the change in occupancy of the outer shell and, in a reasonable approximation, retain their radial dependence.

j

exp2iH rj ,

1:2:6:2

where Pj; core and Pj; valence are the number of electrons (not necessarily integral) in the core and valence shell, respectively, and the atomic scattering factors fj; core and fj; valence are normalized to one electron. Here and in the following sections, the anomalousscattering contributions are incorporated in the core scattering.

13

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES summarized by

1.2.7. Beyond the spherical-atom description: the atomcentred spherical harmonic expansion 1.2.7.1. Direct-space description of aspherical atoms Even though the spherical-atom approximation is often adequate, atoms in a crystal are in a non-spherical environment; therefore, an accurate description of the atomic electron density requires nonspherical density functions. In general, such density functions can be written in terms of the three polar coordinates r, and '. Under the assumption that the radial and angular parts can be separated, one obtains for the density function: r, , ' Rr, ':

in which the direction of the arrows and the corresponding conversion factors Xlm define expressions of the type (1.2.7.4). The expressions for clmp with l 4 are listed in Table 1.2.7.1, together with the normalization factors Mlm and Llm . The spherical harmonic functions are mutually orthogonal and form a complete set, which, if taken to sufficiently high order, can be used to describe any arbitrary angular function. The spherical harmonic functions are often referred to as multipoles since each represents the components of the charge distribution R r, which gives non-zero contribution to the integral lmp rclmp rl dr, where lmp is an electrostatic multipole moment. Terms with increasing l are referred to as monopolar l 0, dipolar l 1, quadrupolar l 2, octapolar l 3, hexadecapolar l 4, triacontadipolar l 5 and hexacontatetrapolar l 6. Site-symmetry restrictions for the real spherical harmonics as given by Kara & Kurki-Suonio (1981) are summarized in Table 1.2.7.2. In cubic space groups, the spherical harmonic functions as defined by equations (1.2.7.2) are no longer linearly independent. The appropriate basis set for this symmetry consists of the ‘Kubic Harmonics’ of Von der Lage & Bethe (1947). Some low-order terms are listed in Table 1.2.7.3. Both wavefunction and densityfunction normalization factors are specified in Table 1.2.7.3. A related basis set of angular functions has been proposed by Hirshfeld (1977). They are of the form cosn k , where k is the angle with a specified set of n 1n 2=2 polar axes. The Hirshfeld functions are identical to a sum of spherical harmonics with l n, n 2, n 4, . . . 0, 1 for n > 1, as shown elsewhere (Hirshfeld, 1977). The radial functions Rr can be selected in different manners. Several choices may be made, such as

1:2:7:1

The angular functions are based on the spherical harmonic functions Ylm defined by 2l 1 l jmj! 1=2 m m Ylm , ' 1 Pl cos expim', 4 l jmj! 1:2:7:2a with l m l, where Pml cos are the associated Legendre polynomials (see Arfken, 1970). djmj Pl x , dxjmj i 1 dl h Pl x l l x2 1l : l!2 dx The real spherical harmonic functions ylmp , 0 m l, p or are obtained as a linear combination of Ylm : 2l 1l jmj! 1=2 m ylm , Pl cos cos m' 21 m0 l jmj! Pml x 1

x2 jmj=2

Nlm Pml cos cos m' 1m Ylm Yl; m

1:2:7:2b

and ylm , Nlm Pml cos sin m' 1m Ylm

Yl;

m =2i:

1:2:7:2c

The normalization constants Nlm are defined by the conditions R 2 ylmp d 1, 1:2:7:3a

R l r

where the coefficient nl may be selected by examination of products of hydrogenic orbitals which give rise to a particular multipole (Hansen & Coppens, 1978). Values for the exponential coefficient l may be taken from energy-optimized coefficients for isolated atoms available in the literature (Clementi & Raimondi, 1963). A standard set has been proposed by Hehre et al. (1969). In the bonded atom, such values are affected by changes in nuclear screening due to migrations of charge, as described in part by equation (1.2.6.1). Other alternatives are:

1:2:7:3b The functions ylmp and dlmp differ only in the normalization constants. For the spherically symmetric function d00 , a population parameter equal to one corresponds to the function being populated by one electron. For the non-spherical functions with l > 0, a population parameter equal to one implies that one electron has shifted from the negative to the positive lobes of the function. The functions ylmp and dlmp can be expressed in Cartesian coordinates, such that

n1 n r exp r2 n!

Gaussian function 1:2:7:5b

R l r rl L2l2 r exp n

r Laguerre function, 2 1:2:7:5c

R l r

1:2:7:4a

or

and dlmp Llm clmp ,

(Slater type function), 1:2:7:5a

which are appropriate for normalization of wavefunctions. An alternative definition is used for charge-density basis functions: R R jdlmp j d 2 for l > 0 and jdlmp j d 1 for l 0:

ylmp Mlm clmp

nl 3 nl r exp l r nl 2!

1:2:7:4b

where the clmp are Cartesian functions. The relations between the various definitions of the real spherical harmonic functions are

where L is a Laguerre polynomial of order n and degree 2l 2.

14


R fj S j r exp2iS r dr:

Table 1.2.7.2. Index-picking rules of site-symmetric spherical harmonics (Kara & Kurki-Suonio, 1981)

In order to evaluate the integral, the scattering operator exp2iS r must be written as an expansion of products of spherical harmonic functions. In terms of the complex spherical harmonic functions, the appropriate expression is (Weiss & Freeman, 1959; Cohen-Tannoudji et al., 1977)

, and j are integers.

Symmetry 1 1 2 m 2=m 222 mm2 mmm 4 4 4=m 422 4mm 42m 4=mmm 3 3 32

3m 3m 6 6 6=m 622 6mm 6m2 6=mmm

Choice of coordinate axes

Indices of allowed ylmp , dlmp All l, m, 2, m, l, 2, l, l 2j, 2, 2, 2, 2, , 2 1, 2, l, 2, 2, 2, l, 4, 2, 4, , 2 1, 4 2, 2, 4, 2, 4, , 2 1, 4, l, 4, 2, 4, , 2 1, 4 2, 2, 4, , 2 1, 4 2, 2, 4, l, 3, 2, 3, 2, 3, , 2 1, 3, 3 2j, 3, , 3 2j 1, 3, l, 3, l, 6, , l, 6 3, 2, 3, 2, 6, , 2, 6 3, l, 6, 2, 6, , 2 1, 6 3, 2, 6, 2, 6, , 2 1, 6, l, 6, 2, 6, , 2 1, 6 3, 2, 6, , 2 1, 6 3, 2, 6,

Any Any 2kz m?z 2kz, m ? z 2kz, 2ky 2kz, m ? y m ? z, m ? y, m ? x 4kz 4kz 4kz, m ? z 4kz, 2ky 4kz, m ? y 4kz, 2kx m?y 4kz, m ? z, m ? x 3kz 3kz 3kz, 2ky 2kx 3kz, m ? y m?x 3kz, m ? y m?x 6kz 6kz 6kz, m ? z 6kz, 2ky 6kz, mky 6kz, m ? y m?x 6kz, m ? z, m ? y

exp2iS r 4

l0

03 R l 0 r

l P P Plmp dlmp r=r,

il jl 2SrYlm , 'Ylm , :

1:2:7:7a The Fourier transform of the product Rof a complex spherical harmonic function with normalization jYlm j2 d 1 and an arbitrary radial function R l r follows from the orthonormality properties of the spherical harmonic functions, and is given by R R Ylm R l r exp2iS r d 4il jl 2SrR l rr2 drYlm , , 1:2:7:8a where jl is the lth-order spherical Bessel function (Arfken, 1970), and and ', and are the angular coordinates of r and S, respectively. For the Fourier transform of the real spherical harmonic functions, the scattering operator is expressed in terms of the real spherical harmonics: exp2iS r

1 X il jl 2Sr2

m0 2l 1

l0

Pml cos Pml cos cosm

l X l

m! l m! m0

,

1:2:7:7b

which leads to R ylmp , 'R l r exp2iS r d 4il hjl iylmp , : 1:2:7:8b Since ylmp occurs on both sides, the expression is independent of the normalization selected. Therefore, for the Fourier transform of the density functions dlmp R dlmp , 'R l r exp2iS r d 4il hjl idlmp , : 1:2:7:8c In (1.2.7.8b) and (1.2.7.8c), hjl i, the Fourier–Bessel transform, is the radial integral defined as R hjl i jl 2SrR l rr2 dr 1:2:7:9 of which hj0 i in expression (1.2.4.3) is a special case. The functions hjl i for Hartree–Fock valence shells of the atoms are tabulated in scattering-factor tables (IT IV, 1974). Expressions for the evaluation of hjl i using the radial function (1.2.7.5a–c) have been given by Stewart (1980) and in closed form for (1.2.7.5a) by Avery & Watson (1977) and Su & Coppens (1990). The closed-form expressions are listed in Table 1.2.7.4. Expressions (1.2.7.8) show that the Fourier transform of a directspace spherical harmonic function is a reciprocal-space spherical harmonic function with the same l, m, or, in other words, the spherical harmonic functions are Fourier-transform invariant. The scattering factors flmp S of the aspherical density functions R l rdlmp , in the multipole expansion (1.2.7.6) are thus given by

atomic r Pc core P 3 valence r lP max

1 P l P

l0 m l

In summary, in the multipole formalism the atomic density is described by

1:2:4:3a

1:2:7:6

m0 p

in which the leading terms are those of the kappa formalism [expressions (1.2.6.1), (1.2.6.2)]; the subscript p is either + or . The expansion in (1.2.7.6) is frequently truncated at the hexadecapolar l 4 level. For atoms at positions of high site symmetry the first allowed functions may occur at higher l values. For trigonally bonded atoms in organic molecules the l 3 terms are often found to be the most significantly populated deformation functions.

flmp S 4il hjl idlmp , :

1:2:7:8d

The reciprocal-space spherical harmonic functions in this expression are identical to the functions given in Table 1.2.7.1, except for the replacement of the direction cosines x, y and z by the direction cosines of the scattering vector S.

1.2.7.2. Reciprocal-space description of aspherical atoms The aspherical-atom form factor is obtained by substitution of (1.2.7.6) in expression (1.2.4.3a):

15

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table 1.2.7.3. ‘Kubic Harmonic’ functions

R R 2 P l (a) Coefficients in the expression Klj kmpj ylmp with normalization 0 0 jKlj j2 sin d d' 1 (Kara & Kurki-Suonio, 1981). mp

Even l

mp

l

j

0+

0

1

1

4

1

1 7 1=2 2 3

1 5 1=2 2 3

0.76376

0.64550

6

1

6

2+

4+

6+

1 1 1=2 2 2

1 7 1=2 2 2

0.35355

0.93541 1 1=2 11 4

2

1

10

0.55902

1 1=2 33 8

1 7 1=2 4 3

1 65 1=2 8 3

0.71807

0.38188

0.58184

1 65 1=2 8 6

1

1 11 4 2

0.41143

1=2

1 187 1=2 8 6

0.58630

0.69784

10

2

1 247 1=2 8 6

1 19 1=2 16 3

1 1=2 85 16

0.80202

0.15729

0.57622

l

j

2

3

1

1

7

1

1 13 1=2 2 6

1 11 1=2 2 16

0.73598

0.41458

9

1

9

2

4

Nlj

6

8

1 1=2 3 4

1 1=2 13 4

0.43301

0.90139

1 17 1=2 2 6

1 7 1=2 2 6

0.84163

0.54006

l (b) Coefficients kmpj and density normalization factors Nlj in the expression Klj Nlj

Even l

10+

1 1=2 5 4

0.82916 8

8+

P l m' kmpj ulmp where ulm Pml cos cos sin m' (Su & Coppens, 1994). mp

mp

l

j

0+

2+

4+

0

1

1=4 0:079577

1

4

1

0.43454

1

1=168

6

1

0.25220

1

1=360

6

2

0.020833

1

6+

1=792

16

8+

10+

1.2. THE STRUCTURE FACTOR Table 1.2.7.3. ‘Kubic Harmonic’ functions (cont.) Even l

Nlj

mp

8

1

0.56292

1

1/5940

1 1 672 5940

10

1

0.36490

1

1/5460

1 1 4320 5460

10

2

0.0095165

1

l

j

3

1

0.066667

1

7

1

0.014612

1

1=1560

9

1

0.0059569

1

1=2520

9

2

0.00014800

1 1 456 43680

1=43680 2

4

6

8

1

1=4080

(c) Density-normalized Kubic harmonics as linear combinations R R 2 of density-normalized spherical harmonic functions. Coefficients in the expression P 00 l dlmp . Density-type normalization is defined as 0 0 jKlj j sin d d' 2 l0 . Klj kmpj mp

Even l

mp

l

j

0+

0

1

1

4

1

0.78245

6

1

0.37790

6

2

l

j

2

3

1

1

7

1

0.73145

2+

4+

6+

8+

10+

0.57939 0.91682 0.83848

0.50000

4

6

8

0.63290

(d) Index rules for cubic symmetries (Kurki-Suonio, 1977; Kara & Kurki-Suonio, 1981).

l

j

23 T

0 3 4 6 6 7 8 9 9 10 10

1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2

m3 Th

432 O

43m Td

m3m Oh

by (Stewart, 1969a) P PP r ni 2i P ' r' r,

1.2.8. Fourier transform of orbital products If the wavefunction is written as a sum over normalized Slater determinants, each representing an antisymmetrized combination of occupied molecular orbitals P i expressed as linear combinations of atomic orbitals ' , i.e. i ci ' , the electron density is given

i

1:2:8:1

with ni 1 or 2. The coefficients P are the populations of the

17

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES orbital product density functions r' r and are given by P 1:2:8:2 P ni ci ci :

ylmp , 'yl0 m0 p0 , '

i

PP 0 Mmm0 R LMP C Lll0 dLMP , ', 1:2:8:6 L M

P

where R LMP MLMP (wavefunction)=LLMP (density function). The normalization constants Mlmp and Llmp are given in Table 1.2.7.1, while the coefficients in the expressions (1.2.8.6) are listed in Table 1.2.8.3.

For a multi-Slater determinant wavefunction the electron density is expressed in terms of the occupied natural spin orbitals, leading again to (1.2.8.2) but with non-integer values for the coefficients ni . The summation (1.2.8.1) consists of one- and two-centre terms for which ' and ' are centred on the same or on different nuclei, respectively. The latter represent the overlap density, which is only significant if ' r and ' r have an appreciable value in the same region of space.

1.2.8.2. Two-centre orbital products

'r, , ' R l rYlm , '

1:2:8:3a

Fourier transform of the electron density as described by (1.2.8.1) requires explicit expressions for the two-centre orbital product scattering. Such expressions are described in the literature for both Gaussian (Stewart, 1969b) and Slater-type (Bentley & Stewart, 1973; Avery & Ørmen, 1979) atomic orbitals. The expressions can also be used for Hartree–Fock atomic functions, as expansions in terms of Gaussian- (Stewart, 1969b, 1970; Stewart & Hehre, 1970; Hehre et al., 1970) and Slater-type (Clementi & Roetti, 1974) functions are available for many atoms.

'r, , ' R l rylmp , ',

1:2:8:3b

1.2.9. The atomic temperature factor

1.2.8.1. One-centre orbital products If the atomic basis consists of hydrogenic type s, p, d, f, . . . orbitals, the basis functions may be written as

or Since the crystal is subject to vibrational oscillations, the observed elastic scattering intensity is an average over all normal modes of the crystal. Within the Born–Oppenheimer approximation, the theoretical electron density should be calculated for each set of nuclear coordinates. An average can be obtained by taking into account the statistical weight of each nuclear configuration, which may be expressed by the probability distribution function Pu1 , . . . , uN for a set of displacement coordinates u1 , . . . , uN . In general, if r, u1 , . . . , uN is the electron density corresponding to the geometry defined by u1 , . . . , uN , the time-averaged electron density is given by R hri r, u1 , . . . , uN Pu1 , . . . , uN du1 . . . duN : 1:2:9:1

which gives for corresponding values of the orbital products ' r' r R l rR l0 rYlm , 'Yl0 m0 , '

1:2:8:4a

' r' r R l rR l0 rylmp , 'yl0 m0 p0 , ',

1:2:8:4b

and

respectively, where it has been assumed that the radial function depends only on l. Because the spherical harmonic functions form a complete set, their products can be expressed as a linear combination of spherical harmonics. The coefficients in this expansion are the Clebsch– Gordan coefficients (Condon & Shortley, 1957), defined by PP Mmm0 Ylm , 'Yl0 m0 , ' CLll0 YLM , ' 1:2:8:5a

When the crystal can be considered as consisting of perfectly following rigid entities, which may be molecules or atoms, expression (1.2.9.1) simplifies: R hrigid group ri r:g:; static r uPu du r:g:; static Pu:

L M

or the equivalent definition

1:2:9:2 In the approximation that the atomic electrons perfectly follow the nuclear motion, one obtains

0 R R2 Mmm sin d d'YLM , 'Ylm , 'Yl0 m0 , ': 1:2:8:5b CLll 0

0

0

0

0

The vanish, unless L l l is even, jl 0 and M m m . The corresponding expression for ylmp is Mmm CLll 0

ylmp , 'yl0 m0 p0 , ' 0

0

lj < L < ll

PP 0 Mmm0 C Lll0 yLMP , ', L M 0

0

hatom ri atom; static r Pu:

1:2:9:3

The Fourier transform of this convolution is the product of the Fourier transforms of the individual functions: 1:2:8:5c

hf Hi f HTH:

1:2:9:4

P 0

Thus TH, the atomic temperature factor, is the Fourier transform of the probability distribution Pu.

0

with M jm m j and jm m j for p p , and M jm m j 0 0 0 and jm m j for p 0 p and P p p . Values of C and C for l 2 are given in Tables 1.2.8.1 and 1.2.8.2. They Rare valid for the Rfunctions Ylm and ylmp with normalization jYlm j2 d 1 and y2lmp d 1. By using (1.2.8.5a) or (1.2.8.5c), the one-centre orbital products are expressed as a sum of spherical harmonic functions. It follows that the one-centre orbital product density basis set is formally equivalent to the multipole description, both in real and in reciprocal space. To obtain the relation between orbital products and the charge-density functions, the right-hand side of (1.2.8.5c) has to be multiplied by the ratio of the normalization constants, as the wavefunctions ylmp and charge-density functions dlmp are normalized in a different way as described by (1.2.7.3a) and (1.2.7.3b). Thus

1.2.10. The vibrational probability distribution and its Fourier transform in the harmonic approximation For a harmonic oscillator, the probability distribution averaged over all populated energy levels is a Gaussian, centred at the equilibrium position. For the three-dimensional isotropic harmonic oscillator, the distribution is Pu 2hu2 i

3=2

expf juj2 =2hu2 ig,

1:2:10:1

where hu i is the mean-square displacement in any direction. The corresponding trivariate normal distribution to be used for anisotropic harmonic motion is, in tensor notation, 2

18

1.2. THE STRUCTURE FACTOR Table 1.2.7.4. Closed-form expressions for Fourier transform of Slater-type functions (Avery & Watson, 1977; Su & Coppens, 1990) hjk i

R1 0

rN exp Zrjk Kr dr, K 4 sin =:

N k 0

1

2

3

1 K2 Z2

K 2 Z 2 2

23Z 2

2Z

1

4 K2

24ZZ 2

K 2 Z 2 3

2K

8KZ

K 2 Z 2 2

K 2 Z 2 3

2

5 K2

6

245Z 2

K2

48KZ5Z 2

8K 2

48K 2 Z

K 2 Z 2 3

K 2 Z 2 4

3

48K 2 7Z 2

48K 3

384K 3 Z K 2 Z 2 5

1920KZ7Z 4

3K 2

384K 2 Z7Z 2

5760K21Z 6

K2

18K 2 Z 2 K 4

63K 2 Z 4 27K 4 Z 2

11520K 2 Z21Z 4

11520K 3 33Z 4

K 2 Z 2 7

46080K 4 Z11Z 2

3840K 5

46080K 5 Z

40680K 5 13Z 2

K 2 Z 2 6

K 2 Z 2 7

5

6

30K 2 Z 2 5K 4

22K 2 Z 2 K 4

K 2 Z 2 8

3840K 4 11Z 2 K 2 K 2 Z 2 7

3840K 4 Z K 2 Z 2 6

K6

K 2 Z 2 8

K2

11520K 3 Z3Z 2

K 6 Z

K 2 Z 2 8

K 2 Z 2 7

K 2 Z 2 6

384K 4 K 2 Z 2 5

7K 2 Z 5 7K 4 Z 3

40320Z 7

K 2 Z 2 8

14K 2 Z 2 3K 4

1152K 2 21Z 4

K 2 Z 2 6 384K 3 9Z 2

K6

K 2 Z 2 7

K 2 Z 2 6

K2

35K 2 Z 4 21K 4 Z 2

7207Z 6

K 2 Z 2 7

42K 2 Z 2 3K 4

48K35Z 4

K 2 Z 2 5

K 2 Z 2 4 4

3K 2

Z2

8

K 2 Z 2 6

K 2 Z 2 5

K 2 Z 2 4

3Z 2 3K 2

240ZK 2

K 2 Z 2 5

K 2 Z 2 4 8K5Z 2

10K 2 Z 2 K 4

7

3K 2

K 2 Z 2 8 K2

K 2 Z 2 8

46080K 6

645120K 6 Z

K 2 Z 2 7

K 2 Z 2 8

7

645120K 7 K 2 Z 2 8

Pu

js 1 j1=2 2

3=2

1 1 j k 2 s jk u u g:

expf

r l r Dr

1:2:10:2a

with

Pu

js 1 j1=2 23=2

expf

T 1 1 2 u s ug,

3 0 1

3 2 1 5, 0

ri Dij rj "ijk k rj

1:2:10:2b

1:2:10:3a

ri Dij rj ti : TH expf 2 H sHg: T

1:2:11:3

where the permutation operator "ijk equals +1 for i, j, k a cyclic permutation of the indices 1, 2, 3, or 1 for a non-cyclic permutation, and zero if two or more indices are equal. For i 1, for example, only the "123 and "132 terms occur. Addition of a translational displacement gives

or 2

1:2:11:2

or in tensor notation, assuming summation over repeated indices,

where the superscript T indicates the transpose. The characteristic function, or Fourier transform, of Pu is TH expf 22 jk hj hk g

2

0 D 4 3 2

Here is the variance–covariance matrix, with covariant components, and js 1 j is the determinant of the inverse of . Summation over repeated indices has been assumed. The corresponding equation in matrix notation is

1:2:11:1

1:2:10:3b

1:2:11:4

When a rigid body undergoes vibrations the displacements vary with time, so suitable averages must be taken to derive the meansquare displacements. If the librational and translational motions are independent, the cross products between the two terms in (1.2.11.4) average to zero and the elements of the mean-square displacement tensor of atom n, Uijn , are given by

With the change of variable b jk 22 jk , (1.2.10.3a) becomes TH expf b jk hj hk g:

1.2.11. Rigid-body analysis The treatment of rigid-body motion of molecules or molecular fragments was developed by Cruickshank (1956) and expanded into a general theory by Schomaker & Trueblood (1968). The theory has been described by Johnson (1970b) and by Dunitz (1979). The latter reference forms the basis for the following treatment. The most general motions of a rigid body consist of rotations about three axes, coupled with translations parallel to each of the axes. Such motions correspond to screw rotations. A libration around a vector l 1 , 2 , 3 , with length corresponding to the magnitude of the rotation, results in a displacement r, such that

n U11 L22 r32 L33 r22

2L23 r2 r3 T11

n U22 n U33

2 L33 r1

2 L11 r3

2L13 r1 r3 T22

L11 r22

L22 r12

2L12 r1 r2 T33

n U12 L33 r1 r2

L12 r32 L13 r2 r3 L23 r1 r3 T12

n

1:2:11:5

2

U13 L22 r1 r3 L12 r2 r3

L13 r2 L23 r1 r2 T13

n U23 L11 r2 r3 L12 r1 r3

L13 r1 r2

L23 r12 T23 ,

where the coefficients Lij hi j i and Tij hti tj i are the elements of the 3 3 libration tensor L and the 3 3 translation tensor T,

19

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table 1.2.8.1. Products of complex spherical harmonics as defined by equation (1.2.7.2a) Y00 Y00 Y10 Y00 Y10 Y10 Y11 Y00 Y11 Y10 Y11 Y11 Y11 Y11 Y20 Y00 Y20 Y10 Y20 Y11 Y20 Y20 Y21 Y00 Y21 Y10 Y21 Y11 Y21 Y11 Y21 Y20 Y21 Y21 Y21 Y21 Y22 Y00 Y22 Y10 Y22 Y11 Y22 Y11 Y22 Y20 Y22 Y21 Y22 Y21 Y22 Y22 Y22 Y22

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

Table 1.2.8.2. Products of real spherical harmonics as defined by equations (1.2.7.2b) and (1.2.7.2c)

0.28209479Y00 0.28209479Y10 0.25231325Y20 + 0.28209479Y00 0.28209479Y11 0.21850969Y21 0.30901936Y22 0.12615663Y20 + 0.28209479Y00 0.28209479Y20 0.24776669Y30 + 0.25231325Y10 0.20230066Y31 0.12615663Y11 0.24179554Y40 + 0.18022375Y20 + 0.28209479Y00 0.28209479Y21 0.23359668Y31 + 0.21850969Y11 0.26116903Y32 0.14304817Y30 + 0.21850969Y10 0.22072812Y41 + 0.09011188Y21 0.25489487Y42 + 0.22072812Y22 0.16119702Y40 + 0.09011188Y20 + 0.28209479Y00 0.28209479Y22 0.18467439Y32 0.31986543Y33 0.08258890Y31 + 0.30901936Y11 0.15607835Y42 0.18022375Y22 0.23841361Y43 0.09011188Y41 + 0.22072812Y21 0.33716777Y44 0.04029926Y40 0.18022375Y20 + 0.28209479Y00

y00 y00 y10 y00 y10 y10 y11 y00 y11 y10 y11 y11 y11+ y11 y20 y00 y20 y10 y20 y11 y20 y20 y21 y00 y21 y10 y21 y11 y21 y11 y21 y20 y21 y21 y21+ y21 y22 y00 y22 y10 y22 y11 y22 y11 y22 y20 y22 y21 y22 y21 y22 y22 y22+ y22

respectively. Since pairs of terms such as hti tj i and htj ti i correspond to averages over the same two scalar quantities, the T and L tensors are symmetrical. If a rotation axis is correctly oriented, but incorrectly positioned, an additional translation component perpendicular to the rotation axes is introduced. The rotation angle and the parallel component of the translation are invariant to the position of the axis, but the perpendicular component is not. This implies that the L tensor is unaffected by any assumptions about the position of the libration axes, whereas the T tensor depends on the assumptions made concerning the location of the axes. The quadratic correlation between librational and translational motions can be allowed for by including in (1.2.11.5) cross terms of the type hDik tj i, or, with (1.2.11.3),

unsymmetrical, since hi tj i is different from hj ti i. The terms involving elements of S may be grouped as h3 t1 ir1

S31 r1

U11 hr1 i

h23 ir22

h22 ir32

2h3 t1 ir2

1:2:11:6

S32 r2 S22

1:2:11:8

S11 r3 :

Uij Gijkl Lkl Hijkl Skl Tij :

1:2:11:9

The arrays Gijkl and Hijkl involve the atomic coordinates x, y, z r1 , r2 , r3 , and are listed in Table 1.2.11.1. Equations (1.2.11.9) for each of the atoms in the rigid body form the observational equations, from which the elements of T, L and S can be derived by a linear least-squares procedure. One of the diagonal elements of S must be fixed in advance or some other suitable constraint applied because of the indeterminacy of TrS. It is common practice to set TrS equal to zero. There are thus eight elements of S to be determined, as well as the six each of L and T, for a total of 20 variables. A shift of origin leaves L invariant, but it intermixes T and S. If the origin is located at a centre of symmetry, for each atom at r with vibration tensor Un there will be an equivalent atom at r with

2h2 3 ir2 r3

2h2 t1 ir3 ht12 i,

U12 hr1 r2 i h23 ir1 r2 h1 3 ir2 r3 h2 3 ir1 r3 h1 2 ir32 h3 t1 ir1

h1 t1 ir3

As the diagonal elements occur as differences in this expression, a constant may be added to each of the diagonal terms without changing the observational equations. In other words, the trace of S is indeterminate. In terms of the L, T and S tensors, the observational equations are

which leads to the explicit expressions such as 2

h3 t2 ir2 h2 t2 i

or

Uij hDik Djl irk rl hDik tj Dji ti irk hti tj i Aijkl rk rl Bijk rk hti tj i,

= 0.28209479y00 = 0.28209479y10 = 0.25231325y20 + 0.28209479y00 = 0.28209479y11 = 0.21850969y21 = 0.21850969y22+ 0.12615663y20 + 0.28209479y00 = 0.21850969y22 = 0.28209479y20 = 0.24776669y30 + 0.25231325y10 = 0.20230066y31 0.12615663y11 = 0.24179554y40 + 0.18022375y20 + 0.28209479y00 = 0.28209479y21 = 0.23359668y31 + 0.21850969y11 = 0.18467439y32+ 0.14304817y30 + 0.21850969y10 = 0.18467469y32 = 0.22072812y41 + 0.09011188y21 = 0.18022375y42+ 0.15607835y22+ 0.16119702y40 + 0.09011188y20 + 0.28209479y00 = 0.18022375y42 + 0.15607835y22 = 0.28209479y22 = 0.18467439y32 = 0.22617901y33+ 0.05839917y31+ + 0.21850969y11+ = 0.22617901y33 0.05839917y31 0.21850969y11 = 0.15607835y42 0.18022375y22 = 0.16858388y43+ 0.06371872y41+ + 0.15607835y21+ = 0.16858388y43 0.06371872y41 0.15607835y21 = 0.23841361y44+ + 0.04029926y40 0.18022375y20 + 0.28209479y00 = 0.23841361y44

h1 t1 ir3

h3 t2 i r2 h2 t2 ir3 ht1 t2 i: 1:2:11:7 The products of the type hi tj i are the components of an additional tensor, S, which unlike the tensors T and L is

20

1.2. THE STRUCTURE FACTOR Table 1.2.8.3. Products of two real spherical harmonic functions ylmp in terms of the density functions dlmp defined by equation (1.2.7.3b)

Table 1.2.11.1. The arrays Gijkl and Hijkl to be used in the observational equations Uij Gijkl Lkl Hijkl Skl Tij [equation (1.2.11.9)] Gijkl

y00 y00 y10 y00 y10 y10 y11 y00 y11 y10 y11 y11 y11+ y11 y20 y00 y20 y10 y20 y11 y20 y20 y21 y00 y21 y10 y21 y11 y21 y11 y21 y20 y21 y21 y21+ y21 y22 y00 y22 y10 y22 y11 y22 y11 y22 y20 y22 y21 y22 y21 y22 y22 y22+ y22

= 1.0000d00 = 0.43301d10 = 0.38490d20 + 1.0d00 = 0.43302d11 = 0.31831d21 = 0.31831d22+ 0.19425d20 + 1.0d00 = 0.31831d22 = 0.43033d20 = 0.37762d30 + 0.38730d10 = 0.28864d31 0.19365d11 = 0.36848d40 + 0.27493d20 + 1.0d00 = 0.41094d21 = 0.33329d31 + 0.33541d11 = 0.26691d32+ 0.21802d30 + 0.33541d10 = 0.26691d32 = 0.31155d41 + 0.13127d21 = 0.25791d42+ 0.22736d22+ 0.24565d40 + 0.13747d20 + 1.0d00 = 0.25790d42 + 0.22736d22 = 0.41094d22 = 0.26691d32 = 0.31445d33+ 0.083323d31+ + 0.33541d11+ = 0.31445d33 0.083323d31 0.33541d11 = 0.22335d42 0.26254d22 = 0.23873d43+ 0.089938d41+ + 0.22736d21+ = 0.23873d43 0.089938d41 0.22736d21 = 0.31831d44+ + 0.061413d40 0.27493d20 + 1.0d00 = 0.31831d44

kl ij

11

22

33

11 22 33 23 31 12

0 z2 y2 yz 0 0

z2 0 x2 0 xz 0

y2 x2 0 0 0 xy

23 2yz 0 0

31

12

0

0 0

2xz 0 xy y2 yz

x2 xy xz

2xy xz yz z2

Hijkl kl ij

11

22

33

23

11 22 33 23 31 12

0 0 0 0 y

0 0 0

0 0 0 x

0 0

x z

0 z

2y 2x

0 z 0

y 0

31 0 0 0 0 x

12

32

13

21

0

0 2x 0 0 0 y

0 0 2y z 0 0

2z 0 0 0 x 0

2z 0 y 0 0

symmetrizes S also minimizes the trace of T. In terms of the coordinate system based on the principal axes of L, the required origin shifts bi are b1

b S23 b S32 b b L22 L33

b2

b S31 b S13 b L33 L11 b

b3

b S12 b S21 , 1:2:11:10 b b L11 L22

in which the carets indicate quantities referred to the principal axis system. The description of the averaged motion can be simplified further by shifting to three generally non-intersecting libration axes, one each for each principal axis of L. Shifts of the L1 axis in the L2 and L3 directions by

the same vibration tensor. When the observational equations for these two atoms are added, the terms involving elements of S disappear since they are linear in the components of r. The other terms, involving elements of the T and L tensors, are simply doubled, like the Un components. The physical meaning of the T and L tensor elements is as follows. Tij li lj is the mean-square amplitude of translational vibration in the direction of the unit vector l with components l1 , l2 , l3 along the Cartesian axes and Lij li lj is the mean-square amplitude of libration about an axis in this direction. The quantity Sij li lj represents the mean correlation between libration about the axis l and translation parallel to this axis. This quantity, like Tij li lj , depends on the choice of origin, although the sum of the two quantities is independent of the origin. The non-symmetrical tensor S can be written as the sum of a symmetric tensor with elements SijS Sij Sji =2 and a skewsymmetric tensor with elements SijA Sij Sji =2. Expressed in terms of principal axes, SS consists of three principal screw correlations hI tI i. Positive and negative screw correlations correspond to opposite senses of helicity. Since an arbitrary constant may be added to all three correlation terms, only the differences between them can be determined from the data. The skew-symmetric part SA is equivalent to a vector l t=2 with components l ti =2 j tk k tj =2, involving correlations between a libration and a perpendicular translation. The components of SA can be reduced to zero, and S made symmetric, by a change of origin. It can be shown that the origin shift that

1

b2 b S13 =b L11 and 1 b3 b S12 =b L11 ,

1:2:11:11

respectively, annihilate the S12 and S13 terms of the symmetrized S tensor and simultaneously effect a further reduction in TrT (the presuperscript denotes the axis that is shifted, the subscript the direction of the shift component). Analogous equations for displacements of the L2 and L3 axes are obtained by permutation of the indices. If all three axes are appropriately displaced, only the diagonal terms of S remain. Referred to the principal axes of L, they represent screw correlations along these axes and are independent of origin shifts. The elements of the reduced T are P r TII TbII b SKI 2 =b LKK K6I

r

TIJ TbIJ

P b SKI b SKJ =b LKK ,

J 6 I:

1:2:11:12

K

The resulting description of the average rigid-body motion is in terms of six independently distributed instantaneous motions – three screw librations about non-intersecting axes (with screw pitches given by b S11 =b L11 etc.) and three translations. The parameter set consists of three libration and three translation amplitudes, six

21

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table 1.2.12.1. Some Hermite polynomials (Johnson & Levy, 1974; Zucker & Schulz, 1982)

where the first and second terms have been omitted since they are equivalent to a shift of the mean and a modification of the harmonic term only. The permutations of j, k, l . . . here, and in the following sections, include all combinations which produce different terms. The coefficients c, defined by (1.2.12.1) and (1.2.12.2), are known as the quasimoments of the frequency function Pu (Kutznetsov et al., 1960). They are related in a simple manner to the moments of the function (Kendall & Stuart, 1958) and are invariant to permutation of indices. There are 10, 15, 21 and 28 components of c for orders 3, 4, 5 and 6, respectively. The multivariate Hermite polynomials are functions of the elements of jk 1 and of uk , and are given in Table 1.2.12.1 for orders 6 (IT IV, 1974; Zucker & Schulz, 1982). The Fourier transform of (1.2.12.3) is given by 4 3 jkl 2 TH 1 ic hj hk hl 4 c jklm hj hk hl hm 3 3 4 5 jklmn ic hj hk hl hm hn 15 4 6 jklmnp hj hk hl hm hn hp . . . T0 H, 1:2:12:4 c 45

H(u) = 1 Hj(u) = wj Hjk(u) = wjwk pjk Hjkl(u) = wjwkwl (wjpkl + wkplj + wlpjk) = wjwkwl 3w(jpkl) Hjklm(u) = wjwkwlwm 6w(jwkplm) + 3pj(kplm) Hjklmn(u) = wjwkwlwmwn 10w(lwmwnpjk) + 15w(npjkplm) Hjklmnp(u) = wjwkwlwmwnwp 15w(jwkwlwmpjk) + 45w(jwkplmpnp) 15pj(kplmpnp) where wj pjk uk and pjk are the elements of 1 , defined in expression (1.2.10.2). Indices between brackets indicate that the term is to be averaged over all permutations which produce distinct terms, keeping in mind that pjk pkj and wj wk wk wj as illustrated for Hjkl .

angles of orientation for the principal axes of L and T, six coordinates of axis displacement, and three screw pitches, one of which has to be chosen arbitrarily, again for a total of 20 variables. Since diagonal elements of S enter into the expression for r TIJ , the indeterminacy of TrS introduces a corresponding indeterminacy in r T. The constraint TrS 0 is unaffected by the various rotations and translations of the coordinate systems used in the course of the analysis.

where T0 H is the harmonic temperature factor. TH is a powerseries expansion about the harmonic temperature factor, with even and odd terms, respectively, real and imaginary. 1.2.12.2. The cumulant expansion A second statistical expansion which has been used to describe the atomic probability distribution is that of Edgeworth (Kendall & Stuart, 1958; Johnson, 1969). It expresses the function Pu as 1 1 jkl Pu exp j Dj jk Dj Dk Dj Dk Dl 2! 3! 1 jklm Dj Dk Dl Dm . . . P0 u: 1:2:12:5a 4!

1.2.12. Treatment of anharmonicity The probability distribution (1.2.10.2) is valid in the case of rectilinear harmonic motion. If the deviations from Gaussian shape are not too large, distributions may be used which are expansions with the Gaussian distribution as the leading term. Three such distributions are discussed in the following sections. 1.2.12.1. The Gram–Charlier expansion

Like the moments of a distribution, the cumulants are descriptive constants. They are related to each other (in the onedimensional case) by the identity 2 t2 r tr 2 t2 r t r exp 1 t ... . . . 1 1 t ... : 2! r! 2! r!

The three-dimensional Gram–Charlier expansion, introduced into thermal-motion treatment by Johnson & Levy (1974), is an expansion of a function in terms of the zero and higher derivatives of a normal distribution (Kendall & Stuart, 1958). If Dj is the operator d/du j , 1 1 jkl Pu 1 c j Dj c jk Dj Dk c Dj Dk Dl . . . 2! 3! c1 . . . cr 1r 1:2:12:1 D1 Dr P0 u, r! where P0 u is the harmonic distribution, 1 1, 2 or 3, and the operator D1 . . . Dr is the rth partial derivative @ r =@u1 . . . @ur . Summation is again implied over repeated indices. The differential operators D may be eliminated by the use of three-dimensional Hermite polynomials H1 ...2 defined, by analogy with the one-dimensional Hermite polynomials, by the expression D1 . . . Dr exp

1 1 j k 2jk u u

1r H1 ...r u exp

1:2:12:5b When it is substituted for t, (1.2.12.5b) is the characteristic function, or Fourier transform of Pt (Kendall & Stuart, 1958). The first two terms in the exponent of (1.2.12.5a) can be omitted if the expansion is around the equilibrium position and the harmonic term is properly described by P0 u. The Fourier transform of (1.2.12.5a) is, by analogy with the lefthand part of (1.2.12.5b) (with t replaced by 2ih), " # 2i3 jkl 2i4 jklm hj hk hl hj hk hl hm . . . T0 H TH exp 3! 4! 4 3 jkl 2 exp i hj hk hl 4 jklm hj hk hl hm . . . T0 H, 3 3

1 1 j k 2jk u u ,

1:2:12:2 which gives 1 1 1 Pu 1 c jkl Hjkl u c jklm Hjklm u c jklmn Hjklmn u 3! 4! 5! 1 jklmnp Hjklmnp u . . . P0 u, 1:2:12:3 c 6!

1:2:12:6 where the first two terms have been omitted. Expression (1.2.12.6) is similar to (1.2.12.4) except that the entire series is in the exponent. Following Schwarzenbach (1986), (1.2.12.6) can be developed in a Taylor series, which gives

22


(

0

in which =kT etc. and the normalization factor N depends on the level of truncation. The probability distribution is related to the spherical harmonic expansion. The ten products of the displacement parameters u j uk ul , for example, are linear combinations of the seven octapoles l 3 and three dipoles l 1 (Coppens, 1980). The thermal probability distribution and the aspherical atom description can be separated only because the latter is essentially confined to the valence shell, while the former applies to all electrons which follow the nuclear motion in the atomic scattering model. The Fourier transform of the OPP distribution, in a general coordinate system, is (Johnson, 1970a; Scheringer, 1985a) 4 3 0 jkl 2 0 TH T0 H 1 i jkl G H 4 jklm G jklm H 3 3 4 5 0 4 0 i"jklmn G jklmn H 6 i'jklmnp G jklmnp H . . . , 15 45

2i3 jkl 2i4 jklm TH 1 hj hk hl hj hk hl hm . . . 3! 4! " # 2i6 jklmp 6! jkl mnp hj hk hl hm hn hp 6! 2!3!2 higher-order terms T0 H: 1:2:12:7 This formulation, which is sometimes called the Edgeworth approximation (Zucker & Schulz, 1982), clearly shows the relation to the Gram–Charlier expansion (1.2.12.4), and corresponds to the probability distribution [analogous to (1.2.12.3)] 1 1 Pu P0 u 1 jkl Hjkl u jklm Hjklm u . . . 3! 4! 1 jklmnp 10 jkl mnp Hjklmnp 6! higher-order terms : 1:2:12:8

1:2:12:13 where T0 is the harmonic temperature factor and G represents the Hermite polynomials in reciprocal space. If the OPP temperature factor is expanded in the coordinate system which diagonalizes jk , simpler expressions are obtained in which the Hermite polynomials are replaced by products of the displacement coordinates u j (Dawson et al., 1967; Coppens, 1980; Tanaka & Marumo, 1983).

The relation between the cumulants jkl and the quasimoments c are apparent from comparison of (1.2.12.8) and (1.2.12.4): jkl

c jkl jkl c jklm jklm c jklmn jklmn c jklmnp jklmnp 10 jkl mnp :

1.2.12.4. Relative merits of the three expansions

1:2:12:9

The relative merits of the Gram–Charlier and Edgeworth expansions have been discussed by Zucker & Schulz (1982), Kuhs (1983), and by Scheringer (1985b). In general, the Gram– Charlier expression is found to be preferable because it gives a better fit in the cases tested, and because its truncation is equivalent in real and reciprocal space. The latter is also true for the oneparticle potential model, which is mathematically related to the Gram–Charlier expansion by the interchange of the real- and reciprocal-space expressions. The terms of the OPP model have a specific physical meaning. The model allows prediction of the temperature dependence of the temperature factor (Willis, 1969; Coppens, 1980), provided the potential function itself can be assumed to be temperature independent. It has recently been shown that the Edgeworth expansion (1.2.12.5a) always has negative regions (Scheringer, 1985b). This implies that it is not a realistic description of a vibrating atom.

The sixth- and higher-order cumulants and quasimoments differ. Thus the third-order cumulant jkl contributes not only to the coefficient of Hjkl , but also to higher-order terms of the probability distribution function. This is also the case for cumulants of higher orders. It implies that for a finite truncation of (1.2.12.6), the probability distribution cannot be represented by a finite number of terms. This is a serious difficulty when a probability distribution is to be derived from an experimental temperature factor of the cumulant type. 1.2.12.3. The one-particle potential (OPP) model When an atom is considered as an independent oscillator vibrating in a potential well V u, its distribution may be described by Boltzmann statistics. Pu N expf V u=kTg,

R

1:2:12:10

with N, the normalization constant, defined by Pu du 1. The classical expression (1.2.12.10) is valid in the high-temperature limit for which kT V u. Following Dawson (1967) and Willis (1969), the potential function may be expanded in terms of increasing order of products of the contravariant displacement coordinates:

1.2.13. The generalized structure factor In the generalized structure-factor formalism developed by Dawson (1975), the complex nature of both the atomic scattering factor and the generalized temperature factor are taken into account. We write for the atomic scattering factor:

V V0 j u j jk u j uk jkl u j uk ul jklm u j uk ul um . . . :

0

fj H fj; c H ifj; a H fj ifj

1:2:12:11

Tj H Tj; c H iTj; a H

The equilibrium condition gives j 0. Substitution into (1.2.12.10) leads to an expression which may be simplified by the assumption that the leading term is the harmonic component represented by jk :

FH AH iBH,

Pu N expf jk u j uk g f1

jkl u u u

j k l

0

jklm u u u u

j k l m

. . .g,

1:2:13:1a 1:2:13:1b

and

0

0

00

1:2:13:2

where the subscripts c and a refer to the centrosymmetric and acentric components, respectively. Substitution in (1.2.4.2) gives for the real and imaginary components A and B of FH

1:2:12:12

23

AH

P j

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 0

fj; c fj cos2H rj Tc

sin2H rj Ta

into the formalism and the treatment of thermal motion are interlinked. It is important that the complexities of the thermal probability distribution function can often be reduced by very low temperature experimentation. Results obtained with the multipole formalism for atomic asphericity can be used to derive physical properties and d-orbital populations of transition-metal atoms (IT C, 1999). In such applications, the deconvolution of the charge density and the thermal vibrations is essential. This deconvolution is dependent on the adequacy of the models summarized here.

00

fj; a fj cos2H rj Ta sin2H rj Tc 1:2:13:3a and BH

P j

0

fj; c fj cos2H rj Ta sin2H rj Tc 00

fj; a fj cos2H rj Tc

sin2H rj Ta 1:2:13:3b

Acknowledgements

(McIntyre et al., 1980; Dawson, 1967). Expressions (1.2.13.3) illustrate the relation between valencedensity anisotropy and anisotropy of thermal motion.

The author would like to thank several of his colleagues who gave invaluable criticism of earlier versions of this manuscript. Corrections and additions were made following comments by P. J. Becker, D. Feil, N. K. Hansen, G. McIntyre, E. N. Maslen, S. Ohba, C. Scheringer and D. Schwarzenbach. Z. Su contributed to the revised version of the manuscript. Support of this work by the US National Science Foundation (CHE8711736 and CHE9317770) is gratefully acknowledged.

1.2.14. Conclusion This chapter summarizes mathematical developments of the structure-factor formalism. The introduction of atomic asphericity

24


1.3. Fourier transforms in crystallography: theory, algorithms and applications BY G. BRICOGNE

which has long been adopted in several applied fields, in particular electrical engineering, with considerable success; the extra work involved handsomely pays for itself by allowing the three different types of Fourier transformations to be treated together, and by making all properties of the Fourier transform consequences of a single property (the convolution theorem). This is particularly useful in all questions related to the sampling theorem; (ii) the various numerical algorithms have been presented as the consequences of basic algebraic phenomena involving Abelian groups, rings and finite fields; this degree of formalization greatly helps the subsequent incorporation of symmetry; (iii) the algebraic nature of space groups has been reemphasized so as to build up a framework which can accommodate both the phenomena used to factor the discrete Fourier transform and those which underlie the existence (and lead to the classification) of space groups; this common ground is found in the notion of module over a group ring (i.e. integral representation theory), which is then applied to the formulation of a large number of algorithms, many of which are new; (iv) the survey of the main types of crystallographic computations has tried to highlight the roles played by various properties of the Fourier transformation, and the ways in which a better exploitation of these properties has been the driving force behind the discovery of more powerful methods. In keeping with this philosophy, the theory is presented first, followed by the crystallographic applications. There are ‘forward references’ from mathematical results to the applications which later invoke them (thus giving ‘real-life’ examples rather than artificial ones), and ‘backward references’ as usual. In this way, the internal logic of the mathematical developments – the surest guide to future innovations – can be preserved, whereas the alternative solution of relegating these to appendices tends on the contrary to obscure that logic by subordinating it to that of the applications. It is hoped that this attempt at an overall presentation of the main features of Fourier transforms and of their ubiquitous role in crystallography will be found useful by scientists both within and outside the field.

1.3.1. General introduction Since the publication of Volume II of International Tables, most aspects of the theory, computation and applications of Fourier transforms have undergone considerable development, often to the point of being hardly recognizable. The mathematical analysis of the Fourier transformation has been extensively reformulated within the framework of distribution theory, following Schwartz’s work in the early 1950s. The computation of Fourier transforms has been revolutionized by the advent of digital computers and of the Cooley–Tukey algorithm, and progress has been made at an ever-accelerating pace in the design of new types of algorithms and in optimizing their interplay with machine architecture. These advances have transformed both theory and practice in several fields which rely heavily on Fourier methods; much of electrical engineering, for instance, has become digital signal processing. By contrast, crystallography has remained relatively unaffected by these developments. From the conceptual point of view, oldfashioned Fourier series are still adequate for the quantitative description of X-ray diffraction, as this rarely entails consideration of molecular transforms between reciprocal-lattice points. From the practical point of view, three-dimensional Fourier transforms have mostly been used as a tool for visualizing electron-density maps, so that only moderate urgency was given to trying to achieve ultimate efficiency in these relatively infrequent calculations. Recent advances in phasing and refinement methods, however, have placed renewed emphasis on concepts and techniques long used in digital signal processing, e.g. flexible sampling, Shannon interpolation, linear filtering, and interchange between convolution and multiplication. These methods are iterative in nature, and thus generate a strong incentive to design new crystallographic Fourier transform algorithms making the fullest possible use of all available symmetry to save both storage and computation. As a result, need has arisen for a modern and coherent account of Fourier transform methods in crystallography which would provide: (i) a simple and foolproof means of switching between the three different guises in which the Fourier transformation is encountered (Fourier transforms, Fourier series and discrete Fourier transforms), both formally and computationally; (ii) an up-to-date presentation of the most important algorithms for the efficient numerical calculation of discrete Fourier transforms; (iii) a systematic study of the incorporation of symmetry into the calculation of crystallographic discrete Fourier transforms; (iv) a survey of the main types of crystallographic computations based on the Fourier transformation. The rapid pace of progress in these fields implies that such an account would be struck by quasi-immediate obsolescence if it were written solely for the purpose of compiling a catalogue of results and formulae ‘customized’ for crystallographic use. Instead, the emphasis has been placed on a mode of presentation in which most results and formulae are derived rather than listed. This does entail a substantial mathematical overhead, but has the advantage of preserving in its ‘native’ form the context within which these results are obtained. It is this context, rather than any particular set of results, which constitutes the most fertile source of new ideas and new applications, and as such can have any hope at all of remaining useful in the long run. These conditions have led to the following choices: (i) the mathematical theory of the Fourier transformation has been cast in the language of Schwartz’s theory of distributions

1.3.2. The mathematical theory of the Fourier transformation 1.3.2.1. Introduction The Fourier transformation and the practical applications to which it gives rise occur in three different forms which, although they display a similar range of phenomena, normally require distinct formulations and different proof techniques: (i) Fourier transforms, in which both function and transform depend on continuous variables; (ii) Fourier series, which relate a periodic function to a discrete set of coefficients indexed by n-tuples of integers; (iii) discrete Fourier transforms, which relate finite-dimensional vectors by linear operations representable by matrices. At the same time, the most useful property of the Fourier transformation – the exchange between multiplication and convolution – is mathematically the most elusive and the one which requires the greatest caution in order to avoid writing down meaningless expressions. It is the unique merit of Schwartz’s theory of distributions (Schwartz, 1966) that it affords complete control over all the troublesome phenomena which had previously forced mathematicians to settle for a piecemeal, fragmented theory of the Fourier transformation. By its ability to handle rigorously highly ‘singular’


1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES objects (especially -functions, their derivatives, their tensor products, their products with smooth functions, their translates and lattices of these translates), distribution theory can deal with all the major properties of the Fourier transformation as particular instances of a single basic result (the exchange between multiplication and convolution), and can at the same time accommodate the three previously distinct types of Fourier theories within a unique framework. This brings great simplification to matters of central importance in crystallography, such as the relations between (a) periodization, and sampling or decimation; (b) Shannon interpolation, and masking by an indicator function; (c) section, and projection; (d) differentiation, and multiplication by a monomial; (e) translation, and phase shift. All these properties become subsumed under the same theorem. This striking synthesis comes at a slight price, which is the relative complexity of the notion of distribution. It is first necessary to establish the notion of topological vector space and to gain sufficient control (or, at least, understanding) over convergence behaviour in certain of these spaces. The key notion of metrizability cannot be circumvented, as it underlies most of the constructs and many of the proof techniques used in distribution theory. Most of Section 1.3.2.2 builds up to the fundamental result at the end of Section 1.3.2.2.6.2, which is basic to the definition of a distribution in Section 1.3.2.3.4 and to all subsequent developments. The reader mostly interested in applications will probably want to reach this section by starting with his or her favourite topic in Section 1.3.4, and following the backward references to the relevant properties of the Fourier transformation, then to the proof of these properties, and finally to the definitions of the objects involved. Hopefully, he or she will then feel inclined to follow the forward references and thus explore the subject from the abstract to the practical. The books by Dieudonne´ (1969) and Lang (1965) are particularly recommended as general references for all aspects of analysis and algebra.

S x 1 if x 2 S 0 if x 2 = S: 1.3.2.2.1. Metric and topological notions in Rn The set Rn can be endowed with the structure of a vector space of dimension n over R, and can be made into a Euclidean space by treating its standard basis as an orthonormal basis and defining the Euclidean norm: n 1=2 P 2 kxk xi : i1

By misuse of notation, x will sometimes also designate the column vector of coordinates of x 2 Rn ; if these coordinates are referred to an orthonormal basis of Rn , then kxk xT x1=2 , where xT denotes the transpose of x. The distance between two points x and y defined by dx, y kx yk allows the topological structure of R to be transferred to Rn , making it a metric space. The basic notions in a metric space are those of neighbourhoods, of open and closed sets, of limit, of continuity, and of convergence (see Section 1.3.2.2.6.1). A subset S of Rn is bounded if sup kx yk < 1 as x and y run through S; it is closed if it contains the limits of all convergent sequences with elements in S. A subset K of Rn which is both bounded and closed has the property of being compact, i.e. that whenever K has been covered by a family of open sets, a finite subfamily can be found which suffices to cover K. Compactness is a very useful topological property for the purpose of proof, since it allows one to reduce the task of examining infinitely many local situations to that of examining only finitely many of them. 1.3.2.2.2. Functions over Rn

1.3.2.2. Preliminary notions and notation

Let ' be a complex-valued function over Rn . The support of ', denoted Supp ', is the smallest closed subset of Rn outside which ' vanishes identically. If Supp ' is compact, ' is said to have compact support. If t 2 Rn , the translate of ' by t, denoted t ', is defined by

Throughout this text, R will denote the set of real numbers, Z the set of rational (signed) integers and N the set of natural (unsigned) integers. The symbol Rn will denote the Cartesian product of n copies of R:

t 'x 'x

Rn R . . . R n times, n 1,

t:

Its support is the geometric translate of that of ':

so that an element x of Rn is an n-tuple of real numbers:

Supp t ' fx tjx 2 Supp 'g: If A is a non-singular linear transformation in Rn , the image of ' by A, denoted A# ', is defined by

x x1 , . . . , xn : Similar meanings will be attached to Zn and Nn . The symbol C will denote the set of complex numbers. If z 2 C, its modulus will be denoted by jzj, its conjugate by z (not z ), and its real and imaginary parts by Re z and Im z: 1 Re z 12z z, Im z z z: 2i If X is a finite set, then jX j will denote the number of its elements. If mapping f sends an element x of set X to the element f x of set Y, the notation

A# 'x 'A 1 x: Its support is the geometric image of Supp ' under A: Supp A# ' fAxjx 2 Supp 'g: If S is a non-singular affine transformation in Rn of the form Sx Ax b with A linear, the image of ' by S is S # ' b A# ', i.e.

f : x 7 ! f x

S # 'x 'A 1 x

will be used; the plain arrow ! will be reserved for denoting limits, as in x p x lim 1 e : !1 p If X is any set and S is a subset of X, the indicator function s of S is the real-valued function on X defined by

b:

Its support is the geometric image of Supp ' under S: Supp S # ' fSxjx 2 Supp 'g: It may be helpful to visualize the process of forming the image of a function by a geometric operation as consisting of applying that operation to the graph of that function, which is equivalent to

26

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY applying the inverse transformation to the coordinates x. This use of the inverse later affords the ‘left-representation property’ [see Section 1.3.4.2.2.2(e)] when the geometric operations form a group, which is of fundamental importance in the treatment of crystallographic symmetry (Sections 1.3.4.2.2.4, 1.3.4.2.2.5).

mean: a Cauchy sequence of integrable functions may converge to a non-integrable function. To obtain the property of completeness, which is fundamental in functional analysis, it was necessary to extend the notion of integral. This was accomplished by Lebesgue [see Berberian (1962), Dieudonne´ (1970), or Chapter 1 of Dym & McKean (1972) and the references therein, or Chapter 9 of Sprecher (1970)], and entailed identifying functions which differed only on a subset of zero measure in Rn (such functions are said to be equal ‘almost everywhere’). The vector spaces Lp Rn consisting of function classes f modulo this identification for which !1=p R p n j f xj d x < 1 kfkp

1.3.2.2.3. Multi-index notation When dealing with functions in n variables and their derivatives, considerable abbreviation of notation can be obtained through the use of multi-indices. A multi-index p 2 Nn is an n-tuple of natural integers: p p1 , . . . , pn . The length of p is defined as n P pi , jpj

Rn

i1

are then complete for the topology induced by the norm k:kp : the limit of every Cauchy sequence of functions in Lp is itself a function in Lp (Riesz–Fischer theorem). The space L1 Rn consists of those function classes f such that R k f k1 j f xj dn x < 1

and the following abbreviations will be used: i ii

xp xp11 . . . xpnn @f Di f @i f @xi

iv

@ jpj f Dp f Dp11 . . . Dpnn f p1 @x1 . . . @xpnn q p if and only if qi pi for all i 1, . . . , n

v

p

iii

q p1

q1 , . . . , pn

Rn

which are called summable or absolutely integrable. The convolution product: R f gx f ygx y dn y

qn

Rn

vi

p! p1 ! . . . pn ! p p1 pn vii ... : q q1 qn Leibniz’s formula for the repeated differentiation of products then assumes the concise form X p Dp fg Dp q fDq g, q qp

B B B B rrT f B B B 2 @ @ f @xn @x1

f x

ygy dn y g f x

Rn

which makes it into a Hilbert space. The Cauchy–Schwarz inequality

In certain sections the notation rf will be used for the gradient vector of f, and the notation rrT f for the Hessian matrix of its mixed second-order partial derivatives: 0 0 1 1 @ @f B @x1 C B @x1 C B B C C B . C B . C B B C . . r B . C, rf B . C C, B B C C @ @ A @ @f A @2f @x21 .. .

R

n

is well defined; combined with the vector space structure of L1 , it makes L1 into a (commutative) convolution algebra. However, this algebra has no unit element: there is no f 2 L1 such that f g g for all g 2 L1 ; it has only approximate units, i.e. sequences f such that f g tends to g in the L1 topology as ! 1. This is one of the starting points of distribution theory. The space L2 Rn of square-integrable functions can be endowed with a scalar product R f , g f xgx dn x

while the Taylor expansion of f to order m about x a reads X 1 f x Dp f ax ap okx akm : p! jpjm

@xn 0

R

j f , gj f , f g, g1=2 generalizes the fact that the absolute value of the cosine of an angle is less than or equal to 1. The space L1 Rn is defined as the space of functions f such that !1=p R j f xjp dn x < 1: k f k1 lim k f kp lim p!1

@xn 1 @2f ... @x1 @xn C C C .. .. C : . . C C C @2f A ... @x2n

p!1

Rn

The quantity k f k1 is called the ‘essential sup norm’ of f, as it is the smallest positive number which j f xj exceeds only on a subset of zero measure in Rn . A function f 2 L1 is called essentially bounded. 1.3.2.2.5. Tensor products. Fubini’s theorem Let f 2 L1 Rm , g 2 L1 Rn . Then the function f g : x, y 7 ! f xgy

1.3.2.2.4. Integration, Lp spaces

is called the tensor product of f and g, and belongs to L1 Rm Rn . The finite linear combinations of functions of the form f g span a subspace of L1 Rm Rn called the tensor product of L1 Rm and L1 Rn and denoted L1 Rm L1 Rn .

The Riemann integral used in elementary calculus suffers from the drawback that vector spaces of Riemann-integrable functions over Rn are not complete for the topology of convergence in the

27

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES The integration of a general function over Rm Rn may be accomplished in two steps according to Fubini’s theorem. Given F 2 L1 Rm Rn , the functions R F1 : x 7 ! Fx, y dn y

limit and continuity may be defined by means of sequences. For nonmetrizable topologies, these notions are much more difficult to handle, requiring the use of ‘filters’ instead of sequences. In some spaces E, a topology may be most naturally defined by a family of pseudo-distances d 2A , where each d satisfies (i) and (iii) but not (ii). Such spaces are called uniformizable. If for every pair x, y 2 E E there exists 2 A such that d x, y 6 0, then the separation property can be recovered. If furthermore a countable subfamily of the d suffices to define the topology of E, the latter can be shown to be metrizable, so that limiting processes in E may be studied by means of sequences.

Rn

F2 : y 7 !

R

Fx, y dm x

Rm

exist for almost all x 2 Rm and almost all y 2 Rn , respectively, are integrable, and R R R Fx, y dm x dn y F1 x dm x F2 y dn y: Rm Rn

Rm

Rn

1.3.2.2.6.2. Topological vector spaces The function spaces E of interest in Fourier analysis have an underlying vector space structure over the field C of complex numbers. A topology on E is said to be compatible with a vector space structure on E if vector addition [i.e. the map x, y 7 ! x y] and scalar multiplication [i.e. the map , x 7 ! x] are both continuous; E is then called a topological vector space. Such a topology may be defined by specifying a ‘fundamental system S of neighbourhoods of 0’, which can then be translated by vector addition to construct neighbourhoods of other points x 6 0. A norm on a vector space E is a non-negative real-valued function on E E such that

Conversely, if any one of the integrals R jFx, yj dm x dn y i Rm Rn

ii iii

R

R

R

R

m

!

n

R

R

R

R

n

jFx, yj d y dm x n

m

! jFx, yj d x dn y m

is finite, then so are the other two, and the identity above holds. It is then (and only then) permissible to change the order of integrations. Fubini’s theorem is of fundamental importance in the study of tensor products and convolutions of distributions.

i0 0

ii

x jjx

for all 2 C and x 2 E;

x 0

if and only if x 0;

0

iii x y x y for all x, y 2 E:

1.3.2.2.6. Topology in function spaces

Subsets of E defined by conditions of the form x r with r > 0 form a fundamental system of neighbourhoods of 0. The corresponding topology makes E a normed space. This topology is metrizable, since it is equivalent to that derived from the translation-invariant distance dx, y x y. Normed spaces which are complete, i.e. in which all Cauchy sequences converge, are called Banach spaces; they constitute the natural setting for the study of differential calculus. A semi-norm on a vector space E is a positive real-valued function on E E which satisfies (i0 ) and (iii0 ) but not (ii0 ). Given a set of semi-norms on E such that any pair (x, y) in E E is separated by at least one 2 , let B be the set of those subsets ; r of E defined by a condition of the form x r with 2 and r > 0; and let S be the set of finite intersections of elements of B. Then there exists a unique topology on E for which S is a fundamental system of neighbourhoods of 0. This topology is uniformizable since it is equivalent to that derived from the family of translation-invariant pseudo-distances x, y 7 ! x y. It is metrizable if and only if it can be constructed by the above procedure with a countable set of semi-norms. If furthermore E is complete, E is called a Frećhet space. If E is a topological vector space over C, its dual E is the set of all linear mappings from E to C (which are also called linear forms, or linear functionals, over E). The subspace of E consisting of all linear forms which are continuous for the topology of E is called the topological dual of E and is denoted E0 . If the topology on E is metrizable, then the continuity of a linear form T 2 E0 at f 2 E can be ascertained by means of sequences, i.e. by checking that the sequence T fj of complex numbers converges to T f in C whenever the sequence fj converges to f in E.

Geometric intuition, which often makes ‘obvious’ the topological properties of the real line and of ordinary space, cannot be relied upon in the study of function spaces: the latter are infinitedimensional, and several inequivalent notions of convergence may exist. A careful analysis of topological concepts and of their interrelationship is thus a necessary prerequisite to the study of these spaces. The reader may consult Dieudonne´ (1969, 1970), Friedman (1970), Tre`ves (1967) and Yosida (1965) for detailed expositions. 1.3.2.2.6.1. General topology Most topological notions are first encountered in the setting of metric spaces. A metric space E is a set equipped with a distance function d from E E to the non-negative reals which satisfies: i

dx, y dy, x

8x, y 2 E

ii dx, y 0 iff x y iii dx, z dx, y dy, z 8x, y, z 2 E

(symmetry); (separation); (triangular inequality).

By means of d, the following notions can be defined: open balls, neighbourhoods; open and closed sets, interior and closure; convergence of sequences, continuity of mappings; Cauchy sequences and completeness; compactness; connectedness. They suffice for the investigation of a great number of questions in analysis and geometry (see e.g. Dieudonne´, 1969). Many of these notions turn out to depend only on the properties of the collection O E of open subsets of E: two distance functions leading to the same O E lead to identical topological properties. An axiomatic reformulation of topological notions is thus possible: a topology in E is a collection O E of subsets of E which satisfy suitable axioms and are deemed open irrespective of the way they are obtained. From the practical standpoint, however, a topology which can be obtained from a distance function (called a metrizable topology) has the very useful property that the notions of closure,

1.3.2.3. Elements of the theory of distributions 1.3.2.3.1. Origins At the end of the 19th century, Heaviside proposed under the name of ‘operational calculus’ a set of rules for solving a class of

28

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY T : ' 7 ! '0:

differential, partial differential and integral equations encountered in electrical engineering (today’s ‘signal processing’). These rules worked remarkably well but were devoid of mathematical justification (see Whittaker, 1928). In 1926, Dirac introduced his famous -function [see Dirac (1958), pp. 58–61], which was found to be related to Heaviside’s constructs. Other singular objects, together with procedures to handle them, had already appeared in several branches of analysis [Cauchy’s ‘principal values’; Hadamard’s ‘finite parts’ (Hadamard, 1932, 1952); Riesz’s regularization methods for certain divergent integrals (Riesz, 1938, 1949)] as well as in the theories of Fourier series and integrals (see e.g. Bochner, 1932, 1959). Their very definition often verged on violating the rigorous rules governing limiting processes in analysis, so that subsequent recourse to limiting processes could lead to erroneous results; ad hoc precautions thus had to be observed to avoid mistakes in handling these objects. In 1945–1950, Laurent Schwartz proposed his theory of distributions (see Schwartz, 1966), which provided a unified and definitive treatment of all these questions, with a striking combination of rigour and simplicity. Schwartz’s treatment of Dirac’s -function illustrates his approach in a most direct fashion. Dirac’s original definition reads:

It is the latter functional which constitutes the proper definition of . The previous paradoxes arose because one insisted on writing down the simple linear operation T in terms of an integral. The essence of Schwartz’s theory of distributions is thus that, rather than try to define and handle ‘generalized functions’ via sequences such as f [an approach adopted e.g. by Lighthill (1958) and Erde´lyi (1962)], one should instead look at them as continuous linear functionals over spaces of well behaved functions. There are many books on distribution theory and its applications. The reader may consult in particular Schwartz (1965, 1966), Gel’fand & Shilov (1964), Bremermann (1965), Tre`ves (1967), Challifour (1972), Friedlander (1982), and the relevant chapters of Ho¨rmander (1963) and Yosida (1965). Schwartz (1965) is especially recommended as an introduction. 1.3.2.3.2. Rationale The guiding principle which leads to requiring that the functions ' above (traditionally called ‘test functions’) should be well behaved is that correspondingly ‘wilder’ behaviour can then be accommodated R in the limiting behaviour of the f while still keeping the integrals Rn f ' dn x under control. Thus (i) to minimize restrictions on the limiting behaviour of the f at infinity, the '’s will be chosen to have compact support; (ii) to minimize restrictions on the local behaviour of the f , the '’s will be chosen infinitely differentiable. To ensure further the continuity of functionals such as T with respect to the test function ' as the f go increasingly wild, very strong control will have to be exercised in the way in which a sequence 'j of test functions will be said to converge towards a limiting ': conditions will have to be imposed not only on the values of the functions 'j , but also on those of all their derivatives. Hence, defining a strong enough topology on the space of test functions ' is an essential prerequisite to the development of a satisfactory theory of distributions.

i x 0 for x 6 0, R ii Rn x dn x 1: These two conditions are irreconcilable with Lebesgue’s theory of integration: by (i), vanishes almost everywhere, so that its integral in (ii) must be 0, not 1. A better definition consists in specifying that R iii Rn x'x dn x '0 for any function ' sufficiently well behaved near x 0. This is related to the problem of finding a unit for convolution (Section 1.3.2.2.4). As will now be seen, this definition is still unsatisfactory. Let the sequence f in L1 Rn be an approximate convolution unit, e.g. 1=2 f x exp 12 2 kxk2 : 2

1.3.2.3.3. Test-function spaces

Then for any well behaved function ' the integrals R f x'x dn x

With this rationale in mind, the following function spaces will be defined for any open subset of Rn (which may be the whole of Rn ): (a) E is the space of complex-valued functions over which are indefinitely differentiable; (b) D is the subspace of E consisting of functions with (unspecified) compact support contained in Rn ; (c) DK is the subspace of D consisting of functions whose (compact) support is contained within a fixed compact subset K of

. When is unambiguously defined by the context, we will simply write E, D, DK . It sometimes suffices to require the existence of continuous derivatives only up to finite order m inclusive. The corresponding m spaces are then denoted E m , Dm , DK with the convention that if m 0, only continuity is required. The topologies on these spaces constitute the most important ingredients of distribution theory, and will be outlined in some detail.

Rn

exist, and the sequence of their numerical values tends to '0. It is tempting to combine this with (iii) to conclude that is the limit of the sequence f as ! 1. However, lim f x 0 as ! 1 almost everywhere in Rn and the crux of the problem is that R '0 lim f x'x dn x !1

6

Rh

Rn

Rn

i lim fv x 'x dn x 0

!1

because the sequence f does not satisfy the hypotheses of Lebesgue’s dominated convergence theorem. Schwartz’s solution to this problem is deceptively simple: the regular behaviour one is trying to capture is an attribute not of the sequence of functions f , but of the sequence of continuous linear functionals R T : ' 7 ! f x'x dn x

1.3.2.3.3.1. Topology on E It is defined by the family of semi-norms ' 2 E 7 ! p; K ' sup jDp 'xj,

Rn

x2K

where p is a multi-index and K a compact subset of . A

which has as a limit the continuous functional

29

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES fundamental system S of neighbourhoods of the origin in E is given by subsets of E of the form

1.3.2.3.4. Definition of distributions A distribution T on is a linear form over D , i.e. a map

V m, ", K f' 2 E jjpj m ) p, K ' < "g

T : ' 7 ! hT, 'i

for all natural integers m, positive real ", and compact subset K of . Since a countable family of compact subsets K suffices to cover , and since restricted values of " of the form " 1=N lead to the same topology, S is equivalent to a countable system of neighbourhoods and hence E is metrizable. Convergence in E may thus be defined by means of sequences. A sequence ' in E will be said to converge to 0 if for any given V m, ", K there exists 0 such that ' 2 V m, ", K whenever > 0 ; in other words, if the ' and all their derivatives Dp ' converge to 0 uniformly on any given compact K in .

which associates linearly a complex number hT, 'i to any ' 2 D , and which is continuous for the topology of that space. In the terminology of Section 1.3.2.2.6.2, T is an element of D0 , the topological dual of D . Continuity over D is equivalent to continuity over DK for all compact K contained in , and hence to the condition that for any sequence ' in D such that (i) Supp ' is contained in some compact K independent of , (ii) the sequences jDp ' j converge uniformly to 0 on K for all multi-indices p; then the sequence of complex numbers hT, ' i converges to 0 in C. If the continuity of a distribution T requires (ii) for jpj m only, T may be defined over Dm and thus T 2 D0m ; T is said to be a distribution of finite order m. In particular, for m 0, D0 is the space of continuous functions with compact support, and a distribution T 2 D00 is a (Radon) measure as used in the theory of integration. Thus measures are particular cases of distributions. Generally speaking, the larger a space of test functions, the smaller its topological dual:

1.3.2.3.3.2. Topology on Dk It is defined by the family of semi-norms ' 2 DK 7 ! p ' sup jDp 'xj, x2K

where K is now fixed. The fundamental system S of neighbourhoods of the origin in DK is given by sets of the form V m, " f' 2 DK jjpj m ) p ' < "g: It is equivalent to the countable subsystem of the V m, 1=N, hence DK is metrizable. Convergence in DK may thus be defined by means of sequences. A sequence ' in DK will be said to converge to 0 if for any given V m, " there exists 0 such that ' 2 V m, " whenever > 0 ; in other words, if the ' and all their derivatives Dp ' converge to 0 uniformly in K.

m < n ) Dm Dn ) D0n D0m : This clearly results from the observation that if the '’s are allowed to be less regular, then less wildness can be accommodated in T if the continuity of the map ' 7 ! hT, 'i with respect to ' is to be preserved.

1.3.2.3.3.3. Topology on D It is defined by the fundamental system of neighbourhoods of the origin consisting of sets of the form V m, " (

1.3.2.3.5. First examples of distributions

)

' 2 D jjpj m ) sup jD 'xj < " for all , p

kxk

where (m) is an increasing sequence m of integers tending to 1 and (") is a decreasing sequence " of positive reals tending to 0, as ! 1. This topology is not metrizable, because the sets of sequences (m) and (") are essentially uncountable. It can, however, be shown to be the inductive limit of the topology of the subspaces DK , in the following sense: V is a neighbourhood of the origin in D if and only if its intersection with DK is a neighbourhood of the origin in DK for any given compact K in . A sequence ' in D will thus be said to converge to 0 in D if all the ' belong to some DK (with K a compact subset of

independent of ) and if ' converges to 0 in DK . As a result, a complex-valued functional T on D will be said to be continuous for the topology of D if and only if, for any given compact K in , its restriction to DK is continuous for the topology of DK , i.e. maps convergent sequences in DK to convergent sequences in C. This property of D, i.e. having a non-metrizable topology which is the inductive limit of metrizable topologies in its subspaces DK , conditions the whole structure of distribution theory and dictates that of many of its proofs.

(i) The linear map ' 7 ! h, 'i '0 is a measure (i.e. a zeroth-order distribution) called Dirac’s measure or (improperly) Dirac’s ‘-function’. (ii) The linear map ' 7 ! ha , 'i 'a is called Dirac’s measure at point a 2 Rn . (iii) The linear map ' 7 ! 1p Dp 'a is a distribution of order m jpj > 0, and hence isP not a measure. (iv) The linear map ' 7 ! >0 ' is a distribution of infinite order on R: the order of differentiation is bounded for each ' (because ' has compact support) but is not as ' varies. (v) If p is a sequence of multi-indices p p1 , . . . , pn such P that jp j ! 1 as ! 1, then the linear map ' 7 ! >0 Dp 'p is a distribution of infinite order on Rn . 1.3.2.3.6. Distributions associated to locally integrable functions a complex-valued function over such that R Let f be n j f xj d x exists for any given compact K in ; f is then called K locally integrable. The linear mapping from D to C defined by R ' 7 ! f x'x dn x

may then be shown to be continuous over D . It thus defines a distribution Tf 2 D0 : R hTf , 'i f x'x dn x:

m

1.3.2.3.3.4. Topologies on E m , Dk , Dm These are defined similarly, but only involve conditions on derivatives up to order m.

As the continuity of Tf only requires that ' 2 D0 , Tf is actually a Radon measure.

30

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY It can be shown that two locally integrable functions f and g define the same distribution, i.e.

1.3.2.3.9. Operations on distributions As a general rule, the definitions are chosen so that the operations coincide with those on functions whenever a distribution is associated to a function. Most definitions consist in transferring to a distribution T an operation which is well defined on ' 2 D by ‘transposing’ it in the duality product hT, 'i; this procedure will map T to a new distribution provided the original operation maps D continuously into itself.

hTf , 'i hTK , 'i for all ' 2 D, if and only if they are equal almost everywhere. The classes of locally integrable functions modulo this equivalence form a vector space denoted L1loc ; each element of L1loc may therefore be identified with the distribution Tf defined by any one of its representatives f. 1.3.2.3.7. Support of a distribution

1.3.2.3.9.1. Differentiation

0

A distribution T 2 D is said to vanish on an open subset ! of

if it vanishes on all functions in D!, i.e. if hT, 'i 0 whenever ' 2 D!. The support of a distribution T, denoted Supp T, is then defined as the complement of the set-theoretic union of those open subsets ! on which T vanishes; or equivalently as the smallest closed subset of

outside which T vanishes. When T Tf for f 2 L1loc , then Supp T Supp f , so that the two notions coincide. Clearly, if Supp T and Supp ' are disjoint subsets of , then hT, 'i 0. It can be shown that any distribution T 2 D0 with compact support may be extended from D to E while remaining continuous, so that T 2 E 0 ; and that conversely, if S 2 E 0 , then its restriction T to D is a distribution with compact support. Thus, the topological dual E 0 of E consists of those distributions in D0 which have compact support. This is intuitively clear since, if the condition of having compact support is fulfilled by T, it needs no longer be required of ', which may then roam through E rather than D.

(a) Definition and elementary properties If T is a distribution on Rn , its partial derivative @i T with respect to xi is defined by h@i T, 'i hT, @i 'i for all ' 2 D. This does define a distribution, because the partial differentiations ' 7 ! @i ' are continuous for the topology of D. Suppose that T Tf with f a locally integrable function such that @i f exists and is almost everywhere continuous. Then integration by parts along the xi axis gives R @i f xl , . . . , xi , . . . , xn 'xl , . . . , xi , . . . , xn dxi Rn

f 'xl , . . . , 1, . . . , xn f 'xl , . . . , 1, . . . , xn R f xl , . . . , xi , . . . , xn @i 'xl , . . . , xi , . . . , xn dxi ; Rn

the integrated term vanishes, since ' has compact support, showing that @i Tf T@i f . The test functions ' 2 D are infinitely differentiable. Therefore, transpositions like that used to define @i T may be repeated, so that any distribution is infinitely differentiable. For instance,

1.3.2.3.8. Convergence of distributions A sequence Tj of distributions will be said to converge in D0 to a distribution T as j ! 1 if, for any given ' 2 D, the sequence of complex numbers hTj , 'i converges in C to the complex number hT, 'i. P 0 A series 1 j0 Tj of distributions will be said to converge in D and toPhave distribution S as its sum if the sequence of partial sums Sk kj0 converges to S. These definitions of convergence in D0 assume that the limits T and S are known in advance, and are distributions. This raises the question of the completeness of D0 : if a sequence Tj in D0 is such that the sequence hTj , 'i has a limit in C for all ' 2 D, does the map

h@ij2 T, 'i h@j T, @i 'i hT, @ij2 'i, hDp T, 'i 1jpj hT, Dp 'i, hT, 'i hT, 'i, where is the Laplacian operator. The derivatives of Dirac’s distribution are hDp , 'i 1jpj h, Dp 'i 1jpj Dp '0: It is remarkable that differentiation is a continuous operation for the topology on D0 : if a sequence Tj of distributions converges to distribution T, then the sequence Dp Tj of derivatives converges to Dp T for any multi-index p, since as j ! 1

' 7 ! lim hTj , 'i j!1

hDp Tj , 'i 1jpj hTj , Dp 'i ! 1jpj hT, Dp 'i hDp T, 'i:

define a distribution T 2 D0 ? In other words, does the limiting process preserve continuity with respect to '? It is a remarkable theorem that, because of the strong topology on D, this is actually the case. An analogous statement holds for series. This notion of convergence does not coincide with any of the classical notions used for ordinary functions: for example, the sequence ' with ' x cos x converges to 0 in D0 R, but fails to do so by any of the standard criteria. An example of convergent sequences of distributions is provided by sequences which converge to . If f is a sequence of locally n summable R functionsnon R such that (i) kxk< b f x d x ! 1 as ! 1 for all b > 0; R (ii) akxk1=a j f xj dn x ! 0 as ! 1 for all 0 < a < 1; R (iii) there exists d > 0 and M > 0 such that kxk< d j f xj dn x < M for all ; then the sequence Tf of distributions converges to in D0 Rn .

An analogous statement holds for series: any convergent series of distributions may be differentiated termwise to all orders. This illustrates how ‘robust’ the constructs of distribution theory are in comparison with those of ordinary function theory, where similar statements are notoriously untrue. (b) Differentiation under the duality bracket Limiting processes and differentiation may also be carried out under the duality bracket h, i as under the integral sign with ordinary functions. Let the function ' 'x, depend on a parameter 2 and a vector x 2 Rn in such a way that all functions ' : x 7 ! 'x, be in DRn for all 2 . Let T 2 D0 Rn be a distribution, let I hT, ' i

31

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Tf Tf S @ 0 S :

and let 0 2 be given parameter value. Suppose that, as runs through a small enough neighbourhood of 0 , (i) all the ' have their supports in a fixed compact subset K of Rn ; (ii) all the derivatives Dp ' have a partial derivative with respect to which is continuous with respect to x and . Under these hypotheses, I is differentiable (in the usual sense) with respect to near 0 , and its derivative may be obtained by ‘differentiation under the h, i sign’: dI hT, @ ' i: d

The latter result is a statement of Green’s theorem in terms of distributions. It will be used in Section 1.3.4.4.3.5 to calculate the Fourier transform of the indicator function of a molecular envelope. 1.3.2.3.9.2. Integration of distributions in dimension 1 The reverse operation from differentiation, namely calculating the ‘indefinite integral’ of a distribution S, consists in finding a distribution T such that T 0 S. For all 2 D such that 0 with 2 D, we must have hT, i hS, i: This condition defines T in a ‘hyperplane’ H of D, whose equation

(c) Effect of discontinuities When a function f or its derivatives are no longer continuous, the derivatives Dp Tf of the associated distribution Tf may no longer coincide with the distributions associated to the functions Dp f . In dimension 1, the simplest example is Heaviside’s unit step function Y Y x 0 for x < 0, Y x 1 for x 0: 1 R 0 hTY 0 , 'i hTY , '0 i ' x dx '0 h, 'i:

h1, i h1, 0 i 0 reflects the fact that has compact support. To specify T in the whole of D, it suffices to specify the value of hT, '0 i where '0 2 D is such that h1, '0 i 1: then any ' 2 D may be written uniquely as ' '0

0

Hence TY 0 , a result long used ‘heuristically’ by electrical engineers [see also Dirac (1958)]. Let f be infinitely differentiable for x < 0 and x > 0 but have discontinuous derivatives f m at x 0 [ f 0 being f itself] with jumps m f m 0 f m 0 . Consider the functions: g0 f g1

with h1, 'i,

gk gk0

'0 ,

Rx x t dt,

and T is defined by hT, 'i hT, '0 i

1 Y

hS, i:

The freedom in the choice of '0 means that T is defined up to an additive constant.

k Y :

1

The gk are continuous, their derivatives gk0 are continuous almost everywhere [which implies that Tgk 0 Tgk0 and gk0 f k1 almost everywhere]. This yields immediately:

1.3.2.3.9.3. Multiplication of distributions by functions The product T of a distribution T on Rn by a function over Rn will be defined by transposition: hT, 'i hT, 'i for all ' 2 D:

Tf 0 Tf 0 0

In order that T be a distribution, the mapping ' 7 ! ' must send DRn continuously into itself; hence the multipliers must be infinitely differentiable. The product of two general distributions cannot be defined. The need for a careful treatment of multipliers of distributions will become clear when it is later shown (Section 1.3.2.5.8) that the Fourier transformation turns convolutions into multiplications and vice versa. If T is a distribution of order m, then needs only have continuous derivatives up to order m. For instance, is a distribution of order zero, and 0 is a distribution provided is continuous; this relation is of fundamental importance in the theory of sampling and of the properties of the Fourier transformation related to sampling (Sections 1.3.2.6.4, 1.3.2.6.6). More generally, Dp is a distribution of order jpj, and the following formula holds for all 2 Dm with m jpj: X jp qj p p Dp q 0Dq : 1 D q qp

Tf 00 Tf 00 0 0 1 Tf m Tf m 0 m

1

. . . m 1 :

Thus the ‘distributional derivatives’ Tf m differ from the usual functional derivatives Tf m by singular terms associated with discontinuities. In dimension n, let f be infinitely differentiable everywhere except on a smooth hypersurface S, across which its partial derivatives show discontinuities. Let 0 and denote the discontinuities of f and its normal derivative @ ' across S (both 0 and are functions of position on S), and let S and @ S be defined by R hS , 'i ' dn 1 S S

h@ S , 'i

'

0

0 Y

g00

0

R

@ ' dn 1 S:

The derivative of a product is easily shown to be

S

@i T @i T @i T

Integration by parts shows that

and generally for any multi-index p X p p Dp q 0Dq T: D T q qp

@i Tf T@i f 0 cos i S , where i is the angle between the xi axis and the normal to S along which the jump 0 occurs, and that the Laplacian of Tf is given by

32

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY T is called an even distribution if T T, an odd distribution if T T. If A I with > 0, A is called a dilation and

1.3.2.3.9.4. Division of distributions by functions Given a distribution S on Rn and an infinitely differentiable multiplier function , the division problem consists in finding a distribution T such that T S. If never vanishes, T S= is the unique answer. If n 1, and if has only isolated zeros of finite order, it can be reduced to a collection of cases where the multiplier is xm , for which the general solution can be shown to be of the form T U

mP1

hA# T, 'i n hT, A 1 # 'i: Writing symbolically as x and A# as x=, we have: x= n x: If n 1 and f is a function with isolated simple zeros xj , then in the same symbolic notation X 1 xj , f x j f 0 xj j j

ci i ,

i0

where U is a particular solution of the division problem xm U S and the ci are arbitrary constants. In dimension n > 1, the problem is much more difficult, but is of fundamental importance in the theory of linear partial differential equations, since the Fourier transformation turns the problem of solving these into a division problem for distributions [see Ho¨rmander (1963)].

where each j 1=j f 0 xj j is analogous to a ‘Lorentz factor’ at zero xj . 1.3.2.3.9.6. Tensor product of distributions The purpose of this construction is to extend Fubini’s theorem to distributions. Following Section 1.3.2.2.5, we may define the tensor product L1loc Rm L1loc Rn as the vector space of finite linear combinations of functions of the form

1.3.2.3.9.5. Transformation of coordinates Let be a smooth non-singular change of variables in Rn , i.e. an infinitely differentiable mapping from an open subset of Rn to 0 in Rn , whose Jacobian @x J det @x

f g : x, y 7 ! f xgy, where x 2 Rm , y 2 Rn , f 2 L1loc Rm and g 2 L1loc Rn . Let Sx and Ty denote the distributions associated to f and g, respectively, the subscripts x and y acting as mnemonics for Rm and Rn . It follows from Fubini’s theorem (Section 1.3.2.2.5) that f g 2 L1loc Rm Rn , and hence defines a distribution over Rm Rn ; the rearrangement of integral signs gives

vanishes nowhere in . By the implicit function theorem, the inverse mapping 1 from 0 to is well defined. If f is a locally summable function on , then the function # f defined by

hSx Ty , 'x; y i hSx , hTy , 'x; y ii hTy , hSx , 'x; y ii

# f x f 1 x

for all 'x; y 2 DRm Rn . In particular, if 'x, y uxvy with u 2 DRm , v 2 DRn , then

is a locally summable function on 0 , and for any ' 2 D 0 we may write: R # R f x'x dn x f 1 x'x dn x

0

hS T, u vi hS, uihT, vi: This construction can be extended to general distributions S 2 D0 Rm and T 2 D0 Rn . Given any test function ' 2 DRm Rn , let 'x denote the map y 7 ! 'x, y; let 'y denote the map x 7 ! 'x, y; and define the two functions x hT, 'x i and !y hS, 'y i. Then, by the lemma on differentiation under the h, i sign of Section 1.3.2.3.9.1, 2 DRm , ! 2 DRn , and there exists a unique distribution S T such that

0

R f y'yjJ j dn y by x y:

0

In terms of the associated distributions hT# f , 'i hTf , jJ j 1 # 'i: This operation can be extended to an arbitrary distribution T by defining its image # T under coordinate transformation through

hS T, 'i hS, i hT, !i: S T is called the tensor product of S and T. With the mnemonic introduced above, this definition reads identically to that given above for distributions associated to locally integrable functions:

h# T, 'i hT, jJ j 1 # 'i, which is well defined provided that is proper, i.e. that 1 K is compact whenever K is compact. For instance, if : x 7 ! x a is a translation by a vector a in Rn , then jJ j 1; # is denoted by a , and the translate a T of a distribution T is defined by

hSx Ty , 'x; y i hSx , hTy , 'x; y ii hTy , hSx , 'x; y ii: The tensor product of distributions is associative: R S T R S T:

ha T, 'i hT, a 'i: Let A : x 7 ! Ax be a linear transformation defined by a nonsingular matrix A. Then J A det A, and

Derivatives may be calculated by Dpx Dqy Sx Ty Dpx Sx Dqy Ty :

hA# T, 'i jdet AjhT, A 1 # 'i:

The support of a tensor product is the Cartesian product of the supports of the two factors.

This formula will be shown later (Sections 1.3.2.6.5, 1.3.4.2.1.1) to be the basis for the definition of the reciprocal lattice. In particular, if A I, where I is the identity matrix, A is an inversion through a centre of symmetry at the origin, and denoting A# ' by ' we have: 'i hT, 'i: hT,

1.3.2.3.9.7. Convolution of distributions The convolution f g of two functions f and g on Rn is defined by R R f gx f ygx y dn y f x ygy dn y Rn

33

Rn

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES of such functions can be constructed which have compact support and converge to , it follows that any distribution T can be obtained as the limit of infinitely differentiable functions T . In topological jargon: DRn is ‘everywhere dense’ in D0 Rn . A standard function in D which is often used for such proofs is defined as follows: put 1 1 for jxj 1, x exp A 1 x2

whenever the integral exists. This is the case when f and g are both in L1 Rn ; then f g is also in L1 Rn . Let S, T and W denote the distributions associated to f, g and f g, respectively: a change of variable immediately shows that for any ' 2 DRn , R f xgy'x y dn x dn y: hW , 'i Rn Rn

Introducing the map from Rn Rn to Rn defined by x, y x y, the latter expression may be written: hSx Ty , ' i

0

(where denotes the composition of mappings) or by a slight abuse of notation:

for jxj 1,

with

hW , 'i hSx Ty , 'x yi:

Z1 A

A difficulty arises in extending this definition to general distributions S and T because the mapping is not proper: if K is compact in Rn , then 1 K is a cylinder with base K and generator the ‘second bisector’ x y 0 in Rn Rn . However, hS T, ' i is defined whenever the intersection between Supp S T Supp S Supp T and 1 Supp ' is compact. We may therefore define the convolution S T of two distributions S and T on Rn by

1

x2

dx

1

(so that is in D and is normalized), and put 1 x " x in dimension 1, " " n Y " xj in dimension n: " x

hS T, 'i hS T, ' i hSx Ty , 'x yi

j1

whenever the following support condition is fulfilled:

Another related result, also proved by convolution, is the structure theorem: the restriction of a distribution T 2 D0 Rn to a bounded open set in Rn is a derivative of finite order of a continuous function. Properties (i) to (iv) are the basis of the symbolic or operational calculus (see Carslaw & Jaeger, 1948; Van der Pol & Bremmer, 1955; Churchill, 1958; Erde´lyi, 1962; Moore, 1971) for solving integro-differential equations with constant coefficients by turning them into convolution equations, then using factorization methods for convolution algebras (Schwartz, 1965).

‘the set fx, yjx 2 A, y 2 B, x y 2 Kg is compact in R R for all K compact in Rn ’. n

exp

1

n

The latter condition is met, in particular, if S or T has compact support. The support of S T is easily seen to be contained in the closure of the vector sum A B fx yjx 2 A, y 2 Bg: Convolution by a fixed distribution S is a continuous operation for the topology on D0 : it maps convergent sequences Tj to convergent sequences S Tj . Convolution is commutative: S T T S. The convolution of p distributions T1 , . . . , Tp with supports A1 , . . . , Ap can be defined by

1.3.2.4. Fourier transforms of functions 1.3.2.4.1. Introduction Given a complex-valued function f on Rn subject to suitable regularity conditions, its Fourier transform F f and Fourier cotransform F f are defined as follows: R F f f x exp 2ij x dn x

hT1 . . . Tp , 'i hT1 x1 . . . Tp xp , 'x1 . . . xp i whenever the following generalized support condition: ‘the set fx1 , . . . , xp jx1 2 A1 , . . . , xp 2 Ap , x1 . . . xp 2 Kg is compact in Rn p for all K compact in Rn ’

F f

is satisfied. It is then associative. Interesting examples of associativity failure, which can be traced back to violations of the support condition, may be found in Bracewell (1986, pp. 436–437). It follows from previous definitions that, for all distributions T 2 D0 , the following identities hold: (i) T T: is the unit convolution; (ii) a T a T: translation is a convolution with the corresponding translate of ; (iii) Dp T Dp T: differentiation is a convolution with the corresponding derivative of ; (iv) translates or derivatives of a convolution may be obtained by translating or differentiating any one of the factors: convolution ‘commutes’ with translation and differentiation, a property used in Section 1.3.4.4.7.7 to speed up least-squares model refinement for macromolecules. The latter property is frequently used for the purpose of regularization: if T is a distribution, an infinitely differentiable function, and at least one of the two has compact support, then T is an infinitely differentiable ordinary function. Since sequences

Pn

Rn

R

R

n

f x exp2ij x dn x,

where j x i1 i xi is the ordinary scalar product. The terminology and sign conventions given above are the standard ones in mathematics; those used in crystallography are slightly different (see Section 1.3.4.2.1.1). These transforms enjoy a number of remarkable properties, whose natural settings entail different regularity assumptions on f : for instance, properties relating to convolution are best treated in L1 Rn , while Parseval’s theorem requires the Hilbert space structure of L2 Rn . After a brief review of these classical properties, the Fourier transformation will be examined in a space S Rn particularly well suited to accommodating the full range of its properties, which will later serve as a space of test functions to extend the Fourier transformation to distributions. There exists an abundant literature on the ‘Fourier integral’. The books by Carslaw (1930), Wiener (1933), Titchmarsh (1948), Katznelson (1968), Sneddon (1951, 1972), and Dym & McKean (1972) are particularly recommended.

34

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY F x; y u v F x u F y v:

1.3.2.4.2. Fourier transforms in L1

Furthermore, if f 2 L1 Rm Rn , then F y f 2 L1 Rm as a function of x and F x f 2 L1 Rn as a function of y, and

1.3.2.4.2.1. Linearity Both transformations F and F are obviously linear maps from L1 to L1 when these spaces are viewed as vector spaces over the field C of complex numbers.

F x; y f F x F y f F y F x f : This is easily proved by using Fubini’s theorem and the fact that j , h x, y j x h y, where x, j 2 Rm , y, h 2 Rn . This property may be written:

1.3.2.4.2.2. Effect of affine coordinate transformations F and F turn translations into phase shifts: F a f j exp 2ij aF f j F a f j exp2ij aF f j :

F x; y F x F y :

Under a general linear change of variable x 7 ! Ax with nonsingular matrix A, the transform of A# f is R F A# f j f A 1 x exp 2ij x dn x

1.3.2.4.2.5. Convolution property If f and g are summable, their convolution f g exists and is summable, and " # R R F f gj f ygx y dn y exp 2ij x dn x:

Rn

R

R

n

f y exp 2iAT j yjdet Aj dn y

Rn

With x y z, so that

by x Ay

exp 2ij x exp 2ij y exp 2ij z,

jdet AjF f AT j

and with Fubini’s theorem, rearrangement of the double integral gives:

i.e. F A# f jdet AjA 1 T # F f and similarly for F . The matrix A 1 T is called the contragredient of matrix A. Under an affine change of coordinates x 7 ! Sx Ax b with non-singular matrix A, the transform of S # f is given by #

F f g F f F g and similarly F f g F f F g: Thus the Fourier transform and cotransform turn convolution into multiplication.

#

F S f j F b A f j exp 2ij bF A# f j

1.3.2.4.2.6. Reciprocity property In general, F f and F f are not summable, and hence cannot be further transformed; however, as they are essentially bounded, their products with the Gaussians Gt exp 22 kk2 t are summable for all t > 0, and it can be shown that f lim F Gt F f lim F Gt F f ,

exp 2ij bjdet AjF f A j T

with a similar result for F , replacing

Rn

i by +i.

1.3.2.4.2.3. Conjugate symmetry The kernels of the Fourier transformations F and F satisfy the following identities:

t!0

t!0

where the limit is taken in the topology of the L1 norm k:k1 . Thus F and F are (in a sense) mutually inverse, which justifies the common practice of calling F the ‘inverse Fourier transformation’.

exp2ij x exp 2ij x exp 2i j x: As a result the transformations F and F themselves have the following ‘conjugate symmetry’ properties [where the notation f x f x of Section 1.3.2.2.2 will be used]: F f j F f j F f j

1.3.2.4.2.7. Riemann–Lebesgue lemma If f 2 L1 Rn , i.e. is summable, then F f and F f exist and are continuous and essentially bounded: kF f k kF f k k f k : 1

F f j F f j :

1

1

In fact one has the much stronger property, whose statement constitutes the Riemann–Lebesgue lemma, that F f j and F f j both tend to zero as kj k ! 1.

Therefore, (i) f real , f f , F f F f , F f j F f j : F f is said to possess Hermitian symmetry; (ii) f centrosymmetric , f f , F f F f ; (iii) f real centrosymmetric , f f f , F f F f F f , F f real centrosymmetric. Conjugate symmetry is the basis of Friedel’s law (Section 1.3.4.2.1.4) in crystallography.

1.3.2.4.2.8. Differentiation Let us now suppose that n 1 and that f 2 L1 R is differentiable with f 0 2 L1 R. Integration by parts yields 1 R 0 F f 0 f x exp 2i x dx 1

f x exp 2i x1 1 1 R 2i f x exp 2i x dx:

1.3.2.4.2.4. Tensor product property Another elementary property of F is its naturality with respect to tensor products. Let u 2 L1 Rm and v 2 L1 Rn , and let F x , F y , F x; y denote the Fourier transformations in L1 Rm , L1 Rn and L1 Rm Rn , respectively. Then

1

0

Since f is summable, f has a limit when x ! 1, and this limit must be 0 since f is summable. Therefore

35

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 0

F f 2iF f

1.3.2.4.3. Fourier transforms in L2 Let f belong to L2 Rn , i.e. be such that !1=2 R 2 n j f xj d x < 1: k f k2

with the bound k2F f k1 k f 0 k1 so that jF f j decreases faster than 1=jj ! 1. This result can be easily extended to several dimensions and to any multi-index m: if f is summable and has continuous summable partial derivatives up to order jmj, then

Rn

1.3.2.4.3.1. Invariance of L2 F f and F f exist and are functions in L2 , i.e. F L2 L2 , F L2 L2 .

m

F D f j 2ij F f j m

and k2j m F f k1 kDm f k1 : Similar results hold for F , with 2ij replaced by 2ij . Thus, the more differentiable f is, with summable derivatives, the faster F f and F f decrease at infinity. The property of turning differentiation into multiplication by a monomial has many important applications in crystallography, for instance differential syntheses (Sections 1.3.4.2.1.9, 1.3.4.4.7.2, 1.3.4.4.7.5) and moment-generating functions [Section 1.3.4.5.2.1(c)].

1.3.2.4.3.2. Reciprocity F F f f and F F f f , equality being taken as ‘almost everywhere’ equality. This again leads to calling F the ‘inverse Fourier transformation’ rather than the Fourier cotransformation. 1.3.2.4.3.3. Isometry F and F preserve the L2 norm: kF f k2 kF f k2 k f k2 (Parseval’s/Plancherel’s theorem): This property, which may be written in terms of the inner product (,) in L2 Rn as F f , F g F f , F g f , g,

1.3.2.4.2.9. Decrease at infinity Conversely, assume that f is summable on Rn and that f decreases fast enough at infinity for xm f also to be summable, for some multiindex m. Then the integral defining F f may be subjected to the differential operator Dm , still yielding a convergent integral: therefore Dm F f exists, and

implies that F and F are unitary transformations of L2 Rn into itself, i.e. infinite-dimensional ‘rotations’.

Dm F f j F 2ixm f j 1.3.2.4.3.4. Eigenspace decomposition of L2 Some light can be shed on the geometric structure of these rotations by the following simple considerations. Note that R F 2 f x F f j exp 2ix j dn j

with the bound kDm F f k1 k2xm f k1 : Similar results hold for F , with 2ix replaced by 2ix. Thus, the faster f decreases at infinity, the more F f and F f are differentiable, with bounded derivatives. This property is the converse of that described in Section 1.3.2.4.2.8, and their combination is fundamental in the definition of the function space S in Section 1.3.2.4.4.1, of tempered distributions in Section 1.3.2.5, and in the extension of the Fourier transformation to them.

Rn

F F f x f x so that F 4 (and similarly F 4 ) is the identity map. Any eigenvalue of F or F is therefore a fourth root of unity, i.e. 1 or i, and L2 Rn splits into an orthogonal direct sum H0 H1 H2 H 3 , where F (respectively F ) acts in each subspace Hk k 0, 1, 2, 3 by multiplication by ik . Orthonormal bases for these subspaces can be constructed from Hermite functions (cf. Section 1.3.2.4.4.2) This method was used by Wiener (1933, pp. 51–71).

1.3.2.4.2.10. The Paley–Wiener theorem An extreme case of the last instance occurs when f has compact support: then F f and F f are so regular that they may be analytically continued from Rn to Cn where they are entire functions, i.e. have no singularities at finite distance (Paley & Wiener, 1934). This is easily seen for F f : giving vector j 2 Rn a vector h 2 Rn of imaginary parts leads to R F f j ih f x exp 2ij ih x dn x

1.3.2.4.3.5. The convolution theorem and the isometry property In L2 , the convolution theorem (when applicable) and the Parseval/Plancherel theorem are not independent. Suppose that f, g, f g and f g are all in L2 (without questioning whether these properties are independent). Then f g may be written in terms of the inner product in L2 as follows: R R f gx f x ygy dn y f y xgy dn y,

Rn

F exp2h xf j , where the latter transform always exists since exp2h xf is summable with respect to x for all values of h. This analytic continuation forms the basis of the saddlepoint method in probability theory [Section 1.3.4.5.2.1( f )] and leads to the use of maximum-entropy distributions in the statistical theory of direct phase determination [Section 1.3.4.5.2.2(e)]. By Liouville’s theorem, an entire function in Cn cannot vanish identically on the complement of a compact subset of Rn without vanishing everywhere: therefore F f cannot have compact support if f has, and hence DRn is not stable by Fourier transformation.

Rn

Rn

i.e. f gx x f , g: Invoking the isometry property, we may rewrite the right-hand side as

36

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY F x f , F g exp 2ix j F f j , F gj R F f F gx

in dimension n: F Gj F Gj Gj : In other words, G is an eigenfunction of F and F for eigenvalue 1 (Section 1.3.2.4.3.4). A complete system of eigenfunctions may be constructed as follows. In dimension 1, consider the family of functions

R

n

exp2ix j dn j F F f F g, so that the initial identity yields the convolution theorem. To obtain the converse implication, note that R f , g f ygy dn y f g0

Hm

Dm G2 G

m 0,

where D denotes the differentiation operator. The first two members of the family

Rn

F F f F g0 R F f j F gj dn j F f , F g,

H0 G,

H1 2DG,

are such that F H0 H0 , as shown above, and

Rn

DGx 2xGx i2ixGx iF DGx,

where conjugate symmetry (Section 1.3.2.4.2.2) has been used. These relations have an important application in the calculation by Fourier transform methods of the derivatives used in the refinement of macromolecular structures (Section 1.3.4.4.7).

hence F H1 iH1 : We may thus take as an induction hypothesis that

1.3.2.4.4. Fourier transforms in S

F Hm im Hm :

1.3.2.4.4.1. Definition and properties of S The duality established in Sections 1.3.2.4.2.8 and 1.3.2.4.2.9 between the local differentiability of a function and the rate of decrease at infinity of its Fourier transform prompts one to consider the space S Rn of functions f on Rn which are infinitely differentiable and all of whose derivatives are rapidly decreasing, so that for all multi-indices k and p

The identity

m 2 D G Dm1 G2 D G G

DG Dm G2 G G

Hm1 x DHm x

2xHm x,

may be written

xk Dp f x ! 0 as kxk ! 1:

and the two differentiation theorems give:

The product of f 2 S by any polynomial over Rn is still in S (S is an algebra over the ring of polynomials). Furthermore, S is invariant under translations and differentiation. If f 2 S , then its transforms F f and F f are (i) infinitely differentiable because f is rapidly decreasing; (ii) rapidly decreasing because f is infinitely differentiable; hence F f and F f are in S : S is invariant under F and F . Since L1 S and L2 S , all properties of F and F already encountered above are enjoyed by functions of S , with all restrictions on differentiability and/or integrability lifted. For instance, given two functions f and g in S , then both fg and f g are in S (which was not the case with L1 nor with L2 ) so that the reciprocity theorem inherited from L2 F F f f and F F f f

F DHm 2ij F Hm F 2xHm iDF Hm : Combination of this with the induction hypothesis yields F Hm1 im1 DHm

2Hm

im1 Hm1 , thus proving that Hm is an eigenfunction of F for eigenvalue im for all m 0. The same proof holds for F , with eigenvalue im . If these eigenfunctions are normalized as 1m 21=4 H m x p Hm x, m!2m m=2

allows one to state the reverse of the convolution theorem first established in L1 :

then it can be shown that the collection of Hermite functions fH m xgm0 constitutes an orthonormal basis of L2 R such that H m is an eigenfunction of F (respectively F ) for eigenvalue im (respectively im ). In dimension n, the same construction can be extended by tensor product to yield the multivariate Hermite functions

F fg F f F g F fg F f F g: 1.3.2.4.4.2. Gaussian functions and Hermite functions Gaussian functions are particularly important elements of S . In dimension 1, a well known contour integration (Schwartz, 1965, p. 184) yields F exp x2 F exp x2 exp 2 ,

H m x H m1 x1 H m2 x2 . . . H mn xn (where m 0 is a multi-index). These constitute an orthonormal basis of L2 Rn , with H m an eigenfunction of F (respectively F ) for eigenvalue ijmj (respectively ijmj ). Thus the subspaces Hk of Section 1.3.2.4.3.4 are spanned by those H m with jmj k mod 4 k 0, 1, 2, 3. General multivariate Gaussians are usually encountered in the non-standard form

which shows that the ‘standard Gaussian’ exp x2 is invariant under F and F . By a tensor product construction, it follows that the same is true of the standard Gaussian

GA x exp

Gx exp kxk2

37

1 T 2x

Ax,

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES This possibility of ‘transposing’ F (and F ) from the left to the right of the duality bracket will be used in Section 1.3.2.5.4 to extend the Fourier transformation to distributions.

where A is a symmetric positive-definite matrix. Diagonalizing A as ELET with EET the identity matrix, and putting A1=2 EL1=2 ET , we may write " # A 1=2 x GA x G 2

1.3.2.4.5. Various writings of Fourier transforms Other ways of writing Fourier transforms in Rn exist besides the one used here. All have the form Z 1 F h; ! f j n f x exp i!j x dn x, h

i.e. GA 2A 1 1=2 # G;

Rn

hence (by Section 1.3.2.4.2.3) 1 1=2

F GA jdet 2A j

" ## A 1=2 G, 2

where h is real positive and ! real non-zero, with the reciprocity formula written: Z 1 f x n F h; ! f j expi!j x dn x k

i.e.

Rn

1 1=2

F GA j jdet 2A j

1 1=2

G2A

j ,

with k real positive. The consistency condition between h, k and ! is 2 hk : j!j The usual choices are:

i.e. finally F GA jdet 2A 1 j1=2 G42 A 1 : This result is widely used in crystallography, e.g. to calculate form factors for anisotropic atoms (Section 1.3.4.2.2.6) and to obtain transforms of derivatives of Gaussian atomic densities (Section 1.3.4.4.7.10).

i

Z

1.3.2.4.6. Tables of Fourier transforms The books by Campbell & Foster (1948), Erde´lyi (1954), and Magnus et al. (1966) contain extensive tables listing pairs of functions and their Fourier transforms. Bracewell (1986) lists those pairs particularly relevant to electrical engineering applications.

2 2

j f xj dx

,

where, by a beautiful theorem of Hardy (1933), equality can only be attained for f Gaussian. Hardy’s theorem is even stronger: if both f and F f behave at infinity as constant multiples of G, then each of them is everywhere a constant multiple of G; if both f and F f behave at infinity as constant multiples of G monomial, then each of them is a finite linear combination of Hermite functions. Hardy’s theorem is invoked in Section 1.3.4.4.5 to derive the optimal procedure for spreading atoms on a sampling grid in order to obtain the most accurate structure factors. The search for optimal compromises between the confinement of f to a compact domain in x-space and of F f to a compact domain in -space leads to consideration of prolate spheroidal wavefunctions (Pollack & Slepian, 1961; Landau & Pollack, 1961, 1962).

1.3.2.5. Fourier transforms of tempered distributions 1.3.2.5.1. Introduction It was found in Section 1.3.2.4.2 that the usual space of test functions D is not invariant under F and F . By contrast, the space S of infinitely differentiable rapidly decreasing functions is invariant under F and F , and furthermore transposition formulae such as hF f , gi h f , F gi hold for all f , g 2 S . It is precisely this type of transposition which was used successfully in Sections 1.3.2.3.9.1 and 1.3.2.3.9.3 to define the derivatives of distributions and their products with smooth functions. This suggests using S instead of D as a space of test functions ', and defining the Fourier transform F T of a distribution T by

1.3.2.4.4.4. Symmetry property A final formal property of the Fourier transform, best established in S , is its symmetry: if f and g are in S , then by Fubini’s theorem ! R R n f x exp 2ij x d x gj dn j hF f , gi Rn

R R

n

Rn

f x

R R

n

hF T, 'i hT, F 'i whenever T is capable of being extended from D to S while remaining continuous. It is this latter proviso which will be subsumed under the adjective ‘tempered’. As was the case with the construction of D0 , it is the definition of a sufficiently strong topology (i.e. notion of convergence) in S which will play a key role in transferring to the elements of its topological dual S 0 (called tempered distributions) all the properties of the Fourier transformation.

! gj exp 2ij x d j n

as here;

ii ! 1, h 1, k 2 in probability theory and in solid-state physics; p iii ! 1, h k 2 in much of classical analysis: It should be noted that conventions (ii) and (iii) introduce numerical factors of 2 in convolution and Parseval formulae, while (ii) breaks the symmetry between F and F .

1.3.2.4.4.3. Heisenberg’s inequality, Hardy’s theorem The result just obtained, which also holds for F , shows that the ‘peakier’ GA , the ‘broader’ F GA . This is a general property of the Fourier transformation, expressed in dimension 1 by the Heisenberg inequality (Weyl, 1931): Z Z 2 2 2 2 x j f xj dx jF f j d 1 162

! 2, h k 1

dn x

hf , F gi:

38

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY are both linear and continuous for the topology of S . In the same way that x and j have been used consistently as arguments for ' and F ', respectively, the notation Tx and F Tj will be used to indicate which variables are involved. When T is a distribution with compact support, its Fourier transform may be written

Besides the general references to distribution theory mentioned in Section 1.3.2.3.1 the reader may consult the books by Zemanian (1965, 1968). Lavoine (1963) contains tables of Fourier transforms of distributions. 1.3.2.5.2. S as a test-function space

F Tx j hTx , exp 2ij xi

A notion of convergence has to be introduced in S Rn in order to be able to define and test the continuity of linear functionals on it. A sequence 'j of functions in S will be said to converge to 0 if, for any given multi-indices k and p, the sequence xk Dp 'j tends to 0 uniformly on Rn . It can be shown that DRn is dense in S Rn . Translation is continuous P for this topology. For any linear differential operator PD p ap Dp and any polynomial Qx over Rn , 'j ! 0 implies Qx PD'j ! 0 in the topology of S . Therefore, differentiation and multiplication by polynomials are continuous for the topology on S . The Fourier transformations F and F are also continuous for the topology of S . Indeed, let 'j converge to 0 for the topology on S . Then, by Section 1.3.2.4.2,

since the function x 7 ! exp 2ij x is in E while Tx 2 E 0 . It can be shown, as in Section 1.3.2.4.2, to be analytically continuable into an entire function over Cn . 1.3.2.5.5. Transposition of basic properties The duality between differentiation and multiplication by a monomial extends from S to S 0 by transposition: F Dpx Tx j 2ij p F Tx j Dpj F Tx j F 2ixp Tx j : Analogous formulae hold for F , with i replaced by i. The formulae expressing the duality between translation and phase shift, e.g.

k2j m Dp F 'j k1 kDm 2xp 'j k1 : The right-hand side tends to 0 as j ! 1 by definition of convergence in S , hence kj km Dp F 'j ! 0 uniformly, so that F 'j ! 0 in S as j ! 1. The same proof applies to F .

F a Tx j exp 2ia j F Tx j a F Tx j F exp2ia xTx j ; between a linear change of variable and its contragredient, e.g.

1.3.2.5.3. Definition and examples of tempered distributions

F A# T jdet AjA 1 T # F T;

A distribution T 2 D0 Rn is said to be tempered if it can be extended into a continuous linear functional on S . If S 0 Rn is the topological dual of S Rn , and if S 2 S 0 Rn , then its restriction to D is a tempered distribution; conversely, if T 2 D0 is tempered, then its extension to S is unique (because D is dense in S ), hence it defines an element S of S 0 . We may therefore identify S 0 and the space of tempered distributions. A distribution with compact support is tempered, i.e. S 0 E 0 . By transposition of the corresponding properties of S , it is readily established that the derivative, translate or product by a polynomial of a tempered distribution is still a tempered distribution. These inclusion relations may be summarized as follows: since S contains D but is contained in E, the reverse inclusions hold for the topological duals, and hence S 0 contains E 0 but is contained in D0 . A locally summable function f on Rn will be said to be of polynomial growth if j f xj can be majorized by a polynomial in kxk as kxk ! 1. It is easily shown that such a function f defines a tempered distribution Tf via R hTf , 'i f x'x dn x:

are obtained similarly by transposition from the corresponding identities in S . They give a transposition formula for an affine change of variables x 7 ! Sx Ax b with non-singular matrix A: F S # T exp 2ij bF A# T exp 2ij bjdet AjA 1 T # F T, with a similar result for F , replacing i by +i. Conjugate symmetry is obtained similarly: F T, F T, F T F T with the same identities for F . The tensor product property also transposes to tempered distributions: if U 2 S 0 Rm , V 2 S 0 Rn , F Ux Vy F Uj F V h F Ux Vy F Uj F V h :

Rn

1.3.2.5.6. Transforms of -functions

In particular, polynomials over Rn define tempered distributions, and so do functions in S . The latter remark, together with the transposition identity (Section 1.3.2.4.4), invites the extension of F and F from S to S 0 .

Since has compact support, F x j hx , exp 2ij xi 1j ,

i:e: F 1:

It is instructive to show that conversely F 1 without invoking the reciprocity theorem. Since @j 1 0 for all j 1, . . . , n, it follows from Section 1.3.2.3.9.4 that F 1 c; the constant c can be determined by using the invariance of the standard Gaussian G established in Section 1.3.2.4.3:

1.3.2.5.4. Fourier transforms of tempered distributions The Fourier transform F T and cotransform F T of a tempered distribution T are defined by hF T, 'i hT, F 'i hF T, 'i hT, F 'i

hF 1x , Gx i h1j , Gj i 1; hence c 1. Thus, F 1 . The basic properties above then read (using multi-indices to denote differentiation):

for all test functions ' 2 S . Both F T and F T are themselves tempered distributions, since the maps ' 7 ! F ' and ' 7 ! F '

39

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES F xm j 2ij m ,

F xm j 2i

F a j exp 2ia j ,

The same identities hold for F . Taken together with the reciprocity theorem, these show that F and F establish mutually inverse isomorphisms between O M and O 0C , and exchange multiplication for convolution in S 0 . It may be noticed that most of the basic properties of F and F may be deduced from this theorem and from the properties of . Differentiation operators Dm and translation operators a are convolutions with Dm and a ; they are turned, respectively, into multiplication by monomials 2ij m (the transforms of Dm ) or by phase factors exp2ij a (the transforms of a ). Another consequence of the convolution theorem is the duality established by the Fourier transformation between sections and projections of a function and its transform. For instance, in R3 , the projection of f x, y, z on the x, y plane along the z axis may be written

jmj m j ;

F exp2ia xj a ,

with analogous relations for F , i becoming i. Thus derivatives of are mapped to monomials (and vice versa), while translates of are mapped to ‘phase factors’ (and vice versa). 1.3.2.5.7. Reciprocity theorem The previous results now allow a self-contained and rigorous proof of the reciprocity theorem between F and F to be given, whereas in traditional settings (i.e. in L1 and L2 ) the implicit handling of through a limiting process is always the sticking point. Reciprocity is first established in S as follows: R F F 'x F 'j exp2ij x dn j

x y 1z f ;

Rn

R

R

n

its Fourier transform is then

F x 'j dn j

1 1 F f ,

h1, F x 'i hF 1, x 'i

which is the section of F f by the plane 0, orthogonal to the z axis used for projection. There are numerous applications of this property in crystallography (Section 1.3.4.2.1.8) and in fibre diffraction (Section 1.3.4.5.1.3).

hx , 'i 'x

1.3.2.5.9. L2 aspects, Sobolev spaces

and similarly

The special properties of F in the space of square-integrable functions L2 Rn , such as Parseval’s identity, can be accommodated within distribution theory: if u 2 L2 Rn , then Tu is a tempered distribution in S 0 (the map u 7 ! Tu being continuous) and it can be shown that S F Tu is of the form Sv , where u F u is the Fourier transform of u in L2 Rn . By Plancherel’s theorem, kuk2 kvk2 . This embedding of L2 into S 0 can be used to derive the convolution theorem for L2 . If u and v are in L2 Rn , then u v can be shown to be a bounded continuous function; thus u v is not in L2 , but it is in S 0 , so that its Fourier transform is a distribution, and

F F 'x 'x: The reciprocity theorem is then proved in S 0 by transposition: F F T F F T T for all T 2 S 0 : Thus the Fourier cotransformation F in S 0 may legitimately be called the ‘inverse Fourier transformation’. The method of Section 1.3.2.4.3 may then be used to show that F and F both have period 4 in S 0 . 1.3.2.5.8. Multiplication and convolution Multiplier functions x for tempered distributions must be infinitely differentiable, as for ordinary distributions; furthermore, they must grow sufficiently slowly as kxk ! 1 to ensure that ' 2 S for all ' 2 S and that the map ' 7 ! ' is continuous for the topology of S . This leads to choosing for multipliers the subspace O M consisting of functions 2 E of polynomial growth. It can be shown that if f is in O M , then the associated distribution Tf is in S 0 (i.e. is a tempered distribution); and that conversely if T is in S 0 , T is in O M for all 2 D. Corresponding restrictions must be imposed to define the space O 0C of those distributions T whose convolution S T with a tempered distribution S is still a tempered distribution: T must be such that, for all ' 2 S , x hTy , 'x yi is in S ; and such that the map ' 7 ! be continuous for the topology of S . This implies that S is ‘rapidly decreasing’. It can be shown that if f is in S , then the associated distribution Tf is in O 0C ; and that conversely if T is in O 0C , T is in S for all 2 D. The two spaces O M and O 0C are mapped into each other by the Fourier transformation F O M F O M O 0

F u v F u F v: Spaces of tempered distributions related to L2 Rn can be defined as follows. For any real s, define the Sobolev space Hs Rn to consist of all tempered distributions S 2 S 0 Rn such that 1 jj j2 s=2 F Sj 2 L2 Rn : These spaces play a fundamental role in the theory of partial differential equations, and in the mathematical theory of tomographic reconstruction – a subject not unrelated to the crystallographic phase problem (Natterer, 1986). 1.3.2.6. Periodic distributions and Fourier series 1.3.2.6.1. Terminology Let Zn be the subset of Rn consisting of those points with (signed) integer coordinates; it is an n-dimensional lattice, i.e. a free Abelian group on n generators. A particularly simple set of n generators is given by the standard basis of Rn , and hence Zn will be called the standard lattice in Rn . Any other ‘non-standard’ ndimensional lattice in Rn is the image of this standard lattice by a general linear transformation. If we identify any two points in Rn whose coordinates are congruent modulo Zn , i.e. differ by a vector in Zn , we obtain the standard n-torus Rn =Zn . The latter may be viewed as R=Zn , i.e. as the Cartesian product of n circles. The same identification may be carried out modulo a non-standard lattice , yielding a non-

C

F O 0C F O 0C O M

and the convolution theorem takes the form F S F F S

S 2 S 0 , 2 O M , F 2 O 0C ;

F S T F S F T S 2 S 0 , T 2 O 0C , F T 2 O M :

40

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY standard n-torus R =. The correspondence to crystallographic terminology is that ‘standard’ coordinates over the standard 3-torus R3 =Z3 are called ‘fractional’ coordinates over the unit cell; while Cartesian coordinates, e.g. in a˚ngstro¨ms, constitute a set of nonstandard coordinates. Finally, we will denote by I the unit cube 0, 1n and by C" the subset n

presentation, as it is more closely related to the crystallographer’s perception of periodicity (see Section 1.3.4.1). 1.3.2.6.4. Fourier transforms of periodic distributions The content of this section is perhaps the central result in the relation between Fourier theory and crystallography (Section 1.3.4.2.1.1). Let T r T 0 with r defined as in Section 1.3.2.6.2. Then r 2 S 0 , T 0 2 E 0 hence T 0 2 O 0C , so that T 2 S 0 : Zn -periodic distributions are tempered, hence have a Fourier transform. The convolution theorem (Section 1.3.2.5.8) is applicable, giving:

C" fx 2 Rn kxj j < " for all j 1, . . . , ng: 1.3.2.6.2. Zn -periodic distributions in Rn A distribution T 2 D0 Rn is called periodic with period lattice Z (or Zn -periodic) if m T T for all m 2 Zn (in crystallography the period lattice is the direct lattice). Given with compact support T 0 2 E 0 Rn , then P a distribution n 0 T m2Zn m T is a Z -periodic P distribution. Note that we may write T r T 0 , where r m2Zn m consists of Dirac ’s at all nodes of the period lattice Zn . Conversely, any Zn -periodic distribution T may be written as r T 0 for some T 0 2 E 0 . To retrieve such a ‘motif’ T 0 from T, a function will be constructed in such a way that 2 D (hence has compact support) and r 1; then T 0 T. Indicator functions (Section 1.3.2.2) such as 1 or C1=2 cannot be used directly, since they are discontinuous; but regularized versions of them may be constructed by convolution (see Section 1.3.2.3.9.7) as 0 C" , with " and such that 0 x 1 on C1=2 and 0 x 0 outside C3=4 . Then the function n

P

F T F r F T 0 and similarly for F . Since F m exp 2ij m, formally P exp 2ij m Q, F rj m2Zn

say. It P is readily shown that Q is tempered and periodic, so that Q m2Zn m Q, while the periodicity of r implies that exp 2ij

m2Z

m

j 1, . . . , n:

Since the first factors have single isolated zeros at j 0 in C3=4 , Q c (see Section 1.3.2.3.9.4) and hence by periodicity Q cr; convoluting with C1 shows that c 1. Thus we have the fundamental result:

0 n

1 Q 0,

F r r

0

has the desired property. The sum in the denominator contains at most 2n non-zero terms at any given point x and acts as a smoothly varying ‘multiplicity correction’.

so that F T r F T 0 ;

1.3.2.6.3. Identification with distributions over Rn =Zn

i.e., according to Section 1.3.2.3.9.3, P F T 0 m m : F Tj

n

Throughout this section, ‘periodic’ will mean ‘Z -periodic’. Let s 2 R, and let [s] denote the largest integer s. For x x1 , . . . , xn 2 Rn , let ~x be the unique vector ~x1 , . . . , ~xn with ~xj xj xj . If x, y 2 Rn , then ~x ~y if and only if x y 2 Zn . The image of the map x 7 ! ~x is thus Rn modulo Zn , or Rn =Zn . If f is a periodic function over Rn , then ~x ~y implies f x f y; we may thus define a function ~f over Rn =Zn by putting ~f ~x f x for any x 2 Rn such that x ~x 2 Zn . Conversely, if ~f is a function over Rn =Zn , then we may define a function f over Rn by putting f x ~f ~x, and f will be periodic. Periodic functions over Rn may thus be identified with functions over Rn =Zn , and this identification preserves the notions of convergence, local summability and differentiability. Given '0 2 DRn , we may define P m '0 x 'x

m2Zn

The right-hand side is a weighted lattice distribution, whose nodes m 2 Zn are weighted by the sample values F T 0 m of the transform of the motif T 0 at those nodes. Since T 0 2 E 0 , the latter values may be written F T 0 m hTx0 , exp 2im xi: By the structure theorem for distributions with compact support (Section 1.3.2.3.9.7), T 0 is a derivative of finite order of a continuous function; therefore, from Section 1.3.2.4.2.8 and Section 1.3.2.5.8, F T 0 m grows at most polynomially as kmk ! 1 (see also P Section 1.3.2.6.10.3 about this property). Conversely, let W m2Zn wm m be a weighted lattice distribution such that the weights wm grow at most polynomially as kmk ! 1. Then W is a tempered distribution, whose Fourier cotransform Tx P m2Zn wm exp2im x is periodic. If T is now written as r T 0 for some T 0 2 E 0 , then by the reciprocity theorem

m2Zn

since the sum only contains finitely many non-zero terms; ' is periodic, and '~ 2 DRn =Zn . Conversely, if '~ 2 DRn =Zn we ~ x, and '0 2 DRn may define ' 2 ERn periodic by 'x '~ 0 by putting ' ' with constructed as above. By transposition, a distribution T~ 2 D0 Rn =Zn defines a unique ~ 'i; ~ conversely, periodic distribution T 2 D0 Rn by hT, '0 i hT, n 0 ~ T 2 D R periodic defines uniquely T 2 D0 Rn =Zn by ~ 'i ~ hT, '0 i. hT, We may therefore identify Zn -periodic distributions over Rn with distributions over Rn =Zn . We will, however, use mostly the former

wm F T 0 m hTx0 , exp 2im xi: Although the choice of T 0 is not unique, and need not yield back the same motif as may have been used to build T initially, different choices of T 0 will lead to the same coefficients wm because of the periodicity of exp 2im x. The Fourier transformation thus establishes a duality between periodic distributions and weighted lattice distributions. The pair of relations

41

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES i

wm hTx0 , exp 2im xi P Tx wm exp2im x

ii

F T 0 A 1 T m jdet AjF t0 m, so that

m2Zn

F T

are referred to as the Fourier analysis and the Fourier synthesis of T, respectively (there is a discrepancy between this terminology and the crystallographic one, see Section 1.3.4.2.1.1). In other words, any periodic distribution T 2 S 0 may be represented by a Fourier series (ii), whose coefficients are calculated by (i). The convergence of (ii) towards T in S 0 will be investigated later (Section 1.3.2.6.10).

P m2Zn

F t0 mA

1 T

m

in non-standard coordinates, while P F t F t0 mm m2Zn

in standard coordinates. The reciprocity theorem may then be written:

1.3.2.6.5. The case of non-standard period lattices Let P denote the non-standard lattice consisting of all vectors of the form j1 mj aj , where the mj are rational integers and a1 , . . . , an are n linearly independentPvectors in Rn . Let R be the corresponding lattice distribution: R x2 x . Let A be the non-singular n n matrix whose successive columns are the coordinates of vectors a1 , . . . , an in the standard basis of Rn ; A will be called the period matrix of , and the mapping x 7 ! Ax will be denoted by A. According to Section 1.3.2.3.9.5 we have P hR, 'i 'Am hr, A 1 # 'i jdet Aj 1 hA# r, 'i

iii iv

Wj jdet Aj 1 hTx0 , exp 2ij xi, P Tx Wj exp2ij x

j 2 L

j 2

in non-standard coordinates, or equivalently: v vi

wm htx0 , exp 2im xi, m 2 Zn P tx wm exp2im x m2Zn

in standard coordinates. It gives an n-dimensional Fourier series representation for any periodic distribution over Rn . The convergence of such series in S 0 Rn will be examined in Section 1.3.2.6.10.

m2Zn

for any ' 2 S , and hence R jdet Aj 1 A# r. By Fourier transformation, according to Section 1.3.2.5.5, F R jdet Aj 1 F A# r A 1 T # F r A 1 T # r,

1.3.2.6.6. Duality between periodization and sampling

which we write:

Let T 0 be a distribution with compact support (the ‘motif’). Its Fourier transform F T 0 is analytic (Section 1.3.2.5.4) and may thus be used as a multiplier. We may rephrase the preceding results as follows: (i) if T 0 is ‘periodized by R’ to give R T 0 , then F T 0 is ‘sampled by R ’ to give jdet Aj 1 R F T 0 ; (ii) if F T 0 is ‘sampled by R ’ to give R F T 0 , then T 0 is ‘periodized by R’ to give jdet AjR T 0 . Thus the Fourier transformation establishes a duality between the periodization of a distribution by a period lattice and the sampling of its transform at the nodes of lattice reciprocal to . This is a particular instance of the convolution theorem of Section 1.3.2.5.8. At this point it is traditional to break the symmetry between F and F which distribution theory has enabled us to preserve even in the presence of periodicity, and to perform two distinct identifications: (i) a -periodic distribution T will be handled as a distribution T~ on Rn =, was done in Section 1.3.2.6.3; P (ii) a weighted lattice distribution W m2Zn Wm A 1 T m will be identified with the collection fWm jm 2 Zn g of its n-tuply indexed coefficients.

F R jdet Aj 1 R with R jdet AjA 1 T # r: R is a lattice distribution: P P A 1 T m j R m2Zn

j 2

associated with the reciprocal lattice whose basis vectors a1 , . . . , an are the columns of A 1 T . Since the latter matrix is equal to the adjoint matrix (i.e. the matrix of co-factors) of A divided by det A, the components of the reciprocal basis vectors can be written down explicitly (see Section 1.3.4.2.1.1 for the crystallographic case n 3). A distribution T will be called -periodic if j T T for all j 2 ; as previously, T may be written R T 0 for some motif distribution T 0 with compact support. By Fourier transformation, F T jdet Aj 1 R F T 0 P F T 0 j j jdet Aj 1 j 2

jdet Aj

1

P

m2Zn

F T 0 A 1 T mA

1 T

m

1.3.2.6.7. The Poisson summation formula Let ' 2 S , so that F ' 2 S . Let R be the lattice distribution associated to lattice , with period matrix A, and let R be associated to the reciprocal lattice . Then we may write:

so that F T is a weighted reciprocal-lattice distribution, the weight attached to node j 2 being jdet Aj 1 times the value F T 0 j of the Fourier transform of the motif T 0 . This result may be further simplified if T and its motif T 0 are referred to the standard period lattice Zn by defining t and t0 so that T A# t, T 0 A# t0 , t r t0 . Then

hR, 'i hR, F F 'i hF R, F 'i jdet Aj 1 hR , F 'i

F T 0 j jdet AjF t0 AT j , hence

i.e.

42

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY P probability theory (Grenander, 1952) and play an important role 'x jdet Aj 1 F 'j : in several direct approaches to the crystallographic phase problem x2 j 2 This identity, which also holds for F , is called the Poisson [see Sections 1.3.4.2.1.10, 1.3.4.5.2.2(e)]. Many aspects of their summation formula. Its usefulness follows from the fact that the theory and applications are presented in the book by Grenander & speed of decrease at infinity of ' and F ' are inversely related Szego¨ (1958). P

(Section 1.3.2.4.4.3), so that if one of the series (say, the left-hand side) is slowly convergent, the other (say, the right-hand side) will be rapidly convergent. This procedure has been used by Ewald (1921) [see also Bertaut (1952), Born & Huang (1954)] to evaluate lattice sums (Madelung constants) involved in the calculation of the internal electrostatic energy of crystals (see Chapter 3.4 in this volume on convergence acceleration techniques for crystallographic lattice sums). When ' is a multivariate Gaussian 'x GB x exp

1.3.2.6.9.1. Toeplitz forms Let f 2 L1 R=Z be real-valued, so that its Fourier coefficients satisfy the relations c m f cm f . The Hermitian form in n 1 complex variables n P n P Tn f u u c u 0 0

is called the nth Toeplitz form associated to f. It is a straightforward consequence of the convolution theorem and of Parseval’s identity that Tn f may be written: n 2 R1 P Tn f u u exp2ix f x dx:

1 T 2x Bx,

then F 'j jdet 2B 1 j1=2 GB 1 j ,

0 0

and Poisson’s summation formula for a lattice with period matrix A reads: P GB Am jdet Aj 1 jdet 2B 1 j1=2 n

m2Z

P m2Zn

1.3.2.6.9.2. The Toeplitz–Caratheódory–Herglotz theorem It was shown independently by Toeplitz (1911b), Caratheódory (1911) and Herglotz (1911) that a function f 2 L1 is almost everywhere non-negative if and only if the Toeplitz forms Tn f associated to f are positive semidefinite for all values of n. This is equivalent to the infinite system of determinantal inequalities 0 1 c0 c 1 c n B c1 c0 c 1 C B C B C Dn det B c1 C 0 for all n: @ c 1A cn c1 c0

G42 B 1 A 1 T m

or equivalently P P GC m jdet 2C 1 j1=2 G42 C 1 m m2Zn

m2Zn

with C AT BA: 1.3.2.6.8. Convolution of Fourier series Let S R S 0 and T R T 0 be two -periodic distributions, the motifs S 0 and T 0 having compact support. The convolution S T does not exist, because S and T do not satisfy the support condition (Section 1.3.2.3.9.7). However, the three distributions R, S 0 and T 0 do satisfy the generalized support condition, so that their convolution is defined; then, by associativity and commutativity:

The Dn are called Toeplitz determinants. Their application to the crystallographic phase problem is described in Section 1.3.4.2.1.10.

R S 0 T 0 S T 0 S 0 T: By Fourier transformation and by the convolution theorem:

1.3.2.6.9.3. Asymptotic distribution of eigenvalues of Toeplitz forms The eigenvalues of the Hermitian form Tn f are defined as the n 1 real roots of the characteristic equation det fTn f g 0. They will be denoted by

R F S 0 T 0 R F S 0 F T 0

1 , 2 , . . . , n1 :

n

n

n

It is easily shown that if m f x M for all x, then m n M for all n and all 1, . . . , n 1. As n ! 1 these bounds, and the distribution of the n within these bounds, can be made more precise by introducing two new notions. (i) Essential bounds: define ess inf f as the largest m such that f x m except for values of x forming a set of measure 0; and define ess sup f similarly. (ii) Equal distribution. For each n, consider two sets of n 1 real numbers:

F T 0 R F S 0 : Let fUj gj 2 , fVj gj 2 and fWj gj 2 be the sets of Fourier coefficients associated to S, T and S T 0 S 0 T, respectively. Identifying the coefficients of j for j 2 yields the forward version of the convolution theorem for Fourier series: Wj jdet AjUj Vj : The backward version of the theorem requires that T be infinitely differentiable. The distribution S T is then well defined and its Fourier coefficients fQj gj 2 are given by P Qj Uh Vj h :

n

n

n

a1 , a2 , . . . , an1 ,

n

n

n

and b1 , b2 , . . . , bn1 :

n Assume that for each and each n, jan j < K and jb j < K with n K independent of and n. The sets fan g and fb g are said to be equally distributed in K, K if, for any function F over K, K,

h2

1.3.2.6.9. Toeplitz forms, Szego¨’s theorem

n1 1 X Fan n!1 n 1 1

Toeplitz forms were first investigated by Toeplitz (1907, 1910, 1911a). They occur in connection with the ‘trigonometric moment problem’ (Shohat & Tamarkin, 1943; Akhiezer, 1965) and

lim

43

Fbn 0:

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES We may now state an important theorem of Szego¨ (1915, 1920). Let f 2 L1 , and put m ess inf f , M ess sup f. If m and M are finite, then for any continuous function F defined in the interval [m, M] we have

k f k1

It is a convolution algebra: If f and g are in L1 , then f g is in L1 . The mth Fourier coefficient cm f of f,

1

cm f

0

jmjp

may be written, by virtue of the convolution theorem, as Sp f Dp f , where

M ess sup f : n

Dp x

1

0

> 0, and let Dn f det Tn f .

Dn f

n1 Q 1

n ,

hence log Dn f

n1 P 1

lim Dn f 1=n1 exp

n!1

Cp f

log n :

Putting F log , it follows that (

R1

exp2imx

sin2p 1x sin x

is the Dirichlet kernel. Because Dp comprises numerous slowly decaying oscillations, both positive and negative, Sp f may not converge towards f in a strong sense as p ! 1. Indeed, spectacular pathologies are known to exist where the partial sums, examined pointwise, diverge everywhere (Zygmund, 1959, Chapter VIII). When f is piecewise continuous, but presents isolated jumps, convergence near these jumps is marred by the Gibbs phenomenon: Sp f always ‘overshoots the mark’ by about 9%, the area under the spurious peak tending to 0 as p ! 1 but not its height [see Larmor (1934) for the history of this phenomenon]. By contrast, the arithmetic mean of the partial sums, also called the pth Cesa`ro sum,

Z n1 1 X s lim n f xs dx: n!1 n 1 1 (iii) Let m > 0, so that Then

X jmjp

n

Thus, when f 0, the condition number n1 =1 of Tn f tends towards the ‘essential dynamic range’ M=m of f. (ii) Let F s where s is a positive integer. Then

n

f x exp 2imx dx

is bounded: jcm f j k f k1 , and by the Riemann–Lebesgue lemma cm f ! 0 as m ! 1. By the convolution theorem, cm f g cm f cm g. The pth partial sum Sp f of the Fourier series of f, P Sp f x cm f exp2imx,

1.3.2.6.9.4. Consequences of Szego¨’s theorem (i) If the ’s are ordered in ascending order, then n lim n!1 n1

R1 0

In other words, the eigenvalues n of the Tn and the values f =n 2 of f on a regular subdivision of ]0, 1[ are equally distributed. Further investigations into the spectra of Toeplitz matrices may be found in papers by Hartman & Wintner (1950, 1954), Kac et al. (1953), Widom (1965), and in the notes by Hirschman & Hughes (1977).

m ess inf f ,

j f xj dx < 1:

0

Z n1 1 X n lim F F f x dx: n!1 n 1 1

n lim n!1 1

R1

1 S0 f . . . Sp f , p1

converges to f in the sense of the L1 norm: kCp f f k1 ! 0 as p ! 1. If furthermore f is continuous, then the convergence is uniform, i.e. the error is bounded everywhere by a quantity which goes to 0 as p ! 1. It may be shown that

) log f x dx :

0

Cp f Fp f ,

Further terms in this limit were obtained by Szego¨ (1952) and interpreted in probabilistic terms by Kac (1954). where 1.3.2.6.10. Convergence of Fourier series

jmj exp2imx p1 jmjp 1 sinp 1x 2 p1 sin x

Fp x

The investigation of the convergence of Fourier series and of more general trigonometric series has been the subject of intense study for over 150 years [see e.g. Zygmund (1976)]. It has been a constant source of new mathematical ideas and theories, being directly responsible for the birth of such fields as set theory, topology and functional analysis. This section will briefly survey those aspects of the classical results in dimension 1 which are relevant to the practical use of Fourier series in crystallography. The books by Zygmund (1959), Tolstov (1962) and Katznelson (1968) are standard references in the field, and Dym & McKean (1972) is recommended as a stimulant.

X

1

is the Feje´r kernel. Fp has over Dp the advantage of being everywhere positive, so that the Cesa`ro sums Cp f of a positive function f are always positive. The de la Valleé Poussin kernel Vp x 2F2p1 x

Fp x

has a trapezoidal distribution of coefficients and is such that cm Vp 1 if jmj p 1; therefore Vp f is a trigonometric polynomial with the same Fourier coefficients as f over that range of values of m.

1.3.2.6.10.1. Classical L1 theory The space L1 R=Z consists of (equivalence classes of) complexvalued functions f on the circle which are summable, i.e. for which

44

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY and because the family of functions fexp2imxgm2Z constitutes an orthonormal Hilbert basis for L2 . The sequence of Fourier coefficients cm f of f 2 L2 belongs to the space `2 Z of square-summable sequences: P jcm f j2 < 1:

The Poisson kernel Pr x 1 2

1 X rm cos 2mx m1

1 r2 2r cos 2mx r2

1

m2Z

Conversely, every element c cm of `2 is the sequence of Fourier coefficients of a unique function in L2 . The inner product P c, d c m dm

with 0 r < 1 gives rise to an Abel summation procedure [Tolstov (1962, p. 162); Whittaker & Watson (1927, p. 57)] since P Pr f x cm f rjmj exp2imx:

m2Z

m2Z

makes ` into a Hilbert space, and the map from L2 to `2 established by the Fourier transformation is an isometry (Parseval/Plancherel): 2

Compared with the other kernels, Pr has the disadvantage of not being a trigonometric polynomial; however, Pr is the real part of the Cauchy kernel (Cartan, 1961; Ahlfors, 1966): 1 r exp2ix Pr x Re 1 r exp2ix

k f kL2 kc f k`2 or equivalently: f , g c f , cg: This is a useful property in applications, since ( f , g) may be calculated either from f and g themselves, or from their Fourier coefficients c f and cg (see Section 1.3.4.4.6) for crystallographic applications). By virtue of the orthogonality of the basis fexp2imxgm2Z , the partial sum Sp f is the best mean-square fit to f in the linear subspace of L2 spanned by fexp2imxgjmjp , and hence (Bessel’s inequality) P P jcm f j2 k f k22 jcM f j2 k f k22 :

and hence provides a link between trigonometric series and analytic functions of a complex variable. Other methods of summation involve forming a moving average of f by convolution with other sequences of functions p x besides Dp of Fp which ‘tend towards ’ as p ! 1. The convolution is performed by multiplying the Fourier coefficients of f by those of p , so that one forms the quantities P Sp0 f x cm p cm f exp2imx: jmjp

jmjp

For instance the ‘sigma factors’ of Lanczos (Lanczos, 1966, p. 65), defined by

1.3.2.6.10.3. The viewpoint of distribution theory The use of distributions enlarges considerably the range of behaviour which can be accommodated in a Fourier series, even in the case of general dimension n where classical theories meet with even more difficulties than in dimension 1. Let fwm gm2Z be a sequence of complex numbers with jwm j growing at most polynomially as jmj ! 1, say jwm j CjmjK . Then the sequence fwm =2imK2 gm2Z is in `2 and even defines a continuous function f 2 L2 R=Z and an associated tempered distribution Tf 2 D0 R=Z. Differentiation of Tf K 2 times then yields a tempered distribution whose Fourier transform leads to the original sequence of coefficients. Conversely, by the structure theorem for distributions with compact support (Section 1.3.2.3.9.7), the motif T 0 of a Z-periodic distribution is a derivative of finite order of a continuous function; hence its Fourier coefficients will grow at most polynomially with jmj as jmj ! 1. Thus distribution theory allows the manipulation of Fourier series whose coefficients exhibit polynomial growth as their order goes to infinity, while those derived from functions had to tend to 0 by virtue of the Riemann–Lebesgue lemma. The distributiontheoretic approach to Fourier series holds even in the case of general dimension n, where classical theories meet with even more difficulties (see Ash, 1976) than in dimension 1.

sinm=p , m=p

m

lead to a summation procedure whose behaviour is intermediate between those using the Dirichlet and the Feje´r kernels; it corresponds to forming a moving average of f by convolution with p p

1=2p; 1=2p Dp ,

which is itself the convolution of a ‘rectangular pulse’ of width 1=p and of the Dirichlet kernel of order p. A review of the summation problem in crystallography is given in Section 1.3.4.2.1.3. 1.3.2.6.10.2. Classical L2 theory The space L2 R=Z of (equivalence classes of) square-integrable complex-valued functions f on the circle is contained in L1 R=Z, since by the Cauchy–Schwarz inequality !2 R1 2 k f k1 j f xj 1 dx 0

R1

!

R1

2

j f xj dx

0

! 1 dx k f k22 1: 2

0 1

1.3.2.7. The discrete Fourier transformation L2 , 1

Thus all the results derived for L hold for a great simplification over the situation in R or Rn where neither L nor L2 was contained in the other. However, more can be proved in L2 , because L2 is a Hilbert space (Section 1.3.2.2.4) for the inner product f , g

R1

jMjp

1.3.2.7.1. Shannon’s sampling theorem and interpolation formula Let ' 2 ERn be such that F ' has compact support K. Let ' be sampled at the nodes of a lattice , yielding the lattice distribution R '. The Fourier transform of this sampled version of ' is

f xgx dx,

F R ' jdet AjR ,

0

45

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES which is essentially periodized by period lattice , with period matrix A. Let us assume that is such that the translates of K by different period vectors of are disjoint. Then we may recover from R by masking the contents of a ‘unit cell’ V of (i.e. a fundamental domain for the action of in Rn ) whose boundary does not meet K. If V is the indicator function of V , then

which may be viewed as the n-dimensional equivalent of the Euclidean algorithm for integer division: l is the ‘remainder’ of the division by A of a vector in B , the quotient being the matrix D. 1.3.2.7.2.2. Sublattice relations for reciprocal lattices Let us now consider the two reciprocal lattices A and B . Their period matrices A 1 T and B 1 T are related by: B 1 T A 1 T NT , where NT is an integer matrix; or equivalently by B 1 T DT A 1 T . This shows that the roles are reversed in that B is a sublattice of A , which we may write:

V R : Transforming both sides by F yields 1 ' F V F R ' , jdet Aj i.e.

i

1 ' F V R ' V

ii

since jdet Aj is the volume V of V . This interpolation formula is traditionally credited to Shannon (1949), although it was discovered much earlier by Whittaker (1915). It shows that ' may be recovered from its sample values on (i.e. from R ') provided is sufficiently fine that no overlap (or ‘aliasing’) occurs in the periodization of by the dual lattice . The interpolation kernel is the transform of the normalized indicator function of a unit cell of containing the support K of . If K is contained in a sphere of radius 1= and if and are rectangular, the length of each basis vector of must be greater than 2=, and thus the sampling interval must be smaller than =2. This requirement constitutes the Shannon sampling criterion.

iii

l 2A =B

A

[ l 2A =B

where TB=A and TA=B

l B :

l DT A :

P l2B =A

P l 2A =B

l

l

are (finite) residual-lattice distributions. We may incorporate the factor 1=jdet Dj in (i) and i into these distributions and define 1 1 SB=A TB=A , SA=B T : jdet Dj jdet Dj A=B Since jdet Dj B : A A : B , convolution with SB=A and SA=B has the effect of averaging the translates of a distribution under the elements (or ‘cosets’) of the residual lattices B =A and A =B , respectively. This process will be called ‘coset averaging’. Eliminating R A and R B between (i) and (ii), and R A and R B between i and ii , we may write:

A DB : (ii) Call two vectors in B congruent modulo A if their difference lies in A . Denote the set of congruence classes (or ‘cosets’) by B =A , and the number of these classes by B : A . The ‘coset decomposition’ [ B l A l2B =A

represents B as the disjoint union of B : A translates of A : B =A is a finite lattice with B : A elements, called the residual lattice of B modulo A . The two descriptions are connected by the relation B : A det D det N, which follows from a volume calculation. We may also combine (i) and (ii) into [

[

1.3.2.7.2.3. Relation between lattice distributions The above relations between lattices may be rewritten in terms of the corresponding lattice distributions as follows: 1 i RA D# R B jdet Dj ii R B TB=A R A 1 i R B DT # R A jdet Dj ii R A TA=B R B

1.3.2.7.2.1. Geometric description of sublattices Let A be a period lattice in Rn with matrix A, and let A be the lattice reciprocal to A , with period matrix A 1 T . Let B , B, B be defined similarly, and let us suppose that A is a sublattice of B , i.e. that B A as a set. The relation between A and B may be described in two different fashions: (i) multiplicatively, and (ii) additively. (i) We may write A BN for some non-singular matrix N with integer entries. N may be viewed as the period matrix of the coarser lattice A with respect to the period basis of the finer lattice B . It will be more convenient to write A DB, where D BNB 1 is a rational matrix (with integer determinant since det D det N) in terms of which the two lattices are related by

B

A

The residual lattice A =B is finite, with A : B det D det N B : A , and we may again combine i and ii into

1.3.2.7.2. Duality between subdivision and decimation of period lattices

iii

B DT A

l DB

l2B =A

i0

R A D# SB=A R A

ii0

R B SB=A D# R B

i0

R B DT # SA=B R B

ii0

R A SA=B DT # R A :

These identities show that period subdivision by convolution with

46

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY SA=B )

Therefore, the duality between subdivision and decimation may be viewed as another aspect of that between convolution and multiplication. There is clearly a strong analogy between the sampling/ periodization duality of Section 1.3.2.6.6 and the decimation/ subdivision duality, which is viewed most naturally in terms of subgroup relationships: both sampling and decimation involve restricting a function to a discrete additive subgroup of the domain over which it is initially given.

SB=A (respectively on the one hand, and period decimation by ‘dilation’ by D# on the other hand, are mutually inverse operations on R A and R B (respectively R A and R B ). 1.3.2.7.2.4. Relation between Fourier transforms Finally, let us consider the relations between the Fourier transforms of these lattice distributions. Recalling the basic relation of Section 1.3.2.6.5, 1 F R A R jdet Aj A 1 by (ii) T R B jdet DBj A=B 1 1 T R jdet Dj A=B jdet Bj B

1.3.2.7.2.5. Sublattice relations in terms of periodic distributions The usual presentation of this duality is not in terms of lattice distributions, but of periodic distributions obtained by convolving them with a motif. Given T 0 2 E 0 Rn , let us form R A T 0 , then decimate its transform 1=jdet AjR A F T 0 by keeping only its values at the points of the coarser lattice B DT A ; as a result, R A is replaced by 1=jdet DjR B , and the reverse transform then yields 1 by (ii), R B T 0 SB=A R A T 0 jdet Dj

i.e. F R B F R A SA=B

iv and similarly:

F R B SB=A F R A :

v

Thus R A (respectively R B ), a decimated version of R B (respectively R A ), is transformed by F into a subdivided version of F R B (respectively F R A ). The converse is also true: 1 F R B R jdet Bj B 1 1 by (i) DT # R A jdet Bj jdet Dj 1 T # D R jdet Aj A

which is the coset-averaged version of the original R A T 0 . The converse situation is analogous to that of Shannon’s sampling theorem. Let a function ' 2 ERn whose transform F ' has compact support be sampled as R B ' at the nodes of B . Then 1 F R B ' R jdet Bj B is periodic with period lattice B . If the sampling lattice B is decimated to A DB , the inverse transform becomes 1 F R A ' R jdet Dj A R B by (ii) , SA=B

i.e. F R B DT # F R A

iv0

hence becomes periodized more finely by averaging over the cosets of A =B . With this finer periodization, the various copies of Supp may start to overlap (a phenomenon called ‘aliasing’), indicating that decimation has produced too coarse a sampling of '.

and similarly v0

F R A D# F R B :

Thus R B (respectively R A ), a subdivided version of R A (respectively R B ) is transformed by F into a decimated version of F R A (respectively F R B ). Therefore, the Fourier transform exchanges subdivision and decimation of period lattices for lattice distributions. Further insight into this phenomenon is provided by applying F to both sides of (iv) and (v) and invoking the convolution theorem: iv00 R A F S R B

1.3.2.7.3. Discretization of the Fourier transformation Let '0 2 ERn be such that 0 F '0 has compact support (' is said to be band-limited). Then ' R A '0 is A -periodic, and F ' 1=jdet AjR A 0 is such that only a finite number of points A of A have a non-zero Fourier coefficient 0 A attached to them. We may therefore find a decimation B DT A of A such that the distinct translates of Supp 0 by vectors of B do not intersect. The distribution can be uniquely recovered from R B by the procedure of Section 1.3.2.7.1, and we may write: 1 R B R R A 0 jdet Aj B 1 R R B 0 jdet Aj A 1 R B 0 ; R TA=B jdet Aj B 0

A=B

R B F SB=A R A :

v00

These identities show that multiplication by the transform of the period-subdividing distribution SA=B (respectively SB=A ) has the effect of decimating R B to R A (respectively R A to R B ). They clearly imply that, if l 2 B =A and l 2 A =B , then F S l 1 if l 0 i:e: if l belongs A=B

to the class of A , 0 if l 6 0; F SB=A l 1 if l 0 i:e: if l belongs to the class of B ,

have these rearrangements being legitimate because 0 and TA=B compact supports which are intersection-free under the action of B . By virtue of its B -periodicity, this distribution is entirely ~ with respect to : characterized by its ‘motif’ B

0 if l 6 0:

47

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES ~

l l l l k N 1 k:

1 T R B 0 : jdet Aj A=B

1 T ~ ~ Denoting 'Bk by k and A k by k , the relation between ! and may be written in the equivalent form

Similarly, ' may be uniquely recovered by Shannon interpolation from the distribution sampling its values at the nodes of B D 1 A B is a subdivision of B ). By virtue of its A -periodicity, this distribution is completely characterized by its motif:

i

'~ TB=A ' TB=A R A '0 : Let l 2 B =A and l 2 A =B , and define the two sets of coefficients ~ 1 'l

ii

X 1 k exp 2ik N 1 k jdet Nj n T n k 2Z =N Z X k exp2ik N 1 k, k k

k2Zn =NZn

'l lA

for any lA 2 A ~ where the summations are now over finite residual lattices in all choices of lA give the same ', 0 standard form. ~ 2 l l lB for the unique lB (if it exists) Equations (i) and (ii) describe two mutually inverse linear 0 such that l lB 2 Supp , transformations F N and F N between two vector spaces WN 0 if no such lB exists: and WN of dimension jdet Nj. F N [respectively F N] is the discrete Fourier (respectively inverse Fourier) transform associated Define the two distributions to matrix N. P ~ l ! 'l The vector spaces WN and WN may be viewed from two different l2B =A standpoints: (1) as vector spaces of weighted residual-lattice distributions, of and the form xTB=A and xTA=B ; the canonical basis of WN P ~ l :

(respectively WN ) then consists of the k for k 2 Zn =NZn l l 2A =B [respectively k for k 2 Zn =NT Zn ]; (2) as vector spaces of weight vectors for the jdet Nj -functions The relation between ! and has two equivalent forms: ); the involved in the expression for TB=A (respectively TA=B (respectively W ) consists of weight vectors canonical basis of W N i R A ! F R B N uk (respectively vk ) giving weight 1 to element k (respectively k ) ii F R A ! R B : and 0 to the others. These two spaces are said to be ‘isomorphic’ (a relation denoted By (i), R A ! jdet BjR B F . Both sides are weighted lattice distributions concentrated at the nodes of B , and equating ), the isomorphism being given by the one-to-one correspondence: the weights at lB l lA gives P P X ! kk $ kuk 1 ~ ~ l exp 2il l lA : 'l k k P P jdet Dj l 2 =

k k $ k vk : B A k

Since l 2 A , l lA is an integer, hence X 1 ~ exp 2il l: ~ l 'l jdet Dj l 2 = A

The second viewpoint will be adopted, as it involves only linear algebra. However, it is most helpful to keep the first one in mind and to think of the data or results of a discrete Fourier transform as representing (through their sets of unique weights) two periodic lattice distributions related by the full, distribution-theoretic Fourier transform. We therefore view WN (respectively WN ) as the vector space of complex-valued functions over the finite residual lattice B =A (respectively A =B ) and write:

B

By (ii), we have 1 1 R B 0 R TA=B F R A !: jdet Aj B jdet Aj Both sides are weighted lattice distributions concentrated at the nodes of B , and equating the weights at lA l lB gives P ~ ~ exp2il l l : 'l l Since l 2 B , l

WN LB =A LZn =NZn

B

l2B =A

k

WN LA =B LZn =NT Zn

lB is ~

an integer, hence P ~ exp2il l : 'l l

since a vector such as is in fact the function k 7 ! k. The two spaces WN and WN may be equipped with the following Hermitian inner products:

l2B =A

Now the decimation/subdivision relations between A and B may be written:

', W

A DB BN,

, W

so that l Bk l A 1 T k

for k 2 Zn for k 2 Zn

P 'k k k

P k k , k

which makes each of them into a Hilbert space. The canonical bases fuk jk 2 Zn =NZn g and fvk jk 2 Zn =NT Zn g and WN and WN are orthonormal for their respective product.

with A 1 T B 1 T N 1 T , hence finally

48

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY A =B , then for all multi-indices p p1 , p2 , . . . , pn Dp ck F N2ik p Ck

1.3.2.7.4. Matrix representation of the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) By virtue of definitions (i) and (ii), 1 X exp 2ik N 1 kuk F Nvk jdet Nj k X exp2ik N 1 kvk F Nuk

Dp Ck F N 2ikp ck or equivalently F NDp ck 2ik p Ck F NDp Ck 2ikp ck:

k

(4) Convolution property. Let w 2 WN and F 2 WN (respectively c and C) be related by the DFT, and define P wk 0 ck k 0 w ck

so that F N and F N may be represented, in the canonical bases of WN and WN , by the following matrices: 1 F Nkk exp 2ik N 1 k jdet Nj F N exp2ik N 1 k:

k 0 2Zn =NZn

F Ck

k k

and 1 F Ck jdet Nj F NF Ck w ck:

F Nw ck

Since addition on Zn =NZn and Zn =NT Zn is modular, this type of convolution is called cyclic convolution. (5) Parseval/Plancherel property. If w, c, F, C are as above, then 1 F NF, F NCW F, CW jdet Nj 1 F Nw, F NcW w, cW : jdet Nj (6) Period 4. When N is symmetric, so that the ranges of indices k and k can be identified, it makes sense to speak of powers of F N and F N. Then the ‘standardized’ matrices 1=jdet Nj1=2 F N and 1=jdet Nj1=2 F N are unitary matrices whose fourth power is the identity matrix (Section 1.3.2.4.3.4); their eigenvalues are therefore 1 and i.

F N F 1 F 2 . . . F n ,

F j kj ; kj

2i

j

,

and F N F 1 F 2 . . . F n , where

0

k :

F Nw ck Fk Ck

Let the index vectors k and k be ordered in the same way as the elements in a Fortran array, e.g. for k with k 1 increasing fastest, k 2 next fastest, . . . , k n slowest; then

k j k j

0

Fk Ck n

F NF Ck jdet Njwkck

gives rise to a tensor product structure for the DFT matrices. The tensor product of matrices is defined as follows: 0 1 a11 B . . . a1n B B . .. C A B @ .. . A: an1 B . . . ann B

n

Then

F x F x1 F x2 . . . F xn

1 exp j

0

k 2Z =NT Z

When N is symmetric, Zn =NZn and Zn =NT Zn may be identified in a natural manner, and the above matrices are symmetric. When N is diagonal, say N diag1 , 2 , . . . , n , then the tensor product structure of the full multidimensional Fourier transform (Section 1.3.2.4.2.4)

where

P

k j k j : Fj kj ; kj exp 2i j

1.3.3. Numerical computation of the discrete Fourier transform 1.3.3.1. Introduction The Fourier transformation’s most remarkable property is undoubtedly that of turning convolution into multiplication. As distribution theory has shown, other valuable properties – such as the shift property, the conversion of differentiation into multiplication by monomials, and the duality between periodicity and sampling – are special instances of the convolution theorem. This property is exploited in many areas of applied mathematics and engineering (Campbell & Foster, 1948; Sneddon, 1951; Champeney, 1973; Bracewell, 1986). For example, the passing of a signal through a linear filter, which results in its being convolved with the response of the filter to a -function ‘impulse’, may be modelled as a multiplication of the signal’s transform by the transform of the impulse response (also called transfer function). Similarly, the solution of systems of partial differential equations may be turned by Fourier transformation into a division problem for distributions. In both cases, the formulations obtained after Fourier transformation are considerably simpler than the initial ones, and lend themselves to constructive solution techniques.

1.3.2.7.5. Properties of the discrete Fourier transform The DFT inherits most of the properties of the Fourier transforms, but with certain numerical factors (‘Jacobians’) due to the transition from continuous to discrete measure. (1) Linearity is obvious. (2) Shift property. If a k k a and a k k a , where subtraction takes place by modular vector arithmetic in Zn =NZn and Zn =NT Zn , respectively, then the following identities hold: F Nk k exp2ik N 1 kF N k F Nk k exp 2ik N 1 kF N k: (3) Differentiation identities. Let vectors c and C be constructed from '0 2 ERn as in Section 1.3.2.7.3, hence be related by the DFT. If Dp c designates the vector of sample values of Dpx '0 at the points of B =A , and Dp C the vector of values of Dpj 0 at points of

49

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES et1 t2 et1 et2

Whenever the functions to which the Fourier transform is applied are band-limited, or can be well approximated by band-limited functions, the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) provides a means of constructing explicit numerical solutions to the problems at hand. A great variety of investigations in physics, engineering and applied mathematics thus lead to DFT calculations, to such a degree that, at the time of writing, about 50% of all supercomputer CPU time is alleged to be spent calculating DFTs. The straightforward use of the defining formulae for the DFT leads to calculations of size N 2 for N sample points, which become unfeasible for any but the smallest problems. Much ingenuity has therefore been exerted on the design and implementation of faster algorithms for calculating the DFT (McClellan & Rader, 1979; Nussbaumer, 1981; Blahut, 1985; Brigham, 1988). The most famous is that of Cooley & Tukey (1965) which heralded the age of digital signal processing. However, it had been preceded by the prime factor algorithm of Good (1958, 1960), which has lately been the basis of many new developments. Recent historical research (Goldstine, 1977, pp. 249–253; Heideman et al., 1984) has shown that Gauss essentially knew the Cooley–Tukey algorithm as early as 1805 (before Fourier’s 1807 work on harmonic analysis!); while it has long been clear that Dirichlet knew of the basis of the prime factor algorithm and used it extensively in his theory of multiplicative characters [see e.g. Chapter I of Ayoub (1963), and Chapters 6 and 8 of Apostol (1976)]. Thus the computation of the DFT, far from being a purely technical and rather narrow piece of specialized numerical analysis, turns out to have very rich connections with such central areas of pure mathematics as number theory (algebraic and analytic), the representation theory of certain Lie groups and coding theory – to list only a few. The interested reader may consult Auslander & Tolimieri (1979); Auslander, Feig & Winograd (1982, 1984); Auslander & Tolimieri (1985); Tolimieri (1985). One-dimensional algorithms are examined first. The Sande mixed-radix version of the Cooley–Tukey algorithm only calls upon the additive structure of congruence classes of integers. The prime factor algorithm of Good begins to exploit some of their multiplicative structure, and the use of relatively prime factors leads to a stronger factorization than that of Sande. Fuller use of the multiplicative structure, via the group of units, leads to the Rader algorithm; and the factorization of short convolutions then yields the Winograd algorithms. Multidimensional algorithms are at first built as tensor products of one-dimensional elements. The problem of factoring the DFT in several dimensions simultaneously is then examined. The section ends with a survey of attempts at formalizing the interplay between algorithm structure and computer architecture for the purpose of automating the design of optimal DFT code. It was originally intended to incorporate into this section a survey of all the basic notions and results of abstract algebra which are called upon in the course of these developments, but time limitations have made this impossible. This material, however, is adequately covered by the first chapter of Tolimieri et al. (1989) in a form tailored for the same purposes. Similarly, the inclusion of numerous detailed examples of the algorithms described here has had to be postponed to a later edition, but an abundant supply of such examples may be found in the signal processing literature, for instance in the books by McClellan & Rader (1979), Blahut (1985), and Tolimieri et al. (1989).

e t et et et 1 , t 2 Z:

1

Thus e defines an isomorphism between the additive group R=Z (the reals modulo the integers) and the multiplicative group of complex numbers of modulus 1. It follows that the mapping ` 7 ! e`=N, where ` 2 Z and N is a positive integer, defines an isomorphism between the one-dimensional residual lattice Z=N Z and the multiplicative group of Nth roots of unity. The DFT on N points then relates vectors X and X in W and W through the linear transformations: 1 X X k e k k=N FN : X k N k 2Z=NZ X FN : X k X kek k=N: k2Z=NZ

1.3.3.2.1. The Cooley–Tukey algorithm The presentation of Gentleman & Sande (1966) will be followed first [see also Cochran et al. (1967)]. It will then be reinterpreted in geometric terms which will prepare the way for the treatment of multidimensional transforms in Section 1.3.3.3. Suppose that the number of sample points N is composite, say N N1 N2 . We may write k to the base N1 and k to the base N2 as follows: k k1 N1 k2

k1 2 Z=N1 Z,

k2 2 Z=N2 Z

k1

k2 2 Z=N2 Z:

k

k2

k1 N2

2 Z=N1 Z,

The defining relation for FN may then be written: X X X k2 k1 N2 X k1 N1 k2 k1 2Z=N1 Z k2 2Z=N2 Z

k2 k1 N2 k1 N1 k2 : e N1 N2 The argument of e: may be expanded as k2 k1 k1 k1 k2 k2 k1 k2 , N N1 N2 and the last summand, being an integer, may be dropped: X k2 k1 N2 ( " #) X k k1 X k k2 2 e X k1 N1 k2 e 2 N N2 k1 k2 k k1 : e 1 N1 This computation may be decomposed into five stages, as follows: (i) form the N1 vectors Yk1 of length N2 by the prescription Yk1 k2 X k1 N1 k2 ,

k1 2 Z=N1 Z,

(ii) calculate the N1 transforms 2 Yk1 , Y FN k1

1.3.3.2. One-dimensional algorithms

Yk1

k2 2 Z=N2 Z;

on N2 points:

k1 2 Z=N1 Z;

(iii) form the N2 vectors Zk2 of length N1 by the prescription k k1 Zk2 k1 e 2 Yk1 k2 , k1 2 Z=N1 Z, k2 2 Z=N2 Z; N

Throughout this section we will denote by et the expression exp2it, t 2 R. The mapping t 7 ! et has the following properties:

50

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY (iv) calculate the N2 transforms Zk on N1 points:

X k2 Y0 k2 ek2 =NY1 k2 ,

2

1 Zk , Zk FN 2 2

k2 2 Z=N2 Z;

1,

Z1 k1 X k1

k1 0, . . . , M

1,

X 2k1 Z0 k1 ,

2k1

1

Z1 k1 ,

k1 0, . . . , M

1;

0, . . . , M

1:

k1

1.3.3.2.2. The Good (or prime factor) algorithm 1.3.3.2.2.1. Ring structure on Z=NZ The set Z=NZ of congruence classes of integers modulo an integer N [see e.g. Apostol (1976), Chapter 5] inherits from Z not only the additive structure used in deriving the Cooley–Tukey factorization, but also a multiplicative structure in which the product of two congruence classes mod N is uniquely defined as the class of the ordinary product (in Z) of representatives of each class. The multiplication can be distributed over addition in the usual way, endowing Z=NZ with the structure of a commutative ring. If N is composite, the ring Z=NZ has zero divisors. For example, let N N1 N2 , let n1 N1 mod N, and let n2 N2 mod N: then n1 n2 0 mod N. In the general case, a product of non-zero elements will be zero whenever these elements collect together all the factors of N. These circumstances give rise to a fundamental theorem in the theory of commutative rings, the Chinese Remainder Theorem (CRT), which will now be stated and proved [see Apostol (1976), Chapter 5; Schroeder (1986), Chapter 16].

1

the periodization by N2 being reflected by the fact that Yk1 does not depend on k1 . Writing k k2 k1 N2 and expanding k k1 shows that the phase shift contains both the twiddle factor ek2 k1 =N and 1 . The Cooley–Tukey algorithm is the kernel ek1 k1 =N1 of FN thus naturally associated to the coset decomposition of a lattice modulo a sublattice (Section 1.3.2.7.2). It is readily seen that essentially the same factorization can be obtained for FN, up to the complex conjugation of the twiddle factors. The normalizing constant 1=N arises from the normalizing constants 1=N1 and 1=N2 in FN1 and FN2 , respectively. Factors of 2 are particularly simple to deal with and give rise to a characteristic computational structure called a ‘butterfly loop’. If N 2M, then two options exist: (a) using N1 2 and N2 M leads to collecting the evennumbered coordinates of X into Y0 and the odd-numbered coordinates into Y1

1,

k1 0, . . . , M

k1 X k1 Me , N

This version is due to Sande (Gentleman & Sande, 1966), and the process of separately obtaining even-numbered and odd-numbered results has led to its being referred to as ‘decimation in frequency’ (i.e. decimation along the result index k ). By repeated factoring of the number N of sample points, the calculation of FN and FN can be reduced to a succession of stages, the smallest of which operate on single prime factors of N. The reader is referred to Gentleman & Sande (1966) for a particularly lucid analysis of the programming considerations which help implement this factorization efficiently; see also Singleton (1969). Powers of two are often grouped together into factors of 4 or 8, which are advantageous in that they require fewer complex multiplications than the repeated use of factors of 2. In this approach, large prime factors P are detrimental, since they require a full P2 -size computation according to the defining formula.

According to (i), Xk1 is related to Yk1 by decimation by N1 and offset by k1 . By Section 1.3.2.7.2, FNX k1 is related to FN2 Yk1 by periodization by N2 and phase shift by ek k1 =N, so that X k k1 X k e Yk1 k2 , N k

k2 0, . . . , M

Z0 k1 X k1 X k1 M,

X

Xk1 k X k if k k1 mod N1 , 0 otherwise:

Y1 k2 X 2k2 1,

1:

then obtaining separately the even-numbered and odd-numbered components of X by transforming Z0 and Z1 :

where

1,

k2 0, . . . , M

ek2 =NY1 k2 ,

This is the original version of Cooley & Tukey, and the process of formation of Y0 and Y1 is referred to as ‘decimation in time’ (i.e. decimation along the data index k). (b) using N1 M and N2 2 leads to forming

k1

k2 0, . . . , M

1;

X k2 M Y0 k2

(v) collect X k2 k1 N2 as Zk k1 . 2 If the intermediate transforms in stages (ii) and (iv) are performed in place, i.e. with the results overwriting the data, then at stage (v) the result X k2 k1 N2 will be found at address k1 N1 k2 . This phenomenon is called scrambling by ‘digit reversal’, and stage (v) is accordingly known as unscrambling. has thus been performed as The initial N-point transform FN N1 transforms FN2 on N2 points, followed by N2 transforms 1 on N1 points, thereby reducing the arithmetic cost from FN N1 N2 2 to N1 N2 N1 N2 . The phase shifts applied at stage (iii) are traditionally called ‘twiddle factors’, and the transposition between k1 and k2 can be performed by the fast recursive technique of Eklundh (1972). Clearly, this procedure can be applied recursively if N1 and N2 are themselves composite, leading to an overall arithmetic cost of order N log N if N has no large prime factors. The Cooley–Tukey factorization may also be derived from a geometric rather than arithmetic argument. The decomposition k k1 N1 k2 is associated to a geometric partition of the residual lattice Z=NZ into N1 copies of Z=N2 Z, each translated by k1 2 Z=N1 Z and ‘blown up’ by a factor N1 . This partition in turn induces a (direct sum) decomposition of X as P X Xk1 ,

Y0 k2 X 2k2 ,

k2 0, . . . , M

1.3.3.2.2.2. The Chinese remainder theorem Let N N1 N2 . . . Nd be factored into a product of pairwise coprime integers, so that g.c.d. Ni , Nj 1 for i 6 j. Then the system of congruence equations ` `j mod Nj ,

j 1, . . . , d,

has a unique solution ` mod N. In other words, each ` 2 Z=NZ is

and writing:

51

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES associated in a one-to-one fashion to the d-tuple `1 , `2 , . . . , `d of its residue classes in Z=N1 Z, Z=N2 Z, . . . , Z=Nd Z. The proof of the CRT goes as follows. Let N Y Ni : Qj Nj i6j

k

i1

Then kk

d P

j 1, . . . , d,

d P i; j1

then the integer d P

`

ì qi Qi mod N

kk

is the solution. Indeed, ` `j qj Qj mod Nj

because all terms with i 6 j contain Nj as a factor; and

mod N, j 1, . . . , d,

so that the qj Qj are mutually orthogonal idempotents in the ring Z=NZ, with properties formally similar to those of mutually orthogonal projectors onto subspaces in linear algebra. The analogy is exact, since by virtue of the CRT the ring Z=N Z may be considered as the direct product

mod N

d P

qj Q2j kj kj mod N

1

nj Nj Qj kj kj mod N:

d kk kk X j j mod 1: Nj N j1

Therefore, by the multiplicative property of e:, O d kj kj k k : e e Nj N j1

via the two mutually inverse mappings: (i) ` 7 ! `1 , `2 , . . . , `d by ` `jPmod Nj for each j; (ii) `1 , `2 , . . . , `d 7 ! ` by ` di1 ì qi Qi mod N . The mapping defined by (ii) is sometimes called the ‘CRT reconstruction’ of ` from the `j . These two mappings have the property of sending sums to sums and products to products, i.e:

Let X 2 LZ=NZ be described by a one-dimensional array X k indexed by k. The index mapping (i) turns X into an element of LZ=N1 Z . . . Z=Nd Z described by a d-dimensional array X k1 , .N . . , kd ; by N the latter may be transformed d into a new array X k1 , k2 , . . . , kd . Finally, 1 . . . FN FN the one-dimensional array of results X k will be obtained by reconstructing k according to (ii). The prime factor algorithm, like the Cooley–Tukey algorithm, reindexes a 1D transform to turn it into d separate transforms, but the use of coprime factors and CRT index mapping leads to the further gain that no twiddle factors need to be applied between the successive transforms (see Good, 1971). This makes up for the cost of the added complexity of the CRT index mapping. The natural factorization of N for the prime factor algorithm is thus its factorization into prime powers: FN is then the tensor product of separate transforms (one for each prime power factor Nj pj j ) whose results can be reassembled without twiddle factors. The separate factors pj within each Nj must then be dealt with by another algorithm (e.g. Cooley–Tukey, which does require twiddle factors). Thus, the DFT on a prime number of points remains undecomposable.

` `0 7 ! `1 `01 , `2 `02 , . . . , `d `0d

``0 7 ! `1 `01 , `2 `02 , . . . , `d `0d

`1 `01 , `2 `02 , . . . , `d `0d 7 ! ` `0

`1 `01 , `2 `02 , . . . , `d `0d 7 ! ``0

(the last proof requires using the properties of the idempotents qj Qj ). This may be described formally by stating that the CRT establishes a ring isomorphism: Z=NZ Z=N1 Z . . . Z=Nd Z:

1.3.3.2.2.3. The prime factor algorithm The CRT will now be used to factor the N-point DFT into a tensor product of d transforms, the jth of length Nj . Let the indices k and k be subjected to the following mappings: (i) k 7 ! k1 , k2 , . . . , kd , kj 2 Z=Nj Z, by kj k mod Nj for each j, with reconstruction formula d P

k j q j Qj

j1

and hence

Z=N1 Z Z=N2 Z . . . Z=Nd Z

k

!

d Qj kk X 1 nj Nj k kj mod 1 N j Qj j N j1 d X 1 nj kj kj mod 1, N j j1

mod N for i 6 j,

qj Qj qj Qj

d P

Dividing by N, which may be written as Nj Qj for each j, yields

by the defining relation for qj . It may be noted that

ii

d P

j1

qj Qj 1 mod Nj

2

ki kj Qi qj Qj mod N:

j1

qi Qi qj Qj 0

ki Qi mod N:

Cross terms with i 6 j vanish since they contain all the factors of N, hence

i1

i

ki Qi

i1

Since g.c.d. Nj , Qj 1 there exist integers nj and qj such that nj Nj qj Qj 1,

d P

1.3.3.2.3. The Rader algorithm ki qi Qi mod N;

The previous two algorithms essentially reduce the calculation of the DFT on N points for N composite to the calculation of smaller DFTs on prime numbers of points, the latter remaining irreducible. However, Rader (1968) showed that the p-point DFT for p an odd

i1 k1 , k2 , . . . , kd , kj

2 Z=Nj Z, by kj qj k mod Nj (ii) k 7 ! for each j, with reconstruction formula

52

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY highly composite. In that case, factoring Fp 1 by means of the Cooley–Tukey or Good methods leads to an algorithm of complex An added bonus is that, because ity p log p rather than p2 for Fp. p 1=2 g 1, the elements of Fp 1C can be shown to be either purely real or purely imaginary, which halves the number of real multiplications involved.

prime can itself be factored by invoking some extra arithmetic structure present in Z=pZ. 1.3.3.2.3.1. N an odd prime The ring Z=pZ f0, 1, 2, . . . , p 1g has the property that its p 1 non-zero elements, called units, form a multiplicative group Up. In particular, all units r 2 Up have a unique multiplicative inverse in Z=pZ, i.e. a unit s 2 Up such that rs 1 mod p. This endows Z=pZ with the structure of a finite field. Furthermore, Up is a cyclic group, i.e. consists of the successive powers gm mod p of a generator g called a primitive root mod p (such a g may not be unique, but it always exists). For instance, for p 7, U7 f1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6g is generated by g 3, whose successive powers mod 7 are: g0 1,

g1 3,

g2 2,

g3 6,

g4 4,

1.3.3.2.3.2. N a power of an odd prime This idea was extended by Winograd (1976, 1978) to the treatment of prime powers N p , using the cyclic structure of the multiplicative group of units Up . The latter consists of all those elements of Z=p Z which are not divisible by p, and thus has q p 1 p 1 elements. It is cyclic, and there exist primitive roots g modulo p such that Up f1, g, g2 , g3 , . . . , gq 1 g:

g5 5

The p 1 elements divisible by p, which are divisors of zero, have to be treated separately just as 0 had to be treated separately for N p. When k 62 Up , then k pk1 with k1 2 Z=p 1 Z. The results X pk1 are p-decimated, hence can be obtained via the p 1 -point DFT of the p 1 -periodized data Y: 1 Yk X pk Fp

[see Apostol (1976), Chapter 10]. The basis of Rader’s algorithm is to bring to light a hidden regularity in the matrix Fp by permuting the basis vectors uk and vk of LZ=pZ as follows: u00 u0

u0m uk v00 v0 v0m

with k gm , m

vk

m 1, . . . , p

with k g ,

1

1;

m 1, . . . , p

with Y k1

1;

eg

m m=p

2, 2,

with Zk2 X pk2 ,

X1 gm

Cm mY m 1

m0

Y 0

pP2

Cm

mZm

m0

Y 0 C Zm ,

m 0, . . . , p

qP 1

X gm egm m=p

m0

then carrying out the multiplication by the skew-circulant matrix core as a convolution. Thus the DFT of size p may be reduced to two DFTs of size p 1 (dealing, respectively, with p-decimated results and p-decimated data) and a convolution of size q p 1 p 1. The latter may be ‘diagonalized’ into a multiplication by purely real or purely imaginary numbers (because gq =2 1) by two DFTs, whose factoring in turn leads to DFTs of size p 1 and p 1. This method, applied recursively, allows the complete decomposition of the DFT on p points into arbitrarily small DFTs.

k pP2

k2 2 Z=p 1 Z

(the p 1 -periodicity follows implicity from the fact that the transform on the right-hand side is independent of k1 2 Z=pZ). Finally, the contribution X1 from all k 2 Up may be calculated by reindexing by the powers of a primitive root g modulo p , i.e. by writing

2:

Thus the ‘core’ Cp of matrix Fp, of size p 1 p 1, formed by the elements with two non-zero indices, has a so-called skew-circulant structure because element m , m depends only on m m. Simplification may now occur because multiplication by Cp is closely related to a cyclic convolution. Introducing the in notation Cm egm=p we may write the relation Y FpY the permuted bases as P Y 0 Y k Y m 1 Y 0

X k1 p 1 k2 :

where X0 contains the contributions from k 2 = Up and X1 those from k 2 Up . By a converse of the previous calculation, X0 arises from p-decimated data Z, hence is the p 1 -periodization of the p 1 -point DFT of these data: 1 Zk2 X0 p 1 k1 k2 Fp

for all m 0, . . . , p

k2 2Z=pZ

X k X0 k X1 k ,

element 0, 0 1 element 0, m 1 1 for all m 0, . . . p

P

When k 2 Up , then we may write

where g is a primitive root mod p. With respect to these new bases, the matrix representing Fp will have the following elements:

element m 1, 0 1 for all m 0, . . . , p k k element m 1, m 1 e p

1

2,

where Z is defined by Zm Y p m 2, m 0, . . . , p 2. Thus Y may be obtained by cyclic convolution of C and Z, which may for instance be calculated by C Z Fp 1Fp 1C Fp 1Z,

1.3.3.2.3.3. N a power of 2 When N 2 , the same method can be applied, except for a slight modification in the calculation of X1 . There is no primitive root modulo 2 for > 2: the group U2 is the direct product of two cyclic groups, the first (of order 2) generated by 1, the second (of order N=4) generated by 3 or 5. One then uses a representation

where denotes the component-wise multiplication of vectors. Since p is odd, p 1 is always divisible by 2 and may even be

53

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES w0 , w1 , . . . , wN 1 be obtained by cyclic convolution of U and V:

m1 m2

k 1 5 m1

k 1 5

m2

wn

NP1

um v n

Uz

The cyclic convolutions generated by Rader’s multiplicative reindexing may be evaluated more economically than through DFTs if they are re-examined within a new algebraic setting, namely the theory of congruence classes of polynomials [see, for instance, Blahut (1985), Chapter 2; Schroeder (1986), Chapter 24]. The set, denoted KX , of polynomials in one variable with coefficients in a given field K has many of the formal properties of the set Z of rational integers: it is a ring with no zero divisors and has a Euclidean algorithm on which a theory of divisibility can be built. Given a polynomial Pz, then for every W z there exist unique polynomials Qz and Rz such that

V z

NP1

ul zl

NP1

vm zm

m0

W z

NP1

wn zn

n0

then the above relation is equivalent to W z UzV z mod zN

1:

Now the polynomial zN 1 can be factored over the field of rational numbers into irreducible factors called cyclotomic polynomials: if d is the number of divisors of N, including 1 and N, then

and

1

zN

degree R < degree P:

d Q

Pi z,

i1

Rz is called the residue of Hz modulo Pz. Two polynomials H1 z and H2 z having the same residue modulo Pz are said to be congruent modulo Pz, which is denoted by

where the cyclotomics Pi z are well known (Nussbaumer, 1981; Schroeder, 1986, Chapter 22). We may now invoke the CRT, and exploit the ring isomorphism it establishes to simplify the calculation of W z from Uz and V z as follows: (i) compute the d residual polynomials

H1 z H2 z mod Pz: If Hz 0 mod Pz, Hz is said to be divisible by Pz. If Hz only has divisors of degree zero in KX , it is said to be irreducible over K (this notion depends on K). Irreducible polynomials play in KX a role analogous to that of prime numbers in Z, and any polynomial over K has an essentially unique factorization as a product of irreducible polynomials. There exists a Chinese remainder theorem (CRT) for polynomials. Let Pz P1 z . . . Pd z be factored into a product of pairwise coprime polynomials [i.e. Pi z and Pj z have no common factor for i 6 j]. Then the system of congruence equations

Ui z Uz mod Pi z, Vi z V z mod Pi z,

i 1, . . . , d, i 1, . . . , d;

(ii) compute the d polynomial products Wi z Ui zVi z mod Pi z,

i 1, . . . , d;

(iii) use the CRT reconstruction formula just proved to recover W z from the Wi z: W z

j 1, . . . , d,

d P

Si zWi z mod zN

1:

i1

has a unique solution Hz modulo Pz. This solution may be constructed by a procedure similar to that used for integers. Let Q Qj z Pz=Pj z Pi z:

When N is not too large, i.e. for ‘short cyclic convolutions’, the Pi z are very simple, with coefficients 0 or 1, so that (i) only involves a small number of additions. Furthermore, special techniques have been developed to multiply general polynomials modulo cyclotomic polynomials, thus helping keep the number of multiplications in (ii) and (iii) to a minimum. As a result, cyclic convolutions can be calculated rapidly when N is sufficiently composite. It will be recalled that Rader’s multiplicative indexing often gives rise to cyclic convolutions of length p 1 for p an odd prime. Since p 1 is highly composite for all p 50 other than 23 and 47, these cyclic convolutions can be performed more efficiently by the above procedure than by DFT. These combined algorithms are due to Winograd (1977, 1978, 1980), and are known collectively as ‘Winograd small FFT algorithms’. Winograd also showed that they can be thought of as bringing the DFT matrix F to the following ‘normal form’:

i6j

Then Pj and Qj are coprime, and the Euclidean algorithm may be used to obtain polynomials pj z and qj z such that pj zPj z qj zQj z 1: With Si z qi zQi z, the polynomial d P

1:

l0

W z PzQz Rz

Hz

n 0, . . . , N

The very simple but crucial result is that this cyclic convolution may be carried out by polynomial multiplication modulo zN 1: if

1.3.3.2.4. The Winograd algorithms

Hz Hj z mod Pj z,

m,

m0

and the reindexed core matrix gives rise to a two-dimensional convolution. The latter may be carried out by means of two 2D DFTs on 2 N=4 points.

Si zHi z mod Pz

i1

is easily shown to be the desired solution. As with integers, it can be shown that the 1:1 correspondence between Hz and Hj z sends sums to sums and products to products, i.e. establishes a ring isomorphism:

F CBA,

KX mod P KX mod P1 . . . KX mod Pd : These results will now be applied to the efficient calculation of cyclic convolutions. Let U u0 , u1 , . . . , uN 1 and V v0 , v1 , . . . , vN 1 be two vectors of length N, and let W

where A is an integer matrix with entries 0, 1, defining the ‘preadditions’,

54

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY k 2 Zn =NT Zn :

k 2 Zn =NZn ,

B is a diagonal matrix of multiplications, C is a matrix with entries 0, 1, i, defining the ‘post-additions’. The elements on the diagonal of B can be shown to be either real or pure imaginary, by the same argument as in Section 1.3.3.2.3.1. Matrices A and C may be rectangular rather than square, so that intermediate results may require extra storage space.

1.3.3.3.2.1. Multidimensional Cooley–Tukey factorization Let us now assume that this decimation can be factored into d successive decimations, i.e. that N N1 N2 . . . Nd 1 Nd

1.3.3.3. Multidimensional algorithms and hence

From an algorithmic point of view, the distinction between onedimensional (1D) and multidimensional DFTs is somewhat blurred by the fact that some factoring techniques turn a 1D transform into a multidimensional one. The distinction made here, however, is a practical one and is based on the dimensionality of the indexing sets for data and results. This section will therefore be concerned with the problem of factoring the DFT when the indexing sets for the input data and output results are multidimensional.

NT NTd NTd

T T 1 . . . N2 N1 :

Then the coset decomposition formulae corresponding to these successive decimations (Section 1.3.2.7.1) can be combined as follows: [ Zn k1 N1 Zn k1

1.3.3.3.1. The method of successive one-dimensional transforms

[

( k1 N1

" [

k1

The DFT was defined in Section 1.3.2.7.4 in an n-dimensional setting and it was shown that when the decimation matrix N is has a diagonal, say N diagN 1 , N 2 , . . . , N n , then FN tensor product structure: 2 . . . FN n : 1 FN FN FN

#) k2 N2 Z n

k2

... [ [ . . . k1 N1 k2 . . . N1 N2 . . . Nd 1 kd NZn k1

kd

with kj 2 Zn =Nj Zn . Therefore, any k 2 Z=NZn may be written uniquely as

This may be rewritten as follows: 1 IN 2 . . . IN n FN FN 2 . . . I n IN 1 FN

k k1 N1 k2 . . . N1 N2 . . . Nd 1 kd : Similarly:

N

Zn

...

[ kd

n , IN 1 IN 2 . . . FN

kd NTd Zn

... [ [ . . . kd NTd kd

where the I’s are identity matrices and denotes ordinary matrix multiplication. The matrix within each bracket represents a onedimensional DFT along one of the n dimensions, the other dimensions being left untransformed. As these matrices commute, the order in which the successive 1D DFTs are performed is immaterial. This is the most straightforward method for building an ndimensional algorithm from existing 1D algorithms. It is known in crystallography under the name of ‘Beevers–Lipson factorization’ (Section 1.3.4.3.1), and in signal processing as the ‘row–column method’.

kd

k1

1

. . . NTd . . . NT2 k1

NT Zn so that any k 2 Zn =NT Zn may be written uniquely as k kd NTd kd

1

. . . NTd . . . NT2 k1

with kj 2 Zn =NTj Zn . These decompositions are the vector analogues of the multi-radix number representation systems used in the Cooley–Tukey factorization. We may then write the definition of FN with d 2 factors as P P X k2 NT2 k1 X k1 N1 k2

1.3.3.3.2. Multidimensional factorization

k1 k2

Substantial reductions in the arithmetic cost, as well as gains in flexibility, can be obtained if the factoring of the DFT is carried out in several dimensions simultaneously. The presentation given here is a generalization of that of Mersereau & Speake (1981), using the abstract setting established independently by Auslander, Tolimieri & Winograd (1982). Let us return to the general n-dimensional setting of Section 1.3.2.7.4, where the DFT was defined for an arbitrary decimation matrix N by the formulae (where jNj denotes jdet Nj): 1 X FN : X k X k e k N 1 k jNj k X FN : X k X kek N 1 k

T 1 1 ekT 2 k1 N2 N2 N1 k1 N1 k2 :

The argument of e(–) may be expanded as k2 N 1 k1 k1 N1 1 k1 k2 N2 1 k2 k1 k2 : The first summand may be recognized as a twiddle factor, the 2 , respectively, 1 and FN second and third as the kernels of FN while the fourth is an integer which may be dropped. We are thus led to a ‘vector-radix’ version of the Cooley–Tukey algorithm, in which the successive decimations may be introduced in all n dimensions simultaneously by general integer matrices. The computation may be decomposed into five stages analogous to those of the one-dimensional algorithm of Section 1.3.3.2.1: (i) form the jN1 j vectors Yk1 of shape N2 by

k

Yk1 k2 X k1 N1 k2 ,

with

55

k1 2 Zn =N1 Zn ,

k2 2 Zn =N2 Zn ;

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES (ii) calculate the jN1 j transforms Yk1 on jN2 j points: P Yk1 k2 ek2 N2 1 k2 Yk1 k2 , k1 2 Zn =N1 Zn ;

M is reduced to 3M=4 by simultaneous 2 2 factoring, and to 15M=32 by simultaneous 4 4 factoring. The use of a non-diagonal decimating matrix may bring savings in computing time if the spectrum of the band-limited function under study is of such a shape as to pack more compactly in a nonrectangular than in a rectangular lattice (Mersereau, 1979). If, for instance, the support K of the spectrum is contained in a sphere, then a decimation matrix producing a close packing of these spheres will yield an aliasing-free DFT algorithm with fewer sample points than the standard algorithm using a rectangular lattice.

k2

(iii) form the jN2 j vectors Zk2 of shape N1 by Zk2 k1 ek2 N 1 k1 Yk1 k2 ,

k1 2 Zn =N1 Zn ,

k2 2 Zn =NT2 Zn ; (iv) calculate the jN2 j transforms Zk on jN1 j points: 2 P Zk k1 ek1 N1 1 k1 Zk2 k1 , k2 2 Zn =NT2 Zn ; 2

k1

1.3.3.3.2.2. Multidimensional prime factor algorithm Suppose that the decimation matrix N is diagonal

(v) collect X k2 NT2 k1 as Zk k1 . 2 The initial jNj-point transform FN can thus be performed as 2 on jN2 j points, followed by jN2 j transforms jN1 j transforms FN 1 on jN1 j points. This process can be applied successively to all FN d factors. The same decomposition applies to FN, up to the complex conjugation of twiddle factors, the normalization factor 1=jNj being obtained as the product of the factors 1=jNj j in the successive partial transforms FNj . The geometric interpretation of this factorization in terms of partial transforms on translates of sublattices applies in full to this ndimensional setting; in particular, the twiddle factors are seen to be related to the residual translations which place the sublattices in register within the big lattice. If the intermediate transforms are performed in place, then the quantity

X kd NTd kd

1

. . . NTd NTd

1

N diag N 1 , N 2 , . . . , N n and let each diagonal element be written in terms of its prime factors: m Q i; j pj , N i j1

where m is the total number of distinct prime factors present in the N i . The CRT may be used to turn each 1D transform along dimension i i 1, . . . , n into a multidimensional transform with a separate ‘pseudo-dimension’ for each distinct prime factor of N i ; the number i , of these pseudo-dimensions is equal to the cardinality of the set:

. . . NT2 k1

f j 2 f1, . . . , mgji, j > 0 for some ig:

will eventually be found at location

The full P n-dimensional transform thus becomes -dimensional, with ni1 i . We may now permute the pseudo-dimensions so as to bring into contiguous position those corresponding to the same prime factor pj ; the m resulting groups of pseudo-dimensions are said to define ‘p-primary’ blocks. The initial transform is now written as a tensor product of m p-primary transforms, where transform j is on

k1 N1 k2 . . . N1 N2 . . . Nd 1 kd , so that the final results will have to be unscrambled by a process which may be called ‘coset reversal’, the vector equivalent of digit reversal. Factoring by 2 in all n dimensions simultaneously, i.e. taking N 2M, leads to ‘n-dimensional butterflies’. Decimation in time corresponds to the choice N1 2I, N2 M, so that k1 2 Zn =2Zn is an n-dimensional parity class; the calculation then proceeds by

1; j

pj

2; j

pj

n; j

. . . pj

points [by convention, dimension i is not transformed if i, j 0]. These p-primary transforms may be computed, for instance, by multidimensional Cooley–Tukey factorization (Section 1.3.3.3.1), which is faster than the straightforward row–column method. The final results may then be obtained by reversing all the permutations used. The extra gain with respect to the multidimensional Cooley– Tukey method is that there are no twiddle factors between pprimary pieces corresponding to different primes p. The case where N is not diagonal has been examined by Guessoum & Mersereau (1986).

Yk1 k2 X k1 2k2 , k1 2 Zn =2Zn , k2 2 Zn =MZn , Yk1 FMY k1 2 Zn =2Zn ; k1 , P X k2 MT k1 1k1 k1 k1 2Zn =2Zn

ek2 N 1 k1 Yk1 k2 : Decimation in frequency corresponds to the choice N1 M, N2 2I, so that k2 2 Zn =2Zn labels ‘octant’ blocks of shape M; the calculation then proceeds through the following steps: " # P k2 k2 Zk2 k1 1 X k1 Mk2

1.3.3.3.2.3. Nesting of Winograd small FFTs Suppose that the CRT has been used as above to map an ndimensional DFT to a -dimensional DFT. For each 1, . . . , [ runs over those pairs (i, j) such that i, j > 0], the Rader/ Winograd procedure may be applied to put the matrix of the th 1D DFT in the CBA normal form of a Winograd small FFT. The full DFT matrix may then be written, up to permutation of data and results, as O C B A :

k2 2Zn =2Zn

ek2 N 1 k1 , Zk FMZ k2 , 2

X k2 2k1 Zk k1 , 2

n

i.e. the 2 parity classes of results, corresponding to the different k2 2 Zn =2Zn , are obtained separately. When the dimension n is 2 and the decimating matrix is diagonal, this analysis reduces to the ‘vector radix FFT’ algorithms proposed by Rivard (1977) and Harris et al. (1977). These lead to substantial reductions in the number M of multiplications compared to the row–column method:

1

A well known property of the tensor product of matrices allows this to be rewritten as

56

O

! C

1

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY ! ! we may write: O O B A X k1 , k2 Tk1 k2 !k1 1 1 or equivalently

and thus to form a matrix in which the combined pre-addition, multiplication and post-addition matrices have been precomputed. This procedure, called nesting, can be shown to afford a reduction of the arithmetic operation count compared to the row–column method (Morris, 1978). Clearly, the nesting rearrangement need not be applied to all dimensions, but can be restricted to any desired subset of them.

For N an odd prime p, all non-zero values of k1 are coprime with p so that the p p-point DFT may be calculated as follows: (1) form the polynomials PP Tk2 z X k1 , k2 zk1 k2 k2 mod Pz

1.3.3.3.2.4. The Nussbaumer–Quandalle algorithm Nussbaumer’s approach views the DFT as the evaluation of certain polynomials constructed from the data (as in Section 1.3.3.2.4). For instance, putting ! e1=N, the 1D N-point DFT NP1

X k

X k!k

k1 k2

for k2 0, . . . , p 1; (2) evaluate Tk2 !k1 for k1 0, . . . , p 1; (3) put X k1 , k2 =k1 Tk2 !k1 ; (4) calculate the terms for k1 0 separately by " # P P X k1 , k2 !k2 k2 : X 0, k2

k

k0

may be written

X k Q!k ,

k2

NP1

X kzk :

k1

k0

Let us consider (Nussbaumer & Quandalle, 1979) a 2D transform of size N N: X k1 , k2

NP1 NP1

then

Tk2 !k1

X k1 , k2 !k1 k1 k2 k2 :

k1 0 k2 0

k1

R k2 z

!k2 k2 Qk2 z,

k2

this may be rewritten:

X k1 , k2 R k2 !k1

P

!k2 k2 Qk2 !k1 :

k2

Let us now suppose that k1 is coprime to N. Then k1 has a unique inverse modulo N (denoted by 1=k1 ), so that multiplication by k1 simply permutes the elements of Z=NZ and hence NP1

f k2

k2 0

NP1

f k1 k2

k2 0

Sk1 k2 !k1 P

2

1.3.3.3.3.1. From local pieces to global algorithms The mathematical analysis of the structure of DFT computations has brought to light a broad variety of possibilities for reducing or reshaping their arithmetic complexity. All of them are ‘analytic’ in that they break down large transforms into a succession of smaller ones. These results may now be considered from the converse ‘synthetic’ viewpoint as providing a list of procedures for assembling them: (i) the building blocks are one-dimensional p-point algorithms for p a small prime; (ii) the low-level connectors are the multiplicative reindexing methods of Rader and Winograd, or the polynomial transform reindexing method of Nussbaumer and Quandalle, which allow the construction of efficient algorithms for larger primes p, for prime powers p , and for p-primary pieces of shape p . . . p ; (iii) the high-level connectors are the additive reindexing scheme of Cooley–Tukey, the Chinese remainder theorem reindexing, and the tensor product construction; (iv) nesting may be viewed as the ‘glue’ which seals all elements.

k2

Sk z

k1

Yk2 k1 !k1 k1 Yk k1 ;

1.3.3.3.3. Global algorithm design

for any function f over Z=NZ. We may thus write: P X k1 , k2 !k1 k2 k2 Qk1 k2 !k1

where

P

step (3) is a permutation; and step (4) is a p-point DFT. Thus the 2D DFT on p p points, which takes 2p p-point DFTs by the row– column method, involves only p 1 p-point DFTs; the other DFTs have been replaced by polynomial transforms involving only additions. This procedure can be extended to n dimensions, and reduces the number of 1D p-point DFTs from npn 1 for the row–column method to pn 1=p 1, at the cost of introducing extra additions in the polynomial transforms. A similar algorithm has been formulated by Auslander et al. (1983) in terms of Galois theory.

By introduction of the polynomials P Qk2 z X k1 , k2 zk1 P

k1

Step (1) is a set of p ‘polynomial transforms’ involving no multiplications; step (2) consists of p DFTs on p points each since if P Tk2 z Yk2 k1 zk1

where the polynomial Q is defined by Qz

k X k1 , 2 Tk2 !k1 : k1

zk k2 Qk2 z:

k2

Since only the value of polynomial Sk z at z !k1 is involved in the result, the computation of Sk may be carried out modulo the unique cyclotomic polynomial Pz such that P!k1 0. Thus, if we define: P Tk z zk k2 Qk2 z mod Pz k2

57

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES the f.p. units, so that complex reindexing schemes may be used without loss of overall efficiency. Another major consideration is that of data flow [see e.g. Nawab & McClellan (1979)]. Serial machines only have few registers and few paths connecting them, and allow little or no overlap between computation and data movement. New architectures, on the other hand, comprise banks of vector registers (or ‘cache memory’) besides the usual internal registers, and dedicated ALUs can service data transfers between several of them simultaneously and concurrently with computation. In this new context, the devices described in Sections 1.3.3.2 and 1.3.3.3 for altering the balance between the various types of arithmetic operations, and reshaping the data flow during the computation, are invaluable. The field of machine-dependent DFT algorithm design is thriving on them [see e.g. Temperton (1983a,b,c, 1985); Agarwal & Cooley (1986, 1987)]. 1.3.3.3.3.3. The Johnson–Burrus family of algorithms In order to explore systematically all possible algorithms for carrying out a given DFT computation, and to pick the one best suited to a given machine, attempts have been made to develop: (i) a high-level notation of describing all the ingredients of a DFT computation, including data permutation and data flow; (ii) a formal calculus capable of operating on these descriptions so as to represent all possible reorganizations of the computation; (iii) an automatic procedure for evaluating the performance of a given algorithm on a specific architecture. Task (i) can be accomplished by systematic use of a tensor product notation to represent the various stages into which the DFT can be factored (reindexing, small transforms on subsets of indices, twiddle factors, digit-reversal permutations). Task (ii) may for instance use the Winograd CBA normal form for each small transform, then apply N the rules governing the rearrangement of tensor product and ordinary product operations on matrices. The matching of these rearrangements to the architecture of a vector and/or parallel computer can be formalized algebraically [see e.g. Chapter 2 of Tolimieri et al. (1989)]. Task (iii) is a complex search which requires techniques such as dynamic programming (Bellman, 1958). Johnson & Burrus (1983) have proposed and tested such a scheme to identify the optimal trade-offs between prime factor nesting and Winograd nesting of small Winograd transforms. In step (ii), they further decomposed the pre-addition matrix A and post-addition matrix C into several factors, so that the number of design options available becomes very large: the N-point DFT when N has four factors can be calculated in over 1012 distinct ways. This large family of nested algorithms contains the prime factor algorithm and the Winograd algorithms as particular cases, but usually achieves greater efficiency than either by reducing the f.p. multiplication count while keeping the number of f.p. additions small. There is little doubt that this systematic approach will be extended so as to incorporate all available methods of restructuring the DFT.

Fig. 1.3.3.1. A few global algorithms for computing a 400-point DFT. CT: Cooley–Tukey factorization. PF: prime factor (or Good) factorization. W: Winograd algorithm.

The simplest DFT may then be carried out into a global algorithm in many different ways. The diagrams in Fig. 1.3.3.1 illustrate a few of the options available to compute a 400-point DFT. They may differ greatly in their arithmetic operation counts. 1.3.3.3.3.2. Computer architecture considerations To obtain a truly useful measure of the computational complexity of a DFT algorithm, its arithmetic operation count must be tempered by computer architecture considerations. Three main types of tradeoffs must be borne in mind: (i) reductions in floating-point (f.p.) arithmetic count are obtained by reindexing, hence at the cost of an increase in integer arithmetic on addresses, although some shortcuts may be found (Uhrich, 1969; Burrus & Eschenbacher, 1981); (ii) reduction in the f.p. multiplication count usually leads to a large increase in the f.p. addition count (Morris, 1978); (iii) nesting can increase execution speed, but causes a loss of modularity and hence complicates program development (Silverman, 1977; Kolba & Parks, 1977). Many of the mathematical developments above took place in the context of single-processor serial computers, where f.p. addition is substantially cheaper than f.p. multiplication but where integer address arithmetic has to compete with f.p. arithmetic for processor cycles. As a result, the alternatives to the Cooley–Tukey algorithm hardly ever led to particularly favourable trade-offs, thus creating the impression that there was little to gain by switching to more exotic algorithms. The advent of new machine architectures with vector and/or parallel processing features has greatly altered this picture (Pease, 1968; Korn & Lambiotte, 1979; Fornberg, 1981; Swartzrauber, 1984): (i) pipelining equalizes the cost of f.p. addition and f.p. multiplication, and the ideal ‘blend’ of the two types of operations depends solely on the number of adder and multiplier units available in each machine; (ii) integer address arithmetic is delegated to specialized arithmetic and logical units (ALUs) operating concurrently with

1.3.4. Crystallographic applications of Fourier transforms 1.3.4.1. Introduction The central role of the Fourier transformation in X-ray crystallography is a consequence of the kinematic approximation used in the description of the scattering of X-rays by a distribution of electrons (Bragg, 1915; Duane, 1925; Havighurst, 1925a,b; Zachariasen, 1945; James, 1948a, Chapters 1 and 2; Lipson & Cochran, 1953, Chapter 1; Bragg, 1975).

58

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY P 0 P Let X be the density of electrons in a sample of matter FH H F F H F HH H2 H2 contained in a finite region V which is being illuminated by a parallel monochromatic X-ray beam with wavevector K0 . Then the distribution, the weight FH far-field amplitude scattered in a direction corresponding to and is thus a weighted reciprocal-lattice attached to each node H 2 being the value at H of the transform wavevector K K0 H is proportional to F 0 of the motif 0 . Taken in conjunction with the assumption R 3 FH X exp2iH X d X that the scattering is elastic, i.e. that H only changes the direction V but not the magnitude of the incident wavevector K0 , this result yields the usual forms (Laue or Bragg) of the diffraction conditions: F H H 2 , and simultaneously H lies on the Ewald sphere. hx , exp2iH Xi: By the reciprocity theorem, 0 can be recovered if F is known for In certain model calculations, the ‘sample’ may contain not only all H 2 as follows [Section 1.3.2.6.5, e.g. (iv)]: volume charges, but also point, line and surface charges. These 1 X singularities may be accommodated by letting be a distribution, FH exp 2iH X: x V H2 and writing These relations may be rewritten in terms of standard, or FH F H hx , exp2iH Xi: ‘fractional crystallographic’, coordinates by putting F is still a well behaved function (analytic, by Section 1.3.2.4.2.10) because has been assumed to have compact support. X Ax, H A 1 T h, If the sample is assumed to be an infinite crystal, so that is now 3 3 a periodic distribution, the customary limiting process by which it is so that3 a unit cell of the crystal corresponds to x 2 R =Z , and that 0 shown that F becomes a discrete series of peaks at reciprocal-lattice h 2 Z . Defining and by points (see e.g. von Laue, 1936; Ewald, 1940; James, 1948a p. 9; 1 1 Lipson & Taylor, 1958, pp. 14–27; Ewald, 1962, pp. 82–101; A # , 0 A# 0 V V Warren, 1969, pp. 27–30) is already subsumed under the treatment of Section 1.3.2.6. so that X d3 X x d3 x,

1.3.4.2. Crystallographic Fourier transform theory we have

1.3.4.2.1. Crystal periodicity

P Fhh , F h

1.3.4.2.1.1. Period lattice, reciprocal lattice and structure factors Let be the distribution of electrons in a crystal. Then, by definition of a crystal, is -periodic for some period lattice (Section 1.3.2.6.5) so that there exists a motif distribution 0 with compact support such that

Fh x

P

Fh exp 2ih x:

These formulae are valid for an arbitrary motif distribution 0 , provided the convergence of the Fourier series for is considered from the viewpoint of distribution theory (Section 1.3.2.6.10.3). The experienced crystallographer may notice the absence of the familiar factor 1=V from the expression for just given. This is because we use the (mathematically) natural unit for , the electron per unit cell, which matches the dimensionless nature of the crystallographic coordinates x and of the associated volume element d3 x. The traditional factor 1=V was the result of the somewhat inconsistent use of x as an argument but of d3 X as a 3 volume element to obtain in electrons per unit volume (e.g. A ). A fortunate consequence of the present convention is that nuisance factors of V or 1=V , which used to abound in convolution or scalar product formulae, are now absent. It should be noted at this point that the crystallographic terminology regarding F and F differs from the standard mathematical terminology introduced in Section 1.3.2.4.1 and applied to periodic distributions in Section 1.3.2.6.4: F is the inverse Fourier transform of rather than its Fourier transform, and the calculation of is called a Fourier synthesis in crystallography even though it is mathematically a Fourier analysis. The origin of this discrepancy may be traced to the fact that the mathematical theory of the Fourier transformation originated with the study of temporal periodicity, while crystallography deals with spatial periodicity; since the expression for the phase factor of a plane wave is exp2it K X, the difference in sign between the

ajk ej :

j1

Then the matrix

0 x exp2ih x d3 x if 0 2 L1loc R3 =Z3 , 3

h2Z3

where R x2 X . The lattice is usually taken to be the finest for which the above representation holds. Let have a basis a1 , a2 , a3 over the integers, these basis vectors being expressed in terms of a standard orthonormal basis e1 , e2 , e3 as 3 P

exp2ih xi

R

R =Z

R ,

ak

h2Z3 h0x , 3

0

P

0 X d3 X 0 x d3 x,

0

1 a11 a12 a13 A @ a21 a22 a23 A a31 a32 a33

is the period matrix of (Section 1.3.2.6.5) with respect to the unit lattice with basis e1 , e2 , e3 , and the volume V of the unit cell is given by V jdet Aj. By Fourier transformation F R F 0 , P where R H2 H is the lattice distribution associated to the reciprocal lattice . The basis vectors a1 , a2 , a3 have coordinates in e1 , e2 , e3 given by the columns of A 1 T , whose expression in terms of the cofactors of A (see Section 1.3.2.6.5) gives the familiar formulae involving the cross product of vectors for n 3. The Hdistribution F of scattered amplitudes may be written

59

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES where D is the ‘spherical Dirichlet kernel’ P exp 2ih x: D x

contributions from time versus spatial displacements makes this conflict unavoidable.

kA 1 T hk

1.3.4.2.1.2. Structure factors in terms of form factors In many cases, 0 is a sum of translates of atomic electrondensity distributions. Assume there are n distinct chemical types of atoms, with Nj identical isotropic atoms of type j described by an electron distribution j about their centre of mass. According to quantum mechanics each j is a smooth rapidly decreasing function of x, i.e. j 2 S , hence 0 2 S and (ignoring the effect of thermal agitation) " # Nj n P P j x xkj , 0 x

D exhibits numerous negative ripples around its central peak. Thus the ‘series termination errors’ incurred by using S instead of consist of negative ripples around each atom, and may lead to a Gibbs-like phenomenon (Section 1.3.2.6.10.1) near a molecular boundary. As in one dimension, Cesa`ro sums (arithmetic means of partial sums) have better convergence properties, as they lead to a convolution by a ‘spherical Feje´r kernel’ which is everywhere positive. Thus Cesa`ro summation will always produce positive approximations to a positive electron density. Other positive summation kernels were investigated by Pepinsky (1952) and by Waser & Schomaker (1953).

j1 kj 1

which may be written (Section 1.3.2.5.8) " !# Nj n P P 0 j xkj :

1.3.4.2.1.4. Friedel’s law, anomalous scatterers If the wavelength of the incident X-rays is far from any absorption edge of the atoms in the crystal, there is a constant phase shift in the scattering, and the electron density may be considered to be real-valued. Then R Fh x exp2ih x d3 x

kj 1

j1

By Fourier transformation: ( " #) Nj n P P exp2ih xkj : Fh F j h kj 1

j1

R3 =Z3

Defining the form factor fj of atom j as a function of h to be fj h F j h we have Fh

n P

" fj h

j1

Nj P kj 1

R

R =Z 3

#

x exp2i h x d3 x 3

F h since x x:

exp2ih xkj :

Thus if Fh jFhj expi'h,

If X Ax and H A 1 T h are the real- and reciprocal-space 1 coordinates in A˚ and A , and if j kXk is the spherically symmetric electron-density function for atom type j, then Z1 sin2kHkkXk fj H 4kXk2 j kXk dkXk: 2kHkkXk

then jF hj jFhj

and

' h 'h:

This is Friedel’s law (Friedel, 1913). The set fFh g of Fourier coefficients is said to have Hermitian symmetry. If is close to some absorption edge(s), the proximity to resonance induces an extra phase shift, whose effect may be represented by letting x take on complex values. Let

0

More complex expansions are used for electron-density studies (see Chapter 1.2 in this volume). Anisotropic Gaussian atoms may be dealt with through the formulae given in Section 1.3.2.4.4.2.

x R x iI x

1.3.4.2.1.3. Fourier series for the electron density and its summation The convergence of the Fourier series for P x Fh exp 2ih x

and correspondingly, by termwise Fourier transformation Fh F R h iF I h: Since R x and I x are both real, F R h and F I h are both Hermitian symmetric, hence

h2Z3

is usually examined from the classical point of view (Section 1.3.2.6.10). The summation of multiple Fourier series meets with considerable difficulties, because there is no natural order in Zn to play the role of the natural order in Z (Ash, 1976). In crystallography, however, the structure factors Fh are often obtained within spheres kHk 1 for increasing resolution (decreasing ). Therefore, successive estimates of are most naturally calculated as the corresponding partial sums (Section 1.3.2.6.10.1): P S x Fh exp 2ih x: kA 1 T hk

1

F h F R h iF I h, while Fh F R h

iF I h:

Thus F h 6 Fh, so that Friedel’s law is violated. The components F R h and F I h, which do obey Friedel’s law, may be expressed as:

1

F R h 12Fh F h, 1 F I h Fh F h: 2i

This may be written S x D x,

60

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY hence the Fourier series representation of , : P , t FhGh exp 2ih t:

1.3.4.2.1.5. Parseval’s identity and other L2 theorems By Section 1.3.2.4.3.3 and Section 1.3.2.6.10.2, R R P jFhj2 jxj2 d3 x V jXj2 d3 X: h2Z3

R =Z 3

h2Z3

R =

3

3

Clearly, , , , as shown by the fact that permuting F and G changes Kh into its complex conjugate. The auto-correlation of is defined as , and is called the Patterson function of . If consists of point atoms, i.e.

Usually x is real and positive, hence jxj x, but the identity remains valid even when x is made complex-valued by the presence of anomalous scatterers. If fGh g is the collection of structure factors belonging to another electron density A# with the same period lattice as , then R P FhGh xx d3 x h2Z3

j1

then

R3 =Z3

V

R

N P

0

XX d X:

"

3

, r

R3 =

Zj xj ,

N P N P

j1 k1

Thus, norms and inner products may be evaluated either from structure factors or from ‘maps’.

and is therefore calculable from the diffraction intensities alone. It was first proposed by Patterson (1934, 1935a,b) as an extension to crystals of the radially averaged correlation function used by Warren & Gingrich (1934) in the study of powders.

Gh exp 2ih x:

1.3.4.2.1.7. Sampling theorems, continuous transforms, interpolation Shannon’s sampling and interpolation theorem (Section 1.3.2.7.1) takes two different forms, according to whether the property of finite bandwidth is assumed in real space or in reciprocal space. (1) The most usual setting is in reciprocal space (see Sayre, 1952c). Only a finite number of diffraction intensities can be recorded and phased, and for physical reasons the cutoff criterion is the resolution 1=kHkmax . Electron-density maps are thus calculated as partial sums (Section 1.3.4.2.1.3), which may be written in Cartesian coordinates as P FH exp 2iH X: S X

h2Z3

The distribution ! r is well defined, since the generalized support condition (Section 1.3.2.3.9.7) is satisfied. The forward version of the convolution theorem implies that if P !x W h exp 2ih x, 0

0

h2Z3

then W h FhGh: If either or is infinitely differentiable, then the distribution exists, and if we analyse it as P Y h exp 2ih x, x 0

0

H2 ; kHk

h2Z3

k2Z3

The cross correlation , between and is the Z3 -periodic distribution defined by:

33 F X 4 3 kXk 3 sin u u cos u where u 2 : u

I X

0 : If 0 and 0 are locally integrable, R , t 0 xx t d3 x

By Shannon’s theorem, it suffices to calculate S on an integral subdivision of the period lattice such that the sampling criterion is satisfied (i.e. that the translates of by vectors of do not overlap). Values of S may then be calculated at an arbitrary point X by the interpolation formula: P I X YS Y: S X

R3

R

R =Z 3

Let t

P

1

S is band-limited, the support of its spectrum being contained in the solid sphere defined by kHk 1 . Let be the indicator function of . The transform of the normalized version of is (see below, Section 1.3.4.4.3.5)

then the backward version of the convolution theorem reads: P FhGh k: Y h

xk

h2Z3

h2Z3

P

Zj Zk xj

contains information about interatomic vectors. It has the Fourier series representation P , t jFhj2 exp 2ih t,

1.3.4.2.1.6. Convolution, correlation and Patterson function Let r 0 and r 0 be two electron densities referred to crystallographic coordinates, with structure factors fFh gh2Z3 and fGh gh2Z3 , so that P Fh exp 2ih x, x x

#

xx t d3 x: 3

Kh exp 2ih t:

Y2

h2Z3

(2) The reverse situation occurs whenever the support of the motif 0 does not fill the whole unit cell, i.e. whenever there exists a region M (the ‘molecular envelope’), strictly smaller than the unit cell, such that the translates of M by vectors of r do not overlap and that

The combined use of the shift property and of the forward convolution theorem then gives immediately: Kh FhGh;

61

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES being related by P P 1 T in order to preserve duality. This change of basis must be such that one of these matrices (say, P) should have a given integer vector u as its first column, u being related to the line or plane defining the section or projection of interest. The problem of constructing a matrix P given u received an erroneous solution in Volume II of International Tables (Patterson, 1959), which was subsequently corrected in 1962. Unfortunately, the solution proposed there is complicated and does not suggest a general approach to the problem. It therefore seems worthwhile to record here an effective procedure which solves this problem in any dimension n (Watson, 1970). Let 0 1 u1 B .. C u@ . A

M 0 0 : It then follows that r M : Defining the ‘interference function’ G as the normalized indicator function of M according to 1 Gh F M h volM we may invoke Shannon’s theorem to calculate the value F 0 j at an arbitrary point j of reciprocal space from its sample values Fh F 0 h at points of the reciprocal lattice as P Gj hFh: F 0 j h2Z3

This aspect of Shannon’s theorem constitutes the mathematical basis of phasing methods based on geometric redundancies created by solvent regions and/or noncrystallographic symmetries (Bricogne, 1974). The connection between Shannon’s theorem and the phase problem was first noticed by Sayre (1952b). He pointed out that the Patterson function of , written as , r 0 0 , may be viewed as consisting of a motif 0 0 0 (containing all the internal interatomic vectors) which is periodized by convolution with r. As the translates of 0 by vectors of Z3 do overlap, the sample values of the intensities jFhj2 at nodes of the reciprocal lattice do not provide enough data to interpolate intensities jFj j2 at arbitrary points of reciprocal space. Thus the loss of phase is intimately related to the impossibility of intensity interpolation, implying in return that any indication of intensity values attached to non-integral points of the reciprocal lattice is a potential source of phase information.

un be a primitive integral vector, i.e. g.c.d. u1 , . . . , un 1. Then an n n integral matrix P with det P 1 having u as its first column can be constructed by induction as follows. For n 1 the result is trivial. For n 2 it can be solved by means of the Euclidean algorithm, which yields z1 , z2 such that u1 z2 u2 z1 1, so that we z u1 z1 . Note that, if z 1 is a solution, may take P u2 z2 z2 then z mu is another solution for any m 2 Z. For n 3,0write 1 z2 u1 B.C with d g.c.d. u2 , . . . , un so that both z @ .. A u dz zn u1 and are primitive. By the inductive hypothesis there is an d u1 integral 2 2 matrix V with as its first column, and an d integral n 1 n 1 matrix Z with z as its first column, with det V 1 and det Z 1. Now put 1 V P , Z In 2

1.3.4.2.1.8. Sections and projections It was shown at the end of Section 1.3.2.5.8 that the convolution theorem establishes, under appropriate assumptions, a duality between sectioning a smooth function (viewed as a multiplication by a -function in the sectioning coordinate) and projecting its transform (viewed as a convolution with the function 1 everywhere equal to 1 as a function of the projection coordinate). This duality follows from the fact that F and F map 1xi to xi and xi to 1xi (Section 1.3.2.5.6), and from the tensor product property (Section 1.3.2.5.5). In the case of periodic distributions, projection and section must be performed with respect to directions or subspaces which are integral with respect to the period lattice if the result is to be periodic; furthermore, projections must be performed only on the contents of one repeating unit along the direction of projection, or else the result would diverge. The same relations then hold between principal central sections and projections of the electron density and the dual principal central projections and sections of the weighted reciprocal lattice, e.g. P x1 , 0, 0 $ Fh1 , h2 , h3 ,

i.e.

1 0 B 0 z2 B PB B 0 z3 @: : 0 zn The first column of P is

h1 ; h2

x1 , x2 , 0 $ 1; 2 x3

P

Fh1 , h2 , h3 ,

h3

R

x1 , x2 , x3 dx1 dx2 $ F0, 0, h3 ,

R2 =Z2

1 x2 , x3

R

R=Z

x1 , x2 , x3 dx1

0

$ F0, h2 , h3

0 :

: : : : :

10 0 u1 Bd C CB B C CB 0 A : @ : 0

0 : 0

0 0 1 : 0

: : : : :

1 0 0C C 0C C: :A 1

0

1 u1 B dz2 C B C B : C u, B C @ : A dzn

and its determinant is 1, QED. The incremental step from dimension n 1 to dimension n is the construction of 2 2 matrix V, for which there exist infinitely many solutions labelled by an integer mn 1 . Therefore, the collection of matrices P which solve the problem is labelled by n 1 arbitrary integers m1 , m2 , . . . , mn 1 . This freedom can be used to adjust the shape of the basis B.

etc. When the sections are principal but not central, it suffices to use the shift property of Section 1.3.2.5.5. When the sections or projections are not principal, they can be made principal by changing to new primitive bases B and B for and , respectively, the transition matrices P and P to these new bases

62

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY The converse property is also useful: it relates the derivatives of the continuous transform F 0 to the moments of 0 : @ m1 m2 m3 F 0 H F 2im1 m2 m3 X1m1 X2m2 X3m3 0x H: @X1m1 @X2m2 @X3m3

Once P has been chosen, the calculation of general sections and projections is transformed into that of principal sections and projections by the changes of coordinates: x Px0 ,

h P h0 ,

and an appeal to the tensor product property. Booth (1945a) made use of the convolution theorem to form the Fourier coefficients of ‘bounded projections’, which provided a compromise between 2D and 3D Fourier syntheses. If it is desired to compute the projection on the (x, y) plane of the electron density lying between the planes z z1 and z z2 , which may be written as

For jmj 2 and H 0, this identity gives the well known relation between the Hessian matrix of the transform F 0 at the origin of reciprocal space and the inertia tensor of the motif 0 . This is a particular case of the moment-generating properties of F , which will be further developed in Section 1.3.4.5.2.

1x 1y z1 ; z2 x y 1z :

1.3.4.2.1.10. Toeplitz forms, determinantal inequalities and Szego¨’s theorem The classical results presented in Section 1.3.2.6.9 can be readily generalized to the case of triple Fourier series; no new concept is needed, only an obvious extension of the notation. Let be real-valued, so that Friedel’s law holds and F h Fh. Let H be a finite set of indices comprising the origin: H fh0 0, h1 , . . . , hn g. Then the Hermitian form in n 1 complex variables n P TH u Fhj hk uj uk

The transform is then F h k F z1 ; z2 1h 1k l , giving for coefficient h, k: X sin lz1 Fh, k, l expf2ilz1 z2 =2g l l2Z

z2

:

1.3.4.2.1.9. Differential syntheses Another particular instance of the convolution theorem is the duality between differentiation and multiplication by a monomial (Sections 1.3.2.4.2.8, 1.3.2.5.8). In the present context, this result may be written m1 m2 m3 @ H F m1 m2 @X1 @X2 @X3m3

j; k0

is called the Toeplitz form of order H associated to . By the convolution theorem and Parseval’s identity, 2 P R n TH u x uj exp2ihj x d3 x: 3 3 j0 R =Z

2im1 m2 m3 H1m1 H2m2 H3m3 FAT H

If is almost everywhere non-negative, then for all H the forms TH are positive semi-definite and therefore all Toeplitz determinants DH are non-negative, where

in Cartesian coordinates, and m1 m2 m3 @ h 2im1 m2 m3 hm1 1 hm2 2 hm3 3 Fh F @xm1 1 @xm2 2 @xm3 3

DH det fFhj

The Toeplitz–Caratheódory–Herglotz theorem given in Section 1.3.2.6.9.2 states that the converse is true: if DH 0 for all H, then is almost everywhere non-negative. This result is known in the crystallographic literature through the papers of Karle & Hauptman (1950), MacGillavry (1950), and Goedkoop (1950), following previous work by Harker & Kasper (1948) and Gillis (1948a,b). Szego¨’s study of the asymptotic distribution of the eigenvalues of Toeplitz forms as their order tends to infinity remains valid. Some precautions are needed, however, to define the notion of a sequence Hk of finite subsets of indices tending to infinity: it suffices that the Hk should consist essentially of the reciprocal-lattice points h contained within a domain of the form k (k-fold dilation of ) where is a convex domain in R3 containing the origin (Widom, of the 1960). Under these circumstances, the eigenvalues n Toeplitz forms THk become equidistributed with the sample n values 0 of on a grid satisfying the Shannon sampling criterion for the data in Hk (cf. Section 1.3.2.6.9.3). A particular consequence of this equidistribution is that the n geometric means of the n and of the 0 are equal, and hence as in Section 1.3.2.6.9.4 ( ) R 1=jHk j 3 lim fDHk g exp log x d x ,

in crystallographic coordinates. A particular case of the first formula is P kHk2 FAT H exp 2iH X X, 42 H2

where

3 X @2 j1

@Xj2

is the Laplacian of . The second formula has been used with jmj 1 or 2 to compute ‘differential syntheses’ and refine the location of maxima (or other stationary points) in electron-density maps. Indeed, the values at x of the gradient vector r and Hessian matrix rrT are readily obtained as P 2ihFh exp 2ih x, rx h2Z3

rr x T

P

42 hhT Fh exp 2ih x,

3

h2Z

and a step of Newton iteration towards the nearest stationary point of will proceed by

k!1

1

x 7 ! x frr xg rx: The modern use of Fourier transforms to speed up the computation of derivatives for model refinement will be described in Section 1.3.4.4.7. T

hk g:

R3 =Z3

where jHk j denotes the number of reflections in Hk . Complementary terms giving a better comparison of the two sides were obtained by Widom (1960, 1975) and Linnik (1975).

63

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES iii0 Tg0 1 g2 Tg0 2 Tg0 1

This formula played an important role in the solution of the 2D Ising model by Onsager (1944) (see Montroll et al., 1963). It is also encountered in phasing methods involving the ‘Burg entropy’ (Britten & Collins, 1982; Narayan & Nityananda, 1982; Bricogne, 1982, 1984, 1988).

The essential difference between left and right actions is of course not whether the elements of G are written on the left or right of those of X: it lies in the difference between (iii) and (iii0 ). In a left action the product g1 g2 in G operates on x 2 X by g2 operating first, then g1 operating on the result; in a right action, g1 operates first, then g2 . This distinction will be of importance in Sections 1.3.4.2.2.4 and 1.3.4.2.2.5. In the sequel, we will use left actions unless otherwise stated.

1.3.4.2.2. Crystal symmetry 1.3.4.2.2.1. Crystallographic groups The description of a crystal given so far has dealt only with its invariance under the action of the (discrete Abelian) group of translations by vectors of its period lattice . Let the crystal now be embedded in Euclidean 3-space, so that it may be acted upon by the group M3 of rigid (i.e. distancepreserving) motions of that space. The group M3 contains a normal subgroup T3 of translations, and the quotient group M3=T3 may be identified with the 3-dimensional orthogonal group O3. The period lattice of a crystal is a discrete uniform subgroup of T3. The possible invariance properties of a crystal under the action of M3 are captured by the following definition: a crystallographic group is a subgroup of M3 if (i) \ T3 , a period lattice and a normal subgroup of ; (ii) the factor group G = is finite. The two properties are not independent: by a theorem of Bieberbach (1911), they follow from the assumption that is a discrete subgroup of M3 which operates without accumulation point and with a compact fundamental domain (see Auslander, 1965). These two assumptions imply that G acts on through an integral representation, and this observation leads to a complete enumeration of all distinct ’s. The mathematical theory of these groups is still an active research topic (see, for instance, Farkas, 1981), and has applications to Riemannian geometry (Wolf, 1967). This classification of crystallographic groups is described elsewhere in these Tables (Wondratschek, 1995), but it will be surveyed briefly in Section 1.3.4.2.2.3 for the purpose of establishing further terminology and notation, after recalling basic notions and results concerning groups and group actions in Section 1.3.4.2.2.2.

(b) Orbits and isotropy subgroups Let x be a fixed element of X. Two fundamental entities are associated to x: (1) the subset of G consisting of all g such that gx x is a subgroup of G, called the isotropy subgroup of x and denoted Gx ; (2) the subset of X consisting of all elements gx with g running through G is called the orbit of x under G and is denoted Gx. Through these definitions, the action of G on X can be related to the internal structure of G, as follows. Let G=Gx denote the collection of distinct left cosets of Gx in G, i.e. of distinct subsets of G of the form gGx . Let jGj, jGx j, jGxj and jG=Gx j denote the numbers of elements in the corresponding sets. The number jG=Gx j of distinct cosets of Gx in G is also denoted G : Gx and is called the index of Gx in G; by Lagrange’s theorem G : Gx jG=Gx j

gGx 7 ! gx establishes a one-to-one correspondence between the distinct left cosets of Gx in G and the elements of the orbit of x under G. It follows that the number of distinct elements in the orbit of x is equal to the index of Gx in G: jGxj G : Gx

Gx f xj 2 G=Gx g: Similar definitions may be given for a right action of G on X. The set of distinct right cosets Gx g in G, denoted Gx nG, is then in one-toone correspondence with the distinct elements in the orbit xG of x.

(i) g1 g2 x g1 g2 x for all g1 , g2 2 G and all x 2 X ,

(c) Fundamental domain and orbit decomposition The group properties of G imply that two orbits under G are either disjoint or equal. The set X may thus be written as the disjoint union [ X Gxi ,

for all x 2 X :

An element g of G thus induces a mapping Tg of X into itself defined by Tg x gx, with the ‘representation property’: (iii) Tg1 g2 Tg1 Tg2 for all g1 , g2 2 G:

i2I

Since G is a group, every g has an inverse g 1 ; hence every mapping Tg has an inverse Tg 1 , so that each Tg is a permutation of X. Strictly speaking, what has just been defined is a left action. A right action of G on X is defined similarly as a mapping g, x 7 ! xg such that i0 xg1 g2 xg1 g2 0

ii

xe x

jGj , jGx j

and that the elements of the orbit of x may be listed without repetition in the form

(a) Left and right actions Let G be a group with identity element e, and let X be a set. An action of G on X is a mapping from G X to X with the property that, if g x denotes the image of g, x, then ex x

jGj : jGx j

Now if g1 and g2 are in the same coset of Gx , then g2 g1 g0 with g0 2 Gx , and hence g1 x g2 x; the converse is obviously true. Therefore, the mapping from cosets to orbit elements

1.3.4.2.2.2. Groups and group actions The books by Hall (1959) and Scott (1964) are recommended as reference works on group theory.

(ii)

for all g1 , g2 2 G:

where the xi are elements of distinct orbits and I is an indexing set labelling them. The subset D fxi gi2I is said to constitute a fundamental domain (mathematical terminology) or an asymmetric unit (crystallographic terminology) for the action of G on X: it contains one representative xi of each distinct orbit. Clearly, other fundamental domains may be obtained by choosing different representatives for these orbits. If X is finite and if f is an arbitrary complex-valued function over X, the ‘integral’ of f over X may be written as a sum of integrals over the distinct orbits, yielding the orbit decomposition formula:

for all g1 , g2 2 G and all x 2 X , for all x 2 X :

The mapping Tg0 defined by Tg0 x xg then has the ‘rightrepresentation’ property:

64

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 0 1 Indeed for any g1 , g2 in G, X X X X X @ A f x f yi f i xi Tg#1 Tg#2 f x Tg#2 f Tg1 1 x f Tg2 1 Tg1 1 x x2X i2I i2I yi 2Gxi

i 2G=Gxi ! f Tg1 Tg2 1 x; X X 1 f gi xi : since Tg1 Tg2 Tg1 g2 , it follows that jGxi j !

gi 2G

i2I

Tg#1 Tg#2 Tg#1 g2 :

In particular, taking f x 1 for all x and denoting by jX j the number of elements of X: X X X jGj jX j jGxi j jG=Gxi j : jGxi j i2I i2I i2I

It is clear that the change of variable must involve the action of g 1 (not g) if T # is to define a left action; using g instead would yield a right action. The linear representation operators Tg# on LX provide the most natural instrument for stating and exploiting symmetry properties which a function may possess with respect to the action of G. Thus a function f 2 LX will be called G-invariant if f gx f x for all g 2 G and all x 2 X . The value f x then depends on x only through its orbit Gx, and f is uniquely defined once it is specified on a fundamental domain D fxi gi2I ; its integral over X is then a weighted sum of its values in D: P P f x G : Gxi f xi :

(d) Conjugation, normal subgroups, semi-direct products A group G acts on itself by conjugation, i.e. by associating to g 2 G the mapping Cg defined by Cg h ghg 1 : Indeed, Cg hk Cg hCg k and Cg h 1 Cg 1 h. In particular, Cg operates on the set of subgroups of G, two subgroups H and K being called conjugate if H Cg K for some g 2 G; for example, it is easily checked that Ggx Cg Gx . The orbits under this action are the conjugacy classes of subgroups of G, and the isotropy subgroup of H under this action is called the normalizer of H in G. If fHg is a one-element orbit, H is called a self-conjugate or normal subgroup of G; the cosets of H in G then form a group G=H called the factor group of G by H. Let G and H be two groups, and suppose that G acts on H by automorphisms of H, i.e. in such a way that

x2X

The G-invariance of f may be written: Tg# f f

which averages an arbitrary function by the action of G. Conversely, if AG f f , then

where eH is the identity element of H:

gh gh 1

for all g 2 G:

Thus f is invariant under each Tg# , which obviously implies that f is invariant under the linear operator in LX 1 X # T , AG jGj g2G g

gh1 h2 gh1 gh2 geH eH

i2I

Tg#0 f Tg#0 AG f Tg#0 AG f AG f f

1

for all g0 2 G,

so that the two statements of the G-invariance of f are equivalent. The identity

Then the symbols [g, h] with g 2 G, h 2 H form a group K under the product rule:

Tg#0 AG AG for all g0 2 G

g1 , h1 g2 , h2 g1 g2 , h1 g1 h2 {associativity checks; [eG , eH ] is the identity; g, h has inverse g 1 , g 1 h 1 }. The group K is called the semi-direct product of H by G, denoted K H G. The elements g, eH form a subgroup of K isomorphic to G, the elements eG , h form a normal subgroup of K isomorphic to H, and the action of G on H may be represented as an action by conjugation in the sense that

is easily proved by observing that the map g 7 ! g0 g (g0 being any element of G) is a one-to-one map from G into itself, so that P # P # Tg Tg0 g

Cg; eH eG , h eG , gh:

AG 2 AG ,

A familiar example of semi-direct product is provided by the group of Euclidean motions M3 (Section 1.3.4.2.2.1). An element S of M3 may be written S R, t with R 2 O3, the orthogonal group, and t 2 T3, the translation group, and the product law

and hence that its eigenvalues are either 0 or 1. In summary, we may say that the invariance of f under G is equivalent to f being an eigenfunction of the associated projector AG for eigenvalue 1.

g2G

g2G

as these sums differ only by the order of the terms. The same identity implies that AG is a projector:

R 1 , t1 R 2 , t2 R 1 R 2 , t1 R 1 t2 shows that M3 T3 O3 with O3 acting on T3 by rotating the translation vectors.

( f ) Orbit exchange One final result about group actions which will be used repeatedly later is concerned with the case when X has the structure of a Cartesian product:

(e) Associated actions in function spaces For every left action Tg of G in X, there is an associated left action Tg# of G on the space LX of complex-valued functions over X, defined by ‘change of variable’ (Section 1.3.2.3.9.5):

X X1 X2 . . . Xn and when G acts diagonally on X, i.e. acts on each Xj separately: gx gx1 , x2 , . . . , xn gx1 , gx2 , . . . , gxn :

Tg# f x f Tg 1 x f g 1 x:

Then complete sets (but not usually minimal sets) of representatives

65

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES of the distinct orbits for the action of G in X may be obtained in the form Dk X 1 . . . X k

1

k fxik gik 2Ik

Xk1 . . . Xn

for each k 1, 2, . . . , n, i.e. by taking a fundamental domain in Xk and all the elements in Xj with j 6 k. The action of G on each Dk does indeed generate the whole of X: given an arbitrary element y y1 , y2 , . . . , yn of X, there is an index ik 2 Ik such that yk 2 k k Gxik and a coset of Gxk in G such that yk xik for any ik representative of that coset; then k

which is of the form y dk with dk 2 Dk . The various Dk are related in a simple manner by ‘transposition’ or ‘orbit exchange’ (the latter name is due to J. W. Cooley). For instance, Dj may be obtained from Dk j 6 k as follows: for each yj 2 Xj there exists gyj 2 G and ij yj 2 Ij such that j yj gyj xij yj ; therefore [

monoclinic

Z=2Z Z=2Z

orthorhombic

Z=3Z, Z=3Z fg

trigonal

Z=4Z, Z=4Z fg

tetragonal

Z=6Z, Z=6Z fg

hexagonal

Z=2Z Z=2Z fS3 g

cubic

and the extension of these groups by a centre of inversion. In this list denotes a semi-direct product [Section 1.3.4.2.2.2(d)], denotes the automorphism g 7 ! g 1 , and S3 (the group of permutations on three letters) operates by permuting the copies of Z=2Z (using the subgroup A3 of cyclic permutations gives the tetrahedral subsystem). Step 2 leads to a list of 73 equivalence classes called arithmetic classes of representations g 7 ! Rg , where Rg is a 3 3 integer matrix, with Rg1 g2 Rg1 Rg2 and Re I3 . This enumeration is more familiar if equivalence is relaxed so as to allow conjugation by rational 3 3 matrices with determinant 1: this leads to the 32 crystal classes. The difference between an arithmetic class and its rational class resides in the choice of a lattice mode P, A=B=C, I, F or R. Arithmetic classes always refer to a primitive lattice, but may use inequivalent integral representations for a given geometric symmetry element; while crystallographers prefer to change over to a non-primitive lattice, if necessary, in order to preserve the same integral representation for a given geometric symmetry element. The matrices P and Q P 1 describing the changes of basis between primitive and centred lattices are listed in Table 5.1 and illustrated in Figs. 5.3 to 5.9, pp. 76–79, of Volume A of International Tables (Arnold, 1995). Step 3 gives rise to a system of congruences for the systems of non-primitive translations ftg gg2G which may be associated to the matrices fRg gg2G of a given arithmetic class, namely:

y 1 y1 , . . . , 1 yk 1 , xik , 1 yk1 , . . . , 1 yn

Dj

Z=2Z

gyj 1 Dk ,

yj 2Xj

since the fundamental domain of Xk is thus expanded to the whole of Xk , while Xj is reduced to its fundamental domain. In other words: orbits are simultaneously collapsed in the jth factor and expanded in the kth. When G operates without fixed points in each Xk (i.e. Gxk feg for all xk 2 Xk ), then each Dk is a fundamental domain for the action of G in X. The existence of fixed points in some or all of the Xk complicates the situation in that for each k and each xk 2 Xk such that Gxk 6 feg the action of G=Gxk on the other factors must be examined. Shenefelt (1988) has made a systematic study of orbit exchange for space group P622 and its subgroups. Orbit exchange will be encountered, in a great diversity of forms, as the basic mechanism by which intermediate results may be rearranged between the successive stages of the computation of crystallographic Fourier transforms (Section 1.3.4.3).

tg1 g2 Rg1 tg2 tg1 mod , first derived by Frobenius (1911). If equivalence under the action of A3 is taken into account, 219 classes are found. If equivalence is defined with respect to the action of the subgroup A 3 of A3 consisting only of transformations with determinant +1, then 230 classes called space-group types are obtained. In particular, associating to each of the 73 arithmetic classes a trivial set of non-primitive translations tg 0 for all g 2 G yields the 73 symmorphic space groups. This third step may also be treated as an abstract problem concerning group extensions, using cohomological methods [Ascher & Janner (1965); see Janssen (1973) for a summary]; the connection with Frobenius’s approach, as generalized by Zassenhaus (1948), is examined in Ascher & Janner (1968). The finiteness of the number of space-group types in dimension 3 was shown by Bieberbach (1912) to be the case in arbitrary dimension. The reader interested in N-dimensional space-group theory for N > 3 may consult Brown (1969), Brown et al. (1978), Schwarzenberger (1980), and Engel (1986). The standard reference for integral representation theory is Curtis & Reiner (1962). All three-dimensional space groups G have the property of being solvable, i.e. that there exists a chain of subgroups

1.3.4.2.2.3. Classification of crystallographic groups Let be a crystallographic group, the normal subgroup of its lattice translations, and G the finite factor group =. Then G acts on by conjugation [Section 1.3.4.2.2.2(d)] and this action, being a mapping of a lattice into itself, is representable by matrices with integer entries. The classification of crystallographic groups proceeds from this observation in the following three steps: Step 1: find all possible finite abstract groups G which can be represented by 3 3 integer matrices. Step 2: for each such G find all its inequivalent representations by 3 3 integer matrices, equivalence being defined by a change of primitive lattice basis (i.e. conjugation by a 3 3 integer matrix with determinant 1). Step 3: for each G and each equivalence class of integral representations of G, find all inequivalent extensions of the action of G from to T3, equivalence being defined by an affine coordinate change [i.e. conjugation by an element of A3]. Step 1 leads to the following groups, listed in association with the crystal system to which they later give rise:

G Gr > Gr

1

> . . . > G1 > G0 feg,

where each Gi 1 is a normal subgroup of G1 and the factor group Gi =Gi 1 is a cyclic group of some order mi 1 i r. This property may be established by inspection, or deduced from a famous theorem of Burnside [see Burnside (1911), pp. 322–323] according to which any group G such that jGj p q , with p and q distinct primes, is solvable; in the case at hand, p 2 and q 3.

66

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY Sg# f x f Sg 1 x f Rg 1 x

The whole classification of 3D space groups can be performed swiftly by a judicious use of the solvability property (L. Auslander, personal communication). Solvability facilitates the indexing of elements of G in terms of generators and relations (Coxeter & Moser, 1972; Magnus et al., 1976) for the purpose of calculation. By definition of solvability, elements g1 , g2 , . . . , gr may be chosen in such a way that the cyclic factor group Gi =Gi 1 is generated by the coset gi Gi 1 . The set fg1 , g2 , . . . , gr g is then a system of generators for G such that the defining relations [see Brown et al. (1978), pp. 26–27] have the particularly simple form

The operators R # g associated to the purely rotational part of each transformation Sg will also be used. Note the relation: Sg# tg R # g: Let a crystal structure be described by the list of the atoms in its unit cell, indexed by k 2 K. Let the electron-density distribution about the centre of mass of atom k be described by k with respect to the standard coordinates x. Then the motif 0 may be written as a sum of translates: P 0 xk k k2K

g1m1 e, gimi

gi 1 gj 1 gi gj

tg :

ai; i 1 ai; i 2 ai; 1 gi 1 gi 2 . . . g1 bi; j; j 1 bi; j; j 2 bi; j; 1 gj 1 gj 2 . . . g1

and the crystal electron density is r 0 . Suppose that is invariant under . If xk1 and xk2 are in the same orbit, say xk2 Sg xk1 , then

for 2 i r, for 1 i < j r,

xk2 k2 Sg# xk1 k1 :

with 0 ai, h < mh and 0 bi, j, h < mh . Each element g of G may then be obtained uniquely as an ‘ordered word’:

Therefore if xk is a special position and thus Gxk 6 feg, then Sg# xk k xk k

g grkr grkr 11 . . . g1k1 , with 0 ki < mi for all i 1, . . . , r, using the algorithm of Ju¨rgensen (1970). Such generating sets and defining relations are tabulated in Brown et al. (1978, pp. 61–76). An alternative list is given in Janssen (1973, Table 4.3, pp. 121–123, and Appendix D, pp. 262–271).

This identity implies that Rg xk tg xk mod (the special position condition), and that k R # g k , i.e. that k must be invariant by the pure rotational part of Gxk . Trueblood (1956) investigated the consequences of this invariance on the thermal vibration tensor of an atom in a special position (see Section 1.3.4.2.2.6 below). Let J be a subset of K such that fxj gj2J contains exactly one atom from each orbit. An orbit decomposition yields an expression for 0 in terms of symmetry-unique atoms: 0 1 P P 0 @ S # xj j A

1.3.4.2.2.4. Crystallographic group action in real space The action of a crystallographic group may be written in terms of standard coordinates in R3 =Z3 as g, x 7 ! Sg x Rg x tg mod ,

for all g 2 Gxk :

g 2 G,

with Sg1 g2 Sg1 Sg2 : An important characteristic of the representation : g 7 ! Sg is its reducibility, i.e. whether or not it has invariant subspaces other than f0g and the whole of R3 =Z3 . For triclinic, monoclinic and orthorhombic space groups, is reducible to a direct sum of three one-dimensional representations: 0 1 1 0 0 Rg B C 0 A; Rg @ 0 Rg2 0 0 R3 g

j2J

j 2G=Gxj

j

or equivalently

8 P< P j R j 1 x 0 x j2J : j 2G=Gx

9 = xj : ;

t j

j

If the atoms are assumed to be Gaussian, write Zj j X jdet Uj j1=2

for trigonal, tetragonal and hexagonal groups, it is reducible to a direct sum of two representations, of dimension 2 and 1, respectively; while for tetrahedral and cubic groups, it is irreducible. By Schur’s lemma (see e.g. Ledermann, 1987), any matrix which commutes with all the matrices Rg for g 2 G must be a scalar multiple of the identity in each invariant subspace. In the reducible cases, the reductions involve changes of basis which will be rational, not integral, for those arithmetic classes corresponding to non-primitive lattices. Thus the simplification of having maximally reduced representation has as its counterpart the use of non-primitive lattices. The notions of orbit, isotropy subgroup and fundamental domain (or asymmetric unit) for the action of G on R3 =Z3 are inherited directly from the general setting of Section 1.3.4.2.2.2. Points x for which Gx 6 feg are called special positions, and the various types of isotropy subgroups which may be encountered in crystallographic groups have been labelled by means of Wyckoff symbols. The representation operators Sg# in LR3 =Z3 have the form:

exp

1 1 T 2X Uj X

in Cartesian A coordinates,

where Zj is the total number of electrons, and where the matrix Uj combines the Gaussian spread of the electrons in atom j at rest with the covariance matrix of the random positional fluctuations of atom j caused by thermal agitation. In crystallographic coordinates: Zj j x jdet Qj j1=2 exp

1 1 T 2x Qj x

with Qj A 1 Uj A 1 T :

If atom k is in a special position xk , then the matrix Qk must satisfy the identity Rg Q k Rg 1 Q k

67

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES for all g in the isotropy subgroup of xk . This condition may also be written in Cartesian coordinates as

In the absence of dispersion, Friedel’s law gives rise to the phase restriction:

Tg Uk Tg 1 Uk ,

'h h t mod :

Tg ARg A :

The value of the restricted phase is independent of the choice of coset representative . Indeed, if 0 is another choice, then 0 g with g 2 Gh and by the Frobenius congruences t 0 Rg t tg , so that

where 1

This is a condensed form of the symmetry properties derived by Trueblood (1956).

h t 0 RTg h t h tg mod 1: Since g 2 Gh , RTg h h and h tg 0 mod 1 if h is not a systematic absence: thus

1.3.4.2.2.5. Crystallographic group action in reciprocal space An elementary discussion of this topic may be found in Chapter 1.4 of this volume. Having established that the symmetry of a crystal may be most conveniently stated and handled via the left representation g 7 ! Sg# of G given by its action on electron-density distributions, it is natural to transpose this action by the identity of Section 1.3.2.5.5: F S # T F t R # T j

g

g

h t h t mod : The treatment of centred lattices may be viewed as another instance of the duality between periodization and decimation (Section 1.3.2.7.2): the periodization of the electron density by the non-primitive lattice translations has as its counterpart in reciprocal space the decimation of the transform by the ‘reflection conditions’ describing the allowed reflections, the decimation and periodization matrices being each other’s contragredient. The reader may consult the papers by Bienenstock & Ewald (1962) and Wells (1965) for earlier approaches to this material.

j

g

exp2ij tg Rg 1 T# F Tj for any tempered distribution T, i.e. F Sg# Tj exp2ij tg F TRTg j

1.3.4.2.2.6. Structure-factor calculation Structure factors may be calculated from a list of symmetryunique atoms by Fourier transformation of the orbit decomposition formula for the motif 0 given in Section 1.3.4.2.2.4:

whenever the transforms are functions. Putting T , a Z3 -periodic distribution, this relation defines a left action Sg of G on LZ3 given by Sg Fh exp2ij tg FRTg h which is conjugate to the action F S # S F , g

g

Fh F 0 h 2 0 13 P P S #j xj j A5h F 4 @

Sg#

in the sense that i:e: S F S # F : g

g

j2J

Sg#

expressing the G-invariance of is then The identity equivalent to the identity Sg F F between its structure factors, i.e. (Waser, 1955a)

Fh exp2ih tg FRTg h:

If G is made to act on Z3 via :

P P

j 2G=Gxj

j2J j 2G=Gxj

P P

j2J j 2G=Gxj

F t j R#

j xj j h exp2ih t j

R j 1 T# exp2ij xj F j j h P P exp2ih t j

g, h 7 ! Rg 1 T h,

the usual notions of orbit, isotropy subgroup (denoted Gh ) and fundamental domain may be attached to this action. The above relation then shows that the spectrum fFhgh2Z3 is entirely known if it is specified on a fundamental domain D containing one reciprocal-lattice point from each orbit of this action. A reflection h is called special if Gh 6 feg. Then for any g 2 Gh we have RTg h h, and hence

j2J j 2G=Gxj

exp2iRT j h xj F j RT j h; i.e. finally: Fh

Fh exp2ih tg Fh,

P

P

j2J j 2G=Gxj

expf2ih S j xj gF j RT j h:

In the case of Gaussian atoms, the atomic transforms are

implying that Fh 0 unless h tg 0 mod 1. Special reflections h for which h tg 6 0 mod 1 for some g 2 Gh are thus systematically absent. This phenomenon is an instance of the duality between periodization and decimation of Section 1.3.2.7.2: if tg 6 0, the projection of on the direction of h has period tg h=h h < 1, hence its transform (which is the portion of F supported by the central line through h) will be decimated, giving rise to the above condition. A reflection h is called centric if Gh G h, i.e. if the orbit of h contains h. Then RT h h for some coset in G=Gh , so that the following relation must hold:

F j h Zj exp

2 1 T 2h 4 Qj h

or equivalently F j H Zj exp

2 1 T 2H 4 Uj H:

Two common forms of equivalent temperature factors (incorporating both atomic form and thermal motion) are (i) isotropic B: F j h Zj exp

jFhj expi'h exp2ih t jF hj expi' h :

T 1 4Bj H H,

so that Uj Bj =82 I, or Qj Bj =82 A 1 A 1 T ;

68

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY Grouping the summands for hl and hl yields a real-valued summand P 2Fhl cos2hl S l x 'hl :

(ii) anisotropic ’s: F j h Zj exp hT b j h, so that b j 22 Qj 22 A 1 Uj A 1 T , or Uj 1=22 A j AT . In the first case, F j RT j h does not depend on j , and therefore: P Fh Zj expf 14Bj hT A 1 A 1 T hg j2J

P

j 2G=Gxj

l 2G=Ghl

Case 2: G hl 6 Ghl , hl is acentric. The two orbits are then disjoint, and the summands corresponding to hl and hl may be grouped together into a single real-valued summand P 2Fhl cos2hl S l x 'hl :

expf2ih S j xj g:

l 2G=Ghl

In order to reindex the collection of all summands of , put

In the second case, however, no such simplification can occur: P P exp hT R j b j RT j h Fh Zj

L Lc [ La , where Lc labels the Friedel-unique centric reflections in L and La the acentric ones, and let L a stand for a subset of La containing a unique element of each pair fhl , hl g for l 2 La . Then

j 2G=Gxj

j2J

expf2ih S j xj g:

x F0

These formulae, or special cases of them, were derived by Rollett & Davies (1955), Waser (1955b), and Trueblood (1956). The computation of structure factors by applying the discrete Fourier transform to a set of electron-density values calculated on a grid will be examined in Section 1.3.4.4.5.

1.3.4.2.2.7. Electron-density calculations A formula for the Fourier synthesis of electron-density maps from symmetry-unique structure factors is readily obtained by orbit decomposition: P x Fh exp 2ih x

P

"

l2L l 2G=Ghl

P l2L

"

Fhl

FRT l hl exp P

l 2G=Ghl

P a2L a

#

P

2Fhc

c 2G=Ghc

"

2Fha

P

a 2G=Gha

cos2hc S c x

'hc #

cos2ha S a x

'ha :

1.3.4.2.2.8. Parseval’s theorem with crystallographic symmetry The general statement of Parseval’s theorem given in Section 1.3.4.2.1.5 may be rewritten in terms of symmetry-unique structure factors and electron densities by means of orbit decomposition. In reciprocal space, P P P F1 hF2 h F1 RT l hl F2 RT l hl ;

#

P

"

c2Lc

h2Z3

P

2iRT l hl x #

l2L l 2G=Ghl

h2Z3

expf 2ihl S l xg ,

for each l, the summands corresponding to the various l are equal, so that the left-hand side is equal to

where L is a subset of Z3 such that fhl gl2L contains exactly one point of each orbit for the action : g, h 7 ! Rg 1 T h of G on Z3 . The physical electron density per cubic a˚ngstro¨m is then 1 X Ax V 3 with V in A . In the absence of anomalous scatterers in the crystal and of a centre of inversion I in , the spectrum fFhgh2Z3 has an extra symmetry, namely the Hermitian symmetry expressing Friedel’s law (Section 1.3.4.2.1.4). The action of a centre of inversion may be added to that of to obtain further simplification in the above formula: under this extra action, an orbit Ghl with hl 6 0 is either mapped into itself or into the disjoint orbit G hl ; the terms corresponding to hl and hl may then be grouped within the common orbit in the first case, and between the two orbits in the second case. Case 1: G hl Ghl , hl is centric. The cosets in G=Ghl may be partitioned into two disjoint classes by picking one coset in each of the two-coset orbits of the action of I. Let G=Ghl denote one such class: then the reduced orbit

F1 0F2 0 P 2jG=Ghc kF1 hc kF2 hc j cos'1 hc

'2 hc

c2Lc

P

a2L a

2jG=Gha kF1 ha kF2 ha j cos'1 ha

'2 ha :

In real space, the triple integral may be rewritten as R R 1 x2 x d3 x jGj 1 x2 x d3 x D

R3 =Z3

(where D is the asymmetric unit) if 1 and 2 are smooth densities, since the set of special positions has measure zero. If, however, the integral is approximated as a sum over a G-invariant grid defined by decimation matrix N, special positions on this grid must be taken into account: 1 X 1 x2 x jNj 3 3 k2Z =NZ

1 X G : Gx 1 x2 x jNj x2D jGj X 1 1 x2 x, jNj x2D jGx j

fRT l hl j l 2 G=Ghl g contains exactly once the Friedel-unique half of the full orbit Ghl , and thus

where the discrete asymmetric unit D contains exactly one point in each orbit of G in Z3 =NZ3 .

jG=Ghl j 12jG=Ghl j:

69

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 1.3.4.2.2.9. Convolution theorems with crystallographic symmetry The standard convolution theorems derived in the absence of symmetry are readily seen to follow from simple properties of functions e h, x exp2ih x (denoted simply e in formulae which are valid for both signs), namely: i

eh, x ek, x eh k, x,

ii

eh, x eh, y eh, x y:

F1 hF2 h with x

in real space

fh 7 ! eh, xgx2R3 =Z3

in reciprocal space

and

eh, x e h, x eh,

1 x2 x

Fh

x:

XX

jGh j e l, tg F1 h jGh RTg l j jGl j l2D g2G

01

Sg# eh, x eh, Sg 1 x

PB P # 1 C S j x1 j1 A, @ 1

j1 2J1

The kernels of symmetrized Fourier transforms are not the functions e but rather the symmetrized sums P P h, x e h, Sg x e h, Sg 1 x

02

g2G

iiG h, x h, y

P

PB @

j2 2J2

1

P 2

j2 2G=Gxj

2 C S #j x2 j2 A, 2

j2

2

where J1 and J2 label the symmetry-unique atoms placed at 1 2 positions fxj1 gj1 2J1 and fxj2 gj2 2J2 , respectively. To calculate the correlation between 1 and 2 we need the following preliminary formulae, which are easily established: if Sx Rx t and f is an arbitrary function on R3 , then R # f R # f , x f x f , R # x f Rx f ,

g2G

for which the linearization formulae are readily obtained using (i), (ii) and (iv) as P iG h, x k, x e k, tg h RTg k, x,

j1

1

j 2G=Gx 1 j1

0

e Rg 1 T h, tg eRg 1 T h, x:

RTg lF2 l:

1.3.4.2.2.10. Correlation and Patterson functions Consider two model electron densities 1 and 2 with the same period lattice Z3 and the same space group G. Write their motifs in terms of atomic electron densities (Section 1.3.4.2.2.4) as 0 1

or equivalently

g2G

X 1 Fh h, x jGh j h2D

Both formulae are simply orbit decompositions of their symmetryfree counterparts.

Sg# 1 eh, x eh, Sg x eh, tg eRTg h, x

iv0

Sg z2 z:

with

When crystallographic symmetry is present, the convolution theorems remain valid in their original form if written out in terms of ‘expanded’ data, but acquire a different form when rewritten in terms of symmetry-unique data only. This rewriting is made possible by the extra relation (Section 1.3.4.2.2.5) iv

jGx j 1 x Sg z j jGz j

then

both generate an algebra of functions, i.e. a vector space endowed with an internal multiplication, since (i) and (ii) show how to ‘linearize products’. Friedel’s law (when applicable) on the one hand, and the Fourier relation between intensities and the Patterson function on the other hand, both follow from the property iii

1 XX jNj z2D g2G jGx

The backward convolution theorem is derived similarly. Let X 1 1 x F1 k k, x, jGk j k2D X 1 F2 l l, x, 2 x jGl j l2D

These relations imply that the families of functions fx 7 ! eh, xgh2Z3

X 1 x h, x jG j x x2D

h, x Sg y,

hence

g2G

S # x f Sx R # f

where the choice of sign in must be the same throughout each formula. Formulae (i)G defining the ‘structure-factor algebra’ associated to G were derived by Bertaut (1955c, 1956b,c, 1959a,b) and Bertaut & Waser (1957) in another context. The forward convolution theorem (in discrete form) then follows. Let X 1 F1 h 1 y h, y, j jG y y2D X 1 F2 h 2 z h, z, j jG z z2D

and S # x f

Sx R

#

f;

and S1# f1 S2# f2 S1# f1 S1 1 S2 # f2 S2# S2 1 S1 # f1 f2 : The cross correlation 01 02 between motifs is therefore PPPP # 1 2 01 02 S j x1 j1 S #j x2 j2 j1 j2 j1 j2

PPPP j1 j2 j1 j2

1

S

j

2

j1

2

2

1

xj S j xj 2

1

1

j2

1

2

j1 R # R #

j

j j2 1

2

1

2

j1 R # which contains a peak of shape R #

j

j2 j2 at the 2 1 1 interatomic vector S j2 xj2 S j1 xj1 for each j1 2 J1 , j2 2 J2 ,

j1 2 G=Gx1 , j2 2 G=Gx2 .

then

j1

70

j2

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 01

is then performed by selecting the n cosine strips labelled Aj , hj and the n sine strips labelled Bj , hj , placing them in register, and adding the tabulated values columnwise. The number 60 was chosen as the l.c.m. of 12 (itself the l.c.m. of the orders of all possible non-primitive translations) and of 10 (for decimal convenience). The limited accuracy imposed by the two-digit tabulation was later improved by Robertson’s sorting board (Robertson, 1936a,b) or by the use of separate strips for each decimal digit of the amplitude (Booth, 1948b), which allowed threedigit tabulation while keeping the set of strips within manageable size. Cochran (1948a) found that, for most structures under study at the time, the numerical inaccuracies of the method were less than the level of error in the experimental data. The sampling rate was subsequently increased from 60 to 120 (Beevers, 1952) to cope with larger unit cells. Further gains in speed and accuracy were sought through the construction of special-purpose mechanical, electro-mechanical, electronic or optical devices. Two striking examples are the mechanical computer RUFUS built by Robertson (1954, 1955, 1961) on the principle of previous strip methods (see also Robertson, 1932) and the electronic analogue computer X-RAC built by Pepinsky, capable of real-time calculation and display of 2D and 3D Fourier syntheses (Pepinsky, 1947; Pepinsky & Sayre, 1948; Pepinsky et al., 1961; see also Suryan, 1957). The optical methods of Lipson & Taylor (1951, 1958) also deserve mention. Many other ingenious devices were invented, whose descriptions may be found in Booth (1948b), Niggli (1961), and Lipson & Cochran (1968). Later, commercial punched-card machines were programmed to carry out Fourier summations or structure-factor calculations (Shaffer et al., 1946a,b; Cox et al., 1947, 1949; Cox & Jeffrey, 1949; Donohue & Schomaker, 1949; Grems & Kasper, 1949; Hodgson et al., 1949; Greenhalgh & Jeffrey, 1950; Kitz & Marchington, 1953). The modern era of digital electronic computation of Fourier series was initiated by the work of Bennett & Kendrew (1952), Mayer & Trueblood (1953), Ahmed & Cruickshank (1953b), Sparks et al. (1956) and Fowweather (1955). Their Fourier-synthesis programs used Beevers–Lipson factorization, the program by Sparks et al. being the first 3D Fourier program useable for all space groups (although these were treated as P1 or P1 by data expansion). Ahmed & Barnes (1958) then proposed a general programming technique to allow full use of symmetry elements (orthorhombic or lower) in the 3D Beevers–Lipson factorization process, including multiplicity corrections. Their method was later adopted by Shoemaker & Sly (1961), and by crystallographic program writers at large. The discovery of the FFT algorithm by Cooley & Tukey in 1965, which instantly transformed electrical engineering and several other disciplines, paradoxically failed to have an immediate impact on crystallographic computing. A plausible explanation is that the calculation of large 3D Fourier maps was a relatively infrequent task which was not thought to constitute a bottleneck, as crystallographers had learned to settle most structural questions by means of cheaper 2D sections or projections. It is significant in this respect that the first use of the FFT in crystallography by Barrett & Zwick (1971) should have occurred as part of an iterative scheme for improving protein phases by density modification in real space, which required a much greater number of Fourier transformations than any previous method. Independently, Bondot (1971) had attracted attention to the merits of the FFT algorithm. The FFT program used by Barrett & Zwick had been written for signal-processing applications. It was restricted to sampling rates of the form 2n , and was not designed to take advantage of crystallographic symmetry at any stage of the calculation; Bantz & Zwick (1974) later improved this situation somewhat.

02

The cross-correlation r between the original electron densities is then obtained by further periodizing by Z3 . Note that these expressions are valid for any choice of ‘atomic’ 1 2 density functions j1 and j2 , which may be taken as molecular fragments if desired (see Section 1.3.4.4.8). If G contains elements g such that Rg has an eigenspace E1 with eigenvalue 1 and an invariant complementary subspace E2 , while tg has a non-zero component tg1 in E1 , then the Patterson function r 0 0 will contain Harker peaks (Harker, 1936) of the form Sg x

2 x t1 g Sg x

x

[where Sgs represent the action of g in E2 ] in the translate of E1 by t1 g . 1.3.4.3. Crystallographic discrete Fourier transform algorithms 1.3.4.3.1. Historical introduction In 1929, W. L. Bragg demonstrated the practical usefulness of the Fourier transform relation between electron density and structure factors by determining the structure of diopside from three principal projections calculated numerically by 2D Fourier summation (Bragg, 1929). It was immediately realized that the systematic use of this powerful method, and of its extension to three dimensions, would entail considerable amounts of numerical computation which had to be organized efficiently. As no other branch of applied science had yet needed this type of computation, crystallographers had to invent their own techniques. The first step was taken by Beevers & Lipson (1934) who pointed out that a 2D summation could be factored into successive 1D summations. This is essentially the tensor product property of the Fourier transform (Sections 1.3.2.4.2.4, 1.3.3.3.1), although its aspect is rendered somewhat complicated by the use of sines and cosines instead of complex exponentials. Computation is economized to the extent that the cost of an N N transform grows with N as 2N 3 rather than N 4 . Generalization to 3D is immediate, reducing computation size from N 6 to 3N 4 for an N N N transform. The complication introduced by using expressions in terms of sines and cosines is turned to advantage when symmetry is present, as certain families of terms are systematically absent or are simply related to each other; multiplicity corrections must, however, be introduced. The necessary information was tabulated for each space group by Lonsdale (1936), and was later incorporated into Volume I of International Tables. The second step was taken by Beevers & Lipson (1936) and Lipson & Beevers (1936) in the form of the invention of the ‘Beevers–Lipson strips’, a practical device which was to assist a whole generation of crystallographers in the numerical computation of crystallographic Fourier sums. The strips comprise a set of ‘cosine strips’ tabulating the functions 2hm A cos A 1, 2, . . . , 99; h 1, 2, . . . , 99 60 and a set of ‘sine strips’ tabulating the functions 2hm B 1, 2, . . . , 99; h 1, 2, . . . , 99 B sin 60 for the 16 arguments m 0, 1, . . . , 15. Function values are rounded to the nearest integer, and those for other arguments m may be obtained by using the symmetry properties of the sine and cosine functions. A Fourier summation of the form n X 2hj m 2hj m Y m Bj sin Aj cos 60 60 j1

71

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES X 1 It was the work of Ten Eyck (1973) and Immirzi (1973, 1976) F m exp2ih N 1 m h which led to the general adoption of the FFT in crystallographic jdet Nj 3 3 m2Z =NZ computing. Immirzi treated all space groups as P1 by data expansion. Ten Eyck based his program on a versatile multi-radix FFT routine (Gentleman & Sande, 1966) coupled with a flexible and P indexing scheme for dealing efficiently with multidimensional x Fh exp 2ih x transforms. He also addressed the problems of incorporating hZ3 =NT Z3 symmetry elements of order 2 into the factorization of 1D transforms, and of transposing intermediate results by other or P symmetry elements. He was thus able to show that in a large m Fh exp 2ih N 1 m: number of space groups (including the 74 space groups having h2Z3 =NT Z3 orthorhombic or lower symmetry) it is possible to calculate only the unique results from the unique data within the logic of the FFT In the presence of symmetry, the unique data are algorithm. Ten Eyck wrote and circulated a package of programs for – fx gx2D or fm gm2D in real space (by abuse of notation, D will computing Fourier maps and re-analysing them into structure denote an asymmetric unit for x or for m indifferently); – fFh gh2D in reciprocal space. factors in some simple space groups (P1, P1, P2, P2/m, P21, P222, The previous summations may then be subjected to orbital P212121, Pmmm). This package was later augmented by a handful of new space-group-specific programs contributed by other crystal- decomposition, to yield the following ‘crystallographic DFT’ lographers (P21212, I222, P3121, P41212). The writing of such (CDFT) defining relations: " # programs is an undertaking of substantial complexity, which has X P 1 deterred all but the bravest: the usual practice is now to expand data x expf2ih S xg Fh for a high-symmetry space group to the largest subgroup for which a jdet Nj x2D 2G=Gx specific FFT program exists in the package, rather than attempt to " # write a new program. Attempts have been made to introduce more 1 X 1 P x expf2ih Sg xg , modern approaches to the calculation of crystallographic Fourier jdet Nj x2D jGx j g2G transforms (Auslander, Feig & Winograd, 1982; Auslander & " # Shenefelt, 1987; Auslander et al., 1988) but have not gone beyond P P x Fh expf 2ih S xg the stage of preliminary studies. h2D

2G=Gh The task of fully exploiting the FFT algorithm in crystallographic " # computations is therefore still unfinished, and it is the purpose of P 1 P this section to provide a systematic treatment such as that (say) of Fh expf 2ih Sg xg , jGh j g2G h2D Ahmed & Barnes (1958) for the Beevers–Lipson algorithm. Ten Eyck’s approach, based on the reducibility of certain space groups, is extended by the derivation of a universal transposition with the obvious alternatives in terms of m , m Nx. Our problem formula for intermediate results. It is then shown that space groups is to evaluate the CDFT for a given space group as efficiently as which are not completely reducible may nevertheless be treated by possible, in spite of the fact that the group action has spoilt the three-dimensional Cooley–Tukey factorization in such a way that simple tensor-product structure of the ordinary three-dimensional their symmetry may be fully exploited, whatever the shape of their DFT (Section 1.3.3.3.1). Two procedures are available to carry out the 3D summations asymmetric unit. Finally, new factorization methods with built-in symmetries are presented. The unifying concept throughout this involved as a succession of smaller summations: (1) decomposition into successive transforms of fewer dimenpresentation is that of ‘group action’ on indexing sets, and of ‘orbit exchange’ when this action has a composite structure; it affords new sions but on the same number of points along these dimensions. This ways of rationalizing the use of symmetry, or of improving possibility depends on the reducibility of the space group, as defined in Section 1.3.4.2.2.4, and simply invokes the tensor product computational speed, or both. property of the DFT; (2) factorization of the transform into transforms of the same number of dimensions as the original one, but on fewer points along 1.3.4.3.2. Defining relations and symmetry considerations each dimension. This possibility depends on the arithmetic A finite set of reflections fFhl gl2L can be periodized without factorability of the decimation matrix N, as described in Section aliasing by the translations of a suitable sublattice NT of the 1.3.3.3.2. reciprocal lattice ; the converse operation in real space is the Clearly, a symmetry expansion to the largest fully reducible sampling of at points X of a grid of the form N 1 (Section subgroup of the space group will give maximal decomposability, 1.3.2.7.3). In standard coordinates, fFhl gl2L is periodized by NT Z3 , but will require computing more than the unique results from more and is sampled at points x 2 N 1 Z3 . than the unique data. Economy will follow from factoring the In the absence of symmetry, the unique data are transforms in the subspaces within which the space group acts 3 3 – the Fh indexed by h 2 Z =NT Z in reciprocal space; irreducibly. – the x indexed by x 2 N 1 Z3 =Z3 ; or equivalently the m For irreducible subspaces of dimension 1, the group action is indexed by m 2 Z3 =NZ3 , where x N 1 m. readily incorporated into the factorization of the transform, as first They are connected by the ordinary DFT relations: shown by Ten Eyck (1973). For irreducible subspaces of dimension 2 or 3, the ease of incorporation of symmetry into the factorization depends on the X 1 Fh x exp2ih x type of factorization method used. The multidimensional Cooley– jdet Nj Tukey method (Section 1.3.3.3.1) is rather complicated; the x2N 1 Z3 =Z3 multidimensional Good method (Section 1.3.3.3.2.2) is somewhat simpler; and the Rader/Winograd factorization admits a generalization, based on the arithmetic of certain rings of algebraic or

72

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY integers, which accommodates 2D crystallographic symmetries in a most powerful and pleasing fashion. At each stage of the calculation, it is necessary to keep track of the definition of the asymmetric unit and of the symmetry properties of the numbers being manipulated. This requirement applies not only to the initial data and to the final results, where these are familiar; but also to all the intermediate quantities produced by partial transforms (on subsets of factors, or subsets of dimensions, or both), where they are less familiar. Here, the general formalism of transposition (or ‘orbit exchange’) described in Section 1.3.4.2.2.2 plays a central role.

and hence the symmetry properties of T are expressed by the identity T Sg0 # Sg00 T: Applying this relation not to T but to Sg0 1 # Se00 T gives Sg0 1 # Se00 T Se0 # Sg00 T, i.e. 00

TSg0 x0 , h00 exp2ih00 t00g Tx0 , RgT h00 : If the unique Fh Fh0 , h00 were initially indexed by

1.3.4.3.3. Interaction between symmetry and decomposition

all h0 unique h00 (see Section 1.3.4.2.2.2), this formula allows the reindexing of the intermediate results Tx0 , h00 from the initial form

Suppose that the space-group action is reducible, i.e. that for each g2G 0 0 tg Rg 0 Rg , tg 00 ; 0 R00g tg

all x0 unique h00 to the final form unique x0 all h00 ,

by Schur’s 0 lemma, the decimation matrix must then be of the form N 0 if it is to commute with all the Rg . N 0 N00 0 x0 h Putting x and h , we may define x00 h00 Sg0 x0 R0g x0 t0g , Sg00 x00

R00g x00

on which the second transform (on h00 ) may now be performed, giving the final results x0 , x00 indexed by unique x0 all x00 , which is an asymmetric unit. An analogous interpretation holds if one is going from to F. The above formula solves the general problem of transposing from one invariant subspace to another, and is the main device for decomposing the CDFT. Particular instances of this formula were derived and used by Ten Eyck (1973); it is useful for orthorhombic groups, and for dihedral groups containing screw axes nm with g.c.d. m, n 1. For comparison with later uses of orbit exchange, it should be noted that the type of intermediate results just dealt with is obtained after transforming on all factors in one summand. A central piece of information for driving such a decomposition is the definition of the full asymmetric unit in terms of the asymmetric units in the invariant subspaces. As indicated at the end of Section 1.3.4.2.2.2, this is straightforward when G acts without fixed points, but becomes more involved if fixed points do exist. To this day, no systematic ‘calculus of asymmetric units’ exists which can automatically generate a complete description of the asymmetric unit of an arbitrary space group in a form suitable for directing the orbit exchange process, although Shenefelt (1988) has outlined a procedure for dealing with space group P622 and its subgroups. The asymmetric unit definitions given in Volume A of International Tables are incomplete in this respect, in that they do not specify the possible residual symmetries which may exist on the boundaries of the domains.

t00g ,

and writeSg Sg0 Sg00 (direct sum) as a shorthand for Sg x Sg0 x0 : Sg00 x00 0 00 We may also define the representation operators Sg# and Sg# 0 00 acting on functions of x and0 x , respectively (as in Section 00 1.3.4.2.2.4), and the operators Sg and Sg acting on functions of h0 and h00 , respectively (as in Section 1.3.4.2.2.5). Then we may write Sg# Sg0 # Sg00 # and Sg Sg0 Sg00 in the sense that g acts on f x f x0 , x00 by Sg# f x0 , x00 f Sg0 1 x0 , Sg00 1 x00 and on h h0 , h00 by Sg h0 , h00 exp2ih0 t0g exp2ih00 t00g 0

00

RgT h0 , RgT h00 : Thus equipped we may now derive concisely a general identity describing the symmetry properties of intermediate quantities of the form X Tx0 , h00 Fh0 , h00 exp 2ih0 x0

1.3.4.3.4. Interaction between symmetry and factorization Methods for factoring the DFT in the absence of symmetry were examined in Sections 1.3.3.2 and 1.3.3.3. They are based on the observation that the finite sets which index both data and results are endowed with certain algebraic structures (e.g. are Abelian groups, or rings), and that subsets of indices may be found which are not merely subsets but substructures (e.g. subgroups or subrings). Summation over these substructures leads to partial transforms, and the way in which substructures fit into the global structure indicates how to reassemble the partial results into the final results. As a rule, the richer the algebraic structure which is identified in the indexing set, the more powerful the factoring method.

h0

1 X x0 , x00 exp2ih00 x00 , jdet N0 j x00

which arise through partial transformation of F on h0 or of on x00 . The action of g 2 G on these quantities will be (i) through Sg0 # on the function x0 7 ! Tx0 , h00 , (ii) through Sg00 on the function h00 7 ! Tx0 , h00 ,

73

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES m1 m

The ability of a given factoring method to accommodate crystallographic symmetry will thus be determined by the extent to which the crystallographic group action respects (or fails to respect) the partitioning of the index set into the substructures pertaining to that method. This remark justifies trying to gain an overall view of the algebraic structures involved, and of the possibilities of a crystallographic group acting ‘naturally’ on them. The index sets fmjm 2 Z3 =NZ3 g and fhjh 2 Z3 =NT Z3 g are finite Abelian groups under component-wise addition. If an iterated addition is viewed as an action of an integer scalar n 2 Z via nh h h . . . h

n times

m2 N1 1 m

for n 0,

h h . . . h jnj times

for n < 0,

g:

then an Abelian group becomes a module over the ring Z (or, for short, a Z-module), a module being analogous to a vector space but with scalars drawn from a ring rather than a field. The left actions of a crystallographic group G by g:

m 7 ! Rg m Ntg mod NZ

g:

h 7 ! Rg 1 T h

2 Ntg t1 g N1 tg , 2 with t1 g 2 I1 and tg 2 I2 determined as above. Suppose further that N, N1 and N2 commute with Rg for all g 2 G, i.e. (by Schur’s lemma, Section 1.3.4.2.2.4) that these matrices are integer multiples of the identity in each G-invariant subspace. The action of g on m Nx mod NZ3 leads to

and by mod NT Z3

can be combined with this Z action as follows: P P ng g : m 7 ! ng Rg m Ntg mod NZ3 , P

Sg m NRg N 1 m Ntg

g2G

ng g :

h7 !

g2G

P

ng Rg 1 T h

mod NT Z3 :

g2G

This provides a left action, on the indexing sets, of the set ( ) P ZG ng g ng 2 Z for each g 2 G

mod NZ3

2 NRg N 1 m1 N1 m2 t1 g N1 tg

mod NZ3

2 Rg m1 t1 g N1 Rg m2 tg

mod NZ3 ,

which we may decompose as Sg m Sg m1 N1 Sg m2

g2G

with

of symbolic linear combinations of elements of G with integral coefficients. If addition and multiplication are defined in ZG by ! ! P P P ag1 g1 bg2 g2 ag bg g g1 2G

m 7 ! Sg m Rg m Ntg mod NZ3

and suppose that N ‘integerizes’ all the non-primitive translations tg so that we may write

3

g2G

m1 mod N2 Z3 :

These relations establish a one-to-one correspondence m $ m1 , m2 between I Z3 =NZ3 and the Cartesian product I1 I2 of I1 Z3 =N1 Z3 and I2 Z3 =N2 Z3 , and hence I I1 I2 as a set. However I 6 I1 I2 as an Abelian group, since in general m m0 6 !m1 m01 , m2 m02 because there can be a ‘carry’ from the addition of the first components into the second components; therefore, I 6 I1 I2 as a ZG-module, which shows that the incorporation of symmetry into the Cooley–Tukey algorithm is not a trivial matter. Let g 2 G act on I through

for n > 0,

0

mod N1 Z3 ,

g2 2G

Sg m1 Sg m

mod N1 Z3

and Sg m2 N1 1 fSg m

g2G

Sg m1 g

mod N2 Z3 :

Introducing the notation

and P

! ag1 g1

g1 2G

P g2 2G

! bg2 g2

P

Sg1 m1 Rg m1 tg1 mod N1 Z3 , Sg2 m2 Rg m2 tg2 mod N2 Z3 ,

cg g,

g2G

the two components of Sg m may be written

with cg

P

Sg m1 Sg1 m1 ,

ag0 bg0 1 g,

g0 2G

Sg m2 Sg2 m2 m2 g, m1 mod N2 Z3 ,

then ZG is a ring, and the action defined above makes the indexing sets into ZG-modules. The ring ZG is called the integral group ring of G (Curtis & Reiner, 1962, p. 44). From the algebraic standpoint, therefore, the interaction between symmetry and factorization can be expected to be favourable whenever the indexing sets of partial transforms are ZGsubmodules of the main ZG-modules.

with m2 g, m1 N1 1 fRg m1 t1 g

The term m2 is the geometric equivalent of a carry or borrow: it 3 3 arises because Rg m1 t1 g , calculated as a vector in Z =NZ , may 3 be outside the unit cell N1 0, 1 , and may need to be brought back into it by a ‘large’ translation with a non-zero component in the m2 space; equivalently, the action of g may need to be applied around different permissible origins for different values of m1 , so as to map the unit cell into itself without any recourse to lattice translations. [Readers familiar with the cohomology of groups (see e.g. Hall, 1959; MacLane, 1963) will recognize m2 as the cocycle of the extension of ZG-modules described by the exact sequence 0 ! I2 ! I ! I1 ! 0.]

1.3.4.3.4.1. Multidimensional Cooley–Tukey factorization Suppose, as in Section 1.3.3.3.2.1, that the decimation matrix N may be factored as N1 N2 . Then any grid point index m 2 Z3 =NZ3 in real space may be written m m1 N1 m2 with m1 2 Z =N1 Z and m2 2 Z3 =N2 Z3 determined by 3

Sg m1 1 g mod N2 Z3 :

3

74

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY h2 h

Thus G acts on I in a rather complicated fashion: although g 7 ! Sg1 does define a left action in I1 alone, no action can be defined in I2 alone because m2 depends on m1 . However, because Sg , Sg1 and Sg2 are left actions, it follows that m2 satisfies the identity m2 gg0 , m1 Sg2 m2 g0 , m1 m2 g, Sg1 m1

h1 N2 1 T h

RTg h RTg h2 NT2 RTg h1 ,

mod N2 Z3 with

RTg h2 Rg2 T h2

1

T 1 T Here R2 g , Rg and h 1 are defined by

This action will now be used to achieve optimal use of symmetry in the multidimensional Cooley–Tukey algorithm of Section 1.3.3.3.2.1. Let us form an array Y according to Y m1 , m2 m1 N1 m2 for all m2 2 I2 but only for the unique m1 under the action Sg1 of G in I1 . Except in special cases which will be examined later, these vectors contain essentially an asymmetric unit of electron-density data, up to some redundancies on boundaries. We may then compute the partial transform on m2 : X 1 Y m1 , m2 eh2 N2 1 m2 : Y m1 , h2 jdet N2 j m2 2I2

Y

T T R2 g h2 Rg h

mod NT2 Z3 ,

T T R1 g h1 Rg h

mod NT1 Z3

and h 1 g, h2 N2 1 T RTg h2

Z h01 , h02 Fh02 NT2 h01 for all h01 but only for the unique h02 under the action of G in Z3 =NT2 Z3 , and transform on h01 to obtain P Z h01 , h02 e h01 N1 1 m1 : Zm1 , h2 h01 2Z3 =NT1 Z3

efh2 N2 t2 g

m2 g, m1 g T Y m1 , R2 g h2 : 1

T T 3 R2 g h2 mod N1 Z :

Let us then form an array Z according to

Using the symmetry of in the form Sg# yields by the procedure of Section 1.3.3.3.2 the transposition formula Sg1 m1 , h2

mod NT2 Z3 ,

RTg h1 Rg1 T h1 h 1 g, h2 mod NT1 Z3 :

m2 g 1 , m1 Sg 1 fm2 g, Sg 1 m1 g mod N2 Z3 :

h2 mod NT1 Z3 :

We may then write

for all g, g0 in G and all m1 in I1 . In particular, m2 e, m1 0 for all m1 , and 2

mod NT2 Z3 ,

Putting h0 RTg h and using the symmetry of F in the form Fh0 Fh exp 2ih tg ,

By means of this identity we can transpose intermediate results Y initially indexed by

where 2 h tg hT2 hT1 N2 N2 1 N1 1 t1 g N1 tg

unique m1 all h2 ,

h2 tg h2 N1 1 t1 g mod 1

so as to have them indexed by all m1 unique h2 :

yields by a straightforward rearrangement

We may then apply twiddle factors to get

T 1 Zm1 , R2 g h2 e fh2 tg h 1 g, h2 N1 m1 g

Zm1 , h2 eh2 N 1 m1 Y m1 , h2

ZfSg1 m1 , h2 g:

and carry out the second transform X 1 Zm1 , h2 eh1 N1 1 m1 : Z h1 , h2 jdet N1 j m1 2I1

This formula allows the transposition of intermediate results Z from an indexing by all m1 unique h2 to an indexing by

The final results are indexed by

unique m1 all h2 :

all h1 unique h2 ,

We may then apply the twiddle factors to obtain

which yield essentially an asymmetric unit of structure factors after unscrambling by:

Y m1 , h2 e h2 N 1 m1 Zm1 , h2

Fh2 NT2 h1 Z h1 , h2 :

and carry out the second transform on h2 P Y m1 , m2 Y m1 , h2 e h2 N2 1 m2 :

The transposition formula above applies to intermediate results when going backwards from F to , provided these results are considered after the twiddle-factor stage. A transposition formula applicable before that stage can be obtained by characterizing the action of G on h (including the effects of periodization by NT Z3 ) in a manner similar to that used for m. Let

h2 2Z3 =NT2 Z3

The results, indexed by unique m1 all m2 yield essentially an asymmetric unit of electron densities by the rearrangement

h h2 NT2 h1 ,

m1 N1 m2 Y m1 , m2 :

with

75

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES The equivalence of the two transposition formulae up to the intervening twiddle factors is readily established, using the relation

1.3.4.3.4.2. Multidimensional Good factorization This procedure was described in Section 1.3.3.3.2.2. The main difference with the Cooley–Tukey factorization is that if N N1 N2 . . . Nd 1 Nd , where the different factors are pairwise coprime, then the Chinese remainder theorem reindexing makes Z3 =NZ3 isomorphic to a direct sum.

h2 N2 1 m2 g, m1 h 1 g, h2 N1 1 m1 mod 1 which is itself a straightforward consequence of the identity h N 1 Sg m h tg RTg h N 1 m:

Z3 =NZ3 Z3 =N1 Z3 . . . Z3 =Nd Z3 ,

To complete the characterization of the effect of symmetry on the Cooley–Tukey factorization, and of the economy of computation it allows, it remains to consider the possibility that some values of m1 may be invariant under some transformations g 2 G under the action m1 7 ! Sg1 m1 . Suppose that m1 has a non-trivial isotropy subgroup Gm1 , and let g 2 Gm1 . Then each subarray Ym1 defined by

where each p-primary piece is endowed with an induced ZGmodule structure by letting G operate in the usual way but with the corresponding modular arithmetic. The situation is thus more favourable than with the Cooley–Tukey method, since there is no interference between the factors (no ‘carry’). In the terminology of Section 1.3.4.2.2.2, G acts diagonally on this direct sum, and results of a partial transform may be transposed by orbit exchange as in Section 1.3.4.3.4.1 but without the extra terms m or h. The analysis of the symmetry properties of partial transforms also carries over, again without the extra terms. Further simplification occurs for all p-primary pieces with p other than 2 or 3, since all non-primitive translations (including those associated to lattice centring) disappear modulo p. Thus the cost of the CRT reindexing is compensated by the computational savings due to the absence of twiddle factors and of other phase shifts associated with non-primitive translations and with geometric ‘carries’. Within each p-primary piece, however, higher powers of p may need to be split up by a Cooley–Tukey factorization, or carried out directly by a suitably adapted Winograd algorithm.

Ym1 m2 Y m1 , m2 m1 N1 m2 satisfies the identity Ym1 m2 YS1 m1 Sg2 m2 m2 g, m1 g

Ym1 Sg2 m2 m2 g, m1 so that the data for the transform on m2 have residual symmetry properties. In this case the identity satisfied by m2 simplifies to m2 gg0 , m1 Sg2 m2 g0 , m1 m2 g, m1 mod N2 Z3 , which shows that the mapping g 7 ! m2 g, m1 satisfies the Frobenius congruences (Section 1.3.4.2.2.3). Thus the internal symmetry of subarray Ym1 with respect to the action of G on m2 is given by Gm1 acting on Z3 =N2 Z3 via

1.3.4.3.4.3. Crystallographic extension of the Rader/ Winograd factorization As was the case in the absence of symmetry, the two previous classes of algorithms can only factor the global transform into partial transforms on prime numbers of points, but cannot break the latter down any further. Rader’s idea of using the action of the group of units Up to obtain further factorization of a p-primary transform has been used in ‘scalar’ form by Auslander & Shenefelt (1987), Shenefelt (1988), and Auslander et al. (1988). It will be shown here that it can be adapted to the crystallographic case so as to take advantage also of the possible existence of n-fold cyclic symmetry elements n 3, 4, 6 in a two-dimensional transform (Bricogne & Tolimieri, 1990). This adaptation entails the use of certain rings of algebraic integers rather than ordinary integers, whose connection with the handling of cyclic symmetry will now be examined. Let G be the group associated with a threefold axis of symmetry: G fe, g, g2 g with g3 e. In a standard trigonal basis, G has matrix representation 1 0 0 1 1 1 I, Rg , Rg2 Re 0 1 1 1 1 0

m2 7 ! Sg2 m2 m2 g, m1 mod N2 Z3 : The transform on m2 needs only be performed for one out of G : Gm1 distinct arrays Ym1 (results for the others being obtainable by the transposition formula), and this transforms is Gm1 symmetric. In other words, the following cases occur: i

Gm1 feg

ii

Gm1

iii Gm1

maximum saving in computation by jGj; m2 -transform has no symmetry: G0 < G saving in computation by a factor of G : G0 ; m2 -transform is G0 -symmetric: G no saving in computation; m2 -transform is G-symmetric:

The symmetry properties of the m2 -transform may themselves be exploited in a similar way if N2 can be factored as a product of smaller decimation matrices; otherwise, an appropriate symmetrized DFT routine may be provided, using for instance the idea of ‘multiplexing/demultiplexing’ (Section 1.3.4.3.5). We thus have a recursive descent procedure, in which the deeper stages of the recursion deal with transforms on fewer points, or of lower symmetry (usually both). The same analysis applies to the h1 -transforms on the subarrays Zh2 , and leads to a similar descent procedure. In conclusion, crystallographic symmetry can be fully exploited to reduce the amount of computation to the minimum required to obtain the unique results from the unique data. No such analysis was so far available in cases where the asymmetric units in real and reciprocal space are not parallelepipeds. An example of this procedure will be given in Section 1.3.4.3.6.5.

in real space, 1 0 I, Re 0 1

Rg

1 1

1 , 0

Rg2

0 1

1 1

in reciprocal space. Note that Rg2 Rg21 T RTg , and that

RTg

J Rg J, 1

where J

1 0

0 1

so that Rg and RTg are conjugate in the group of 2 2 unimodular

76

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY The structure of Zp G depends on whether PX remains irreducible when considered as a polynomial over Zp . Thus two cases arise: (1) PX remains irreducible mod p, i.e. there is no nth root of unity in Zp ; (2) PX factors as X uX v, i.e. there are nth roots of unity in Zp . These two cases require different developments. Case 1. Zp G is a finite field with p2 elements. There is essentially (i.e. up to isomorphism) only one such field, denoted GFp2 , and its group of units is a cyclic group with p2 1 elements. If is a generator of this group of units, the input data m with m 6 0 may be reordered as

integer matrices. The group ring ZG is commutative, and has the structure of the polynomial ring ZX with the single relation X 2 X 1 0 corresponding to the minimal polynomial of Rg . In the terminology of Section 1.3.3.2.4, the ring structure of ZG is obtained from that of ZX by carrying out polynomial addition and multiplication modulo X 2 X 1, then replacing X by any generator of G. This type of construction forms the very basis of algebraic number theory [see Artin (1944, Section IIc) for an illustration of this viewpoint], and ZG as just defined is isomorphic to the ring Z! of algebraic integers of the form a b! a, b 2 Z, ! exp2i=3 under the identification X $ !. Addition in this ring is defined component-wise, while multiplication is defined by a1 b1 ! a2 b2 ! a1 a2 a1

b1 b 2

2

m0 , m0 , 2 m0 , 3 m0 , . . . , p

b1 b2 b1 a2 !: 3

4

2

h0 , h0 , 2 h0 , 3 h0 , . . . , p

2

h0

by the reciprocal-space action of , where m0 and h0 are arbitrary non-zero indices. The core Cpp of the DFT matrix, defined by 0 1 1 1 ... 1 B1 C C, Fpp B @ ... A C

ZG is obtained from ZX by carrying out polynomial arithmetic modulo X 2 1. This identifies ZG with the ring Zi of Gaussian integers of the form a bi, in which addition takes place component-wise while multiplication is defined by a1 b1 i a2 b2 i a1 a2

m0

by the real-space action of ; while the results Fh with h 6 0 may be reordered as

In the case of a fourfold axis, G fe, g, g , g g with g e, and 0 1 Rg , with again RTg J 1 Rg J: Rg 1 0 2

2

b1 b2 a1 b2 b1 a2 i:

pp

In the case of a sixfold axis, G fe, g, g2 , g3 , g4 , g5 g with 6 g e, and 1 1 0 1 , Rg , RTg J 1 Rg J: Rg 1 0 1 1

1 will then have a skew-circulant structure (Section 1.3.3.2.3.1) since j h0 k m0 h0 jk m0 e Cpp jk e p p

ZG is isomorphic to Z! under the mapping g $ 1 ! since 1 !6 1. Thus in all cases ZG ZX =PX where PX is an irreducible quadratic polynomial with integer coefficients. The actions of G on lattices in real and reciprocal space (Sections 1.3.4.2.2.4, 1.3.4.2.2.5) extend naturally to actions of ZG on Z2 in which an element z a bg of ZG acts via m1 m1 7 ! zm aI bRg m m2 m2

depends only on j k. Multiplication by Cpp may then be turned into a cyclic convolution of length p2 1, which may be factored by two DFTs (Section 1.3.3.2.3.1) or by Winograd’s techniques (Section 1.3.3.2.4). The latter factorization is always favourable, as it is easily shown that p2 1 is divisible by 24 for any odd prime p 5. This procedure is applicable even if no symmetry is present in the data. Assume now that cyclic symmetry of order n 3, 4 or 6 is present. Since n divides 24 hence divides p2 1, the generator g of p2 1=n this symmetry is representable as for a suitable generator of the group of units. The reordered data will then be p2 1=nperiodic rather than simply p2 1-periodic; hence the reindexed results will be n-decimated (Section 1.3.2.7.2), and the p2 1=n non-zero results can be calculated by applying the DFT to the p2 1=n unique input data. In this way, the n-fold symmetry can be used in full to calculate the core contributions from the unique data to the unique results by a DFT of length p2 1=n. It is a simple matter to incorporate non-primitive translations into this scheme. For example, when going from structure factors to electron densities, reordered data items separated by p2 1=n are not equal but differ by a phase shift proportional to their index mod p, whose effect is simply to shift the origin of the n-decimated transformed sequence. The same economy of computation can therefore be achieved as in the purely cyclic case. Dihedral symmetry elements, which map g to g 1 (Section 1.3.4.2.2.3), induce extra one-dimensional symmetries of order 2 in the reordered data which can also be fully exploited to reduce computation. Case 2. If p 5, it can be shown that the two roots u and v are always distinct. Then, by the Chinese remainder theorem (CRT) for polynomials (Section 1.3.3.2.4) we have a ring isomorphism

in real space, and via h h1 T 7 ! zh aI bRg 1 h h2 h2 in reciprocal space. These two actions are related by conjugation, since aI bRTg J 1 aI bRg J and the following identity (which is fundamental in the sequel) holds: zh m h zm for all m, h 2 Z2 : Let us now consider the calculation of a p p two-dimensional DFT with n-fold cyclic symmetry n 3, 4, 6 for an odd prime p 5. Denote Z=pZ by Zp . Both the data and the results of the DFT are indexed by Zp Zp : hence the action of ZG on these indices is in fact an action of Zp G, the latter being obtained from ZG by carrying out all integer arithmetic in ZG modulo p. The algebraic structure of Zp G combines the symmetry-carrying ring structure of ZG with the finite field structure of Zp used in Section 1.3.3.2.3.1, and holds the key to a symmetry-adapted factorization of the DFT at hand.

Zp X =PX fZp X =X

77

ug fZp X =X

vg

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES m 7 ! aI bRg m 0 becomes m 7 ! m with m Mm, 0

defined by sending a polynomial QX from the left-hand-side ring to its two residue classes modulo X u and X v, respectively. Since the latter are simply the constants Qu and Qv, the CRT reindexing has the particularly simple form

h 7 ! aI bRTg h 0 becomes h 7 ! h with h MJh: 0

a bX 7 ! a bu, a bv , or equivalently a a 7 ! M mod p, b b

with M

1 u : 1 v

Thus the sets of indices m and h can be split into four pieces as Zp G itself, according as these indices have none, one or two of their coordinates in Up. These pieces will be labelled by the same symbols – 0, D1 , D2 and U – as those of Zp G. The scalar product h m may be written in terms of h and m as

The CRT reconstruction formula similarly simplifies to a 7 ! M 1 mod p, b v u 1 1 : with M v u 1 1

h m h M 1 T JM 1 m, and an elementary calculation shows that the matrix M 1 T JM 1 is diagonal by virtue of the relation uv constant term in PX 1: Therefore, h m 0 if h 2 D1 and m 2 D2 or vice versa. We are now in a position to rearrange the DFT matrix Fpp . Clearly, the structure of Fpp is more complex than in case 1, as there are three types of ‘core’ matrices:

The use of the CRT therefore amounts to the simultaneous diagonalization (by M) of all the matrices representing the elements of Zp G in the basis (1, X). A first consequence of this diagonalization is that the internal structure of Zp G becomes clearly visible. Indeed, Zp G is mapped isomorphically to a direct product of two copies of Zp , in which arithmetic is carried out component-wise between eigenvalues and . Thus if

type 1: D D with D D1 or D2 ; type 2: D U or U D; type 3: U U: (Submatrices of type D1 D2 and D2 D1 have all their elements equal to 1 by the previous remark.) Let be a generator of Up. We may reorder the elements in D1 , D2 and U – and hence the data and results indexed by these elements – according to powers of . This requires one exponent in each of D1 and D2 , and two exponents in U. For instance, in the h-index space: ( )

0 j 1 D1 j 1, . . . , p 1 0 0 0 0 ( ) 0 0 j 0 D2 j 1, . . . , p 1 2 0 0 (

0 j1 1 0 j2 1 U j1 1, . . . , p 1; 0 2 0 0 1 j2 1, . . . , p 1

CRT

z a bX !, , CRT

z0 a0 b0 X !0 , 0 , then CRT

z z0 ! 0 , 0 , CRT

zz0 !0 , 0 : Taking in particular CRT

z !, 0 6 0, 0, CRT

z0 !0, 6 0, 0, we have zz0 0, so that Zp G contains zero divisors; therefore Zp G CRT is not a field. On the other hand, if z !, with 6 0 and 6 0, then and belong to the group of units Up (Section 1.3.3.2.3.1) and hence have inverses 1 and 1 ; it follows that z is CRT a unit in Zp G, with inverse z 1 ! 1 , 1 . Therefore, Zp G consists of four distinct pieces:

and similarly for the m index. Since the diagonal matrix D commutes with all the matrices representing the action of , this rearrangement will induce skewcirculant structures in all the core matrices. The corresponding cyclic convolutions may be carried out by Rader’s method, i.e. by diagonalizing them by means of two (p 1)-point one-dimensional DFTs in the D D pieces and of two p 1 p 1-point twodimensional DFTs in the U U piece (the U D and D U pieces involve extra section and projection operations). In the absence of symmetry, no computational saving is achieved, since the same reordering could have been applied to the initial Zp Zp indexing, without the CRT reindexing. In the presence of n-fold cyclic symmetry, however, the rearranged Fpp lends itself to an n-fold reduction in size. The basic fact is that whenever case 2 occurs, p 1 is divisible by n (i.e. p 1 is divisible by 6 when n 3 or 6, and by 4 when n 4), say

CRT

0 !f0, 0g, CRT

D1 !f, 0j 2 Upg Up, CRT

D2 !f0, j 2 Upg Up, CRT

U !f, j 2 Up, 2 Upg Up Up: A second consequence of this diagonalization is that the actions of Zp G on indices m and h can themselves be brought to diagonal form by basis changes:

78

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY h2 , h1 7 ! N2 z h2 h2 , N1 z h1 h1 z h2 : Hermitian symmetry is traditionally dealt with by factoring by 2, i.e. by assuming N 2M. If N2 2I, then each h2 is invariant under G, so that each partial vector Zh2 (Section 1.3.4.3.4.1) inherits the symmetry internally, with a ‘modulation’ by h 1 g, h2 . The ‘multiplexing–demultiplexing’ technique provides an efficient treatment of this singular case.

p 1 nq. If g is a generator of the cyclic symmetry, the generator

of Up may be chosen in such a way that g q . The action of g is then to increment the j index in D1 and D2 by q, and the j1 , j2 index in U by (q, q). Since the data items whose indices are related in this way have identical values, the DFTs used to diagonalize the Rader cyclic convolutions will operate on periodized data, hence yield decimated results; and the non-zero results will be obtained from the unique data by DFTs n times smaller than their counterparts in the absence of symmetry. A more thorough analysis is needed to obtain a Winograd factorization into the normal from CBA in the presence of symmetry (see Bricogne & Tolimieri, 1990). Non-primitive translations and dihedral symmetry may also be accommodated within this framework, as in case 1. This reindexing by means of algebraic integers yields larger orbits, hence more efficient algorithms, than that of Auslander et al. (1988) which only uses ordinary integers acting by scalar dilation.

(b) Calculation of structure factors The computation may be summarized as follows: 2 FN

decN1

TW

1 FN

revN2

7 ! Y 7 ! Y 7 ! Z 7 ! Z 7 ! F where decN1 is the initial decimation given by Ym1 m2 m1 N1 m2 , TW is the transposition and twiddlefactor stage, and revN2 is the final unscrambling by coset reversal given by Fh2 N2 h1 Zh2 h1 . (i) Decimation in time N1 2I, N2 M The decimated vectors Ym1 are real and hence have Hermitian transforms Ym1 . The 2n values of m1 may be grouped into 2n 1 pairs m01 , m001 and the vectors corresponding to each pair may be multiplexed into a general complex vector

1.3.4.3.5. Treatment of conjugate and parity-related symmetry properties Most crystallographic Fourier syntheses are real-valued and originate from Hermitian-symmetric collections of Fourier coefficients. Hermitian symmetry is closely related to the action of a centre of inversion in reciprocal space, and thus interacts strongly with all other genuinely crystallographic symmetry elements of order 2. All these symmetry properties are best treated by factoring by 2 and reducing the computation of the initial transform to that of a collection of smaller transforms with less symmetry or none at all.

Y Ym01 iYm001 : The transform Y FMY can then be resolved into the separate transforms Ym0 and Ym00 by using the Hermitian symmetry of the 1 1 latter, which yields the demultiplexing formulae Ym 0 h2 iYm 00 h2 Y h2 1

1

Ym 0 h2 1

1.3.4.3.5.1. Hermitian-symmetric or real-valued transforms The computation of a DFT with Hermitian-symmetric or realvalued data can be carried out at a cost of half that of an ordinary transform, essentially by ‘multiplexing’ pairs of special partial transforms into general complex transforms, and then ‘demultiplexing’ the results on the basis of their symmetry properties. The treatment given below is for general dimension n; a subset of cases for n 1 was treated by Ten Eyck (1973).

iYm 00 h2 1

Y Mz h2

h2 :

The number of partial transforms FM is thus reduced from 2n to n 1 2 . Once this separation has been achieved, the remaining steps need only be carried out for a unique half of the values of h2 . (ii) Decimation in frequency N1 M, N2 2I Since h2 2 Zn =2Zn we have h2 h2 and z h2 h2 mod 2Zn . The vectors of decimated and scrambled results Zh2 then obey the symmetry relations Zh2 h1

(a) Underlying group action Hermitian symmetry is not a geometric symmetry, but it is defined in terms of the action in reciprocal space of point group G 1, i.e. G fe, eg, where e acts as I (the n n identity matrix) and e acts as I. This group action on Zn =NZn with N N1 N2 will now be characterized by the calculation of the cocycle h 1 (Section 1.3.4.3.4.1) under the assumption that N1 and N2 are both diagonal. For this it is convenient to associate to any integer vector 0 purpose 1 v1 B . C v @ .. A in Zn the vector z v whose jth component is vn 0 if vj 0 1 if vj 6 0.

h2 Zh2 Mz h1

h1

which can be used to halve the number of FM necessary to compute them, as follows. Having formed the vectors Zh2 given by 2 3 X 1h2 m2 Zh2 m1 4 m1 Mm2 5eh2 N 1 m1 , n 2 n n m 2Z =2Z 2

we may group the 2n values of h2 into 2n each pair form the multiplexed vector:

1

pairs h02 , h002 and for

Z Zh02 iZh002 :

Let m m1 N1 m2 , and hence h h2 N2 h1 . Then

the 2n After calculating the 2n 1 transforms Z FMZ, individual transforms Zh0 and Zh00 can be separated by using for 2 2 each pair the demultiplexing formulae

h2 mod NZn Nz h2

Zh0 h1 iZh00 h1 Z h1

h2 ,

h2 mod N2 Zn N2 z h2

2

Zh0 h1 2

h2 ,

hence h 1 e, h2 N2 1 fNz h2

h2

N2 z h2

2

h002 Z Mz h1

h1

which can be solved recursively. If all pairs are chosen so that they differ only in the jth coordinate h2 j , the recursion is along h1 j and can be initiated by introducing the (real) values of Zh0 and Zh00 at 2 2 h1 j 0 and h1 j Mj , accumulated e.g. while forming Z for that pair. Only points with h1 j going from 0 to 12 Mj need be resolved,

h2 g mod N1 Zn

z h2 mod N1 Zn : Therefore

h02 iZh00 h1 2

e acts by

79

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES (ii) Decimation in frequency N1 2I, N2 M The last transformation F(M) gives the real-valued results , therefore the vectors Ym1 after the twiddle-factor stage each have Hermitian symmetry. A first consequence is that the intermediate vectors Zh2 need only be computed for the unique half of the values of h2 , the other half being related by the Hermitian symmetry of Ym1 . A second consequence is that the 2n vectors Ym1 may be condensed into 2n 1 general complex vectors

and they contain the unique half of the Hermitian-symmetric transform F. (c) Calculation of electron densities The computation may be summarized as follows: scrN2

FN1

FN2

TW

natN1

F 7 ! Z 7 ! Z 7 ! Y 7 ! Y 7 ! where scrN2 is the decimation with coset reversal given by Zh2 h1 Fh2 N2 h1 , TW is the transposition and twiddlefactor stage, and natN1 is the recovery in natural order given by m1 N1 m2 Ym1 m2 . (i) Decimation in time N1 M, N2 2I The last transformation F2I has a real-valued matrix, and the final result is real-valued. It follows that the vectors Ym1 of intermediate results after the twiddle-factor stage are real-valued, hence lend themselves to multiplexing along the real and imaginary components of half as many general complex vectors. Let the 2n initial vectors Zh2 be multiplexed into 2n 1 vectors

Z

Zh0 2

Y Ym0 iYm00 1

m01 , m001 ]

[one for each pair be applied to yield

with Ym01 and Ym001 real-valued. The final results can therefore be retrieved by the particularly simple demultiplexing formulae: m01 2m2 Re Y m2 ,

iZh00 2

m001 2m2 Im Y m2 : 1.3.4.3.5.2. Hermitian-antisymmetric or pure imaginary transforms A vector X fX kjk 2 Zn =NZn g is said to be Hermitianantisymmetric if

Z Zh02 iZh002 : The real-valuedness of the Ym1 may be used to recover the separate result vectors for h02 and h002 . For this purpose, introduce the abbreviated notation

X k X k for all k: Its transform X then satisfies

e h02 N 1 m1 c0 is0 m1 e

00

X k X k for all k ,

00

N m1 c is m1 R h2 m1 Ym 1 h2 1

R0 Rh02 ,

i.e. is purely imaginary. If X is Hermitian-antisymmetric, then F iX is Hermitiansymmetric, with iX real-valued. The treatment of Section 1.3.4.3.5.1 may therefore be adapted, with trivial factors of i or 1, or used as such in conjunction with changes of variable by multiplication by i.

R00 Rh002 :

Then we may write Z c0 is0 R0 ic00 is00 R00

1.3.4.3.5.3. Complex symmetric and antisymmetric transforms The matrix I is its own contragredient, and hence (Section 1.3.2.4.2.2) the transform of a symmetric (respectively antisymmetric) function is symmetric (respectively antisymmetric). In this case the group G fe, eg acts in both real and reciprocal space as fI, Ig. If N N1 N2 with both factors diagonal, then e acts by

c0 R0 s00 R00 i s0 R0 c00 R00 or, equivalently, for each m1 , 0 0 c Re Z s00 R : Im Z s0 c00 R 00 Therefore R0 and R00 may be retrieved from Z by the ‘demultiplexing’ formula: 0 00 1 R c s00 Re Z 0 00 R 00 c0 Im Z c c s0 s00 s0

m1 , m2 7 ! N1 z m1 h2 , h1 7 ! N2 z h2

h002

h2 , N1 z h1

z m1 ,

m2 h1

z h2 ,

m2 e, m1 z m1 mod N2 Zn ,

N m1 6 0: 1

h 1 e, h2 z h2 mod N1 Zn : The symmetry or antisymmetry properties of X may be written

Demultiplexing fails when h02

m1 , N2 z m2

i.e.

which is valid at all points m1 where c0 c00 s0 s00 6 0, i.e. where cos2h02

to which a general complex F(M) may

Y Ym01 iYm001

[one for each pair h02 , h002 ], each of which yields by F(M) a vector

h002

1

X m "X m for all m,

h002 N 1 m1 12 mod 1:

with " 1 for symmetry and " 1 for antisymmetry. The computation will be summarized as

If the pairs h02 , h002 are chosen so that their members differ only in one coordinate (the jth, say), then the exceptional points are at m1 j 12 Mj and the missing transform values are easily obtained e.g. by accumulation while forming Z . The final stage of the calculation is then P 1h2 m2 R h2 m1 : m1 Mm2

decN1

2 FN

TW

1 FN

revN2

X 7 ! Y 7 ! Y 7 ! Z 7 ! Z 7 ! X with the same indexing as that used for structure-factor calculation. In both cases it will be shown that a transform FN with N 2M and M diagonal can be computed using only 2n 1 partial transforms FM instead of 2n .

h2 2Zn =2Zn

80

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY (i) Decimation in time N1 2I, N2 M Since m1 2 Zn =2Zn we have m1 m1 and z m1 m1 mod 2Zn , so that the symmetry relations for each parity class of data Ym1 read Ym1 Mz m2

have an internal symmetry expressed by Ym1 Mz m2

This symmetry, however, is different for each m1 so that we may multiplex two such vectors Ym01 and Ym001 into a general real vector

m1 "Ym1 m2

m2

m1 "Ym1 m2 :

m2

Y Ym01 Ym001 ,

or equivalently m1 : m1 Ym1 "Y

for each of the 2n 1 pairs m01 , m001 . The 2n transform vectors

Transforming by FM, this relation becomes

1

Y Ym01 Ym001 : Putting e h2 M 1 m01 c0 is0 h2

Ym0 c0

is0 R0

Ym00 c00

is00 R00 ,

1

e h2 M 1 m001 c00 is00 h2

1

where R0 and R00 are real vectors and where the multipliers c0 and c00 is00 are the inverse twiddle factors. Therefore,

we then have the demultiplexing relations for each h2 : Ym 0 h2 Ym 00 h2 Y h2 1

Y c0

c0 is0 h2 Ym 0 h2 c00 is00 h2 Ym 00 h2 1

1

can then be evaluated by the methods of Section 1.3.4.3.5.1(b) at the cost of only 2n 2 general complex FM. The demultiplexing relations by which the separate vectors Ym0 1 and Ym00 may be recovered are most simply obtained by observing 1 that the vectors Z after the twiddle-factor stage are real-valued since F(2I) has a real matrix. Thus, as in Section 1.3.4.3.5.1(c)(i),

Each parity class thus obeys a different symmetry relation, so that we may multiplex them in pairs by forming for each pair m01 , m001 the vector

is0 R0 c00

c0 R0 c00 R00

1

"Y Mz h2

Hermitian-symmetric

Y Ym0 Ym00

e h2 M 1 m1 Ym1 "Ym1 :

1

1

h2

is0

is00 R00

is0 R0 s00 R00

which can be solved recursively. Transform values at the exceptional points h2 where demultiplexing fails (i.e. where c0 is0 c00 is00 ) can be accumulated while forming Y. Only the unique half of the values of h2 need to be considered at the demultiplexing stage and at the subsequent TW and F(2I) stages. (ii) Decimation in frequency N1 M, N2 2I The vectors of final results Zh2 for each parity class h2 obey the symmetry relations , h2 Z "Z

and hence the demultiplexing relation for each h2 : 0 00 1 R s c00 Re Y : R 00 s0 c 0 Im Y c0 s00 s0 c00

which are different for each h2 . The vectors Zh2 of intermediate results after the twiddle-factor stage may then be multiplexed in pairs as

need only be carried out for the unique half of the range of h2 . (ii) Decimation in frequency N1 M, N2 2I Similarly, the vectors Zh2 of decimated and scrambled results are real and obey internal symmetries

h2

The values of R 0h2 and R 00h2 at those points h2 where c0 s00 s0 c00 0 can be evaluated directly while forming Y. This demultiplexing and the final stage of the calculation, namely 1 X Fh2 Mh1 n 1h1 m1 R m1 h2 2 m 2Zn =2Zn 1

h2

Z Zh02 Zh002 :

h2 Zh2 "Z h2

After transforming by FM, the results Z may be demultiplexed by using the relations Zh0 h1 2 Zh0 h1 2

Zh00 h1 2

h02 Zh00 h1 2

which are different for each h2 . For each of the 2n the multiplexed vector

Z h1 h002 "Z Mz h1

1

pairs h02 , h002

Z Zh02 Zh002

h1

is a Hermitian-symmetric vector without internal symmetry, and the 2n 1 real vectors

which can be solved recursively as in Section 1.3.4.3.5.1(b)(ii).

Z Zh0 Zh00

1.3.4.3.5.4. Real symmetric transforms Conjugate symmetric (Section 1.3.2.4.2.3) implies that if the data X are real and symmetric [i.e. X k X k and X k X k], then so are the results X . Thus if contains a centre of symmetry, F is real symmetric. There is no distinction (other than notation) between structure-factor and electron-density calculation; the algorithms will be described in terms of the former. It will be shown that if N 2M, a real symmetric transform can be computed with only 2n 2 partial transforms FM instead of 2n . (i) Decimation in time N1 2I, N2 M Since m1 2 Zn =2Zn we have m1 m1 and z m1 m1 mod 2Zn . The decimated vectors Ym1 are not only real, but

2

2

n 2

may be evaluated at the cost of only 2 general complex FM by the methods of Section 1.3.4.3.5.1(c). The individual transforms Zh02 and Zh002 may then be retrieved via the demultiplexing relations Zh0 h1 2

Zh0 h1 2

Zh00 h1 2

h02 Zh00 h1 2

Z h1 h002 Z Mz h1

h1

which can be solved recursively as described in Section 1.3.4.3.5.1(b)(ii). This yields the unique half of the real symmetric results F.

81

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES The symmetry relations obeyed by and F are as follows: for electron densities

1.3.4.3.5.5. Real antisymmetric transforms If X is real antisymmetric, then its transform X is purely imaginary and antisymmetric. The double-multiplexing techniques used for real symmetric transforms may therefore be adapted with only minor changes involving signs and factors of i.

m , m m N t g, or, after factoring by 2, m 1 , m2 , m1 , m2

1.3.4.3.5.6. Generalized multiplexing So far the multiplexing technique has been applied to pairs of vectors with similar types of parity-related and/or conjugate symmetry properties, in particular the same value of ". It can be generalized so as to accommodate mixtures of vectors with different symmetry characteristics. For example if X1 is Hermitian-symmetric and X2 is Hermitian-antisymmetric, so that X1 is real-valued while X2 has purely imaginary values, the multiplexing process should obviously form X X1 X2 (instead of X X1 iX2 if both had the same type of symmetry), and demultiplexing consists in separating

2 m , M z m1 1 , m2 t g

Fh , h exp2ih t g h tg F h , h

or, after factoring by 2, 2

2

1h2 tg

X h1

1.3.4.3.6.2. Monoclinic groups A general monoclinic transformation is of the form Sg : x 7 ! Rg x tg

X h 1

with Rg a diagonal matrix whose entries are 1 or 1, and tg a vector whose entries are 0 or 12. We may thus decompose both real and reciprocal space into a direct sum of a subspace Zn where Rg acts as the identity, and a subspace Zn where Rg acts as minus the identity, with n n n 3. All usual entities may be correspondingly written as direct sums, for instance:

h h h ,

h1 h 1 h1 ,

h 1

h 2 , h2 , h1 , h2 :

h2 "X M z h1

h1

h 2 "X M z h1

h 1

with " 1 independent of h 1 . This is the same relation as for the same parity class of data for a Hermitian symmetric " 1 or antisymmetric " 1 transform. The same techniques may be used to decrease the number of FM . This generalizes the procedure described by Ten Eyck (1973) for treating dyad axes, i.e. for the case n 1, t2 0, and t2 0 (simple dyad) or g g t2 6 0 (screw dyad). g Once FN is completed, its results have Hermitian symmetry properties with respect to h which can be used to obtain the unique electron densities. Structure factors may be computed by applying the reverse procedures in the reverse order.

M M M ,

h2 h 2 h2 :

We will use factoring by 2, with decimation in frequency when computing structure factors, and decimation in time when computing electron densities; this corresponds to N N1 N2 with N1 M, N2 2I. The non-primitive translation vector Ntg then belongs to MZn , and thus n t1 g 0 mod MZ ,

FM z h 1

with " 1 independent of h1 . This is the same relation as for the same parity class of data for a (complex or real) symmetric " 1 or antisymmetric " 1 transform. The same techniques can be used to decrease the number of FM by multiplexing pairs of such vectors and demultiplexing their transforms. Partial vectors with different values of " may be mixed in this way (Section 1.3.4.3.5.6). Once FN is completed, its results have Hermitian symmetry with respect to h , and the methods of Section 1.3.4.3.5.1 may be used to obtain the unique electron densities. (ii) Transform on h first. The partial vectors defined by Xh ; h2 Fh 1 , h2 , h obey symmetry relations of the form

1.3.4.3.6.1. Triclinic groups Space group P1 is dealt with by the methods of Section 1.3.4.3.5.1 and P1 by those of Section 1.3.4.3.5.4.

m 2 m 2 m2 ,

2

h2 tg

When calculating electron densities, two methods may be used. (i) Transform on h first. The partial vectors defined by Xh ; h2 Fh , h1 , h2 obey symmetry relations of the form

All the necessary ingredients are now available for calculating the CDFT for any given space group.

m 1 m 1 m1 ,

h2 , h2

Fh 1 , h2 , h1 , h2

1.3.4.3.6. Global crystallographic algorithms

m m m ,

h1

with Friedel counterpart

where ! is a phase factor (e.g. 1 or i) chosen in such a way that all non-exceptional components of X1 and X2 (or X1 and X2 ) be embedded in the complex plane C along linearly independent directions, thus making multiplexing possible. It is possible to develop a more general form of multiplexing/ demultiplexing for more than two vectors, which can be used to deal with symmetry elements of order 3, 4 or 6. It is based on the theory of group characters (Ledermann, 1987).

2 t2 tg2 , g tg

2

h2 tg

Fh 1 , h2 , M z h1

X X1 !X2 ,

1 t1 t1 , g tg g

h

with its Friedel counterpart

h2 tg Fh 1 , h2 , h1 , h2 1

tg t g tg ,

m2 , m2 tg2 ;

Fh , h exp2ih t g h tg Fh ,

The general multiplexing formula for pairs of vectors may therefore be written

N N N ,

m1

while for structure factors

X1 Re X X2 iIm X :

Rg R g Rg ,

N tg

m

1.3.4.3.6.3. Orthorhombic groups Almost all orthorhombic space groups are generated by two monoclinic transformations g1 and g2 of the type described in Section 1.3.4.3.6.2, with the addition of a centre of inversion e for centrosymmetric groups. The only exceptions are Fdd2 and Fddd

n n t2 g 2 Z =2Z :

82

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY diagonal classes with residual threefold symmetry into a single class; see Section 1.3.4.3.5.6). More generally, factoring by q leads to a reduction from q3 to 13 q3 q q. Each of the remaining transforms then has a symmetry induced from the orthorhombic or tetragonal subgroup, which can be treated as above. No implementation of this procedure is yet available.

which contain diamond glides, in which some non-primitive translations are ‘square roots’ not of primitive lattice translations, but of centring translations. The generic case will be examined first. To calculate electron densities, the unique octant of data may first be transformed on h (respectively h ) as in Section 1.3.4.3.6.2 using the symmetry pertaining to generator g1 . These intermediate results may then be expanded by generator g2 by the formula of Section 1.3.4.3.3 prior to the final transform on h (respectively h ). To calculate structure factors, the reverse operations are applied in the reverse order. The two exceptional groups Fdd2 and Fddd only require a small modification. The F-centring causes the systematic absence of parity classes with mixed parities, leaving only (000) and (111). For the former, the phase factors exp2ih t g h tg in the symmetry relations of Section 1.3.4.3.6.2 become powers of ( 1) so that one is back to the generic case. For the latter, these phase factors are odd powers of i which it is a simple matter to incorporate into a modified multiplexing/demultiplexing procedure.

1.3.4.3.6.6. Treatment of centred lattices Lattice centring is an instance of the duality between periodization and decimation: the extra translational periodicity of induces a decimation of F fFh g described by the ‘reflection conditions’ on h. As was pointed out in Section 1.3.4.2.2.3, nonprimitive lattices are introduced in order to retain the same matrix representation for a given geometric symmetry operation in all the arithmetic classes in which it occurs. From the computational point of view, therefore, the main advantage in using centred lattices is that it maximizes decomposability (Section 1.3.4.2.2.4); reindexing to a primitive lattice would for instance often destroy the diagonal character of the matrix representing a dyad. In the usual procedure involving three successive one-dimensional transforms, the loss of efficiency caused by the duplication of densities or the systematic vanishing of certain classes of structure factors may be avoided by using a multiplexing/demultiplexing technique (Ten Eyck, 1973): (i) for base-centred or body-centred lattices, two successive planes of structure factors may be overlaid into a single plane; after transformation, the results belonging to each plane may be separated by parity considerations; (ii) for face-centred lattices the same method applies, using four successive planes (the third and fourth with an origin translation); (iii) for rhombohedral lattices in hexagonal coordinates, three successive planes may be overlaid, and the results may be separated by linear combinations involving cube roots of unity. The three-dimensional factorization technique of Section 1.3.4.3.4.1 is particularly well suited to the treatment of centred lattices: if the decimation matrix of N contains as a factor N1 a matrix which ‘integerizes’ all the non-primitive lattice vectors, then centring is reflected by the systematic vanishing of certain classes of vectors of decimated data or results, which can simply be omitted from the calculation. An alternative possibly is to reindex on a primitive lattice and use different representative matrices for the symmetry operations: the loss of decomposability is of little consequence in this three-dimensional scheme, although it substantially complicates the definition of the cocycles m2 and h 1 .

1.3.4.3.6.4. Trigonal, tetragonal and hexagonal groups All the symmetries in this class of groups can be handled by the generalized Rader/Winograd algorithms of Section 1.3.4.3.4.3, but no implementation of these is yet available. In groups containing axes of the form nm with g.c.d. m, n 1 i:e: 31 , 32 , 41 , 43 , 61 , 65 along the c direction, the following procedure may be used (Ten Eyck, 1973): (i) to calculate electron densities, the unique structure factors indexed by unique h, k all l are transformed on l; the results are rearranged by the transposition formula of Section 1.3.4.3.3 so as to be indexed by 1 all h, k unique th of z n and are finally transformed on (h, k) to produce an asymmetric unit. For a dihedral group, the extra twofold axis may be used in the transposition to produce a unique 1=2nth of z. (ii) to calculate structure factors, the unique densities in 1=nth of z [or 1=2nth for a dihedral group] are first transformed on x and y, then transposed by the formula of Section 1.3.4.3.3 to reindex the intermediate results by unique h, k all z;

1.3.4.3.6.7. Programming considerations The preceding sections have been devoted to showing how the raw computational efficiency of a crystallographic Fourier transform algorithm can be maximized. This section will briefly discuss another characteristic (besides speed) which a crystallographic Fourier transform program may be required to possess if it is to be useful in various applications: a convenient and versatile mode of presentation of input data or output results. The standard crystallographic FFT programs (Ten Eyck, 1973, 1985) are rather rigid in this respect, and use rather rudimentary data structures (lists of structure-factor values, and two-dimensional arrays containing successive sections of electron-density maps). It is frequently the case that considerable reformatting of these data or results must be carried out before they can be used in other computations; for instance, maps have to be converted from 2D sections to 3D ‘bricks’ before they can be inspected on a computer graphics display. The explicitly three-dimensional approach to the factorization of the DFT and the use of symmetry offers the possibility of richer and more versatile data structures. For instance, the use of ‘decimation in frequency’ in real space and of ‘decimation in time’ in reciprocal

the last transform on z is then carried out. 1.3.4.3.6.5. Cubic groups These are usually treated as their orthorhombic or tetragonal subgroups, as the body-diagonal threefold axis cannot be handled by ordinary methods of decomposition. The three-dimensional factorization technique of Section 1.3.4.3.4.1 allows a complete treatment of cubic symmetry. Factoring by 2 along all three dimensions gives four types (i.e. orbits) of parity classes: 000 with residual threefold symmetry, 100, 010, 001 related by threefold axis, 110, 101, 011 related by threefold axis, 111

with residual threefold symmetry.

Orbit exchange using the threefold axis thus allows one to reduce the number of partial transforms from 8 to 4 (one per orbit). Factoring by 3 leads to a reduction from 27 to 11 (in this case, further reduction to 9 can be gained by multiplexing the three

83

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES to six decimal places or better in most applications (see Gentleman & Sande, 1966).

space leads to data structures in which real-space coordinates are handled by blocks (thus preserving, at least locally, the threedimensional topological connectivity of the maps) while reciprocalspace indices are handled by parity classes or their generalizations for factors other than 2 (thus making the treatment of centred lattices extremely easy). This global three-dimensional indexing also makes it possible to carry symmetry and multiplicity characteristics for each subvector of intermediate results for the purpose of automating the use of the orbit exchange mechanism. Bru¨nger (1989) has described the use of a similar threedimensional factoring technique in the context of structure-factor calculations for the refinement of macromolecular structures.

1.3.4.4.3. Fourier analysis of modified electron-density maps Various approaches to the phase problem are based on certain modifications of the electron-density map, followed by Fourier analysis of the modified map and extraction of phase information from the resulting Fourier coefficients. 1.3.4.4.3.1. Squaring Sayre (1952a) derived his ‘squaring method equation’ for structures consisting of equal, resolved and spherically symmetric atoms by observing that squaring such an electron density is equivalent merely to sharpening each atom into its square. Thus P Fh h Fk Fh k ,

1.3.4.4. Basic crystallographic computations 1.3.4.4.1. Introduction Fourier transform (FT) calculations play an indispensable role in crystallography, because the Fourier transformation is inherent in the diffraction phenomenon itself. Besides this obligatory use, the FT has numerous other applications, motivated more often by its mathematical properties than by direct physical reasoning (although the latter can be supplied after the fact). Typically, many crystallographic computations turn out to be convolutions in disguise, which can be speeded up by orders of magnitude through a judicious use of the FT. Several recent advances in crystallographic computation have been based on this kind of observation.

k

where h f h=f h is the ratio between the form factor f h common to all the atoms and the form factor f sq h for the squared version of that atom. Most of the central results of direct methods, such as the tangent formula, are an immediate consequence of Sayre’s equation. Phase refinement for a macromolecule by enforcement of the squaring method equation was demonstrated by Sayre (1972, 1974). sq

1.3.4.4.3.2. Other non-linear operations A category of phase improvement procedures known as ‘density modification’ is based on the pointwise application of various quadratic or cubic ‘filters’ to electron-density maps after removal of negative regions (Hoppe & Gassmann, 1968; Hoppe et al., 1970; Barrett & Zwick, 1971; Gassmann & Zechmeister, 1972; Collins, 1975; Collins et al., 1976; Gassmann, 1976). These operations are claimed to be equivalent to reciprocal-space phase-refinement techniques such as those based on the tangent formula. Indeed the replacement of P x Fh exp 2ih x

1.3.4.4.2. Fourier synthesis of electron-density maps Bragg (1929) was the first to use this type of calculation to assist structure determination. Progress in computing techniques since that time was reviewed in Section 1.3.4.3.1. The usefulness of the maps thus obtained can be adversely affected by three main factors: (i) limited resolution; (ii) errors in the data; (iii) computational errors. Limited resolution causes ‘series-termination errors’ first investigated by Bragg & West (1930), who used an optical analogy with the numerical aperture of a microscope. James (1948b) gave a quantitative description of this phenomenon as a convolution with the ‘spherical Dirichlet kernel’ (Section 1.3.4.2.1.3), which reflects the truncation of the Fourier spectrum by multiplication with the indicator function of the limiting resolution sphere. Bragg & West (1930) suggested that the resulting ripples might be diminished by applying an artificial temperature factor to the data, which performs a further convolution with a Gaussian point-spread function. When the electron-density map is to be used for model refinement, van Reijen (1942) suggested using Fourier coefficients calculated from the model when no observation is available, as a means of combating series-termination effects. Errors in the data introduce errors in the electron-density maps, with the same mean-square value by virtue of Parseval’s theorem. Special positions accrue larger errors (Cruickshank & Rollett, 1953; Cruickshank, 1965a). To minimize the mean-square electrondensity error due to large phase uncertainties, Blow & Crick (1959) introduced the ‘best Fourier’ which uses centroid Fourier coefficients; the associated error level in the electron-density map was evaluated by Blow & Crick (1959) and Dickerson et al. (1961a,b). Computational errors used to be a serious concern when Beevers–Lipson strips were used, and Cochran (1948a) carried out a critical evaluation of the accuracy limitations imposed by strip methods. Nowadays, the FFT algorithm implemented on digital computers with a word size of at least 32 bits gives results accurate

h

by Px, where P is a polynomial P a0 a1 a2 2 a3 3 . . . yields Px a0

P

P a 1 Fh a2 Fk Fh

h

a3

k

PP k

Fk F l F h

k l

k

. . . exp 2ih x

l

and hence gives rise to the convolution-like families of terms encountered in direct methods. This equivalence, however, has been shown to be rather superficial (Bricogne, 1982) because the ‘uncertainty principle’ embodied in Heisenberg’s inequality (Section 1.3.2.4.4.3) imposes severe limitations on the effectiveness of any procedure which operates pointwise in both real and reciprocal space. In applying such methods, sampling considerations must be given close attention. If the spectrum of extends to resolution and if the pointwise non-linear filter involves a polynomial P of degree n, then P() should be sampled at intervals of at most =2n to accommodate the full bandwidth of its spectrum. 1.3.4.4.3.3. Solvent flattening Crystals of proteins and nucleic acids contain large amounts of mother liquor, often in excess of 50% of the unit-cell volume,

84

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY by an indicator function U in real space, whereas they involve a convolution with F U in reciprocal space. The averaging by noncrystallographic symmetries of an electrondensity map calculated by FFT – hence sampled on a grid which is an integral subdivision of the period lattice – necessarily entails the interpolation of densities at non-integral points of that grid. The effect of interpolation on the structure factors recalculated from an averaged map was examined by Bricogne (1976). This study showed that, if linear interpolation is used, the initial map should be calculated on a fine grid, of size /5 or /6 at resolution (instead of the previously used value of /3). The analysis about to be given applies to all interpolation schemes which consist in a convolution of the sampled density with a fixed interpolation kernel function K. Let be a Z3 -periodic function. Let R K be the interpolation kernel in ‘normalized’ form, i.e. such that R3 Kx d3 x 1 and scaled so as to interpolate between sample values given on a unit grid Z3 ; in the case of linear interpolation, K is the ‘trilinear wedge’

occupying connected channels. The well ordered electron density M x corresponding to the macromolecule thus occupies only a periodic subregion U of the crystal. Thus M U M , implying the convolution identity between structure factors (Main & Woolfson, 1963): X 1 FM h F U h kFM k U k which is a form of the Shannon interpolation formula (Sections 1.3.2.7.1, 1.3.4.2.1.7; Bricogne, 1974; Colman, 1974). It is often possible to obtain an approximate ‘molecular envelope’ U from a poor electron-density map , either interactively by computer graphics (Bricogne, 1976) or automatically by calculating a moving average of the electron density within a small sphere S. The latter procedure can be implemented in real space (Wang, 1985). However, as it is a convolution of with S , it can be speeded up considerably (Leslie, 1987) by computing the moving average mav as mav x F F F S x:

Kx W xW yW z, where W t 1 0

This remark is identical in substance to Booth’s method of computation of ‘bounded projections’ (Booth, 1945a) described in Section 1.3.4.2.1.8, except that the summation is kept threedimensional. The iterative use of the estimated envelope U for the purpose of phase improvement (Wang, 1985) is a submethod of the previously developed method of molecular averaging, which is described below. Sampling rules for the Fourier analysis of envelopetruncated maps will be given there.

jtj

if jtj 1, if jtj 1:

Let be sampled on a grid G1 N1 1 Z3 , and let IN1 denote the function interpolated from this sampled version of . Then: " # P IN1 N1 1 m N1 1 # K, m2Z3

where N1 1 # Kx KN1 x, so that " # P NT1 k1 F IN1 F jdet N1 j

1.3.4.4.3.4. Molecular averaging by noncrystallographic symmetries Macromolecules and macromolecular assemblies frequently crystallize with several identical subunits in the asymmetric metric unit, or in several crystal forms containing the same molecule in different arrangements. Rossmann & Blow (1963) recognized that intensity data collected from such structures are redundant (Sayre, 1952b) and that their redundancy could be a source of phase information. The phase constraints implied by the consistency of geometrically redundant intensities were first derived by Rossmann & Blow (1963), and were generalized by Main & Rossmann (1966). Crowther (1967, 1969) reformulated them as linear eigenvalue equations between structure factors, for which he proposed an iterative matrix solution method. Although useful in practice (Jack, 1973), this reciprocal-space approach required computations of size / N 2 for N reflections, so that N could not exceed a few thousands. The theory was then reformulated in real space (Bricogne, 1974), showing that the most costly step in Crowther’s procedure could be carried out much more economically by averaging the electron densities of all crystallographically independent subunits, then rebuilding the crystal(s) from this averaged subunit, flattening the density in the solvent region(s) by resetting it to its average value. This operation is a projection [by virtue of Section 1.3.4.2.2.2(d)]. The overall complexity was thus reduced from N 2 to N log N. The design and implementation of a general-purpose program package for averaging, reconstructing and solvent-flattening electrondensity maps (Bricogne, 1976) led rapidly to the first highresolution determinations of virus structures (Bloomer et al., 1978; Harrison et al., 1978), with N 200 000. The considerable gain in speed is a consequence of the fact that the masking operations used to retrieve the various copies of the common subunit are carried out by simple pointwise multiplication

k1 2Z3

1 T # N F K jdet N1 j 1 " # P t NT1 k1 F N1T # F K: k1 2Z3

The transform of IN1 thus consists of (i) a ‘main band’ corresponding to k1 0, which consists of the true transform F j attenuated by multiplication by the central region of F KN 1 T j ; in the case of linear interpolation, for example, sin 2 sin 2 sin 2 ; F K, , (ii) a series of ‘ghost bands’ corresponding to k1 6 0, which consist of translates of F multiplied by the tail regions of N1T # F K. Thus IN1 is not band-limited even if is. Supposing, however, that is band-limited and that grid G1 satisfies the Shannon sampling criterion, we see that there will be no overlap between the different bands: F may therefore be recovered from the main band by compensating its attenuation, which is approximately a temperature-factor correction. For numerical work, however, IN1 must be resampled onto another grid G2 , which causes its transform to become periodized into (" # ) P P # T jdet N2 j t T t T F N F K : k2 2Z3

85

N2 k2

k1 2Z3

N1 k1

1

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES This now causes the main band k1 k2 0 to become contaminated by the ghost bands k1 6 0 of the translates k2 6 0 of IN1 . Aliasing errors may be minimized by increasing the sampling rate in grid G1 well beyond the Shannon minimum, which rapidly reduces the r.m.s. content of the ghost bands. The sampling rate in grid G2 needs only exceed the Shannon minimum to the extent required to accommodate the increase in bandwidth due to convolution with F U , which is the reciprocalspace counterpart of envelope truncation (or solvent flattening) in real space.

agitation and their chemical identity (which can be used as a pointer to form-factor tables). Form factors are usually parameterized as sums of Gaussians, and thermal agitation by a Gaussian temperature factor or tensor. The formulae given in Section 1.3.4.2.2.6 for Gaussian atoms are therefore adequate for most purposes. Highresolution electron-density studies use more involved parameterizations. Early calculations were carried out by means of Bragg–Lipson charts (Bragg & Lipson, 1936) which gave a graphical representation of the symmetrized trigonometric sums of Section 1.3.4.2.2.9. The approximation of form factors by Gaussians goes back to the work of Vand et al. (1957) and Forsyth & Wells (1959). Agarwal (1978) gave simplified expansions suitable for mediumresolution modelling of macromolecular structures. This method of calculating structure factors is expensive because each atom sends contributions of essentially equal magnitude to all structure factors in a resolution shell. The calculation is therefore of size / NN for N atoms and N reflections. Since N and N are roughly proportional at a given resolution, this method is very costly for large structures. Two distinct programming strategies are available (Rollett, 1965) according to whether the fast loop is on all atoms for each reflection, or on all reflections for each atom. The former method was favoured in the early times when computers were unreliable. The latter was shown by Burnett & Nordman (1974) to be more amenable to efficient programming, as no multiplication is required in calculating the arguments of the sine/cosine terms: these can be accumulated by integer addition, and used as subscripts in referencing a trigonometric function table.

1.3.4.4.3.5. Molecular-envelope transforms via Green’s theorem Green’s theorem stated in terms of distributions (Section 1.3.2.3.9.1) is particularly well suited to the calculation of the Fourier transforms F U of indicator functions. Let f be the indicator function U and let S be the boundary of U (assumed to be a smooth surface). The jump 0 in the value of f across S along the outer normal vector is 0 1, the jump in the normal derivative of f across S is 0, and the Laplacian of f as a function is (almost everywhere) 0 so that Tf 0. Green’s theorem then reads: Tf Tf S @ 0 S @ S : The function eH X exp2iH X satisfies the identity eH 42 kHk2 eH . Therefore, in Cartesian coordinates: U H hTU , eH i F

1 42 kHk 1 42 kHk 1

2

1.3.4.4.5. Structure factors via model electron-density maps

hTU , eH i

hTU , eH i 2

Section 1:3:2:3:9:1a

h @ S , eH i 42 kHk2 Z 1 @ eH d2 S Section 1:3:2:3:9:1c 42 kHk2 S Z 1 2iH n exp2iH X d2 S, 2 2 4 kHk S

i.e. F U H

1 2ikHk2

Z H n exp2iH X d2 S, S

where n is the outer normal to S. This formula was used by von Laue (1936) for a different purpose, namely to calculate the transforms of crystal shapes (see also Ewald, 1940). If the surface S is given by a triangulation, the surface integral becomes a sum over all faces, since n is constant on each face. If U is a solid sphere with radius R, an integration by parts gives immediately: 1 3 F U H 3 sin X X cos X volU X with X 2kHkR: 1.3.4.4.4. Structure factors from model atomic parameters An atomic model of a crystal structure consists of a list of symmetry-unique atoms described by their positions, their thermal

86

Robertson (1936b) recognized the similarity between the calculation of structure factors by Fourier summation and the calculation of Fourier syntheses, the main difference being of course that atomic coordinates do not usually lie exactly on a grid obtained by integer subdivision of the crystal lattice. He proposed to address this difficulty by the use of his sorting board, which could extend the scale of subdivision and thus avoid phase errors. In this way the calculation of structure factors became amenable to Beevers–Lipson strip methods, with considerable gain of speed. Later, Beevers & Lipson (1952) proposed that trigonometric functions attached to atomic positions falling between the grid points on which Beevers–Lipson strips were based should be obtained by linear interpolation from the values found on the strips for the closest grid points. This amounts (Section 1.3.4.4.3.4) to using atoms in the shape of a trilinear wedge, whose form factor was indicated in Section 1.3.4.4.3.4 and gives rise to aliasing effects (see below) not considered by Beevers & Lipson. The correct formulation of this idea came with the work of Sayre (1951), who showed that structure factors could be calculated by Fourier analysis of a sampled electron-density map previously generated on a subdivision N 1 of the crystal lattice . When generating such a map, care must be taken to distribute onto the sample grid not only the electron densities of all the atoms in the asymmetric motif, but also those of their images under space-group symmetries and lattice translations. Considerable savings in computation occur, especially for large structures, because atoms are localized: each atom sends contributions to only a few grid points in real space, rather than to all reciprocal-lattice points. The generation of the sampled electron-density map is still of complexity / NN for N atoms and N reflections, but the proportionality constant is smaller than that in Section 1.3.4.4.4 by orders of magnitude; the extra cost of Fourier analysis, proportional to N log N , is negligible.

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY The idea of approximating a Fourier transform by a discrete transform on sampled values had already been used by Whittaker (1948), who tested it on the first three odd Hermite functions and did not consider the problem of aliasing errors. By contrast, Sayre gave a lucid analysis of the sampling problems associated to this technique. If the periodic sampled map is written in the form of a weighted lattice distribution (as in Section 1.3.2.7.3) as P s N 1 mN 1 m ,

B

then its discrete Fourier transform yields P F s h Fh NT h h2Z3

so that each correct value Fh is corrupted by its aliases Fh NT h for h 6 0. To cure this aliasing problem, Sayre used ‘hypothetical atoms’ with form factors equal to those of standard atoms within the resolution range of interest, but set to zero outside that range. This amounts to using atomic densities with built-in series-termination errors, which has the detrimental effect of introducing slowly decaying ripples around the atom which require incrementing sample densities at many more grid points per atom. Sayre considered another cure in the form of an artificial temperature factor B (Bragg & West, 1930) applied to all atoms. This spreads each atom on more grid points in real space but speeds up the decay of its transform in reciprocal space, thus allowing the use of a coarser sampling grid in real space. He discounted it as spoiling the agreement with observed data, but Ten Eyck (1977) pointed out that this agreement could be restored by applying the negative of the artificial temperature factor to the results. This idea cannot be carried to extremes: if B is chosen too large, the atoms will be so spread out in real space as each to occupy a sizeable fraction of the unit cell and the advantage of atom localization will be lost; furthermore, the form factors will fall off so rapidly that round-off error amplification will occur when the results are sharpened back. Clearly, there exists an optimal combination of B and sampling rate yielding the most economical computation for a given accuracy at a given resolution, and a formula will now be given to calculate it. Let us make the simplifying assumption that all atoms are roughly equal and that their common form factor can be represented by an equivalent temperature factor Beq . Let 1=dmax be the resolution to which structure factors are wanted. The Shannon . Let be the oversampling sampling interval is =2 1=2dmax rate, so that the actual sampling interval in the map is =2 1=2dmax : then consecutive copies of the transform are in reciprocal space. Let the artificial separated by a distance 2dmax temperature factor Bextra be added, and let

2 1dmax

1.3.4.4.6. Derivatives for variational phasing techniques Some methods of phase determination rely on maximizing a certainR global criterion S involving the electron density, of the form R3 =Z3 Kx d3 x, under constraint of agreement with the observed structure-factor amplitudes, typically measured by a 2 residual C. Several recently proposed methods use for S various measures of entropy defined by taking K log= or K log (Bricogne, 1982; Britten & Collins, 1982; Narayan & Nityananda, 1982; Bryan et al., 1983; Wilkins et al., 1983; Bricogne, 1984; Navaza, 1985; Livesey & Skilling, 1985). Sayre’s use of the squaring method to improve protein phases (Sayre, 1974) also belongs to this category, and is amenable to the same computational strategies (Sayre, 1980). These methods differ from the density-modification procedures of Section 1.3.4.4.3.2 in that they seek an optimal solution by moving electron densities (or structure factors) jointly rather than pointwise, i.e. by moving along suitably chosen search directions vi x [or Vi h]. For computational purposes, these search directions may be handled either as column vectors of sample values fvi N 1 mgm2Z3 =NZ3 on a grid in real space, or as column vectors of Fourier coefficients fVi hgh2Z3 =NT Z3 in reciprocal space. These column vectors are the coordinates of the same vector Vi in an abstract vector space V LZ3 =NZ3 of dimension N jdet Nj over R, but referred to two different bases which are related by the DFT and its inverse (Section 1.3.2.7.3). The problem of finding the optimum of S for a given value of C amounts to achieving collinearity between the gradients rS and rC of S and of C in V , the scalar ratio between them being a Lagrange multiplier. In order to move towards such a solution from a trial position, the dependence of rS and rC on position in V must be represented. This involves the N N Hessian matrices H(S) and H(C), whose size precludes their use in the whole of V . Restricting the search to a smaller search subspace of dimension n spanned by fVi gi1, ..., n we may build local quadratic models of S and C (Bryan & Skilling, 1980; Burch et al., 1983) with respect to n coordinates X in that subspace:

B Beq Bextra : , where The worst aliasing occurs at the outer resolution limit dmax the ‘signal’ due to an atom is proportional to 2 , exp B=4dmax

while the ‘noise’ due to the closest alias is proportional to

SX SX0 ST0 X

1dmax 2 g:

12X

Thus the signal-to-noise ratio, or quality factor, Q is expB

defines B in terms of , dmax and Q. The overall cost of the structure-factor calculation from N atoms is then (i) C1 B2=3 N for density generation, (ii) C2 2dmax 3 log2dmax 3 for Fourier analysis, where C1 and C2 are constant depending on the speed of the computer used. This overall cost may be minimized with respect to for given dmax and Q, determining the optimal B (and hence Bextra ) in passing by the above relation. Sayre (1951) did observe that applying an artificial temperature factor in real space would not create series-termination ripples: the resulting atoms would have a smaller effective radius than his hypothetical atoms, so that step (i) would be faster. This optimality of Gaussian smearing is ultimately a consequence of Hardy’s theorem (Section 1.3.2.4.4.3).

m2Z3

expf B=42

log Q

CX

1dmax 2 :

If a certain value of Q is desired (e.g. Q 100 for 1% accuracy), then the equation

X0

X0 T H0 SX

CX0 CT0 X X0 12X X0 T H0 CX

X0 X0 :

The coefficients of these linear models are given by scalar products:

87

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES S0 i Vi , rS

Ahp

C0 i Vi , rC

@jFhcalc j @up jFh jobs

H0 Sij Vi , HSVj

h jFhcalc j

H0 Cij Vi , HCVj

W diag Wh with Wh

which, by virtue of Parseval’s theorem, may be evaluated either in real space or in reciprocal space (Bricogne, 1984). In doing so, special positions and reflections must be taken into account, as in Section 1.3.4.2.2.8. Scalar products involving S are best evaluated by real-space grid summation, because H(S) is diagonal in this representation; those involving C are best calculated by reciprocalspace summation, because H(C) is at worst 2 2 block-diagonal in this representation. Using these Hessian matrices in the wrong space would lead to prohibitively expensive convolutions instead of scalar (or at worst 2 2 matrix) multiplications.

1 2h obs

:

To calculate the elements of A, write: F jFj expi' i ; hence @jFj @ @ cos ' sin ' @u @u @u @F @F Re expi' Re expi' : @u @u In the simple case of atoms with real-valued form factors and isotropic thermal agitation in space group P1, P Fhcalc gj h exp2ih xj ,

1.3.4.4.7. Derivatives for model refinement Since the origins of X-ray crystal structure analysis, the calculation of crystallographic Fourier series has been closely associated with the process of refinement. Fourier coefficients with phases were obtained for all or part of the measured reflections in the basis of some trial model for all or part of the structure, and Fourier syntheses were then used to complete and improve this initial model. This approach is clearly described in the classic paper by Bragg & West (1929), and was put into practice in the determination of the structures of topaz (Alston & West, 1929) and diopside (Warren & Bragg, 1929). Later, more systematic methods of arriving at a trial model were provided by the Patterson synthesis (Patterson, 1934, 1935a,b; Harker, 1936) and by isomorphous replacement (Robertson, 1935, 1936c). The role of Fourier syntheses, however, remained essentially unchanged [see Robertson (1937) for a review] until more systematic methods of structure refinement were introduced in the 1940s. A particularly good account of the processes of structure completion and refinement may be found in Chapters 15 and 16 of Stout & Jensen (1968). It is beyond the scope of this section to review the vast topic of refinement methods: rather, it will give an account of those aspects of their development which have sought improved power by exploiting properties of the Fourier transformation. It is of more than historical interest that some recent advances in the crystallographic refinement of macromolecular structures had been anticipated by Cochran and Cruickshank in the early 1950s.

j2J

where gj h Zj fj h exp

2 1 4Bj dh ,

Zj being a fractional occupancy. Positional derivatives with respect to xj are given by @Fhcalc 2ihgj h exp2ih xj @xj @jFhcalc j Re 2ihgj h exp 2ih xj expi'calc h @xj so that the corresponding 3 1 subvector of the right-hand side of the normal equations reads: X @jFhcalc j calc Wh jFh j jFh jobs @x j h2H " X Re gj h 2ihWh jFhcalc j jFh jobs h2H

expi'calc h exp 2ih xj : The setting up and solution of the normal equations lends itself well to computer programming and has the advantage of providing a thorough analysis of the accuracy of its results (Cruickshank, 1965b, 1970; Rollett, 1970). It is, however, an expensive task, of complexity / n jH j2 , which is unaffordable for macromolecules.

1.3.4.4.7.1. The method of least squares Hughes (1941) was the first to use the already well established multivariate least-squares method (Whittaker & Robinson, 1944) to refine initial estimates of the parameters describing a model structure. The method gained general acceptance through the programming efforts of Friedlander et al. (1955), Sparks et al. (1956), Busing & Levy (1961), and others. The Fourier relations between and F (Section 1.3.4.2.2.6) are used to derive the ‘observational equations’ connecting the structure parameters fup gp1, ..., n to the observations fjFh jobs , 2h obs gh2H comprising the amplitudes and their experimental variances for a set H of unique reflections. The normal equations giving the corrections u to the parameters are then

1.3.4.4.7.2. Booth’s differential Fourier syntheses It was the use of Fourier syntheses in the completion of trial structures which provided the incentive to find methods for computing 2D and 3D syntheses efficiently, and led to the Beevers–Lipson strips. The limited accuracy of the latter caused the estimated positions of atoms (identified as peaks in the maps) to be somewhat in error. Methods were therefore sought to improve the accuracy with which the coordinates of the electron-density maxima could be determined. The naive method of peak-shape analysis from densities recalculated on a 3 3 3 grid using highaccuracy trigonometric tables entailed 27 summations per atom. Booth (1946a) suggested examining the rapidly varying derivatives of the electron density rather than its slowly varying values. If

AT WAu AT W, where

88

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY P x Fh exp 2ih x coefficients used in Booth’s differential syntheses on the other hand h (see also Booth, 1948a). In doing so he initiated a remarkable 0 sequence of formal and computational developments which are still then the gradient vector rx of at x actively pursued today. P rx x0 Fh 2ih exp 2ih x0 Let C x be the electron-density map corresponding to the h current atomic model, with structure factors jFhcalc j expi'calc h ; and x be the map calculated from observed moduli and let O can be calculated by means of three Fourier summations from the calculated phases, i.e. with coefficients fjFh jobs expi'calc 3 1 vector of Fourier coefficients h gh2H . If there are enough data for C to have a resolved peak at each 2ihFh : model atomic position xj , then Similarly, the Hessian matrix of at x0 rx C xj 0 for each j 2 J; P T 0 2 T 0 rx rx x Fh 4 hh exp 2ih x while if the calculated phases 'calc are good enough, O will also h h have peaks at each xj : can be calculated by six Fourier summations from the unique rx O xj 0 for each j 2 J : elements of the symmetric matrix of Fourier coefficients: 0 2 1 It follows that h hk hl P 2@ 4 hk k 2 kl AFh : rx C O xj 2ihjFhcalc j jFh jobs expi'calc h h hl kl l2 exp 2ih xj The scalar maps giving the components of the gradient and Hessian matrix of will be called differential syntheses of 1st order 0 for each j 2 J, and 2nd order respectively. If x0 is approximately but not exactly a maximum of , then the Newton–Raphson estimate of the true where the summation is over all reflections in H or related to H by space-group and Friedel symmetry (overlooking multiplicity maximum x is given by: factors!). This relation is less sensitive to series-termination errors x x0 rx rTx x0 1 rx x0 : than either of the previous two, since the spectrum of O could have This calculation requires only nine accurate Fourier summations been extrapolated beyond the data in H by using that of C [as in (instead of 27), and this number is further reduced to four if the peak van Reijen (1942)] without changing its right-hand side. Cochran then used the identity is assumed to be spherically symmetrical. The resulting positions are affected by series-termination errors @Fhcalc 2ihgj h exp2ih xj in the differential syntheses. Booth (1945c, 1946c) proposed a @xj ‘back-shift correction’ to eliminate them, and extended this treatment to the acentric case (Booth, 1946b). He cautioned against in the form the use of an artificial temperature factor to fight series-termination 1 @Fhcalc errors (Brill et al., 1939), as this could be shown to introduce 2ih exp 2ih xj coordinate errors by causing overlap between atoms (Booth, 1946c, gj h @xj 1947a,b). Cruickshank was able to derive estimates for the standard to rewrite the previous relation as uncertainties of the atomic coordinates obtained in this way (Cox rx C O xj & Cruickshank, 1948; Cruickshank, 1949a,b) and to show that they " # calc agreed with those provided by the least-squares method. X 1 @F obs h jFhcalc j jFh j Re expi'calc The calculation of differential Fourier syntheses was incorpoh h @x g j j h rated into the crystallographic programs of Ahmed & Cruickshank (1953b) and of Sparks et al. (1956). X 1 @jFhcalc j jFhcalc j jFh jobs gj h @xj h 1.3.4.4.7.3. Booth’s method of steepest descents Having defined the now universally adopted R factors (Booth, 0 for each j 2 J 1945b) as criteria of agreement between observed and calculated amplitudes or intensities, Booth proposed that R should be (the operation Re [] on the first line being neutral because of Friedel minimized with respect to the set of atomic coordinates fxj gj2J symmetry). This is equivalent to the vanishing of the 3 1 by descending along the gradient of R in parameter space (Booth, subvector of the right-hand side of the normal equations associated 1947c,d). This ‘steepest descents’ procedure was compared with to a least-squares refinement in which the weights would be Patterson methods by Cochran (1948d). 1 When calculating the necessary derivatives, Booth (1948a, 1949) Wh : gj h used the formulae given above in connection with least squares. This method was implemented by Qurashi (1949) and by Vand Cochran concluded that, for equal-atom structures with g h j (1948, 1951) with parameter-rescaling modifications which made it gh for all j, the positions x obtained by Booth’s method applied to j very close to the least-squares method (Cruickshank, 1950; Qurashi the difference map C are such that they minimize the residual O & Vand, 1953; Qurashi, 1953). 1X 1 jFhcalc j jFh jobs 2 1.3.4.4.7.4. Cochran’s Fourier method 2 h gh Cochran (1948b,c, 1951a) undertook to exploit an algebraic similarity between the right-hand side of the normal equations in the with respect to the atomic positions. If it is desired to minimize the least-squares method on the one hand, and the expression for the residual of the ordinary least-squares method, then the differential

89

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Unlike Cochran’s original heuristic argument, this result does not depend on the atoms being resolved. Cruickshank (1952) also considered the elements of the normal matrix, of the form X @jF calc j @jF calc j h h wh @up @uq h

synthesis method should be applied to the weighted difference map X Wh jFhcalc j jFh jobs expi'calc h : gh h He went on to show (Cochran, 1951b) that the refinement of temperature factors could also be carried out by inspecting appropriate derivatives of the weighted difference map. This Fourier method was used by Freer et al. (1976) in conjunction with a stereochemical regularization procedure to refine protein structures.

associated with positional parameters. The 3 3 block for parameters xj and xk may be written P wh hhT Re 2igj h exp 2ih xj expi'calc h h

1.3.4.4.7.5. Cruickshank’s modified Fourier method Cruickshank consolidated and extended Cochran’s derivations in a series of classic papers (Cruickshank, 1949b , 1950, 1952, 1956). He was able to show that all the coefficients involved in the righthand side and normal matrix of the least-squares method could be calculated by means of suitable differential Fourier syntheses even when the atoms overlap. This remarkable achievement lay essentially dormant until its independent rediscovery by Agarwal in 1978 (Section 1.3.4.4.7.6). To ensure rigorous equivalence between the summations over h 2 H (in the expressions of least-squares right-hand side and normal matrix elements) and genuine Fourier summations, multiplicity-corrected weights were introduced by: 1 wh Wh if h 2 Gh with h 2 H , jGh j wh 0

Re 2igk h exp 2ih xk expi'calc h which, using the identity Rez1 Rez2 12Rez1 z2 Rez1 z2 , becomes 22

h

fexp 2ih xj

(Friedel’s symmetry makes Re redundant on the last line). Cruickshank argued that the first term would give a good approximation to the diagonal blocks of the normal matrix and to those off-diagonal blocks for which xj and xk are close. On this basis he was able to justify the ‘n-shift rule’ of Shoemaker et al. (1950). Cruickshank gave this derivation in a general space group, but using a very terse notation which somewhat obscures it. Using the symmetrized trigonometric structure-factor kernel of Section 1.3.4.2.2.9 and its multiplication formula, the above expression is seen to involve the values of a Fourier synthesis at points of the form xj Sg xk . Cruickshank (1956) showed that this analysis could also be applied to the refinement of temperature factors. These two results made it possible to obtain all coefficients involved in the normal equations by looking up the values of certain differential Fourier syntheses at xj or at xj Sg xk . At the time this did not confer any superiority over the standard form of the leastsquares procedure, because the accurate computation of Fourier syntheses was an expensive operation. The modified Fourier method was used by Truter (1954) and by Ahmed & Cruickshank (1953a), and was incorporated into the program system described by Cruickshank et al. (1961). A more recent comparison with the least-squares method was made by Dietrich (1972). There persisted, however, some confusion about the nature of the relationship between Fourier and least-squares methods, caused by the extra factors gj h which make it necessary to compute a differential synthesis for each type of atom. This led Cruickshank to conclude that ‘in spite of their remarkable similarities the leastsquares and modified-Fourier methods are fundamentally distinct’.

where Gh denotes the orbit of h and Gh its isotropy subgroup (Section 1.3.4.2.2.5). Similarly, derivatives with respect to parameters of symmetry-unique atoms were expressed, via the chain rule, as sums over the orbits of these atoms. Let p 1, . . . , n be the label of a parameter up belonging to atoms with label j. Then Cruickshank showed that the pth element of the right-hand side of the normal equations can be obtained as Dp; j xj , where Dp; j is a differential synthesis of the form P Dp; j x Pp hgj hwh jFhcalc j jFh jobs h

expi'calc h exp 2ih x with Pp h a polynomial in (h, k, l) depending on the type of parameter p. The correspondence between parameter type and the associated polynomial extends Booth’s original range of differential syntheses, and is recapitulated in the following table. Ph, k, l

x coordinate

2ih

y coordinate

2ik

z coordinate B isotropic B11 anisotropic

xk

exp2i'calc h exp 2ih xj xk g

otherwise,

Parameter type

P wh hhT gj hgk h

2il 1 2 4dh 2

1.3.4.4.7.6. Agarwal’s FFT implementation of the Fourier method Agarwal (1978) rederived and completed Cruickshank’s results at a time when the availability of the FFT algorithm made the Fourier method of calculating the coefficients of the normal equations much more economical than the standard method, especially for macromolecules. As obtained by Cruickshank, the modified Fourier method required a full 3D Fourier synthesis – for each type of parameter, since this determines [via the polynomial Pp h] the type of differential synthesis to be computed;

h

B

12

anisotropic

hk

B

13

anisotropic

hl

B

22

anisotropic

k2

B23 anisotropic

kl

B33 anisotropic

l2 :

90

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY X X @R – for each type of atom j 2 J, since the coefficients of the @R calc calc R Ah calc Bh Re Dh Fhcalc : differential synthesis must be multiplied by gj h. calc @A @B h h h h Agarwal disposed of the latter dependence by pointing out that the multiplication involved is equivalent to a real-space convolution The Re operation is superfluous because of Friedel symmetry, so between the differential synthesis and j x, the standard electron that R may be simply written in terms of the Hermitian scalar density j for atom type j (Section 1.3.4.2.1.2) smeared by the product in `2 Z3 : isotropic thermal agitation of that atom. Since j is localized, this convolution involves only a small number of grid points. The R D, Fcalc : requirement of a distinct differential synthesis for each parameter type, however, continued to hold, and created some difficulties at If calc is the transform of Fcalc , we have also by Parseval’s theorem the FFT level because the symmetries of differential syntheses are R D, calc : more complex than ordinary space-group symmetries. Jack & Levitt (1978) sought to avoid the calculation of difference syntheses by using instead finite differences calculated from ordinary Fourier or We may therefore write difference Fourier maps. @R Dx calc , In spite of its complication, this return to the Fourier @ x implementation of the least-squares method led to spectacular increases in speed (Isaacs & Agarwal, 1978; Agarwal, 1980; Baker which states that Dx is the functional derivative of R with respect & Dodson, 1980) and quickly gained general acceptance (Dodson, to calc . 1981; Isaacs, 1982a,b, 1984). The right-hand side of the normal equations has @R=@up for its pth element, and this may be written Z 1.3.4.4.7.7. Lifchitz’s reformulation @R @R @calc x 2 @calc : d x D, Lifchitz [see Agarwal et al. (1981), Agarwal (1981)] proposed calc x @up @up @up R3 =Z3 @ that the idea of treating certain multipliers in Cruickshank’s modified differential Fourier syntheses by means of a convolution If up belongs to atom j, then in real space should be applied not only to gj h, but also to the @j polynomials Pp h which determine the type of differential @calc @xj j ; xj synthesis being calculated. This leads to convoluting @j =@up @up @up @up with the same ordinary weighted difference Fourier synthesis, rather than j with the differential synthesis of type p. In this way, a single hence Fourier synthesis, with ordinary (scalar) symmetry properties, @j @R needs be computed; the parameter type and atom type both : D, xj intervene through the function @j =@up with which it is convoluted. @up @up This approach has been used as the basis of an efficient generalpurpose least-squares refinement program for macromolecular By the identity of Section 1.3.2.4.3.5, this is identical to Lifchitz’s structures (Tronrud et al., 1987). expression D @j =@up xj . The present derivation in terms of This rearrangement amounts to using the fact (Section scalar products [see Bru¨nger (1989) for another presentation of it] is 1.3.2.3.9.7) that convolution commutes with differentiation. Let conceptually simpler, since it invokes only the chain rule [other uses of which have been reviewed by Lunin (1985)] and Parseval’s P obs calc calc Dx wh jFh j jFh j expi'h exp 2ih x theorem; economy of computation is obviously related to the good h localization of @calc =@up compared to @F calc =@up . Convolutions, be the inverse-variance weighted difference map, and let us assume whose meaning is less clear, are no longer involved; they were a that parameter up belongs to atom j. Then the Agarwal form for the legacy of having first gone over to reciprocal space via differential syntheses in the 1940s. pth component of the right-hand side of the normal equations is Cast in this form, the calculation of derivatives by FFT methods @D appears as a particular instance of the procedure described in j xj , connection with variational techniques (Section 1.3.4.4.6) to @up calculate the coefficients of local quadratic models in a search while the Lifchitz form is subspace; this is far from surprising since varying the electron density through a variation of the parameters of an atomic model is @j a particular case of the ‘free’ variations considered by the xj : D @up variational approach. The latter procedure would accommodate in a very natural fashion the joint consideration of an energetic (Jack & Levitt, 1978; Bru¨nger et al., 1987; Bru¨nger, 1988; Bru¨nger et al., 1989; Kuriyan et al., 1989) or stereochemical (Konnert, 1976; 1.3.4.4.7.8. A simplified derivation Sussman et al., 1977; Konnert & Hendrickson, 1980; Hendrickson A very simple derivation of the previous results will now be & Konnert, 1980; Tronrud et al., 1987) restraint function (which given, which suggests the possibility of many generalizations. The weighted difference map Dx has coefficients Dh which are would play the role of S) and of the crystallographic residual (which would be C). It would even have over the latter the superiority of the gradients of the global residual with respect to each Fhcalc : affording a genuine second-order approximation, albeit only in a @R @R subspace, hence the ability of detecting negative curvature and the Dh calc i calc : resulting bifurcation behaviour (Bricogne, 1984). Current methods @Ah @Bh are unable to do this because they use only first-order models, and By the chain rule, a variation of each Fhcalc by Fhcalc will result in a this is known to degrade severely the overall efficiency of the variation of R by R with refinement process.

91

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Suppose that a crystal contains one or several copies of a molecule M in its asymmetric unit. If x is the electron density of that molecule in some reference position and orientation, then " # P P # # 0 Sg Tj ,

1.3.4.4.7.9. Discussion of macromolecular refinement techniques The impossibility of carrying out a full-matrix least-squares refinement of a macromolecular crystal structure, caused by excessive computational cost and by the paucity of observations, led Diamond (1971) to propose a real-space refinement method in which stereochemical knowledge was used to keep the number of free parameters to a minimum. Refinement took place by a leastsquares fit between the ‘observed’ electron-density map and a model density consisting of Gaussian atoms. This procedure, coupled to iterative recalculation of the phases, led to the first highly refined protein structures obtained without using full-matrix least squares (Huber et al., 1974; Bode & Schwager, 1975; Deisenhofer & Steigemann, 1975; Takano, 1977a,b). Real-space refinement takes advantage of the localization of atoms (each parameter interacts only with the density near the atom to which it belongs) and gives the most immediate description of stereochemical constraints. A disadvantage is that fitting the ‘observed’ electron density amounts to treating the phases of the structure factors as observed quantities, and to ignoring the experimental error estimates on their moduli. The method is also much more vulnerable to series-termination errors and accidentally missing data than the least-squares method. These objections led to the progressive disuse of Diamond’s method, and to a switch towards reciprocal-space least squares following Agarwal’s work. The connection established above between the Cruickshank– Agarwal modified Fourier method and the simple use of the chain rule affords a partial refutation to both the premises of Diamond’s method and to the objections made against it: (i) it shows that refinement can be performed through localized computations in real space without having to treat the phases as observed quantities; (ii) at the same time, it shows that measurement errors on the moduli can be fully utilized in real space, via the Fourier synthesis of the functional derivative @R=@calc x or by means of the coefficients of a quadratic model of R in a search subspace.

j2J g2G

where Tj : x 7 ! Cj x dj describes the placement of the jth copy of the molecule with respect to the reference copy. It is assumed that each such copy is in a general position, so that there is no isotropy subgroup. The methods of Section 1.3.4.2.2.9 (with j replaced by Cj# , and xj by dj ) lead to the following expression for the autocorrelation of 0 : PPPP 0 0 t Sg2 dj2 sg1 dj1 j1 j2 g1 g2

# # R # R # g1 Cj1 g2 Cj2 :

If is unknown, consider the subfamily of terms with j1 j2 j and g1 g2 g: PP # # R g Cj : g

j

The scalar product , R # in which R is a variable rotation will have a peak whenever R R g1 Cj1 1 R g2 Cj2 since two copies of the ‘self-Patterson’ of the molecule will be brought into coincidence. If the interference from terms in the Patterson r 0 0 other than those present in is not too serious, the ‘self-rotation function’ , R # (Rossmann & Blow, 1962; Crowther, 1972) will show the same peaks, from which the rotations fCj gj2J may be determined, either individually or jointly if for instance they form a group. If is known, then its self-Patterson may be calculated, and the Cj may be found by examining the ‘cross-rotation function’ , R # which will have peaks at R R g Cj , g 2 G, j 2 J. Once the Cj are known, then the various copies Cj# of M may be Fourier-analysed into structure factors:

1.3.4.4.7.10. Sampling considerations The calculation of the inner products D, @calc =@up from a sampled gradient map D requires even more caution than that of structure factors via electron-density maps described in Section 1.3.4.4.5, because the functions @j =@up have transforms which extend even further in reciprocal space than the j themselves. Analytically, if the j are Gaussians, the @j =@up are finite sums of multivariate Hermite functions (Section 1.3.2.4.4.2) and hence the same is true of their transforms. The difference map D must therefore be finely sampled and the relation between error and sampling rate may be investigated as in Section 1.3.4.4.5. An examination of the sampling rates commonly used (e.g. one third of the resolution) shows that they are insufficient. Tronrud et al. (1987) propose to relax this requirement by applying an artificial temperature factor to j (cf. Section 1.3.4.4.5) and the negative of that temperature factor to D, a procedure of questionable validity because the latter ‘sharpening’ operation is ill defined [the function exp kxk2 does not define a tempered distribution, so the associativity properties of convolution may be lost]. A more robust procedure would be to compute the scalar product by means of a more sophisticated numerical quadrature formula than a mere grid sum.

Mj h F Cj# h: The cross terms with j1 6 j2 , g1 6 g2 in 0 0 then contain ‘motifs’ # # R # R # g1 Cj1 g2 Cj2 ,

with Fourier coefficients Mj1 RTg1 h Mj2 RTg2 h, translated by Sg2 dj2 Sg1 dj1 . Therefore the ‘translation functions’ (Crowther & Blow, 1967) P T j1 g1 , j2 g2 s jFh j2 Mj1 RTg1 h h

1.3.4.4.8. Miscellaneous correlation functions

Mj2 RTg2 h exp 2ih s

Certain correlation functions can be useful to detect the presence of multiple copies of the same molecule (known or unknown) in the asymmetric unit of a crystal of unknown structure.

will have peaks at s Sg2 dj2 detection of these motifs.

92

Sg1 dj1 corresponding to the

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY 1.3.4.5. Related applications

called the Hankel transform (see e.g. Titchmarsh, 1922; Sneddon, 1972) of order n.

1.3.4.5.1. Helical diffraction The theory of diffraction by helical structures (Cochran et al., 1952; Klug et al., 1958) has played an important part in the study of polypeptides, of nucleic acids and of tobacco mosaic virus.

1.3.4.5.1.3. The transform of an axially periodic fibre Let be the electron-density distribution in a fibre, which is assumed to have translational periodicity with period 1 along z, and to have compact support with respect to the (x, y) coordinates. Thus may be written " # P x y

k 0 ,

1.3.4.5.1.1. Circular harmonic expansions in polar coordinates Let f f x, y be a reasonably regular function in twodimensional real space. Going over to polar coordinates

k2Z

x r cos ' y r sin ' and writing, by slight misuse of notation, f r, ' for f r cos ', r sin ' we may use the periodicity of f with respect to ' to expand it as a Fourier series (Byerly, 1893): P f r, ' fn r expin' n2Z

with

l2Z

Similarly, in reciprocal space, if F F, and if

FR,

P

with R1 F, , l F xy 0 , , z exp2ilz dz:

R sin

0

Changing to polar coordinates in the (x, y) and , planes decomposes the calculation of F from into the following steps:

i Fn R expin n

n2Z

1 R2R1 r, ', z expi n' 2lz d' dz 2 0 0 R1 Gnl R gnl rJn 2Rr2r dr

with Fn R

and hence consists of ‘layers’ labelled by l: P F F, , ll

1 R2 fn r f r, ' exp in' d': 2 0

then

0

l2Z

R cos

z

where x, y, z is the motif. By the tensor product property, the inverse Fourier transform F F xyz may be written " # P F 0 l F 1 1

0

gnl r

1 R2 FR, exp in d , 2in 0

0

where the phase factor in has been introduced for convenience in the forthcoming step.

FR, , l

P

in Gnl R expin

n2Z

and the calculation of from F into:

1.3.4.5.1.2. The Fourier transform in polar coordinates The Fourier transform relation between f and F may then be written in terms of fn ’s and Fn ’s. Observing that x y Rr cos' , and that (Watson, 1944) R2

1 R2 FR, , l exp in d 2in 0 R1 gnl r Gnl RJn 2rR2R dR

Gnl R

expiX cos in d 2in Jn X ,

0

0

r, ', z

we obtain: FR,

R1 R2 P 0 0

gnl r expin'

2lz:

n2Z l2Z

fn r expin'

These formulae are seen to involve a 2D Fourier series with respect to the two periodic coordinates ' and z, and Hankel transforms along the radial coordinates. The two periodicities in ' and z are independent, so that all combinations of indices (n, l) occur in the Fourier summations.

n2Z

exp2iRr cos' r dr d' " # P n R1 i fn rJn 2Rr2r dr expin ; n2Z

PP

0

1.3.4.5.1.4. Helical symmetry and associated selection rules Helical symmetry involves a ‘clutching’ between the two (hitherto independent) periodicities in ' (period 2) and z (period 1) which causes a subdivision of the period lattice and hence a decimation (governed by ‘selection rules’) of the Fourier coefficients. Let i and j be the basis vectors along '=2 and z. The integer lattice with basis (i, j) is a period lattice for the ', z dependence of the electron density of an axially periodic fibre considered in Section 1.3.4.5.1.3:

hence, by the uniqueness of the Fourier expansion of F: R1 Fn R fn rJn 2Rr2r dr: 0

The inverse Fourier relationship leads to R1 fn r Fn RJn 2rR2R dR: 0

The integral transform involved in the previous two equations is

93

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES r, ' 2k1 , z k2 r, ', z: Suppose the fibre now has helical symmetry, with u copies of the same molecule in t turns, where g.c.d. u, t 1. Using the Euclidean algorithm, write u t with and positive integers and < t. The period lattice for the ', z dependence of may be defined in terms of the new basis vectors: I, joining subunit 0 to subunit l in the same turn; J, joining subunit 0 to subunit after wrapping around. In terms of the original basis t 1 I i j, J i j: u u u u If and are coordinates along I and J, respectively, '=2 1 t 1 u z

properties which follow from the exchange between differentiation and multiplication by monomials. When the limit theorems are applied to the calculation of joint probability distributions of structure factors, which are themselves closely related to the Fourier transformation, a remarkable phenomenon occurs, which leads to the saddlepoint approximation and to the maximum-entropy method.

or equivalently

(a) Convolution of probability densities The addition of independent random variables or vectors leads to the convolution of their probability distributions: if X1 and X2 are two n-dimensional random vectors independently distributed with probability densities P1 and P2 , respectively, then their sum X X1 X2 has probability density P given by R P X P1 X1 P2 X X1 dn X1

1.3.4.5.2.1. Analytical methods of probability theory The material in this section is not intended as an introduction to probability theory [for which the reader is referred to Crame´r (1946), Petrov (1975) or Bhattacharya & Rao (1976)], but only as an illustration of the role played by the Fourier transformation in certain specific areas which are used in formulating and implementing direct methods of phase determination.

'=2 : 1 t z

By Fourier transformation, ' , z , n, l 2 , , m, p

Rn

with the transformations between indices given by the contragredients of those between coordinates, i.e. 1 m n t p l and

(b) Characteristic functions This convolution can be turned into a simple multiplication by considering the Fourier transforms (called the characteristic functions) of P1 , P2 and P , defined with a slightly different normalization in that there is no factor of 2 in the exponent (see Section 1.3.2.4.5), e.g. R Ct PX expit X dn X:

or alternatively that l,

which are two equivalent expressions of the selection rules describing the decimation of the transform. These rules imply that only certain orders n contribute to a given layer l. The 2D Fourier analysis may now be performed by analysing a single subunit referred to coordinates and to obtain

Rn

Then by the convolution theorem C t C1 t C2 t, so that P X may be evaluated by Fourier inversion of its characteristic function as Z 1 P X C1 tC2 t exp it X dn t 2n

r, , exp2im p d d

00

and then reindexing to get only the allowed gnl ’s by gnl r uh

X2 P2 X2 dn X2

This result can be extended to the case where P1 and P2 are singular measures (distributions of order zero, Section 1.3.2.3.4) and do not have a density with respect to the Lebesgue measure in Rn .

l tn um,

R1 R1

P1 X

P P 1 P2 :

It follows that

hm; p r

Rn

i.e.

1 m t 1 n : p l u

n up

R

Rn

mp; mtp r:

(see Section 1.3.2.4.5 for the normalization factors). It follows from the differentiation theorem that the partial derivatives of the characteristic function Ct at t 0 are related to the moments of a distribution P by the identities Z r1 r2 ...rn PXX1r1 X2r2 . . . Xnrn dn X

This is u times faster than analysing u subunits with respect to the ', z coordinates. 1.3.4.5.2. Application to probability theory and direct methods

D

The Fourier transformation plays a central role in the branch of probability theory concerned with the limiting behaviour of sums of large numbers of independent and identically distributed random variables or random vectors. This privileged role is a consequence of the convolution theorem and of the ‘moment-generating’

i

r1 ...rn

@ r1 ...rn C @t1r1 . . . @tnrn t0

for any n-tuple of non-negative integers r1 , r2 , . . . , rn .

94

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY numerical evaluation as the discrete Fourier transform of M N it. This exact method is practical only for small values of the dimension n. In all other cases some form of approximation must be used in the Fourier inversion of M N it. For this purpose it is customary (Crame´r, 1946) to expand the cumulant-generating function around t 0 with respect to the carrying variables t:

(c) Moment-generating functions The above relation can be freed from powers of i by defining (at least formally) the moment-generating function: R Mt PX expt X dn X Rn

which is related to Ct by Ct Mit so that the inversion formula reads Z 1 P X M1 itM2 it exp it X dn t: 2n

logM N it

X Nr r2N

n

r!

itr ,

Rn

where r r1 , r2 , . . . , rn is a multi-index (Section 1.3.2.2.3). The first-order terms may be eliminated by recentring P around its vector of first-order cumulants

The moment-generating function is well defined, in particular, for any probability distribution with compact support, in which case it may be continued analytically from a function over Rn into an entire function of n complex variables by virtue of the Paley–Wiener theorem (Section 1.3.2.4.2.10). Its moment-generating properties are summed up in the following relations: @ r1 ...rn M : r1 r2 ...rn r1 @t . . . @tnrn 1

hXi

where hi denotes the mathematical expectation of a random vector. The second-order terms may be grouped separately from the terms of third or higher order to give

t0

M N it exp

log M log M1 log M2 , exp

or equivalently of the coefficients of their Taylor series at t 0, viz: @ r1 ...rn log M : r1 r2 ...rn @t1r1 . . . @tnrn t0

exp

R

(e) Asymptotic expansions and limit theorems Consider an n-dimensional random vector X of the form X X1 X2 . . . XN , where the N summands are independent n-dimensional random vectors identically distributed with probability density P. Then the distribution P of X may be written in closed form as a Fourier transform: Z 1 P X M N it exp it X dn t 2n Rn Z 1 expN log Mit it X dn t, 2n

R

1 T 2N t Qt

itr , ;

monomial in t1 , t2 , . . . , tn ,

1 P E p exp det 2Q

1 1 T 2E Q E,

where E

X

hXi p : N

( f ) The saddlepoint approximation A limitation of the Edgeworth series is that it gives an accurate estimate of P X only in the vicinity of X hXi, i.e. for small values of E. These convergence difficulties are easily understood: one is substituting a local approximation to log M (viz a Taylorseries expansion valid near t 0) into an integral, whereas integration is a global process which consults values of log M far from t 0. It is possible, however, to let the point t where log M is expanded as a Taylor series depend on the particular value X of X for which an accurate evaluation of P X is desired. This is the essence of the saddlepoint method (Fowler, 1936; Khinchin 1949; Daniels, 1954; de Bruijn, 1970; Bleistein & Handelsman, 1986), which uses an analytical continuation of Mt from a function over Rn to a function over Cn (see Section 1.3.2.4.2.10). Putting then t s i, the Cn version of Cauchy’s theorem (Ho¨rmander, 1973) gives rise to the identity

Rn

n

:jrj3 r!

9 =

each of which may now be subjected to a Fourier transformation to yield a Hermite function of t (Section 1.3.2.4.4.2) with coefficients involving the cumulants of P. Taking the transformed terms in natural order gives an asymptotic expansion of P for large N called the Gram–Charlier series of P , while grouping the terms according p to increasing powers of 1= N gives another asymptotic expansion called the Edgeworth series of P . Both expansions comprise a leading Gaussian term which embodies the central-limit theorem:

n

R

1 U 2Nt Qt 8 < X N r

where Q rrT log M is the covariance matrix of the multivariate distribution P. Expanding the exponential gives rise to a series of terms of the form

These coefficients are called cumulants, since they add when the independent random vectors to which they belong are added, and log M is called the cumulant-generating function. The inversion formula for P then reads Z 1 P X explog M1 it log M2 it it X dn t: 2n

Mt

hXj i,

j1

(d) Cumulant-generating functions The multiplication of moment-generating functions may be further simplified into the addition of their logarithms:

where

N P

PY expt Y dn Y

is the moment-generating function common to all the summands. This an exact expression for P , which may be exploited analytically or numerically in certain favourable cases. Supposing for instance that P has compact support, then its characteristic function Mit can be sampled finely enough to accommodate the bandwidth of the support of P PN (this sampling rate clearly depends on n) so that the above expression for P can be used for its

95

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES P X

exp t X 2n Z exp N log Mt is Rn

is

X N

maximization of certain entropy criteria. This connection exhibits most of the properties of the Fourier transform at play simultaneously, and will now be described as a final illustration.

dn s

(a) Definitions and conventions Let H be a set of unique non-origin reflections h for a crystal with lattice and space group G. Let H contain na acentric and nc centric reflections. Structure-factor values attached to all reflections in H will comprise n 2na nc real numbers. For h acentric, h and h will be the real and imaginary parts of the complex structure factor; for h centric, h will be the real coordinate of the (possibly complex) structure factor measured along a real axis rotated by one of the two angles h , apart, to which the phase is restricted modulo 2 (Section 1.3.4.2.2.5). These n real coordinates will be arranged as a column vector containing the acentric then the centric data, i.e. in the order

for any t 2 Rn . By a convexity argument involving the positivedefiniteness of covariance matrix Q, there is a unique value of t such that X rlog Mjt0 it : N At the saddlepoint t 0 it, the modulus of the integrand above is a maximum and its phase is stationary with respect to the integration variable s: as N tends to infinity, all contributions to the integral cancel because of rapid oscillation, except those coming from the immediate vicinity of t where there is no oscillation. A Taylor expansion of log M N to second order with respect to s at t then gives N T log M N t is log M N t is X s Qs 2 and hence Z 1 N explog M t t X exp 12sT Qs dn s: P X 2n

1 , 1 , 2 , 2 , . . . , na , na , 1 , 2 , . . . , nc : (b) Vectors of trigonometric structure-factor expressions Let j x denote the vector of trigonometric structure-factor expressions associated with x 2 D, where D denotes the asymmetric unit. These are defined as follows: h x i h x h, x

h x exp ih h, x for h centric,

Rn

The last integral is elementary and gives the ‘saddlepoint approximation’:

where

expS P SP X p , det 2Q

h, x

1 X expf2ih Sg xg: jGx j g2G

According to the convention above, the coordinates of j x in Rn will be arranged in a column vector as follows:

where t X

S log M N t

for h acentric

j 2r 1 x hr x for r 1, . . . , na ,

and where

j 2r x hr x for r 1, . . . , na ,

Q rr log M NQ: This approximation scheme amounts to using the ‘conjugate distribution’ (Khinchin, 1949) T

Pt Xj PXj

N

j na r x hr x for r na 1, . . . , na nc :

expt Xj Mt

(c) Distributions of random atoms and moment-generating functions Let position x in D now become a random vector with probability density mx. Then j x becomes itself a random vector in Rn , whose distribution pj is the image of distribution mx through the mapping x ! j x just defined. The locus of j x in Rn is a compact algebraic manifold L (the multidimensional analogue of a Lissajous curve), so that p is a singular measure (a distribution of order 0, Section 1.3.2.3.4, concentrated on that manifold) with compact support. The average with respect to p of any function

over Rn which is infinitely differentiable in a neighbourhood of L may be calculated as an average with respect to m over D by the ‘induction formula’: R hp, i mx j x d3 x:

instead of the original distribution PXj P 0 Xj for the common distribution of all N random vectors Xj . The exponential modulation results from the analytic continuation of the characteristic (or moment-generating) function into Cn , as in Section 1.3.2.4.2.10. The saddlepoint approximation P SP is only the leading term of an asymptotic expansion (called the saddlepoint expansion) for P , which is actually the Edgeworth expansion associated with PN t . 1.3.4.5.2.2. The statistical theory of phase determination The methods of probability theory just surveyed were applied to various problems formally similar to the crystallographic phase problem [e.g. the ‘problem of the random walk’ of Pearson (1905)] by Rayleigh (1880, 1899, 1905, 1918, 1919) and Kluyver (1906). They became the basis of the statistical theory of communication with the classic papers of Rice (1944, 1945). The Gram–Charlier and Edgeworth series were introduced into crystallography by Bertaut (1955a,b,c, 1956a) and by Klug (1958), respectively, who showed them to constitute the mathematical basis of numerous formulae derived by Hauptman & Karle (1953). The saddlepoint approximation was introduced by Bricogne (1984) and was shown to be related to variational methods involving the

D

In particular, one can calculate the moment-generating function M for distribution p as R Mt hpj , expt j i mx expt j x d3 x D

and hence calculate the moments (respectively cumulants ) of p by differentiation of M (respectively log M) at t 0:

96

1.3. FOURIER TRANSFORMS IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHY

Z r1 r2 ...rn

the modified distribution of atoms

mxj r11 xj r22 x . . . j rnn x d3 x

qt x mx

D

r1 r2 ...rn

@ r1 ...rn M r1 @t1 . . . @tnrn @ r1 ...rn log M : @t1r1 . . . @tnrn

where, by the induction formula, Mt may be written as R Mt mx expt j x d3 x

rt log M N F :

SP3

The desired approximation is then expS P SP F p , det 2Q where S log M N t

t F

and where Q rrT log M N NQ:

j I ,

Finally, the elements of the Hessian matrix Q rrT log M are just the trigonometric second-order cumulants of distribution p, and hence can be calculated via structure-factor algebra from the Fourier coefficients of qt x. All the quantities involved in the expression for P SP F are therefore effectively computable from the initial data mx and F .

I1

where the N copies j I of random vector j are independent and have the same distribution pj . The joint probability distribution P F is then [Section 1.3.4.5.2.1(e)] Z 1 expN log Mit it X dn t: P X 2n

(e) Maximum-entropy distributions of atoms One of the main results in Bricogne (1984) is that the modified distribution qt x in (SP1) is the unique distribution which has maximum entropy S m q relative to mx, where Z qx 3 S m q qx log d x, mx

Rn

For low dimensionality n it is possible to carry out the Fourier transformation numerically after discretization, provided Mit is sampled sufficiently finely that no aliasing results from taking its Nth power (Barakat, 1974). This exact approach can also accommodate heterogeneity, and has been used first in the field of intensity statistics (Shmueli et al., 1984, 1985; Shmueli & Weiss, 1987, 1988), then in the study of the 1 and 2 relations in triclinic space groups (Shmueli & Weiss, 1985, 1986). Some of these applications are described in Chapter 2.1 of this volume. This method could be extended to the construction of any joint probability distribution (j.p.d.) in any space group by using the generic expression for the moment-generating function (m.g.f.) derived by Bricogne (1984). It is, however, limited to small values of n by the necessity to carry out n-dimensional FFTs on large arrays of sample values. The asymptotic expansions of Gram–Charlier and Edgeworth have good convergence properties only if Fh lies in the vicinity of hFh i N F mh for all h 2 H. Previous work on the j.p.d. of structure factors has used for mx a uniform distribution, so that hFi 0; as a result, the corresponding expansions are accurate only if all moduli jFh j are small, in which case the j.p.d. contains little phase information. The saddlepoint method [Section 1.3.4.5.2.1( f )] constitutes the method of choice for evaluating the joint probability P F of structure factors when some of the moduli in F are large. As shown previously, this approximation amounts to using the ‘conjugate distribution’ pt j pj

SP2

and where t is the unique solution of the saddlepoint equation:

(d) The joint probability distribution of structure factors In the random-atom model of an equal-atom structure, N atoms are placed randomly, independently of each other, in the asymmetric unit D of the crystal with probability density mx. For point atoms of unit weight, the vector F of structure-factor values for reflections h 2 H may be written F

SP1

D

The structure-factor algebra for group G (Section 1.3.4.2.2.9) then allows one to express products of j ’s as linear combinations of other j’s, and hence to express all moments and cumulants of distribution pj as linear combinations of real and imaginary parts of Fourier coefficients of the prior distribution of atoms mx. This plays a key role in the use of non-uniform distributions of atoms.

N P

expt j x , Mt

D

under the constraint that F be the centroid vector of the corresponding conjugate distribution P t F. The traditional notation of maximum-entropy (ME) theory (Jaynes, 1957, 1968, 1983) is in this case (Bricogne, 1984) expl j x qME x mx Zl R Zl mx expl j x d3 x

ME1 ME2

D

r log Z N F

ME3

so that Z is identical to the m.g.f. M, and the coordinates t of the saddlepoint are the Lagrange multipliers l for the constraints F . Jaynes’s ME theory also gives an estimate for P F : P ME F expS , where S log Z N

l F NS m qME

is the total entropy and is the counterpart to S under the equivalence just established. P ME is identical to P SP , but lacks the denominator. The latter, which is the normalization factor of a multivariate Gaussian with covariance matrix Q, may easily be seen to arise through Szego¨’s theorem (Sections 1.3.2.6.9.4, 1.3.4.2.1.10) from the extra logarithmic term in Stirling’s formula

expt j Mt

instead of the original distribution pj p0 j for the distribution of random vector j. This conjugate distribution pt is induced from

logq! q log q

97

q 12 log2q

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES distributions with compact support, and thus gives rise to conjugate families of distributions; (v) Bertaut’s structure-factor algebra (a discrete symmetrized version of the convolution theorem), which allows the calculation of all necessary moments and cumulants when the dimension n is small; (vi) Szego¨’s theorem, which provides an asymptotic approximation of the normalization factor when n is large. This multi-faceted application seems an appropriate point at which to end this description of the Fourier transformation and of its use in crystallography.

(see, for instance, Reif, 1965) beyond the first two terms which serve to define entropy, since Z 1 log 2qME x d3 x: log det 2Q n R3 =Z3

The relative effect of this extra normalization factor depends on the ratio n dimension of F over R : N number of atoms The above relation between entropy maximization and the saddlepoint approximation is the basis of a Bayesian statistical approach to the phase problem (Bricogne, 1988) where the assumptions under which joint distributions of structure factors are sought incorporate many new ingredients (such as molecular boundaries, isomorphous substitutions, known fragments, noncrystallographic symmetries, multiple crystal forms) besides trial phase choices for basis reflections. The ME criterion intervenes in the construction of qME x under these assumptions, and the distribution qME x is a very useful computational intermediate in obtaining the approximate joint probability P SP F and the associated conditional distributions and likelihood functions.

Acknowledgements Many aspects of the theory of discrete Fourier transform algorithms and of its extension to incorporate crystallographic symmetry have been the focus of a long-standing collaborative effort between Professor Louis Auslander, Professor Richard Tolimieri, their coworkers and the writer. I am most grateful to them for many years of mathematical stimulation and enjoyment, for introducing me to the ‘big picture’ of the discrete Fourier transform which they have elaborated over the past decade, and for letting me describe here some of their unpublished work. In particular, the crystallographic extensions of the Rader/Winograd algorithms presented in Section 1.3.4.3.4.3 were obtained by Richard Tolimieri, in a collaboration partially supported by NIH grant GM 32362 (to the writer). I am indebted to the Editor for many useful and constructive suggestions of possible improvements to the text, only a few of which I have been able to implement. I hope to incorporate many more of them in the future. I also wish to thank Dr D. Sayre for many useful comments on an early draft of the manuscript. This contribution was written during the tenure of a Visiting Fellowship at Trinity College, Cambridge, with partial financial support from Trinity College and the MRC Laboratory of Molecular Biology. I am most grateful to both institutions for providing ideal working conditions.

( f ) Role of the Fourier transformation The formal developments presented above make use of the following properties of the Fourier transformation: (i) the convolution theorem, which turns the convolution of probability distributions into the multiplication of their characteristic functions; (ii) the differentiation property, which confers moment-generating properties to characteristic functions; (iii) the reciprocity theorem, which allows the retrieval of a probability distribution from its characteristic or moment-generating function; (iv) the Paley–Wiener theorem, which allows the analytic continuation of characteristic functions associated to probability

98


1.4. Symmetry in reciprocal space BY U. SHMUELI WITH

APPENDIX 1.4.2

BY

U. SHMUELI, S. R. HALL AND R. W. GROSSE-KUNSTLEVE

including the set of symbols that were used in the preparation of the present tables.

1.4.1. Introduction Crystallographic symmetry, as reflected in functions on reciprocal space, can be considered from two complementary points of view. (1) One can assume the existence of a certain permissible symmetry of the density function of crystalline (scattering) matter, a function which due to its three-dimensional periodicity can be expanded in a triple Fourier series (e.g. Bragg, 1966), and inquire about the effects of this symmetry on the Fourier coefficients – the structure factors. Since there exists a one-to-one correspondence between the triplets of summation indices in the Fourier expansion and vectors in the reciprocal lattice (Ewald, 1921), the above approach leads to consequences of the symmetry of the density function which are relevant to the representation of its Fourier image in reciprocal space. The symmetry properties of these Fourier coefficients, which are closely related to the crystallographic experiment, can then be readily established. This traditional approach, the essentials of which are the basis of Sections 4.5–4.7 of Volume I (IT I, 1952), and which was further developed in the works of Buerger (1949, 1960), Waser (1955), Bertaut (1964) and Wells (1965), is one of the cornerstones of crystallographic practice and will be followed in the present chapter, as far as the basic principles are concerned. (2) The alternative approach, proposed by Bienenstock & Ewald (1962), also presumes a periodic density function in crystal space and its Fourier expansion associated with the reciprocal. However, the argument starts from the Fourier coefficients, taken as a discrete set of complex functions, and linear transformations are sought which leave the magnitudes of these functions unchanged; the variables on which these transformations operate are h, k, l and ' – the Fourier summation indices (i.e., components of a reciprocallattice vector) and the phase of the Fourier coefficient, respectively. These transformations, or the groups they constitute, are then interpreted in terms of the symmetry of the density function in direct space. This direct analysis of symmetry in reciprocal space will also be discussed. We start the next section with a brief discussion of the pointgroup symmetries of associated direct and reciprocal lattices. The weighted reciprocal lattice is then briefly introduced and the relation between the values of the weight function at symmetry-related points of the weighted reciprocal lattice is discussed in terms of the Fourier expansion of a periodic function in crystal space. The remaining part of Section 1.4.2 is devoted to the formulation of the Fourier series and its coefficients (values of the weight function) in terms of space-group-specific symmetry factors, an extensive tabulation of which is presented in Appendix 1.4.3. This is a revised version of the structure-factor tables given in Sections 4.5– 4.7 of Volume I (IT I, 1952). Appendix 1.4.4 contains a reciprocalspace representation of the 230 crystallographic space groups and some explanatory material related to these space-group tables is given in Section 1.4.4; the latter are interpreted in terms of the two viewpoints discussed above. The tabular material given in this chapter is compatible with the direct-space symmetry tables given in Volume A (IT A, 1983) with regard to the space-group settings and choices of the origin. Most of the tabular material, the new symmetry-factor tables in Appendix 1.4.3 and the space-group tables in Appendix 1.4.4 have been generated by computer with the aid of a combination of numeric and symbolic programming techniques. The algorithm underlying this procedure is briefly summarized in Appendix 1.4.1. Appendix 1.4.2 deals with computer-adapted space-group symbols,

1.4.2. Effects of symmetry on the Fourier image of the crystal 1.4.2.1. Point-group symmetry of the reciprocal lattice Regarding the reciprocal lattice as a collection of points generated from a given direct lattice, it is fairly easy to see that each of the two associated lattices must have the same point-group symmetry. The set of all the rotations that bring the direct lattice into self-coincidence can be thought of as interchanging equivalent families of lattice planes in all the permissible manners. A family of lattice planes in the direct lattice is characterized by a common normal and a certain interplanar distance, and these two characteristics uniquely define the direction and magnitude, respectively, of a vector in the reciprocal lattice, as well as the lattice line associated with this vector and passing through the origin. It follows that any symmetry operation on the direct lattice must also bring the reciprocal lattice into self-coincidence, i.e. it must also be a symmetry operation on the reciprocal lattice. The roles of direct and reciprocal lattices in the above argument can of course be interchanged without affecting the conclusion. The above elementary considerations recall that for any point group (not necessarily the full point group of a lattice), the operations which leave the lattice unchanged must also leave unchanged its associated reciprocal. This equivalence of pointgroup symmetries of the associated direct and reciprocal lattices is fundamental to crystallographic symmetry in reciprocal space, in both points of view mentioned in Section 1.4.1. With regard to the effect of any given point-group operation on each of the two associated lattices, we recall that: (i) If P is a point-group rotation operator acting on the direct lattice (e.g. by rotation through the angle about a given axis), the effect of this rotation on the associated reciprocal lattice is that of applying the inverse rotation operator, P 1 (i.e. rotation through about a direction parallel to the direct axis); this is readily found from the requirement that the scalar product hT rL , where h and rL are vectors in the reciprocal and direct lattices, respectively, remains invariant under the application of a point-group operation to the crystal. (ii) If our matrix representation of the rotation operator is such that the point-group operation is applied to the direct-lattice (column) vector by premultiplying it with the matrix P, the corresponding operation on the reciprocal lattice is applied by postmultiplying the (row) vector hT with the point-group rotation matrix. We can thus write, e.g., hT rL hT P 1 PrL P 1 T hT PrL . Note, however, that the orthogonality relationship: P 1 P T is not satisfied if P is referred to some oblique crystal systems, higher than the orthorhombic. Detailed descriptions of the 32 crystallographic point groups are presented in the crystallographic and other literature; their complete tabulation is given in Chapter 10 of Volume A (IT A, 1983). 1.4.2.2. Relationship between structure factors at symmetryrelated points of the reciprocal lattice Of main interest in the context of the present chapter are symmetry relationships that concern the values of a function defined at the points of the reciprocal lattice. Such functions, of crystal-


1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES lographic interest, are Fourier-transform representations of directspace functions that have the periodicity of the crystal, the structure factor as a Fourier transform of the electron-density function being a representative example (see e.g. Lipson & Taylor, 1958). The value of such a function, attached to a reciprocal-lattice point, is called the weight of this point and the set of all such weighted points is often termed the weighted reciprocal lattice. This section deals with a fundamental relationship between functions (weights) associated with reciprocal-lattice points, which are related by point-group symmetry, the weights here considered being the structure factors of Bragg reflections (cf. Chapter 1.2). The electron density, an example of a three-dimensional periodic function with the periodicity of the crystal, can be represented by the Fourier series 1X r Fh exp 2ihT r, 1:4:2:1 V h where h is a reciprocal-lattice vector, V is the volume of the (direct) unit cell, Fh is the structure factor at the point h and r is a position vector of a point in direct space, at which the density is given. The summation in (1.4.2.1) extends over all the reciprocal lattice. Let r0 Pr t be a space-group operation on the crystal, where P and t are its rotation and translation parts, respectively, and P must therefore be a point-group operator. We then have, by definition, r Pr t and the Fourier representation of the electron density, at the equivalent position Pr t, is given by 1X Fh exp 2ihT Pr t Pr t V h 1X Fh exp 2ihT t V h exp 2iP T hT r,

1:4:2:2

noting that hT P P T hT . Since P is a point-group operator, the vectors PT h in (1.4.2.2) must range over all the reciprocal lattice and a comparison of the functional forms of the equivalent expansions (1.4.2.1) and (1.4.2.2) shows that the coefficients of the exponentials exp 2iP T hT r in (1.4.2.2) must be the structure factors at the points P T h in the reciprocal lattice. Thus FP T h Fh exp 2ihT t,

1:4:2:3

wherefrom it follows that the magnitudes of the structure factors at h and P T h are the same:

According to equation (1.4.2.5), the phases of the structure factors of symmetry-related reflections differ, in the general case, by a phase shift that depends on the translation part of the spacegroup operation involved. Only when the space group is symmorphic, i.e. it contains no translations other than those of the Bravais lattice, will the distribution of the phases obey the pointgroup symmetry of the crystal. These phase shifts are considered in detail in Section 1.4.4 where their tabulation is presented and the alternative interpretation (Bienenstock & Ewald, 1962) of symmetry in reciprocal space, mentioned in Section 1.4.1, is given. Equation (1.4.2.3) can be usefully applied to a classification of all the general systematic absences or – as defined in the space-group tables in the main editions of IT (1935, 1952, 1983, 1987, 1992) – general conditions for possible reflections. These systematic absences are associated with special positions in the reciprocal lattice – special with respect to the point-group operations P appearing in the relevant relationships. If, in a given relationship, we have P T h h, equation (1.4.2.3) reduces to Fh Fh exp 2ihT t:

1:4:2:6

Of course, Fh may then be nonzero only if cos2hT t equals unity, or the scalar product hT t is an integer. This well known result leads to a ready determination of lattice absences, as well as those produced by screw-axis and glide-plane translations, and is routinely employed in crystallographic computing. An exhaustive classification of the general conditions for possible reflections is given in the space-group tables (IT, 1952, 1983). It should be noted that since the axes of rotation and planes of reflection in the reciprocal lattice are parallel to the corresponding elements in the direct lattice (Buerger, 1960), the component of t that depends on the location of the corresponding space-group symmetry element in direct space does not contribute to the scalar product hT t in (1.4.2.6), and it is only the intrinsic part of the translation t (IT A, 1983) that usually matters. It may, however, be of interest to note that some screw axes in direct space cannot give rise to any systematic absences. For example, the general Wyckoff position No. (10) in the space group Pa3 (No. 205) (IT A, 1983) has the coordinates y, 12 z, 12 x, and corresponds to the space-group operation 1 0 1 0 13 20 1 1 0 1 0 3 3 P, t P, ti tl 4@ 0 0 1 A, @ 13 A @ 16 A5, 1 1 1 0 0 3 6

1:4:2:4

1:4:2:7

1:4:2:5 'P h 'h 2h t: The relationship (1.4.2.3) between structure factors of symmetryrelated reflections was first derived by Waser (1955), starting from a representation of the structure factor as a Fourier transform of the electron-density function. It follows that an application of a point-group transformation to the (weighted) reciprocal lattice leaves the moduli of the structure factors unchanged. The distribution of diffracted intensities obeys, in fact, the same point-group symmetry as that of the crystal. If, however, anomalous dispersion is negligibly small, and the point group of the crystal is noncentrosymmetric, the apparent symmetry of the diffraction pattern will also contain a false centre of symmetry and, of course, all the additional elements generated by the inclusion of this centre. Under these circumstances, the diffraction pattern from a single crystal may belong to one of the eleven centrosymmetric point groups, known as Laue groups (IT I, 1952).

where ti and tl are the intrinsic and location-dependent components of the translation part t, and are parallel and perpendicular, respectively, to the threefold axis of rotation represented by the matrix P in (1.4.2.7) (IT A, 1983; Shmueli, 1984). This is clearly a threefold screw axis, parallel to 111. The reciprocal-lattice vectors which remain unchanged, when postmultiplied by P (or premultiplied by its transpose), have the form: hT hhh; this is the special position for the present example. We see that (i) hT tl 0, as expected, and (ii) hT ti h. Since the scalar product hT t is an integer, there are no values of index h for which the structure factor Fhhh must be absent. Other approaches to systematically absent reflections include a direct inspection of the structure-factor equation (Lipson & Cochran, 1966), which is of considerable didactical value, and the utilization of transformation properties of direct and reciprocal base vectors and lattice-point coordinates (Buerger, 1942). Finally, the relationship between the phases of symmetry-related reflections, given by (1.4.2.5), is of fundamental as well as practical importance in the theories and techniques of crystal structure

jFPT hj jFhj, and their phases are related by T

T

100

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE determination which operate in reciprocal space (Part 2 of this volume). 1.4.2.3. Symmetry factors for space-group-specific Fourier summations The weighted reciprocal lattice, with weights taken as the structure factors, is synonymous with the discrete space of the coefficients of a Fourier expansion of the electron density, or the Fourier space (F space) of the latter. Accordingly, the asymmetric unit of the Fourier space can be defined as the subset of structure factors within which the relationship (1.4.2.3) does not hold – except at special positions in the reciprocal lattice. If the point group of the crystal is of order g, this is also the order of the corresponding factor-group representation of the space group (IT A, 1983) and there exist g relationships of the form of (1.4.2.3): FP Ts h Fh exp 2ihT ts :

1:4:2:8

We can thus decompose the summation in (1.4.2.1) into g sums, each extending over an asymmetric unit of the F space. It must be kept in mind, however, that some classes of reciprocal-lattice vectors may be common to more than one asymmetric unit, and thus each reciprocal-lattice point will be assigned an occupancy factor, denoted by qh, such that qh 1 for a general position and qh 1=mh for a special one, where mh is the multiplicity – or the order of the point group that leaves h unchanged. Equation (1.4.2.1) can now be rewritten as g 1 XX r qha FPTs ha exp 2iPTs ha T r, 1:4:2:9 V s1 ha where the inner summation in (1.4.2.9) extends over the reference asymmetric unit of the Fourier space, which is associated with the identity operation of the space group. Substituting from (1.4.2.8) for FP Ts ha , and interchanging the order of the summations in (1.4.2.9), we obtain g X 1X qha Fha exp 2ihTs Ps r ts 1:4:2:10 r V ha s1 1X qha Fha Aha iBha , 1:4:2:11 V ha where Ah

g P

cos2hT P s r ts

1:4:2:12

metric case, when the space-group origin is chosen at a centre of symmetry, and in the noncentrosymmetric case, when dispersion is neglected. In each of the latter two cases the summation over ha is restricted to reciprocal-lattice vectors that are not related by real or apparent inversion (denoted by ha > 0), and we obtain 2X r qha Fha Aha 1:4:2:14 V h >0 a

and r

2X qha jFha jAha cos 'ha V h >0 a

Bha sin 'ha

for the dispersionless centrosymmetric and noncentrosymmetric cases, respectively. 1.4.2.4. Symmetry factors for space-group-specific structurefactor formulae The explicit dependence of structure-factor summations on the space-group symmetry of the crystal can also be expressed in terms of symmetry factors, in an analogous manner to that described for the electron density in the previous section. It must be pointed out that while the above treatment only presumes that the electron density can be represented by a three-dimensional Fourier series, the present one is restricted by the assumption that the atoms are isotropic with regard to their motion and shape (cf. Chapter 1.2). Under the above assumptions, i.e. for isotropically vibrating spherical atoms, the structure factor can be written as

P j

sin2hT Ps r ts :

1:4:2:13

The symmetry factors A and B are well known as geometric or trigonometric structure factors and a considerable part of Volume I of IT (1952) is dedicated to their tabulation. Their formal association with the structure factor – following from direct-space arguments – is closely related to that shown in equation (1.4.2.11) (see Section 1.4.2.4). Simplified trigonometric expressions for A and B are given in Tables A1.4.3.1–A1.4.3.7 in Appendix 1.4.3 for all the two- and three-dimensional crystallographic space groups, and for all the parities of hkl for which A and B assume different functional forms. These expressions are there given for general reflections and can also be used for special ones, provided the occupancy factors qh have been properly accounted for. Equation (1.4.2.11) is quite general and can, of course, be applied to noncentrosymmetric Fourier summations, without neglect of dispersion. Further simplifications are obtained in the centrosym-

1:4:2:16

where hT hkl is the diffraction vector, N is the number of atoms in the unit cell, fj is the atomic scattering factor including its temperature factor and depending on the magnitude of h only, and rj is the position vector of the jth atom referred to the origin of the unit cell. If the crystal belongs to a point group of order mp and the multiplicity of its Bravais lattice is mL , there are g0 mp mL general equivalent positions in the unit cell of the space group (IT A, 1983). We can thus rewrite (1.4.2.16), grouping the contributions of the symmetry-related atoms, as Fh

s1

fj exp2ihT rj ,

j1

and g P

N P

Fh

s1

Bh

1:4:2:15

0

fj

g P

exp2ihT P s r ts ,

1:4:2:17

s1

where P s and ts are the rotation and translation parts of the sth space-group operation respectively. The inner summation in (1.4.2.17) contains the dependence of the structure factor of reflection h on the space-group symmetry of the crystal and is known as the (complex) geometric or trigonometric structure factor. Equation (1.4.2.17) can be rewritten as P Fh fj Aj h iBj h, 1:4:2:18 j

where 0

Aj h

g P

cos2hT P s rj ts

1:4:2:19

sin2hT P s rj ts

1:4:2:20

s1

and

101

0

Bj h

g P s1

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES are the real and imaginary parts of the trigonometric structure factor. Equations (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) are mathematically identical to equations (1.4.2.11) and (1.4.2.12), respectively, apart from the numerical coefficients which appear in the expressions for A and B, for space groups with centred lattices: while only the order of the point group need be considered in connection with the Fourier expansion of the electron density (see above), the multiplicity of the Bravais lattice must of course appear in (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20). Analogous functional forms are arrived at by considerations of symmetry in direct and reciprocal spaces. These quantities are therefore convenient representations of crystallographic symmetry in its interaction with the diffraction experiment and have been indispensable in all of the early crystallographic computing related to structure determination. Their applications to modern crystallographic computing have been largely superseded by fast Fourier techniques, in reciprocal space, and by direct use of matrix and vector representations of space-group operators, in direct space, especially in cases of low space-group symmetry. It should be noted, however, that the degree of simplification of the trigonometric structure factors generally increases with increasing symmetry (see, e.g., Section 1.4.3), and the gain of computing efficiency becomes significant when problems involving high symmetries are treated with this ‘old-fashioned’ tool. Analytic expressions for the trigonometric structure factors are of course indispensable in studies in which the knowledge of the functional form of the structure factor is required [e.g. in theories of structurefactor statistics and direct methods of phase determination (see Chapters 2.1 and 2.2)]. Equations (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) are simple but their expansion and simplification for all the space groups and relevant hkl subsets can be an extremely tedious undertaking when carried out in the conventional manner. As shown below, this process has been automated by a suitable combination of symbolic and numeric high-level programming procedures. 1.4.3. Structure-factor tables 1.4.3.1. Some general remarks This section is a revised version of the structure-factor tables contained in Sections 4.5 through 4.7 of Volume I (IT I, 1952). As in the previous edition, it is intended to present a comprehensive list of explicit expressions for the real and the imaginary parts of the trigonometric structure factor, for all the 17 plane groups and the 230 space groups, and for the hkl subsets for which the trigonometric structure factor assumes different functional forms. The tables given here are also confined to the case of general Wyckoff positions (IT I, 1952). However, the expressions are presented in a much more concise symbolic form and are amenable to computation just like the explicit trigonometric expressions in Volume I (IT I, 1952). The present tabulation is based on equations (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20), i.e. the numerical coefficients in A and B which appear in Tables A1.4.3.1–A1.4.3.7 in Appendix 1.4.3 are appropriate to space-group-specific structure-factor formulae. The functional form of A and B is, however, the same when applied to Fourier summations (see Section 1.4.2.3). 1.4.3.2. Preparation of the structure-factor tables The lists of the coordinates of the general equivalent positions, presented in IT A (1983), as well as in earlier editions of the Tables, are sufficient for the expansion of the summations in (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) and the simplification of the resulting expressions can be performed using straightforward algebra and trigonometry (see, e.g., IT I, 1952). As mentioned above, the preparation of the present structure-factor tables has been automated and its stages can be summarized as follows:

(i) Generation of the coordinates of the general positions, starting from a computer-adapted space-group symbol (Shmueli, 1984). (ii) Formation of the scalar products, appearing in (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20), and their separation into components depending on the rotation and translation parts of the space-group operations: hT P s , ts r hT P s r hT ts

1:4:3:1

for the space groups which are not associated with a unique axis; the left-hand side of (1.4.3.1) is separated into contributions of the relevant plane group and unique axis for the remaining space groups. (iii) Analysis of the translation-dependent parts of the scalar products and automatic determination of all the parities of hkl for which A and B must be computed and simplified. (iv) Expansion of equations (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) and their reduction to trigonometric expressions comparable to those given in the structure-factor tables in Volume I of IT (1952). (v) Representation of the results in terms of a small number of building blocks, of which the expressions were found to be composed. These representations are described in Section 1.4.3.3. All the stages outlined above were carried out with suitably designed computer programs, written in numerically and symbolically oriented languages. A brief summary of the underlying algorithms is presented in Appendix 1.4.1. The computer-adapted space-group symbols used in these computations are described in Section A1.4.2.2 and presented in Table A1.4.2.1. 1.4.3.3. Symbolic representation of A and B We shall first discuss the symbols for the space groups that are not associated with a unique axis. These comprise the triclinic, orthorhombic and cubic space groups. The symbols are also used for the seven rhombohedral space groups which are referred to rhombohedral axes (IT I, 1952; IT A, 1983). The abbreviation of triple products of trigonometric functions such as, e.g., denoting cos2hx sin2ky cos2lz by csc, is well known (IT I, 1952), and can be conveniently used in representing A and B for triclinic and orthorhombic space groups. However, the simplified expressions for A and B in space groups of higher symmetry also possess a high degree of regularity, as is apparent from an examination of the structure-factor tables in Volume I (IT I, 1952), and as confirmed by the preparation of the present tables. An example, illustrating this for the cubic system, is given below. The trigonometric structure factor for the space group Pm3 (No. 200) is given by A 8cos2hx cos2ky cos2lz cos2hy cos2kz cos2lx cos2hz cos2kx cos2ly,

1:4:3:2

and the sum of the above nine-function block and the following one: 8cos2hx cos2kz cos2ly cos2hz cos2ky cos2lx cos2hy cos2kx cos2lz

1:4:3:3

is the trigonometric structure factor for the space group Pm3m (No. 221, IT I, 1952, IT A, 1983). It is obvious that the only difference between the nine-function blocks in (1.4.3.2) and (1.4.3.3) is that the permutation of the coordinates xyz is cyclic or even in (1.4.3.2), while it is non-cyclic or odd in (1.4.3.3). It was observed during the generation of the present tables that the expressions for A and B for all the cubic space groups, and all the relevant hkl subsets, can be represented in terms of such ‘even’ and ‘odd’ nine-function blocks. Moreover, it was found that the order of the trigonometric functions in each such block remains the same in

102

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE each of its three terms (triple products). This is not surprising since each of the above space groups contains threefold axes of rotation along [111] and related directions, and such permutations of xyz for fixed hkl (or vice versa) are expected. It was therefore possible to introduce two permutation operators and represent A and B in terms of the following two basic blocks:

expressions must be given we make use of the convention of replacing cos2u by cu and sin2u by su. For example, cos2hy kx etc. is given as chy kx etc. The symbols are defined below. Monoclinic space groups (Table A1.4.3.3) The following symbols are used in this system:

Epqr p2hxq2kyr2lz p2hyq2kzr2lx p2hzq2kxr2ly

1:4:3:4

and Opqr p2hxq2kzr2ly p2hzq2kyr2lx p2hyq2kxr2lz, 1:4:3:5 where each of p, q and r can be a sine or a cosine, and appears at the same position in each of the three terms of a block. The capital prefixes E and O were chosen to represent even and odd permutations of the coordinates xyz, respectively. For example, the trigonometric structure factor for the space group Pa3 (No. 205, IT I, 1952, IT A, 1983) can now be tabulated as follows: A 8Eccc 8Ecss 8Escs 8Essc

B 0 0 0 0

hk even even odd odd

kl even odd even odd

hl even odd odd even

chl cos2hx lz,

chk cos2hx ky

shl sin2hx lz,

shk sin2hx ky

1:4:3:7

so that any expression for A or B in the monoclinic system has the form Kphlqky or Kphkqlz for the second or first setting, respectively, where p and q can each be a sine or a cosine and K is a numerical constant. Tetragonal space groups (Table A1.4.3.5) The most frequently occurring expressions in the summations for A and B in this system are of the form P(pq) p2hxq2ky p2kxq2hy

1:4:3:8

and M(pq) p2hxq2ky

p2kxq2hy,

1:4:3:9

where p and q can each be a sine or a cosine. These are typical contributions related to square plane groups. Trigonal and hexagonal space groups (Table A1.4.3.6) The contributions of plane hexagonal space groups to the first term in (1.4.3.6) are

(cf. Table A1.4.3.7), where the sines and cosines are abbreviated by s and c, respectively. It is interesting to note that the only maximal non-isomorphic subgroup of Pa3, not containing a threefold axis, is the orthorhombic Pbca (see IT A, 1983, p. 621), and this group– subgroup relationship is reflected in the functional forms of the trigonometric structure factors; the representation of A and B for Pbca is in fact analogous to that of Pa3, including the parities of hkl and the corresponding forms of the triple products, except that the prefix E – associated with the threefold rotation – is absent from Pbca. The expression for A for the space group Pm3m [the sum of (1.4.3.2) and (1.4.3.3)] now simply reads: A 8Eccc Occc. As pointed out above, the permutation operators also apply to rhombohedral space groups that are referred to rhombohedral axes (Table A1.4.3.6), and the corresponding expressions for R3 and R 3 bear the same relationship to those for P1 and P1 (Table A1.4.3.2), respectively, as that shown above for the related Pa3 and Pbca. When in any given standard space-group setting one of the coordinate axes is parallel to a unique axis, the point-group rotation matrices can be partitioned into 2 2 and 1 1 diagonal blocks, the former corresponding to an operation of the plane group resulting from the projection of the space group down the unique axis. If, for example, the unique axis is parallel to c, we can decompose the scalar product in (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) as follows: x t1 P11 P12 T h P s r ts h k y P21 P22 t2 lP33 z t3 , 1:4:3:6 where the first scalar product on the right-hand side of (1.4.3.6) contains the contribution of a plane group and the second product is the contribution of the unique axis itself. The above decomposition often leads to a convenient factorization of A and B, and is applicable to monoclinic, tetragonal and hexagonal families, the latter including rhombohedral space groups that are referred to hexagonal axes. The symbols used in Tables A1.4.3.3, A1.4.3.5 and A1.4.3.6 are based on such decompositions. In those few cases where explicit

p1 hx ky,

p2 kx iy,

p3 ix hy,

q1 kx hy,

q2 hx iy,

q3 ix ky,

1:4:3:10

where i h k (IT I, 1952). The symbols which represent the frequently occurring expressions in this family, and given in terms of (1.4.3.10), are Chki cos2p1 cos2p2 cos2p3 Ckhi cos2q1 cos2q2 cos2q3 Shki sin2p1 sin2p2 sin2p3 Skhi sin2q1 sin2q2 sin2q3

1:4:3:11

and these quite often appear as the following sums and differences: PH(cc) Chki Ckhi, MH(cc) Chki

Ckhi,

PH(ss) Shki Skhi MH(ss) Shki

Skhi: 1:4:3:12

The symbols defined in this section are briefly redefined in the appropriate tables, which also contain the conditions for vanishing symbols. 1.4.3.4. Arrangement of the tables The expressions for A and B are usually presented in terms of the short symbols defined above for all the representations of the plane groups and space groups given in Volume A (IT A, 1983), and are fully consistent with the unit-cell choices and space-group origins employed in that volume. The tables are arranged by crystal families and the expressions appear in the order of the appearance of the corresponding plane and space groups in the space-group tables in IT A (1983). The main items in a table entry, not necessarily in the following order, are: (i) the conventional space-group number, (ii) the short Hermann–Mauguin space-group symbol, (iii) brief remarks on the choice of the space-group origin and setting, where appropriate, (iv) the real (A) and imaginary (B) parts of the trigonometric structure factor, and (v) the parity of the hkl subset to which the expressions

103

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES for A and B pertain. Full space-group symbols are given in the monoclinic system only, since they are indispensable for the recognition of the settings and glide planes appearing in the various representations of monoclinic space groups given in IT A (1983). 1.4.4. Symmetry in reciprocal space: space-group tables

pn qn rn =m denotes

2hpn kqn lrn =m,

1:4:4:2

where the fractions pn =m, qn =m and rn =m are the components of the translation part tn of the nth space-group operation. The phase-shift part of an entry is given only if pn qn rn is not a vector in the direct lattice, since such a vector would give rise to a trivial phase shift (an integer multiple of 2).

1.4.4.1. Introduction The purpose of this section, and the accompanying table, is to provide a representation of the 230 three-dimensional crystallographic space groups in terms of two fundamental quantities that characterize a weighted reciprocal lattice: (i) coordinates of pointsymmetry-related points in the reciprocal lattice, and (ii) phase shifts of the weight functions that are associated with the translation parts of the various space-group operations. Table A1.4.4.1 in Appendix 1.4.4 collects the above information for all the spacegroup settings which are listed in IT A (1983) for the same choice of the space-group origins and following the same numbering scheme used in that volume. Table A1.4.4.1 was generated by computer using the space-group algorithm described by Shmueli (1984) and the space-group symbols given in Table A1.4.2.1 in Appendix 1.4.2. It is shown in a later part of this section that Table A1.4.4.1 can also be regarded as a table of symmetry groups in Fourier space, in the Bienenstock–Ewald (1962) sense which was mentioned in Section 1.4.1. The section is concluded with a brief description of the correspondence between Bravais-lattice types in direct and reciprocal spaces. 1.4.4.2. Arrangement of the space-group tables Table A1.4.4.1 is subdivided into point-group sections and space-group subsections, as outlined below. (i) The point-group heading. This heading contains a short Hermann–Mauguin symbol of a point group, the crystal system and the symbol of the Laue group with which the point group is associated. Each point-group heading is followed by the set of space groups which are isomorphic to the point group indicated, the set being enclosed within a box. (ii) The space-group heading. This heading contains, for each space group listed in Volume A (IT A, 1983), the short Hermann– Mauguin symbol of the space group, its conventional space-group number and (in parentheses) the serial number of its representation in Volume A; this is also the serial number of the explicit spacegroup symbol in Table A1.4.2.1 from which the entry was derived. Additional items are full space-group symbols, given only for the monoclinic space groups in their settings that are given in Volume A (IT, 1983), and self-explanatory comments as required. (iii) The table entry. In the context of the analysis in Section 1.4.2.2, the format of a table entry is: hT P n : hT tn , where Pn , tn is the nth space-group operator, and the phase shift hT tn is expressed in units of 2 [see equations (1.4.2.3) and (1.4.2.5)]. More explicitly, the general format of a table entry is n hn kn ln : pn qn rn =m:

1:4:4:1

In (1.4.4.1), n is the serial number of the space-group operation to which this entry pertains and is the same as the number of the general Wyckoff position generated by this operation and given in IT A (1983) for the space group appearing in the space-group heading. The first part of an entry, hn kn ln :, contains the coordinates of the reciprocal-lattice vector that was generated from the reference vector (hkl) by the rotation part of the nth space-group operation. These rotation parts of the table entries, for a given space group, thus constitute the set of reciprocal-lattice points that are generated by the corresponding point group (not Laue group). The second part of an entry is an abbreviation of the phase shift which is associated with the nth operation and thus

1.4.4.3. Effect of direct-space transformations The phase shifts given in Table A1.4.4.1 depend on the translation parts of the space-group operations and these translations are determined, all or in part, by the choice of the space-group origin. It is a fairly easy matter to find the phase shifts that correspond to a given shift of the space-group origin in direct space, directly from Table A1.4.4.1. Moreover, it is also possible to modify the table entries so that a more general transformation, including a change of crystal axes as well as a shift of the spacegroup origin, can be directly accounted for. We employ here the frequently used concise notation due to Seitz (1935) (see also IT A, 1983). Let the direct-space transformation be given by rnew Trold v,

1:4:4:3

where T is a non-singular 3 3 matrix describing the change of the coordinate system and v is an origin-shift vector. The components of T and v are referred to the old system, and rnew rold is the position vector of a point in the crystal, referred to the new (old) system, respectively. If we denote a space-group operation referred to the new and old systems by P new , tnew and P old , told , respectively, we have Pnew , tnew T, vPold , told T, v TP old T , v 1

1

1:4:4:4

TP old T v Ttold : 1

1:4:4:5

It follows from (1.4.4.2) and (1.4.4.5) that if the old entry of Table A1.4.4.1 is given by n hT P : hT t, the transformed entry becomes n hT TPT

1

: hT TPT 1 v

hT v

hT Tt,

1:4:4:6

and in the important special cases of a pure change of setting v 0 or a pure shift of the space-group origin (T is the unit matrix I), (1.4.4.6) reduces to n hT TPT

1

: hT Tt

1:4:4:7

hT v

1:4:4:8

or n hT P : hT Pv

hT t,

respectively. The rotation matrices P are readily obtained by visual or programmed inspection of the old entries: if, for example, hT P is khl, we must have P21 1, P12 1 and P33 1, the remaining Pij ’s being equal to zero. Similarly, if hT P is kil, where i h k, we have 0 1 0 1 0 kil k, h k, l hkl@ 1 1 0 A: 0 0 1 The rotation matrices can also be obtained by reference to Chapter 7 and Tables 11.2 and 11.3 in Volume A (IT A, 1983). As an example, consider the phase shifts corresponding to the operation No. (16) of the space group P4=nmm (No. 129) in its two origins given in Volume A (IT A, 1983). For an Origin 2-to-Origin 1 transformation we find there v 14 , 14 , 0 and the old Origin 2

104

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE entry in Table A1.4.4.1 is (16) khl (t is zero). The appropriate entry for the Origin 1 description of this operation should therefore be hT Pv hT v k=4 h=4 h=4 k=4 h=2 k=2, as given by (1.4.4.8), or h k=2 if a trivial shift of 2 is subtracted. The (new) Origin 1 entry thus becomes: (16) khl: 110=2, as listed in Table A1.4.4.1.

1.4.4.4. Symmetry in Fourier space As shown below, Table A1.4.4.1 can also be regarded as a collection of the general equivalent positions of the symmetry groups of Fourier space, in the sense of the treatment by Bienenstock & Ewald (1962). This interpretation of the table is, however, restricted to the underlying periodic function being real and positive (see the latter reference). The symmetry formalism can be treated with the aid of the original 4 4 matrix notation, but it appears that a concise Seitz-type notation suits better the present introductory interpretation. The symmetry dependence of the fundamental relationship (1.4.2.5) 'hT Pn 'h

aT : bR, r aT R : aT r b,

1:4:4:9

where R is a 3 3 matrix, aT is a row vector, r is a column vector and b is a scalar, we can write the general form of a table entry as t hT P : hT t ,

1:4:4:10

where is a constant phase shift which we take as zero. The positions hT : 0 and hT P : hT t are now related by the operation P, t via the combination law (1.4.4.9), which is a shorthand transcription of the 4 4 matrix notation of Bienenstock & Ewald (1962), with the appropriate sign of t. Let us evaluate the result of a successive application of two such operators, say P, t and Q, v to the reference position hT : 0 in Fourier space: hT : 0P,

v hT : 0PQ,

tQ,

Pv

h PQ : h Pv T

hT : 0m,

T

t T

h t,

1:4:4:11

u2 hT : 0I,

mu

u

h : h m Iu T

T

hkl : 2hu lw, where

2hT tn

is given by a table entry of the form: n hT P : hT t, where the phase shift is given in units of 2, and the structure-dependent phase 'h is omitted. Defining a combination law analogous to Seitz’s product of two operators of affine transformation:

hT : P,

F is the structure factor [cf. equation (1.4.2.4)]. In order to make use of the second requirement in deriving permissible symmetry operators on Fourier space, all the relevant transformations, i.e. those which have rotation operators of the orders 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6, must be individually examined. A comprehensive example, covering most of the tetragonal system, can be found in Bienenstock & Ewald (1962). It is of interest to illustrate the above process for a simple particular instance. Consider an operation, the rotation part of which involves a mirror plane, and assume that it is associated with the monoclinic system, in the second setting (unique axis b). We denote the operator by m, u, where uT uvw, and the permissible values of u, v and w are to be determined. The operation is of order 2, and according to requirement (ii) above we have to evaluate

0

1 m @0 0

1:4:4:13

1 0 0 1 0 A 0 1

is the matrix representing the operation of reflection and I is the unit matrix. For m, u to be an admissible symmetry operator, the phase-shift part of (1.4.4.13), i.e. 2hu lw, must be an integer (multiple of 2). The smallest non-negative values of u and w which satisfy this are the pairs: u w 0, u 12 and w 0, u 0 and w 12, and u w 12. We have thus obtained four symmetry operators in Fourier space, which are identical (except for the sign of their translational parts) to those of the direct-space monoclinic mirror and glide-plane operations. The fact that the component v cancels out simply means that an arbitrary component of the phase shift can be added along the b axis; this is concurrent with arbitrary direct-space translations that appear in the characterization of individual types of space-group operations [see e.g. Koch & Fischer (1983)]. Each of the 230 space groups, which leaves invariant a (real and non-negative) function with the periodicity of the crystal, thus has its counterpart which determines the symmetry of the Fourier expansion coefficients of this function, with equivalent positions given in Table A1.4.4.1.

and perform an inverse operation: hT P : hT tP,

t

1

hT P : hT tP 1 , P 1 t hT PP

1

hT : 0:

: hT PP 1 t

1.4.4.5. Relationships between direct and reciprocal Bravais lattices

hT t 1:4:4:12

These equations confirm the validity of the shorthand notation (1.4.4.9) and illustrate the group nature of the operators P, t in the present context. Following Bienenstock & Ewald, the operators P, t are symmetry operators that act on the positions hT : 0 in Fourier space, provided they satisfy the following requirements: (i) the application of such an operator leaves the magnitude of the (generally) complex Fourier coefficient unchanged, and (ii) after g successive applications of an operator, where g is the order of its rotation part, the phase remains unchanged up to a shift by an integer multiple of 2 (a trivial phase shift, corresponding to a translation by a lattice vector in direct space). If our function is the electron density in the crystal, the first requirement is obviously satisfied since jFhj jFhT Pj, where

Centred Bravais lattices in crystal space give rise to systematic absences of certain classes of reflections (IT I, 1952; IT A, 1983) and the corresponding points in the reciprocal lattice have accordingly zero weights. These absences are periodic in reciprocal space and their ‘removal’ from the reciprocal lattice results in a lattice which – like the direct one – must belong to one of the fourteen Bravais lattice types. This must be so since the point group of a crystal leaves its lattice – and also the associated reciprocal lattice – unchanged. The magnitudes of the structure factors (the weight functions) are also invariant under the operation of this point group. The correspondence between the types of centring in direct and reciprocal lattices is given in Table 1.4.4.1. Notes: (i) The vectors a , b and c , appearing in the definition of the multiple unit cell in the reciprocal lattice, define this lattice prior to

105

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table 1.4.4.1. Correspondence between types of centring in direct and reciprocal lattices Direct lattice

Reciprocal lattice

Lattice type(s)

Centring translations

Lattice type(s)

P, R A B C I

0, 12, 12 1 1 2, 0, 2 1 1 2, 2, 0 1 1 1 2, 2, 2

P, R A B C F

F

0, 12, 12 1 1 2, 0, 2 1 1 2, 2, 0

I

R hex

2 3, 1 3,

R hex

1 3, 2 3,

1 3 2 3

k l 2n h l 2n h k 2n h k l 2n

a , b , c a , 2b , 2c 2a , b , 2c 2a , 2b , c 2a , 2b , 2c

h k l 3n

bR

b bR cR c aR bR cR ,

Multiple unit cell

k l 2n h l 2n h k 2n

the removal of lattice points with zero weights (absences). All the restrictions on hkl pertain to indexing on a , b and c . (ii) The centring type of the reciprocal lattice refers to the multiple unit cell given in the table. (iii) The centring type denoted by R hex is a representation of the rhombohedral lattice R by a triple hexagonal unit cell, in the obverse setting (IT I, 1952), i.e. according to the transformation a aR

Restriction on hkl

1:4:4:14

where aR , bR and cR pertain to a primitive unit cell in the rhombohedral lattice R. The corresponding multiple reciprocal cell, with centring denoted by R hex , contains nine lattice points with coordinates 000, 021, 012, 101, 202, 110, 220, 211 and 122 – indexed on the usual reciprocal to the triple hexagonal unit cell defined by (1.4.4.14). Detailed derivations of these correspondences are given by Buerger (1942), and an elementary proof of the reciprocity of I and F lattices can be found, e.g., in pamphlet No. 4 of the Commission on Crystallographic Teaching (Authier, 1981). Intuitive proofs follow directly from the restrictions on hkl, given in Table 1.4.4.1.

Appendix 1.4.1. Comments on the preparation and usage of the tables (U. SHMUELI) The straightforward but rather extensive calculations and text processing related to Tables A1.4.3.1 through A1.4.3.7 and Table A1.4.4.1 in Appendices 1.4.3 and 1.4.4, respectively, were performed with the aid of a combination of FORTRAN and REDUCE (Hearn, 1973) programs, designed so as to enable the author to produce the table entries directly from a space-group symbol and with a minimum amount of intermediate manual intervention. The first stage of the calculation, the generation of a space group (coordinates of the equivalent positions), was accomplished with the program SPGRGEN, the algorithm of

2a , 2b , 2c

3a , 3b , 3c

which was described in some detail elsewhere (Shmueli, 1984). A complete list of computer-adapted space-group symbols, processed by SPGRGEN and not given in the latter reference, is presented in Table A1.4.2.1 of Appendix 1.4.2. The generation of the space group is followed by a construction of symbolic expressions for the scalar products hT Pr t; e.g. for position No. (13) in the space group P41 32 (No. 213, IT I, 1952, IT A, 1983), this scalar product is given by h34 y k14 x l14 z. The construction of the various table entries consists of expanding the sines and cosines of these scalar products, performing the required summations, and simplifying the result where possible. The construction of the scalar products in a FORTRAN program is fairly easy and the extremely tedious trigonometric calculations required by equations (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) can be readily performed with the aid of one of several available computer-algebraic languages (for a review, see Computers in the New Laboratory – a Nature Survey, 1981); the REDUCE language was employed for the above purpose. Since the REDUCE programs required for the summations in (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) for the various space groups were seen to have much in common, it was decided to construct a FORTRAN interface which would process the space-group input and prepare automatically REDUCE programs for the algebraic work. The least straightforward problem encountered during this work was the need to ‘convince’ the interface to generate hkl parity assignments which are appropriate to the space-group information input. This was solved for all the crystal families except the hexagonal by setting up a ‘basis’ of the form: h=2, k=2, l=2, k l=2, . . . , h k l=4 and representing the translation parts of the scalar products, hT t, as sums of such ‘basis functions’. A subsequent construction of an automatic parity routine proved to be easy and the interface could thus produce any number of REDUCE programs for the summations in (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) using a list of spacegroup symbols as the sole input. These included trigonal and hexagonal space groups with translation components of 12. This approach seemed to be too awkward for some space groups containing threefold and sixfold screw axes, and these were treated individually. There is little to say about the REDUCE programs, except that the output they generate is at the same level of trigonometric complexity as the expressions for A and B appearing in Volume I (IT I, 1952). This could have been improved by making use of the pattern-matching capabilities that are incorporated in REDUCE, but

106

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE it was found more convenient to construct a FORTRAN interpreter which would detect in the REDUCE output the basic building blocks of the trigonometric structure factors (see Section 1.4.3.3) and perform the required transformations. Tables A1.4.3.1–A1.4.3.7 were thus constructed with the aid of a chain composed of (i) a space-group generating routine, (ii) a FORTRAN interface, which processes the space-group input and ‘writes’ a complete REDUCE program, (iii) execution of the REDUCE program and (iv) a FORTRAN interpreter of the REDUCE output in terms of the abbreviated symbols to be used in the tables. The computation was at a ‘one-group-at-a-time’ basis and the automation of its repetition was performed by means of procedural constructs at the operating-system level. The construction of Table A1.4.4.1 involved only the preliminary stage of the processing of the space-group information by the FORTRAN interface. All the computations were carried out on a Cyber 170-855 at the Tel Aviv University Computation Center. It is of some importance to comment on the recommended usage of the tables included in this chapter in automatic computations. If, for example, we wish to compute the expression: A 8Escs Ossc, use can be made of the facility provided by most versions of FORTRAN of transferring subprogram names as parameters of a FUNCTION. We thus need only two FUNCTIONs for any calculation of A and B for a cubic space group, one FUNCTION for the block of even permutations of x, y and z: FUNCTION E(P, Q, R) EXTERNAL SIN, COS COMMON/TSF/TPH, TPK, TPL, X, Y, Z E PTPH X QTPK Y RTPL Z 1 PTPH Z QTPK X RTPL Y 2 PTPH Y QTPK Z RTPL X RETURN END where TPH, TPK and TPL denote 2h, 2k and 2l, respectively, and a similar FUNCTION, say O(P,Q,R), for the block of odd permutations of x, y and z. The calling statement in the calling (sub)program can thus be: A 8 (E(SIN, COS, SIN) O(SIN, SIN, COS)): A small number of such FUNCTIONs suffices for all the spacegroup-specific computations that involve trigonometric structure factors.

Appendix 1.4.2. Space-group symbols for numeric and symbolic computations

A1.4.2.1. Introduction (U. SHMUELI, S. R. HALL GROSSE-KUNSTLEVE)

AND

R. W.

This appendix lists two sets of computer-adapted space-group symbols which are implemented in existing crystallographic software and can be employed in the automated generation of space-group representations. The computer generation of spacegroup symmetry information is of well known importance in many

crystallographic calculations, numeric as well as symbolic. A prerequisite for a computer program that generates this information is a set of computer-adapted space-group symbols which are based on the generating elements of the space group to be derived. The sets of symbols to be presented are: (i) Explicit symbols. These symbols are based on the classification of crystallographic point groups and space groups by Zachariasen (1945). These symbols are termed explicit because they contain in an explicit manner the rotation and translation parts of the space-group generators of the space group to be derived and used. These computer-adapted explicit symbols were proposed by Shmueli (1984), who also describes in detail their implementation in the program SPGRGEN. This program was used for the automatic preparation of the structure-factor tables for the 17 plane groups and 230 space groups, listed in Appendix 1.4.3, and the 230 space groups in reciprocal space, listed in Appendix 1.4.4. The explicit symbols presented in this appendix are adapted to the 306 representations of the 230 space groups as presented in IT A (1983) with regard to the standard settings and choice of spacegroup origins. The symmetry-generating algorithm underlying the explicit symbols, and their definition, are given in Section A1.4.2.2 of this appendix and the explicit symbols are listed in Table A1.4.2.1. (ii) Hall symbols. These symbols are based on the implied-origin notation of Hall (1981a,b), who also describes in detail the algorithm implemented in the program SGNAME (Hall, 1981a). In the first edition of IT B (1993), the term ‘concise space-group symbols’ was used for this notation. In recent years, however, the term ‘Hall symbols’ has come into use in symmetry papers (Altermatt & Brown, 1987; Grosse-Kunstleve, 1999), software applications (Hovmo¨ller, 1992; Grosse-Kunstleve, 1995; Larine et al., 1995; Dowty, 1997) and data-handling approaches (Bourne et al., 1998). This term has therefore been adopted for the second edition. The main difference in the definition of the Hall symbols between this edition and the first edition of IT B is the generalization of the origin-shift vector to a full change-of-basis matrix. The examples have been expanded to show how this matrix is applied. The notation has also been made more consistent, and a typographical error in a default axis direction has been corrected.* The lattice centring symbol ‘H’ has been added to Table A1.4.2.2. In addition, Hall symbols are now provided for 530 settings to include all settings from Table 4.3.1 of IT A (1983). Namely, all non-standard symbols for the monoclinic and orthorhombic space groups are included. Some of the space-group symbols listed in Table A1.4.2.7 differ from those listed in Table B.6 (p. 119) of the first edition of IT B. This is because the symmetry of many space groups can be represented by more than one subset of ‘generator’ elements and these lead to different Hall symbols. The symbols listed in this edition have been selected after first sorting the symmetry elements into a strictly prescribed order based on the shape of their Seitz matrices, whereas those in Table B.6 were selected from symmetry elements in the order of IT I (1965). Software for selecting the Hall symbols listed in Table A1.4.2.7 is freely available (Hall, 1997). These symbols and their equivalents in the first edition of IT B will generate identical symmetry elements, but the former may be used as a reference table in a strict mapping procedure between different symmetry representations (Hall et al., 2000). The Hall symbols are defined in Section A1.4.2.3 of this appendix and are listed in Table A1.4.2.7.

* The correct default axis direction a b of an N preceded by 3 or 6 replaces a b on p. 117, right-hand column, line 4, in the first edition of IT B.

107

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 0 0 1 A1.4.2.2. Explicit symbols (U. SHMUELI) 1 0 0 1 B B C 1A @ 0 1 0 A 2A @ 0 As shown elsewhere (Shmueli, 1984), the set of representative 0 0 1 0 operators of a crystallographic space group [i.e. the set that is listed 0 0 1 for each space group in the symmetry tables of IT A (1983) and 0 1 0 0 automatically regenerated for the purpose of compiling the B B C 2C @ 0 1 0 A 2D @ 1 symmetry tables in the present chapter] may have one of the following forms: 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 B B C fQ, ug, 2F @ 0 1 0 A 2G @ 1 fQ, ug fR, vg,

or

fP, tg fQ, ug fR, vg,

fP, tg fI, 0, P, t, P, t2 , . . . , P, tg 1 g,

A1:4:2:2

where I is a unit operator and g is the order of the rotation operator P (i.e. Pg = I). The representative operations of the space group are evaluated by expanding the generators into cyclic groups, as in (A1.4.2.2), and forming, as needed, ordered products of the expanded groups as indicated in (A1.4.2.1) and explained in detail in the original article (Shmueli, 1984). The rotation and translation parts of the generators (P, t), (Q, u) and (R, v) presented here were adapted to the settings and choices of origin used in the main symmetry tables of IT A (1983). The general structure of a three-generator symbol, corresponding to the last line of (A1.4.2.1), as represented in Table A1.4.2.1, is LSC$r1 Pt1 t2 t3 $r2 Qu1 u2 u3 $r3 Rv1 v2 v3 ,

A1:4:2:3

where L – lattice type; can be P, A, B, C, I, F, or R. The symbol R is used only for the seven rhombohedral space groups in their representations in rhombohedral and hexagonal axes [obverse setting (IT I, 1952)]. S – crystal system; can be A (triclinic), M (monoclinic), O (orthorhombic), T (tetragonal), R (trigonal), H (hexagonal) or C (cubic). C – status of centrosymmetry; can be C or N according as the space group is centrosymmetric or noncentrosymmetric, respectively. $ – this character is followed by six characters that define a generator of the space group. ri – indicator of the type of rotation that follows: ri is P or I according as the rotation part of the ith generator is proper or improper, respectively. P, Q, R – two-character symbols of matrix representations of the point-group rotation operators P, Q and R, respectively (see below). t1 t2 t3 , u1 u2 u3 , v1 v2 v3 – components of the translation parts of the generators, given in units of 121 ; e.g. the translation part (0 12 34) is given in Table A1.4.2.1 as 069. An exception: (0 0 56) is denoted by 005 and not by 0010. The two-character symbols for the matrices of rotation, which appear in the explicit space-group symbols in Table A1.4.2.1, are defined as follows:

0 0

1

C 1 0A 0 1

1 1 0 C 0 0A 0 1 1 0 1 C 0 0A 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 B B B C C C 3C @ 1 1 0 A 4C @ 1 0 0 A 6C @ 1 0 0 A, 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

A1:4:2:1

where P, Q and R are point-group operators, and t, u and v are zero vectors or translations not belonging to the lattice-translations subgroup. Each of the forms in (A1.4.2.1), enclosed in braces, is evaluated as, e.g.,

1 0 0 0 1 C B 1 0 A 2B @ 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 C B 0 0 A 2E @ 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 C B 1 0 A 3Q @ 1

where only matrices of proper rotation are given (and required), since the corresponding matrices of improper rotation are created by the program for appropriate value of the ri indicator. The first character of a symbol is the order of the axis of rotation and the second character specifies its orientation: in terms of direct-space lattice vectors, we have A 100, B 010, C 001, D 110, E 110, F 100, G 210 and Q 111

for the standard orientations of the axes of rotation. Note that the axes 2F, 2G, 3C and 6C appear in trigonal and hexagonal space groups. In the above scheme a space group is determined by one, two or at most three generators [see (A1.4.2.1)]. It should be pointed out that a convenient way of achieving a representation of the space group in any setting and relative to any origin is to start from the standard generators in Table A1.4.2.1 and let the computer program perform the appropriate transformation of the generators only, as in equations (1.4.4.4) and (1.4.4.5). The subsequent expansion of the transformed generators and the formation of the required products [see (A1.4.2.1) and (A1.4.2.2)] leads to the new representation of the space group. In order to illustrate an explicit space-group symbol consider, for example, the symbol for the space group Ia3d, as given in Table A1.4.2.1: ICC$I3Q000$P4C393$P2D933:

The first three characters tell us that the Bravais lattice of this space group is of type I, that the space group is centrosymmetric and that it belongs to the cubic system. We then see that the generators are (i) an improper threefold axis along [111] (I3Q) with a zero translation part, (ii) a proper fourfold axis along [001] (P4C) with translation part (1/4, 3/4, 1/4) and (iii) a proper twofold axis along [110] (P2D) with translation part (3/4, 1/4, 1/4). If we make use of the above-outlined interpretation of the explicit symbol (A1.4.2.3), the space-group symmetry transformations in direct space, corresponding to these three generators of the space group Ia3d, become

108

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.2.1. Explicit symbols

Explicit symbols

No.

Short Hermann– Mauguin symbol

P1

PAN$P1A000

15

C2=c

C12=c1

CMC$I1A000$P2B006

P1

PAC$I1A000

15

C2=c

A12=n1

AMC$I1A000$P2B606

P121

PMN$P2B000

15

C2=c

I12=a1

IMC$I1A000$P2B600

P2

P112

PMN$P2C000

15

C2=c

A112=a

AMC$I1A000$P2C600

4

P21

P121 1

PMN$P2B060

15

C2=c

B112=n

BMC$I1A000$P2C660

4

P21

P1121

PMN$P2C006

15

C2=c

I112=b

IMC$I1A000$P2C060

5

C2

C121

CMN$P2B000

16

P222

PON$P2C000$P2A000

5 5

C2 C2

A121 I121

AMN$P2B000 IMN$P2B000

17 18

P2221 P21 21 2

PON$P2C006$P2A000 PON$P2C000$P2A660

5

C2

A112

AMN$P2C000

19

P21 21 21

PON$P2C606$P2A660

5

C2

B112

BMN$P2C000

20

C2221

CON$P2C006$P2A000

5

C2

I112

IMN$P2C000

21

C222

CON$P2C000$P2A000

6

Pm

P1m1

PMN$I2B000

22

F222

FON$P2C000$P2A000

6

Pm

P11m

PMN$I2C000

23

I222

ION$P2C000$P2A000

7

Pc

P1c1

PMN$I2B006

24

I21 21 21

ION$P2C606$P2A660

7 7

Pc Pc

P1n1 P1a1

PMN$I2B606 PMN$I2B600

25 26

Pmm2 Pmc21

PON$P2C000$I2A000 PON$P2C006$I2A000

7

Pc

P11a

PMN$I2C600

27

Pcc2

PON$P2C000$I2A006

7

Pc

P11n

PMN$I2C660

28

Pma2

PON$P2C000$I2A600

7

Pc

P11b

PMN$I2C060

29

Pca21

PON$P2C006$I2A606

8

Cm

C1m1

CMN$I2B000

30

Pnc2

PON$P2C000$I2A066

8

Cm

A1m1

AMN$I2B000

31

Pmn21

PON$P2C606$I2A000

8

Cm

I1m1

Pba2

PON$P2C000$I2A660

Cm Cm

A11m B11m

IMN$I2B000 AMN$I2C000 BMN$I2C000

32

8 8

33 34

Pna21 Pnn2

PON$P2C006$I2A666 PON$P2C000$I2A666

8

Cm

I11m

IMN$I2C000

35

Cmm2

CON$P2C000$I2A000

9

Cc

C1c1

CMN$I2B006

36

Cmc21

CON$P2C006$I2A000

9

Cc

A1n1

AMN$I2B606

37

Ccc2

CON$P2C000$I2A006

9

Cc

I1a1

IMN$I2B600

38

Amm2

AON$P2C000$I2A000

9

Cc

A11a

AMN$I2C600

39

Abm2

AON$P2C000$I2A060

9

Cc

B11n

BMN$I2C660

40

Ama2

AON$P2C000$I2A600

9 10

Cc P2=m

I11b P12=m1

IMN$I2C060 PMC$I1A000$P2B000

41 42

Aba2 Fmm2

AON$P2C000$I2A660 FON$P2C000$I2A000

10

No.


1 2 3

P2

3

Comments

Comments

Explicit symbols

P2=m P21 =m

P112=m P121 =m1

PMC$I1A000$P2C000 PMC$I1A000$P2B060

43

Fdd2

FON$P2C000$I2A333

11 11

44

Imm2

ION$P2C000$I2A000

P21 =m

P1121 =m

PMC$I1A000$P2C006

45

Iba2

ION$P2C000$I2A660

12

C2=m

C12=m1

CMC$I1A000$P2B000

46

Ima2

ION$P2C000$I2A600

12

C2=m

A12=m1

AMC$I1A000$P2B000

47

Pmmm

12

C2=m

I12=m1

IMC$I1A000$P2B000

48

Pnnn

Origin 1

POC$I1A666$P2C000$P2A000

12 12

C2=m C2=m

A112=m B112=m

AMC$I1A000$P2C000 BMC$I1A000$P2C000

48 49

Pnnn Pccm

Origin 2

POC$I1A000$P2C660$P2A066 POC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A006

12

C2=m

I112=m

IMC$I1A000$P2C000

50

Pban

Origin 1

POC$I1A660$P2C000$P2A000

13

P2=c

P12=c1

PMC$I1A000$P2B006

50

Pban

Origin 2

POC$I1A000$P2C660$P2A060

13

P2=c

P12=n1

PMC$I1A000$P2B606

51

Pmma

POC$I1A000$P2C600$P2A600

13

P2=c

P12=a1

PMC$I1A000$P2B600

52

Pnna

POC$I1A000$P2C600$P2A066

13

P2=c

Pmna

POC$I1A000$P2C606$P2A000

P2=c P2=c P21 =c

PMC$I1A000$P2C600 PMC$I1A000$P2C660

53

13 13 14

P112=a P112=n

54

Pcca

POC$I1A000$P2C600$P2A606

P112=b P121 =c1

PMC$I1A000$P2C060 PMC$I1A000$P2B066

55 56

Pbam Pccn

POC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A660 POC$I1A000$P2C660$P2A606

14

P21 =c

P121 =n1

PMC$I1A000$P2B666

57

Pbcm

POC$I1A000$P2C006$P2A060

14

P21 =c

P121 =a1

PMC$I1A000$P2B660

58

Pnnm

14

P21 =c

P1121 =a

PMC$I1A000$P2C606

59

Pmmn

Origin 1

POC$I1A660$P2C000$P2A660

14

P21 =c

P1121 =n

PMC$I1A000$P2C666

59

Pmmn

Origin 2

POC$I1A000$P2C660$P2A600

14

P21 =c

P1121 =b

PMC$I1A000$P2C066

60

Pbcn

109

POC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A000

POC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A666

POC$I1A000$P2C666$P2A660

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.2.1. Explicit symbols (cont.)

Explicit symbols

No.


Pbca

POC$I1A000$P2C606$P2A660

110

I41 cd

ITN$P4C063$I2A660

Pnma Cmcm

POC$I1A000$P2C606$P2A666 COC$I1A000$P2C006$P2A000

111 112

P42m P42c

PTN$I4C000$P2A000 PTN$I4C000$P2A006

64

Cmca

COC$I1A000$P2C066$P2A000

113

P421 m

PTN$I4C000$P2A660

65

Cmmm

COC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A000

114

P421 c

PTN$I4C000$P2A666

66

Cccm

COC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A006

115

P4m2

PTN$I4C000$P2D000

67

Cmma

COC$I1A000$P2C060$P2A000

116

P4c2

PTN$I4C000$P2D006

68

Ccca

Origin 1

COC$I1A066$P2C660$P2A660

117

P4b2

PTN$I4C000$P2D660

68

Ccca

Origin 2

COC$I1A000$P2C600$P2A606

118

P4n2

PTN$I4C000$P2D666

69 70

Fmmm Fddd

Origin 1

FOC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A000 FOC$I1A333$P2C000$P2A000

119 120

I4m2 I4c2

ITN$I4C000$P2D000 ITN$I4C000$P2D006

70

Fddd

Origin 2

FOC$I1A000$P2C990$P2A099

121

I42m

ITN$I4C000$P2A000

71

Immm

IOC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A000

122

I42d

ITN$I4C000$P2A609

72

Ibam

IOC$I1A000$P2C000$P2A660

123

P4=mmm

PTC$I1A000$P4C000$P2A000

73

Ibca

IOC$I1A000$P2C606$P2A660

124

P4=mcc

74

Imma

IOC$I1A000$P2C060$P2A000

125

P4=nbm

Origin 1

PTC$I1A660$P4C000$P2A000

75

P4

125

P4=nbm

Origin 2

PTC$I1A000$P4C600$P2A060

76 77

P41 P42

PTN$P4C000 PTN$P4C003 PTN$P4C006

126 126

P4=nnc P4=nnc

Origin 1 Origin 2

PTC$I1A666$P4C000$P2A000 PTC$I1A000$P4C600$P2A066

78

P43

PTN$P4C009

127

P4=mbm

79

I4

ITN$P4C000

128

P4=mnc

80

I41

ITN$P4C063

129

P4=nmm

Origin 1

PTC$I1A660$P4C660$P2A660

81

P4

PTN$I4C000

129

P4=nmm

Origin 2

PTC$I1A000$P4C600$P2A600

82

I4

ITN$I4C000

130

P4=ncc

Origin 1

PTC$I1A660$P4C660$P2A666

83

P4=m

PTC$I1A000$P4C000

130

Origin 2

84 85

P42 =m P4=n

PTC$I1A000$P4C006 PTC$I1A660$P4C660

131 132

P4=ncc P42 =mmc P42 =mcm

PTC$I1A000$P4C600$P2A606 PTC$I1A000$P4C006$P2A000 PTC$I1A000$P4C006$P2A006

85

P4=n

Origin 2

PTC$I1A000$P4C600

133

P42 =nbc

Origin 1

PTC$I1A666$P4C666$P2A006

86

P42 =n

Origin 1

PTC$I1A666$P4C666

133

P42 =nbc

Origin 2

PTC$I1A000$P4C606$P2A060

86

P42 =n

Origin 2

PTC$I1A000$P4C066

134

P42 =nnm

Origin 1

PTC$I1A666$P4C666$P2A000

87

I4=m

ITC$I1A000$P4C000

134

P42 =nnm

Origin 2

PTC$I1A000$P4C606$P2A066

88

I41 =a

Origin 1

ITC$I1A063$P4C063

135

P42 =mbc

88

I41 =a

Origin 2

ITC$I1A000$P4C933

136

P42 =mnm

89 90

P422 P421 2

PTN$P4C000$P2A000 PTN$P4C660$P2A660

137 137

P42 =nmc P42 =nmc

Origin 1 Origin 2


91

P41 22

PTN$P4C003$P2A006

138

P42 =ncm

Origin 1

PTC$I1A666$P4C666$P2A660

92

P41 21 2

PTN$P4C663$P2A669

138

P42 =ncm

Origin 2

PTC$I1A000$P4C606$P2A606

93

P42 22

PTN$P4C006$P2A000

139

I4=mmm

94

P42 21 2

PTN$P4C666$P2A666

140

I4=mcm

95

P43 22

PTN$P4C009$P2A006

141

I41 =amd

Origin 1

ITC$I1A063$P4C063$P2A063

No.


61 62 63

Comments

Origin 1

Comments

Explicit symbols

PTC$I1A000$P4C000$P2A006



ITC$I1A000$P4C000$P2A000 ITC$I1A000$P4C000$P2A006

96

P43 21 2

PTN$P4C669$P2A663

141

I41 =amd

Origin 2

ITC$I1A000$P4C393$P2A000

97 98

I422 I41 22

ITN$P4C000$P2A000 ITN$P4C063$P2A063

142 142

I41 =acd I41 =acd

Origin 1 Origin 2

ITC$I1A063$P4C063$P2A069 ITC$I1A000$P4C393$P2A006

99

P4mm

PTN$P4C000$I2A000

143

P3

PRN$P3C000

100

P4bm

PTN$P4C000$I2A660

144

P31

PRN$P3C004

101

P42 cm

PTN$P4C006$I2A006

145

P32

102

P42 nm

PTN$P4C666$I2A666

146

R3

Hexagonal axes

103

P4cc

PTN$P4C000$I2A006

146

R3

Rhombohedral axes PRN$P3Q000

104

P4nc

PTN$P4C000$I2A666

147

P3

PRC$I3C000

105 106

P42 mc P42 bc

PTN$P4C006$I2A000 PTN$P4C006$I2A660

148 148

R3 R3

Hexagonal axes RRC$I3C000 Rhombohedral axes PRC$I3Q000

107

I4mm

ITN$P4C000$I2A000

149

P312

108

I4cm

ITN$P4C000$I2A006

150

P321

PRN$P3C000$P2F000

109

I41 md

ITN$P4C063$I2A666

151

P31 12

PRN$P3C004$P2G000

110

PRN$P3C008 RRN$P3C000

PRN$P3C000$P2G000

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.2.1. Explicit symbols (cont.)

Explicit symbols

No.


P31 21

PRN$P3C004$P2F008

192

P6=mcc

PHC$I1A000$P6C000$P2F006

P32 12 P32 21

PRN$P3C008$P2G000 PRN$P3C008$P2F004

193 194

P63 =mcm P63 =mmc

PHC$I1A000$P6C006$P2F006 PHC$I1A000$P6C006$P2F000

RRN$P3C000$P2F000

195

P23

PCN$P3Q000$P2C000$P2A000

Rhombohedral axes PRN$P3Q000$P2E000

196

F23

FCN$P3Q000$P2C000$P2A000

PRN$P3C000$I2F000

197

I23

ICN$P3Q000$P2C000$P2A000

P31m

PRN$P3C000$I2G000

198

P21 3

PCN$P3Q000$P2C606$P2A660

158

P3c1

PRN$P3C000$I2F006

199

I21 3

ICN$P3Q000$P2C606$P2A660

159

P31c

PRN$P3C000$I2G006

200

Pm3

PCC$I3Q000$P2C000$P2A000

160 160

R3m R3m

Hexagonal axes RRN$P3C000$I2F000 Rhombohedral axes PRN$P3Q000$I2E000

201 201

Pn3 Pn3

161

R3c

Hexagonal axes

RRN$P3C000$I2F006

202

Fm3

161

R3c

203

Fd3

Origin 1

FCC$I3Q333$P2C000$P2A000

162 163

P31m P31c

Rhombohedral axes PRN$P3Q000$I2E666 PRC$I3C000$P2G000

203

Fd3

Origin 2

FCC$I3Q000$P2C330$P2A033

PRC$I3C000$P2G006

204

Im3

ICC$I3Q000$P2C000$P2A000

164

P3m1

PRC$I3C000$P2F000

205

Pa3

PCC$I3Q000$P2C606$P2A660

No.


152 153 154 155

R32

Hexagonal axes

155

R32

156

P3m1

157

Comments

Comments

Origin 1 Origin 2

Explicit symbols

PCC$I3Q666$P2C000$P2A000 PCC$I3Q000$P2C660$P2A066 FCC$I3Q000$P2C000$P2A000

165

P3c1

PRC$I3C000$P2F006

206

Ia3

ICC$I3Q000$P2C606$P2A660

166 166

R3m R3m

Hexagonal axes RRC$I3C000$P2F000 Rhombohedral axes PRC$I3Q000$P2E000

207 208

P432 P42 32

PCN$P3Q000$P4C000$P2D000 PCN$P3Q000$P4C666$P2D666

167

R3c

Hexagonal axes

RRC$I3C000$P2F006

209

F432

FCN$P3Q000$P4C000$P2D000

167

R3c

Rhombohedral axes PRC$I3Q000$P2E666

210

F41 32

FCN$P3Q000$P4C993$P2D939

168

P6

PHN$P6C000

211

I432

ICN$P3Q000$P4C000$P2D000

169

P61

PHN$P6C002

212

P43 32

PCN$P3Q000$P4C939$P2D399

170

P65

PHN$P6C005

213

P41 32

PCN$P3Q000$P4C393$P2D933

171

P62

PHN$P6C004

214

I41 32

ICN$P3Q000$P4C393$P2D933

172 173

P64 P63

PHN$P6C008 PHN$P6C006

215 216

P43m F43m

PCN$P3Q000$I4C000$I2D000 FCN$P3Q000$I4C000$I2D000

174

P6

PHN$I6C000

217

I43m

ICN$P3Q000$I4C000$I2D000

175

P6=m

PHC$I1A000$P6C000

218

P43n

PCN$P3Q000$I4C666$I2D666

176

P63 =m

PHC$I1A000$P6C006

219

F43c

FCN$P3Q000$I4C666$I2D666

177

P622

PHN$P6C000$P2F000

220

I43d

ICN$P3Q000$I4C939$I2D399

178

P61 22

PHN$P6C002$P2F000

221

Pm3m

179

P65 22

PHN$P6C005$P2F000

222

Pn3n

Origin 1

PCC$I3Q666$P4C000$P2D000

180 181

P62 22 P64 22

PHN$P6C004$P2F000 PHN$P6C008$P2F000

222 223

Pn3n Pm3n

Origin 2

PCC$I3Q000$P4C600$P2D006 PCC$I3Q000$P4C666$P2D666

182

P63 22

PHN$P6C006$P2F000

224

Pn3m

Origin 1

PCC$I3Q666$P4C666$P2D666

183

P6mm

PHN$P6C000$I2F000

224

Pn3m

Origin 2

PCC$I3Q000$P4C066$P2D660

184

P6cc

PHN$P6C000$I2F006

225

Fm3m

185

P63 cm

PHN$P6C006$I2F006

226

Fm3c

186

P63 mc

PHN$P6C006$I2F000

227

Fd3m

Origin 1

FCC$I3Q333$P4C993$P2D939

PCC$I3Q000$P4C000$P2D000

FCC$I3Q000$P4C000$P2D000 FCC$I3Q000$P4C666$P2D666

187

P6m2

PHN$I6C000$P2G000

227

Fd3m

Origin 2

FCC$I3Q000$P4C693$P2D936

188 189

P6c2 P62m

PHN$I6C006$P2G000 PHN$I6C000$P2F000

228 228

Fd3c Fd3c

Origin 1 Origin 2

FCC$I3Q999$P4C993$P2D939 FCC$I3Q000$P4C093$P2D930

190

P62c

PHN$I6C006$P2F000

229

Im3m

ICC$I3Q000$P4C000$P2D000

191

P6=mmm

PHC$I1A000$P6C000$P2F000

230

Ia3d

ICC$I3Q000$P4C393$P2D933

111

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.2.2. Lattice symbol L The lattice symbol L implies Seitz matrices for the lattice translations. For noncentrosymmetric lattices the rotation parts of the Seitz matrices are for 1 (see Table A1.4.2.4). For centrosymmetric lattices the rotation parts are 1 and 1. The translation parts in the fourth columns of the Seitz matrices are listed in the last column of the table. The total number of matrices implied by each symbol is given by nS.

20

Noncentrosymmetric

Centrosymmetric

Symbol

nS

Symbol

P A B C I R H F

1 2 2 2 2 3 3 4

P A B C I R H F

nS

Implied lattice translation(s)

2 4 4 4 4 6 6 8

0, 0, 0 0, 0, 0 0, 12 , 12 0, 0, 0 12 , 0, 12 0, 0, 0 12 , 12 , 0 0, 0, 0 12 , 12 , 12 0, 0, 0 23 , 13 , 13 0, 0, 0 23 , 13 , 0 0, 0, 0 0, 12 , 12

10 1 0 13 0 1 0 z x 6B CB C B C7 B C 4@ 1 0 0 A@ y A @ 0 A5 @ x A, 0 y z 0 1 0 1 20 10 1 0 1 13 0 1 y x 0 1 0 4 4 C 6B CB C B C7 B 4@ 1 0 0 A@ y A @ 34 A5 @ 34 x A,

1 1 2, 2,0

Table A1.4.2.7 lists space-group notation in several formats. The first column of Table A1.4.2.7 lists the space-group numbers with axis codes appended to identify the non-standard settings. The second column lists the Hermann–Mauguin symbols in computerentry format with appended codes to identify the origin and cell choice when there are alternatives. The general forms of the Hall notation are listed in the fourth column and the computer-entry representations of these symbols are listed in the third column. The computer-entry format is the general notation expressed as caseinsensitive ASCII characters with the overline (bar) symbol replaced by a minus sign. The Hall notation has the general form:

0 0 1

1 1 z z 10 1 0 43 13 0 43 1 0 1 0 x 4 4y CB C B C7 B 6B C 4@ 1 0 0 A@ y A @ 14 A5 @ 14 x A: 1 1 z 0 0 1 z 4 4

20

1 2 2 3, 3, 3 1 2 3, 3,0 1 1 2 , 0, 2

0 0 1

The corresponding symmetry transformations in reciprocal space, in the notation of Section 1.4.4, are 0 1 2 0 13 0 0 0 1 4hkl@ 1 0 0 A : hkl@ 0 A5 klh : 0; 0 0 1 0 similarly, khl : 131=4 and khl : 311=4 are obtained from the second and third generator of Ia3d, respectively. The first column of Table A1.4.2.1 lists the conventional spacegroup number. The second column shows the conventional short Hermann–Mauguin or international space-group symbol, and the third column, Comments, shows the full international space-group symbol only for the different settings of the monoclinic space groups that are given in the main space-group tables of IT A (1983). Other comments pertain to the choice of the space-group origin – where there are alternatives – and to axial systems. The fourth column shows the explicit space-group symbols described above for each of the settings considered in IT A (1983).

LNAT 1 . . . NAT p V:

A1:4:2:4

L is the symbol specifying the lattice translational symmetry (see Table A1.4.2.2). The integral translations are implicitly included in the set of generators. If L has a leading minus sign, it also specifies an inversion centre at the origin. NAT n specifies the 4 4 Seitz matrix Sn of a symmetry element in the minimum set which defines the space-group symmetry (see Tables A1.4.2.3 to A1.4.2.6), and p is the number of elements in the set. V is a change-of-basis operator needed for less common descriptions of the space-group symmetry. Table A1.4.2.3. Translation symbol T The symbol T specifies the translation elements of a Seitz matrix. Alphabetical symbols (given in the first column) specify translations along a fixed direction. Numerical symbols (given in the third column) specify translations as a fraction of the rotation order |N| and in the direction of the implied or explicitly defined axis.

A1.4.2.3. Hall symbols (S. R. HALL AND R. W. GROSSEKUNSTLEVE) The explicit-origin space-group notation proposed by Hall (1981a) is based on a subset of the symmetry operations, in the form of Seitz matrices, sufficient to uniquely define a space group. The concise unambiguous nature of this notation makes it well suited to handling symmetry in computing and database applications.

112

Translation symbol

Translation vector

Subscript symbol

Fractional translation

a b c n u v w d

1 2 , 0, 0 0, 12 , 0 0, 0, 12 1 1 1 2, 2, 2 1 4 , 0, 0 0, 14 , 0 0, 0, 14 1 1 1 4, 4, 4

1 2 1 3 1 2 4 5

1 3 2 3 1 4 3 4 1 6 1 3 2 3 5 6

in 31 in 32 in 41 in 43 in 61 in 62 in 64 in 65

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.2.4. Rotation matrices for principal axes The 3 3 matrices for proper rotations along the three principal unit-cell directions are given below. The matrices for improper rotations ( 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6) are identical except that the signs of the elements are reversed. Rotation order Axis

Symbol A

a

x

b

y

c

z

0

1 @0 0 0 1 @0 0 0 1 @0 0

1

2

0

1

1 @0 0 0 1 @0 0 0 1 @0 0

0 0 1 0A 0 1 1 0 0 1 0A 0 1 1 0 0 1 0A 0 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

0

1

1 @0 0 0 1 @0 1 0 0 @1 0

0 0A 1 1 0 0A 1 1 0 0A 1

The matrix symbol NAT is composed of three parts: N is the symbol denoting the |N|-fold order of the rotation matrix (see Tables A1.4.2.4, A1.4.2.5 and A1.4.2.6), T is a subscript symbol denoting the translation vector (see Table A1.4.2.3) and A is a superscript symbol denoting the axis of rotation. The computer-entry format of the Hall notation contains the rotation-order symbol N as positive integers 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 for proper rotations and as negative integers 1, 2, 3, 4 or 6 for improper rotations. The T translation symbols 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, a, b, c, n, u, v, w, d are described in Table A1.4.2.3. These translations apply additively [e.g. ad signifies a (34 , 14 , 14) translation]. The A axis symbols x, y, z denote rotations about the axes a, b and c, respectively (see Table A1.4.2.4). The axis symbols 00 and 0 signal rotations about the body-diagonal vectors a + b (or alternatively b + c or c + a) and a b (or alternatively b c or c a) (see Table

Table A1.4.2.5. Rotation matrices for face-diagonal axes The symbols for face-diagonal twofold rotations are 20 and 200 . The facediagonal axis direction is determined by the axis of the preceding rotation Nx, Ny or Nz. Note that the single prime 0 is the default and may be omitted.

3 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

1

0 1 A 1 1 1 0A 0 1 0 0A 1

0

1 @0 0 0 0 @0 1 0 0 @1 0

4

1

0 0 0 1 A 1 0 1 0 1 1 0A 0 0 1 1 0 0 0A 0 1

0

1 @0 0 0 0 @0 1 0 1 @1 0

6 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

A1.4.2.5). The axis symbol * always refers to a threefold rotation along a + b + c (see Table A1.4.2.6). The change-of-basis operator V has the general form (vx, vy, vz). The vectors vx, vy and vz are specified by vx r1; 1 X r1; 2 Y r1; 3 Z t1 vy r2; 1 X r2; 2 Y r2; 3 Z t2 , vz r3; 1 X r3; 2 Y r3; 3 Z t3 where ri; j and ti are fractions or real numbers. Terms in which ri; j or ti are zero need not be specified. The 4 4 change-of-basis matrix operator V is defined as 0 1 r1; 1 r1; 2 r1; 3 t1 B r2; 1 r2; 2 r2; 3 t2 C C VB @ r3; 1 r3; 2 r3; 3 t3 A: 0 0 0 1 The transformed symmetry operations are derived from the specified Seitz matrices Sn as S0n V Sn V

Preceding rotation N

x

Ny

Nz

Rotation 2

0

Axis b

c

200

b+c

20

a

200

a+c

20

a

2

00

c

b

a+b

Matrix 0

1 @0 0 0 1 @0 0 0 0 @0 1 0 0 @0 1 0 0 @ 1 0 0 0 @1 0

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0

1

0 1 A 0 1 0 1A 0 1 1 0A 0 1 1 0A 0 1 0 0A 1 1 0 0A 1

1 0 1 A 0 1 1 0A 1 1 0 0A 1

1

and from the integral translations t(1, 0, 0), t(0, 1, 0) and t(0, 0, 1) as t0n , 1T V tn , 1T : A shorthand form of V may be used when the change-of-basis operator only translates the origin of the basis system. In this form vx, vy and vz are specified simply as shifts in twelfths, implying the matrix operator Table A1.4.2.6. Rotation matrix for the body-diagonal axis The symbol for the threefold rotation in the a + b + c direction is 3*. Note that for cubic space groups the body-diagonal axis is implied and the asterisk * may be omitted.

113

Axis

Rotation

a+b+c

3*

Matrix 0

1 0 0 1 @1 0 0A 0 1 0

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 1 The change-of-basis vector (0 0 1) could also be entered as 1 0 0 vx =12 B 0 1 0 vy =12 C (x, y, z 1/12). C VB The reverse setting of the R-centred lattice (hexagonal axes) is @ 0 0 1 vz =12 A: specified using a change-of-basis transformation applied to the 0 0 0 1 standard obverse setting (see Table A1.4.2.2). The obverse Seitz In the shorthand form of V, the commas separating the vectors may matrices are 0 10 10 1 be omitted. 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 23 1 0 0 13 B0 1 0 2 C B0 1 0 1 C B1 1 0 0C B C A1.4.2.3.1. Default axes 3C B 3C B , , R3B B C C B C: 2A @ 1 A @0 @ A 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 3 3 For most symbols the rotation axes applicable to each N are implied and an explicit axis symbol A is not needed. The rules for 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 default axis directions are: (i) the first rotation or roto-inversion has an axis direction of c; The reverse-setting Seitz matrices are (ii) the second rotation (if |N| is 2) has an axis direction of a if R 3 x, y, z 0 10 10 1 preceded by an |N| of 2 or 4, a b if preceded by an |N| of 3 or 6; 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 23 1 0 0 13 (iii) the third rotation (if |N| is 3) has an axis direction of B0 1 0 2 C B0 1 0 1 C B1 1 0 0C a + b + c. B C 3C B 3C B , , B B C C B C: @ 0 0 1 13 A @ 0 0 1 23 A @ 0 0 1 0 A A1.4.2.3.2. Example matrices 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 The following examples show how the notation expands to Seitz The conventional primitive hexagonal lattice may be transmatrices. The notation 2xc represents an improper twofold rotation along a formed to a C-centred orthohexagonal setting using the change-ofbasis operator and a c/2 translation: 01 1 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 B 1 1 0 0C B 0 1 0 0C B C C 2xc B P 6 x 1=2y, 1=2y, z B 2 2 C: @ 0 0 1 1 A: @0 0 1 0A 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 The notation 3 represents a threefold rotation along a + b + c: 0 1 In this case the lattice translation for the C centring is obtained by 0 0 1 0 transforming the integral translation t(0, 1, 0): B1 0 0 0C 0 10 1 C 1 3 B 0 1 @ 0 1 0 0 A: 2 0 0 B 0 1 0 0 CB 1 C 0 0 0 1 B CB C 2 V 0 1 0 1 T B CB C @ 0 0 1 0 A@ 0 A The notation 4vw represents a fourfold rotation along c (implied) and translation of b/4 and c/4: 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 T 0 1 0 0 1 1 2 2 0 1 : B1 0 0 1 C 4 B C 4vw @ : The standard setting of an I-centred tetragonal space group may 0 0 1 14 A be transformed to a primitive setting using the change-of-basis 0 0 0 1 operator 0 1 The notation 61 2 (0 0 1) represents a 61 screw along c, a 0 1 0 0 twofold rotation along a b and an origin shift of c/12. Note that B 0 1 1 0C C the 61 matrix is unchanged by the shifted origin whereas the 2 I 4 y z, x z, x y B @ 1 1 0 0 A: matrix is changed by c/6. 0 0 0 1 61 2 0 0 1 0 10 1 Note that in the primitive setting, the fourfold axis is along a + b. 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

B1 B B @0 0

0 0 0

B 0 0C CB 1 , B C 1 16 A @ 0 0 1 0

0 0 0

0C C : 5C 1 6A 0 1

0

114

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.2.7. Hall symbols The first column, n:c, lists the space-group numbers and axis codes separated by a colon. The second column lists the Hermann–Mauguin symbols in computerentry format. The third column lists the Hall symbols in computer-entry format and the fourth column lists the Hall symbols as described in Tables A1.4.2.2– A1.4.2.6. n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

1 2 3:b 3:c 3:a 4:b 4:c 4:a 5:b1 5:b2 5:b3 5:c1 5:c2 5:c3 5:a1 5:a2 5:a3 6:b 6:c 6:a 7:b1 7:b2 7:b3 7:c1 7:c2 7:c3 7:a1 7:a2 7:a3 8:b1 8:b2 8:b3 8:c1 8:c2 8:c3 8:a1 8:a2 8:a3 9:b1 9:b2 9:b3 9:-b1 9:-b2 9:-b3 9:c1 9:c2 9:c3 9:-c1 9:-c2 9:-c3 9:a1 9:a2 9:a3 9:-a1

P1 P -1 P121 P112 P211 P 1 21 1 P 1 1 21 P 21 1 1 C121 A121 I121 A112 B112 I112 B211 C211 I211 P1m1 P11m Pm11 P1c1 P1n1 P1a1 P11a P11n P11b Pb11 Pn11 Pc11 C1m1 A1m1 I1m1 A11m B11m I11m Bm11 Cm11 Im11 C1c1 A1n1 I1a1 A1a1 C1n1 I1c1 A11a B11n I11b B11b A11n I11a Bb11 Cn11 Ic11 Cc11

p1 -p 1 p 2y p2 p 2x p 2yb p 2c p 2xa c 2y a 2y i 2y a2 b2 i2 b 2x c 2x i 2x p -2y p -2 p -2x p -2yc p -2yac p -2ya p -2a p -2ab p -2b p -2xb p -2xbc p -2xc c -2y a -2y i -2y a -2 b -2 i -2 b -2x c -2x i -2x c -2yc a -2yab i -2ya a -2ya c -2yac i -2yc a -2a b -2ab i -2b b -2b a -2ab i -2a b -2xb c -2xac i -2xc c -2xc

P1 P1 P 2y P2 P 2x y P 2b P 2c P 2xa C 2y A 2y I 2y A2 B2 I2 B 2x C 2x I 2x P2y P2 P2x y P2c y P 2 ac y P2a P2a P 2 ab P2b P 2 xb P 2 xbc P 2 xc C2y A2y I2y A2 B2 I2 B2x C2x I2x y C2c y A 2 ab y I2a y A2a y C 2 ac y I2c A2a B 2 ab I2b B2b A 2 ab I2a B 2 xb C 2 xac I 2 xc C 2 xc

9:-a2 9:-a3 10:b 10:c 10:a 11:b 11:c 11:a 12:b1 12:b2 12:b3 12:c1 12:c2 12:c3 12:a1 12:a2 12:a3 13:b1 13:b2 13:b3 13:c1 13:c2 13:c3 13:a1 13:a2 13:a3 14:b1 14:b2 14:b3 14:c1 14:c2 14:c3 14:a1 14:a2 14:a3 15:b1 15:b2 15:b3 15:-b1 15:-b2 15:-b3 15:c1 15:c2 15:c3 15:-c1 15:-c2 15:-c3 15:a1 15:a2 15:a3 15:-a1 15:-a2 15:-a3 16

Bn11 Ib11 P 1 2/m 1 P 1 1 2/m P 2/m 1 1 P 1 21/m 1 P 1 1 21/m P 21/m 1 1 C 1 2/m 1 A 1 2/m 1 I 1 2/m 1 A 1 1 2/m B 1 1 2/m I 1 1 2/m B 2/m 1 1 C 2/m 1 1 I 2/m 1 1 P 1 2/c 1 P 1 2/n 1 P 1 2/a 1 P 1 1 2/a P 1 1 2/n P 1 1 2/b P 2/b 1 1 P 2/n 1 1 P 2/c 1 1 P 1 21/c 1 P 1 21/n 1 P 1 21/a 1 P 1 1 21/a P 1 1 21/n P 1 1 21/b P 21/b 1 1 P 21/n 1 1 P 21/c 1 1 C 1 2/c 1 A 1 2/n 1 I 1 2/a 1 A 1 2/a 1 C 1 2/n 1 I 1 2/c 1 A 1 1 2/a B 1 1 2/n I 1 1 2/b B 1 1 2/b A 1 1 2/n I 1 1 2/a B 2/b 1 1 C 2/n 1 1 I 2/c 1 1 C 2/c 1 1 B 2/n 1 1 I 2/b 1 1 P222

b -2xab i -2xb -p 2y -p 2 -p 2x -p 2yb -p 2c -p 2xa -c 2y -a 2y -i 2y -a 2 -b 2 -i 2 -b 2x -c 2x -i 2x -p 2yc -p 2yac -p 2ya -p 2a -p 2ab -p 2b -p 2xb -p 2xbc -p 2xc -p 2ybc -p 2yn -p 2yab -p 2ac -p 2n -p 2bc -p 2xab -p 2xn -p 2xac -c 2yc -a 2yab -i 2ya -a 2ya -c 2yac -i 2yc -a 2a -b 2ab -i 2b -b 2b -a 2ab -i 2a -b 2xb -c 2xac -i 2xc -c 2xc -b 2xab -i 2xb p22

B 2 xab I 2 xb P 2y P2 P 2x y P 2b P 2c P 2xa C 2y A 2y I 2y A2 B2 I2 B 2x C 2x I 2x y P 2c y P 2ac y P 2a P 2a P 2ab P 2b P 2xb P 2xbc P 2xc y P 2bc y P 2n y P 2ab P 2ac P 2n P 2bc P 2xab P 2xn P 2xac y C 2c y A 2ab y I 2a y A 2a y C 2ac y I 2c A 2a B 2ab I 2b B 2b A 2ab I 2a B 2xb C 2xac I 2xc C 2xc B 2xab I 2xb P22

115

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.2.7. Hall symbols (cont.) n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

17 17:cab 17:bca 18 18:cab 18:bca 19 20 20:cab 20:bca 21 21:cab 21:bca 22 23 24 25 25:cab 25:bca 26 26:ba-c 26:cab 26:-cba 26:bca 26:a-cb 27 27:cab 27:bca 28 28:ba-c 28:cab 28:-cba 28:bca 28:a-cb 29 29:ba-c 29:cab 29:-cba 29:bca 29:a-cb 30 30:ba-c 30:cab 30:-cba 30:bca 30:a-cb 31 31:ba-c 31:cab 31:-cba 31:bca 31:a-cb 32 32:cab 32:bca 33

P 2 2 21 P 21 2 2 P 2 21 2 P 21 21 2 P 2 21 21 P 21 2 21 P 21 21 21 C 2 2 21 A 21 2 2 B 2 21 2 C222 A222 B222 F222 I222 I 21 21 21 Pmm2 P2mm Pm2m P m c 21 P c m 21 P 21 m a P 21 a m P b 21 m P m 21 b Pcc2 P2aa Pb2b Pma2 Pbm2 P2mb P2cm Pc2m Pm2a P c a 21 P b c 21 P 21 a b P 21 c a P c 21 b P b 21 a Pnc2 Pcn2 P2na P2an Pb2n Pn2b P m n 21 P n m 21 P 21 m n P 21 n m P n 21 m P m 21 n Pba2 P2cb Pc2a P n a 21

p 2c 2 p 2a 2a p 2 2b p 2 2ab p 2bc 2 p 2ac 2ac p 2ac 2ab c 2c 2 a 2a 2a b 2 2b c22 a22 b22 f22 i22 i 2b 2c p 2 -2 p -2 2 p -2 -2 p 2c -2 p 2c -2c p -2a 2a p -2 2a p -2 -2b p -2b -2 p 2 -2c p -2a 2 p -2b -2b p 2 -2a p 2 -2b p -2b 2 p -2c 2 p -2c -2c p -2a -2a p 2c -2ac p 2c -2b p -2b 2a p -2ac 2a p -2bc -2c p -2a -2ab p 2 -2bc p 2 -2ac p -2ac 2 p -2ab 2 p -2ab -2ab p -2bc -2bc p 2ac -2 p 2bc -2bc p -2ab 2ab p -2 2ac p -2 -2bc p -2ab -2 p 2 -2ab p -2bc 2 p -2ac -2ac p 2c -2n

P 2c 2 P 2a 2a P 2 2b P 2 2ab P 2bc 2 P 2ac 2ac P 2ac 2ab C 2c 2 A 2a 2a B 2 2b C22 A22 B22 F22 I22 I 2b 2c P22 P22 P22 P 2c 2 P 2c 2 c P 2a 2a P 2 2a P 2 2b P 2b 2 P 2 2c P 2a 2 P 2b 2b P 2 2a P 2 2b P 2b 2 P 2c 2 P 2c 2c P 2a 2a P 2c 2ac P 2c 2 b P 2b 2a P 2ac 2a P 2bc 2c P 2a 2ab P 2 2bc P 2 2ac P 2ac 2 P 2ab 2 P 2ab 2ab P 2bc 2bc P 2ac 2 P 2bc 2bc P 2ab 2ab P 2 2ac P 2 2bc P 2ab 2 P 2 2ab P 2bc 2 P 2ac 2ac P 2c 2n

33:ba-c 33:cab 33:-cba 33:bca 33:a-cb 34 34:cab 34:bca 35 35:cab 35:bca 36 36:ba-c 36:cab 36:-cba 36:bca 36:a-cb 37 37:cab 37:bca 38 38:ba-c 38:cab 38:-cba 38:bca 38:a-cb 39 39:ba-c 39:cab 39:-cba 39:bca 39:a-cb 40 40:ba-c 40:cab 40:-cba 40:bca 40:a-cb 41 41:ba-c 41:cab 41:-cba 41:bca 41:a-cb 42 42:cab 42:bca 43 43:cab 43:bca 44 44:cab 44:bca 45 45:cab 45:bca

P b n 21 P 21 n b P 21 c n P c 21 n P n 21 a Pnn2 P2nn Pn2n Cmm2 A2mm Bm2m C m c 21 C c m 21 A 21 m a A 21 a m B b 21 m B m 21 b Ccc2 A2aa Bb2b Amm2 Bmm2 B2mm C2mm Cm2m Am2m Abm2 Bma2 B2cm C2mb Cm2a Ac2m Ama2 Bbm2 B2mb C2cm Cc2m Am2a Aba2 Bba2 B2cb C2cb Cc2a Ac2a Fmm2 F2mm Fm2m Fdd2 F2dd Fd2d Imm2 I2mm Im2m Iba2 I2cb Ic2a

p 2c -2ab p -2bc 2a p -2n 2a p -2n -2ac p -2ac -2n p 2 -2n p -2n 2 p -2n -2n c 2 -2 a -2 2 b -2 -2 c 2c -2 c 2c -2c a -2a 2a a -2 2a b -2 -2b b -2b -2 c 2 -2c a -2a 2 b -2b -2b a 2 -2 b 2 -2 b -2 2 c -2 2 c -2 -2 a -2 -2 a 2 -2b b 2 -2a b -2a 2 c -2a 2 c -2a -2a a -2b -2b a 2 -2a b 2 -2b b -2b 2 c -2c 2 c -2c -2c a -2a -2a a 2 -2ab b 2 -2ab b -2ab 2 c -2ac 2 c -2ac -2ac a -2ab -2ab f 2 -2 f -2 2 f -2 -2 f 2 -2d f -2d 2 f -2d -2d i 2 -2 i -2 2 i -2 -2 i 2 -2c i -2a 2 i -2b -2b

P 2c 2ab P 2bc 2a P 2n 2a P 2n 2ac P 2 ac 2n P 2 2n P 2n 2 P 2n 2n C22 A22 B22 C 2c 2 C 2c 2c A 2a 2a A 2 2a B 2 2b B 2b 2 C 2 2c A 2a 2 B 2b 2b A22 B22 B22 C22 C22 A22 A 2 2b B 2 2a B 2a 2 C 2a 2 C 2a 2a A 2b 2b A 2 2a B 2 2b B 2b 2 C 2c 2 C 2c 2c A 2a 2a A 2 2ab B 2 2ab B 2ab 2 C 2ac 2 C 2ac 2ac A 2ab 2ab F22 F22 F22 F 2 2d F 2d 2 F 2d 2d I22 I22 I22 I 2 2c I 2a 2 I 2b 2b

116

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.2.7. Hall symbols (cont.) n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

46 46:ba-c 46:cab 46:-cba 46:bca 46:a-cb 47 48:1 48:2 49 49:cab 49:bca 50:1 50:2 50:1cab 50:2cab 50:1bca 50:2bca 51 51:ba-c 51:cab 51:-cba 51:bca 51:a-cb 52 52:ba-c 52:cab 52:-cba 52:bca 52:a-cb 53 53:ba-c 53:cab 53:-cba 53:bca 53:a-cb 54 54:ba-c 54:cab 54:-cba 54:bca 54:a-cb 55 55:cab 55:bca 56 56:cab 56:bca 57 57:ba-c 57:cab 57:-cba 57:bca 57:a-cb 58 58:cab

Ima2 Ibm2 I2mb I2cm Ic2m Im2a Pmmm P n n n:1 P n n n:2 Pccm Pmaa Pbmb P b a n:1 P b a n:2 P n c b:1 P n c b:2 P c n a:1 P c n a:2 Pmma Pmmb Pbmm Pcmm Pmcm Pmam Pnna Pnnb Pbnn Pcnn Pncn Pnan Pmna Pnmb Pbmn Pcnm Pncm Pman Pcca Pccb Pbaa Pcaa Pbcb Pbab Pbam Pmcb Pcma Pccn Pnaa Pbnb Pbcm Pcam Pmca Pmab Pbma Pcmb Pnnm Pmnn

i 2 -2a i 2 -2b i -2b 2 i -2c 2 i -2c -2c i -2a -2a -p 2 2 p 2 2 -1n -p 2ab 2bc -p 2 2c -p 2a 2 -p 2b 2b p 2 2 -1ab -p 2ab 2b p 2 2 -1bc -p 2b 2bc p 2 2 -1ac -p 2a 2c -p 2a 2a -p 2b 2 -p 2 2b -p 2c 2c -p 2c 2 -p 2 2a -p 2a 2bc -p 2b 2n -p 2n 2b -p 2ab 2c -p 2ab 2n -p 2n 2bc -p 2ac 2 -p 2bc 2bc -p 2ab 2ab -p 2 2ac -p 2 2bc -p 2ab 2 -p 2a 2ac -p 2b 2c -p 2a 2b -p 2ac 2c -p 2bc 2b -p 2b 2ab -p 2 2ab -p 2bc 2 -p 2ac 2ac -p 2ab 2ac -p 2ac 2bc -p 2bc 2ab -p 2c 2b -p 2c 2ac -p 2ac 2a -p 2b 2a -p 2a 2ab -p 2bc 2c -p 2 2n -p 2n 2

I 2 2a I 2 2b I 2b 2 I 2c 2 I 2c 2c I 2a 2a P22 P 2 2 1n P 2ab 2bc P 2 2c P 2a 2 P 2b 2b P 2 2 1ab P 2ab 2b P 2 2 1bc P 2b 2bc P 2 2 1ac P 2a 2c P 2a 2a P 2b 2 P 2 2b P 2c 2c P 2c 2 P 2 2a P 2a 2bc P 2b 2n P 2n 2b P 2ab 2c P 2ab 2n P 2n 2bc P 2ac 2 P 2bc 2bc P 2ab 2ab P 2 2ac P 2 2bc P 2ab 2 P 2a 2ac P 2b 2c P 2a 2b P 2ac 2c P 2bc 2b P 2b 2ab P 2 2ab P 2bc 2 P 2ac 2ac P 2ab 2ac P 2ac 2bc P 2bc 2ab P 2c 2b P 2c 2ac P 2ac 2a P 2b 2a P 2a 2ab P 2bc 2c P 2 2n P 2n 2

58:bca 59:1 59:2 59:1cab 59:2cab 59:1bca 59:2bca 60 60:ba-c 60:cab 60:-cba 60:bca 60:a-cb 61 61:ba-c 62 62:ba-c 62:cab 62:-cba 62:bca 62:a-cb 63 63:ba-c 63:cab 63:-cba 63:bca 63:a-cb 64 64:ba-c 64:cab 64:-cba 64:bca 64:a-cb 65 65:cab 65:bca 66 66:cab 66:bca 67 67:ba-c 67:cab 67:-cba 67:bca 67:a-cb 68:1 68:2 68:1ba-c 68:2ba-c 68:1cab 68:2cab 68:1-cba 68:2-cba 68:1bca 68:2bca 68:1a-cb

Pnmn P m m n:1 P m m n:2 P n m m:1 P n m m:2 P m n m:1 P m n m:2 Pbcn Pcan Pnca Pnab Pbna Pcnb Pbca Pcab Pnma Pmnb Pbnm Pcmn Pmcn Pnam Cmcm Ccmm Amma Amam Bbmm Bmmb Cmca Ccmb Abma Acam Bbcm Bmab Cmmm Ammm Bmmm Cccm Amaa Bbmb Cmma Cmmb Abmm Acmm Bmcm Bmam C c c a:1 C c c a:2 C c c b:1 C c c b:2 A b a a:1 A b a a:2 A c a a:1 A c a a:2 B b c b:1 B b c b:2 B b a b:1

-p 2n 2n p 2 2ab -1ab -p 2ab 2a p 2bc 2 -1bc -p 2c 2bc p 2ac 2ac -1ac -p 2c 2a -p 2n 2ab -p 2n 2c -p 2a 2n -p 2bc 2n -p 2ac 2b -p 2b 2ac -p 2ac 2ab -p 2bc 2ac -p 2ac 2n -p 2bc 2a -p 2c 2ab -p 2n 2ac -p 2n 2a -p 2c 2n -c 2c 2 -c 2c 2c -a 2a 2a -a 2 2a -b 2 2b -b 2b 2 -c 2ac 2 -c 2ac 2ac -a 2ab 2ab -a 2 2ab -b 2 2ab -b 2ab 2 -c 2 2 -a 2 2 -b 2 2 -c 2 2c -a 2a 2 -b 2b 2b -c 2a 2 -c 2a 2a -a 2b 2b -a 2 2b -b 2 2a -b 2a 2 c 2 2 -1ac -c 2a 2ac c 2 2 -1ac -c 2a 2c a 2 2 -1ab -a 2a 2b a 2 2 -1ab -a 2ab 2b b 2 2 -1ab -b 2ab 2b b 2 2 -1ab

P 2n 2n P 2 2ab 1ab P 2ab 2a P 2bc 2 1bc P 2c 2bc P 2ac 2ac 1ac P 2c 2a P 2n 2ab P 2n 2c P 2a 2n P 2bc 2n P 2ac 2b P 2b 2ac P 2ac 2ab P 2bc 2ac P 2ac 2n P 2bc 2a P 2c 2ab P 2n 2ac P 2n 2a P 2c 2n C 2c 2 C 2c 2c A 2a 2a A 2 2a B 2 2b B 2b 2 C 2ac 2 C 2ac 2ac A 2ab 2ab A 2 2ab B 2 2ab B 2ab 2 C22 A22 B22 C 2 2c A 2a 2 B 2b 2b C 2a 2 C 2a 2a A 2b 2b A 2 2b B 2 2a B 2a 2 C 2 2 1ac C 2a 2ac C 2 2 1ac C 2a 2c A 2 2 1ab A 2a 2b A 2 2 1ab A 2ab 2b B 2 2 1ab B 2ab 2b B 2 2 1ab

117

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.2.7. Hall symbols (cont.) n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

68:2a-cb 69 70:1 70:2 71 72 72:cab 72:bca 73 73:ba-c 74 74:ba-c 74:cab 74:-cba 74:bca 74:a-cb 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85:1 85:2 86:1 86:2 87 88:1 88:2 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111

B b a b:2 Fmmm F d d d:1 F d d d:2 Immm Ibam Imcb Icma Ibca Icab Imma Immb Ibmm Icmm Imcm Imam P4 P 41 P 42 P 43 I4 I 41 P -4 I -4 P 4/m P 42/m P 4/n:1 P 4/n:2 P 42/n:1 P 42/n:2 I 4/m I 41/a:1 I 41/a:2 P422 P 4 21 2 P 41 2 2 P 41 21 2 P 42 2 2 P 42 21 2 P 43 2 2 P 43 21 2 I422 I 41 2 2 P4mm P4bm P 42 c m P 42 n m P4cc P4nc P 42 m c P 42 b c I4mm I4cm I 41 m d I 41 c d P -4 2 m

-b 2b 2ab -f 2 2 f 2 2 -1d -f 2uv 2vw -i 2 2 -i 2 2c -i 2a 2 -i 2b 2b -i 2b 2c -i 2a 2b -i 2b 2 -i 2a 2a -i 2c 2c -i 2 2b -i 2 2a -i 2c 2 p4 p 4w p 4c p 4cw i4 i 4bw p -4 i -4 -p 4 -p 4c p 4ab -1ab -p 4a p 4n -1n -p 4bc -i 4 i 4bw -1bw -i 4ad p42 p 4ab 2ab p 4w 2c p 4abw 2nw p 4c 2 p 4n 2n p 4cw 2c p 4nw 2abw i42 i 4bw 2bw p 4 -2 p 4 -2ab p 4c -2c p 4n -2n p 4 -2c p 4 -2n p 4c -2 p 4c -2ab i 4 -2 i 4 -2c i 4bw -2 i 4bw -2c p -4 2

B 2b 2ab F22 F 2 2 1d F 2uv 2vw I22 I 2 2c I 2a 2 I 2b 2b I 2b 2c I 2a 2b I 2b 2 I 2a 2a I 2c 2c I 2 2b I 2 2a I 2c 2 P4 P 4w P 4c P 4cw I4 I 4bw P4 I4 P4 P 4c P 4ab 1ab P 4a P 4n 1 n P 4bc I4 I 4bw 1bw I 4ad P42 P 4ab 2ab P 4w 2c P4abw 2 nw P 4c 2 P 4 n 2n P 4cw 2c P 4 nw 2abw I42 I 4bw 2bw P42 P 4 2ab P 4c 2c P 4n 2n P 4 2c P 4 2n P 4c 2 P 4c 2ab I42 I 4 2c I 4bw 2 I 4bw 2c P42

112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125:1 125:2 126:1 126:2 127 128 129:1 129:2 130:1 130:2 131 132 133:1 133:2 134:1 134:2 135 136 137:1 137:2 138:1 138:2 139 140 141:1 141:2 142:1 142:2 143 144 145 146:h 146:r 147 148:h 148:r 149 150 151 152 153 154 155:h

P -4 2 c P -4 21 m P -4 21 c P -4 m 2 P -4 c 2 P -4 b 2 P -4 n 2 I -4 m 2 I -4 c 2 I -4 2 m I -4 2 d P 4/m m m P 4/m c c P 4/n b m:1 P 4/n b m:2 P 4/n n c:1 P 4/n n c:2 P 4/m b m P 4/m n c P 4/n m m:1 P 4/n m m:2 P 4/n c c:1 P 4/n c c:2 P 42/m m c P 42/m c m P 42/n b c:1 P 42/n b c:2 P 42/n n m:1 P 42/n n m:2 P 42/m b c P 42/m n m P 42/n m c:1 P 42/n m c:2 P 42/n c m:1 P 42/n c m:2 I 4/m m m I 4/m c m I 41/a m d:1 I 41/a m d:2 I 41/a c d:1 I 41/a c d:2 P3 P 31 P 32 R 3:h R 3:r P -3 R -3:h R -3:r P312 P321 P 31 1 2 P 31 2 1 P 32 1 2 P 32 2 1 R 3 2:h

p -4 2c p -4 2ab p -4 2n p -4 -2 p -4 -2c p -4 -2ab p -4 -2n i -4 -2 i -4 -2c i -4 2 i -4 2bw -p 4 2 -p 4 2c p 4 2 -1ab -p 4a 2b p 4 2 -1n -p 4a 2bc -p 4 2ab -p 4 2n p 4ab 2ab -1ab -p 4a 2a p 4ab 2n -1ab -p 4a 2ac -p 4c 2 -p 4c 2c p 4n 2c -1n -p 4ac 2b p 4n 2 -1n -p 4ac 2bc -p 4c 2ab -p 4n 2n p 4n 2n -1n -p 4ac 2a p 4n 2ab -1n -p 4ac 2ac -i 4 2 -i 4 2c i 4bw 2bw -1bw -i 4bd 2 i 4bw 2aw -1bw -i 4bd 2c p3 p 31 p 32 r3 p 3* -p 3 -r 3 -p 3* p32 p 3 2" p 31 2 (0 0 4) p 31 2" p 32 2 (0 0 2) p 32 2" r 3 2"

P 4 2c P 4 2ab P 4 2n P42 P 4 2c P 4 2ab P 4 2n I42 I 4 2c I42 I 4 2bw P42 P 4 2c P 4 2 1ab P 4a 2b P 4 2 1n P 4a 2bc P 4 2ab P 4 2n P 4ab 2ab 1ab P 4a 2a P 4ab 2n 1ab P 4a 2ac P 4c 2 P 4c 2c P 4n 2c 1n P 4ac 2b P 4n 2 1n P 4ac 2bc P 4c 2ab P 4n 2n P 4n 2n 1n P 4ac 2a P 4n 2ab 1n P 4ac 2ac I42 I 4 2c I 4bw 2bw 1bw I 4bd 2 I 4bw 2aw 1bw I 4bd 2c P3 P 31 P 32 R3 P 3* P3 R3 P 3* P32 P 3 2" P 31 2 (0 0 4) P 31 2" P 32 2 (0 0 2) P 32 2" R 3 2"

118

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.2.7. Hall symbols (cont.) n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

n:c

H–M entry

Hall entry

Hall symbol

155:r 156 157 158 159 160:h 160:r 161:h 161:r 162 163 164 165 166:h 166:r 167:h 167:r 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193

R 3 2:r P3m1 P31m P3c1 P31c R 3 m:h R 3 m:r R 3 c:h R 3 c:r P -3 1 m P -3 1 c P -3 m 1 P -3 c 1 R -3 m:h R -3 m:r R -3 c:h R -3 c:r P6 P 61 P 65 P 62 P 64 P 63 P -6 P 6/m P 63/m P622 P 61 2 2 P 65 2 2 P 62 2 2 P 64 2 2 P 63 2 2 P6mm P6cc P 63 c m P 63 m c P -6 m 2 P -6 c 2 P -6 2 m P -6 2 c P 6/m m m P 6/m c c P 63/m c m

p 3* 2 p 3 -2" p 3 -2 p 3 -2"c p 3 -2c r 3 -2" p 3* -2 r 3 -2"c p 3* -2n -p 3 2 -p 3 2c -p 3 2" -p 3 2"c -r 3 2" -p 3* 2 -r 3 2"c -p 3* 2n p6 p 61 p 65 p 62 p 64 p 6c p -6 -p 6 -p 6c p62 p 61 2 (0 p 65 2 (0 p 62 2 (0 p 64 2 (0 p 6c 2c p 6 -2 p 6 -2c p 6c -2 p 6c -2c p -6 2 p -6c 2 p -6 -2 p -6c -2c -p 6 2 -p 6 2c -p 6c 2

P 3* 2 P 3 2" P32 P 3 2"c P 3 2c R 3 2" P 3* 2 R 3 2"c P 3* 2n P32 P 3 2c P 3 2" P 3 2"c R 3 2" P 3* 2 R 3 2"c P 3* 2n P6 P 61 P 65 P 62 P 64 P 6c P6 P6 P 6c P62 P 61 2 (0 P 65 2 (0 P 62 2 (0 P 64 2 (0 P 6 c 2c P62 P 6 2c P 6c 2 P 6c 2 c P62 P 6c 2 P62 P 6c 2c P62 P 6 2c P 6c 2

194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201:1 201:2 202 203:1 203:2 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222:1 222:2 223 224:1 224:2 225 226 227:1 227:2 228:1 228:2 229 230

P 63/m m c P23 F23 I23 P 21 3 I 21 3 P m -3 P n -3:1 P n -3:2 F m -3 F d -3:1 F d -3:2 I m -3 P a -3 I a -3 P432 P 42 3 2 F432 F 41 3 2 I432 P 43 3 2 P 41 3 2 I 41 3 2 P -4 3 m F -4 3 m I -4 3 m P -4 3 n F -4 3 c I -4 3 d P m -3 m P n -3 n:1 P n -3 n:2 P m -3 n P n -3 m:1 P n -3 m:2 F m -3 m F m -3 c F d -3 m:1 F d -3 m:2 F d -3 c:1 F d -3 c:2 I m -3 m I a -3 d

-p 6c 2c p223 f223 i223 p 2ac 2ab 3 i 2b 2c 3 -p 2 2 3 p 2 2 3 -1n -p 2ab 2bc 3 -f 2 2 3 f 2 2 3 -1d -f 2uv 2vw 3 -i 2 2 3 -p 2ac 2ab 3 -i 2b 2c 3 p423 p 4n 2 3 f423 f 4d 2 3 i423 p 4acd 2ab 3 p 4bd 2ab 3 i 4bd 2c 3 p -4 2 3 f -4 2 3 i -4 2 3 p -4n 2 3 f -4a 2 3 i -4bd 2c 3 -p 4 2 3 p 4 2 3 -1n -p 4a 2bc 3 -p 4n 2 3 p 4n 2 3 -1n -p 4bc 2bc 3 -f 4 2 3 -f 4a 2 3 f 4d 2 3 -1d -f 4vw 2vw 3 f 4d 2 3 -1ad -f 4ud 2vw 3 -i 4 2 3 -i 4bd 2c 3

P 6c 2c P223 F223 I223 P 2ac 2ab 3 I 2b 2 c 3 P223 P 2 2 3 1n P 2ab 2bc 3 F223 F 2 2 3 1d F 2uv 2vw 3 I223 P 2ac 2ab 3 I 2b 2c 3 P423 P 4n 2 3 F423 F 4d 2 3 I423 P 4acd 2ab 3 P 4bd 2ab 3 I 4bd 2c 3 P423 F423 I423 P 4n 2 3 F 4a 2 3 I 4bd 2c 3 P423 P 4 2 3 1n P 4a 2bc 3 P 4n 2 3 P 4n 2 3 1n P 4bc 2bc 3 F423 F 4a 2 3 F 4d 2 3 1d F 4vw 2vw 3 F 4d 2 3 1ad F 4ud 2vw 3 I423 I 4bd 2c 3

0 5) 0 1) 0 4) 0 2)

0 5) 0 1) 0 4) 0 2)

The codes appended to the space-group numbers listed in the first column identify the relationship between the symmetry elements and the crystal cell. Where no code is given the first choice listed below applies. Monoclinic. Code = : unique axis choices [cf. IT A (1983) Table 4.3.1] b, -b, c, -c, a, -a; cell choices [cf. IT A (1983) Table 4.3.1] 1, 2, 3. Orthorhombic. Code = <setting>: origin choices 1, 2; setting choices [cf. IT A (1983) Table 4.3.1] abc, ba-c, cab, -cba, bca, a-cb. Tetragonal, cubic. Code = : origin choices 1, 2. Trigonal. Code = : cell choices h (hexagonal), r (rhombohedral).

119

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Appendix 1.4.3. Structure-factor tables Table A1.4.3.1. Plane groups The symbols appearing in this table are explained in Section 1.4.3 and in Tables A1.4.3.3 (monoclinic), A1.4.3.5 (tetragonal) and A1.4.3.6 (trigonal and hexagonal). System

No.

Oblique

1 2 3 4

p1 p2 pm pg

5 6 7

cm p2mm p2mg

8

p2gg

9 10 11 12

c2mm p4 p4mm p4gm

13 14 15 16 17

p3 p3m1 p31m p6 p6mm

Rectangular

Square

Hexagonal

Symbol

Parity

k 2n k 2n 1

h 2n h 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1

h k 2n h k 2n 1

A

B

c(hk) 2c(hk) 2c(hx)c(ky) 2c(hx)c(ky) 2s(hx)s(ky) 4c(hx)c(ky) 4c(hx)c(ky) 4c(hx)c(ky) 4s(hx)s(ky) 4c(hx)c(ky) 4s(hx)s(ky) 8c(hx)c(ky) 2[P(cc) M(ss)] 4P(cc) 4P(cc) 4M(ss) C(hki) PH(cc) PH(cc) 2C(hki) 2PH(cc)

s(hk) 0 2c(hx)s(ky) 2c(hx)s(ky) 2s(hx)c(ky) 4c(hx)s(ky) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S(hki) MH(ss) PH(ss) 0 0

Table A1.4.3.2. Triclinic space groups For the definition of the triple products ccc, csc etc., see Table A1.4.3.4. P1 [No. 1] hkl

A

B

All

cos 2(hx ky lz) = ccc

css

scs

sin 2(hx ky lz) = scc csc ccs

ssc

P1 [No. 2] hkl

A

All

2(ccc

B css

scs

ssc)

0

120

sss

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.3. Monoclinic space groups Each expression for A or B in the monoclinic system and for the space-group settings chosen in IT A is represented in terms of one of the following symbols: chlcky cos2hx lz cos2ky, chlsky cos2hx lz sin2ky, shlcky sin2hx lz cos2ky,

chkclz cos2hx ky cos2lz, chkslz cos2hx ky sin2lz, shkclz sin2hx ky cos2lz,

shlsky sin2hx lz sin2ky,

shkslz sin2hx ky sin2lz,

A1:4:3:1

where the left-hand column of expressions corresponds to space-group representations in the second setting, with b taken as the unique axis, and the right-hand column corresponds to representations in the first setting, with c taken as the unique axis. The lattice types in this table are P, A, B, C and I, and are all explicit in the full space-group symbol only (see below). Note that s(hl), s(hk), s(ky) and s(lz) are zero for h = l = 0, h = k = 0, k = 0 and l = 0, respectively. Group symbol No.

Short

Full

3 3 4

P2 P2 P21

P121 P112 P121 1

4

P21

P1121

5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 7

C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 Pm Pm Pc

C121 A121 I121 A112 B112 I112 P1m1 P11m P1c1

7

Pc

P1n1

7

Pc

P1a1

7

Pc

P11a

7

Pc

P11n

7

Pc

P11b

8 8 8 8 8 8 9

Cm Cm Cm Cm Cm Cm Cc

C1m1 A1m1 I1m1 A11m B11m I11m C1c1

9

Cc

A1n1

9

Cc

I1a1

9

Cc

A11a

9

Cc

B11n

9

Cc

I11b

10

P2=m

P12=m1

Parity

A

k 2n k 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1

l 2n l 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 k 2n k 2n 1

l 2n l 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 k 2n k 2n 1

121

2c(hl)c(ky) 2c(hk)c(lz) 2c(hl)c(ky) 2s(hl)s(ky) 2c(hk)c(lz) 2s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 2c(hl)c(ky) 2c(hk)c(lz) 2c(hl)c(ky) 2s(hl)s(ky) 2c(hl)c(ky) 2s(hl)s(ky) 2c(hl)c(ky) 2s(hl)s(ky) 2c(hk)c(lz) 2s(hk)s(lz) 2c(hk)c(lz) 2s(hk)s(lz) 2c(hk)c(lz) 2s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hl)c(ky)

B 2c(hl)s(ky) 2c(hk)s(lz) 2c(hl)s(ky) 2s(hl)c(ky) 2c(hk)s(lz) 2s(hk)c(lz) 4c(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)s(ky) 4c(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)s(lz) 2s(hl)c(ky) 2s(hk)c(lz) 2s(hl)c(ky) 2c(hl)s(ky) 2s(hl)c(ky) 2c(hl)s(ky) 2s(hl)c(ky) 2c(hl)s(ky) 2s(hk)c(lz) 2c(hk)s(lz) 2s(hk)c(lz) 2c(hk)s(lz) 2s(hk)c(lz) 2c(hk)s(lz) 4s(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)c(ky) 4s(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)c(lz) 4s(hl)c(ky) 4c(hl)s(ky) 4s(hl)c(ky) 4c(hl)s(ky) 4s(hl)c(ky) 4c(hl)s(ky) 4s(hk)c(lz) 4c(hk)s(lz) 4s(hk)c(lz) 4c(hk)s(lz) 4s(hk)c(lz) 4c(hk)s(lz) 0

Unique axis b c b c b b b c c c b c b b b c c c b b b c c c b b b c c c b

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.3. Monoclinic space groups (cont.) Group symbol No.

Short

Full

10 11

P2=m P21 =m

P112=m P121 =m1

11

P21 =m

P1121 =m

12 12 12 12 12 12 13

C2=m C2=m C2=m C2=m C2=m C2=m P2=c

C12=m1 A12=m1 I12=m1 A112=m B112=m I112=m P12=c1

13

P2=c

P12=n1

13

P2=c

P12=a1

13

P2=c

P112=a

13

P2=c

P112=n

13

P2=c

P112=b

14

P21 =c

P121 =c1

14

P21 =c

P121 =n1

14

P21 =c

P121 =a1

14

P21 =c

P1121 =a

14

P21 =c

P1121 =n

14

P21 =c

P1121 =b

15

C2=c

C12=c1

15

C2=c

A12=n1

15

C2=c

I12=a1

15

C2=c

A112=a

15

C2=c

B112=n

15

C2=c

I112=b

Parity

A

k 2n k 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1

l 2n l 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 k 2n k 2n 1 k l 2n k l 2n 1 h k l 2n h k l 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 h k l 2n h k l 2n 1 k l 2n k l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 k 2n k 2n 1

122

4c(hk)c(lz) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 8c(hl)c(ky) 8c(hl)c(ky) 8c(hl)c(ky) 8c(hk)c(lz) 8c(hk)c(lz) 8c(hk)c(lz) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hl)c(ky) 4s(hl)s(ky) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 4c(hk)c(lz) 4s(hk)s(lz) 8c(hl)c(ky) 8s(hl)s(ky) 8c(hl)c(ky) 8s(hl)s(ky) 8c(hl)c(ky) 8s(hl)s(ky) 8c(hk)c(lz) 8s(hk)s(lz) 8c(hk)c(lz) 8s(hk)s(lz) 8c(hk)c(lz) 8s(hk)s(lz)

Unique axis

B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

c b c b b b c c c b b b c c c b b b c c c b b b c c c

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.4. Orthorhombic space groups The expressions for A and B for the orthorhombic space groups in their standard settings [as in IT A (1983)] contain one, two or four terms of the form pqr p2hxq2kyr2lz

A1:4:3:2

preceded by a signed numerical constant, where p, q and r can each be either a sine or a cosine function, and the arguments of the functions in any product of the form (A1.4.3.2) are ordered as in (A1.4.3.2). These products are given in this table as ccc, ccs, csc, scc, ssc, scs, css and/or sss, where c and s are abbreviations for ‘sin’ and ‘cos’, respectively. Note that pqr vanishes if at least one of p, q and r is a sine, and the corresponding index h, k or l is zero. No.

Symbol

16 17

P222 P2221

18

P21 21 2

19

P21 21 21

20

C2221

21 22 23 24

C222 F222 I222 I21 21 21

25 26

Pmm2 Pmc21

27

Pcc2

28

Pma2

29

Pca21

30

Pnc2

31

Pmn21

32

Pba2

33

Pna21

34

Pnn2

35 36

Cmm2 Cmc21

37

Ccc2

38 39

Amm2 Abm2

40

Ama2

Origin

Parity

A

B 4ccc 4ccc 4css 4ccc 4ssc 4ccc 4css 4scs 4ssc 8ccc 8css 8ccc 16ccc 8ccc 8ccc 8scs 8ssc 8css 4ccc 4ccc 4css 4ccc 4ssc 4ccc 4ssc 4ccc 4scs 4ssc 4css 4ccc 4ssc 4ccc 4css 4ccc 4ssc 4ccc 4scs 4ssc 4css 4ccc 4ssc 8ccc 8ccc 8css 8ccc 8ssc 8ccc 8ccc 8ssc 8ccc

l 2n l 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 h k 2n; k l 2n h k 2n; k l 2n 1 h k 2n 1; k l 2n h k 2n 1; k l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1

h, k, l all even h 2n; k, l 2n 1 k 2n; l, h 2n 1 l 2n; h, k 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h 2n; l 2n h 2n; l 2n 1 h 2n 1; l 2n h 2n 1; l 2n 1 k l 2n k l 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 h k 2n; l 2n h k 2n; l 2n 1 h k 2n 1; l 2n h k 2n 1; l 2n 1 h k l 2n h k l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1 k 2n k 2n 1 h 2n

123

4sss 4sss 4scc 4sss 4ccs 4sss 4scc 4csc 4ccs 8sss 8scc 8sss 16sss 8sss 8sss 8csc 8ccs 8scc 4ccs 4ccs 4csc 4ccs 4sss 4ccs 4sss 4ccs 4scc 4sss 4csc 4ccs 4sss 4ccs 4csc 4ccs 4sss 4ccs 4scc 4sss 4csc 4ccs 4sss 8ccs 8ccs 8csc 8ccs 8sss 8ccs 8ccs 8sss 8ccs

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.4. Orthorhombic space groups (cont.) No.

Symbol

41

Aba2

42 43

Fmm2 Fdd2

Origin

Parity

A

h 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 h k l 4n h k l 4n 1 h k l 4n 2 h k l 4n 3

44 45

Imm2 Iba2

46

Iam2

47 48

Pmmm Pnnn

(1)

48

Pnnn

(2)

49

Pccm

50

Pban

(1)

50

Pban

(2)

51

Pmma

52

Pnna

53

Pmna

54

Pcca

55

Pbam

56

Pccn

57

Pbcm

58

Pnnm

59

Pmmn

(1)

59

Pmmn

(2)

8(ccc 8(ccc

l 2n l 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h k l 2n h k l 2n 1 h k 2n; k l 2n h k 2n; k l 2n 1 h k 2n 1; k l 2n h k 2n 1; k l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 h 2n; k 2n h 2n; k 2n 1 h 2n 1; k 2n h 2n 1; k 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h 2n; k l 2n h 2n; k l 2n 1 h 2n 1; k l 2n h 2n 1; k l 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 h 2n; l 2n h 2n; l 2n 1 h 2n 1; l 2n h 2n 1; l 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 h k 2n; h l 2n h k 2n; h l 2n 1 h k 2n 1; h l 2n h k 2n 1; h l 2n 1 k 2n; l 2n k 2n; l 2n 1 k 2n 1; l 2n k 2n 1; l 2n 1 h k l 2n h k l 2n 1 h k 2n h k 2n 1 h 2n; k 2n h 2n; k 2n 1

124

8ssc 8ccc 8ssc 16ccc 16ccc ssc ccs sss) 16ssc ssc ccs sss) 8ccc 8ccc 8ssc 8ccc 8ssc 8ccc 8ccc 0 8ccc 8ssc 8css 8scs 8ccc 8ssc 8ccc 0 8ccc 8scs 8css 8ssc 8ccc 8scs 8ccc 8ssc 8css 8scs 8ccc 8css 8ccc 8ssc 8scs 8css 8ccc 8ssc 8ccc 8ssc 8css 8scs 8ccc 8css 8ssc 8scs 8ccc 8ssc 8ccc 0 8ccc 8css

B

8(ccs 8(ccs

8sss 8ccs 8sss 16ccs 16ccs sss ccc ssc) 16sss sss ccc ssc) 8ccs 8ccs 8sss 8ccs 8sss 0 0 8sss 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8sss 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8ccs 0 0

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.4. Orthorhombic space groups (cont.) No.

Symbol

Origin

Pbcn

61

Pbca

62

Pnma

63

Cmcm

64

Cmca

65 66

Cmmm Cccm

67

Cmma

68

Ccca

(1)

68

Ccca

(2)

69 70

Fmmm Fddd

(1)

70

Fddd

(2)

Immm Ibam

73

Ibca

74

Imma

A

h 2n 1; k 2n h 2n 1; k 2n 1 h k 2n; l 2n h k 2n; l 2n 1 h k 2n 1; l 2n h k 2n 1; l 2n 1 h k 2n; k l 2n h k 2n; k l 2n 1 h k 2n 1; k l 2n h k 2n 1; k l 2n 1 h l 2n; k 2n h l 2n; k 2n 1 h l 2n 1; k 2n h l 2n 1; k 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1 k l 2n k l 2n 1

60

71 72

Parity

l 2n l 2n 1 h 2n h 2n 1 h l 2n h l 2n 1 k 2n; l 2n k 2n; l 2n 1 k 2n 1; l 2n k 2n 1; l 2n 1 h k l 4n h k l 4n 1 h k l 4n 2 h k l 4n 3 h k 4n; k l 4n; l h 4n h k 4n; k l 4n 2; l h 4n 2 h k 4n 2; k l 4n; l h 4n 2 h k 4n 2; k l 4n 2; l h 4n h k 4n 2; k l 4n 2; l h 4n 2 h k 4n 2; k l 4n; l h 4n h k 4n; k l 4n 2; l h 4n h k 4n; k l 4n; l h 4n 2 l 2n l 2n 1 h 2n; k 2n h 2n; k 2n 1 h 2n 1; k 2n h 2n 1; k 2n 1 k 2n k 2n 1

125

B 8scs 8ssc 8ccc 8css 8scs 8ssc 8ccc 8css 8scs 8ssc 8ccc 8ssc 8scs 8css 16ccc 16css 16ccc 16css 16ccc 16ccc 16ssc 16ccc 16css 16ccc 0 16ccc 16ssc 16scs 16css 32ccc 32ccc 16(ccc sss) 0 16(ccc sss) 32ccc 32ssc

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16sss 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 32sss A 0 0

32css

0

32scs

0

16(ccc ssc scs css)

0

16(ccc ssc scs css) 16(ccc ssc scs css) 16(ccc ssc scs css) 16ccc 16ccc 16ssc 16ccc 16scs 16ssc 16css 16ccc 16css

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.5. Tetragonal space groups The symbols appearing in this table are based on the factorization of the scalar product appearing in equations (1.4.2.19) and (1.4.2.20) into its plane-group and unique-axis components. The symbols are Ppq p2hxq2ky p2hyq2kx Mpq p2hxq2ky p2hyq2kx,

A1:4:3:3

where p and q can each be a sine or a cosine. Explicit trigonometric functions given in the table follow the convention cu cos2u su sin2u: Conditions for vanishing symbols: Pss Mss 0 if h 0 or k 0, Psc Msc 0 if h 0, Pcs Mcs 0 if k 0, Mcc Mss 0 if h k or h k, and any explicit sine function vanishes if all the indices (h and k, or l) appearing in its argument are zero. P4 [No. 75] hkl

A

B

All

2[P(cc)

M(ss)]c(lz)

2[P(cc)

M(ss)]s(lz)

P41 [No. 76] (enantiomorphous to P43 [No. 78]) l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 2[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) 2[s(hx ky)s(lz) s(hy 2[M(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) 2[s(hx ky)s(lz) s(hy

2[P(cc) M(ss)]s(lz) 2[s(hx ky)c(lz) s(hy 2[M(cc) P(ss)]s(lz) 2[s(hx ky)c(lz) s(hy

kx)c(lz)] kx)c(lz)]

kx)s(lz)] kx)s(lz)]

P42 [No. 77] l

A

2n 2n 1

2[P(cc) 2[M(cc)

B M(ss)]c(lz) P(ss)]c(lz)

2[P(cc) 2[M(cc)

M(ss)]s(lz) P(ss)]s(lz)


A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 2[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) 2[s(hx ky)s(lz) s(hy kx)c(lz)] 2[M(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) 2[s(hx ky)s(lz) s(hy kx)c(lz)]

2[P(cc) M(ss)]s(lz) 2[s(hx ky)c(lz) s(hy 2[M(cc) P(ss)]s(lz) 2[s(hx ky)c(lz) s(hy

kx)s(lz)] kx)s(lz)]

I4 [No. 79] hkl

A

All

4[P(cc)

B M(ss)]c(lz)

4[P(cc)

M(ss)]s(lz)

I41 [No. 80] 2h l

A

B

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

4[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) 4[c(hx ky)c(lz) c(hy 4[M(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) 4[c(hx ky)c(lz) c(hy

4[P(cc) M(ss)]s(lz) 4[c(hx ky)s(lz) c(hy 4[M(cc) P(ss)]s(lz) 4[c(hx ky)s(lz) c(hy

kx)s(lz)] kx)s(lz)]

126

kx)c(lz)] kx)c(lz)]

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.5. Tetragonal space groups (cont.)

P4 [No. 81] hkl

A

B

All

2[P(cc)

M(ss)]c(lz)

2[M(cc)

M(ss)]c(lz)

4[M(cc)

P(ss)]s(lz)

I4 [No. 82] hkl

A

All

4[P(cc)

B P(ss)]s(lz)

P4=m [No. 83] hkl

A

B

All

4[P(cc)

M(ss)]c(lz)

0

P42 =m [No. 84] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1

4[P(cc) 4[M(cc)

M(ss)]c(lz) P(ss)]c(lz)

P4=n [No. 85, Origin 1] hk

A

2n 2n 1

4[P(cc) 0

B M(ss)]c(lz)

0 4[M(cc)

P(ss)]s(lz)

P4=n [No. 85, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

A

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

4[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) 4[P(cs) M(sc)]s(lz) 4[M(cs) P(sc)]s(lz) 4[M(cc) P(ss)]c(lz)

P42 =n [No. 86, Origin 1] hkl

A

2n 2n 1

4[P(cc) 0

B M(ss)]c(lz)

0 4[M(cc)

P(ss)]s(lz)

P42 =n [No. 86, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 4[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) 4[M(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) 4[M(cs) P(sc)]s(lz) 4[P(cs) M(sc)]s(lz)

I4=m [No. 87] hkl

A

All

8[P(cc)

B M(ss)]c(lz)

0

127

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.5. Tetragonal space groups (cont.)

I41 =a [No. 88, Origin 1] 2k l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

8[P(cc) 4[P(cc) 0 4[P(cc)

B M(ss)]c(lz) M(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc)

P(ss)]s(lz)

M(ss)]c(lz)

P(ss)]s(lz)

[M(cc)

0 A 8[M(cc) A

P(ss)]s(lz)

I41 =a [No. 88, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2

A 8[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) 8[s(hx ky)s(lz) c(hy 8[c(hx ky)c(lz) s(hy 8[M(cs) P(sc)]s(lz) 8[M(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) 8[s(hx ky)s(lz) c(hy 8[c(hx ky)c(lz) s(hy 8[P(cs) M(sc)]s(lz)

kx)c(lz)] kx)s(lz)]

kx)c(lz)] kx)s(lz)]

P422 [No. 89] hkl

A

All

4P(cc)c(lz)

B 4M(ss)s(lz)

P421 2 [No. 90] hk

A

2n 2n 1

B 4P(cc)c(lz) 4P(ss)c(lz)

4M(ss)s(lz) 4M(cc)s(lz)

P41 22 [No. 91] (enantiomorphous to P43 22 [No. 95]) l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 4P(cc)c(lz) 4[s(hx)c(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)c(lz)] 4M(cc)c(lz) 4[s(hx)c(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)c(lz)]

4M(ss)s(lz) 4[c(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)c(hy)s(lz)] 4P(ss)s(lz) 4[c(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)c(hy)s(lz)]

P41 21 2 [No. 92] (enantiomorphous to P43 21 2 [No. 96]) 2h 2k l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 4P(cc)c(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs) M(sc)]s(lz)} 4P(ss)c(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs) M(sc)]s(lz)}

4M(ss)s(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs) 4M(cc)s(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs)

P42 22 [No. 93] l

A

2n 2n 1

4P(cc)c(lz) 4M(cc)c(lz)

B 4M(ss)s(lz) 4P(ss)s(lz)

128

M(sc)]s(lz)} M(sc)s(lz)}


P42 21 2 [No. 94] hkl

A

2n 2n 1


4M(ss)s(lz) 4M(cc)s(lz)


A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 4P(cc)c(lz) 4[s(hx)c(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)c(lz)] 4M(cc)c(lz) 4[s(hx)c(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)c(lz)]

4M(ss)s(lz) 4[c(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)c(hy)c(lz)] 4P(ss)s(lz) 4[c(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)c(hy)c(lz)]

P43 21 2 [No. 96] (enantiomorphous to P41 21 2 [No. 92]) 2h 2k l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 4P(cc)c(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs) M(sc)]s(lz)} 4P(ss)c(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs) M(sc)]s(lz)}

4M(ss)s(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs) 4M(cc)s(lz) 2{[P(sc) P(cs)]c(lz) [M(cs)

M(sc)]s(lz)} M(sc)]s(lz)}

I422 [No. 97] hkl

A

B

All

8P(cc)c(lz)

8M(ss)s(lz)

I41 22 [No. 98] 2k l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 8P(cc)c(lz) 4{[P(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc) M(ss)]s(lz)} 8P(ss)c(lz) 4{[P(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc) M(ss)]s(lz)}

8M(ss)s(lz) 4{[P(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc) 8M(cc)s(lz) 4{[P(cc) P(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc)

P4mm [No. 99] hkl

A

B

All

4P(cc)c(lz)

4P(cc)s(lz)

A

B

P4bm [No. 100] hk 2n 2n 1

4P(cc)c(lz) 4M(ss)c(lz)

4P(cc)s(lz) 4M(ss)s(lz)

P42 cm [No. 101] l 2n 2n 1

A


4P(cc)s(lz) 4P(ss)s(lz)

129

M(ss)]s(lz)} M(ss)]s(lz)}


P42 nm [No. 102] hkl

A

2n 2n 1


4P(cc)s(lz) 4P(ss)s(lz)

P4cc [No. 103] l

A

2n 2n 1

B 4P(cc)c(lz) 4M(ss)c(lz)


P4nc [No. 104] hkl

A

2n 2n 1



P42 mc [No. 105] l

A

B

2n 2n 1


4P(cc)s(lz) 4M(cc)s(lz)

P42 bc [No. 106] hk

l

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

A

B 4P(cc)c(lz) 4M(ss)c(lz) 4M(cc)c(lz) 4P(ss)c(lz)

4P(cc)s(lz) 4M(ss)s(lz) 4M(cc)s(lz) 4P(ss)s(lz)

I4mm [No. 107] hkl

A

B

All

8P(cc)c(lz)

8P(cc)s(lz)

A

B

I4cm [No. 108] l 2n 2n 1



I41 md [No. 109] 2k l

A

B

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

8P(cc)c(lz) 8[c(hx)c(ky)c(lz) c(kx)c(hy)s(lz)] 8M(cc)c(lz) 8[c(hx)c(ky)c(lz) c(kx)c(hy)s(lz)]

8P(cc)s(lz) 8[c(hx)c(ky)s(lz) c(kx)c(hy)c(lz)] 8M(cc)s(lz) 8[c(hx)c(ky)s(lz) c(kx)c(hy)c(lz)]

130


I41 cd [No. 110] 2k l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 8P(cc)c(lz) 8[s(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)s(hy)s(lz)] 8M(cc)c(lz) 8[s(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)s(hy)s(lz)]

8P(cc)s(lz) 8[s(hx)s(ky)s(lz) s(kx)s(hy)c(lz)] 8M(cc)s(lz) 8[s(hx)s(ky)s(lz) s(kx)s(hy)c(lz)]

P42m [No. 111] hkl

A

All

4P(cc)c(lz)

B 4P(ss)s(lz)

P42c [No. 112] l

A

2n 2n 1


4P(ss)s(lz) 4M(cc)s(lz)

P421 m [No. 113] hk

A

2n 2n 1



P421 c [No. 114] hkl

A

2n 2n 1



P4m2 [No. 115] hkl

A

B

All

4P(cc)c(lz)

4M(cc)s(lz)

A

B

P4c2 [No. 116] l 2n 2n 1


4M(cc)s(lz) 4P(ss)s(lz)

P4b2 [No. 117] hk

A

2n 2n 1



P4n2 [No. 118] hkl 2n 2n 1

A



131


I4m2 [No. 119] hkl

A

B

All

8P(cc)c(lz)

8M(cc)s(lz)

A

B

I4c2 [No. 120] l 2n 2n 1



I42m [No. 121] hkl

A

B

All

8P(cc)c(lz)

8P(ss)s(lz)

I42d [No. 122] 2h l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

B 8P(cc)c(lz) 4{[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc) P(ss)]s(lz)} 8M(ss)c(lz) 4{[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc) P(ss)]s(lz)}

8P(ss)s(lz) 4{[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc) 8M(cc)s(lz) 4{[P(cc) M(ss)]c(lz) [M(cc)

P4=mmm [No. 123] hkl

A

B

All

8P(cc)c(lz)

0

P4=mcc [No. 124] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1


P4=nbm [No. 125, Origin 1] hk

A

B

2n 2n 1

8P(cc)c(lz) 0

0 8M(ss)s(lz)

P4=nbm [No. 125, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8M(sc)s(lz) 8M(cs)s(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz)

132

P(ss)]s(lz)} P(ss)]s(lz)}


P4=nnc [No. 126, Origin 1] hkl

A

B

2n 2n 1

8P(cc)c(lz) 0

0 8M(ss)s(lz)

P4=nnc [No. 126, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

l

2n 2n 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8M(ss)c(lz) 8M(sc)s(lz) 8P(cs)s(lz) 8M(cs)s(lz) 8P(sc)s(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz) 8M(cc)c(lz)

P4=mbm [No. 127] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

A

2n 2n 1


P4=mnc [No. 128] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hkl

A

2n 2n 1


P4=nmm [No. 129, Origin 1] hk

A

B

2n 2n 1

8P(cc)c(lz) 0

0 8M(cc)s(lz)

P4=nmm [No. 129, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8P(cs)s(lz) 8P(sc)s(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz)

P4=ncc [No. 130, Origin 1] hk

l

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A

B 8P(cc)c(lz) 8M(ss)c(lz) 0 0

0 0 8M(cc)s(lz) 8P(ss)s(lz)

133


P4=ncc [No. 130, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

l

2n 2n 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8M(ss)c(lz) 8P(cs)s(lz) 8M(sc)s(lz) 8P(sc)s(lz) 8M(cs)s(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz) 8M(cc)c(lz)

P42 =mmc [No. 131] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1


P42 =mcm [No. 132] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1

8P(cc)c(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz)

P42 =nbc [No. 133, Origin 1] hkl

l

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A


0 0 8P(ss)s(lz) 8M(cc)s(lz)

P42 =nbc [No. 133, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

l

2n 2n 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8M(cc)c(lz) 8M(sc)s(lz) 8P(sc)s(lz) 8M(cs)s(lz) 8P(cs)s(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz) 8M(ss)c(lz)

P42 =nnm [No. 134, Origin 1] hkl

A

B

2n 2n 1

8P(cc)c(lz) 0

0 8P(ss)s(lz)

P42 =nnm [No. 134, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz) 8M(sc)s(lz) 8M(cs)s(lz)

134


P42 =mbc [No. 135] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

l

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8M(cc)c(lz) 8M(ss)c(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz)

P42 =mnm [No. 136] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hkl

A

2n 2n 1

8P(cc)c(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz)

P42 =nmc [No. 137, Origin 1] hkl

A

B

2n 2n 1

8P(cc)c(lz) 0

0 8M(cc)s(lz)

P42 =nmc [No. 137, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

l

2n 2n 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8M(cc)c(lz) 8P(cs)s(lz) 8M(cs)s(lz) 8P(sc)s(lz) 8M(sc)s(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz) 8M(ss)c(lz)

P42 =ncm [No. 138, Origin 1] hk

l

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A


0 0 8M(cc)s(lz) 8P(ss)s(lz)

P42 =ncm [No. 138, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A 8P(cc)c(lz) 8P(ss)c(lz) 8P(cs)s(lz) 8P(sc)s(lz)

I4=mmm [No. 139] hkl

A

B

All

16P(cc)c(lz)

0

135


I4=mcm [No. 140] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1


I41 =amd [No. 141, Origin 1] 2h l

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

16P(cc)c(lz) 8[P(cc)c(lz) M(cc)s(lz)] 0 8[P(cc)c(lz) M(cc)s(lz)]

B 0 A 16M(cc)s(lz) A

I41 =amd [No. 141, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2

A 16P(cc)c(lz) 16[c(hx)s(ky)s(lz) c(kx)c(hy)c(lz)] 16[c(hx)c(ky)c(lz) c(kx)s(hy)s(lz)] 16[c(hx)s(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)s(lz)] 16M(cc)c(lz) 16[c(hx)s(ky)s(lz) c(kx)c(hy)c(lz)] 16[c(hx)c(ky)c(lz) c(kx)s(hy)s(lz)] 16[c(hx)s(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)s(lz)]

I41 =acd [No. 142, Origin 1] 2h l 4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

A

B 16P(cc)c(lz) 8[M(ss)c(lz) P(ss)s(lz)] 0 8[M(ss)c(lz) P(ss)s(lz)]

0 A 16M(cc)s(lz) A

I41 =acd [No. 142, Origin 2] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2

A 16P(cc)c(lz) 16[s(hx)c(ky)s(lz) s(kx)s(hy)c(lz)] 16[s(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)c(hy)s(lz)] 16[c(hx)s(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)s(lz)] 16M(cc)c(lz) 16[s(hx)c(ky)s(lz) s(kx)s(hy)c(lz)] 16[s(hx)s(ky)c(lz) s(kx)c(hy)s(lz)] 16[c(hx)s(ky)s(lz) c(kx)s(hy)s(lz)]

136

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.6. Trigonal and hexagonal space groups The table lists the expressions for A and B for the space groups belonging to the hexagonal family. For the space groups that are referred to hexagonal axes the expressions are given in terms of symbols related to the decomposition of the scalar products into their plane-group and unique-axis components [cf. equations (1.4.3.10)–(1.4.3.12)]. The symbols for the seven rhombohedral space groups in their rhombohedral-axes representation are the same as those used for the cubic space groups [cf. equations (1.4.3.4) and (1.4.3.5), and the notes at the start of Table A1.4.3.7]. Factors of the forms cos2x and sin2x are abbreviated by c(x) and s(x), respectively. All the symbols used in this table are repeated below. Most expressions are given in terms of Chki cp1 cp2 cp3 , Ckhi cq1 cq2 cq3 and Shki sp1 sp2 sp3 , Skhi sq1 sq2 sq3 ,

A1:4:3:4

where p1 hx ky, p2 kx iy, p3 ix hy, q1 kx hy, q2 hx iy, q3 ix ky,

A1:4:3:5

and the abbreviations PHcc Chki Ckhi, PHss Shki Skhi, MHcc Chki MHss Shki

Ckhi and Skhi:

A1:4:3:6

In addition, the following abbreviations are employed for some space groups: u1 lz, u2 lz 13 and u3 lz

1 3:

Conditons for vanishing symbols: Shki Skhi 0 if h k 0, PHss 0 if h k or k i or i h, MHcc 0 if jhj jkj or jkj jij or jij jhj and any explicit sine function vanishes if all the indices (h and k, or l) appearing in its argument are zero. P3 [No. 143] hkl

A

All

C(hki)c(lz)

B C(hki)s(lz) S(hki)c(lz)

S(hki)s(lz)


A

B

3n

as for P3 [No. 143]

3n 1 3n 2

c(p1 u1 ) c(p2 u2 ) c(p3 u3 ) c(p1 u1 ) c(p2 u3 ) c(p3 u2 )

s(p1 u1 ) s(p2 u2 ) s(p3 u3 ) s(p1 u1 ) s(p2 u3 ) s(p3 u2 )


A, B

3n 3n 1 3n 2

as for P3 [No. 143] as for l = 3n 2 in P31 [No. 144] as for l = 3n 1 in P31 [No. 144]

R3 [No. 146] (rhombohedral axes) hkl

A

B

All

c(hx ky lz) c(kx ly hz) c(lx hy kz)

s(hx ky lz) s(kx ly hz) s(lx hy kz)

R3 [No. 146] (hexagonal axes) hkl

A

All

3[C(hki)c(lz)

B 3[C(hki)s(lz) S(hki)c(lz)]

S(hki)s(lz)]

137

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.6. Trigonal and hexagonal space groups (cont.)

P3 [No. 147] hkl

A

All

2[C(hki)c(lz)

B S(hki)s(lz)]

0


A

B

All

2[c(hx ky lz) c(kx ly hz) c(lx hy kz)]

0


A

All

6[C(hki)c(lz)

B S(hki)s(lz)]

0

P312 [No. 149] hkl

A

All

PH(cc)c(lz)

B PH(ss)s(lz)

MH(cc)s(lz) MH(ss)c(lz)

MH(ss)s(lz)

PH(ss)c(lz) MH(cc)s(lz)

P321 [No. 150] hkl

A

All

PH(cc)c(lz)

B


A

3n

as for P312 [No. 149]

3n 1

cp1 u1 cp2 u2 cp3 u3 cq1 u2 cq2 u3 cq3 u1 cp1 u1 cp2 u3 cp3 u2 cq1 u3 cq2 u2 cq3 u1

3n 2

B

sp1 u1 sp2 u2 sp3 u3 sq2 u3 sq3 u1 sp1 u1 sp2 u3 sp3 u2 sq2 u2 sq3 u1

sq1 u2 sq1 u3


A

B

3n

as for P321 [No. 150]

3n 1

cp1 u1 cp2 u2 cp3 u3 cq1 cq2 u2 cq3 u3 cp1 u1 cp2 u3 cp3 u2 cq1 cq2 u3 cq3 u2

3n 2

u1

s(p1 u1 ) s(p2 u2 ) s(p3 u3 ) s(q1 sq2 u2 ) s(q3 u3 ) sp1 u1 sp2 u3 sp3 u2 sq1 sq2 u3 sq3 u2

u1


A, B

3n 3n 1 3n 2

as for P312 [No. 149] as for l = 3n 2 in P31 12 [No. 151] as for l = 3n 1 in P31 12 [No. 151]


A, B

3n 3n 1 3n 2


138

u1 ) u1

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.6. Trigonal and hexagonal space groups (cont.)


A

All

Eccc

B Ecss

Escs

Essc Occc

Ocss

Oscs

Ossc

Escc Ecsc Eccs

Esss

Oscc

Ocsc

Occs Osss


A

All

3[PH(cc)c(lz)

B 3[PH(ss)c(lz) MH(cc)s(lz)]

MH(ss)s(lz)]

P3m1 [No. 156] hkl

A

B

All

PH(cc)c(lz)

PH(cc)s(lz) MH(ss)c(lz)

MH(ss)s(lz)

P31m [No. 157] hkl

A

B

All

PH(cc)c(lz)

PH(ss)s(lz)

PH(cc)s(lz) PH(ss)c(lz)

MH(ss)s(lz) PH(ss)s(lz)

PH(cc)s(lz) MH(ss)c(lz) PH(ss)c(lz) MH(cc)s(lz)

P3c1 [No. 158] l

A

2n 2n 1

PH(cc)c(lz) MH(cc)c(lz)

B

P31c [No. 159] l

A

B

2n 2n 1

PH(cc)c(lz) MH(cc)c(lz)

PH(cc)s(lz) PH(ss)c(lz) MH(cc)s(lz) MH(ss)c(lz)

PH(ss)s(lz) MH(ss)s(lz)

R3m [No. 160] (rhombohedral axes) hkl

A

All

Eccc

B Ecss

Escs

Essc Occc

Ocss

Oscs

Ossc

Escc Ecsc Eccs

Esss Oscc Ocsc Occs

Osss

R3m [No. 160] (hexagonal axes) hkl

A

B

All

3[PH(cc)c(lz)

3[PH(cc)s(lz) MH(ss)c(lz)]

MH(ss)s(lz)]

R3c [No. 161] (rhombohedral axes) hkl

A

2n 2n 1

Eccc Eccc

B Ecss Ecss

Escs Escs

Essc Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc Essc Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc

Escc Ecsc Eccs Escc Ecsc Eccs

Esss Oscc Ocsc Occs Osss Esss Oscc Ocsc Occs Osss

R3c [No. 161] (hexagonal axes) l

A

2n 2n 1

3[PH(cc)c(lz) 3[MH(cc)c(lz)

B 3[PH(cc)s(lz) MH(ss)c(lz)] 3[PH(ss)c(lz) MH(cc)s(lz)]

MH(ss)s(lz)] PH(ss)s(lz)]

139


P31m [No. 162] (B 0 for all h, k, l) A 2[PH(cc)c(lz)

PH(ss)s(lz)]

P31c [No. 163] (B 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1


PH(ss)s(lz)] MH(ss)s(lz)]

P3m1 [No. 164] (B 0 for all h, k, l) A 2[PH(cc)c(lz)

MH(ss)s(lz)]

P3c1 [No. 165] (B 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1



R3m [No. 166] (rhombohedral axes, B 0 for all h, k, l) A 2(Eccc

Ecss

Escs

Essc Occc

Ocss

Oscs

Ossc)

R3m [No. 166] (hexagonal axes, B 0 for all h, k, l) A 6[PH(cc)c(lz)

MH(ss)s(lz)]

R3c [No. 167] (rhombohedral axes, B 0 for all h, k, l) hkl

A

2n 2n 1

2(Eccc 2(Eccc

Ecss Ecss

Escs Escs

Essc Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc) Essc Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc)

R3c [No. 167] (hexagonal axes, B 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1



P6 [No. 168] hkl

A

B

All

2C(hki)c(lz)

2C(hki)s(lz)


A

6n

as for P6 [No.168]

6n 6n 6n 6n 6n

1 2 3 4 5

B

2[s(p1 )s(u1 ) s(p2 )s(u2 ) s(p3 )s(u3 )] 2[c(p1 )c(u1 ) c(p2 )c(u3 ) c(p3 )c(u2 )] 2S(hki)s(lz) 2[c(p1 )c(u1 ) c(p2 )c(u2 ) c(p3 )c(u3 )] 2[s(p1 )s(u1 ) s(p2 )s(u3 ) s(p3 )s(u2 )]

2[s(p1 )c(u1 ) 2[c(p1 )s(u1 ) 2S(hki)c(lz) 2[c(p1 )s(u1 ) 2[s(p1 )c(u1 )

140

s(p2 )c(u2 ) s(p3 )c(u3 )] c(p2 )s(u3 ) c(p3 )s(u2 )] c(p2 )s(u2 ) c(p3 )s(u3 )] s(p2 )c(u3 ) s(p3 )c(u2 )]


P65 [No. 170] (enantiomorphous to P61 [No. 169]) l 6n 6n 6n 6n 6n 6n

A, B as as as as as as

1 2 3 4 5

for P6 [No. 168] for l = 6n 5 in for l = 6n 4 in for l = 6n 3 in for l = 6n 2 in for l = 6n 1 in

P61 P61 P61 P61 P61

[No. 169] [No. 169] [No. 169] [No. 169] [No. 169]


A, B

3n 3n 1 3n 2

as for P6 [No. 168] as for l = 6n 2 in P61 [No. 169] as for l = 6n 4 in P61 [No. 169]


A, B

3n 3n 1 3n 2

as for P6 [No. 168] as for l = 6n 4 in P61 [No.169] as for l = 6n 2 in P61 [No. 169]

P63 [No. 173] l

A, B

2n 2n 1

as for P6 [No. 168] as for l = 6n 3 in P61 [No. 169]

P6 [No. 174] hkl

A

B

All

2C(hki)c(lz)

2S(hki)c(lz)

P6=m [No. 175] hkl

A

B

All

4C(hki)c(lz)

0

A

B

P63 =m [No. 176] l 2n 2n 1

4C(hki)c(lz) 4S(hki)s(lz)

0 0

P622 [No. 177] hkl

A

B

All

2PH(cc)c(lz)

2MH(cc)s(lz)

141



A

6n

as for P622 [No. 177]

6n 1

B

2sp1 su1 sp2 su2 sp3 su3 sq1 su3 sq2 su1 sq3 su2 2cp1 cu1 cp2 cu3 cp3 cu2 cq1 cu2 cq2 cu1 cq3 cu3 2MH(ss)s(lz) 2cp1 cu1 cp2 cu2 cp3 cu3 cq1 cu3 cq2 cu1 cq3 cu2 2sp1 su1 sp2 su3 sp3 su2 sq1 su2 sq2 su1 sq3 su3

6n 2 6n 3 6n 4 6n 5

2sp1 cu1 sp2 cu2 sp3 cu3 sq1 cu3 sq2 cu1 sq3 cu2 2cp1 su1 cp2 su3 cp3 su2 cq1 su2 cq2 su1 cq3 su3 2PH(ss)c(lz) 2cp1 su1 cp2 su2 cp3 su3 cq1 su3 cq2 su1 cq3 su2 2sp1 cu1 sp2 cu3 sp3 cu2 sq1 cu2 sq2 cu1 sq3 cu3


A, B

6n 6n 6n 6n 6n 6n

as as as as as as

1 2 3 4 5

for P622 [No. 177] for l = 6n 5 in P61 22 [No. 178] for l = 6n 4 in P61 22 [No. 178] for l = 6n 3 in P61 22 [No. 178] for l = 6n 2 in P61 22 [No. 178] for l = 6n 1 in P61 22 [No. 178]


A, B

n 3n 1 3n 2

as for P622 [No. 177] as for l = 6n 2 in P61 22 [No. 178] as for l = 6n 4 in P61 22 [No.178]


A, B

3n 3n 1 3n 2


P63 22 [No. 182] l

A, B

2n 2n 1

as for P622 [No. 177] as for l = 6n 3 in P61 22 [No. 178]

P6mm [No. 183] hkl

A

B

All

2PH(cc)c(lz)

2PH(cc)s(lz)

l

A

B

2n 2n 1

2PH(cc)c(lz) 2MH(cc)c(lz)

2PH(cc)s(lz) 2MH(cc)s(lz)

P6cc [No. 184]

142


P63 cm [No. 185] l

A

2n 2n 1

B 2PH(cc)c(lz) 2PH(ss)s(lz)

2PH(cc)s(lz) 2PH(ss)c(lz)

2PH(cc)c(lz) 2MH(ss)s(lz)

2PH(cc)s(lz) 2MH(ss)c(lz)

P63 mc [No. 186] l

A

2n 2n 1

B

P6m2 [No. 187] hkl

A

B

All

2PH(cc)c(lz)

2MH(ss)c(lz)

A

B

P6c2 [No. 188] l 2n 2n 1

2PH(cc)c(lz) 2PH(ss)s(lz)

2MH(ss)c(lz) 2MH(cc)s(lz)

P62m [No. 189] hkl

A

B

All

2PH(cc)c(lz)

2PH(ss)c(lz)

A

B

P62c [No. 190] l 2n 2n 1

2PH(cc)c(lz) 2MH(ss)s(lz)

2PH(ss)c(lz) 2MH(cc)s(lz)

P6=mmm [No. 191] hkl

A

B

All

4PH(cc)c(lz)

0

P6=mcc [No. 192] (B 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1

4PH(cc)c(lz) 4MH(cc)c(lz)

P63 =mcm [No. 193] (B 0 for all h, k, l) l

A

2n 2n 1

4PH(cc)c(lz) 4PH(ss)s(lz)

P63 =mmc [No. 194] (B 0 for all h, k, l) l 2n 2n 1

A 4PH(cc)c(lz) 4MH(ss)s(lz)

143

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.7. Cubic space groups The symbols appearing in this table are related to the pqr representation used with the orthorhombic space groups as follows: Each of the symbols defined below is a sum of three pqr terms, where the order of hkl is fixed in each of the three terms and that of xyz is permuted. This table and parts of Table A1.4.3.6 (rhombohedral space groups referred to rhombohedral axes) are given in terms of the following two symbols: Epqr phxqkyrlz phyqkzrlx phzqkxrly

A1:4:3:7

Opqr phxqkzrly phzqkyrlx phyqkxrlz,

A1:4:3:8

and

where p, q and r can each be a sine or a cosine, and the factor 2 has been absorbed in the abbreviations (see text). As in Tables A1.4.3.1–A1.4.3.6, cosine and sine are abbreviated by c and s, respectively. The permutation of the coordinates is even in Epqr and odd in Opqr. Conditions for vanishing symbols: Epqr = Opqr = 0 if at least one of p, q, r is a sine and the index h, k or l in its argument is zero, Occc 0 if jhj jkj or jkj jlj or jlj jhj, Osss 0 if jhj jkj or jkj jlj or jlj jhj, Ecss Ocss Escc Oscc 0 if jkj jlj, Escs Oscs Ecsc Ocsc 0 if jlj jhj and

Eccc Esss

Essc

Ossc Eccs

Occs 0 if jhj jkj:

P23 [No. 195] hkl

A

All

4Eccc

B 4Esss

F23 [No. 196] hkl

A

All

16Eccc

B 16Esss

I23 [No. 197] hkl

A

All

8Eccc

B 8Esss

P21 3 [No. 198] hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

A

B 4Eccc 4Ecss 4Escs 4Essc

4Esss 4Escc 4Ecsc 4Eccs

I21 3 [No. 199] hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

A

B 8Eccc 8Escs 8Essc 8Ecss

8Esss 8Ecsc 8Eccs 8Escc

Pm3 [No. 200] hkl

A

B

All

8Eccc

0

Pn3 (Origin 1) [No. 201] hkl

A

B

2n 2n 1

8Eccc 0

0 8Esss

144

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.7. Cubic space groups (cont.) Pn3 (Origin 2) [No. 201] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

A 8Eccc 8Essc 8Ecss 8Escs

Fm3 [No. 202] hkl

A

B

All

32Eccc

0

Fd3 (Origin 1) [No. 203] hkl

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

32Eccc 16(Eccc Esss) 0 16(Eccc Esss)

B 0 A 32Esss A

Fd3 (Origin 2) [No. 203] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 4n

4n 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n

4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n 4n 4n 2

2 2 2 2

A 32Eccc 32Essc 32Ecss 32Escs 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc) 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc) 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc) 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc)

Im3 [No. 204] hkl

A

B

All

16Eccc

0

Pa3 [No. 205] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

A 8Eccc 8Ecss 8Escs 8Essc

Ia3 [No. 206] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

A 16Eccc 16Ecss 16Escs 16Essc

P432 [No. 207] hkl

A

All

4(Eccc Occc)

B 4(Esss

145

Osss)

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.7. Cubic space groups (cont.) P42 32 [No. 208] hkl

A

2n 2n 1

4(Eccc Occc) 4(Eccc Occc)

B 4(Esss Osss) 4(Esss Osss)

F432 [No. 209] hkl

A

All

16(Eccc Occc)

B 16(Esss

Osss)

F41 32 [No. 210] hkl

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

16(Eccc Occc) 16(Eccc Osss) 16(Eccc Occc) 16(Eccc Osss)

B 16(Esss Osss) 16(Esss Occc) 16(Esss Osss) 16(Esss Occc)

I432 [No. 211] hkl

A

All

8(Eccc Occc)

B 8(Esss

Osss)

P43 32 [No. 212] (enantiomorphous to P41 32 [No. 213]) hk

kl

hl

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 1 4n 1 4n 1 4n 1 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 3 4n 3 4n 3 4n 3

A

B 4(Eccc Occc) 4(Ecss Oscs) 4(Escs Ossc) 4(Essc Ocss) 4(Eccc Osss) 4(Ecss Ocsc) 4(Escs Occs) 4(Essc Oscc) 4(Eccc Occc) 4(Ecss Oscs) 4(Escs Ossc) 4(Essc Ocss) 4(Eccc Osss) 4(Ecss Ocsc) 4(Escs Occs) 4(Essc Oscc)

4(Esss Osss) 4(Escc Ocsc) 4(Ecsc Occs) 4(Eccs Oscc) 4(Esss Occc) 4(Escc Oscs) 4(Ecsc Ossc) 4(Eccs Ocss) 4(Esss Osss) 4(Escc Ocsc) 4(Ecsc Occs) 4(Eccs Oscc) 4(Esss Occc) 4(Escc Oscs) 4(Ecsc Ossc) 4(Eccs Ocss)

P41 32 [No. 213] (enantiomorphous to P43 32 [No. 212]) h

k

l

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 1 4n 1 4n 1 4n 1 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2

A

B 4(Eccc Occc) 4(Escs Ossc) 4(Essc Ocss) 4(Ecss Oscs) 4(Eccc Osss) 4(Ecss Ocsc) 4(Escs Occs) 4(Essc Oscc) 4(Eccc Occc) 4(Escs Ossc) 4(Essc Ocss)

146

4(Esss Osss) 4(Ecsc Occs) 4(Eccs Oscc) 4(Escc Ocsc) 4(Esss Occc) 4(Escc Oscs) 4(Ecsc Ossc) 4(Eccs Ocss) 4(Esss Osss) 4(Ecsc Occs) 4(Eccs Oscc)

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.7. Cubic space groups (cont.) h

k

l

hkl

2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n

2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n

4n 2 4n 3 4n 3 4n 3 4n 3

A

B 4(Ecss 4(Eccc 4(Ecss 4(Escs 4(Essc

4(Escc Ocsc) 4(Esss Occc) 4(Escc Oscs) 4(Ecsc Ossc) 4(Eccs Ocss)

Oscs) Osss) Ocsc) Occs) Oscc)

I41 32 [No. 214] h

k

l

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2

A

B 8(Eccc Occc) 8(Escs Ossc) 8(Essc Ocss) 8(Ecss Oscs) 8(Eccc Occc) 8(Escs Ossc) 8(Essc Ocss) 8(Ecss Oscs)

8(Esss Osss) 8(Ecsc Occs) 8(Eccs Oscc) 8(Escc Ocsc) 8(Esss Osss) 8(Ecsc Occs) 8(Eccs Oscc) 8(Escc Ocsc)

P43m [No. 215] hkl

A

All

4(Eccc Occc)

B 4(Esss Osss)

F43m [No. 216] hkl

A

All

16(Eccc Occc)

B 16(Esss Osss)

I43m [No. 217] hkl

A

All

8(Eccc Occc)

B 8(Esss Osss)

P43n [No. 218] hkl

A

2n 2n 1



F43c [No. 219] hkl

A

2n 2n 1



I43d [No. 220] h

k

l

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2

A

B 8(Eccc Occc) 8(Escs Ossc) 8(Essc Ocss) 8(Ecss Oscs) 8(Eccc Occc) 8(Escs Ossc) 8(Essc Ocss) 8(Ecss Oscs)

147

8(Esss Osss) 8(Ecsc Occs) 8(Eccs Oscc) 8(Escc Ocsc) 8(Esss Osss) 8(Ecsc Occs) 8(Eccs Oscc) 8(Escc Ocsc)

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.3.7. Cubic space groups (cont.)

Pm3m [No. 221] hkl

A

B

All

8(Eccc Occc)

0

Pn3n (Origin 1) [No. 222] hkl

A

B

2n 2n 1

8(Eccc Occc) 0

0 8(Esss

Osss)

Pn3n (Origin 2) [No. 222] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

l

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1

A 8(Eccc Occc) 8(Ecss Ocss) 8(Escs Oscs) 8(Essc Ossc) 8(Eccc Occc) 8(Ecss Ocss) 8(Escs Oscs) 8(Essc Ossc)

Pm3n [No. 223] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hkl

A

2n 2n 1


Pn3m (Origin 1) [No. 224] hkl

A

B

2n 2n 1

8(Eccc Occc) 0

0 8(Esss Osss)

Pn3m (Origin 2) [No. 224] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

A 8(Eccc Occc) 8(Essc Ossc) 8(Ecss Ocss) 8(Escs Oscs)

Fm3m [No. 225] hkl

A

B

All

32(Eccc Occc)

0

Fm3c [No. 226] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hkl

A

2n 2n 1


148

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.3.7. Cubic space groups (cont.)

Fd3m (Origin 1) [No. 227] hkl

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

32(Eccc Occc) 16(Eccc Esss Occc Osss) 0 16(Eccc Esss Occc Osss)

B 0 A 32(Esss Osss) A

Fd3m (Origin 2) [No. 227] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n

4n 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n

4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n 4n 4n 2

A 32(Eccc Occc) 32(Essc Ossc) 32(Ecss Ocss) 32(Escs Oscs) 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc Occc Ocss Oscs 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc Occc Ocss Oscs 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc Occc Ocss Oscs 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc Occc Ocss Oscs

Ossc) Ossc) Ossc) Ossc)

Fd3c (Origin 1) [No. 228] hkl

A

4n 4n 1 4n 2 4n 3

32(Eccc Occc) 16(Eccc Esss Occc Osss) 0 16(Eccc Esss Occc Osss)

B 0 A 32(Esss Osss) A

Fd3c (Origin 2) [No. 228] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) hk

kl

hl

4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n

4n 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n

4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 4n 2 4n 4n 4n 2

A 32(Eccc Occc) 32(Essc Ossc) 32(Ecss Ocss) 32(Escs Oscs) 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc 16(Eccc Ecss Escs Essc

Im3m [No. 229] hkl

A

B

All

16(Eccc Occc)

0

Ia3d [No. 230] (B = 0 for all h, k, l) h

k

l

hkl

2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1 2n 2n 1

2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 2n 1 2n

4n 4n 4n 4n 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2 4n 2

A 16(Eccc Occc) 16(Escs Ossc) 16(Essc Ocss) 16(Ecss Oscs) 16(Eccc Occc) 16(Escs Ossc) 16(Essc Ocss) 16(Ecss Oscs)

149

Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc) Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc) Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc) Occc Ocss Oscs Ossc)

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Appendix 1.4.4. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space The table entries are described in detail in Section 1.4.4.1. The general format of an entry is n hT Pn : hT tn or n hT P n : , according as the phase-shift part of the entry is nonzero or zero modolo 2, respectively. Notes: (1) For centrosymmetric space groups with the centre located at the unit-cell origin only those entries are given which correspond to symmetry operations not related by inversion. If the origin in such space groups is chosen elsewhere, all the entries corresponding to the operations of the point group are presented. (2) For trigonal and hexagonal space groups referred to hexagonal axes the Miller–Bravais indices hkil are employed, and for the rhombohedral space groups referred to rhombohedral axes the indices are denoted by hkl (cf. IT I, 1952). Point group: 1

Triclinic

Laue group: 1

Point group: m Pm P1m1 (1) hkl:

P1 No. 1 (1) (1) hkl:

Point group: 1

Triclinic

Laue group: 2/m

No. 6 (13) (2) hkl:

Pm P11m Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 6 (14) (2) hkl:

Laue group: 1

P1 No. 2 (2) (1) hkl:

Point group: 2

Monoclinic

Unique axis b

Monoclinic

Pc P1c1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 7 (15) (2) hkl: 001/2

Pc P1n1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b No. 7 (16) (2) hkl: 101/2

Laue group: 2/m

P2 P121 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 3 (3) (2) hkl:

Pc P1a1 (1) hkl:


P2 P112 (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 3 (4) (2) hkl:

Pc P11a (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 7 (18) (2) hkl: 100/2

P21 P121 1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 4 (5) (2) hkl: 010/2

Pc P11n (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 7 (19) (2) hkl: 110/2

P21 P1121 (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 4 (6) (2) hkl: 001/2

Pc P11b (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 7 (20) (2) hkl: 010/2

C2 C121 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 5 (7) (2) hkl:

Cm C1m1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 8 (21) (2) hkl:

C2 A121 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 5 (8) (2) hkl:

Cm A1m1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 8 (22) (2) hkl:

C2 I121 Unique axis b (1) hkl:

No. 5 (9) (2) hkl:

Cm I1m1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 8 (23) (2) hkl:

C2 A112 (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 5 (10) (2) hkl:

Cm A11m Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 8 (24) (2) hkl:

C2 B112 (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 5 (11) (2) hkl:

Cm B11m Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 8 (25) (2) hkl:

C2 I112 Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 5 (12) (2) hkl:

Cm I11m Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 8 (26) (2) hkl:

150

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) Cc C1c1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 9 (27) (2) hkl: 001/2

P2=c P112=a (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 13 (46) (2) hkl: 100/2

Cc A1n1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 9 (28) (2) hkl: 101/2

P2=c P112=n (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 13 (47) (2) hkl: 110/2

Cc I1a1 (1) hkl:


P2=c P112=b (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 13 (48) (2) hkl: 010/2

Cc A11a (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 9 (30) (2) hkl: 100/2

P21 =c P121 =c1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 14 (49) (2) hkl: 011/2

Cc B11n (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 9 (31) (2) hkl: 110/2

P21 =c P121 =n1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 14 (50) (2) hkl: 111/2

Cc I11b (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 9 (32) (2) hkl: 010/2

P21 =c P121 =a1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 14 (51) (2) hkl: 110/2

P21 =c P1121 =a (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 14 (52) (2) hkl: 101/2

P21 =c P1121 =n (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 14 (53) (2) hkl: 111/2

P21 =c P1121 =b (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 14 (54) (2) hkl: 011/2

Point group: 2/m P2=m P12=m1 (1) hkl:

Monoclinic

Laue group: 2/m

Unique axis b No. 10 (33) (2) hkl:

P2=m P112=m Unique axis c (1) hkl: P21 =m P121 =m1 (1) hkl:

No. 10 (34) (2) hkl:

Unique axis b

P21 =m P1121 =m Unique axis c (1) hkl: C2=m C12=m1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

C2=m A12=m1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

C2=m I12=m1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 11 (35) (2) hkl: 010/2 No. 11 (36) (2) hkl: 001/2 No. 12 (37) (2) hkl: No. 12 (38) (2) hkl: No. 12 (39) (2) hkl:

C2=m A112=m Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 12 (40) (2) hkl:

C2=m B112=m Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 12 (41) (2) hkl:

C2=m I112=m Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 12 (42) (2) hkl:

P2=c P12=c1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

P2=c P12=n1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

P2=c P12=a1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

C2=c C12=c1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 15 (55) (2) hkl: 001/2

C2=c A12=n1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 15 (56) (2) hkl: 101/2

C2=c I12=a1 (1) hkl:

Unique axis b

No. 15 (57) (2) hkl: 100/2

C2=c A112=a Unique axis c (1) hkl:

No. 15 (58) (2) hkl: 100/2

C2=c B112=n (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 15 (59) (2) hkl: 110/2

C2=c I112=b (1) hkl:

Unique axis c

No. 15 (60) (2) hkl: 010/2

Point group: 222 Orthorhombic

Laue group: mmm

No. 13 (43) (2) hkl: 001/2

P222 No. 16 (61) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

No. 13 (44) (2) hkl: 101/2

P2221 No. 17 (62) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl:

No. 13 (45) (2) hkl: 100/2

P21 21 2 (1) hkl:

(3) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

151

No. 18 (63) (2) hkl:

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) P21 21 21 (1) hkl:

Ccc2 No. 37 (82) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl: 001/2

Amm2 No. 38 (83) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Abm2 No. 39 (84) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 010/2

(4) hkl: 010/2

(4) hkl:

Ama2 No. 40 (85) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 100/2

(4) hkl: 100/2

(4) hkl:

Aba2 No. 41 (86) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

Fmm2 No. 42 (87) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Fdd2 No. 43 (88) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 313/4

(4) hkl: 133/4

Imm2 No. 44 (89) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Iba2 No. 45 (90) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

Ima2 No. 46 (91) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 100/2

(4) hkl: 100/2

No. 19 (64) (2) hkl: 101/2

(3) hkl: 011/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

C2221 No. 20 (65) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl:

C222 No. 21 (66) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: F222 No. 22 (67) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: I222 No. 23 (68) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: I21 21 21 (1) hkl:

No. 24 (69) (2) hkl: 101/2

Point group: mm2

Orthorhombic

Pmm2 No. 25 (70) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: Pmc21 No. 26 (71) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 Pcc2 No. 27 (72) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: Pma2 No. 28 (73) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: Pca21 No. 29 (74) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 Pnc2 No. 30 (75) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: Pmn21 No. 31 (76) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 Pba2 No. 32 (77) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(3) hkl: 011/2

Laue group: mmm (3) hkl:

(3) hkl: 001/2

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl:

(4) hkl:

(4) hkl: 001/2 Point group: mmm

(3) hkl: 100/2

(3) hkl: 100/2

(3) hkl: 011/2

(3) hkl: 101/2

(3) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 100/2

(4) hkl: 101/2

Orthorhombic

Laue group: mmm

Pmmm No. 47 (92) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Pnnn Origin 1 (1) hkl: (5) hkl: 111/2

No. 48 (93) (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2

(3) hkl: (7) hkl: 111/2

(4) hkl: (8) hkl: 111/2

Pnnn Origin 2 (1) hkl:

No. 48 (94) (2) hkl: 110/2

(3) hkl: 101/2

(4) hkl: 011/2

Pccm No. 49 (95) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl: 001/2

No. 50 (96) (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2

(3) hkl: (7) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: (8) hkl: 110/2

No. 50 (97) (2) hkl: 110/2

(3) hkl: 100/2

(4) hkl: 010/2

(4) hkl: 011/2

(4) hkl:

(4) hkl: 110/2

Pna21 No. 33 (78) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2

(3) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 111/2

Pban Origin 1 (1) hkl: (5) hkl: 110/2

Pnn2 No. 34 (79) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 111/2

(4) hkl: 111/2

Pban Origin 2 (1) hkl:

Cmm2 No. 35 (80) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Pmma No. 51 (98) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 100/2

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl: 100/2

Cmc21 No. 36 (81) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl:

Pnna No. 52 (99) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 100/2

(3) hkl: 111/2

(4) hkl: 011/2

152

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) Pmna No. 53 (100) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2

(3) hkl: 101/2

(4) hkl:

Pcca No. 54 (101) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 100/2

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl: 101/2

Pbam No. 55 (102) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

Pccn No. 56 (103) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 Pbcm No. 57 (104) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 Pnnm No. 58 (105) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 011/2

(3) hkl: 011/2

(3) hkl: 111/2

(4) hkl: 101/2

(4) hkl: 010/2

(4) hkl: 111/2

Pmmn Origin 1 No. 59 (106) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) hkl: 110/2 (7) hkl:

(4) hkl: 110/2 (8) hkl:

Pmmn Origin 2 No. 59 (107) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2

(3) hkl: 010/2

(4) hkl: 100/2

Pbcn No. 60 (108) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 111/2 Pbca No. 61 (109) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 Pnma No. 62 (110) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 Cmcm No. 63 (111) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 Cmca No. 64 (112) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 011/2

(3) hkl: 001/2

(3) hkl: 011/2

(3) hkl: 010/2

(3) hkl: 001/2

(3) hkl: 011/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 111/2

(4) hkl:

(4) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Cccm No. 66 (114) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 001/2

(4) hkl: 001/2

Cmma No. 67 (115) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 010/2 Ccca Origin 1 (1) hkl: (5) hkl: 011/2

No. 68 (116) (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 101/2

Ccca Origin 2 (1) hkl:

No. 68 (117) (2) hkl: 100/2

(3) hkl: 010/2

(3) hkl: (7) hkl: 011/2

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Fddd Origin 1 (1) hkl: (5) hkl: 111/4

No. 70 (119) (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/4

(3) hkl: (7) hkl: 111/4

(4) hkl: (8) hkl: 111/4

Fddd Origin 2 (1) hkl:

No. 70 (120) (2) hkl: 330/4

(3) hkl: 303/4

(4) hkl: 033/4

Immm No. 71 (121) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl:

(4) hkl:

Ibam No. 72 (122) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) hkl: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

Ibca No. 73 (123) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2

(3) hkl: 011/2

(4) hkl: 110/2

Imma No. 74 (124) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 010/2

(3) hkl: 010/2

(4) hkl:

Point group: 4

(4) hkl: 110/2

Cmmm No. 65 (113) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

Fmmm No. 69 (118) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

Tetragonal

(3) khl:

(4) khl:

P41 No. 76 (126) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: 001/4

(4) khl: 003/4

P42 No. 77 (127) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 001/2

P43 No. 78 (128) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: 003/4

(4) khl: 001/4

I4 No. 79 (129) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) khl:

(4) khl:

I41 No. 80 (130) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: 021/4

(4) khl: 203/4

Point group: 4

Tetragonal

Laue group: 4/m

P4 No. 81 (131) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) khl:

(4) khl:

I4 No. 82 (132) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) khl:

(4) khl:

(4) hkl:

(4) hkl: 110/2 (8) hkl: 101/2 Point group: 4/m

(3) hkl: 001/2

Laue group: 4/m

P4 No. 75 (125) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

Tetragonal

P4=m No. 83 (133) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(4) hkl: 101/2

153

Laue group: 4/m (3) khl:

(4) khl:

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) P42 =m No. 84 (134) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 001/2

P4=n Origin 1 (1) hkl: (5) hkl: 110/2

No. 85 (135) (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: 110/2 (7) khl:

P4=n Origin 2 (1) hkl:

No. 85 (136) (2) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: 100/2

P43 21 2 No. 96 (149) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 (6) hkl: 221/4 (5) hkl: 223/4

(3) khl: 223/4 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 221/4 (8) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 110/2 (8) khl:

I422 No. 97 (150) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

(4) khl: 010/2

I41 22 No. 98 (151) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 111/2 (6) hkl: 021/4 (5) hkl: 203/4

(3) khl: 021/4 (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: 203/4 (8) khl:

P42 =n Origin 1 No. 86 (137) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: 111/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl:

P42 =n Origin 2 No. 86 (138) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: 011/2

(4) khl: 101/2 Point group: 4mm

I4=m No. 87 (139) (1) hkl: (2) hkl:

(3) khl:

(4) khl:

I41 =a Origin 1 No. 88 (140) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 111/2 (6) hkl: 203/4 (5) hkl: 021/4

(3) khl: 021/4 (7) khl:

I41 =a Origin 2 No. 88 (141) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2

(3) khl: 311/4

Point group: 422 Tetragonal

Tetragonal

Laue group: 4/mmm

P4mm No. 99 (152) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

(4) khl: 203/4 (8) khl: 111/2

P4bm No. 100 (153) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: 333/4

P42 cm No. 101 (154) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: 001/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 001/2 (8) khl:

Laue group: 4/mmm

P422 No. 89 (142) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

P42 nm No. 102 (155) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: 111/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl:

P421 2 No. 90 (143) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: 110/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 110/2 (8) khl:

P4cc No. 103 (156) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 001/2

P41 22 No. 91 (144) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl:

(3) khl: 001/4 (7) khl: 003/4

(4) khl: 003/4 (8) khl: 001/4

P4nc No. 104 (157) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 111/2

P41 21 2 No. 92 (145) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 (6) hkl: 223/4 (5) hkl: 221/4

(3) khl: 221/4 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 223/4 (8) khl: 001/2

P42 mc No. 105 (158) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 001/2 (8) khl: 001/2

P42 22 No. 93 (146) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 001/2 (8) khl: 001/2

P42 bc No. 106 (159) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: 001/2 (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: 001/2 (8) khl: 111/2

P42 21 2 No. 94 (147) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: 111/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl:

I4mm No. 107 (160) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

P43 22 No. 95 (148) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 001/2 (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl:

(3) khl: 003/4 (7) khl: 001/4

(4) khl: 001/4 (8) khl: 003/4

I4cm No. 108 (161) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 001/2

154

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) I41 md No. 109 (162) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 111/2 (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl:

(3) khl: 021/4 (7) khl: 203/4

(4) khl: 203/4 (8) khl: 021/4

I41 cd No. 110 (163) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 111/2 (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: 021/4 (7) khl: 201/4

(4) khl: 203/4 (8) khl: 023/4

Point group: 42m

Tetragonal

Point group: 4/mmm

Laue group: 4/mmm

Tetragonal

Laue group: 4/mmm

P4=mmm No. 123 (176) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

P4=mcc No. 124 (177) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 001/2

P4=nbm Origin 1 No. 125 (178) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (3) khl: (6) hkl: (7) khl: (5) hkl: (9) hkl: 110/2 (10) hkl: 110/2 (11) khl: 110/2 (13) hkl: 110/2 (14) hkl: 110/2 (15) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: (12) khl: 110/2 (16) khl: 110/2

P42m No. 111 (164) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

P42c No. 112 (165) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 001/2

P4=nbm Origin 2 No. 125 (179) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 010/2 (5) hkl: 100/2

(3) khl: 100/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 010/2 (8) khl: 110/2

P421 m No. 113 (166) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 110/2

P421 c No. 114 (167) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 111/2

P4=nnc Origin 1 No. 126 (180) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl: (9) hkl: 111/2 (10) hkl: 111/2 (13) hkl: 111/2 (14) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: (11) khl: 111/2 (15) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: (12) khl: 111/2 (16) khl: 111/2

P4=nnc Origin 2 No. 126 (181) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 011/2 (5) hkl: 101/2

(3) khl: 100/2 (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 010/2 (8) khl: 111/2

P4=mbm No. 127 (182) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 110/2

P4=mnc No. 128 (183) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 111/2

P4=nmm Origin 1 No. 129 (184) (3) khl: 110/2 (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (7) khl: (5) hkl: 110/2 (9) hkl: 110/2 (10) hkl: 110/2 (11) khl: (14) hkl: (15) khl: 110/2 (13) hkl:

(4) khl: 110/2 (8) khl: (12) khl: (16) khl: 110/2

P4m2 No. 115 (168) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl: P4c2 No. 116 (169) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2 P4b2 No. 117 (170) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(3) khl: (7) khl: 001/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: (8) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 110/2

P4n2 No. 118 (171) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 111/2

I4m2 No. 119 (172) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

P4=nmm Origin 2 No. 129 (185) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 100/2 (5) hkl: 010/2

I4c2 No. 120 (173) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 001/2

P4=ncc (1) hkl: (5) hkl: (9) hkl: (13) hkl:

I42m No. 121 (174) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl: I42d No. 122 (175) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 203/4 (5) hkl: 203/4

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(3) khl: (7) khl: 021/4

(4) khl: (8) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl: 021/4

155

(3) khl: 100/2 (7) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: 010/2 (8) khl:

111/2 110/2 001/2

(3) khl: 110/2 (7) khl: 001/2 (11) khl: (15) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: 110/2 (8) khl: 001/2 (12) khl: (16) khl: 111/2

P4=ncc Origin 2 No. 130 (187) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 101/2 (5) hkl: 011/2

(3) khl: 100/2 (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: 010/2 (8) khl: 001/2

Origin 1 111/2 110/2 001/2

No. 130 (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (10) hkl: (14) hkl:

(186)

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) P42 =mmc No. 131 (188) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 001/2 (8) khl: 001/2

P42 =mcm No. 132 (189) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: 001/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 001/2 (8) khl:

P42 =nbc Origin 1 No. 133 (190) (3) khl: 111/2 (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (7) khl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 001/2 (9) hkl: 111/2 (10) hkl: 111/2 (11) khl: (13) hkl: 110/2 (14) hkl: 110/2 (15) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl: 110/2 (12) khl: (16) khl: 001/2

P42 =nbc Origin 2 No. 133 (191) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 010/2 (5) hkl: 100/2

(3) khl: 101/2 (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: 011/2 (8) khl: 111/2

P42 =nnm Origin 1 No. 134 (192) (3) khl: 111/2 (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (7) khl: 111/2 (5) hkl: (9) hkl: 111/2 (10) hkl: 111/2 (11) khl: (13) hkl: 111/2 (14) hkl: 111/2 (15) khl:

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl: 111/2 (12) khl: (16) khl:

(3) khl: 101/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 011/2 (8) khl: 110/2

P42 =mbc No. 135 (194) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (5) hkl: 110/2

(3) khl: 001/2 (7) khl: 111/2

(4) khl: 001/2 (8) khl: 111/2

(3) khl: 111/2 (7) khl:

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl:

P42 =nmc Origin 1 No. 137 (196) (3) khl: 111/2 (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (7) khl: (5) hkl: 111/2 (9) hkl: 111/2 (10) hkl: 111/2 (11) khl: (14) hkl: (15) khl: 111/2 (13) hkl:

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl: (12) khl: (16) khl: 111/2

P42 =nmc Origin 2 No. 137 (197) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 100/2 (5) hkl: 010/2 P42 =ncm (1) hkl: (5) hkl: (9) hkl: (13) hkl:

I41 =amd Origin 2 No. 141 (203) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 (6) hkl: (5) hkl: 101/2 I41 =acd (1) hkl: (5) hkl: (9) hkl: (13) hkl:

Origin 1

(3) khl: 021/4 (7) khl: 110/2 (11) khl: (15) khl: 201/4

I41 =acd Origin 2 No. 142 (205) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 100/2

(3) khl: 131/4 (7) khl: 133/4

201/4 021/4 110/2

(4) khl: 011/2 (8) khl: 001/2

No. 138 (198) (3) khl: 111/2 (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 110/2 (7) khl: 001/2 (10) hkl: 111/2 (11) khl: (14) hkl: 001/2 (15) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: 111/2 (8) khl: 001/2 (12) khl: (16) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: 113/4 (8) khl: 113/4

(4) khl: (8) khl: (12) khl: (16) khl:

Laue group: 3

(2) kil:

(3) ihl:

P31 No. 144 (207) (1) hkl:

(2) kil: 001/3

(3) ihl: 002/3

P32 No. 145 (208) (1) hkl:

(2) kil: 002/3

(3) ihl: 001/3

R3 (hexagonal axes) (1) hkl:

No. 146 (209) (2) kil:

R3 (rhombohedral axes) No. 146 (210) (1) hkl: (2) klh:

Trigonal

P3 No. 147 (211) (1) hkl:

(3) ihl:

(3) lhk:

Laue group: 3

(2) kil:

(3) ihl:

Origin 1 110/2 111/2 001/2

R3 (hexagonal axes) (1) hkl:

No. 148 (212) (2) kil:

R3 (rhombohedral axes) No. 148 (213) (1) hkl: (2) klh:

(3) ihl:

(3) lhk:

P42 =ncm Origin 2 No. 138 (199) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 101/2 (5) hkl: 011/2

(3) khl: 101/2 (7) khl: 110/2

(4) khl: 011/2 (8) khl:

I4=mmm No. 139 (200) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: (5) hkl:

(3) khl: (7) khl:

(4) khl: (8) khl:

P312 No. 149 (214) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(2) kil: (5) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

I4=mcm No. 140 (201) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 001/2 (5) hkl: 001/2

(3) khl: (7) khl: 001/2

(4) khl: (8) khl: 001/2

P321 No. 150 (215) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(2) kil: (5) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

Point group: 32

156

Trigonal

Laue group: 3m

203/4 001/2 111/2 023/4

(4) khl: 113/4 (8) khl: 111/4

P3 No. 143 (206) (1) hkl:

Point group: 3 (3) khl: 101/2 (7) khl: 111/2

Trigonal

(4) khl: 203/4 (8) khl: (12) khl: 111/2 (16) khl: 021/4

(3) khl: 131/4 (7) khl: 131/4

No. 142 (204) (2) hkl: 111/2 (6) hkl: 023/4 (10) hkl: 203/4 (14) hkl: 001/2

Point group: 3

P42 =nnm Origin 2 No. 134 (193) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) hkl: 011/2 (5) hkl: 101/2

P42 =mnm No. 136 (195) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (6) hkl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 111/2

I41 =amd Origin 1 No. 141 (202) (3) khl: 021/4 (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 111/2 (6) hkl: 021/4 (7) khl: 111/2 (5) hkl: 203/4 (9) hkl: 021/4 (10) hkl: 203/4 (11) khl: (15) khl: 203/4 (13) hkl: 111/2 (14) hkl:

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) P31 12 No. 151 (216) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 002/3

(2) kil: 001/3 (5) hil: 001/3

(3) ihl: 002/3 (6) ikl:

P31 21 No. 152 (217) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(2) kil: 001/3 (5) hil: 002/3

(3) ihl: 002/3 (6) ikl: 001/3

P32 12 No. 153 (218) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 001/3

(2) kil: 002/3 (5) hil: 002/3

(3) ihl: 001/3 (6) ikl:

P32 21 No. 154 (219) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(2) kil: 002/3 (5) hil: 001/3

(3) ihl: 001/3 (6) ikl: 002/3

R32 (hexagonal axes) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

Point group: 3m

No. 155 (220) (2) kil: (5) hil:

R32 (rhombohedral axes) No. 155 (221) (1) hkl: (2) klh: (5) hlk: (4) khl:

Point group: 3m

Trigonal

P3m1 No. 156 (222) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

(3) lhk: (6) lkh:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

P31m No. 157 (223) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(2) kil: (5) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

P3c1 No. 158 (224) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 001/2

(2) kil: (5) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ikl: 001/2

P31c No. 159 (225) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 001/2 R3m (hexagonal axes) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(2) kil: (5) hil: 001/2 No. 160 (226) (2) kil: (5) hil:

R3m (rhombohedral axes) No. 160 (227) (1) hkl: (2) klh: (4) khl: (5) hlk: R3c (hexagonal axes) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 001/2

No. 161 (228) (2) kil: (5) hil: 001/2

R3c (rhombohedral axes) No. 161 (229) (1) hkl: (2) klh: (4) khl: 111/2 (5) hlk: 111/2

Laue group: 3m

(2) kil: (5) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

P31c No. 163 (231) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 001/2

(2) kil: (5) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ikl: 001/2

P3m1 No. 164 (232) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

(2) kil: (5) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

P3c1 No. 165 (233) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 001/2

(2) kil: (5) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ikl: 001/2

R3m (hexagonal axes) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

Laue group: 3m

(2) kil: (5) hil:

Trigonal

P31m No. 162 (230) (1) hkl: (4) khl:

No. 166 (234) (2) kil: (5) hil:

R3m (rhombohedral axes) No. 166 (235) (1) hkl: (2) klh: (5) hlk: (4) khl:

(3) lhk: (6) lkh:

R3c (hexagonal axes) (1) hkl: (4) khl: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ikl: 001/2

No. 167 (236) (2) kil: (5) hil: 001/2

R3c (rhombohedral axes) No. 168 (237) (1) hkl: (2) klh: (5) hlk: 111/2 (4) khl: 111/2

Point group: 6

(3) ihl: (6) ikl: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

(3) lhk: (6) lkh:

(3) ihl: (6) ikl: 001/2

(3) lhk: (6) lkh: 111/2

157

(3) ihl: (6) ikl:

Hexagonal

(3) lhk: (6) lkh: 111/2

Laue group: 6/m

P6 No. 168 (238) (1) hkl: (4) hkl:

(2) kil: (5) kil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl:

P61 No. 169 (239) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2

(2) kil: 001/3 (5) kil: 005/6

(3) ihl: 002/3 (6) ihl: 001/6

P65 No. 170 (240) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2

(2) kil: 002/3 (5) kil: 001/6

(3) ihl: 001/3 (6) ihl: 005/6

P62 No. 171 (241) (1) hkl: (4) hkl:

(2) kil: 002/3 (5) kil: 002/3

(3) ihl: 001/3 (6) ihl: 001/3

P64 No. 172 (242) (1) hkl: (4) hkl:

(2) kil: 001/3 (5) kil: 001/3

(3) ihl: 002/3 (6) ihl: 002/3

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) P63 No. 173 (243) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2

Point group: 6

Point group: 6mm (2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2

Hexagonal

P6 No. 174 (244) (1) hkl: (4) hkl:

Point group: 6/m

Laue group: 6/m

(2) kil: (5) kil:

Hexagonal

P6=m No. 175 (245) (1) hkl: (4) hkl:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl:

Laue group: 6/m

(2) kil: (5) kil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl:

P63 =m No. 176 (246) (1) hkl: (2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (4) hkl: 001/2

Point group: 622 Hexagonal P622 No. 177 (247) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: (7) khl: (10) khl: P61 22 No. 178 (248) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/3 (10) khl: 005/6

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2

Laue group: 6/mmm

(2) kil: (5) kil: (8) hil: (11) hil:

(2) kil: 001/3 (5) kil: 005/6 (8) hil: (11) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

P65 22 No. 179 (249) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2 (7) khl: 002/3 (10) khl: 001/6

(2) kil: 002/3 (5) kil: 001/6 (8) hil: (11) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

001/3 005/6 001/3 005/6

P62 22 No. 180 (250) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: (7) khl: 002/3 (10) khl: 002/3

(2) kil: 002/3 (5) kil: 002/3 (8) hil: (11) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

001/3 001/3 001/3 001/3

P64 22 No. 181 (251) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: (7) khl: 001/3 (10) khl: 001/3

(2) kil: 001/3 (5) kil: 001/3 (8) hil: (11) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

002/3 002/3 002/3 002/3

P63 22 No. 182 (252) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2 (7) khl: (10) khl: 001/2

(2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (8) hil: (11) hil: 001/2

(2) kil: (5) kil: (8) hil: (11) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

P6cc No. 184 (254) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: (7) khl: 001/2 (10) khl: 001/2

(2) kil: (5) kil: (8) hil: 001/2 (11) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: 001/2 (12) ikl: 001/2

P63 cm No. 185 (255) (1) hkl: (2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (4) hkl: 001/2 (8) hil: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/2 (10) khl: (11) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2 (9) ikl: 001/2 (12) ikl:

P63 mc No. 186 (256) (1) hkl: (2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (4) hkl: 001/2 (8) hil: (7) khl: (10) khl: 001/2 (11) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2 (9) ikl: (12) ikl: 001/2

Point group: 6m2

002/3 001/6 002/3 001/6

Hexagonal Laue group: 6/mmm

P6mm No. 183 (253) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: (7) khl: (10) khl:

Hexagonal (2) kil: (5) kil: (8) hil: (11) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

P6c2 No. 188 (258) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/2 (10) khl:

(2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (8) hil: 001/2 (11) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2 (9) ikl: 001/2 (12) ikl:

P62m No. 189 (259) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: (7) khl: (10) khl:

(2) kil: (5) kil: (8) hil: (11) hil:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

P62c No. 190 (260) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: 001/2 (7) khl: (10) khl: 001/2

(2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (8) hil: (11) hil: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2 (9) ikl: (12) ikl: 001/2

Point group: 6/mmm

Hexagonal

P6=mmm No. 191 (261) (1) hkl: (2) kil: (5) kil: (4) hkl: (8) hil: (7) khl: (11) hil: (10) khl:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2 (9) ikl: (12) ikl: 001/2

158

Laue group: 6/mmm

P6m2 No. 187 (257) (1) hkl: (4) hkl: (7) khl: (10) khl:

Laue group: 6/mmm (3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: (12) ikl:

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) P6=mcc No. 192 (262) (1) hkl: (2) kil: (5) kil: (4) hkl: (8) hil: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/2 (11) hil: 001/2 (10) khl: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: (9) ikl: 001/2 (12) ikl: 001/2

P63 =mcm No. 193 (263) (1) hkl: (2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (4) hkl: 001/2 (8) hil: 001/2 (7) khl: 001/2 (11) hil: (10) khl:

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2 (9) ikl: 001/2 (12) ikl:

P63 =mmc No. 194 (264) (1) hkl: (2) kil: (5) kil: 001/2 (4) hkl: 001/2 (8) hil: (7) khl: (11) hil: 001/2 (10) khl: 001/2

(3) ihl: (6) ihl: 001/2 (9) ikl: (12) ikl: 001/2

Point group: 23

Cubic Laue group: m3

P23 No. 195 (265) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk:

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk:

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk:

F23 No. 196 (266) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk:

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk:

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk:

I23 No. 197 (267) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk:

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk:

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk:

P21 3 No. 198 (268) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 110/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 011/2

(3) hkl: 011/2 (7) klh: 101/2 (11) lhk: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2 (8) klh: 011/2 (12) lhk: 101/2

I21 3 No. 199 (269) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 110/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 011/2

(3) hkl: 011/2 (7) klh: 101/2 (11) lhk: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2 (8) klh: 011/2 (12) lhk: 101/2

Point group: m3

Pn3 Origin 2 (1) hkl: (5) klh: (9) lhk:

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk:

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk:

Pn3 Origin 1 No. 201 (271) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) hkl: 111/2 (14) hkl: 111/2 (17) klh: 111/2 (18) klh: 111/2 (21) lhk: 111/2 (22) lhk: 111/2

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk: (15) hkl: 111/2 (19) klh: 111/2 (23) lhk: 111/2


(3) hkl: 101/2 (7) klh: 110/2 (11) lhk: 011/2

(4) hkl: 011/2 (8) klh: 101/2 (12) lhk: 110/2

Fm3 No. 202 (273) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk:

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk:

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk:

Fd3 Origin 1 No. 203 (274) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) hkl: 111/4 (14) hkl: 111/4 (17) klh: 111/4 (18) klh: 111/4 (21) lhk: 111/4 (22) lhk: 111/4



Fd3 Origin 2 (1) hkl: (5) klh: (9) lhk:

(3) hkl: 101/4 (7) klh: 110/4 (11) lhk: 011/4

(4) hkl: 011/4 (8) klh: 101/4 (12) lhk: 110/4

Im3 No. 204 (276) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk:

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk:

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk:

Pa3 No. 205 (277) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 110/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 011/2

(3) hkl: 011/2 (7) klh: 101/2 (11) lhk: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2 (8) klh: 011/2 (12) lhk: 101/2

Ia3 No. 206 (278) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 101/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 110/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 011/2

(3) hkl: 011/2 (7) klh: 101/2 (11) lhk: 110/2

(4) hkl: 110/2 (8) klh: 011/2 (12) lhk: 101/2

No. 203 (275) (2) hkl: 110/4 (6) klh: 011/4 (10) lhk: 101/4

Point group: 432 Cubic Laue group: m3m

Cubic Laue group: m3

Pm3 No. 200 (270) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk:

No. 201 (272) (2) hkl: 110/2 (6) klh: 011/2 (10) lhk: 101/2

P432 No. 207 (279) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (13) khl: (18) hlk: (17) hlk: (22) lkh: (21) lkh:

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk: (15) khl: (19) hlk: (23) lkh:


P42 32 No. 208 (1) hkl: (5) klh: (9) lhk: (13) khl: 111/2 (17) hlk: 111/2 (21) lkh: 111/2

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk: (15) khl: 111/2 (19) hlk: 111/2 (23) lkh: 111/2


(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk: (15) khl:

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk: (16) khl:

(280) (2) hkl: (6) klh: (10) lhk: (14) khl: 111/2 (18) hlk: 111/2 (22) lkh: 111/2

F432 No. 209 (281) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (13) khl:

159

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) (17) hlk: (21) lkh: F41 32 No. 210 (1) hkl: (5) klh: (9) lhk: (13) khl: 313/4 (17) hlk: 313/4 (21) lkh: 313/4

(18) hlk: (22) lkh: (282) (2) hkl: (6) klh: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (18) hlk: (22) lkh:

(19) hlk: (23) lkh:

011/2 101/2 110/2 111/4 331/4 133/4

I432 No. 211 (283) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (13) khl: (18) hlk: (17) hlk: (22) lkh: (21) lkh:


(20) hlk: (24) lkh:

110/2 011/2 101/2 133/4 111/4 331/4



101/2 110/2 011/2 331/4 133/4 111/4



(284) (2) hkl: (6) klh: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (18) hlk: (22) lkh:

101/2 110/2 011/2 111/4 313/4 331/4


011/2 101/2 110/2 331/4 111/4 313/4


110/2 011/2 101/2 313/4 331/4 111/4



101/2 110/2 011/2 333/4 131/4 113/4


011/2 101/2 110/2 113/4 333/4 131/4


110/2 011/2 101/2 131/4 113/4 333/4

I41 32 No. 214 (286) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: 311/4 (14) khl: (17) hlk: 311/4 (18) hlk: (21) lkh: 311/4 (22) lkh:

Point group: 43m

101/2 110/2 011/2 333/4 131/4 113/4


011/2 101/2 110/2 113/4 333/4 131/4




F43m No. 216 (288) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: (14) khl: (17) hlk: (18) hlk: (21) lkh: (22) lkh:





P43n No. 218 (290) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: 111/2 (14) khl: 111/2 (17) hlk: 111/2 (18) hlk: 111/2 (21) lkh: 111/2 (22) lkh: 111/2



F43c No. 219 (291) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: 111/2 (14) khl: 111/2 (17) hlk: 111/2 (18) hlk: 111/2 (21) lkh: 111/2 (22) lkh: 111/2



I43d No. 220 (292) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: 111/4 (14) khl: (17) hlk: 111/4 (18) hlk: (21) lkh: 111/4 (22) lkh:



Point group: m3m Pm3m No. 221 (1) hkl: (5) klh: (9) lhk: (13) khl: (17) hlk: (21) lkh:

110/2 011/2 101/2 131/4 113/4 333/4

Cubic Laue group: m3m

P43m No. 215 (287) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: (14) khl: (17) hlk: (18) hlk: (21) lkh: (22) lkh:

I43m No. 217 (289) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: (14) khl: (17) hlk: (18) hlk: (21) lkh: (22) lkh:

160

010/2 001/2 100/2 311/4 113/4 131/4

011/2 101/2 110/2 313/4 133/4 331/4

001/2 100/2 010/2 113/4 131/4 311/4

Cubic Laue group: m3m




Pn3n Origin 1 No. 222 (294) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (13) khl: (18) hlk: (17) hlk: (22) lkh: (21) lkh: (25) hkl: 111/2 (26) hkl: 111/2 (29) klh: 111/2 (30) klh: 111/2 (33) lhk: 111/2 (34) lhk: 111/2 (37) khl: 111/2 (38) khl: 111/2 (41) hlk: 111/2 (42) hlk: 111/2 (45) lkh: 111/2 (46) lkh: 111/2

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk: (15) khl: (19) hlk: (23) lkh: (27) hkl: (31) klh: (35) lhk: (39) khl: (43) hlk: (47) lkh:

111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2


111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2

Pn3n Origin 2 No. 222 (295) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 011/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 101/2 (13) khl: 001/2 (14) khl: 111/2

(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk: (15) khl:

101/2 110/2 011/2 010/2

(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk: (16) khl:

011/2 101/2 110/2 100/2

1.4. SYMMETRY IN RECIPROCAL SPACE Table A1.4.4.1. Crystallographic space groups in reciprocal space (cont.) (17) hlk: 001/2 (21) lkh: 001/2

(18) hlk: 100/2 (22) lkh: 010/2

(19) hlk: 111/2 (23) lkh: 100/2

(20) hlk: 010/2 (24) lkh: 111/2

Pm3n No. 223 (296) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: 111/2 (14) khl: 111/2 (17) hlk: 111/2 (18) hlk: 111/2 (21) lkh: 111/2 (22) lkh: 111/2



Pn3m Origin 1 (1) hkl: (5) klh: (9) lhk: (13) khl: 111/2 (17) hlk: 111/2 (21) lkh: 111/2 (25) hkl: 111/2 (29) klh: 111/2 (33) lhk: 111/2 (37) khl: (41) hlk: (45) lkh:

No. 224 (297) (2) hkl: (6) klh: (10) lhk: (14) khl: 111/2 (18) hlk: 111/2 (22) lkh: 111/2 (26) hkl: 111/2 (30) klh: 111/2 (34) lhk: 111/2 (38) khl: (42) hlk: (46) lkh:



Pn3m Origin 2 No. 224 (298) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 110/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 011/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 101/2 (13) khl: 110/2 (14) khl: (17) hlk: 110/2 (18) hlk: 011/2 (21) lkh: 110/2 (22) lkh: 101/2


Fm3m No. 225 (299) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (13) khl: (18) hlk: (17) hlk: (22) lkh: (21) lkh: Fm3c No. 226 (300) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: 111/2 (14) khl: 111/2 (17) hlk: 111/2 (18) hlk: 111/2 (21) lkh: 111/2 (22) lkh: 111/2 Fd3m Origin 1 No. 227 (301) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 011/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 101/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 110/2 (13) khl: 313/4 (14) khl: 111/4 (17) hlk: 313/4 (18) hlk: 331/4

111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2

101/2 110/2 011/2 101/2 011/2


110/2 011/2 101/2 133/4 111/4

111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2 111/2

011/2 101/2 110/2 011/2 101/2


(4) hkl: (8) klh: (12) lhk: (16) khl: (20) hlk:

313/4 111/4 111/4 111/4 101/2 101/2 101/2

331/4 331/4 133/4 313/4 011/2

110/2 011/2

(23) lkh: (27) hkl: (31) klh: (35) lhk: (39) khl: (43) hlk: (47) lkh:


111/4 313/4 331/4 133/4 110/2 011/2

No. 227 (302) (2) hkl: 312/4 (6) klh: 231/4 (10) lhk: 123/4 (14) khl: (18) hlk: 231/4 (22) lkh: 123/4


123/4 312/4 231/4 123/4

231/4 123/4 312/4 231/4 123/4

231/4


Fd3c Origin 1 No. 228 (303) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 011/2 (5) klh: (6) klh: 101/2 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 110/2 (13) khl: 313/4 (14) khl: 111/4 (17) hlk: 313/4 (18) hlk: 331/4 (21) lkh: 313/4 (22) lkh: 133/4 (25) hkl: 333/4 (26) hkl: 311/4 (29) klh: 333/4 (30) klh: 131/4 (33) lhk: 333/4 (34) lhk: 113/4 (37) khl: 010/2 (38) khl: 111/2 (41) hlk: 010/2 (42) hlk: 001/2 (45) lkh: 010/2 (46) lkh: 100/2


110/2 011/2 101/2 133/4 111/4 331/4 113/4 311/4 131/4 100/2 111/2 001/2


101/2 110/2 011/2 331/4 133/4 111/4 131/4 113/4 311/4 001/2 100/2 111/2

Fd3c Origin 2 No. 228 (304) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: 132/4 (5) klh: (6) klh: 213/4 (9) lhk: (10) lhk: 321/4 (13) khl: 310/4 (14) khl: 111/2 (17) hlk: 310/4 (18) hlk: 031/4 (21) lkh: 310/4 (22) lkh: 103/4


321/4 132/4 213/4 103/4 111/2 031/4


213/4 321/4 132/4 031/4 103/4 111/2

Im3m No. 229 (305) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (14) khl: (13) khl: (18) hlk: (17) hlk: (22) lkh: (21) lkh:


Fd3m Origin 2 (1) hkl: (5) klh: (9) lhk: (13) khl: 312/4 (17) hlk: 312/4 (21) lkh: 312/4



(3) hkl: (7) klh: (11) lhk: (15) khl: (19) hlk:




Ia3d No. 230 (306) (1) hkl: (2) hkl: (5) klh: (6) klh: (9) lhk: (10) lhk: (13) khl: 311/4 (14) khl: (17) hlk: 311/4 (18) hlk: (21) lkh: 311/4 (22) lkh:

101/2 110/2 011/2 331/4 133/4

161

133/4 133/4 313/4 331/4

101/2 110/2 011/2 333/4 131/4 113/4


110/2


011/2 101/2 110/2 113/4 333/4 131/4


110/2 011/2 101/2 131/4 113/4 333/4


1.5. Crystallographic viewpoints in the classification of space-group representations BY M. I. AROYO 1.5.1. List of symbols G; S G G0 P or G T R, S; W w X x, y, z; xi x L a, b, c or t L a , b , c K k G k G Lk G

H. WONDRATSCHEK

AND

Group, especially space group; site-symmetry group Element of group G Symmorphic space group Point group of space group G Translation subgroup of space group G Matrix; matrix part of a symmetry operation Column part of a symmetry operation Point of point space Coordinates of a point or coefficients of a vector Column of point coordinates or of vector coefficients Vector lattice of the space group G ak T Basis vectors or row of basis vectors of the lattice L of G Vector of the lattice L of G Reciprocal lattice of the space group G or ak Basis vectors or column of basis vectors of the reciprocal lattice L Vector of the reciprocal lattice L Vector of reciprocal space Reciprocal-space group Little co-group of k Little group of k (Matrix) representation of G 1.5.2. Introduction

This new chapter on representations widens the scope of the general topics of reciprocal space treated in this volume. Space-group representations play a growing role in physical applications of crystal symmetry. They are treated in a number of papers and books but comparison of the terms and the listed data is difficult. The main reason for this is the lack of standards in the classification and nomenclature of representations. As a result, the reader is confronted with different numbers of types and barely comparable notations used by the different authors, see e.g. Stokes & Hatch (1988), Table 7. The k vectors, which can be described as vectors in reciprocal space, play a decisive role in the description and classification of space-group representations. Their symmetry properties are determined by the so-called reciprocal-space group G which is always isomorphic to a symmorphic space group G0 . The different symmetry types of k vectors correspond to the different kinds of point orbits in the symmorphic space groups G0 . The classification of point orbits into Wyckoff positions in International Tables for Crystallography Volume A (IT A) (1995) can be used directly to classify the irreducible representations of a space group, abbreviated irreps; the Wyckoff positions of the symmorphic space groups G0 form a basis for a natural classification of the irreps. This was first discovered by Wintgen (1941). Similar results have been obtained independently by Raghavacharyulu (1961), who introduced the term reciprocal-space group. In this chapter a classification of irreps is provided which is based on Wintgen’s idea. Although this idea is now more than 50 years old, it has been utilized only rarely and has not yet found proper recognition in the literature and in the existing tables of space-group irreps. Slater (1962) described the correspondence between the special k vectors

of the Brillouin zone and the Wyckoff positions of space group Pm3m. Similarly, Jan (1972) compared Wyckoff positions with points of the Brillouin zone when describing the symmetry Pm3 of the Fermi surface for the pyrite structure. However, the widespread tables of Miller & Love (1967), Zak et al. (1969), Bradley & Cracknell (1972) (abbreviated as BC), Cracknell et al. (1979) (abbreviated as CDML), and Kovalev (1986) have not made use of this kind of classification and its possibilities, and the existing tables are unnecessarily complicated, cf. Boyle (1986). In addition, historical reasons have obscured the classification of irreps and impeded their application. The first considerations of irreps dealt only with space groups of translation lattices (Bouckaert et al., 1936). Later, other space groups were taken into consideration as well. Instead of treating these (lower) symmetries as such, their irreps were derived and classified by starting from the irreps of lattice space groups and proceeding to those of lower symmetry. This procedure has two consequences: (1) those k vectors that are special in a lattice space group are also correspondingly listed in the low-symmetry space group even if they have lost their special properties due to the symmetry reduction; (2) during the symmetry reduction unnecessary new types of k vectors and symbols for them are introduced. The use of the reciprocal-space group G avoids both these detours. In this chapter we consider in more detail the reciprocal-spacegroup approach and show that widely used crystallographic conventions can be adopted for the classification of space-group representations. Some basic concepts are developed in Section 1.5.3. Possible conventions are discussed in Section 1.5.4. The consequences and advantages of this approach are demonstrated and discussed using examples in Section 1.5.5.

1.5.3. Basic concepts The aim of this section is to give a brief overview of some of the basic concepts related to groups and their representations. Its content should be of some help to readers who wish to refresh their knowledge of space groups and representations, and to familiarize themselves with the kind of description in this chapter. However, it can not serve as an introductory text for these subjects. The interested reader is referred to books dealing with space-group theory, representations of space groups and their applications in solid-state physics: see Bradley & Cracknell (1972) or the forthcoming Chapter 1.2 of IT D (Physical properties of crystals) by Janssen (2001). 1.5.3.1. Representations of finite groups Group theory is the proper tool for studying symmetry in science. The elements of the crystallographic groups are rigid motions (isometries) with regard to performing one after another. The set of all isometries that map an object onto itself always fulfils the group postulates and is called the symmetry or the symmetry group of that object; the isometry itself is called a symmetry operation. Symmetry groups of crystals are dealt with in this chapter. In addition, groups of matrices with regard to matrix multiplication (matrix groups) are considered frequently. Such groups will sometimes be called realizations or representations of abstract groups. Many applications of group theory to physical problems are closely related to representation theory, cf. Rosen (1981) and


1.5. CLASSIFICATION OF SPACE-GROUP REPRESENTATIONS references therein. In this section, matrix representations of finite groups G are considered. The concepts of homomorphism and matrix groups are of essential importance. A group B is a homomorphic image of a group A if there exists a mapping of the elements Ai of A onto the elements Bk of B that preserves the multiplication relation (in general several elements of A are mapped onto one element of B): if Ai ! Bi and Ak ! Bk , then Ai Ak ! Bi Bk holds for all elements of A and B (the image of the product is equal to the product of the images). In the special case of a one-to-one mapping, the homomorphism is called an isomorphism. A matrix group is a group whose elements are non-singular square matrices. The law of combination is matrix multiplication and the group inverse is the inverse matrix. In the following we will be concerned with some basic properties of finite matrix groups relevant to representations. Let M1 and M2 be two matrix groups whose matrices are of the same dimension. They are said to be equivalent if there exists a (non-singular) matrix S such that M2 S 1 M1 S holds. Equivalence implies isomorphism but the inverse is not true: two matrix groups may be isomorphic without being equivalent. According to the theorem of Schur-Auerbach, every finite matrix group is equivalent to a unitary matrix group (by a unitary matrix group we understand a matrix group consisting entirely of unitary matrices). A matrix group M is reducible if it is equivalent to a matrix group in which every matrix M is of the form D1 X R , O D2 see e.g. Lomont (1959), p. 47. The group M is completely reducible if it is equivalent to a matrix group in which for all matrices R the submatrices X are O matrices (consisting of zeros only). According to the theorem of Maschke, a finite matrix group is completely reducible if it is reducible. A matrix group is irreducible if it is not reducible. A (matrix) representation G of a group G is a homomorphic mapping of G onto a matrix group MG. In a representation every element G 2 G is associated with a matrix MG. The dimension of the matrices is called the dimension of the representation. The above-mentioned theorems on finite matrix groups can be applied directly to representations: we can restrict the considerations to unitary representations only. Further, since every finite matrix group is either completely reducible into irreducible constituents or irreducible, it follows that the infinite set of all matrix representations of a group is known in principle once the irreducible representations are known. Naturally, the question of how to construct all nonequivalent irreducible representations of a finite group and how to classify them arises. Linear representations are especially important for applications. In this chapter only linear representations of space groups will be considered. Realizations and representations are homomorphic images of abstract groups, but not all of them are linear. In particular, the action of space groups on point space is a nonlinear realization of the abstract space groups because isometries and thus symmetry operations W of space groups G are nonlinear operations. The same holds for their description by matrix-column pairs (W, w),† by the general position, or by augmented 4 4 matrices, see IT A, Part 8. Therefore, the isomorphic matrix representation of a space group, mostly used by crystallographers and listed in the space-group tables of IT A as the general position, is not linear. { In physics often written as the Seitz symbol W jw.

1.5.3.2. Space groups In crystallography one deals with real crystals. In many cases the treatment of the crystal is much simpler, but nevertheless describes the crystal and its properties very well, if the real crystal is replaced by an ‘ideal crystal’. The real crystal is then considered to be a finite piece of an undisturbed, periodic, and thus infinitely extended arrangement of particles or their centres: ideal crystals are periodic objects in three-dimensional point space E3 , also called direct space. Periodicity means that there are translations among the symmetry operations of ideal crystals. The symmetry group of an ideal crystal is called its space group G. Space groups G are of special interest for our problem because: (1) their irreps are the subject of the classification to be discussed; (2) this classification makes use of the isomorphism of certain groups to the so-called symmorphic space groups G0 . Therefore, space groups are introduced here in a slightly more detailed manner than the other concepts. In doing this we follow the definitions and symbolism of IT A, Part 8. To each space group G belongs an infinite set T of translations, the translation lattice of G. The lattice T forms an infinite Abelian invariant subgroup of G. For each translation its translation vector is defined. The set of all translation vectors is called the vector lattice L of G. Because of the finite size of the atoms constituting the real crystal, the lengths of the translation vectors of the ideal crystal cannot be arbitrarily small; rather there is a lower limit > 0 for their length in the range of a few A˚. When referred to a coordinate system O, a1 , a2 , a3 , consisting of an origin O and a basis ak , the elements W, i.e. the symmetry operations of the space group G, are described by matrix-column pairs (W, w) with matrix part W and column part w. The translations of G are represented by pairs I, ti , where I is the 3 3 unit matrix and t i is the column of coefficients of the translation vector ti 2 L. The basis can always be chosen such that all columns t i and no other columns of translations consist of integers. Such a basis p1 , p2 , p3 is called a primitive basis. For each vector lattice L there exists an infinite number of primitive bases. The space group G can be decomposed into left cosets relative to T: G T [ W 2 , w2 T [ . . . [ W i , wi T [ . . . [ W n , wn T : 1:5:3:1 The coset representatives form the finite set V fW v , wv g, v 1, . . . , n, with W 1 , w1 I, o, where o is the column consisting of zeros only. The factor group G=T is in books on isomorphic to the point group P of G (called G representation theory) describing the symmetry of the external shape of the macroscopic crystal and being represented by the matrices W 1 , W 2 , . . . , W n . If V can be chosen such that all wv o, then G is called a symmorphic space group G0 . A symmorphic space group can be recognized easily from its conventional Hermann– Mauguin symbol which does not contain any screw or glide component. In terms of group theory, a symmorphic space group is the semidirect product of T and P, cf. BC, p. 44. In symmorphic space groups G0 (and in no others) there are site-symmetry groups which are isomorphic to the point group P of G0 . Space groups can be classified into 219 (affine) space-group types either by isomorphism or by affine equivalence; the 230 crystallographic space-group types are obtained by restricting the transformations available for affine equivalence to those with positive determinant, cf. IT A, Section 8.2.1. Many important properties of space groups are shared by all space groups of a type. In such a case one speaks of properties of the type. For example, if a space group is symmorphic, then all space groups of its type are

163

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES symmorphic, so that one normally speaks of a symmorphic spacegroup type. With the concept of symmorphic space groups one can also define the arithmetic crystal classes: Let G0 be a symmorphic space group referred to a primitive basis and V fW v , wv g its set of coset representatives with wv o for all columns. To G0 all those space groups G can be assigned for which a primitive basis can be found such that the matrix parts W v of their sets V are the same as those of G0 , only the columns wv may differ. In this way, to a type of symmorphic space groups G0 , other types of space groups are assigned, i.e. the space-group types are classified according to the symmorphic space-group types. These classes are called arithmetic crystal classes of space groups or of space-group types. There are 73 arithmetic crystal classes corresponding to the 73 types of symmorphic space groups; between 1 and 16 space-group types belong to an arithmetic crystal class. A matrix-algebraic definition of arithmetic crystal classes and a proposal for their nomenclature can be found in IT A, Section 8.2.2; see also Section 8.3.4 and Table 8.2. 1.5.3.3. Representations of the translation group T and the reciprocal lattice For representation theory we follow the terminology of BC and CDML. Let G be referred to a primitive basis. For the following, the infinite set of translations, based on discrete cyclic groups of infinite order, will be replaced by a (very large) finite set in the usual way. One assumes the Born–von Karman boundary conditions I, tbi Ni I, Ni I, o

1:5:3:2

to hold, where tbi 1, 0, 0, (0, 1, 0) or (0, 0, 1) and Ni is a large integer for i 1, 2 or 3, respectively. Then for any lattice translation (I, t), I, Nt I, o

1:5:3:3

holds, where Nt is the column N1 t1 , N2 t2 , N3 t3 . If the (infinitely many) translations mapped in this way onto (I, o) form a normal subgroup T 1 of G, then the mapping described by (1.5.3.3) is a homomorphism. There exists a factor group G0 G=T 1 of G relative to T 1 with translation subgroup T 0 T =T 1 which is finite and is sometimes called the finite space group. Only the irreducible representations (irreps) of these finite space groups will be considered. The definitions of space-group type, symmorphic space group etc. can be transferred to these groups. Because T is Abelian, T 0 is also Abelian. Replacing the space group G by G0 means that the especially well developed theory of representations of finite groups can be applied, cf. Lomont (1959), Jansen & Boon (1967). For convenience, the prime 0 will be omitted and the symbol G will be used instead of G0 ; T 0 will be denoted by T in the following. Because T (formerly T 0 ) is Abelian, its irreps T are onedimensional and consist of (complex) roots of unity. Owing to equations (1.5.3.2) and (1.5.3.3), the irreps q1 q2 q3 I, t of T have the form t1 t2 t3 q1 q2 q3 , 1:5:3:4 I, t exp 2i q1 q2 q3 N1 N2 N3 where t is the column t1 , t2 , t3 , qj 0, 1, 2, . . . , Nj 1, j 1, 2, 3, and tk and qj are integers. Given a primitive basis a1 , a2 , a3 of L, mathematicians and crystallographers define the basis of the dual or reciprocal lattice L by ai aj ij ,

1:5:3:5

where a a is the scalar product between the vectors and ij is the unit matrix (see e.g. Chapter 1.1, Section 1.1.3). Texts on the physics of solids redefine the basis a1 , a2 , a3 of the reciprocal lattice L , lengthening each of the basis vectors aj by the factor 2. Therefore, in the physicist’s convention the relation between the bases of direct and reciprocal lattice reads (cf. BC, p. 86): ai aj 2ij :

1:5:3:6

In the present chapter only the physicist’s basis of the reciprocal lattice is employed, and hence the use of aj should not lead to misunderstandings. The set of all vectors K,† K k1 a1 k2 a2 k3 a3 ,

1:5:3:7

ki integer, is called the lattice reciprocal to L or the reciprocal lattice L .‡ If one adopts the notation of IT A, Part 5, the basis of direct space is denoted by a row a1 , a2 , a3 T , where T means transposed. For reciprocal space, the basis is described by a column a1 , a2 , a3 . To each lattice generated from a basis ai T a reciprocal lattice is generated from the basis aj . Both lattices, L and L , can be compared most easily by referring the direct lattice L to its conventional basis ai T as defined in Chapters 2.1 and 9.1 of IT A. In this case, the lattice L may be primitive or centred. If ai T forms a primitive basis of L, i.e. if L is primitive, then the basis aj forms a primitive basis of L . If L is centred, i.e. ai T is not a primitive basis of L, then there exists a centring matrix P, 0 < det P < 1, by which three linearly independent vectors of L with rational coefficients are generated from those with integer coefficients, cf. IT A, Table 5.1. Moreover, P can be chosen such that the set of vectors p1 , p2 , p3 T a1 , a2 , a3 T P

1:5:3:8

forms a primitive basis of L. Then the basis vectors p1 , p2 , p3 of the lattice reciprocal to the lattice generated by p1 , p2 , p3 T are determined by

p1 , p2 , p3 P 1 a1 , a2 , a3

1:5:3:9

and form a primitive basis of L . Because det P 1 > 1, not all vectors K of the form (1.5.3.7) belong to L . If k1 , k2 , k3 are the (integer) coefficients of these vectors K referred to aj and kp1 p1 kp2 p2 kp3 p3 are the vectors of L , then K kj T aj kj T Ppi kpi T pi is a vector of L if and only if the coefficients kp1 , kp2 , kp3 T k1 , k2 , k3 T P

1:5:3:10

are integers. In other words, k1 , k2 , k3 T has to fulfil the equation k1 , k2 , k3 T kp1 , kp2 , kp3 T P 1 :

1:5:3:11

As is well known, the Bravais type of the reciprocal lattice L is not necessarily the same as that of its direct lattice L. If W is the matrix of a (point-) symmetry operation of the direct lattice, referred to its basis ai T , then W 1 is the matrix of the same symmetry operation of the reciprocal lattice but referred to the dual basis ai . This does not affect the symmetry because in a (symmetry) group the inverse of each element in the group also belongs to the group. Therefore, the (point) symmetries of a lattice { In crystallography vectors are designated by small bold-faced letters. With K we make an exception in order to follow the tradition of physics. A crystallographic alternative would be t . { The lattice L is often called the direct lattice. These names are historically introduced and cannot be changed, although equations (1.5.3.5) and (1.5.3.6) show that essentially neither of the lattices is preferred: they form a pair of mutually reciprocal lattices.

164

1.5. CLASSIFICATION OF SPACE-GROUP REPRESENTATIONS k , then the number of arms of the star of k and the and its reciprocal lattice are always the same. However, there may little co-group G be differences in the matrix descriptions due to the different number of k vectors in the fundamental region from the orbit of k is j=jG k j. and jG orientations of L and L relative to the symmetry elements of G T due to the reference to the different bases ai and ai . For Definition. The group of all elements W, w 2 G for which W 2 example, if L has the point symmetry (Hermann–Mauguin symbol) k is called the little group Lk of k. 3m1, then the symbol for the point symmetry of L is 31m and vice G versa. Equation (1.5.3.14) for k resembles the equation x Wx t,

1.5.3.4. Irreducible representations of space groups and the reciprocal-space group Let ai T be a conventional basis of the lattice P L of the space group G. From (1.5.3.6), ki qi =Ni and k 3k1 ki ai , equation (1.5.3.4) can be written q1 q2 q3

I, t

k

I, t exp ik t:

1:5:3:12

Equation (1.5.3.12) has the same form if a primitive basis pi T of L has P been chosen. In this case, the vector k is given by k 3i1 kpi pi . Let a primitive basis pi T be chosen for the lattice L. The set of all vectors k (known as wavevectors) forms a discontinuous array. Consider two wavevectors k and k0 k K, where K is a vector of the reciprocal lattice L . Obviously, k and k0 describe the same irrep of T . Therefore, to determine all irreps of T it is necessary to consider only the wavevectors of a small region of the reciprocal space, where the translation of this region by all vectors of L fills the reciprocal space without gap or overlap. Such a region is called a fundamental region of L . (The nomenclature in literature is not quite uniform. We follow here widely adopted definitions.) The fundamental region of L is not uniquely determined. Two types of fundamental regions are of interest in this chapter: (1) The first Brillouin zone is that range of k space around o for which jkj jK kj holds for any vector K 2 L (Wigner–Seitz cell or domain of influence in k space). The Brillouin zone is used in books and articles on irreps of space groups. (2) The crystallographic unit cell in reciprocal space, for short unit cell, is the set of all k vectors with 0 ki < 1. It corresponds to the unit cell used in crystallography for the description of crystal structures in direct space. Let k be some vector according to (1.5.3.12) and W be the The following definitions are useful: matrices of G. Definition. The set of all vectors k0 fulfilling the condition K 2 L k0 kW K, W 2 G, 1:5:3:13

t2L

1:5:3:15

by which the fixed points of the symmetry operation W, t of a symmorphic space group G0 are determined. Indeed, the orbits of k defined by (1.5.3.13) correspond to the point orbits of G0 , the little k of k corresponds to the site-symmetry group of that co-group G point X whose coordinates xi have the same values as the vector coefficients ki T of k, and the star of k corresponds to a set of representatives of X in G0 . (The analogue of the little group Lk is rarely considered in crystallography.) All symmetry operations of G0 may be obtained as combinations of an operation that leaves the origin fixed with a translation of L, i.e. are of the kind W, t I, tW , o. We now define the analogous group for the k vectors. Whereas G0 is a realization of the corresponding abstract group in direct (point) space, the group to be defined will be a realization of it in reciprocal (vector) space. Definition. The group G which is the semidirect product of the and the translation group of the reciprocal lattice L point group G of G is called the reciprocal-space group of G. The elements of G are the operations W, K I, KW , o and K 2 L . In order to emphasize that G is a group with W 2 G acting on reciprocal space and not the inverse of a space group (whatever that may mean) we insert a hyphen ‘-’ between ‘reciprocal’ and ‘space’. From the definition of G it follows that space groups of the same type define the same type of reciprocal-space group G . Moreover, as G does not depend on the column parts of the space-group operations, all space groups of the same arithmetic crystal class determine the same type of G ; for arithmetic crystal class see Section 1.5.3.2. Following Wintgen (1941), the types of reciprocalspace groups G are listed for the arithmetic crystal classes of space groups, i.e. for all space groups G, in Appendix 1.5.1.

1.5.4. Conventions in the classification of space-group irreps

is called the orbit of k. for which Definition. The set of all matrices W 2 G 1:5:3:14 k forms a group which is called the little co-group G of k. The vector k fIg; otherwise G k > fIg and k is called k is called general if G special.

Because of the isomorphism between the reciprocal-space groups G and the symmorphic space groups G0 one can introduce crystallographic conventions in the classification of space-group irreps. These conventions will be compared with those which have mainly been used up to now. Illustrative examples to the following more theoretical considerations are discussed in Section 1.5.5.1.

k is a subgroup of the point group G. The little co-group G k relative to G . Consider the coset decomposition of G

1.5.4.1. Fundamental regions

k kW K,

K2L

relative Definition. If fW m g is a set of coset representatives of G k to G , then the set fkW m g is called the star of k and the vectors kW m are called the arms of the star. of the The number of arms of the star of k is equal to the order jGj k k of point group G divided by the order jG j of the symmetry group G vectors from the orbit of k in k. If k is general, then there are jGj each fundamental region and jGj arms of the star. If k is special with

Different types of regions of reciprocal space may be chosen as fundamental regions, see Section 1.5.3.4. The most frequently used type is the first Brillouin zone, which is the Wigner–Seitz cell (or Voronoi region, Dirichlet domain, domain of influence; cf. IT A, Chapter 9.1) of the reciprocal lattice. It has the property that with each k vector also its star belongs to the Brillouin zone. Such a choice has three advantages: (1) the Brillouin zone is always primitive and it manifests the point symmetry of the reciprocal lattice L of G;

165

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES (2) only k vectors of the boundary of the Brillouin zone may have little-group representations which are obtained from projective k , see e.g. BC, p. 156; representations of the little co-group G (3) for physical reasons, the Brillouin zone may be the most convenient fundamental region. Of these advantages only the third may be essential. For the classification of irreps the minimal domains, see Section 1.5.4.2, are much more important than the fundamental regions. The minimal domain does not display the point-group symmetry anyway and the distinguished k vectors always belong to its boundary however the minimal domain may be chosen. The serious disadvantage of the Brillouin zone is its often complicated shape which, moreover, depends on the lattice parameters of L . The body that represents the Brillouin zone belongs to one of the five Fedorov polyhedra (more or less distorted versions of the cubic forms cube, rhombdodecahedron or cuboctahedron, of the hexagonal prism, or of the tetragonal elongated rhombdodecahedron). A more detailed description is that by the 24 symmetrische Sorten (Delaunay sorts) of Delaunay (1933), Figs. 11 and 12. According to this classification, the Brillouin zone may display three types of polyhedra of cubic, one type of hexagonal, two of rhombohedral, three of tetragonal, six of orthorhombic, six of monoclinic, and three types of triclinic symmetry. For low symmetries the shape of the Brillouin zone is so variable that BC, p. 90 ff. chose a primitive unit cell of L for the fundamental regions of triclinic and monoclinic crystals. This cell also reflects the point symmetry of L , it has six faces only, and although its shape varies with the lattice constants all cells are affinely equivalent. For space groups of higher symmetry, BC and most other authors prefer the Brillouin zone. Considering L as a lattice, one can refer it to its conventional crystallographic lattice basis. Referred to this basis, the unit cell of L is always an alternative to the Brillouin zone. With the exception of the hexagonal lattice, the unit cell of L reflects the point symmetry, it has only six faces and its shape is always affinely equivalent for varying lattice constants. For a space group G with a primitive lattice, the above-defined conventional unit cell of L is also primitive. If G has a centred lattice, then L also belongs to a type of centred lattice and the conventional cell of L [not to be confused with the cell spanned by the basis aj dual to the basis ai T ] is larger than necessary. However, this is not disturbing because in this context the fundamental region is an auxiliary construction only for the definition of the minimal domain; see Section 1.5.4.2.

Definition. A simply connected part of the fundamental region which contains exactly one k vector of each orbit of k is called a minimal domain .

In general, in representation theory of space groups the Brillouin zone is taken as the fundamental region and is called a representation domain.† Again, the volume of a representation j of the volume of the Brillouin domain in reciprocal space is 1=jG zone. In addition, as the Brillouin zone contains for each k vector all k vectors of the star of k, by application of all symmetry operations to one obtains the Brillouin zone; cf. BC, p. 147. As the W 2G Brillouin zone may change its geometrical type depending on the lattice constants, the type of the representation domain may also vary with varying lattice constants; see examples (3) and (4) in Section 1.5.5.1. The simplest crystal structures are the lattice-like structures that are built up of translationally equivalent points (centres of particles) of the space group G is only. For such a structure the point group G equal to the point group Q of its lattice L. Such point groups are called holohedral, the space group G is called holosymmetric. There are seven holohedral point groups of three dimensions: 1, 2=m, mmm, 4=mmm, 3m, 6=mmm and m3m. For the non-holosym < Q holds. metric space groups G, G In books on representation theory of space groups, holosymmetric space groups play a distinguished role. Their representation domains are called basic domains . For holosymmetric space < Q holds, groups holds. If G is non-holosymmetric, i.e. G

is defined by Q and is smaller than the representation domain in Q. In the literature by a factor which is equal to the index of G these basic domains are considered to be of primary importance. In Miller & Love (1967) only the irreps for the k vectors of the basic domains are listed. Section 5.5 of BC and Davies & Cracknell (1976) state that such a listing is not sufficient for the nonholosymmetric space groups because < . Section 5.5 of BC shows how to overcome this deficiency; Chapter 4 of CDML introduces new types of k vectors for the parts of not belonging to

. The crystallographic analogue of the representation domain in direct space is the asymmetric unit, cf. IT A. According to its definition it is a simply connected smallest part of space from which by application of all symmetry operations of the space group the whole space is exactly filled. For each space-group type the asymmetric units of IT A belong to the same topological type independent of the lattice constants. They are chosen as ‘simple’ bodies by inspection rather than by applying clearly stated rules. Among the asymmetric units of the 73 symmorphic space-group types G0 there are 31 parallelepipeds, 27 prisms (13 trigonal, 6 tetragonal and 8 pentagonal) for the non-cubic, and 15 pyramids (11 trigonal and 4 tetragonal) for the cubic G0 . The asymmetric units of IT A – transferred to the groups G of reciprocal space – are alternatives for the representation domains of the literature. They are formulated as closed bodies. Therefore, for inner points k, the asymmetric units of IT A fulfil the condition that each star of k is represented exactly once. For the surface, however, these conditions either have to be worked out or one gives up the condition of uniqueness and replaces exactly by at least in the definition of the minimal domain (see preceding footnote). The examples of Section 1.5.5.1 show that the conditions for the boundary of the asymmetric unit and its special points, lines and

The choice of the minimal domain is by no means unique. One of the difficulties in comparing the published data on irreps of space groups is due to the different representation domains found in the literature. The number of k vectors of each general k orbit in a fundamental of G; see region is always equal to the order of the point group G Section 1.5.3.4. Therefore, the volume of the minimal domain in j of the volume of the fundamental region. reciprocal space is 1=jG Now we can restrict the search for all irreps of G to the k vectors within a minimal domain .

{ From definition 3.7.1 on p. 147 of BC, it does not follow that a representation domain contains exactly one k vector from each star. The condition ‘The intersection of the representation domain with its symmetrically equivalent domains is empty’ is missing. Lines 14 to 11 from the bottom of p. 149, however, state that such a property of the representation domain is intended. The representation domains of CDML, Figs. 3.15–3.29 contain at least one k vector of each star (Vol. 1, pp. 31, 57 and 65). On pp. 66, 67 a procedure is described for eliminating those k vectors from the representation domain which occur more than once. In the definition of Altmann (1977), p. 204, the representation domain contains exactly one arm (prong) per star.

1.5.4.2. Minimal domains One can show that all irreps of G can be built up from the irreps of T . Moreover, to find all irreps of G it is only necessary to consider one k vector from each orbit of k, cf. CDML, p. 31. k

166

1.5. CLASSIFICATION OF SPACE-GROUP REPRESENTATIONS Table 1.5.4.1. Conventional coefficients ki T of k expressed by the adjusted coefficients kai of IT A for the different Bravais types of lattices in direct space

Table 1.5.4.2. Primitive coefficients kpi T of k from CDML expressed by the adjusted coefficients kai of IT A for the different Bravais types of lattices in direct space

Lattice types

k1

k2

k3

Lattice types

kp1

kp2

kp3

aP, mP, oP, tP, cP, rP mA, oA mC, oC oF, cF, oI, cI tI hP hR (hexagonal)

ka1 ka1 2ka1 2ka1 ka1 ka2 ka1 ka2 2ka1 ka2

ka2 2ka2 2ka2 2ka2 ka1 ka2 ka2 ka1 2ka2

ka3 2ka3 ka3 2ka3 2ka3 ka3 3ka3

aP, mP, oP, tP, cP, rP mA, oA mC, oC oF, cF oI, cI tI hP hR (hexagonal)

ka1

ka2

ka3

ka1 ka1 ka2 ka2 ka3 ka1 ka2 ka3 ka1 ka3 ka1 ka2 ka1 ka3

ka2 ka3 ka1 ka2 ka1 ka3 ka1 ka2 ka3 ka1 ka3 ka2 ka1 ka2 ka3

ka2 ka3 ka3 ka1 ka2 ka1 ka2 ka3 ka2 ka3 ka3 ka2 ka3

planes are in many cases much easier to formulate than those for the representation domain. The k-vector coefficients. For each k vector one can derive a set of irreps of the space group G. Different k vectors of a k orbit give rise to equivalent irreps. Thus, for the calculation of the irreps of the space groups it is essential to identify the orbits of k vectors in reciprocal space. This means finding the sets of all k vectors that are related by the operations of the reciprocal-space group G according to equation (1.5.3.13). The classification of these k orbits can be done in analogy to that of the point orbits of the symmorphic space groups, as is apparent from the comparison of equations (1.5.3.14) and (1.5.3.15). The classes of point orbits in direct space under a space group G are well known and are listed in the space-group tables of IT A. They are labelled by Wyckoff letters. The stabilizer S G X of a point X is called the site-symmetry group of X, and a Wyckoff position consists of all orbits for which the site-symmetry groups are conjugate subgroups of G. Let G be a symmorphic space group G0 . Owing to the isomorphism between the reciprocal-space groups G and the symmorphic space groups G0 , the complete list of the types of special k vectors of G is provided by the Wyckoff positions of k correspond to each other and the G0 . The groups S G0 X and G multiplicity of the Wyckoff position (divided by the number of centring vectors per unit cell for centred lattices) equals the number of arms of the star of k. Let the vectors t of L be referred to the conventional basis ai T of the space-group tables of IT A, as defined in Chapters 2.1 and 9.1 of IT A. Then, for the construction of the irreducible representations k of T the coefficients of the k vectors must be referred to the basis aj of reciprocal space dual to ai T in direct space. These k-vector coefficients may be different from the conventional coordinates of G0 listed in the Wyckoff positions of IT A. Example. Let G be a space group with an I-centred cubic lattice L, conventional basis ai T . Then L is an F-centred lattice. If referred to the conventional basis aj with ai aj 2ij , the k vectors with coefficients 1 0 0, 0 1 0 and 0 0 1 do not belong to L due to the ‘extinction laws’ well known in X-ray crystallography. However, in the standard basis of G0 , isomorphic to G , the vectors 1 0 0, 0 1 0 and 0 0 1 point to the vertices of the face-centred cube and thus correspond to 2 0 0, 0 2 0 and 0 0 2 referred to the conventional basis aj . In the following, three bases and, therefore, three kinds of coefficients of k will be distinguished: (1) Coefficients referred to the conventional basis aj in reciprocal space, dual to the conventional basis ai T in direct space. The corresponding k-vector coefficients, kj T , will be called conventional coefficients. (2) Coefficients of k referred to a primitive basis api in reciprocal space (which is dual to a primitive basis in direct space).

The corresponding coefficients will be called primitive coefficients kpi T . For a centred lattice the coefficients kpi T are different from the conventional coefficients ki T . In most of the physics literature related to space-group representations these primitive coefficients are used, e.g. by CDML. (3) The coefficients of k referred to the conventional basis of G0 . These coefficients will be called adjusted coefficients kai T . The relations between conventional and adjusted coefficients are listed for the different Bravais types of reciprocal lattices in Table 1.5.4.1, and those between adjusted and primitive coordinates in Table 1.5.4.2. If adjusted coefficients are used, then IT A is as suitable for dealing with irreps as it is for handling space-group symmetry. 1.5.4.3. Wintgen positions In order to avoid confusion, in the following the analogues to the Wyckoff positions of G0 will be called Wintgen positions of G ; the coordinates of the Wyckoff position are replaced by the k-vector coefficients of the Wintgen position, the Wyckoff letter will be called the Wintgen letter, and the symbols for the site symmetries of k of the k G0 are to be read as the symbols for the little co-groups G vectors in G . The multiplicity of a Wyckoff position is retained in the Wintgen symbol in order to facilitate the use of IT A for the description of symmetry in k space. However, it is equal to the multiplicity of the star of k only in the case of primitive lattices L . In analogy to a Wyckoff position, a Wintgen position is a set of orbits of k vectors. Each orbit as well as each star of k can be represented by any one of its k vectors. The zero, one, two or three parameters in the k-vector coefficients define points, lines, planes or the full parameter space. The different stars of a Wintgen position are obtained by changing the parameters. Remark. Because reciprocal space is a vector space, there is no origin choice and the Wintgen letters are unique (in contrast to the Wyckoff letters, which may depend on the origin choice). Therefore, the introduction of Wintgen sets in analogy to the Wyckoff sets of IT A, Section 8.3.2 is not necessary. It may be advantageous to describe the different stars belonging to a Wintgen position in a uniform way. For this purpose one can define: Definition. Two k vectors of a Wintgen position are uni-arm if one can be obtained from the other by parameter variation. The description of the stars of a Wintgen position is uni-arm if the k vectors representing these stars are uni-arm.

167

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES and Ia Table 1.5.5.1. The k-vector types for the space groups Im3m 3d Comparison of the k-vector labels and parameters of CDML with the Wyckoff positions of IT A for Fm3m, O5h , isomorphic to the reciprocal-space group G of m3mI. The parameter ranges in the last column are chosen such that each star of k is represented exactly once. The sign means symmetrically equivalent. The coordinates x, y, z of IT A are related to the k-vector coefficients of CDML by x 1=2k2 k3 , y 1=2k1 k3 , z 1=2k1 k2 . k-vector label, CDML

Wyckoff position, IT A

Parameters (see Fig. 1.5.5.1b), IT A

0, 0, 0

4 a m3m

0, 0, 0

H

1 2,

4 b m3m

1 2 , 0, 0

P

1 1 1 4, 4, 4

8 c 43m

1 1 1 4, 4, 4

1 1 2, 2

N 0, 0,

1 2

24 d m.mm

1 1 4, 4,0

,

,

24 e 4m.m

x, 0, 0 : 0 < x < 12

32 f 32 f 32 f 32 f 32 f

x, x, x: 0 < x < 14 1 x, x, x: 0 < x < 14 2 x, x, x: 14 < x < 12 x, x, 12 x : 0 < x < 14 x, x, x: 0 < x < 12 with x 6 14

, , F 12 , 12 3, 12 F1 (Fig. 1.5.5.1b) F2 (Fig. 1.5.5.1b) [ F1 H2 nP D , ,

1 2

.3m .3m .3m .3m .3m

z: 0 < z < 14

48 g 2.mm

1 1 4 , 4,

48 h m.m2

x, x, 0: 0 < x < 14

48 i m.m2

1 2

96 j m..

x, y, 0: 0 < y < x < 12

B , , PH1 N1 (Fig. 1.5.5.1b) C , , J , , PH1 (Fig. 1.5.5.1b) C [ B [ J NN1 H1

96 k 96 k 96 k 96 k 96 k 96 k

x, x, z: 0 < z < x < 14 1 x, x, z: 0 < x < 2 x < z < 12 x, x, z: 0 < z < x < 14 x, y, y: 0 < y < x < 12 y x, x, z: 0 < x < z < 12 x x, x, z: 0 < x < 14, 0 < z < 12 with z 6 x, z 6 12 x.

GP , ,

192 l 1

0, 0, G 12

,

A ,

,

1 2

,

1 2

1 2

1 4

..m ..m ..m ..m ..m ..m

x, x, 0: 0 < x < 14

1 4

y 1 4

x, y, z: 0 < z < y < x < 12

For non-holosymmetric space groups the representation domain is a multiple of the basic domain . CDML introduced new letters for stars of k vectors in those parts of which do not belong to . If one can make a new k vector uni-arm to some k vector of the basic domain by an appropriate choice of and , one can extend the parameter range of this k vector of to instead of introducing new letters. It turns out that indeed most of these new letters are unnecessary. This restricts the introduction of new types of k vectors to the few cases where it is indispensible. Extension of the parameter range for k means that the corresponding representations can also be obtained by parameter variation. Such representations can be considered to belong to the same type. In this way a large number of superfluous k-vector names, which pretend a greater variety of types of irreps than really exists, can be avoided (Boyle, 1986). For examples see Section 1.5.5.1. 1.5.5. Examples and conclusions 1.5.5.1. Examples In this section, four examples are considered in each of which the crystallographic classification scheme for the irreps is compared with the traditional one:† { Corresponding tables and figures for all space groups are available at http:// www.cryst.ehu.es/cryst/get_kvec.html.

y

(space (1) k-vector types of the arithmetic crystal class m3mI groups Im3m and Ia3d), reciprocal-space group isomorphic to Fm3m; ; see Table 1.5.5.1 and Fig. 1.5.5.1; (2) k-vector types of the arithmetic crystal class m3I (Im3 and Ia3), reciprocal-space group isomorphic to Fm3, > ; see Table 1.5.5.2 and Fig. 1.5.5.2; (3) k-vector types of the arithmetic crystal class 4=mmmI I4=mmm, I4=mcm, I41 =amd and I41 =acd, reciprocalspace group isomorphic to I4=mmm. Here changes for different ratios of the lattice constants a and c; see Table 1.5.5.3 and Fig. 1.5.5.3; (4) k-vector types of the arithmetic crystal class mm2F (Fmm2 and Fdd2), reciprocal-space group isomorphic to Imm2. Here >

changes for different ratios of the lattice constants a, b and c; see Table 1.5.5.4 and Fig. 1.5.5.4. The asymmetric units of IT A are displayed in Figs. 1.5.5.1 to 1.5.5.4 by dashed lines. In Tables 1.5.5.1 to 1.5.5.4, the k-vector types of CDML are compared with the Wintgen (Wyckoff) positions of IT A. The parameter ranges are chosen such that each star of k is represented exactly once. Sets of symmetry points, lines or planes of CDML which belong to the same Wintgen position are separated by horizontal lines in Tables 1.5.5.1 to 1.5.5.3. The uniarm description is listed in the last entry of each Wintgen position in Tables 1.5.5.1 and 1.5.5.2. In Table 1.5.5.4, so many k-vector types of CDML belong to each Wintgen position that the latter are used as headings under which the CDML types are listed.

168

1.5. CLASSIFICATION OF SPACE-GROUP REPRESENTATIONS Examples: (a) In m3mI and m3I there are the and F lines of k vectors k1 , , and k2 12 , 12 3, 12 in CDML, see Tables 1.5.5.1 and 1.5.5.2, Figs. 1.5.5.1 and 1.5.5.2. Do they belong to the same Wintgen position, i.e. do their irreps belong to the same type? There is a twofold rotation 2 x, 14 , 14 which maps k2 onto k02 12 , 12 , 12 2 F1 (the rotation 2 is described in the primitive basis of CDML by k 01 k 3 , k 02 k 1 k 2 k 3 1, k 03 k 1 ). The k vectors k1 and k02 are uni-arm and form the line H2 nP [ F1 [ F which protrudes from the body of the asymmetric unit like a flagpole. This proves that k1 and k2 belong to the same Wintgen position, which is 32 f .3m x, x, x. Owing to the shape of the asymmetric unit of IT A (which is similar here to that of the representation domain in CDML), the line x, x, x is kinked into the parts and F. One may choose even between F1 (uni-arm to ) or F2 (completing the plane C NP). The latter transformation is performed by applying the symmetry operation 3 x, x, x for F ! F2 . Remark. The uni-arm description unmasks those k vectors (e.g. those of line F) which lie on the boundary of the Brillouin zone but belong to a Wintgen position which also contains inner k vectors (line ). Such k vectors cannot give rise to little-group representations obtained from projective representations of the k. little co-group G (b) In Table 1.5.5.1 for m3mI, see also Fig. 1.5.5.1, the k-vector planes B HNP, C NP and J HP of CDML belong to the same Wintgen position 96 k ..m. In the asymmetric unit of IT A (as in the representation domain of CDML) the plane x, x, z is kinked into parts belonging to different arms of the star of k. Transforming, e.g., B and J to the plane of C by 2 14 , y, 14 B ! PN1 H1 and 3 x, x, x J ! PH1 , one obtains a complete plane ( NN1 H1 for C, B and J) as a uni-arm description of the Wintgen position 96 k ..m. This plane protrudes from the body of the asymmetric unit like a wing. Fig. 1.5.5.1. Symmorphic space group Fm3m (isomorphic to the reciprocalspace group G of m3mI). (a) The asymmetric unit (thick dashed edges) imbedded in the Brillouin zone, which is a cubic rhombdodecahedron. (b) The asymmetric unit HNP, IT A, p. 678. The representation domain NH3 P of CDML is obtained by reflecting HNP through the plane of NP. Coordinates of the points: 0, 0, 0; N 14 , 14 , 0 N1 = 14 , 14 , 12; H 12 , 0, 0 H1 0, 0, 12 H2 12 , 12 , 12 H3 0, 12 , 0; P 14 , 14 , 14; the sign means symmetrically equivalent. Lines: P x, x, x; F HP 12 x, x, x F1 PH2 x, x, x F2 PH1 x, x, 12 x; H x, 0, 0; N x, x, 0; D NP 14 , 14 , z; G NH x, 12 x, 0. Planes: A HN x, y, 0; B HNP x, 12 x, z PN1 H1 x, x, z; C NP x, x, z; J HP x, y, y PH1 x, x, z. Large black circles: corners of the asymmetric unit (special points); small open circles: other special points; dashed lines: edges of the asymmetric unit (special lines). For the parameter ranges see Table 1.5.5.1.

1.5.5.2. Results of G, the more (1) The higher the symmetry of the point group G one is restricted in the choice of the boundaries of the minimal domain. This is because a symmetry element (rotation or rotoinversion axis, plane of reflection, centre of inversion) cannot occur in the interior of the minimal domain but only on its boundary. However, even for holosymmetric space groups of highest symmetry, the description by Brillouin zone and representation domain is not as concise as possible, cf. CDML.

Remark. One should avoid the term equivalent for the relation between and F or between B, C and J as it is used by Stokes et al. (1993). BC, p. 95 give the definition: ‘Two k vectors k1 and k2 are equivalent if k1 k2 K, where K 2 L ’. One can also express this by saying: ‘Two k vectors are equivalent if they differ by a vector K of the (reciprocal) lattice.’ We prefer to extend this equivalence by saying: ‘Two k vectors k1 and k2 are equivalent if and only if they belong to the same orbit of k’, i.e. if there is a matrix part W and a vector K 2 L belonging to G such that k2 W k1 K, see equation (1.5.3.13). Alternatively, this can be expressed as: ‘Two k vectors are equivalent if and only if they belong to the same or to translationally equivalent stars of k.’ The k vectors of and F or of B, C and J are not even equivalent under this broader definition, see Davies & Dirl (1987). If the representatives of the k-vector stars are chosen uni-arm, as in the examples, their non-equivalence is evident. (2) In general two trends can be observed: (a) The lower the symmetry of the crystal system, the more irreps of CDML, recognized by different letters, belong to the same Wintgen position. This trend is due to the splitting of lines and planes into pieces because of the more and more complicated shape of the Brillouin zone. Faces and lines on the surface of the Brillouin zone may appear or disappear depending on the lattice parameters, causing different descriptions of Wintgen positions. This does not happen in unit cells or their asymmetric units; see Sections 1.5.4.1 and 1.5.4.2. Examples: (i) The boundary conditions (parameter ranges) for the special lines and planes of the asymmetric unit and for general k vectors of

169

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES and Ia Table 1.5.5.2. The k-vector types for the space groups Im3 3 Comparison of the k-vector labels and parameters of CDML with the Wyckoff positions of IT A for Fm3 Th3 , isomorphic to the reciprocal-space group G of m3I. The parameter ranges in Fm3 are obtained by extending those of Fm3m such that each star of k is represented exactly once. The k-vector types of Fm3m , see Table 1.5.5.1, are also listed. The sign means symmetrically equivalent. Lines in parentheses are not special lines but belong to special planes. As in Table 1.5.5.1, the coordinates x, y, z of IT A are related to the k-vector coefficients of CDML by x 1=2k2 k3 , y 1=2k1 k3 , z 1=2k1 k2 . k-vector label, CDML Fm3m

Wyckoff position, IT A Fm3

Parameters (see Fig. 1.5.5.2b), IT A

Fm3

4 a m3.

0, 0, 0 1 2 , 0, 0

H

H

4 b m3.

P

P

8 c 23.

1 1 1 4, 4, 4

N

N

24 d 2=m::

1 1 4, 4,0

24 e mm2..

x, 0, 0: 0 < x < 12

F F1 [ F1 H2 nP

F F1 [ F1 H2 nP

32 f 32 f 32 f 32 f

x, x, x: 0 < x < 14 1 x, x, x: 0 < x < 14 2 x, x, x: 14 < x < 12 x, x, x: 0 < x < 12 with x 6 14

D

D

48 g 2..

1 1 4 , 4 , z:

G A

G A AA , , A [ AA [ [ G

48 h 48 h 48 h 48 h 48 h

m.. m.. m.. m.. m..

x, y, 0 : 0 < x y < 14 x, y, 0 : 0 < y 12 x < 14 x, y, 0 : 0 < y < x < 12 y x, y, 0 : 0 < 12 x < y < x x, y, 0 : 0 < y < x < 12 [ [ 0 < y x < 14

C B J GP

GP GP GP GP GP GP

96 i 96 i 96 i 96 i 96 i 96 i

1 1 1 1 1 1

x, y, z : 0 < z < x y < 14 x, y, z : 0 < z < y 12 x < 14 x, y, z : 0 < z y < x < 12 y x, y, z : 0 < z < y < x < 12 y x, y, z : 0 < z < 12 x < y < x

the reciprocal-space group F4=mmm (setting I4=mmm) are listed in Table 1.5.5.3. The main condition of the representation domain is that of the boundary plane x, y, z f1 c=a2 1 2x yg=4, which for c=a < 1 forms the triangle Z0 Z1 P (Figs. 1.5.5.3a,b) but for c=a > 1 forms the pentagon S1 RPGS (Figs. 1.5.5.3c,d). The inner points of these boundary planes are points of the general position GP with the exception of the line Q x, 12 x, 14, which is a twofold rotation axis. The boundary conditions for the representation domain depend on c=a; they are much more complicated than those for the asymmetric unit (for this the boundary condition is simply x, y, 14). (ii) In the reciprocal-space group Imm2 , see Figs. 1.5.5.4(a) to (c), the lines and Q belong to Wintgen position 2 a mm2; G and H belong to 2 b mm2; and R, and U, A and C, and B and D belong to the general position GP. The decisive boundary plane is x=a2 y=b2 z=c2 d 2 =4, where d 2 1=a2 1=b2 1=c2 , or xa2 yb2 zc2 d 2 =4, where d 2 a2 b2 c2 . There is no relation of the lattice constants for which all the abovementioned lines are realized on the surface of the representation domain simultaneously, either two or three of them do not appear and the length of the others depends on the boundary plane; see Table 1.5.5.4 and Figs. 1.5.5.4(a) to (c). Again, the boundary conditions for the asymmetric unit are independent of the lattice parameters, all lines mentioned above are present and their parameters run from 0 to 12.

.3. .3. .3. .3.

0 < z < 14

x, y, z : 0 < z y x 12 y [ [ x, y, z : 0 < z < 12 x < y < x

(b) The more symmetry a space group has lost compared to its holosymmetric space group, the more letters of irreps are introduced, cf. CDML. In most cases these additional labels can be easily avoided by extension of the parameter range in the kvector space of the holosymmetric group. Example. Extension of the plane A NH, Wintgen position 96 j m.. of Fm3m , to A [ AA 1 NH in the reciprocal-space group Fm3 of the arithmetic crystal class m3I, cf. Tables 1.5.5.1 and 1.5.5.2 and Fig. 1.5.5.2. Both planes, A and AA, belong to Wintgen position 48 h m.. of Fm3 . In addition, in the transition from a holosymmetric space group H to a non-holosymmetric space group G, the order of the little co k . Such a k k of a special k vector of H may be reduced in G group H vector may then be incorporated into a more general Wintgen k and described by an extension of the parameter range. position of G Example. Plane H 1 x, y, 0: In Fm3m , see Fig. 1.5.5.1, all points , H, N and lines , , G of the boundary of the asymmetric unit are special. In Fm3 , see Fig. 1.5.5.2, the lines and H 1 ( means equivalent) are special but , G and N 1 N belong to the plane A [ AA. The free parameter range on the line 1 is 12 of the full parameter range of 1 , see Section 1.5.5.3. Therefore, the parameter ranges of A [ AA [ G [ in x, y, 0 can be taken as: 0 < y < x < 12 for A [ AA [ G and (for ) 0 < y x < 14.

170

1.5. CLASSIFICATION OF SPACE-GROUP REPRESENTATIONS Is it easy to recognize those letters of CDML which belong to the same Wintgen position? In I4=mmm , the lines and V (V exists for c=a < 1 only) are parallel, as are and F, but the lines Y and U are not (F and U exist for c=a > 1 only). The planes C x, y, 0 and D x, y, 12 (D for c=a > 1 only) are parallel but the planes A 0, y, z and E x, 12 , z are not. Nevertheless, each of these pairs belongs to one Wintgen position, i.e. describes one type of k vector. 1.5.5.3. Parameter ranges

Fig. 1.5.5.2. Symmorphic space group F 3m (isomorphic to the reciprocalspace group G of m3I). (a) The asymmetric unit (thick dashed edges) half imbedded in and half protruding from the Brillouin zone, which is a cubic rhombdodecahedron (as in Fig. 1.5.5.1). (b) The asymmetric unit H 1 P, IT A, p. 610. The representation domain of CDML is HH3 P. Both bodies have HNP in common; H 1 NP is mapped onto NH3 P by a twofold rotation around NP. The representation domain as the asymmetric unit would be the better choice because it is congruent to the asymmetric unit of IT A and is fully imbedded in the Brillouin zone. Coordinates of the points: 0, 0, 0 1 12 , 12 , 0; P 14 , 14 , 14; H 12 , 0, 0 H1 0, 0, 12 H2 12 , 12 , 12 H3 0, 12 , 0; N 14 , 14 , 0 N1 14 , 14 , 12; the sign means symmetrically equivalent. Lines: P x, x, x P 1 x, x, 12 x; F HP 12 x, x, x F1 PH2 x, x, x F2 PH1 x, x, 12 x; H x, 0, 0 H 1 1 1 1 1 x, 0 and N 2 , y, 0; D PN 4 , 4 , z. (G NH x, 2 x, x, 0 N 1 x, x, 0 are not special lines.) Planes: A HN x, y, 0; AA 1 NH x, y, 0; B HNP x, 12 x, z PN1 H1 x, x, z; C NP x, x, z; J HP x, y, y PH1 x, x, z. (The boundary planes B, C and J are parts of the general position GP.) Large black circles: special points of the asymmetric unit; small black circle: special point 1 ; small open circles: other special points; dashed lines: edges and special line D of the asymmetric unit. The edge 1 is not a special line but is part of the boundary plane A [ AA. For the parameter ranges see Table 1.5.5.2.

For the uni-arm description of a Wintgen position it is easy to check whether the parameter ranges for the general or special constituents of the representation domain or asymmetric unit have been stated correctly. For this purpose one may define the field of k as the parameter space (point, line, plane or space) of a Wintgen position. For the check, one determines that part of the field of k k (G k which is inside the unit cell. The order of the little co-group G represents those operations which leave the field of k fixed pointwise) is divided by the order of the stabilizer [which is the set of all symmetry operations (modulo integer translations) that leave the field invariant as a whole]. The result gives the independent fraction of the above-determined volume of the unit cell or the area of the plane or length of the line. If the description is not uni-arm, the uni-arm parameter range will be split into the parameter ranges of the different arms. The parameter ranges of the different arms are not necessarily equal; see the second of the following examples. Examples: (1) Line [ F1 : In Fm3m the line x, x, x has stabilizer 3m and k 3m. Therefore, the divisor is 2 and x runs from little co-group G 0 to 12 in 0 < x < 1. (2) Plane B [ C [ J : In Fm3m , the stabilizer of x, x, z is generated by m.mm and the centring translation t12 , 12 , 0 modulo integer translations mod Tint . They generate a group of order 16; k is ..m of order 2. The fraction of the plane is 2 1 of the area G 16 8 21=2 a2 , as expressed by the parameter ranges 0 < x < 14, 0 < z < 12. There are six arms of the star of x, x, z: x, x, z; x, x, z; x, y, x; x, y, x; x, y, y; x, y, y. Three of them are represented in the boundary of the representation domain: B HNP, C NP and J HP; see Fig. 1.5.5.1. The areas of their parameter ranges are 321 , 321 and 161 , respectively; the sum is 18. The same result holds for Fm3 : the stabilizer is generated by k j jf1gj 1, the 2=m:: and t12 , 12 , 0 mod Tint and is of order 8, jG 1 quotient is again 8, the parameter range is the same as for Fm3m . The planes H 1 P and N 1 P are equivalent to J HP and C NP, and do not contribute to the parameter ranges. (3) Plane x, y, 0: In Fm3m the stabilizer of plane A is generated k (site-symmetry group) m.., by 4=mmm and t12 , 12 , 0, order 32, G order 2. Consequently, HN is 161 of the unit square a2 : 0 < y < x < 12 y. In Fm3 , the stabilizer of A [ AA is k . Therefore, mmm. plus t12 , 12 , 0, order 16, with the same group G 1 2 H 1 is 8 of the unit square a in Fm3 : 0 < y < x < 12. (4) Line x, x, 0: In Fm3m the stabilizer is generated by m.mm k is m.2m of order 4. The divisor and t12 , 12 , 0 mod Tint , order 16, G 1 is 4 and thus 0 < x < 4. In Fm3 the stabilizer is generated by k m::, order 2; the 2=m:: and t12 , 12 , 0 mod Tint , order 8, and G divisor is 4 again and 0 < x < 14 is restricted to the same range.† Data for the independent parameter ranges are essential to make sure that exactly one k vector per orbit is represented in the representation domain or in the asymmetric unit. Such data are { Boyle & Kennedy (1988) propose general rules for the parameter ranges of kvector coefficients referred to a primitive basis. The ranges listed in Tables 1.5.5.1 to 1.5.5.4 possibly do not follow these rules.

171

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table 1.5.5.3. The k-vector types for the space groups I4=mmm, I4=mcm, I41 =amd and I41 =acd Comparison of the k-vector labels and parameters of CDML with the Wyckoff positions of IT A for I4=mmm D17 4h , isomorphic to the reciprocal-space group G of 4=mmmI. For the asymmetric unit, see Fig. 1.5.5.3. Two ratios of the lattice constants are distinguished for the representation domains of CDML: a > c and a < c, see Figs. 1.5.5.3(a, b) and (c, d). The sign means symmetrically equivalent. The parameter ranges for the planes and the general position GP refer to the asymmetric unit. The coordinates x, y, z of IT A are related to the k-vector coefficients of CDML by x 1=2 k1 k2 , y 1=2k1 k2 2k3 , z 1=2k1 k2 .

Wyckoff position, IT A

k-vector labels, CDML a>c

ac

0, 0, 0

1 1 1 2, 2, 2

Parameters (see Fig. 1.5.5.3), IT A

M 12 , 12 ,

1 2

2 a 4=mmm

0, 0, 0

2 b 4=mmm

1 1 2, 2,0

a < c†

0, 0,

1 2

X 0, 0,

1 2

X 0, 0,

1 2

4 c mmm.

0, 12 , 0

P 14 , 14 ,

1 4

P 14 , 14 ,

1 4

4 d 4m2

0, 12 ,

8 f ..2=m

1 1 1 4, 4, 4

4 e 4mm 4 e 4mm

1 1 2 , 2 , z:

8 g 2mm.

0,

1 2,

8 h m.2m 8 h m.2m

x, x, 0 : 0 < x < 12 —

8 i m2m.

0, y, 0: 0 < y
c, i.e. c > a . In the figures a 1:25c, i.e. c 1:25a . (a) Representation domain (thick lines) and asymmetric unit (thick dashed lines, partly protruding) imbedded in the Brillouin zone, which is a tetragonal elongated rhombdodecahedron. (b) Representation domain MXZ1 PZ0 and asymmetric unit MXTT1 P of I4=mmm, IT A, p. 468. The part MXTNZ1 P is common to both bodies; the part TNPZ0 is equivalent to the part NZ1 PT1 by a twofold rotation around the axis Q NP. Coordinates of the points: 0, 0, 0; X 0, 12 , 0; M 12 , 12 , 0; P 0, 12 , 14; N 14 , 14 , 14; T 0, 0, 14 T1 12 , 12 , 14; Z0 0, 0, z0 Z1 12 , 12 , z1 with z0 1 c=a2 =4; z1 12 z0 ; the sign means symmetrically equivalent. Lines: Z0 0, 0, z; V Z1 M 12 , 12 , z; W XP 0, 12 , z; M x, x, 0; X 0, y, 0; Y XM x, 12 , 0; Q PN x, 12 x, 14. The lines Z0 Z1 , Z1 P and PZ0 have no special symmetry but belong to special planes. Planes: C MX x, y, 0; B Z0 Z1 M x, x, z; A XPZ0 0, y, z; E MXPZ1 x, 12 , z. The plane Z0 Z1 P belongs to the general position GP. Large black circles: special points belonging to the representation domain; small open circles: T T1 and Z0 Z1 belonging to special lines; thick lines: edges of the representation domain and special line Q NP; dashed lines: edges of the asymmetric unit. For the parameter ranges see Table 1.5.5.3. (c), (d). Symmorphic space group I4=mmm (isomorphic to the reciprocal-space group G of 4=mmmI). Diagrams for c > a, i.e. a > c . In the figures c 1:25a, i.e. a 1:25c . (c) Representation domain (thick lines) and asymmetric unit (dashed lines, partly protruding) imbedded in the Brillouin zone, which is a tetragonal cuboctahedron. (d) Representation domain S1 RXPMSG and asymmetric unit M2 XTT1 P of I4=mmm, IT A, p. 468. The part S1 RXTNP is common to both bodies; the part TNPMSG is equivalent to the part T1 NPM2 S1 R by a twofold rotation around the axis Q NP. Coordinates of the points: 0, 0, 0; X 0, 12 , 0; N 14 , 14 , 14; M 0, 0, 12 M2 12 , 12 , 0; T 0, 0, 14 T1 12 , 12 , 14; P 0, 12 , 14; S s, s, 12 S1 s1 , s1 , 0 with s 1 a=c2 =4; s1 12 s; R r, 12 , 0 G 0, g, 12 with r a=c2 =2; g 12 r; the sign means symmetrically equivalent. Lines: M 0, 0, z; W XP 0, 12 , z; S1 x, x, 0; F MS x, x, 12; X 0, y, 0; Y XR x, 12 , 0; U MG 0, y, 12; Q PN x, 12 x, 14. The lines GS S1 R, SN NS1 and GP PR have no special symmetry but belong to special planes. Planes: C S1 RX x, y, 0; D MSG x, y, 12; B S1 SM x, x, z; A XPGM 0, y, z; E RXP x, 12 , z. The plane S1 RPGS belongs to the general position GP. Large black circles: special points belonging to the representation domain; small open circles: M2 M; the points T T1 , S S1 and G R belong to special lines; thick lines: edges of the representation domain and special line Q NP; dashed lines: edges of the asymmetric unit. For the parameter ranges see Table 1.5.5.3.

173

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES Table 1.5.5.4. The k-vector types for the space groups Fmm2 and Fdd2 20 Comparison of the k-vector labels and parameters of CDML with the Wyckoff positions of IT A for Imm2 C2h , isomorphic to the reciprocal-space group G of mm2F. For the asymmetric unit see Fig. 1.5.5.4. Four ratios of the lattice constants are distinguished in CDML, Fig. 3.6 for the representation domains: (a) a2 < b2 c2 , b2 < c2 a2 and c2 < a2 b2 (see Fig. 1.5.5.4a); (b) c2 > a2 b2 (see Fig. 1.5.5.4b); (c) b2 > c2 a2 [not displayed because essentially the same as (d)]; (d) a2 > b2 c2 (see Fig. 1.5.5.4c). The vertices of the Brillouin zones of Fig. 3.6(a)–(d) with a variable coordinate are not designated in CDML. In Figs. 1.5.5.4 (a), (b) and (c) they are denoted as follows: the end point of the line is 0 , of line is 0 , of line is 0 , of line A is A0 etc. The variable coordinate of the end point is 0 , 0 , 0 , a0 etc., respectively. The line A0 B0 is called ab etc. The plane (111) is called '. It has the equation in the a , b , c basis ': a2 x b2 y c2 z d 2 =4 with d 2 a2 b2 c2 . From this equation one calculates the variable coordinates of the vertices of the Brillouin zone: 0 0, 0, 0 with 0 d 2 =4c2 ; Q0 12 , 12 , q0 with q0 12 0 ; 0 0, 0 , 0 with 0 d 2 =4b2 ; R 0 12 , r0 , 12 with r0 12 0 ; 0 0 , 0, 0 with 0 d 2 =4a2 ; U0 u0 , 12 , 12 with u0 12 0 ; A0 a0 , 0, 12 with a0 14 b2 c2 =4a2 ; C0 c0 , 12 , 0 with c0 12 a0 ; B0 0, b0 , 12 with b0 14 a2 c2 =4b2 ; D0 12 , d0 , 0 with d0 12 b0 ; G0 12 , 0, g0 with g0 14 b2 a2 =4c2 ; H0 0, 12 , h0 with h0 12 g0 . The coordinates x, y, z of IT A are related to the k-vector coefficients of CDML by x 1=2 k1 k2 k3 , y 1=2k1 k2 k3 , z 1=2k1 k2 k3 . If necessary, a lattice vector has been added or a twofold screw rotation around the axis 14, 14, z has been performed in order to shift the range of coordinates to 0 x, y, z 12. For example, , , 0 0, 0, z0 with 0 < z0 < 0 is replaced by 12 , 12 , 12 z0 12 , 12, z with 12 0 < z < 12. (The sign means symmetrically equivalent.)

Wyckoff position: 2 a mm2. Parameter range in asymmetric unit: 0, 0, z and 12, 12, z: 0 z < 12 (or 0, 0, z: 0 z < 1). Type of Brillouin zone as in: Fig. 1.5.5.4(a) k-vector label, CDML

Z LE Q QA

Fig. 1.5.5.4(b)

CDML

IT A

CDML

0, 0, 0 1 1 2, 2, 0 , , 0 , , 0

0, 0, 0 0, 0, 12 0, 0, z: 0 < z < 12 1 1 1 2, 2, z: 0 < z < 2

0, 0, 0 1 1 2, 2, 1 , , 0 , , 0 1 , 12 , 1 2 1 , 12 , 1 2

Fig. 1.5.5.4(c) IT A 0, 0, 0 0 0, 0, z: 0 < z 0 1 1 1 0 < z < 12 2, 2, z: 2 1 1 2, 2, z: 0 < z q0 0, 0, z: 12 q0 < z < 12 1 1 2, 2,

CDML

IT A

0, 0, 0 0 , , 0 , , 0

0, 0, 0 0, 0, 12 0, 0, z: 0 < z < 12 1 1 1 2, 2, z: 0 < z < 2

1 1 2, 2,

Wyckoff position: 2 b mm2. Parameter range in asymmetric unit: 12, 0, z and 0, 12, z: 0 z < 12 (or uni-arm 12, 0, z: 0 z < 1). Type of Brillouin zone as in: Fig. 1.5.5.4(a)

Fig. 1.5.5.4(b)

Fig. 1.5.5.4(c)

k-vector label, CDML

CDML

IT A

CDML

IT A

CDML

IT A

T Y G GA H HA

0, 12, 12 1 1 2, 0, 2 1 , 2 , 12 1 2 , 1 , 2

1 2,

0, 12, 12 1 1 2, 0, 2 1 , 2 , 12 1 2 , 1 , 2

1 2,

1, 12, 12 1 1 2, 0, 2

0, 12, 12 0, 12, 0

, 12 , 12 , 12 , 12

0, 0 0, 12, 0 1 2, 0, z: 0 < z g0 0, 12, z: 12 g0 < z < 12 0, 12, z: 0 < z h0 1 1 h0 < z < 12 2, 0, z: 2

(b) All k-vector stars giving rise to the same type of irreps belong to the same Wintgen position. In the tables they are collected in one box and are designated by the same Wintgen letter. (c) The Wyckoff positions of IT A, interpreted as Wintgen positions, provide a complete list of the special k vectors in the k of Brillouin zone; the site symmetry of IT A is the little co-group G k; the multiplicity per primitive unit cell is the number of arms of the star of k. (d) The Wintgen positions with 0, 1, 2 or 3 variable parameters correspond to special k-vector points, k-vector lines, k-vector planes or to the set of all general k vectors, respectively. (e) The complete set of types of irreps is obtained by considering the irreps of one k vector per Wintgen position in the uni-arm description or one star of k per Wintgen position otherwise. A complete set of inequivalent irreps of G is obtained from these irreps by varying the parameters within the asymmetric unit or the representation domain of G . (f) For listing each irrep exactly once, the calculation of the parameter range of k is often much simpler in the asymmetric unit of the unit cell than in the representation domain of the Brillouin zone.

, 12 , 12 , 12 , 12

0, 0 0, 12, 0 1 2, 0, z: 0 < z g0 0, 12, z: 12 g0 < z < 12 0, 12, z: 0 < z h0 1 1 h0 < z < 12 2, 0, z: 2

1 2 1 2

, , 12 , , 12

0, 12, z: 0 < z < 12 1 1 2, 0, z: 0 < z < 2

(g) The consideration of the basic domain in relation to the representation domain is unnecessary. It may even be misleading, because special k-vector subspaces of frequently belong to more general types of k vectors in . Space groups G with non-holohedral point groups can be referred to their reciprocal-space groups G directly without reference to the types of irreps of the corresponding holosymmetric space group. If is used, and if the representation domain is larger than , then in most cases the irreps of can be obtained from those of by extending the parameter ranges of k. (h) The classification by Wintgen letters facilitates the derivation of the correlation tables for the irreps of a group–subgroup chain. The necessary splitting rules for Wyckoff (and thus Wintgen) positions are well known. In principle, both approaches are equivalent: the traditional one by Brillouin zone, basic domain and representation domain, and the crystallographic one by unit cell and asymmetric unit of IT A. Moreover, it is not difficult to relate one approach to the other, see the figures and Tables 1.5.5.1 to 1.5.5.4. The conclusions show that the crystallographic approach for the description of irreps of space groups has several advantages as compared to the traditional

174

1.5. CLASSIFICATION OF SPACE-GROUP REPRESENTATIONS Table 1.5.5.4. The k-vector types for the space groups Fmm2 and Fdd2 (cont.) Wyckoff position: 4 c .m. Parameter range in asymmetric unit: x, 0, z and x, 12 , z: 0 < x < 12 ; 0 z < 12 (or x, 0, z: 0 < x < 12; 0 z < 1). Type of Brillouin zone as in: k-vector label, CDML

Fig. 1.5.5.4(a)

Fig. 1.5.5.4(b)

Fig. 1.5.5.4(c)

CDML

IT A

CDML

IT A

CDML

IT A

U

0, ,

x, 0, 0: 0 < x < 12

0, ,

x, 0, 0: 0 < x < 12

0, , 1, 12 , 12

A C

1 1 2, 2 , 1 1 2, , 2

x, 0, 12; 0 < x a0 x, 0, 12: 12 c0 < x < 12

1 2,

J

, ,

x, 0, 0: 0 < x 0 x, 0, 0: 1 u0 < x < 12 2 1 x, 0, 2: 0 < x a0 x, 0, 12: 1 c0 < x < 12 2 x, 0, z: 0 < z < 12; 0 < x a

,

JA K

1 2

KA

1 2

x, 0, z: 0 < x < 12; 0 < z < 12, ga†

,

, , 12 ,

, 12

x, 12, z: 0 < x < 12; 0, ch < z < 12 1 x, 2, z: 0 < x < c0 ; 0 < z ch x, 0, z: a0 12 c0 < x < 12; ga z < 12

, 1 2

x, 0,

, , , 1 2 1 2

,

, , 12 ,

, 12

1 2:

0<x
c2 . The endpoint of line A is A0 etc., the free coordinate of A0 is a0 etc. Asymmetric unit TZ 0 YZY 0 0 T 0 of Imm2, IT A, p. 246. The part TD0 C0 YG0 H0 ZA0 B0 is common to both bodies; the part A0 Y 0 0 T 0 B0 G0 H0 D0 Z 0 C0 is equivalent to the part of the representation domain with negative z values through a twofold screw rotation 21 around the axis 14 , 14 , z. Coordinates of the points: 0, 0, 0 0 12 , 12 , 12; Y 0, 12 , 0 Y 0 12 , 0, 12; Z 0, 0, 12 Z 0 12 , 12 , 0; T 12 , 0, 0 T 0 0, 12 , 12; C0 c0 , 12 , 0 A0 a0 , 0, 12; D0 12 , d0 , 0 B0 0, b0 , 12; G0 12 , 0, g0 H0 0, 12 , h0 . The coordinates of the points are c0 1=41 b2 c2 =a2 ; a0 1=2 c0 ; d0 1=41 a2 c2 =b2 ; b0 1=2 d0 ; g0 1=41 a2 b2 =c2 ; h0 1=2 g0 . The sign means symmetrically equivalent. There are no special points. The points , T, Y, Z, G0 and H0 belong to special lines; A0 , B0 , C0 and D0 belong to special planes. The points with negative z coordinates are equivalent to those already listed. Lines: Z 0, 0, z; G TG0 12 , 0, z; H YH0 0, 12 , z. The lines T x, 0, 0; C YC0 x, 12 , 0; A ZA0 x, 0, 12; Y 0, y, 0; B ZB0 0, y, 12; D TD0 12 , y, 0; A0 G0 , G0 D0 , C0 H0 and H0 B0 have no special symmetry but belong to special planes, the lines D0 C0 and B0 A0 belong to the general position GP. The 0, Y H 0A 0 , Z B 0B 0, H 0 and B 0 , C0 H 0, H TG 0 , D0 G 0B 0 and A G 0, A 0 with negative z 0, G 0 , Z A 0 of the representation domain to the points Z, lines Z, coordinates are equivalent to lines of the asymmetric unit not belonging to the representation domain. Planes: E YH0 B0 Z 0, y, z; F TD0 G0 12 , y, z; J ZA0 G0 T x, 0, z; K YH0 C0 x, 12 , z. The planes x, y, 0; x, y, 12; and D0 C0 H0 B0 A0 G0 belong to the general position 0G 0 T, Z B 0 of the representation domain to the points Z, 0H 0 C0 and TD0 G 0 Y, Y H GP, as do the negative counterparts of the latter two. The planes Z A 0 and H 0, B 0, G 0 with negative z coordinates are equivalent to planes of the asymmetric unit not belonging to the representation domain. For the A parameter ranges see Table 1.5.5.4. (b) Brillouin zone (thin lines), representation domain (thick lines) and asymmetric unit (dashed lines, partly protruding) imbedded in the Brillouin zone, which is an orthorhombic elongated rhombdodecahedron. The diagram is drawn for a2 4, b2 9, c2 16, i.e. a2 b2 < c2 . The endpoint of line G is G0 etc., the free coordinate of G0 is g0 etc. Asymmetric unit TZ 0 YZY 0 0 T 0 of Imm2, IT A, p. 246. The part TZ 0 YQ0 H0 0 G0 is common to both bodies; the part ZY 0 0 T 0 0 G0 Q0 H0 is equivalent to the part of the representation domain with negative z values through a twofold screw rotation 21 around the axis 14, 14, z. Coordinates of the points: 0, 0, 0 0 12 , 12 , 12; Y 0, 12 , 0 Y 0 12 , 0, 12; Z 0, 0, 12 Z 0 12 , 12 , 0; T 12 , 0, 0 T 0 0, 12 , 12; 0 0, 0, 0 Q0 12 , 12 , q0 ; G0 12 , 0, g0 H0 0, 12 , h0 . The coordinates of the points are 0 1=41 a2 b2 =c2 ; q0 1=2 0 ; g0 1=41 b2 a2 =c2 ; h0 1=2 g0 . The sign means symmetrically equivalent. There are no special points. The points , T, Y, Z 0 , 0 , Q0 , G0 and H0 belong to special lines. The points with negative z coordinates are equivalent to those already listed. Lines: 0 0, 0, z; Q Z 0 Q0 12 , 12 , z; G TG0 12 , 0, z; H YH0 0, 12 , z. The lines T x, 0, 0; C YZ 0 x, 12 , 0; 0, Z0Q 0 0, T G Y 0, y, 0; D TZ 0 12 , y, 0; Q0 G0 , G0 0 , 0 H0 and H0 Q0 have no special symmetry but belong to special planes. The lines Q 0, G 0 and H 0 of the representation domain to the points , 0 with negative z coordinates are equivalent to lines of the asymmetric unit not and Y H belonging to the representation domain. Planes: E YH0 0 0, y, z; F TZ 0 Q0 G0 12 , y, z; J 0 G0 T x, 0, z; K YH0 Q0 Z 0 x, 12 , z. The 0G 0H 0 T, 0 Y, planes x, y, 0 and 0 G0 Q0 H0 belong to the general position GP, as does the negative counterpart of 0 G0 Q0 H0 . The planes Q 0Q 0, G 0 and H 0 Z 0 and T G 0 Z 0 of the representation domain to the points , 0Q 0 with negative z coordinates are equivalent to planes of the YH asymmetric unit not belonging to the representation domain. For the parameter ranges see Table 1.5.5.4. (c) Brillouin zone (thin lines), representation domain (thick lines) and asymmetric unit (dashed lines, partly protruding) imbedded in the Brillouin zone, which is an orthorhombic elongated rhombdodecahedron. The diagram is drawn for a2 49, b2 9, c2 16, i.e. a2 > b2 c2 . The endpoint of line A is A0 etc., the free coordinate of A0 is a0 etc. Asymmetric unit TZ 0 YZY 0 0 T 0 of Imm2, IT A, p. 246. The part 0 C0 YZA0 U0 T 0 is common to both bodies; the part 0 TZ 0 C0 A0 Y 0 0 U0 is equivalent to the part of the representation domain with negative z values through a twofold screw rotation 21 around the axis 14, 14, z. Coordinates of the points: 0, 0, 0 0 12 , 12 , 12; Y 0, 12 , 0 Y 0 12 , 0, 12; Z 0, 0, 12 Z 0 12 , 12 , 0; 0 0 , 0, 0 U0 u0 , 12 , 12; A0 a0 , 0, 12 C0 c0 , 12 , 0. The coordinates of the points are T 12 , 0, 0 T 0 0, 12 , 12; 0 1=41 b2 c2 =a2 ; u0 1=2 0 ; a0 1=41 b2 c2 =a2 ; c0 1=2 a0 . The sign means symmetrically equivalent. There are no special points. The points , Z, Y and T 0 belong to special lines, 0 , U0 , A0 and C0 belong to special planes. The points with negative z coordinates are equivalent to those already listed. Lines: Z 0, 0, z; H YT 0 0, 12 , z. The lines 0 x, 0, 0; U T 0 U0 x, 12 , 12; A ZA0 x, 0, 12; C YC0 x, 12 , 0; Y 0, y, 0; B ZT 0 0, y, 12; U0 A0 , A0 0 , 0 C0 and C0 U0 have no special symmetry but belong to special planes. The lines Z and Y T 0 of the representation domain to the points Z and T 0 with negative z coordinates are equivalent to lines of the asymmetric unit not belonging to the representation domain. Planes: E YT 0 Z 0, y, z; J 0 A0 Z x, 0, z; K YC0 U0 T 0 x, 12 , z. The planes 0 Z and x, y, 0; x, y, 12; and 0 C0 U0 A0 belong to the general position GP, as does the negative counterpart of 0 C0 U0 A0 . The planes Z T 0 Y , 0 A 0 and U T 0 , A 0 with negative z coordinates are equivalent to planes of the asymmetric unit not 0 C0 of the representation domain to the points Z, Y T 0 U belonging to the representation domain. For the parameter ranges see Table 1.5.5.4. The fourth possible type of Brillouin zone with b2 > a2 c2 is similar to that displayed in (c). It can be obtained from this by exchanging a and b and changing the letters for the points, lines and planes correspondingly.

177

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES

References 1.1 Arnold, H. (1983). Transformations in crystallography. In International tables for crystallography, Vol. A. Space-group symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn, pp. 70–79. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Ashcroft, N. W. & Mermin, N. D. (1975). Solid state physics. Philadelphia: Saunders College. ¨ ber die Quantenmechanik der Elektronen in Bloch, F. (1928). U Kristallgittern. Z. Phys. 52, 555–600. Buerger, M. J. (1941). X-ray crystallography. New York: John Wiley. Buerger, M. J. (1959). Crystal structure analysis. New York: John Wiley. Ewald, P. P. (1913). Zur Theorie der Interferenzen der Ro¨ntgenstrahlen in Kristallen. Phys. Z. 14, 465–472. Ewald, P. P. (1921). Das reziproke Gitter in der Strukturtheorie. Z. Kristallogr. 56, 129–156. International Tables for Crystallography (1995). Vol. A. Spacegroup symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. International Tables for Crystallography (1999). Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Koch, E. (1999). In International tables for crystallography, Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince, pp. 2–9. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Laue, M. (1914). Die Interferenzerscheinungen an Ro¨ntgenstrahlen, hervorgerufen durch das Raumgitter der Kristalle. Jahrb. Radioakt. Elektron. 11, 308–345. Lipson, H. & Cochran, W. (1966). The determination of crystal structures. London: Bell. Patterson, A. L. (1967). In International tables for X-ray crystallography, Vol. II. Mathematical tables, edited by J. S. Kasper & K. Lonsdale, pp. 5–83. Birmingham: Kynoch Press. Sands, D. E. (1982). Vectors and tensors in crystallography. New York: Addison-Wesley. Schomaker, V. & Trueblood, K. N. (1968). On the rigid-body motion of molecules in crystals. Acta Cryst. B24, 63–76. Wilson, E. B. (1901). Vector analysis. New Haven: Yale University Press. Ziman, J. M. (1969). Principles of the theory of solids. Cambridge University Press.

1.2 Arfken, G. (1970). Mathematical models for physicists, 2nd ed. New York, London: Academic Press. Avery, J. & Ørmen, P.-J. (1979). Generalized scattering factors and generalized Fourier transforms. Acta Cryst. A35, 849–851. Avery, J. & Watson, K. J. (1977). Generalized X-ray scattering factors. Simple closed-form expressions for the one-centre case with Slater-type orbitals. Acta Cryst. A33, 679–680. Bentley, J. & Stewart, R. F. (1973). Two-centre calculations for X-ray scattering. J. Comput. Phys. 11, 127–145. Born, M. (1926). Quantenmechanik der Stoszvorga¨nge. Z. Phys. 38, 803. Clementi, E. & Raimondi, D. L. (1963). Atomic screening constants from SCF functions. J. Chem. Phys. 38, 2686–2689. Clementi, E. & Roetti, C. (1974). Roothaan–Hartree–Fock atomic wavefunctions. At. Data Nucl. Data Tables, 14, 177–478. Cohen-Tannoudji, C., Diu, B. & Laloe, F. (1977). Quantum mechanics. New York: John Wiley and Paris: Hermann. Condon, E. V. & Shortley, G. H. (1957). The theory of atomic spectra. London, New York: Cambridge University Press. Coppens, P. (1980). Thermal smearing and chemical bonding. In Electron and magnetization densities in molecules and solids, edited by P. J. Becker, pp. 521–544. New York: Plenum.

Coppens, P., Guru Row, T. N., Leung, P., Stevens, E. D., Becker, P. J. & Yang, Y. W. (1979). Net atomic charges and molecular dipole moments from spherical-atom X-ray refinements, and the relation between atomic charges and shape. Acta Cryst. A35, 63– 72. Coulson, C. A. (1961). Valence. Oxford University Press. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1956). The analysis of the anisotropic thermal motion of molecules in crystals. Acta Cryst. 9, 754–756. Dawson, B. (1967). A general structure factor formalism for interpreting accurate X-ray and neutron diffraction data. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 248, 235–288. Dawson, B. (1975). Studies of atomic charge density by X-ray and neutron diffraction – a perspective. In Advances in structure research by diffraction methods. Vol. 6, edited by W. Hoppe & R. Mason. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Dawson, B., Hurley, A. C. & Maslen, V. W. (1967). Anharmonic vibration in fluorite-structures. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 298, 289–306. Dunitz, J. D. (1979). X-ray analysis and the structure of organic molecules. Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press. Feil, D. (1977). Diffraction physics. Isr. J. Chem. 16, 103–110. Hansen, N. K. & Coppens, P. (1978). Testing aspherical atom refinements on small-molecule data sets. Acta Cryst. A34, 909– 921. Hehre, W. J., Ditchfield, R., Stewart, R. F. & Pople, J. A. (1970). Self-consistent molecular orbital methods. IV. Use of Gaussian expansions of Slater-type orbitals. Extension to second-row molecules. J. Chem. Phys. 52, 2769–2773. Hehre, W. J., Stewart, R. F. & Pople, J. A. (1969). Self-consistent molecular orbital methods. I. Use of Gaussian expansions of Slater-type atomic orbitals. J. Chem. Phys. 51, 2657–2664. Hirshfeld, F. L. (1977). A deformation density refinement program. Isr. J. Chem. 16, 226–229. International Tables for Crystallography (1999). Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. International Tables for X-ray Crystallography (1974). Vol. IV. Birmingham: Kynoch Press. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) James, R. W. (1982). The optical principles of the diffraction of X-rays. Woodbridge, Connecticut: Oxbow Press. Johnson, C. K. (1969). Addition of higher cumulants to the crystallographic structure-factor equation: a generalized treatment for thermal-motion effects. Acta Cryst. A25, 187–194. Johnson, C. K. (1970a). Series expansion models for thermal motion. ACA Program and Abstracts, 1970 Winter Meeting, Tulane University, p. 60. Johnson, C. K. (1970b). An introduction to thermal-motion analysis. In Crystallographic computing, edited by F. R. Ahmed, S. R. Hall & C. P. Huber, pp. 207–219. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Johnson, C. K. & Levy, H. A. (1974). Thermal motion analysis using Bragg diffraction data. In International tables for X-ray crystallography (1974), Vol. IV, pp. 311–336. Birmingham: Kynoch Press. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) Kara, M. & Kurki-Suonio, K. (1981). Symmetrized multipole analysis of orientational distributions. Acta Cryst. A37, 201–210. Kendall, M. G. & Stuart, A. (1958). The advanced theory of statistics. London: Griffin. Kuhs, W. F. (1983). Statistical description of multimodal atomic probability structures. Acta Cryst. A39, 148–158. Kurki-Suonio, K. (1977). Symmetry and its implications. Isr. J. Chem. 16, 115–123. Kutznetsov, P. I., Stratonovich, R. L. & Tikhonov, V. I. (1960). Theory Probab. Its Appl. (USSR), 5, 80–97. Lipson, H. & Cochran, W. (1966). The determination of crystal structures. London: Bell. McIntyre, G. J., Moss, G. & Barnea, Z. (1980). Anharmonic temperature factors of zinc selenide determined by X-ray diffraction from an extended-face crystal. Acta Cryst. A36, 482–490.

178

REFERENCES 1.2 (cont.) Materlik, G., Sparks, C. J. & Fischer, K. (1994). Resonant anomalous X-ray scattering. Theory and applications. Amsterdam: NorthHolland. Paturle, A. & Coppens, P. (1988). Normalization factors for spherical harmonic density functions. Acta Cryst. A44, 6–7. Ruedenberg, K. (1962). The nature of the chemical bond. Phys. Rev. 34, 326–376. Scheringer, C. (1985a). A general expression for the anharmonic temperature factor in the isolated-atom-potential approach. Acta Cryst. A41, 73–79. Scheringer, C. (1985b). A deficiency of the cumulant expansion of the anharmonic temperature factor. Acta Cryst. A41, 79–81. Schomaker, V. & Trueblood, K. N. (1968). On the rigid-body motion of molecules in crystals. Acta Cryst. B24, 63–76. Schwarzenbach, D. (1986). Private communication. Squires, G. L. (1978). Introduction to the theory of thermal neutron scattering. Cambridge University Press. Stewart, R. F. (1969a). Generalized X-ray scattering factors. J. Chem. Phys. 51, 4569–4577. Stewart, R. F. (1969b). Small Gaussian expansions of atomic orbitals. J. Chem. Phys. 50, 2485–2495. Stewart, R. F. (1970). Small Gaussian expansions of Slater-type orbitals. J. Chem. Phys. 52, 431–438. Stewart, R. F. (1980). Electron and magnetization densities in molecules and solids, edited by P. J. Becker, pp. 439–442. New York: Plenum. Stewart, R. F. & Hehre, W. J. (1970). Small Gaussian expansions of atomic orbitals: second-row atoms. J. Chem. Phys. 52, 5243– 5247. Su, Z. & Coppens, P. (1990). Closed-form expressions for Fourier– Bessel transforms of Slater-type functions. J. Appl. Cryst. 23, 71– 73. Su, Z. & Coppens, P. (1994). Normalization factors for Kubic harmonic density functions. Acta Cryst. A50, 408–409. Tanaka, K. & Marumo, F. (1983). Willis formalism of anharmonic temperature factors for a general potential and its application in the least-squares method. Acta Cryst. A39, 631–641. Von der Lage, F. C. & Bethe, H. A. (1947). A method for obtaining electronic functions and eigenvalues in solids with an application to sodium. Phys. Rev. 71, 612–622. Waller, I. & Hartree, D. R. (1929). Intensity of total scattering X-rays. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 124, 119–142. Weiss, R. J. & Freeman, A. J. (1959). X-ray and neutron scattering for electrons in a crystalline field and the determination of outer electron configurations in iron and nickel. J. Phys. Chem. Solids, 10, 147–161. Willis, B. T. M. (1969). Lattice vibrations and the accurate determination of structure factors for the elastic scattering of X-rays and neutrons. Acta Cryst. A25, 277–300. Zucker, U. H. & Schulz, H. (1982). Statistical approaches for the treatment of anharmonic motion in crystals. I. A comparison of the most frequently used formalisms of anharmonic thermal vibrations. Acta Cryst. A38, 563–568.

1.3 Agarwal, R. C. (1978). A new least-squares refinement technique based on the fast Fourier transform algorithm. Acta Cryst. A34, 791–809. Agarwal, R. C. (1980). The refinement of crystal structure by fast Fourier least-squares. In Computing in crystallography, edited by R. Diamond, S. Ramaseshan & K. Venkatesan, pp. 18.01–18.13. Bangalore: The Indian Academy of Science. Agarwal, R. C. (1981). New results on fast Fourier least-squares refinement technique. In Refinement of protein structures, compiled by P. A. Machin, J. W. Campbell & M. Elder (ref. DL/SCI/R16), pp. 24–28. Warrington: SERC Daresbury Laboratory.

Agarwal, R. C. & Cooley, J. W. (1986). Fourier transform and convolution subroutines for the IBM 3090 Vector facility. IBM J. Res. Dev. 30, 145–162. Agarwal, R. C. & Cooley, J. W. (1987). Vectorized mixed radix discrete Fourier transform algorithms. Proc. IEEE, 75, 1283– 1292. Agarwal, R. C., Lifchitz, A. & Dodson, E. J. (1981). Appendix (pp. 36–38) to Dodson (1981). Ahlfors, L. V. (1966). Complex analysis. New York: McGraw-Hill. Ahmed, F. R. & Barnes, W. H. (1958). Generalized programmes for crystallographic computations. Acta Cryst. 11, 669–671. Ahmed, F. R. & Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1953a). A refinement of the crystal structure analysis of oxalic acid dihydrate. Acta Cryst. 6, 385–392. Ahmed, F. R. & Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1953b). Crystallographic calculations on the Manchester University electronic digital computer (Mark II). Acta Cryst. 6, 765–769. Akhiezer, N. I. (1965). The classical moment problem. Edinburgh and London: Oliver & Boyd. Alston, N. A. & West, J. (1929). The structure of topaz, [Al(F,OH)]2SiO4. Z. Kristallogr. 69, 149–167. Apostol, T. M. (1976). Introduction to analytic number theory. New York: Springer-Verlag. Arnold, H. (1995). Transformations in crystallography. In International tables for crystallography, Vol. A. Space-group symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn, pp. 69–79. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Artin, E. (1944). Galois theory. Notre Dame University Press. Ascher, E. & Janner, A. (1965). Algebraic aspects of crystallography. I. Space groups as extensions. Helv. Phys. Acta, 38, 551–572. Ascher, E. & Janner, A. (1968). Algebraic aspects of crystallography. II. Non-primitive translations in space groups. Commun. Math. Phys. 11, 138–167. Ash, J. M. (1976). Multiple trigonometric series. In Studies in harmonic analysis, edited by J. M. Ash, pp. 76–96. MAA studies in mathematics, Vol. 13. The Mathematical Association of America. Auslander, L. (1965). An account of the theory of crystallographic groups. Proc. Am. Math. Soc. 16, 1230–1236. Auslander, L., Feig, E. & Winograd, S. (1982). New algorithms for evaluating the 3-dimensional discrete Fourier transform. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 451– 461. New York: Oxford University Press. Auslander, L., Feig, E. & Winograd, S. (1983). New algorithms for the multidimensional discrete Fourier transform. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 31, 388–403. Auslander, L., Feig, E. & Winograd, S. (1984). Abelian semi-simple algebras and algorithms for the discrete Fourier transform. Adv. Appl. Math. 5, 31–55. Auslander, L., Johnson, R. W. & Vulis, M. (1988). Evaluating finite Fourier transforms that respect group symmetries. Acta Cryst. A44, 467–478. Auslander, L. & Shenefelt, M. (1987). Fourier transforms that respect crystallographic symmetries. IBM J. Res. Dev. 31, 213–223. Auslander, L. & Tolimieri, R. (1979). Is computing with the finite Fourier transform pure or applied mathematics? Bull. Am. Math. Soc. 1, 847–897. Auslander, L. & Tolimieri, R. (1985). Ring structure and the Fourier transform. Math. Intelligencer, 7, 49–54. Auslander, L., Tolimieri, R. & Winograd, S. (1982). Hecke’s theorem in quadratic reciprocity, finite nilpotent groups and the Cooley–Tukey algorithm. Adv. Math. 43, 122–172. Ayoub, R. (1963). An introduction to the analytic theory of numbers. Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society. Baker, E. N. & Dodson, E. J. (1980). Crystallographic refinement of the structure of actinidin at 1.7 A˚ resolution by fast Fourier leastsquares methods. Acta Cryst. A36, 559–572. Bantz, D. & Zwick, M. (1974). The use of symmetry with the fast Fourier algorithm. Acta Cryst. A30, 257–260. Barakat, R. (1974). First-order statistics of combined random sinusoidal waves with applications to laser speckle patterns. Opt. Acta, 21, 903–921.

179

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 1.3 (cont.) Barrett, A. N. & Zwick, M. (1971). A method for the extension and refinement of crystallographic protein phases utilizing the fast Fourier transform. Acta Cryst. A27, 6–11. Beevers, C. A. (1952). Fourier strips at a 3° interval. Acta Cryst. 5, 670–673. Beevers, C. A. & Lipson, H. (1934). A rapid method for the summation of a two-dimensional Fourier series. Philos. Mag. 17, 855–859. Beevers, C. A. & Lipson, H. (1936). A numerical method for twodimensional Fourier synthesis. Nature (London), 137, 825–826. Beevers, C. A. & Lipson, H. (1952). The use of Fourier strips for calculating structure factors. Acta Cryst. 5, 673–675. Bellman, R. (1958). Dynamic programming and stochastic control processes. Inf. Control, 1, 228–239. Bennett, J. M. & Kendrew, J. C. (1952). The computation of Fourier syntheses with a digital electronic calculating machine. Acta Cryst. 5, 109–116. Berberian, S. K. (1962). Measure and integration. New York: Macmillan. [Reprinted by Chelsea, New York, 1965.] Bertaut, E. F. (1952). L’eńergie e´lectrostatique de re´seaux ioniques. J. Phys. Radium, 13, 499–505. Bertaut, E. F. (1955a). La me´thode statistique en cristallographie. I. Acta Cryst. 8, 537–543. Bertaut, E. F. (1955b). La me´thode statistique en cristallographie. II. Quelques applications. Acta Cryst. 8, 544–548. Bertaut, E. F. (1955c). Fonction de re´partition: application a` l’approache directe des structures. Acta Cryst. 8, 823–832. Bertaut, E. F. (1956a). Les groupes de translation non primitifs et la me´thode statistique. Acta Cryst. 9, 322. Bertaut, E. F. (1956b). Tables de lineárisation des produits et puissances des facteurs de structure. Acta Cryst. 9, 322–323. Bertaut, E. F. (1956c). Alge`bre des facteurs de structure. Acta Cryst. 9, 769–770. Bertaut, E. F. (1959a). IV. Alge`bre des facteurs de structure. Acta Cryst. 12, 541–549. Bertaut, E. F. (1959b). V. Alge`bre des facteurs de structure. Acta Cryst. 12, 570–574. Bertaut, E. F. & Waser, J. (1957). Structure factor algebra. II. Acta Cryst. 10, 606–607. Bhattacharya, R. N. & Rao, R. R. (1976). Normal approximation and asymptotic expansions. New York: John Wiley. ¨ ber die Bewegungsgruppen der EuklidBieberbach, L. (1911). U ischen Raume I. Math. Ann. 70, 297–336. ¨ ber die Bewegungsgruppen der EuklidBieberbach, L. (1912). U ischen Raume II. Math. Ann. 72, 400–412. Bienenstock, A. & Ewald, P. P. (1962). Symmetry of Fourier space. Acta Cryst. 15, 1253–1261. Blahut, R. E. (1985). Fast algorithms for digital signal processing. Reading: Addison-Wesley. Bleistein, N. & Handelsman, R. A. (1986). Asymptotic expansions of integrals. New York: Dover Publications. Bloomer, A. C., Champness, J. N., Bricogne, G., Staden, R. & Klug, A. (1978). Protein disk of tobacco mosaic virus at 2.8 A˚ngstro¨m resolution showing the interactions within and between subunits. Nature (London), 276, 362–368. Blow, D. M. & Crick, F. H. C. (1959). The treatment of errors in the isomorphous replacement method. Acta Cryst. 12, 794–802. Bochner, S. (1932). Vorlesungen u¨ber Fouriersche Integrale. Leipzig: Akademische Verlagsgesellschaft. Bochner, S. (1959). Lectures on Fourier integrals. Translated from Bochner (1932) by M. Tenenbaum & H. Pollard. Princeton University Press. Bode, W. & Schwager, P. (1975). The refined crystal structure of bovine -trypsin at 1.8A˚ resolution. II. Crystallographic refinement, calcium-binding site, benzamidine binding site and active site at pH 7.0. J. Mol. Biol. 98, 693–717. Bondot, P. (1971). Application de la transformeé de Fourier performante aux calculs cristallographiques. Acta Cryst. A27, 492–494.

Booth, A. D. (1945a). Two new modifications of the Fourier method of X-ray structure analysis. Trans. Faraday Soc. 41, 434–438. Booth, A. D. (1945b). An expression for following the process of refinement in X-ray structure analysis using Fourier series. Philos. Mag. 36, 609–615. Booth, A. D. (1945c). Accuracy of atomic co-ordinates derived from Fourier synthesis. Nature (London), 156, 51–52. Booth, A. D. (1946a). A differential Fourier method for refining atomic parameters in crystal structure analysis. Trans. Faraday Soc. 42, 444–448. Booth, A. D. (1946b). The simultaneous differential refinement of coordinates and phase angles in X-ray Fourier synthesis. Trans. Faraday Soc. 42, 617–619. Booth, A. D. (1946c). The accuracy of atomic co-ordinates derived from Fourier series in X-ray structure analysis. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 188, 77–92. Booth, A. D. (1947a). The accuracy of atomic co-ordinates derived from Fourier series in X-ray structure analysis. III. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 190, 482–489. Booth, A. D. (1947b). The accuracy of atomic co-ordinates derived from Fourier series in X-ray structure analysis. IV. The twodimensional projection of oxalic acid. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 190, 490–496. Booth, A. D. (1947c). A new refinement technique for X-ray structure analysis. J. Chem. Phys. 15, 415–416. Booth, A. D. (1947d). Application of the method of steepest descents to X-ray structure analysis. Nature (London), 160, 196. Booth, A. D. (1948a). A new Fourier refinement technique. Nature (London), 161, 765–766. Booth, A. D. (1948b). Fourier technique in X-ray organic structure analysis. Cambridge University Press. Booth, A. D. (1949). The refinement of atomic parameters by the technique known in X-ray crystallography as ‘the method of steepest descents’. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 197, 336–355. Born, M. & Huang, K. (1954). Dynamical theory of crystal lattices. Oxford University Press. Bracewell, R. N. (1986). The Fourier transform and its applications, 2nd ed., revised. New York: McGraw-Hill. Bragg, W. H. (1915). X-rays and crystal structure. (Bakerian Lecture.) Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 215, 253–274. Bragg, W. L. (1929). Determination of parameters in crystal structures by means of Fourier series. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 123, 537–559. Bragg, W. L. (1975). The development of X-ray analysis, edited by D. C. Phillips & H. Lipson. London: Bell. Bragg, W. L. & Lipson, H. (1936). The employment of contoured graphs of structure-factor in crystal analysis. Z. Kristallogr. 95, 323–337. Bragg, W. L. & West, J. (1929). A technique for the X-ray examination of crystal structures with many parameters. Z. Kristallogr. 69, 118–148. Bragg, W. L. & West, J. (1930). A note on the representation of crystal structure by Fourier series. Philos. Mag. 10, 823–841. Bremermann, H. (1965). Distributions, complex variables, and Fourier transforms. Reading: Addison-Wesley. Bricogne, G. (1974). Geometric sources of redundancy in intensity data and their use for phase determination. Acta Cryst. A30, 395–405. Bricogne, G. (1976). Methods and programs for direct-space exploitation of geometric redundancies. Acta Cryst. A32, 832–847. Bricogne, G. (1982). Generalised density modification methods. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 258–264. New York: Oxford University Press. Bricogne, G. (1984). Maximum entropy and the foundations of direct methods. Acta Cryst. A40, 410–445. Bricogne, G. (1988). A Bayesian statistical theory of the phase problem. I. A multichannel maximum entropy formalism for constructing generalised joint probability distributions of structure factors. Acta Cryst. A44, 517–545. Bricogne, G. & Tolimieri, R. (1990). Two-dimensional FFT algorithms on data admitting 90°-rotational symmetry. In Signal processing theory, edited by L. Auslander, T. Kailath & S. Mitter, pp. 25–35. New York: Springer-Verlag.

180

REFERENCES 1.3 (cont.) Brigham, E. O. (1988). The fast Fourier transform and its applications. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. Brill, R., Grimm, H., Hermann, C. & Peters, C. (1939). Anwendung der ro¨ntgenographischen Fourieranalyse auf Fragen den chemischen Bindung. Ann. Phys. (Leipzig), 34, 393–445. Britten, P. L. & Collins, D. M. (1982). Information theory as a basis for the maximum determinant. Acta Cryst. A38, 129–132. Brown, H. (1969). An algorithm for the determination of space groups. Math. Comput. 23, 499–514. Brown, H., Bu¨low, R., Neubu¨ser, J., Wondratschek, H. & Zassenhaus, H. (1978). Crystallographic groups of four-dimensional space. New York: John Wiley. Bruijn, N. G. de (1970). Asymptotic methods in analysis, 3rd ed. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Bru¨nger, A. T. (1988). Crystallographic refinement by simulated annealing. In Crystallographic computing 4: techniques and new technologies, edited by N. W. Isaacs & M. R. Taylor, pp. 126– 140. New York: Oxford University Press. Bru¨nger, A. T. (1989). A memory-efficient fast Fourier transformation algorithm for crystallographic refinement on supercomputers. Acta Cryst. A45, 42–50. Bru¨nger, A. T., Karplus, M. & Petsko, G. A. (1989). Crystallographic refinement by simulated annealing: application to crambin. Acta Cryst. A45, 50–61. Bru¨nger, A. T., Kuriyan, J. & Karplus, M. (1987). Crystallographic R factor refinement by molecular dynamics. Science, 235, 458– 460. Bryan, R. K., Bansal, M., Folkhard, W., Nave, C. & Marvin, D. A. (1983). Maximum-entropy calculation of the electron density at 4A˚ resolution of Pf1 filamentous bacteriophage. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 80, 4728–4731. Bryan, R. K. & Skilling, J. (1980). Deconvolution by maximum entropy, as illustrated by application to the jet of M87. Mon. Not. R. Astron. Soc. 191, 69–79. Burch, S. F., Gull, S. F. & Skilling, J. (1983). Image restoration by a powerful maximum entropy method. Comput. Vision, Graphics Image Process. 23, 113–128. Burnett, R. M. & Nordman, C. E. (1974). Optimization of the calculation of structure factors for large molecules. J. Appl. Cryst. 7, 625–627. Burnside, W. (1911). Theory of groups of finite order, 2nd ed. Cambridge University Press. Burrus, C. S. & Eschenbacher, P. W. (1981). An in-place, in-order prime factor FFT algorithm. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 29, 806–817. Busing, W. R. & Levy, H. A. (1961). Least squares refinement programs for the IBM 704. In Computing methods and the phase problem in X-ray crystal analysis, edited by R. Pepinsky, J. M. Robertson & J. C. Speakman, pp. 146–149. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Byerly, W. E. (1893). An elementary treatise on Fourier’s series and spherical, cylindrical and ellipsoidal harmonics. Boston: Ginn & Co. [Reprinted by Dover Publications, New York, 1959.] Campbell, G. A. & Foster, R. M. (1948). Fourier integrals for practical applications. Princeton: Van Nostrand. ¨ ber den Variabilita¨tsbereich der FourCaratheódory, C. (1911). U ierschen Konstanten von positiven harmonischen Functionen. Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo, 32, 193–217. Carslaw, H. S. (1930). An introduction to the theory of Fourier’s series and integrals. London: Macmillan. [Reprinted by Dover Publications, New York, 1950.] Carslaw, H. S. & Jaeger, J. C. (1948). Operational methods in applied mathematics. Oxford University Press. Cartan, H. (1961). Theórie des fonctions analytiques. Paris: Hermann. Challifour, J. L. (1972). Generalized functions and Fourier analysis. Reading: Benjamin. Champeney, D. C. (1973). Fourier transforms and their physical applications. New York: Academic Press.

Churchill, R. V. (1958). Operational mathematics, 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill. Cochran, W. (1948a). A critical examination of the Beevers–Lipson method of Fourier series summation. Acta Cryst. 1, 54–56. Cochran, W. (1948b). The Fourier method of crystal structure analysis. Nature (London), 161, 765. Cochran, W. (1948c). The Fourier method of crystal-structure analysis. Acta Cryst. 1, 138–142. Cochran, W. (1948d). X-ray analysis and the method of steepest descents. Acta Cryst. 1, 273. Cochran, W. (1951a). Some properties of the Fo Fc -synthesis. Acta Cryst. 4, 408–411. Cochran, W. (1951b). The structures of pyrimidines and purines. V. The electron distribution in adenine hydrochloride. Acta Cryst. 4, 81–92. Cochran, W., Crick, F. H. C. & Vand, V. (1952). The structure of synthetic polypeptides. I. The transform of atoms on a helix. Acta Cryst. 5, 581–586. Cochran, W. T., Cooley, J. W., Favin, D. L., Helms, H. D., Kaenel, R. A., Lang, W. W., Maling, G. C., Nelson, D. E., Rader, C. M. & Welch, P. D. (1967). What is the fast Fourier transform? IEEE Trans. Audio, 15, 45–55. Collins, D. M. (1975). Efficiency in Fourier phase refinement for protein crystal structures. Acta Cryst. A31, 388–389. Collins, D. M., Brice, M. D., Lacour, T. F. M. & Legg, M. J. (1976). Fourier phase refinement and extension by modification of electron-density maps. In Crystallographic computing techniques, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 330–335. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Colman, P. M. (1974). Non-crystallographic symmetry and the sampling theorem. Z. Kristallogr. 140, 344–349. Cooley, J. W. & Tukey, J. W. (1965). An algorithm for the machine calculation of complex Fourier series. Math. Comput. 19, 297–301. Cox, E. G. & Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1948). The accuracy of electrondensity maps in X-ray structure analysis. Acta Cryst. 1, 92–93. Cox, E. G., Gross, L. & Jeffrey, G. A. (1947). A Hollerith punchedcard method for the evaluation of electron density in crystal structure analysis. Proc. Leeds Philos. Soc. 5, 1–13. Cox, E. G., Gross, L. & Jeffrey, G. A. (1949). A Hollerith technique for computing three-dimensional differential Fourier syntheses in X-ray crystal structure analysis. Acta Cryst. 2, 351–355. Cox, E. G. & Jeffrey, G. A. (1949). The use of Hollerith computing equipment in crystal structure analysis. Acta Cryst. 2, 341–343. Coxeter, H. S. M. & Moser, W. O. J. (1972). Generators and relations for discrete groups, 3rd ed. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Crame´r, H. (1946). Mathematical methods of statistics. Princeton University Press. Crowther, R. A. (1967). A linear analysis of the non-crystallographic symmetry problem. Acta Cryst. 22, 758–764. Crowther, R. A. (1969). The use of non-crystallographic symmetry for phase determination. Acta Cryst. B25, 2571–2580. Crowther, R. A. (1972). The fast rotation function. In The molecular replacement method, edited by M. G. Rossmann, pp. 173–178. New York: Gordon & Breach. Crowther, R. A. & Blow, D. M. (1967). A method of positioning a known molecule in an unknown crystal structure. Acta Cryst. 23, 544–548. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1949a). The accuracy of electron-density maps in X-ray analysis with special reference to dibenzyl. Acta Cryst. 2, 65–82. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1949b). The accuracy of atomic co-ordinates derived by least-squares or Fourier methods. Acta Cryst. 2, 154– 157. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1950). The convergence of the least-squares and Fourier refinement methods. Acta Cryst. 3, 10–13. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1952). On the relations between Fourier and least-squares methods of structure determination. Acta Cryst. 5, 511–518. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1956). The determination of the anisotropic thermal motion of atoms in crystals. Acta Cryst. 9, 747–753. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1965a). Errors in Fourier series. In Computing methods in crystallography, edited by J. S. Rollett, pp. 107–111. Oxford: Pergamon Press.

181

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 1.3 (cont.) Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1965b). Errors in least-squares methods. In Computing methods in crystallography, edited by J. S. Rollett, pp. 112–116. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Cruickshank, D. W. J. (1970). Least-squares refinement of atomic parameters. In Crystallographic computing, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 187–197. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Cruickshank, D. W. J., Pilling, D. E., Bujosa, A., Lovell, F. M. & Truter, M. R. (1961). Crystallographic calculations on the Ferranti Pegasus and mark I computers. In Computing methods and the phase problem in X-ray crystal analysis, edited by R. Pepinsky, J. M. Robertson & J. C. Speakman, pp. 32–78. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Cruickshank, D. W. J. & Rollett, J. S. (1953). Electron-density errors at special positions. Acta Cryst. 6, 705–707. Curtis, C. W. & Reiner, I. (1962). Representation theory of finite groups and associative algebras. New York: Wiley–Interscience. Daniels, H. E. (1954). Saddlepoint approximation in statistics. Ann. Math. Stat. 25, 631–650. Deisenhofer, J. & Steigemann, W. (1975). Crystallographic refinement of the structure of bovine pancreatic trypsin inhibitor at 1.5 A˚ resolution. Acta Cryst. B31, 238–250. Diamond, R. (1971). A real-space refinement procedure for proteins. Acta Cryst. A27, 436–452. Dickerson, R. E., Kendrew, J. C. & Strandberg, B. E. (1961a). The phase problem and isomorphous replacement methods in protein structures. In Computing methods and the phase problem in X-ray crystal analysis, edited by R. Pepinsky, J. M. Robertson & J. C. Speakman, pp. 236–251. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Dickerson, R. E., Kendrew, J. C. & Strandberg, B. E. (1961b). The crystal structure of myoglobin: phase determination to a resolution of 2 A˚ by the method of isomorphous replacement. Acta Cryst. 14, 1188–1195. Dietrich, H. (1972). A reconsideration of Fourier methods for the refinement of crystal structures. Acta Cryst. B28, 2807–2814. Dieudonne´, J. (1969). Foundations of modern analysis. New York and London: Academic Press. Dieudonne´, J. (1970). Treatise on analysis, Vol. II. New York and London: Academic Press. Dirac, P. A. M. (1958). The principles of quantum mechanics, 4th ed. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Dodson, E. J. (1981). Block diagonal least squares refinement using fast Fourier techniques. In Refinement of protein structures, compiled by P. A. Machin J. W. Campbell & M. Elder (ref. DL/ SCI/R16), pp. 29–39. Warrington: SERC Daresbury Laboratory. Donohue, J. & Schomaker, V. (1949). The use of punched cards in molecular structure determinations. III. Structure factor calculations of X-ray crystallography. Acta Cryst. 2, 344–347. Duane, W. (1925). The calculation of the X-ray diffracting power at points in a crystal. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 11, 489–493. Dym, H. & McKean, H. P. (1972). Fourier series and integrals. New York and London: Academic Press. Eklundh, J. O. (1972). A fast computer method for matrix transposing. IEEE Trans. C-21, 801–803. Engel, P. (1986). Geometric crystallography. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Erde´lyi, A. (1954). Tables of integral transforms, Vol. I. New York: McGraw-Hill. Erde´lyi, A. (1962). Operational calculus and generalized functions. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston. Ewald, P. P. (1921). Die Berechnung optischer und electrostatischer Gitterpotentiale. Ann. Phys. Leipzig, 64, 253–287. Ewald, P. P. (1940). X-ray diffraction by finite and imperfect crystal lattices. Proc. Phys. Soc. London, 52, 167–174. Ewald, P. P. (1962). Fifty years of X-ray diffraction. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Farkas, D. R. (1981). Crystallographic groups and their mathematics. Rocky Mountain J. Math. 11, 511–551. Fornberg, A. (1981). A vector implementation of the fast Fourier transform algorithm. Math. Comput. 36, 189–191.

Forsyth, J. B. & Wells, M. (1959). On an analytical approximation to the atomic scattering factor. Acta Cryst. 12, 412–415. Fowler, R. H. (1936). Statistical mechanics, 2nd ed. Cambridge University Press. Fowweather, F. (1955). The use of general programmes for crystallographic calculations on the Manchester University electronic digital computer (Mark II). Acta Cryst. 8, 633–637. Freer, S. T., Alden, R. A., Levens, S. A. & Kraut, J. (1976). Refinement of five protein structures by constrained Fo Fc Fourier methods. In Crystallographic computing techniques, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 317–321. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Friedel, G. (1913). Sur les syme´tries cristallines que peut re´ve´ler la diffraction des rayons Ro¨ntgen. C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, 157, 1533– 1536. Friedlander, F. G. (1982). Introduction to the theory of distributions. Cambridge University Press. Friedlander, P. H., Love, W. & Sayre, D. (1955). Least-squares refinement at high speed. Acta Cryst. 8, 732. Friedman, A. (1970). Foundations of modern analysis. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston. [Reprinted by Dover, New York, 1982.] ¨ ber die unzerlegbaren diskreten BewegungsFrobenius, G. (1911). U gruppen. Sitzungsber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 29, 654–665. Gassmann, J. (1976). Improvement and extension of approximate phase sets in structure determination. In Crystallographic computing techniques, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 144–154. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Gassmann, J. & Zechmeister, K. (1972). Limits of phase expansion in direct methods. Acta Cryst. A28, 270–280. Gel’fand, I. M. & Shilov, G. E. (1964). Generalized functions, Vol. I. New York and London: Academic Press. Gentleman, W. M. & Sande, G. (1966). Fast Fourier transforms – for fun and profit. In AFIPS Proc. 1966 Fall Joint Computer Conference, pp. 563–578. Washington, DC: Spartan Books. Gillis, J. (1948a). Structure factor relations and phase determination. Acta Cryst. 1, 76–80. Gillis, J. (1948b). The application of the Harker–Kasper method of phase determination. Acta Cryst. 1, 174–179. Goedkoop, J. A. (1950). Remarks on the theory of phase-limiting inequalities and equalities. Acta Cryst. 3, 374–378. Goldstine, H. H. (1977). A history of numerical analysis from the 16th through the 19th century. New York: Springer-Verlag. Good, I. J. (1958). The interaction algorithm and practical Fourier analysis. J. R. Stat. Soc. B20, 361–372. Good, I. J. (1960). Addendum [to Good (1958)]. J. R. Stat. Soc. B22, 372–375. Good, I. J. (1971). The relationship between two fast Fourier transforms. IEEE Trans. C-20, 310–317. Greenhalgh, D. M. S. & Jeffrey, G. A. (1950). A new punched card method of Fourier synthesis. Acta Cryst. 3, 311–312. Grems, M. D. & Kasper, J. S. (1949). An improved punched-card method for crystal structure-factor calculations. Acta Cryst. 2, 347–351. Grenander, U. (1952). On Toeplitz forms and stationary processes. Ark. Math. 1, 555–571. Grenander, U. & Szego¨, G. (1958). Toeplitz forms and their applications. Berkeley: University of California Press. Guessoum, A. & Mersereau, R. M. (1986). Fast algorithms for the multidimensional discrete Fourier transform. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 34, 937–943. Hadamard, J. (1932). Le proble`me de Cauchy et les e´quations aux de´riveés partielles lineáires hyperboliques. Paris: Hermann. Hadamard, J. (1952). Lectures on Cauchy’s problem in linear partial differential equations. New York: Dover Publications. Hall, M. (1959). The theory of groups. New York: Macmillan. Hardy, G. H. (1933). A theorem concerning Fourier transforms. J. London Math. Soc. 8, 227–231. Harker, D. (1936). The application of the three-dimensional Patterson method and the crystal structures of proustite Ag3 AsS3 , and pyrargyrite, Ag3 SbS3 . J. Chem. Phys. 4, 381–390. Harker, D. & Kasper, J. S. (1948). Phases of Fourier coefficients directly from crystal diffraction data. Acta Cryst. 1, 70–75.

182

REFERENCES 1.3 (cont.) Harris, D. B., McClellan, J. H., Chan, D. S. K. & Schuessler, H. W. (1977). Vector radix fast Fourier transform. Rec. 1977 IEEE Internat. Conf. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. pp. 548–551. Harrison, S. C., Olson, A. J., Schutt, C. E., Winkler, F. K. & Bricogne, G. (1978). Tomato bushy stunt virus at 2.9 A˚ngstro¨m resolution. Nature (London), 276, 368–373. Hartman, P. & Wintner, A. (1950). On the spectra of Toeplitz’s matrices. Am. J. Math. 72, 359–366. Hartman, P. & Wintner, A. (1954). The spectra of Toeplitz’s matrices. Am. J. Math. 76, 867–882. Hauptman, H. & Karle, J. (1953). Solution of the phase problem. I. The centrosymmetric crystal. ACA Monograph No. 3. Pittsburgh: Polycrystal Book Service. Havighurst, R. J. (1925a). The distribution of diffracting power in sodium chloride. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 11, 502–507. Havighurst, R. J. (1925b). The distribution of diffracting power in certain crystals. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 11, 507–512. Heideman, M. T., Johnson, D. H. & Burrus, C. S. (1984). Gauss and the history of the fast Fourier transform. IEEE Acoust. Speech Signal Process. Mag. October 1984. Hendrickson, W. A. & Konnert, J. H. (1980). Incorporation of stereochemical information into crystallographic refinement. In Computing in crystallography, edited by R. Diamond, S. Ramaseshan & K. Venkatesan, pp. 13.01–13.26. Bangalore: The Indian Academy of Science. ¨ ber Potenzreihen mit positiven, reellen Teil im Herglotz, G. (1911). U Einheitskreis. Ber. Sa¨chs. Ges. Wiss. Leipzig, 63, 501–511. Hirschman, I. I. Jr & Hughes, D. E. (1977). Extreme eigenvalues of Toeplitz operators. Lecture notes in mathematics, Vol. 618. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Hodgson, M. L., Clews, C. J. B. & Cochran, W. (1949). A punched card modification of the Beevers–Lipson method of Fourier synthesis. Acta Cryst. 2, 113–116. Hoppe, W. & Gassmann, J. (1968). Phase correction, a new method to solve partially known structures. Acta Cryst. B24, 97–107. Hoppe, W., Gassmann, J. & Zechmeister, K. (1970). Some automatic procedures for the solution of crystal structures with direct methods and phase correction. In Crystallographic computing, edited by F. R. Ahmed, S. R. Hall & C. P. Huber, pp. 26–36. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Ho¨rmander, L. (1963). Linear partial differential operators. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Ho¨rmander, L. (1973). An introduction to complex analysis in several variables, 2nd ed. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Huber, R., Kulka, D., Bode, W., Schwager, P., Bartels, K., Deisenhofer, J. & Steigemann, W. (1974). Structure of the complex formed by bovine trypsin and bovine pancreatic trypsin inhibitor. II. Crystallographic refinement at 1.9A˚ resolution. J. Mol. Biol. 89, 73–101. Hughes, E. W. (1941). The crystal structure of melamine. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 63, 1737–1752. Immirzi, A. (1973). A general Fourier program for X-ray crystalstructure analysis which utilizes the Cooley–Tukey algorithm. J. Appl. Cryst. 6, 246–249. Immirzi, A. (1976). Fast Fourier transform in crystallography. In Crystallographic computing techniques, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 399–412. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Isaacs, N. W. (1982a). The refinement of macromolecules. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 381–397. New York: Oxford University Press. Isaacs, N. W. (1982b). Refinement techniques: use of the FFT. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 398–408. New York: Oxford University Press. Isaacs, N. W. (1984). Refinement using the fast-Fourier transform least squares algorithm. In Methods and applications in crystallographic computing, edited by S. R. Hall & T. Ashida, pp. 193– 205. New York: Oxford University Press. Isaacs, N. W. & Agarwal, R. C. (1978). Experience with fast Fourier least squares in the refinement of the crystal structure of

rhombohedral 2-zinc insulin at 1.5 A˚ resolution. Acta Cryst. A34, 782–791. Jack, A. (1973). Direct determination of X-ray phases for tobacco mosaic virus protein using non-crystallographic symmetry. Acta Cryst. A29, 545–554. Jack, A. & Levitt, M. (1978). Refinement of large structures by simultaneous minimization of energy and R factor. Acta Cryst. A34, 931–935. James, R. W. (1948a). The optical principles of the diffraction of X-rays. London: Bell. James, R. W. (1948b). False detail in three-dimensional Fourier representations of crystal structures. Acta Cryst. 1, 132–134. Janssen, T. (1973). Crystallographic groups. Amsterdam: NorthHolland. Jaynes, E. T. (1957). Information theory and statistical mechanics. Phys. Rev. 106, 620–630. Jaynes, E. T. (1968). Prior probabilities. IEEE Trans. SSC, 4, 227– 241. Jaynes, E. T. (1983). Papers on probability, statistics and statistical physics. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Johnson, H. W. & Burrus, C. S. (1983). The design of optimal DFT algorithms using dynamic programming. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 31, 378–387. Ju¨rgensen, H. (1970). Calculation with the elements of a finite group given by generators and defining relations. In Computational problems in abstract algebra, edited by J. Leech, pp. 47–57. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Kac, M. (1954). Toeplitz matrices, translation kernels, and a related problem in probability theory. Duke Math. J. 21, 501–509. Kac, M., Murdock, W. L. & Szego¨, G. (1953). On the eigenvalues of certain Hermitian forms. J. Rat. Mech. Anal. 2, 767–800. Karle, J. & Hauptman, H. (1950). The phases and magnitudes of the structure factors. Acta Cryst. 3, 181–187. Katznelson, Y. (1968). An introduction to harmonic analysis. New York: John Wiley. Khinchin, A. I. (1949). Mathematical foundations of statistical mechanics. New York: Dover Publications. Kitz, N. & Marchington, B. (1953). A method of Fourier synthesis using a standard Hollerith senior rolling total tabulator. Acta Cryst. 6, 325–326. Klug, A. (1958). Joint probability distributions of structure factors and the phase problem. Acta Cryst. 11, 515–543. Klug, A., Crick, F. H. C. & Wyckoff, H. W. (1958). Diffraction by helical structures. Acta Cryst. 11, 199–213. Kluyver, J. C. (1906). A local probability problem. K. Ned. Akad. Wet. Proc. 8, 341–350. Kolba, D. P. & Parks, T. W. (1977). A prime factor FFT algorithm using high-speed convolution. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 25, 281–294. Konnert, J. H. (1976). A restrained-parameter structure-factor leastsquares refinement procedure for large asymmetric units. Acta Cryst. A32, 614–617. Konnert, J. H. & Hendrickson, W. A. (1980). A restrained-parameter thermal-factor refinement procedure. Acta Cryst. A36, 344–350. Korn, D. G. & Lambiotte, J. J. Jr (1979). Computing the fast Fourier transform on a vector computer. Math. Comput. 33, 977–992. Kuriyan, J., Bru¨nger, A. T., Karplus, M. & Hendrickson, W. A. (1989). X-ray refinement of protein structures by simulated annealing: test of the method on myohemerythrin. Acta Cryst. A45, 396–409. Lanczos, C. (1966). Discourse on Fourier series. Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd. Landau, H. J. & Pollack, H. O. (1961). Prolate spheroidal wave functions, Fourier analysis and uncertainty (2). Bell Syst. Tech. J. 40, 65–84. Landau, H. J. & Pollack, H. O. (1962). Prolate spheroidal wave functions, Fourier analysis and uncertainty (3): the dimension of the space of essentially time- and band-limited signals. Bell Syst. Tech. J. 41, 1295–1336. Lang, S. (1965). Algebra. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. Larmor, J. (1934). The Fourier discontinuities: a chapter in historical integral calculus. Philos. Mag. 17, 668–678.

183

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 1.3 (cont.) Laue, M. von (1936). Die au¨ßere Form der Kristalle in ihrem Einfluß auf die Interferenzerscheinungen an Raumgittern. Ann. Phys. (Leipzig), 26, 55–68. Lavoine, J. (1963). Transformation de Fourier des pseudo-fonctions, avec tables de nouvelles transformeés. Paris: Editions du CNRS. Ledermann, W. (1987). Introduction to group characters, 2nd ed. Cambridge University Press. Leslie, A. G. W. (1987). A reciprocal-space method for calculating a molecular envelope using the algorithm of B. C. Wang. Acta Cryst. A43, 134–136. Lighthill, M. J. (1958). Introduction to Fourier analysis and generalized functions. Cambridge University Press. Linnik, I. Ju. (1975). A multidimensional analogue of a limit theorem of G. Szego¨. Math. USSR Izv. 9, 1323–1332. Lipson, H. & Beevers, C. A. (1936). An improved numerical method of two-dimensional Fourier synthesis for crystals. Proc. Phys. Soc. London, 48, 772–780. Lipson, H. & Cochran, W. (1953). The determination of crystal structures. London: Bell. Lipson, H. & Cochran, W. (1968). The determination of crystal structures. Revised and enlarged edition. London: G. Bell & Sons. Lipson, H. & Taylor, C. A. (1951). Optical methods in X-ray analysis. II. Fourier transforms and crystal-structure determination. Acta Cryst. 4, 458–462. Lipson, H. & Taylor, C. A. (1958). Fourier transforms and X-ray diffraction. London: Bell. Livesey, A. K. & Skilling, J. (1985). Maximum entropy theory. Acta Cryst. A41, 113–122. Lonsdale, K. (1936). Simplified structure factor and electron density formulae for the 230 space groups of mathematical crystallography. London: Bell. Lunin, V. Yu. (1985). Use of the fast differentiation algorithm for phase refinement in protein crystallography. Acta Cryst. A41, 551–556. McClellan, J. H. & Rader, C. M. (1979). Number theory in digital signal processing. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice Hall. MacGillavry, C. H. (1950). On the derivation of Harker–Kasper inequalities. Acta Cryst. 3, 214–217. MacLane, S. (1963). Homology. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Magnus, W., Karrass, A. & Solitar, D. (1976). Combinatorial group theory: presentations of groups in terms of generators and relations, 2nd revised ed. New York: Dover Publications. Magnus, W., Oberhettinger, F. & Soni, R. P. (1966). Formulas and theorems for the special functions of mathematical physics. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Main, P. & Rossmann, M. G. (1966). Relationships among structure factors due to identical molecules in different crystallographic environments. Acta Cryst. 21, 67–72. Main, P. & Woolfson, M. M. (1963). Direct determination of phases by the use of linear equations between structure factors. Acta Cryst. 16, 1046–1051. Mayer, S. W. & Trueblood, K. N. (1953). Three-dimensional Fourier summations on a high-speed digital computer. Acta Cryst. 6, 427. Mersereau, R. & Speake, T. C. (1981). A unified treatment of Cooley–Tukey algorithms for the evaluation of the multidimensional DFT. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 29, 1011–1018. Mersereau, R. M. (1979). The processing of hexagonally sampled two-dimensional signals. Proc. IEEE, 67, 930–949. Montroll, E. W., Potts, R. B. & Ward, J. C. (1963). Correlations and spontaneous magnetization of the two-dimensional Ising model. J. Math. Phys. 4, 308–322. Moore, D. H. (1971). Heaviside operational calculus. An elementary foundation. New York: American Elsevier. Morris, R. L. (1978). A comparative study of time efficient FFT and WFTA programs for general purpose computers. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 26, 141–150. Narayan, R. & Nityananda, R. (1982). The maximum determinant method and the maximum entropy method. Acta Cryst. A38, 122– 128.

Natterer, F. (1986). The mathematics of computerized tomography. New York: John Wiley. Navaza, J. (1985). On the maximum-entropy estimate of the electron density function. Acta Cryst. A41, 232–244. Nawab, H. & McClellan, J. H. (1979). Bounds on the minimum number of data transfers in WFTA and FFT programs. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 27, 393–398. Niggli, A. (1961). Small-scale computers in X-ray crystallography. In Computing methods and the phase problem, edited by R. Pepinsky, J. M. Robertson & J. C. Speakman, pp. 12–20. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Nussbaumer, H. J. (1981). Fast Fourier transform and convolution algorithms. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Nussbaumer, H. J. & Quandalle, P. (1979). Fast computation of discrete Fourier transforms using polynomial transforms. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 27, 169–181. Onsager, L. (1944). Crystal statistics. I. Two-dimensional model with an order–disorder transition. Phys. Rev. 65, 117–149. Paley, R. E. A. C. & Wiener, N. (1934). Fourier transforms in the complex domain. Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society. Patterson, A. L. (1934). A Fourier series method for the determination of the components of interatomic distances in crystals. Phys. Rev. 46, 372–376. Patterson, A. L. (1935a). A direct method for the determination of the components of interatomic distances in crystals. Z. Kristallogr. 90, 517–542. Patterson, A. L. (1935b). Tabulated data for the seventeen plane groups. Z. Kristallogr. 90, 543–554. Patterson, A. L. (1959). In International tables for X-ray crystallography, Vol. II, pp. 9–10. Erratum, January 1962. Birmingham: Kynoch Press. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) Pearson, K. (1905). The problem of the random walk. Nature (London), 72, 294, 342. Pease, M. C. (1968). An adaptation of the fast Fourier transform for parallel processing. J. Assoc. Comput. Mach. 15, 252–264. Pepinsky, R. (1947). An electronic computer for X-ray crystal structure analyses. J. Appl. Phys. 18, 601–604. Pepinsky, R. (1952). The use of positive kernels in Fourier syntheses of crystal structures. In Computing methods and the phase problem in X-ray crystal analysis, edited by R. Pepinsky, pp. 319– 338. State College: Penn. State College. Pepinsky, R., van den Hende, J. & Vand, V. (1961). X-RAC and digital computing methods. In Computing methods and the phase problem, edited by R. Pepinsky, J. M. Robertson & J. C. Speakman, pp. 154–160. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Pepinsky, R. & Sayre, D. (1948). Quantitative electron-density contour delineation in the electronic Fourier synthesizer for crystal structure analysis. Nature (London), 162, 22–23. Petrov, V. V. (1975). Sums of independent random variables. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Pollack, H. O. & Slepian, D. (1961). Prolate spheroidal wave functions, Fourier analysis and uncertainty (1). Bell Syst. Tech. J. 40, 43–64. Qurashi, M. M. (1949). Optimal conditions for convergence of steepest descents as applied to structure determination. Acta Cryst. 2, 404–409. Qurashi, M. M. (1953). An analysis of the efficiency of convergence of different methods of structure determination. I. The methods of least squares and steepest descents: centrosymmetric case. Acta Cryst. 6, 577–588. Qurashi, M. M. & Vand, V. (1953). Weighting of the least-squares and steepest-descents methods in the initial stages of the crystalstructure determination. Acta Cryst. 6, 341–349. Rader, C. M. (1968). Discrete Fourier transforms when the number of data samples is prime. Proc. IEEE, 56, 1107–1108. Rayleigh (J. W. Strutt), Lord (1880). On the resultant of a large number of vibrations of the same pitch and arbitrary phase. Philos. Mag. 10, 73–78. Rayleigh (J. W. Strutt), Lord (1899). On James Bernoulli’s theorem in probabilities. Philos. Mag. 47, 246–251.

184

REFERENCES 1.3 (cont.) Rayleigh (J. W. Strutt), Lord (1905). The problem of the random walk. Nature (London), 72, 318. Rayleigh (J. W. Strutt), Lord (1918). On the light emitted from a random distribution of luminous sources. Philos. Mag. 36, 429–449. Rayleigh (J. W. Strutt), Lord (1919). On the problem of random flights in one, two or three dimensions. Philos. Mag. 37, 321–347. Reif, F. (1965). Fundamentals of statistical and thermal physics, Appendix A.6. New York: McGraw-Hill. Reijen, L. L. van (1942). Diffraction effects in Fourier syntheses and their elimination in X-ray structure investigations. Physica, 9, 461–480. Rice, S. O. (1944, 1945). Mathematical analysis of random noise. Bell Syst. Tech. J. 23, 283–332 (parts I and II); 24, 46–156 (parts III and IV). [Reprinted in Selected papers on noise and stochastic processes (1954), edited by N. Wax, pp. 133–294. New York: Dover Publications.] Riesz, M. (1938). L’inte´grale de Riemann–Liouville et le proble`me de Cauchy pour l’e´quation des ondes. Bull. Soc. Math. Fr. 66, 153–170. Riesz, M. (1949). L’inte´grale de Riemann–Liouville et le proble`me de Cauchy. Acta Math. 81, 1–223. Rivard, G. E. (1977). Direct fast Fourier transform of bivariate functions. IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 25, 250–252. Robertson, J. M. (1932). A simple harmonic continuous calculating machine. Philos. Mag. 13, 413–419. Robertson, J. M. (1935). An X-ray study of the structure of phthalocyanines. Part I. The metal-free, nickel, copper, and platinum compounds. J. Chem. Soc. pp. 615–621. Robertson, J. M. (1936a). Numerical and mechanical methods in double Fourier synthesis. Philos. Mag. 21, 176–187. Robertson, J. M. (1936b). Calculation of structure factors and summation of Fourier series in crystal analysis: non-centrosymmetrical projections. Nature (London), 138, 683–684. Robertson, J. M. (1936c). An X-ray study of the phthalocyanines. Part II. Quantitative structure determination of the metal-free compound. J. Chem. Soc. pp. 1195–1209. Robertson, J. M. (1937). X-ray analysis and application of Fourier series methods to molecular structures. Phys. Soc. Rep. Prog. Phys. 4, 332–367. Robertson, J. M. (1954). A fast digital computer for Fourier operations. Acta Cryst. 7, 817–822. Robertson, J. M. (1955). Some properties of Fourier strips with applications to the digital computer. Acta Cryst. 8, 286–288. Robertson, J. M. (1961). A digital mechanical computer for Fourier operations. In Computing methods and the phase problem, edited by R. Pepinsky, J. M. Robertson & J. C. Speakman, pp. 21–24. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Rollett, J. S. (1965). Structure factor routines. In Computing methods in crystallography, edited by J. S. Rollett, pp. 38–46. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Rollett, J. S. (1970). Least-squares procedures in crystal structure analysis. In Crystallographic computing, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 167–181. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Rollett, J. S. & Davies, D. R. (1955). The calculation of structure factors for centrosymmetric monoclinic systems with anisotropic atomic vibration. Acta Cryst. 8, 125–128. Rossmann, M. G. & Blow, D. M. (1962). The detection of sub-units within the crystallographic asymmetric unit. Acta Cryst. 15, 24–31. Rossmann, M. G. & Blow, D. M. (1963). Determination of phases by the conditions of non-crystallographic symmetry. Acta Cryst. 16, 39–45. Sayre, D. (1951). The calculation of structure factors by Fourier summation. Acta Cryst. 4, 362–367. Sayre, D. (1952a). The squaring method: a new method for phase determination. Acta Cryst. 5, 60–65. Sayre, D. (1952b). Some implications of a theorem due to Shannon. Acta Cryst. 5, 843. Sayre, D. (1952c). The Fourier transform in X-ray crystal analysis. In Computing methods and the phase problem in X-ray crystal analysis, edited by R. Pepinsky, pp. 361–390. State College: Penn. State University.

Sayre, D. (1972). On least-squares refinement of the phases of crystallographic structure factors. Acta Cryst. A28, 210–212. Sayre, D. (1974). Least-squares phase refinement. II. High-resolution phasing of a small protein. Acta Cryst. A30, 180–184. Sayre, D. (1980). Phase extension and refinement using convolutional and related equation systems. In Theory and practice of direct methods in crystallography, edited by M. F. C. Ladd & R. A. Palmer, pp. 271–286. New York and London: Plenum. Schroeder, M. R. (1986). Number theory in science and communication, 2nd ed. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Schwartz, L. (1965). Mathematics for the physical sciences. Paris: Hermann, and Reading: Addison-Wesley. Schwartz, L. (1966). Theórie des distributions. Paris: Hermann. Schwarzenberger, R. L. E. (1980). N-dimensional crystallography. Research notes in mathematics, Vol. 41. London: Pitman. Scott, W. R. (1964). Group theory. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. [Reprinted by Dover, New York, 1987.] Shaffer, P. A. Jr, Schomaker, V. & Pauling, L. (1946a). The use of punched cards in molecular structure determinations. I. Crystal structure calculations. J. Chem. Phys. 14, 648–658. Shaffer, P. A. Jr, Schomaker, V. & Pauling, L. (1946b). The use of punched cards in molecular structure determinations. II. Electron diffraction calculations. J. Chem. Phys. 14, 659–664. Shannon, C. E. (1949). Communication in the presence of noise. Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. NY, 37, 10–21. Shenefelt, M. (1988). Group invariant finite Fourier transforms. PhD thesis, Graduate Centre of the City University of New York. Shmueli, U. & Weiss, G. H. (1985). Exact joint probability distribution for centrosymmetric structure factors. Derivation and application to the 1 relationship in the space group P 1. Acta Cryst. A41, 401–408. Shmueli, U. & Weiss, G. H. (1986). Exact joint distribution of Eh , Ek and Ehk , and the probability for the positive sign of the triple product in the space group P1. Acta Cryst. A42, 240–246. Shmueli, U. & Weiss, G. H. (1987). Exact random-walk models in crystallographic statistics. III. Distributions of jEj for space groups of low symmetry. Acta Cryst. A43, 93–98. Shmueli, U. & Weiss, G. H. (1988). Exact random-walk models in crystallographic statistics. IV. P.d.f.’s of jEj allowing for atoms in special positions. Acta Cryst. A44, 413–417. Shmueli, U., Weiss, G. H. & Kiefer, J. E. (1985). Exact random-walk models in crystallographic statistics. II. The bicentric distribution for the space group P1. Acta Cryst. A41, 55–59. Shmueli, U., Weiss, G. H., Kiefer, J. E. & Wilson, A. J. C. (1984). Exact random-walk models in crystallographic statistics. I. Space groups P1 and P1. Acta Cryst. A40, 651–660. Shoemaker, D. P., Donohue, J., Schomaker, V. & Corey, R. B. (1950). The crystal structure of LS -threonine. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 72, 2328–2349. Shoemaker, D. P. & Sly, W. G. (1961). Computer programming strategy for crystallographic Fourier synthesis: program MIFR1. Acta Cryst. 14, 552. Shohat, J. A. & Tamarkin, J. D. (1943). The problem of moments. Mathematical surveys, No. 1. New York: American Mathematical Society. Silverman, H. F. (1977). An introduction to programming the Winograd Fourier transform algorithm (WFTA). IEEE Trans. Acoust. Speech Signal Process. 25, 152–165. Singleton, R. C. (1969). An algorithm for computing the mixed radix fast Fourier transform. IEEE Trans. AU, 17, 93–103. Sneddon, I. N. (1951). Fourier transforms. New York: McGraw-Hill. Sneddon, I. N. (1972). The use of integral transforms. New York: McGraw-Hill. Sparks, R. A., Prosen, R. J., Kruse, F. H. & Trueblood, K. N. (1956). Crystallographic calculations on the high-speed digital computer SWAC. Acta Cryst. 9, 350–358. Sprecher, D. A. (1970). Elements of real analysis. New York: Academic Press. [Reprinted by Dover Publications, New York, 1987.] Stout, G. H. & Jensen, L. H. (1968). X-ray structure determination. A practical guide. New York: Macmillan. Suryan, G. (1957). An analogue computer for double Fourier series

185

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 1.3 (cont.) summation for X-ray crystal-structure analysis. Acta Cryst. 10, 82–84. Sussman, J. L., Holbrook, S. R., Church, G. M. & Kim, S.-H. (1977). A structure-factor least-squares refinement procedure for macromolecular structures using constrained and restrained parameters. Acta Cryst. A33, 800–804. Swartzrauber, P. N. (1984). FFT algorithms for vector computers. Parallel Comput. 1, 45–63. Szego¨, G. (1915). Ein Grenzwertsatz uber die Toeplitzschen Determinanten einer reellen positiven Funktion. Math. Ann. 76, 490–503. Szego¨, G. (1920). Beitrage zur Theorie der Toeplitzchen Formen (Erste Mitteilung). Math. Z. 6, 167–202. Szego¨, G. (1952). On certain Hermitian forms associated with the Fourier series of a positive function. Comm. Se´m. Math. Univ. Lund (Suppl. dedicated to Marcel Riesz), pp. 228–238. Takano, T. (1977a). Structure of myoglobin refined at 2.0 A˚ resolution. I. Crystallographic refinement of metmyoglobin from sperm whale. J. Mol. Biol. 110, 537–568. Takano, T. (1977b). Structure of myoglobin refined at 2.0 A˚ resolution. II. Structure of deoxymyoglobin from sperm whale. J. Mol. Biol. 110, 569–584. Temperton, C. (1983a). Self-sorting mixed-radix fast Fourier transforms. J. Comput. Phys. 52, 1–23. Temperton, C. (1983b). A note on the prime factor FFT algorithm. J. Comput. Phys. 52, 198–204. Temperton, C. (1983c). Fast mixed-radix real Fourier transforms. J. Comput. Phys. 52, 340–350. Temperton, C. (1985). Implementation of a self-sorting in-place prime factor FFT algorithm. J. Comput. Phys. 58, 283–299. Ten Eyck, L. F. (1973). Crystallographic fast Fourier transforms. Acta Cryst. A29, 183–191. Ten Eyck, L. F. (1977). Efficient structure factor calculation for large molecules by fast Fourier transform. Acta Cryst. A33, 486– 492. Ten Eyck, L. F. (1985). Fast Fourier transform calculation of electron density maps. In Diffraction methods for biological macromolecules (Methods in enzymology, Vol. 115), edited by H. Wyckoff, C. H. W. Hirs & S. N. Timasheff, pp. 324–337. New York: Academic Press. Titchmarsh, E. C. (1922). Hankel transforms. Proc. Camb. Philos. Soc. 21, 463–473. Titchmarsh, E. C. (1948). Introduction to the theory of Fourier integrals. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Toeplitz, O. (1907). Zur Theorie der quadratischen Formen von unendlichvielen Variablen. Nachr. der Kgl. Ges. Wiss. Go¨ttingen, Math. Phys. Kl. pp. 489–506. Toeplitz, O. (1910). Zur Transformation der Scharen bilinearer Formen von unendlichvielen Vera¨nderlichen. Nachr. der Kgl. Ges. Wiss. Go¨ttingen, Math. Phys. Kl. pp. 110–115. Toeplitz, O. (1911a). Zur Theorie der quadratischen und bilinearen Formen von unendlichvielen Vera¨nderlichen. I. Teil: Theorie der L-formen. Math. Ann. 70, 351–376. ¨ ber die Fouriersche Entwicklung positiver Toeplitz, O. (1911b). U Funktionen. Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo, 32, 191–192. Tolimieri, R. (1985). The algebra of the finite Fourier transform and coding theory. Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 287, 253–273. Tolimieri, R., An, M. & Lu, C. (1989). Algorithms for discrete Fourier transform and convolution. New York: Springer-Verlag. Tolstov, G. P. (1962). Fourier series. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. Tre`ves, F. (1967). Topological vector spaces, distributions, and kernels. New York and London: Academic Press. Tronrud, D. E., Ten Eyck, L. F. & Matthews, B. W. (1987). An efficient general-purpose least-squares refinement program for macromolecular structures. Acta Cryst. A43, 489–501. Trueblood, K. N. (1956). Symmetry transformations of general anisotropic temperature factors. Acta Cryst. 9, 359–361. Truter, M. R. (1954). Refinement of a non-centrosymmetrical structure: sodium nitrite. Acta Cryst. 7, 73–77.

Uhrich, M. L. (1969). Fast Fourier transforms without sorting. IEEE Trans. AU, 17, 170–172. Van der Pol, B. & Bremmer, H. (1955). Operational calculus, 2nd ed. Cambridge University Press. Vand, V. (1948). Method of steepest descents: improved formula for X-ray analysis. Nature (London), 161, 600–601. Vand, V. (1951). A simplified method of steepest descents. Acta Cryst. 4, 285–286. Vand, V., Eiland, P. F. & Pepinsky, R. (1957). Analytical representation of atomic scattering factors. Acta Cryst. 10, 303– 306. Wang, B. C. (1985). Resolution of phase ambiguity in macromolecular crystallography. In Diffraction methods for biological macromolecules (Methods in enzymology, Vol. 115), edited by H. Wyckoff, C. H. W. Hirs & S. N. Timasheff, pp. 90–112. New York: Academic Press. Warren, B. & Bragg, W. L. (1929). The structure of diopside, CaMg(SiO3)2. Z. Kristallogr. 69, 168–193. Warren, B. E. (1969). X-ray diffraction. Reading: Addison-Wesley. Warren, B. E. & Gingrich, N. S. (1934). Fourier integral analysis of X-ray powder patterns. Phys. Rev. 46, 368–372. Waser, J. (1955a). Symmetry relations between structure factors. Acta Cryst. 8, 595. Waser, J. (1955b). The anisotropic temperature factor in triclinic coordinates. Acta Cryst. 8, 731. Waser, J. & Schomaker, V. (1953). The Fourier inversion of diffraction data. Rev. Mod. Phys. 25, 671–690. Watson, G. L. (1970). Integral quadratic forms. Cambridge University Press. Watson, G. N. (1944). A treatise on the theory of Bessel functions, 2nd ed. Cambridge University Press. Wells, M. (1965). Computational aspects of space-group symmetry. Acta Cryst. 19, 173–179. Weyl, H. (1931). The theory of groups and quantum mechanics. New York: Dutton. [Reprinted by Dover Publications, New York, 1950.] Whittaker, E. J. W. (1948). The evaluation of Fourier transforms by a Fourier synthesis method. Acta Cryst. 1, 165–167. Whittaker, E. T. (1915). On the functions which are represented by the expansions of the interpolation-theory. Proc. R. Soc. (Edinburgh), 35, 181–194. Whittaker, E. T. (1928). Oliver Heaviside. Bull. Calcutta Math. Soc. 20, 199–220. [Reprinted in Moore (1971).] Whittaker, E. T. & Robinson, G. (1944). The calculus of observations. London: Blackie. Whittaker, E. T. & Watson, G. N. (1927). A course of modern analysis, 4th ed. Cambridge University Press. Widom, H. (1960). A theorem on translation kernels in n dimensions. Trans. Am. Math. Soc. 94, 170–180. Widom, H. (1965). Toeplitz matrices. In Studies in real and complex analysis, edited by I. I. Hirschmann Jr, pp. 179–209. MAA studies in mathematics, Vol. 3. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall. Widom, H. (1975). Asymptotic inversion of convolution operators. Publ. Math. IHES, 44, 191–240. Wiener, N. (1933). The Fourier integral and certain of its applications. Cambridge University Press. [Reprinted by Dover Publications, New York, 1959.] Wilkins, S. W., Varghese, J. N. & Lehmann, M. S. (1983). Statistical geometry. I. A self-consistent approach to the crystallographic inversion problem based on information theory. Acta Cryst. A39, 47–60. Winograd, S. (1976). On computing the discrete Fourier transform. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 73, 1005–1006. Winograd, S. (1977). Some bilinear forms whose multiplicative complexity depends on the field of constants. Math. Syst. Theor. 10, 169–180. Winograd, S. (1978). On computing the discrete Fourier transform. Math. Comput. 32, 175–199. Winograd, S. (1980). Arithmetic complexity of computations. CBMSNST Regional Conf. Series Appl. Math, Publ. No. 33. Philadelphia: SIAM Publications.

186

REFERENCES 1.3 (cont.) Wolf, J. A. (1967). Spaces of constant curvature. New York: McGraw-Hill. Wondratschek, H. (1995). Introduction to space-group symmetry. In International tables for crystallography, Vol. A. Space-group symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn, pp. 712–735. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Yosida, K. (1965). Functional analysis. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Zachariasen, W. H. (1945). Theory of X-ray diffraction in crystals. New York: John Wiley. ¨ ber eine Algorithmus zur Bestimmung der Zassenhaus, H. (1948). U Raumgruppen. Commun. Helv. Math. 21, 117–141. Zemanian, A. H. (1965). Distribution theory and transform analysis. New York: McGraw-Hill. Zemanian, A. H. (1968). Generalised integral transformations. New York: Interscience. Zygmund, A. (1959). Trigonometric series, Vols. 1 and 2. Cambridge University Press. Zygmund, A. (1976). Notes on the history of Fourier series. In Studies in harmonic analysis, edited by J. M. Ash, pp. 1–19. MAA studies in mathematics, Vol. 13. The Mathematical Association of America.

1.4 Altermatt, U. D. & Brown, I. D. (1987). A real-space computerbased symmetry algebra. Acta Cryst. A43, 125–130. Authier, A. (1981). The reciprocal lattice. Edited by the IUCr Commission on Crystallographic Teaching. Cardiff: University College Cardiff Press. Bertaut, E. F. (1964). On the symmetry of phases in the reciprocal lattice: a simple method. Acta Cryst. 17, 778–779. Bienenstock, A. & Ewald, P. P. (1962). Symmetry of Fourier space. Acta Cryst. 15, 1253–1261. Bourne, P. E., Berman, H. M., McMahon, B., Watenpaugh, K. D., Westbrook, J. D. & Fitzgerald, P. M. D. (1997). mmCIF: macromolecular crystallographic information file. Methods Enzymol. 277, 571–590. Bragg, L. (1966). The crystalline state. Vol. I. A general survey. London: Bell. Buerger, M. J. (1942). X-ray crystallography. New York: John Wiley. Buerger, M. J. (1949). Crystallographic symmetry in reciprocal space. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 35, 198–201. Buerger, M. J. (1960). Crystal structure analysis. New York: John Wiley. Computers in the New Laboratory – a Nature Survey (1981). Nature (London), 290, 193–200. Dowty, E. (2000). ATOMS: a program for the display of atomic structures. Commercial software available from http://www. shapesoftware.com. Ewald, P. P. (1921). Das ‘reziproke Gitter’ in der Strukturtheorie. Z. Kristallogr. Teil A, 56, 129–156. Grosse-Kunstleve, R. W. (1995). SGINFO: a comprehensive collection of ANSI C routines for the handling of space-group symmetry. Freely available from http://www.kristall.ethz.ch/LFK/ software/sginfo/. Grosse-Kunstleve, R. W. (1999). Algorithms for deriving crystallographic space-group information. Acta Cryst. A55, 383–395. Hall, S. R. (1981a). Space-group notation with an explicit origin. Acta Cryst. A37, 517–525. Hall, S. R. (1981b). Space-group notation with an explicit origin: erratum. Acta Cryst. A37, 921. Hall, S. R. (1997). LoopX: a script used to loop Xtal. Copyright University of Western Australia. Freely available from http:// www.crystal.uwa.edu.au/~syd/symmetry/. Hall, S. R., du Boulay, D. J. & Olthof-Hazekamp, R. (2000). Xtal: a system of crystallographic programs. Copyright University of Western Australia. Freely available from http://xtal.crystal.uwa. edu.au.

Hearn, A. C. (1973). REDUCE 2.0 user’s manual. University of Utah, Salt Lake City, Utah, USA. Hovmo¨ller, S. (1992). CRISP: crystallographic image processing on a personal computer. Ultramicroscopy, 41, 121–135. International Tables for Crystallography (1983). Vol. A. Spacegroup symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn. Dordrecht: Reidel. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) International Tables for Crystallography (1987). Vol. A. Spacegroup symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn, 2nd ed. Dordrecht: Reidel. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) International Tables for Crystallography (1992). Vol. A. Spacegroup symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn, 3rd ed. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. International Tables for Crystallography (1993). Vol. B. Reciprocal space, edited by U. Shmueli, 1st ed. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. International Tables for X-ray Crystallography (1952). Vol. I. Symmetry groups, edited by N. F. M. Henry & K. Lonsdale. Birmingham: Kynoch Press. International Tables for X-ray Crystallography (1965). Vol. I. Symmetry groups, edited by N. F. M. Henry & K. Lonsdale, 2nd ed. Birmingham: Kynoch Press. Internationale Tabellen zur Bestimmung von Kristallstrukturen (1935). 1. Band. Edited by C. Hermann. Berlin: Borntraeger. Koch, E. & Fischer, W. (1983). In International tables for crystallography, Vol. A, ch. 11. Symmetry operations. Dordrecht: Reidel. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) Larine, M., Klimkovich, S., Farrants, G., Hovmo¨ller, S. & Xiaodong, Z. (1995). Space Group Explorer: a computer program for obtaining extensive information about any of the 230 space groups. Freely available from http://www.calidris-em. com/. Lipson, H. & Cochran, W. (1966). The crystalline state. Vol. II. The determination of crystal structures. London: Bell. Lipson, H. & Taylor, C. A. (1958). Fourier transforms and X-ray diffraction. London: Bell. Seitz, F. (1935). A matrix-algebraic development of crystallographic groups. III. Z. Kristallogr. 90, 289–313. Shmueli, U. (1984). Space-group algorithms. I. The space group and its symmetry elements. Acta Cryst. A40, 559–567. Waser, J. (1955). Symmetry relations between structure factors. Acta Cryst. 8, 595. Wells, M. (1965). Computational aspects of space-group symmetry. Acta Cryst. 19, 173–179. Zachariasen, W. H. (1945). Theory of X-ray diffraction in crystals. New York: John Wiley.

1.5 Altmann, S. L. (1977). Induced representations in crystals and molecules. London: Academic Press. Bouckaert, L. P., Smoluchowski, R. & Wigner, E. P. (1936). Theory of Brillouin zones and symmetry properties of wave functions in crystals. Phys. Rev. 50, 58–67. Boyle, L. L. (1986). The classification of space group representations. In Proceedings of the 14th international colloquium on group-theoretical methods in physics, pp. 405–408. Singapore: World Scientific. Boyle, L. L. & Kennedy, J. M. (1988). Raumgruppen Charakterentafeln. Z. Kristallogr. 182, 39–42. Bradley, C. J. & Cracknell, A. P. (1972). The mathematical theory of symmetry in solids: representation theory for point groups and space groups. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Cracknell, A. P., Davies, B. L., Miller, S. C. & Love, W. F. (1979). Kronecker product tables, Vol. 1. General introduction and tables of irreducible representations of space groups. New York: IFI/ Plenum. Davies, B. L. & Cracknell, A. P. (1976). Some comments on and addenda to the tables of irreducible representations of the

187

1. GENERAL RELATIONSHIPS AND TECHNIQUES 1.5 (cont.) classical space groups published by S. C. Miller and W. F. Love. Acta Cryst. A32, 901–903. Davies, B. L. & Dirl, R. (1987). Various classification schemes for irreducible space group representations. In Proceedings of the 15th international colloquium on group-theoretical methods in physics, edited by R. Gilmore, pp. 728–733. Singapore: World Scientific. Delaunay, B. (1933). Neue Darstellung der geometrischen Kristallographie. Z. Kristallogr. 84, 109–149; 85, 332. (In German.) International Tables for Crystallography (1995). Vol. A. Spacegroup symmetry, edited by Th. Hahn, 4th ed. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Jan, J.-P. (1972). Space groups for Fermi surfaces. Can. J. Phys. 50, 925–927. Jansen, L. & Boon, M. (1967). Theory of finite groups. Applications in physics: symmetry groups of quantum mechanical systems. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Janssen, T. (2001). International tables for crystallography, Vol. D. Physical properties of crystals, edited by A. Authier, ch. 1.2, Representations of crystallographic groups. In the press.

Kovalev, O. V. (1986). Irreducible and induced representations and co-representations of Fedorov groups. Moscow: Nauka. (In Russian.) Lomont, J. S. (1959). Applications of finite groups. New York: Academic Press. Miller, S. C. & Love, W. F. (1967). Tables of irreducible representations of space groups and co-representations of magnetic space groups. Boulder: Pruett Press. Raghavacharyulu, I. V. V. (1961). Representations of space groups. Can. J. Phys. 39, 830–840. Rosen, J. (1981). Resource letter SP-2: Symmetry and group theory in physics. Am. J. Phys. 49, 304–319. Slater, L. S. (1962). Quantum theory of molecules and solids, Vol. 2. Amsterdam: McGraw-Hill. Stokes, H. T. & Hatch, D. M. (1988). Isotropy subgroups of the 230 crystallographic space groups. Singapore: World Scientific. Stokes, H. T., Hatch, D. M. & Nelson, H. M. (1993). Landau, Lifshitz, and weak Lifshitz conditions in the Landau theory of phase transitions in solids. Phys. Rev. B, 47, 9080–9083. Wintgen, G. (1941). Zur Darstellungstheorie der Raumgruppen. Math. Ann. 118, 195–215. (In German.) Zak, J., Casher, A., Glu¨ck, M. & Gur, Y. (1969). The irreducible representations of space groups. New York: Benjamin.

188

references


2.1. Statistical properties of the weighted reciprocal lattice BY U. SHMUELI

AND

2.1.1. Introduction

The intensity of reflection is given by multiplying equation (2.1.1.1) by its complex conjugate:

The structure factor of the hkl reflection is given by Fhkl

N P

fj exp2ihxj kyj lzj ,

A. J. C. WILSON

I FF P fj fk expf2ihxj

2:1:1:1

j1

j; k

where fj is the atomic scattering factor [complex if there is appreciable dispersion; see Chapter 1.2 and IT C (1999, Section 4.2.6 )], xj yj zj are the fractional coordinates of the jth atom and N is the number of atoms in the unit cell. The present chapter is concerned with the statistical properties of the structure factor F and the intensity I FF , such as their average values, variances, higher moments and their probability density distributions. Equation (2.1.1.1) expresses F as a function of two conceptually different sets of variables: hkl taking on integral values in reciprocal space and xyz in general having non-integral values in direct space, although the special positions tabulated for each space group in IT A (1983) may include the integers 0 and 1. In special positions, the non-integers often include rational fractions, but in general positions they are in principle irrational. Although hkl and xyz appear to be symmetrical variables in (2.1.1.1), these limitations on their values mean that one can consider two different sets of statistical properties. In the first we seek, for example, the average intensity of the hkl reflection (indices fixed) as the positional parameters of the N atoms are distributed with equal probability over the continuous range 0–1. In the second, we seek, for example, the average intensity of the observable reflections (or of a subgroup of them having about the same value of sin ) with the values of xyz held constant at the values they have, or are postulated to have, in a crystal structure. Other examples are obtained by substituting the words ‘probability density’ for ‘average intensity’. For brevity, we may call the statistics resulting from the first process fixed-index (continuously variable parameters being understood), and those resulting from the second process fixed-parameter (integral indices being understood). Theory based on the first process is (comparatively) easy; theory based on the second hardly exists, although there is a good deal of theory concerning the conditions under which the two processes will lead to the same result (Hauptman & Karle, 1953; Giacovazzo, 1977, 1980). Mathematically, of course, the condition is that the phase angle # 2hx ky lz

2:1:1:2

should be distributed with uniform probability over the range 0–2, whichever set of variables is regarded as fixed, but it is not clear when this distribution can be expected in practice for fixedparameter averaging. The usual conclusion is that the uniform distribution will be realized if there are enough atoms, if the atomic coordinates do not approximate to rational fractions, if there are enough reflections and if stereochemical effects are negligible (Shmueli et al., 1984). Obviously, the second process (fixed parameters, varying integral indices) corresponds to the observable reality, and various approximations to it have been attempted, in preference to assuming its equivalence with the first. For example, a third (approximate) method of averaging has been used (Wilson, 1949, 1981): xyz are held fixed and hkl are treated as continuous variables. 2.1.2. The average intensity of general reflections 2.1.2.1. Mathematical background The process may be illustrated by evaluating, or attempting to evaluate, the average intensity of reflection by the three processes.

j6k

xk . . .g

fj fk expf2ihxj

where

P j

xk . . .g,

fj fj

2:1:2:3

2:1:2:4

is the sum of the squares of the moduli of the atomic scattering factors. Wilson (1942) argued, without detailed calculation, that the average value of the exponential term would be zero and hence that hIi :

2:1:2:5

Averaging equation (2.1.2.3) for hkl fixed, xyz ranging uniformly over the unit cell – the first process described above – gives this result identically, without complication or approximation. Ordinarily the second process cannot be carried out. We can, however, postulate a special case in which it is possible. We take a homoatomic structure and before averaging we correct the f ’s for temperature effects and the fall-off with sin , so that ff is the same for all the atoms and is independent of hkl. If the range of hkl over which the expression for I has to be averaged is taken as a parallelepiped in reciprocal space with h ranging from H to H, k from K to K, l from L to L, equation (2.1.2.2) can be factorized into the product of the sums of three geometrical progressions. Algebraic manipulation then easily leads to X X sin NH xj xk hIi ff NH sin xj xk j k

sin NK yj NK sin yj

yk sin NL zj yk NL sin zj

zk , zk 2:1:2:6

where NH 2H 1, NK 2K 1 and NL 2L 1. The terms with j k give , but the remaining terms are not zero. Because of the periodic nature of the trigonometric terms, the effective coordinate differences are never greater than 0.5 and in a structure of any complexity there will be many much less than 0.5. For HKL 000, in fact, hIi becomes the square of the modulus of the sum of the atomic scattering factors, hIi ,

2:1:2:7

where

N P

fj ,

2:1:2:8

j1

and not the sum of the squares of their moduli; for larger HKL, hIi rapidly decreases to and then oscillates about that value. Wilson (1949, especially Section 2.1.1) suggested that the regions of averaging should be chosen so that at least one index of every reflection is 2 if hIi is to be identified with , and this has proven to be a useful rule-of-thumb. The third process of averaging replaces the sum over integral values of the indices by an integration over continuous values, the appropriate values of the limits in this example being H 1=2 to H 1=2. The effect is to replace the sines in the


P

2:1:2:1 2:1:2:2

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE denominators, but not in the numerators, of equation (2.1.2.6) by their arguments, and this is equivalent to the approximation sin x ' x in the denominators only. This is a good approximation for atoms close together in the structure and thus giving the largest terms in the sums in equation (2.1.2.6), and gives the correct sign and order of magnitude even for x having its maximum value of =2.

Table 2.1.3.1. Intensity-distribution effects of symmetry elements causing systematic absences Abbreviations and orientation of axes: A = acentric distribution, C = centric distribution, Z = systematically zero, S = distribution parameter, hIi = average intensity. Axes are parallel to c, planes are perpendicular to c. Element

Reflections

Distribution

S=

hIi=

21

hkl hk0 00l

A C Z A=2

1 1 1

1 1 2

31 , 32

hkl hk0 00l

A A 2Z A=3

1 1 1

1 1 3

4 1 , 43

hkl hk0 00l

A C 3Z A=4

1 1 1

1 1 4

42

hkl hk0 00l

A C Z A=2

1 1 2

1 1 4

61 , 65

hkl hk0 00l

A C 5Z A=6

1 1 1

1 1 6

6 2 , 64

hkl hk0 00l

A C 2Z A=3

1 1 2

1 1 6

63

hkl hk0 00l

A C Z A=2

1 1 3

1 1 6

a

hkl hk0 00l 0k0

A Z A=2 C A

1 1 1 2

1 2 1 2

C, I

All

Z A=2

1

2

F

All

3Z A=2

1

4

2.1.2.2. Physical background The preceding section has used mathematical arguments. From a physical point of view, the radiation diffracted by atoms that are resolved will interfere destructively, so that the resulting intensity will be the sum of the intensities diffracted by individual atoms, whereas that from completely unresolved atoms will interfere constructively, so that amplitudes rather than intensities add. In intermediate cases there will be partial constructive interference. Resolution in accordance with the Rayleigh (1879) criterion requires that s 2 sin = should be greater than half the reciprocal of the minimum interatomic distance in the crystal (Wilson, 1979); full resolution requires a substantial multiple of this. This criterion is essentially equivalent to that proposed from the study of a special case of the second process in the preceding section. 2.1.2.3. An approximation for organic compounds In organic compounds there are very many interatomic distances of about 1.5 or 1.4 A˚. Adoption of the preceding criterion would mean that the inner portion of the region of reciprocal space accessible by the use of copper K radiation is not within the sphere of intensity statistics based on fixed-index (first process) averaging. No substantial results are available for fixed-parameter (second process) averaging, and very few from the approximation to it (third process). To the extent to which the third process is acceptable, an approximation to the variation of hIi with sin is obtainable. The exponent in equation (2.1.2.2) can be written as 2isrjk cos ,

2:1:2:9

where s is the radial distance in reciprocal space, rjk is the distance from the jth to the kth atom and is the angle between the vectors s and r. Averaging over a sphere of radius s, with treated as the colatitude, gives XX sin 2srjk hIi fj f k : 2:1:2:10 2srjk j k This is the familiar Debye expression. It has the correct limits for s zero and s large, and is in accord with the argument from resolution. 2.1.2.4. Effect of centring In the preceding discussion there has been a tacit assumption that the lattice is primitive. A centred crystal can always be referred to a primitive lattice and if this is done no change is required. If the centred lattice is retained, many reflections are identically zero and the intensity of the non-zero reflections is enhanced by a factor of two (I and C lattices) or four (F lattice), so that the average intensity of all the reflections, zero and non-zero taken together, is unchanged. Other symmetry elements affect only zones and rows of reflections, and so do not affect the general average when the total number of reflections is large. Their effect on zones and rows is discussed in Section 2.1.3.

2.1.3. The average intensity of zones and rows 2.1.3.1. Symmetry elements producing systematic absences Symmetry elements can be divided into two types: those that cause systematic absences and those that do not. Those producing systematic absences (glide planes and screw axes) produce at the same time groups of reflections (confined to zones and rows in reciprocal space, respectively) with an average intensity an integral* multiple of the general average. The effects for single symmetry elements of this type are given in Table 2.1.3.1 for the general reflections hkl and separately for any zones and rows that are affected. The ‘average multipliers’ are given in the column headed hIi=; ‘distribution’ and ‘distribution parameters’ are treated in Section 2.1.5. As for the centring, the fraction of reflections missing and the integer multiplying the average are related in such a way that the overall intensity is unchanged. The

* The multiple is given as an exact integer for fixed-index averaging, an approximate integer for fixed-parameter averaging. Statements should be understood to refer to fixed-index averaging unless the contrary is explicitly stated.

191

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.1.3.2. Intensity-distribution effects of symmetry elements not causing systematic absences Abbreviations and orientation of axes: A = acentric distribution, C = centric distribution, S = distribution parameter, hIi = average intensity. Axes are parallel to c, planes are perpendicular to c.

matter is discussed in more detail by Wilson (1987a). It should be noted, however, that organic structures containing molecules related by rotation axes are rare, and such structures related by mirror planes are even rarer (Wilson, 1993). 2.1.3.3. More than one symmetry element

Element

Reflections

Distribution

S= hIi=

1

All

A

1

1

All

C

1

2

hkl hk0 00l

A C A

1 1 2

2m

hkl hk0 00l

A A C

1 2 1

3

hkl hk0 00l

A A A

1 1 3

3

hkl hk0 00l

C C C

1 1 3

4

hkl hk0 00l

A C A

1 1 4

4

hkl hk0 00l

A C C

1 1 2

6

hkl hk0 00l

A C A

1 1 6

6 3=m

hkl hk0 00l

A A C

1 2 3

Further alterations of the intensities occur if two or more such symmetry elements are present in the space group. The effects were treated in detail by Rogers (1950), who used them to construct a table for the determination of space groups by supplementing the usual knowledge of Laue group with statistical information. Only two pairs of space groups, the orthorhombic I222 and I21 21 21 , and their cubic supergroups I23 and I21 31 , remained unresolved. Examination of this table shows that what statistical information does is to resolve the Laue group into point groups; the further resolution into space groups is equivalent to the use of Table 3.2 in IT A (1983). The statistical consequences of each point group, as given by Rogers, are reproduced in Table 2.1.3.3.

2.1.4. Probability density distributions – mathematical preliminaries For the purpose of this chapter, ‘ideal’ probability distributions or probability density functions are the asymptotic forms obtained by the use of the central-limit theorem when the number of atoms in the unit cell, N, is sufficiently large. In order to derive them it is necessary to outline the properties of characteristic functions and to state alternative conditions for the validity of the central-limit theorem; the distributions themselves are derived in Section 2.1.5. 2.1.4.1. Characteristic functions The average value of expitx is very important in probability theory; it is called the characteristic function of the distribution f x and is denoted by Cx t or, when no confusion can arise, by Ct. It exists for all legitimate distributions, whether discrete or continuous. In the continuous case it is given by R1 Ct expitxf x dx, 2:1:4:1 1

mechanism for compensation for the reflections with enhanced intensity is obvious. 2.1.3.2. Symmetry elements not producing systematic absences Certain symmetry elements not producing absences (mirror planes and rotation axes) cause equivalent atoms to coincide in a plane or a line projection and hence produce a zone or row in reciprocal space for which the average intensity is an integral multiple of the general average (Wilson, 1950); the effects of single such symmetry elements are given in Table 2.1.3.2. There is, however, no obvious mechanism for compensation for this enhancement. When reflections are few this may be an important matter in assigning an approximate absolute scale by comparing observed and calculated intensities. Wilson (1964), Nigam (1972) and Nigam & Wilson (1980), noting that in such cases the finite size of atoms results in forbidden ranges of positional parameters, have shown that there is a diminution of the intensity of layers (rows) in the immediate neighbourhood of the enhanced zones (rows), just sufficient to compensate for the enhancement. In forming general averages, therefore, reflections from enhanced zones or rows should be included at their full intensity, not divided by the multiplier; the

and is thus the Fourier transform of f x. In many cases it can be obtained from known integrals. For example, for the Cauchy distribution, Z a 1 expitx dx 2:1:4:2 Ct 1 a2 x 2 exp ajtj, 2:1:4:3 and for the normal distribution, ! Z 1 x m2 2 1=2 Ct 2 exp expitx dx 22 1 exp imt

2:1:4:4

t : 2 2 2

2:1:4:5

Since the characteristic function is the Fourier transform of the distribution function, the converse is true, and if the characteristic function is known the probability distribution function can be obtained by the use of Fourier inversion theorem, R1 f x 1=2 exp itxCt dt: 2:1:4:6

192

1

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE Table 2.1.3.3. Average multiples for the 32 point groups (modified from Rogers, 1950). The multiple gives S= for the row and zone corresponding to the principal axis of the point-group symbol; those for the secondary and tertiary axes are given when the symbol contains such axes. Principal Point group

Row

Zone

1 1

1 1

1 1

2 m 2=m

2 1 2

1 2 2

222 mm2 mmm

2 2 4

1 2 2

4 4 4=m

4 2 4

1 1 2

422 4mm 42m 4=mmm

4 8 4 8

1* 1 1 2

3 3

3 3

1 1

321 3m1 31m

3 6 6

1 1 1

6 6 6=m

6 3 6

1 2 2

622 6mm 6m2 6=mmm

6 12 6 12

231 m 31 432 43m m3m

Secondary

Tertiary

Row

Row

Zone

Zone

is the product Cz t Cx tCy t:

2:1:4:8

Obviously this can be extended to any number of independent random variables. When the moments exist, the characteristic function can be expanded in a power series in which the kth term is mk itk =k!. If the power series it2 x2 it3 x3 ... 2! 3! is substituted in equation (2.1.4.1), one obtains expitx 1 itx

2:1:4:9

it2 m02 it3 m03 ...: 2:1:4:10 2! 3! The moments are written with primes in order to indicate that equation (2.1.4.10) is valid for moments about an arbitrary origin as well as for moments about the mean. If the random variable is transformed by a change of origin and scale, say x a y , 2:1:4:11 b the characteristic function for y becomes Ct 1 itm01

2 2 4

1 2 2

2 4 4

1 1 2

2 2 2 4

1 2 1 2

2 2 2 4

1 2 2 2

Cy t b exp iat=bCx t:

2:1:4:12

2.1.4.2. The cumulant-generating function A function that is often more useful than the characteristic function is its logarithm, the cumulant-generating function:

2 1 2

1 2 2

1 2 2

1

1 1 2 2

2 2 2 4

1 2 2 2

2 2 4 4

1 2 1 2

2 4

1 2

3 3

1 1

1 1

1 1

4 4 8

1 1 2

3 6 6

1 1 2

2 2 4

1 2 2

k2 it2 k3 it3 ..., 2:1:4:13 2! 3! where the k’s are called the cumulants and may be regarded as being defined by the equation. They can be evaluated in terms of the moments by combining the series (2.1.4.10) for Ct with the ordinary series for the logarithm and equating the coefficients of tr . In most cases the process as described is tedious, but it can be shortened by use of a general method [Stuart & Ord (1994), Section 3.14, pp. 87–88; Exercise 3.19, p. 119]. Obviously, the cumulants exist only if the moments exist. The first few relations are

1

Kt log Ct k1

k0 0 k1 m01 k2 m2 m02

not distinguished by Note. The pairs of point groups, 1 and 1 and 3 and 3, average multiples, may be distinguished by their centric and acentric probability density functions. * The entry for the principal zone for the point group 422 was given incorrectly as 2 in the first edition of this volume.

An alternative approach to the derivation of the distribution from a known characteristic function will be discussed below. The most important property of characteristic functions in crystallography is the following: if x and y are independent random variables with characteristic functions Cx t and Cy t, the characteristic function of their sum zxy

2:1:4:7

m01 2

k3 m3

m03

k4 m4

3m2

m04

m03 m01

3m02 m01 2

2:1:4:14 2m01 2

3m02 2 12m02 m1 2

6m01 4 :

Such expressions and their converses up to k10 are given by Stuart & Ord (1994, pp. 88–91). Since all the cumulants except k1 can be expressed in terms of the central moments only (i.e., those unprimed), only k1 is changed by a change of the origin. Because of this property, they are sometimes called the semi-invariants (or seminvariants) of the distribution. Since addition of random variables is equivalent to the multiplication of their characteristic functions [equation (2.1.4.8)] and multiplication of functions is equivalent to the addition of their logarithms, each cumulant of the distribution of the sum of a number of random variables is equal to the sum of the cumulants of the distribution functions of the individual variables – hence the name cumulants. Although the cumulants (except k1 ) are independent of a change of origin, they are not independent of a change of scale. As for the moments, a

193

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION + *X 1 change of scale simply multiplies them by a power of the scale W1 itr W1r exp it p factor; if y x=b r! nr=2 n r0 ky r kx r =br :

2:1:4:15

2 t2 =2

k2 2 ,

2:1:4:16 2:1:4:17 2:1:4:18

2.1.4.3. The central-limit theorem A simple form of this important theorem can be stated as follows: If x1 , x2 , . . . , xn are independent and identically distributed random variables, each of them having the same mean m and variance 2 , then the sum n P

xj

2:1:4:19

j1

tends to be normally distributed – independently of the distribution(s) of the individual random variables – with mean nm and variance n2 , provided n is sufficiently large.

In order to prove this theorem, let us define a standardized random variable corresponding to the sum Sn , i.e., such that its mean is zero and its variance is unity: Pn n m X Wj S nm j1 xj n p , p 2:1:4:20 S^n p n n n j1 where Wj xj m= is a standardized single random variable. The characteristic function of S^n is therefore given by Cn S^n , t hexpitS^n i * " #+ n X Wj p exp it n j1 n Y Wj exp it p n j1 n W exp it p1 , n

1

r! nr=2 t2 t, n , 2n n

2:1:4:21

2:1:4:24

since hW1 i 0, hW12 i 1, and the quantity denoted by t, n in (2.1.4.24) is given by 1 X itr hW1r i t, n : 2:1:4:25 r! nr=2 1 r3 The characteristic function of S^n is therefore n t2 t, n ^ : hexpitSn i 1 2n n

all cumulants with r > 2 are identically zero.

Sn

1

r0

The cumulants of the normal distribution are particularly simple. From equation (2.1.4.5), the cumulant-generating function of a normal distribution is Kt imt k1 m

1 X itr hW r i

2:1:4:26

Now, as is seen from (2.1.4.25), for every fixed t the quantity t, n tends to zero as n tends to infinity. The cumulant-generating function of the standardized sum then becomes 1 t2 ^ log Cn Sn , t n log 1 t, n 2:1:4:27 n 2 and the logarithm on the right-hand side of equation (2.1.4.27) has the form log1 z with jzj ! 0 as n ! 1. We may therefore use the expansion z2 z3 log1 z z ... , 2 3 which is valid for jzj < 1. We then obtain " 2 1 t2 1 t2 ^ t, n 2 t, n log Cn Sn , t n n 2 2n 2 # 3 1 t2 t, n 3 3n 2 2 t2 1 t2 t, n t, n 2 2n 2 3 1 t2 t, n 3n2 2 and finally, for every fixed t, lim log Cn S^n , t

2:1:4:22 2:1:4:23

where the brackets h i denote the operation of averaging with respect to the appropriate probability density function (p.d.f.) [cf. equation (2.1.4.1)]. Equation (2.1.4.22) follows from equation (2.1.4.21) by the assumption of independence, while the assumption of identically distributed variables leads to the identity of the characteristic functions of the individual variables – as seen in equation (2.1.4.23). On the assumption that moments of all the orders exist – a most plausible assumption in situations usually encountered in structurefactor statistics – we can now expand the characteristic function of a single variable in a power series [cf. equation (2.1.4.10)]:

n!1

t2 : 2

2:1:4:28

Since the logarithm is a continuous function of t, it follows directly that 2 t ^ : 2:1:4:29 lim Cn Sn , t exp n!1 2 The right-hand side of (2.1.4.29) is just the characteristic function of a standardized normal p.d.f., i.e., a normal p.d.f. with zero mean and unit variance [cf. equation (2.1.4.5)]. The asymptotic expression for the p.d.f. of the standardized sum is therefore obtained as ! ^2 1 S ^ p exp pS , 2 2 which proves the above version of the central-limit theorem.

194

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE Surprisingly, this theorem has a very wide applicability and values of n as low as 30 are often large enough for the theorem to be useful. Situations in which the normal p.d.f. must be modified or replaced by an altogether different one are dealt with in Sections 2.1.7 and 2.1.8 of this chapter. 2.1.4.4. Conditions of validity The above outline of a proof of the central-limit theorem depended on the existence of moments of all orders. The components of structure factors always possess finite moments of all orders, but the existence of moments beyond the second is not necessary for the validity of the theorem and it can be proved under much less stringent conditions. In fact, if all the random variables in equation (2.1.4.19) have the same distribution – as in a homoatomic structure – the only requirement is that the second moments of the distributions should exist [the Lindeberg–Le´vy theorem (e.g. Crame´r, 1951)]. If the distributions are not the same – as in a heteroatomic structure – some further condition is necessary to ensure that no individual random variable dominates the sum. The Liapounoff proof requires the existence of third absolute moments, but this is regarded as aesthetically displeasing; a theorem that ultimately involves only means and variances should require only means and variances in the proof. The Lindeberg–Crame´r conditions meet this aesthetic criterion. Roughly, the conditions are that S 2 , the variance of the sum, should tend to infinity and 2j =S 2 , where 2j is the variance of the jth random variable, should tend to zero for all j as n tends to infinity. The precise formulation is quoted by Kendall & Stuart (1977, p. 207). 2.1.4.5. Non-independent variables The central-limit theorem, under certain conditions, remains valid even when the variables summed in equation (2.1.4.19) are not independent. The conditions have been investigated by Bernstein (1922, 1927); roughly they amount to requiring that the variables should not be too closely correlated. The theorem applies, in particular, when each xr is related to a finite number, f n, of its neighbours, when the x’s are said to be f n dependent. The f n dependence seems plausible for crystallographic applications, since the positions of atoms close together in a structure are closely correlated by interatomic forces, whereas those far apart will show little correlation if there is any flexibility in the asymmetric unit when unconstrained. Harker’s (1953) idea of ‘globs’ seems equivalent to f n dependence. Long-range stereochemical effects, as in pseudo-graphitic aromatic hydrocarbons, would presumably produce long-range correlations and make f n dependence less plausible. If Bernstein’s conditions are satisfied, the central-limit theorem would apply, but the actual value of hx2 i hxi2 would have to be used for the variance, instead of the sum of the variances of the random variables in (2.1.4.19). Because of the correlations the two values are no longer equal. French & Wilson (1978) seem to have been the first to appeal explicitly to the central-limit theorem extended to non-independent variables, but many previous workers [for typical references, see Wilson (1981)] tacitly made the replacement – in the X-ray case substituting the local mean intensity for the sum of the squares of the atomic scattering factors. 2.1.5. Ideal probability density distributions In applications of the central-limit theorem, and its extensions, to intensity statistics the xj ’s of equation (2.1.4.19) have the form (atomic scattering factor of the jth atom) times (a trigonometric expression characteristic of the space group and Wyckoff position; also known as the trigonometric structure factor). These trigono-

metric expressions for all the space groups, and general Wyckoff positions, are given in Tables A1.4.3.1 through A1.4.3.7, and their first few even moments (fixed-index averaging) are given in Table 2.1.7.1. One cannot, of course, conclude that the magnitudes of the structure factor always have a normal distribution – even if the structure is homoatomic; one must look at each problem and see what components of the structure factor can be put in the form (2.1.4.19), deduce the m and 2 to be used for each, and combine the components to obtain the asymptotic (large N, not large x) expression for the problem in question. Ordinarily the components are the real and the imaginary parts of the structure factor; the structure factor is purely real only if the structure is centrosymmetric, the space-group origin is chosen at a crystallographic centre and the atoms are non-dispersive. 2.1.5.1. Ideal acentric distributions The ideal acentric distributions are obtained by applying the central-limit theorem to the real and the imaginary parts of the structure factor, as given by equation (2.1.1.1). Consider first a crystal with no rotational symmetry (space group P1). The real part, A, of the structure factor is then given by A

N P

fj cos #j ,

2:1:5:1

j1

where N is the number of atoms in the unit cell and #j is the phase angle of the jth atom. The central-limit theorem then states that A tends to be normally distributed about its mean value with variance equal to its mean-square deviation from its mean. Under the assumption that the phase angles #j are uniformly distributed on the 0–2 range, the mean value of each cosine is zero, so that its variance is 2

N P j1

fj2 hcos2 #j i:

2:1:5:2

Under the same assumption, the mean value of each cos2 # is onehalf, so that the variance becomes 2 1=2

N P j1

fj2 1=2,

2:1:5:3

where is the sum of the squares of the atomic scattering factors [cf. equation (2.1.2.4)]. The asymptotic form of the distribution of A is therefore given by 1=2

pA dA

exp A2 = dA:

2:1:5:4

A similar calculation, with sines instead of cosines, gives an analogous distribution for the imaginary part B, so that the joint probability of the real and imaginary parts of F is pA, B dA dB

1

exp A2 B2 = dA dB:

2:1:5:5

Ordinarily, however, we are more interested in the distribution of the magnitude, jFj, of the structure factor than in the distribution of A and B. Using polar coordinates in equation (2.1.5.5) [A jFj cos , B jFj sin ] and integrating over the angle gives pjFj djFj 2jFj= exp jFj2 = djFj:

2:1:5:6

It is usually convenient, in structure-factor and intensity statistics, to express the results in terms of the normalized structure factor E and its magnitude jEj. If jFj has been put on an absolute scale (see Section 2.2.4.3), we have

195

F E p

jFj and jEj p ,

2:1:5:7

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION so that pjEj djEj 2jEj exp jEj2 djEj

2:1:5:8

is the normalized-structure-factor version of (2.1.5.6). Distributions resulting from noncentrosymmetric crystals are known as acentric distributions; those arising from centrosymmetric crystals are known as centric. These adjectives are used to describe distributions, not crystal symmetry. 2.1.5.2. Ideal centric distributions When a non-dispersive crystal is centrosymmetric, and the spacegroup origin is chosen at a crystallographic centre of symmetry, the imaginary part B of its structure amplitude is zero. In the simplest case, space group P1, the contribution of the jth atom plus its centrosymmetric counterpart is 2fj cos #j . The calculation of pA goes through as before, with allowance for the fact that there are N=2 pairs instead of N independent atoms, giving pA dA 2

1=2

exp A2 =2 dA

2:1:5:9

or equivalently pjFj djFj 2=1=2 exp jFj2 =2 djFj

2:1:5:10

pjEj djEj 2=1=2 exp jEj2 =2 djEj:

2:1:5:11

or

noncentrosymmetry into the scattering from a centrosymmetric crystal (Srinivasan & Parthasarathy, 1976, ch. III; Wilson, 1980a,b; Shmueli & Wilson, 1983). The bicentric distribution pjEj djEj

3=2

exp jEj2 =8K0 jEj2 =8 djEj

2:1:5:13

arises, for example, when the ‘asymmetric unit in a centrosymmetric crystal is a centrosymmetric molecule’ (Lipson & Woolfson, 1952); K0 x is a modified Bessel function of the second kind. There are higher hypercentric, hyperparallel and sesquicentric analogues (Wilson, 1952; Rogers & Wilson, 1953; Wilson, 1956). The ideal subcentric and bicentric distributions are expressed in terms of known functions, but the higher hypercentric and the sesquicentric distributions have so far been studied only through their moments and integral representations. Certain hypersymmetric distributions can be expressed in terms of Meijer’s G functions (Wilson, 1987b). 2.1.5.5. Relation to distributions of I When only the intrinsic probability distributions are being considered, it does not greatly matter whether the variable chosen is the intensity of reflection (I), or its positive square root, the modulus of the structure factor (jFj), since both are necessarily real and non-negative. In an obvious notation, the relation between the intensity distribution and the structure-factor distribution is pI I 1=2I

1=2

pjFj I 1=2

2:1:5:14

or pjFj jFj 2jFjpI jFj2 :

2.1.5.3. Effect of other symmetry elements on the ideal acentric and centric distributions Additional crystallographic symmetry elements do not produce any essential alterations in the ideal centric or acentric distribution; their main effect is to replace the parameter by a ‘distribution parameter’, called S by Wilson (1950) and Rogers (1950), in certain groups of reflections. In addition, in noncentrosymmetric space groups, the distribution of certain groups of reflections becomes centric, though the general reflections remain acentric. The changes are summarized in Tables 2.1.3.1 and 2.1.3.2. The values of S are integers for lattice centring, glide planes and those screw axes that produce absences, and approximate integers for rotation axes and mirror planes; the modulations of the average intensity in reciprocal space outlined in Section 2.1.3.2 apply. It should be noted that if intensities are normalized to the average of the group to which they belong, rather than to the general average, the distributions given in equations (2.1.5.8) and (2.1.5.11) are not affected.

Statistical fluctuations in counting rates, however, introduce a small but finite probability of negative observed intensities (Wilson, 1978a, 1980a) and thus of imaginary structure factors. This practical complication is treated in IT C (1999, Parts 7 and 8). Both the ideal centric and acentric distributions are simple members of the family of gamma distributions, defined by

n x dx n 1 xn

pjEj djEj

2jEj

exp jEj2 =1

1

k 2 1=2

I0

kjEj2 1 k2

exp x dx,

pI dI exp I= dI= 1 I= dI=

k 2 2:1:5:12

where I0 x is a modified Bessel function of the first kind and k is the ratio of the scattering from the centrosymmetric part to the total scattering, arises when a noncentrosymmetric crystal contains centrosymmetric parts or when dispersion introduces effective

2:1:5:16

2:1:5:17 2:1:5:18

and the ideal centric intensity distribution is pI dI 2=1=2 exp I=2 dI=2 1=2 I=2 dI=2:

! djEj,

1

where n is a parameter, not necessarily integral, and n is the gamma function. Thus the ideal acentric intensity distribution is

2.1.5.4. Other ideal distributions The distributions just derived are asymptotic, as they are limiting values for large N. They are the only ideal distributions, in this sense, when there is only strict crystallographic symmetry and no dispersion. However, other ideal (asymptotic) distributions arise when there is noncrystallographic symmetry, or if there is dispersion. The subcentric distribution,

2:1:5:15

2:1:5:19 2:1:5:20

The properties of gamma distributions and of the related beta distributions, summarized in Table 2.1.5.1, are used in Section 2.1.6 to derive the probability density functions of sums and of ratios of intensities drawn from one of the ideal distributions. 2.1.5.6. Cumulative distribution functions The integral of the probability density function f x from the lower end of its range up to an arbitrary value x is called the cumulative probability distribution, or simply the distribution function, Fx, of x. It can always be written Rx Fx f u du; 2:1:5:21 1

if the lower end of its range is not actually 1 one takes f x as identically zero between 1 and the lower end of its range. For the distribution of A [equation (2.1.5.4) or (2.1.5.9)] the lower limit is in

196

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE Table 2.1.5.1. Some properties of gamma and beta distributions

NjEj 2=1=2

If x1 , x2 , . . . , xn are independent gamma-distributed variables with parameters p1 , p2 , . . . , pn , their sum is a gamma-distributed variable with p p1 p2 . . . pn . If x and y are independent gamma-distributed variables with parameters p and q, then the ratio u x=y has the distribution 2 u; p, q. With the same notation, the ratio v x=x y has the distribution 1 v; p, q. Differences and products of gamma-distributed variables do not lead to simple results. For proofs, details and references see Kendall & Stuart (1977).

mean: hxi p;

exp x;

p x 1,

p>0

hxi2 i p:

variance: hx

Beta distribution of first kind with parameters p and q: p q p 1 x 1 p q

1 x; p, q

xq 1 ;

0 x 1,

erf jEj=2

:

2:1:5:25 2:1:5:26

The error function is extensively tabulated [see e.g. Abramowitz & Stegun (1972), pp. 310–311, and a closely related function on pp. 966–973].

2.1.6. Distributions of sums, averages and ratios In Section 2.1.2.1, it was shown that the average intensity of a sufficient number of reflections is [equation (2.1.2.4)]. When the number of reflections is not ‘sufficient’, their mean value will show statistical fluctuations about ; such statistical fluctuations are in addition to any systematic variation resulting from non-independence of atomic positions, as discussed in Sections 2.1.2.1–2.1.2.3. We thus need to consider the probability density functions of sums like n P Jn Gi , 2:1:6:1

Gamma distribution with parameter p: 1

y exp y2 =2 dy

0 1=2

2.1.6.1. Distributions of sums and averages

Name of the distribution, its functional form, mean and variance

p x x 1 xp

jEj R

p, q > 0

i1

mean: hxi p=p q; variance: hx

and averages like Y Jn =n,

hxi2 i pq=p q2 p q 1:

where Gi is the intensity of the ith reflection. The probability density distributions are easily obtained from a property of gamma distributions: If x1 , x2 , . . . , xn are independent gamma-distributed variables with parameters p1 , p2 , . . . , pn , their sum is a gammadistributed variable with parameter p equal to the sum of the parameters. The sum of n intensities drawn from an acentric distribution thus has the distribution

Beta distribution of second kind with parameters p and q: p q p 1 x 1 x p q

2 x; p, q

variance: hx

p q

;

0 x 1,

mean: hxi p=q

1;

hxi2 i pp q

1=q

1q

p, q > 0

pJn dJn n Jn = dJn =;

2:

fact 1; for the distribution of jFj, jEj, I and I= the lower end of the range is zero. In such cases, equation (2.1.5.21) becomes Rx

Fx f x dx:

2:1:5:22

0

In crystallographic applications the cumulative distribution is usually denoted by N x, rather than by the capital letter corresponding to the probability density function designation. The cumulative forms of the ideal acentric and centric distributions (Howells et al., 1950) have found many applications. For the acentric distribution of jEj [equation (2.1.5.8)] the integration is readily carried out: NjEj 2

jEj R

y exp y2 dy 1

exp jEj2 :

2:1:5:23

0

The integral for the centric distribution of jEj [equation (2.1.5.11)] cannot be expressed in terms of elementary functions, but the integral required has so many important applications in statistics that it has been given a special name and symbol, the error function erf(x), defined by Rx

erf x 2=1=2 exp t2 dt: 0

For the centric distribution, then

2:1:6:2

2:1:5:24

2:1:6:3

the parameters of the variables added are all equal to unity, so that their sum is p. Similarly, the sum of n intensities drawn from a centric distribution has the distribution pJn dJn n=2 Jn =2 dJn =2;

2:1:6:4

each parameter has the value of one-half. The corresponding distributions of the averages of n intensities are then pY dY n nY = dnY =

2:1:6:5

for the acentric case, and pY dY n=2 nY =2 dnY =2

2:1:6:6

for the centric. In both cases the expected value of Y is and the variances are 2 =n and 22 =n, respectively, just as would be expected. 2.1.6.2. Distribution of ratios Ratios like Sn; m Jn =Km ,

2:1:6:7

where Jn is given by equation (2.1.6.1), m P Km Hj ,

2:1:6:8

j1

and the Hj ’s are the intensities of a set of reflections (which may or may not overlap with those included in Jn ), are used in correlating intensities measured under different conditions. They arise in

197

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION correlating reflections on different layer lines from the same or different specimens, in correlating the same reflections from different crystals, in normalizing intensities to the local average or to , and in certain systematic trial-and-error methods of structure determination (see Rabinovich & Shakked, 1984, and references therein). There are three main cases: (i) Gi and Hi refer to the same reflection; for example, they might be the observed and calculated quantities for the hkl reflection measured under different conditions or for different crystals of the same substance; or (ii) Gi and Hi are unrelated; for example, the observed and calculated values for the hkl reflection for a completely wrong trial structure, of values for entirely different reflections, as in reducing photographic measurements on different layer lines to the same scale; or (iii) the Gi ’s are a subset of the Hi ’s, so that Gi Hi for i < n and m > n. Aside from the scale factor, in case (i) Gi and Hi will differ chiefly through relatively small statistical fluctuations and uncorrected systematic errors, whereas in case (ii) the differences will be relatively large because of the inherent differences in the intensities. Here we are concerned only with cases (ii) and (iii); the practical problems of case (i) are postponed to IT C (1999). There is little in the crystallographic literature concerning the probability distribution of sums like (2.1.6.1) or ratios like (2.1.6.7); certain results are reviewed by Srinivasan & Parthasarathy (1976, ch. 5), but with a bias toward partially related structures that makes it difficult to apply them to the immediate problem. In case (ii) (Gi and Hi independent), acentric distribution, Table 2.1.5.1 gives the distribution of the ratio u nY =mZ

2:1:6:10

where 2 is a beta distribution of the second kind, Y is given by equation (2.1.6.2) and Z by Z Km =m,

2:1:6:11

where n is the number of intensities included in the numerator and m is the number in the denominator. The expected value of Y =Z is then m m

1

1

1 ... m

2:1:6:12

2n m

2m2

2

m

2 m

4n

1

2 I mhIi2

2:1:6:17

,

2.1.6.3. Intensities scaled to the local average When the Gi ’s are a subset of the Hi ’s, the beta distributions of the second kind are replaced by beta distributions of the first kind, with means and variances readily found from Table 2.1.5.1. The distribution of such a ratio is chiefly of interest when Y relates to a single reflection and Z relates to a group of m intensities including Y. This corresponds to normalizing intensities to the local average. Its distribution is pI=hIi dI=hIi 1 I=nhIi; 1, n

1 dI=nhIi

n m m

2

1m

1 m

2n

:

which is less than the variance of the intensities normalized to an ‘infinite’ population by a fraction of the order of 2=n. Unlike the variance of the scaling factor, the variance of the normalized intensity approaches unity as n becomes large. For intensities having a centric distribution, the distribution normalized to the local average is given by

with the expected value of Y =Z equal to m 2 hY =Zi 1 ... m 2 m and with its variance equal to

1=2 dI=nhIi, 2:1:6:20

2:1:6:13

with an expected value of I=hIi of unity and with variance

One sees that Y =Z is a biased estimate of the scaling factor between two sets of intensities and the bias, of the order of m 1 , depends only on the number of intensities averaged in the denominator. This may seem odd at first sight, but it becomes plausible when one remembers that the mean of a quantity is an unbiased estimator of itself, but the reciprocal of a mean is not an unbiased estimator of the mean of a reciprocal. The mean exists only if m > 1 and the variance only for m > 2. In the centric case, the expression for the distribution of the ratio of the two means Y and Z becomes pu du 2 nY =mZ; n=2, m=2 dnY =mZ

2:1:6:18

in the acentric case, with an expected value of I=hIi of unity; there is no bias, as is obvious a priori. The variance of I=hIi is n 1 2 , 2:1:6:19 n1

pI=hIi dI=hIi 1 I=nhIi; 1=2, n 2

2:1:6:16

whatever the intensity distribution. Equations (2.1.6.12) and (2.1.6.15) are consistent with this.

with variance 2

:

For the same number of reflections, the bias in hY =Zi and the variance for the centric distribution are considerably larger than for the acentric. For both distributions the variance of the scaling factor approaches zero when n and m become large. The variances are large for m small, in fact ‘infinite’ if the number of terms averaged in the denominator is sufficiently small. These biases are readily removed by multiplying Y =Z by m 1=m or m 2=m. Many methods of estimating scaling factors – perhaps most – also introduce bias (Wilson, 1975; Lomer & Wilson, 1975; Wilson, 1976, 1978c) that is not so easily removed. Wilson (1986a) has given reasons for supposing that the bias of the ratio (2.1.6.7) approximates to

2:1:6:9

pu du 2 nY =mZ; n, m dnY =mZ,

hY =Zi

2

2:1:6:14

2:1:6:15

2

2n 1 , n2

2:1:6:21

less than that for an ‘infinite’ population by a fraction of about 3=n. Similar considerations apply to intensities normalized to in the usual way, since they are equal to those normalized to hIi multiplied by hIi=. 2.1.6.4. The use of normal approximations Since Jn and Km [equations (2.1.6.1) and (2.1.6.8)] are sums of identically distributed variables conforming to the conditions of the central-limit theorem, it is tempting to approximate their distributions by normal distributions with the correct mean and variance. This would be reasonably satisfactory for the distributions of Jn and Km themselves for quite small values of n and m, but unsatisfactory for the distribution of their ratio for any values of n and m, even large. The ratio of two variables with normal distributions is

198

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE notorious for its rather indeterminate mean and ‘infinite’ variance, resulting from the ‘tail’ of the denominator distributions extending through zero to negative values. The leading terms of the ratio distribution are given by Kendall & Stuart (1977, p. 288).

2.1.7. Non-ideal distributions: the correction-factor approach 2.1.7.1. Introduction The probability density functions (p.d.f.’s) of the magnitude of the structure factor, presented in Section 2.1.5, are based on the central-limit theorem discussed above. In particular, the centric and acentric p.d.f.’s given by equations (2.1.5.11) and (2.1.5.8), respectively, are expected to account for the statistical properties of diffraction patterns obtained from crystals consisting of nearly equal atoms, which obey the fundamental assumptions of uniformity and independence of the atomic contributions and are not affected by noncrystallographic symmetry and dispersion. It is also assumed there that the number of atoms in the asymmetric unit is large. Distributions of structure-factor magnitudes which are based on the central-limit theorem, and thus obey the above assumptions, have been termed ‘ideal’, and the subjects of the following sections are those distributions for which some of the above assumptions/restrictions are not fulfilled; the latter distributions will be called ‘non-ideal’. We recall that the assumption of uniformity consists of the requirement that the fractional part of the scalar product hx ky lz be uniformly distributed over the [0, 1] interval, which holds well if x, y, z are rationally independent (Hauptman & Karle, 1953), and permits one to regard the atomic contribution to the structure factor as a random variable. This is of course a necessary requirement for any statistical treatment. If, however, the atomic composition of the asymmetric unit is widely heterogeneous, the structure factor is then a sum of unequally distributed random variables and the Lindeberg– Le´vy version of the central-limit theorem (cf. Section 2.1.4.4) cannot be expected to apply. Other versions of this theorem might still predict a normal p.d.f. of the sum, but at the expense of a correspondingly large number of terms/atoms. It is well known that atomic heterogeneity gives rise to severe deviations from ideal behaviour (e.g. Howells et al., 1950) and one of the aims of crystallographic statistics has been the introduction of a correct dependence on the atomic composition into the non-ideal p.d.f.’s [for a review of the early work on non-ideal distributions see Srinivasan & Parthasarathy (1976)]. A somewhat less well known fact is that the dependence of the p.d.f.’s of jEj on space-group symmetry becomes more conspicuous as the composition becomes more heterogeneous (e.g. Shmueli, 1979; Shmueli & Wilson, 1981). Hence both the composition and the symmetry dependence of the intensity statistics are of interest. Other problems, which likewise give rise to non-ideal p.d.f.’s, are the presence of heavy atoms in (variable) special positions, heterogeneous structures with complete or partial noncrystallographic symmetry, and the presence of outstandingly heavy dispersive scatterers. The need for theoretical representations of non-ideal p.d.f.’s is exemplified in Fig. 2.1.7.1(a), which shows the ideal centric and acentric p.d.f.’s together with a frequency histogram of jEj values, recalculated for a centrosymmetric structure containing a platinum atom in the asymmetric unit of P1 (Faggiani et al., 1980). Clearly, the deviation from the Gaussian p.d.f., predicted by the central-limit theorem, is here very large and a comparison with the possible ideal distributions can (in this case) lead to wrong conclusions. Two general approaches have so far been employed in derivations of non-ideal p.d.f.’s which account for the abovementioned problems: the correction-factor approach, to be dealt

Fig. 2.1.7.1. Atomic heterogeneity and intensity statistics. The histogram appearing in (a) and (b) was constructed from jEj values which were recalculated from atomic parameters published for the centrosymmetric structure of C6H18Cl2N4O4Pt (Faggiani et al., 1980). The space group of the crystal is P1, Z 2, i.e. all the atoms are located in general positions. (a) A comparison of the recalculated distribution of jEj with the ideal centric [equation (2.1.5.11)] and acentric [equation (2.1.5.8)] p.d.f.’s, denoted by 1 and 1, respectively. (b) The same recalculated histogram along with the centric correction-factor p.d.f. [equation (2.1.7.5)], truncated after two, three, four and five terms (dashed lines), and with that accurately computed for the correct space-group Fourier p.d.f. [equations (2.1.8.5) and (2.1.8.22)] (solid line).

with in the following sections, and the more recently introduced Fourier method, to which Section 2.1.8 is dedicated. In what follows, we introduce briefly the mathematical background of the correction-factor approach, apply this formalism to centric and acentric non-ideal p.d.f.’s, and present the numerical values of the moments of the trigonometric structure factor which permit an approximate evaluation of such p.d.f.’s for all the three-dimensional space groups. 2.1.7.2. Mathematical background Suppose that px is a p.d.f. which accurately describes the experimental distribution of the random variable x, where x is related to a sum of random variables and can be assumed to obey (to some approximation) an ideal p.d.f., say p0 x, based on the central-limit theorem. In the correction-factor approach we seek to represent px as

199

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION P These non-ideal p.d.f.’s of jEj, for which the first five expansion px p0 x dk fk x, 2:1:7:1 terms are available, are given by k " # where dk are coefficients which depend on the cause of the deviation 1 X A 2k of px from the central-limit theorem approximation and fk x are pc jEj pc0 jEj 1 2:1:7:5 He2k jEj 2k! suitably chosen functions of x. A choice of the set ffk g is deemed k2 suitable, if only from a practical point of view, if it allows the convenient introduction of the cause of the above deviation of px and into the expansion coefficients dk . This requirement is satisfied – " # k 1 also from a theoretical point of view – by taking fk x as a set of X 1 B 2k pa jEj p0 2:1:7:6 Lk jEj2 polynomials which are orthogonal with respect to the ideal p.d.f., a jEj 1 k! taken as their weight function (e.g. Crame´r, 1951). That is, the k2 functions fk x so chosen have to obey the relationship for centrosymmetric and noncentrosymmetric space groups, Rb 0 0 1, if 2k m 0 fk xfm xp x dx km , 2:1:7:2 respectively, where pc jEj and pa jEj are the ideal centric 0, if 2k 6 m and acentric p.d.f.’s [see (2.1.7.4)] and the unified form of the a coefficients A2k and B2k , for k 2, 3, 4 and 5, is where a, b is the range of existence of all the functions involved. It can be readily shown that the coefficients dk are given by A4 or B4 a4 Q4 k Rb P n ck dk fk xpx dx hfk xi n hx i, a

n0

where the brackets h i in equation (2.1.7.3) denote averaging with respect to the unknown p.d.f. px and ck n is the coefficient of the nth power of x in the polynomial fk x. The coefficients dk are thus directly related to the moments of the non-ideal distribution and the coefficients of the powers of x in the orthogonal polynomials. The latter coefficients can be obtained by the Gram–Schmidt procedure (e.g. Spiegel, 1974), or by direct use of the Szego¨ determinants (e.g. Crame´r, 1951), for any weight function that has finite moments. However, the feasibility of the present approach depends on our ability to obtain the moments hxn i without the knowledge of the non-ideal p.d.f., px. 2.1.7.3. Application to centric and acentric distributions We shall summarize here the non-ideal centric and acentric distributions of the magnitude of the normalized structure factor E (e.g. Shmueli & Wilson, 1981; Shmueli, 1982). We assume that (i) all the atoms are located in general positions and have rationally independent coordinates, (ii) all the scatterers are dispersionless, and (iii) there is no noncrystallographic symmetry. Arbitrary atomic composition and space-group symmetry are admitted. The appropriate weight functions and the corresonding orthogonal polynomials are 0

p jEj

fk x

2=1=2 exp jEj2 =2 He2k jEj=2k!1=2 2jEj exp jEj2

A6 or B6 a6 Q6 A8 or B8 a8 Q8 Ua24 Q24

2:1:7:3

Lk jEj2

42

A10 or B10 a10 Q10 V a4 a6 Q4 Q6

2:1:7:7

4 6 Q10

W 42 Q10

(Shmueli, 1982), where U 35 or 18, V 210 or 100 and W 3150 or 900 according as A2k or B2k is required, respectively, and the other quantities in equation (2.1.7.7) are given below. The composition-dependent terms in equations (2.1.7.7) are Pm 2k j1 fj Q2k Pm 2:1:7:8 , 2 k n1 fn where m is the number of atoms in the asymmetric unit, fj , j 1, . . . , m are their scattering factors, and the symmetry dependence is expressed by the coefficients a2k in equation (2.1.7.7), as follows: a2k 1k 1 k

1!k0

k P

1k p k

p!kp 2p ,

p2

2:1:7:9 where k 2k kp p 2p

Non-ideal distribution

1!! 1!!

k k! or p p!

2:1:7:10

according as the space group is centrosymmetric or noncentrosymmetric, respectively, and 2p in equation (2.1.7.9) is given by

Centric

2p

Acentric 2:1:7:4

where Hek and Lk are Hermite and Laguerre polynomials, respectively, as defined, for example, by Abramowitz & Stegun (1972). Equations (2.1.7.2), (2.1.7.3) and (2.1.7.4) suffice for the general formulation of the above non-ideal p.d.f.’s of jEj. Their full derivation entails (i) the expression of a sufficient number of moments of jEj in terms of absolute moments of the trigonometric structure factor (e.g. Shmueli & Wilson, 1981; Shmueli, 1982) and (ii) calculation of the latter moments for the various symmetries (Wilson, 1978b; Shmueli & Kaldor, 1981, 1983). The notation below is similar to that employed by Shmueli (1982).

hjTj2p i hjTj2 ip

,

2:1:7:11

where hjTjk i is the kth absolute moment of the trigonometric structure factor Th

g P

exp2ihT Ps r ts h ih:

2:1:7:12

s1

In equation (2.1.7.12), g is the number of general equivalent positions listed in IT A (1983) for the space group in question, times the multiplicity of the Bravais lattice, Ps , ts is the sth space-group operator and r is an atomic position vector.

200

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE Table 2.1.7.1. Some even absolute moments of the trigonometric structure factor The symbols p, q, r and s denote the second, fourth, sixth and eighth absolute moments of the trigonometric structure factor T [equation (2.1.7.12)], respectively, and the columns of the table contain (for some conciseness) p, q, r=p and s=p2 . The numbers in parentheses, appearing beside some space-group entries, refer to hkl subsets which are defined in the note at the end of the table. These subset references are identical with those given by Shmueli & Kaldor (1981, 1983). The symbols q, r and s are also equivalent to 4 P2 , 6 P3 and 8 P4 , respectively, where 2n are the normalized absolute moments given by equation (2.1.7.11). Space groups(s)

p

q

s=p2

r=p

Space groups(s)

Point group: 1 P1

1

1

1

1

Point group: 1 P 1

2

6

10

17

Point groups: 2, m All P All C

2 4

6 48

10 160

17 560

Point group: 2=m All P All C

4 8

36 288

100 1600

30614 9800

Point group: 222 All P All C and I F222

4 8 16

28 224 1792

64 1024 16384

16934 5432 173824

Point group: mm2 All P All A, C and I Fmm2 Fdd2 (1) Fdd2 (2)

4 8 16 16 16

36 288 2304 2304 1280

100 1600 25600 25600 7168

30614 9800 313600 313600 43264

Point group: mmm All P All C and I Fmmm Fddd (1) Fddd (2)

8 16 32 32 32

216 1728 13824 13824 7680

1000 16000 256000 256000 71680

535938 171500 5488000 5488000 757120

Point group: 4 P4, P42 P41 * (3) P41 * (4) I4 I41 (5) I41 (6)

4 4 4 8 8 8

36 36 20 288 288 160

100 100 28 1600 1600 448

30614 30614 4214 9800 9800 1352

Point group: 4 P 4 I 4

4 8

28 224

64 1024

16934 5432

8 16 16 16

216 1728 1728 960

1000 16000 16000 4480

535938 171500 171500 23660

8

136

424

168218

8 8 16 16 16

136 104 1088 1088 832

424 208 6784 6784 3328

168218 47018 53828 53828 15044

Point group: 4=m All P I4=m I41 =a (7) I41 =a (8) Point group: 422 P422, P421 2, P42 22, P42 21 2 P122,* P41 21 2* (3) P41 22,* P41 21 2* (4) I422 I41 22 (7) I41 22 (8)

p

q

s=p2

r=p

Point group: 4mm All P I4mm, I4cm I41 md, I41 cd (7) I41 md, I41 cd (8)

8 16 16 16

168 1344 1344 832

640 10240 10240 3328

297055 95060 95060 15188

Point groups: 42m, 4m2 All P I 4m2, I 42m, I 4c2 I 42d (5) I 42d (6)

8 16 16 16

136 1088 1088 832

424 6784 6784 3328

168218 53828 53828 15044

Point group: 4/mmm All P I4=mmm, I4=mcm I41 =amd, I41 =acd (5) I41 =amd, I41 =acd (6)

16 32 32 32

1008 8064 8064 4992

6400 102400 102400 33280

Point group: 3 All P and R

3

15

31

71


6

90

310

1242


6

66

166

508

6 6

66 66

178 178

604 604

6

66

154

412

12 12

396 396

1780 1780

1057834 1057834

12

396

1540

721834

Point group: 6 P6 P61 * (9) P61 * (10) P61 * (11) P61 * (12) P62 * (13) P62 * (14) P63 (3) P63 (4)

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

90 90 54 54 90 90 54 90 90

340 340 91 97 280 340 97 340 280

1522 1522 161 193 962 1522 193 1522 962

Point group: 6 P6

6

90

310

1242

12 12

540 540

3400 3400

2664334 2664334

Point group: 3m P3m1, P31m, R3m P3c1, P31c, (3); R3c (1) P3c1, P31c, (4); R3c (2) Point group: 3m P31m, P3m1, R 3m P31c, P3c1 (3); R 3c (1) P31c, P3c1 (4); R 3c (2)

Point group: 6=m P6=m P63 =m (3)

201

5198515 16 1663550 1663550 265790

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.1.7.1. Some even absolute moments of the trigonometric structure factor (cont.) Space groups(s) P63 =m (4)

p 12

q

s=p2

r=p 540

2800

Space groups(s) 1684334

Point group: 622 P622 P61 22* (9) P61 22* (10) P61 22* (11) P61 22* (12) P62 22* (13) P62 22* (14) P63 22 (3) P63 22 (4)

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

324 324 252 252 324 324 252 324 324

1150 1150 577 583 1090 1150 583 1150 1090

550614 550614 153734 160134 474614 550614 160134 550614 474614

Point group: 6mm P6mm P6cc (3) P6cc (4) P63 cm, P63 mc (3) P63 cm, P63 mc (4)

12 12 12 12 12

396 396 396 396 396

1930 1930 1450 1930 1630

1281834 1281834 609834 1281834 833834

Point groups: 6m2, 62m P6m2, P62m P 6c2, P62c (3) P 6c2, P62c (4)

12 12 12

396 396 396

1780 1780 1540

1057834 1057834 721834

Point group: 6/mmm P6/mmm P6/mcc (3) P6/mcc (4) P6/mcm, P6/mmc (3) P6=mcm, P6=mmc (4)

24 24 24 24 24

2376 2376 2376 2376 2376

19300 19300 14500 19300 16300

22432818 22432818 10672818 22432818 14592818

Point group: 23 P23, P21 3 I23, I21 3 F23

12 24 48

276 2208 17664

760 12160 194560

269514 86248 2759936

Point group: m3 Pm 3, Pn3, Pa3 Im3, Ia3 Fm3 Fd 3 (1) Fd 3 (2)

24 48 96 96 96

1800 14400 115200 115200 96768

9400 150400 2406400 2406400 1484800

6770318 2166500 69328000 69328000 28183680

p

q

r=p

s=p2

Point group: 432 P432, P42 32 P41 32* (15) P41 32* (16) P41 32* (17) P41 32* (18) I432 I41 32 (15) I41 32 (17) F432 F41 32 (15) F41 32 (18)

24 24 24 24 24 48 48 48 96 96 96

1272 1272 1176 1080 984 10176 10176 8640 81408 81408 62976

4648 4648 3568 2776 2272 74368 74368 44416 1189888 1189888 581632

2521678 2521678 1391678 866478 658078 806940 806940 277276 25822080 25822080 6738816

Point group: 43m P43m P43n (1) P43n (2) I 43m I 43d (15); (20) I 43d (15); (21) I 43d (17) F 43m F 43c (15) F 43c (18)

24 24 24 48 48 48 48 96 96 96

1272 1272 1272 10176 10176 10176 8640 81408 81408 81408

5128 5128 4168 82048 82048 66688 44416 1312768 1312768 1067008

3289678 3289678 1753678 1052700 1052700 561180 277276 33686400 33686400 17957760

Point group: m3m Pn3m Pm3m, Pn3n, Pm3n (1) Pn3n, Pm3n (2) Im3m Ia3d (15); (20) Ia3d (15); (21) Ia3d (17) Fm3m Fm3c (1) Fm3c (2) Fd 3m (1) Fd 3m (2) Fd 3c (1) Fd 3c (2)

48 48 48 96 96 96 96 192 192 192 192 192 192 192

8784 8784 8784 70272 70272 51840 70272 562176 562176 562176 562176 414720 562176 414720

72160 72160 56800 1154560 1154560 432640 908800 18472960 18472960 14540800 18472960 7782400 18472960 6799360

97271713 16 97271713 16 48887713 16 31126970 31126970 4497850 15644090 996063040 996063040 500610880 996063040 205432640 996063040 136619840

Note. hkl subsets: (1) h k l 2n; (2) h k l 2n 1; (3) l 2n; (4) l 2n 1; (5) 2h l 2n; (6) 2h l 2n 1; (7) 2k l 2n; (8) 2k l 2n 1; (9) l 6n; (10) l 6n 1, 6n 5; (11) l 6n 2, 6n 4; (12) l 6n 3; (13) l 3n; (14) l 3n 1, 3n 2; (15) hkl all even; (16) only one index odd; (17) only one index even; (18) hkl all odd; (19) two indices odd; (20) h k l 4n; (21) h k l 4n 2. * And the enantiomorphous space group.

The cumulative distribution functions, obtained by integrating equations (2.1.7.5) and (2.1.7.6), are given by ! jEj 2 jEj2 p exp Nc jEj erf p 2 2 " # 1 X A2k 2:1:7:13 He2k 1 jEj 2k! k2 and

exp jEj2 exp jEj2 ( ) 1 X 1k B2k 2 2 Lk 1 jEj Lk jEj k! k2

Na jEj 1

2:1:7:14 for centrosymmetric and noncentrosymmetric space groups, respectively, where the coefficients are defined in equations (2.1.7.7)–(2.1.7.12). Note that the first term on the right-hand side

202

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE Table 2.1.7.2. Closed expressions for 2k [equation (2.1.7.11)] for space groups of low symmetry

orthogonal-function)* fit to pc jEj. One does exist, based on the orthogonal functions

The normalized moments 2k are expressed in terms of Mk , where Mk

2k! 2k k!2

2k

1!! k!

fk nxHek 21=2 x,

,

and l0 , which takes on the values 1, 2 or 4 according as the Bravais lattice is of type P, one of the types A, B, C or I, or type F, respectively. The expressions for

2k are identical for all the space groups based on a given point group, except Fdd2 and Fddd. The expressions are valid for general reflections and under the restrictions given in the text. Point group(s)

Expression for 2k

1 1, 2, m 2=m, mm2 mmm 222

1 l0k 1 Mk l0k 1 Mk2 l0k 1 Mk3

where nx is the Gaussian distribution (Myller-Lebedeff, 1907). Unfortunately, no reasonably simple relationship between the coefficients dk and readily evaluated properties of pc jEj has been found, and the Myller-Lebedeff expansion has not, as yet, been applied in crystallography. Although Stuart & Ord (1994, p. 112) dismiss it in a three-line footnote, it does have important applications in astronomy (van der Marel & Franx, 1993; Gerhard, 1993).

2.1.8. Non-ideal distributions: the Fourier method

0k 1

k X

2k k!2

p0

l

2:1:7:16

Mp Mk p 3 p!k

p!2

of equation (2.1.7.13) and the first two terms on the right-hand side of equation (2.1.7.14) are just the cumulative distributions derived from the ideal centric and acentric p.d.f.’s in Section 2.1.5.6. The moments hjTj2k i were compiled for all the space groups by Wilson (1978b) for k 1 and 2, and by Shmueli & Kaldor (1981, 1983) for k 1, 2, 3 and 4. These results are presented in Table 2.1.7.1. Closed expressions for the normalized moments 2p were obtained by Shmueli (1982) for the triclinic, monoclinic and orthorhombic space groups except Fdd2 and Fddd (see Table 2.1.7.2). The composition-dependent terms, Q2k , are most conveniently computed as weighted averages over the ranges of sin = which were used in the construction of the Wilson plot for the computation of the jEj values.

2.1.7.4. Fourier versus Hermite approximations As noted in Section 2.1.8.7 below, the Fourier representation of the probability distribution of jFj is usually much better than the particular orthogonal-function representation discussed in Section 2.1.7.3. Many, perhaps most, non-ideal centric distributions look like slight distortions of the ideal (Gaussian) distribution and have no resemblance to a cosine function. The empirical observation thus seems paradoxical. The probable explanation has been pointed out by Wilson (1986b). A truncated Fourier series is a best approximation, in the least-squares sense, to the function represented. The particular orthogonal-function approach used in equation (2.1.7.5), on the other hand, is not a least-squares approximation to pc jEj, but is a least-squares approximation to pc jEj expjEj2 =4:

2:1:7:15

The usual expansions (often known as Gram–Charlier or Edgeworth) thus give great weight to fitting the distribution of the (compararively few) strong reflections, at the expense of a poor fit for the (much more numerous) weak-to-medium ones. Presumably, a similar situation exists for the representation of acentric distributions, but this has not been investigated in detail. Since the centric distributions pc jEj often look nearly Gaussian, one is led to ask if there is an expansion in orthogonal functions that (i) has the leading term pc jEj and (ii) is a least-squares (as well as an

The starting point of the method described in the previous section is the central-limit theorem approximation, and the method consists of finding correction factors which result in better approximations to the actual p.d.f. Conceptually, this is equivalent to improving the approximation of the characteristic function [cf. equation (2.1.4.10)] over that which led to the central-limit theorem result. The method to be described in this section does not depend on any initial approximation and will be shown to utilize the dependence of the exact value of the characteristic function on the space-group symmetry, atomic composition and other factors. This approach has its origin in a simple but ingenious observation by Barakat (1974), who noted that if a random variable has lower and upper bounds then the corresponding p.d.f. can be non-zero only within these bounds and can therefore be expanded in an ordinary Fourier series and set to zero (identically) outside the bounded interval. Barakat’s (1974) work dealt with intensity statistics of laser speckle, where sinusoidal waves are involved, as in the present problem. This method was applied by Weiss & Kiefer (1983) to testing the accuracy of a steepest-descents approximation to the exact solution of the problem of random walk, and its first application to crystallographic intensity statistics soon followed (Shmueli et al., 1984). Crystallographic (e.g. Shmueli & Weiss, 1987; Rabinovich et al., 1991a,b) and noncrystallographic (Shmueli et al., 1985; Shmueli & Weiss, 1985a; Shmueli, Weiss & Wilson, 1989; Shmueli et al., 1990) symmetry was found to be tractable by this approach, as well as joint conditional p.d.f.’s of several structure factors (Shmueli & Weiss, 1985b, 1986; Shmueli, Rabinovich & Weiss, 1989). The Fourier method is illustrated below by deriving the exact counterparts of equations (2.1.7.5) and (2.1.7.6) and specifying them for some simple symmetries. We shall then indicate a method of treating higher symmetries and present results which will suffice for evaluation of Fourier p.d.f.’s of jEj for a wide range of space groups. 2.1.8.1. General representations of p.d.f.’s of jEj by Fourier series We assume, as before, that (i) the atomic phase factors #j 2hT rj [cf. equation (2.1.1.2)] are uniformly distributed on (0–2) and (ii) the atomic contributions to the structure factor are independent. For a centrosymmetric space group, with the origin chosen at a centre of symmetry, the random variable is the (real) normalized structure factor E and its bounds are EM and EM , where * The condition for this desirable property seems to be that the weight function in equation (2.1.7.2) should be unity.

203

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION p PP N P fj pjEj 2 jEj=2 Cmn J0 jEj m2 n2 , 2:1:8:9 EM nj , with nj : 2:1:8:1 m n PN 2 1=2 j1 k1 fk where J0 x is the Bessel function of the first kind (e.g. Abramowitz Here, EM is the maximum possible value of E and fj is the & Stegun, 1972). This is a general form of the p.d.f. of jEj for a conventional scattering factor of the jth atom, including its noncentrosymmetric space group. The Fourier coefficients are temperature factor. The p.d.f., pE, can be non-zero in the range obtained, similarly to the above, as ( EM , EM ) only and can thus be expanded in the Fourier series Cmn hexpimA nBi 2:1:8:10 1 P Ck exp ikE, 2:1:8:2 and the average in equation (2.1.8.10), just as that in equation pE =2 k 1 (2.1.8.4), is evaluated in terms of integrals over the appropriate trigonometric structure factors. In terms of the characteristic where 1=EM . Only the real part of pE is relevant. The Fourier function for a joint p.d.f. of A and B, the Fourier coefficient in coefficients can be obtained in the conventional manner by equation (2.1.8.10) is given by C Cm, n. mn integrating over the range ( EM , EM ), We shall denote the characteristic function by Ct1 if it corresponds to a Fourier coefficient of a Fourier series for a ERM space group and by Ct1 , t2 or by Ct, , where pE expikE dE: 2:1:8:3 centrosymmetric Ck t t12 t22 1=2 and tan 1 t1 =t2 , if it corresponds to a Fourier EM series for a noncentrosymmetric space group. Since, however, pE 0 for E < EM and E > EM , it is possible and convenient to replace the limits of integration in equation (2.1.8.3) by infinity. Thus 2.1.8.2. Fourier–Bessel series Ck

R1 1

pE expikE dE hexpikEi:

2:1:8:4

Equation (2.1.8.4) shows that Ck is a Fourier transform of the p.d.f. pE and, as such, it is the value of the corresponding characteristic function at the point tk k [i.e., Ck Ck, where the characteristic function Ct is defined by equation (2.1.4.1)]. It is also seen that Ck is the expected value of the exponential expikE. It follows that the feasibility of the present approach depends on one’s ability to evaluate the characteristic function in closed form without the knowledge of the p.d.f.; this is analogous to the problem of evaluating absolute moments of the structure factor for the correction-factor approach, discussed in Section 2.1.7. Fortunately, in crystallographic applications these calculations are feasible, provided individual isotropic motion is assumed. The formal expression for the p.d.f. of jEj, for any centrosymmetric space group, is therefore 1 P pjEj 1 2 Ck coskjEj , 2:1:8:5 k1

where use is made of the assumption that pE p E, and the Fourier coefficients are evaluated from equation (2.1.8.4). The p.d.f. of jEj for a noncentrosymmetric space group is obtained by first deriving the joint p.d.f. of the real and imaginary parts of E and then integrating out its phase. The general expression for E is E A iB jEj cos ' ijEj sin ', where ' is the phase of E. The required joint p.d.f. is PP pA, B 2 =4 Cmn exp imA nB, m

Equations (2.1.8.5) and (2.1.8.9) are the exact counterparts of equations (2.1.7.5) and (2.1.7.6), respectively. The computational effort required to evaluate equation (2.1.8.9) is somewhat greater than that for (2.1.8.5), because a double Fourier series has to be summed. The p.d.f. for any noncentrosymmetric space group can be expressed by a double Fourier series, but this can be simplified if the characteristic function depends on t t12 t22 1=2 alone, rather than on t1 and t2 separately. In such cases the p.d.f. of jEj for a noncentrosymmetric space group can be expanded in a single Fourier–Bessel series (Barakat, 1974; Weiss & Kiefer, 1983; Shmueli et al., 1984). The general form of this expansion is pjEj 22 jEj

Du J0 u jEj,

2:1:8:11

u1

where Du

Cu J12 u

2:1:8:12

and Cu

N=g Q

Cju ,

2:1:8:13

j1

where J1 x is the Bessel function of the first kind, and u is the uth root of the equation J0 x 0; the atomic contribution Cju to equation (2.1.8.13) is computed as

2:1:8:6

Cju Cnj u :

2:1:8:7

The roots u are tabulated in the literature (e.g. Abramowitz & Stegun, 1972), but can be most conveniently computed as follows. The first five roots are given by

n

2:1:8:14

1 2:4048255577

and introducing polar coordinates m r sin and n r cos , p where r m2 n2 and tan 1 m=n, we have PP Cmn exp ijEj pjEj, ' 2 =4jEj m n p m2 n2 sin' : 2:1:8:8 Integrating out the phase ', we obtain

1 P

2 5:5200781103 3 8:6537279129 4 11:7915344390 5 14:9309177085 and the higher ones can be obtained from McMahon’s approximation (cf. Abramowitz & Stegun, 1972)

204

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE 1 8

u

124 3

38

120928 158

5

401743168 1058

7

...,

N Q

p J0 nj m2 n2 :

2:1:8:26

j1

2:1:8:15 where u 14. For u > 5 the values given by equation (2.1.8.15) have a relative error less than 10 11 so that no refinement of roots of higher orders is needed (Shmueli et al., 1984). Numerical computations of single Fourier–Bessel series are of course faster than those of the double Fourier series, but both representations converge fairly rapidly. 2.1.8.3. Simple examples Consider the Fourier coefficient of the p.d.f. of jEj for the centrosymmetric space group P1. The normalized structure factor is given by E2

N=2 P

nj cos #j ,

with #j 2hT rj ,

Equation (2.1.8.24) leads to (2.1.8.25) by introducing polar coordinates analogous to those leading to equation (2.1.8.8), and equation (2.1.8.26) is then obtained by making use of the assumptions of independence and uniformity in an analogous manner to that detailed in equations (2.1.8.12)–(2.1.8.22) above. The right-hand side of equation (2.1.8.26) is to be used as a Fourier coefficient of the double Fourier series given by (2.1.8.9). Since, however, this coefficient depends on m2 n2 1=2 alone rather than on m and n separately, the p.d.f. of jEj for P1 can also be represented by a Fourier–Bessel series [cf. equation (2.1.8.11)] with coefficient Du

2:1:8:16

N 1 Y J0 nj u , J12 u j1

2:1:8:27

j1

where u is the uth root of the equation J0 x 0.

and the Fourier coefficient is Ck hexpikEi * " #+ N=2 P exp 2ik nj cos #j j1

*

N=2 Q

2:1:8:17 2:1:8:18

+

exp2iknj cos #j

2:1:8:19

hexp2iknj cos #j i

2:1:8:20

j1

N=2 Q j1

N=2 Q

1=2

j1

R

2.1.8.4. A more complicated example We now illustrate the methodology of deriving characteristic functions for space groups of higher symmetries, following the method of Rabinovich et al. (1991a,b). The derivation is performed for the space group P6 [No. 174]. According to Table A1.4.3.6, the real and imaginary parts of the normalized structure factor are given by

exp2iknj cos # d#

A2

j1

2:1:8:21

N=2 Q

2

N=6 P

nj Chkiclzj nj cos j

j1

J0 2knj :

cos jk

2:1:8:28

k1

and

Equation (2.1.8.20) is obtained from equation (2.1.8.19) if we make use of the assumption of independence, the assumption of uniformity allows us to rewrite equation (2.1.8.20) as (2.1.8.21), and the expression in the braces in the latter equation is just a definition of the Bessel function J0 2knj (e.g. Abramowitz & Stegun, 1972). Let us now consider the Fourier coefficient of the p.d.f. of jEj for the noncentrosymmetric space group P1. We have N P

3 P

2:1:8:22

j1

A

N=6 P

nj cos #j and B

j1

N P

nj sin #j :

2:1:8:23

B2

N=6 P j1

2

N=6 P

nj Shkiclzj nj cos j

j1

3 P

sin jk ,

2:1:8:29

k1

where

j1

j1 2hxj kyj , j2 2kxj iyj ,

These expressions for A and B are substituted in equation (2.1.8.10), resulting in * + N Q Cmn expinj m cos #j n sin #j

j3 2ixj hyj , j 2lzj :

j1

*

N Q

+

2:1:8:24

p expinj m2 n2 sin#j

j1

2:1:8:25

Note that j1 j2 j3 0, i.e., one of these contributions depends on the other two; this is a recurring problem in calculations pertaining to trigonal and hexagonal systems. For brevity, we write directly the general form of the characteristic function from which the functional form of the Fourier coefficient can be readily obtained. The characteristic function is given by

205

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION =2 Ct1 , t2 hexpit1 A t2 Bi 2:1:8:30 R 3 J0 2nj t sin Cj t, 2= N=6 3 P Q 0 exp 2inj cos j t1 cos jk t2 sin jk 1 P j1 k1 2 cos6kJk3 2nj t sin d k1 2:1:8:31 2:1:8:38 N=6 3 P Q exp 2inj t cos j sin cos jk and a double Fourier series must be used for the p.d.f. j1 k1 cos sin jk 2:1:8:32 2.1.8.5. Atomic characteristic functions N=6 3 Expressions for the atomic contributions to the characteristic P Q exp 2inj t cos j sinjk , functions were obtained by Rabinovich et al. (1991a) for a wide j1 k1 range of space groups, by methods similar to those described above. 2:1:8:33 These expressions are collected in Table 2.1.8.1 in terms of symbols which are defined below. The following abbreviations are used in the subsequent definitions of the symbols: 1 2 2 1=2 where tan t1 =t2 , t t1 t2 and the assumption of s 2anj sin , independence was used. If we further employ the assumption of uniformity, while remembering that the angular variables jk are c 2anj cos and not independent, the characteristic function can be written as 2anj sin 2=3 , N=6 R Q and the symbols appearing in Table 2.1.8.1 are given below: 1=2 d 1=22 Ct1 , t2 a j1 Lj a, hJ0 s J0 s i R R R 1 P d1 d2 d3 2 1 2 3 cos4kJk4 k 1 3 1 P P sink , exp 2inj t cos J04 anj 2 cos4kJk4 anj , k1

k1

2:1:8:34

b c

1 1 X exp ik 2 k 1

Ct1 , t2

k 1

R

exp

3

ik 2inj t cos sin d

: 2:1:8:36

If we change the variable to 0 and ik ik0 ik. Hence Ct1 , t2

N=6 Q j1

1=2

R

d

, sin becomes sin 0 1 P

k 1

2

1 P J06 anj 2 cos6kJk6 anj , k1 D h iE 1 e 1 Hj a, R Sj ; a, , 0 , D h iE 2 f 2 Hj a, R Sj ; a, , 0 , 1 g ~ 1 Hj a, 1 , 2 , R Sj ; a, 1 , 1 Sj ; a, 2 , , 2 h ~ 2 Hj a, 1 , 2 , R Sj ; a, 1 , 2 Sj ; a, 2 , ,

1 R P 1=2 1=2 d

j1

i ,

k 1

2:1:8:35

is the Fourier representation of the periodic delta function. Equation (2.1.8.34) then becomes N=6 Q

hJ02 s J02 s

Qj a, hJ0 s J0 s J0 c J0 c i , 1 P d Tj a, exp6ikJk6 anj

where 2

1 Qj a,

where

exp3ikJk3 2nj t cos :

1

Sj ; a, ,

2:1:8:37

1 P k 1

e3ik Jk3 s

and The imaginary part of the summation, involving Bessel functions of odd orders, vanishes upon integration and the latter is restricted to the positive quadrant in . Thus, upon replacing cosines by sines (this is permissible at this stage) the atomic contribution to the characteristic function becomes

2

Sj ; a, ,

1 P k 1

e3ik Jk s Jk Jk :

The averages appearing in the above summary are, in general, computed as

206

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE Table 2.1.8.1. Atomic contributions to characteristic functions for pjEj The table lists symbolic expressions for the atomic contributions to exact characteristic functions (abbreviated as c.f.) for pjEj, to be computed as single Fourier series (centric), double Fourier series (acentric) and single Fourier–Bessel series (acentric), as defined in Sections 2.1.8.1 and 2.1.8.2. The symbolic expressions are defined in Section 2.1.8.5. The table is arranged by point groups, space groups and parities of the reflection indices analogously to the table of moments, Table 2.1.7.1, and covers all the space groups and statistically different parities of hkl up to and including space group Fd3. The expressions are valid for atoms in general positions, for general reflections and presume the absence of noncrystallographic symmetry and of dispersive scatterers. Space group(s) Point group: 1 P1 Point group: 1 P 1 Point groups: 2, m All P All C Point group: 2=m All P All C Point group: 222 All P All C and I F222 Point group: mm2 All P All C and I Fmm2 Fdd2 Point group: mmm All P All C and I Fmmm Fddd Point group: 4 P4, P42 P41 * I4 I41 Point group: 4 P 4 I 4 Point group: 4=m All P I4=m I41 =a Point group: 422 P422, P4212, P4222, P42212 P4122,* P41212* I422 I4122 Point group: 4mm All P

g

Atomic c.f.

1

J0 tnj

2

J0 2t1 nj

2 4

J02 tnj J02 2tnj

4 8

J02 2t1 nj J02 4t1 nj

4 8 16

Lj t, a Lj 2t, Lj 4t,

4 8 16 16 16

Lj t, 0 Lj 2t, 0 Lj 4t, 0 Lj 4t, 0 Lj 4t, =4

8 16 32 32 32

Lj 2t1 , 0 Lj 4t1 , 0 Lj 8t1 , 0 Lj 8t1 , 0 Lj 8t1 , =4

4 4 4 8 8 8

Lj t, 0 Lj t, 0 Lj t, =4 Lj 2t, 0 Lj 2t, 0 Lj 2t, =4

4 8

Lj t, Lj 2t,

8 16 16 16

Lj 2t1 , 0 Lj 4t1 , 0 Lj 4t1 , 0 Lj 4t1 , =4

8

Qj t, b

8 8 16 16 16

Qj t, 2 Qj t, c 1 Qj 2t, 1 Qj 2t, 2 Qj 2t,

8

Remarks

I4mm, I4cm I41md, I41cd Point groups: 42m, 4m2 All P I42m, I4m2, I4c2 I42d Point group: 4=mmm All P I4=mmm, I4=mcm I41 =amd, I41 =acd

h k l 2n h k l 2n 1

h k l 2n h k l 2n 1

l 2n l 2n 1 2h l 2n 2h l 2n 1

1

Qj t, 0

Point group: 3 All P and R Point group: 3 All P and R Point group: 32 All P and R Point group: 3m P3m1, P31m, R3m P3c1, P31c, R3c

Point group: 3m P3m1, P31m, R 3m P3c1, P31c, R 3c

Point group: 6 P6 P61 *

P62 * l 2n l 2n 1

1 1

Space group(s)

l 2n l 2n 1 2k l 2n 2k l 2n 1

P63 Point group: 6 P6 Point group: 6=m P6=m P63 =m Point group: 622 P622

207

g

Atomic c.f.

Remarks

16 16 16

1 Qj 2t, 0 1 Qj 2t, 0 1 Qj 2t, =4

2k l 2n 2k l 2n 1

8 16 16 16

Qj t, 1 Qj 2t, 1 Qj 2t, 2 Qj 2t,

16 32 32 32

Qj 2t1 , 0 1 Qj 4t1 , 0 1 Qj 4t1 , 0 1 Qj 4t1 , =4

1

2h l 2n 2h l 2n 1

1

3

J03 tnj

6

J03 2t1 nj

6

Tj t, d

6 6

Tj t, =2 Tj t, =2

6

Tj t, 0

12 12

Tj 2t1 , =2 Tj 2t1 , =2

12

Tj 2t1 , 0

l 2n l 2n 1

l 2n P, h k l 2n R l 2n 1 P, h k l 2n 1 R

l 2n P, h k l 2n R l 2n 1 P, h k l 2n 1 R

1

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Hj t, =2e 1 Hj t, =2 2 Hj t, 0f 2 Hj t, =2 1 Hj t, 0 1 Hj t, =2 2 Hj t, =2 1 Hj t, =2 1 Hj t, 0

6

Hj t,

l l l l l l l l

6n 6n 1, 6n 5 6n 2, 6n 4 6n 3 3n 3n 1 2n 2n 1

1

1

12 12 12

Hj 2t1 , =2 1 Hj 2t1 , =2 1 Hj 2t1 , 0

12

~ j1 t, =2, H =2, g

l 2n l 2n 1

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.1.8.1. Atomic contributions to characteristic functions for pjEj (cont.) Space group(s)

g

Atomic c.f.

P61 22*

12

~ j1 t, =2, H

P62 22*

12 12 12 12

P63 22

12 12 12

Point group: 6mm P6mm P6cc

P63 cm, P63 mc Point groups: 62m, 6m2 P62m, P6m2 P 62c, P6c2

=2, ~ j2 t, 0, 0, h H ~ j2 t, =2, =2, H 1 ~ Hj t, 0, 0, 1 ~ Hj t, =2, =2, ~ j2 t, =2, =2, H ~ j1 t, =2, H =2, ~ j1 t, 0, 0, H

12 12

~ j1 t, =2, =2, 0 H ~ j1 t, =2, =2, 0 H ~ j1 t, =2, H =2, 0 ~ j1 t, =2, =2, 0 H ~ j1 t, 0, 0, 0 H

12 12

~ j1 t, , , 0 H ~ j1 t, , , 0 H

12 12 12

Remarks

Space group(s)

l 6n l l l l

g

Atomic c.f.

Remarks

12

~ j1 t, H

l 2n 1

6n 1, 6n 5 6n 2, 6n 4 6n 3 3n

Point group: 6=mmm P6=mmm P6=mcc

l 3n 1 l 2n

24 24 24

P63 =mcm, P63 =mmc 24 24

l 2n 1

Point group: 23 P23, P213 I23, I21 3 F23 Point group: m3 Pm3, Pn3, Pa3 Im3, Ia3 Fm3 Fd3

l 2n l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1

=2, =2, 0

~ j1 2t1 , =2, =2, 0 H ~ j1 2t1 , =2, =2, 0 H ~ j1 2t1 , =2, H =2, 0 ~ j1 2t1 , =2, =2, 0 H ~ j1 2t1 , 0, 0, 0 H

12 24 48

L3j t, L3j 2t, L3j 4t,

24 48 96 96 96

L3j 2t1 , 0 L3j 4t1 , 0 L3j 8t1 , 0 L3j 8t1 , 0 L3j 8t1 , =4

l 2n l 2n 1 l 2n l 2n 1

h k l 2n h k l 2n 1

l 2n

* And the enantiomorphous space group.

h f i 2=

=2 R

f d,

2:1:8:39

0 2

except Hj

~ j2 which are computed as and H h f i 3=

=3 R

f d,

2:1:8:40

0

where f is any of the atomic characteristic functions indicated above. The superscripts preceding the symbols in the above summary are appended to the corresponding symbols in Table 2.1.8.1 on their first occurrence. 2.1.8.6. Other non-ideal Fourier p.d.f.’s As pointed out above, the representation of the p.d.f.’s by Fourier series is also applicable to effects of noncrystallographic symmetry. Thus, Shmueli et al. (1985) obtained the following Fourier coefficient for the bicentric distribution in the space group P1 " # =2 R N=4 Q Ck 2= J0 4knj cos # d# 2:1:8:41 0

j1

to be used with equation (2.1.8.5). Furthermore, if we use the important property of the characteristic function as outlined in Section 2.1.4.1, it is easy to write down the Fourier coefficient for a P1 asymmetric unit containing a centrosymmetric fragment centred at a noncrystallographic centre and a number of atoms not related by symmetry. This Fourier for the above partially bicentric arrangement is a product of expressions (2.1.8.17) and (2.1.8.41), with the appropriate number of atoms in each factor (Shmueli & Weiss, 1985a). While the purely bicentric p.d.f. obtained by using (2.1.8.41) with (2.1.8.5) is significantly different from the ideal bicentric p.d.f. given by equation (2.1.5.13) only when the atomic

composition is sufficiently heterogeneous, the above partially bicentric p.d.f. appears to be a useful development even for an equal-atom structure. The problem of the coexistence of several noncrystallographic centres of symmetry within the asymmetric unit of P1, and its effect on the p.d.f. of jEj, was examined by Shmueli, Weiss & Wilson (1989) by the Fourier method. The latter study indicates that the strongest effect is produced by the presence of a single noncrystallographic centre. Another kind of noncrystallographic symmetry is that arising from the presence of centrosymmetric fragments in a noncentrosymmetric structure – the subcentric arrangement already discussed in Section 2.1.5.4. A Fourier-series representation of a non-ideal p.d.f. corresponding to this case was developed by Shmueli, Rabinovich & Weiss (1989), and was also applied to the mathematically equivalent effects of dispersion and presence of heavy scatterers in centrosymmetric special positions in a noncentrosymmetric space group. A variety of other non-ideal p.d.f.’s occur when heavy atoms are present in special positions (Shmueli & Weiss, 1988). Without going into the details of this development, it can be noted that if the atoms are distributed among k types of Wyckoff positions, the characteristic function corresponding to the p.d.f. of jEj is a product of the k characteristic functions, each of which is related to one of these special positions; the same property of the characteristic function as that in Section 2.1.4.1 is here utilized. 2.1.8.7. Comparison of the correction-factor and Fourier approaches The need for theoretical non-ideal distributions was exemplified by Fig. 2.1.7.1(a), referred to above, and the performance of the two approaches described above, for this particular example, is shown in

208

2.1. STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE WEIGHTED RECIPROCAL LATTICE Fig. 2.1.7.1(b). Briefly, the Fourier p.d.f. shows an excellent agreement with the histogram of recalculated jEj values, while the agreement attained by the Hermite correction factor is much less satisfactory, even for the (longest available to us) five-term expansion. It must be pointed out that (i) the inadequacy of ‘short’ correction factors, in the example shown, is due to the large deviation from the ideal behaviour and (ii) the number of terms used there in the Fourier summation is twenty, whereafter the summation is terminated. Obviously, the computation of twenty (or more) Fourier coefficients is easier than that of five terms in the correction factor. The convergence of the Fourier series is very satisfactory. It appears that the (analytically) exact Fourier approach is the preferred one in cases of large or intermediate deviations, while the correction-factor approach may cope well with small ones. As far as the availability of symmetry-dependent centric and acentric p.d.f.’s is concerned, correction factors are available for all the space groups (see Table 2.1.7.1), while Fourier coefficients of

p.d.f.’s are available for the first 206 space groups (see Table 2.1.8.1). It should be pointed out that p.d.f.’s based on the correction-factor method cope very well with cubic symmetries higher than Fd 3, even if the asymmetric unit of the space group is strongly heterogeneous (Rabinovich et al., 1991b). Both approaches described in this section are related to the characteristic function of the required p.d.f. The correction-factor p.d.f.’s (2.1.7.5) and (2.1.7.6) can be obtained by expanding the logarithm of the appropriate characteristic function in a series of cumulants [e.g. equation (2.1.4.13); see also Shmueli & Wilson (1982)], truncating the series and performing its term-by-term Fourier inversion. The Fourier p.d.f., on the other hand, is computed by forming a Fourier series whose coefficients are exact analytical forms of the characteristic function at points related to the summation indices [e.g. equations (2.1.8.5), (2.1.8.9) and (2.1.8.11), and Table 2.1.8.1] and truncating the series when the terms become small enough.

209


2.2. Direct methods BY C. GIACOVAZZO 2.2.1. List of symbols and abbreviations fj Zj N m

2.2.3. Origin specification

atomic scattering factor of jth atom atomic number of jth atom number of atoms in the unit cell order of the point group p q N P P P r p , r q , r N , . . . Zjr , Zjr , Zjr , . . . j1

j1

(a) Once the origin has been chosen, the symmetry operators Cs Rs , Ts and, through them, the algebraic form of the s.f. remain fixed. A shift of the origin through a vector with coordinates X0 transforms 'h into '0h 'h

j1

r N is always abbreviated to r when N is the number of atoms in the cell p q N P P P P P P fj2 , fj2 , fj2 , . . . p, q, N , ... j1

s.f. n.s.f. cs. ncs. s.i. s.s. C R, T 'h

j1

j1

structure factor normalized structure factor centrosymmetric noncentrosymmetric structure invariant structure seminvariant symmetry operator; R is the rotational part, T the translational part phase of the structure factor Fh jFh j expi'h 2.2.2. Introduction

Direct methods are today the most widely used tool for solving small crystal structures. They work well both for equal-atom molecules and when a few heavy atoms exist in the structure. In recent years the theoretical background of direct methods has been improved to take into account a large variety of prior information (the form of the molecule, its orientation, a partial structure, the presence of pseudosymmetry or of a superstructure, the availability of isomorphous data or of data affected by anomalous-dispersion effects, . . .). Owing to this progress and to the increasing availability of powerful computers, a number of effective, highly automated packages for the practical solution of the phase problem are today available to the scientific community. The ab initio crystal structure solution of macromolecules seems not to exceed the potential of direct methods. Many efforts will certainly be devoted to this task in the near future: a report of the first achievements is given in Section 2.2.10. This chapter describes both the traditional direct methods tools and the most recent and revolutionary techniques suitable for macromolecules. The theoretical background and tables useful for origin specification are given in Section 2.2.3; in Section 2.2.4 the procedures for normalizing structure factors are summarized. Phase-determining formulae (inequalities, probabilistic formulae for triplet, quartet and quintet invariants, and for one- and twophase s.s.’s, determinantal formulae) are given in Section 2.2.5. In Section 2.2.6 the connection between direct methods and related techniques in real space is discussed. Practical procedures for solving crystal structures are described in Sections 2.2.7 and 2.2.8, and references to the most extensively used packages are given in Section 2.2.9. The techniques suitable for the ab initio crystal structure solution of macromolecules are described in Section 2.2.10.2. The integration of direct methods with isomorphousreplacement and anomalous-dispersion techniques is briefly described in Sections 2.2.10.3 and 2.2.10.4. The reader will find full coverage of the most important aspects of direct methods in the recent books by Giacovazzo (1998) and Woolfson & Fan (1995).

2:2:3:1

and the symmetry operators Cs into C0s R0s , T0s , where R0s Rs ; T0s Ts Rs

IX0 s 1, 2, . . . , m:

2:2:3:2

(b) Allowed or permissible origins (Hauptman & Karle, 1953, 1959) for a given algebraic form of the s.f. are all those points in direct space which, when taken as origin, maintain the same symmetry operators Cs . The allowed origins will therefore correspond to those points having the same symmetry environment in the sense that they are related to the symmetry elements in the same way. For instance, if Ts 0 for s 1, . . . , 8, then the allowed origins in Pmmm are the eight inversion centres. To each functional form of the s.f. a set of permissible origins will correspond. (c) A translation between permissible origins will be called a permissible or allowed translation. Trivial allowed translations correspond to the lattice periods or to their multiples. A change of origin by an allowed translation does not change the algebraic form of the s.f. Thus, according to (2.2.3.2), all origins allowed by a fixed functional form of the s.f. will be connected by translational vectors Xp such that Rs

IXp V,

s 1, 2, . . . , m,

2:2:3:3

where V is a vector with zero or integer components. In centred space groups, an origin translation corresponding to a centring vector Bv does not change the functional form of the s.f. Therefore all vectors Bv represent permissible translations. Xp will then be an allowed translation (Giacovazzo, 1974) not only when, as imposed by (2.2.3.3), the difference T0s Ts is equal to one or more lattice units, but also when, for any s, the condition Rs

IXp V Bv ,

s 1, 2, . . . , m; 0, 1 2:2:3:4

is satisfied. We will call any set of cs. or ncs. space groups having the same allowed origin translations a Hauptman–Karle group (H–K group). The 94 ncs. primitive space groups, the 62 primitive cs. groups, the 44 ncs. centred space groups and the 30 cs. centred space groups can be collected into 13, 4, 14 and 5 H–K groups, respectively (Hauptman & Karle, 1953, 1956; Karle & Hauptman, 1961; Lessinger & Wondratschek, 1975). In Tables 2.2.3.1–2.2.3.4 the H–K groups are given together with the allowed origin translations. (d) Let us consider a product of structure factors FhA11 FhA22 . . . FhAnn

n Q j1

A

Fhjj

exp i

n P j1

! Aj 'hj

n Q

jFhj jAj ,

j1

2:2:3:5 Aj being integer Pnumbers. The factor nj1 Aj 'hj is the phase of the product (2.2.3.5). A structure invariant (s.i.) is a product (2.2.3.5) such that


2h X0

2.2. DIRECT METHODS Table 2.2.3.1. Allowed origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for centrosymmetric primitive space groups H–K group h, k, lP2, 2, 2 Space group

P1

Pmna

2 m 21 P m 2 P c 21 P c Pmmm

Pcca

Pnnm

Pnnn

Pmmn

Pccm

Pbcn

Pban

Pbca

Pmma

Pnma

P

h k, lP2, 2 4 P m 42 P m 4 P n 42 P n 4 P mm m 4 P cc m 4 P bm n 4 P nc n 4 P bm m 4 P nc m

Pbam Pccn Pbcm

4 P mm n 4 P cc n 42 P mc m 42 P cm m 42 P bc n 42 P nm n 42 P bc m 42 P nm m 42 P mc n 42 P cm n

(0, 0, 0); 12 , 0, 0; 0, 12 , 0; 0, 0, 12;

Vector hs seminvariantly associated with h h, k, l

0, 12 , 12 12 , 0, 12 12 , 12 , 0 12 , 12 , 12

h k lP2

P3

R 3

P31m

R 3m

P31c

R 3c

P3m1

Pm 3

P3c1

Pn 3

6 m 63 P m 6 P mm m 6 P cc m 63 P cm m 63 P mc m

Pa 3

P

Pnna Allowed origin translations

lP2

Pm 3m Pn 3n Pm 3n Pn 3m

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 12 , 12 , 0 12 , 12 , 12

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12

(0, 0, 0) 12 , 12 , 12

h, k, l

h k, l

(l)

h k l

Seminvariant modulus v s

(2, 2, 2)

(2, 2)

(2)

(2)

Seminvariant phases

'eee

'eee ; 'ooe

'eee ; 'eoe 'oee ; 'ooe

'eee ; 'ooe 'oeo ; 'eoo

Number of semindependent phases to be specified

3

2

1

1

n P

Aj hj 0:

n P

2:2:3:6

j1

Since jFhj j are usually known from experiment, it is often said that s.i.’s are combinations of phases n P

Aj hj Xp r,

p 1, 2, . . .

2:2:3:8

j1

Aj 'hj ,

where r is a positive integer, null or a negative integer. Conditions (2.2.3.8) can be written in the following more useful form (Hauptman & Karle, 1953): n P

2:2:3:7

j1

Aj hsj 0 mod v s ,

2:2:3:9

j1

for which (2.2.3.6) holds. F0 , Fh F h , Fh Fk Fhk , Fh Fk Fl Fhkl , Fh Fk Fl Fp Fhklp are examples of s.i.’s for n 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. The value of any s.i. does not change with an arbitrary shift of the space-group origin and thus it will depend on the crystal structure only. (e) A structure seminvariant (s.s.) is a product of structure factors [or a combination of phases (2.2.3.7)] whose value is unchanged when the origin is moved by an allowed translation. Let Xp ’s be the permissible origin translations of the space group. Then the product (2.2.3.5) [or the sum (2.2.3.7)] is an s.s., if, in accordance with (2.2.3.1),

where hsj is the vector seminvariantly associated with the vector hj and v s is the seminvariant modulus. In Tables 2.2.3.1–2.2.3.4, the reflection hs seminvariantly associated with h h, k, l, the seminvariant modulus v s and seminvariant phases are given for every H–K group. The symbol of any group (cf. Giacovazzo, 1974) has the structure hs Lv s , where L stands for the lattice symbol. This symbol is underlined if the space group is cs. By definition, if the class of permissible origin has been chosen, that is to say, if the algebraic form of the symmetry operators has been fixed, then the value of an s.s. does not depend on the origin but on the crystal structure only.

211

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.2.3.2. Allowed origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for noncentrosymmetric primitive space groups

Table 2.2.3

H–K group

H–K group

h, k, lP(0, 0, 0)

h, k, lP(2, 0, 2)

h, k, lP(0, 2, 0)

h, k, lP(2, 2, 2)

h, k, lP(2, 2, 0)

h k, lP(2, 0)

h k, lP(2

Space group

P1

P2 P21

Pm Pc

P222 P2221 P21 21 2 P21 21 21

Pmm2 Pmc21 Pcc2 Pma2 Pca21 Pnc2 Pmn21 Pba2 Pna21 Pnn2

P4 P41 P42 P43 P4mm P4bm P42 cm P42 nm P4cc P4nc P42 mc P42 bc

P 4 P422 P421 2 P41 22 P41 21 2 P42 22 P42 21 2 P43 22 P43 21 2 P 42m P 42c P 421 m P 421 c P 4m2 P 4c2 P 4b2 P 4n2

Allowed origin translations

(x, y, z)

(0, y, 0) 0, y, 12 12 , y, 0 12 , y, 12

(x, 0, z) x, 12 , z

(0, 0, 0) 12 , 0, 0 0, 12 , 0 0, 0, 12 0, 12 , 12 12 , 0, 12 12 , 12 , 0 12 , 12 , 12

(0, 0, z) 0, 12 , z 12 , 0, z 12 , 12 , z

(0, 0, z) 12 , 12 , z

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 12 , 12 , 0 12 , 12 , 12


(h, k, l)

(h, k, l)

(h, k, l)

(h, k, l)

(h, k, l)

h k, l

h k, l


(0, 0, 0)

(2, 0, 2)

(0, 2, 0)

(2, 2, 2)

(2, 2, 0)

(2, 0)

(2, 2)

Seminvariant phases

'000

'e0e

'0e0

'eee

'ee0

'ee0 'oo0

'eee 'ooe

Allowed variations for the semindependent phases

k1k

k1k, k2k if k0

k1k, k2k if hl0

k2k

k1k, k2k if l0

k1k, k2k if l0

k2k


3

3

3

3

3

2

2

( f ) Suppose that we have chosen the symmetry operators Cs and thus fixed the functional form of the s.f.’s and the set of allowed origins. In order to describe the structure in direct space a unique reference origin must be fixed. Thus the phase-determining process must also require a unique permissible origin congruent to the values assigned to the phases. More specifically, at the beginning of the structure-determining process by direct methods we shall assign as many phases as necessary to define a unique origin among those allowed (and, as we shall see, possibly to fix the enantiomorph). From the theory developed so far it is obvious that arbitrary phases can be assigned to one or more s.f.’s if there is at least one allowed origin which, fixed as the origin of the unit cell, will give those phase values to the chosen reflections. The concept of linear dependence will help us to fix the origin. (g) n phases 'hj are linearly semidependent (Hauptman & Karle, 1956) when the n vectors hsj seminvariantly associated with the hj are linearly dependent modulo v s , v s being the seminvariant modulus of the space group. In other words, when

n P

Aj hsj 0 mod v s ,

Aq 6 0 mod v s

2:2:3:10

j1

is satisfied. The second condition means that at least one Aq exists that is not congruent to zero modulo each of the components of v s . If (2.2.3.10) is not satisfied for any n-set of integers Aj , the phases 'hj are linearly semindependent. If (2.2.3.10) is valid for n 1 and A 1, then h1 is said to be linearly semidependent and 'h1 is an s.s. It may be concluded that a seminvariant phase is linearly semidependent, and, vice versa, that a phase linearly semidependent is an s.s. In Tables 2.2.3.1–2.2.3.4 the allowed variations (which are those due to the allowed origin translations) for the semindependent phases are given for every H–K group. If 'h1 is linearly semindependent its value can be fixed arbitrarily because at least one origin compatible with the given value exists. Once 'h1 is assigned, the necessary condition to be able to fix a second phase 'h2 is that it should be linearly semindependent of 'h1 .

212

2.2. DIRECT METHODS

groups

Table 2.2.3.2. (cont.) H–K group

k, lP(2, 0)

mm bm cm nm cc nc mc bc

h k, lP(2, 2) P4 P422 P421 2 P41 22 P41 21 2 P42 22 P42 21 2 P43 22 P43 21 2 P42m P 42c P421 m P421 c P 4m2 P 4c2 P 4b2 P 4n2

h

2h 4k 3lP(6)

(l)P(0)

(l)P(2)

h k lP(0)

h k lP(2)

P3 P31 P32 P3m1 P3c1

P312 P31 12 P32 12 P6 P6m2 P6c2

P31m P31c P6 P61 P65 P64 P63 P62 P6mm P6cc P63 cm P63 mc

P321 P31 21 P32 21 P622 P61 22 P65 22 P62 22 P64 22 P63 22 P62m P62c

R3 R3m R3c

R32 P23 P21 3 P432 P42 32 P43 32 P41 32 P 43m P 43n

k, lP(3, 0)

0, z) 1 2 , z

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 12 , 12 , 0 12 , 12 , 12

(0, 0, z) 13 , 23 , z 23 , 13 , z

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 13 , 23 , 0 13 , 23 , 12 23 , 13 , 0 23 , 13 , 12

(0, 0, z)

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12

(x, x, x)

(0, 0, 0) 12 , 12 , 12

k, l

h k, l

h

2h 4k 3l

(l)

(l)

h k l

h k l

0)

(2, 2)

(3, 0)

(6)

(0)

(2)

(0)

(2)

'eee 'ooe

'hk0 if h (mod 3)

'hkl if 2h 4k 3l 0 (mod 6)

'hk0

'hke

'h; k; hk

'eee ; 'ooe 'oeo ; 'ooe

k2k

k1k, k3k if l 0

k2k if h k (mod 3) k3k if l 0 (mod 2)

k1k

k2k

k1k

k2k

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

k, k2k if 0

k, l

k0

Similarly, the necessary condition to be able arbitrarily to assign a third phase 'h3 is that it should be linearly semindependent from 'h1 and 'h2 . In general, the number of linearly semindependent phases is equal to the dimension of the seminvariant vector v s (see Tables 2.2.3.1–2.2.3.4). The reader will easily verify in (h, k, l) P (2, 2, 2) that the three phases 'oee , 'eoe , 'eoo define the origin (o indicates odd, e even). (h) From the theory summarized so far it is clear that a number of semindependent phases 'hj , equal to the dimension of the seminvariant vector v s , may be arbitrarily assigned in order to fix the origin. However, it is not always true that only one allowed origin compatible with the given phases exists. An additional condition is required such that only one permissible origin should lie at the intersection of the lattice planes corresponding to the origin-fixing reflections (or on the lattice plane h if one reflection is sufficient to define the origin). It may be shown that the condition is verified if the determinant formed with the vectors seminvariantly

associated with the origin reflections, reduced modulo v s , has the value 1. In other words, such a determinant should be primitive modulo v s . For example, in P1 the three reflections h1 345, h2 139, h3 784 define the origin uniquely because 3 4 5 reduced mod 2, 2, 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 1: 1 3 9 ! 7 8 4 1 0 0 Furthermore, in P4mm hs h k, l, v s 2, 0 h1 5, 2, 0, define the origin uniquely since

213

h2 6, 2, 1

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.2.3.3. Allowed origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for centrosymmetric non-primitive space groups H–K group (h, l) C (2, 2) 2 C m 2 C c Cmcm

Space groups

Cmca

(k, l) I (2, 2)

h k lF2

Immm

Fmmm

Ibam

Fddd

Ibca

Fm3

Imma

Fd 3

Cmmm

Fm3m

Cccm

Fm3c

Cmma Ccca

Fd 3m Fd 3c

(l) I (2) 4 I m 41 I a 4 I mm m 4 I cm m 41 I md a 41 I cd a

I Im 3 Ia 3 Im 3m Ia 3d


(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 12 , 0, 0 12 , 0, 12

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 0, 12 , 0 12 , 0, 0

(0, 0, 0) 12 , 12 , 12

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12

(0, 0, 0)


h, l

k, l

h k l

(l)

h, k, l


(2, 2)

(2, 2)

(2)

(2)

(1, 1, 1)

Seminvariant phases

'eee

'eee

'eee

'eoe ; 'eee 'ooe ; 'oee

All


2

2

1

1

0

Table 2.2.3.4. Allowed origin translations, seminvariant moduli and phases for noncentrosymmetric non-primitive space groups H–K group

H–K group

(k, l)C(0, 2)

(h, l)C(0, 0)

(h, l)C(2, 0)

(h, l)C(2, 2)

(h, l)A(2, 0)

(h, l)I(2, 0)

(h, l)I(2, 2)

Space group

C2

Cm Cc

Cmm2 Cmc21 Ccc2

C222 C2221

Amm2 Abm2 Ama2 Aba2

Imm2 Iba2 Ima2

I222 I21 21 21


(0, y, 0) 0, y, 12

(x, 0, z)

(0, 0, z) 12 , 0, z

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 12 , 0, 0 12 , 0, 12

(0, 0, z) 12 , 0, z

(0, 0, z) 12 , 0, z

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 0, 12 , 0 12 , 0, 0


(k, l)

(h, l)

(h, l)

(h, l)

(h, l)

(h, l)

(h, l)


(0, 2)

(0, 0)

(2, 0)

(2, 2)

(2, 0)

(2, 0)

(2, 2)

Seminvariant phases

'e0e

'0e0

'ee0

'eee

'ee0

'ee0

'eee

k1k, k2k if k 0

Allowed variations for the semindependent phases


2

k1k, k2k if l 0

k1k

2

2

214

k1k, k2k if l 0

k2k

2

2

k1k, k2k if l 0

2

k2k

2

7 0 8 1

reduced mod 2, 0 1 0 1: ! 0 1

2.2. DIRECT METHODS Eh

(i) If an s.s. or an s.i. has a general value ' for a given structure, it will have a value ' for the enantiomorph structure. If ' 0, the s.s. has the same value for both enantiomorphs. Once the origin has been assigned, in ncs. space groups the sign of a given s.s. ' 6 0, can be assigned to fix the enantiomorph. In practice it is often advisable to use an s.s. or an s.i. whose value is as near as possible to =2.

"h

Fh P

N

2.2.4.1. Definition of normalized structure factor The normalized structure factors E (see also Chapter 2.1) are calculated according to (Hauptman & Karle, 1953) jEh j2 jFh j2 =hjFh j2 i,

2:2:4:1

where jFh j2 is the squared observed structure-factor magnitude on the absolute scale and hjFh j2 i is the expected value of jFh j2 . hjFh j2 i depends on the available a priori information. Often, but not always, this may be considered as a combination of several typical situations. We mention: (a) No structural information. The atomic positions are considered random variables. Then hjFh j2 i "h

N P j1

fj2 "h

P N

so that

pace groups

:

2:2:4:2

"h takes account of the effect of space-group symmetry (see Chapter 2.1). (b) P atomic groups having a known configuration but with unknown orientation and position (Main, 1976). Then a certain number of interatomic distances rj1 j2 are known and ! Mi P X X X sin 2qr j j 1 2 hjFh j2 i "h fj 1 fj 2 , N 2qr j j 1 2 i1 j 6j 1 1

2.2.4. Normalized structure factors

1=2

2

where Mi is the number of atoms in the ith molecular fragment and q jhj. (c) P atomic groups with a known configuration, correctly oriented, but with unknown position (Main, 1976). Then a certain group of interatomic vectors rj1 j2 is fixed and ! Mi P P P P 2 hjFh j i "h fj1 fj2 exp 2ih rj1 j2 : N i1 j1 6j2 1

The above formula has been derived on the assumption that primitive positional random variables are uniformly distributed over the unit cell. Such an assumption may be considered unfavourable (Giacovazzo, 1988) in space groups for which the allowed shifts of origin, consistent with the chosen algebraic form for the symmetry operators Cs , are arbitrary displacements along any polar axes. Thanks to the indeterminacy in the choice of origin, the first of the shifts t i (to be applied to the ith fragment in order to translate atoms in the correct positions) may be restricted to a region which is smaller than the unit cell (e.g. in P2 we are free to specify

Table 2.2.3.4. (cont.) H–K group (h, l)I(2, 2)

h k lF2

h k lF4

(l)I(0)

(l)I(2)

2k

(l)F(0)

I

m2 2 a2

I222 I21 21 21

F432 F41 32

F222 F23 F 43m F 43c

I4 I41 I4mm I4cm I41 md I41 cd

I422 I41 22 I 42m I 42d

I 4 I 4m2 I 4c2

Fmm2 Fdd2

I23 I21 3 I432 I41 32 I 43m I 43d

0, z) 0, z

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 0, 12 , 0 12 , 0, 0

(0, 0, 0) 12 , 12 , 12

(0, 0, 0) 14 , 14 , 14 12 , 12 , 12 34 , 34 , 34

(0, 0, z)

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12

(0, 0, 0) 0, 0, 12 12 , 0, 34 12 , 0, 14

(0, 0, z)

(0, 0, 0)

l)

(h, l)

h k l

h k l

(l)

(l)

2k

(l)

h, k, l

0)

(2, 2)

(2)

(4)

(0)

(2)

(4)

(0)

(1, 1, 1)

0

'eee

'eee

'hkl with hkl 0 (mod 4)

'hk0

'hke

'hkl with 2k l 0 (mod 4)

'hk0

All

k2k

k2k

k2k if hkl 0 (mod 2) k4k if h k l 1 (mod 2)

k1k

k2k

k2k if hkl 0 (mod 2) k4k if 2k l 1 (mod 2)

k1k

All

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

l)I(2, 0)

1k, k2k l0

215

lI4

l

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION the origin along the diad axis by restricting t 1 to the family of vectors ft 1 g of type x0z). The practical consequence is that hjFh j2 i is significantly modified in polar space groups if h satisfies h t 1 0, where t 1 belongs to the family of restricted vectors ft 1 g. (d) Atomic groups correctly positioned. Then (Main, 1976; Giacovazzo, 1983a) P hjFh j2 i jFp; h j2 "h q , where Fp, h is the structure factor of the partial known structure and q are the atoms with unknown positions. (e) A pseudotranslational symmetry is present. Let u1 , u2 , u3 , . . . be the pseudotranslation vectors of order n1 , n2 , n3 , . . ., respectively. Furthermore, let p be the number of atoms (symmetry equivalents included) whose positions are related by pseudotranslational symmetry and q the number of atoms (symmetry equivalents included) whose positions are not related by any pseudotranslation. Then (Cascarano et al., 1985a,b) P P hjFh j2 i "h h p q , where n1 n2 n3 . . . h m and h is the number of times for which algebraic congruences h

h Rs ui 0 mod 1 for i 1, 2, 3, . . . are simultaneously satisfied when s varies from 1 to m. If h 0 then Fh is said to be a superstructure reflection, otherwise it is a substructure reflection. Often substructures are not ideal: e.g. atoms related by pseudotranslational symmetry are ideally located but of different type (replacive deviations from ideality); or they are equal but not ideally located (displacive deviations); or a combination of the two situations occurs. In these cases a correlation exists between the substructure and the superstructure. It has been shown (Mackay, 1953; Cascarano et al., 1988a) that the scattering power of the substructural part may be estimated via a statistical analysis of diffraction data for ideal pseudotranslational symmetry or for displacive deviations from it, while it is not estimable in the case of replacive deviations. 2.2.4.2. Definition of quasi-normalized structure factor

Fig. 2.2.4.1. Probability density functions for cs. and ncs. crystals.

be calculated without having estimated the vibrational motion of the atoms. This is usually obtained by the well known Wilson plot (Wilson, 1942), according to which observed data are divided into ranges of s2 sin2 =2 and averages of intensity hIh i are taken in each shell. Reflection multiplicities and other effects of space-group symmetry on intensities must be taken into account when such averages are calculated. The shells are symmetrically overlapped in order to reduce statistical fluctuations and are restricted so that the number of reflections in each shell is reasonably large. For each shell KhIi hjFj2 i hjF o j2 i exp 2Bs2

2:2:4:3

should be obtained, where K is the scale factor needed to place X-ray intensities on the absolute scale, B is the overall thermal parameter and hjF o j2 i is the expected value of jFj2 in which it is assumed that all the atoms are at rest. hjF o j2 i depends upon the structural information that is available (see Section 2.2.4.1 for some examples). Equation (2.2.4.3) may be rewritten as ( ) hIi ln ln K 2Bs2 , 2 o hjF j i

When probability theory is not used, the quasi-normalized structure factors E h and the unitary structure factors Uh are often used. E h and Uh are defined according to jE h j2 "h jEh j2 ! . P N Uh Fh fj : PN

j1

Since j1 fj is the largest possible value for Fh , Uh represents the fraction of Fh with respect to its largest possible value. Therefore 0 jUh j 1: If atoms are equal, then Uh E h =N 1=2 . 2.2.4.3. The calculation of normalized structure factors N.s.f.’s cannot be calculated by applying (2.2.4.1) to observed s.f.’s because: (a) the observed magnitudes Ih (already corrected for Lp factor, absorption, . . .) are on a relative scale; (b) hjFh j2 i cannot

Fig. 2.2.4.2. Cumulative distribution functions for cs. and ncs. crystals.

216

2.2. DIRECT METHODS 2

which plotted at various s should be a straight line of which the slope (2B) and intercept (ln K) on the logarithmic axis can be obtained by applying a linear least-squares procedure. Very often molecular geometries produce perceptible departures from linearity in the logarithmic Wilson plot. However, the more extensive the available a priori information on the structure is, the closer, on the average, are the Wilson-plot curves to their leastsquares straight lines. Accurate estimates of B and K require good strategies (Rogers & Wilson, 1953) for: (1) treatment of weak measured data. If weak data are set to zero, there will be bias in the statistics. Methods are, however, available (French & Wilson, 1978) that provide an a posteriori estimate of weak (even negative) intensities by means of Bayesian statistics. (2) treatment of missing weak data (Rogers et al., 1955; Vickovic´ & Viterbo, 1979). All unobserved reflections may assume

Table 2.2.4.1. Moments of the distributions (2.2.4.4) and (2.2.4.5) REs is the percentage of n.s.f.’s with amplitude greater than the threshold Es .

jFo min j2 =3 for cs. space groups jFo min j2 =2 for ncs. space groups, where the subscript ‘o min’ refers to the minimum observed intensity. Once K and B have been estimated, Eh values can be obtained from experimental data by KIh jEh j2 o 2 , hjFh j i exp 2Bs2 where hjFho j2 i is the expected value of jFho j2 for the reflection h on the basis of the available a priori information. 2.2.4.4. Probability distributions of normalized structure factors Under some fairly general assumptions (see Chapter 2.1) probability distribution functions for the variable jEj for cs. and ncs. structures are (see Fig. 2.2.4.1) r 2 2 E djEj 2:2:4:4 exp 1 PjEj djEj 2 djEj 2jEj exp jEj2 djEj,

2:2:4:5

respectively. Corresponding cumulative functions are (see Fig. 2.2.4.2) r ZjEj 2 t2 jEj exp dt erf p , 1 NjEj 2 2

1 NjEj

2t exp t2 dt 1

exp jEj2 :

0

Some moments of the distributions (2.2.4.4) and (2.2.4.5) are listed in Table 2.2.4.1. In the absence of other indications for a given crystal structure, a cs. or an ncs. space group will be preferred according to whether the statistical tests yield values closer to column 2 or to column 3 of Table 2.2.4.1. For further details about the distribution of intensities see Chapter 2.1. 2.2.5. Phase-determining formulae From the earliest periods of X-ray structure analysis several authors (Ott, 1927; Banerjee, 1933; Avrami, 1938) have tried to determine atomic positions directly from diffraction intensities. Significant

Noncentrosymmetric distribution

hjEji hjEj2 i hjEj3 i hjEj4 i hjEj5 i hjEj6 i hjE2 hE2 hE2 hjE2 R(1) R(2) R(3)

0.798 1.000 1.596 3.000 6.383 15.000 0.968 2.000 8.000 8.691 0.320 0.050 0.003

0.886 1.000 1.329 2.000 3.323 6.000 0.736 1.000 2.000 2.415 0.368 0.018 0.0001

1ji 12 i 13 i 1j3 i

2.2.5.1. Inequalities among structure factors An extensive system of inequalities exists for the coefficients of a Fourier series which represents a positive function. This can restrict the allowed values for the phases of the s.f.’s in terms of measured structure-factor magnitudes. Harker & Kasper (1948) derived two types of inequalities: Type 1. A modulus is bound by a combination of structure factors: jUh j2

m 1X as hUhI m s1

Rs ,

2:2:5:1

where m is the order of the point group and as h exp 2ih Ts . Applied to low-order space groups, (2.2.5.1) gives P1 : jUh; k; l j2 1 P1 : Uh;2 k; l 0:5 0:5U2h; 2k; 2l P21 : jUh; k; l j2 0:5 0:5 1k U2h; 0; 2l :

0

ZjEj

Centrosymmetric distribution

developments are the derivation of inequalities and the introduction of probabilistic techniques via the use of joint probability distribution methods (Hauptman & Karle, 1953).

and 1 PjEj

Criterion

The meaning of each inequality is easily understandable: in P1, for example, U2h; 2k; 2l must be positive if jUh; k; l j is large enough. Type 2. The modulus of the sum or of the difference of two structure factors is bound by a combination of structure factors: ( m m X X 1 jUh Uh0 j2 as hUhI Rs as h0 Uh0 I Rs m s1 s1 " #) m X as h0 Uh h0 Rs 2Re 2:2:5:2 s1

where Re stands for ‘real part of’. Equation (2.2.5.2) applied to P1 gives

217

jUh Uh0 j2 2 2jUh

h0 j cos 'h h0 :

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION A variant of (2.2.5.2) valid for cs. space groups is Uh Uh0 2 1 Uhh0 1 Uh

h0 :

After Harker & Kasper’s contributions, several other inequalities were discovered (Gillis, 1948; Goedkoop, 1950; Okaya & Nitta, 1952; de Wolff & Bouman, 1954; Bouman, 1956; Oda et al., 1961). The most general are the Karle–Hauptman inequalities (Karle & Hauptman, 1950): U0 U h1 U h2 . . . U hn Uh1 U0 Uh1 h2 . . . Uh1 hn Uh2 Uh2 h1 U0 . . . Uh2 hn 0: 2:2:5:3 Dm .. . . .. .. .. .. . . . Uh Uh h Uh h . . . U0 n

n

1

n

2

The determinant can be of any order but the leading column (or row) must consist of U’s with different indices, although, within the column, symmetry-related U’s may occur. For n 2 and h2 2h1 2h, equation (2.2.5.3) reduces to U0 U h U 2h D3 Uh U0 U h 0, U2h Uh U0

suitable set of diffraction magnitudes. The method was first proposed by Hauptman & Karle (1953) and was developed further by several authors (Bertaut, 1955a,b, 1960; Klug, 1958; Naya et al., 1964, 1965; Giacovazzo, 1980a). From a probabilistic point of view the crystallographic problem is clear: the joint distribution PEh1 , . . . , Ehn , from which the conditional distributions (2.2.5.5) can be derived, involves a number of normalized structure factors each of which is a linear sum of random variables (the atomic contributions to the structure factors). So, for the probabilistic interpretation of the phase problem, the atomic positions and the reciprocal vectors may be considered as random variables. A further problem is that of identifying, for a given , a suitable set of magnitudes jEj on which primarily depends. The formulation of the nested neighbourhood principle first (Hauptman, 1975) fixed the idea of defining a sequence of sets of reflections each contained in the succeeding one and having the property that any s.i. or s.s. may be estimated via the magnitudes constituting the various neighbourhoods. A subsequent more general theory, the representation method (Giacovazzo, 1977a, 1980b), arranges for any the set of intensities in a sequence of subsets in order of their expected effectiveness (in the statistical sense) for the estimation of . In the following sections the main formulae estimating low-order invariants and seminvariants or relating phases to other phases and diffraction magnitudes are given.

which, for cs. structures, gives the Harker & Kasper inequality 2.2.5.3. Triplet relationships

Uh2 0:5 0:5U2h :

The basic formula for the estimation of the triplet phase 3=2 'h 'k 'h k given the parameter G 23 2 R h R k R h k is Cochran’s (1955) formula

For m 3, equation (2.2.5.3) becomes U0 U h U k D3 Uh U0 Uh k 0, Uk Uk h U0 from which 1

jUh j2

jUk j2

jUh k j2 2jUh Uk Uh k j cos h; k 0, 2:2:5:4

where h; k 'h

'k

'h k :

P'h 2I0

If the moduli jUh j, jUk j, jUh k j are large enough, (2.2.5.4) is not satisfied for all values of h; k . In cs. structures the eventual check that one of the two values of h; k does not satisfy (2.2.5.4) brings about the unambiguous identification of the sign of the product Uh Uk Uh k . It was observed (Gillis, 1948) that ‘there was a number of cases in which both signs satisfied the inequality, one of them by a comfortable margin and the other by only a relatively small margin. In almost all such cases it was the former sign which was the correct one. That suggests that the method may have some power in reserve in the sense that there are still fundamentally stronger inequalities to be discovered’. Today we identify this power in reserve in the use of probability theory. 2.2.5.2. Probabilistic phase relationships for structure invariants For any space group (see Section 2.2.3) there are linear combinations of phases with cosines that are, in principle, fixed by the jEj magnitudes alone (s.i.’s) or by the jEj values and the trigonometric form of the structure factor (s.s.’s). This result greatly stimulated the calculation of conditional distribution functions where R h jEh j,

P

PjfRg,

2:2:5:6 P 2I0 G 1 expG cos , PN n where n j1 Zj , Zj is the atomic number of the jth atom and In is the modified Bessel function of order n. In Fig. 2.2.5.1 the distribution P is shown for different values of G. The conditional probability distribution for 'h , given a set of 3=2 'kj 'h kj and Gj 23 2 R h R kj R h kj , is given (Karle & Hauptman, 1956; Karle & Karle, 1966) by

2:2:5:5

Ai 'hi is an s.i. or an s.s. and fRg is a

where

" 2

r P j1

"

1

h ,

exp cos'h

#2 Gh; kj cos'kj 'h

r P

j1

kj

#2 Gh; kj sin'kj 'h

P

j Gh; kj

sin'kj 'h

kj

j Gh; kj

cos'kj 'h

kj

tan h P

2:2:5:7

kj

:

2:2:5:8

2:2:5:9

h is the most probable value for 'h . The variance of 'h may be obtained from (2.2.5.7) and is given by 1 X 2 I2n Vh I0 1 3 n2 n1 4I0

1

1 X I2n1 n0

2n 12

,

2:2:5:10

which is plotted in Fig. 2.2.5.2. Equation (2.2.5.9) is the so-called tangent formula. According to (2.2.5.10), the larger is the more reliable is the relation 'h h . 3=2 For an equal-atom structure 3 2 N 1=2 .

218

2.2. DIRECT METHODS 'h1 'h2

'h1 h2 'k

'k ,

where k is a free vector. The formula retains the same algebraic form as (2.2.5.6), but 2R h1 R h2 R h3 p G 1 Q, 2:2:5:13 N where h3 h1 h2 , Q

X k

Fig. 2.2.5.1. Curves of 3=2 23 2 jEh Ek Eh k j.

(2.2.5.6)

for

some

values

of

h1 h2 j cos'h1 p

' ChjEk j 26

3=2

4

p

'h2

'h1 h2 p

jEj jEh1 k j

jEjp jEh1 h2 k jp

jEjp ik

1=2

8 jEh1 j2 jEh2 j2 jEh1 h2 j2 . . . , 4

2:2:5:12

where C is a constant which differs for cs. and ncs. crystals, jEjp is the average value of jEjp and p is normally chosen to be some small number. Several modifications of (2.2.5.12) have been proposed (Hauptman, 1964, 1970; Karle, 1970a; Giacovazzo, 1977b). A recent formula (Cascarano, Giacovazzo, Camalli et al., 1984) exploits information contained within the second representation of , that is to say, within the collection of special quintets (see Section 2.2.5.6):

"h2 kRi "h3

P0 m

i1 Bk; i

, 2N

"h2

kRi

kRi ,

kRi

"h2

kRi "h3 kRi

"h2 "k "h2 kRi "h2 "h1 kRi "h3 kRi "h1

kRi

"h3 "k "h3 kRi "h3

kRi

kRi "h3 kRi

"h1 kRi "h2 kRi "h1 kRi "h2 kRi ; P0 m " jEj2 1, "h1 "h2 "h3 i1 Bk; i is assumed to be zero if it is experimentally negative. The prime to the summation warns the reader that precautions have to be taken in order to avoid duplications in the contributions. G may be positive or negative. In particular, if G < 0 the triplet is estimated negative. The accuracy with which the value of is estimated strongly depends on "k . Thus, in practice, only a subset of reciprocal space (the reflections k with large values of ") may be used for estimating . (2.2.5.13) proved to be quite useful in practice. Positive triplet cosines are ranked in order of reliability by (2.2.5.13) markedly better than by Cochran’s parameters. Negative estimated triplet cosines may be excluded from the phasing process and may be used as a figure of merit for finding the correct solution in a multisolution procedure. 2.2.5.4. Triplet relationships using structural information A strength of direct methods is that no knowledge of structure is required for their application. However, when some a priori information is available, it should certainly be a weakness of the methods not to make use of this knowledge. The conditional distribution of given R h R k R h k and the first three of the five kinds of a priori information described in Section 2.2.4.1 is (Main, 1976; Heinermann, 1977a) P '

expf2QR 1 R 2 R 3 cos qg , 2I0 2QR 1 R 2 R 3

where

2:2:5:14

Pp

Q expiq

Fig. 2.2.5.2. Variance (in square radians) as a function of .

kRi

Bk; i "h1 "k "h1 kRi "h1

j1

jEh1 Eh2 E

1 "h1 "h2 "h3

"h3 kRi "h1

The basic conditional formula for sign determination of Eh in cs. crystals is Cochran & Woolfson’s (1955) formula ! r P 3=2 P 12 12 tanh 3 2 jEh j Ekj Eh kj , 2:2:5:11 where P is the probability that Eh is positive and k ranges over the set of known values Ek Eh k . The larger the absolute value of the argument of tanh, the more reliable is the phase indication. An auxiliary formula exploiting all the jEj’s in reciprocal space in order to estimate a single is the B3; 0 formula (Hauptman & Karle, 1958; Karle & Hauptman, 1958) given by

i1 Ak; i =N

Ak; i "k "h1 kRi "h2 kRi "h3 kRi "h2 kRi "h1 kRi "h3 kRi

G

P0 m

i1 gi h1 , h2 , h3 : 2 1=2 hjFh1 j i hjFh2 j2 i1=2 hjFh3 j2 i1=2

h1 , h2 , h3 stand for h, k, h k, and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 for R h , R k , R h k . The quantities hjFhi j2 i have been calculated in Section 2.2.4.1 according to different categories: gi h1 , h2 , h3 is a suitable average of the product of three scattering factors for the ith atomic group, p is the number of atomic groups in the cell including those related by symmetry elements. We have the following categories.

219

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION P'h j . . . 2I0

(a) No structural information (2.2.5.14) then reduces to (2.2.5.6).

1

h ,

exp cos'h

2:2:5:15

where h , the most probable value of 'h , is given by

(b) Randomly positioned and randomly oriented atomic groups Then P gi h1 , h2 , h3 fj fk fl hexp2ih1 rkj h2 rlj iR , j; k; l

tan h ' 02 =01 , 02

and

n h 01 2R 0h R Ep;0 h q

where h. . .iR means rotational average. The average of the exponential term extends over all orientations of the triangle formed by the atoms j, k and l, and is given (Hauptman, 1965) by

Eh0

Bz, t hexp2ih r h0 r0 i 1 1=2 X t2n J z, 2 4n1=2 2z n0 n!

k

Eh0

where

k

1=2 P 0 k Ek

io

Ep;0 k

Ep;0 h k

n h 02 2R 0h I Ep;0 h q

z 2q2 r2 2qrq0 r0 cos 'q cos 'r q02 r02 1=2

2:2:5:16 02

1 2 2

1=2 P 0 k Ek

io

Ep;0 h k

Ep;0 k

:

R and I stand for ‘real P and imaginary part of’, respectively. Furthermore, E0 F= q1=2 is a pseudo-normalized s.f. If no pair 'k , 'h k is known, then

and t 22 qrq0 r0 sin 'q sin 'r =z;

01 2R 0h R 0p; h cos 'p; h

q, q0 , r and r0 are the magnitudes of h, h0 , r and r0 , respectively; 'q and 'r are the angles h, h0 and r, r0 , respectively. (c) Randomly positioned but correctly oriented atomic groups Then m P P gi h1 , h2 , h3 fj fk fl

02 2R 0h R 0p; h sin 'p; h and (2.2.5.15) reduces to Sim’s (1959) equation P'h ' 2I0 G

1

expG cos'h

'p; h ,

2:2:5:17

where G 2R 0h R 0p; h . In this case 'p; h is the most probable value of 'h .

s1 j; k; l

exp2ih1 Rs rkj h2 Rs rlk , where the summations over j, k, l are taken over all the atoms in the ith group. A modified expression for gi has to be used in polar space groups for special triplets (Giacovazzo, 1988). Translation functions [see Chapter 2.3; for an overview, see also Beurskens et al. (1987)] are also used to determine the position of a correctly oriented molecular fragment. Such functions can work in direct space [expressed as Patterson convolutions (Buerger, 1959; Nordman, 1985) or electron-density convolutions (Rossmann et al., 1964; Argos & Rossmann, 1980)] or in reciprocal space [expressed as correlation functions (Crowther & Blow, 1967; Karle, 1972; Langs, 1985) or residual functions (Rae, 1977)]. Both the probabilistic methods and the translation functions are quite efficient tools: the decision as to which one to use is often a personal choice. (d) Atomic groups correctly positioned Let p be the number of atoms with known position, q the number of atoms with unknown position, Fp and Fq the corresponding structure factors. Tangent recycling methods (Karle, 1970b) may be used for recovering the complete crystal structure. The phase 'p; h is accepted in the starting set as a useful approximation of 'h if jFp; h j > jFh j, where is the fraction of the total scattering power contained in the fragment and where jFh j is associated with jEh j > 1:5. Tangent recycling methods are applied (Beurskens et al., 1979) with greater effectiveness to difference s.f.’s F jFj jFp j expi'p . The weighted tangent formula uses Fh values in order to convert them to more probable Fq; h values. From a probabilistic point of view (Giacovazzo, 1983a; Camalli et al., 1985) the distribution of 'h , given Ep;0 h and some products Ek0 Ep;0 k Eh0 k Ep;0 h k , is the von Mises function

(e) Pseudotranslational symmetry is present Substructure and superstructure reflections are then described by different forms of the structure-factor equation (Bo¨hme, 1982; Gramlich, 1984; Fan et al., 1983), so that probabilistic formulae estimating triplet cosines derived on the assumption that atoms are uniformly dispersed in the unit cell cannot hold. In particular, the reliability of each triplet also depends on, besides R h , R k , R h k , the actual h, k, h k indices and on the nature of the pseudotranslation. It has been shown (Cascarano et al., 1985b; Cascarano, Giacovazzo & Luic´, 1987) that (2.2.5.7), (2.2.5.8), (2.2.5.9) still hold provided Gh; kj is replaced by 2R h R kj R h kj G0h; kj p , Nh; k where factors E and ni are defined according to Section 2.2.4.1, Nh, k

h 2 p 2 q k 2 p 2 q h k 2 p 2 q f =m3 p n21 n22 n23 . . . 3 q g2

,

and is the number of times for which hRs u1 0 mod 1 hRs u2 0 mod 1 hRs u3 0 mod 1 . . . kRs u1 0 mod 1 kRs u2 0 mod 1 kRs u3 0 mod 1 . . . h kRs u1 0 mod 1 h kRs u2 0 mod 1 h

kRs u3 0 mod 1 . . .

are simultaneously satisfied when s varies from 1 to m. The above formulae have been generalized (Cascarano et al., 1988b) to the case in which deviations both of replacive and of displacive type from ideal pseudo-translational symmetry occur. 2.2.5.5. Quartet phase relationships In early papers (Hauptman & Karle, 1953; Simerska, 1956) the phase

220

2.2. DIRECT METHODS ' h 'k ' l

'hkl

was always expected to be zero. Schenk (1973a,b) [see also Hauptman (1974)] suggested that primarily depends on the seven magnitudes: R h , R k , R l , R hkl , called basis magnitudes, and R hk , R hl , R kl , called cross magnitudes. The conditional probability of in P1 given seven magnitudes R 1 R h , . . . , R 4 R hkl , R 5 R hk , R 6 R hl , R 7 R kl according to Hauptman (1975) is 1 3=2 P7 exp 2B cos I0 23 2 R 5 Y5 L 3=2 3=2 I0 23 2 R 6 Y6 I0 23 2 R 7 Y7 ,

where P is the probability that the sign of E1 E2 E3 E4 is positive or negative, and Z5

R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4 , N 1=2 1 Z6 1=2 R 1 R 3 R 2 R 4 , N 1 Z7 1=2 R 1 R 4 R 2 R 3 : N

The normalized probability may be derived by P =P P . More simple probabilistic formulae were derived independently by Giacovazzo (1975, 1976): P7 2I0 G

where L is a suitable normalizing constant which can be derived numerically, B 2 3 323

G

Y6 R 23 R 21 R 22 R 24 2R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4 cos 1=2

2C1 "5 "6 "7 1 Q=2N

2:2:5:21

2

C R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4 =N, p p Z6 2Y6 = N , Z7 2Y7 = N

gives

2:2:5:18

Fig. 2.2.5.3 shows the distribution (2.2.5.18) for three typical cases. It is clear from the figure that the cosine estimated near or in the middle range will be in poorer agreement with the true values than the cosine near 0 because of the relatively larger values of the variance. In principle, however, the formula is able to estimate negative or enantiomorph-sensitive quartet cosines from the seven magnitudes. In the cs. case (2.2.5.18) is replaced (Hauptman & Green, 1976) by 1 P ' exp2C coshR 5 Z5 L coshR 6 Z6 coshR 7 Z7 ,

2:2:5:20

2:2:5:22

2 4 2=N. Denoting

1 P7 exp 4C cos L I0 R 5 Z5 I0 R 6 Z6 I0 R 7 Z7 :

expG cos ,

Q "1 "2 "3 "4 "5 "1 "3 "2 "4 "6 "1 "4 "2 "3 "7

Y7 R 22 R 23 R 21 R 24 2R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4 cos 1=2 :

p Z5 2Y5 = N ,

1

where

2 4 R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4

Y5 R 21 R 22 R 23 R 24 2R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4 cos 1=2

For equal atoms 2 3 323

1

and "i jEi j 1. Q is never allowed to be negative. According to (2.2.5.20) cos is expected to be positive or negative according to whether "5 "6 "7 1 is positive or negative: the larger is C, the more reliable is the phase indication. For N 150, (2.2.5.18) and (2.2.5.20) are practically equivalent in all cases. If N is small, (2.2.5.20) is in good agreement with (2.2.5.18) for quartets strongly defined as positive or negative, but in poor agreement for enantiomorph-sensitive quartets (see Fig. 2.2.5.3). In cs. cases the sign probability for E1 E2 E3 E4 is P 12 12 tanhG=2,

where G is defined by (2.2.5.21). All three cross magnitudes are not always in the set of measured reflections. From marginal distributions the following formulae arise (Giacovazzo, 1977c; Heinermann, 1977b): (a) in the ncs. case, if R 7 , or R 6 and R 7 , or R 5 and R 6 and R 7 , are not in the measurements, then (2.2.5.18) is replaced by PjR 1 , . . . , R 6 '

2:2:5:19

2:2:5:23

1 exp 2C cos I0 R 5 Z5 I0 R 6 Z6 , L0

or

Fig. 2.2.5.3. Distributions (2.2.5.18) (––––) and (2.2.5.20) (– – – –) for the indicated jEj values in three typical cases.

221

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.2.5.1. List of quartets symmetry equivalent to 1 in the class mmm Quartets

Basis vectors

Cross vectors

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

(1, 2, 3) 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3

1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3 (1, 5, 3) 1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3 1, 5, 3

PjR 1 , . . . , R 5 '

1 I0 R 5 Z5 , L00

1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 1, 5, 8 (1, 5, 8)

1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8 1, 2, 8

or PjR 1 , . . . , R 4 '

1 exp2C cos , L000

respectively. (b) in the same situations, we have for cs. cases 1 P ' 0 expC coshR 5 Z5 coshR 6 Z6 , L or 1 P ' 00 coshR 5 Z5 L or 1 P 000 expC ' 0:5 0:5 tanhC, L respectively. Equations (2.2.5.20) and (2.2.5.23) are easily modifiable when some cross magnitudes are not in the measurements. If R i is not measured then (2.2.5.20) or (2.2.5.23) are still valid provided that in G it is assumed that "i 0. For example, if R 7 and R 6 are not in the data then (2.2.5.21) and (2.2.5.22) become G

2C1 "5 , 1 Q=2N

0, 3, 11 2, 3, 11 0, 3, 5 2, 3, 5 0, 3, 11 (0, 7, 11) 2, 7, 11 0, 3, 5 (0, 7, 5) 2, 7, 5 (0, 7, 11)

(0, 7, 0) (0, 7, 0) (0, 7, 0) (0, 7, 0) 2, 7, 0 0, 3, 0 0, 3, 0 2, 7, 0 0, 3, 0 0, 3, 0 2, 3, 0

context it is noted that systematically absent reflections are not usually included in the set of diffraction data. This custom, not exceptionable when only triplet relations are used, can give rise to a loss of information when quartets are used. In fact the usual programs of direct methods discard quartets as soon as one of the cross reflections is not measured, so that systematic absences are dealt with in the same manner as those reflections which are outside the sphere of measurements. 2.2.5.6. Quintet phase relationships A quintet phase 'h 'k 'l 'm 'hklm may be considered as the sum of three suitable triplets or the sum of a triplet and a quartet, i.e. 'h 'k 'hk 'l 'm 'hk 'lm 'hklm

In space groups with symmetry higher than P1 more symmetryequivalent quartets can exist of the type 'hR 'kR 'lR 'hklR ,

'h 'k

'hk 'l 'm 'hklm 'hk :

It depends primarily on 15 magnitudes: the five basis magnitudes Rh,

R km ,

Rk,

R hlm ,

Rl,

Rm,

'123 '153 '158 '128 : Quartets symmetry equivalent to and respective cross terms are given in Table 2.2.5.1. Experimental tests on the application of the representation concept to quartets have recently been made (Busetta et al., 1980). It was shown that quartets with more than three cross magnitudes are more accurately estimated than other quartets. Also, quartets with a cross reflection which is systematically absent were shown to be of significant importance in direct methods. In this

R lm ,

R hklm , R klm ,

R kl ,

R hkm ,

R hkl :

In the following we will denote R1 Rh,

where R , R , R , R are rotation matrices of the space group. The set f g is called the first representation of . In this case primarily depends on more than seven magnitudes. For example, let us consider in Pmmm the quartet

'lm

or

and the ten cross magnitudes R hk , R hl , R hm ,

Q "1 "2 "3 "4 "5 :

2, 0, 5 (0, 0, 5) 2, 0, 11) (0, 0, 11) (0, 0, 5) 2, 0, 5 (0, 0, 5) (0, 0, 11) 2, 0, 11 (0, 0, 11) (0, 0, 5)

R2 Rk, . . . ,

R 15 R hkl : Conditional distributions of in P1 and P1 given the 15 magnitudes have been derived by several authors and allow in favourable circumstances in ncs. space groups the quintets having near 0 or near or near =2 to be identified. Among others, we remember: (a) the semi-empirical expression for P15 suggested by Van der Putten & Schenk (1977): " ! # 15 15 Y X 1 2 Pj . . . ' exp 6 R j 2C cos I0 2R j Yj , L j6 j6 where

222

CN

3=2

R1R2R3R4R5

2.2. DIRECT METHODS and Yj is an expression related to the jth of the ten quartets connected with the quintet ; (b) the formula by Fortier & Hauptman (1977), valid in P1, which is able to predict the sign of a quintet by means of an expression which involves a summation over 1024 sets of signs; (c) the expression by Giacovazzo (1977d), according to which 1

P15 ' 2I0 G where G

2C

expG cos ,

p; q1

Ej Ehj k ,

15 P

1AB 1 D=2N

2:2:5:25

"i ,

B "6 "13 "6 "15 "6 "14 "7 "11 "7 "15 "7 "12 "8 "10 "8 "14 "8 "12 "10 "15 "10 "9 "11 "14 "11 "9 "13 "9 "13 "12 , D "1 "2 "6 "1 "3 "7 "1 "4 "8 "1 "5 "9 "1 "10 "15 "2 "5 "12 "2 "7 "15 "2 "8 "14 "2 "13 "9 "3 "4 "13 "3 "5 "14 "3 "6 "15 "3 "8 "12 "3 "11 "9 "4 "5 "15 "4 "6 "14 "4 "7 "12 "4 "10 "9 "5 "6 "13 "5 "7 "11 "5 "8 "10 :

1

For cs. cases (2.2.5.24) reduces to P ' 0:5 0:5 tanhG=2:

2:2:5:26

Positive or negative quintets may be identified according to whether G is larger or smaller than zero. If R i is not measured then (2.2.5.24) and (2.2.5.25) are still valid provided that in (2.2.5.25) "i 0. If the symmetry is higher than in P1 then more symmetryequivalent quintets can exist of the type

2.2.5.7. Determinantal formulae In a crystal structure with N identical atoms the joint probability distribution of n normalized s.f.’s Eh1 k , Eh2 k , . . . , Ehn k under the following conditions: (a) the structure is kept fixed whereas k is the primitive random variable; (b) Ehi hj , i, j 1, . . . , n, have values which are known a priori; is given (Tsoucaris, 1970) [see also Castellano et al. (1973) and Heinermann et al. (1979)] by

for cs. structures and

2

n

PE1 , E2 , . . . , En 2

n=2

Dn

1=2

n1 Dn exp N 2Dn

2:2:5:29

and PE1 , E2 , . . . , En

where R , . . . , R" are rotation matrices of the space groups. The set f g is called the first representation of . In this case primarily depends on more than 15 magnitudes which all have to be taken into account for a careful estimation of (Giacovazzo, 1980a). A wide use of quintet invariants in direct methods procedures is prevented for two reasons: (a) the large correlation of positive quintet cosines with positive triplets; (b) the large computing time necessary for ptheir estimation [quintets are phase relationships of order 1=N N , so a large number of quintets have to be estimated in order to pick up a sufficient percentage of reliable ones].

1 2Qn

. . . U1n . . . U2n .. .. . . : . . . Upn .. . . .. ... 1

the K–H determinant obtained by adding to l the last column and line formed by E1 , E2 , . . . , En , and E1 , E2 , . . . , En , respectively. Then (2.2.5.27) and (2.2.5.28) may be written

'hR 'kR 'lR 'mR 'hklmR" ,

Dn 1=2 exp

hq

is a K–H determinant: therefore Dn 0. Let us call 1 ... U1n Eh1 k U12 U21 1 ... U2n Eh2 k 1 . . . . .. ; .. .. .. n1 .. . N Un1 Un2 ... 1 Ehn k E h k E h k ... E h k N

"1 "11 "14 "1 "13 "12 "2 "3 "10 "2 "4 "11

n=2

j, p, q 1, . . . , n:

hq ,

hEhp k Ehq k i Uhp 1 U12 . . . U1q U21 1 . . . U2q . .. . . . . . . . .. l Up1 Up2 . . . Upq .. .. . . . . . . .. Un1 Un2 . . . Unq

i6

PE1 , E2 , . . . , En 2

Upq Uhp

pq is an element of l 1 , and l is the covariance matrix with elements

and where A

2:2:5:28

for ncs. structures. In (2.2.5.27) and (2.2.5.28) we have denoted n P Dn , Qn pq Ep Eq

2:2:5:24

1 6N1=2

PE1 , E2 , . . . , En 2 n Dn 1=2 exp Qn

n1 Dn , 2 n Dn 1=2 exp N Dn

2:2:5:30

respectively. Because Dn is a constant, the maximum values of the conditional joint probabilities (2.2.5.29) and (2.2.5.30) are obtained when n1 is a maximum. Thus the maximum determinant rule may be stated (Tsoucaris, 1970; Lajze´rowicz & Lajze´rowicz, 1966): among all sets of phases which are compatible with the inequality n1 E1 , E2 , . . . , En 0 the most probable one is that which leads to a maximum value of n1 . If only one phase, i.e. 'q , is unknown whereas all other phases and moduli are known then (de Rango et al., 1974; Podjarny et al., 1976) for cs. crystals 8 9 < = n P P Eq ' 0:5 0:5 tanh jEq j pq Ep , 2:2:5:31 : ; p1 p6q

and for ncs. crystals P'q 2I0 Gq

2:2:5:27

where

223

1

expfGq cos'q

q g,

2:2:5:32

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION n P f g '123 '725 '3K 1 '3K1 Gq expiq 2jEq j pq Ep : p6q1 and Equations (2.2.5.31) and (2.2.5.32) generalize (2.2.5.11) and f g '123 '725 '4K4 '4K 4 , (2.2.5.7), respectively, and reduce to them for n 3. Fourth-order determinantal formulae estimating triplet invariants in cs. and ncs. where K is a free index. crystals, and making use of the entire data set, have recently been The set of special quartets (2.2.5.35a) and (2.2.5.35b) constitutes secured (Karle, 1979, 1980). the first representations of . Advantages, limitations and applications of determinantal Structure seminvariants of the second rank can be characterized formulae can be found in the literature (Heinermann et al., 1979; as follows: suppose that, for a given seminvariant , it is not de Rango et al., 1975, 1985). Taylor et al. (1978) combined K–H possible to find a vectorial index h and a rotation matrix R such determinants with a magic-integer approach. The computing time, that 'h 'hR is a structure invariant. Then is a structure however, was larger than that required by standard computing seminvariant of the second rank and a set of structure invariants techniques. The use of K–H matrices has been made faster and more can certainly be formed, of type effective by de Gelder et al. (1990) (see also de Gelder, 1992). They f g 'hRp 'hRq 'lRi 'lRj , developed a phasing procedure (CRUNCH) which uses random phases as starting points for the maximization of the K–H by means of suitable indices h and l and rotation matrices Rp , Rq , Ri determinants. and Rj . As an example, for symmetry class 222, '240 or '024 or '204 are s.s.’s of the first rank while '246 is an s.s. of the second rank. The procedure may easily be generalized to s.s.’s of any order of 2.2.5.8. Algebraic relationships for structure seminvariants the first and of the second rank. So far only the role of one-phase and According to the representations method (Giacovazzo, 1977a, two-phase s.s.’s of the first rank in direct procedures is well 1980a,b): documented (see references quoted in Sections 2.2.5.9 and (i) any s.s. may be estimated via one or more s.i.’s f g, whose 2.2.5.10). values differ from by a constant arising because of symmetry; (ii) two types of s.s.’s exist, first-rank and second-rank s.s.’s, with 2.2.5.9. Formulae estimating one-phase structure different algebraic properties: (iii) conditions characterizing s.s.’s of first rank for any space seminvariants of the first rank group may be expressed in terms of seminvariant moduli and Let EH be our one-phase s.s. of the first rank, where seminvariantly associated vectors. For example, for all the space H hI Rn : 2:2:5:36 groups with point group 422 [Hauptman–Karle group h k, l P(2, 2)] the one-phase s.s.’s of first rank are characterized by In general, more than one rotation matrix Rn and more than one h, k, l 0 mod 2, 2, 0 or 2, 0, 2 or 0, 2, 2 vector h are compatible with (2.2.5.36). The set of special triplets h k, l 0 mod 0, 2 or 2, 0: f g f'H 'h 'hRn g The more general expressions for the s.s.’s of first rank are (a) 'u 'hI R for one-phase s.s.’s; (b) 'u1 'u2 'h1 h2 R 'h2 h1 R for two-phase s.s.’s; (c) 'u1 'u2 'u3 'h1 h2 R 'h2 h3 R 'h3 h1 R for three-phase s.s.’s; d 'u1 'u2 'u3 'u4 'h1

h2 R

'h2

h3 R

'h3

h4 R

'h4

h; n h1 R

for four-phase s.s.’s; etc. In other words: (a) 'u is an s.s. of first rank if at least one h and at least one rotation matrix R exist such that u hI R . 'u may be estimated via the special triplet invariants f g 'u

'h 'hR :

is the first representation of EH . In cs. space groups the probability that EH > 0, given jEH j and the set fjEh jg, may be estimated (Hauptman & Karle, 1953; Naya et al., 1964; Cochran & Woolfson, 1955) by P P EH ' 0:5 0:5 tanh Gh; n 12hTn , 2:2:5:37

2:2:5:33

The set f g is called the first representation of 'u . (b) 'u1 'u2 is an s.s. of first rank if at least two vectors h1 and h2 and two rotation matrices R and R exist such that u1 h1 h2 R 2:2:5:34 u2 h2 h1 R :

where

p Gh; n jEH j"h =2 N , and " jEj2

In (2.2.5.37), the summation over n goes within the set of matrices Rn for which (2.2.5.35a,b) is compatible, and h varies within the set of vectors which satisfy (2.2.5.36) for each Rn . Equation (2.2.5.36) P is actually a generalized way of writing the so-called 1 relationships (Hauptman & Karle, 1953). If 'H is a phase restricted by symmetry to H and H in an ncs. space group then (Giacovazzo, 1978) ( ) X P'H H ' 0:5 0:5 tanh Gh; n cosH 2h Tn : h; n

may then be estimated via the special quartet invariants f g 'u1 R 'u2

2:2:5:38

'h2 'h2 R R

2:2:5:35a

'h1 'h1 R R g:

2:2:5:35b

If 'H is a general phase then 'H is distributed according to

and f g f'u1 'u2 R

For example, '123 '725 in P21 may be estimated via

1:

1 P'H ' expf cos'H L where

224

H g,

P

Gh; n sin 2h Tn

h; n

tan H

P

2.2. DIRECT METHODS

! !

2:2:5:39

Gh; n cos 2h Tn

2.2.5.10. Formulae estimating two-phase structure seminvariants of the first rank

h; n

Two-phase s.s.’s of the first rank were first evaluated in some cs. space groups by the method of coincidence by Grant et al. (1957); the idea was extended to ncs. space groups by Debaerdemaeker & Woolfson (1972), and in a more general way by Giacovazzo (1977e, f ). The technique was based on the combination of the two triplets

with a reliability measured by 8 !2 < P G sin 2h Tn : h; n h; n P

Gh; n cos 2h Tn

h; n

!2 91=2 = ;

'h1 'h2 ' 'h1 h2

:

'h1 'h2 R ' 'h1 h2 R , which, subtracted from one another, give

The second representation of 'H is the set of special quintets 'h 'hRn 'kRj

f g f'H

'kRj g

2:2:5:40

provided that h and Rn vary over the vectors and matrices for which (2.2.5.36) is compatible, k over the asymmetric region of the reciprocal space, and Rj over the rotation matrices in the space group. Formulae estimating 'H via the second representation in all the space groups [all the base and cross magnitudes of the quintets (2.2.5.40) now constitute the a priori information] have recently been secured (Giacovazzo, 1978; Cascarano & Giacovazzo, 1983; Cascarano, Giacovazzo, Calabrese et al., 1984). Such formulae contain, besides the contribution of order N 1=2 provided by the first representation, a supplementary (not negligible) contribution of order N 3=2 arising from quintets. Denoting E 1 E H , E2 E h , E 3 E k , E4; j EhkRj , E5; j EHkRj , formulae (2.2.5.37), (2.2.5.38), (2.2.5.39) still hold provided that P h; n Gh; n is replaced by X

Gh; n

h; n

X 0 jEH j Ah; k; n , 2N 3=2 1 Bh; k; n h; k; n 0

6 Ah; k; n 42jE2 j2 m "3 X

2

"4; j

X B X C 1"3 @ "4; i "5; j "4; i "4; j A

j1

2

1 2

PEh1 , Eh2 , Eh1 h2 , Eh1

"2

X Rj Ri Rj Ri Rn 0

A , 1B h2

is positive,

"u1 "u2 "2h1 "u1 "u2 "2h2 =2N: It may be seen that in favourable cases P < 0:5. For the sake of brevity, the probabilistic formulae for the general case are not given and the reader is referred to the original papers.

Rj Ri Rj Ri Rn 0

2.2.6. Direct methods in real and reciprocal space: Sayre’s equation

j1

7 "4; i "5; j 14"1 H4 E2 5

h2 j

B "h1 "h2 "u1 "h1 "h2 "u2

Rj Ri Rn Ri Rj Rn

3

h2 , E2h1 , E2h2

A "h1 "h2 2"h1 "h2 "h1 "2h1 "h2 "2h2

3 , X 7 "4; i "5; j 5 N,

Rj Ri Rn Ri Rj Rn

'h2 ' 2h T:

If all four jEj’s are sufficiently large, an estimate of the two-phase seminvariant 'h1 h2 R 'h1 h2 is available. Probability distributions valid in P21 according to the neighbourhood principle have been given by Hauptman & Green (1978). Finally, the theory of representations was combined by Giacovazzo (1979a) with the joint probability distribution method in order to estimate two-phase s.s.’s in all the space groups. According to representation theory, the problem is that of evaluating 'u1 'u2 via the special quartets (2.2.5.35a) and (2.2.5.35b). Thus, contributions of order N 1 will appear in the probabilistic formulae, which will be functions of the basis and of the cross magnitudes of the quartets (2.2.5.35) . Since more pairs of matrices R and R can be compatible with (2.2.5.34), and for each pair R , R more pairs of vectors h1 and h2 may satisfy (2.2.5.34), several quartets can in general be exploited for estimating . The simplest case occurs in P1 where the two quartets (2.2.5.35) suggest the calculation of the six-variate distribution function u1 h1 h2 , u2 h1 h2

m m X X X 6 "5; j "1 "4; i "4j "2 "3 "4; j Bh; k; n 4"1 "3 j1

'h1 h2 ' 'h2 R

where P is the probability that the product Eh1 h2 Eh1 and

1 Ri Rj Rj Ri Rn 0

'h1 h2 R

which leads to the probability formula jEh1 h2 Eh1 P ' 0:5 0:5 tanh 2N

where 2

Bh; k; n is assumed to be zero if it is computed negative. The prime to the summation warns the reader that precautions have to be taken in order to avoid duplication in the contributions.

, 2N :

m is the number of symmetry operators and H4 E E4 is the Hermite polynomial of order four.

6E2 3

The statistical treatment suggested by Wilson for scaling observed intensities corresponds, in direct space, to the origin peak of the Patterson function, so it is not surprising that a general correspondence exists between probabilistic formulation in reciprocal space and algebraic properties in direct space. For a structure containing atoms which are fully resolved from one another, the operation of raising r to the nth power retains

225

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION the condition of resolved atoms but changes the shape of each atom. Let r

N P

j r

rj ,

j1

where j r is an atomic function and rj is the coordinate of the ‘centre’ of the atom. Then the Fourier transform of the electron density can be written as Fh

N R P

j r

rj exp2ih r dV

j1 V

N P

fj exp2ih rj :

2:2:6:1

j1

If the atoms do not overlap " N P n j r r

#n rj '

j1

N P j1

rj

V N P n

where As and Bs are adjustable parameters of sin =. Equation (2.2.6.6) can easily be generalized to the case of structures containing resolved atoms of more than two types (von Eller, 1973). Besides the algebraic properties of the electron density, Patterson methods also can be developed so that they provide phase indications. For example, it is possible to find the reciprocal counterpart of the function R Pn u1 , u2 , . . . , un rr u1 . . . r un dV : 2:2:6:7 V

nj r

and its Fourier transform gives R n n Fh r exp2ih r dV

Q, it is impossible to find a factor 2 such that the relation Fh 2 2 Fh holds, since this would imply values of 2 such that 2 f P 2 f P and 2 f Q 2 f Q simultaneously. However, the following relationship can be stated (Woolfson, 1958): As X Bs X Fk F h k 2 F k Fl Fh k l , 2:2:6:6 Fh V k V k; l

f j exp2ih rj :

2:2:6:2

For n 1 the function (2.2.6.7) coincides with the usual Patterson function Pu; for n 2, (2.2.6.7) reduces to the double Patterson function P2 u1 , u2 introduced by Sayre (1953). Expansion of P2 u1 , u2 as a Fourier series yields 1 X Eh Eh Eh exp 2ih1 u1 h2 u2 : P2 u1 , u2 2 V h1 ; h2 1 2 3 2:2:6:8

j1 n

fj is the scattering factor for the jth peak of n r: R n n fj h j r exp2ih r dr: V

We now introduce the condition that all atoms are equal, so that fj f and n fj n f for any j. From (2.2.6.1) and (2.2.6.2) we may write f 2:2:6:3 Fh n Fh n n Fh , n f where n is a function which corrects for the difference of shape of the atoms with electron distributions r and n r. Since r r . . . r 1 1 X Fh . . . Fhn exp 2ih1 . . . hn r, n V h1 ; ...; hn 1 n

1

the Fourier transform of both sides gives Z 1 1 X Fh . . . Fhn exp2ih h1 n Fh n V h1 ; ...; hn 1 1

1 Vn

hn r dV

V

1 X 1

...

Fh1 Fh2 . . . Fh

h1 h2 ... hn

1

,

1 X

1 Vn

1

Fh1 Fh2 . . . Fh

h1 h2 ... hn

Eh1 Eh2 Eh1 h2

N

' A1 hjEk j2

3=2

1jEh1 k j2

1jE

h2 k j

2

1ik

B1 ,

which is clearly related to (2.2.5.12); (b) the zero points in the Patterson function provide information about the value of a triplet invariant (Anzenhofer & Hoppe, 1962; Allegra, 1979); (c) the Hoppe sections (Hoppe, 1963) of the double Patterson provide useful information for determining the triplet signs (Krabbendam & Kroon, 1971; Simonov & Weissberg, 1970); (d) one phase s.s.’s of the first rank can be estimated via the Fourier transform of single Harker sections of the Patterson (Ardito et al., 1985), i.e. Z 1 FH exp2ih Tn Pu exp2ih u du, 2:2:6:9 L HSI; Cn

h1 ; ...; hn 1 1

from which the following relation arises: Fh n

Vice versa, the value of a triplet invariant may be considered as the Fourier transform of the double Patterson. Among the main results relating direct- and reciprocal-space properties it may be remembered: (a) from the properties of P2 u1 , u2 the following relationship may be obtained (Vaughan, 1958)

1

:

2:2:6:4

h1 ; ...; hn 1 1

For n 2, equation (2.2.6.4) reduces to Sayre’s (1952) equation [but see also Hughes (1953)] 1X Fh 2 F k Fh k : 2:2:6:5 V k If the structure contains resolved isotropic atoms of two types, P and

where (see Section 2.2.5.9) H hI Rn is the s.s., u varies over the complete Harker section corresponding to the operator Cn [in symbols HSI, Cn ] and L is a constant which takes into account the dimensionality of the Harker section. If no spurious peak is on the Harker section, then (2.2.6.9) is an exact relationship. Owing to the finiteness of experimental data and to the presence of spurious peaks, (2.2.6.9) cannot be considered in practice an exact relation: it works better when heavy atoms are in the chemical formula. More recently (Cascarano, Giacovazzo, Luic´ et al., 1987), a special least-squares procedure has been proposed for discriminating spurious peaks among those lying on Harker sections and for improving positional and thermal parameters of heavy atoms.

226

2.2. DIRECT METHODS (e) translation and rotation functions (see Chapter 2.3), when defined in direct space, always have their counterpart in reciprocal space. 2.2.7. Scheme of procedure for phase determination A traditional procedure for phase assignment may be schematically presented as follows: Stage 1: Normalization of s.f.’s. See Section 2.2.4. Stage 2: (Possible) estimation of one-phase s.s.’s. The computing program recognizes the one-phase s.s.’s and applies the proper formulae (see Section 2.2.5.9). Each phase is associated with a reliability value, to allow the user to regard as known only those phases with reliability higher than a given threshold. Stage 3: Search of the triplets. The reflections are listed for decreasing jEj values and, related to each PjEj value, all possible triplets are reported p (this is the so-called 2 list). The value G 2jEh Ek Eh k j= N is associated with every triplet for an evaluation of its efficiency. Usually reflections with jEj < Es (Es may range from 1.2 to 1.6) are omitted from this stage onward. Stage 4: Definition of the origin and enantiomorph. This stage is carried out according to the theory developed in Section 2.2.3. Phases chosen for defining the origin and enantiomorph, one-phase seminvariants estimated at stage 2, and symbolic phases described at stage 5 are the only phases known at the beginning of the phasing procedure. This set of phases is conventionally referred to as the starting set, from which iterative application of the tangent formula will derive new phase estimates. Stage 5: Assignment of one or more (symbolic or numerical) phases. In complex structures the number of phases assigned for fixing the origin and the enantiomorph may be inadequate as a basis for further phase determination. Furthermore, only a few one-phase s.s.’s can be determined with sufficient reliability to make them qualify as members of the starting set. Symbolic phases may then be associated with some (generally from 1 to 6) high-modulus reflections (symbolic addition procedures). Iterative application of triplet relations leads to the determination of other phases which, in part, will remain expressed by symbols (Karle & Karle, 1966). In other procedures (multisolution procedures) each symbol is assigned four phase values in turn: =4, 3=4, 5=4, 7=4. If p symbols are used, in at least one of the possible 4p solutions each symbolic phase has unit probability of being within 45 of its true value, with a mean error of 22:5 . To find a good starting set a convergence method (Germain et al., 1970) is used according to which: (a) P hh i Gj I1 Gj =I0 Gj j

is calculated for all reflections (j runs over the set of triplets containing h); (b) the reflection is found with smallest hi not already in the starting set; it is retained to define the origin if the origin cannot be defined without it; (c) the reflection is eliminated if it is not used for origin definition. Its hi is recorded and hi values for other reflections are updated; (d) the cycle is repeated from (b) until all reflections are eliminated; (e) the reflections with the smallest hi at the time of elimination go into the starting set; ( f ) the cycle from (a) is repeated until all reflections have been chosen. Stage 6: Application of tangent formula. Phases are determined in reverse order of elimination in the convergence procedure. In order to ensure that poorly determined phases 'kj and 'h kj have little effect in the determination of other phases a weighted tangent formula is normally used (Germain et al., 1971): P j wkj wh kj jEkj Eh kj j sin'kj 'h kj tan 'h P , 2:2:7:1 j wkj wh kj jEkj Eh kj j cos'kj 'h kj

where wh min 0:2, 1: Once a large number of contributions are available in (2.2.7.1) for a given 'h , then the value of h quickly becomes greater than 5, and so assigns an unrealistic unitary weight to 'h . In this respect a different weighting scheme may be proposed (Hull & Irwin, 1978) according to which Rx w exp x2 expt2 dt, 2:2:7:2 0

where x =hi and 1:8585 is a constant chosen so that w 1 when x 1. Except for , the right-hand side of (2.2.7.2) is the Dawson integral which assumes its maximum value at x 1 (see Fig. 2.2.7.1): when > hi or < hi then w < 1 and so the agreement between and hi is promoted. Alternative weighting schemes for the tangent formula are frequently used [for example, see Debaerdemaeker et al. (1985)]. In one (Giacovazzo, 1979b), the values kj and h kj (which are usually available in direct procedures) are considered as additional a priori information so that (2.2.7.1) may be replaced by P j j sin'kj 'h kj tan 'h ' P , 2:2:7:3 j j cos'kj 'h kj where j is the solution of the equation D1 j D1 Gj D1 kj D1 h In (2.2.7.4), Gj 2jEh Ekj Eh

kj :

2:2:7:4

p N

kj j

or the corresponding second representation parameter, and D1 x I1 x=I0 x is the ratio of two modified Bessel functions. In order to promote (in accordance with the aims of Hull and Irwin) the agreement between and hi, the distribution of may be used (Cascarano, Giacovazzo, Burla et al., 1984; Burla et al., 1987); in particular, the first two moments of the distribution: accordingly, ( " #)1=3 hi2 w exp 22 may be used, where 2 is the estimated variance of . Stage 7: Figures of merit. The correct solution is found among several by means of figures of merit (FOMs) which are expected to be extreme for the correct solution. Largely used are (Germain et al., 1970)

Fig. 2.2.7.1. The form of w as given by (2.2.7.2).

227

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION P P a ABSFOM h = hh i, between their actual and their expected distributions are considered h h as criteria for identifying the correct solution. (a3) correlation among some FOMs is taken into account. which is expected to be unity for the correct solution. According to this scheme, each FOM (as well as the CFOM) is expected to be unity for the correct solution. Thus one or more P P figures are available which constitute a sort of criterion (on an E E h k k h k PSI0 b : absolute scale) concerning the correctness of the various solutions: 1=2 P P 2 FOMs (and CFOM) ' 1 probably denote correct solutions, CFOMs h k jEk Eh k j 1 should indicate incorrect solutions. Stage 8: Interpretation of E maps. This is carried out in up to four The summation over k includes (Cochran & Douglas, 1957) the strong jEj’s for which phases have been determined, and indices h stages (Koch, 1974; Main & Hull, 1978; Declercq et al., 1973): (a) peak search; correspond to very small jEh j. Minimal values of PSI0 ( 1.20) are (b) separation of peaks into potentially bonded clusters; expected to be associated with the correct solution. P (c) application of stereochemical criteria to identify possible jh hh ij molecular fragments; R hP c : (d) comparison of the fragments with the expected molecular h hh i structure. That is, the Karle & Karle (1966) residual between the actual and the estimated ’s. After scaling of h on hh i the correct solution should be characterized by the smallest R values. d

NQEST

P

2.2.8. Other multisolution methods applied to small molecules

Gj cos j ,

j

where G is defined by (2.2.5.21) and 'h

'k

'l

'h

k l

are quartet invariants characterized by large basis magnitudes and small cross magnitudes (De Titta et al., 1975; Giacovazzo, 1976). Since G is expected to be negative as well as cos , the value of NQEST is expected to be positive and a maximum for the correct solution. Figures of merit are then combined as ABSFOM ABSFOMmin ABSFOMmax ABSFOMmin PSI0max PSI0 w2 PSI0max PSI0min R max R w3 R max R min NQEST NQESTmin w4 , NQESTmax NQESTmin

CFOM w1

(1) Magic-integer methods In the classical procedure described in Section 2.2.7, the unknown phases in the starting set are assigned all combinations of the values =4, 3=4. For n unknown phases in the starting set, 4n sets of phases arise by quadrant permutation; this is a number that increases very rapidly with n. According to White & Woolfson (1975), phases can be represented for a sequence of n integers by the equations

where wi are empirical weights proportional to the confidence of the user in the various FOMs. Different FOMs are often used by some authors in combination with those described above: for example, enantiomorph triplets and quartets are supplementary FOMs (Van der Putten & Schenk, 1977; Cascarano, Giacovazzo & Viterbo, 1987). Different schemes of calculating and combining FOMs are also used: a recent scheme (Cascarano, Giacovazzo & Viterbo, 1987) uses P a1

CPHASE

In very complex structures a large initial set of known phases seems to be a basic requirement for a structure to be determined. This aim can be achieved, for example, by introducing a large number of permutable phases into the initial set. However, the introduction of every new symbol implies a fourfold increase in computing time, which, even in fast computers, quickly leads to computing-time limitations. On the other hand, a relatively large starting set is not in itself enough to ensure a successful structure determination. This is the case, for example, when the triplet invariants used in the initial steps differ significantly from zero. New strategies have therefore been devised to solve more complex structures.

j wj Gj cos j , w s:i:s:s: j Gj D1 Gj

wj Gj cosj P

where the first summation in the numerator extends over symmetryrestricted one-phase and two-phase s.s.’s (see Sections 2.2.5.9 and 2.2.5.10), and the second summation in the numerator extends over negative triplets estimated via the second representation formula [equation (2.2.5.13)] and over negative quartets. The value of CPHASE is expected to be close to unity for the correct solution. (a2) h for strong triplets and Ek Eh k contributions for PSI0 triplets may be considered random variables: the agreements

'i mi x mod 2,

i 1, . . . , n:

2:2:8:1

The set of equations can be regarded as the parametric equation of a straight line in n-dimensional phase space. The nature and size of errors connected with magic-integer representations have been investigated by Main (1977) who also gave a recipe for deriving magic-integer sequences which minimize the r.m.s. errors in the represented phases (see Table 2.2.8.1). To assign a phase value, the variable x in equation (2.2.8.1) is given a series of values at equal intervals in the range 0 < x < 2. The enantiomorph is defined by exploring only the appropriate half of the n-dimensional space. A different way of using the magic-integer method (Declercq et al., 1975) is the primary–secondary P–S method which may be described schematically in the following way: (a) Origin- and enantiomorph-fixing phases are chosen and some one-phase s.s.’s are estimated. (b) Nine phases [this is only an example: very long magic-integer sequences may be used to represent primary phases (Hull et al., 1981; Debaerdemaeker & Woolfson, 1983)] are represented with the approximated relationships:

228

2.2. DIRECT 8 < 'p1 3z 'p 4z : ' 2 5z: p3

8 < 'j1 3y 'j 4y : ' 2 5y j3

8 < 'i1 3x 'i 4x : 2 'i3 5x

Phases in (a) and (b) consistitute the primary set. P (c) The phases in the secondary set are those defined through 2 relationships involving pairs of phases from the primary set: they, too, can be expressed in magic-integer form. (d) All the triplets that link together the phases in the combined primary and secondary set are now found, other than triplets used to obtain secondary reflections from the primary ones. The general algebraic form of these triplets will be m1 x m2 y m3 z b 0 mod 1, where b is a phase constant which arises from symmetry translation. It may be expected that the ‘best’ value of the unknown x, y, z corresponds to a maximum of the function P x, y, z jE1 E2 E3 j cos 2m1 x m2 y m3 z b, with 0 x, y, z < 1. It should be noticed that is a Fourier summation which can easily be evaluated. In fact, is essentially a figure of merit for a large number of phases evaluated in terms of a small number of magic-integer P variables and gives a measure of the internal consistency of 2 relationships. The map generally presents several peaks and therefore can provide several solutions for the variables. (2) The random-start method These are procedures which try to solve crystal structures by starting from random initial phases (Baggio et al., 1978; Yao, 1981). They may be so described: (a) A number of reflections (say NUM 100 or larger) at the bottom of the CONVERGE map are selected. These, and the relationships which link them, form the system for which trial phases will be found. (b) A pseudo-random number generator is used to generate M sets of NUM random phases. Each of the M sets is refined and extended by the tangent formula or similar methods.

METHODS representation method or the neighbourhood principle (Hauptman, 1975; Giacovazzo, 1977a, 1980b). So far, second-representation formulae are available for triplets and one-phase seminvariants; in particular, reliably estimated negative triplets can be recognized, which is of great help in the phasing process (Cascarano, Giacovazzo, Camalli et al., 1984). Estimation of higher-order s.s.’s with upper representations or upper neighbourhoods is rather difficult, both because the procedures are time consuming and because the efficiency of the present joint probability distribution techniques deteriorates with complexity. However, further progress can be expected in the field. (4) Modified tangent formulae and least-squares determination and refinement of phases The problem of deriving the individual phase angles from triplet relationships is greatly overdetermined: indeed the number of triplets, in fact, greatly exceeds the number of phases so that any 'h may be determined by a least-squares approach (Hauptman et al., 1969). The function to be minimized may be P wk cos'h 'k 'h k Ck 2 P , M k wk where Ck is the estimate of the cosine obtained by probabilistic or other methods. Effective least-squares procedures based on linear equations (Debaerdemaeker & Woolfson, 1983; Woolfson, 1977) can also be used. A triplet relationship is usually represented by 'p 'q 'r b 0 mod 2,

2:2:8:2

where b is a factor arising from translational symmetry. If (2.2.8.2) is expressed in cycles and suitably weighted, then it may be written as w'p 'q 'r b wn, where n is some integer. If the integers were known then the equation would appear (in matrix notation) as

(3) Accurate calculation of s.i.’s and s.s.’s with 1, 2, 3, 4, . . ., n phases Having a large set of good phase relationships allows one to overcome difficulties in the early stages and in the refinement process of the phasing procedure. Accurate estimates of s.i.’s and s.s.’s may be achieved by the application of techniques such as the

giving the least-squares solution

Table 2.2.8.1. Magic-integer sequences for small numbers of phases (n) together with the number of sets produced and the root-mean-square error in the phases

When approximate phases are available, the nearest integers may be found and equations (2.2.8.3) and (2.2.8.4) constitute the basis for further refinement. Modified tangent procedures are also used, such as (Sint & Schenk, 1975; Busetta, 1976) P j j Gh; kj sin'kj 'h kj tan 'h ' P , Gh; kj cos'kj 'h kj j

n

Sequence

No. of sets

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 5 8 13 21 34

4 12 20 32 50 80 128 206

3 4 7 11 18 29 47

5 8 13 21 34 55

9 14 23 37 60

15 24 39 63

25 40 65

41 66

67

R.m.s. error 26 29 37 42 45 47 48 49

AF C,

2:2:8:3

F AT A 1 AT C:

where j is an 'h 'kj 'h kj .

estimate

for

the

2:2:8:4

triplet

phase

sum

(5) Techniques based on the positivity of Karle–Hauptman determinants (The main formulae have been briefly described in Section 2.2.5.7.) The maximum determinant rule has been applied to solve small structures (de Rango, 1969; Vermin & de Graaff, 1978) via determinants of small order. It has, however, been found that their use (Taylor et al., 1978) is not of sufficient power to justify the

229

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION R larger amount of computing time required by the technique as Gj p prCj r dr cj , V compared to that required by the tangent formula. (6) Tangent techniques using simultaneously triplets, quartets,. . . The availability of a large number of phase relationships, in particular during the first stages of a direct procedure, makes the phasing process easier. However, quartets are sums of two triplets with a common reflection. If the phase of this reflection (and/or of the other cross terms) is known then the quartet probability formulae described in Section 2.2.5.5 cannot hold. Similar considerations may be made for quintet relationships. Thus triplet, quartet and quintet formulae described in the preceding paragraphs, if used without modifications, will certainly introduce systematic errors in the tangent refinement process. A method which takes into account correlation between triplets and quartets has been described (Giacovazzo, 1980c) [see also Freer & Gilmore (1980) for a first application], according to which P G sin'k 'h k k tan 'h ' P G cos'k 'h k k

P

G0 sin'k 'l 'h

k l

G0 cos'k 'l 'h

k l

k; l

P

,

k; l

where G0 takes into account both the magnitudes of the cross terms of the quartet and the fact that their phases may be known. (7) Integration of Patterson techniques and direct methods (Egert & Sheldrick, 1985) [see also Egert (1983, and references therein)] A fragment of known geometry is oriented in the unit cell by realspace Patterson rotation search (see Chapter 2.3) and its position is found by application of a translation function (see Section 2.2.5.4 and Chapter 2.3) or by maximizing the weighted sum of the cosines of a small number of strong translation-sensitive triple phase invariants, starting from random positions. Suitable FOMs rank the most reliable solutions. (8) Maximum entropy methods A common starting point for all direct methods is a stochastic process according to which crystal structures are thought of as being generated by randomly placing atoms in the asymmetric unit of the unit cell according to some a priori distribution. A non-uniform prior distribution of atoms p(r) gives rise to a source of random atomic positions with entropy (Jaynes, 1957) Hp

R

pr log pr dr:

V

The maximum value Hmax log V is reached for a uniform prior pr 1=V . The strength of the restrictions introduced by p(r) is not measured by Hp but by Hp Hmax , given by Hp

Hmax

R

pr log pr=mr dr,

V

where mr 1=V . Accordingly, if a prior prejudice m(r) exists, which maximizes H, the revised relative entropy is Sp

R

pr log pr=mr dr:

V

The maximization problem was solved by Jaynes (1957). If Gj p are linear constraint functionals defined by given constraint functions Cj r and constraint values cj , i.e.

the most unbiased probability density p(r) under prior prejudice m(r) is obtained by maximizing the entropy of p(r) relative to m(r). A standard variational technique suggests that the constrained maximization is equivalent to the unconstrained maximization of the functional P Sp j Gj p, j

where the j ’s are Lagrange multipliers whose values can be determined from the constraints. Such a technique has been applied to the problem of finding good electron-density maps in different ways by various authors (Wilkins et al., 1983; Bricogne, 1984; Navaza, 1985; Navaza et al., 1983). Maximum entropy methods are strictly connected with traditional direct methods: in particular it has been shown that: (a) the maximum determinant rule (see Section 2.2.5.7) is strictly connected (Britten & Collins, 1982; Piro, 1983; Narayan & Nityananda, 1982; Bricogne, 1984); (b) the construction of conditional probability distributions of structure factors amounts precisely to a reciprocal-space evaluation of the entropy functional Sp (Bricogne, 1984). Maximum entropy methods are under strong development: important contributions can be expected in the near future even if a multipurpose robust program has not yet been written.

2.2.9. Some references to direct-methods packages Some references for direct-methods packages are given below. Other useful packages using symbolic addition or multisolution procedures do exist but are not well documented. CRUNCH: Gelder, R. de, de Graaff, R. A. G. & Schenk, H. (1993). Automatic determination of crystal structures using Karle– Hauptman matrices. Acta Cryst. A49, 287–293. DIRDIF: Beurskens, P. T., Beurskens G., de Gelder, R., GarciaGranda, S., Gould, R. O., Israel, R. & Smits, J. M. M. (1999). The DIRDIF-99 program system. Crystallography Laboratory, University of Nijmegen, The Netherlands. MITHRIL: Gilmore, C. J. (1984). MITHRIL. An integrated direct-methods computer program. J. Appl. Cryst. 17, 42–46. MULTAN88: Main, P., Fiske, S. J., Germain, G., Hull, S. E., Declercq, J.-P., Lessinger, L. & Woolfson, M. M. (1999). Crystallographic software: teXsan for Windows. http:// www.msc.com/brochures/teXsan/wintex.html. PATSEE: Egert, E. & Sheldrick, G. M. (1985). Search for a fragment of known geometry by integrated Patterson and direct methods. Acta Cryst. A41, 262–268. SAPI: Fan, H.-F. (1999). Crystallographic software: teXsan for Windows. http://www.msc.com/brochures/teXsan/wintex.html. SnB: Weeks, C. M. & Miller, R. (1999). The design and implementation of SnB version 2.0. J. Appl. Cryst. 32, 120–124. SHELX97: Sheldrick, G. M. (2000a). The SHELX home page. http://shelx.uni-ac.gwdg.de/SHELX/. SHELXS: Sheldrick, G. M. (2000b). SHELX. http://www.ucg.ie/ cryst/shelx.htm. SIR97: Altomare, A., Burla, M. C., Camalli, M., Cascarano, G. L., Giacovazzo, C., Guagliardi, A., Moliterni, A. G. G., Polidori, G. & Spagna, R. (1999). SIR97: a new tool for crystal structure determination and refinement. J. Appl. Cryst. 32, 115–119. XTAL3.6.1: Hall, S. R., du Boulay, D. J. & Olthof-Hazekamp, R. (1999). Xtal3.6 crystallographic software. http://www.crystal. uwa.edu.au/Crystal/xtal.

230

2.2. DIRECT METHODS 2.2.10. Direct methods in macromolecular crystallography 2.2.10.1. Introduction Protein structures cannot be solved ab initio by traditional direct methods (i.e., by application of the tangent formula alone). Accordingly, the first applications were focused on two tasks: (a) improvement of the accuracy of the available phases (refinement process); (b) extension of phases from lower to higher resolution (phaseextension process). The application of standard tangent techniques to (a) and (b) has not been found to be very satisfactory (Coulter & Dewar, 1971; Hendrickson et al., 1973; Weinzierl et al., 1969). Tangent methods, in fact, require atomicity and non-negativity of the electron density. Both these properties are not satisfied if data do not extend to atomic resolution d > 2 A. Because of series termination and other errors the electron-density map at d > 2 A presents large negative regions which will appear as false peaks in the squared structure. However, tangent methods use only a part of the information given by the Sayre equation (2.2.6.5). In fact, (2.2.6.5) express two equations relating the radial and angular parts of the two sides, so obtaining a large degree of overdetermination of the phases. To achieve this Sayre (1972) [see also Sayre & Toupin (1975)] suggested minimizing (2.2.10.1) by least squares as a function of the phases: 2 P P : a F F F 2:2:10:1 h h k h k h

k

Even if tests on rubredoxin (extensions of phases from 2.5 to 1.5 A˚ resolution) and insulin (Cutfield et al., 1975) (from 1.9 to 1.5 A˚ resolution) were successful, the limitations of the method are its high cost and, especially, the higher efficiency of the least-squares method. Equivalent considerations hold for the application of determinantal methods to proteins [see Podjarny et al. (1981); de Rango et al. (1985) and literature cited therein]. A question now arises: why is the tangent formula unable to solve protein structures? Fan et al. (1991) considered the question from a first-principle approach and concluded that: (1) the triplet phase probability distribution is very flat for proteins (N is very large) and close to the uniform distribution; (2) low-resolution data create additional problems for direct methods since the number of available phase relationships per reflection is small. Sheldrick (1990) suggested that direct methods are not expected to succeed if fewer than half of the reflections in the range 1.1–1.2 A˚ are observed with jFj > 4jFj (a condition seldom satisfied by protein data). The most complete analysis of the problem has been made by Giacovazzo, Guagliardi et al. (1994). They observed that the expected value of (see Section 2.2.7) suggested by the tangent formula for proteins is comparable with the variance of the parameter. In other words, for proteins the signal determining the phase is comparable with the noise, and therefore the phase indication is expected to be unreliable. 2.2.10.2. Ab initio direct phasing of proteins Section 2.2.10.1 suggests that the mere use of the tangent formula or the Sayre equation cannot solve ab initio protein structures of usual size. However, even in an ab initio situation, there is a source of supplementary information which may be used. Good examples are the ‘peaklist optimization’ procedure (Sheldrick & Gould, 1995) and the SIR97 procedure (Altomare et al., 1999) for refining and completing the trial structure offered by the first E map.

In both cases there are reasons to suspect that the correct structure is sometimes extracted from a totally incorrect direct-methods solution. These results suggest that a direct-space procedure can provide some form of structural information complementary to that used in reciprocal space by the tangent or similar formulae. The combination of real- and reciprocal-space techniques could therefore enlarge the size of crystal structures solvable by direct methods. The first program to explicitly propose the combined use of direct and reciprocal space was Shake and Bake (SnB), which inspired a second package, half-bake (HB). A third program, SIR99, uses a different algorithm. The SnB method (DeTitta et al., 1994; Weeks et al., 1994; Hauptman, 1995) is the heir of the cosine least-squares method described in Section 2.2.8, point (4). The function P R

j Gj cos j

P

j Gj

D1 Gj 2

,

where is the triplet phase, G 2jEh Ek Ehk j=N1=2 and D1 x I1 x=I0 x. R is expected to have a global minimum, provided the number of phases involved is sufficiently large, when all the phases are equal to their true values for some choice of origin and enantiomorph. Thus the phasing problem reduces to that of finding the global minimum of R (the minimum principle). SnB comprises a shake step (phase refinement) and a bake step (electron-density modification), the second step aiming to impose phase constraints implicit in real space. Accordingly, the program requires two Fourier transforms per cycle, and numerous cycles. Thus it may be very time consuming and it is not competitive with other direct methods for the solution of the crystal structures of small molecules. However, it introduced into the field the tremendous usefulness of intensive computations for the direct solution of complex crystal structures. Owing to Sheldrick (1997), HB does most of its work in direct space. Random atomic positions are generated, to which a modified peaklist optimization process is applied.PA number of peaks are eliminated subject to the condition that jEc jjE0 j2 1 remains as large as possible (only reflections with jE0 j > jEmin j are involved, where jEmin j ' 1:4). The phases of a suitable subset of reflections are then used as input for a tangent expansion. Then an E map is calculated from which peaks are selected: these are submitted to the elimination procedure. Typically 5–20 cycles of this internal loop are performed. Then a correlation coefficient (CC) between jE0 j and jEc j is calculated for all the data. If the CC is good (i.e. larger than a given threshold), then a new loop is performed: a new E map is obtained, from which a list of peaks is selected for submission to the elimination procedure. The criterion now is the value of the CC, which is calculated for all the reflections. Typically two to five cycles of this external loop are performed. The program works indefinitely, restarting from random atoms until interrupted. It may work either by applying the true spacegroup symmetry or after having expanded the data to P1. The SIR99 procedure (Burla et al., 1999) may be divided into two distinct parts: the tangent section (i.e., a double tangent process using triplet and quartet invariants) is followed by a real-space refinement procedure. As in SIR97, the reciprocal-space part is followed by the real-space refinement, but this time this last part is much more complex. It involves three different techniques: EDM (an electron-density modification process), the HAFR part (in which all the peaks are associated with the heaviest atomic species) and the DLSQ procedure (a least-squares Fourier refinement process). The atomicity is gradually introduced into the procedure. The entire process requires, for each trial, several cycles of EDM and HAFR:

231

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION the real-space part is able to lead to the correct solution even when the tangent formula does not provide favourable phase values. 2.2.10.3. Integration of direct methods with isomorphous replacement techniques The modulus of the isomorphous difference F jFPH j

jFP j

may be assumed at a first approximation as an estimate of the heavy-atom s.f. FH . Normalization of jFj’s and application of the tangent formula may reveal the heavy-atom structure (Wilson, 1978). The theoretical basis for integrating the techniques of direct methods and isomorphous replacement was introduced by Hauptman (1982a). According to his notation let us denote by fj and gj atomic scattering factors for the atom labelled j in a pair of isomorphous structures, and let Eh and Gh denote corresponding normalized structure factors. Then 1=2

Eh jEh j expi'h 20 Gh jGh j expi

h

N P

fj exp2ih rj ,

1=2

N P

gj exp2ih rj ,

j1

N P j1

fjm gjn :

The conditional probability of the two-phase structure invariant 'h h given jEh j and jGh j is (Hauptman, 1982a) Pj jEj, jGj ' 2I0 Q

1

expQ cos ,

where Q jEGj2=1

2 ,

1=2 1=2

11 =20 02 : Three-phase structure invariants were evaluated by considering that eight invariants exist for a given triple of indices h, k, l h k l 0: 1 'h 'k ' l

2 'h 'k

3 'h

'l

4

l k 'l

6 8

5 'h 7 h

k k

h

l

'k h k h

Fh P Fk PH

Fk P Fl PH

Fl P

is plus then the value of 1 is estimated to be zero; if its sign is minus then the expected value of 1 is close to . In practice Karle’s rule agrees with (2.2.10.2) only if the Cochran-type term in (2.2.10.2) may be neglected. Furthermore, (2.2.10.2) shows that large reliability values do not depend on the triple product of structure-factor differences, but on the triple product of pseudonormalized differences. A series of papers (Giacovazzo, Siliqi & Ralph, 1994; Giacovazzo, Siliqi & Spagna, 1994; Giacovazzo, Siliqi & Platas, 1995; Giacovazzo, Siliqi & Zanotti, 1995; Giacovazzo et al., 1996) shows how equation (2.2.10.2) may be implemented in a direct procedure which proved to be able to estimate the protein phases correctly without any preliminary information on the heavy-atom substructure. Combination of direct methods with the two-derivative case is also possible (Fortier et al., 1984) and leads to more accurate estimates of triplet invariants provided experimental data are of sufficient accuracy. 2.2.10.4. Integration of anomalous-dispersion techniques with direct methods

l l:

PEh , Ek , El , Gh , Gk , Gl has to be studied, from which eight conditional probability densities can be obtained: Pi kEh j, jEk j, jEl j, jGh j, jGk j, jGl j 1

2:2:10:2

'k ' l

So, for the estimation of any j , the joint probability distribution

' 2I0 Qj

3=2

where indices P and H warn that parameters have to be calculated over protein atoms and over heavy atoms, respectively, and P 1=2 FPH FP = fj2 H :

Fh PH

where mn

3=2

Q1 23 =2 P jEh Ek El j 23 =2 H h k l ,

is a pseudo-normalized difference (with respect to the heavyatom structure) between moduli of structure factors. Equation (2.2.10.2) may be compared with Karle’s (1983) qualitative rule: if the sign of

j1

02

them, distributions do not depend, as in the case of the traditional three-phase invariants, on the total number of atoms per unit cell but rather on the scattering difference between the native protein and the derivative (that is, on the scattering of the heavy atoms in the derivative). Hauptman’s formulae were generalized by Giacovazzo et al. (1988): the new expressions were able to take into account the resolution effects on distribution parameters. The formulae are completely general and include as special cases native protein and heavy-atom isomorphous derivatives as well as X-ray and neutron diffraction data. Their complicated algebraic forms are easily reduced to a simple expression in the case of a native protein heavyatom derivative: in particular, the reliability parameter for 1 is

expQj cos j

for j 1, . . . , 8. The analytical expressions of Qj are too intricate and are not given here (the reader is referred to the original paper). We only say that Qj may be positive or negative, so that reliable triplet phase estimates near 0 or near are possible: the larger jQj j, the more reliable the phase estimate. A useful interpretation of the formulae in terms of experimental parameters was suggested by Fortier et al. (1984): according to

If the frequency of the radiation is close to an absorption edge of an atom, then that atom will scatter the X-rays anomalously (see Chapter 2.4) according to f f 0 if 00 . This results in the breakdown of Friedel’s law. It was soon realized that the Bijvoet difference could also be used in the determination of phases (Peerdeman & Bijvoet, 1956; Ramachandran & Raman, 1956; Okaya & Pepinsky, 1956). Since then, a great deal of work has been done both from algebraic (see Chapter 2.4) and from probabilistic points of view. In this section we are only interested in the second. We will mention the following different cases: (1) The OAS (one-wavelength anomalous scattering) case, also called SAS (single-wavelength anomalous scattering). (2) The SIRAS (single isomorphous replacement combined with anomalous scattering) case. Typically, native protein and heavyatom-derivative data are simultaneously available, with heavy atoms as anomalous scatterers. (3) The MIRAS case, which generalizes the SIRAS case. (4) The MAD case, a multiple-wavelength technique.

232

2.2. DIRECT METHODS Eh Ek El R h R k R l expih; k ,

2.2.10.4.1. One-wavelength techniques Probability distributions of diffraction intensities and of selected functions of diffraction intensities for dispersive structures have been given by various authors [Parthasarathy & Srinivasan (1964), see also Srinivasan & Parthasarathy (1976) and relevant literature cited therein]. We describe here some probabilistic formulae for estimating invariants of low order. (a) Estimation of two-phase structure invariants. The conditional probability distribution of 'h ' h given R h and Gh (normalized moduli of Fh and F h , respectively) (Hauptman, 1982b; Giacovazzo, 1983b) is PjR h , Gh ' 2I0 Q

1

expQ cos

q,

2:2:10:3

where 2R h Gh Q p c21 c22 1=2 , c c1 c2 , sin q , cos q 1=2 c21 c22 c21 c22 1=2 N P P c1 fj0 2 fj00 2 = ,

E h E k E l Gh Gk Gl expih; k , 1 2h; k h; k , and 00 is the contribution of the imaginary part of , which may be approximated in favourable conditions by 00 2f 00 fh0 fk0 fh0 fl0 fk fl 1 SR 2h R 2k R 2l

where S is a suitable scale factor. ( and Equation (2.2.10.5) gives two possible values for ). Only if R h R k R hk is large enough may this phase ambiguity be resolved by choosing the angle nearest to zero. The evaluation of triplet phases by means of anomalous dispersion has been further pursued by Hauptman (1982b) and Giacovazzo (1983b). Owing to the breakdown of Friedel’s law there are eight distinct triplet invariants which can contemporaneously be exploited:

j1

c2 2

N P j1

N P

,

fj0 2 fj00 2 :

j1

q is the most probable value of : a large value of the parameter Q suggests that the phase relation q is reliable. Large values of Q are often available in practice: q, however, may be considered an estimate of jj rather than of because the enantiomorph is not fixed in (2.2.10.3). A formula for the estimation of in centrosymmetric structures has recently been provided by Giacovazzo (1987). If the positions of the p anomalous scatterers are known a priori [let Fph jFph j expi'ph be the structure factor of the partial structure], then an estimate of 0 'h 'ph is given (Cascarano & Giacovazzo, 1985) by P0 jR h , R ph ' 2I0 Q0

1

expQ0 cos 0 ,

! P P = , p

P p

p P j1

fj0 2 fj00 2 :

(2.2.10.4) may be considered the generalization of Sim’s distribution (2.2.5.17) to dispersive structures. (b) Estimation of triplet invariants. Kroon et al. (1977) first incorporated anomalous diffraction in order to estimate triplet invariants. Their work was based on an analysis of the complex double Patterson function. Subsequent probabilistic considerations (Heinermann et al., 1978) confirmed their results, which can be so expressed: sin

jj2

where h k l 0

3 'h

4 'h 'k

'

5 '

h

7 '

h

'

k

'l , k

' l,

'k ' l ,

h

'k ' l '

6 'h '

k

8 '

k

h

'

l

'

l

'l :

iso jF j

jF j

can be used for locating the positions of the anomalous scatterers (Mukherjee et al., 1989). Tests prove that accuracy in the difference magnitudes is critical for the success of the phasing process. Suppose now that the positions of the heavy atoms have been found. How do we estimate the phase values for the protein? The phase ambiguity strictly connected with OAS techniques can be overcome by different methods: we quote the Qs method by Hao & Woolfson (1989), the Wilson distribution method and the MPS method by Ralph & Woolfson (1991), and the Bijvoet–Ramachandran–Raman method by Peerdeman & Bijvoet (1956), Raman (1959) and Moncrief & Lipscomb (1966). More recently, a probabilistic method by Fan & Gu (1985) gained additional insight into the problem. 2.2.10.4.2. The SIRAS, MIRAS and MAD cases

j j2

4 00 12 jj2 j j2

2 '

The definitions of Aj , Lj and !j are rather extensive and so the reader is referred to the published papers. Aj and Lj are positive values, so !j is the expected value of j . It may lie anywhere between 0 and 2. An algebraic analysis of triplet phase invariants coupled with probabilistic considerations has been carried out by Karle (1984, 1985). The rules permit the qualitative selection of triple phase invariants that have values close to =2, =2, 0, and other values in the range from to . Let us now describe some practical aspects of the integration of direct methods with OAS techniques. Anomalous difference structure factors

2:2:10:4

where Q0 2R R p= 1

1 'h 'k 'l ,

The conditional probability distribution for each of the eight triplet invariants, given R h , R k , R l , Gh , Gk , Gl , is 1 Pj j ' expAj cosj !j : Lj

c21 c22 2 ,

c 1 P

fj0 fj00 =

P

3,

j 00 j2 1=2

,

2:2:10:5

Isomorphous replacement and anomalous scattering are discussed in Chapter 2.4 and in IT F (2001). We observe here only that the SIRAS case can lead algebraically to unambiguous phase determination provided the experimental data are sufficiently good.

233

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Thus, any probabilistic treatment must take into consideration errors in the measurements. In the MIRAS and MAD cases the system is overconditioned: again any probabilistic treatment must consider errors in the measurements, but now overconditioning allows the reduction of the perverse effects of the experimental errors and (in MIRAS) of the lack of isomorphism.

A particular application of extreme relevance concerns the location of anomalous scatterers when selenomethioninesubstituted proteins and MAD data are available (Hendrickson & Ogata, 1997; Smith, 1998). In this case, many selenium sites should be identified and usual Patterson-interpretation methods can be expected to fail. The successes of SnB and HB prove the essential role of direct methods in this important area.

234


2.3. Patterson and molecular-replacement techniques BY M. G. ROSSMANN

2.3.1.1. Background Historically, the Patterson has been used in a variety of ways to effect the solutions of crystal structures. While some simple structures (Ketelaar & de Vries, 1939; Hughes, 1940; Speakman, 1949; Shoemaker et al., 1950) were solved by direct analysis of Patterson syntheses, alternative methods have largely superseded this procedure. An early innovation was the heavy-atom method which depends on the location of a small number of relatively strong scatterers (Harker, 1936). Image-seeking methods and Patterson superposition techniques were first contemplated in the late 1930s (Wrinch, 1939) and applied sometime later (Beevers & Robertson, 1950; Clastre & Gay, 1950; Garrido, 1950a; Buerger, 1959). This experience provided the encouragement for computerized vector-search methods to locate individual atoms automatically (Mighell & Jacobson, 1963; Kraut, 1961; Hamilton, 1965; Simpson et al., 1965) or to position known molecular fragments in unknown crystal structures (Nordman & Nakatsu, 1963; Huber, 1965). The Patterson function has been used extensively in conjunction with the isomorphous replacement method (Rossmann, 1960; Blow, 1958) or anomalous dispersion (Rossmann, 1961a) to determine the position of heavy-atom substitution. Pattersons have been used to detect the presence and relative orientation of multiple copies of a given chemical motif in the crystallographic asymmetric unit in the same or different crystals (Rossmann & Blow, 1962). Finally, the orientation and placement of known molecular structures (‘molecular replacement’) into unknown crystal structures can be accomplished via Patterson techniques. The function, introduced by Patterson in 1934 (Patterson, 1934a,b), is a convolution of electron density with itself and may be defined as R Pu x u x dx, 2:3:1:1 V

where Pu is the ‘Patterson’ function at u, x is the crystal’s periodic electron density and V is the volume of the unit cell. The Patterson function, or F 2 series, can be calculated directly from the experimentally derived X-ray intensities as 2 V2

hemisphere X

jFh j2 cos 2h u:

E. ARNOLD

An analysis of Patterson peaks can be obtained by considering N atoms with form factors fi in the unit cell. Then

2.3.1. Introduction

Pu

AND

2:3:1:2

h

The derivation of (2.3.1.2) from (2.3.1.1) can be found in this volume (see Section 1.3.4.2.1.6) along with a discussion of the physical significance and symmetry of the Patterson function, although the principal properties will be restated here. The Patterson can be considered to be a vector map of all the pairwise interactions between the atoms in a unit cell. The vectors in a Patterson correspond to vectors in the real (direct) crystal cell but translated to the Patterson origin. Their weights are proportional to the product of densities at the tips of the vectors in the real cell. The Patterson unit cell has the same size as the real crystal cell. The symmetry of the Patterson comprises the Laue point group of the crystal cell plus any additional lattice symmetry due to Bravais centring. The reduction of the real space group to the Laue symmetry is produced by the translation of all vectors to the Patterson origin and the introduction of a centre of symmetry. The latter is a consequence of the relationship between the vectors AB and BA. The Patterson symmetries for all 230 space groups are tabulated in IT A (1983).

Fh

fi exp2ih xi :

i1

Using Friedel’s law, jFh j2 Fh Fh # N " N P P fi exp2ih xi fj exp 2ih xj , i1

j1

which can be decomposed to jFh j2

N P i1

fi2

NP N P i6j

fi fj exp2ih xi

xj :

2:3:1:3

On substituting (2.3.1.3) in (2.3.1.2), we see that the Patterson consists of the sum of N 2 total interactions of which N are of weight fi2 at the origin and N N 1 are of weight fi fj at xi xj . The weight of a peak in a real cell is given by R wi i x dx Zi the atomic number, U

where U is the volume of the atom i. By analogy, the weight of a peak in a Patterson (form factor fi fj ) will be given by R wij Pij u du Zi Zj : U

Although the maximum height of a peak will depend on the spread of the peak, it is reasonable to assume that heights of peaks in a Patterson are proportional to the products of the atomic numbers of the interacting atoms. There are a total of N 2 interactions in a Patterson due to N atoms in the crystal cell. These can be represented as an N N square matrix whose elements uij , wij indicate the position and weight of the peak produced between atoms i and j (Table 2.3.1.1). The N vectors corresponding to the diagonal of this matrix are located at the Patterson origin and arise from the convolution of each atom with itself. This leaves NN 1 vectors whose locations depend on the relative positions of all of the atoms in the crystal cell and whose weights depend on the atom types related by the vector. Complete specification of the unique non-origin Patterson vectors requires description of only the NN 1=2 elements in either the upper or the lower triangle of this matrix, since the two sets of vectors represented by the two triangles are related by a centre of symmetry uij xi xj uij xj xi . Patterson vector positions are usually represented as huvwi, where u, v and w are expressed as fractions of the Patterson cell axes. 2.3.1.2. Limits to the number of resolved vectors If we assume a constant number of atoms per unit volume, the number of atoms N in a unit cell increases in direct proportion with the volume of the unit cell. Since the number of non-origin peaks in the Patterson function is NN 1 and the Patterson cell is the same size as the real cell, the problem of overlapping peaks in the Patterson function becomes severe as N increases. To make matters worse, the breadth of a Patterson peak is roughly equal to the sum of the breadth of the original atoms. The effective width of a Patterson peak will also increase with increasing thermal motion, although this effect can be artificially reduced by sharpening techniques. Naturally, a loss of attainable resolution at high scattering angles


N P

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.3.1.1. Matrix representation of Patterson peaks The N N matrix represents the position uij and weights wij of atomic interactions in a Patterson arising from N atoms at xi and weight wi in the real cell.

x1 , w1 x2 , w2 .. . xN , wN

x1 , w1

x2 , w2

...

xN , wN

u11 x1 x1 , w11 w21 x2 x1 , w2 w1 .. . xN x1 , wN w1

u12 x1 x2 , w12 w1 w2 0, w22 .. . xN x2 , wN w2

...

u1N x1 xN , w1N w1 wN x2 xN , w2 wN .. . 0, w2N

... .. . ...

structure factors which had been obtained from a Patterson in which the largest peaks had been attenuated. The N origin peaks [see expression (2.3.1.3)] may be removed from the Patterson by using coefficients jFh; mod j2 jFh j2

N P i1

f i2 :

A Patterson function using these modified coefficients will retain all interatomic vectors. However, the observed structure factors Fh must first be placed on an absolute scale (Wilson, 1942) in order to match the scattering-factor term. Analogous to origin removal, the vector interactions due to atoms in known positions can also be removed from the Patterson function. Patterson showed that non-origin Patterson peaks arising from known atoms 1 and 2 may be removed by using the expression

will affect the resolution of atomic peaks in the real cell as well as peaks in the Patterson cell. If U is the van der Waals volume per average atom, then the fraction of the cell occupied by atoms will be f NU=V . Similarly, the fraction of the cell occupied by Patterson peaks will be 2UNN 1=V or 2f N 1. With the reasonable assumption that f ' 0:1 for a typical organic crystal, then the cell can contain at most five atoms N 5 for there to be no overlap, other than by coincidence, of the peaks in the Patterson. As N increases there will occur a background of peaks on which are superimposed features related to systematic properties of the structure. The contrast of selected Patterson peaks relative to the general background level can be enhanced by a variety of techniques. For instance, the presence of heavy atoms not only enhances the size of a relatively small number of peaks but ordinarily ensures a larger separation of the peaks due to the light-atom skeleton on which the heavy atoms are hung. That is, the factor f (above) is substantially reduced. Another example is the effect of systematic atomic arrangements (e.g. -helices or aromatic rings) resulting in multiple peaks which stand out above the background. In the isomorphous replacement method, isomorphous difference Pattersons are utilized in which the contrast of the Patterson interactions between the heavy atoms is enhanced by removal of the predominant interactions which involve the rest of the structure.

jFh; mod j2 jFh j2

N P i1

fi2 ti2

2f1 f2 t1 t2 cos 2h x1

x2 ,

where x1 and x2 are the positions of atoms 1 and 2 and t1 and t2 are their respective thermal correction factors. Using one-dimensional Fourier series, Patterson illustrated how interactions due to known atoms can obscure other information. Patterson also introduced a means by which the peaks in a Patterson function may be artificially sharpened. He considered the effect of thermal motion on the broadening of electron-density peaks and consequently their Patterson peaks. He suggested that the F 2 coefficients could be corrected for thermal effects by simulating the atoms as point scatterers and proposed using a modified set of coefficients jFh; sharp j2 jFh j2 =f 2 , where f , the average scattering factor per electron, is given by N N f P fi PZi : i1

i1

A common formulation for this type of sharpening expresses the atomic scattering factors at a given angle in terms of an overall isotropic thermal parameter B as f s f0 exp Bs2 :

2.3.1.3. Modifications: origin removal, sharpening etc. A. L. Patterson, in his first in-depth exposition of his newly discovered F 2 series (Patterson, 1935), introduced the major modifications to the Patterson which are still in use today. He illustrated, with one-dimensional Fourier series, the techniques of removing the Patterson origin peak, sharpening the overall function and also removing peaks due to atoms in special positions. Each one of these modifications can improve the interpretability of Pattersons, especially those of simple structures. Whereas the recommended extent of such modifications is controversial (Buerger, 1966), most studies which utilize Patterson functions do incorporate some of these techniques [see, for example, Jacobson et al. (1961), Braun et al. (1969) and Nordman (1980a)]. Since Patterson’s original work, other workers have suggested that the Patterson function itself might be modified; Fourier inversion of the modified Patterson then provides a new and perhaps more tractable set of structure factors (McLachlan & Harker, 1951; Simonov, 1965; Raman, 1966; Corfield & Rosenstein, 1966). Karle & Hauptman (1964) suggested that an improved set of structure factors could be obtained from an origin-removed Patterson modified such that it was everywhere non-negative and that Patterson density values less than a bonding distance from the origin were set to zero. Nixon (1978) was successful in solving a structure which had previously resisted solution by using a set of

The Patterson coefficients then become Z total Fh : Fh; sharp PN il f s The normalized structure factors, E (see Chapter 2.2), which are used in crystallographic direct methods, are also a common source of sharpened Patterson coefficients E2 1. Although the centre positions and total contents of Patterson peaks are unaltered by sharpening, the resolution of individual peaks may be enhanced. The degree of sharpening can be controlled by adjusting the size of the assumed B factor; Lipson & Cochran (1966, pp. 165–170) analysed the effect of such a choice on Patterson peak shape. All methods of sharpening Patterson coefficients aim at producing a point atomic representation of the unit cell. In this quest, the high-resolution terms are enhanced (Fig. 2.3.1.1). Unfortunately, this procedure must also produce a serious Fourier truncation error which will be seen as large ripples about each Patterson peak (Gibbs, 1898). Consequently, various techniques have been used (mostly unsuccessfully) in an attempt to balance the advantages of sharpening with the disadvantages of truncation errors. Schomaker and Shoemaker [unpublished; see Lipson & Cochran (1966, p. 168)] used a function

236

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES

Fig. 2.3.1.1. Effect of ‘sharpening’ Patterson coefficients. (1) shows a mean distribution of jFj2 values with resolution, sin =. The normal decline of this curve is due to increasing destructive interference between different portions within diffuse atoms at larger Bragg angles. (2) shows the distribution of ‘sharpened’ coefficients. (3) shows the theoretical distribution of jFj2 produced by a point-atom structure. To represent such a structure with a Fourier series would require an infinite series in order to avoid large errors caused by truncation.

jFh j2 jFh; sharp j 2 s2 exp f 2

2 2 s , p

in which s is the length of the scattering vector, to produce a Patterson synthesis which is less sensitive to errors in the low-order terms. Jacobson et al. (1961) used a similar function, jFh j2 2 jFh; sharp j2 2 k s2 exp s , p f which they rationalize as the sum of a scaled exponentially sharpened Patterson and a gradient Patterson function (the value of k was empirically chosen as 23). This approach was subsequently further developed and generalized by Wunderlich (1965). 2.3.1.4. Homometric structures and the uniqueness of structure solutions; enantiomorphic solutions Interpretation of any Patterson requires some assumption, such as the existence of discrete atoms. A complete interpretation might also require an assumption of the number of atoms and may require other external information (e.g. bond lengths, bond angles, van der Waals separations, hydrogen bonding, positive density etc.). To what extent is the solution of a Patterson function unique? Clearly the greater is the supply of external information, the fewer will be the number of possible solutions. Other constraints on the significance of a Patterson include the error involved in measuring the observed coefficients and the resolution limit to which they have been observed. The larger the error, the larger the number of solutions. When the error on the amplitudes is infinite, it is only the other physical constraints, such as packing, which limit the structural solutions. Alternative solutions of the same Patterson are known as homometric structures. During their investigation of the mineral bixbyite, Pauling & Shappell (1930) made the disturbing observation that there were two solutions to the structure, with different arrangements of atoms, which yielded the same set of calculated intensities. Specifically, atoms occupying equipoint set 24d in space group I21 =a3 can be placed at either x, 0, 14 or x, 0, 14 without changing the calculated intensities. Yet the two structures were not chemically equivalent. These authors resolved the ambiguity by placing the oxygen atoms in question at positions which gave the most acceptable bonding distances with the rest of the structure.

Patterson interpreted the above ambiguity in terms of the F 2 series: the distance vector sets or Patterson functions of the two structures were the same since each yielded the same calculated intensities (Patterson, 1939). He defined such a pair of structures a homometric pair and called the degenerate vector set which they produced a homometric set. Patterson went on to investigate the likelihood of occurrence of homometric structures and, indeed, devoted a great deal of his time to this matter. He also developed algebraic formalisms for examining the occurrence of homometric pairs and multiplets in selected one-dimensional sets of points, such as cyclotomic sets, and also sets of points along a line (Patterson, 1944). Some simple homometric pairs are illustrated in Fig. 2.3.1.2. Drawing heavily from Patterson’s inquiries into the structural uniqueness allowed by the diffraction data, Hosemann, Bagchi and others have given formal definitions of the different types of homometric structures (Hosemann & Bagchi, 1954). They suggested a classification divided into pseudohomometric structures and homomorphs, and used an integral equation representing a convolution operation to express their examples of finite homometric structures. Other workers have chosen various means for describing homometric structures [Buerger (1959, pp. 41–50), Menzer (1949), Bullough (1961, 1964), Hoppe (1962)]. Since a Patterson function is centrosymmetric, the Pattersons of a crystal structure and of its mirror image are identical. Thus the enantiomeric ambiguity present in noncentrosymmetric crystal structures cannot be overcome by using the Patterson alone and represents a special case of homometric structures. Assignment of the correct enantiomorph in a crystal structure analysis is generally not possible unless a recognizable fragment of known chirality emerges (e.g. L-amino acids in proteins, D-riboses in nucleic acids, the known framework of steroids and other natural products, the right-handed twist of -helices, the left-handed twist of successive strands in a -sheet, the fold of a known protein subunit etc.) or anomalous-scattering information is available and can be used to resolve the ambiguity (Bijvoet et al., 1951). It is frequently necessary to select arbitrarily one enantiomorph over another in the early stages of a structure solution. Structurefactor phases calculated from a single heavy atom in space group P1, P2 or P21 (for instance) will be centrosymmetric and both enantiomorphs will be present in Fourier calculations based on these phases. In other space groups (e.g. P21 21 21 ), the selected heavy atom is likely to be near one of the planes containing the 21 axes and thus produce a weaker ‘ghost’ image of the opposite enantiomorph. The mixture of the two overlapped enantiomorphic solutions can cause interpretive difficulties. As the structure solution progresses, the ‘ghosts’ are exorcized owing to the dominance of the chosen enantiomorph in the phases.

Fig. 2.3.1.2. (c) The point Patterson of the two homometric structures in (a) and (b). The latter are constructed by taking points at a and 12 M0 , where M0 is a cell diagonal, and adding a third point which is (a) at 34 M0 a or (b) at 14 M0 a. [Reprinted with permission from Patterson (1944).]

237

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION 2.3.1.5. The Patterson synthesis of the second kind Patterson also defined a second, less well known, function (Patterson, 1949) as Z P u u x u x dx

2 V2

hemisphere X

Fh2 cos22h u

2h :

h

This function can be computed directly only for centrosymmetric structures. It can be calculated for noncentrosymmetric structures when the phase angles are known or assumed. It will represent the degree to which the known or assumed structure has a centre of symmetry at u. That is, the product of the density at u x and u x is large when integrated over all values x within the unit cell. Since atoms themselves have a centre of symmetry, the function will contain peaks at each atomic site roughly proportional in height to the square of the number of electrons in each atom plus peaks at the midpoint between atoms proportional in height to the product of the electrons in each atom. Although this function has not been found very useful in practice, it is useful for demonstrating the presence of weak enantiomorphic images in a given tentative structure determination.

convenient because then the structure factors are all real. Typically, one of the vector peaks closest to the Patterson origin is selected to start the solution, usually in the calculated asymmetric unit of the Patterson. Care must be exercised in selecting the same origin for all atomic positions by considering cross-vectors between atoms. Examine, for example, the c-axis Patterson projection of a cuprous chloride azomethane complex C2 H6 Cl2 Cu2 N2 in P1 as shown in Fig. 2.3.2.2. The largest Patterson peaks should correspond to vectors arising from Cu Z 29 and Cl Z 17 atoms. There will be copper atoms at xCu xCu , yCu and xCu xCu , yCu as well as chlorine atoms at analogous positions. The interaction matrix is

xCu , 29 xCl , 17 xCu , 29 xCl , 17

0, 841

xCu xCl , 493 0, 289

xCu , 29 2xCu , 841 xCl xCu , 493 0, 841

xCl , 17 xCu xCl , 493 2xCl , 289 xCu xCl , 493 0, 289

Position Weight Multiplicity Total weight 841 1 841 2xCu 2xCl 289 1 289 493 2 986 xCu xCl xCu xCl 493 2 986

2.3.2.1. Simple solutions in the triclinic cell. Selection of the origin

Fig. 2.3.2.1. Origin selection in the interpretation of a Patterson of a onedimensional centrosymmetric structure.

xCl , 17

which shows that the Patterson should contain the following types of vectors:

2.3.2. Interpretation of Patterson maps

A hypothetical one-dimensional centrosymmetric crystal structure containing an atom at x and at x and the corresponding Patterson is illustrated in Fig. 2.3.2.1. There are two different centres of symmetry which may be chosen as convenient origins. If the atoms are of equal weight, we expect Patterson vectors at positions u 2x with weights equal to half the origin peak. There are two symmetry-related peaks, u1 and u2 (Fig. 2.3.2.1) in the Patterson. It is an arbitrary choice whether u1 2x or u2 2x. This choice is equivalent to selecting the origin at the centre of symmetry I or II in the real structure (Fig. 2.3.2.1). Similarly in a threedimensional P1 cell, the Patterson will contain peaks at huvwi which can be used to solve for the atom coordinates h2x, 2y, 2zi. Solving for the same coordinates by starting from symmetric representations of the same vector will lead to alternate origin choices. For example, use of h1 u, 1 v, wi will lead to translating the origin by 12 , 12 , 0 relative to the solution based on huvwi. There are eight distinct inversion centres in P1, each one of which represents a valid origin choice. Although any choice of origin would be allowable, an inversion centre is

xCu , 29

The coordinates of the largest Patterson peaks are given in Table 2.3.2.1 for an asymmetric half of the cell chosen to span 0 ! 12 in u and 0 ! 1 in v. Since the three largest peaks are in the same ratio (7:7:6) as the three largest expected vector types (986:986:841), it is reasonable to assume that peak III corresponds to the copper– copper interaction at 2xCu . Hence, xCu 0:08 and yCu 0:20. Peaks I and II should be due to the double-weight Cu–Cl vectors at xCu xCl and xCu xCl . Now suppose that peak I is at position xCu xCl , then xCl 0:25 and yCl 0:14. Peak II should now check out as the remaining double-weight Cu–Cl interaction at xCu xCl . Indeed, xCu xCl h 0:17, 0:06i h0:17, 0:06i which agrees tolerably well with the position of peak II. The chlorine position also predicts the position of a peak at 2xCl with

Fig. 2.3.2.2. The c-axis projection of cuprous chloride azomethane complex C2 H6 Cl2 Cu2 N2 . The space group is P1 with one molecule per unit cell. [Adapted from and reprinted with permission from Woolfson (1970, p. 321).]

238

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES Table 2.3.2.1.

Coordinates of Patterson peaks for C 2 H 6 Cl2 Cu2 N 2 projection

Height

u

v

Number in diagram (Fig. 2.3.2.2)

7 7 6 3 3 2 2

0.33 0.18 0.16 0.49 0.02 0.30 0.12

0.34 0.97 0.40 0.29 0.59 0.75 0.79

I II III IV V VI VII

vectors and such ‘Harker vectors’ constitute the subject of the next section. 2.3.2.2. Harker sections

weight 289; peak IV confirms the chlorine assignment. In fact, this Patterson can be solved also for the lighter nitrogen- and carbonatom positions which account for the remainder of the vectors listed in Table 2.3.2.1. However, the simplest way to complete the structure determination is probably to compute a Fourier synthesis using phases calculated from the heavier copper and chlorine positions. Consider now a real cell with M crystallographic asymmetric units, each of which contains N atoms. Let us define xmn , the position of the nth atom in the mth crystallographic unit, by xmn T m x1n tm , where T m and tm are the rotation matrix and translation vector, respectively, for the mth crystallographic symmetry operator. The Patterson of this crystal will contain vector peaks which arise from atoms interacting with other atoms both in the same and in different crystallographic asymmetric units. The set of MN2 Patterson vector interactions for this crystal is represented in a matrix in Table 2.3.2.2. Upon dissection of this diagram we see that there are MN origin vectors, MN 1N vectors from atom interactions with other atoms in the same crystallographic asymmetric unit and MM 1N 2 vectors involving atoms in separate asymmetric units. Often a number of vectors of special significance relating symmetry-equivalent atoms emerge from this milieu of Patterson

Soon after Patterson introduced the F 2 series, Harker (1936) recognized that many types of crystallographic symmetry result in a concentration of vectors at characteristic locations in the Patterson. Specifically, he showed that atoms related by rotation axes produce vectors in characteristic planes of the Patterson, and that atoms related by mirror planes or reflection glide planes produce vectors on characteristic lines. Similarly, noncrystallographic symmetry operators produce analogous concentrations of vectors. Harker showed how special sections through a three-dimensional function could be computed using one- or two-dimensional summations. With the advent of powerful computers, it is usual to calculate a full three-dimensional Patterson synthesis. Nevertheless, ‘Harker’ planes or lines are often the starting point for a structure determination. It should, however, be noted that non-Harker vectors (those not due to interactions between symmetry-related atoms) can appear by coincidence in a Harker section. Table 2.3.2.3 shows the position in a Patterson of Harker planes and lines produced by all types of crystallographic symmetry operators. Buerger (1946) noted that Harker sections can be helpful in space-group determination. Concentrations of vectors in appropriate regions of the Patterson should be diagnostic for the presence of some symmetry elements. This is particularly useful where these elements (such as mirror planes) are not directly detected by systematic absences. Buerger also developed a systematic method of interpreting Harker peaks which he called implication theory [Buerger (1959, Chapter 7)]. 2.3.2.3. Finding heavy atoms The previous two sections have developed some of the useful mechanics for interpreting Pattersons. In this section, we will consider finding heavy-atom positions, in the presence of numerous light atoms, from Patterson maps. The feasibility of structure solution by the heavy-atom method depends on a number of factors which include the relative size of the heavy atom and the extent and

Table 2.3.2.2. Square matrix representation of vector interactions in a Patterson of a crystal with M crystallographic asymmetric units each containing N atoms Peak positions um1n1; m2n2 correspond to vectors between the atoms xm1n1 and xm2n2 where xmn is the nth atom in the mth crystallographic asymmetric unit. The corresponding weights are wn1 wn2 . The outlined blocks I1 and IM represent vector interactions between atoms in the same crystallographic asymmetric units (there are M such blocks). The off-diagonal blocks IIM1 and II1M represent vector interactions between atoms in crystal asymmetric units 1 and M; there are MM 1 blocks of this type. The significance of diagonal elements of block IIM1 is that they represent Harker-type interactions between symmetry-equivalent atoms (see Section 2.3.2.2).

x11 , w1 x12 , w2 .. . x1N , wN

x11 , w1

x12 , w2

...

x1N , wN

0, w21

u11; 12 , w1 w2 0, w22 .. .

... ...

u11; 1N , w1 wN u12; 1N , w2 wN .. . 0, w2N

...

xM1 , w1 xM2 , w2 .. . xMN , wN

Block II1M .. .

uM1; 11 , w21 uM2; 11 , w2 w1

xM2 , w2

...

Block I1 .. .

xM1 , w1

..

uM1; 12 , w1 w2 uM2; 12 , w22 .. .

.. .

.

... uMN ; 1N , w2N

Block IIM1

Block IM

239

...

xMN , wN

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.3.2.3. Position of Harker sections within a Patterson Symmetry element

Form of Px, y, z

(a) Harker planes Axes parallel to the b axis: (i) 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 6, 6 (ii) 21 , 42 , 63 (iii) 31 , 32 , 62 , 64 (iv) 41 , 43 (v) 61 , 65

Px, 0, z Px, 12 , z Px, 13 , z Px, 14 , z Px, 16 , z

(b) Harker lines Planes perpendicular to the b axis: (i) Reflection planes (ii) Glide plane, glide 12 a (iii) Glide plane, glide 12 c (iv) Glide plane, glide 12 a c (v) Glide plane, glide 14 a c (vi) Glide plane, glide 14 3a c

P0, y, 0 P12 , y, 0 P0, y, 12 P12 , y, 12 P14 , y, 14 P34 , y, 14

(c) Special Harker planes Axes parallel to or containing body diagonal (111), valid for cubic space groups only: Equation of plane lx my nz p 0 (i) 3 l m n cos 54:73561 0:57735 p0 l m n cos 54:73561 0:57735 (ii) 31 p p 3=3 Rhombohedral threefold axes produce analogous Harker planes whose description will depend on the interaxial angle.

quality of the data. A useful rule of thumb is that the ratio P heavy r P

Z2

light Z

2

should be near unity if the heavy atom is to provide useful starting phase information (Z is the atomic number of an atom). The condition that r > 1 normally guarantees interpretability of the Patterson function in terms of the heavy-atom positions. This ‘rule’, arising from the work of Luzzati (1953), Woolfson (1956), Sim (1961) and others, is not inviolable; many ambitious determinations have been accomplished via the heavy-atom method for which r was well below 1.0. An outstanding example is vitamin B12 with formula C62 H88 CoO14 P, which gave an r 0:14 for the cobalt atom alone (Hodgkin et al., 1957). One factor contributing to the success of such a determination is that the relative scattering power of Co is enhanced for higher scattering angles. Thus, the ratio, r, provides a conservative estimate. If the value of r is well above 1.0, the initial easier interpretation of the Patterson will come at the expense of poorly defined parameters of the lighter atoms. A general strategy for determining heavy atoms from the Patterson usually involves the following steps. (1) List the number and type of atoms in the cell. (2) Construct the interaction matrix for the heaviest atoms to predict the positions and weights of the largest Patterson vectors. Group recurrent vectors and notice vectors with special properties, such as Harker vectors.

(3) Compute the Patterson using any desired P modifications. Placing the map on an absolute scale P000 Z 2 is convenient but not necessary. (4) Examine Harker sections and derive trial atom coordinates from vector positions. (5) Check the trial coordinates using other vectors in the predicted set. Correlate enantiomorphic choice and origin choice for independent sites. (6) Include the next-heaviest atoms in the interpretation if possible. In particular, use the cross-vectors with the heaviest atoms. (7) Use the best heavy-atom model to initiate phasing. Detailed and instructive examples of using Pattersons to find heavy-atom positions are found in almost every textbook on crystal structure analysis [see, for example, Buerger (1959), Lipson & Cochran (1966) and Stout & Jensen (1968)]. The determination of the crystal structure of cholesteryl iodide by Carlisle & Crowfoot (1945) provides an example of using the Patterson function to locate heavy atoms. There were two molecules, each of formula C27 H45 I, in the P21 unit cell. The ratio r 2:8 is clearly well over the optimal value of unity. The P(x, z) Patterson projection showed one dominant peak at h0:434, 0:084i in the asymmetric unit. The equivalent positions for P21 require that an iodine atom at xI , yI , zI generates another at xI , 12 yI , zI and thus produces a Patterson peak at h2xI , 12 , 2zI i. The iodine position was therefore determined as 0.217, 0.042. The y coordinate of the iodine is arbitrary for P21 yet the value of yI 0:25 is convenient, since an inversion centre in the two-atom iodine structure is then exactly at the origin, making all calculated phases 0 or . Although the presence of this extra symmetry caused some initial difficulties in the interpretation of the steroid backbone, Carlisle and Crowfoot successfully separated the enantiomorphic images. Owing to the presence of the perhaps too heavy iodine atom, however, the structure of the carbon skeleton could not be defined very precisely. Nevertheless, all critical stereochemical details were adequately illuminated by this determination. In the cholesteryl iodide example, a number of different yet equivalent origins could have been selected. Alternative origin choices include all combinations of x 12 and z 12. A further example of using the Patterson to find heavy atoms will be provided in Section 2.3.5.2 on solving for heavy atoms in the presence of noncrystallographic symmetry. 2.3.2.4. Superposition methods. Image detection As early as 1939, Wrinch (1939) showed that it was possible, in principle, to recover a fundamental set of points from the vector map of that set. Unlike the Harker–Buerger implication theory (Buerger, 1946), the method that Wrinch suggested was capable of using all the vectors in a three-dimensional set, not those restricted to special lines or sections. Wrinch’s ideas were developed for vector sets of points, however, and could not be directly applied to real, heavily overlapped Pattersons of a complex structure. These ideas seem to have lain dormant until the early 1950s when a number of independent investigators developed superposition methods (Beevers & Robertson, 1950; Clastre & Gay, 1950; Garrido, 1950a; Buerger, 1950a). A Patterson can be considered as a sum of images of a molecule as seen, in turn, for each atom placed on the origin (Fig. 2.3.2.3). Thus, the deconvolution of a Patterson could proceed by superimposing each image of the molecule obtained onto the others by translating the Patterson origin to each imaging atom. For instance, let us take a molecule consisting of four atoms ABCD arranged in the form of a quadrilateral (Fig. 2.3.2.3). Then the Patterson consists of the images of four identical quadrilaterals with atoms A, B, C and D placed on the origin in turn. The Pattersons can then be

240

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES Thus, the sum function is equivalent to a weighted ‘heavy atom’ method based on the known atoms assumed by the superposition translation vectors. The product function is somewhat more vigorous in that the images are enhanced by the product. If an image is superimposed on no image, then the product should be zero. The product function can be expressed as Prx

N Q

Px ui :

i1

When N 2 (h and p are sets of Miller indices), PP 2 2 Prx Fh Fp exp2ih p x h p

exp2ih ui p ui : Fig. 2.3.2.3. Atoms ABCD, arranged as a quadrilateral, generate a Patterson which is the sum of the images of the quadrilateral when each atom is placed on the origin in turn.

deconvoluted by superimposing two of these Pattersons after translating these (without rotation) by, for instance, the vector AB. A further improvement could be obtained by superimposing a third Patterson translated by AC. This would have the additional advantage in that ABC is a noncentrosymmetric arrangement and, therefore, selects the enantiomorph corresponding to the hand of the atomic arrangement ABC [cf. Buerger (1951, 1959)]. A basic problem is that knowledge of the vectors AB and AC also implies some knowledge of the structure at a time when the structure is not yet known. In practice ‘good-looking’ peaks, estimated to be single peaks by assessing the absolute scale of the structure amplitudes with Wilson statistics, can be assumed to be the result of single interatomic vectors within a molecule. Superposition can then proceed and the result can be inspected for reasonable chemical sense. As many apparently single peaks can be tried systematically using a computer, this technique is useful for selecting and testing a series of reasonable Patterson interpretations (Jacobson et al., 1961). Three major methods have been used for the detection of molecular images of superimposed Pattersons. These are the sum, product and minimum ‘image seeking’ functions (Raman & Lipscomb, 1961). The concept of the sum function is to add the images where they superimpose, whereas elsewhere the summed Pattersons will have a lower value owing to lack of image superposition. Therefore, the sum function determines the average Patterson density for superimposed images, and is represented analytically as Sx

N P

Px ui ,

i1

where Sx is the sum function at x given by the superposition of the ith Patterson translated by ui , or N P P 2 Fh exp2ih x exp2ih ui : Sx h

i1

Setting m expi'h

N P

exp2ih ui

i1

(m and 'h can be calculated from the translational vectors used for the superposition), P Sx Fh2 m exp2ih x 'h : h

Successive superpositions using the product functions will quickly be dominated by a few terms with very large coefficients. Finally, the minimum function is a clever invention of Buerger (Buerger, 1950b, 1951, 1953a,b,c; Taylor, 1953; Rogers, 1951). If a superposition is correct then each Patterson must represent an image of the structure. Whenever there are two or more images that intersect in the Patterson, the Patterson density will be greater than a single image. When two different images are superimposed, it is a reasonable hope that at least one of these is a single image. Thus by taking the value of that Patterson which is the minimum, it should be possible to select a single image and eliminate noise from interfering images as far as possible. Although the minimum function is perhaps the most powerful algorithm for image selection of well sharpened Pattersons, it is not readily amenable to Fourier representation. The minimum function was conceived on the basis of selecting positive images on a near-zero background. If it were desired to select negative images [e.g. the F1 F2 2 correlation function discussed in Section 2.3.3.4], then it would be necessary to use a maximum function. In fact, normally, an image has finite volume with varying density. Thus, some modification of the minimum function is necessary in those cases where the image is large compared to the volume of the unit cell, as in low-resolution protein structures (Rossmann, 1961b). Nordman (1966) used the average of the Patterson values of the lowest 10 to 20 per cent of the vectors in comparing Pattersons with hypothetical point Pattersons. A similar criterion was used by High & Kraut (1966). Image-seeking methods using Patterson superposition have been used extensively (Beevers & Robertson, 1950; Garrido, 1950b; Robertson, 1951). For a review the reader is referred to Vector Space (Buerger, 1959) and a paper by Fridrichsons & Mathieson (1962). However, with the advent of computerized direct methods (see Chapter 2.2), such techniques are no longer popular. Nevertheless, they provide the conceptual framework for the rotation and translation functions (see Sections 2.3.6 and 2.3.7). 2.3.2.5. Systematic computerized Patterson vector-search procedures. Looking for rigid bodies The power of the modern digital computer has enabled rapid access to the large number of Patterson density values which can serve as a lookup table for systematic vector-search procedures. In the late 1950s, investigators began to use systematic searches for the placement of single atoms, of known chemical groups or fragments and of entire known structures. Methods for locating single atoms were developed and called variously: vector verification (Mighell & Jacobson, 1963), symmetry minimum function (Kraut, 1961; Simpson et al., 1965; Corfield & Rosenstein, 1966) and consistency functions (Hamilton, 1965). Patterson superposition techniques using stored function values were often used to image the structure

241

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION from the known portion. In such single-site search procedures, single atoms are placed at all possible positions in a crystal, using a search grid of the same fineness as for the stored Patterson function, preferably about one-third of the resolution of the Patterson map. Solutions are gauged to be acceptable if all expected vectors due to symmetry-related atoms are observed above a specified threshold in the Patterson. Systematic computerized Patterson search procedures for orienting and positioning known molecular fragments were also developed in the early 1960s. These hierarchical procedures rely on first using the ‘self’-vectors which depend only on the orientation of a molecular fragment. A search for the position of the fragment relative to the crystal symmetry elements then uses the crossvectors between molecules (see Sections 2.3.6 and 2.3.7). Nordman constructed a weighted point representation of the predicted vector set for a fragment (Nordman & Nakatsu, 1963; Nordman, 1966) and successfully solved the structure of a number of complex alkaloids. Huber (1965) used the convolution molecule method of Hoppe (1957a) in three dimensions to solve a number of natural-product structures, including steroids. Various program systems have used Patterson search methods operating in real space to solve complex structures (Braun et al., 1969; Egert, 1983). Others have used reciprocal-space procedures for locating known fragments. Tollin & Cochran (1964) developed a procedure for determining the orientation of planar groups by searching for origin-containing planes of high density in the Patterson. General procedures using reciprocal-space representations for determining rotation and translation parameters have been developed and will be described in Sections 2.3.6 and 2.3.7, respectively. Although as many functions have been used to detect solutions in these Patterson search procedures as there are programs, most rely on some variation of the sum, product and minimum functions (Section 2.3.2.4). The quality of the stored Patterson density representation also varies widely, but it is now common to use 16 or more bits for single density values. Treatment of vector overlap is handled differently by different investigators and the choice will depend on the degree of overlapping (Nordman & Schilling, 1970; Nordman, 1972). General Gaussian multiplicity corrections can be employed to treat coincidental overlap of independent vectors in general positions and overlap which occurs for symmetric peaks in the vicinity of a special position or mirror plane in the Patterson (G. Kamer, S. Ramakumar & P. Argos, unpublished results; Rossmann et al., 1972).

they dominated the total scattering effect. It was not until Perutz and his colleagues (Green et al., 1954; Bragg & Perutz, 1954) applied the technique to the solution of haemoglobin, a protein of 68 000 Da, that it was necessary to consider methods for detecting heavy atoms. The effect of a single heavy atom, even uranium, can only have a very marginal effect on the structure amplitudes of a crystalline macromolecule. Hence, techniques had to be developed which were dependent on the difference of the isomorphous structure amplitudes rather than on the solution of the Patterson of the heavy-atom-derivative compound on its own. 2.3.3.2. Finding heavy atoms with centrosymmetric projections Phases in a centrosymmetric projection will be 0 or if the origin is chosen at the centre of symmetry. Hence, the native structure factor, FN , and the heavy-atom-derivative structure factor, FNH , will be collinear. It follows that the structure amplitude, jFH j, of the heavy atoms alone in the cell will be given by jFH j jjFNH j jFN jj ", where " is the error on the parenthetic sum or difference. Three different cases may arise (Fig. 2.3.3.1). Since the situation shown in Fig. 2.3.3.1(c) is rare, in general jFH j2 ' jFNH j

jFN j2 :

2:3:3:1

Thus, a Patterson computed with the square of the differences between the native and derivative structure amplitudes of a centrosymmetric projection will approximate to a Patterson of the heavy atoms alone. The approximation (2.3.3.1) is valid if the heavy-atom substitution is small enough to make jFH j jFNH j for most reflections, but sufficiently large to make " jFNH j jFN j2 . It is also assumed that the native and heavy-atom-derivative data have been placed on the same relative scale. Hence, the relation (2.3.3.1) should be re-written as jFH j2 ' jFNH j

kjFN j2 ,

where k is an experimentally determined scale factor (see Section 2.3.3.7). Uncertainty in the determination of k will contribute further to ", albeit in a systematic manner. Centrosymmetric projections were used extensively for the determination of heavy-atom sites in early work on proteins such as haemoglobin (Green et al., 1954), myoglobin (Bluhm et al.,

2.3.3. Isomorphous replacement difference Pattersons 2.3.3.1. Introduction One of the initial stages in the application of the isomorphous replacement method is the determination of heavy-atom positions. Indeed, this step of a structure determination can often be the most challenging. Not only may the number of heavy-atom sites be unknown, and have incomplete substitution, but the various isomorphous compounds may also lack isomorphism. To compound these problems, the error in the measurement of the isomorphous difference in structure amplitudes is often comparable to the differences themselves. Clearly, therefore, the ease with which a particular problem can be solved is closely correlated with the quality of the data-measuring procedure. The isomorphous replacement method was used incidentally by Bragg in the solution of NaCl and KCl. It was later formalized by J. M. Robertson in the analysis of phthalocyanine where the coordination centre could be Pt, Ni and other metals (Robertson, 1935, 1936; Robertson & Woodward, 1937). In this and similar cases, there was no difficulty in finding the heavy-atom positions. Not only were the heavy atoms frequently in special positions, but

Fig. 2.3.3.1. Three different cases which can occur in the relation of the native, FN , and heavy-atom derivative, FNH , structure factors for centrosymmetric reflections. FN is assumed to have a phase of 0, although analogous diagrams could be drawn when FN has a phase of . The crossover situation in (c) is clearly rare if the heavy-atom substitution is small compared to the native molecule, and can in general be neglected.

242

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES p 1958) and lysozyme (Poljak, 1963). However, with the advent of 2:3:3:2 jFH j2 ' 2jFNH j jFN j2 , ˚ faster data-collecting techniques, low-resolution (e.g. a 5 A limit) three-dimensional data are to be preferred for calculating difference whichpaccounts for the assumption (Section 2.3.3.2) that Pattersons. For noncentrosymmetric reflections, the approximation "3 2"2 . The almost universal method for the initial determina(2.3.3.1) is still valid but less exact (Section 2.3.3.3). However, the tion of major heavy-atom sites in an2isomorphous derivative utilizes larger number of three-dimensional differences compared to a Patterson with jFNH j jFN j coefficients. Approximation projection differences will enhance the signal of the real Patterson (2.3.3.2) is also the basis for the refinement of heavy-atom peaks relative to the noise. If there are N terms in the Patterson p parameters in a single isomorphous replacement pair (Rossmann, synthesis, then the peak-to-noise ratio will be proportionally N 1960; Cullis et al., 1962; Terwilliger & Eisenberg, 1983). and 1/". With the subscripts 2 and 3 representing two- and threedimensional syntheses, respectively, the latter will be more 2.3.3.4. Correlation functions powerful than the former whenever p p In the most general case of a triclinic space group, it will be N3 N2 necessary to select an origin arbitrarily, usually coincident with a > : "3 "2 heavy atom. All other heavy atoms (and subsequently also the p Now, as "3 ' 2"2 , it follows that N3 must be greater than 2N2 if macromolecular atoms) will be referred to this reference atom. the three-dimensional noncentrosymmetric computation is to be However, the choice of an origin will be independent in the interpretation of each derivative’s difference Patterson. It will then more powerful. This condition must almost invariably be true. be necessary to correlate the various, arbitrarily chosen, origins. The same problem occurs in space groups lacking symmetry axes 2.3.3.3. Finding heavy atoms with three-dimensional perpendicular to the primary rotation axis (e.g. P21 , P6 etc.), methods although only one coordinate, namely parallel to the unique rotation A Patterson of a native bio-macromolecular structure (coeffi- axis, will require correlation. This problem gave rise to some cients FN2 ) can be considered as being, at least approximately, a concern in the 1950s. Bragg (1958), Blow (1958), Perutz (1956), vector map of all the light atoms (carbons, nitrogens, oxygens, some Hoppe (1959) and Bodo et al. (1959) developed a variety of satisfactory. Rossmann sulfurs, and also phosphorus for nucleic acids) other than hydrogen techniques, none of which were entirely 2 F synthesis and applied it (1960) proposed the F NH1 NH2 atoms. These interactions will be designated as LL. Similarly, a successfully to the heavy-atom determination of horse haemogloPatterson of the heavy-atom derivative will contain HH HL LL bin. This function gives positive peaks H1 H1 at the end of interactions, where H represents the heavy atoms. Thus, a true vectors between the heavy-atom sites in the first compound, positive 2 2 difference Patterson, with coefficients FNH FN , will contain only the interactions HH HL. In general, the carpet of HL vectors peaks H2 H2 between the sites in the second compound, and completely dominates the HH vectors except for very small proteins negative peaks between sites in the first and second compound (Fig. such as insulin (Adams et al., 1969). Therefore, it would be 2.3.3.3). It is thus the negative peaks which provide the necessary preferable to compute a Patterson containing only HH interactions correlation. The function is unique in that it is a Patterson in order to interpret the map in terms of specific heavy-atom sites. containing significant information in both positive and negative Blow (1958) and Rossmann (1960) showed that a Patterson with peaks. Steinrauf (1963) suggested using the coefficients jFNH1 j jFNH j jFN j2 coefficients approximated to a Patterson containing jFN j jFNH2 j jFN j in order to eliminate the positive H1 H1 only HH vectors. If the phase angle between FN and FNH is ' (Fig. and H2 H2 vectors. Although the problem of correlation was a serious concern in the 2.3.3.2), then early structural determination of proteins during the late 1950s and early 1960s, the problem has now been by-passed. Blow & jFH j2 jFN j2 jFNH j2 2jFN kFNH j cos ': In general, however, jFH j jFN j. Hence, ' is small and jFH j2 ' jFNH j

jFN j2 ,

which is the same relation as (2.3.3.1) for centrosymmetric approximations. Since the direction of FH is random compared to the root-mean-square projected length of FH onto FN will be FN , p FH = 2. Thus it follows that a better approximation is

Fig. 2.3.3.2. Vector triangle showing the relationship between FN , FNH and FH , where FNH FN FH .

Fig. 2.3.3.3. A Patterson with coefficients FNH1 FNH2 2 will be equivalent to a Patterson whose coefficients are AB2 . However, AB FH1 FH2 . Thus, a Patterson with AB2 coefficients is equivalent to having negative atomic substitutions in compound 1 and positive substitutions in compound 2, or vice versa. Therefore, the Patterson will contain positive peaks for vectors of the type H1 H1 and H2 H2, but negative vector peaks for vectors of type H1 H2.

243

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION 2 2 Rossmann (1961) and Kartha (1961) independently showed that it P P 2 2:3:3:4 Eh Ah ahi Bh bhi : was possible to compute usable phases from a single isomorphous N N replacement (SIR) derivative. This contradicted the previously accepted notion that it was necessary to have at least two Following the same procedure as above, it follows that isomorphous derivatives to be able to determine a noncentrosym" # metric reflection’s phase (Harker, 1956). Hence, currently, the P P P ahi ahj bhi bhj , 2:3:3:5 CP0 2h Ah ah Bh bh procedure used to correlate origins in different derivatives is to h i6j compute SIR phases from the first compound and apply them to a difference electron-density map of the second heavy-atom PL PL derivative. Thus, the origin of the second derivative will be referred where ah i1 ahi and bh i1 bhi . Expression (2.3.3.5) will now be compared with the ‘feedback’ to the arbitrarily chosen origin of the first compound. More method (Dickerson et al., 1967, 1968) of verifying heavy-atom sites important, however, the interpretation of such a ‘feedback’ difference Fourier is easier than that of a difference Patterson. using SIR phasing. Inspection of Fig. 2.3.3.4 shows that the native Hence, once one heavy-atom derivative has been solved for its phase, , will be determined as ' (' is the structure-factor heavy-atom sites, the solution of other derivatives is almost assured. phase corresponding to the presumed heavy-atom positions) when jFN j > jFH j and ' when jFN j jFH j. Thus, an SIR difference This concept is examined more closely in the following section. electron density, x, can be synthesized by the Fourier summation 2.3.3.5. Interpretation of isomorphous difference Pattersons 1X x mjFNH j jFN j cos2h x 'h Difference Pattersons have usually been manually interpreted in V terms of point atoms. In more complex situations, such as from terms with h jFNH j jFN j > 0 crystalline viruses, a systematic approach may be necessary to 1X analyse the Patterson. That is especially true when the structure mjFNH j jFN j cos2h x 'h contains noncrystallographic symmetry (Argos & Rossmann, V 1976). Such methods are in principle dependent on the comparison from terms with h < 0 of the observed Patterson, P1 x, with a calculated Patterson, P2 x. 1X A criterion, CP , based on the sum of the Patterson densities at all test mjh j cos2h x 'h , V vectors within the unit-cell volume V, would be R CP P1 x P2 x dx: where m is a figure of merit of the phase reliability (Blow & Crick, V 1959; Dickerson et al., 1961). Now, CP can be evaluated for all reasonable heavy-atom distributions. Each different set of trial sites corresponds to a different P2 Patterson. It is then easily shown that P CP 2h Eh2 , h

where the sum is taken over all h reflections in reciprocal space, 2h are the observed differences and Eh are the structure factors of the trial point Patterson. (The symbol E is used here because of its close relation to normalized structure factors.) Let there be n noncrystallographic asymmetric units within the crystallographic asymmetric unit and m crystallographic asymmetric units within the crystal unit cell. Then there are L symmetryrelated heavy-atom sites where L nm. Let the scattering contribution of the ith site have ai and bi real and imaginary structure-factor components with respect to an arbitrary origin. Hence, for reflection h 2 2 N P N P P 2 P ahi bhi L ahi ahj bhi bhj : Eh L

Therefore,

i6j

L

" # P 2 PP ahi ahj bhi bhj : CP h L 2 i6j

h

P

But h 2h must be independent of the number, L, of heavy-atom sites per cell. Thus the criterion can be re-written as " # P P P 2:3:3:3 ahi ahj bhi bhj : CP0 2h h

i6j

More generally, if some sites have already been tentatively determined, and if these sites give rise to the structure-factor components Ah and Bh , then

Fig. 2.3.3.4. The phase of the native compound (structure factor FN ) is determined either as being equal to, or 180° out of phase with, the presumed heavy-atom contribution when only a single isomorphous compound is available. In (a) is shown the case when jFN j > jFNH j and ' ' . In (b) is shown the case when jFN j < jFNH j and ', where ' is the phase of the heavy-atom structure factor FH .

244

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES Fh Ah iBh FH cos 'h iFH sin 'h , where Ah and Bh are the real and imaginary components of the presumed heavy-atom sites. Therefore, 1 X mjh j x Ah cos 2h x Bh sin 2h x: V jFH j If this SIR difference electron-density map shows significant peaks at sites related by noncrystallographic symmetry, then those sites will be at the position of a further set of heavy atoms. Hence, a suitable criterion for finding heavy-atom sites is n P CSIR xj , j1

or by substitution n X 1 X mjh j CSIR Ah cos 2h xj Bh sin 2h xj : V h jFH j j1

broken on combining information from all three sites (which together lack a centre of symmetry) by superimposing Figs. 2.3.3.5(c) and (d) to obtain either the original structure (Fig. 2.3.3.5a) or its enantiomorph. Thus it is clear, in principle, that there is sufficient information in a single isomorphous derivative data set, when used in conjunction with a native data set, to solve a structure completely. However, the procedure shown in Fig. 2.3.3.5 does not consider the accumulation of error in the selection of individual images when these intersect with another image. In this sense the reciprocal-space isomorphous replacement technique has greater elegance and provides more insight, whereas the alternative view given by the Patterson method was the original stimulus for the discovery of the SIR phasing technique (Blow & Rossmann, 1961). Other Patterson functions for the deconvolution of SIR data have been proposed by Ramachandran & Raman (1959), as well as others. The principles are similar but the coefficients of the functions are optimized to emphasize various aspects of the signal representing the molecular structure.

But ah

n P

cos 2h xj and bh

j1

n P

sin 2h xj :

2.3.3.7. Isomorphism and size of the heavy-atom substitution

j1

Therefore, CSIR

1 X mjh j Ah ah Bh bh : V h jFH j

2:3:3:6

This expression is similar to (2.3.3.5) derived by consideration of a Patterson search. It differs from (2.3.3.5) in two respects: the Fourier coefficients are different and expression (2.3.3.6) is lacking a second term. Now the figure of merit m will be small whenever jFH j is small as the SIR phase cannot be determined well under those conditions. Hence, effectively, the coefficients are a function of jh j, and the coefficients of the functions (2.3.3.5) and (2.3.3.6) are indeed rather similar. The second term in (2.3.3.5) relates to the use of the search atoms in phasing and could be included in (2.3.3.6), provided the actual feedback sites in each of the n electron-density functions tested by CSIR are omitted in turn. Thus, a systematic Patterson search and an SIR difference Fourier search are very similar in character and power.

It is insufficient to discuss Patterson techniques for locating heavy-atom substitutions without also considering errors of all kinds. First, it must be recognized that most heavy-atom labels are not a single atom but a small compound containing one or more heavy atoms. The compound itself will displace water or ions and locally alter the conformation of the protein or nucleic acid. Hence, a simple Gaussian approximation will suffice to represent individual heavy-atom scatterers responsible for the difference between native and heavy-atom derivatives. Furthermore, the heavy-atom compound often introduces small global structural changes which can be detected only at higher resolution. These problems were considered with some rigour by Crick & Magdoff (1956). In general, lack of isomorphism is exhibited by an increase in the size of the isomorphous differences with increasing resolution (Fig. 2.3.3.6).

2.3.3.6. Direct structure determination from difference Pattersons 2 The difference Patterson computed with coefficients FHN FN2 contains information on the heavy atoms (HH vectors) and the macromolecular structure (HL vectors) (Section 2.3.3.3). If the scaling between the jFHN j and jFN j data sets is not perfect there will also be noise. Rossmann (1961b) was partially successful in determining the low-resolution horse haemoglobin structure by using a series of superpositions based on the known heavy-atom sites. Nevertheless, Patterson superposition methods have not been used for the structure determination of proteins owing to the successful error treatment of the isomorphous replacement method in reciprocal space. However, it is of some interest here for it gives an alternative insight into SIR phasing. The deconvolution of an arbitrary molecule, represented as ‘?’, 2 from an FHN FN2 Patterson, is demonstrated in Fig. 2.3.3.5. The original structure is shown in Fig. 2.3.3.5(a) and the corresponding Patterson in Fig. 2.3.3.5(b). Superposition with respect to one of the heavy-atom sites is shown in Fig. 2.3.3.5(c) and the other in Fig. 2.3.3.5(d). Both Figs. 2.3.3.5(c) and (d) contain a centre of symmetry because the use of only a single HH vector implies a centre of symmetry half way between the two sites. The centre is

Fig. 2.3.3.5. Let (a) be the original structure which contains three heavy atoms ABC in a noncentrosymmetric configuration. Then a Fourier 2 summation, with FNH FN2 coefficients, will give the Patterson shown in (b). Displacement of the Patterson by the vector BC and selecting the common patterns yields (c). Similarly, displacement by AC gives (d). Finally, superposition of (c) on (d) gives the original figure or its enantiomorph. This series of steps demonstrates that, in principle, complete structural information is contained in an SIR derivative.

245

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION complex scattering factor f0 f 0 if 00 ,

Fig. 2.3.3.6. A plot of mean isomorphous differences as a function of resolution. (a) The theoretical size of mean differences following roughly a Gaussian distribution. (b) The observed size of differences for a good isomorphous derivative where the smaller higher-order differences have been largely masked by the error of measurement. (c) Observed differences where ‘lack of isomorphism’ dominates beyond approximately 5 A˚ resolution.

Crick & Magdoff (1956) also derived the approximate expression r 2NH fH NP fP to estimate the r.m.s. fractional change in intensity as a function of heavy-atom substitution. Here, NH represents the number of heavy atoms attached to a protein (or other large molecule) which contains NP light atoms. fH and fP are the scattering powers of the average heavy and protein atom, respectively. This function was tabulated by Eisenberg (1970) as a function of molecular weight (proportional to NP ). For instance, for a single, fully substituted, Hg atom the formula predicts an r.m.s. intensity change of around 25% in a molecule of 100 000 Da. However, the error of measurement of a reflection intensity is likely to be arround 10% of I, implying perhaps an error of around 14% of I on a difference measurement. Thus, the isomorphous replacement difference measurement for almost half the reflections will be buried in error for this case. Scaling of the different heavy-atom-derivative data sets onto a common relative scale is clearly important if error is to be reduced. Blundell & Johnson (1976, pp. 333–336) give a careful discussion of this subject. Suffice it to say here only that a linear scale factor is seldom acceptable as the heavy-atom-derivative crystals frequently suffer from greater disorder than the native crystals. The heavyatom derivative should, in general, have a slightly larger mean value for the structure factors on account of the additional heavy atoms (Green P P et al., 1954). The usual effect is to make jFNH j2 = jFN j2 ' 1:05 (Phillips, 1966). As the amount of heavy atom is usually unknown in a yet unsolved heavy-atom derivative, it is usual practice either to apply a scale factor of the form k exp Bsin =2 or, more generally, to use local scaling (Matthews & Czerwinski, 1975). The latter has the advantage of not making any assumption about the physical nature of the relative intensity decay with resolution. 2.3.4. Anomalous dispersion

where f0 is the scattering factor of the atom without the anomalous absorption and re-scattering effect, f 0 is the real correction term (usually negative), and f 00 is the imaginary component. The real term f0 f 0 is often written as f 0 , so that the total scattering factor will be f 0 if 00 . Values of f 0 and f 00 are tabulated in IT IV (Cromer, 1974), although their precise values are dependent on the environment of the anomalous scatterer. Unlike f0 , f 0 and f 00 are almost independent of scattering angle as they are caused by absorption of energy in the innermost electron shells. Thus, the anomalous effect resembles scattering from a point atom. The structure factor of index h can now be written as Fh

N P j1

N P j1

fj00 exp2ih xj :

2:3:4:1

(Note that the only significant contributions to the second term are from those atoms that have a measurable anomalous effect at the chosen wavelength.) Let us now write the first term as A iB and the second as a ib. Then, from (2.3.4.1), F A iB ia ib A

b iB a:

2:3:4:2

Therefore, jFh j2 A

b2 B a2

and similarly jFh j2 A b2 B a2 , demonstrating that Friedel’s law breaks down in the presence of anomalous dispersion. However, it is only for noncentrosymmetric reflections that jFh j 6 jFh j. Now, x

sphere 1 X Fh exp2ih x: V h

Hence, by using (2.3.4.2) and simplifying, x

2 V

hemisphere X

A cos 2h x

B sin 2h x

h

ia cos 2h x

b sin 2h x:

2:3:4:3

The first term in (2.3.4.3) is the usual real Fourier expression for electron density, while the second term is an imaginary component due to the anomalous scattering of a few atoms in the cell. 2.3.4.2. The Ps u function Expression (2.3.4.3) gives the complex electron density expression in the presence of anomalous scatterers. A variety of Patterson-type functions can be derived from (2.3.4.3) for the determination of a structure. For instance, the Ps u function gives vectors between the anomalous atoms and the ‘normal’ atoms. From (2.3.4.1) it is easy to show that Fh Fh jFh j2 P fi0 fj0 fi00 fj00 cos 2h xi

2.3.4.1. Introduction The physical basis for anomalous dispersion has been well reviewed by Ramaseshan & Abrahams (1975), James (1965), Cromer (1974) and Bijvoet (1954). As the wavelength of radiation approaches the absorption edge of a particular element, then an atom will disperse X-rays in a manner that can be defined by the

fj0 exp2ih xj i

i; j

P i; j

Therefore,

246

fi0 fj00

fi00 fj0 sin 2h xi

xj xj :

and

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES P Patterson. The procedure has been used only rarely [cf. Moncrief & jFh j2 jFh j2 2 fi0 fj0 fi00 fj00 cos 2h xi xj i; j Lipscomb (1966) and Pepinsky et al. (1957)], probably because alternative procedures are available for small compounds and the solution of Ps u is too complex for large biological molecules. P jFh j2 jFh j2 2 fi0 fj00 fi00 fj0 sin 2h xi xj : 2.3.4.3. The position of anomalous scatterers i; j

Let us now consider the significance of a Patterson in the presence of anomalous dispersion. The normal Patterson definition is given by R Pu xx u dx V

sphere 1 X jFh j2 exp 2ih u 2 V h

Pc u

iPs u,

where Pc u

2 V

hemisphere X

jFh j2 jFh j2 cos 2h u

h

and 2 Ps u V

hemisphere X

2

jFh j

Anomalous scatterers can be used as an aid to phasing, when their positions are known. But the anomalous-dispersion differences (Bijvoet differences) can also be used to determine or confirm the heavy atoms which scatter anomalously (Rossmann, 1961a). Furthermore, the use of anomalous-dispersion information obviates the lack of isomorphism but, on the other hand, the differences are normally far smaller than those produced by a heavy-atom isomorphous replacement. Consider a structure of many light atoms giving rise to the structure factor Fh N. In addition, it contains a few heavy atoms which have a significant anomalous-scattering effect. The nonanomalous component will be Fh H and the anomalous component is F00h H if 00 =f 0 Fh H (Fig. 2.3.4.2a). The total structure factor will be Fh . The Friedel opposite is constructed appropriately (Fig. 2.3.4.2a). Now reflect the Friedel opposite construction across the real axis of the Argand diagram (Fig. 2.3.4.2b). Let the difference in phase between Fh and Fh be '. Thus 4jF00h Hj2 jFh j2 jFh j2

2

jFh j sin 2h u:

2jFh jjFh j cos ',

but since ' is very small

h

The Pc u component is essentially the normal Patterson, in which the peak heights have been very slightly modified by the anomalous-scattering effect. That is, the peaks of Pc u are proportional in height to fi0 fj0 fi00 fj00 . The Ps u component is more interesting. It represents vectors between the normal atoms in the unit cell and the anomalous scatterers, proportional in height to fi0 fj00 fi00 fj0 (Okaya et al., 1955). This function is antisymmetric with respect to the change of the direction of the diffraction vector. An illustration of the function is given in Fig. 2.3.4.1. In a unit cell containing N atoms, n of which are anomalous scatterers, the Ps u function contains only nN n positive peaks and an equal number of negative peaks related to the former by anticentrosymmetry. The analysis of a Ps u synthesis presents problems somewhat similar to those posed by a normal

Fig. 2.3.4.1. (a) A model structure with an anomalous scatterer at A. (b) The corresponding Ps u function showing positive peaks (full lines) and negative peaks (dashed lines). [Reprinted with permission from Woolfson (1970, p. 293).]

jF00h Hj2 ' 14jFh j

jFh j2 :

Hence, a Patterson with coefficients jFh j

jFh j2 will be

Fig. 2.3.4.2. Anomalous-dispersion effect for a molecule whose light atoms contribute Fh N and heavy atom Fh H with a small anomalous component of F00h H, 90 ahead of the non-anomalous Fh H component. In (a) is seen the construction for Fh and Fh . In (b) Fh has been reflected across the real axis.

247

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION equivalent to a Patterson with coefficients jF00h Hj2 which is proportional to jFh Hj2 . Such a Patterson (Rossmann, 1961a) will have vectors between all anomalous scatterers with heights proportional to the number of anomalous electrons f 00 . This ‘anomalous dispersion’ Patterson function has been used to find anomalous scatterers such as iron (Smith et al., 1983; Strahs & Kraut, 1968) and sulfur atoms (Hendrickson & Teeter, 1981). It is then apparent that a Patterson with coefficients 2 FANO jFh j

jFh j2

(Rossmann, 1961a), as well as a Patterson with coefficients 2 FISO jFNH j

jFH j2

(Rossmann, 1960; Blow, 1958), represent Pattersons of the heavy 2 atoms. The FANO Patterson suffers from errors which may be 2 larger than the size of the Bijvoet differences, while the FISO Patterson may suffer from partial lack of isomorphism. Hence, Kartha & Parthasarathy (1965) have suggested the use of the sum of these two Pattersons, which would then have coefficients 2 2 FANO FISO . However, given both SIR and anomalous-dispersion data, it is possible to make an accurate estimate of the jFH j2 magnitudes for use in a Patterson calculation [Blundell & Johnson (1976, p. 340), Matthews (1966), Singh & Ramaseshan (1966)]. In essence, the Harker phase diagram can be constructed out of three circles: the native amplitude and each of the two isomorphous Bijvoet differences, giving three circles in all (Blow & Rossmann, 1961) which should intersect at a single point thus resolving the ambiguity in the SIR data and the anomalous-dispersion data. Furthermore, the phase ambiguities are orthogonal; thus the two data sets are cooperative. It can be shown (Matthews, 1966; North, 1965) that 2 2 FN2 FNH FN2 16k 2 FP2 FH2 I 2 1=2 , k 2 where I FNH FNH 2 and k f 00 =f 0 . The sign in the thirdterm expression is when jNH H j < =2 or + otherwise. Since, in general, jFH j is small compared to jFN j, it is reasonable to assume that the sign above is usually negative. Hence, the heavyatom lower estimate (HLE) is usually written as 2 2 2 FNH FH2 16k 2 FP2 FH2 I 2 1=2 , FHLE k which is an expression frequently used to derive Patterson coefficients useful in the determination of heavy-atom positions when both SIR and anomalous-dispersion data are available.

Crystallographic symmetry applies to the whole of the threedimensional crystal lattice. Hence, the symmetry must be expressed both in the lattice and in the repeating pattern within the lattice. In contrast, noncrystallographic symmetry is valid only within a limited volume about the noncrystallographic symmetry element. For instance, the noncrystallographic twofold axes in the plane of the paper of Fig. 2.3.5.1 are true only in the immediate vicinity of each local dyad. In contrast, the crystallographic twofold axes perpendicular to the plane of the paper (Fig. 2.3.5.1) apply to every point within the lattice. Two types of noncrystallographic symmetry can be recognized: proper and improper rotations. A proper symmetry element is independent of the sense of rotation, as, for example, a fivefold axis in an icosahedral virus; a rotation either left or right by one-fifth of a revolution will leave all parts of a given icosahedral shell (but not the whole crystal) in equivalent positions. Proper noncrystallographic symmetry can also be recognized by the existence of a closed point group within a defined volume of the lattice. Improper rotation axes are found when two molecules are arbitrarily oriented relative to each other in the same asymmetric unit or when they occur in two entirely different crystal lattices. For instance, in Fig. 2.3.5.2, the object A1 B1 can be rotated by + about the axis at P to orient it identically with A2 B2 . However, the two objects will not be coincident after a rotation of A1 B1 by or of A2 B2 by +. The envelope around each noncrystallographic object must be known in order to define an improper rotation. In contrast, only the volume about the closed point group need be defined for proper noncrystallographic operations. Hence, the boundaries of the repeating unit need not correspond to chemically covalently linked units in the presence of proper rotations. Translational components of noncrystallographic rotation elements are said to be ‘precise’ in a direction parallel to the axis and

2.3.5. Noncrystallographic symmetry 2.3.5.1. Definitions The interpretation of Pattersons can be helped by using various types of chemical or physical information. An obvious example is the knowledge that one or two heavy atoms per crystallographic asymmetric unit are present. Another example is the exploitation of a rigid chemical framework in a portion of a molecule (Nordman & Nakatsu, 1963; Burnett & Rossmann, 1971). One extremely useful constraint on the interpretation of Pattersons is noncrystallographic symmetry. Indeed, the structural solution of large biological assemblies such as viruses is only possible because of the natural occurrence of this phenomenon. The term ‘molecular replacement’ is used for methods that utilize noncrystallographic symmetry in the solution of structures [for earlier reviews see Rossmann (1972) and Argos & Rossmann (1980)]. These methods, which are only partially dependent on Patterson concepts, are discussed in Sections 2.3.6–2.3.8.

Fig. 2.3.5.1. The two-dimensional periodic design shows crystallographic twofold axes perpendicular to the page and local noncrystallographic rotation axes in the plane of the paper (design by Audrey Rossmann). [Reprinted with permission from Rossmann (1972, p. 8).]

248

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES could also be considered in the application of molecular replacement to non-biological materials. In this chapter, the relationship x0 Cx d will be used to describe noncrystallographic symmetry, where x and x0 are position vectors, expressed as fractional coordinates, with respect to the crystallographic origin, [C] is a rotation matrix, and d is a translation vector. Crystallographic symmetry will be described as x0 Tx t,

Fig. 2.3.5.2. The objects A1 B1 and A2 B2 are related by an improper rotation , since it is necessary to consider the sense of rotation to achieve superposition of the two objects. [Reprinted with permission from Rossmann (1972, p. 9).]

‘imprecise’ perpendicular to the axis (Rossmann et al., 1964). The position, but not direction, of a rotation axis is arbitrary. However, a convenient choice is one that leaves the translation perpendicular to the axis at zero after rotation (Fig. 2.3.5.3). Noncrystallographic symmetry has been used as a tool in structural analysis primarily in the study of biological molecules. This is due to the propensity of proteins to form aggregates with closed point groups, as, for instance, viruses with 532 symmetry. At best, only part of such a point group can be incorporated into the crystal lattice. Since biological materials cannot contain inversion elements, all studies of noncrystallographic symmetries have been limited to rotational axes. Reflection planes and inversion centres

Fig. 2.3.5.3. The position of the twofold rotation axis which relates the two piglets is completely arbitrary. The diagram on the left shows the situation when the translation is parallel to the rotation axis. The diagram on the right has an additional component of translation perpendicular to the rotation axis, but the component parallel to the axis remains unchanged. [Reprinted from Rossmann et al. (1964).]

where [T] and t are the crystallographic rotation matrix and translation vector, respectively. The noncrystallographic asymmetric unit will be defined as having n copies within the crystallographic asymmetric unit, and the unit cell will be defined as having m crystallographic asymmetric units. Hence, there are L nm noncrystallographic asymmetric units within the unit cell. Clearly, the n noncrystallographic asymmetric units cannot completely fill the volume of one crystallographic asymmetric unit. The remaining space must be assumed to be empty or to be occupied by solvent molecules which disobey the noncrystallographic symmetry. 2.3.5.2. Interpretation of Pattersons in the presence of noncrystallographic symmetry If noncrystallographic symmetry is present, an atom at a general position within the relevant volume will imply the presence of others within the same crystallographic asymmetric unit. If the noncrystallographic symmetry is known, then the positions of equivalent atoms may be generated from a single atomic position. The additional vector interactions which arise from crystallographically and noncrystallographically equivalent atoms in a crystal may be predicted and exploited in an interpretation of the Patterson function. An object in real space which has a closed point group may incorporate some of its symmetry in the crystallographic symmetry. If there are l such objects in the cell, then there will be mn=l equivalent positions within each object. The ‘self-vectors’ formed between these positions within the object will be independent of the position of the objects. This distinction is important in that the selfvectors arising from atoms interacting with other atoms within a single particle may be correctly predicted without the knowledge of the particle centre position. In fact, this distinction may be exploited in a two-stage procedure in which an atom may be first located relative to the particle centre by use of the self-vectors and subsequently the particle may be positioned relative to crystallographic symmetry elements by use of the ‘cross-vectors’ (Table 2.3.5.1). The interpretation of a heavy-atom difference Patterson for the holo-enzyme of lobster glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase (GAPDH) provides an illustration of how the known noncrystallographic symmetry can aid the solution (Rossmann et al., 1972; Buehner et al., 1974). The GAPDH enzyme crystallized in a P21 21 21 cell (a = 149.0, b = 139.1, c = 80.7 A˚) containing one tetramer per asymmetric unit. A rotation-function analysis had indicated the presence of three mutually perpendicular molecular twofold axes which suggested that the tetramer had 222 symmetry, and a locked rotation function determined the precise orientation of the tetramer relative to the crystal axes (see Table 2.3.5.2). Packing considerations led to assignment of a tentative particle centre near 1 1 2 , 4 , Z. An isomorphous difference Patterson was calculated for the K2 HgI4 derivative of GAPDH using data to a resolution of 6.8 A˚. From an analysis of the three Harker sections, a tentative first

249

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION (Stauffacher et al., 1987)] and enzyme [catalase (Murthy et al., 1981)] heavy-atom difference Pattersons. A heavy atom is placed in turn at all plausible positions within the volume of the noncrystallographic asymmetric unit and the corresponding vector set is constructed from the resulting constellation of heavy atoms. Argos & Rossmann (1976) found a spherical polar coordinate search grid to be convenient for spherical viruses. After all vectors for the current search position are predicted, the vectors are allocated to the nearest grid point and the list is sorted to eliminate recurring ones. The criterion used by Argos & Rossmann for selecting a solution is that the sum

Table 2.3.5.1. Possible types of vector searches

Self-vectors (1)

Dimension of search, n

Cross-vectors

n3

Locate single site relative to particle centre

(2)

Use information from (1) to locate particle centre

n3

Simultaneous search for both (1) and (2). In general this is a six-dimensional search but may be simplified when particle is on a crystallographic symmetry axis

3n6

(4)

Given (1) for more than one site, find all vectors within particle

n3

(5)

Given information from (3), locate additional site using complete vector set

n3

(3)

S

N P

Pi

NPav

i1

of the lookup Patterson density values Pi achieves a high value for a correct heavy-atom position. The sum is corrected for the carpet of cross-vectors by the second term in the sum. An additional criterion, which has been found useful for discriminating correct solutions, is a unit vector density criterion . N P U Pi =ni N, i1

heavy-atom position was assigned (atom A2 at x, y, z). At this juncture, the known noncrystallographic symmetry was used to obtain a full interpretation. From Table 2.3.5.2 we see that molecular axis 2 will generate a second heavy atom with coordinates roughly 14 y, 14 x, 2Z z (if the molecular centre was assumed to be at 12 , 14 , Z). Starting from the tentative coordinates of site A2 , the site A1 related by molecular axis 1 was detected at about the predicted position and the second site A1 generated acceptable cross-vectors with the earlier determined site A2 . Further examination enabled the completion of the set of four noncrystallographically related heavy-atom sites, such that all predicted Patterson vectors were acceptable and all four sites placed the molecular centre in the same position. Following refinement of these four sites, the corresponding SIR phases were used to find an additional set of four sites in this compound as well as in a number of other derivatives. The multiple isomorphous replacement phases, in conjunction with real-space electron-density averaging of the noncrystallographically related units, were then sufficient to solve the GAPDH structure. When investigators studied larger macromolecular aggregates such as the icosahedral viruses, which have 532 point symmetry, systematic methods were developed for utilizing the noncrystallographic symmetry to aid in locating heavy-atom sites in isomorphous heavy-atom derivatives. Argos & Rossmann (1974, 1976) introduced an exhaustive Patterson search procedure for a single heavy-atom site within the noncrystallographic asymmetric unit which has been successfully applied to the interpretation of both virus [satellite tobacco necrosis virus (STNV) (Lentz et al., 1976), southern bean mosaic virus (Rayment et al., 1978), alfalfa mosaic virus (Fukuyama et al., 1983), cowpea mosaic virus

where ni is the number of vectors expected to contribute to the Patterson density value Pi (Arnold et al., 1987). This criterion can be especially valuable for detecting correct solutions at special search positions, such as an icosahedral fivefold axis, where the number of vector lookup positions may be drastically reduced owing to the higher symmetry. An alternative, but equivalent, method for locating heavy-atom positions from isomorphous difference data is discussed in Section 2.3.3.5. Even for a single heavy-atom site at a general position in the simplest icosahedral or T 1 virus, there are 60 equivalent heavy atoms in one virus particle. The number of unique vectors corresponding to this self-particle vector set will depend on the crystal symmetry but may be as many as 6059=2 1770 for a virus particle at a general crystallographic position. Such was the case for the STNV crystals which were in space group C2 containing four virus particles at general positions. The method of Argos & Rossmann was applied successfully to a solution of the K2 HgI4 derivative of STNV using a 10 A˚ resolution difference Patterson. Application of the noncrystallographic symmetry vector search procedure to a K2 AuCN2 derivative of human rhinovirus 14 (HRV14) crystals (space group P21 3, Z 4) has succeeded in establishing both the relative positions of heavy atoms within one particle and the positions of the virus particles relative to the crystal symmetry elements (Arnold et al., 1987). The particle position was established by incorporating interparticle vectors in the search and varying the particle position along the crystallographic threefold axis until the best fit for the predicted vector set was achieved.

2.3.6. Rotation functions Table 2.3.5.2. Orientation of the glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase molecular twofold axis in the orthorhombic cell

Rotation axes 1 2 3

Polar coordinates (°) ' 45.0 180.0–55.0 180.0–66.0

Cartesian coordinates (direction cosines) u

7.0 0.7018 38.6 0.6402 70.6 0.3035

v

2.3.6.1. Introduction The rotation function is designed to detect noncrystallographic rotational symmetry (see Table 2.3.6.1). The normal rotation function definition is given as (Rossmann & Blow, 1962) R R P1 u P2 u0 du, 2:3:6:1 U

w 0.7071 0.5736 0.4067

0.0862 0.5111 0.8616

where P1 and P2 are two Pattersons and U is an envelope centred at the superimposed origins. This convolution therefore measures the degree of similarity, or ‘overlap’, between the two Pattersons when P2 has been rotated relative to P1 by an amount defined by

250

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES Table 2.3.6.1. Different types of uses for the rotation function Pattersons to be compared Type of rotation function

P1

P2

Purpose

Self

Unknown structure

Unknown structure, same cell

Cross

Unknown structure

Unknown structure in different cell

Cross

Unknown structure

Known structure in large cell to avoid overlap of self-Patterson vectors

Finds orientation of noncrystallographic axes Finds relative orientation of unknown molecules Determines orientation of unknown structure as preliminary to positioning and subsequent phasing with known molecule

u0 Cu:

2:3:6:2

The elements of [C] will depend on three rotation angles 1 , 2 , 3 . Thus, R is a function of these three angles. Alternatively, the matrix [C] could be used to express mirror symmetry, permitting searches for noncrystallographic mirror or glide planes. The basic concepts were first clearly stated by Rossmann & Blow (1962), although intuitive uses of the rotation function had been considered earlier. Hoppe (1957b) had also hinted at a convolution of the type given by (2.3.6.1) to find the orientation of known molecular fragments and these ideas were implemented by Huber (1965). Consider a structure of two identical units which are in different orientations. The Patterson function of such a structure consists of three parts. There will be the self-Patterson vectors of one unit, being the set of interatomic vectors which can be formed within that unit, with appropriate weights. The set of self-Patterson vectors of the other unit will be identical, but they will be rotated away from the first due to the different orientation. Finally, there will be the cross-Patterson vectors, or set of interatomic vectors which can be formed from one unit to another. The self-Patterson vectors of the two units will all lie in a volume centred at the origin and limited by the overall dimensions of the units. Some or all of the crossPatterson vectors will lie outside this volume. Suppose the Patterson function is now superposed on a rotated version of itself. There will be no particular agreement except when one set of self-Patterson vectors of one unit has the same orientation as the self-Patterson vectors from the other unit. In this position, we would expect a maximum of agreement or ‘overlap’ between the two. Similarly, the superposition of the molecular self-Patterson derived from different crystal forms can provide the relative orientation of the two crystals when the molecules are aligned. While it would be possible to evaluate R by interpolating in P2 and forming the point-by-point product with P1 within the volume U for every combination of 1 , 2 and 3 , such a process is tedious and requires large computer storage for the Pattersons. Instead, the process is usually performed in reciprocal space where the number of independent structure amplitudes which form the Pattersons is about one-thirtieth of the number of Patterson grid points. Thus, the computation of a rotation function is carried out directly on the structure amplitudes, while the overlap definition (2.3.6.1) simply serves as a physical basis for the technique. The derivation of the reciprocal-space expression depends on the expansion of each Patterson either as a Fourier summation, the conventional approach of Rossmann & Blow (1962), or as a sum of spherical harmonics in Crowther’s (1972) analysis. The conventional and mathematically easier treatment is discussed presently, but the reader is referred also to Section 2.3.6.5 for Crowther’s elegant approach. The latter leads to a rapid technique for

performing the computations, about one hundred times faster than conventional methods. Let, omitting constant coefficients, P P1 u jFh j2 exp 2ih u h

and P2 u0

P 2 jFp j exp 2ip u0 : p

From (2.3.6.2) it follows that P P2 u0 jFp j2 exp 2ipC u, p

and, hence, by substitution in (2.3.6.1) Z P 2 jFh j exp 2ih u R1 , 2 , 3 h

U

" # P 2 jFp j exp 2ipC u du p

U

P

2

jFh j

UGhp

R

2:3:6:3

p

h

where

! P 2 jFp j Ghp ,

exp f2ih pC ug du:

U

When the volume U is a sphere, Ghp has the analytical form Ghp

3sin

cos 3

,

2:3:6:4

where 2HR and H h pC. G is a spherical interference function whose form is shown in Fig. 2.3.6.1 The expression (2.3.6.3) represents the rotation function in reciprocal space. If h0 C T p in the argument of Ghp , then h0 can be seen as the point in reciprocal space to which p is rotated by [C]. Only for those integral reciprocal-lattice points which are close to h0 will Ghp be of an appreciable size (Fig. 2.3.6.1). Thus, the number of significant terms is greatly reduced in the summation over p for every value of h, making the computation of the rotation function manageable. The radius of integration R should be approximately equal to or a little smaller than the molecular diameter. If R were roughly equal to the length of a lattice translation, then the separation of reciprocal-lattice points would be about 1=R. Hence, when H is equal to one reciprocal-lattice separation, HR ' 1, and G is thus

251

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION

Fig. 2.3.6.1. Shape of the interference function G for a spherical envelope of radius R at a distance H from the reciprocal-space origin. [Reprinted from Rossmann & Blow (1962).]

quite small. Indeed, all terms with HR > 1 might well be neglected. Thus, in general, the only terms that need be considered are those where h0 is within one lattice point of h. However, in dealing with a small molecular fragment for which R is small compared to the unit-cell dimensions, more reciprocal-lattice points must be included for the summation over p in the rotation-function expression (2.3.6.3). In practice, the equation

Fig. 2.3.6.2. Relationships of the orthogonal axes X1 , X2 , X3 to the crystallographic axes a1 , a2 , a3 . [Reprinted from Rossmann & Blow (1962).]

X0 rX,

2:3:6:6

where r represents the rotation matrix relating the two vectors in the orthogonal system. Finally, X0 is converted back to fractional coordinates measured along the oblique cell dimension in the second crystal by x0 aX0 :

h h0 0, Thus, by substitution,

that is

x0 arX arbx,

C T p h

and by comparison with (2.3.6.2) it follows that

or p C T 1 h,

2:3:6:5

determines p, given a set of Miller indices h. This will give a nonintegral set of Miller indices. The terms included in the inner summation of (2.3.6.3) will be integral values of p around the nonintegral lattice point found by solving (2.3.6.5). Details of the conventional program were given by Tollin & Rossmann (1966) and follow the principles outlined above. They discussed various strategies as to which crystal should be used to calculate the first (h) and second P (p) Patterson. Rossmann & Blow (1962) noted that the factor p jFp j2 Ghp in expression (2.3.6.3) represents an interpolation of the squared transform of the selfPatterson of the second (p) crystal. Thus, the rotation function is a sum of the products of the two molecular transforms taken over all the h reciprocal-lattice points. Lattman & Love (1970) therefore computed the molecular transform explicitly and stored it in the computer, sampling it as required by the rotation operation. A discussion on the suitable choice of variables in the computation of rotation functions has been given by Lifchitz (1983). 2.3.6.2. Matrix algebra The initial step in the rotation-function procedure involves the orthogonalization of both crystal systems. Thus, if fractional coordinates in the first crystal system are represented by x, these can be orthogonalized by a matrix [ ] to give the coordinates X in units of length (Fig. 2.3.6.2); that is, X bx: If the point X is rotated to the point X0 , then

2:3:6:7

C arb: Fig. 2.3.6.2 shows the mode of orthogonalization used by Rossmann & Blow (1962). With their definition it can be shown that 0 1 0 0 1=a1 sin 3 sin ! B 1=a2 tan 1 tan ! 1=a2 1=a2 tan 1 C C a B @ 1=a2 tan 3 sin ! A 0 1=a3 sin 1 1=a3 sin 1 tan ! and

0

1 a1 sin 3 sin ! 0 0 b @ a1 cos 3 a2 a3 cos 1 A, a1 sin 3 cos ! 0 a3 sin 1

with where cos ! cos 2 cos 1 cos 3 =sin 1 sin 3 0 ! < . For a Patterson compared with itself, a b 1 . Both spherical , , ' and Eulerian 1 , 2 , 3 angles are used in evaluating the rotation function. The usual definitions employed are given diagrammatically in Figs. 2.3.6.3 and 2.3.6.4. They give rise to the following rotation matrices. (a) Matrix [r] in terms of Eulerian angles 1 , 2 , 3 : 0 1 sin 1 cos 2 sin 3 cos 1 cos 2 sin 3 sin 2 sin 3 B cos 1 cos 3 C sin 1 cos 3 B C B C B sin 1 cos 2 cos 3 cos 1 cos 2 cos 3 sin 2 cos 3 C B C cos 1 sin 3 sin 1 sin 3 @ A sin 1 sin 2

cos 1 sin 2

cos 2

and (b) matrix [r] in terms of rotation angle and the spherical polar coordinates , ':

252

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES

Fig. 2.3.6.3. Eulerian angles 1 , 2 , 3 relating the rotated axes X10 , X20 , X30 to the original unrotated orthogonal axes X1 , X2 , X3 . [Reprinted from Rossmann & Blow (1962).]

0

cos sin2 cos2 '1

cos B B B B B sin cos cos '1 cos B B sin sin ' sin B B B @ sin2 sin ' cos '1 cos cos sin

sin cos cos '1

Fig. 2.3.6.4. Variables and ' are polar coordinates which specify a direction about which the axes may be rotated through an angle . [Reprinted from Rossmann & Blow (1962).]

cos

1 3 , 2 1 3 1 3 sec , tan ' cot2 =2 sin 2 2 1 3 cos ' tan cot : 2

sin sin ' sin cos cos2 1

cos=2 cos2 =2 cos

cos

sin cos sin '1 cos sin cos ' sin 1 2 sin cos ' sin '1 cos C cos sin C C C sin cos sin '1 cos C C C sin cos ' sin A

cos sin2 sin2 '1

cos

Since ' and can always be chosen in the range 0 to , these equations suffice to find , , ' from any set 1 , 2 , 3 . 2.3.6.3. Symmetry In analogy with crystal lattices, the rotation function is periodic and contains symmetry. The rotation function has a cell whose periodicity is 2 in each of its three angles. This may be written as R1 , 2 , 3 R1 2n1 , 2 2n2 , 3 2n3

Alternatively, (b) can be expressed as 0

cos u2 1

cos

uv1

or

cos

R, , ' R 2n1 , 2n2 , ' 2n3 ,

w sin

B @ vu1 cos w sin cos v2 1 cos wu1 cos v sin wv1 cos u sin 1 uw1 cos v sin C uw1 cos u sin A, cos w2 1

cos

where u, v and w are the direction cosines of the rotation axis given by u sin cos ', v cos , w

sin sin ':

This latter form also demonstrates that the trace of a rotation matrix is 2 cos 1. The relationship between the two sets of variables established by comparison of the elements of the two matrices yields

where n1 , n2 and n3 are integers. A redundancy in the definition of either set of angles leads to the equivalence of the following points: R1 , 2 , 3 R1 ,

2 , 3 in Eulerian space

or R, , ' R, 2

, ' in polar space:

These relationships imply an n glide plane perpendicular to 2 for Eulerian space or a ' glide plane perpendicular to in polar space. In addition, the Laue symmetry of the two Pattersons themselves must be considered. This problem was first discussed by Rossmann & Blow (1962) and later systematized by Tollin et al. (1966), Burdina (1970, 1971, 1973) and Rao et al. (1980). A closely related problem was considered by Hirshfeld (1968). The rotation function will have the same value whether the Patterson density at X or T i X in the first crystal is multiplied by the Patterson density at X0 or T j X0 in the second crystal. T i and T j refer to the ith and jth crystallographic rotations in the orthogonalized coordinate systems of the first and second crystal, respectively. Hence, from (2.3.6.6) T j X0 rT i X or

253

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.3.6.2. Eulerian symmetry elements for all possible types of space-group rotations Axis Direction First crystal 1 2 2 4 3 6 2*

[010] [001] [001] [001] [001] [110]

Second crystal

1 , 2 , 3 1 , 2 , 3 1 , 2 , 3 =2 1 , 2 , 3 2=3 1 , 2 , 3 =3 1 , 2 , 3 3=2 1 , 2 , 3

1 , 2 , 3 1 , 2 , 3 1 , 2 , 3 1 , 2 , =2 3 1 , 2 , 2=3 3 1 , 2 , =3 3 1 , 2 , 3=2

3

* This axis is not unique (that is, it can always be generated by two other unique axes), but is included for completeness.

X0 T Tj rT i X: Thus, it is necessary to find angular relationships which satisfy the relation r T Tj rT i for given Patterson symmetries. Tollin et al. (1966) show that the Eulerian angular equivalences can be expressed in terms of the Laue symmetries of each Patterson (Table 2.3.6.2). The example given by Tollin et al. (1966) is instructive in the use of Table 2.3.6.2. They consider the determination of the Eulerian space group when P1 has symmetry Pmmm and P2 has symmetry P2=m. These Pattersons contain the proper rotation groups 222 and 2 (parallel to b), respectively. Inspection of Table 2.3.6.2 shows that these symmetries produce the following Eulerian relationships: (a) In the first crystal (Pmmm): 1 2 3 ! 1 , 1 2 3 !

2 , 3 onefold axis

1 , 2 , 3 twofold axis parallel to b

1 2 3 ! 1 , 2 , 3 twofold axis parallel to c: (b) In the second crystal P2=m: 1 2 3 ! 1 ,

2 , 3 onefold axis

1 2 3 ! 1 , 2 ,

3 twofold axis parallel to b:

When these symmetry operators are combined two cells result, each of which has the space group Pbcb (Fig. 2.3.6.5). The asymmetric unit within which the rotation function need be evaluated is found

Fig. 2.3.6.5. Rotation space group diagram for the rotation function of a Pmmm Patterson function P1 against a P2=m Patterson function P2 . The Eulerian angles 1 , 2 , 3 repeat themselves after an interval of 2. Heights above the plane are given in fractions of a revolution. [Reprinted from Tollin et al. (1966).]

from a knowledge of the Eulerian space group. In the above example, the limits of the asymmetric unit are 0 1 =2, 0 2 and 0 3 =2. Non-linear transformations occur when using Eulerian symmetries for threefold axes along [111] (as in the cubic system) or when using polar coordinates. Hence, Eulerian angles are far more suitable for a derivation of the limits of the rotation-function asymmetric unit. However, when searching for given molecular axes, where some plane of need be explored, polar angles are more useful. Rao et al. (1980) have determined all possible rotation function Eulerian space groups, except for combinations with Pattersons of cubic space groups. They numbered these rotation groups 1 through 100 (Table 2.3.6.3) according to the combination of the Patterson Laue groups. The characteristics of each of the 100 groups are given in Table 2.3.6.4, including the limits of the asymmetric unit. In the 100 unique combinations of non-cubic Laue groups, there are only 16 basic rotation function space groups. 2.3.6.4. Sampling, background and interpretation If the origins are retained in the Pattersons, their product will form a high but constant plateau on which the rotation-function

Table 2.3.6.3. Numbering of the rotation function space groups The Laue group of the rotated Patterson map P1 is chosen from the left column and the Laue group of P2 is chosen from the upper row.

1 2=m, b axis unique 2=m, c axis unique mmm 4=m 4=mmm 3 3m 6=m 6=mmm

1

2/m, b axis unique

2/m, c axis unique

mmm

4/m

4/mmm

3

3m

6/m

6/mmm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

254

2.3. PATTERSON AND MOLECULAR-REPLACEMENT TECHNIQUES peaks are superimposed; this leads to a small apparent peak-to-noise ratio. The effect can be eliminated by removal of the origins through a modification of the Patterson coefficients. Irrespective of origin removal, a significant peak is one which is more than three r.m.s. deviations from the mean background. As in all continuous functions sampled at discrete points, a convenient grid size must be chosen. Small intervals result in an excessive computing burden, while large intervals might miss peaks. Furthermore, equal increments of angles do not represent equal changes in rotation, which can result in distorted peaks (Lattman, 1972). In general, a crude idea of a useful sampling interval can be obtained by considering the angle necessary to move one reciprocal-lattice point onto its neighbour (separated by a ) at the extremity of the resolution limit, R. This interval is given by a =21=R 12Ra : Simple sharpening of the rotation function can be useful. This can be achieved by restricting the computations to a shell in reciprocal space or by using normalized structure factors. Useful limits are frequently 10 to 6 A˚ for an average protein or 6 to 5 A˚ for a virus structure determination. When exploring the rotation function in polar coordinates, there is no significance to the latitude ' (Fig. 2.3.6.4) when 0. For small values of , the rotation function will be quite insensitive to ', which therefore needs to be explored only at coarse intervals (say 45°). As approaches the equator at 90°, optimal increments of and ' will be about equal. A similar situation exists with Eulerian angles. When 2 0, the rotation function will be determined by 1 3 , corresponding to 0 and varying in polar coordinates. There will be no dependence on 1 3 . Thus Eulerian searches can often be performed more economically in terms of the variables 1 3 and 1 3 , where 0

B B B B B B B r B B B B B B B @

2 cos cos2 2 2 2 cos sin 2 2 sin cos2 2 2 sin sin2 2 sin 2 sin

2 sin 2 sin 2 2 sin sin2 2 2 cos cos2 sin 2 cos 2 2 cos sin2 2 sin cos2

sin 2 cos

1 C C C C C C C C, C C C C C C A

In general, the interpretation of the rotation function is straightforward. However, noise often builds up relative to the signal in high-symmetry space groups or if the data are limited or poor. One aid to a systematic interpretation is the locked rotation function (Rossmann et al., 1972) for use when a molecule has more than one noncrystallographic symmetry axis. It is then possible to determine the rotation-function values for each molecular axis for a chosen molecular orientation (Fig. 2.3.6.6). Another problem in the interpretation of rotation functions is the appearance of apparent noncrystallographic symmetry that relates the self-Patterson of one molecule to the self-Patterson of a crystallographically related molecule. For example, take the case of -chymotrypsin (Blow et al., 1964). The space group is P21 with a molecular dimer in each of the two crystallographic asymmetric units. The noncrystallographic dimer axis was found to be perpendicular to the crystallographic 21 axis. The product of the crystallographic twofold in the Patterson with the orthogonal twofold in the self-Patterson vectors around the origin creates a third twofold, orthogonal to both of the other twofolds. In real space this represents a twofold screw direction relating the two dimers in the cell. In other cases, the product of the crystallographic and noncrystallographic symmetry results in symmetry which only has meaning in terms of all the vectors in the vicinity of the Patterson origin, but not in real space. Rotation-function peaks arising from such products are called Klug peaks (Johnson et al., 1975). Such peaks normally refer to the total symmetry of all the vectors around the Patterson origin and may, therefore, be much larger than the peaks due to noncrystallographic symmetry within one molecule alone. Hence the Klug peaks, if not correctly recognized, can lead to erroneous conclusions (A˚kervall et al., 1972). Litvin (1975) has shown how Klug peaks can be predicted. These usually occur only for special orientations of a particle with a given symmetry relative to the crystallographic symmetry axes. Prediction of Klug peaks requires the simultaneous consideration of the noncrystallographic point group, the crystallographic point group and their relative orientations. 2.3.6.5. The fast rotation function Unfortunately, the rotation-function computations can be extremely time-consuming by conventional methods. Sasada (1964) developed a technique for rapidly finding the maximum of

cos 2

which reduces to the simple rotation matrix 0 1 cos sin 0 r @ sin cos 0 A 0 0 1 when 2 0. The computational effort to explore carefully a complete asymmetric unit of the rotation-function Eulerian group can be considerable. However, unless improper rotations are under investigation (as, for example, cross-rotation functions between different crystal forms of the same molecule), it is not generally necessary to perform such a global search. The number of molecules per crystallographic asymmetric unit, or the number of subunits per molecule, are often good indicators as to the possible types of noncrystallographic symmetry element. For instance, in the early investigation of insulin, the rotation function was used to explore only the 180 plane in polar coordinates as there were only two molecules per crystallographic asymmetric unit (Dodson et al., 1966). Rotation functions of viruses, containing 532 icosahedral symmetry, are usually limited to exploration of the 180, 120, 72 and 144° planes [e.g. Rayment et al. (1978) and Arnold et al. (1984)].

Fig. 2.3.6.6. The locked rotation function, L, applied to the determination of the orientation of the common cold virus (Arnold et al., 1984). There are four virus particles per cubic cell with each particle sitting on a threefold axis. The locked rotation function explores all positions of rotation about this axis and, hence, repeats itself after 120°. The locked rotation function is determined from the individual rotation-function values of the noncrystallographic symmetry directions of a 532 icosahedron. [Reprinted with permission from Arnold et al. (1984).]

255

2. RECIPROCAL SPACE IN CRYSTAL-STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Table 2.3.6.4. Rotation function Eulerian space groups The rotation space groups are given in Table 2.3.6.3. No. of the rotation space group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53

No. of equivalent positionsa 2 4 4 8 8 16 6 12 12 24 4 8 8 16 16 32 12 24 24 48 4 8 8 16 16 32 12 24 24 48 8 16 16 32 32 64 24 48 48 96 8 16 16 32 32 64 24 48 48 96 16 32 32

Symbolb

Translation along the 1 axisc

Translation along the 3 axisc

Range of the asymmetric unitd

Pn Pbn21 Pc Pbc21 Pc Pbc21 Pn Pbn21 Pc Pbc21 P21 nb Pbnb P2cb Pbcb P2cb Pbcb P21 nb Pbnb P2cb Pbcb Pa Pba2 Pm Pbm2 Pm Pbm2 Pa Pba2 Pm Pbm2 P21 ab Pbab P2mb Pbmb P2mb Pbmb P21 ab Pbab P2mb Pbmb Pa Pba2 Pm Pbm2 Pm Pbm2 Pa Pba2 Pm Pbm2 P21 ab Pbab P2mb

2 2 =2 =2 2=3 2=3 =3 =3 2 2 =2 =2 2=3 2=3 =3 =3 2 2 =2 =2 2=3 2=3 =3 =3 2 2 =2 =2 2=3 2=3 =3 =3 2 2 =2 =2 2=3 2=3 =3 =3 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2 =2

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

256

< 2, < 2, < , < , < =2, < =2, < 2=3, < 2=3, < =3, < =3, < 2, =2, < , =2, < =2, < =2, < 2=3, < 2=3, < =3, < =3, < 2, < 2, < , < , < =2, < =2, < 2=3, < 2=3, < =3, < =3, < 2, =2, < , =2, < =2, < =2, < 2=3, < 2=3, < =3, < =3, < 2, < 2, < , < , < =2, < =2, < 2=3, < 2=3, < =3, < =3, < 2, < 2, < ,

0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2

, =2, , =2, , =2, , =2, , =2, =2, < , =2, =2, =2, < , =2, < , =2, < , , =2, , =2, , =2, , =2, , =2, =2, < , =2, =2, =2, =2, =2, =2, =2, =2, , =2, , =2, , =2, , =2, , =2, =2, =2, =2,

0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3

< 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 < 2 =2 < 2 =2 < 2 =2 k T1 qj 2 ; let j PP Qjk exp2iHh Rk Rj T2 h j

k

T0 2 Then T2 h jFhj2 j

PP

Qjk cos2Hh Rk

j>k

P

Rj :

qj exp2iHh Rj j2 Ah2 Bh2 ,

j

3.4.9. Evaluation of the incomplete gamma function The incomplete gamma function may be expressed in terms of commonly available functions such as the exponential integral and the complement of the error function. The definition of the exponential integral is R1 E1 x2 t 1 exp t dt 0, x2 :

where Ah

P

qj cos2Hh Rj

j

and

P

Bh

x2

qj sin2Hh Rj :

j

The definition of the complement of the error function is R1 erfcx exp t2 dt 1=2 1=2, x2 : x

Numerical approximations to these functions are given, for example, by Hastings (1955). The recursion formula for the incomplete gamma function (Davis, 1972)

The formulae below describe V n, Rj in terms of T0 , T1 and T2 ; the distance jRk Xd Rj j is simply represented by R jkd . P PP0 V 1, Rj 1=2 qj qk R jkd1 erfca j

k

1=2Vd PP0

n 1, x2 n n, x2 x2n exp x2

V 2, Rj 1=2

may be used to obtain working formulae starting from the special values of 0, x2 and 1=2, x2 which are defined above. Also we note that 1, x2 exp x2 .

390

j

k

=2Vd

P

h60

d

T2 hjHhj

Qjk

P h60

2

exp b2

wT0

P 2 R jkd exp a2 d

T2 hjHhj 1 erfcb

=2w2 T0

3.4. ACCELERATED CONVERGENCE TREATMENT OF R n LATTICE SUMS PP0 P P PP0 V 10, Rj 1=2 Qjk R jkd10 V 3, Rj 1=2 Qjk R jkd3 erfca 2a 1=2 exp a2 j

=Vd

P

PP0 j

5=2

T2 hE1 b 2

h60

V 4, Rj 1=2

Qjk

k

=Vd

j

d

k

P

h60

exp b2

E1 b2

22 =3Vd w2 T1 42 =15w5 T0 PP0 P V 6, Rj 1=2 Qjk R jkd6 1 a2 a4 =2 exp a2 j

9=2

k

=3Vd

P

d

h60

T2 hjHhj3

1=2 erfcb 1=2b3

1=b exp b2

3 =6Vd w3 T1 3 =12w6 T0 PP0 P V 7, Rj 1=2 Qjk R jkd7 j

d

k

erfca 2 exp a2 25 =15Vd

1=2

P

h60

b

2

a1 2=3a2 4=15a4

T2 hjHhj4

b 4 exp b2 E1 b2

23 =15Vd w4 T1 83 =105w7 T0 P PP0 V 8, Rj 1=2 Qjk R jkd8 j

d

k

1 a a =2 a6 =6 exp a2 P 213=2 =45Vd T2 hjHhj5 2

3=4b5

5 =240w10 T0 :

3.4.12. Numerical illustrations

h60

b

erfcb 1=b 1=2b3

5 =168Vd w7 T1

exp b2

d

k

1=2

15=8b7 exp b2

erfca 2 1=2 a1 2a2 =3 exp a2 P 23 =3Vd T2 hjHhj2 2

T2 hjHhj 1

4

h60

d

2 =Vd wT1 2 =4w4 T0 P PP0 V 5, Rj 1=2 Qjk R jkd5 j

1 a a =2 a6 =6 a8 =24 exp a2 P 17=2 =315Vd T2 hjHhj7

2=3w T0

P 4 R jkd 1 a2 exp a2

1=2 erfcb b

d

k

2

3

4

Consider the case of the sodium chloride crystal structure (a facecentred cubic structure) as a simple example for evaluation of the Coulombic sum. The sodium ion can be taken at the origin, and the chloride ion halfway along an edge of the unit cell. The results can easily be generalized for this structure type by using the unit-cell edge length, a, as a scaling constant. First, consider the nearest neighbours. Each sodium and each chloride ion is surrounded by six ions of opposite sign at a distance of a=2. The Coulombic energy for the first coordination sphere is 1=2122=a1389:3654 16672:385=a kJ mol 1 . Table 3.4.2.1 shows that the converged value of the lattice energy is 4855:979=a. Thus the nearest-neighbour energy is over three times more negative than the total lattice energy. In the second coordination sphere each ion is surrounded by 12 similar ions at a distance of a=21=2 . The energy contribution of the second sphere is 1=22421=2 =a1389:3654 23578:313=a. Thus, major cancellation occurs and the net energy for the first two coordination spheres is 6905:928=a which actually has the wrong sign for a stable crystal. The third coordination sphere again makes a negative contribution. Each ion is surrounded by eight ions of opposite sign at a distance of a=31=2 . The energy contribution is 1=21631=2 =a1389:3654 19251:612=a, now giving a total so far of 12345:684=a. In the fourth coordination sphere each ion is surrounded by six others of the same sign at a distance of a. The energy contribution is 1=2121=a1389:3654 8336:19=a to yield a total of 4009:491=a. It is seen immediately by examining the numbers that the Coulombic sum is converging very slowly in direct space. Madelung (1918) devised a method for accurate evaluation of the sodium chloride lattice sum. However, his method is not generally applicable for more complex lattice structures. Evjen (1932) emphasized the importance of summing over a neutral domain, and replaced the sum with an integral outside of the first few shells of nearest neighbours. But the method of Ewald remained as the

h60

1=2

erfcb 1=b

1=2b3 3=4b5 Table 3.4.12.1. Accelerated-convergence results for the Coulombic sum (n 1) of sodium chloride (kJ mol 1 , A˚): the direct sum plus the constant term

exp b2 4 =30Vd w5 T1 4 =48w8 T0 PP0 P V 9, Rj 1=2 Qjk R jkd9 j

Limit

d

k

erfca 2

1=2

6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

a1 2=3a2 4=15a4

8=105a6 exp a2 P 47 =315Vd T2 hjHhj6 h60

b

2

b

4

2b 6 exp b2

84 =315Vd w6 T1

E1 b2

164 =945w9 T0

391

w 0:1 779.087 818.549 865.323 861.183 862.717 862.792 862.810 862.825

w 0:15 838.145 860.194 862.818 862.824 862.828 862.828

w 0:2 860.393 863.764 863.811 863.811

w 0:3 924.275 924.282 924.282

w 0:4 1125.372 1125.372

3. DUAL BASES IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHIC COMPUTING Table 3.4.12.2. The reciprocal-lattice results (kJ mol 1 , A˚) for Table 3.4.12.4. The reciprocal-lattice results (kJ mol 1 , A˚) for the Coulombic sum (n 1) of sodium chloride the dispersion sum (n 6) of crystalline benzene Limit 0.0 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

w 0:1 277.872 0.000

w 0:15 416.806 0.003 0.003

w 0:2 555.742 0.986 0.986

w 0:3 833.613 61.451 61.451 61.457 61.457

w 0:4

Limit

1111.483 261.042 261.042 262.542 262.542 262.547 262.547

0.0 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Table 3.4.12.3. Accelerated-convergence results for the dispersion sum (n 6) of crystalline benzene (kJ mol 1 , A˚); the figures shown are the direct-lattice sum plus the two constant terms Limit

w 0:1

w 0:15

w 0:2

w 0:3

w 0:4

6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

73.452 79.029 80.217 80.527 80.578 80.588 80.589 80.589

77.761 80.374 80.571 80.585 80.585

79.651 80.256 80.265 80.265

61.866 61.870 61.870

76.645 76.645

w 0:15

w 0:2

w 0:3

5.547 0.000 0.000

16.706 0.004 0.004

32.326 0.321 0.324 0.324

43.681 16.792 18.656 18.716 18.719 18.719

w 0:4 80.947 117.106 152.651 155.940 157.102 157.227 157.233 157.234 157.234

Table 3.4.12.5. Approximate time (s) required to evaluate the dispersion sum (n 6) for crystalline benzene within 0:001 kJ mol 1 truncation error

w 0.0 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.3 0.4

only completely general and accurate method of evaluating the Coulombic sum for a general lattice. Although it was derived in a somewhat different way, Ewald’s method is equivalent to accelerated convergence for the special case of n 1. In the reciprocal lattice of sodium chloride only points with indices (hkl) all even or all odd are permitted by the face-centred symmetry. The reciprocal cell has edge length 1=a and the reciprocal-axis directions coincide with the direct-lattice axis directions. The closest points to the origin are the eight (111) forms at a distance of 1=a=31=2 . For sodium chloride this distance is 0:3078 A 1 . Table 3.4.12.1 shows the effect of convergence acceleration on the direct-space portion of the n P1 sum for the sodium chloride structure. The constant term w q2j is included in the values given. This constant term is always large if w is not zero; for instance, when w 0:1 this term is 277:872 (Table 3.4.12.2). For w 0:1 the reciprocal-lattice sum is zero to six figures. Thus, only the direct sum (plus the constant term) is needed, evaluated out to 20 A˚ in direct space, to obtain six-figure accuracy. As shown in Table 3.4.2.1 above, the same summation effort without the use of accelerated convergence gave 8% error, or only slightly better than one-figure accuracy. The accelerated-convergence technique therefore yielded nearly five orders of magnitude improvement in accuracy, even without evaluation of the reciprocal-lattice sum. The column showing w 0:15 shows an example of how the reciprocal-lattice sum can also be neglected if lower accuracy is required. Table 3.4.12.2 shows that the reciprocal-lattice sum is still only 0.003. But now the direct-lattice sum only needs to be evaluated out to 14 A˚, with further savings in calculation effort. For w values larger than 0.15 the reciprocal sum is needed. For w 0:4

w 0:1

Direct terms

Reciprocal terms

Time, direct

Time, reciprocal

˚ summation limit) (not yet converged at 20 A 15904 0 77 0 4718 34 23 6 2631 78 13 14 1313 246 7 46 524 804 3 149

Total time >107 77 29 27 53 152

this sum must be evaluated out to 0:8 A 1 to obtain six-figure accuracy. Table 3.4.12.3 illustrates an application for the n 6 dispersion sum. When w 0:1 A 1 five figures of accuracy can be obtained without consideration of the reciprocal sum. The direct sum is required out to 18 A˚. If w 0:15, better than four-figure accuracy can still be obtained without evaluating the reciprocallattice sum. In this case, the direct lattice needs to be summed only to 12 A˚, and there is a saving of an order of magnitude in the length of the calculation. As with the Coulombic sum, if w is greater than 0.15 the reciprocal-lattice summation is needed; Table 3.4.12.4 shows the values. The time required to obtain a lattice sum of given accuracy will vary depending on the particular structure considered and of course on the computer and program which are used. An example of timing for the benzene dispersion sum is given in Table 3.4.12.5 for the PCK83 program (Williams, 1984) running on a VAX-11/750 computer. In this particular case direct terms were evaluated at a rate of about 200 terms s 1 and reciprocal terms, being a sum themselves, were evaluated at a slower rate of about 5 terms s 1 . Table 3.4.12.5 shows the time required for evaluation of the dispersion sum using various values of the convergence constant, w. The timing figures show that there is an optimum choice for w; for the PCK83 program the optimum value indicated is 0:15---0:2 A 1 . In the program of Pietila & Rasmussen (1984) values in the range 0:15---0:2 A 1 are also suggested. For the WMIN program (Busing, 1981) a slightly higher value of 0:25 A 1 is suggested. Trial calculations can be used to determine the optimum value of w for the situation of a particular crystal structure, program and computer.

392

REFERENCES

References 3.1 Busing, W. R. & Levy, H. A. (1964). Effect of thermal motion on the estimation of bond lengths. Acta Cryst. 17, 142–146. Hamilton, W. C. (1964). Statistics in physical science. New York: Ronald Press. Johnson, C. K. (1970). The effect of thermal motion on interatomic distances and angles. In Crystallographic computing, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 220–226. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Johnson, C. K. (1980). Thermal motion analysis. In Computing in crystallography, edited by R. Diamond, S. Ramaseshan & K. Venkatesan, pp. 14.01–14.19. Bangalore: Indian Academy of Sciences. Sands, D. E. (1966). Transformations of variance–covariance tensors. Acta Cryst. 21, 868–872. Sands, D. E. (1977). Correlation and covariance. J. Chem. Educ. 54, 90–94. Sands, D. E. (1982a). Vectors and tensors in crystallography. Reading: Addison Wesley. Reprinted (1995) Dover Publications. Sands, D. E. (1982b). Molecular geometry. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 421–429. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Shmueli, U. (1974). On the standard deviation of a dihedral angle. Acta Cryst. A30, 848–849. Taylor, R. & Kennard, O. (1983). The estimation of average molecular dimensions from crystallographic data. Acta Cryst. B39, 517–525. Taylor, R. & Kennard, O. (1985). The estimation of average molecular dimensions. 2. Hypothesis testing with weighted and unweighted means. Acta Cryst. A41, 85–89. Waser, J. (1973). Dyadics and the variances and covariances of molecular parameters, including those of best planes. Acta Cryst. A29, 621–631.

3.2 Arley, N. & Buch, K. R. (1950). Introduction to the theory of probability and statistics. New York: John Wiley. London: Chapman & Hall. Clews, C. J. B. & Cochran, W. (1949). The structures of pyrimidines and purines. III. An X-ray investigation of hydrogen bonding in aminopyrimidines. Acta Cryst. 2, 46–57. Deming, W. E. (1943). Statistical adjustment of data. New York: John Wiley. [First edition 1938.] Hamilton, W. C. (1961). On the least-squares plane through a set of points. Acta Cryst. 14, 185–189. Hamilton, W. C. (1964). Statistics in physical science. New York: Ronald Press. Ito, T. (1981a). Least-squares refinement of the best-plane parameters. Acta Cryst. A37, 621–624. Ito, T. (1981b). On the least-squares plane through a group of atoms. Sci. Pap. Inst. Phys. Chem. Res. Saitama, 75, 55–58. Ito, T. (1982). On the estimated standard deviation of the atom-toplane distance. Acta Cryst. A38, 869–870. Kalantar, A. H. (1987). Slopes of straight lines when neither axis is error-free. J. Chem. Educ. 64, 28–29. Lybanon, M. (1984). A better least-squares method when both variables have uncertainties. Am. J. Phys. 52, 22–26. Robertson, J. M. (1948). Bond-length variations in aromatic systems. Acta Cryst. 1, 101–109. Schomaker, V. & Marsh, R. E. (1983). On evaluating the standard deviation of Ueq . Acta Cryst. A39, 819–820. Schomaker, V., Waser, J., Marsh, R. E. & Bergman, G. (1959). To fit a plane or a line to a set of points by least squares. Acta Cryst. 12, 600–604. Shmueli, U. (1981). On the statistics of atomic deviations from the ‘best’ molecular plane. Acta Cryst. A37, 249–251.

Waser, J. (1973). Dyadics and variances and covariances of molecular parameters, including those of best planes. Acta Cryst. A29, 621–631. Waser, J., Marsh, R. E. & Cordes, A. W. (1973). Variances and covariances for best-plane parameters including dihedral angles. Acta Cryst. B29, 2703–2708. Whittaker, E. T. & Robinson, G. (1929). The calculus of observations. London: Blackie.

3.3 Abad-Zapatero, C., Abdel-Meguid, S. S., Johnson, J. E., Leslie, A. G. W., Rayment, I., Rossmann, M. G., Suck, D. & Tsukihara, T. (1980). Structure of southern bean mosaic virus at 2.8 A˚ resolution. Nature (London), 286, 33–39. Abi-Ezzi, S. S. & Bunshaft, A. J. (1986). An implementer’s view of PHIGS. IEEE Comput. Graphics Appl. Vol. 6, Part 2. Aharonov, Y., Farach, H. A. & Poole, C. P. (1977). Non-linear vector product to describe rotations. Am. J. Phys. 45, 451–454. Allen, F. H., Bellard, S., Brice, M. D., Cartwright, B. A., Doubleday, A., Higgs, H., Hummelink, T., Hummelink-Peters, B. G., Kennard, O., Motherwell, W. D. S., Rodgers, J. R. & Watson, D. G. (1979). The Cambridge Crystallographic Data Centre: computer-based search, retrieval, analysis and display of information. Acta Cryst. B35, 2331–2339. Allinger, N. L. (1976). Calculation of molecular structure and energy by force field methods. Adv. Phys. Org. Chem. 13, 1–82. Altona, C. & Sundaralingam, M. (1972). Conformational analysis of the sugar ring in nucleosides and nucleotides. A new description using the concept of pseudorotation. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 94(23), 8205–8212. American National Standards Institute, American National Standard for Information Processing Systems – Computer Graphics – Graphical Kernel System (GKS) Functional Description (1985). ISO 7942, ISO Central Secretariat, Geneva, Switzerland. American National Standards Institute, American National Standard for Information Processing Systems – Computer Graphics – Programmer’s Hierarchical Graphics System (PHIGS) Functional Description, Archive File Format, Clear-Text Encoding of Archive File (1988). ANSI X3.144-1988. ANSI, New York, USA. Anderson, S. (1984). Graphical representation of molecules and substructure-search queries in MACCS. J. Mol. Graphics, 2, 83– 90. Arnold, D. B. & Bono, P. R. (1988). CGM and CGI: metafile and interface standards for computer graphics. Berlin: SpringerVerlag. Barry, C. D. & North, A. C. T. (1971). The use of a computercontrolled display system in the study of molecular conformations. Cold Spring Harbour Symp. Quant. Biol. 36, 577–584. Bash, P. A., Pattabiraman, N., Huang, C., Ferrin, T. E. & Langridge, R. (1983). Van der Waals surfaces in molecular modelling: implementation with real-time computer graphics. Science, 222, 1325–1327. Beddell, C. J. (1970). An X-ray crystallographic study of the activity of lysozyme. DPhil thesis, University of Oxford, England. Bernstein, F. C., Koetzle, T. F., Williams, G. J. B., Meyer, E. F., Brice, M. D., Rodgers, J. R., Kennard, O., Shimanouchi, T. & Tasumi, M. (1977). The Protein Data Bank: a computer-based archival file for macromolecular structures. J. Mol. Biol. 112, 535–542. Bloomer, A. C., Champness, J. N., Bricogne, G., Staden, R. & Klug, A. (1978). Protein disk of tobacco mosaic virus at 2.8 A˚ resolution showing the interactions within and between subunits. Nature (London), 276, 362–368. Boyd, D. B. & Lipkowitz, K. B. (1982). Molecular mechanics, the method and its underlying philosophy. J. Chem. Educ. 59, 269– 274.

393

3. DUAL BASES IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHIC COMPUTING

3.3 (cont.) Brandenburg, N. P., Dempsey, S., Dijkstra, B. W., Lijk, L. J. & Hol, W. G. J. (1981). An interactive graphics system for comparing and model building of macromolecules. J. Appl. Cryst. 14, 274–279. Brooks, B. R., Brucolleri, R. E., Olafson, B. D., States, D. J., Swaminathan, S. & Karplus, M. (1983). CHARMM: a program for macromolecular energy, minimization, and dynamics calculations. J. Comput. Chem. 4, 187–217. Brown, M. D. (1985). Understanding PHIGS. Template, Megatek Corp., San Diego, California, USA. Burkert, U. & Allinger, N. L. (1982). Molecular mechanics. ACS Monogr. No. 177. Cambillau, C. & Horjales, E. (1987). TOM: a FRODO subpackage for protein-ligand fitting with interactive energy minimization. J. Mol. Graphics, 5, 174–177. Cambillau, C., Horjales, E. & Jones, T. A. (1984). TOM, a display program for fitting ligands into protein receptors and performing interactive energy minimization. J. Mol. Graphics, 2, 53–54. Cambridge Structural Database (1994). Cambridge Crystallographic Data Centre, 12 Union Road, Cambridge, England. Cockrell, P. R. (1983). A new general purpose method for large volume production of contour charts. Comput. Graphics Forum, 2, 35–47. Cohen, N. C. (1971). GEMO: a computer program for the calculation of the preferred conformations of organic molecules. Tetrahedron, 27, 789–797. Cohen, N. C., Colin, P. & Lemoine, G. (1981). Script: interactive molecular geometrical treatments on the basis of computer-drawn chemical formula. Tetrahedron, 37, 1711–1721. Collins, D. M., Cotton, F. A., Hazen, E. E., Meyer, E. F. & Morimoto, C. N. (1975). Protein crystal structures: quicker, cheaper approaches. Science, 190, 1047–1053. Connolly, M. L. (1983a). Solvent-accessible surfaces of proteins and nucleic acids. Science, 221, 709–713. Connolly, M. L. (1983b). Analytical molecular surface calculation. J. Appl. Cryst. 16, 548–558. Dam, A. van (1988). PHIGS+ functional description, revision 3.0. Comput. Graphics, 22(3), 125–218. Dayringer, H. E., Tramontano, A., Sprang, S. R. & Fletterick, R. J. (1986). Interactive program for visualization and modelling of proteins, nucleic acids and small molecules. J. Mol. Graphics, 4, 82–87. Diamond, R. (1966). A mathematical model-building procedure for proteins. Acta Cryst. 21, 253–266. Diamond, R. (1971). A real-space refinement procedure for proteins. Acta Cryst. A27, 436–452. Diamond, R. (1976a). On the comparison of conformations using linear and quadratic transformations. Acta Cryst. A32, 1–10. Diamond, R. (1976b). Model building techniques for macromolecules. In Crystallographic computing techniques, edited by F. R. Ahmed, K. Huml & B. Sedlacek, pp. 336–343. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Diamond, R. (1980a). BILDER: a computer graphics program for biopolymers and its application to the interpretation of the structure of tobacco mosaic virus protein discs at 2.8 A˚ resolution. In Biomolecular structure, conformation, function and evolution, Vol. 1, edited by R. Srinivasan, pp. 567–588. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Diamond, R. (1980b). Some problems in macromolecular map interpretation. In Computing in crystallography, edited by R. Diamond, S. Ramaseshan & K. Venkatesan, pp. 21.01–21.19. Bangalore: Indian Academy of Sciences for the International Union of Crystallography. Diamond, R. (1980c). Inter-active graphics. In Computing in crystallography, edited by R. Diamond, S. Ramaseshan & K. Venkatesan, pp. 27.01–27.16. Bangalore: Indian Academy of Sciences for the International Union of Crystallography.

Diamond, R. (1981). A review of the principles and properties of the method of least squares. In Structural aspects of biomolecules, edited by R. Srinivasan & V. Pattabhi, pp. 81–122. Delhi: Macmillan India Ltd. Diamond, R. (1982a). Two contouring algorithms. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 266–272. Oxford University Press. Diamond, R. (1982b). BILDER: an interactive graphics program for biopolymers. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 318–325. Oxford University Press. Diamond, R. (1984a). Applications of computer graphics in molecular biology. Comput. Graphics Forum, 3, 3–11. Diamond, R. (1984b). Least squares and related optimisation techniques. In Methods and applications in crystallographic computing, edited by S. R. Hall & T. Ashida, pp. 174–192. Oxford University Press. Diamond, R. (1988). A note on the rotational superposition problem. Acta Cryst. A44, 211–216. Diamond, R. (1989). A comparison of three recently published methods for superimposing vector sets by pure rotation. Acta Cryst. A45, 657. Diamond, R. (1990a). On the factorisation of rotations with special reference to diffractometry. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 428, 451–472. Diamond, R. (1990b). Chirality in rotational superposition. Acta Cryst. A46, 423. Diamond, R., Wynn, A., Thomsen, K. & Turner, J. (1982). Threedimensional perception for one-eyed guys, or, the use of dynamic parallax. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 286–293. Oxford University Press. Dodson, E. J., Isaacs, N. W. & Rollett, J. S. (1976). A method for fitting satisfactory models to sets of atomic positions in protein structure refinements. Acta Cryst. A32, 311–315. Dodson, G. G., Eliopoulos, E. E., Isaacs, N. W., McCall, M. J., Niall, H. D. & North, A. C. T. (1982). Rat relaxin: insulin-like fold predicts a likely receptor binding region. Int. J. Biol. Macromol. 4, 399–405. Enderle, G., Kansy, K. & Pfaff, G. (1984). Computer graphics programming, GKS – the graphics standard. Berlin: SpringerVerlag. Evans, P. R., Farrants, G. W. & Hudson, P. J. (1981). Phosphofructokinase: structure and control. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London Ser. B, 293, 53–62. Feldmann, R. J. (1976). The design of computing systems for molecular modeling. Annu. Rev. Biophys. Bioeng. 5, 477–510. Feldmann, R. J. (1983). Directions in macromolecular structure representation and display. In Computer applications in chemistry, edited by S. R. Heller & R. Potenzone Jr, pp. 9–18. Amsterdam: Elsevier. Feldmann, R. J., Bing, D. H., Furie, B. C. & Furie, B. (1978). Interactive computer surface graphics approach to the study of the active site of bovine trypsin. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. Biochemistry, 75, 5409–5412. Ferrin, T. E., Huang, C., Jarvis, L. & Langridge, R. (1984). Molecular inter-active display and simulation: MIDAS. J. Mol. Graphics, 2, 55. Foley, J. D., van Dam, A., Feiner, S. K. & Hughes, J. F. (1990). Computer graphics principles and practice, 2nd edition. New York: Addison Wesley. Ford, L. O., Johnson, L. N., Machin, P. A., Phillips, D. C. & Tjian, R. (1974). Crystal structure of a lysozyme-tetrasaccharide lactone complex. J. Mol. Biol. 88, 349–371. Gallo, L., Huang, C. & Ferrin, T. (1983). UCSF MIDAS, molecular interactive display and simulation, users’ guide. Computer Graphics Laboratory, School of Pharmacy, University of California, San Francisco, USA. Gill, P. E., Murray, W. & Wright, M. H. (1981). Practical optimization. Orlando, Florida: Academic Press. Gilliland, G. L. & Quiocho, F. A. (1981). Structure of the Larabinose-binding protein from Escherichia coli at 2.4 A˚ resolution. J. Mol. Biol. 146, 341–362.

394

REFERENCES

3.3 (cont.) Girling, R. L., Houston, T. E., Schmidt, W. C. Jr & Amma, E. L. (1980). Macromolecular structure refinement by restrained leastsquares and interactive graphics as applied to sickling deer type III hemoglobin. Acta Cryst. A36, 43–50. Gossling, T. H. (1967). Two methods of presentation of electrondensity maps using a small-store computer. Acta Cryst. 22, 465– 468. Greer, J. (1974). Three-dimensional pattern recognition: an approach to automated interpretation of electron density maps of proteins. J. Mol. Biol. 82, 279–302. Harris, M. R., Geddes, A. J. & North, A. C. T. (1985). A liquid crystal stereo-viewer for molecular graphics. J. Mol. Graphics, 3, 121–122. Hass, B. S., Willoughby, T. V., Morimoto, C. N., Cullen, D. L. & Meyer, E. F. (1975). The solution of the structure of spirodienone by visual packing analysis. Acta Cryst. B31, 1225–1229. Heap, B. R. & Pink, M. G. (1969). Three contouring algorithms, DNAM Rep. 81. National Physical Laboratory, Teddington, England. Hermans, J. (1985). Rationalization of molecular models. In Methods in enzymology, Vol. 115. Diffraction methods for biological molecules, Part B, edited by H. W. Wyckoff, C. H. W. Hirs & S. N. Timasheff, pp. 171–189. Orlando, Florida: Academic Press. Hermans, J. & McQueen, J. E. (1974). Computer manipulation of (macro) molecules with the method of local change. Acta Cryst. A30, 730–739. Hogle, J., Rao, S. T., Mallikarjunan, M., Beddell, C., McMullan, R. K. & Sundaralingam, M. (1981). Studies of monoclinic hen egg white lysozyme. Structure solution at 4 A˚ resolution and molecular-packing comparisons with tetragonal and triclinic lysozymes. Acta Cryst. B37, 591–597. Hopgood, F. R. A., Duce, D. A., Gallop, J. R. & Sutcliffe, D. C. (1986). Introduction to the graphical kernel system, 2nd ed. London: Academic Press. Hubbard, R. E. (1983). Colour molecular graphics on a microcomputer. J. Mol. Graphics, 1, 13–16, C3–C4. Hubbard, R. E. (1985). The representation of protein structure. In Computer aided molecular design, pp. 99–106. Proceedings of a two-day conference, London, October 1984. London: Oyez Scientific. International Standards Organisation, International Standard Information Processing Systems – Computer Graphics – Graphical Kernel System for Three Dimensions (GKS-3D), Functional Description (1988). ISO Document No. 8805:1988(E). American National Standards Institute, New York, USA. International Tables for Crystallography (1983). Vol. A. Spacegroup symmetry, edited by T. Hahn. Dordrecht: D. Reidel. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) IUPAC–IUB Commission on Biochemical Nomenclature (1970). Abbreviations and symbols for the description of the conformation of polypeptide chains. J. Biol. Chem. 245, 6489–6497. Johnson, C. K. (1970). Drawing crystal structures by computer. In Crystallographic computing, edited by F. R. Ahmed, pp. 227–230. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Johnson, C. K. (1976). ORTEPII. A Fortran thermal-ellipsoid plot program for crystal structure illustrations. Report ORNL-5138. Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Tennessee, USA. Johnson, C. K. (1980). Computer-generated illustrations. In Computing in crystallography, edited by R. Diamond, S. Ramaseshan & K. Venkatesan, pp. 26.01–26.10. Bangalore: Indian Academy of Sciences for the International Union of Crystallography. Jones, T. A. (1978). A graphics model building and refinement system for macromolecules. J. Appl. Cryst. 11, 268–272. Jones, T. A. (1982). FRODO: a graphics fitting program for macromolecules. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 303–317. Oxford University Press. Jones, T. A. (1985). Interactive computer graphics: FRODO. In Methods in enzymology, Vol. 115. Diffraction methods for

biological molecules, Part B, edited by H. W. Wyckoff, C. H. W. Hirs & S. N. Timasheff, pp. 157–171. Orlando, Florida: Academic Press. Jones, T. A. & Liljas, L. (1984). Crystallographic refinement of macromolecules having non-crystallographic symmetry. Acta Cryst. A40, 50–57. Jones, T. A., Zou, J.-Y., Cowan, S. W. & Kjeldgaard, M. (1991). Improved methods for building protein models in electron density maps and the location of errors in these models. Acta Cryst. A47, 110–119. Kabsch, W. (1976). A solution for the best rotation to relate two sets of vectors. Acta Cryst. A32, 922–923. Kabsch, W. (1978). A discussion of the solution for the best rotation to relate two sets of vectors. Acta Cryst. A34, 827–828. Katz, L. & Levinthal, C. (1972). Interactive computer graphics and representation of complex biological structures. Annu. Rev. Biophys. Bioeng. 1, 465–504. Kearsley, S. K. (1989). On the orthogonal transformation used for structural comparisons. Acta Cryst. A45, 208–210. Langridge, R., Ferrin, T. E., Kuntz, I. D. & Connolly, M. L. (1981). Real-time color graphics in studies of molecular interactions. Science, 211, 661–666. Lederer, F., Glatigny, A., Bethge, P. H., Bellamy, H. D. & Mathews, F. S. (1981). Improvement of the 2.5 A˚ resolution model of cytochrome b562 by re-determining the primary structure and using molecular graphics. J. Mol. Biol. 148, 427–448. Lesk, A. M. & Hardman, K. D. (1982). Computer-generated schematic diagrams of protein structures. Science, 216, 539–540. Lesk, A. M. & Hardman, K. D. (1985). Computer-generated pictures of proteins. In Methods in enzymology, Vol. 115. Diffraction methods for biological molecules, Part B, edited by H. W. Wyckoff, C. H. W. Hirs & S. N. Timasheff, pp. 381–390. Orlando, Florida: Academic Press. Levinthal, C. (1966). Molecular model-building by computer. Sci. Am. 214, 42–52. Levitt, M. (1971). PhD Dissertation, ch. 2. University of Cambridge, England. Levitt, M. (1974). Energy refinement of hen egg-white lysozyme. J. Mol. Biol. 82, 393–420. Levitt, M. & Lifson, S. (1969). Refinement of protein conformations using a macromolecular energy minimization procedure. J. Mol. Biol. 46, 269–279. Levitt, M. & Warshel, A. (1975). Computer simulation of protein folding. Nature (London), 253, 694–698. Lieth, C. W. van der, Carter, R. E., Dolata, D. P. & Liljefors, T. (1984). RINGS – a general program to build ring systems. J. Mol. Graphics, 2, 117–123. Liljefors, T. (1983). MOLBUILD – an interactive computer graphics interface to molecular mechanics. J. Mol. Graphics, 1, 111–117. Luenberger, D. G. (1984). Linear and nonlinear programming. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison Wesley. Mackay, A. L. (1984). Quaternion transformation of molecular orientation. Acta Cryst. A40, 165–166. McLachlan, A. D. (1972). A mathematical procedure for superimposing atomic coordinates of proteins. Acta Cryst. A28, 656– 657. McLachlan, A. D. (1979). Gene duplications in the structural evolution of chymotrypsin. Appendix: Least squares fitting of two structures. J. Mol. Biol. 128, 49–79. McLachlan, A. D. (1982). Rapid comparison of protein structures. Acta Cryst. A38, 871–873. Max, N. L. (1984). Computer representation of molecular surfaces. J. Mol. Graphics, 2, 8–13, C2–C4. Meyer, E. F. (1970). Three-dimensional graphical models of molecules and a time-slicing computer. J. Appl. Cryst. 3, 392–395. Meyer, E. F. (1971). Interactive computer display for the three dimensional study of macromolecular structures. Nature (London), 232, 255–257. Meyer, E. F. (1974). Storage and retrieval of macromolecular structural data. Biopolymers, 13, 419–422.

395

3. DUAL BASES IN CRYSTALLOGRAPHIC COMPUTING

3.3 (cont.) Miller, J. R., Abdel-Meguid, S. S., Rossmann, M. G. & Anderson, D. C. (1981). A computer graphics system for the building of macromolecular models into electron density maps. J. Appl. Cryst. 14, 94–100. Morffew, A. J. (1983). Bibliography for molecular graphics. J. Mol. Graphics, 1, 17–23. Morffew, A. J. (1984). Bibliography for molecular graphics, 1983/ 84. J. Mol. Graphics, 2, 124–128. Morimoto, C. N. & Meyer, E. F. (1976). Information retrieval, computer graphics, and remote computing. In Crystallographic computing techniques, edited by F. R. Ahmed, K. Huml & B. Sedlacek, pp. 488–496. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. Motherwell, W. D. S. (1978). Pluto – a program for displaying molecular and crystal structures. Cambridge Crystallographic Data Centre, 12 Union Road, Cambridge, England. Newman, W. M. & Sproull, R. F. (1973). Principles of inter-active computer graphics. New York: McGraw-Hill. North, A. C. T. (1982). Use of interactive computer graphics in studying molecular structures and interactions. Chem. Ind. pp. 221–225. North, A. C. T., Denson, A. K., Evans, A. C., Ford, L. O. & Willoughby, T. V. (1981). The use of an interactive computer graphics system in the study of protein conformations. In Biomolecular structure, conformation, function and evolution, Vol. 1, edited by R. Srinivasan, pp. 59–72. Oxford: Pergamon Press. O’Donnell, T. J. & Olson, A. J. (1981). GRAMPS – a graphics language interpreter for real-time, interactive, three-dimensional picture editing and animation. Comput. Graphics, 15, 133–142. Olson, A. J. (1982). GRAMPS: a high level graphics interpreter for expanding graphics utilization. In Computational crystallography, edited by D. Sayre, pp. 326–336. Oxford University Press. Opdenbosch, N. van, Cramer, R. III & Giarrusso, F. F. (1985). Sybyl, the integrated molecular modelling system. J. Mol. Graphics, 3, 110–111. Pearl, L. H. & Honegger, A. (1983). Generation of molecular surfaces for graphic display. J. Mol. Graphics, 1, 9–12, C2. Phillips, S. E. V. (1980). Structure and refinement of oxymyoglobin at 1.6 A˚ resolution. J. Mol. Biol. 142, 531–554. Phong, B. T. (1975). Illumination for computer generated images. Commun. ACM, 18, 311–317. Porter, T. K. (1978). Spherical shading. Comput. Graphics, 12, 282– 285. Potenzone, R., Cavicchi, E., Weintraub, H. J. R. & Hopfinger, A. J. (1977). Molecular mechanics and the CAMSEQ processor. Comput. Chem. 1, 187–194. Potterton, E. A., Geddes, A. J. & North, A. C. T. (1983). Attempts to design inhibitors of dihydrofolate reductase using interactive computer graphics with real time energy calculations. In Chemistry and biology of pteridines, edited by J. A. Blair, pp. 299–303. Berlin, New York: Walter de Gruyter. Purisima, E. O. & Scheraga, H. A. (1986). An approach to the multiple-minima problem by relaxing dimensionality. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 83, 2782–2786. Richardson, J. S. (1977). -Sheet topology and the relatedness of proteins. Nature (London), 268, 495–500. Richardson, J. S. (1981). The anatomy and taxonomy of protein structure. Adv. Protein Chem. 34, 167–339. Richardson, J. S. (1985). Schematic drawings of protein structures. In Methods in enzymology, Vol. 115. Diffraction methods for biological molecules, Part B, edited by H. W. Wyckoff, C. H. W. Hirs & S. N. Timasheff, pp. 359–380. Orlando, Florida: Academic Press. Sundaram, K. & Radhakrishnan, R. (1979). A computer program for topographic analysis of biomolecular systems. Comput. Programs Biomed. 10, 34–42.

Sutcliffe, D. C. (1980). Contouring over rectangular and skewed rectangular grids – an introduction. In Mathematical methods in computer graphics and design, edited by K. W. Brodie, pp. 39–62. London: Academic Press. Sutherland, I. E., Sproull, R. F. & Schumacker, R. A. (1974). A characterization of ten hidden surface algorithms. Comput. Surv. 6, 1–55. Swanson, S. M., Wesolowski, T., Geller, M. & Meyer, E. F. (1989). Animation: a useful tool for protein molecular dynamicists, applied to hydrogen bonds in the active site of elastase. J. Mol. Graphics, 7, 240–242, 223–224. Takenaka, A. & Sasada, Y. (1980). Computer manipulation of crystal and molecular models. J. Crystallogr. Soc. Jpn, 22, 214–225. [In Japanese.] Thomas, D. J. (1993). Toward more reliable printed stereo. J. Mol. Graphics, 11, 15–22. Tsernoglou, D., Petsko, G. A., McQueen, J. E. & Hermans, J. (1977). Molecular graphics: application to the structure determination of a snake venom neurotoxin. Science, 197, 1378–1381. Vedani, A. & Meyer, E. F. (1984). Structure–activity relationships of sulfonamide drugs and human carbonic anhydrase C: modelling of inhibitor molecules into receptor site of the enzyme with an interactive computer graphics display. J. Pharm. Sci. 73, 352– 358. Walsh, G. R. (1975). Methods of optimization. London: John Wiley. Warme, P. K., Go, N. & Scheraga, H. A. (1972). Refinement of X-ray data of proteins. 1. Adjustment of atomic coordinates to conform to a specified geometry. J. Comput. Phys. 9, 303–317. Williams, T. V. (1982). Thesis. University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, NC, USA. Willoughby, T. V., Morimoto, C. N., Sparks, R. A. & Meyer, E. F. (1974). Mini-computer control of a stereo graphics display. J. Appl. Cryst. 7, 430–434. Wipke, W. T. (1974). Computer assisted three-dimensional synthetic analysis. In Computer representation and manipulation of chemical information, edited by W. T. Wipke, S. R. Heller, R. J. Feldmann & E. Hyde, pp. 147–174. New York: John Wiley. Wipke, W. T., Braun, H., Smith, G., Choplin, F. & Sieber, W. (1977). SECS – simulation and evaluation of chemical synthesis: strategy and planning. ACS Symp. Ser. 61, 97–125. Wipke, W. T. & Dyott, T. M. (1974). Simulation and evaluation of chemical synthesis. Computer representation and manipulation of stereochemistry. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 96, 4825–4834.

3.4 Arfken, G. (1970). Mathematical methods for physicists, 2nd ed. New York: Academic Press. Bertaut, E. F. (1952). L’eńergie e´lectrostatique de re´seaux ioniques. J. Phys. (Paris), 13, 499–505. Bertaut, E. F. (1978). The equivalent charge concept and its application to the electrostatic energy of charges and multipoles. J. Phys. (Paris), 39, 1331–1348. Busing, W. R. (1981). WMIN, a computer program to model molecules and crystals in terms of potential energy functions. Oak Ridge National Laboratory Report ORNL-5747. Oak Ridge, Tennessee 37830, USA. Cummins, P. G., Dunmur, D. A., Munn, R. W. & Newham, R. J. (1976). Applications of the Ewald method. I. Calculation of multipole lattice sums. Acta Cryst. A32, 847–853. Davis, P. J. (1972). Gamma function and related functions. Handbook of mathematical functions with formulas, graphs, and mathematical tables, edited by M. Abramowitz & I. A. Stegun, pp. 260–262. London, New York: John Wiley. [Reprint, with corrections of 1964 Natl Bur. Stand. publication.] DeWette, F. W. & Schacher, G. E. (1964). Internal field in general dipole lattices. Phys. Rev. 137, A78–A91. Evjen, H. M. (1932). The stability of certain heteropolar crystals. Phys. Rev. 39, 675–694. Ewald, P. P. (1921). Die Berechnung optischer und elektrostatischer Gitterpotentiale. Ann. Phys. (Leipzig), 64, 253–287.

396

REFERENCES

3.4 (cont.) Fortuin, C. M. (1977). Note on the calculation of electrostatic lattice potentials. Physica (Utrecht), 86A, 574–586. Glasser, M. L. & Zucker, I. J. (1980). Lattice sums. Theor. Chem. Adv. Perspect. 5, 67–139. Hastings, C. Jr (1955). Approximations for digital computers. New Jersey: Princeton University Press. Madelung, E. (1918). Das elektrische Feld in Systemen von regelma¨ssig angeordneten Punktladungen. Phys. Z. 19, 524–532. Massidda, V. (1978). Electrostatic energy in ionic crystals by the planewise summation method. Physica (Utrecht), 95B, 317–334. Nijboer, B. R. A. & DeWette, F. W. (1957). On the calculation of lattice sums. Physica (Utrecht), 23, 309–321.

Pietila, L.-O. & Rasmussen, K. (1984). A program for calculation of crystal conformations of flexible molecules using convergence acceleration. J. Comput. Chem. 5, 252–260. Widder, D. V. (1961). Advanced calculus, 2nd ed. New York: Prentice-Hall. Williams, D. E. (1971). Accelerated convergence of crystal lattice potential sums. Acta Cryst. A27, 452–455. Williams, D. E. (1984). PCK83, a crystal molecular packing analysis program. Quantum Chemistry Program Exchange, Department of Chemistry, Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana 47405, USA. Williams, D. E. (1989). Accelerated convergence treatment of R n lattice sums. Crystallogr. Rev. 2, 3–23. Corrections: Crystallogr. Rev. 2, 163–166.

397

references


4.1. Thermal diffuse scattering of X-rays and neutrons BY B. T. M. WILLIS

4.1.1. Introduction Thermal motion of the atoms in a crystal gives rise to a reduction in the intensities of the Bragg reflections and to a diffuse distribution of non-Bragg scattering in the rest of reciprocal space. This distribution is known as thermal diffuse scattering (TDS). Measurement and analysis of TDS gives information about the lattice dynamics of the crystal, i.e. about the small oscillatory displacements of the atoms from their equilibrium positions which arise from thermal excitations. Lattice-dynamical models form the basis for interpreting many physical properties – for example, specific heat and thermal conductivity – which cannot be explained by a static model of the crystal. Reference to a lattice-dynamical model is found in Newton’s Principia, which contains a discussion of the vibrations of a linear chain of equidistant mass points connected by springs. The model was used to estimate the speed of sound in air. The vibrational properties of a one-dimensional crystal treated as a linear chain of atoms provide the starting point for several modern treatises on the lattice dynamics of crystals. The classical theory of the dynamics of three-dimensional crystals is based on the treatment of Born & von Ka´rmań (1912, 1913). In this theory, the restoring force on an atom is determined not by the displacement of the atom from its equilibrium position, but by its displacement relative to its neighbours. The atomic motion is then considered in terms of travelling waves, or ‘lattice vibrations’, extending throughout the whole crystal. These waves are the normal modes of vibration, in which each mode is characterized by a wavevector q, an angular frequency !(q) and certain polarization properties. For twenty years after its publication the Born–von Ka´rmań treatment was eclipsed by the theory of Debye (1912). In the Debye theory the crystal is treated as a continuous medium instead of a discrete array of atoms. The theory gives a reasonable fit to the integral vibrational properties (for example, the specific heat or the atomic temperature factor) of simple monatomic crystals. It fails to account for the form of the frequency distribution function which relates the number of modes and their frequency. An even simpler model than Debye’s is due to Einstein (1907), who considered the atoms in the crystal to be vibrating independently of each other and with the same frequency !E. By quantizing the energy of each atom in units of h!E , Einstein showed that the specific heat falls to zero at T = 0 K and rises asymptotically to the Dulong and Petit value for T much larger than h!E =kB . (h is Planck’s constant divided by 2 and kB is Boltzmann’s constant.) His theory accounts satisfactorily for the breakdown of equipartition of energy at low temperatures, but it predicts a more rapid falloff of specific heat with decreasing temperature than is observed. Deficiencies in the Debye theory were noted by Blackman (1937), who showed that they are overcome satisfactorily using the more rigorous Born–von Ka´rmań theory. Extensive X-ray studies of Laval (1939) on simple structures such as sylvine, aluminium and diamond showed that the detailed features of the TDS could only be explained in terms of the Born–von Ka´rmań theory. The X-ray work on aluminium was developed further by Olmer (1948) and by Walker (1956) to derive the phonon dispersion relations (see Section 4.1.5) along various symmetry directions in the crystal. It is possible to measure the vibrational frequencies directly with X-rays, but such measurements are very difficult as lattice vibrational energies are many orders of magnitude less than X-ray energies. The situation is much more favourable with thermal neutrons because their wavelength is comparable with interatomic spacings and their energy is comparable with a quantum of

vibrational energy (or phonon). The neutron beam is scattered inelastically by the lattice vibrations, exchanging energy with the phonons. By measuring the energy change for different directions of the scattered beam, the dispersion relations !q can be determined. Brockhouse & Stewart (1958) reported the first dispersion curves to be derived in this way; since then the neutron technique has become the principal experimental method for obtaining detailed information about lattice vibrations. In this chapter we shall describe briefly the standard treatment of the lattice dynamics of crystals. There follows a section on the theory of the scattering of X-rays by lattice vibrations, and a similar section on the scattering of thermal neutrons. We then refer briefly to experimental work with X-rays and neutrons. The final section is concerned with the measurement of elastic constants: these constants are required in calculating the TDS correction to measured Bragg intensities (see Section 7.4.2 of IT C, 1999). 4.1.2. Dynamics of three-dimensional crystals For modes of vibration of very long wavelength, the crystal can be treated as a homogeneous elastic continuum without referring to its crystal or molecular structure. The theory of the propagation of these elastic waves is based on Hooke’s law of force and on Newton’s equations of motion. As the wavelength of the vibrations becomes shorter and shorter and approaches the separation of adjacent atoms, the calculation of the vibrational properties requires a knowledge of the crystal structure and of the nature of the forces between adjacent atoms. The three-dimensional treatment is based on the formulation of Born and von Ka´rmań, which is discussed in detail in the book by Born & Huang (1954) and in more elementary terms in the books by Cochran (1973) and by Willis & Pryor (1975). Before setting up the equations of motion, it is necessary to introduce three approximations: (i) The harmonic approximation. When an atom is displaced from its equilibrium position, the restoring force is assumed to be proportional to the displacement, measured relative to the neighbouring atoms. The approximation implies no thermal expansion and other properties not possessed by real crystals; it is a reasonable assumption in the lattice-dynamical theory provided the displacements are not too large. (ii) The adiabatic approximation. We wish to set up a potential function for the crystal describing the binding between the atoms. However, the binding involves electronic motions whereas the dynamics involve nuclear motions. The adiabatic approximation, known as the Born–Oppenheimer approximation in the context of molecular vibrations, provides the justification for adopting the same potential function to describe both the binding and the dynamics. Its essence is that the electronic and nuclear motions may be considered separately. This is possible if the nuclei move very slowly compared with the electrons: the electrons can then instantaneously take up a configuration appropriate to that of the displaced nuclei without changing their quantum state. The approximation holds well for insulators, where electronic transition energies are high owing to the large energy gap between filled and unfilled electron states. Surprisingly, it even works for metals, because (on account of the Pauli principle) only a few electrons near the Fermi level can make transitions. (iii) Periodic boundary conditions. These are introduced to avoid problems associated with the free surface. The system is treated as an infinite crystal made up of contiguous, repeating blocks of the actual crystal. The periodic (or cyclic) boundary conditions require that the displacements of corresponding atoms in different blocks are identical. The validity of the conditions was challenged by


4.1. THERMAL DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS Raman (1941), but these objections were safely disposed of by Ledermann (1944). 4.1.2.1. Equations of motion As a result of thermal fluctuations, the atoms vibrate about their equilibrium positions, so that the actual position of the th atom in the lth primitive cell is given by Rl rl ul with r representing the equilibrium position and u the thermal displacement. (In lattice-dynamical theory it is advantageous to deal with the primitive cell, as it possesses the fewest degrees of freedom.) The kinetic energy of the vibrating crystal is P 1=2 mu_ 2 l, l

where m is the mass of atom and the index ( = 1, 2, 3) refers to the Cartesian components of the displacement. (The dot denotes the time derivative.) If the adiabatic approximation is invoked, the potential energy V of the crystal can be expressed as a function of the instantaneous atomic positions. Expanding V in powers of ul, using the threedimensional form of Taylor’s series, we have V V 0 V 1 V 2 V 3 . . . , where V 0 is the static (equilibrium) potential and V 1 , V 2 are given by X @V u l V 1 @u l 0 l 1X X @2V 2 u lu0 0 l0 : V 2 l 0 l0 0 @u l@u0 0 l0 0 The subscript zero indicates that the derivatives are to be evaluated at the equilibrium configuration. In the harmonic approximation, V 3 and all higher terms in the expansion are neglected. At equilibrium the forces on an atom must vanish, so that V 1 0: Ignoring the static potential V 0 , the quadratic term V 2 only remains and the Hamiltonian for the crystal (the sum of the kinetic and potential energies) is then 1X H mu_ 2 l 2 l 0 1X X u lu0 0 l0 , 0 2 l 0 l0 0 l l0 4:1:2:1 where 0 is an element of the 3 3 ‘atomic force-constant matrix’ and is defined (for distinct atoms l, 0 l0 ) by @2V 0 : 0 0 0 l l0 0 @u l@u l

0

It is the negative of the force in the direction imposed on the atom l when atom 0 l0 is displaced unit distance along 0 with all the remaining atoms fixed at their equilibrium sites. 0 is defined differently for the self-term with 0 and l l0 : XX 0 0 : 0 l l l l0 0 0 l l l60 l0

Thus the self-matrix describes the force on l when the atom itself is displaced with all the remaining atoms kept stationary. There are restrictions on the number of distinct force constants 0 : these are imposed by symmetry and by the requirement that the potential energy is invariant under infinitesimal translations and rotations of the rigid crystal. Such constraints are discussed in the book by Venkataraman et al. (1975). Applying Hamilton’s equations of motion to equation (4.1.2.1) now gives X 0 0 0 mu l 0 4:1:2:2 0 u0 l : l l 0 0 0 l These represent 3nN coupled differential equations, where n is the number of atoms per primitive cell 1, . . . , n and N is the number of cells per crystal l 1, . . . , N. By applying the periodic boundary conditions, the solutions of equation (4.1.2.2) can be expressed as running, or travelling, plane waves extending throughout the entire crystal. The number of independent waves (or normal modes) is 3nN. Effectively, we have transferred to a new coordinate system: instead of specifying the motion of the individual atoms, we describe the thermal motion in terms of normal modes, each of which contributes to the displacement of each atom. The general solution for the component of the displacement of l is then given by the superposition of the displacements from all modes: P u l m 1=2 jAj qje jjq jq

expfiq rl

!j qtg:

4:1:2:3

Here q is the wavevector of a mode (specifying both its wavelength and direction of propagation in the crystal) and !q its frequency. There are N distinct wavevectors, occupying a uniformly distributed mesh of N points in the Brillouin zone (reciprocal cell); each wavevector is shared by 3n modes which possess, in general, different frequencies and polarization properties. Thus an individual mode is conveniently labelled (jq), where j is an index (j 1, . . . , 3n) indicating the branch. The scalar quantity jAj qj in equation (4.1.2.3) is the amplitude of excitation of (jq) and e jjq is the element of the eigenvector ejq referring to the displacement in the direction of the atom . The eigenvector itself, with dimensions n 1, determines the pattern of atomic displacements in the mode (jq) and its magnitude is fixed by the orthonormality and closure conditions P e jjqe jj0 q jj0

and

P j

e jjqe0 0 jjq 0 0

with indicating complex conjugate and the Kronecker delta. The pre-exponential, or amplitude, terms in (4.1.2.3) are independent of the cell number. This follows from Bloch’s (1928) theorem which states that, for corresponding atoms in different cells, the motions are identical as regards their amplitude and direction and differ only in phase. The theorem introduces an enormous simplification as it allows us to restrict attention to the 3n equations of motion of the n atoms in just one cell, rather than the 3nN equations of motion for all the atoms in the crystal. Substitution of (4.1.2.3) into (4.1.2.2) gives the equations of motion in the form P !2j qe jjq D0 0 jqe0 0 jjq, 4:1:2:4 0 0

in which D0 is an element of the dynamical matrix D(q). D0 is

401

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS defined by

4.1.2.3. Einstein and Debye models

D0 0 jq mm0 1=2 expfiqr0 rg X 0 0 expiq rL, 0 L

In the Einstein model it is assumed that each atom vibrates in its private potential well, entirely unaffected by the motion of its neighbours. There is no correlation between the motion of different atoms, whereas correlated motion – in the form of collective modes propagating throughout the crystal – is a central feature in explaining the characteristics of the TDS. Nevertheless, the Einstein model is occasionally used to represent modes belonging to flat optic branches of the dispersion relations, with the frequency written symbolically as !q !E (constant). In the Debye model the optic branches are ignored. The dispersion relations for the remaining three acoustic branches are assumed to be the same and represented by

4:1:2:5

where r is the position of atom with respect to the cell origin, L is l0 l and rL is the separation between cells l and l0 . The element D0 is obtained by writing down the 0 component of the force constant between atoms , 0 which are L cells apart and multiplying by the phase factor expiq rL; this term is then summed over those values of L covering the range of interaction of and 0 . The dynamical matrix is Hermitian and has dimensions 3n 3n. Its eigenvalues are the squared frequencies !2j q of the normal modes and its eigenvectors ejq determine the corresponding pattern of atomic displacements. The frequencies of the modes in three of the branches, j, go to zero as q approaches zero: these are the acoustic modes. The remaining 3n 3 branches contain the optic modes. There are N distinct q vectors, and so, in all, there are 3N acoustic modes and 3n 3N optic modes. Thus copper has acoustic modes but no optic modes, silicon and rock salt have an equal number of both, and lysozyme possesses predominantly optic modes.

which is the same as (4.1.2.9) at q = 0 but gives a sinusoidal dispersion relation with zero slope at the zone boundary.

4.1.2.2. Quantization of normal modes. Phonons

4.1.2.4. Molecular crystals

Quantum concepts are not required in solving the equations of motion (4.1.2.4) to determine the frequencies and displacement patterns of the normal modes. The only place where quantum mechanics is necessary is in calculating the energy of the mode, and from this the amplitude of vibration jAj qj. It is possible to discuss the theory of lattice dynamics from the beginning in the language of quantum mechanics (Donovan & Angress, 1971). Instead of treating the modes as running waves, they are conceived as an assemblage of indistinguishable quasiparticles called phonons. Phonons obey Bose–Einstein statistics and are not limited in number. The number of phonons, each with energy h!j q in the vibrational state specified by q and j, is given by

The full Born–von Ka´rmań treatment becomes excessively cumbersome when applied to most molecular crystals. For example, for naphthalene with two molecules or 36 atoms in the primitive cell, the dynamical matrix has dimensions 108 108. Moreover, the physical picture of molecules or of groups of atoms, vibrating in certain modes as quasi-rigid units, is lost in the full treatment. To simplify the setting up of the dynamical matrix, it is assumed that the molecules vibrate as rigid units in the crystal with each molecule possessing three translational and three rotational (librational) degrees of freedom. The motion of these rigid groups as a whole is described by the external modes of motion, whereas the internal modes arise from distortions within an individual group. The frequencies of these internal modes, which are largely determined by the strong intramolecular forces, are unaffected by the phase of the oscillation between neighbouring cells: the modes are taken, therefore, to be equivalent to those of the free molecule. The remaining external modes are calculated by applying the Born– von Ka´rmań procedure to the crystal treated as an assembly of rigid molecules. The dynamical matrix D(q) now has dimensions 6n0 6n0 , where n0 is the number of molecules in the primitive cell: for naphthalene, D is reduced to 12 12. The elements of D can be expressed in the same form as equation (4.1.2.5) for an atomic system. , 0 refer to molecules which are L cells apart and the indices , 0 ( 1, . . . , 6) label the six components of translation and rotation. m in equation (4.1.2.5) is replaced by m where m represents the 3 3 molecular-mass matrix for 1, 2, 3 and the 3 3 moment-ofinertia matrix referred to the principal axes of inertia for 4, 5, 6. The 6 6 force-torque constant matrices 0 are derived by taking the second derivative of the potential energy of the crystal with respect to the coordinates of translation and rotation.

nj q fexph!j q=kB T

1g

1

4:1:2:6

and the mode energy Ej q by Ej q h!j qnj q 1=2:

4:1:2:7

Thus the quantum number nj q describes the degree of excitation of the mode ( jq). The relation between Ej q and the amplitude jAj qj is Ej q N!2j qjAj qj2 :

4:1:2:8

Equations (4.1.2.6) to (4.1.2.8) together determine the value of jAj qj to be substituted into equation (4.1.2.3) to give the atomic displacement in terms of the absolute temperature and the properties of the normal modes. In solving the lattice-dynamical problem using the Born–von Ka´rmań analysis, the first step is to set up a force-constant matrix describing the interactions between all pairs of atoms. This is followed by the assembly of the dynamical matrix D, whose eigenvalues give the frequencies of the normal modes and whose eigenvectors determine the patterns of atomic displacement for each mode. Before considering the extension of this treatment to molecular crystals, we shall comment briefly on the less rigorous treatments of Einstein and Debye.

!q vs q,

4:1:2:9

where vs is a mean sound velocity. The Brillouin zone is replaced by a sphere with radius qD chosen to ensure the correct number of modes. The linear relationship (4.1.2.9) holds right up to the boundary of the spherical zone. In an improved version of the Debye model, (4.1.2.9) is replaced by the expression !q vs 2qD = sinq=2qD ,

4:1:2:10

4.1.3. Scattering of X-rays by thermal vibrations The change of frequency, or energy, of X-rays on being scattered by thermal waves is extremely small. The differential scattering cross section, d=d , giving the probability that X-rays are scattered into the solid angle d is then

402

4.1. THERMAL DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS d hjY Qj2 i, d

The one-phonon cross section is 1 d 23 X jGj Q, qj2 Ej q v jq d

!2j q X Q q Qh ,

where Y Q

P l

f Q expfiQ rl ulg:

4:1:3:1

The angled brackets indicate an average value over a period of time much longer than the period of oscillation of an atom. Q is the ‘scattering vector’ defined by Qk

k0 ,

where k and k0 are the wavevectors (each of magnitude 2=) of the scattered and incident beams, respectively. The magnitude of Q is 4sin =, where 2 is the angle between k and k0. f Q is the scattering factor of the th atom in the unit cell. The cross section d=d can be expanded as a power series: 0 1 2 d d d d ...: 4:1:3:2 d

d

d

d

The individual terms on the right-hand side refer to the cross sections for zero-order, first-order, second-order scattering . . ., i.e. for processes involving no exchange of energy between the incident radiation and the crystal (Bragg scattering), the exchange of one quantum of lattice vibrational energy (one-phonon scattering), the exchange of two quanta (two-phonon scattering) . . .. The instantaneous thermal displacement ul of the atom l can be expressed, using equations (4.1.2.3), (4.1.2.6), (4.1.2.7) and (4.1.2.8), as a superposition of the displacements of the 3nN (1023) independent normal modes of vibration: ul Nm

1=2

X Ej jq

expfiq rl

1=2

q

!2j q

ejjq

!j qtg:

4:1:3:3

Explicit expressions can now be given for the partial cross sections in equation (4.1.3.2). The cross section for Bragg scattering is 0 d 23 X NjFQj2 Q Qh , 4:1:3:4 v h d

where Gj Q, q is the ‘structure factor for one-phonon scattering’ by the mode ( jq) and is given by X Q ejjq f Q Gj Q, q 1=2 m expiQ r exp W : The delta function in equation (4.1.3.6) implies that Q Qh q,

Q Qh q1 q2 :

Q Qh ,

where the exponent W of the temperature factor of the atom is calculated by summing over the normal modes: Ej q 1 X jQh ejjqj2 2 : 2Nm jq !j q

4:1:3:5

The last equation shows that the acoustic modes, with frequencies approaching zero as q ! 0, make the largest contribution to the temperature factor.

4:1:3:8

The intensity at any point in reciprocal space is now contributed by a very large number of pairs of elastic waves with wavevectors satisfying equation (4.1.3.8). These vectors span the entire Brillouin zone, and so the variation of the two-phonon intensity with location in reciprocal space is less pronounced than for one-phonon scattering. Expressions for d=d 2 and for higher terms in equation (4.1.3.2) will not be given, but a rough estimate of their relative magnitudes can be derived by using the Einstein model of the crystal. All frequencies are the same, !j q !E , and for one atom per cell (n 1) the exponent of the temperature factor, equation (4.1.3.5), becomes W

where Qh is a reciprocal-lattice vector, so that scattering is restricted to the points h of the reciprocal lattice. The structure factor F(Q) is P FQ f Q expiQ r exp W ,

4:1:3:7

so that the scattering from the 3n modes with the same wavevector q is restricted to pairs of points in reciprocal space which are displaced by q from the reciprocal-lattice points. (These satellite reflections are analogous to the pairs of ‘ghosts’ near the principal diffraction maxima in a grating ruled with a periodic error.) There is a huge number, N, of q vectors which are uniformly distributed throughout the Brillouin zone, and each of these vectors gives a cross section in accordance with equation (4.1.3.6). Thus the onephonon TDS is spread throughout the whole of reciprocal space, rising to a maximum at the reciprocal-lattice points where ! ! 0 for the acoustic modes. For two-phonon scattering, involving modes with wavevectors q1 and q2, the scattering condition becomes

where v is the cell volume. The delta function requires that

W

4:1:3:6

h

Q2 k B T , 2m!2E

4:1:3:9

assuming classical equipartition of energy between modes: Ej q kB T. The cross sections for zero-order, first-order, second-order . . . scattering are then 0 d Nf 2 exp 2W d

1 d Nf 2 exp 2W 2W d

2 d 1 Nf 2 exp 2W 2W 2 d

2 .. . and the total cross section is

403

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS The partial differential scattering cross section d2 =d d! gives d Nf 2 exp 2W 1 2W the probability that neutrons will be scattered into a small solid d

angle d about the direction k with a change of energy between h! 1 1 2 3 and h! d!. This cross section can be split into two terms, 2W 2W . . . : 2 6 known as the coherent and incoherent cross sections: 2 2 d2 d d The expression in curly brackets is the expansion of exp2W . The : nth term in the expansion, associated with the nth-order (n-phonon) d

d! d

d! d

d! incoh coh process, is proportional to W n or to Q2n T n . The higher-order processes are more important, therefore, at higher values of The coherent cross section depends on the correlation between the sin = and at higher temperatures. positions of all the atoms at different times, and so gives Our treatment so far applies to the TDS from single crystals. It interference effects. The incoherent cross section depends only on can be extended to cover the TDS from polycrystalline samples, but the correlation between the positions of the same atom at different the calculations are more complicated as the first-order scattering at times, giving no interference effects. Incoherent inelastic scattering a fixed value of sin = is contributed by phonon wavevectors is the basis of a powerful technique for studying the dynamics of extending over the whole of the Brillouin zone. For a fuller molecular crystals containing hydrogen (Boutin & Yip, 1968). discussion of the TDS from powders see Section 7.4.2 in IT C The coherent scattering cross section d2 =d d!coh can be (1999). expanded, as in the X-ray case [equation (4.1.3.2)], into terms representing the contributions from zero-phonon, one-phonon, twophonon . . . scattering. To determine phonon dispersion relations, 4.1.4. Scattering of neutrons by thermal vibrations we measure the one-phonon contribution and this arises from both The amplitude of the X-ray beam scattered by a single atom is phonon emission and phonon absorption: 2 1 2 1 2 1 denoted by the form factor or atomic scattering factor f(Q). The d d d corresponding quantity in neutron scattering is the scattering : d d! coh d d! coh1 d d! coh 1 amplitude or scattering length b of an atom. b is independent of scattering angle and is also independent of neutron wavelength The superscript (1) denotes a one-phonon process, and the subscript apart from for a few isotopes (e.g. 113Cd, 149Sm) with resonances in +1 ( 1) indicates emission (absorption). the thermal neutron region. The emission cross section is given by (Squires, 1978) The scattering amplitude for atoms of the same chemical element 2 1 can vary randomly from one atom to the next, as different d hk 43 X X nj q 1 amplitudes are associated with different isotopes. If the nucleus !j q d d! coh1 k0 v jq Q has a nonzero spin, even a single isotope has two different h amplitudes, dependent on whether the nuclear spin is parallel or b antiparallel to the spin of the incident neutron. If there is a variation expiQ r m1=2 in the amplitude associated with a particular type of atom, some of 2 the waves scattered by the atom will interfere with one another and some will not. The first part is called coherent scattering and the Q ejjq exp W second incoherent scattering. The amplitude of the coherent scattering is determined by the mean atomic scattering amplitude, ! !j qQ Qh q, averaged over the various isotopes and spin states of the atom, and 4:1:4:2 is known as the coherent scattering length, b. A crucial difference between neutrons and X-rays concerns their whereas for phonon absorption energies: 2 1 d hk 43 X X nj q E h2 k 2 =2mn neutrons d d! coh 1 k0 v jq Q !j q (X-rays), chk h b where mn is the neutron mass and c the velocity of light. At 1 A˚, expiQ r neutrons have an energy of 0.08 eV or a temperature of about m1=2 2 800 K; for X-rays of this wavelength the corresponding temperature exceeds 108 K! Thermal neutrons have energies comparable with Q ejjq exp W phonon energies, and so inelastic scattering processes, involving the exchange of energy between neutrons and phonons, produce ! !j qQ Qh q: appreciable changes in neutron energy. (These changes are readily 4:1:4:3 determined from the change in wavelength or velocity of the scattered neutrons.) It is customary to refer to the thermal diffuse scattering of neutrons as ‘inelastic neutron scattering’ to draw The first delta function in these two expressions embodies energy conservation, attention to this energy change. For a scattering process in which energy is exchanged with just h2 2 k k 2 "h!j q, h! one phonon, energy conservation gives 2mn 0 E0 E "h!j q, 4:1:4:1 and the second embodies conservation of momentum, where E0 and E are the energies of the neutron before and after Q k k0 Qh "q: 4:1:4:4 scattering. If " 1 the neutron loses energy by creating a phonon The phonon population number, nj q, tends to zero as T ! 0 (‘phonon emission’), and if " 1 it gains energy by annihilating a [see equation (4.1.2.6)], so that the one-phonon absorption cross phonon (‘phonon absorption’).

404

4.1. THERMAL DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS section is very small at low temperatures where there are few phonons for the radiation to absorb. Comparison of equations (4.1.4.2) and (4.1.4.3) shows that there is always a greater probability that the neutrons are scattered with energy loss rather than with energy gain. Normally it is not possible in X-ray experiments to distinguish between phonon emission and phonon absorption, and the measured cross section is obtained by summing over all energy transfers. The cross section for X-rays can be derived from the neutron formulae, equations (4.1.4.2) and (4.1.4.3), by putting k k0 and by replacing b with f Q. Integration over ! and addition of the parts for emission and absorption gives the X-ray formula (4.1.3.6). The theory of neutron scattering can also be formulated in terms of thermal averages known as Van Hove correlation functions (Van Hove, 1954). For example, the partial differential cross section for coherent scattering is 2 d k SQ, !, d d! coh k0 where SQ, !

1 2h

Z Gr, t expiQ r

!t dr dt:

SQ, ! is the Fourier transform in space and time of Gr, t, the time-dependent pair-correlation function. The classical interpretation of Gr, t is that it is the probability of finding any atom at time t in a volume dr d3 r, if there is an atom at the origin at time zero. 4.1.5. Phonon dispersion relations Both X-rays and neutrons are used for determining crystal structures, but the X-ray method plays the dominant role. The reverse is true for the measurement of phonon dispersion relations: the experimental determination of !q versus q was first undertaken with X-rays, but the method has been superseded by the technique of coherent inelastic neutron scattering (or neutron spectroscopy). For phonon wavevectors lying anywhere within the first Brillouin zone, it is necessary to employ radiation of wavelength comparable with interatomic distances and of energy comparable with lattice vibrational energies. X-rays satisfy the first of these conditions, but not the second, whereas the opposite holds for infrared radiation. Thermal neutrons satisfy both conditions simultaneously. 4.1.5.1. Measurement with X-rays Frequencies can be derived indirectly with X-rays from the intensity of the thermal diffuse scattering. For a monatomic crystal with one atom per primitive cell, there are no optic modes and the one-phonon TDS intensity, equation (4.1.3.6), reduces to d Q2 f 2 e d

2W

3 X Ej q j1

!2 q

cos2 j qQ q

Qh ,

4:1:5:1

where j q is the angle between Q and the direction of polarization of the mode ( jq). There are three acoustic modes associated with each wavevector q, but along certain directions of Q it is possible to isolate the intensities contributed by the individual modes by choosing j q to be close to 0 or 90°. Equation (4.1.5.1) can then be employed to derive the frequency !j q for just one mode. The measured intensity must be corrected for multi-phonon and Compton scattering, both of which can exceed the intensity of the one-phonon scattering. The correction for two-phonon scattering involves an integration over the entire Brillouin zone, and this in turn requires an approximate knowledge of the dispersion relations.

The correction for Compton scattering can be made by repeating the measurements at low temperature. The X-ray method is hardly feasible for systems with several atoms in the primitive cell. It comes into its own for those few materials which cannot be examined by neutrons. These include boron, cadmium and samarium with high absorption cross sections for thermal neutrons, and vanadium with a very small coherent (and a large incoherent) cross section for the scattering of neutrons. An important feature of TDS measurements with X-rays is in providing an independent check on interatomic or intermolecular force constants derived from measurements with inelastic neutron scattering. The force model is used to generate phonon frequencies and eigenvectors, which are then employed to compute the onephonon and multi-phonon contributions to the X-ray TDS. Any discrepancy between calculated and observed X-ray intensities might be ascribed to such features as ionic deformation (Buyers et al., 1968) or anharmonicity (Schuster & Weymouth, 1971). 4.1.5.2. Measurement with neutrons The inelastic scattering of neutrons by phonons gives rise to changes of energy which are readily measured and converted to frequencies !j q using equation (4.1.4.1). The corresponding wavevector q is derived from the momentum conservation relation (4.1.4.4). Nearly all phonon dispersion relations determined to date have been obtained in this way. Well over 200 materials have been examined, including half the chemical elements, a large number of alloys and diatomic compounds, and rather fewer molecular crystals (Dolling, 1974; Bilz & Kress, 1979). Phonon dispersion curves have been determined in crystals with up to ten atoms in the primitive cell, for example, tetracyanoethylene (Chaplot et al., 1983). The principal instrument for determining phonon dispersion relations with neutrons is the triple-axis spectrometer, first designed and built by Brockhouse (Brockhouse & Stewart, 1958). The modern instrument is unchanged apart from running continuously under computer control. A beam of thermal neutrons falls on a single-crystal monochromator, which Bragg reflects a single wavelength on to the sample in a known orientation. The magnitude of the scattered wavevector, and hence the change of energy on scattering by the sample, is found by measuring the Bragg angle at which the neutrons are reflected by the crystal analyser. The direction of k is defined by a collimator between the sample and analyser. In the ‘constant Q’ mode of operating the triple-axis spectrometer, the phonon wavevector is kept fixed while the energy transfer h! is varied. This allows the frequency spectrum to be determined for all phonons sharing the same q; the spectrum will contain up to 3n frequencies, corresponding to the 3n branches of the dispersion relations. In an inelastic neutron scattering experiment, where the TDS intensity is of the order of one-thousandth of the Bragg intensity, it is necessary to use a large sample with a volume of 1 cm3, or more. The sample should have a high cross section for coherent scattering as compared with the cross sections for incoherent scattering and for true absorption. Crystals containing hydrogen should be deuterated. Dolling (1974) has given a comprehensive review of the measurement of phonon dispersion relations by neutron spectroscopy. 4.1.5.3. Interpretation of dispersion relations The usual procedure for analysing dispersion relations is to set up the Born–von Ka´rmań formalism with interatomic force constants . The calculated frequencies !j q are then derived from the eigenvalues of the dynamical matrix D (Section 4.1.2.1) and the force constants fitted, by least squares, to the observed frequencies. Several sets of force constants may describe the frequencies equally

405

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS well, and to decide which set is preferable it is necessary to compare eigenvectors as well as eigenvalues (Cochran, 1971). The main interest in the curves is in testing different models of interatomic potentials, whose derivatives are related to the measured force constants. For the solid inert gases the curves are reproduced reasonably well using a two-parameter Lennard–Jones 6–12 potential, although calculated frequencies are systematically higher than the experimental points near the Brillouin-zone boundary (Fujii et al., 1974). To reproduce the dispersion relations in metals it is necessary to use a large number of interatomic force constants, extending to at least fifth neighbours. The number of independent constants is then too large for a meaningful analysis with the Born–von Ka´rmań theory, but in the pseudo-potential approximation (Harrison, 1966) only two parameters are required to give good agreement between calculated and observed frequencies of simple metals such as aluminium. In the rigid-ion model for ionic crystals, the ions are treated as point charges centred on the nuclei and polarization of the outermost electrons is ignored. This is unsatisfactory at high frequencies. In the shell model, polarization is accounted for by representing the ion as a rigid core connected by a flexible spring to a polarizable shell of outermost electrons. There are many variants of this model – extended shell, overlap shell, deformation dipole, breathing shell . . . (Bilz & Kress, 1979). For molecular crystals the contributions to the force constants from the intermolecular forces can be derived from the non-bonded atomic pair potential of, say, the 6-exponential type: Aij 'r Bij exp Cij r: r6 Here, i, j label atoms in different molecules. The values of the parameters A, B, C depend on the pair of atomic species i, j only. For hydrocarbons they have been tabulated for different atom pairs by Kitaigorodskii (1966) and Williams (1967). The 6-exponential potential is applicable to molecular crystals that are stabilized mainly by London–van der Waals interactions; it is likely to fail when hydrogen bonds are present. 4.1.6. Measurement of elastic constants There is a close connection between the theory of lattice dynamics and the theory of elasticity. Acoustic modes of vibration of long wavelength propagate as elastic waves in a continuous medium, with all the atoms in one unit cell moving in phase with one another. These vibrations are sound waves with velocities which can be calculated from the macroscopic elastic constants and from the density. The sound velocities are also given by the slopes, at q 0, of the acoustic branches of the phonon dispersion relations. A knowledge of the velocities, or of the elastic constants, is necessary in estimating the TDS contribution to measured Bragg intensities. The elastic constants relate the nine components of stress and nine components of strain, making 81 constants in all. This large

number is reduced to 36, because there are only six independent components of stress and six independent components of strain. An economy of notation is now possible, replacing the indices 11 by 1, 22 by 2, 33 by 3, 23 by 4, 31 by 5 and 12 by 6, so that the elastic constants are represented by cij with i, j 1, . . . , 6. Applying the principle of conservation of energy gives cij cji and the number of constants is reduced further to 21. Crystal symmetry effects yet a further reduction. For cubic crystals there are just three independent constants (c11 , c12 , c44 ) and the 6 6 matrix of elastic constants is 0 1 c11 c12 c12 0 0 0 B c12 c11 c12 0 0 0 C B C B c12 c12 c11 0 0 0 C B C: B 0 0 C 0 0 c44 0 B C @ 0 0 0 0 c44 0 A 0 0 0 0 0 c44 In principle, the elastic constants can be derived from static measurements of the four quantities – compressibility, Poisson’s ratio, Young’s modulus and rigidity modulus. The measurements are made along different directions in the crystal: at least six directions are needed for the orthorhombic system. The accuracy of the static method is limited by the difficulty of measuring small strains. Dynamic methods are more accurate as they depend on measuring a frequency or velocity. For a cubic crystal, the three elastic constants can be derived from the three sound velocities propagating along the single direction [110]; for non-cubic crystals the velocities must be measured along a number of non-equivalent directions. Sound velocities can be determined in a number of ways. In the ultrasonic pulse technique, a quartz transducer sends a pulse through the crystal; the pulse is reflected from the rear surface back to the transducer, and the elapsed time for the round trip of several cm is measured. Brillouin scattering of laser light is also used (Vacher & Boyer, 1972). Fluctuations in dielectric constant caused by (thermally excited) sound waves give rise to a Doppler shift of the light frequency. The sound velocity is readily calculated from this shift, and the elastic constants are then obtained from the velocities along several directions, using the Christoffel relations (Hearmon, 1956). The Brillouin method is restricted to transparent materials. This restriction does not apply to neutron diffraction methods, which employ the inelastic scattering of neutrons (Willis, 1986; Schofield & Willis, 1987; Popa & Willis, 1994). Tables of elastic constants of cubic and non-cubic crystals have been compiled by Hearmon (1946, 1956) and by Huntingdon (1958).

406


4.2. Disorder diffuse scattering of X-rays and neutrons BY H. JAGODZINSKI 4.2.1. Scope of this chapter Diffuse scattering of X-rays, neutrons and other particles is an accompanying effect in all diffraction experiments aimed at structure analysis with the aid of so-called elastic scattering. In this case the momentum exchange of the scattered photon (or particle) includes the crystal as a whole; the energy transfer involved becomes negligibly small and need not be considered in diffraction theory. Inelastic scattering processes, however, are due to excitation processes, such as ionization, phonon scattering etc. Distortions as a consequence of structural changes cause typical elastic or inelastic diffuse scattering. All these processes contribute to scattering, and a general theory has to include all of them. Hence, the exact treatment of diffuse scattering becomes very complex. Fortunately, approximations treating the phenomena independently are possible in most cases, but it should be kept in mind that difficulties may occasionally arise. A separation of elastic from inelastic diffuse scattering may be made if detectors sensitive to the energy of radiation are used. Difficulties may sometimes result from small energy exchanges, which cannot be resolved for experimental reasons. The latter is true for scattering of X-rays by phonons which have energies of the order of 10 2 10 3 eV, a value which is considerably smaller than 10 keV, a typical value for X-ray quanta. Another equivalent explanation, frequently forwarded in the literature, is the high speed of X-ray photons, such that the rather slow motion of atoms cannot be ‘observed’ by them during diffraction. Hence, all movements appear as static displacement waves of atoms, and temperature diffuse scattering is pseudo-elastic for X-rays. This is not true in the case of thermal neutrons, which have energies comparable to those of phonons. Since thermal diffuse scattering is discussed in Chapter 4.1, this chapter is mainly concerned with the elastic (or pseudoelastic other than thermal) part of diffuse scattering. The full treatment of the complicated theoretical background for all other kinds of diffuse scattering lies beyond the scope of this article. It is also impossible to refer to all papers in this wide and complicated field. Different theoretical treatments of one and the same subject are often developed, but only some are given here, in most cases those which may be understood most easily – at least to the authors’ feeling. As shown in this chapter, electron-density fluctuations and distribution functions of defects play an important role for the complete interpretation of diffraction patterns. Both quantities may best be studied in the low-angle scattering range, which occasionally represents the only Bragg peak dealing with the full information of the distribution function of the defects. Hence, many problems cannot be solved without a detailed interpretation of low-angle diffraction. Disorder phenomena in magnetic structures are not specifically discussed here. Magnetic diffuse neutron scattering and special experimental techniques themselves constitute a large subject. Many aspects, however, may be analysed along similar lines as given here. For this particular topic the reader is referred to textbooks of neutron scattering, where the theory of diffraction by magnetic materials is generally included (see, e.g., Lovesey, 1984). Glasses, liquids or liquid crystals show typical diffuse diffraction phenomena. Particle-size effects and strains have an important influence on the diffuse scattering. The same is true for dislocations and point defects such as interstitials or vacancies. These defects are mainly described by their strain field which influences the intensities of sharp reflections like an artificial temperature factor: the Bragg peaks diminish in intensity, while the diffuse scattering increases predominantly close to them. These phenomena are less important from a structural point of view, at least in the case of

F. FREY

metals or other simple structures. This statement is true as long as the structure of the ‘kernel’ of defects may be neglected when compared with the influence of the strain field. Whether dislocations in more complicated structures meet this condition is not yet known. Radiation damage in crystals represents another field of diffuse scattering which cannot be treated here explicitly. As long as point defects only are generated, the strain field around these defects is the most important factor governing diffuse scattering. Particles with high energy, such as fast neutrons, protons and others, generate complicated defect structures which have to be treated with the aid of the cluster method described below, but no special reference is given here because of the complexity of these phenomena. Diffuse scattering related to phase transitions, in particular the critical diffuse scattering observed at or close to the transition temperature, cannot be discussed here. In simple cases a satisfactory description may be given with the aid of a ‘soft phonon’, which freezes at the critical temperature, thus generating typical temperature-dependent diffuse scattering. If the geometry of the lattice is maintained during the transformation (no breakdown into crystallites of different cell geometry), the diffuse scattering is very similar to diffraction phenomena described in this article. Sometimes, however, very complicated interim stages (ordered or disordered) are observed demanding a complicated theory for their full explanation (see, e.g., Dorner & Comes, 1977). Commensurate and incommensurate modulated structures as well as quasicrystals are frequently accompanied by a typical diffuse scattering, demanding an extensive experimental and theoretical study in order to arrive at a satisfactory explanation. A reliable structure determination becomes very difficult in cases where the interpretation of diffuse scattering has not been incorporated. Many erroneous structural conclusions have been published in the past. The solution of problems of this kind needs careful thermodynamical consideration as to whether a plausible explanation of the structural data can be given. Obviously, there is a close relationship between thermodynamics and diffuse scattering in disordered systems, representing a stable or metastable thermal equilibrium. From the thermodynamical point of view the system is then characterized by its grand partition function, which is intimately related to the correlation functions used in the interpretation of diffuse scattering. The latter is nothing other than a kind of ‘partial partition function’ where two atoms, or two cell occupations, are fixed such that the sum of all partial partition functions represents the grand partition function. This fact yields the useful correlation between thermodynamics and diffuse scattering mentioned above, which may well be used for a determination of thermodynamical properties of the crystal. This subject could not be included here for the following reason: real three-dimensional crystals generally exhibit diffuse scattering by defects and/or disordering effects which are not in thermal equilibrium. They are created during crystal growth, or are frozen-in defects formed at higher temperatures. Hence, a thermodynamical interpretation of diffraction data needs a careful study of diffuse scattering as a function of temperature or some other thermodynamical parameters. This can be done in very rare cases only, so the omission of this subject seems justified. For all of the reasons mentioned above, this article cannot be complete. It is hoped, however, that it will provide a useful guide for those who need the information for the full understanding of the crystal chemistry of a given structure. There is no comprehensive treatment of all aspects of diffuse scattering. Essential parts are treated in the textbooks of James (1954), Wilson (1962), Wooster (1962) and Schwartz & Cohen (1977); handbook articles are written by Jagodzinski (1963,


AND

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 1964a,b, 1987), Schulz (1982), Welberry (1985); and a series of interesting papers is collected by Collongues et al. (1977). Many differences are caused by different symbols and by different ‘languages’ used in the various diffraction methods. Quite a few of the new symbols in use are not really necessary, but some are caused by differences in the experimental techniques. For example, the neutron scattering length b may usually be equated with the atomic form factor f in X-ray diffraction. The differential cross section introduced in neutron diffraction represents the intensity scattered into an angular range d and an energy range dE. The famous scattering law in neutron work corresponds to the square of an (extended) structure factor; the ‘static structure factor’, a term used by neutron diffractionists, is nothing other than the conventional Patterson function. The complicated resolution functions in neutron work correspond to the well known Lorentz factors in X-ray diffraction. These have to be derived in order to include all techniques used in diffuse-scattering work.

4.2.2. Summary of basic scattering theory Diffuse scattering results from deviations from the identity of translational invariant scattering objects and from long-range correlations in space and time. Fluctuations of scattering amplitudes and/or phase shifts of the scattered wavetrains reduce the maximum capacity of interference (leading to Bragg reflections) and are responsible for the diffuse scattering, i.e. scattering parts which are not located in reciprocal space in distinct spots. Unfortunately, the terms ‘coherent’ and ‘incoherent’ scattering used in this context are not uniquely defined in the literature. Since all scattering processes are correlated in space and time, there is no incoherent scattering at all in its strict sense. (A similar relationship exists for ‘elastic’ and ‘inelastic’ scattering. Here pure inelastic scattering would take place if the momentum and the energy were transferred to a single scatterer; on the other hand, an elastic scattering process would demand a uniform exchange of momentum and energy with the whole crystal.) Obviously, both cases are idealized and the truth lies somewhere in between. In spite of this, a great many authors use the term ‘incoherent’ systematically for the diffuse scattering away from the Bragg peaks, even if some diffuse maxima or minima, other than those due to structure factors of molecules or atoms, are observed. Although this definition is unequivocal as such, it is physically incorrect. Other authors use the term ‘coherent’ for Bragg scattering only; all diffuse contributions are then called ‘incoherent’. This definition is clear and unique since it considers space and time, but it does not differentiate between incoherent and inelastic. In the case of neutron scattering both terms are essential and cannot be abandoned. In neutron diffraction the term ‘incoherent’ scattering is generally used in cases where no correlation between spin orientations or between isotopes of the same element exists. Hence, another definition of ‘incoherence’ is proposed for scattering processes that are uncorrelated in space and time. In fact there may be correlations between the spins via their magnetic field, but the correlation length in space (and time) may be very small, such that the scattering process appears to be incoherent. Even in these cases the nuclei contribute to coherent (average structure) and incoherent scattering (diffuse background). Hence, the scattering process cannot really be understood by assuming nuclei which scatter independently. For this reason, it seems to be useful to restrict the term ‘incoherent’ to cases where a random contribution to scattering is realized or, in other words, a continuous function exists in reciprocal space. This corresponds to a function in real four-dimensional space. The randomness may be attributed to a nucleus (neutron diffraction) or an atom (molecule). It follows from this definition that the scattering need not be continuous, but

may be modulated by structure factors of molecules. In this sense we shall use the term ‘incoherent’, remembering that it is incorrect from a physical point of view. As mentioned in Chapter 4.1 the theory of thermal neutron scattering must be treated quantum mechanically. (In principle this is true also in the X-ray case.) In the classical limit, however, the final expressions have a simple physical interpretation. Generally, the quantum-mechanical nature of the scattering function of thermal neutrons is negligible at higher temperatures and in those cases where energy or momentum transfers are not too large. In almost all disorder problems this classical interpretation is sufficient for interpretation of diffuse scattering phenomena. This is not quite true in the case of orientational disorder (plastic crystals) where H atoms are involved. The basic formulae given below are valid in either the X-ray or the neutron case: the atomic form factor f replaces the coherent scattering length bcoh (abbreviated to b). The formulation in the frame of the van Hove correlation function G(r, t) (classical interpretation, coherent part) corresponds to a treatment by a fourdimensional Patterson function P(r, t). The basic equations for the differential cross sections are: Z Z d2 coh jkj hbi2 Gr, t N d dh! jk0 j 2h r

t

expf2iH r

tg dr dt Z d inc jkj hb i hbi Gs r, t N d dh! 2h jk0 j 2

2

2Z

r

expf2iH r

4:2:2:1a

t

tg dr dt

4:2:2:1b

(N = number of scattering nuclei of same chemical species; k, k0 wavevectors after/before scattering). The integrations over space may be replaced by summations in disordered crystals except for cases where structural elements exhibit a liquid-like behaviour. Then the van Hove correlation functions are: 1X Gr, t fr rj0 t rj 0g 4:2:2:2a N rj ; r 0 j

1X fr Gs r, t N rj

rj t

rj 0g:

4:2:2:2b

Gr, t gives the probability that if there is an atom j at rj 0 at time zero, there is an arbitrary atom j0 at rj0 t at arbitrary time t, while Gs r, t refers to the same atom j at rj t at time t. Equations (4.2.2.1) may be rewritten by use of the fourdimensional Fourier transforms of G, and Gs , respectively: ZZ 1 Scoh H, ! Gr, t expf2iH r tg dr dt 4:2:2:3a 2 r t ZZ 1 Sinc H, ! Gs r, t expf2iH r tg dr dt4:2:2:3b 2 r t

d2 coh k N hbi2 Scoh H, ! d dh! k0

4:2:2:4a

d2 inc k N hb2 i d dh! k0

4:2:2:4b

hbi2 Sinc H, !:

Incoherent scattering cross sections [(4.2.2.3b), (4.2.2.4b)] refer to one and the same particle (at different times). In particular, plastic crystals (see Section 4.2.4.5) may be studied by means of this

408

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS incoherent scattering. It should be emphasized, however, that for reasons of intensity only disordered crystals with strong incoherent scatterers can be investigated by this technique. In practice, mostly samples with hydrogen atoms were investigated. This topic will not be treated further in this article (see, e.g., Springer, 1972; Lechner & Riekel, 1983). The following considerations are restricted to coherent scattering only. Essentially the same formalism as given by equations (4.2.2.1a)– (4.2.2.4a) may be described by the use of a generalized Patterson function, which is more familiar to crystallographers, R R Pr, t r0 , t0 r0 r, t0 t dr0 dt0 , 4:2:2:5 r0 t0 0

where denotes the time of observation. The only difference between Gr, t and Pr, t is the inclusion of the scattering weight (f or b) in Pr, t. Pr, t is an extension of the usual spatial Patterson function Pr.

the Patterson function for t 0, i.e. the instantaneous structure (‘snapshot’ of the correlation function): a projection in Fourier space along the energy axis gives a section in direct (Patterson) space at t 0. An energy integration is automatically performed in a conventional X-ray diffraction experiment jkj jk0 j. One should keep in mind that in a real experiment there is, of course, an average over both the sample volume and the time of observation. In most practical cases averaging over time is equivalent to averaging over space: the total diffracted intensity may be regarded as the sum of intensities from a large number of independent regions due to the limited coherence of a beam. At any time these regions take all possible configurations. Therefore, this sum of intensities is equivalent to the sum of intensities from any one region at different times: * + PP hItot it fj fj0 expf2iH rj rj0 g j

Pr, t $ 2SH, ! jFH, !j2 RR Pr, t expf2iH r

tg dr dt:

P

4:2:2:6

j; j0

r t

One difficulty arises from neglecting the time of observation. Just as SH jFHj2 is always proportional to the scattering volume V, in the frame of a kinematical theory or within Born’s first approximation [cf. equation (4.2.2.1a)], so SH, ! jFH, !j2 is proportional to volume and observation time. Generally one does not make S proportional to V, but one normalizes S to be independent of as ! 1 : 2S 1=jFj2 . Averaging over time gives therefore + Z Z *Z 1 0 0 0 0 0 SH, ! r , t r r, t t dr 2 r

r0

t

t0

expf2iH r

tg dr dt:

4:2:2:7

Special cases (see, e.g., Cowley, 1981): (1) Pure elastic measurement R R Ie SH, 0 Pr, t dt expf2iH rg dr r

t

2 P fj hexpf2iH rj tgit : j

4:2:2:8

In this type of measurement the time-averaged ‘structure’ is determined: R hr, tit jFH, 0j expf2iH rg dH: H

The projection along the time axis in real (Patterson) space gives a section in Fourier space at ! 0. True elastic measurement is a domain of neutron scattering. For a determination of the timeaveraged structure of a statistically disordered crystal dynamical disorder (phonon scattering) may be separated. For liquids or liquidlike systems this kind of scattering technique is rather ineffective as the time-averaging procedure gives a uniform particle distribution only. (2) Integration over frequency (or energy) R RRR Itot jFH, !j2 d! Pr, t !

! r t

expf2iH r tg dr dt d! R Pr, 0 expf2iH rg dr

4:2:2:9

r

(cf. properties of functions). In such an experiment one determines

j0

t

fj fj0 hexpf2iH rj

rj0 git :

4:2:2:9a

From the basic formulae one also derives the well known results of X-ray or neutron scattering by a periodic arrangement of particles in space [cf. equation (4.1.3.2) of Chapter 4.1]: d 23 X jFHj2 H h N Vc h d

X FH fj H expf Wj g expf2iH rj g:

4:2:2:10 4:2:2:11

j

FH denotes the Fourier transform of one cell (structure factor); the f ’s are assumed to be real. The evaluation of the intensity expressions (4.2.2.6), (4.2.2.8) or (4.2.2.9), (4.2.2.9a) for a disordered crystal must be performed in terms of statistical relationships between scattering factors and/or atomic positions. From these basic concepts the generally adopted method in a disorder problem is to try to separate the scattering intensity into two parts, namely one part hi from an average periodic structure where formulae (4.2.2.10), (4.2.2.11) apply and a second part resulting from fluctuations from this average (see, e.g., Schwartz & Cohen, 1977). One may write formally: hi ,

4:2:2:12a

where hi is defined to be time independent and periodic in space and hi 0. Because cross terms hi vanish by definition, the Patterson function is hri r h ri r hri h ri r r:

4:2:2:12b

Fourier transformation gives I jhFij2 jFj2

4:2:2:13a

2

4:2:2:13b

2

jFj hjFj i

2

jhFij :

Since hi is periodic, the first term in (4.2.2.13) describes Bragg scattering where hFi plays the normal role of a structure factor of one cell of the averaged structure. The second term corresponds to diffuse scattering. In many cases diffuse interferences are centred exactly at the positions of the Bragg reflections. It is then a serious experimental problem to decide whether the observed intensity distribution is Bragg scattering obscured by crystal-size limitations or other scattering phenomena.

409

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS If disordering is time dependent exclusively, hi represents the time average, whereas hFi gives the pure elastic scattering part [cf. equation (4.2.2.8)] and F refers to inelastic scattering only. 4.2.3. General treatment 4.2.3.1. Qualitative interpretation of diffuse scattering Any structure analysis of disordered structures should start with a qualitative interpretation of diffuse scattering. This problem may be facilitated with the aid of Fourier transforms and their algebraic operations (see, e.g., Patterson, 1959). For simplicity the following modified notation is used in this section: functions in real space are represented by small letters, e.g. a(r), b(r), . . . except for F(r) and P(r) which are used as general symbols for a structure and the Patterson function, respectively; functions in reciprocal space are given by capital letters A(H), B(H); r and H are general vectors in real and reciprocal space, respectively, Hz Ky Lz is the scalar product H r; dr and dH indicate integrations in three dimensions in real and reciprocal space, respectively. Even for X-rays the electron density r will generally be replaced by the scattering potential a(r). Consequently, anomalous contributions to scattering may be included if complex functions a(r) are admitted. In the neutron case a(r) refers to a quasi-potential. Using this notation we obtain the scattered amplitude and phase AH exp i' R AH ar expf2iH rg dr 4:2:3:1a r R ar AH expf 2iH rg dH 4:2:3:1b

From equations (4.2.3.1) one has: ar r0 $ AH exp2iH r0 AH H0 $ ar exp 2iH0 r

(law of displacements). Since symmetry operations are well known to crystallographers in reciprocal space also, the law of inversion is mentioned here only: a r $ A H:

a r $ A H a r $ A H:

ar a r $ jAHj2 , with

R ar a r ar0 ar0

r dr0 Pr:

A HA H $ a r a r P r:

ar $ AH law of scalar multiplication

4:2:3:3

(1) Normalized Gaussian function

(laws of convolution and multiplication). Since arbr brar: R R AH0 BH H0 dH0 BH0 AH

0

H dH

1

expf x=2

y= 2

z= 2 g:

4:2:3:12

This plays an important role in statistics. Its Fourier transform is again a Gaussian: expf 2 2 H 2 2 K 2 2 L2 g:

4:2:3:12a

The three parameters , , determine the width of the curve. Small values of , , represent a broad maximum in reciprocal space but a narrow one in real space, and vice versa. The constant has been chosen such that the integral of the Gaussian is unity in real space. The product of two Gaussians in reciprocal space expf 2 21 H 2 12 K 2 12 L2 g expf 2 22 H 2 22 K 2 22 L2 g

4:2:3:5

The associative law of multiplication does not hold if mixed products (convolution and multiplication) are used: ar brcr 6 ar brcr:

3=2

0

and vice versa. The convolution operation is commutative in either space. For simplicity the symbol ar br instead of the complete convolution integral is used. The distribution law ab c ab ac is valid for the convolution as well: ar br cr ar br ar cr:

4:2:3:11

Equation (4.2.3.11) is very useful for the determination of the contribution of anomalous scattering to diffuse reflections. Most of the diffuse diffraction phenomena observed may be interpreted qualitatively or even semi-quantitatively in a very simple manner using a limited number of important Fourier transforms, given below. 4.2.3.1.1. Fourier transforms

4:2:3:4b

4:2:3:10

Note that Pr P r is not valid if a(r) is complex. Consequently jA Hj2 6 jAHj2 . This is shown by evaluating A HA H

4:2:3:2

$ AHBH

4:2:3:9a 4:2:3:9b

Equations (4.2.3.9) yield the relationship A H AH (‘Friedel’s law’) if a(r) is a real function. The multiplication of a function with its conjugate is given by:

ar br $ AH BH law of addition

scalar quantity. On the other hand, the multiplication of two functions does not yield a relation of similar symmetrical simplicity: R arbr $ AH0 BH H0 dH0 AH BH 4:2:3:4a R 0 0 0 ar br ar br r dr

4:2:3:8

Consequently, if ar a r, then AH A H. In order to calculate the intensity the complex conjugate A H is needed:

H

(constant factors are omitted). a(r) and A(H) are reversibly and uniquely determined by Fourier transformation. Consequently equations (4.2.3.1) may simply be replaced by ar $ AH, where the double-headed arrow represents the two integrations given by (4.2.3.1) and means: A(H) is the Fourier transform of a(r), and vice versa. The following relations may easily be derived from (4.2.3.1):

4:2:3:7

4:2:3:6

expf 2 21 22 H 2 12 22 K 2 12 22 L2 g

4:2:3:12b

again represents a Gaussian of the same type, but with a sharper profile. Consequently its Fourier transform given by the convolution of the transforms of the two Gaussians is itself a Gaussian with a broader maximum. It may be concluded from this discussion that the Gaussian with , , ! 0 is a function in real space, and its Fourier transform is unity in reciprocal space. The convolution of two functions is again a function.

410

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS (2) Lattices Lattices in real and reciprocal space may be described by functions P lr r n n

and LH

P

H

h,

h

where n, h represent the components of the displacement vectors in real and reciprocal space, respectively. The Fourier transforms of lattices with orthogonal basis vectors of unit length and an infinite number of points in all three dimensions correspond to each other. In the following the relation lr $ LH is used in this generalized sense. The Fourier transforms of finite lattices are given by sin N1 H sin N2 K sin N3 L , sin H sin K sin L

4:2:3:13

which is a periodic function in reciprocal space, but, strictly speaking, non-periodic in real space. It should be pointed out that the correspondence of lattices in either space is valid only if the origin coincides with a function. This fact may easily be understood by applying the law of displacement given in equation (4.2.3.7).

convolution) and represents the generalized Patterson function including anomalous scattering [cf. equation (4.2.3.10)]. The change of the variable in the convolution integral may sometimes lead to confusion if certain operations are applied to the arguments of the functions entering the integral. Hence, it seems to be useful to mention the invariance of the convolution integral with respect to a change of sign, or a displacement, respectively, if applied to r0 in both functions. Consequently, the convolution with the inverted function ar b r may be determined as follows: b0 r b r R ar b r ar b0 r ar0 b0 r r0 dr0 R ar0 br0 r dr0 P0 r:

This equation means that the second function is displaced into the positive direction by r, then multiplied by the first function and integrated. In the original meaning of the convolution the operation represents a displacement of the second function into the positive direction and an inversion at the displaced origin before multiplication and subsequent integration. On comparing both operations it may be concluded that P0 r 6 P0 r if the second function is acentric. For real functions both have to be acentric. In a similar way it may be shown that the convolution of R ar m br m0 ar0 mbr m0 r0 dr0 r0 R ar00 br m0 m r00 dr00 : r00

(3) Box functions The Fourier transform of a box function b(r) with unit height is: br $

sin H sin K sin L : H K L

4:2:3:14

, , describe its extension in the three dimensions. This function is real as long as the centre of symmetry is placed at the origin, otherwise the law of displacement has to be used. The convolution of the box function is needed for the calculation of intensities: tr br b r sin H 2 sin K 2 sin L 2 $ : H K L

4:2:3:18 Equation (4.2.3.18) indicates a displacement by m0 m with respect to the convolution of the undisplaced functions. Consequently r

m r

m0 r

t(r) is a generalized three-dimensional ‘pyramid’ of doubled basal length when compared with the corresponding length of the box function. The top of the pyramid has a height given by the number of unit cells covered by the box function. Obviously, the box function generates a particle size in real space by multiplying the infinite lattice l(r) by b(r). Fourier transformation yields a particlesize effect well known in diffraction. Correspondingly, the termination effect of a Fourier synthesis is caused by multiplication by a box function in reciprocal space, which causes a broadening of maxima in real space. (4) Convolutions It is often very useful to elucidate the convolution given in equations (4.2.3.4) by introducing the corresponding pictures in real or reciprocal space. Since 1 f r f r, H FH FH the convolution with a function must result in an identical picture of the second function, although the function is used as f r in the integrals of equations (4.2.3.4), f r r0 with r0 as variable in the integral of convolution. The convolution with f r brings the integral into the form R f r0 f r0 r dr0 , 4:2:3:16 which is known as the Patterson function (or self- or auto-

m

m0 :

4:2:3:19

Obviously, the commutative law of convolution is obeyed; on the other hand, the convolution with the inverted function yields r

4:2:3:15

4:2:3:17

m0 m,

indicating that the commutative law (interchange of m and m0 ) is violated because of the different signs of m and m0 . The effectiveness of the method outlined above may be greatly improved by introducing further Fourier transforms of useful functions in real and reciprocal space (Patterson, 1959). 4.2.3.1.2. Applications (1) Clusters in a periodic lattice (low concentrations) The exsolution of clusters of equal sizes is considered. The lattice of the host is undistorted and the clusters have the same lattice but a different structure. A schematic drawing is shown in Fig. 4.2.3.1. Two different structures are introduced by P F1 r r r F r P F2 r r r F r:

Their Fourier transforms are the structure factors F1 H, F2 H. The bold lines in Fig. 4.2.3.1 indicate the clusters, which may be represented by box functions br in the simplest case. It should be pointed out, however, that a more complicated shape means nothing other than a replacement of br by another shape function b0 r and its Fourier transform B0 H. The distribution of clusters is represented by

411

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS

Fig. 4.2.3.1. Model of the two-dimensional distribution of point defects, causing changes in the surroundings.

dr

P

r

m,

m

where m refers to the centres (crosses in Fig. 4.2.3.1) of the box functions. The problem is therefore defined by: lr F1 r lrbr F2 r

F1 r dr:

4:2:3:20a

The incorrect addition of F1 r to the areas of clusters F2 r is compensated by subtracting the same contribution from the second term in equation (4.2.3.20a). In order to determine the diffuse scattering the Fourier transformation of (4.2.3.20a) is performed: LHF1 H LH BHF2 H

F1 HDH: 4:2:3:20b

The intensity is given by jLHF1 H LH BHF2 H

F1 HDHj2 : 4:2:3:20c

Evaluation of equation (4.2.3.20c) yields three terms (c.c. means complex conjugate): i

jLHF1 Hj2

ii

fLHF1 HLH BH

iii

F2 H F1 HDH c.c.g jLH BHF2 H F1 HDHj2 :

The first two terms represent modulated lattices [multiplication of LH by F1 H]. Consequently, they cannot contribute to diffuse scattering which is completely determined by the third term. Fourier transformation of this term gives [lr l r; br b r; F F2 F1 ]: lrbr Fr dr lrbr F r d r lrbr lrbr Fr F r dr d r lrtr Fr F r dr d r:

4:2:3:21a

According to equation (4.2.3.15) and its subsequent discussion the convolution of the two expressions in square brackets was replaced by l(r)t(r), where t(r) represents the ‘pyramid’ of n-fold height discussed above and n is the number of unit cells within b(r). dr d r is the Patterson function of the distribution function d(r). Its usefulness may be recognized by considering the two possible extreme solutions, namely the random and the strictly periodic distribution. If no fluctuations of domain sizes are admitted the minimum distance between two neighbouring domains is equal to the length of the domain in the corresponding direction. This means that the distribution function cannot be completely random. In one

Fig. 4.2.3.2. One-dimensional Patterson functions of various point-defect distributions: (a) random distribution; (b) influence of finite volume of defects on the distribution function; (c), (d) decomposition of (b) into a periodic (c) and a convergent (d) part; (e) Fourier transform of c d; ( f ) changes of (e), if the centres of the defects show major deviations from the origins of the lattice.

dimension the solution of a random distribution of particles of a given size on a finite length shows that the distribution functions exhibit periodicities depending on the average free volume of one particle (Zernike & Prins, 1927). Although the problem is more complicated in three dimensions, there should be no fundamental difference in the exact solutions. On the other hand, it may be shown that the convolution of a pseudo-random distribution may be obtained if the average free volume is large. This is shown in Fig. 4.2.3.2(a) for the particular case of a cluster smaller than one unit cell. A strictly periodic distribution function (superstructure) may result, however, if the volume of the domain and the average free volume are equal. Obviously, the practical solution for the self-convolution of the distribution function ( Patterson function) lies somewhere in between, as shown in Fig. 4.2.3.2(b). If a harmonic periodicity damped by a Gaussian is assumed, this self-convolution of the distribution in real space may be considered to consist of two parts, as shown in Figs. 4.2.3.2(c), (d). Note that the two different solutions result in completely different diffraction patterns: (i) The geometrically perfect lattice extends to distances which are large when compared with the correlation length of the distribution function. Then the Patterson function of the distribution function concentrates at the positions of the basic lattice, which is

412

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS given by multiplication by the lattice l(r). The corresponding convolution in reciprocal space gives the same contribution to all Bragg reflections (Fig. 4.2.3.2e). (ii) There is no perfect lattice geometry. In this case a continuous Patterson function results. Fourier transformation yields an influence which is now restricted primarily to the reflection 000, i.e. to the low-angle diffraction range. Figs. 4.2.3.2(e), ( f ) show the different diffraction patterns of the diffuse scattering which is concentrated around the Bragg maxima. Although the discussion of the diffuse scattering was restricted to the case of identical domains, the introduction of a distribution of domain sizes does not influence the diffraction pattern essentially, as long as the fluctuation of sizes is small compared with the average volume of domain sizes and no strong correlation exists between domains of any size (size-independent random distribution). The complete qualitative discussion of the diffraction pattern may be made by investigating the Fourier transform of (4.2.3.21a): LH THjFHj2 jDHj2 :

4:2:3:21b

The first factor in (4.2.3.21b) describes the particle-size effect of a domain containing the influence of a surrounding strain field and the new structure of the domains precipitated from the bulk. D(H) has its characteristic variation near the Bragg peaks (Figs. 4.2.3.2e, f ), and is less important in between. For structure determination of domains, intensities near the Bragg peaks should be avoided. Note that equation (4.2.3.21b) may be used for measurements applying anomalous scattering in both the centric and the acentric case. Solution of the diffraction problem. In equation (4.2.3.21b) FH is replaced by its average P hFHi p F H,

Fig. 4.2.3.3. Periodic array of domains consisting of two different atoms, represented by different heights. (a) Distribution of domain type 1, (b) distribution of domain type 2.

two types of lamellae may be different. The structure of the first domain type is given by a convolution with F1 r (Fig. 4.2.3.3a) and that of the second domain type by F2 r (Fig. 4.2.3.3b). Introducing hFri and Fr, the structure in real space is described by: lrb1 r dr F1 r lrb2 r dr F2 r flrb1 r lrb2 r drg hFri lrb1 r

jLHj2 jhFHij2 with

2 P jhFHij p F H 2

4:2:3:21c

where p is the a priori probability of the structure factor F H. It should be emphasized here that (4.2.3.21c) is independent of the distribution function d(r), or its Fourier transform D(H). (2) Periodic lamellar domains Here d(r) is one-dimensional, and can easily be calculated: a periodic array of two types of lamellae having the same basic lattice l(r), but a different structure, is shown in Fig. 4.2.3.3. The size of the

4:2:3:22a

Obviously the first term in curly brackets in equation (4.2.3.22a) is no more than l(r) itself and d(r) is strictly periodic. b1 r and b2 r are box functions, mutually displaced by n1 n2 =2 unit cells in the c direction [n1 , n2 are the numbers of cells covered by b1 r and b2 r, respectively]. Fourier transformation of equation (4.2.3.22a) yields LHhFHi fLH B1 H

where p represents the a priori probability of a domain of type m. This replacement becomes increasingly important if small clusters (domains) have to be considered. Applications of the formulae to Guinier–Preston zones are given by Guinier (1942) and Gerold (1954); a similar application to clusters of vacancies in spinels with an excess in Al2 O3 was outlined by Jagodzinski & Haefner (1967). Although refinement procedures are possible in principle, the number of parameters entering the diffraction problem becomes increasingly large if more clusters or domains (different sizes) have to be introduced. Another difficulty results from the large number of diffraction data which must be collected to perform a reliable structure determination. There is no need to calculate the first two terms in equation (4.2.3.20c) which do contribute to the sharp Bragg peaks only, because their intensity is simply described by the averaged structure factor jhFHij2 . These terms may therefore be replaced by

lrb2 r dr Fr:

B2 HgDHFH: 4:2:3:22b

The first term in equation (4.2.3.22b) gives the normal sharp reflections of the average structure, while the second describes superlattice reflections [sublattice Ls H DH in reciprocal space], multiplied by FH and another ‘structure factor’ generated by the convolution of the reciprocal lattice L(h) with B1 H B2 H (cf. Fig. 4.2.3.3b). Since the centres of b1 r and b2 r are mutually displaced, the expression in square brackets includes extinctions if b1 r and b2 r represent boxes equal in size. These extinctions are discussed below. It should be pointed out that Ls H and its Fourier transform ls r are commensurate with the basic lattice, as long as no change of the translation vector at the interface of the lamellae occurs. Obviously, Ls H becomes incommensurate in the general case of a slightly distorted interface. Considerations of this kind play an important role in the discussion of modulated structures. No assumption has been made so far for the position of the interface. This point is meaningless only in the case of a strictly periodic array of domains (no diffuse scattering). Therefore it seems to be convenient to introduce two basic vectors parallel to the interface in real space which demand a new reciprocal vector perpendicular to them defined by a0 b0 =V 0 , where a0 , b0 are the new basic vectors and V0 is the volume of the supercell. As long as the new basic vectors are commensurate with the original lattice, the direction of the new reciprocal vector c0 , perpendicular to a0 , b0 , passes through the Bragg points of the original reciprocal lattice and the reciprocal lattice of the superlattice remains commensurate as long as V0 is a multiple of V V 0 mV , m integer. Since the direction of c is arbitrary to some extent, there is no clear rule about the assignment of superlattice reflections to the original Bragg peaks. This problem becomes very important if extinction rules of the basic lattice and the superlattice have to be described together.

413

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS Example. We consider a b.c.c. structure with two kinds of atoms (1, 2) with a strong tendency towards superstructure formation (CsCl-type ordering). According to equations (4.2.3.21b,c) and (4.2.3.22b) we obtain, in the case of negligible short-range order, the following expressions for sharp and diffuse scattering c concentration: Is jcF1 H 1

cF2 Hj2 for h k l 2n

in the case of the (100) orientation of the interfaces. Summarizing, we may state that three types of extinction rules have to be considered: (a) Normal extinctions for the average structure. (b) Extinction of the difference structure factors for diffuse scattering. (c) Extinctions caused by the ordering process itself.

Since both structure factors occur with the same probability, the equations for sharp and diffuse reflections become

(3) Lamellar system with two different structures, where hFHi and FH do not obey any systematic extinction law The convolution of the second term in equation (4.2.3.22b) (cf. Fig. 4.2.3.3) may be represented by a convolution of the Fourier transform of a box function B1 H with the reciprocal superlattice. Since B1 H is given by sinms H=H, where ms number of cells of the supercell, the reader might believe that the result of the convolution may easily be determined quantitatively: this assumption is not correct because of the slow convergence of B1 H. The systematic concidences of the maxima, or minima, of B1 H with the points of the superlattice in the commensurate case cause considerable changes in intensities especially in the case of a small thickness of the domains. For this reason an accurate calculation of the amplitudes of satellites is necessary (Jagodzinski & Penzkofer, 1981): (a) Bragg peaks of the basic lattice

Is 14jF1 Hj2 1 expfih k lg2

I jhFHij2 ;

Id c1

cjF1 H

F2 Hj2 elsewhere:

With increasing short-range order the sharp reflections remain essentially unaffected, while the diffuse ones concentrate into diffuse maxima at h with h k l 2n 1. This process is treated more extensively below. As long as the domains exhibit no clear interface, it is useful to describe the ordering process with the two possible cell occupations of a pair of different atoms; then contributions of equal pairs may be neglected with increasing shortrange order. Now the two configurations 1, 2 and 2, 1 may be given with the aid of the translation 12 a b c. Hence the two structure factors are F1 and F2 F1 expfih k lg:

Id

2 1 4jF1 Hj 1

2

expfih k lg :

4:2:3:23a

(b) satellites: 2n n integer except 0

It is well recognized that no sharp reflections may occur for h k l 2n 1, and the same holds for the diffuse scattering if h k l 2n. This extinction rule for diffuse scattering is due to suppression of contributions of equal pairs. The situation becomes different for lamellar structures. Let us first consider the case of lamellae parallel to (100). The ordered structure is formed by an alternating sequence of monoatomic layers, consisting of atoms of types 1 and 2, respectively. Hence, the interface between two neighbouring domains is a pair of equal layers 1,1 or 2,2 which are not equivalent. Each interface of type 1 (2) may be described by an inserted layer of type 1 (2), and the chemical composition differs from 1:1 if one type of interface is preferred. Since the contribution of equal pairs has been neglected in deriving the extinction rule of diffuse scattering (see above) this rule is no longer valid. Because of the lamellar structure the diffuse intensity is concentrated into streaks parallel to (00l). Starting from the diffuse maximum (010), the diffuse streak passes over the sharp reflection 011 to the next diffuse one 012 etc., and the extinction rule is violated as long as one of the two interfaces is predominant. Hence, the position of the interface determines the extinction rule in this orientation. A completely different behaviour is observed for lamellae parallel to (110). This structure is described by a sequence of equal layers containing 1 and 2 atoms. The interface between two domains (exchange of the two different atoms) is now nothing other than the displacement parallel to the layer of the original one in the ordered sequence. Calculation of the two structure factors would involve displacements 12 a b. Starting from the diffuse reflection 001, the diffuse streak parallel to (HH0) passes through (111), (221), (331), . . .; i.e. through diffuse reflections only. On the other hand, rows (HH2) going through (002), (112), (222), . . . do not show any diffuse scattering. Hence, we have a new extinction rule for diffuse scattering originating from the orientation of interfaces. This fact is rather important in structure determination. For various reasons, lamellar interfaces show a strong tendency towards a periodic arrangement. In diffraction the diffuse streak then concentrates into more or less sharp superstructure reflections. These are not observed on those rows of the reciprocal lattice which are free from diffuse scattering. The same extinction law is not valid

I j2 sin C=sin =N1 N2 FHj2 ;

4:2:3:23b

(c) satellites: 2n 1 I j2 cos C=sin =N1 N2 FHj2 :

4:2:3:23c

order of satellites, C 12 N1 N2 =N1 N2 , N1 , N2 number of cells within b1 r and b2 r, respectively. Obviously, there is again a systematic extinction rule for even satellites if N1 N2 . Equation (4.2.3.23b) indicates an increasing intensity of first even-order satellites with increasing C. Intensities of first even and odd orders become nearly equal if N2 ' 12 N1 . Smaller values of N2 result in a decrease of intensities of both even and odd orders (no satellites if N2 0). The denominators in equations (4.2.3.23b,c) indicate a decrease in intensity with increasing order of satellites. The quantitative behaviour of the intensities needs a more detailed discussion of the numerator in equations (4.2.3.23a,b) with increasing order of satellites. Obviously, there are two kinds of extinction rules to be taken into account: systematic absences for the various orders of satellites, and the usual extinctions for hFHi and FH. Both have to be considered separately in order to arrive at reliable conclusions. This different behaviour of the superlattice reflections (satellites) and that of the basic lattice may well be represented by a multi-dimensional group-theoretical representation as has been shown by de Wolff (1974), Janner & Janssen (1980), de Wolff et al. (1981), and others. (4) Non-periodic system (qualitative discussion) Following the discussion of equations (4.2.3.21) one may conclude that the fluctuations of domain sizes cause a broadening of satellites, if the periodic distribution function has to be replaced by a statistical one. In this case the broadening effect increases with the order of satellites. The intensities, however, are completely determined by the distribution function and can be estimated by calculating the intensities of the perfectly ordered array, as approximated by the distribution function. A careful check of hFHi and FH in equations (4.2.3.23) shows that the position of the interface plays an important role for

414

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS the intensities of satellites. Since this position determines the origin of the unit cells in the sublattice, we have to choose this origin for the calculation of F(H) and FH. This involves phase factors which are meaningless for integral values of H, (i) if the average hFHi refers to different structures with arbitrary origin, or (ii), which is important for practical cases, where no change occurs in the origin of related structures for neighbouring domains which are bound to an origin by general convention (e.g. a centre of symmetry). This statement is no longer true for non-integral values of H which are needed for the calculation of intensities of satellites. The intensities of satellites become different for different positions of the interface, even in the absence of a relative displacement between neighbouring domains with respect to an origin by convention. This statement may be extended to non-periodic distribution functions. Consequently, one may conclude that the study of diffuse scattering yields information on the interfacial scattering. For slightly different structures at the interface two cases are important: (i) the two structures are related by symmetry (e.g. by a twin law); and (ii) the difference between the two structures cannot be described by a symmetry operation. In structures based on the same sublattice, the first case seems to be more important, because two different structures with the same sublattice are improbable. In the first case there is an identical sublattice if the symmetry operation in question does not influence the plane of intergrowth, e.g. a mirror plane should coincide with the plane of intergrowth. Since we have two inequivalent mirror planes in any sublattice, there are two such planes. It is assumed that no more than one unit cell of both domains at the interface has a slightly different structure without any change of geometry of the unit cell, and the number of unit cells is equal because of the equivalence of both domain structures (twins). Fig. 4.2.3.4(a) shows a picture of this model; Figs. 4.2.3.4(b), (c) explain that this structure may be described by two contributions: (i) The first term is already given by equation (4.2.3.23) for N1 N2 , consequently odd orders of satellites only are observed. (ii) The second term may be described by a superlattice containing 2N1 cells with an alternating arrangement of interfaces, correlated by the relevant plane of symmetry. In real space the second term may be constructed by convolution of the one-dimensional superlattice with two difference structures displaced by N1 =2 units of the sublattice; its Fourier transformation yields Ls HfFi H expf2iN1 H=2g Fi0 H expf 2iN1 H=2gg,

4:2:3:24

where Fi , Fi0 correspond to the Fourier transforms of the contributions shown in Fig. 4.2.3.4(c). Since H =N1 there are alternating contributions to the th satellite, which may be calculated more accurately by taking into account the symmetry operations. The important difference between equations (4.2.3.23) and (4.2.3.24) is the missing decrease in intensity with increasing order of satellites. Consequently one may conclude that the interface contributes to low- and high-order satellites as well, but its influence prevails for high-order satellites. Similar considerations may be made for two- and three-dimensional distributions of domains. A great variety of extinction rules may be found depending on the type of order approximated by the distribution under investigation. (5) Two kinds of lamellar domains with variable size distribution Obviously the preceding discussion of the diffuse scattering from domains is restricted to more or less small fluctuations of domain sizes. This is specifically valid if the most probable domain size

Fig. 4.2.3.4. Influence of distortions at the boundary of domains, and separation into two parts; for discussion see text.

does not differ markedly from the average size. The condition is violated in the case of order–disorder phenomena. It may happen that the smallest ordered area is the most probable one, although the average is considerably larger. This may be shown for a lamellar structure of two types of layers correlated by a (conditional) pair probability p0 1. As shown below, a pair at distance m occurs with the probability p p0 m which may be derived from the pairprobability of nearest neighbours p p0 1. (In fact only one component of vector m is relevant in this context.) The problem will be restricted to two kinds of layers , 0 1, 2. Furthermore, it will be symmetric in the sense that the pair probabilities obey the following rules p11 m p22 m,

p12 m p21 m:

4:2:3:25

It may be derived from equation (4.2.3.25) that the a priori probabilities p of a single layer are 12 and p11 0 p22 0 1,

p12 0 p21 0 0:

With these definitions and the general relation p11 m p12 m p22 m p21 m 1 the a priori probability of a domain containing m layers of type 1 may be calculated with the aid of p11 1 0 p11 1 1: p 12 p11 1m 1 1

p11 1:

4:2:3:26

Hence the most probable size of domains is a single layer because a similar relation holds for layers of type 2. Since the average thickness of domains is strongly dependent on p11 1 [infinite for p11 1 1, and one layer for p11 1 0] it may become very large in the latter case. Consequently there are extremely large fluctuations if p11 1 is small, but different from zero. It may be concluded from equation (4.2.3.26) that the function p11 m decreases monotonically with increasing m, approaching 12 with m ! 1. Apparently this cannot be true for a finite crystal if p11 m is unity (structure of two types of domains) or zero (superstructure of alternating layers). In either case the crystal should consist of a single domain of type 1 or 2, or one of the possible superstructures 1212 . . ., 2121 . . ., respectively. Hence one has to differentiate between long-range order, where two equivalent solutions have to be considered, and short-range order, where p11 m approaches the a priori probability 12 for large m. This behaviour of p11 m and p12 m, which may also be expressed by equivalent correlation functions, is shown in Figs. 4.2.3.5(a) (shortrange order) and 4.2.3.5(b) (long-range order). p11 m approaches 1 2 s for large m 1with s 0 in the case of short-range order, while p12 m becomes 2 s. Obviously a strict correlation between p11 1 and s exists which has to be calculated. For a qualitative

415

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS transformation of the four terms given above yields the four corresponding expressions , 0 !: P 0 1 p0 m expf 2iH mgF HF0 H: 4:2:3:27a 2 TH m

Now the summation over m may be replaced by an integral if the factor lm is added to p00 m, which may then be considered as the smoothest continuous curve passing through the relevant integer values of m: P R ! lmp00 m expf 2iH mg dm since both lm and p00 m are symmetric in our special case we obtain P LH P00 H: Insertion of the sum in equation (4.2.3.27a) results in Fig. 4.2.3.5. Typical distributions of mixed crystals (unmixing): (a) upper curve: short-range order only; (b) lower curve: long-range order.

interpretation of the diffraction pictures this correlation may be derived from the diffraction pattern itself. The p0 m are separable into a strictly periodic and a monotonically decreasing term approaching zero in both cases. This behaviour is shown in Figs. 4.2.3.6(a), (b). The periodic term contributes to sharp Bragg scattering. In the case of short-range order the symmetry relations given in equation (4.2.3.25) are valid. The convolution in real space yields with factors tr (equations 4.2.3.21): P 1 r mp011 m F1 r F1 r 2 tr m P 12 tr r mp012 m F1 r F2 r m P 1 2 tr r mp021 m F2 r F1 r m P 1 2 tr r mp022 m F2 r F2 r, m

where

p00 m

are factors attached to the functions: p011 m p11 m

1 2

p022 m

p012 m p021 m p011 m:

The positive sign of n in the functions results from the convolution with the inverted lattice [cf. Patterson (1959, equation 32)]. Fourier

0 1 2LH TH P0 HF HF0 H:

4:2:3:27b

Using all symmetry relations for p00 m and P00 H, respectively, we obtain for the diffuse scattering after summing over , 0 Id LH TH P011 HjFHj2

4:2:3:28

with FH 12F1 H F2 H. It should be borne in mind that P011 H decreases rapidly if p011 r decreases slowly and vice versa. It is interesting to compare the different results from equations (4.2.3.21b) and (4.2.3.28). Equation (4.2.3.28) indicates diffuse maxima at the positions of the sharp Bragg peaks, while the multiplication by DH causes satellite reflections in the neighbourhood of Bragg maxima. Both equations contain the factor jFHj2 indicating the same influence of the two structures. More complicated formulae may be derived for several cell occupations. In principle, a result similar to equation (4.2.3.28) will be obtained, but more interdependent correlation functions p0 r have to be introduced. Consequently, the behaviour of diffuse intensities becomes more differentiated in so far as all p00 r are now correlated with the corresponding F r, F0 r. Hence the method of correlation functions becomes increasingly ineffective with increasing number of correlation functions. Here the cluster method seems to be more convenient and is discussed below. (6) Lamellar domains with long-range order: tendency to exsolution The Patterson function of a disordered crystal exhibiting longrange order is shown in Fig. 4.2.3.5(b). Now p11 1 converges against 12 s, the a priori probability changes correspondingly. Since p12 1 becomes 12 s, the symmetry relation given in equation (4.2.3.25) is violated: p11 r 6 p22 r for a finite crystal; it is evident that another crystal shows long-range order with the inverted correlation function, p22 1 12 s, p21 1 12 s, respectively, such that the symmetry p11 r p22 r is now valid for an assembly of finite crystals only. According to Fig. 4.2.3.5(b) there is a change in the intensities of the Bragg peaks. I1 j12 sF1 H 12

sF2 Hj2

I2 j12 sF2 H 12

sF1 Hj2 ,

4:2:3:29

where I1 , I2 represent the two solutions discussed for the assembly of crystals which have to be added with the probability 12; the intensities of sharp reflections become Fig. 4.2.3.6. Decomposition of Fig. 4.2.3.5(a) into a periodic and a rapidly convergent part.

I I1 I2 =2:

4:2:3:30

Introducing equation (4.2.3.29) into (4.2.3.30) we obtain

416

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS I j12F1 H F2 Hj2 s2 jF1 H

F2 H2 j2 :

4:2:3:31a

s 0 corresponds to the well known behaviour of sharp reflections, s 12 (maximum long-range order) gives I 12jF1 Hj2 jF2 Hj2 :

4:2:3:31b

This result reveals some difficulties for structure determination of the averaged structure as long as s is different from zero or 12, since in the former case the use of integrated sharp Bragg intensities yields a correct average structure. If s 12, a correct structure determination can only be performed with a refinement allowing for an incoherent superposition of two different structures. Having subtracted all periodic contributions to p0 r, new functions which describe the remaining non-periodic parts have to be introduced (Fig. 4.2.3.6b). In order to obtain a clear overview of intensities, p00 r is again defined: p00 r cp0 r

p0 1,

where c should be chosen such that p0 0 1. By this definition a very simple behaviour of the diffuse scattering is obtained: p011 r : 12

s; p012 r : 12

s;

p022 r : 12 s; p021 r : 12 s:

With the definitions introduced above it is found that: p011 r p022 r: The diffuse scattering is given by: Id H 14

s2 jF1 H

undisplaced origin and the displaced one. Fourier transformation of the new functions yields the following very similar results: Sharp Bragg reflections (a) k 0 even

F2 Hj2 P011 H LH: 4:2:3:32

Since equation (4.2.3.32) is symmetrical with respect to an interchange of F1 and F2 , the same result is obtained for I2 . Diffuse reflections occur in the positions of the sharp ones; the integrated intensities of sharp and diffuse reflections are independent of the special shape of P011 H: p11 0 1; hence R R 1 P011 H expf2i0 Hg dH P011 H dH: (7) Lamellar domains with long-range order: tendency to superstructure So far it has been tacitly assumed that the crystal shows a preference for equal neighbours. If there is a reversed tendency (pairs of unequal neighbours are more probable) the whole procedure outlined above may be repeated as shown in Fig. 4.2.3.7 for the one-dimensional example. With the same probability of an unlike pair as used for the equal pair in the preceding example, the order process approaches an alternating structure such that the even-order neighbours have the same pair probabilities, while the odd ones are complementary for equal pairs (Fig. 4.2.3.7). In order to calculate intensities, it is necessary to introduce a new lattice with the doubled lattice constant and the corresponding reciprocal lattice with b 0 b =2. In order to describe the probability p0 r, one has to introduce two lattices in real space – the normal lattice with the

Fig. 4.2.3.7. The same distribution (cf. Fig. 4.2.3.5) in the case of superstructure formation.

I j12F1 H F2 Hj2

4:2:3:33a

(b) k 0 odd I s2 j12F1 H

F2 Hj2

4:2:3:33b

Diffuse reflections (c) k 0 odd I 14

s2 j12F1 H

F2 Hj2 :

4:2:3:33c

Obviously, there is a better situation for determination of the averaged structure which may be performed without any difficulty, regardless of whether s is different from zero or not. For this purpose even reflections (or reflections in the old setting) may be used. The inclusion of odd reflections in the structure determination of the superstructure is also possible if convenient H-independent scaling factors are introduced in order to compensate for the loss in intensity which is unavoidable for the integration of the diffuse scattering. A few comments should be made on the physical meaning of the formulae derived above. All formulae may be applied to the general three-dimensional case, where long-range and short-range order is a function of the relevant thermodynamical parameters. In practice, long-range order will never be realized in a real crystal consisting of mosaic blocks which may behave as small subunits in order– disorder transitions. Another reason to assume partly incoherent areas in single crystals is the presence of possible strains or other distortions at the interfaces between domains which should cause a decrease of the averaged areas of coherent scattering. All these effects may lead to diffuse scattering in the neighbourhood of Bragg peaks, similar to the diffuse scattering caused by domain structures. For this reason an incoherent treatment of domains is probably more efficient, although considerable errors in intensity measurements may occur. A very careful study of line profiles is generally useful in order to decide between the various possibilities. (8) Order–disorder in three dimensions Correlation functions in three dimensions may have very complicated periodicities; hence a careful study is necessary as to whether or not they may be interpreted in terms of a superlattice. If so, extinction rules have to be determined in order to obtain information on the superspace group. In the literature these are often called modulated structures because a sublattice, as determined by the basic lattice, and a superlattice may well be defined in reciprocal space: reflections of a sublattice including (000) are formally described by a multiplication by a lattice having larger lattice constants (superlattice) in reciprocal space; in real space this means a convolution with the Fourier transform of this lattice (sublattice). In this way the averaged structure is generated in each of the subcells (superposition or ‘projection’ of all subcells into a single one). Obviously, the Patterson function of the averaged structure contains little information in the case of small subcells. Hence it is advisable to include the diffuse scattering of the superlattice reflections at the beginning of any structure determination. N subcells in real space are assumed, each of them representing a kind of a complicated ‘atom’ which may be equal by translation or other symmetry operation. Once a superspace group has been determined, the usual extinction rules of space groups may be applied, remembering that the ‘atoms’ themselves may have systematic extinctions. Major difficulties arise from the existence of different symmetries of the subgroup and the supergroup. Since the symmetry of the supergroup is lower in general, all missing

417

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS symmetry elements may cause domains, corresponding to the missing symmetry element: translations cause antiphase domains in their generalized sense, other symmetry elements cause twins generated by rotations, mirror planes or the centre of symmetry. If all these domains are small enough to be detected by a careful study of line profiles, using diffraction methods with a high resolution power, the structural study may be facilitated by a reasonable explanation of scaling factors to be introduced for groups of reflections affected by the possible domain structures. (9) Density modulations A density modulation of a structure in real space leads to pairs of satellites in reciprocal space. Each main reflection is accompanied by a pair of satellites in the directions H with phases 2'. The reciprocal lattice may then be written in the following form 0 1: LH LH H expf2ig 2 LH H expf2i g: 2 Fourier transformation yields h lr 1 expf2iH r g 2 i expf 2iH r g 2 lr1 cos2H r :

4:2:3:34

Equation (4.2.3.34) describes the lattice modulated by a harmonic density wave. Since phases cannot be determined by intensity measurements, there is no possibility of obtaining any information on the phase relative to the sublattice. From (4.2.3.34) it is obvious that the use of higher orders of harmonics does not change the situation. If H is not rational such that nH n integer does not coincide with a main reflection in reciprocal space, the modulated structure is incommensurate with the basic lattice, and the phase of the density wave becomes meaningless. The same is true for the relative phases of the various orders of harmonic modulations of the density. This uncertainty even remains valid for commensurate density modulations of the sublattice, because coinciding higher-order harmonics in reciprocal space cause the same difficulty; higher-order coefficients cannot uniquely be separated from lower ones, consequently structure determination becomes impossible unless phase-determination methods are applied. Fortunately, density modulations of pure harmonic character are impossible for chemical reasons; they may be approximated by disorder phenomena for the averaged structure only. If diffuse scattering is taken into account the situation is changed considerably: A careful study of the diffuse scattering alone, although difficult in principle, will yield the necessary information about the relative phases of density waves (Korekawa, 1967). (10) Displacement modulations Displacement modulations are more complicated, even in a primitive structure. The Fourier transform of a longitudinal or a transverse displacement wave has to be calculated and this procedure does not result in a function of similar simplicity. A set of satellites is generated whose amplitudes are described by Bessel functions of th order, where represents the order of the satellites. With as amplitude of the displacement wave the intensity of the satellites increases with the magnitude of the product H. This means that a single harmonic displacement causes an infinite number of satellites. They may be unobservable at low diffraction angles as long as the amplitudes are small. If the displacement

modulation is incommensurate there are no coincidences with reflections of the sublattice. Consequently, the reciprocal space is completely covered with an infinite number of satellites, or, in other words, with diffuse scattering. This is a clear indication that incommensurate displacement modulations belong to the category of disordered structures. Statistical fluctuations of amplitudes of the displacement waves cause additional diffuse scattering, regardless of whether the period is commensurate or incommensurate (Overhauser, 1971; Axe, 1980). Fluctuations of ‘phases’ ( periods) cause a broadening of satellites in reciprocal space, but no change of their integrated intensities as long as the changes are not correlated with fluctuation periods. The broadening of satellite reflections increases with the order of satellites and H a. Obviously, there is no fundamental difference in the calculation of diffuse scattering with an ordered supercell of sufficient size. The use of optical transforms has been revived recently, although its efficiency is strongly dependent on the availability of a useful computer program capable of producing masks for optical diffraction. An atlas of optical transforms is available (Wooster, 1962; Harburn et al., 1975), but the possibility cannot be excluded that the diffuse scattering observed does not fit well into one of the diffraction pictures shown. Yet one of the major advantages of this optical method is the simple experimental setup and the high brilliance owing to the use of lasers. This method is specifically useful in disordered molecular structures where only a few orientations of the molecules have to be considered. It should be borne in mind, however, that all optical masks must correspond to projections of the disorder model along one specific direction which generates the two-dimensional diffraction picture under consideration. An important disadvantage is caused by the difficulty in simulating the picture of an atom. This situation may be improved by using computer programs with a high-resolution matrix printer representing electron densities by point densities of the printer. This latter method seems to be very powerful because of the possibility of avoiding ‘ghosts’ in the diffraction picture. 4.2.3.2. Guideline to solve a disorder problem Generally, structure determination of a disordered crystal should start in the usual way by solving the average structure. The effectiveness of this procedure strongly depends on the distribution of integrated intensities of sharp and diffuse reflections. In cases where the integrated intensities of Bragg peaks is predominant, the maximum information can be drawn from the averaged structure. The observations of fractional occupations of lattice sites, split positions and anomalous temperature factors are indications of the disorder involved. Since these aspects of disorder phenomena in the averaged structure may be interpreted very easily, a detailed discussion of this matter is not given here (see any modern textbook of X-ray crystallography). Difficulties may arise from the intensity integration which should be carried out using a high-resolution diffraction method. The importance of this may be understood from the following argument. The averaged structure is determined by the coherent superposition of different structure factors. This interpretation is true if there is a strictly periodic subcell with long-range order which allows for a clear separation of sharp and diffuse scattering. There are important cases, however, where this procedure cannot be applied without loss of information. (a) The diffuse scattering is concentrated near the Bragg peaks for a large number of reflections. Because of the limited resolution power of conventional single-crystal methods the separation of sharp and diffuse scattering is impossible. Hence, the conventional study of integrated intensities does not really lead to an averaged structure. In this case a refinement should be tried using an incoherent superposition of different structure factors. Application

418

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS of this procedure is subject to conditions which have to be checked very carefully before starting the refinement: first, it is necessary to estimate the amount of diffuse scattering not covered by intensity integration of the ‘sharp’ reflections. Since loss in intensity, hidden in the background scattering, is underestimated very frequently, it should be checked whether nearly coinciding sharp and diffuse maxima are modulated by the same structure factor. It may be difficult to meet this condition in some cases; e.g. this condition is fulfilled for antiphase domains, but the same is not true for twin domains. (b) The concentration of diffuse maxima near Bragg peaks is normally restricted to domain structures with a strictly periodic sublattice. Cases deviating from this rule are possible. Since they are rare, they are omitted here. Even structures with small deviations from the average structure do not lead to structure factors for diffuse scattering which are proportional to that of the average structure. This has been shown in the case of a twin structure correlated by a mirror plane where the reflections of a zone only have equal structure factors (Cowley & Au, 1978). This effect causes even more difficulties for orthogonal lattices where the two twins have reflections in exactly the same positions, although differing in their structure factors. In this particular case, the incoherent or coherent treatment in refinements may be seriously hampered by strains originating from the boundary. Unsatisfactory refinements may be explained in this way but this does not improve their reliability. The integrated intensity of any structure is independent of atomic positions if the atomic form factors remain unchanged by structural fluctuations. Small deviations of atomic form factors owing to electron-density changes of valence electrons are neglected. Consequently, the integrated diffuse intensities remain unchanged if the average structure is not altered by the degree of order. The latter condition is obeyed in cases where a geometrical long-range order of the lattice is independent of the degree of order, and no long-range order in the structure exists. This law is extremely useful for the interpretation of diffuse scattering. Unfortunately, intensity integration over coinciding sharp and diffuse maxima does not necessarily lead to a structure determination of the corresponding undistorted structure. This integration may be useful for antiphase domains without major structural changes at the boundaries. In all other cases the deviations of domains (or clusters) from the averaged structure determine the intensities of maxima which are no longer correlated with those of the average structure. If the integrated intensity of diffuse scattering is comparable with, or even larger than, those of the Bragg peaks it is useful to begin the interpretation with a careful statistical study of the diffuse intensities. Intensity statistics can be applied in a way similar to the intensity statistics in classical structure determination. The following rules are briefly discussed in order to enable a semiquantitative interpretation of the essential features of disorder to be realized. (1) First, it is recommended that the integrated intensities be studied in certain areas of reciprocal space. (2) Since low-angle scattering is very sensitive to fluctuations of densities, the most important information can be drawn from its intensity behaviour. If there is at least a one-dimensional sublattice in reciprocal space without diffuse scattering, it may often be concluded that there is no important low-angle scattering either. This law is subject to the condition of a sufficient number of reflections obeying this extinction rule without any exception. (3) If the diffuse scattering shows maxima and minima, it should be checked whether the maxima observed may be approximately assigned to a lattice in reciprocal space. Obviously, this condition can hardly be met exactly if these maxima are modulated by a kind of structure factor, which causes displacements of maxima proportional to the gradient of this structure factor. Hence this

influence may well be estimated from a careful study of the complete diffuse diffraction pattern. It should then be checked whether the corresponding lattice represents a sub- or a superlattice of the structure. An increase of the width of reflections as a function of growing jHj indicates strained clusters of sub- or superlattice. (4) The next step is the search for extinction rules of diffuse scattering. The simplest is the lack of low-angle scattering which has already been mentioned above. Since diffuse scattering is generally given by equation (4.2.2.13) Id H hjFHj2 i jhFHij2 P P p jF Hj2 j p F Hj2 ,

it may be concluded that this condition is fulfilled in cases where all structural elements participating in disorder differ by translations only (stacking faults, antiphase domains etc.). They add phase factors to the various structure factors, which may become n2 n integer for specific values of the reciprocal vector H. If all p are equivalent by symmetry: P P P p jF Hj2 p F Hp F H 0:

Other possibilities of vanishing diffuse scattering may be derived in a similar manner for special reflections if glide operations are responsible for disorder. Since we are concerned with disordered structures, these glide operations need not necessarily be a symmetry operation of the lattice. It should be pointed out, however, that all these extinction rules of diffuse scattering are a kind of ‘anti’-extinction rule, because they are valid for reflections having maximum intensity for the sharp reflections unless the structure factor itself vanishes. (5) Furthermore, it is important to plot the integrated intensities of sharp and diffuse scattering as a function of the reciprocal coordinates at least in a semi-quantitative way. If the ratio of integrated intensities remains constant in the statistical sense, we are predominantly concerned with a density phenomenon. It should be pointed out, however, that a particle-size effect of domains behaves like a density phenomenon (density changes at the boundary!). If the ratio of ‘diffuse’ to ‘sharp’ intensities increases with diffraction angle, we have to take into account atomic displacements. A careful study of this ratio yields very important information on the number of displaced atoms. The result has to be discussed separately for domain structures if the displacements are equal in the subcells of a single domain, but different for the various domains. In the case of two domains with displacements of all atoms the integrated intensities of sharp and diffuse reflections become statistically equal for large jHj. Other rules may be derived from statistical considerations. (6) The next step of a semi-quantitative interpretation is the check of the intensity distribution of diffuse reflections in reciprocal space. Generally this modulation is simpler than that of the sharp reflections. Hence it is frequently possible to start a structure determination with diffuse scattering. This method is extremely helpful for one- and two-dimensional disorder where partial structure determinations yield valuable information, even for the evaluation of the average structure. (7) In cases where no sub- or superlattice belonging to diffuse scattering can be determined, a careful check of integrated intensities in the surroundings of Bragg peaks should again be performed. If systematic absences are found, the disorder is most probably restricted to specific lattice sites which may also be found in the average structure. The accuracy, however, is much lower here. If no such effects correlated with the average structure are

419

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS observed, the disorder problem is related to a distribution of molecules or clusters with a structure differing from the average structure. As pointed out in Section 4.2.3.1 the problem of the representative structure(s) of the molecule(s) or the cluster(s) should be solved. Furthermore their distribution function(s) is (are) needed. In this particular case it is very useful to start with a study of diffuse intensity at low diffraction angles in order to acquire the information about density effects. Despite the contribution to sharp reflections, one should remember that the information derived from the average structure may be very low (e.g. small displacements, low concentrations etc.). (8) As pointed out above, a Patterson picture – or strictly speaking a difference Patterson (jFj2 -Fourier synthesis) – may be very useful in this case. This method is promising in the case of disorder in molecular structures where the molecules concerned are at least partly known. Hence the interpretation of the difference Patterson may start with some internal molecular distances. Nonmolecular structures show some distances of the average structure. Consequently a study of the important distances will yield information on displacements or replacements in the average structure. For a detailed study of this matter the reader is referred to the literature (Schwartz & Cohen, 1977). Although it is highly improbable that exactly the same diffraction picture will really be found, the use of an atlas of optical transforms (Wooster, 1962; Harburn et al., 1975; Welberry & Withers, 1987) may be very helpful at the beginning of any study of diffuse scattering. The most important step is the separation of the distribution function from the molecular scattering. Since this information may be derived from a careful comparison of low-angle diffraction with the remaining sharp reflections, this task is not too difficult. If the influence of the distribution function is unknown, the reader is strongly advised to disregard the immediate neighbourhood of Bragg peaks in the first step of the interpretation. Obviously information may be lost in this way but, as has been shown in the past, much confusion caused by the attempt to interpret the scattering near the Bragg peaks with specific structural properties of a cluster or molecular model is avoided. The inclusion of this part of diffuse scattering can be made after the complete interpretation of the change of the influence of the distribution function on diffraction in the far-angle region.

4.2.4. Quantitative interpretation 4.2.4.1. Introduction In these sections quantitative interpretations of the elastic part of diffuse scattering (X-rays and neutrons) are outlined. Although similar relations are valid, magnetic scattering of neutrons is excluded. Obviously, all disorder phemomena are strongly temperature dependent if thermal equilibrium is reached. Consequently, the interpretation of diffuse scattering should include a statistical thermodynamical treatment. Unfortunately, no quantitative theory for the interpretation of structural phenomena is so far available: all quantitative solutions introduce formal order parameters such as correlation functions or distributions of defects. At low temperatures (low concentration of defects) the distribution function plays the dominant role in diffuse scattering. With increasing temperature the number of defects increases with corresponding strong interactions between them. Therefore, correlations become increasingly important, and phase transformations of first or higher order may occur which need a separate theoretical treatment. In many cases large fluctuations of structural properties occur which are closely related to the dynamical properties of the crystal. Theoretical approximations are possible

but their presentation is far beyond the scope of this article. Hence we restrict ourselves to formal parameters in the following. Point defects or limited structural units, such as molecules, clusters of finite size etc., may only be observed in diffraction for a sufficiently large number of defects. This statement is no longer true in high-resolution electron diffraction where single defects may be observed either by diffraction or by optical imaging if their contrast is high enough. Hence, electron microscopy and diffraction provide valuable methods for the interpretation of disorder phenomena. The arrangement of a finite assembly of structural defects is described by its structure and its three-dimensional (3D) distribution function. Structures with a strict 1D periodicity (chain-like structures) need a 2D distribution function, while for structures with a 2D periodicity (layers) a 1D distribution function is sufficient. Since the distribution function is the dominant factor in statistics with correlations between defects, we define the dimensionality of disorder as that of the corresponding distribution function. This definition is more effective in diffraction problems because the dimension of the disorder problem determines the dimension of the diffuse scattering: 1D diffuse streaks, 2D diffuse layers, or a general 3D diffuse scattering. Strictly speaking, completely random distributions cannot be realized as shown in Section 4.2.3. They occur approximately if the following conditions are satisfied. (1) The average volume of all defects including their surrounding strain fields NcVd (N = number of unit cells, c = concentration of defects, Vd = volume of the defect with Vd > Vc , Vc = volume of the unit cell) is small in comparison with the total volume NVc of the crystal, or Vc cVd . (2) Interactions between the defects are negligible. These conditions, however, are valid in very rare cases only, i.e. where small concentrations and vanishing strain fields are present. Remarkable exceptions from this rule are real point defects without interactions, such as isotope distribution (neutron diffraction!), or the system AuAg at high temperature. As already mentioned, disorder phenomena may be observed in thermal equilibrium. Two completely different cases have to be considered. (1) The concentration of defects is given by the chemical composition, i.e. impurities in a closed system. (2) The number of defects increases with temperature and also depends on pressure or other parameters, i.e. interstitials, voids, static displacements of atoms, stacking faults, dislocations etc. In many cases the defects do not occur in thermal equilibrium. Nevertheless, their diffuse scattering is temperature dependent because of the anomalous thermal movements at the boundary of the defect. Hence, the observation of a temperature-dependent behaviour of diffuse scattering cannot be taken as a definite criterion of thermal equilibrium without further careful interpretation. Ordering of defects may take place in a very anisotropic manner. This is demonstrated by the huge number of examples of 1D disorder. As shown by Jagodzinski (1963) this type of disorder cannot occur in thermal equilibrium for the infinite crystal. This type of disorder is generally formed during crystal growth or mechanical deformation. Similar arguments may be applied to 2D disorder. This is a further reason why the so-called Ising model can hardly be used in order to obtain interaction energies of structural defects. From these remarks it becomes clear that order parameters are more or less formal parameters without strict thermodynamical meaning. The following section is organized as follows: first we discuss the simple case of 1D disorder where reliable solutions of the diffraction problem are available. Intensity calculations of diffuse scattering of 2D disorder by chain-like structures follow. Finally, the 3D case is treated, where formal solutions of the diffraction

420

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS problem have been tried and applied successfully to metallic systems to some extent. A short concluding section concerns the special phenomenon of orientational disorder. 4.2.4.2. One-dimensional disorder of ordered layers As has been pointed out above, it is often useful to start the interpretation of diffuse scattering by checking the diffraction pattern with respect to the dimensionality of the disorder concerned. Since each disordered direction in the crystal demands a violation of the corresponding Laue condition, this question may easily be answered by looking at the diffuse scattering. Diffuse streaks in reciprocal space are due to a one-dimensional violation of the Laue conditions, and will be called one-dimensional disorder. This kind of order is typical for layer structures, but it is frequently observed in cases where several sequences of layers do not differ in the interactions of next-nearest neighbours. Typical examples are structures which may be described in terms of close packing, e.g. hexagonal and cubic close packing. For a quantitative interpretation of diffuse streaks we need onedimensional correlation functions, which may uniquely be determined if a single independent correlation function is active. According to equation (4.2.3.28) Fourier transformation yields the information required. In all other cases a specific model has to be suggested for a full interpretation of diffuse streaks. Another comment seems to be necessary: disorder parameters can be defined uniquely only if the diffraction pattern allows for a differentiation between long-range and short-range order. This question can at least partly be answered by studying the line width of sharp reflections with a very good resolution. Since integrated intensities of sharp reflections have to be separated from the diffuse scattering, this question is of outstanding importance in most cases. Inclusion of diffuse parts in the diffraction pattern during intensity integration of sharp reflections may lead to serious errors in the interpretation of the average structure. The existence of diffuse streaks in more than one direction of reciprocal space means that the diffraction problem is no longer one-dimensional. Sometimes the problem may be treated independently, if the streaks are sharp, and no interference effects may be observed in the diffraction pattern in areas where the diffuse streaks do overlap. In all other cases there are correlations between the various directions of one-dimensional disorder which may be determined with the aid of a model covering more than one of the pertinent directions of disorder. Before starting the discussion of the quantitative solution of the one-dimensional problem, some remarks should be made on the usefulness of quantitative disorder parameters. It is well known from statistical thermodynamics that a one-dimensional system cannot show long-range order above T 0 K. Obviously, this statement is in contradiction with many experimental observations where long-range order is realized even in layer structures. The reason for this behaviour is given by the following arguments which are valid for any structure. Let us assume a structure with strong interactions at least in two directions. From the theoretical treatment of the two-dimensional Ising model it is known that such a system shows long-range order below a critical temperature Tc . This statement is true even if the layer is finite, although the strict thermodynamic behaviour is not really critical in the thermodynamical sense. A three-dimensional crystal can be constructed by adding layer after layer. Since each layer has a typical twodimensional free energy, the full statistics of the three-dimensional crystal may be calculated by introducing a specific free energy for the various stackings of layers. Obviously, this additional energy has to include terms describing potential and entropic energies as well. They may be formally developed into contributions of next, overnext etc. nearest neighbours. Apparently, the contribution to

entropy must include configurational and vibrational parts which are strongly coupled. As long as the layers are finite, there is a finite probability of a fault in the stacking sequence of layers which approaches zero with increasing extension of the layers. Consequently, the free energy of a change in the favourite stacking sequence becomes infinite quadratically with the size of the layer. Therefore, the crystal should be either completely ordered or disordered; the latter case can only be realized if the free energies of one or more stacking sequences are exactly equal (very rare, but possible over a small temperature range of phase transformations). An additional positive entropy associated with a deviation from the periodic stacking sequence may lead to a kind of competition between entropy and potential energy, in such a way that periodic sequences of faults result. Obviously, this situation occurs in the transition range of two structures differing only in their stacking sequence. On the other hand, one must assume that defects in the stacking sequence may be realized if the size of the layers is small. This situation occurs during crystal growth, but one should remember that the number of stacking defects should decrease with increasing size of the growing crystal. Apparently, this rearrangement of layers may be suppressed as a consequence of relaxation effects. The growth process itself may influence the propagation of stacking defects and, consequently, the determination of stacking-fault probabilities, aiming at an interpretation of the chemical bonding seems to be irrelevant in most cases. The quantitative solution of the diffraction problem of onedimensional disorder follows a method similar to the Ising model. As long as next-nearest neighbours alone are considered, the solution is very simple only if two possibilities of structure factors are to be taken into account. Introducing the probability of equal pairs 1 and 2, , one arrives at the known solution for the a priori probability p and a posteriori probabilities p0 m, respectively. In the one-dimensional Ising model with two spins and the interaction energies U U=kB T, defining the pair probability p11 1

expfU=kB Tg expfU=kB Tg expf U=kB Tg

the full symmetry is p1 p2 12, and p11 m p22 m. Consequently: p12 m p22 m 1

p11 m:

The scattered intensity is given by P IH Lh, k hFFm iN jmj expf 2imlg,

4:2:4:1

m

where m mc, N number of unit cells in the c direction and hFF i depends on 1 , 2 which are the eigenvalues of the matrix 1 : 1 From the characteristic equation 2

2

1 2 0

4:2:4:2

one has 1 1; 2 2

1:

4:2:4:2a

1 describes a sharp Bragg reflection (average structure) which need not be calculated. Its intensity is simply proportional to hFHi. The second characteristic value yields a diffuse reflection in the same position if the sign is positive > 0:5, and in a position displaced by 12 in reciprocal space if the sign is negative < 0:5. Because of the symmetry conditions p11 m only is needed; it may be determined with the aid of the boundary conditions

421

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS p11 0 1,

p11 1 ,

and the general relation that p0 m is given by p0 m c00 m1 c000 m2 : The final solution of our problem yields simply: p11 m 12 12m2 p22 m, p12 m 12

1 m 22

p21 m:

The calculation of the scattered intensity is now performed with the general formula PP p p0 mF F0 N jmj IH Lh, k m ; 0

expf 2imlg:

4:2:4:3

Evaluation of this expression yields P IH Lh, k N jmj expf 2imlg m

j12F1

F2 j2 m1 j12F1

F2 j2 m2 :

4:2:4:4

Since the characteristic solutions of the problem are real: IH LhjF1 F2 =2j2 Lh, kjF1

1 1

F2 =2j2 j2 j2

22 cos 2l j2 j2

:

4:2:4:5

This particle size effect has been neglected in (4.2.4.5). This result confirms the fact mentioned above that the sharp Bragg peaks are determined by the averaged structure factor and the diffuse one by its mean-square deviation. For the following reason there are no examples for quantitative applications: two different structures generally have different lattice constants; hence the original assumption of an undisturbed lattice geometry is no longer valid. The only case known to the authors is the typical lamellar structure of plagioclases, reported by Jagodzinski & Korekawa (1965). The authors interpret the well known ‘Schiller effect’ as a consequence of optical diffraction. Hence, the size of the lamellae is of the order of 2000 A˚. This longperiod superstructure cannot be explained in terms of next-nearestneighbour interactions. In principle, however, the diffraction effects are similar: instead of the diffuse peak as described by the second term in equation (4.2.4.5), satellites of first and second order, etc. accompanying the Bragg peaks are observed. The study of this phenomenon (Korekawa & Jagodzinski, 1967) has not so far resulted in a quantitative interpretation. Obviously, the symmetry relation used in the formulae discussed above is only valid if the structures described by the F are related by symmetries such as translations, rotations or combinations of both. The type of symmetry has an important influence on the diffraction pattern. (1) Translation parallel to the ordered layers If the translation vector between the two layers in question is such that 2r is a translation vector parallel to the layer, there are two relevant structure factors F1 , F2 F1 exp2iH r: H r may be either an integer or an integer 12. Since any integer may be neglected because of the translation symmetry parallel to the layer, we have F1 F2 in the former case, and F1 F2 in the latter. As a consequence either the sharp reflections given in equation (4.2.4.4) vanish, or the same is true for the diffuse ones.

Hence, the reciprocal lattice may be described in terms of two kinds of lattice rows, sharp and diffuse, parallel to the reciprocal coordinate l. Disorder of this type is observed very frequently. One of the first examples was wollastonite, CaSiO3 , published by Jefferey (1953). Here the reflections with k 2n are sharp Bragg peaks without any diffuse scattering. Diffuse streaks parallel to (h00), however, are detected for k 2n 1. In the light of the preceding discussion, the translation vector is 12 b, and the plane of ordered direction (plane of intergrowth of the two domains) is (100). Hence the displacement is parallel to the said plane. Since the intensity of the diffuse lines does not vary according to the structure factor involved, the disorder cannot be random. The maxima observed are approximately in the position of a superstructure, generated by large domains without faults in the stacking sequence, mutually displaced by 12 b (antiphase domains). This complicated ordering behaviour is typical for 1D order and may easily be explained by the above-mentioned fact that an infinitely extended interface between two domains causes an infinite unfavourable energy (Jagodzinski, 1964b, p. 188). Hence, a growing crystal should become increasingly ordered. This consideration explains why the agreement between a 1D disorder theory and experiment is often so poor. Examples where more than one single displacement vector occur are common. If these are symmetrically equivalent all symmetries have to be considered. The most important cases of displacements differing only by translation are the well known close-packed structures (see below). A very instructive example is the mineral maucherite (approximately Ni4 As3 ). According to Jagodzinski & Laves (1947) the structure has the following disorder parameters: interface (001), displacement vectors [000], 12 00, 0 12 0, 12 12 0. From equation (4.2.4.5) we obtain: hFHi 1 expfihg expfikg expfih kg=4: Hence there are sharp reflections for h, k even, and diffuse ones otherwise. Further conclusions may be drawn from the average structure. (2) Translation perpendicular to the ordered layers If the translation is c/2 the structure factors are: F2 F1 expf2ilg F1 F2 for l even F1 F2 for l odd: There are sharp l 2n and diffuse l 2n 1 reflections on all reciprocal-lattice rows discussed above. Since the sharp and diffuse reflections occur on the same reciprocal line there is a completely different behaviour compared with the preceding case. In general, a component of any displacement vector perpendicular to the interface gives rise to a change in chemical composition as shown in the next example: in a binary system consisting of A and B atoms with a tendency towards an alternating arrangement of A and B layers, any fault in the sequence BABAB|BABAB|B increases the number of B atoms (or A atoms). Generally such kinds of defects will lead to an interface with a different lattice constant, at least in the direction perpendicular to the interface. Consequently the exact displacement vectors of 12, 13, 14 are rare. Since ordered structures should be realized in the 1D case, incommensurate superstructures will occur which are very abundant during ordering processes. An interesting example has been reported and interpreted by Cowley (1976) where the displacement vector has a translational period of 14 perpendicular to the plane of intergrowth. Reflections 00l and 22l with l 4n are sharp, all remaining reflections more or less diffuse. Since the maxima 111, 133 show a systematically different

422

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS behaviour, there is also a displacement component parallel to the plane of intergrowth in question. The semi-quantitative interpretation has been given in his paper. (3) Rotations The discussion concerning layers related by a twofold rotation parallel to c may easily be made by simply considering their structure factors. Since the layers do not obey the twofold symmetry their structure factors are generally different; unless they equalize accidentally there are sharp and diffuse reflections according to the values of hFi and F, respectively. Obviously, F1 F2 is valid only if h k 0; consequently there is just one reciprocal-lattice row free from diffuse scattering. (4) Asymmetric case In the asymmetric case the symmetry conditions used above are no longer valid:

corresponding to the phase of the complex characteristic value. Equation (4.2.4.8) has been used in many cases. Qualitative examples are the mixed-layer structures published by Hendricks & Teller (1942). An example of a four-layer-type structure is treated by Dubernat & Pezerat (1974). A first quantitative treatment with good agreement between theory and experimental data (powder diffraction) has been given by Dorner & Jagodzinski (1972) for the binary system TiO2–SnO2. In the range of the so-called spinodal decomposition the chemical composition of the two domains and the average lengths of the two types of domains could be determined. Another quantitative application was reported by Jagodzinski & Hellner (1956) for the transformation of RhSn2 into a very complicated mixed-layer type. A good agreement of measured and calculated diffuse scattering (asymmetric line profiles, displacement of maxima) could be found over a wide angular range of single-crystal diffraction.

p1 6 p2 , p12 6 p21 , p11 6 p22 :

4.2.4.2.1. Stacking disorder in close-packed structures

But there is one condition which may be derived from the invariance of the numbers of pairs in the relevant and its opposite direction: p p0 m p0 p0 m: This equation requires that p0 m is not necessarily symmetric in m. The calculation of characteristic values yields 1 1,

2 1 2

1:

j2 j2 =1

2 =1 2 F2 j2

22 cos 2l j2 j2 :

and yields the characteristic equation 1 " 2 "

hence F1 F2 F3 if h

1 1 2 0:

p1 p2 p3 , p12 p23 p31 ,

4:2:4:7

Again there are sharp Bragg reflections and diffuse ones in the same positions, or in a displaced position depending on the sign of 2 . From a discussion of the next-nearest-neighbour Ising model one may conclude that the detailed study of the qualitative behaviour of sharp and diffuse reflections may give additional information on the symmetry of the layers involved. In the case of translations between neighbouring layers not fulfilling the condition h r integer, where r is parallel to the layer, more than two structure factors have to be taken into account. If nh r integer, where n is the smallest integer fulfilling the said condition, n different structure factors have to be considered. The characteristic equation has formally to be derived with the aid of an n n matrix containing internal symmetries which may be avoided by adding the phase factors " expf2iH r=ng, " expf 2iH r=ng to the probability of pairs. The procedure is allowed if the displacements r and r are admitted only for neighbouring layers. The matrix yielding the characteristic values may then be reduced to 1 " 1 1 " 1 2 " 2 " 2

k=3g,

k 0 mod 3:

According to the above discussion the said indices define the reciprocal-lattice rows exhibiting sharp reflections only, as long as the distances between the layers are exactly equal. The symmetry conditions caused by the translation are normally:

IH Lhj1 =1 2 F1 2 =1 2 F2 j2 Lh, kj1 =1 2 F1

k=3g,

F3 F1 expf 2ih

p2 2 =1 2 :

The intensity is given by an expression very similar to (4.2.4.5):

1

F2 F1 expf2ih

4:2:4:6

The a priori probabilities are now different from 12, and may be calculated by considering p0 m ! p0 m ! 1: p1 1 =1 2 ;

From an historical point of view stacking disorder in closepacked systems is most important. The three relevant positions of ordered layers are represented by the atomic coordinates j0, 0j, j 13 , 23 j, j 23 , 13 j in the hexagonal setting of the unit cell, or simply by the figures 1, 2, 3 in the same sequence. Structure factors F1 , F2 , F3 refer to the corresponding positions of the same layer:

For the case of close packing of spheres and some other problems any configuration of m layers determining the a posteriori probability p0 m, 0 , has a symmetrical counterpart where is replaced by 0 1 (if 0 3, 0 1 1). In this particular case p12 m p13 m, and equivalent relations generated by translation. Nearest-neighbour interactions do not lead to an ordered structure if the principle of close packing is obeyed (no pairs in equal positions) (Hendricks & Teller, 1942; Wilson, 1942). Extension of the interactions to next-but-one or more neighbours may be carried out by introducing the method of matrix multiplication developed by Kakinoki & Komura (1954, 1965), or the method of overlapping clusters (Jagodzinski, 1954). The latter procedure is outlined in the case of interactions between four layers. A given set of three layers may occur in the following 12 combinations: 123, 231, 312; 132, 213, 321; 121, 232, 313; 131, 212, 323: Since three of them are equivalent by translation, only four representatives have to be introduced:

4:2:4:8

Equation (4.2.4.8) gives sharp Bragg reflections for H r=n integer; the remaining diffuse reflections are displaced

p11 p22 p33 , p13 p21 p32 :

123; 132; 121; 131: In the following the new indices 1, 2, 3, 4 are used for these four representatives for the sake of simplicity.

423

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS In order to construct the statistics layer by layer the next layer must belong to a triplet starting with the same two symbols with which the preceding one ended, e.g. 123 can only be followed by 231, or 232. In a similar way 132 can only be followed by 321 or 323. Since both cases are symmetrically equivalent the probabilities 1 and 1 1 are introduced. In a similar way 121 may be followed by 212 or 213 etc. For these two groups the probabilities 2 and 1 2 are defined. The different translations of groups are considered by introducing the phase factors as described above. Hence, the matrix for the characteristic equation may be set up as follows. As representative cluster of each group is chosen that one having the number 1 at the centre, e.g. 312 is representative for the group 123, 231, 312; in a similar way 213, 212 and 313 are the remaining representatives. Since this arrangement of three layers is equivalent by translation, it may be assumed that the structure of the central layer is not influenced by the statistics to a first approximation. The same arguments hold for the remaining three groups. On the other hand, the groups 312 and 213 are equivalent by rotation only. Consequently their structure factors may differ if the influence of the two neighbours has to be taken into account. A different situation exists for the groups 212 and 313 which are correlated by a centre of symmetry, which causes different corresponding structure factors. It should be pointed out, however, that the structure factor is invariant as long as there is no influence of neighbouring layers on the structure of the central layer. The latter is often observed in close-packed metal structures, or in compounds like ZnS, SiC and others. For the calculation of intensities p p0 , F F0 is needed. According to the following scheme of sequences any sequence of pairs is correlated with the same phase factor for FF due to translation, if both members of the pair belong to the same group. Consequently the phase factor may be attached to the sequence probability such that FF remains unchanged, and the group may be treated as a single element in the statistics. In this way the reduced matrix for the solution of the characteristic equation is given by

F0 F 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 312, 123" , 231" 212, 323" , 131" 213, 321" , 132" 313, 121" , 232"

312, 123", 231" 212, 323", 131" 213, 321", 132" 313, 121", 232"

1 " 1 2 " 0 0

0 0 1 2 " 2 "

There are three solutions of the diffraction problem: (1) If h k 0 (mod 3), " 1, there are two quadratic equations: 2

1 2

1

2

1 1 2 0

2 1

reflections for l integer, and diffuse ones in a position determined by the sequence probabilities 1 and 2 (position either l integer, l 12 integer, respectively). The remaining two characteristic values may be given in the form jj expf2i'g, where ' determines the position of the reflection. If the structure factors of the layers are independent of the cluster, 2 , 3 , 4 become irrelevant because of the new identity of the F’s (no diffuse scattering). Weak diffuse intensities on the lattice rows k k 0 (mod 3) may be explained in terms of this influence. (2) The remaining two solutions for " expf2ih k=3g are equivalent, and result in the same characteristic values. They have been discussed explicitly in the literature; the reader is referred to the papers of Jagodzinski (1949a,b,c, 1954). In order to calculate the intensities one has to reconsider the symmetry of the clusters, which is different from the symmetry of the layers. Fortunately, a threefold rotation axis is invariant against the translations, but this is not true for the remaining symmetry operations in the layer if there are any more. Since we have two pairs of inequivalent clusters, namely 312, 213 and 212, 313, there are only two different a priori probabilities p1 p3 and p2 p4 12 1 2p1 . The symmetry conditions of the new clusters may be determined by means of the so-called ‘probability trees’ described by Wilson (1942) and Jagodzinski (1949b, pp. 208–214). For example: p11 p33 , p22 p44 , p13 p31 , p24 p42 etc. It should be pointed out that clusters 1 and 3 describe a cubic arrangement of three layers in the case of simple close packing, while clusters 2 and 4 represent the hexagonal close packing. There may be a small change in the lattice constant c perpendicular to the layers. Additional phase factors then have to be introduced in the matrix for the characteristic equation, and a recalculation of the constants is necessary. As a consequence, the reciprocal-lattice rows h k 0 mod 3 become diffuse if l 6 0, and the diffuseness increases with l. A similar behaviour results for the remaining reciprocal-lattice rows.

1

1

3=4

1 2

2j j cos 2l

2B Hj j sin 2l

with solutions 1 1, " 2 1

2 1 2 2 2 4

1 1

1 2

1

#1=2 :

4:2:4:10

1 and 2 are identical with the solution of the asymmetric case of two kinds of layers [cf. equation (4.2.4.6)]. They yield sharp

1 " 2 " 0 0

The final solution of the diffraction problem results in the following general intensity formula: P IH Lh, kN fA H1 j j2

4:2:4:9

2 0

1

0 0 1 " 1 2 "

2j j cos 2l

' j j2

1

' ' j j2 1 g:

4:2:4:11

Here A and B represent the real and imaginary part of the constants to be calculated with the aid of the boundary conditions of the problem. The first term in equation (4.2.4.11) determines the symmetrical part of a diffuse reflection with respect to the maximum, and is completely responsible for the integrated

424

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS intensity. The second term causes an antisymmetrical contribution to intensity profiles but does not influence the integrated intensities. These general relations enable a semi-quantitative interpretation of the sharp and diffuse scattering in any case, without performing the time-consuming calculations of the constants which may only be done in more complicated disorder problems with the aid of a computer program evaluating the boundary conditions of the problem. This can be carried out with the aid of the characteristic values and a linear system of equations (Jagodzinski, 1949a,b,c), or with the aid of matrix formalism (Kakinoki & Komura, 1954; Takaki & Sakurai, 1976). As long as only the line profiles and positions of the reflections are required, these quantities may be determined experimentally and fitted to characteristic values of a matrix. The size of this matrix is given by the number of sharp and diffuse maxima observed, while j j and expf2i' g may be found by evaluating the line width and the position of diffuse reflections. Once this matrix has been found, a semi-quantitative model of the disorder problem can be given. If a system of sharp reflections is available, the averaged structure can be solved as described in Section 4.2.3.2. The determination of the constants of the diffraction problem is greatly facilitated by considering the intensity modulation of diffuse scattering, which enables a phase determination of structure factors to be made under certain conditions. The theory of closed-packed structures with three equivalent translation vectors has been applied very frequently, even to systems which do not obey the principle of close-packing. The first quantitative explanation was published by Halla et al. (1953). It was shown there that single crystals of C18 H24 from the same synthesis may have a completely different degree of order. This was true even within the same crystal. Similar results were found for C, Si, CdI2 , CdS2 , mica and many other compounds. Quantitative treatments are less abundant [e.g. CdI2 : Martorana et al. (1986); MX3 structures: Conradi & Mu¨ller (1986)]. Special attention has been paid to the quantitative study of polytypic phase transformations in order to gain information about the thermodynamical stability or the mechanism of layer displacements, e.g. Co (Edwards & Lipson, 1942; Frey & Boysen, 1981), SiC (Jagodzinski, 1972; Pandey et al., 1980), ZnS (Mu¨ller, 1952; Mardix & Steinberger, 1970; Frey et al., 1986) and others. Certain laws may be derived for the reduced integrated intensities of diffuse reflections. ‘Reduction’ in this context means a division of the diffuse scattering along l by the structure factor, or the difference structure factor if hFi 6 0. This procedure is valuable if the number of stacking faults rather than the complete solution of the diffraction problem is required. The discussion given above has been made under the assumption that the full symmetry of the layers is maintained in the statistics. Obviously, this is not necessarily true if external lower symmetries influence the disorder. An important example is the generation of stacking faults during plastic deformation. Problems of this kind need a complete reconsideration of symmetries. Furthermore, it should be pointed out that a treatment with the aid of an extended Ising model as described above is irrelevant in most cases. Simplified procedures describing the diffuse scattering of intrinsic, extrinsic, twin stacking faults and others have been described in the literature. Since their influence on structure determination can generally be neglected, the reader is referred to the literature for additional information. 4.2.4.3. Two-dimensional disorder of chains In this section disorder phenomena are considered which are related to chain-like structural elements in crystals. This topic includes the so-called ‘1D crystals’ where translational symmetry

(in direct space) exists in one direction only – crystals in which highly anisotropic binding forces are responsible for chain-like atomic groups, e.g. compounds which exhibit a well ordered 3D framework structure with tunnels in a unique direction in which atoms, ions or molecules are embedded. Examples are compounds with platinum, iodine or mercury chains, urea inclusion compounds with columnar structures (organic or inorganic), 1D ionic conductors, polymers etc. Diffuse-scattering studies of 1D conductors have been carried out in connection with investigations of stability/instability problems, incommensurate structures, phase transitions, dynamic precursor effects etc. These questions are not treated here. For general reading of diffuse scattering in connection with these topics see, e.g., Comes & Shirane (1979, and references therein). Also excluded are specific problems related to polymers or liquid crystals (mesophases) (see Chapter 4.4) and magnetic structures with chain-like spin arrangements. Trivial diffuse scattering occurs as 1D Bragg scattering (diffuse layers) by internally ordered chains. Diffuse phenomena in reciprocal space are due to ‘longitudinal’ disordering within the chains (along the unique direction) as well as to ‘transverse’ correlations between different chains over a restricted volume. Only static aspects are considered; diffuse scattering resulting from collective excitations or diffusion-like phenomena which are of inelastic or quasielastic origin are not treated here. 4.2.4.3.1. Scattering by randomly distributed collinear chains As found in any elementary textbook of diffraction the simplest result of scattering by a chain with period c P 4:2:4:12 lr lz z n3 c n3

is described by one of the Laue equations: GL jLLj2 sin2 NL= sin2 L

4:2:4:13

which gives broadened profiles for small N. In the context of phase transitions the Ornstein–Zernike correlation function is frequently used, i.e. (4.2.4.13) is replaced by a Lorentzian: 1=f2 42 L

l2 g,

where denotes the correlation length. In the limiting case N ! 1, (4.2.4.13) becomes P L l:

4:2:4:14

4:2:4:15

l

The scattering by a real chain a(r) consisting of molecules with structure factor FM is therefore determined by P FM H fj expf2iHxj Kyj Lzj g: 4:2:4:16 j

The Patterson function is: RR Pr 1=c jF0 H, Kj2 cos 2Hx Ky dH dK PR R 2=c jFl j2 expf2iHx Kyg l

expf 2ilzg dH dK,

4:2:4:17

where the index l denotes the only relevant position L l (the subscript M is omitted). The intensity is concentrated in diffuse layers perpendicular to c from which the structural information may be extracted. Projections are: R RR ar dz F0 H, K expf2iHx Kyg dH dK 4:2:4:18

425

RR

ar dx dy 2=c

P

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS Fl 00l exp 2ilz:

4:2:4:19

l

Obviously the z parameters can be determined by scanning along a meridian (00L) through the diffuse sheets (diffractometer recording). Owing to intersection of the Ewald sphere with the set of planes the meridian cannot be recorded on one photograph; successive equi-inclination photographs are necessary. Only in the case of large c spacings is the meridian well approximated in one photograph. There are many examples where a tendency to cylindrical symmetry exists: chains with p-fold rotational or screw symmetry around the preferred direction or assemblies of chains (or domains) with statistical orientational distribution around the texture axis. In this context it should be mentioned that symmetry operations with rotational parts belonging to the 1D rod groups actually occur, i.e. not only p 2, 3, 4, 6. In all these cases a treatment in the frame of cylindrical coordinates is advantageous (see, e.g., Vainshtein, 1966): Direct space

ar, , z

Reciprocal space

x r cos

H Hr cos

y r sin

K Hr sin

zz

LL

RRR

Hr dHr d dL FH

RRR

ar, , z expf2iHr r cos

4:2:4:20 Lzg

r dr d dz:

n

Jn 2rHr 2r dr ar,

P

expfin

4:2:4:25

R =2g Fn Hr

n

Jn 2rHr 2Hr dHr :

4:2:4:26

The formulae may be used for calculation of diffuse intensity distribution within a diffuse sheet, in particular when the chain molecule is projected along the unique axis [cf. equation (4.2.4.18)]. Special cases are: (a) Complete cylinder symmetry R FHr 2 arJ0 2rHr r dr R ar 2 FHr Jn 2rHr Hr dHr :

Lzg

FH expf 2iHr r cos

FHr , is a complex function; Fn Hr are the Fourier coefficients which are to be evaluated from the an r: Z 1 Fn Hr FHr , expf in g d 2 Z expfin=2g an rJn 2rHr 2r dr R P FHr , expfin =2g an r

4:2:4:27 4:2:4:28

(b) p-fold symmetry of the projected molecule ar, ar, 2=p P Fp Hr , expfinp =2g n

4:2:4:21

R anp rJnp 2rHr 2r dr P ap r, janp rj cosnp np r:

The integrals may be evaluated by the use of Bessel functions: R Jn u 12in expfiu cos ' n'g d'

4:2:4:29 4:2:4:30

n

. u 2rHr ; ' The 2D problem a ar, is treated first; an extension to the general case ar, , z is easily made afterwards. Along the theory of Fourier series one has: P ar, an r expfin g n Z 4:2:4:22 1 an r ar, expf in g d 2

Only Bessel functions J0 , Jp , J2p , . . . occur. In most cases J2p and higher orders may be neglected.

or with:

FH Fl Hr , , L FM HLL RRR aM r, , z expf2iHr r cos

Z 1 ar, cosn d n 2 Z 1 n ar, sinn d 2 an r jan rj expf i n rg q jan rj a2n n2 n r

(c) Vertical mirror planes Only cosine terms occur, i.e. all n 0 or n r 0. The general 3D expressions valid for extended chains with period c [equation (4.2.4.12)] are found in an analogous way: ar, , z aM r, , z lz

2r dr d dz

R Fnl Hr expfin=2g anl rJn 2Hr r2r dr

arctan n =n :

one has: Fl H

FHr ,

n

P

4:2:4:33

R expfin =2g anl rJn 2Hr r2r dr:

n

n

P

4:2:4:31

using a series expansion analogous to (4.2.4.23) and (4.2.4.24): Z Z 1 anl r 2lzg d dz 4:2:4:32 aM expf in 2

If contributions to anomalous scattering are neglected a(r, ) is a real function: P ar, jan rj cosn 4:2:4:23 n r: Analogously, one has

Lzg

4:2:4:34 jFn Hr j expin :

4:2:4:24

In practice the integrals are often replaced by discrete summation of j atoms at positions: r rj , j , z zj 0 zj < c:

426

Fl H

PP

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS fj Jn 2Hr rj expf in j g

replaced by a distribution:

n

j

exp2ilzj expfin =2g or Fl H

P

dz

4:2:4:35

DL n i n expfin g

n

fj Jn 2Hr rj cosfn=2

j 2lzj g

P

fj Jn 2Hr rj sinfn=2

j

Pr aM r aM

2lzj g:

z

expf2iLz g

4:2:4:37

r dz d

z:

4:2:4:38

Because the autocorrelation function w d d is centrosymmetric PP PP wz Nz z z z z z z ,

j

Intensity in the lth diffuse layer is given by PP n n0 n n0 in0 n n n0 Il n

P

z

The Patterson function is given by

j

n

FH FM HDL:

n

P

P

4:2:4:39

n0

expfin

n0 g:

4:2:4:36

(a) Cylinder symmetry (free rotating molecules around the chain axis or statistical averaging with respect to over an assembly of chains). Only component F0l occurs: RR F0l Hr , L 2 haM iJ0 2Hr r expf2ilzgr dr dz or F0l Hr , L

P

fj J0 2Hr rj expf2ilzj g:

j

In particular, F00 Hr determines the radial component of the molecule projected along z: P F00 Hr fj J0 2Hr rj :

the interference function W L jDLj2 is given by PP W L N 2 cos 2Lz z 4:2:4:40

IH jFM Hj2 W L:

dz d1 bz ar aM r d1 bz

with bz b

(e) Twofold symmetry axis perpendicular to the chain axis (at positions 0, 2=p, . . .). Exponentials in equation (4.2.4.32), expf inp 2lzg, are replaced by the corresponding cosine term cosnp 2lz. Formulae concerning the reverse method (Fourier synthesis) are not given here (see, e.g., Vainshtein, 1966). Usually there is no practical use in diffuse-scattering work because it is very difficult to separate out a single component Fnl . Every diffuse layer is affected by all components Fnl . There is a chance if one diffuse layer corresponds predominantly to one Bessel function. 4.2.4.3.2. Disorder within randomly distributed collinear chains

4.2.4.3.2.1. General treatment All formulae given in this section are only special cases of a 3D treatment (see, e.g., Guinier, 1963). The 1D lattice (4.2.4.12) is

z $ jBLj2

4:2:4:43

I jFM Hj2 jD1 BLj2 :

If the order is perfect within P P one domain one has D1 L ' L l; D1 B DL l; i.e. each reflection is affected by the shape function. 4.2.4.3.2.2. Orientational disorder A misorientation of the chain molecules with respect to one another is taken into account by different structure factors FM . PP F HF H expf2iLz z g: 4:2:4:44 IH

A further discussion follows the same arguments outlined in Section 4.2.3. For example, a very simple result is found in the case of uncorrelated orientations. Averaging over all pairs F F yields IH NhjFj2 i

Deviations from strict periodicities in the z direction within one chain may be due to loss of translational symmetry of the centres of the molecules along z and/or due to varying orientations of the molecules with respect to different axes, such as azimuthal misorientation, tilting with respect to the z axis or combinations of both types. As in 3D crystals, there may or may not exist 1D structures in an averaged sense.

4:2:4:42

FH FM HD1 BL

(c) Vertical mirror plane: see above. (d) Horizontal mirror plane (perpendicular to the chain): Exponentials expf2ilzg in equation (4.2.4.32) may be replaced by cos 2lz.

4:2:4:41

Sometimes, e.g. in the following example of orientational disorder, there is an order only within domains. As shown in Section 4.2.3, this may be treated by a box or shape function bz 1 for z zN and 0 elsewhere.

j

(b) p-fold symmetry of a plane molecule (or projected molecule) as outlined previously: only components np instead of n occur. Bessel functions J0 and Jp are sufficient in most cases.

hjFji2 hjFji2 LL,

4:2:4:44a

where hjFji2 1=N 2 hF F i P P F H F H 6

hjFj2 i 1=NhF F i

P

jF Hj2 :

Besides the diffuse layer system there is a diffuse background modulated by the H dependence of hjFHj2 i hjFHji2 .

427

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.2.4.3.2.3. Longitudinal disorder In this context the structure factor of a chain molecule is neglected. Irregular distances between the molecules within a chain occur owing to the shape of the molecules, intrachain interactions and/or interaction forces via a surrounding matrix. A general discussion is given by Guinier (1963). It is convenient to reformulate the discrete Patterson function, i.e. the correlation function (4.2.4.39). P wz Nz z z z1 P z z z2 . . . 4:2:4:39a

concept (Bra¨mer, 1975; Bra¨mer & Ruland, 1976) it is widely used as a theoretical model for describing diffraction of highly distorted lattices. One essential development is to limit the size of a paracrystalline grain so that fluctuations never become too large (Hosemann, 1975). If this concept is used for the 1D case, a z is defined by convolution products of a1 z. For example, the probability of finding the next-nearest molecule is given by R a2 z a1 z0 a1 z z0 dz0 a1 z a1 z and, generally:

in terms of continuous functions a z which describe the probability of finding the mth neighbour within an arbitrary distance w0 z wz=N z a1 z a 1 z . . . a za z . . . 4:2:4:45 R a z dz 1, a z a z: There are two principal ways to define a z. The first is the case of a well defined one-dimensional lattice with positional fluctuations of the molecules around the lattice points, i.e. long-range order is retained: a z c0 z , where z denotes the displacement of the mth molecule in the chain. Frequently used are Gaussian distributions: c0 expf z

c0 2 =22 g

(c0 normalizing constant; standard deviation). Fourier transformation [equation (4.2.4.45)] gives the well known result Id 1

expf L g, 2

2

i.e. a monotonically increasing intensity with L (modulation due to a molecular structure factor neglected). This result is quite analogous to the treatment of the scattering of independently vibrating atoms. If (short-range) correlations exist between the molecules the Gaussian distribution is replaced by a multivariate normal distribution where correlation coefficients 0 < < 1 between a molecule and its mth neighbour are incorporated. is defined by the second moment: hz0 z i=2 . a z c00 expf z

c0 2 =22 1

g:

Obviously the variance increases if the correlation diminishes and reaches an upper bound of twice the single site variance. Fourier transformation gives an expression for diffuse intensity (Welberry, 1985): P Id L expf L2 2 g L2 2 j =j! j

1

=1 2j 2j

2 j cos 2Lc0 :

4:2:4:46

For small , terms with j > 1 are mostly neglected. The terms become increasingly important with higher values of L. On the other hand, j becomes smaller with increasing j, each additional term in equation (4.2.4.46) becomes broader and, as a consequence, the diffuse planes in reciprocal space become broader with higher L. In a different way – in the paracrystal method – the position of the second and subsequent molecules with respect to some reference zero point depends on the actual position of the predecessor. The variance of the position of the mth molecule relative to the first becomes unlimited. There is a continuous transition to a fluid-like behaviour of the chain molecules. This 1D paracrystal (sometimes called distortions of second kind) is only a special case of the 3D paracrystal concept (see Hosemann & Bagchi, 1962; Wilke, 1983). Despite some difficulties with this

a z a1 z a1 z a1 z . . . a1 z (m-fold convolution). The mean distance between next-nearest neighbours is R hci z0 a1 z0 dz0 and between neighbours of the mth order: hci. The average value of a 1=hci, which is also the value of w(z) for z > zk , where the distribution function is completely smeared out. The general expression for the interference function G(L) is P GL 1 fF F g Ref1 F=1 Fg 4:2:4:47

with FL $ a1 z, F L $ a z. With F jFjei Lhci, equation (4.2.4.47) is written: GL 1

jFLj2 =1

2jFLj cos jFLj2 : 4:2:4:47a

[Note the close similarity to the diffuse part of equation (4.2.4.5), which is valid for 1D disorder problems.] This function has maxima of height 1 jFj=1 jFj and minima of height 1 jFj=1 jFj at positions lc and l 12 c , respectively. With decreasing jFj the oscillations vanish; a critical L value (corresponding to zk ) may be defined by Gmax/Gmin 9 1.2. Actual values depend strongly on FH. The paracrystal method is substantiated by the choice a1 z, i.e. the disorder model. Again, frequently used is a Gaussian distribution: p a1 z 1= 2 expf z hci2 =22 g p p a z 1= 1= 2 expf z hci2 =22 g 4:2:4:48 with the two parameters hci, . There are peaks of height 1=2 L2 =hci2 which obviously decrease with L2 and =hci2 . The oscillations vanish for jFj ' 0:1, p i.e. 1=hci ' 0:25=. The width of the mth peak is m m. The integral reflectivity is approximately 1=hci1 2 L2 =hci2 and the integral width (defined by integral reflectivity divided by peak reflectivity) (background subtracted!) 1=hci2 L2 =hci2 which, therefore, increases with L2 . In principle the same results are given by Zernike & Prins (1927). In practice a single Gaussian distribution is not fully adequate and modified functions must be used (Rosshirt et al., 1985). A final remark concerns the normalization [equation (4.2.4.39)]. Going from (4.2.4.39) to (4.2.4.45) it is assumed that N is a large number so that the correct normalization factors N jj for each a z may be approximated by a uniform N. If this is not true then P GL N N jjF F

428

N Re f1 jFj=1 2 Re fjFj1

jFjg N

jFj =1

4:2:4:49 2

jFj g:

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS The correction term may be important in the case of relatively small (1D) domains. As mentioned above, the structure factor of a chain molecule was neglected. The H dependence of Fm , of course, obscures the intensity variation of the diffuse layers as described by (4.2.4.47a). The matrix method developed for the case of planar disorder was adapted to 2D disorder by Scaringe & Ibers (1979). Other models and corresponding expressions for diffuse scattering are developed from specific microscopic models (potentials), e.g. in the case of Hg3 AsF6 (Emery & Axe, 1978; Radons et al., 1983), hollandites (Beyeler et al., 1980; Ishii, 1983), iodine chain compounds (Endres et al., 1982) or urea inclusion compounds (Forst et al., 1987). 4.2.4.3.3. Correlations between different almost collinear chains In real cases there are more or less strong correlations between different chains at least within small domains. Deviations from a strict (3D) order of chain-like structural elements are due to several reasons: shape and structure of the chains, varying binding forces, thermodynamical or kinetic considerations. Many types of disorder occur. (1) Relative shifts parallel to the common axis while projections along this axis give a perfect 2D ordered net (‘axial disorder’). (2) Relative fluctuations of the distances between the chains (perpendicular to the unique axis) with short-range order along the transverse a and/or b directions. The net of projected chains down to the ab plane is distorted (‘net distortions’). Disorder of types (1) and (2) is sometimes correlated owing to non-uniform cross sections of the chains. (3) Turns, twists and torsions of chains or parts of chains. This azimuthal type of disorder may be treated similarly to the case of azimuthal disorder of single-chain molecules. Correlations between axial shifts and torsions produce ‘screw shifts’ (helical structures). Torsion of chain parts may be of dynamic origin (rotational vibrations). (4) Tilting or bending of the chains in a uniform or non-uniform way (‘conforming/non-conforming’). Many of these types and a variety of combinations between them are found in polymer and liquid crystals and are treated therefore separately. Only some simple basic ideas are discussed here in brief. For the sake of simplicity the paracrystal concept in combination with Gaussians is used again. Distribution functions are given by convolution products of next-nearest-neighbour distribution functions. As long as averaged lattice directions and lattice constants in a plane perpendicular to the chain axis exist, only two functions a100 a1 xyz and a010 a2 xyz are needed to describe the arrangement of next-nearest chains. Longitudinal disorder is treated as before by a third distribution function a001 a3 xyz. The phenomena of chain bending or tilting may be incorporated by an x and y dependence of a3 . Any general fluctuation in the spatial arrangement of chains is given by ampq a1 . . . a1 a2 . . . a2 a3 . . . a3 :

4:2:4:50

(m-fold, p-fold, q-fold self-convolution of a1 , a2 , a3 , respectively.) PPP wr r ampq r a mpq r: 4:2:4:51 m

p

q

a 1, 2, 3 are called fundamental functions. If an averaged lattice cannot be defined, more fundamental functions a are needed to account for correlations between them. By Fourier transformations the interference function is given by PPP m p q F1 F2 F3 G1 G2 G3 ; GH m p q 4:2:4:52 G Ref1 jF j=1 jF jg: If Gaussian functions are assumed, simple pictures are derived. For example:

a1 r hai 1=23=2 1=11 12 13 exp 12x2 =211 y2 =212 z2 =213 4:2:4:53 describes the distribution of neighbours in the x direction (mean distance hai). Parameter 13 concerns axial, 11 and 12 radial and tangential fluctuations, respectively. Pure axial distribution along c is given by projection of a1 on the z axis, pure net distortions by projection on the x y plane. If the chain-like structure is neglected the interference function G1 H expf 22 211 H 2 212 K 2 213 L2 g

4:2:4:54

describes a set of diffuse planes perpendicular to a with mean distance 1=hai. These diffuse layers broaden along H with m11 and decrease in intensity along K and L monotonically. There is an ellipsoidal-shaped region in reciprocal space defined by main axes of length 1=11 , 1=12 , 1=13 with a limiting surface given by jFj ' 0:1, beyond which the diffuse intensity is completely smeared out. The influence of a2 may be discussed in an analogous way. If the chain-like arrangement parallel to c [equation (4.2.4.12)] is taken into consideration, P lz z n3 c; n3

the set of planes perpendicular to a (and/or b ) is subdivided in the L direction by a set of planes located at l 1=c [equation (4.2.4.15)]. Longitudinal disorder is given by a3 z [equation (4.2.4.48), 33 ] and leads to two intersecting sets of broadened diffuse layer systems. Particular cases like pure axial distributions 11 , 12 0, pure tangential distributions (net distortions: 11 , 13 0), uniform bending of chains or combinations of these effects are discussed in the monograph of Vainshtein (1966).

4.2.4.4. Disorder with three-dimensional correlations (defects, local ordering and clustering) 4.2.4.4.1. General formulation (elastic diffuse scattering) In this section general formulae for diffuse scattering will be derived which may best be applied to crystals with a well ordered average structure, characterized by (almost) sharp Bragg peaks. Textbooks and review articles concerning defects and local ordering are by Krivoglaz (1969), Dederichs (1973), Peisl (1975), Schwartz & Cohen (1977), Schmatz (1973, 1983), Bauer (1979), and Kitaigorodsky (1984). A series of interesting papers on local order is given by Young (1975) and also by Cowley et al. (1979). Expressions for polycrystalline sample material are given by Warren (1969) and Fender (1973). Two general methods may be applied: (a) the average difference cluster method, where a representative cluster of scattering differences between the average structure and the cluster is used; and (b) the method of short-range-order correlation functions where formal parameters are introduced. Both methods are equivalent in principle. The cluster method is generally more convenient in cases where a single average cluster is a good approximation. This holds for small concentrations of clusters with sufficient space in between. The method of shortrange-order parameters is optimal in cases where isolated clusters are not realized and the correlations do not extend to long distances. Otherwise periodic solutions are more convenient in most cases. In any case, the first step towards the solution of the diffraction problem is the accurate determination of the average structure. As

429

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS described in Section 4.2.3.2 important information on fractional occupations, interstitials and displacements (unusual thermal parameters) of atoms may be derived. Unfortunately all defects contribute to diffuse scattering; hence one has to start with the assumption that the disorder to be interpreted is predominant. Fractional occupancy of certain lattice sites by two or more kinds of atoms plays an important role in the literature, especially in metallic or ionic structures. Since vacancies may be treated as atoms with zero scattering amplitude, structures containing vacancies may be formally treated as multi-component systems. Since the solution of the diffraction problem should not be restricted to metallic systems with a simple (primitive) structure, we have to consider the structure of the unit cell – as given by the average structure – and the propagation of order according to the translation group separately. In simple metallic systems this difference is immaterial. It is well known that the thermodynamic problem of propagation of order in a three-dimensional crystal can hardly be solved analytically in a general way. Some solutions have been published with the aid of the so-called Ising model using nextnearest-neighbour interactions. They are excellent for an understanding of the principles of order–disorder phenomena, but they can scarcely be applied quantitatively in practical problems. Hence, methods have been developed to derive the propagation of order from the diffraction pattern by means of Fourier transformation. This method has been described qualitatively in Section 4.2.3.1, and will be used here for a quantitative application. In a first approximation the assumption of a small number of different configurations of the unit cell is made, represented by the corresponding number of structure factors. Displacements of atoms caused by the configurations of the neighbouring cells are excluded. This problem will be treated subsequently. The finite number of structures of the unit cell in the disordered crystal is given by PP F r j f r rj : 4:2:4:55

Introducing (4.2.4.58) into (4.2.4.57): P P P r F r r F r lr F r

P

F r

with lr lattice in real space. The structure of the disordered crystal is given by P r F r:

4:2:4:57

r consists of N points, where N N1 N2 N3 is the total (large) number of unit cells and denotes the a priori probability (concentration) of the th cell occupation. It is now useful to introduce r r

r

P

r

lr

P

hFri

F r

P

hFri 0:

4:2:4:60

P

P

r hFri lr hFri

r F r lr hFri: 4:2:4:61

Comparison with (4.2.4.59) yields P P r F r r F r:

Fourier transformation of (4.2.4.61) gives P P HF H HF H LHhFHi

with

P

H 0;

P

F H 0:

The expression for the scattered intensity is therefore 2 P IH HF H jLHhFHij2

P LH hF Hi HF H

with n 1, if the cell n n1 a n2 b n3 c has the F structure, and n 0 elsewhere. In the definitions given above n are numbers (scalars) assigned to the cell. Since all these are occupied we have P r lr

P

4:2:4:59

Using (4.2.4.60) it follows from (4.2.4.58) that P P r F r r F r

n

with

r F r lrhFri:

F r F r

Note that F r is defined in real space, and rj gives the position vector of site j; j 1 if in the th structure factor the site j is occupied by an atom of kind m, and 0 elsewhere. In order to apply the laws of Fourier transformation adequately, it is useful to introduce the distribution function of F P r n r n 4:2:4:56

Similarly:

j

P

P

lr lr

hF Hi

HF H :

4:2:4:62

Because of the multiplication by L(H) the third term in (4.2.4.62) contributes to sharp reflections only. Since they are correctly given by the second term in (4.2.4.62), the third term vanishes, Hence, the diffuse part is given by 2 P Id H HF H : 4:2:4:63

For a better understanding of the behaviour of diffuse scattering it is useful to return to real space: P P id r r F r 0 r F0 r

4:2:4:58 lr 0:

P

PP

0

0

r 0 r F r F0 r 4:2:4:64

and with (4.2.4.58):

430

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS PP Id H N lr 0 r 0 lr P00 H LHF HF0 H:

PP id r r

0

F r F0 r: lr 0 r

0 lr r 0 lr lr F r F0 r:

4:2:4:66

Since l(r) is a periodic function of points, all convolution products with l(r) are also periodic. For the final evaluation the decrease of a number of overlapping points (maximum N) in the convolution products with increasing displacements of the functions is neglected (no particle-size effect). Then (4.2.4.66) becomes r 0 r

N 0 lr

N 0 lr N 0 lr

F r F0 r r 0 r

4:2:4:71

4:2:4:65

Evaluation of this equation for a single term yields r 0 r

N 0 lr

F r F0 r:

4:2:4:67

If the first term in (4.2.4.67) is considered, the convolution of the two functions for a given distance n counts the number of coincidences of the function r with 0 r. This quantity is given by Nlr p0 r, where p0 r is the probability of a pair occupation in the r direction. Equation (4.2.4.67) then reads: Nlr p0 r

N 0 lr

It may be concluded from equations (4.2.4.69) that all functions p00 r may be expressed by p011 r in the case of two structure factors F1 , F2 . Then all p00 r are symmetric in r; the same is true for the P00 H. Consequently, the diffuse reflections described by (4.2.4.71) are all symmetric. The position of the diffuse peak depends strongly on the behaviour of p00 r; in the case of cluster formation Bragg peaks and diffuse peaks coincide. Diffuse superstructure reflections are observed if the p00 r show some damped periodicities. It should be emphasized that the condition p00 r p00 r may be violated for 6 0 if more than two cell occupations are involved. As shown below, the possibly asymmetric functions may be split into symmetric and antisymmetric parts. From equation (4.2.3.8) it follows that the Fourier transform of the antisymmetric part of p00 r is also antisymmetric. Hence, the convolution in the two terms in square brackets in (4.2.4.71) yields an antisymmetric contribution to each diffuse peak, generated by the convolution with the reciprocal lattice L(h). Obviously, equation (4.2.4.71) may also be applied to primitive lattices, occupied by two or more kinds of atoms. Then the structure factors F are merely replaced by the atomic scattering factors f and the are equivalent to the concentrations of atoms c . In terms of the 0 jnn0 (Warren short-range-order parameters) equation (4.2.4.71) reads PP 0 jnn0 expf2iHn n0 g: Id H N f 2 f 2 n n0

4:2:4:71a In the simplest case of a binary system A, B

F r F r

nn0 1

0

F r F0 r

4:2:4:68

Id H NcA cB fA

p00 r

p0 r 0 . The function p00 r is usually pair-correlation function g $ 0 jnn0 in the physical

with called the literature. The following relations hold: P 1 P P p0 r 0 ; p00 r 0 0 0 P P p0 r ; p00 r 0

p0 r 0 p0 r:

4:2:4:69a 4:2:4:69b 4:2:4:69c 4:2:4:69d

Also, functions normalized to unity are in use. Obviously the following relation is valid: p00 0 0 0 . Hence: 0 jnn0 0 p00 r=0

pBAjnn0 =cA ;

PP n n0

pAB ;

nn0

n0 g:

4:2:4:71b

[The exponential in (4.2.4.71b) may even be replaced by a cosine term owing to the centrosymmetry of this particular case.] It should be mentioned that the formulations of the problem in terms of pair probabilities, pair correlation functions, short-rangeorder parameters or concentration waves (Krivoglaz, 1969) are equivalent. Using continuous electron (or nuclear) density functions where site occupancies are implied, the Patterson function may be used, too (Cowley, 1981). 4.2.4.4.2. Random distribution As shown above in the case of random distributions all p00 r are zero, except for r 0. Consequently, p00 rlr may be replaced by p00 r 0

0 :

4:2:4:72

According to (4.2.4.59) and (4.2.4.61) the diffuse scattering can be given by the Fourier transformation of PP r 0 r F r F r

0

0

4:2:4:70 and Fourier transformation yields

fB 2

expf2iHn

0

is unity for r 0 n n0 . This property is especially convenient in binary systems. With (4.2.4.68), equation (4.2.4.64) becomes PP p00 rlr F r F0 r id r N

pABjnn0 =cB 1

cA pAB cB pBA ; pAA 1

N p00 rlr

0

PP

or with (4.2.4.72):

431

0

p00 r F r F0 r


PP id r N 0

0 F r F0 r:

0

Fourier transformation gives P P P 2 0 Id H N jF Hj F H F0 H

NfhjFHj2 i

0

jhFHij2 g:

4:2:4:73

This is the most general form of any diffuse scattering of systems ordered randomly (‘Laue scattering’). Occasionally it is called ‘incoherent scattering’ (see Section 4.2.2). 4.2.4.4.3. Short-range order in multi-component systems The diffuse scattering of a disordered binary system without displacements of the atoms has already been discussed in Section 4.2.4.4.1. It could be shown that all distribution functions p00 r are mutually dependent and may be replaced by a single function [cf. (4.2.4.69)]. In that case p00 r p00 r was valid for all. This condition, however, may be violated in multi-component systems. If a tendency towards an F1 F2 F3 order in a ternary system is assumed, for example, p12 r is apparently different from p12 r. In this particular case it is useful to introduce hp00 ri 12p00 r p00 r;

p00 r 12p00 r

p00 r

and their Fourier transforms hP00 Hi, P00 H, respectively. The asymmetric correlation functions are therefore expressed by p00 r hp00 ri p00 r; p00 r hp00 ri

p00 r;

p0 r 0: Consequently, id r (4.2.4.70) and Id H (4.2.4.71) may be separated according to the symmetric and antisymmetric contributions. The final result is: nP Id H N P0 H LHjF Hj2

P > 0

hP00 Hi LH

F HF0 H F HF0 H P P00 H LH > 0

F HF0 H

o F HF0 H :

4:2:4:74

Obviously, antisymmetric contributions to line profiles will only occur if structure factors of acentric cell occupations are involved. This important property may be used to draw conclusions with respect to structure factors involved in the statistics. It should be mentioned here that the Fourier transform of the antisymmetric function p00 r is imaginary and antisymmetric. Since the last term in (4.2.4.74) is also imaginary, the product of the two factors in brackets is real, as it should be. 4.2.4.4.4. Displacements: general remarks Even small displacements may have an important influence on the problem of propagation of order. Therefore, no structural treatments other than the introduction of formal parameters (e.g. Landau’s theory) have been published in the literature. Most of the

examples with really reliable results refer to binary systems, and even these represent very crude approximations, as will be shown below. For this reason we shall restrict ourselves here to binary systems, although general formulae where displacements are included may be developed in a formal way. Two kinds of atoms, f1 r and f2 r, are considered. Obviously, the position of any given atom is determined by its surroundings. Their extension depends on the forces acting on the atom under consideration. These may be very weak in the case of metals (repulsive forces, so-called ‘size effect’), but long-range effects have to be expected in ionic crystals. For the development of formulae authors have assumed that small displacements 0 r may be assigned to the pair correlation functions p00 r by adding a phase factor expf2iH 0 rg which is then expanded in the usual way: expf2iH 0 rg ' 1 2iH 0 r

2H 0 r2 : 4:2:4:75

The displacements and correlation probabilities are separable if the change of atomic scattering factors in the angular range considered may be neglected. The formulae in use are given in the next section. As shown below, this method represents nothing other than a kind of average over certain sets of displacements. For this purpose the correct solution of the problem has to be discussed. In the simplest model the displacements are due to next-nearest neighbours only. It is assumed further that the configurations rather than the displacements determine the position of the central atom and a general displacement of the centre of the first shell does not occur (no influence of a strain field). Obviously, the formal correlation function of pairs is not independent of displacements. This difficulty may be avoided either by assuming that the pair correlation function has already been separated from the diffraction data, or by theoretical calculations of the correlation function (mean-field method) (Moss, 1966; de Fontaine, 1972, 1973). The validity of this procedure is subject to the condition that the displacements have no influence on the correlation functions themselves. The observation of a periodic average structure justifies the definition of a periodic array of origins which normally depends on the degree of order. Local deviations of origins may be due to fluctuations in the degree of order and due to the surrounding atoms of a given site occupation. For example, a b.c.c. lattice with eight nearest neighbours is considered. It is assumed that only these have an influence on the position of the central atom owing to different forces of the various configurations. With two kinds of atoms, there are 29 512 possible configurations of the cluster (central atom plus 8 neighbours). Symmetry considerations reduce this number to 28. Each is characterized by a displacement vector. Hence, their a priori probabilities and the propagation of 28 different configurations have to be determined. Since each atom has to be considered as the centre once, this problem may be treated by introducing 28 different atomic scattering factors as determined from the displacements: f r expf2iH r0 g. The diffraction problem has to be solved with the aid of the propagation of order of overlapping clusters. This is demonstrated by a two-dimensional model with four nearest neighbours (Fig. 4.2.4.1). Here the central and the neighbouring cluster (full and broken lines) overlap with two sites in the, e.g., x direction. Hence, only neighbouring clusters with the same overlapping pairs are admitted. These restrictions introduce severe difficulties into the problem of propagation of cluster ordering which determines the displacement field. Since it was assumed that the problem of pair correlation had been solved, the cluster probabilities may be derived by calculating Q lr p00 r n: 4:2:4:76

432

n60

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS 0

0

p00 r 0 p0 r $ P00 H 0 P0 H: 4:2:4:77

Fig. 4.2.4.1. Construction of the correlation function in the method of overlapping clusters.

In the product only next-nearest neighbours have to be included. This must be performed for the central cluster r 0 and for the reference cluster at r n1 a n2 b n3 c, because all are characterized by different displacements. So far, possible displacement of the centre has not been considered; this may also be influenced by the problem of propagation of cluster ordering. These displacement factors should best be attached to the function describing the propagation of order which determines, in principle, the local fluctuations of the lattice constants (strain field etc.). This may be understood by considering a binary system with a high degree of order but with atoms of different size. Large fluctuations of lattice constants are involved in the case of exsolution of the two components because of their different lattice parameters, but they become small in the case of superstructure formation where a description in terms of antiphase domains is reasonable (equal lattice constants). This example demonstrates the mutual dependence of ordering and displacements which is mostly neglected in the literature. The method of assigning phase factors to the pair correlation function is now discussed. Pair correlation functions average over all pairs of clusters having the same central atom. An analogous argument holds for displacements: using pair correlations for the determination of displacements means nothing other than averaging over all displacements caused by various clusters around the same central atom. There remains the general strain field due to the propagation of order, whereas actual displacements of atoms are realized by fluctuations of configurations. Since large fluctuations of this type occur in highly disordered crystals, the displacements become increasingly irrelevant. Hence, the formal addition of displacement factors to the pair correlation function does not yield too much information about the structural basis of the displacements. This situation corresponds exactly to the relationship between a Patterson function and a real structure: the structure has to be found which explains the more or less complicated function completely, and its unique solution is rather difficult. These statements seem to be necessary because in most publications related to this subject these considerations are not taken into account adequately. Displacements usually give rise to antisymmetric contributions to diffuse reflections. As pointed out above, the influence of displacements has to be considered as phase factors which may be attached either to the structure factors or to the Fourier transforms P00 H of the correlation functions in equation (4.2.4.71). As has been mentioned in the context of equation (4.2.4.74) antisymmetric contributions will occur if acentric structure factors are involved. Apparently, this condition is met by the phase factors of displacements. In consequence, antisymmetric contributions to diffuse reflections may also originate from the displacements. This fact can also be demonstrated if the assignment of phase factors to the Fourier transforms of the correlation functions is advantageous. In this case equations (4.2.4.69a,b) are no longer valid because the functions p00 r become complex. The most important change is the relation corresponding to (4.2.4.69):

Strictly speaking we have to replace the a priori probabilities by complex numbers exp2ir H which are determined by the position of the central atom. In this way all correlations between displacements may be included with the aid of the clusters mentioned above. To a rough approximation it may be assumed that no correlations of this kind exist. In this case the complex factors may be assigned to the structure factors involved. Averaging over all displacements results in diffraction effects which are very similar to a static Debye–Waller factor for all structure factors. On the other hand, the thermal motion of atoms is treated similarly. Obviously both factors affect the sharp Bragg peaks. Hence, this factor can easily be determined by the average structure which contains a Debye–Waller factor including static and thermal displacements. It should be pointed out, however, that these static displacements cause elastic diffuse scattering which cannot be separated by inelastic neutron scattering techniques. A careful study of the real and imaginary parts of hp00 ri hp00 riR hp00 riI and p00 r p00 rR p00 rI and their Fourier transforms results, after some calculations, in the following relation for diffuse scattering: P Id ' N jF Hj2 fhP0 Hi P0 H LHg P 2N F F0 R > 0 fhP00 HiR

2N

P

> 0

P00 HI LHg

F F0 I

fhP00 HiI

P00 HR LHg:

4:2:4:78

It should be noted that all contributions are real. This follows from the properties of Fourier transforms of symmetric and antisymmetric functions. All P0 H are antisymmetric; hence they generate antisymmetric contributions to the line profiles. In contrast to equation (4.2.4.75), the real and the imaginary parts of the structure factors contribute to the asymmetry of the line profiles. 4.2.4.4.5. Distortions in binary systems In substitutional binary systems (primitive cell with only one sublattice) the Borie–Sparks method is widely used (Sparks & Borie, 1966; Borie & Sparks, 1971). The method is formulated in the short-range-order-parameter formalism. The diffuse scattering may be separated into two parts (a) owing to short-range order and (b) owing to static displacements. Corresponding to the expansion (4.2.4.75), Id Isro I2 I3 , where Isro is given by equation (4.2.4.71b) and the correction terms I2 and I3 relate to the linear and the quadratic term in (4.2.4.75). The intensity expression will be split into terms of A–A, A–B, . . . pairs. More explicitly 0 r un un0 0 and with the following abbreviations:

433

nn0 jAA unjA

un0 jA xnn0 jAA a ynn0 jAA b znn0 jAA c

nn0 jAB unjA

un0 jB . . .

Fnn0 jAA fA2 = fA

fB 2 cA =cB nn0

Fnn0 jBB fB2 = fA

fB 2 cB =cA nn0

Fnn0 jAB 2fA fB = fA

fB 2 1

nn0 Fnn0 jBA


P The double sums over n, n0 may be replaced by N m; n; p where m, n, p are the coordinates of the interatomic vectors n n0 and I2 becomes PPP H lmnjx . . . . . . I2 NcA cB fA fB 2

one finds (where the short-hand notation is self-explanatory): PP fH Fnn0 jAA hxnn0 jAA i I2 2icA cB fA fB 2 n n0

Fnn0 jBB hxnn0 jBB i Fnn0 jAB hxnn0 jAB i K ‘y’ n0 g

L ‘z’g expf2iH n I 3 c A c B fA

fB 2 22

PP 2 fH Fnn0 hx2nn0 jAA i n

n0

Fnn0 jBB hx2nn0 jBB i Fnn0 jAB hx2nn0 jAB i K 2 ‘y2 ’ L2 ‘z2 ’ HKFnn0 jAA hxynn0 jAA i Fnn0 jBB hxynn0 jBB i Fnn0 jAB hxynn0 jAB i KL‘yz’ LH‘zx’g n0 g:

expf2iH n

4:2:4:80

With further abbreviations

nn0 jx 2Fnn0 jAA hxnn0 jAA i Fnn0 jBB hxnn0 jBB i Fnn0 jAB hxnn0 jAB i

nn0 jy . . .

nn0 jz . . . nn0 jx 22 Fnn0 jAA hx2nn0 jAA i Fnn0 jBB hx2nn0 jBB i Fnn0 jAB hx2nn0 jAB i nn0 jy . . . nn0 jz . . . "nn0 jxy 42 Fnn0 jAA hxynn0 jAA i Fnn0 jBB hxynn0 jBB i Fnn0 jAB hxynn0 jAB i "nn0 jyz . . . "nn0 jzx . . . fB 2

I 2 cA cB f A

PP n n0

i nn0 jx nn0 jy nn0 jz

expf2iH n n0 g PP I3 cA cB fA fB 2 nn0 jx H 2 nn0 jy K 2 n n0

nn0 jz L "nn0 jxy HK "nn0 jyz KL 2

"nn0 jzx LH expf2iH n

n0 g:

If the Fnn0 jAA , . . . are independent of jHj in the range of measurement which is better fulfilled with neutrons than with X-rays (see below), , , " are the coefficients of the Fourier series: PP Qx i nn0 jx expf2iH n n0 g; n n0

Qz . . . ; Qy . . . ; PP Rx nn0 jx expf2iH n n

n0

Rz . . . ; Ry . . . ; PP Sxy "nn0 jxy expf2iH n n n0

Syz . . . ;

m

4:2:4:79

n0 g; n0 g;

Szx . . . :

The functions Q, R, S are then periodic in reciprocal space.

n

sin 2Hm Kn Lp:

p

4:2:4:81

The intensity is therefore modulated sinusoidally and increases with scattering angle. The modulation gives rise to an asymmetry in the intensity around a Bragg peak. Similar considerations for I3 reveal an intensity contribution h2i times a sum over cosine terms which is symmetric around the Bragg peaks. This term shows quite an analogous influence of local static displacements and thermal movements: an increase of diffuse intensity around the Bragg peaks and a reduction of Bragg intensities, which is not discussed here. The second contribution I2 has no analogue owing to the nonvanishing average displacement. The various diffuse intensity contributions may be separated by symmetry considerations. Once they are separated, the single coefficients may be determined by Fourier inversion. Owing to the symmetry constraints there are relations between the displacements hx . . .i and, in turn, between the

and Q components. The same is true for the , ", and R, S components. Consequently, there are symmetry conditions for the individual contributions of the diffuse intensity which may be used to distinguish them. Generally the total diffuse intensity may be split into only a few independent terms. The single components of Q, R, S may be expressed separately by combinations of diffuse intensities which are measured in definite selected volumes in reciprocal space. Only a minimum volume must be explored in order to reveal the behaviour over the whole reciprocal space. This minimum repeat volume is different for the single components: Isro , Q, R, S or combinations of them. The Borie–Sparks method has been applied very frequently to binary and even ternary systems; some improvements have been communicated by Bardhan & Cohen (1976). The diffuse scattering of the historically important metallic compound Cu3 Au has been studied by Cowley (1950a,b), and the pair correlation parameters could be determined. The typical fourfold splitting was found by Moss (1966) and explained in terms of atomic displacements. The same splitting has been found for many similar compounds such as Cu3 Pd (Ohshima et al., 1976), Au3 Cu (Bessie`re et al., 1983), and Ag1 x Mgx x 0:15 0:20 (Ohshima & Harada, 1986). Similar pair correlation functions have been determined. In order to demonstrate the disorder parameters in terms of structural models, computer programs were used (e.g. Gehlen & Cohen, 1965). A similar microdomain model was proposed by Hashimoto (1974, 1981, 1983, 1987). According to approximations made in the theoretical derivation the evaluation of diffuse scattering is generally restricted to an area in reciprocal space where the influence of displacements is of the same order of magnitude as that of the pair correlation function. The agreement between calculation and measurement is fairly good but it should be remembered that the amount and quality of the experimental information used is low. No residual factors are so far available; these would give an idea of the reliability of the results. The more general case of a multi-component system with several atoms per lattice point was treated similarly by Hayakawa & Cohen (1975). Sources of error in the determination of the short-rangeorder coefficients are discussed by Gragg et al. (1973). In general the assumption of constant Fnn0 jAA , . . . produces an incomplete separation of the order- and displacement-dependent components of diffuse scattering. By an alternative method, by separation of the form factors from the Q, R, S functions and solving a large array of linear relationships by least-squares methods, the accuracy of the separation of the various contributions is improved (Tibbals, 1975;

434

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS Georgopoulos & Cohen, 1977; Wu et al., 1983). The method does not work for neutron diffraction. Also, the case of planar shortrange order with corresponding diffuse intensity along rods in reciprocal space may be treated along the Borie & Sparks method (Ohshima & Moss, 1983). Multi-wavelength methods taking advantage of the variation of the structure factor near an absorption edge (anomalous dispersion) are discussed by Cenedese et al. (1984). The same authors show that in some cases the neutron method allows for a contrast variation by using samples with different isotope substitution. 4.2.4.4.6. Powder diffraction Evaluation of diffuse-scattering data from powder diffraction follows the same theoretical formulae developed for the determination of the radial distribution function for glasses and liquids (Debye & Menke, 1931; Warren & Gingrich, 1934). The final formula for random distributions may be given as (Fender, 1973) P Idp fhjFHj2 i jhFHij2 g si sin2Hri =2Hri : i

4:2:4:82 si represents the number of atoms at distance ri from the origin. An equivalent expression for a substitutional binary alloy is P Idp 1 fj f2 H f2 Hj2 g si sin2Hri =2Hri : i

4:2:4:83 4.2.4.4.7. Small concentrations of defects In the literature small concentrations are treated in terms of fluctuations of the functions n as defined in equation (4.2.4.56). Generally we prefer the introduction of the distribution function of the defects or clusters. Since this problem has already been treated in Section 4.2.4.4.3 only some very brief remarks are given here. The most convenient way to derive the distribution function correctly from experimental data is the use of low-angle scattering which generally shows one or more clear maxima caused by partly periodic properties of the distribution function. For the deconvolution of the distribution function, received by Fourier transformation of the corrected diffused low-angle scattering, the reader is referred to the relevant literature. Since deconvolutions are not unique some reasonable assumptions are necessary for the final solution. Anomalous scattering may be very helpful if applicable. 4.2.4.4.8. Cluster method As mentioned above, the cluster method may be useful for the interpretation of disorder problems. In the general formula of diffuse scattering of random distributions equation (4.2.2.13) may be used. Here jhFHij2 describes the sharp Bragg maxima, while jFHj2 hjFHj2 i jhFHij2 represents the contribution to diffuse scattering. Correlation effects can also be taken into account by using clusters of sufficient size if their distribution may be considered as random in good approximation. The diffuse intensity is then given by P P Id H p jF Hj2 j p F Hj2 , 4:2:4:84

where F H represents the difference structure factor of the th cluster and p is its a priori probability. Obviously equation (4.2.4.84) is of some use in two cases only. (1) The number of clusters is sufficiently small and meets the condition of nearly random distribution. In principle, its structure may then be determined with the aid of refinement methods according to

equation (4.2.4.84). Since the second term is assumed to be known from the average structure, the first term may be evaluated by introducing as many parameters as there are clusters involved. A special computer program for incoherent refinement has to be used if more than one representative cluster has to be introduced. In the case of more clusters, constraints are necessary. (2) The number of clusters with similar structures is not limited. It may be assumed that their size distribution may be expressed by well known analytical expressions, e.g. Gaussians or Lorentzians. The distribution is still assumed to be random. An early application of the cluster method was the calculation of the diffuse intensity of Guinier–Preston zones, where a single cluster is sufficient (see, e.g., Gerold, 1954; Bubeck & Gerold, 1984). Unfortunately no refinements of cluster structures have so far been published. The full theory of the cluster method was outlined by Jagodzinski & Haefner (1967). Some remarks on the use of residual factors should be added here. Obviously the diffuse scattering may be used for refinements in a similar way as in conventional structure determination. For this purpose a sufficiently small reciprocal lattice has to be defined. The size of the reciprocal cell has to be chosen with respect to the maximum gradient of diffuse scattering. Then the diffuse intensity may be described by a product of the real intensity distribution and the small reciprocal lattice. Fourier transformation yields the convolution of the real disordered structure and a large unit cell. In other words, the disordered structure is subdivided into large units and subsequently superimposed (‘projected’) in a single cell. In cases where a clear model of the disorder could be determined, a refinement procedure for atomic and other relevant parameters can be started. In this way a residual factor may be determined. A first approach has been elaborated by Epstein & Welberry (1983) in the case of substitutional disorder of two molecules. The outstanding limiting factor is the collection of weak intensity data. The amount increases rapidly with the complexity of the structure and could even exceed by far the amount which is needed in the case of protein structure refinement. Hence, it seems to be reasonable to restrict the measurement to distinct areas in reciprocal space. Most of these publications, however, use too little information when compared with the minimum of data which would be necessary for the confirmation of the proposed model. Hence, physical and chemical considerations should be used as an additional source of information. 4.2.4.4.9. Comparison between X-ray and neutron methods Apart from experimental arguments in favour of either method, there are some specific points which should be mentioned in this context. The diffuse scattering in question must be separated from Bragg scattering and from other diffuse-scattering contributions. Generally both methods are complementary: neutrons are preferable in cases where X-rays show only a small scattering contrast: (heavy) metal hydrides, oxides, carbides, Al–Mg distribution etc. In favourable cases it is possible to suppress (nuclear) P Bragg scattering of neutrons when isotopes are used so that c f 0 for all equivalent positions. Another way to separate Bragg peaks is to record the diffuse intensity, if possible, at low jHj values. This can be achieved either by measurement at low angles or by using long wavelengths. For reasons of absorption the latter point is the domain of neutron scattering. Exceeding the Bragg cut-off, Bragg scattering is ruled out. In this way ‘diffuse’ background owing to multiple Bragg scattering is avoided. Other diffuse-scattering contributions which increase with the jHj value are thus also minimized: thermal diffuse scattering (TDS) and scattering due to long-range static displacements. On the other hand, lattice distortions, Huang scattering, . . . should be measured at large values of jHj. TDS

435

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS can be separated by purely elastic neutron methods within the limits given by the energy resolution of an instrument. This technique is of particular importance at higher temperatures where TDS becomes remarkably strong. Neutron scattering is a good tool only in cases where (isotope/spin-)incoherent scattering is not too strong. In the case of magnetic materials confusion with paramagnetic diffuse scattering could occur. This is also important when electrons are trapped by defects which themselves act as paramagnetic centres. As mentioned in Section 4.2.4.4.4 the evaluations of the , , " depend on the assumption that the f ’s do not depend on jHj strongly within the range of measurement. Owing to the atomic form factor, this is not always well approximated in the X-ray case and is one of the main sources of error in the determination of the short-rangeorder parameters. 4.2.4.4.10. Dynamic properties of defects Some brief remarks concerning the dynamic properties of defects as discussed in the previous sections now follow. Mass defects (impurity atoms), force-constant defects etc. influence the dynamic properties of the undistorted lattice and one could think of a modified TDS as discussed in Chapter 4.1. In the case of low defect concentrations special vibrational modes characterized by large amplitudes at the defect with frequency shifts and reduced lifetimes (resonant modes) or vibrational modes localized in space may occur. Other modes with frequencies near these particular modes may also be affected. Owing to the very low intensity of these phenomena their influence on the normal TDS is negligible and may be neglected in diffuse-scattering work. Theoretical treatments of crystals with higher defect concentrations are extremely difficult and not developed so far. For further reading see Bo¨ttger (1983). 4.2.4.5. Orientational disorder

Generally high Debye–Waller factors are typical for scattering of orientationally disordered crystals. Consequently only a few Bragg reflections are observable. A large amount of structural information is stored in the diffuse background. It has to be analysed with respect to an incoherent and coherent part, elastic, quasielastic or inelastic nature, short-range correlations within one and the same molecule and between orientations of different molecules, and cross correlations between positional and orientational disorder scattering. Combined X-ray and neutron methods are therefore highly recommended. 4.2.4.5.1. General expressions On the assumption of a well ordered 3D lattice, a general expression for the scattering by an orientationally disordered crystal with one molecule per unit cell may be given. This is a very common situation. Moreover, orientational disorder is frequently related to molecules with an overall ‘globular’ shape and consequently to crystals of high (in particular, averaged) spherical symmetry. In the following the relevant equations are given for this situation; these are discussed in some detail in a review article by Fouret (1979). The orientation of a molecule is characterized by a parameter !l , e.g. the set of Eulerian angles of three molecular axes with respect to the crystal axes: !l 1, . . . , D (D possible different orientations). The equilibrium position of the centre of mass of a molecule in orientation !l is given by rl , the equilibrium position of atom k within a molecule l in orientation !l by rlk and a displacement from this equilibrium position by ulk . Averaging over a long time, i.e. supposing that the lifetime of a discrete configuration is long compared with the period of atomic vibrations, the observed intensity may be deduced from the intensity expression corresponding to a given configuration at time t: PP IH, t Fl H, tFl0 H, t l0

l

Molecular crystals show in principle disorder phenomena similar to those discussed in previous sections (substitutional or displacement disorder). Here we have to replace the structure factors F H, used in the previous sections, by the molecular structure factors in their various orientations. Usually these are rapidly varying functions in reciprocal space which may obscure the disorder diffuse scattering. Disorder in molecular crystals is treated by Guinier (1963), Amoro´s & Amoro´s (1968), Flack (1970), Epstein et al. (1982), Welberry & Siripitayananon (1986, 1987), and others. A particular type of disorder is very common in molecular and also in ionic crystals: the centres of masses of molecules or ionic complexes form a perfect 3D lattice but their orientations are disordered. Sometimes these solids are called plastic crystals. For comparison, the liquid-crystalline state is characterized by an orientational order in the absence of long-range positional order of the centres of the molecules. A clear-cut separation is not possible in cases where translational symmetry occurs in low dimension, e.g. in sheets or parallel to a few directions in crystal space. For discussion of these mesophases see Chapter 4.4. An orientationally disordered crystal may be imagined in a static picture by freezing molecules in different sites in one of several orientations. Local correlations between neighbouring molecules and correlations between position and orientation may be responsible for orientational short-range order. Often thermal reorientations of the molecules are related to an orientationally disordered crystal. Thermal vibrations of the centres of masses of the molecules, librational or rotational excitations around one or more axes of the molecules, jumps between different equilibrium positions or diffusion-like phenomena are responsible for diffuse scattering of dynamic origin. As mentioned above the complexity of molecular structures and the associated large number of thermal modes complicate a separation from static disorder effects.

expf2iH rl rl0 g P Fl H, t fk expf2iH rlk ulk g:

4:2:4:85 4:2:4:86

k

Averaging procedures must be carried out with respect to the thermal vibrations (denoted by an overbar) and over all configurations (symbol h i). The centre-of-mass translational vibrations and librations of the molecules are most important in this context. (Internal vibrations of the molecules are assumed to be decoupled and remain unconsidered.) PP hFl H, tFl0 H, ti IH, t l

l0

expf2iH rl

rl0 g:

4:2:4:85a

Thermal averaging gives (cf. Chapter 4.1) PP I Fl Fl0 expf2iH rl rl0 g Fl Fl0

l

l0

k

k0

PP

fk fk 0 expf2iH rlk

expf2iH ulk

rl0 k 0 g

ul0 k0 g:

4:2:4:87

In the harmonic approximation expf2iH ug is replaced by expf12 j2H uj2 g. This is, however, a more or less crude approximation because strongly anharmonic vibrations are quite common in an orientationally disordered crystal. In this approximation Fl Fl0 becomes PP Fl Fl0 fk fk0 expf Bk !l g

436

k

k0

expf Bk 0 !l0 g expfDlk; l0 k 0 g:

4:2:4:88

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS 2 1 2 2H ulk

Bk is equal to (Debye–Waller factor) and depends on the specific configuration !l . Dlk; l0 k 0 2H ulk 2H ul0 k 0 includes all the correlations between positions, orientations and vibrations of the molecules. Averaging over different configurations demands a knowledge of the orientational probabilities. The probability of finding molecule l in orientation !l is given by p!l . The double probability p!l , !l0 gives the probability of finding two molecules l, l0 in different orientations !l and !l0 , respectively. In the absence of correlations between the orientations we have: p!l , !l0 p!l p!l0 . If correlations exist: p!l , !l0 p!l p0 !l j!l0 where p0 !l j!l0 defines the conditional probability that molecule l0 has the orientation !l if molecule l has the orientation !l0 . For long distances between l and l0 p0 !l j!l0 tends to p!l0 . The difference !l j!l0 p0 !l j!l0 p!l0 characterizes, therefore, the degree of short-range orientational correlation. Note that this formalism corresponds fully to the p , p0 used in the context of translational disorder. The average structure factor, sometimes called averaged form factor, of the molecule is given by P hFl i p!l Fl !l : 4:2:4:89

(b) If intermolecular correlations between the molecules cannot be neglected, the final intensity expression for diffuse scattering is very complicated. In many cases these correlations are caused by dynamical processes (see Chapter 4.1). A simplified treatment assumes the molecule to be a rigid body with a centre-of-mass displacement ul and neglects vibrational–librational and librational–librational correlations: Dl; l0 2H ul 2H ul0 l 6 l0 . The following expression approximately holds: hIi N 2 jhF 0 ij2 LH PP 0 0 Fl !l Fl0 !l0 expfDl; l0 gif2iH rl rl0 g h 0 l l nP P N p!l fk fk 0 expf2iH rlk rl0 k 0 g !l k; k 0

Dlk; l0 k 0 0 for l 6 l0 : From (4.2.4.88) it follows (the prime symbol takes the Debye– Waller factor into account): hIi N 2 jhF 0 ij2 LH nP P P N p!l fk fk 0 exp 2iH rlk k

k 0 !l

rlk0

o expfDlk; lk0 g jhF 0 ij2 P PP N p!l !l j!l0 l60 !l !l0

Fl0 !l Fl0 !l0

expf2iH rl

rl0 g:

NhF 2 i

jhF 0 ij2 NF 2

jhFij2 NjhFij2

hF 2 i

PPPP !l !l 0 k

k0

Fl0 !l Fl0 !l0 expf2iH rl

rl0 k 0 g:

rl0 g expfDl; l0 g:

4:2:4:93

Again the first term describes Bragg scattering and the second corresponds to the average thermal diffuse scattering in the disordered crystal. Because just one molecule belongs to one unit cell only acoustic waves contribute to this part. To an approximation, the result for an ordered crystal may be used by replacing F by hF 0 i [Chapter 4.1, equation (4.1.3.4)]. The third term corresponds to random-disorder diffuse scattering. If librations are neglected this term may be replaced by NhF 2 i hFi2 . The last term in (4.2.4.93) describes space correlations. Omission of expfDl; l0 g or expansion to 1 Dl; l0 are further simplifying approximations. In either (4.2.4.90) or (4.2.4.93) the diffuse-scattering part depends on a knowledge of the conditional probability !l j!l0 and the orientational probability p!l . The latter may be found, at least in principle, from the average structure factor. 4.2.4.5.2. Rotational structure (form) factor In certain cases and with simplifying assumptions, hFi [equation (4.2.4.89)] and hF 2 i [equation (4.2.4.92)] may be calculated. Assuming only one molecule per unit cell and treating the molecule as a rigid body, one derives from the structure factor of an ordered crystal Fl P hFi fk hexpf2iH rlk gi 4:2:4:94 k

and hF 2 i

PP k

k0

fk fk 0 hexpf2iH rlk

rl0 k 0 gi

hexpf2iH rlk gihexpf2iH rl0 k 0 gi:

fk !l fk 0 !l0 p!l

expf2iH rlk

p!l p!l0 fk fk 0

l6l0 !l !l

jhF 0 ij2 4:2:4:91

with

k0

0

4:2:4:90

LH is the reciprocal lattice of the well defined ordered lattice. The first term describes Bragg scattering from an averaged structure. The second term governs the diffuse scattering in the absence of short-range orientational correlations. The last term takes the correlation between the orientations into account. If rigid molecules with centre-of-mass translational displacements and negligible librations are assumed, which is a first approximation only, jhFij2 is no longer affected by a Debye–Waller factor. In this approximation the diffuse scattering may therefore be separated into two parts:

!l !l 0 k

expf2iH rlk rl0 k 0 g o PPP expfDlk; l0 k 0 g p!l !l j!l0

!l

(a) Negligible correlations between vibrations of different molecules (Einstein model):

PPPP

expfDlk; l0 k 0 g

4:2:4:95

If the molecules have random orientation in space the following expressions hold [see, e.g., Dolling et al. (1979)]: P hFi fk j0 H rk 4:2:4:96 k

hjFj2 i

4:2:4:92

The first term in (4.2.4.91) gives the scattering from equilibrium fluctuations in the scattering from individual molecules (diffuse scattering without correlations), the second gives the contribution from the centre-of-mass thermal vibrations of the molecules.

PP k

k0

fk fk 0 f j0 H rk

j0 H rk j0 H rk 0 g:

rk 0 4:2:4:97

j0 z is the zeroth order of the spherical Bessel functions and describes an atom k uniformly distributed over a shell of radius rk .

437

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS In practice the molecules perform more or less finite librations about the main orientation. The structure factor may then be found by the method of symmetry-adapted functions [see, e.g., Press (1973), Press & Hu¨ller (1973), Dolling et al. (1979), Prandl (1981, and references therein)]. P P P k hFi fk 4 i j H rk C Y , ': 4:2:4:98

k

j z is the th order of spherical Bessel functions, the coefficients k C characterize the angular distribution of rk , Y , ' are the spherical harmonics where jHj, , ' denote polar coordinates of H. The general case of an arbitrary crystal, site and molecular symmetry and the case of several symmetrically equivalent orientationally disordered molecules per unit cell are treated by Prandl (1981); an example is given by Hohlwein et al. (1986). As mentioned above, cubic plastic crystals are common and therefore mostly studied up to now. The expression for hFi may then be formulated as an expansion in cubic harmonics, K , ': P PP 0 k hFi fk 4 i j H rk C K , ': 4:2:4:99 k

0 are modified expansion coefficients.) (C Taking into account isotropic centre-of-mass translational displacements, which are not correlated with the librations, we obtain:

hF 0 i hFi expf

2 1 2 6H hU ig:

4:2:4:100

U is the mean-square translational displacement of the molecule. Correlations between translational and vibrational displacements are treated by Press et al. (1979). Equivalent expressions for crystals with symmetry other than cubic may be found from the same concept of symmetry-adapted functions [tables are given by Bradley & Cracknell (1972)]. 4.2.4.5.3. Short-range correlations The final terms in equations (4.2.4.90) and (4.2.4.93) concern correlations between the orientations of different molecules. Detailed evaluations need a knowledge of a particular model. Examples are compounds with nitrate groups (Wong et al., 1984; Lefebvre et al., 1984), CBr4 (More et al., 1980, 1984), and many others (see Sherwood, 1979). The situation is even more complicated when a modulation wave with respect to the occupation of different molecular orientations is superimposed. A limiting case would be a box-like function describing a pattern of domains. Within one domain all molecules have the same orientation. This situation is common in ferroelectrics where molecules exhibit a permanent dipole moment. The modulation may occur in one or more directions in space. The observed intensity in this type of orientationally disordered crystal is characterized by a system of more or less diffuse satellite reflections. The general scattering theory of a crystal with occupational modulation waves follows the same lines as outlined in Section 4.2.3.1. 4.2.5. Measurement of diffuse scattering To conclude this chapter experimental aspects are summarized which are specifically important in diffuse-scattering work. The summary is restricted to film methods commonly used in laboratories and (X-ray or neutron) diffractometer measurements. Sophisticated special techniques and instruments at synchrotron facilities and reactors dedicated to diffuse-scattering work are not described here. The full merit of these machines may be assessed

after inspection of corresponding user handbooks which are available upon request. Also excluded from this section are instruments and methods related to diffuse scattering at low angles, i.e. small-angle scattering techniques. Although no fundamental differences exist between an X-ray experiment in a laboratory and at a synchrotron facility, some specific points have to be considered in the latter case. These are discussed by Matsubara & Georgopoulos (1985), Oshima & Harada (1986), and Ohshima et al. (1986). Generally, diffuse scattering is weak in comparison with Bragg scattering, anisotropically and inhomogeneously distributed in reciprocal space, elastic, inelastic, or quasi-elastic in origin. It is frequently related to more than one structural element, which means that different parts may show different behaviour in reciprocal space and/or on an energy scale. Therefore special care has to be taken concerning the following points: (1) type of experiment: X-rays or neutrons, film or diffractometer/spectrometer, single crystal or powder; (2) strong sources; (3) best choice of wavelength (or energy) of incident radiation if no ‘white’ technique is used; (4) monochromatic and focusing techniques; (5) sample environment and background reduction; (6) resolution and scanning procedure in diffractometer or densitometer recording. On undertaking an investigation of a disorder problem by an analysis of the diffuse scattering an overall picture should first be recorded by X-ray diffraction experiments. Several sections through reciprocal space help to define the problem. For this purpose film methods are preferable. Cameras with relatively short crystal–film distances avoid long exposure times. Unfortunately, there are some disorder problems which cannot be tackled by X-ray methods. X-rays are rather insensitive for the elucidation of disorder problems where light atoms in the presence of heavy atoms play the dominant role, or when elements are involved which scarcely differ in X-ray scattering amplitudes (e.g. Al/Si/Mg). In these cases neutrons have to be used at an early stage. If a significant part of the diffuse scattering is suspected not to be of static origin concomitant purely elastic, quasi-elastic or inelastic neutron experiments have to be planned from the very beginning. Because diffuse scattering is usually weak, intense radiation sources are needed, whereas the background level should be kept as low as possible. Coming to the background problem later, we should make some brief remarks concerning sources. Even a normal modern X-ray tube is a stronger source, defined by the flux density from an anode (number of photons cm 2 s 1 ), than a reactor with the highest available flux. For this reason most experimental work which can be performed with X-rays should be. Generally the characteristic spectrum will be used, but special methods have been developed where the white X-ray spectrum is of interest (see below). A most powerful source in this respect is a modern synchrotron storage ring (see, e.g., Kunz, 1979). With respect to rotating anodes one should bear in mind not only the power but also the flux density, because there is little merit for a broad focus in diffuse-scattering work (separation of sharp and diffuse scattering). One can suppose that synchrotron radiation in the X-ray range will also play an important role in the field of monochromatic diffraction methods, owing to the extremely high brilliance of these sources (number of quanta cm 2 , sr 1 , s 1 and wavelength interval). Diffuse neutron-diffraction work may only be performed on a highor medium-flux reactor. Highly efficient monochromator systems are necessary. In combination with time-of-flight neutron methods pulsed sources are nowadays equivalent to reactors (Windsor, 1982). If film and (X-ray) diffractometer methods are compared, film techniques are highly recommended at an early stage to give a general survey of the disorder problem. Routine X-ray techniques such as rotation photographs, Weissenberg or precession techniques may be used. The Weissenberg method is preferred to the

438

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS precession method in most cases because of the comparatively larger coverage of reciprocal space (with the same wavelength). The drawback of a distorted image of the reciprocal space may be compensated by digitizing the film blackening via a densitometer recording and subsequent plotting. With this procedure a distorted section through the reciprocal lattice may be transformed into a form suitable for easy interpretation (Welberry, 1983). Frequently used are standing-crystal techniques in combination with monochromatic radiation, usually called monochromatic Laue techniques (see, e.g., Flack, 1970). The Noromosic technique (Jagodzinski & Korekawa, 1973) is characterized by a convergent monochromatic beam which simulates an oscillation photograph over a small angular range. Heavily overexposed photographs, with respect to Bragg scattering, allow for sampling of diffuse intensity if a crystal is oriented in such a way that there is a well defined section between the Ewald sphere and the diffuse phenomenon under consideration. By combining single Noromosic photographs, Weissenberg patterns can be simulated. This relatively tedious way of comparison with a true Weissenberg photograph is often unavoidable because the heavily overexposed Bragg peaks obscure weak diffuse phenomena over a considerable area of a photograph. Furthermore, standing pictures are pointwise measurements in comparison with the normal continuous pattern with respect to the crystal setting. Long-exposure Weissenberg photographs are therefore not equivalent to a smaller set of standing photographs. In this context it should be mentioned that a layer-line screen has not only the simple function of a selecting diaphragm, but the gap width determines the resolution volume within which diffuse intensity is collected (Welberry, 1983). For further discussion of questions of resolution see below. Single-crystal diffractometer measurements, either in the X-ray or in the neutron case, are frequently adopted for quantitative measurements of diffuse intensities. Microdensitometer recording of X-ray films is an equivalent method, incorporating corrections for background and other factors into this procedure. A comparison of Weissenberg and diffractometer methods for the measurement of diffuse scattering is given by Welberry & Glazer (1985). In the case of powder-diffractometer experiments preferred orientations/textures could lead to a complete misidentification of the problem. Single-crystal experiments are preferable in some respect, because diffuse phenomena in a powder diagram may be analysed only after an idea about the disorder has been obtained and only in special cases. Nevertheless, high-resolution powder investigations give quick supporting information, e.g. about superlattice peaks, split reflections, lattice strains, domain size effects, lattice-constant change related to a disorder effect etc. Before starting an experiment of any kind, one should specify the optimum wavelength. This is important with respect to the problem to be solved: e.g., point defects cause diffuse scattering to fall off with increasing scattering vector; short-range ordering between clusters causes broad peaks corresponding to large d spacings; lattice-relaxation processes induce a broadening of the interferences (Huang scattering); or static modulation waves with long periods give rise to satellite scattering close to Bragg peaks. In all these cases a long wavelength is preferable. On the other hand, a shorter wavelength is needed if diffuse phenomena are structured in a sense that broad peaks are observable up to large reciprocal vectors, or diffuse streaks or planes have to be recorded up to high values of the scattering vector in order to decide between different models. The 3 -dependence of the scattered intensity, in the framework of the kinematical theory, is a crucial point for exposure or dataacquisition times. Moreover, the accuracy with which an experiment can be carried out suffers from a short wavelength: generally, momentum as well as energy resolution are lower. For a quantitative estimate detailed considerations of resolution in reciprocal (and energy) space are needed. Special attention must

be paid to absorption phenomena, in particular when (in the X-ray case) an absorption edge of an element of the sample is close to the wavelength used. 0:91 A must be avoided in combination with film methods owing to the K edge of Br. Strong fluorescence scattering may completely obscure weak diffuse-scattering phenomena. In comparison with X-rays, the generally lower absorption coefficients of neutrons of any wavelength makes absolute measurements easier. This also allows the use of larger sample volumes, which is not true in the X-ray case. An extinction problem does not exist in diffuse-scattering work. In particular, the use of a long wavelength is profitable when the main diffuse contributions can be recorded within an Ewald sphere as small as the Bragg cutoff of the sample: 2dmax ; a contamination by Bragg scattering can then be avoided. This is also advantageous from a different point of view: because the contribution of thermal diffuse scattering increases with increasing scattering vector H, the relative amount of this component becomes negligibly small within the first reciprocal cell. Highly monochromatic radiation should be used in order to eliminate broadening effects due to the wavelength distribution. Focusing monochromators help to overcome the lack of luminosity. A focusing technique, in particular a focusing camera geometry, is very helpful for deciding between geometrical broadening and ‘true’ diffuseness. With good success a method is used where in a monochromatic divergent beam the sample is placed with its selected axis lying in the scattering plane of the monochromator (Jagodzinski, 1968). The specimen is fully embedded in the incident beam which is focused onto the film. By this procedure the influence of the sample size is suppressed in one dimension. In an oscillation photograph a high resolution perpendicular to the diffuse layer lines may thus be achieved. A serious problem is a careful suppression of background scattering. Incoherent X-ray scattering as an inherent property of a sample occurs as continuous blackening in the case of fluorescence, or as scattering at high 2 angles owing to Compton scattering or ‘incoherent’ inelastic effects. Protecting the film by a thin Al or Ni foil is of some help against fluorescence, but also attenuates the diffuse intensity. Scratching the film emulsion after the exposure from the ‘front’ side of the film is another possibility for reducing the relative amount of the lower-energy fluorescence radiation. Obviously, energy-dispersive counter methods are highly efficient in this case (see below). Air scattering produces a background at low 2 angles which may easily be avoided by special slit systems and evacuation of the camera. In X-ray or neutron diffractometer measurements incoherent and multiple scattering contribute to a background which varies only slowly with 2 and can be subtracted by linear interpolation or fitting a smooth curve, or can even be calculated quantitatively and then subtracted. In neutron diffraction there are rare cases when monoisotopic and ‘zero-spin’ samples are available and, consequently, the corresponding incoherent scattering part vanishes completely. In some cases a separation of coherent and incoherent neutron scattering is possible by polarization analysis (Gerlach et al., 1982). An ‘empty’ scan can take care of instrumental background contributions. Evacuation or controlled-atmosphere studies need a chamber which may give rise to spurious scattering. This can be avoided if no part of the vacuum chamber is hit by the primary beam. The problem is less serious in neutron work. Mounting a specimen, e.g., on a silica fibre with cement, poorly aligned collimators or beam catchers are further sources. Sometimes a specimen has to be enclosed in a capillary which will always be hit by the incident beam. Careful and tedious experimental work is necessary in the case of low- and high-temperature (or -pressure) investigations which have to be carried out in many disorder problems. Whereas the experimental situation is again less serious in neutron scattering, there are large problems with scattering from

439

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS PP 0 walls and containers in X-ray work. Most of the X-ray 0 0 1 R H H0 R 0 exp 2 4:2:5:1 Mkl Hk Hl : investigations have therefore been made on quenched samples. k l Because TDS is dominating at high temperatures, also in the presence of a static disorder problem, the quantitative separation Gaussians are assumed for the mosaic distributions and for the can hardly be carried out in the case of high experimental transmission functions the parameters are involved in the background. Calculation and subtraction of the TDS is possible in coefficients R 00 and Mkl0 . principle, but difficult in practice. The general assumption of Gaussians is not too serious in the A quantitative analysis of diffuse-scattering data is essential for a X-ray case (Iizumi, 1973). Restrictions are due to absorption which definite decision about a disorder model. By comparison of makes the profiles asymmetric. Box-like functions are considered to calculated and corrected experimental data the magnitudes of the be better for the spectral distribution or for large apertures (Boysen parameters of the structural disorder model may be derived. A & Adlhart, 1987). These questions are treated in some detail by careful analysis of the data requires, therefore, corrections for Klug & Alexander (1954). The main features, however, may also be polarization (X-ray case), absorption and resolution. These may be derived by the Gaussian approximation. In practice the function R performed in the usual way for polarization and absorption. Very may be obtained either by calculation from the known instrumental detailed considerations, however, are necessary for the question of parameters or by measuring Bragg peaks of a perfect unstrained instrumental resolution which depends, in addition to other factors, crystal. In the latter case [cf. equation (4.2.5.2)] the intensity profile on the scattering angle and implies intensity corrections analogous is given solely by the resolution function. A normalization with the to the Lorentz factor used in structure analysis from sharp Bragg Bragg intensities is also useful in order to place the diffusereflections. scattering intensity on an absolute scale. Resolution is conveniently described by a function, RH H0 , In single-crystal diffractometry the measured intensity is given which is defined as the probability of detecting a photon or neutron by the convolution product of d=d with R, Z with momentum transfer hH hk k0 when the instrument is d set to measure H0 . This function R depends on the instrumental IH0 4:2:5:2 H RH H0 dH, d

parameters (collimations, mosaic spread of monochromator, scattering angle) and the spectral width of the source. Fig. 4.2.5.1 where d=d describes the scattering cross section for the disorder shows a schematic sketch of a diffractometer setting. Detailed problem. In more accurate form the mosaic of the sample has to be considerations of resolution volume in X-ray diffractometry are included: given by Sparks & Borie (1966). If a triple-axis (neutron) Z d instrument is used, for example in a purely elastic configuration, IH0 H k kRH H0 dH dk d

the set of instrumental parameters is extended by the mosaic of the Z analyser and the collimations between analyser and detector (see d 0 4:2:5:2a H R 0 H0 H0 dH0 : Chapter 4.1). d

If photographic (X-ray) techniques are used, the detector aperture R is controlled by the slit width of the microdensitometer. A general R 0 H0 H0 kRH0 k H0 dk. k descrformulation of R in neutron diffractometry is given by Cooper & ibes the mosaic block distribution around a most probable vector Nathans (1968): k0 : k k k0 ; H0 H k. In formulae (4.2.5.1) and (4.2.5.2) all factors independent of 2 are neglected. All intensity expressions have to be calculated from equations (4.2.5.2) or (4.2.5.2a). In the case of a dynamical disorder problem, i.e. when the differential cross section also depends on energy transfer h!, the integration must be extended over energy. The intensity variation of diffuse peaks with 2 was studied in detail by Yessik et al. (1973). In principle all special cases are included there. In practice, however, some important simplifications can be made if d=d is either very broad or very sharp compared with R, i.e. for Bragg peaks, sharp streaks, ‘thin’ diffuse layers or extended 3D diffuse peaks (Boysen & Adlhart, 1987). In the latter case the cross section d=d may be treated as nearly constant over the resolution volume so that the corresponding ‘Lorentz’ factor is independent of 2: L3D 1:

4:2:5:3

For a diffuse plane within the scattering plane with very small thickness and slowly varying cross section within the plane, one derives for a point measurement in the plane: 0

2 L2D; k 12 22 2v

sin2

1=2

,

4:2:5:4

exhibiting an explicit dependence on ( 10 , 2 , 2v determining an effective vertical divergence before the sample, the divergence before the detector and the vertical mosaic spread of the sample, respectively). In the case of relaxed vertical collimations 10 , 2 2v 0

L2D; k 12 22 Fig. 4.2.5.1. Schematic sketch of a diffractometer setting.

i.e. again independent of .

440

1=2

,

4:2:5:4a

4.2. DISORDER DIFFUSE SCATTERING OF X-RAYS AND NEUTRONS Scanning across the diffuse layer in a direction perpendicular to it one obtains an integrated intensity which is also independent of 2. This is even true if approximations other than Gaussians are used. If, on the other hand, an equivalent diffuse plane is positioned perpendicular to the scattering plane, the equivalent expression for L2D; ? of a point measurement is given by 2 sin2 cos2 L2D; ? ' 42H

22 sin2

sin2 400 sin2 sin2 4001 sin sin sin ,

4:2:5:5

where gives the angle between the line of intersection between the diffuse and the scattering plane and the vector H0 . The coefficients 2H , 2 , 01 , 001 , are either instrumental parameters or functions of them, defining horizontal collimations and mosaic spreads. In the case of a (sharp) X-ray line (produced, for example, by filtering) the last two terms in equation (4.2.5.5) vanish. The use of integrated intensities from individual scans perpendicular to the diffuse plane, now carried out within the scattering plane, again gives a Lorentz factor independent of 2. In the third fundamental special case, diffuse streaking along one reciprocal direction within the scattering plane (narrow cross section, slowly varying intensity along the streak), the Lorentz factor for a point measurement may be expressed by the product L1D; k ' L2D; k L2D; ? ,

4:2:5:6

where now defines the angle between the streak and H0 . The integrated intensity taken from an H scan perpendicular to the streak has to be corrected by a Lorentz factor which is equal to L2D; k [equation (4.2.5.4)]. In the case of a diffuse streak perpendicular to the scattering plane a relatively complicated equation holds for the corresponding Lorentz factor (Boysen & Adlhart, 1987). Again more simple expressions hold for integrated intensities from H scans perpendicular to the streaks. Such scans may be performed in the radial direction (corresponding to a –2 scan): 2 L1D; ?; rad 42H 22 02 1

1=2

1= sin

4:2:5:7

or perpendicular to the radial direction (within the scattering plane) (corresponding to an ! scan): L1D; ?; per 22 21 400 tan2

4001 tan

1=2

1= cos 4:2:5:8

Note that only the radial scan yields a simple dependence 1= sin . From these considerations it is recommended that integrated intensities from scans perpendicular to a diffuse plane or a diffuse streak should be used in order to extract the disorder cross sections. For other scan directions, which make an angle with the intersection line (diffuse plane) or with a streak, the L factors are simply: L2D; ? = sin and L1D; ? = sin , respectively. One point should be emphasized: since in a usual experiment the integration is performed over an angle ! via a general ! : g2 scan, an additional correction factor arises: !=H sin =k0 sin 2:

4:2:5:9

is the angle between H0 and the scan direction H ; g tan tan =2 tan defines the coupling ratio between the rotation of the crystal around a vertical axis and the rotation of the detector shaft. Most frequently used are the so-called 1:2 and !-scan techniques where 0 and 90°, respectively. It should be mentioned that the results in the neutron case are restricted to the elastic diffuse part, since in a diffractometer measurement the inelastic part deserves special attention concerning the integration over energy by the detector (Tucciarone et al.,

1971; Grabcev, 1974). If a triple-axis instrument is used, the collimations 2 and 2 have to be replaced by effective values after the sample owing to the analyser system. In order to optimize a single-crystal experiment, the scan direction and also the instrumental collimations should be carefully chosen according to the anisotropy of the diffuse phenomenon. If the variation of d=d is appreciable along a streak, the resolution should be held narrow in one direction and relaxed in the other to gain intensity and the scans should be performed perpendicular to that direction. If the variation is smooth the sharpest signal is measured by a scan perpendicular to the streak. In any case, a good knowledge of the resolution and its variation with 2 is helpful. Even the diffuse background in powder diagrams contains valuable information about disorder. Only in very simple cases can a model be deduced from a powder pattern alone; however, a refinement of a known disorder model can favourably be carried out, e.g. the temperature dependence may be studied. On account of the intensity integration the ratio of diffuse intensity to Bragg intensity is enhanced in a powder pattern. Moreover, a powder pattern contains, in principle, all the information about the sample and might thus reveal more than single-crystal work. The quantitative calculation of a diffuse background is also helpful in combination with Rietveld’s (1969) method for refining an averaged structure by fitting (powder) Bragg reflections. In particular, for highly anisotropic diffuse phenomena characteristic asymmetric line shapes occur. The calculation of these line shapes is treated in the literature, mostly neglecting the instrumental resolution (see, e.g., Warren, 1941; Wilson, 1949; Jones, 1949; and de Courville-Brenasin et al., 1981). This is not justified if the variation of the diffuse intensity becomes comparable with that of the resolution function as is often the case in neutron diffraction. It may be incorporated by taking advantage of a resolution function of a powder instrument (Caglioti et al., 1958). A detailed analysis of diffuse peaks is given by Yessik et al. (1973), the equivalent considerations for diffuse planes and streaks by Boysen (1985). The case of 3D random disorder (incoherent neutron scattering, monotonous Laue scattering, averaged TDS, multiple scattering or short-range-order modulations) is treated by Sabine & Clarke (1977). In polycrystalline samples the cross section has to be averaged over all orientations (nc number of crystallites in the sample): Z dp 0 nc d 0 0 0 H 2 4:2:5:10 H R jH j jH0 j dH0 d

H d

and this averaged cross section enters the relevant expressions for the convolution product with the resolution function. A general intensity expression may be written as (Yessik et al., 1973): P In H0 P mAn n H0 , : 4:2:5:11

P denotes a scaling factor depending on the instrumental luminosity, the shortest distance to the origin of the reciprocal lattice, m the corresponding symmetry-induced multiplicity, An contains the structure factor of the structural units and the type of disorder, and n describes the characteristic modulation of the diffuse phenomenon of dimension n in the powder pattern. These expressions are given below with the assumption of Gaussian line shapes of width D for the narrow extension(s). The formulae depend on a factor M A1=2 4k12 H02 =32 ln 2, where A1=2 describes the dependence of the Bragg peaks on the instrumental parameters U, V, W (see Caglioti et al., 1958),

441

A21=2 U tan2 V tan W :

4:2:5:12

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS simplified to p erf f H0 = 2M 2 D2 g p 1=H20 2M 2 D2

2 =H0 1

expf H0

Fig. 4.2.5.2. Line profiles in powder diffraction for sharp and diffuse reflections; peaks (full line), continuous streaks (dot–dash lines) and continuous planes (broken lines). For explanation see text.

(a) Isotropic diffuse peak around 0 2M 2 D2 expf H0

1=2

1= 2

2 =2M 2 D2 g:

4:2:5:13

The moduli jH0 j and jj enter the exponential, i.e. the variation of d=d along jH0 j is essential. For broad diffuse peaks M D the angular dependence is due to 1= 2 , i.e. proportional to 1= sin2 . This result is valid for diffuse peaks of any shape. (b) Diffuse streak 1 2M 2 D2 expf H0

1=2 R

2 q2 1=2 p 2 q2 =2M 2 D2 g dq:

4:2:5:14

The integral has to be evaluated numerically. If M 2 D2 is not too large, the term 1=k02 1= 2 q2 varies only slowly compared to the exponential term and may be kept outside the integral, setting it approximately to 1=H02 . (c) Diffuse plane (with r2 q2x q2y ) R 2 M 2 D2 1=2 r2 = 2 r2 p expf H0 2 r2 =2M 2 D2 g dr:

4:2:5:15

With the same approximation as in (b) the expression may be

2 =2M 2 D2 g:

4:2:5:16

(d) Slowly varying diffuse scattering in three dimensions 3 constant: Consequently, the intensity is directly proportional to the cross section. The characteristic functions 0 , 1 and 2 are shown in Fig. 4.2.5.2 for equal values of and D. Note the relative peak shifts and the high-angle tail. Techniques for the measurement of diffuse scattering using a white spectrum are common in neutron diffraction. Owing to the relatively low velocity of thermal or cold neutrons, time-of-flight (TOF) methods in combination with time-resolving detector systems, placed at a fixed angle 2, allow for a simultaneous recording along a radial direction through the origin of reciprocal space (see, e.g., Turberfield, 1970; Bauer et al., 1975). The scan range is limited by the Ewald spheres corresponding to max and min , respectively. With several such detector systems placed at different angles, several scans may be carried out simultaneously during one neutron pulse. There is a renaissance of these methods in combination with high-flux pulsed neutron sources. An analogue of neutron TOF diffractometry in the X-ray case is a combination of a white source of X-rays and an energy-dispersive detector. This technique, which has been known in principle for a long time, suffered from relatively weak white sources. With the development of high-power X-ray generators or the powerful synchrotron source this method has become highly interesting in recent times. Its use in diffuse-scattering work (in particular, resolution effects) is discussed by Harada et al. (1984). Valuable developments with a view to diffuse-scattering work are multidetectors (see, e.g., Haubold, 1975) and position-sensitive detectors for X-rays (Arndt, 1986a) and neutrons (Convert & Forsyth, 1983). A linear position-sensitive detector allows one to record a large amount of data at the same time, which is very favourable in powder work and also in diffuse scattering with single crystals. By combining a linear position-sensitive detector and the TOF method a whole area in reciprocal space is accessible simultaneously (Niimura et al., 1982; Niimura, 1986). At present, area detectors are mainly used in combination with low-angle scattering techniques, but are also of growing interest for diffusescattering work (Arndt, 1986b).

442


4.3. Diffuse scattering in electron diffraction BY J. M. COWLEY

AND

J. K. GJØNNES

4:3:1:3

scattering increases and the Bragg beams are reduced in intensity until there is only a diffuse ‘channelling pattern’ where the features depend in only a very indirect way on the incident-beam direction or on the sources of the diffuse scattering (Uyeda & Nonoyama, 1968). The multiple-scattering effects make the quantitative interpretation of diffuse scattering more difficult and complicate the extraction of particular components, e.g. disorder scattering. Much of the multiple scattering involves inelastic scattering processes. However, electrons that have lost energy of the order of 1 eV or more can be subtracted experimentally by use of electron energy filters (Krahl et al., 1990; Krivanek et al., 1992) which are commercially available. Measurement can be made also of the complete scattering function Iu, , but such studies have been rare. Another significant improvement to quantitative measurement of diffuse electron scattering is offered by new recording devices: slow-scan charge-couple-device cameras (Krivanek & Mooney, 1993) and imaging plates (Mori et al., 1990). There are some advantages in the use of electrons which make it uniquely valuable for particular applications. (1) Diffuse-scattering distributions can be recorded from very small specimen regions, a few nm in diameter and a few nm thick. The diameter of the specimen area may be varied readily up to several mm. (2) Diffraction information on defects or disorder may be correlated with high-resolution electron-microscope imaging of the same specimen area [see Section 4.3.8 in IT C (1999)]. (3) The electron-diffraction pattern approximates to a planar section of reciprocal space, so that complicated configurations of diffuse scattering may be readily visualized (see Fig. 4.3.1.2). (4) Dynamical effects may be exploited to obtain information about localization of sources of the diffuse scattering within the unit cell.

where the brackets may indicate a time average, an expectation value, or a spatial average over the periodicity of the lattice in the case of static deviations from a periodic structure. The considerations of TDS and static defects and disorder of Chapters 4.1 and 4.2 thus may be applied directly to electron diffraction in the kinematical approximation when the differences in experimental conditions and diffraction geometry are taken into account. The most prominent contribution to the diffuse background in electron diffraction, however, is the inelastic scattering at low angles arising mainly from the excitation of outer electrons. This is quite different from the X-ray case where the inelastic (‘incoherent’) scattering, Su, goes to zero at small angles and increases to a value proportional to Z for high values of juj. The difference is due to the Coulomb nature of electron scattering, which leads to the kinematical intensity expression S=u4 , emphasizing the small-angle region. At high angles, the inelastic scattering from an atom is then proportional to Z=u4 , which is considerably less than the corresponding elastic scattering Z f 2 =u4 which approaches Z 2 =u4 (Section 2.5.2) (see Fig. 4.3.1.1). The kinematical description can be used for electron scattering only when the crystal is very thin (10 nm or less) and composed of light atoms. For heavy atoms such as Au or Pb, crystals of thickness 1 nm or more in principal orientations show strong deviations from kinematical behaviour. With increasing thickness, dynamical scattering effects first modify the sharp Bragg reflections and then have increasingly significant effects on the diffuse scattering. Bragg scattering of the diffuse scattering produces Kikuchi lines and other effects. Multiple diffuse scattering broadens the distribution and smears out detail. As the thickness increases further, the diffuse

Fig. 4.3.1.1. Comparison between the kinematical inelastic scattering (full line) and elastic scattering (broken) for electrons and X-rays. Values for silicon [Freeman (1960) and IT C (1999)].

4.3.1. Introduction The origins of diffuse scattering in electron-diffraction patterns are the same as in the X-ray case: inelastic scattering due to electronic excitations, thermal diffuse scattering (TDS) from atomic motions, scattering from crystal defects or disorder. For diffraction by crystals, the diffuse scattering can formally be described in terms of a nonperiodic deviation ' from the periodic, average crystal potential, ': 'r, t, 'r, t 'r

4:3:1:1

where ' may have a static component from disorder in addition to time-dependent fluctuations of the electron distribution or atomic positions. In the kinematical case, the diffuse scattering can be treated separately. The intensity Id as a function of the scattering variable u juj 2 sin = and energy transfer h is then given by the Fourier transform F of ' Iu, juj2 jF f'r, tgj2 F fPd r, g 4:3:1:2 and may also be written as the Fourier transform of a correlation function Pd representing fluctuations in space and time (see Cowley, 1981). When the energy transfers are small – as with TDS – and hence not measured, the observed intensity corresponds to an integral over : Iu Id u Iav u R Id u Id u, d F fPd r, 0g and also Id u hjuj2 i

jhuij2 ,


4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS wavevectors and energies before and after the scattering between object states no and n; Pno are weights of the initial states; W(u) is a form factor (squared) for the individual particle. In equation (4.3.2.1), u is essentially momentum transfer. When the energy transfer is small E=E , we can still write juj 2 sin =, then the sum over final states n is readily performed and an expression of the Waller–Hartree type is obtained for the total inelastic scattering as a function of angle: Iinel u /

S , u4

where Su Z

Z P

j fjj uj2

j1

Fig. 4.3.1.2. Electron-diffraction pattern from a disordered crystal of 17Nb2 O5 :48WO3 close to the [001] orientation of the tetragonal tungsten-bronze-type structure (Iijima & Cowley, 1977).

These experimental and theoretical aspects of electron diffraction have influenced the ways in which it has been applied in studies of diffuse scattering. In general, we may distinguish three different approaches to the interpretation of diffuse scattering: (a) The crystallographic way, in which the Patterson- or correlation-function representation of the local order is emphasized, e.g. by use of short-range-order parameters. (b) The physical model in terms of excitations. These are usually described in reciprocal (momentum) space: phonons, plasmons etc. (c) Structure models in direct space. These must be derived by trial or by chemical considerations of bonds, coordinates etc. Owing to the difficulties of separating the different components in the diffuse scattering, most work on diffuse scattering of electrons has followed one or both of the two last approaches, although Patterson-type interpretation, based upon kinematical scattering including some dynamical corrections, has also been tried.

In the kinematical approximation, a general expression which includes inelastic scattering can be written in the form quoted by Van Hove (1954) m3 k 22 h6 ko W u

X

En

Pno

Z XX jhno j expf2iu Rj gjnij2 j1

Eno h

j 6k

j fjk uj2 ,

4:3:2:1

for the intensity of scattering as function of energy transfer and momentum transfer from a system of Z identical particles, Rj . Here m and h have their usual meanings; ko and k, Eno and En are

4:3:2:2

and where the one-electron f ’s for Hartree–Fock orbitals, fjk u hjj exp2iu rjki, have been calculated by Freeman (1959, 1960) for atoms up to Z 30. The last sum is over electrons with the same spin only. The Waller–Hartree formula may be a very good approximation for Compton scattering of X-rays, where most of the scattering occurs at high angles and multiple scattering is no problem. With electrons, it has several deficiencies. It does not take into account the electronic structure of the solid, which is most important at low values of u. It does not include the energy distribution of the scattering. It does not give a finite cross section at zero angle, if u is interpreted as an angle. In order to remedy this, we should go back to equation (4.3.1.2) and decompose u into two components, one tangential part which is associated with angle in the usual way and one normal component along the beam direction, un , which may be related to the excitation energy E En Eno by the expression un Ek =2E. This will introduce a factor 1=u2 u2n in the intensity at small angles, often written as 1=2 2E , with E estimated from ionization energies etc. (Strictly speaking, E is not a constant, not even for scattering from one shell. It is a weighted average which will vary with u.) Calculations beyond this simple adjustment of the Waller– Hartree-type expression are few. Plasmon scattering has been treated on the basis of a nearly free electron model by Ferrel (1957): d2 1=2 aH mv2 N Imf1="g=2 2E , dE d

4:3:2:3

where m, v are relativistic mass and velocity of the incident electron, N is the density of the valence electrons and "E, their dielectric constant. Upon integration over E: Ep d 1=2 2E G, c , d 2aH mvN

4.3.2. Inelastic scattering

Iu,

Z P Z P

4:3:2:4

where G, c takes account of the cut-off angle c . Inner-shell excitations have been studied because of their importance to spectroscopy. The most realistic calculations may be those of Leapman et al. (1980) where one-electron wavefunctions are determined for the excited states in order to obtain ‘generalized oscillator strengths’ which may then be used to modify equation (4.3.1.2). At high energies and high momentum transfer, the scattering will approach that of free electrons, i.e. a maximum at the so-called Bethe ridge, E h2 u2 =2m. A complete and detailed picture of inelastic scattering of electrons as a function of energy and angle (or scattering variable) is lacking, and may possibly be the least known area of diffraction by solids. It is further complicated by the dynamical scattering, which involves the incident and diffracted electrons and also the ejected atomic electron (see e.g. Maslen & Rossouw, 1984).

444

4.3. DIFFUSE SCATTERING IN ELECTRON DIFFRACTION 4.3.3. Kinematical and pseudo-kinematical scattering Kinematical expressions for TDS or defect and disorder scattering according to equation (4.3.1.3) can be obtained by inserting the appropriate atomic scattering factors in place of the X-ray scattering factors in Chapter 4.1. The complications introduced by dynamical diffraction are considerable (see Section 4.3.4). In the most general case, a complete specification of the disordered structure may be needed. However, for thin specimens, approximate treatments of the deviations from kinematical scattering may lead to relatively simple forms. Two such cases are treated in this section, both relying on the small-angle nature of electron scattering. The first is based upon the phase-object approximation, which applies to small angles and thin specimens. The amplitude at the exit surface of a specimen can always be written as a sum of a periodic and a nonperiodic part, and may in analogy with the kinematical case [equation (4.3.1.1)] be written r r r, 4:3:3:1 where r is a vector in two dimensions. The intensities can be separated in the same way [cf. equation (4.3.1.3)]. When the phase-object approximation applies (Chapter 2.1) r expf i'rg expf i'rg1

i'r

. . .:

4:3:3:2

Then the Bragg reflections are given by Fourier transform of the periodic part, viz: hexpf i'rgi expf i'rg exp 122 h'2 ri ; 4:3:3:3 note that an absorption function is introduced. The diffuse scattering derives from i'r expf i'rg,

4:3:3:4

Id u 2 ju av uj2 :

4:3:3:5

so that Thus, the kinematical diffuse-scattering amplitude is convoluted with the amplitude function for the average structure, i.e. the set of sharp Bragg beams. When the direct beam, av 0, is relatively strong, the kinematical diffuse scattering will be modified to only a limited extent by convolution with the Bragg reflections. To the extent that the diffuse scattering is periodic in reciprocal space, the effect will be to modify the intensity by a slowly varying function. Thus the shapes of local diffuse maxima will not be greatly affected. The electron-microscope image contrast derived from the diffuse scattering will be obtained by inserting equation (4.3.3.4) in the appropriate intensity expressions of Section 4.3.8 of IT C (1999). Another approach may be used for extended crystal defects in thin films, e.g. faults normal or near-normal to the film surface. Often, an average periodic structure may not readily be defined, as in the case of a set of incommensurate stacking faults. Kinematically, the projection of the structure in the simplest case may be described by convoluting the projection of a unit-cell structure with a nonperiodic set of delta functions which constitute a distribution function: P 'r '0 r r rn '0 r dr: 4:3:3:6 n

Then the diffraction-pattern intensity is Iu j0 uj2 jDuj2 :

4:3:3:7

Here, 0 u is the scattering amplitude of the unit whereas the function jDuj2 , where Du F fdrg, gives the configuration

of spots, streaks or other diffraction maxima corresponding to the faulted structure (see e.g. Marks, 1985). In the projection (column) approximation to dynamical scattering, the wavefunction at the exit surface may be given by an expression identical to (4.3.3.6), but with a wavefunction, 0 r, for the unit in place of the projected potential, '0 r. An intensity expression of the same form as (4.3.3.7) then applies, with a dynamical scattering amplitude 0 for the scattering unit substituted for the kinematical amplitude 0 . Iu j 0 uj2 jDuj2 ,

4:3:3:8

which in the simplest case describes a diffraction pattern with the same features as in the kinematical case. Note that 0 u may have different symmetries when the incident beam is tilted away from a zone axis, leading to diffuse streaks etc. appearing also in positions where the kinematical diffuse scattering is zero. More complicated cases have been considered by Cowley (1976a) who applied this type of analysis to the case of nonperiodic faulting in magnesium fluorogermanate (Cowley, 1976b). 4.3.4. Dynamical scattering: Bragg scattering effects The distribution of diffuse scattering is modified by higher-order terms in essentially two ways: Bragg scattering of the incident and diffuse beams or multiple diffuse scattering, or by a combination. Theoretical treatment of the Bragg scattering effects in diffuse scattering has been given by many authors, starting with Kainuma’s (1955) work on Kikuchi-line contrast (Howie, 1963; Fujimoto & Kainuma, 1963; Gjønnes, 1966; Rez et al., 1977; Maslen & Rossouw, 1984; Wang, 1995; Allen et al., 1997). Mathematical formalism may vary but the physical pictures and results are essentially the same. They may be discussed with reference to a Born-series expansion, i.e. by introducing the potential ' in the integral equation, as a sum of a periodic and a nonperiodic part [cf. equation (4.3.1.1)] and arranging the terms by orders of '.

0

G'

1 G' G'2 . . . 2

. . . 1 G' G'

0 0

2

. . . 1 G' G' 2 . . . G'1 G' G'

0

higher-order terms:

4:3:4:1

Some of the higher-order terms contributing to the Bragg scattering can be included by adding the essentially imaginary term h'G'i to the static potential '. Theoretical treatments have mostly been limited to the first-order diffuse scattering. With the usual approximation to forward scattering, the expression for the amplitude of diffuse scattering in a direction k0 u g can be written as u g

PPRz

Shg k0 u, z

z1

g f 0

u g

fSf 0 k0 , z1 dz1

4:3:4:2

and read (from right to left): Sf 0 , Bragg scattering of the incident beam above the level z1 ; , diffuse scattering within a thin layer dz1 through the Fourier components of the nonperiodic potential ; Shg , Bragg scattering between diffuse beams in the lower part of the crystal. It is commonly assumed that diffuse scattering at different levels can be treated as independent (Gjønnes, 1966), then the intensity expression becomes

445

Iu g

PPPPRz h h0 f

f0 0

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS X fii h Sgh 2Sgh hu u hi 0 2 i

0

hu h f u h Sf 0 1Sf0 0 1 dz1 ,

0

f i 4:3:4:3

where (1) and (2) refer to the regions above and below the diffusescattering layer. This expression can be manipulated further, e.g. by introducing Bloch-wave expansion of the scattering matrices, viz Iu g

hu u

0

0

i z expi j j z

i i0 j j0 hf u h ff u h0 f 0 i 0

Cfi 1Cfi 0 1C0i 1C0i 1,

i6j

u2

u2 h

,

4:3:4:6

where fij are the one-electron amplitudes (Freeman, 1959). A similar expression for scattering by phonons is obtained in terms of the scattering factors Gj u, g for the branch j, wavevector g and a polarization vector lj; q (see Chapter 4.1):

hh0 ff 0 jj0 ii0

expi i

uj

2

u2 h u XX fij ufij jh uj i

PPPP j 0 0 Cg 2Cgj 2Chj 2Chj 0 2

fii ufii jh

hi Gj u, qGj u

h, q,

4:3:4:7

independent phonons being assumed. For scattering from substitutional order in a binary alloy with ordering on one site only, we obtain simply u u

4:3:4:4

which may be interpreted as scattering by ' between Bloch waves belonging to the same branch (intraband scattering) or different branches (interband scattering). Another alternative is to evaluate the scattering matrices by multislice calculations (Section 4.3.5). Expressions such as (4.3.4.2) contain a large number of terms. Unless very detailed calculations relating to a precisely defined model are to be carried out, attention should be focused on the most important terms. In Kikuchi-line contrast, the scattering in the upper part of the crystal is usually not considered and frequently the angular variation of the u is also neglected. In diffraction contrast from small-angle inelastic scattering, it may be sufficient to consider the intraband terms [i i0 , j j0 in (4.3.4.3)]. In studies of diffuse-scattering distribution, the factor hu hu h0 i will produce two types of terms: Those with h h0 result only in a redistribution of intensity between corresponding points in the Brillouin zones, with the same total intensity. Those with h 6 h0 lead to enhancement or reduction of the total diffuse intensity and hence absorption from the Bragg beam and enhanced/ reduced intensity of secondary radiation, i.e. anomalous absorption and channelling effects. They arise through interference between different Fourier components of the diffuse scattering and carry information about position of the sources of diffuse scattering, referred to the projected unit cell. This is exploited in channelling experiments, where beam direction is used to determine atom reaction (Taftø & Spence, 1982; Taftø & Lehmpfuhl, 1982). Gjønnes & Høier (1971) expressed this information in terms of the Fourier transform R of the generalized or Kikuchi-line form factor; hu u hiu2 u h2 Qu h F fRr, gg

h j'uj2

fA ju

hj fA u

fB ju fB u

hj

,

4:3:4:8 where fA; B are atomic scattering factors. It is seen that Qu then does not contain any new information; the location of the site involved in the ordering is known. When several sites are involved in the ordering, the dynamical scattering factor becomes less trivial, since scattering factors for the different ordering parameters (for different sites) will include a factor exp2irm h (see Andersson et al., 1974). From the above expressions, it is found that the Bragg scattering will affect diffuse scattering from different sources differently: Diffuse scattering from substitutional order will usually be enhanced at low and intermediate angles, whereas scattering from thermal and electronic fluctuations will be reduced at low angles and enhanced at higher angles. This may be used to study substitutional order and displacement order (size effect) separately (Andersson, 1979). The use of such expressions for quantitative or semiquantitative interpretation raises several problems. The Bragg scattering effects occur in all diffuse components, in particular the inelastic scattering, which thus may no longer be represented by a smooth, monotonic background. It is best to eliminate this experimentally. When this cannot be done, the experiment should be arranged so as to minimize Kikuchi-line excess/deficient terms, by aligning the incident beam along a not too dense zone. In this way, one may optimize the diffuse-scattering information and minimize the dynamical corrections, which then are used partly as guides to conditions, partly as refinement in calculations. The multiple scattering of the background remains as the most serious problem. Theoretical expressions for multiple scattering in the absence of Bragg scattering have been available for some time (Moliere, 1948), as a sum of convolution integrals

4:3:4:5

Iu tI1 u 1=2t2 I2 u . . . exp t, 4:3:4:9

includes information both about correlations between sources of diffuse scattering and about their position in the projected unit cell. RIt is seen that Qu, 0 represents the kinematical intensity, hence Rr, g dg is the Patterson function. The integral of Qu, h in the plane gives the anomalous absorption (Yoshioka, 1957) which is related to the distribution Rr, 0 of scattering centres across the unit cell. The scattering factor hu u hi can be calculated for different modes. For one-electron excitations as an extension of the Waller–Hartree expression (Gjønnes, 1962; Whelan, 1965):

where I2 u I1 u I1 u . . . etc., and I1 u is normalized. A complete description of multiple scattering in the presence of Bragg scattering should include Bragg scattering between diffuse scattering at all levels z1 , z2 , etc. This quickly becomes unwieldy. Fortunately, the experimental patterns seem to indicate that this is not necessary: The Kikuchi-line contrast does not appear to be very sensitive to the exact Bragg condition of the incident beam. Høier (1973) therefore introduced Bragg scattering only in the last part of the crystal, i.e. between the level zn and the final thickness z for ntimes scattering. He thus obtained the formula:

446

Iu h

P j

4.3. DIFFUSE SCATTERING IN ELECTRON DIFFRACTION

( jChj j2 Aj1

PP g 6g0

F1 u, g, g0 Cgj Cgj0

) PP j Ang Fn u, gjCgj j2 ,

4:3:4:10

n g

where Fn are normalized scattering factors for nth-order multiple diffuse scattering and Ajn are multiple-scattering coefficients which include absorption. When the thickness is increased, the variation of Fn u, g with angle becomes slower, and an expression for intensity of the channelling pattern is obtained (Gjønnes & Taftø, 1976): Iu h

PPP j

g n

jChj j2 jCgj j2 Ajn

P P jChj j2 Ajn ! jChj j2 = j u: j

4:3:4:11

n

Another approach is the use of a modified diffusion equation (Ohtsuki et al., 1976). These expressions seem to reproduce the development of the general background with thickness over a wide range of thicknesses. It may thus appear that the contribution to the diffuse background from known sources can be treated adequately – and that such a procedure must be included together with adequate filtering of the inelastic component in order to improve the quantitative interpretation of diffuse scattering.

4.3.5. Multislice calculations for diffraction and imaging The description of dynamical diffraction in terms of the progression of a wave through successive thin slices of a crystal (Chapter 5.2) forms the basis for the multislice method for the calculation of electron-diffraction patterns and electron-microscope images [see Section 4.3.6.1 in IT C (1999)]. This method can be applied directly to the calculations of diffuse scattering in electron diffraction due to thermal motion and positional disorder and for calculating the images of defects in crystals. It is essentially an amplitude calculation based on the formulation of equation (4.3.4.1) [or (4.3.4.2)] for first-order diffuse scattering. The Bragg scattering in the first part of the crystal is calculated using a standard multislice method for the set of beams h. In the nth slice of the crystal, a diffuse-scattering amplitude d u is convoluted with the incident set of Bragg beams. For each u, propagation of the set of beams u h is then calculated through the remaining slices of the crystal. The intensities for the exit wave at the set of points u h are then calculated by adding either amplitudes or intensities. Amplitudes are added if there is correlation between the defects in successive slices. Intensities are added if there are no such correlations. The process is repeated for all u values to obtain a complete mapping of the diffuse scattering. Calculations have been made in this way, for example, for shortrange order in alloys (Fisher, 1969) and also for TDS on the assumption of both correlated and uncorrelated atomic motions (Doyle, 1969). The effects of the correlations were shown to be small. This computing method is not practical for electron-microscope images in which individual defects are to be imaged. The perturbations of the exit wavefunction due to individual defects (vacancies, replaced atoms, displaced atoms) or small groups of defects may then be calculated with arbitrary accuracy by use of the ‘periodic continuation’ form of the multislice computer programs in which an artificial, large, superlattice unit cell is assumed [Section

4.3.6.1 in IT C (1999)]. The corresponding images and microdiffraction patterns from the individual defects or clusters may then be calculated (Fields & Cowley, 1978). A more recent discussion of the image calculations, particularly in relation to thermal diffuse scattering, is given by Cowley (1988). In order to calculate the diffuse-scattering distributions from disordered systems or from a crystal with atoms in thermal motion by the multislice method with periodic continuation, it would be necessary to calculate for a number of different defect configurations sufficiently large to provide an adequate representation of the statistics of the disordered system. However, it has been shown by Cowley & Fields (1979) that, if the single-diffuse-scattering approximation is made, the perturbations of the exit wave due to individual defects are characteristic of the defect type and of the slice number and may be added, so that a considerable simplification of the computing process is possible. Methods for calculating diffuse scattering in electron-diffraction patterns using the multislice approach are described by Tanaka & Cowley (1987) and Cowley (1989). Loane et al. (1991) introduced the concept of ‘frozen phonons’ for multislice calculations of thermal scattering.

4.3.6. Qualitative interpretation of diffuse scattering of electrons Quantitative interpretation of the intensity of diffuse scattering by calculation of e.g. short-range-order parameters has been the exception. Most studies have been directed to qualitative features and their variation with composition, treatment etc. Many features in the scattering which pass unrecognized in extensive X-ray or neutron investigations will be observed readily with electrons, frequently inviting other ways of interpretation. Most such studies have been concerned with substitutional disorder, but the extensive investigations of thermal streaks by Honjo and co-workers should be mentioned (Honjo et al., 1964). Diffuse spots and streaks from disorder have been observed from a wide range of substances. The most frequent may be streaks due to planar faults, one of the most common objects studied by electron microscopy. Diffraction patterns are usually sufficient to determine the orientation and the fault vector; the positions and distribution of faults are more easily seen by dark-field microscopy, whereas the detailed atomic arrangement is best studied by high-resolution imaging of the structure [Section 4.3.8 in IT C (1999)]. This combination of diffraction and different imaging techniques cannot be applied in the same way to the study of the essentially three-dimensional substitutional local order. Considerable effort has therefore been made to interpret the details of diffuse scattering, leaving the determination of the short-range-order (SRO) parameters usually to X-ray or neutron studies. Frequently, characteristic shapes or splitting of the diffuse spots from e.g. binary alloys are observed. They reflect order extending over many atomic distances, and have been assumed to arise from forces other than the near-neighbour pair forces invoked in the theory of local order. A relationship between the diffuse-scattering distribution and the Fourier transform of the effective atom-pairinteraction potential is given by the ordering theory of Clapp & Moss (1968). An interpretation in terms of long-range forces carried by the conduction electrons was proposed by Krivoglaz (1969). Extensive studies of alloy systems (Ohshima & Watanabe, 1973) show that the separations, m, observed in split diffuse spots from many alloys follow the predicted variation with the electron/atom ratio e=a: 1=3 p 12 m t 2, e=a

447

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS where m is measured along the [110] direction in units of 2a and t is a truncation factor for the Fermi surface. A similarity between the location of diffuse maxima and the shape of the Fermi surface has been noted also for other structures, notably some defect rock-salt-type structures. Although this may offer a clue to the forces involved in the ordering, it entails no description of the local structure. Several attempts have been made to formulate principles for building the disordered structure, from small ordered domains embedded in less ordered regions (Hashimoto, 1974), by a network of antiphase boundaries, or by building the structure from clusters with the average composition and coordination (De Ridder et al., 1976). Evidence for such models may be sought by computer simulations, in the details of the SRO scattering as seen in electron diffraction, or in images. The cluster model is most directly tied to the location of diffuse scattering, noting that a relation between order parameters derived from clusters consistent with the ordered state can be used to predict the position of diffuse scattering in the form of surfaces in reciprocal space, e.g. the relation cos h cos k cos l 0 for ordering of octahedral clusters in the rock-salt-type structure (Sauvage & Parthe´, 1974).

Some of the models imply local fluctuations in order which may be observable either by diffraction from very small regions or by imaging. Microdiffraction studies (Tanaka & Cowley, 1985) do indeed show that spots from 1–1.5 nm regions in disordered LiFeO2 appear on the locus of diffuse maxima observed in diffraction from larger areas. Imaging of local variations in the SRO structure has been pursued with different techniques (De Ridder et al., 1976; Tanaka & Cowley, 1985; De Meulenaare et al., 1998), viz: dark field using diffuse spots only; bright field with the central spot plus diffuse spots; lattice image. With domains of about 3 nm or more, highresolution images seem to give clear indication of their presence and form. For smaller ordered regions, the interpretation becomes increasingly complex: Since the domains will then usually not extend through the thickness of the foil, they cannot be imaged separately. Since image-contrast calculations essentially demand complete specification of the local structure, a model beyond the statistical description must be constructed in order to be compared with observations. On the other hand, these models of the local structure should be consistent with the statistics derived from diffraction patterns collected from a larger volume.

448


4.4. Scattering from mesomorphic structures BY P. S. PERSHAN 4.4.1. Introduction The term mesomorphic is derived from the prefix ‘meso-’, which is defined in the dictionary as ‘a word element meaning middle’, and the term ‘-morphic’, which is defined as ‘an adjective termination corresponding to morph or form’. Thus, mesomorphic order implies some ‘form’, or order, that is ‘in the middle’, or intermediate between that of liquids and crystals. The name liquid crystalline was coined by researchers who found it to be more descriptive, and the two are used synonymously. It follows that a mesomorphic, or liquid-crystalline, phase must have more symmetry than any one of the 230 space groups that characterize crystals. A major source of confusion in the early liquid-crystal literature was concerned with the fact that many of the molecules that form liquid crystals also form true three-dimensional crystals with diffraction patterns that are only subtly different from those of other liquid-crystalline phases. Since most of the original mesomorphic phase identifications were performed using a ‘miscibility’ procedure, which depends on optically observed changes in textures accompanying variation in the sample’s chemical composition, it is not surprising that some threedimensional crystalline phases were mistakenly identified as mesomorphic. Phases were identified as being either the same as, or different from, phases that were previously observed (Liebert, 1978; Gray & Goodby, 1984), and although many of the workers were very clever in deducing the microscopic structure responsible for the microscopic textures, the phases were labelled in the order of discovery as smectic-A, smectic-B etc. without any attempt to develop a systematic nomenclature that would reflect the underlying order. Although different groups did not always assign the same letters to the same phases, the problem is now resolved and the assignments used in this article are commonly accepted (Gray & Goodby, 1984). Fig. 4.4.1.1 illustrates the way in which increasing order can be assigned to the series of mesomorphic phases in three dimensions listed in Table 4.4.1.1. Although the phases in this series are the most thoroughly documented mesomorphic phases, there are others not included in the table which we will discuss below.

The progression from the completely symmetric isotropic liquid through the mesomorphic phases into the crystalline phases can be described in terms of three separate types of order. The first, or the molecular orientational order, describes the fact that the molecules have some preferential orientation analogous to the spin orientational order of ferromagnetic materials. In the present case, the molecular quantity that is oriented is a symmetric second-rank tensor, like the moment of inertia or the electric polarizability, rather than a magnetic moment. This is the only type of long-range order in the nematic phase and as a consequence its physical properties are those of an anisotropic fluid; this is the origin of the name liquid crystal. Fig. 4.4.1.2(a) is a schematic illustration of the nematic order if it is assumed that the molecules can be represented by oblong ellipses. The average orientation of the ellipses is aligned; however, there is no long-range order in the relative positions of the ellipses. Nematic phases are also observed for discshaped molecules and for clusters of molecules that form micelles. These all share the common properties of being optically anisotropic and fluid-like, without any long-range positional order. The second type of order is referred to as bond orientational order. Consider, for example, the fact that for dense packing of spheres on a flat surface most of the spheres will have six neighbouring spheres distributed approximately hexagonally around it. If a perfect two-dimensional triangular lattice of indefinite size were constructed of these spheres, each hexagon on the lattice would be oriented in the same way. Within the last few years, we have come to recognize that this type of order, in which the hexagons are everywhere parallel to one another, is possible even when there is no lattice. This type of order is referred to as bond orientational order, and bond orientational order in the absence of a lattice is the essential property defining the hexatic phases (Halperin & Nelson, 1978; Nelson & Halperin, 1979; Young, 1979; Birgeneau & Litster, 1978).

Table 4.4.1.1. Some of the symmetry properties of the series of three-dimensional phases described in Fig. 4.4.1.1 The terms LRO and SRO imply long-range or short-range order, respectively, and QLRO refers to ‘quasi-long-range order’ as explained in the text.

Fig. 4.4.1.1. Illustration of the progression of order throughout the sequence of mesomorphic phases that are based on ‘rod-like’ molecules. The shaded section indicates phases in which the molecules are tilted with respect to the smectic layers.

Bond orientation order

Positional order Normal to layer

Within layer

Smectic-A (SmA) Smectic-C (SmC)

SRO LRO

SRO LRO*

SRO SRO

SRO SRO

Hexatic-B Smectic-F (SmF) Smectic-I (SmI)

LRO* LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

QLRO QLRO QLRO

SRO SRO SRO

Crystalline-B (CrB) Crystalline-G (CrG) Crystalline-J (CrJ)

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

Crystalline-E (CrE) Crystalline-H (CrH) Crystalline-K (CrK)

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

* Theoretically, the existence of LRO in the molecular orientation, or tilt, implies that there must be some LRO in the bond orientation and vice versa.


Phase

Molecular orientation order within layer


Fig. 4.4.1.2. Schematic illustration of the real-space molecular order and the scattering cross sections in reciprocal space for the: (a) nematic; (b) smecticA; and (c), (d) smectic-C phases. The scattering cross sections are enclosed in the boxes. Part (c) indicates the smectic-C phase for an oriented monodomain and (d) indicates a polydomain smectic-C structure in which the molecular axes are aligned.

The third type of order is the positional order of an indefinite lattice of the type that defines the 230 space groups of conventional crystals. In view of the fact that some of the mesomorphic phases have a layered structure, it is convenient to separate the positional order into the positional order along the layer normal and perpendicular to it, or within the layers. Two of the symmetries listed in Tables 4.4.1.1 and 4.4.1.2 are short-range order (SRO), implying that the order is only correlated over a finite distance such as for a simple liquid, and long-range order (LRO) as in either the spin orientation of a ferromagnet or the positional order of a three-dimensional crystal. The third type of symmetry, ‘quasi-long-range order’ (QLRO), will be explained below. In any case, the progressive increase in symmetry from the isotropic liquid to the crystalline phases for this series of

Table 4.4.1.2. The symmetry properties of the two-dimensional hexatic and crystalline phases

Phase

Molecular orientation order within layer

Bond orientation order

Positional order within layer

Smectic-A (SmA) Smectic-C (SmC)

SRO QLRO

SRO QLRO

SRO SRO

Hexatic-B Smectic-F (SmF) Smectic-I (SmI)

QLRO QLRO QLRO

QLRO QLRO QLRO

SRO SRO SRO

Crystalline-B (CrB) Crystalline-G (CrG) Crystalline-J (CrJ)

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

QLRO QLRO QLRO

Crystalline-E (CrE) Crystalline-H (CrH) Crystalline-K (CrK)

LRO LRO LRO

LRO LRO LRO

QLRO QLRO QLRO

mesomorphic phases is illustrated in Fig. 4.4.1.1. One objective of this chapter is to describe the reciprocal-space structure of the phases listed in the tables and the phase transitions between them. Finally, in most of the crystalline phases that we wish to discuss, the molecules have considerable amounts of rotational disorder. For example, one series of molecules that form mesomorphic phases consists of long thin molecules which might be described as ‘blade shaped’. Although the cross section of these molecules is quite anisotropic, the site symmetry of the molecule is often symmetric, as though the molecule is rotating freely about its long axis. On cooling, many of the mesomorphic systems undergo transitions to the phases, listed at the bottom of Fig. 4.4.1.1, for which the site symmetry is anisotropic as though some of the rotational motions about the molecular axis have been frozen out. A similar type of transition, in which rotational motions are frozen out, occurs on cooling systems such as succinonitrile NCCH2 CH2 CN that form optically isotropic ‘plastic crystals’ (Springer, 1977). There are two broad classes of liquid-crystalline systems, the thermotropic and the lyotropic, and, since the former are much better understood, this chapter will emphasize results on thermotropic systems (Liebert, 1978). The historical difference between these two, and also the origin of their names, is that the lyotropic are always mixtures, or solutions, of unlike molecules in which one is a normal, or non-mesogenic, liquid. Solutions of soap and water are prototypical examples of lyotropics, and their mesomorphic phases appear as a function of either concentration or temperature. In contrast, the thermotropic systems are usually formed from a single chemical component, and the mesomorphic phases appear primarily as a function of temperature changes. The molecular distinction between the two is that one of the molecules in the lyotropic solution always has a hydrophilic part, often called the ‘head group’, and one or more hydrophobic alkane chains called ‘tails’. These molecules will often form mesomorphic phases as singlecomponent or neat systems; however, the general belief is that in solution with either water or oil most of the phases are the result of competition between the hydrophilic and hydrophobic interactions, as well as other factors such as packing and steric constraints (Pershan, 1979; Safran & Clark, 1987). To the extent that molecules

450

4.4. SCATTERING FROM MESOMORPHIC STRUCTURES below. On the other hand, the inhomogeneity of the molecule is probably not important for the nematic phase. 4.4.2. The nematic phase

Fig. 4.4.1.3. Chemical formulae for some of the molecules that form thermotropic liquid crystals: (a) N-[4-(n-butyloxy)benzylidene]-4-noctylaniline (4O.8), (b) 40 -n-octylbiphenyl-4-carbonitrile (8CB), (c) 4hexylphenyl 4-(4-cyanobenzoyloxy)benzoate DB6 ; lyotropic liquid crystals: (d) sodium dodecyl sulfate, (e) 1,2-dipalmitoyl-L-phosphatidylcholine (DPPC); and a discotic liquid crystal: (f) benzenehexayl hexa-n-alkanoates.

that form thermotropic liquid-crystalline phases have hydrophilic and hydrophobic parts, the disparity in the affinity of these parts for either water or oil is much less and most of these molecules are relatively insoluble in water. These molecules are called thermotropic because their phase transformations are primarily studied only as a function of temperature. This is not to say that there are not numerous examples of interesting studies of the concentration dependence of phase diagrams involving mixtures of thermotropic liquid crystals. Fig. 4.4.1.3 displays some common examples of molecules that form lyotropic and thermotropic phases. In spite of the above remarks, it is interesting to observe that different parts of typical thermotropic molecules do have some of the same features as the lyotropic molecules. For example, although the rod-like thermotropic molecules always have an alkane chain at one or both ends of a more rigid section, the chain lengths are rarely as long as those of the lyotropic molecules, and although the solubility of the parts of the thermotropic molecules, when separated, are not as disparate as those of the lyotropic molecules, they are definitely different. We suspect that this may account for the subtler features of the phase transformations between the mesomorphic phases to be discussed

The nematic phase is a fluid for which the molecules have longrange orientational order. The phase as well as its molecular origin can be most simply illustrated by treating the molecules as long thin rods. The orientation of each molecule can be described by a symmetric second-rank tensor si; j ni nj di; j =3, where n is a unit vector along the axis of the rod (De Gennes, 1974). For disclike molecules, such as that shown in Fig. 4.4.1.3(f), or for micellar nematic phases, n is along the principal symmetry axis of either the molecule or the micelle (Lawson & Flautt, 1967). Since physical quantities such as the molecular polarizability, or the moment of inertia, transform as symmetric second-rank tensors, either one of these could be used as specific representations of the molecular orientational order. The macroscopic order, however, is given by the statistical average Si; j hsi; j i Shni ihnj i di; j =3, where hni is a unit vector along the macroscopic symmetry axis and S is the order parameter of the nematic phase. The microscopic origin of the phase can be understood in terms of steric constraints that occur on filling space with highly asymmetric objects such as long rods or flat discs. Maximizing the density requires some degree of short-range orientational order, and theoretical arguments can be invoked to demonstrate longrange order. Onsager presented quantitative arguments of this type to explain the nematic order observed in concentrated solutions of the long thin rods of tobacco mosaic viruses (Onsager, 1949; Lee & Meyer, 1986), and qualitatively similar ideas explain the nematic order for the shorter thermotropic molecules (Maier & Saupe, 1958, 1959). The existence of nematic order can also be understood in terms of a phenomenological mean-field theory (De Gennes, 1969b, 1971; Fan & Stephen, 1970). If the free-energy difference F between the isotropic and nematic phases can be expressed as an analytic function of the nematic order parameter Si; j , one can expand FSi; j as a power series in which the successive terms all transform as the identity representation of the point group of the isotropic phase, i.e. as scalars. The most general form is given by: AX BX FSi; j Sij Sji Sij Sjk Ski 2 ij 3 ijk 2 D0 X D X Sij Sji S S S S : 4:4:2:1 4 ijkl ij jk kl li 4 ij The usual mean-field treatment assumes that the coefficient of the leading term is of the form A aT T , where T is the absolute temperature and T is the temperature at which A 0. Taking a, D and D0 > 0, one can show that for either positive or negative values of B, but for sufficiently large T, the minimum value of F 0 occurs for Si; j 0, corresponding to the isotropic phase. For T < T , F can be minimized, at some negative value, for a nonzero Si; j corresponding to nematic order. The details of how this is derived for a tensorial order parameter can be found in the literature (De Gennes, 1974); however, the basic idea can be understood by treating Si; j as a scalar. If we write F 12 AS 2 13 BS 3 14 DS 4 A B2 2 D 2B 2 2 S S S 2 9D 4 3D

4:4:2:2

and if TNI is defined by the condition A aTNI T 2B2 =9D, then F 0 for both S 0 and S 2B=3D. This value for TNI

451

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS marks the transition temperature from the isotropic phase, when A > 2B2 =9D and the only minimum is at S 0 with F 0, to the nematic case when A < 2B2 =9D and the absolute minimum with F < 0 is slightly shifted from S 2B=3D. The symmetry properties of second-rank tensors imply that there will usually be a nonvanishing value for B, and this implies that the transition from the isotropic to nematic transition will be first order with a discontinuous jump in the nematic order parameter Si; j . Although most nematic systems are uniaxial, biaxial nematic order is theoretically possible (Freiser, 1971; Alben, 1973; Lubensky, 1987) and it has been observed in certain lyotropic nematic liquid crystals (Neto et al., 1985; Hendrikx et al., 1986; Yu & Saupe, 1980) and in one thermotropic system (Maltheˆte et al., 1986). The X-ray scattering cross section of an oriented monodomain sample of the nematic phase with rod-like molecules usually exhibits a diffuse spot like that illustrated in Fig. 4.4.1.2(a), where the maximum of the cross section is along the average molecular axis hni at a value of jqj 2=d, where d 20:0 to 40.0 A˚ is of the order of the molecular length L. This is a precursor to the smectic-A order that develops at lower temperatures for many materials. In addition, there is a diffuse ring along the directions normal to hni at jqj 2=a, where a 4:0 A is comparable to the average radius of the molecule. In some nematic systems, the near-neighbour correlations favour antiparallel alignment and molecular centres tend to form pairs such that the peak of the scattering cross section can actually have values anywhere in the range from 2=L to 2=2L. There are also other cases where there are two diffuse peaks, corresponding to both jq1 j 2=L and jq2 j jq1 j=2 which are precursors of a richer smectic-A morphology (Prost & Barois, 1983; Prost, 1984; Sigaud et al., 1979; Wang & Lubensky, 1984; Hardouin et al., 1983; Chan, Pershan et al., 1985). In some cases, jq2 j 6 12jq1 j and competition between the order parameters at incommensurate wavevectors gives rise to modulated phases. For the moment, we will restrict the discussion to those systems for which the order parameter is characterized by a single wavevector. On cooling, many nematic systems undergo a second-order phase transition to a smectic-A phase and as the temperature approaches the nematic to smectic-A transition the widths of these diffuse peaks become infinitesimally small. De Gennes (1972) demonstrated that this phenomenon could be understood by analogy with the transitions from either normal fluidity to superfluidity in liquid helium or normal conductivity to superconductivity in metals. Since the electron density of the smectic-A phase is (quasi-)periodic in one dimension, he represented it by the form: r hi Ref expi2=dzg, where d is the thickness of the smectic layers lying in the xy plane. The complex quantity j j expi' is similar to the superfluid wavefunction except that in this analogy the amplitude j j describes the electron-density variations normal to the smectic layers, and the phase ' describes the position of the layers along the z axis. De Gennes proposed a mean-field theory for the transition in which the free-energy difference between the nematic and smectic-A phase F was represented by " 2 A 2 D 4 E @ 2 F j j j j i 2 4 2 @z d # 2 2 @ @ : 4:4:2:3 @x @y This mean-field theory differs from the one for the isotropic to nematic transition in that the symmetry for the latter allowed a term that was cubic in the order parameter, while no such term is allowed for the nematic to smectic-A transition. In both cases, however, the

coefficient of the leading term is taken to have the form aT T . If D > 0, without the cubic term the free energy has only one minimum when T > T at j j 0, and two equivalent minima at j j faT T=Dg0:5 for T < T . On the basis of this free energy, the nematic to smectic-A transition can be second order with a transition temperature TNA T and an order parameter that varies as the square root of TNA T. There are conditions that we will not discuss in detail when D can be negative. In that case, the nematic to smectic-A transition will be first order (McMillan, 1972, 1973a,b,c). McMillan pointed out that, by allowing coupling between the smectic and nematic order parameters, a more general free energy can be developed in which D is negative. McMillan’s prediction that for systems in which the difference TIN TNA is small the nematic to smectic-A transition will be first order is supported by experiment (Ocko, Birgeneau & Litster, 1986; Ocko et al., 1984; Thoen et al., 1984). Although the mean-field theory is not quantitatively accurate, it does explain the principal qualitative features of the nematic to smectic-A transition. The differential scattering cross section for X-rays can be expressed in terms of the Fourier transform of the density–density correlation function hr0i. The expectation value is calculated from the thermal average of the order parameter that is obtained from the free-energy density F . If one takes the transform Z 1 Q 4:4:2:4 d3 r expiQ rr, 23 the free-energy density in reciprocal space has the form A D F j j2 j j4 2 4 E fQz 2=d2 Q2x Q2y gj j2 4:4:2:5 2 and one can show that for T > TNA the cross section obtained from the above form for the free energy is d 0 , 4:4:2:6 d A EfQz 2=d2 Q2x Q2y g where the term in j j4 has been neglected. The mean-field theory predicts that the peak intensity should vary as 0 =A 1=T TNA and that the half width of the peak in any direction should vary as A=E1=2 T TNA 1=2 . The physical interpretation of the half width is that the smectic fluctuations in the nematic phase are correlated over lengths E=A1=2 T TNA 1=2 . One of the major shortcomings of all mean-field theories is that they do not take into account the difference between the average value of the order parameter h i and the instantaneous value h i , where represents the thermal fluctuations (Ma, 1976). The usual effect expected from theories for this type of critical phenomenon is a ‘renormalization’ of the various terms in the free energy such that the temperature dependence of correlation length has the form t / t , where t T T =T , T TNA is the second-order transition temperature, and is expected to have some universal value that is generally not equal to 0.5. One of the major unsolved problems of the nematic to smectic-A phase transition is that the width along the scattering vector q varies as 1=k / tk with a temperature dependence different from that of the width perpendicular to q, 1=? / t? ; also, neither k nor ? have the expected universal values (Lubensky, 1983; Nelson & Toner, 1981). The correlation lengths are measured by fitting the differential scattering cross sections to the empirical form: d : 4:4:2:7 2 2 d 1 Qz jqj k Q2? ?2 cQ2? ?2 2

452

4.4. SCATTERING FROM MESOMORPHIC STRUCTURES Table 4.4.2.1. Summary of critical exponents from X-ray scattering studies of the nematic to smectic-A phase transition Molecule

k

?

Reference

4O.7 8S5 CBOOA 4O.8 8OCB 9S5 8CB 10S5 9CB

1.46 1.53 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.31 1.26 1.10 1.10

0.78 0.83 0.70 0.70 0.71 0.71 0.67 0.61 0.57

0.65 0.68 0.62 0.57 0.58 0.57 0.51 0.51 0.39

(a) (b), (g) (c), (d) (e) (d), (f) (b), (g) (h), (i) (b), (g) (g), (j)

It is interesting to note that even those systems for which the nematic to smectic-A transition is first order show some pretransitional lengthening of the correlation lengths k and ? . In these cases, the apparent T at which the correlation lengths would diverge is lower than TNA and the divergence is truncated by the first-order transition (Ocko et al., 1984).

4.4.3. Smectic-A and smectic-C phases 4.4.3.1. Homogeneous smectic-A and smectic-C phases

References: (a) Garland et al. (1983); (b) Brisbin et al. (1979); (c) Djurek et al. (1974); (d) Litster et al. (1979); (e) Birgeneau et al. (1981); (f) Kasting et al. (1980); (g) Ocko et al. (1984); (h) Thoen et al. (1982); (i) Davidov et al. (1979); (j) Thoen et al. (1984).

The amplitude / t , where the measured values of are empirically found to be very close to the measured values for the sum k ? . Most of the systems that have been measured to date have values for k > 0:66 > ? and k ? 0:1 to 0.2. Table 4.4.2.1 lists sources of the observed values for , k and ? . The theoretical and experimental studies of this pretransition effect account for a sizeable fraction of all of the liquid-crystal research in the last 15 or 20 years, and as of this writing the explanation for these two different temperature dependences remains one of the major unresolved theoretical questions in equilibrium statistical physics. It is very likely that the origin of the problem is the QLRO in the position of the smectic layers. Lubensky attempted to deal with this by introducing a gauge transformation in such a way that the thermal fluctuations of the transformed order parameter did not have the logarithmic divergence. While this approach has been informative, it has not yet yielded an agreed-upon understanding. Experimentally, the effect of the phase can be studied in systems where there are two competing order parameters with wavevectors that are at q2 and q1 2q2 (Sigaud et al., 1979; Hardouin et al., 1983; Prost & Barois, 1983; Wang & Lubensky, 1984; Chan, Pershan et al., 1985). On cooling, mixtures of 4-hexylphenyl 4-(4cyanobenzoyloxy)benzoate DB6 and N,N0 -(1,4-phenylenedimethylene)bis(4-butylaniline) (also known as terephthal-bis-butylaniline, TBBA) first undergo a second-order transition from the nematic to a phase that is designated as smectic-A1 . The various smectic-A and smectic-C morphologies will be described in more detail in the following section; however, the smectic-A1 phase is characterized by a single peak at q1 2=d owing to a onedimensional density wave with wavelength d of the order of the molecular length L. In addition, however, there are thermal fluctuations of a second-order parameter with a period of 2L that give rise to a diffuse peak at q2 =L. On further cooling, this system undergoes a second second-order transition to a smectic-A2 phase with QLRO at q2 =L, with a second harmonic that is exactly at q 2q2 2=L. The critical scattering on approaching this transition is similar to that of the nematic to smectic-A1 , except that the pre-existing density wave at q1 2=L quenches the phase fluctuations of the order parameter at the subharmonic q2 =L. The measured values of k ? 0:74 (Chan, Pershan et al., 1985) agree with those expected from the appropriate theory (Huse, 1985). A mean-field theory that describes this effect is discussed in Section 4.4.3.2 below.

In the smectic-A and smectic-C phases, the molecules organize themselves into layers, and from a naive point of view one might describe them as forming a one-dimensional periodic lattice in which the individual layers are two-dimensional liquids. In the smectic-A phase, the average molecular axis hni is normal to the smectic layers while for the smectic-C it makes a finite angle. It follows from this that the smectic-C phase has lower symmetry than the smectic-A, and the phase transition from the smectic-A to smectic-C can be considered as the ordering of a two-component order parameter, i.e. the two components of the projection of the molecular axis on the smectic layers (De Gennes, 1973). Alternatively, Chen & Lubensky (1976) have developed a meanfield theory in which the transition is described by a free-energy density of the Lifshitz form. This will be described in more detail below; however, it corresponds to replacing equation (4.4.2.5) for the free energy F by an expression for which the minimum is obtained when the wavevector q, of the order parameter / expiq r, tilts away from the molecular axis. The X-ray cross section for the prototypical aligned monodomain smectic-A sample is shown in Fig. 4.4.1.2(b). It consists of a single sharp spot along the molecular axis at jqj somewhere between 2=2L and 2=L that reflects the QLRO along the layer normal, and a diffuse ring in the perpendicular direction at jqj 2=a that reflects the SRO within the layer. The scattering cross section for an aligned smectic-C phase is similar to that of the smectic-A except that the molecular tilt alters the intensity distribution of the diffuse ring. This is illustrated in Fig. 4.4.1.2(c) for a monodomain sample. Fig. 4.4.1.2(d) illustrates the scattering pattern for a polydomain smectic-C sample in which the molecular axis remains fixed, but where the smectic layers are randomly distributed azimuthally around the molecular axis. The naivety of describing these as periodic stacks of twodimensional liquids derives from the fact that the sharp spot along the molecular axis has a distinct temperature-dependent shape indicative of QLRO that distinguishes it from the Bragg peaks due to true LRO in conventional three-dimensional crystals. Landau and Peierls discussed this effect for the case of two-dimensional crystals (Landau, 1965; Peierls, 1934) and Caille´ (1972) extended the argument to the mesomorphic systems. The usual treatment of thermal vibrations in three-dimensional crystals estimates the Debye–Waller factor by integrating the thermal expectation value for the mean-square amplitude over reciprocal space (Kittel, 1963): Z kB T kD k d 1 W' 3 dk, 4:4:3:1 k2 c 0 where c is the sound velocity, !D ckD is the Debye frequency and d 3 for three-dimensional crystals. In this case, the integral converges and the only effect is to reduce the integrated intensity of the Bragg peak by a factor proportional to exp 2W . For twodimensional crystals d 1, and the integral, of the form of dk=k, obtains a logarithmic divergence at the lower limit (Fleming et al., 1980). A more precise treatment of thermal vibrations, necessitated by this divergence, is to calculate the relative phase of X-rays

453

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS scattered from two points in the sample a distance jrj apart. The appropriate integral that replaces the Debye–Waller integral is Z kB T dk hur u02 i ' 3 sin2 k r dfcosk rg 4:4:3:2 c k and the divergence due to the lower limit is cut off by the fact that sin2 k r vanishes as k ! 0. More complete analysis obtains hur u02 i ' kB T=c2 lnjrj=a, where a atomic size. If this is exponentiated, as for the Debye–Waller factor, the density– density correlation function can be shown to have the form hr0i ' jr=aj , where ' jqj2 kB T=c2 and jqj ' 2=a. In place of the usual periodic density–density correlation function of three-dimensional crystals, the periodic correlations of twodimensional crystals decay as some power of the distance. This type of positional order, in which the correlations decay as some power of the distance, is the quasi-long-range order (QLRO) that appears in Tables 4.4.1.1 and 4.4.1.2. It is distinguished from true long-range order (LRO) where the correlations continue indefinitely, and short-range order (SRO) where the positional correlations decay exponentially as in either a simple fluid or a nematic liquid crystal. The usual prediction of Bragg scattering for three-dimensional crystals is obtained from the Fourier transform of the threedimensional density–density correlation function. Since the correlation function is made up of periodic and random parts, it follows that the scattering cross section is made up of a function at the Bragg condition superposed on a background of thermal diffuse scattering from the random part. In principle, these two types of scattering can be separated empirically by using a high-resolution spectrometer that integrates all of the -function Bragg peak, but only a small part of the thermal diffuse scattering. Since the twodimensional lattice is not strictly periodic, there is no formal way to separate the periodic and random parts, and the Fourier transform for the algebraic correlation function obtains a cross section that is described by an algebraic singularity of the form jQ qj 2 (Gunther et al., 1980). In 1972, Caille´ (Caille´, 1972) presented an argument that the X-ray scattering line shape for the onedimensional periodicity of the smectic-A system in three dimensions has an algebraic singularity that is analogous to the line shapes from two-dimensional crystals. In three-dimensional crystals, both the longitudinal and the shear sound waves satisfy linear dispersion relations of the form ! ck. In simple liquids, and also for nematic liquid crystals, only the longitudinal sound wave has such a linear dispersion relation. Shear sound waves are overdamped and the decay rate 1= is given by the imaginary part of a dispersion relation of the form ! i=k 2 , where is a viscosity coefficient and is the liquid density. The intermediate order of the smectic-A mesomorphic phase, between the three-dimensional crystal and the nematic, results in one of the modes for shear sound waves having the curious dispersion relation !2 c2 k?2 kz2 =k?2 kz2 , where k? and kz are the magnitudes of the components of the acoustic wavevector perpendicular and parallel to hni, respectively (De Gennes, 1969a; Martin et al., 1972). More detailed analysis, including terms of higher order in k?2 , obtains the equivalent of the Debye–Waller factor for the smectic-A as Z kD k? dk? dkz W ' kB T , 4:4:3:3 4 2 0 Bkz Kk? where B and K are smectic elastic constants, k?2 kx2 ky2 , and kD is the Debye wavevector. On substitution of u2 RK=Bk?2 kz2 , the integral can be manipulated into the form du=u, which diverges logarithmically at the lower limit in exactly the same way as the integral for the Debye–Waller factor of the two-dimensional crystal. The result is that the smectic-A phase has a sharp peak,

described by an algebraic cusp, at the place in reciprocal space where one would expect a true -function Bragg cross section from a truly periodic one-dimensional lattice. In fact, the lattice is not truly periodic and the smectic-A system has only QLRO along the direction hni. X-ray scattering experiments to test this idea were carried out on one thermotropic smectic-A system, but the results, while consistent with the theory, were not adequate to provide an unambiguous proof of the algebraic cusp (Als-Nielsen et al., 1980). One of the principal difficulties was due to the fact that, when thermotropic samples are oriented in an external magnetic field in the higher-temperature nematic phase and then gradually cooled through the nematic to smectic-A phase transition, the smectic-A samples usually have mosaic spreads of the order of a fraction of a degree and this is not sufficient for detailed line-shape studies near to the peak. A second difficulty is that, in most of the thermotropic smectic-A phases that have been studied to date, only the lowest-order peak is observed. It is not clear whether this is due to a large Debye–Waller-type effect or whether the form factor for the smectic-A layer falls off this rapidly. Nevertheless, since the factor in the exponent of the cusp jQ qj 2 depends quadratically on the magnitude of the reciprocal vector jqj, the shape of the cusp for the different orders would constitute a severe test of the theory. Fortunately, it is common to observe multiple orders for lyotropic smectic-A systems and such an experiment, carried out on the lyotropic smectic-A system formed from a quaternary mixture of sodium dodecyl sulfate, pentanol, water and dodecane, confirmed the theoretical predictions for the Landau–Peierls effect in the smectic-A phase (Safinya, Roux et al., 1986). The problem of sample mosaic was resolved by using a three-dimensional powder. Although the conditions on the analysis are delicate, Safinya et al. demonstrated that for a perfect powder, for which the microcrystals are sufficiently large, the powder line shape does allow unambiguous determination of all of the parameters of the anisotropic line shape. The only other X-ray study of a critical property on the smectic-A side of the transition has been a measurement of the temperature dependence of the integrated intensity of the peak. For threedimensional crystals, the integrated intensity of a Bragg peak can be measured for samples with poor mosaic distributions, and because the differences between QLRO and true LRO are only manifest at long distances in real space, or at small wavevectors in reciprocal space, the same is true for the ‘quasi-Bragg peak’ of the smectic-A phase. Chan et al. measured the temperature dependence of the integrated intensity of the smectic-A peak across the nematic to smectic-A phase transition for a number of liquid crystals with varying exponents k and ? (Chan, Deutsch et al., 1985). For the Landau–De Gennes free-energy density (equation 4.4.2.5), the theoretical prediction is that the critical part of the integrated intensity should vary as jtjx , where x 1 when the critical part of the heat capacity diverges according to the power law jtj . Six samples were measured with values of varying from 0 to 0.5. Although for samples with 0:5 the critical intensity did vary as x 0:5, there were systematic deviations for smaller values of , and for 0 the measured values of x were in the range 0.7 to 0.76. The origin of this discrepancy is not at present understood. Similar integrated intensity measurements in the vicinity of the first-order nematic to smectic-C transition cannot easily be made in smectic-C samples since the magnetic field aligns the molecular axis hni, and when the layers form at some angle ' to hni the layer normals are distributed along the full 2 of azimuthal directions around hni, as shown in Fig. 4.4.1.2(d). The X-ray scattering pattern for such a sample is a partial powder with a peak-intensity distribution that forms a ring of radius jqj sin'. The opening of the single spot along the average molecular axis hni into a ring can be used to study either the nematic to smectic-C or the smectic-A to smectic-C transition (Martinez-Miranda et al., 1986).

454

4.4. SCATTERING FROM MESOMORPHIC STRUCTURES The statistical physics in the region of the phase diagram surrounding the triple point, where the nematic, smectic-A and smectic-C phases meet, has been the subject of considerable theoretical speculation (Chen & Lubensky, 1976; Chu & McMillan, 1977; Benguigui, 1979; Huang & Lien, 1981; Grinstein & Toner, 1983). The best representation of the observed X-ray scattering structure near the nematic to smectic-A, the nematic to smectic-C and the nematic/smectic-A/smectic-C (NAC) multicritical point is obtained from the mean-field theory of Chen and Lubensky, the essence of which is expressed in terms of an energy density of the form A D F j j2 j j4 12Ek Q2k Q20 2 E? Q2? 2 4 4 E?? Q? E?k Q2? Q2k Q20 j Qj2 , 4:4:3:4

al., 1981; Hardouin et al., 1980, 1983; Ratna et al., 1985, 1986; Chan, Pershan et al., 1985, 1986; Safinya, Varady et al., 1986; Fontes et al., 1986) and confirmed phase transitions between phases that have been designated smectic-A1 with period d L, smecticA2 with period d 2L and smectic-Ad with period L < d < 2L. Stimulated by the experimental results, Prost and co-workers generalized the De Gennes mean-field theory by writing

Q is the Fourier component of the electron density: Z 1 d3 r expiQ rr: Q 4:4:3:5 23

that couple the two order parameters. Suitable choices for the relative values of the phenomenological parameters of the free energy then result in minima that correspond to any one of these three smectic-A phases. Much more interesting, however, was the observation that even if jq1 j < 2jq2 j the two order parameters could still be coupled together if q1 and q2 were not collinear, as illustrated in Fig. 4.4.3.1(a), such that 2q1 q2 jq1 j2 . Prost et al. predicted the existence of phases that are modulated in the direction perpendicular to the average layer normal with a period 4=jq2 j sin' 2=jqm j. Such a modulated phase has been observed and is designated as the smectic-A (Hardouin et al., 1981). Similar considerations apply to the smectic-C phases and the ~ (Hardouin et al., 1982; modulated phase is designated smectic-C; Huang et al., 1984; Safinya, Varady et al., 1986).

where

The quantities Ek , E?? , and Ek? are all positive definite; however, the sign of A and E? depends on temperature. For A > 0 and E? > 0, the free energy, including the higher-order terms, is minimized by Q 0 and the nematic is the stable phase. For A < 0 and E? > 0, the minimum in the free energy occurs for a nonvanishing value for Q in the vicinity of Qk Q0 , corresponding to the uniaxial smectic-A phase; however, for E? < 0, the free-energy minimum occurs for a nonvanishing Q with a finite value of Q? , corresponding to smectic-C order. The special point in the phase diagram where two terms in the free energy vanish simultaneously is known as a ‘Lifshitz point’ (Hornreich et al., 1975). In the present problem, this occurs at the triple point where the nematic, smectic-A and smectic-C phases coexist. Although there have been other theoretical models for this transition, the best agreement between the observed and theoretical line shapes for the X-ray scattering cross sections is based on the Chen–Lubensky model. Most of the results from light-scattering experiments in the vicinity of the NAC triple point also agree with the main features predicted by the Chen–Lubensky model; however, there are some discrepancies that are not explained (Solomon & Litster, 1986). The nematic to smectic-C transition in the vicinity of this point is particularly interesting in that, on approaching the nematic to smectic-C transition temperature from the nematic phase, the X-ray scattering line shapes first appear to be identical to the shapes usually observed on approaching the nematic to smectic-A phase transition; however, within approximately 0.1 K of the transition, they change to shapes that clearly indicate smectic-C-type fluctuations. Details of this crossover are among the strongest evidence supporting the Lifshitz idea behind the Chen–Lubensky model.

r hi Ref 1 expiq1 r 2 expiq2 rg, where 1 and 2 refer to two different density waves (Prost, 1979; Prost & Barois, 1983; Barois et al., 1985). In the special case that q1 2q2 the free energy represented by equation (4.4.2.3) must be generalized to include terms like 2 2 1 expiq1

2q2 r c.c.

4.4.3.3. Surface effects The effects of surfaces in inducing macroscopic alignment of mesomorphic phases have been important both for technological applications and for basic research (Sprokel, 1980; Gray & Goodby, 1984). Although there are a variety of experimental techniques that are sensitive to mesomorphic surface order (Beaglehole, 1982; Faetti & Palleschi, 1984; Faetti et al., 1985; Gannon & Faber, 1978; Miyano, 1979; Mada & Kobayashi, 1981; Guyot-Sionnest et al.,

4.4.3.2. Modulated smectic-A and smectic-C phases Previously, we mentioned that, although the reciprocal-lattice spacing jqj for many smectic-A phases corresponds to 2=L, where L is the molecular length, there are a number of others for which jqj is between =L and 2=L (Leadbetter, Frost, Gaughan, Gray & Mosley, 1979; Leadbetter et al., 1977). This suggests the possibility of different types of smectic-A phases in which the bare molecular length is not the sole determining factor of the period d. In 1979, workers at Bordeaux optically observed some sort of phase transition between two phases that both appeared to be of the smectic-A type (Sigaud et al., 1979). Subsequent X-ray studies indicated that in the nematic phase these materials simultaneously displayed critical fluctuations with two separate periods (Levelut et

Fig. 4.4.3.1. (a) Schematic illustration of the necessary condition for coupling between order parameters when jq2 j < 2jq1 j; jqj jq2 j2 jq1 j2 1=2 jq1 j sin. (b) Positions of the principal peaks for the indicated smectic-A phases.

455

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 1986), it is only recently that X-ray scattering techniques have been applied to this problem. In one form or another, all of the techniques for obtaining surface specificity in an X-ray measurement make use of the fact that the average interaction between X-rays and materials can be treated by the introduction of a dielectric constant " 1 4e2 =m!2 1 re 2 =, where is the electron density, re is the classical radius of the electron, and ! and are the angular frequency and the wavelength of the X-ray. Since " < 1, X-rays that are incident at a small angle to the surface 0 will be 1=2 refracted in the material toward a smaller angle T 20 2c , 1=2 where the ‘critical angle’ c re 2 = 0:003 rad 0:2 for most liquid crystals (Warren, 1968). Although this is a small angle, it is at least two orders of magnitude larger than the practical angular resolution available in modern X-ray spectrometers (AlsNielsen et al., 1982; Pershan & Als-Nielsen, 1984; Pershan et al., 1987). One can demonstrate that for many conditions the specular reflection R0 is given by R R0 R F 0 j 1 dz exp iQzh@=@zij2 , where Q 4= sin0 , h@=@zi is the normal derivative of the electron density averaged over a region in the surface that is defined by the coherence area of the incident X-ray, and 0 q12 20 2c C 0 B A q R F 0 @ 0 20 2c is the Fresnel reflection law that is calculated from classical optics for a flat interface between the vacuum and a material of dielectric constraint ". Since the condition for specular reflection, that the incident and scattered angles are equal and in the same plane, requires that the scattering vector Q ^z4= sin0 be parallel to the surface normal, it is quite practical to obtain, for flat surfaces, an unambiguous separation of the specular reflection signal from all other scattering events. Fig. 4.4.3.2(a) illustrates the specular reflectivity from the free nematic–air interface for the liquid crystal 40 -octyloxybiphenyl-4carbonitrile (8OCB) 0.050 K above the nematic to smectic-A phasetransition temperature (Pershan & Als-Nielsen, 1984). The dashed line is the Fresnel reflection R F 0 in units of sin0 = sinc ,

Fig. 4.4.3.2. Specular reflectivity of 8 keV X-rays from the air–liquid interface of the nematic liquid crystal 8OCB 0.05 K above the nematic to smectic-A transition temperature. The dashed line is the Fresnel reflection law as described in the text.

where the peak at c 1:39 corresponds to surface-induced smectic order in the nematic phase: i.e. the selection rule for specular reflection has been used to separate the specular reflection from the critical scattering from the bulk. Since the full width at half maximum is exactly equal to the reciprocal of the correlation length for critical fluctuations in the bulk, 2=k at all temperatures from T TNA 0:006 K up to values near to the nematic to isotropic transition, T TNA 3:0 K, it is clear this is an example where the gravitationally induced long-range order in the surface position has induced mesomorphic order that has long-range correlations parallel to the surface. Along the surface normal, the correlations have only the same finite range as the bulk critical fluctuations. Studies on a number of other nematic (Gransbergen et al., 1986; Ocko et al., 1987) and isotropic surfaces (Ocko, Braslau et al., 1986) indicate features that are specific to local structure of the surface.

4.4.4. Phases with in-plane order Although the combination of optical microscopy and X-ray scattering studies on unoriented samples identified most of the mesomorphic phases, there remain a number of subtle features that were only discovered by spectra from well oriented samples (see the extensive references contained in Gray & Goodby, 1984). Nematic phases are sufficiently fluid that they are easily oriented by either external electric or magnetic fields, or surface boundary conditions, but similar alignment techniques are not generally successful for the more ordered phases because the combination of strains induced by thermal expansion and the enhanced elasticity that accompanies the order creates defects that do not easily anneal. Other defects that might have been formed during initial growth of the phase also become trapped and it is difficult to obtain well oriented samples by cooling from a higher-temperature aligned phase. Nevertheless, in some cases it has been possible to obtain crystalline-B samples with mosaic spreads of the order of a fraction of a degree by slowing cooling samples that were aligned in the nematic phase. In other cases, mesomorphic phases were obtained by heating and melting single crystals that were grown from solution (Benattar et al., 1979; Leadbetter, Mazid & Malik, 1980). Moncton & Pindak (1979) were the first to realize that X-ray scattering studies could be carried out on the freely suspended films that Friedel (1922) described in his classical treatise on liquid crystals. These samples, formed across a plane aperture (i.e. approximately 1 cm in diameter) in the same manner as soap bubbles, have mosaic spreads that are an order of magnitude smaller. The geometry is illustrated in Fig. 4.4.4.1(a). The substrate in which the aperture is cut can be glass (e.g. a microscope cover slip), steel or copper sheeting, etc. A small amount of the material, usually in the high-temperature region of the smectic-A phase, is spread around the outside of an aperture that is maintained at the necessary temperature, and a wiper is used to drag some of the material across the aperture. If a stable film is successfully drawn, it is detected optically by its finite reflectivity. In particular, against a dark background and with the proper illumination it is quite easy to detect the thinnest free films. In contrast to conventional soap films that are stabilized by electrostatic effects, smectic films are stabilized by their own layer structure. Films as thin as two molecular layers can be drawn and studied for weeks (Young et al., 1978). Thicker films of the order of thousands of layers can also be made and, with some experience in depositing the raw material around the aperture and the speed of drawing, it is possible to draw films of almost any desired thickness (Moncton et al., 1982). For films thinner than approximately 20 to 30 molecular layers (i.e. 600 to 1000 A˚), the thickness is determined from the reflected intensity of a small helium–neon laser. Since the

456

4.4. SCATTERING FROM MESOMORPHIC STRUCTURES

Fig. 4.4.4.2. Typical QL scans from the crystalline-B phases of (a) a free film of 7O.7, displayed on a logarithmic scale to illustrate the reduced level of the diffuse scattering relative to the Bragg reflection and (b) a bulk sample of 4O.8 oriented by a magnetic field. Fig. 4.4.4.1. (a) Schematic illustration of the geometry and (b) kinematics of X-ray scattering from a freely suspended smectic film. The insert (c) illustrates the orientation of the film in real space corresponding to the reciprocal-space kinematics in (b). If the angle ' , the film is oriented such that the scattering vector is parallel to the surface of the film, i.e. parallel to the smectic layers. A ‘QL scan’ is taken by simultaneous adjustment of ' and 2 to keep 4= sin cos ' 4= sin100 , where 100 is the Bragg angle for the 100 reflection. The different in-plane Bragg reflections can be brought into the scattering plane by rotation of the film by the angle around the film normal.

reflected intensities for films of 2, 3, 4, 5, . . . layers are in the ratio of 4, 9, 16, 25, . . ., the measurement can be calibrated by drawing and measuring a reasonable number of thin films. The most straightforward method for thick films is to measure the ellipticity of the polarization induced in laser light transmitted through the film at an oblique angle (Collett, 1983; Collett et al., 1985); however, a subtler method that makes use of the colours of white light reflected from the films is also practical (Sirota, Pershan, Sorensen & Collett, 1987). In certain circumstances, the thickness can also be measured using the X-ray scattering intensity in combination with one of the other methods. Fig. 4.4.4.1 illustrates the scattering geometry used with these films. Although recent unpublished work has demonstrated the possibility of a reflection geometry (Sorensen, 1987), all of the X-ray scattering studies to be described here were performed in transmission. Since the in-plane molecular spacings are typically between 4 and 5 A˚, while the layer spacing is closer to 30 A˚, it is difficult to study the 00L peaks in this geometry. Fig. 4.4.4.2 illustrates the difference between X-ray scattering spectra taken on a bulk crystalline-B sample of N-[4-(n-butyloxy)benzylidene]-4-n-octylaniline (4O.8) that was oriented in an external magnetic field while in the nematic phase and then cooled through the smectic-A phase into the crystalline-B phase (Aeppli et al., 1981), and one taken on a thick freely suspended film of N-[4(n-heptyloxy)benzylidene]-4-n-heptylaniline (7O.7) (Collett et al., 1982, 1985). Note that the data for 7O.7 are plotted on a semilogarithmic scale in order to display simultaneously both the Bragg peak and the thermal diffuse background. The scans are along the QL direction, at the appropriate value of QH to intersect the peaks associated with the intralayer periodicity. In both cases, the widths of the Bragg peaks are essentially determined by the sample mosaicity and as a result of the better alignment the ratio of the

thermal diffuse background to the Bragg peak is nearly an order of magnitude smaller for the free film sample. 4.4.4.1. Hexatic phases in two dimensions The hexatic phase of matter was first proposed independently by Halperin & Nelson (Halperin & Nelson 1978; Nelson & Halperin 1979) and Young (Young, 1979) on the basis of theoretical studies of the melting process in two dimensions. Following work by Kosterlitz & Thouless (1973), they observed that since the interaction energy between pairs of dislocations in two dimensions decreases logarithmically with their separation, the enthalpy and the entropy terms in the free energy have the same functional dependence on the density of dislocations. It follows that the freeenergy difference between the crystalline and hexatic phase has the form F H TS Tc S TS STc T, where S log is the entropy as a function of the density of dislocations and Tc is defined such that Tc S is the enthalpy. Since the prefactor of the enthalpy term is independent of temperature while that of the entropy term is linear, there will be a critical temperature, Tc , at which the sign of the free energy changes from positive to negative. For temperatures greater than Tc , the entropy term will dominate and the system will be unstable against the spontaneous generation of dislocations. When this happens, the two-dimensional crystal, with positional QLRO, but true long-range order in the orientation of neighbouring atoms, can melt into a new phase in which the positional order is short range, but for which there is QLRO in the orientation of the six neighbours surrounding any atom. The reciprocal-space structures for the twodimensional crystal and hexatic phases are illustrated in Figs. 4.4.4.3(b) and (c), respectively. That of the two-dimensional solid consists of a hexagonal lattice of sharp rods (i.e. algebraic line shapes in the plane of the crystal). For a finite size sample, the reciprocal-space structure of the two-dimensional hexatic phase is a hexagonal lattice of diffuse rods and there are theoretical predictions for the temperature dependence of the in-plane line shapes (Aeppli & Bruinsma, 1984). If the sample were of infinite size, the QLRO of the orientation would spread the six spots continuously around a circular ring, and the pattern would be indistinguishable from that of a well correlated liquid, i.e. Fig. 4.4.4.3(a). The extent of the patterns along the rod corresponds to the molecular form factor. Figs. 4.4.4.3(a), (b) and (c) are drawn on the assumption that the molecules are normal to the two-

457

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS have the same symmetry as the two-dimensional tilted fluid phase, i.e. the smectic-C. In two dimensions they all have QLRO in the tilt orientation, and since the simplest phenomenological argument says that there is a linear coupling between the tilt order and the nearneighbour positional order (Nelson & Halperin, 1980; Bruinsma & Nelson, 1981), it follows that the QLRO of the smectic-C tilt should induce QLRO in the near-neighbour positional order. Thus, by the usual arguments, if there is to be a phase transition between the smectic-C and one of the tilted hexatic phases, the transition must be a first-order transition (Landau & Lifshitz, 1958). This is analogous to the three-dimensional liquid-to-vapour transition which is first order up to a critical point, and beyond the critical point there is no real phase transition. 4.4.4.2. Hexatic phases in three dimensions

Fig. 4.4.4.3. Scattering intensities in reciprocal space from twodimensional: (a) liquid; (b) crystal; (c) normal hexatic; and tilted hexatics in which the tilt is (d) towards the nearest neighbours as for the smectic-I or (e) between the nearest neighbours as for the smectic-F. The thin rods of scattering in (b) indicate the singular cusp for peaks with algebraic line shapes in the HK plane.

dimensional plane of the phase. If the molecules are tilted, the molecular form factor for long thin rod-like molecules will shift the intensity maxima as indicated in Figs. 4.4.4.3(d) and (e). The phase in which the molecules are normal to the two-dimensional plane is the two-dimensional hexatic-B phase. If the molecules tilt towards the position of their nearest neighbours (in real space), or in the direction that is between the lowest-order peaks in reciprocal space, the phase is the two-dimensional smectic-I, Fig. 4.4.4.3(d). The other tilted phase, for which the tilt direction is between the nearest neighbours in real space or in the direction of the lowest-order peaks in reciprocal space, is the smectic-F, Fig. 4.4.4.3(e). Although theory (Halperin & Nelson, 1978; Nelson & Halperin, 1979; Young, 1979) predicts that the two-dimensional crystal can melt into a hexatic phase, it does not say that it must happen, and the crystal can melt directly into a two-dimensional liquid phase. Obviously, the hexatic phases will also melt into a two-dimensional liquid phase. Fig. 4.4.4.3(a) illustrates the reciprocal-space structure for the two-dimensional liquid in which the molecules are normal to the two-dimensional surface. Since the longitudinal (i.e. radial) width of the hexatic spot could be similar to the width that might be expected in a well correlated fluid, the direct X-ray proof of the transition from the hexatic-B to the normal liquid requires a hexatic sample in which the domains are sufficiently large that the sample is not a two-dimensional powder. On the other hand, the elastic constants must be sufficiently large that the QLRO does not smear the six spots into a circle. The radial line shape of the powder pattern of the hexatic-B phase can also be subtly different from that of the liquid and this is another possible way that X-ray scattering can detect melting of the hexatic-B phase (Aeppli & Bruinsma, 1984). Changes that occur on the melting of the tilted hexatics, i.e. smectic-F and smectic-I, are usually easier to detect and this will be discussed in more detail below. On the other hand, there is a fundamental theoretical problem concerning the way of understanding the melting of the tilted hexatics. These phases actually

Based on both this theory and the various X-ray scattering patterns that had been reported in the literature (Gray & Goodby, 1984), Litster & Birgeneau (Birgeneau & Litster, 1978) suggested that some of the three-dimensional systems that were previously identified as mesomorphic were actually three-dimensional hexatic systems. They observed that it is not theoretically consistent to propose that the smectic phases are layers of two-dimensional crystals randomly displaced with respect to each other since, in thermal equilibrium, the interactions between layers of twodimensional crystals must necessarily cause the layers to lock together to form a three-dimensional crystal.* On the other hand, if the layers were two-dimensional hexatics, then the interactions would have the effect of changing the QLRO of the hexagonal distribution of neighbours into the true long-range-order orientational distribution of the three-dimensional hexatic. In addition, interactions between layers in the three-dimensional hexatics can also result in interlayer correlations that would sharpen the width of the diffuse peaks in the reciprocal-space direction along the layer normal. 4.4.4.2.1. Hexatic-B Although Leadbetter, Frost & Mazid (1979) had remarked on the different types of X-ray structures that were observed in materials identified as ‘smectic-B’, the first proof for the existence of the hexatic-B phase of matter was the experiment by Pindak et al. (1981) on thick freely suspended films of the liquid crystal n-hexyl 40 -pentyloxybiphenyl-4-carboxylate (65OBC). A second study on free films of the liquid crystal n-butyl 40 -n-hexyloxybiphenyl-4carboxylate (46OBC) demonstrated that, as the hexatic-B melts into the smectic-A phase, the position and the in-plane width of the X-ray scattering peaks varied continuously. In particular, the inplane correlation length evolved continuously from 160 A˚, nearly 10 K below the hexatic to smectic-A transition, to only 17 A˚, a few degrees above. Similar behaviour was also observed in a film only two layers thick (Davey et al., 1984). Since the observed width of the peak along the layer normal corresponded to the molecular form factor, these systems have negligible interlayer correlations. 4.4.4.2.2. Smectic-F, smectic-I In contrast to the hexatic-B phase, the principal reciprocal-space features of the smectic-F phase were clearly determined before the theoretical work that proposed the hexatic phase. Demus et al. (1971) identified a new phase in one material, and subsequent X-ray studies by Leadbetter and co-workers (Leadbetter, Mazid & Richardson, 1980; Leadbetter, Gaughan et al., 1979; Gane & * Prior to the paper by Birgeneau & Litster, it was commonly believed that some of the smectic phases consisted of uncorrelated stacks of two-dimensional crystals.

458


Fig. 4.4.4.4. Scattering intensities in reciprocal space from threedimensional tilted hexatic phases: (a) the smectic-I and (b) the smectic-F. The variation of the intensity along the QL direction indicates interlayer correlations that are absent in Figs. 4.4.4.1(d) and (e). The peak widths QL1, 2 and QH1, 2 correspond to the four inequivalent widths in the smectic-F phase. Similar inequivalent widths exist for the smectic-I phase. The circle through the shaded points in (a) indicates the reciprocal-space scan that directly measures the hexatic order. A similar scan in the smectic-C phase would have intensity independent of .

Leadbetter, 1981) and by Benattar and co-workers (Benattar et al., 1978, 1980, 1983; Guillon et al., 1986) showed it to have the reciprocal-space structure illustrated in Fig. 4.4.4.4(b). There are interlayer correlations in the three-dimensional smectic-F phases, and as a consequence the reciprocal-space structure has maxima along the diffuse rods. Benattar et al. (1979) obtained monodomain smectic-F samples of the liquid crystal N,N0 -(1,4-phenylenedimethylene)bis(4-n-pentylaniline) by melting a single crystal that was previously precipitated from solution. One of the more surprising results of this work was the demonstration that the near-neighbour packing was very close to what would be expected from a model in which rigid closely packed rods were simply tilted away from the layer normal. In view of the facts that the molecules are clearly not cylindrical, and that the molecular tilt indicates that the macroscopic symmetry has been broken, it would have been reasonable to expect significant deviations from local hexagonal symmetry when the system is viewed along the molecular axis. The fact that this is not the case indicates that this phase has a considerable amount of rotational disorder around the long axis of the molecules. Other important features of the smectic-F phase are, firstly, that the local molecular packing is identical to that of the tilted crystalline-G phase (Benattar et al., 1979; Sirota et al., 1985; Guillon et al., 1986). Secondly, there is considerable temperature dependence of the widths of the various diffuse peaks. Fig. 4.4.4.4(b) indicates the four inequivalent line widths that Sirota and co-workers measured in freely suspended films of the liquid crystal N-[4-(n-heptyloxy)benzylidene]-4-n-heptyl aniline (7O.7). Parenthetically, bulk samples of this material do not have a smecticF phase; however, the smectic-F is observed in freely suspended films as thick as 200 layers. Fig. 4.4.4.5 illustrates the thickness– temperature phase diagram of 7O.7 between 325 and 342 K (Sirota et al., 1985; Sirota, Pershan & Deutsch, 1987). Bulk samples and thick films have a first-order transition from the crystalline-B to the smectic-C at 342 K. Thinner films indicate a surface phase above

Fig. 4.4.4.5. The phase diagram for free films of 7O.7 as a function of thickness and temperature. The phases ABAB, AAA, OR m1 , OR m2 , OR 0m1 , M and ABAB are all crystalline-B with varying interlayer stacking, or long-wavelength modulations; CrG, SmF and SmI are crystalline-G, smectic-F and smectic-I, respectively (Sirota et al., 1985; Sirota, Pershan & Deutsch, 1987; Sirota, Pershan, Sorensen & Collett, 1987).

342 K that will be discussed below. Furthermore, although there is a strong temperature dependence of the widths of the diffuse scattering peaks, the widths are independent of film thickness. This demonstrates that, although the free film boundary conditions have stabilized the smectic-F phase, the properties of the phase are not affected by the boundaries. Finally, the fact that the widths QL1 and QL2 along the L direction and QH1 and QH2 along the in-plane directions are not equal indicates that the correlations are very anisotropic (Brock et al., 1986; Sirota et al., 1985). We will discuss one possible model for these properties after presenting other data on thick films of 7O.7. From the fact that the positions of the intensity maxima for the diffuse spots of the smectic-F phase of 7O.7 correspond exactly to the positions of the Bragg peaks in the crystalline-G phase, we learn that the local molecular packing must be identical in the two phases. The major difference between the crystalline-G and the tilted hexatic smectic-F phase is that, in the latter, defects destroy the long-range positional order of the former (Benattar et al., 1979; Sirota et al., 1985). Although this is consistent with the existing theoretical model that attributes hexatic order to a proliferation of unbounded dislocations, it is not obvious that the proliferation is attributable to the same Kosterlitz–Thouless mechanism that Halperin & Nelson and Young discussed for the transition from the two-dimensional crystal to the hexatic phase. We will say more on this point below. The only identified difference between the two tilted hexatic phases, the smectic-F and the smectic-I, is the direction of the molecular tilt relative to the near-neighbour positions. For the smectic-I, the molecules tilt towards one of the near neighbours, while for the smectic-F they tilt between the neighbours (Gane & Leadbetter, 1983). There are a number of systems that have both smectic-I and smectic-F phases, and in all cases of which we are aware the smectic-I is the higher-temperature phase (Gray & Goodby, 1984; Sirota et al., 1985; Sirota, Pershan, Sorensen & Collett, 1987). Optical studies of freely suspended films of materials in the nO.m series indicated tilted surface phases at temperatures for which the bulk had uniaxial phases (Farber, 1985). As mentioned above,

459

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS X-ray scattering studies of 7O.7 demonstrated that the smectic-F phase set in for a narrow temperature range in films as thick as 180 layers, and that the temperature range increases with decreasing layer number. For films of the order of 25 layers thick, the smectic-I phase is observed at approximately 334 K, and with decreasing thickness the temperature range for this phase also increases. Below approximately 10 to 15 layers, the smectic-I phase extends up to 342 K where bulk samples undergo a first-order transition from the crystalline-B to the smectic-C phase. Synchrotron X-ray scattering experiments show that, in thin films (five layers for example), the homogeneous smectic-I film undergoes a first-order transition to one in which the two surface layers are smectic-I and the three interior layers are smectic-C (Sirota et al., 1985; Sirota, Pershan, Sorensen & Collett, 1987). The fact that two phases with the same symmetry can coexist in this manner tells us that in this material there is some important microscopic difference between them. This is reaffirmed by the fact that the phase transition from the surface smectic-I to the homogeneous smectic-C phase has been observed to be first order (Sorensen et al., 1987). In contrast to 7O.7, Birgeneau and co-workers found that in racemic 4-(2-methylbutyl)phenyl 40 -octyloxylbiphenyl-4-carboxylate (8OSI) (Brock et al., 1986), the X-ray structure of the smectic-I phase evolves continuously into that of the smectic-C. By applying a magnetic field to a thick freely suspended sample, Brock et al. were able to obtain a large monodomain sample. They measured the X-ray scattering intensity around the circle in the reciprocal-space plane shown in Fig. 4.4.4.4(b) that passes through the peaks. For higher temperatures, when the sample is in the smectic-C phase, the intensity is essentially constant around the circle; however, on cooling, it gradually condenses into six peaks, separated by 60 . The data were analysed by expressing the intensity as a Fourier series of the form 1 P 1 S I0 2 C6n cos 6n90 IB , n1

where I0 fixes the absolute intensity and IB fixes the background. The temperature variation of the coefficients scaled according to the relation C6n C6n where the empirical relation n 2:6n 1 is in good agreement with a theoretical form predicted by Aharony et al. (1986). The only other system in which this type of measurement has been made was the smectic-C phase of 7O.7 (Collett, 1983). In that case, the intensity around the circle was constant, indicating the absence of any tilt-induced bond orientational order (Aharony et al., 1986). It would appear that the near-neighbour molecular packing of the smectic-I and the crystalline-J phases is the same, in just the same way as for the packing of the smectic-F and the crystalline-G phases. The four smectic-I widths analogous to those illustrated in Fig. 4.4.4.4(a) are, like that of the smectic-F, both anisotropic and temperature dependent (Sirota et al., 1985; Sirota, Pershan, Sorensen & Collett, 1987; Brock et al., 1986; Benattar et al., 1979). 4.4.4.3. Crystalline phases with molecular rotation 4.4.4.3.1. Crystal-B Recognition of the distinction between the hexatic-B and crystalline-B phases provided one of the more important keys to understanding the ordered mesomorphic phases. There are a number of distinct phases called crystalline-B that are all true three-dimensional crystals, with resolution-limited Bragg peaks (Moncton & Pindak, 1979; Aeppli et al., 1981). The feature common to them all is that the average molecular orientation is normal to the layers, and within each layer the molecules are distributed on a triangular lattice. In view of the ‘blade-like’ shape of the molecule, the hexagonal site symmetry implies that the

molecules must be rotating rapidly (Levelut & Lambert, 1971; Levelut, 1976; Richardson et al., 1978). We have previously remarked that this apparent rotational motion characterizes all of the phases listed in Table 4.4.1.1 except for the crystalline-E, -H and -K. In the most common crystalline-B phase, adjacent layers have ABAB-type stacking (Leadbetter, Gaughan et al., 1979; Leadbetter, Mazid & Kelly, 1979). High-resolution studies on well oriented samples show that in addition to the Bragg peaks the crystalline-B phases have rods of relatively intense diffuse scattering distributed along the 10L Bragg peaks (Moncton & Pindak, 1979; Aeppli et al., 1981). The widths of these rods in the reciprocal-space direction, parallel to the layers, are very sharp, and without a high-resolution spectrometer their widths would appear to be resolution limited. In contrast, along the reciprocal-space direction normal to the layers, their structure corresponds to the molecular form factor. If the intensity of the diffuse scattering can be represented as proportional to hQ ui2 , where u describes the molecular displacement, the fact that there is no rod of diffuse scattering through the 00L peaks indicates that the rods through the 10L peaks originate from random disorder in ‘sliding’ displacements of adjacent layers. It is likely that these displacements are thermally excited phonon vibrations; however, we cannot rule out some sort of non-thermal static defect structure. In any event, assuming this diffuse scattering originates in a thermal vibration for which adjacent layers slide over one another with some amplitude hu2 i1=2 , and assuming strong coupling between this shearing motion and the molecular tilt, we can define an angle ' tan 1 hu2 i1=2 =d, where d is the layer thickness. The observed diffuse intensity corresponds to angles ' between 3 and 6 (Aeppli et al., 1981). Leadbetter and co-workers demonstrated that in the nO.m series various molecules undergo a series of restacking transitions and that crystalline-B phases exist with ABC and AAA stacking as well as the more common ABAB (Leadbetter, Mazid & Richardson 1980; Leadbetter, Mazid & Kelly, 1979). Subsequent high-resolution studies on thick freely suspended films revealed that the restacking transitions were actually subtler, and in 7O.7, for example, on cooling the hexagonal ABAB phase one observes an orthorhombic and then a monoclinic phase before the hexagonal AAA (Collett et al., 1982, 1985). Furthermore, the first transition from the hexagonal ABAB to the monoclinic phase is accompanied by the appearance of a relatively long wavelength modulation within the plane of the layers. The polarization of this modulation is along the layer normal, or orthogonal to the polarization of the displacements that gave rise to the rods of thermal diffuse scattering (Gane & Leadbetter, 1983). It is also interesting to note that the AAA simple hexagonal structure does not seem to have been observed outside liquidcrystalline materials and, were it not for the fact that the crystallineB hexagonal AAA is always accompanied by long wavelength modulations, it would be the only case of which we are aware. Figs. 4.4.4.6(a) and (b) illustrate the reciprocal-space positions of the Bragg peaks (dark dots) and modulation-induced side bands (open circles) for the unmodulated hexagonal ABAB and the modulated orthorhombic phase (Collett et al., 1984). For convenience, we only display one 60 sector. Hirth et al. (1984) explained how both the reciprocal-space structure and the modulation of the orthorhombic phase could result from an ordered array of partial dislocations. They were not, however, able to provide a specific model for the microscopic driving force for the transition. Sirota, Pershan & Deutsch (1987) proposed a variation of the Hirth model in which the dislocations pair up to form a wall of dislocation dipoles such that within the wall the local molecular packing is essentially identical to the packing in the crystalline-G phase that appears at temperatures just below the crystalline-B phase. This model explains: (1) the macroscopic symmetry of the

460


Fig. 4.4.4.6. Location of the Bragg peaks in one 60 section of reciprocal space for the three-dimensional crystalline-B phases observed in thick films of 7O.7. (a) The normal hexagonal crystalline-B phase with ABAB stacking. (b) The one-dimensional modulated phase with orthorhombic symmetry. The closed circles are the principal Bragg peaks and the open circles indicate side bands associated with the long-wavelength modulation. (c) The twodimensional modulated phase with orthorhombic symmetry. Only the lowest-order side bands are shown. They are situated on the corners of squares surrounding the Bragg peak. The squares are oriented as shown and the amplitude of the square diagonal is equal to the distance between the two side bands illustrated in (b). (d) The two-dimensional modulated phase with monoclinic symmetry. Note that the L position of one of the peaks has shifted relative to (c). (e) A two-dimensional modulated phase with orthorhombic symmetry that is only observed on heating the quenched phase illustrated in (g). (f) The two-dimensional modulated phase with hexagonal symmetry and AAA layer stacking. (g) A two-dimensional hexagonal phase with AAA layer stacking that is only observed on rapid cooling from the phase shown in (c).

phase; (2) the period of the modulation; (3) the polarization of the modulation; and (4) the size of the observed deviations of the reciprocal-space structure from the hexagonal symmetry of the ABAB phase and suggests a microscopic driving mechanism that we will discuss below. On further cooling, there is a first-order transition in which the one-dimensional modulation that appeared at the transition to orthorhombic symmetry is replaced by a two-dimensional modulation as shown in Fig. 4.4.4.6(c). On further cooling, there is another first-order transition in which the positions of the principal Bragg spots change from having orthorhombic to monoclinic symmetry as illustrated in Fig. 4.4.4.6(d). On further cooling, the Bragg peaks shift continually until there is one more first-order transition to a phase with hexagonal AAA positions as illustrated in Fig. 4.4.4.6(f). On further cooling, the AAA symmetry remains unchanged, and the modulation period is only slightly dependent on temperature, but the modulation amplitude increases dramatically. Eventually, as indicated in the phase diagram shown in Fig. 4.4.4.5, the system undergoes another first-order transition to the tilted crystalline-G phase. The patterns in Figs. 4.4.4.6(e) and (g) are observed by rapid quenching from the temperatures at which the patterns in Fig. 4.4.4.6(b) are observed. Although there is not yet an established theoretical explanation for the origin of the ‘restacking-modulation’ effects, there are a number of experimental facts that we can summarize, and which indicate a probable direction for future research. Firstly, if one ignores the long wavelength modulation, the hexagonal ABAB phase is the only phase in the diagram for 7O.7 for which there are two molecules per unit cell. There must be some basic molecular effect that determines this particular coupling between every other layer. In addition, it is particularly interesting that it only manifests itself for a small temperature range and then vanishes as the sample is cooled. Secondly, any explanation for the driving force of the restacking transition must also explain the modulations that accompany it. In particular, unless one cools rapidly, the same modulation structures with the same amplitudes always appear at the same temperature, regardless of the sample history, i.e. whether heating or cooling. No significant hysteresis is observed and Sirota argued that the structures are in thermal equilibrium. There are a number of physical systems for which the development of long-wavelength modulations is understood, and

in each case they are the result of two or more competing interaction energies that cannot be simultaneously minimized (Blinc & Levanyuk, 1986; Safinya, Varady et al., 1986; Lubensky & Ingersent, 1986; Winkor & Clarke, 1986; Moncton et al., 1981; Fleming et al., 1980; Villain, 1980; Frank & van der Merwe, 1949; Bak et al., 1979; Pokrovsky & Talapov, 1979). The easiest to visualize is epitaxic growth of one crystalline phase on the surface of another when the two lattice vectors are slightly incommensurate. The first atomic row of adsorbate molecules can be positioned to minimize the attractive interactions with the substrate. This is slightly more difficult for the second row, since the distance that minimizes the interaction energy between the first and second rows of adsorbate molecules is not necessarily the same as the distance that would minimize the interaction energy between the first row and the substrate. As more and more rows are added, the energy price of this incommensurability builds up, and one possible configuration that minimizes the global energy is a modulated structure. In all known cases, the very existence of modulated structures implies that there must be competing interactions, and the only real question about the modulated structures in the crystalline-B phases is the identification of the competing interactions. It appears that one of the more likely possibilities is the difficulty in packing the 7O.7 molecules within a triangular lattice while simultaneously optimizing the area per molecule of the alkane tails and the conjugated rings in the core (Carlson & Sethna, 1987; Sadoc & Charvolin, 1986). Typically, the mean cross-sectional area for a straight alkane in the all-trans configuration is between 18 and 19 A2 , while the mean area per molecule in the crystalline-B phase is closer to 24 A2 . While these two could be reconciled by assuming that the alkanes are tilted with respect to the conjugated core, there is no reason why the angle that reconciles the two should also be the same angle that minimizes the internal energy of the molecule. Even if it were the correct angle at some temperature by accident, the average area per chain is certainly temperature dependent. Even without attempting to include the rotational dynamics that are necessary to understanding the axial site symmetry, it is obvious that there can be a conflict in the packing requirements of the two different parts of the molecule. A possible explanation of these various structures might be as follows: at high temperatures, both the alkane chain, as well as the

461

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS other degrees of freedom, have considerable thermal motions that make it possible for the conflicting packing requirements to be simultaneously reconciled by one or another compromise. On the other hand, with decreasing temperature, some of the thermal motions become frozen out, and the energy cost of the reconciliation that was possible at higher temperatures becomes too great. At this point, the system must find another solution, and the various modulated phases represent the different compromises. Finally, all of the compromises involving inhomogeneities, like the modulations or grain boundaries, become impossible and the system transforms into a homogeneous crystalline-G phase. If this type of argument could be made more specific, it would also provide a possible explanation for the molecular origin of the three-dimensional hexatic phases. The original suggestion for the existence of hexatic phases in two dimensions was based on the fact that the interaction energy between dislocations in two dimensions was logarithmic, such that the entropy and the enthalpy had the same functional dependence on the density of dislocations. This gave rise to the observation that above a certain temperature twodimensional crystals would be unstable against thermally generated dislocations. Although Litster and Birgeneau’s suggestion that some of the observed smectic phases might be stacks of twodimensional hexatics is certainly correct, it is not necessary that the observed three-dimensional hexatics originate from entropy-driven thermally excited dislocations. For example, the temperature–layernumber phase diagram for 7O.7 that is shown in Fig. 4.4.4.5 has the interesting property that the temperature region over which the tilted hexatic phases exist in thin films is almost the same as the temperature region for which the modulated phases exist in thick films and in bulk samples. From the fact that molecules in the nO.m series that only differ by one or two —CH2 — groups have different sequences of mesomorphic phases, we learn that within any one molecule the difference in chemical potentials between the different mesomorphic phases must be very small (Leadbetter, Mazid & Kelly, 1979; Doucet & Levelut, 1977; Leadbetter, Frost & Mazid, 1979; Leadbetter, Mazid & Richardson, 1980; Smith et al., 1973; Smith & Garland, 1973). For example, although in 7O.7 the smectic-F phase is only observed in finite-thickness films, both 5O.6 and 9O.4 have smectic-F phase in bulk. Thus, in bulk 7O.7 the chemical potential for the smectic-F phase must be only slightly larger than that of the modulated crystalline-B phases, and the effect of the surfaces must be sufficient to reverse the order in samples of finite thickness. As far as the appearance of the smectic-F phase in 7O.7 is concerned, it is well known that the interaction energy between dislocation pairs is very different near a free surface from that in the bulk (Pershan, 1974; Pershan & Prost, 1975). The origin of this is that the elastic properties of the surface will usually cause the stress field of a dislocation near to the surface either to vanish or to be considerably smaller than it would in the bulk. Since the interaction energy between dislocations depends on this stress field, the surface significantly modifies the dislocation–dislocation interaction. This is a long-range effect, and it would not be surprising if the interactions that stabilized the dislocation arrays to produce the long-wavelength modulations in the thick samples were sufficiently weaker in the samples of finite thickness that the dislocation arrays are disordered. Alternatively, there is evidence that specific surface interactions favour a finite molecular tilt at temperatures where the bulk phases are uniaxial (Farber, 1985). Incommensurability between the period of the tilted surface molecules and the crystalline-B phases below the surface would increase the density of dislocations, and this would also modify the dislocation– dislocation interactions in the bulk. Sirota et al. (1985) and Sirota, Pershan, Sorensen & Collett (1987) demonstrated that, while the correlation lengths of the smectic-F phase have a significant temperature dependence, the

lengths are independent of film thickness, and this supports the argument that although the effects of the surface are important in stabilizing the smectic-F phase in 7O.7, once the phase is established it is essentially no different from the smectic-F phases observed in bulk samples of other materials. Brock et al. (1986) observed anisotropies in the correlation lengths of thick samples of 8OSI that are similar to those observed by Sirota. These observations motivate the hypothesis that the dislocation densities in the smectic-F phases are determined by the same incommensurability that gives rise to the modulated crystalline-B structures. Although all of the experimental evidence supporting this hypothesis was obtained from the smectic-F tilted hexatic phase, there is no reason why this speculation could not apply to both the tilted smectic-I and the untilted hexatic-B phase. 4.4.4.3.2. Crystal-G, crystal-J The crystalline-G and crystalline-J phases are the ordered versions of the smectic-F and smectic-I phases, respectively. The positions of the principal peaks illustrated in Fig. 4.4.4.4 for the smectic-F(I) are identical to the positions in the smectic-G(J) phase if small thermal shifts are discounted. In both the hexatic and the crystalline phases, the molecules are tilted with respect to the layer normals by approximately 25 to 30 with nearly hexagonal packing around the tilted axis (Doucet & Levelut, 1977; Levelut et al., 1974; Levelut, 1976; Leadbetter, Mazid & Kelly, 1979; Sirota, Pershan, Sorensen & Collett, 1987). The interlayer molecular packing appears to be end to end, in an AAA type of stacking (Benattar et al., 1983; Benattar et al., 1981; Levelut, 1976; Gane et al., 1983). There is only one molecule per unit cell and there is no evidence for the long-wavelength modulations that are so prevalent in the crystalline-B phase that is the next higher temperature phase above the crystalline-G in 7O.7. 4.4.4.4. Crystalline phases with herringbone packing 4.4.4.4.1. Crystal-E Fig. 4.4.4.7 illustrates the intralayer molecular packing proposed for the crystalline-E phase (Levelut, 1976; Doucet, 1979; Levelut et al., 1974; Doucet et al., 1975; Leadbetter et al., 1976; Richardson et al., 1978; Leadbetter, Frost, Gaughan & Mazid, 1979; Leadbetter, Frost & Mazid, 1979). The molecules are, on average, normal to the

Fig. 4.4.4.7. (a) The ‘herringbone’ stacking suggested for the crystalline-E phase in which molecular rotation is partially restricted. The primitive rectangular unit cell containing two molecules is illustrated by the shaded region. The lattice has rectangular symmetry and a 6 b. (b) The position of the Bragg peaks in the plane in reciprocal space that is parallel to the layers. The dark circles indicate the principal Bragg peaks that would be the only ones present if all molecules were equivalent. The open circles indicate additional peaks that are observed for the model illustrated in (a). The cross-hatched circles indicate peaks that are missing because of the glide plane in (a).

462

4.4. SCATTERING FROM MESOMORPHIC STRUCTURES layers; however, from the optical birefringence it is apparent that the site symmetry is not uniaxial. X-ray diffraction studies on single crystals by Doucet and co-workers demonstrated that the biaxiality was not attributable to molecular tilt and subsequent work by a number of others resulted in the arrangement shown in Fig. 4.4.4.7(a). The most important distinguishing reciprocal-space feature associated with the intralayer ‘herringbone’ packing is the p appearance of Bragg peaks at sin equal to 7=2 times the value for the lowest-order in-plane Bragg peak for the triangular lattice (Pindak et al., 1981). These are illustrated by the open circles in Fig. 4.4.4.7(b). The shaded circles correspond to peaks that are missing because of the glide plane that relates the two molecules in the rectangular cell. Leadbetter, Mazid & Malik (1980) carried out detailed studies on both the crystalline-E phase of isobutyl 4-(4-phenylbenzylideneamino)cinnamate (IBPBAC) and the crystalline phase immediately below the crystalline-E phase. Partially ordered samples of the crystalline-E phase were obtained by melting the lower-temperature crystalline phase. Although the data for the crystalline-E phase left some ambiguity, they argued that the phase they were studying might well have had molecular tilts of the order of 5 or 6 . This is an important distinction, since the crystalline-H and crystalline-J phases are essentially tilted versions of the crystalline-E. Thus, one important symmetry difference that might distinguish the crystalline-E from the others is the presence of a mirror plane parallel to the layers. In view of the low symmetry of the individual molecules, the existence of such a mirror plane would imply residual molecular motions. In fact, using neutron diffraction Leadbetter et al. (1976) demonstrated for a different liquid crystal that, even though the site symmetry is not axially symmetric, there is considerable residual rotational motion in the crystalline-E phase about the long axis of the molecules. Since the in-plane spacing is too small for neighbouring molecules to be rotating independently of each other, they proposed what might be interpreted as large partially hindered rotations. 4.4.4.4.2. Crystal-H, crystal-K The crystalline-H and crystalline-K phases are tilted versions of the crystalline-E. The crystalline-H is tilted in the direction between the near neighbours, with the convenient mnemonic that on cooling the sequence of phases with the same relative orientation of tilt to near-neighbour position is F ! G ! H. Similarly, the tilt direction for the crystalline-K phase is similar to that of the smectic-I and crystalline-J so that the expected phase sequence on cooling might be I ! J ! K. In fact, both of these sequences are only intended to indicate the progression in lower symmetry; the actual transitions vary from material to material. 4.4.5. Discotic phases In contrast to the long thin rod-like molecules that formed most of the other phases discussed in this chapter, the discotic phases are formed by molecules that are more disc-like [see Fig. 4.4.1.3( f ), for example]. There was evidence that mesomorphic phases were formed from disc-like molecules as far back as 1960 (Brooks & Taylor, 1968); however, the first identification of a discotic phase was by Chandrasekhar et al. (1977) with benzenehexyl hexa-nalkanoate compounds. Disc-like molecules can form either a fluid nematic phase in which the disc normals are aligned, without any particular long-range order at the molecular centre of mass, or more-ordered ‘columnar’ (Helfrich, 1979) or ‘discotic’ (Billard et al., 1981) phases in which the molecular positions are correlated such that the discs stack on top of one another to form columns. Some of the literature designates this nematic phase as ND to distinguish it from the phase formed by ‘rod-like’ molecules

Fig. 4.4.5.1. Schematic illustration of the molecular stacking for the discotic (a) D2 and (b) D1 phases. In neither of these two phases is there any indication of long-range positional order along the columns. The hexagonal symmetry of the D1 phase is broken by ‘herringbone-like’ correlations in the molecular tilt from column to column.

(Destrade et al., 1983). In the same way that the appearance of layers characterizes order in smectic phases, the order for the discotic phases is characterized by the appearance of columns. Chandrasekhar (1982, 1983) and Destrade et al. (1983) have reviewed this area and have summarized the several notations for various phases that appear in the literature. Levelut (1983) has also written a review and presented a table listing the space groups for columnar phases formed by 18 different molecules. Unfortunately, it is not absolutely clear which of these are mesomorphic phases and which are crystals with true long-range positional order. Fig. 4.4.5.1 illustrates the molecular packing in two of the well identified discotic phases that are designated as D1 and D2 (Chandrasekhar, 1982). The phase D2 consists of a hexagonal array of columns for which there is no intracolumnar order. The system is uniaxial and, as originally proposed, the molecular normals were supposed to be along the column axis. However, recent X-ray scattering studies on oriented free-standing fibres of the D2 phase of triphenylene hexa-n-dodecanoate indicate that the molecules are tilted with respect to the layer normal (Safinya et al., 1985, 1984). The D1 phase is definitely a tilted phase, and consequently the columns are packed in a rectangular cell. According to Safinya et al., the D1 to D2 transition corresponds to an order–disorder transition in which the molecular tilt orientation is ordered about the column axis in the D1 phase and disordered in the D2 phase. The reciprocal-space structure of the D1 phase is similar to that of the crystalline-E phase shown in Fig. 4.4.4.7(b). Other discotic phases that have been proposed would have the molecules arranged periodically along the column, but disordered between columns. This does not seem physically realistic since it is well known that thermal fluctuations rule out the possibility of a one-dimensional periodic structure even more strongly than for the two-dimensional lattice that was discussed above (Landau, 1965; Peierls, 1934). On the other hand, in the absence of either more high-resolution studies on oriented fibres or further theoretical studies, we prefer not to speculate on the variety of possible true discotic or discotic-like crystalline phases that might exist. This is a subject for future research.

4.4.6. Other phases We have deliberately chosen not to discuss the properties of the cholesteric phase in this chapter because the length scales that characterize the long-range order are of the order of micrometres and are more easily studied by optical scattering than by X-rays (De Gennes, 1974; De Vries, 1951). Nematic phases formed from chiral

463

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS molecules develop long-range order in which the orientation of the director hni varies in a plane-wave-like manner that can be described as x cos2z= y sin2z=, where x and y are unit vectors and =2 is the cholesteric ‘pitch’ that can be anywhere from 0.1 to 10 mm depending on the particular molecule. Even more interesting is that for many cholesteric systems there is a small temperature range, of the order of 1 K, between the cholesteric and isotropic phases for which there is a phase known as the ‘blue phase’ (Coates & Gray, 1975; Stegemeyer & Bergmann, 1981; Meiboom et al., 1981; Bensimon et al., 1983; Hornreich & Shtrikman, 1983; Crooker, 1983). In fact, there is more than one ‘blue phase’ but they all have the property that the cholesteric twist forms a three-dimensional lattice twisted network rather than the plane-wave-like twist of the cholesteric phase. Three-dimensional Bragg scattering from blue phases using laser light indicates cubic lattices; however, since the optical cholesteric interactions are much stronger than the usual interactions between X-rays and atoms, interpretation of the results is subtler. Gray and Goodby discuss a ‘smectic-D’ phase that is otherwise omitted from this chapter (Gray & Goodby, 1984). Gray and coworkers first observed this phase in the homologous series of 40 -nalkoxy-30 -nitrobiphenyl-4-carboxylic acids (Gray et al., 1957). In the hexadecyloxy compound, this phase exists for a region of about 26 K between the smectic-C and smectic-A phases: smectic-C (444.2 K) smectic-D (470.4 K) smectic-A. It is optically isotropic and X-ray studies by Diele et al. (1972) and by Tardieu & Billard (1976) indicate a number of similarities to the ‘cubic–isotropic’ phase observed in lyotropic systems (Luzzati & Riess-Husson, 1966; Tardieu & Luzzati, 1970). More recently, Etherington et al. (1986) studied the ‘smectic-D’ phase of 30 -cyano-40 -n-octadecyloxybiphenyl-4-carboxylic acid. Since this material appears to be more stable than some of the others that were previously studied, they were able to perform sufficient measurements to determine that the space group is cubic P23 or Pm3 with a lattice parameter of 86 A˚. Etherington et al. suggested that the ‘smectic-D’ phase that they studied is a true three-dimensional cubic crystal of micelles and noted that the designation of ‘smectic-D’ is not accurate. Guillon & Skoulios (1987) have proposed a molecular model for this and related phases. Fontell (1974) has reviewed the literature on the X-ray diffraction studies of lyotropic mesomorphic systems and the reader is referred there for more extensive information on those cubic systems. The mesomorphic structures of lyotropic systems are much richer than those of the thermotropic and, in addition to all structures mentioned here, there are lyotropic systems in which the smectic-A lamellae seem to break up into cylindrical rods which seem to have the same macroscopic symmetry as some of the discotic phases. On the other hand, it is also much more difficult to prepare a review for the lyotropic systems in the same type of detail as for the thermotropic. The extra complexity associated with the need to control water concentration as well as temperature has made both theoretical and experimental progress more difficult, and, since there has not been very much experimental work on well oriented samples, detailed knowledge of many of these phases is also limited. Aside from the simpler lamellae systems, which seem to have the same symmetry as the thermotropic smectic-A phase, it is not at all clear which of the other phases are three-dimensional crystals and which are true mesomorphic structures. For example, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine has an L phase that appears for temperatures and (or) water content that is lower than that of the smectic-A L phase (Shipley et al., 1974; Small, 1967; Chapman et al., 1967). The diffraction pattern for this phase contains sharp large-angle reflections that may well correspond to a phase that is like one of the crystalline phases listed in Tables 4.4.1.1 and 4.4.1.2, and Fig. 4.4.1.1. On the other hand, this phase could also be hexatic and we do not have sufficient information to decide. The interested

reader is referred to the referenced articles for further detailed information.

4.4.7. Notes added in proof to first edition 4.4.7.1. Phases with intermediate molecular tilt: smectic-L, crystalline-M,N Following the completion of this manuscript, Smith and coworkers [G. S. Smith, E. B. Sirota, C. R. Safinya & N. A. Clark (1988). Phys. Rev. Lett. 60, 813–816; E. B. Sirota, G. S. Smith, C. R. Safinya, R. J. Plano & N. A. Clark (1988). Science, 242, 1406– 1409] published an X-ray scattering study of the structure of a freely suspended multilayer film of hydrated phosphatidylcholine in which the phase that had been designated LB0 in the literature on lipid phases [M. J. Janiak, D. M. Small & G. G. Shipley (1979). J. Biol. Chem. 254, 6068–6078; V. Luzzati (1968). In Biological Membranes: Physical Fact and Function, Vol. 1, edited by D. Chapman, pp. 71–123; A. Tardieu, V. Luzzati & F. C. Reman (1973). J. Mol. Biol. 75, 711–733] was shown to consist of three separate two-dimensional phases in which the positional order in adjacent layers is uncoupled. The three phases are distinguished by the direction of the alkane-chain tilt relative to the nearest neighbours, and in one of these phases the orientation varies continuously with increasing hydration. At the lowest hydration, they observe a phase in which the tilt is towards the second-nearest neighbour; in analogy to the smectic-F phase, they designate this phase L F . On increasing hydration, they observe a phase in which the tilt direction is intermediate between the nearest- and nextnearest-neighbour directions, and which varies continuously with hydration. This is a new phase that was not previously known and they designate it L L . On further hydration, they observe a phase in which the molecular tilt is towards a nearest neighbour and this is designated L I . At maximum hydration, they observe the phase with long-wavelength modulation that was previously designated P [M. J. Janiak, D. M. Small & G. G. Shipley (1979). J. Biol. Chem. 254, 6068–6078]. J. V. Selinger & D. R. Nelson [Phys. Rev. Lett. (1988), 61, 416–419] have subsequently developed a theory for the phase transitions between phases with varying tilt orientation and have rationalized the existence of phases with intermediate tilt. To be complete, both Fig. 4.4.1.1 and Table 4.4.1.1 should be amended to include this type of hexatic order which is now referred to as the smectic-L. Extension of the previous logic suggests that the crystalline phases with intermediate tilt should be designated M and N, where N has ‘herringbone’ type of intermolecular order. 4.4.7.2. Nematic to smectic-A phase transition At the time this manuscript was prepared, there was a fundamental discrepancy between theoretical predictions for the details of the critical properties of the second-order nematic to smectic-A phase transition. This has been resolved. W. G. Bouwan & W. H. de Jeu [Phys. Rev. Lett. (1992), 68, 800–803] reported an X-ray scattering study of the critical properties of octyloxyphenylcyanobenzyloxybenzoate in which the data were in good agreement with predictions of the three-dimensional xy model [T. C. Lubensky (1983). J. Chim. Phys. 80, 31–43; J. C. Le Guillou & J. Zinn-Justin (1985). J. Phys. Lett. 52, L-137–L-141]. The differences between this experiment and others that were discussed previously, and which did not agree with theory, are firstly that this material is much further from the tricritical point that appears to be ubiquitous for most liquid-crystalline materials and, secondly, that they used the Landau–De Gennes theory to argue that the critical temperature dependence for the Q4? term in the differential cross section given in equation (4.4.2.7) is not that of the c?4 term but

464

4.4. SCATTERING FROM MESOMORPHIC STRUCTURES rather should vary as T TNA =T =4 , where is the exponent that describes the critical-temperature dependence of the smectic order parameter j j2 ' T TNA =T . The experimental results

are in good agreement with the Monte Carlo simulation of the N---SA transition that was reported by C. Dasgupta [Phys. Rev. Lett. (1985), 55, 1771–1774; J. Phys. (Paris), (1987), 48, 957–970].

465


4.5. Polymer crystallography BY R. P. MILLANE

4.5.1. Overview (R. P. MILLANE

AND

D. L. DORSET)

Linear polymers from natural or synthetic sources are actually polydisperse aggregates of high-molecular-weight chains. Nevertheless, many of these essentially infinite-length molecules can be prepared as solid-state specimens that contain ordered molecular segments or crystalline inclusions (Vainshtein, 1966; Tadokoro, 1979; Mandelkern, 1989; Barham, 1993). In general, ordering can occur in a number of ways. Hence an oriented and/or somewhat ordered packing of chain segments might be found in a stretched fibre, or in the chain-folded arrangement of a lamellar crystallite. Lamellae themselves may exist as single plates or in the more complex array of a spherulite (Geil, 1963). Diffraction data can be obtained from these various kinds of specimens and used to determine molecular and crystal structures. There are numerous reasons why crystallography of polymers is important. Although it may be possible to crystallize small constituent fragments of these large molecules and determine their crystal structures, one often wishes to study the intact (and biologically or functionally active) polymeric system. The molecular conformations and intermolecular interactions are determinants of parameters such as persistence length which affect, for example, solution conformations (random or worm-like coils) which determine viscosity. Molecular conformations also influence intermolecular interactions, which determine physical properties in gels and melts. Molecular conformations are, of course, of critical importance in many biological recognition processes. Knowledge of the stereochemical constraints that are placed on the molecular packing to maximize unit-cell density is particularly relevant to the fact that many linear molecules (as well as monodisperse substances with low molecular weight) can adopt several different allomorphic forms, depending on the crystallization conditions employed or the biological origin. Since different allomorphs can behave quite differently from one another, it is clear that the mode of chain packing is related to the bulk properties of the polymer (Grubb, 1993). The three-dimensional geometry of the chain packing obtained from a crystal structure analysis can be used to investigate other phenomena such as the possible inclusion of disordered material in chain-fold regions (Mandelkern, 1989; Lotz & Wittmann, 1993), the ordered interaction of crystallite sectors across grain boundaries where tight interactions are found between domains, or the specific interactions of polymer chains with another substance in a composite material (Lotz & Wittmann, 1993). The two primary crystallographic techniques used for studying polymer structure are described in this chapter. The first is X-ray fibre diffraction analysis, described in Section 4.5.2; and the second is polymer electron crystallography, described in Section 4.5.3. Crystallographic studies of polymers were first performed using X-ray diffraction from oriented fibre specimens. Early applications were to cellulose and DNA from the 1930s to the 1950s, and the technique has subsequently been applied to hundreds of biological and synthetic polymers (Arnott, 1980; Millane, 1988). This technique is now referred to as X-ray fibre diffraction analysis. In fact, fibre diffraction analysis can be employed not only for polymers, but for any system that can be oriented. Indeed, one of the first applications of the technique was to tobacco mosaic virus (Franklin, 1955). Fibre diffraction analysis has also utilized, in some cases, neutrons instead of X-rays (e.g. Stark et al., 1988; Forsyth et al., 1989). X-ray fibre diffraction analysis is particularly suitable for biological polymers that form natural fibrous superstructures and even for many synthetic polymers that exist in either a fibrous or a liquid-crystalline state. Fibre diffraction has played an important role in structural studies of polynucleotides, polysacchar-

AND

ides, polypeptides and polyesters, as well as rod-like helical viruses, bacteriophages, microtubules and muscle fibres (Arnott, 1980; French & Gardner, 1980; Hall, 1984; Millane, 1988; Atkins, 1989). The common, and unique, feature of these systems is that the molecules (or their aggregates) are randomly rotated about an axis of preferred orientation. As a result, the measured diffraction is the cylindrical average of that from a single molecule or aggregate. The challenge for the structural scientist, therefore, is that of structure determination from cylindrically averaged diffraction intensities. Since a wide range of types and degrees of order (or disorder) occur in fibrous specimens, as well as a wide range of sizes of the repeating units, a variety of methods are used for structure determination. The second technique used for structural studies of polymers is polymer electron crystallography. This involves measuring electron intensity data from individual crystalline regions or lamellae in the diffraction plane of an electron microscope. This is possible because a narrow electron beam can be focused on a single thin microcrystal and because of the enhanced scattering cross section of matter for electrons. By tilting the specimen, three-dimensional diffraction intensities from a single microcrystal can be collected. This means that the unit-cell dimensions and symmetry can be obtained unambiguously in electron-diffraction experiments on individual chain-folded lamellae, and the data can be used for actual singlecrystal structure determinations. One of the first informative electron-diffraction studies of crystalline polymer films was made by Storks (1938), who formulated the concept of chain folding in polymer lamellae. Among the first quantitative structure determinations from electron-diffraction intensities was that of Tatarinova & Vainshtein (1962) on the form of poly- -methyl-L-glutamate. Quantitative interpretation of the intensity data may benefit from the assumption of quasi-kinematical scattering (Dorset, 1995a), as long as the proper constraints are placed on the experiment. Structure determination may then proceed using the traditional techniques of X-ray crystallography. While molecular-modelling approaches (in which atomic level molecular and crystal structure models are constructed and refined) have been employed with single-crystal electron-diffraction data (Brisse, 1989), the importance of ab initio structure determination has been established in recent years (Dorset, 1995b), demonstrating that no initial assumptions about the molecular geometry need be made before the determination is begun. In some cases too, high-resolution electron micrographs of the polymer crystal structure can be used as an additional means for determining crystallographic phases and/or to visualize lattice defects. Each of the two techniques described above has its own advantages and disadvantages. While specimen disorder can limit the application of X-ray fibre diffraction analysis, polymer electron diffraction is limited to materials that can be be prepared as crystalline lamallae and that can withstand the high vacuum environment of an electron microscope (although the latter restriction can now be largely overcome by the use of lowtemperature specimen holders and/or environmental chambers).

4.5.2. X-ray fibre diffraction analysis (R. P. MILLANE) 4.5.2.1. Introduction X-ray fibre diffraction analysis is a collection of crystallographic techniques that are used to determine molecular and crystal structures of molecules, or molecular assemblies, that form specimens (often fibres) in which the molecules, assemblies or


D. L. DORSET

4.5. POLYMER CRYSTALLOGRAPHY crystallites are approximately parallel but not otherwise ordered (Arnott, 1980; French & Gardner, 1980; Hall, 1984; Vibert, 1987; Millane, 1988; Atkins, 1989; Stubbs, 1999). These are usually long, slender molecules and they are often inherently flexible, which usually precludes the formation of regular three-dimensional crystals suitable for conventional crystallographic analysis. X-ray fibre diffraction therefore provides a route for structure determination for certain kinds of specimens that cannot be crystallized. Although it may be possible to crystallize small fragments or subunits of these molecules, and determine the crystal structures of these, X-ray fibre diffraction provides a means for studying the intact, and often the biologically or functionally active, system. Fibre diffraction has played an important role in the determination of biopolymers such as polynucleotides, polysaccharides (both linear and branched), polypeptides and a wide variety of synthetic polymers (such as polyesters), as well as larger assemblies including rod-like helical viruses, bacteriophages, microtubules and muscle fibres (Arnott, 1980; Arnott & Mitra, 1984; Millane, 1990c; Squire & Vibert, 1987). Specimens appropriate for fibre diffraction analysis exhibit rotational disorder (of the molecules, aggregates or crystallites) about a preferred axis, resulting in cylindrical averaging of the diffracted intensity in reciprocal space. Therefore, fibre diffraction analysis can be thought of as ‘structure determination from cylindrically averaged diffraction intensities’ (Millane, 1993). In a powder specimen the crystallites are completely (spherically) disordered, so that structure determination by fibre diffraction can be considered to be intermediate between structure determination from single crystals and from powders. This section is a review of the theory and techniques of structure determination by X-ray fibre diffraction analysis. It includes descriptions of fibre specimens, the theory of diffraction by these specimens, intensity data collection and processing, and the variety of structure determination methods used for the various kinds of specimens studied by fibre diffraction. It does not include descriptions of specimen preparation (those can be found in the references given for specific systems), or of applications of X-ray diffraction to determining polymer morphology (e.g. particle or void sizes and shapes, texture, domain structure etc.). 4.5.2.2. Fibre specimens A wide variety of kinds of fibre specimen exist. All exhibit preferred orientation; the variety results from variability in the degree of order (crystallinity) in the lateral plane (the plane perpendicular to the axis of preferred orientation). This leads to categorization of three kinds of fibre specimen: noncrystalline fibres, in which there is no order in the lateral plane; polycrystalline fibres, in which there is near-perfect crystallinity in the lateral plane; and disordered fibres, in which there is disorder either within the molecules or in their crystalline packing (or both). The kind of fibre specimen affects the kind of diffraction pattern obtained, the relationships between the molecular and crystal structures and the diffraction data, methods of data collection, and methods of structure determination. Noncrystalline fibres are made up of a collection of molecules that are oriented. This means that there is a common axis in each molecule (referred to here as the molecular axis), the axes being parallel in the specimen. The direction of preferred orientation is called the fibre axis. The molecule itself is usually considered to be a rigid body. There is no other ordering within the specimen. The molecules are therefore randomly positioned in the lateral plane and are randomly rotated about their molecular axes. Furthermore, if the molecule does not have a twofold rotation axis normal to the molecular axis, then the molecular axis has a direction associated with it, and the molecular axes are oriented randomly parallel or

antiparallel to each other. This is often called directional disorder, or the molecules are said to be oriented randomly up and down. The average length of the ordered molecular segments in a noncrystalline fibre is referred to as the coherence length. Polycrystalline fibres are characterized by molecular segments packing together to form well ordered microcrystallites within the specimen. The crystallites effectively take the place of the molecules in a noncrystalline specimen as described above. The crystallites are oriented, and since the axis within each crystallite that is aligned parallel to those in other crystallites usually corresponds to the long axes of the constituent molecules, it is also referred to here as the molecular axis. The crystallites are randomly positioned in the lateral plane, randomly rotated about the molecular axis, and randomly oriented up or down. The size of the crystalline domains can be characterized by their average dimensions in the directions of the a, b and c unit-cell vectors. However, because of the rotational disorder of the crystallites, any differences between crystallite dimensions in different directions normal to the fibre axis tend to be smeared out in the diffraction pattern, and the crystallite size is usefully characterized by the average dimensions of the crystallites normal and parallel to the fibre axis. The molecules or crystallites in a fibre specimen are not perfectly oriented, and the variation in inclinations of the molecular axes to the fibre axis is referred to as disorientation. Assuming that the orientation is axisymmetric, then it can be described by an orientation density function such that d! is the fraction of molecules in an element of solid angle d! inclined at an angle to the fibre axis. The exact form of is generally not known for any particular fibre and it is often sufficient to assume a Gaussian orientation density function, so that 1 2

, 4:5:2:1 exp 220 220 where 0 is a measure of the degree of disorientation. Fibre specimens often exhibit various kinds of disorder. The disorder may be within the molecules or in their packing. Disorder affects the relationship between the molecular and crystal structure and the diffracted intensities. Disorder within the molecules may result from a degree of randomness in the chemical sequence of the molecule or from variability in the interactions between the units that make up the molecule. Such molecules may (at least in principle) form noncrystalline, polycrystalline or partially crystalline (described below) fibres. Disordered packing of molecules within crystallites can result from a variety of ways in which the molecules can interact with each other. Fibre specimens made up of disordered crystallites are referred to here as partially crystalline fibres. 4.5.2.3. Diffraction by helical structures Molecules or assemblies studied by fibre diffraction are usually made up of a large number of identical, or nearly identical, residues, or subunits, that in an oriented specimen are distributed along an axis; this leads naturally to helical symmetry. Since a periodic structure with no helix symmetry can be treated as a onefold helix, the assumption of helix symmetry is not restrictive. 4.5.2.3.1. Helix symmetry The presence of a unique axis about which there is rotational disorder means that it is convenient to use cylindrical polar coordinate systems in fibre diffraction. We denote by r, ', z a cylindrical polar coordinate system in real space, in which the z axis is parallel to the molecular axes. The molecule is said to have uv helix symmetry, where u and v are integers, if the electron density

467

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS f r, ', z satisfies

4.5.2.3.2. Diffraction by helical structures

f r, ' 2mv=u, z mc=u f r, ', z,

4:5:2:2

where m is any integer. The constant c is the period along the z direction, which is referred to variously as the molecular repeat distance, the crystallographic repeat, or the c repeat. The helix pitch P is equal to c=v. Helix symmetry is easily interpreted as follows. There are u subunits, or helix repeat units, in one c repeat of the molecule. The helix repeat units are repeated by integral rotations of 2v=u about, and translations of c=u along, the molecular (or helix) axis. The helix repeat units may therefore be referenced to a helical lattice that consists of points at a fixed radius, with relative rotations and translations as described above. These points lie on a helix of pitch P, there are v turns (or pitch-lengths) of the helix in one c repeat, and there are u helical lattice points in one c repeat. A uv helix is said to have ‘u residues in v turns’. Since the electron density is periodic in ' and z, it can be decomposed into a Fourier series as f r, ', z

1 P

1 P

l 1 n 1

gnl r exp in'

2lz=c ,

Fl R,

Rc R2 R1 f r, ', z exp i2Rr cos 0 0 0 lz=c r dr d' dz:

R1 Gnl R gnl rJn 2Rr2r dr,

4:5:2:10

and the inverse transform is R1 gnl r Gnl RJn 2Rr2R dR:

4:5:2:4 Assume now that the electron density has helical symmetry. Denote by gr, ', z the electron density in the region 0 < z < c=u; the electron density being zero outside this region, i.e. gr, ', z is the electron density of a single helix repeat unit. It follows that gr, ' 2mv=u, z mc=u:

m 1

4:5:2:11

0

0 0

f r, ', z

4:5:2:9

0

Rc R2 f r, ', z exp i n' 2lz=c d' dz:

1 P

'

It is convenient to rewrite equation (4.5.2.9) making use of the Fourier decomposition described in Section 4.5.2.3.1, since this allows utilization of the helix selection rule. The Fourier–Bessel structure factors (Klug et al., 1958), Gnl R, are defined as the Hankel transform of the Fourier coefficients gnl r, i.e.

4:5:2:3

where the coefficients gnl r are given by gnl r c=2

Denote by R, , Z a cylindrical polar coordinate system in reciprocal space (with the Z and z axes parallel), and by FR, , Z the Fourier transform of f r, ', z. Since f r, ', z is periodic in z with period c, its Fourier transform is nonzero only on the layer planes Z l=c where l is an integer. Denote FR, , l=c by Fl R, ; using the cylindrical form of the Fourier transform shows that

4:5:2:5

Substituting equation (4.5.2.5) into equation (4.5.2.4) shows that gnl r vanishes unless l nv is a multiple of u, i.e. unless

Using equations (4.5.2.7) and (4.5.2.11) shows that equation (4.5.2.9) can be written as P Fl R, Gnl R exp in =2 , 4:5:2:12 n

where, as usual, the sum is over only those values of n that satisfy the helix selection rule. Using equations (4.5.2.8) and (4.5.2.10) shows that the Fourier–Bessel structure factors may be written in terms of the atomic coordinates as P Gnl R fj Jn 2Rr j exp i n'j 2lzj =c , j

4:5:2:6

4:5:2:13

for any integer m. Equation (4.5.2.6) is called the helix selection rule. The electron density in the helix repeat unit is therefore given by PP gr, ', z gnl r exp in' 2lz=c , 4:5:2:7

where fj is the (spherically symmetric) atomic scattering factor (usually including an isotropic temperature factor) of the jth atom and R 2 l2 =Z 2 1=2 is the spherical radius in reciprocal space. Equations (4.5.2.12) and (4.5.2.13) allow the complex diffracted amplitudes for a helical molecule to be calculated from the atomic coordinates, and are analogous to expressions for the structure factors in conventional crystallography. The significance of the selection rule is now more apparent. On a particular layer plane l, not all Fourier–Bessel structure factors Gnl R contribute; only those whose Bessel order n satisfies the selection rule for that value of l contribute. Since any molecule has a maximum radius, denoted here by rmax , and since Jn x is small for x < jnj 2 and diffraction data are measured out to only a finite value of R, reference to equation (4.5.2.10) [or equation (4.5.2.13)] shows that there is a maximum Bessel order that contributes significant value to equation (4.5.2.12) (Crowther et al., 1970; Makowski, 1982), so that the infinite sum over n in equation (4.5.2.12) can be replaced by a finite sum. On each layer plane there is also a minimum value of jnj, denoted by nmin , that satisfies the helix selection rule, so that the region R < R min is devoid of diffracted amplitude where

l um vn

l

where gnl r c=2

n

RR

gr, ', z exp i n' 2l=c d' dz, 4:5:2:8

and where in equation (4.5.2.7) (and in the remainder of this section) the sum over l is over all integers, the sum over n is over all integers satisfying the helix selection rule and the integral in equation (4.5.2.8) is over one helix repeat unit. The effect of helix symmetry, therefore, is to restrict the number of Fourier coefficients gnl r required to represent the electron density to those whose index n satisfies the selection rule. Note that the selection rule is usually derived using a rather more complicated argument by considering the convolution of the Fourier transform of a continuous filamentary helix with a set of planes in reciprocal space (Cochran et al., 1952). The approach described above, which follows that of Millane (1991), is much more straightforward.

468

R min

nmin 2 : 2rmax

4:5:2:14

4.5. POLYMER CRYSTALLOGRAPHY The selection rule therefore results in a region around the Z axis of reciprocal space that is devoid of diffraction, the shape of the region depending on the helix symmetry. 4.5.2.3.3. Approximate helix symmetry In some cases the nature of the subunits and their interactions results in a structure that is not exactly periodic. Consider a helical structure with u x subunits in v turns, where x is a small x 1 real number; i.e. the structure has approximate, but not exact, uv helix symmetry. Since the molecule has an approximate repeat distance c, only those layer planes close to those at Z l=c show significant diffraction. Denoting by Zmn the Z coordinate of the nth Bessel order and its associated value of m, and using the selection rule shows that Zmn um vn=c mx=c l=c mx=c,

4:5:2:15

so that the positions of the Bessel orders are shifted by mx=c from their positions if the helix symmetry is exactly uv . At moderate resolution m is small so the shift is small. Hence Bessel orders that would have been coincident on a particular layer plane are now separated in reciprocal space. This is referred to as layer-plane splitting and was first observed in fibre diffraction patterns from tobacco mosaic virus (TMV) (Franklin & Klug, 1955). Splitting can be used to advantage in structure determination (Section 4.5.2.6.6). As an example, TMV has approximately 493 helix symmetry with a c repeat of 69 A˚ . However, close inspection of diffraction patterns from TMV shows that there are actually about 49.02 subunits in three turns (Stubbs & Makowski, 1982). The virus is therefore more accurately described as a 2451150 helix with a c repeat of 3450 A˚ . The layer lines corresponding to this larger repeat distance are not observed, but the effects of layer-plane splitting are detectable (Stubbs & Makowski, 1982). 4.5.2.4. Diffraction by fibres The kind of diffraction pattern obtained from a fibre specimen made up of helical molecules depends on the kind of specimen as described in Section 4.5.2.2. This section is divided into four parts. The first two describe diffraction patterns obtained from noncrystalline and polycrystalline fibres (which are the most common kinds used for structural analysis), and the last two describe diffraction by partially crystalline fibres. 4.5.2.4.1. Noncrystalline fibres A noncrystalline fibre is made up of a collection of helical molecules that are oriented parallel to each other, but are otherwise randomly positioned and rotated relative to each other. The recorded intensity, Il R, is therefore that diffracted by a single molecule cylindrically averaged about the Z axis in reciprocal space i.e. R2 Il R 1=2 jFl R, j2 d ;

4:5:2:16

0

using equation (4.5.2.12) shows that P Il R jGnl Rj2 ,

4:5:2:17

n

where, as usual, the sum is over the values of n that satisfy the helix selection rule. On the diffraction pattern, reciprocal space R, , Z collapses to the two dimensions (R, Z ). The R axis is called the equator and the Z axis the meridian. The layer planes collapse to layer lines, at Z l=c, which are indexed by l. Equation (4.5.2.17) gives a rather simple relationship between the recorded intensity and the Fourier–Bessel structure factors.

Coherence length and disorientation, as described in Section 4.5.2.2, also affect the form of the diffraction pattern. These effects are described here, although they also apply to other than noncrystalline fibres. A finite coherence length leads to smearing of the layer lines along the Z direction. If the average coherence length of the molecules is lc , the intensity distribution Il R, Z about the lth layer line can be approximated by Il R, Z Il R exp lc2 Z l=c2 : 4:5:2:18 It is convenient to express the effects of disorientation on the intensity distribution of a fibre diffraction pattern by writing the latter as a function of the polar coordinates , (where is the angle with the Z axis) in (R, Z ) space. Assuming a Gaussian orientation density function [equation (4.5.2.1)], if 0 is small and the effects of disorientation dominate over those of coherence length (which is usually the case except close to the meridian), then the distribution of intensity about one layer line can be approximated by (Holmes & Barrington Leigh, 1974; Stubbs, 1974) " # Il R l 2 I, ' exp , 4:5:2:19 2 2 20 lc where (Millane & Arnott, 1986; Millane, 1989c) 2 20 1=2lc2 2 sin2 l

4:5:2:20

and l is the polar angle at the centre of the layer line, i.e. R sin l . The effect of disorientation, therefore, is to smear each layer line about the origin of reciprocal space. 4.5.2.4.2. Polycrystalline fibres A polycrystalline fibre is made up of crystallites that are oriented parallel to each other, but are randomly positioned and randomly rotated about their molecular axes. The recorded diffraction pattern is the intensity diffracted by a single crystallite, cylindrically averaged about the Z axis. On a fibre diffraction pattern, therefore, the Bragg reflections are cylindrically projected onto the (R, Z ) plane and their positions are described by the cylindrically projected reciprocal lattice (Finkenstadt & Millane, 1998). The molecules are periodic and are therefore usually aligned with one of the unit-cell vectors. Since the z axis is defined as the fibre axis, it is usual in fibre diffraction to take the c lattice vector as the unique axis and as the lattice vector parallel to the molecular axes. It is almost always the case that the fibre is rotationally disordered about the molecular axes, i.e. about c. Consider first the case of a monoclinic unit cell 90 so that the reciprocal lattice is cylindrically projected about c . The cylindrical coordinates of the projected reciprocal-lattice points are then given by R 2hkl h2 a2 k 2 b2 2hka b cos

4:5:2:21

and Zhkl lc ,

4:5:2:22

so that R depends only on h and k, and Z depends only on l. Reflections with fixed h and k lie on straight row lines. Certain sets of distinct reciprocal-lattice points will have the same value of R hkl and therefore superimpose in cylindrical projection. For example, for an orthorhombic system 90 the reciprocal-lattice points (hkl), hkl, hkl and hkl superimpose. Furthermore, the crystallites in a fibre specimen are usually oriented randomly up and down so that the reciprocal-lattice points (hkl) and hkl superimpose, so that in the orthorhombic case eight reciprocallattice points superimpose. Also, as described below, reciprocallattice points that have similar values of R can effectively superimpose.

469

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS If the unit cell is either triclinic, or is monoclinic with 6 90 or 6 90 , then c is inclined to c and the Z axis, and the reciprocal lattice is not cylindrically projected about c . Equation (4.5.2.22) for Zhkl still applies, but the cylindrical radius is given by

Reflections that have similar enough R, Z coordinates overlap severely with each other and are also included in the sum in equation (4.5.2.24). This is quite common in practice because a number of sets of reflections may have similar values of R hk .

R 2hkl h2 a2 k 2 b2 l2 c2 1=c2 2hka b cos 2hla c cos 2klb c cos 4:5:2:23 and the row lines are curved (Finkenstadt & Millane, 1998). The most complicated situation arises if the crystallites are rotationally disordered about an axis that is inclined to c. Reciprocal space is then rotated about an axis that is inclined to the normal to the a b plane, R hkl and Zhkl are both functions of h, k and l, equation (4.5.2.23) does not apply, and reciprocal-lattice points for fixed l do not lie on layer lines of constant Z. Although this situation is rather unusual, it does occur (Daubeny et al., 1954), and is described in detail by Finkenstadt & Millane (1998). The observed fibre diffraction pattern consists of reflections at the projected reciprocal-lattice points whose intensities are equal to the sums of the intensities of the contributing structure factors. The observed intensity, denoted by Il R hk , at a projected reciprocallattice point on the lth layer line and with R R hk is therefore given by (assuming, for simplicity, a monoclinic system) P Il R hk jFh0 k0 l j2 , 4:5:2:24 h0 ; k 0 2S h; k

where S h, k denotes the set of indices h0 , k 0 such that R h0 k 0 R hk . The number of independent reflections contributing in equation (4.5.2.24) depends on the space-group symmetry of the crystallites, because of either systematic absences or structure factors whose values are related. The effect of a finite crystallite size is to smear what would otherwise be infinitely sharp reflections into broadened reflections of a finite size. If the average crystallite dimensions normal and parallel to the z axis are llat (i.e. in the ‘lateral’ direction) and laxial (i.e. in the ‘axial’ direction), respectively, the profile of the reflection centred at R hk , Z l=c can be written as (Fraser et al., 1984; Millane & Arnott, 1986; Millane, 1989c) IR, Z Il R hk SR

R hk , Z

4:5:2:25

l=c,

where the profile function SR, Z can be approximated by 2 2 2 SR, Z exp llat R laxial Z 2 :

4:5:2:26

The effect of crystallite disorientation is to smear the reflections given by equation (4.5.2.26) about the origin of the projected reciprocal space. If the effects of disorientation dominate over those of crystallite size, then the profile of a reflection can be approximated by (Fraser et al., 1984; Millane & Arnott, 1986; Millane, 1989c) I, '

Il R hk 20 llat laxial " exp

hkl 2 hkl 2 2 2 2 2

#! ,

4:5:2:27

2 2 llat laxial 2 2 sin 2 2 2llat hkl laxial cos hkl

4:5:2:28

2 2 llat laxial : 2 2 2 2 cos2 2hkl laxial sin hkl llat hkl

4:5:2:29

and 2 0

Random copolymers are made up of a small number of different kinds of monomer, whose sequence along the polymer chain is not regular, but is random, or partially random. A particularly interesting class are synthetic polymers such as copolyesters that form a variety of liquid-crystalline phases and have useful mechanical properties (Biswas & Blackwell, 1988a). The structures of these materials have been studied quite extensively using X-ray fibre diffraction analysis. Because the molecules do not have an average c repeat, their diffraction patterns do not consist of equally spaced layer lines. However, as a result of the small number of distinct spacings associated with the monomers, diffracted intensity is concentrated about layer lines, but these are irregularly spaced (along Z ) and are aperiodic. Since the molecule is not periodic, the basic theory of diffraction by helical molecules described in Section 4.5.2.3.2 does not apply in this case. Cylindrically averaged diffraction from random copolymers is described here. Related approaches have been described independently by Hendricks & Teller (1942) and Blackwell et al. (1984). Hendricks & Teller (1942) considered the rather general problem of diffraction by layered structures made up of different kinds of layers, the probability of a layer at a particular level depending on the layers present at adjacent levels. This is a one-dimensional disordered structure that can be used to describe a random copolymer. Blackwell and co-workers have developed a similar theory in terms of a one-dimensional paracrystalline model (Hosemann & Bagchi, 1962) for diffraction by random copolymers (Blackwell et al., 1984; Biswas & Blackwell, 1988a), and this is the theory described here. Consider a random copolymer made up of monomer units (residues) of N different types. Since the disorder is along the length of the polymer, some of the main characteristics of diffraction from such a molecule can be elucidated by studying the diffraction along the meridian of the diffraction pattern. The meridional diffraction is the intensity of the Fourier transform of the polymer chain projected onto the z axis and averaged over all possible monomer sequences. The diffraction pattern depends on the monomer (molar) compositions, denoted by pi , the statistics of the monomer sequence (described by the probability of the different possible monomer pairs in this model) and the Fourier transform of the monomer units. Development of this model shows that the meridional diffracted intensity IZ can be written in the form (Blackwell et al., 1984; Biswas & Blackwell, 1988a; Schneider et al., 1991) P PP IZ pi jFi Zj2 2 3 dimensions. A d-dimensional (dD) ideal aperiodic crystal can be defined as a dD irrational section of an n-dimensional (nD, n > d) crystal with nD lattice symmetry. The intersection of the nD hypercrystal with the dD physical space is equivalent to Pa projection of the weighted nD reciprocal lattice H ni1 hi di jhi 2 Z onto the dD physical space. The resulting set (Fourier module) M

AND

k Pn H i1 hi ai jhi 2 Z is countably dense. Countably dense means that the dense set of Bragg peaks can be mapped one-toone onto the set of natural numbers. Hence, the Bragg reflections can be indexed with integer indices on an appropriate basis. The Fourier module of the projected reciprocal-lattice vectors Hk has the structure of a Z module of rank n. A Z module is a free Abelian group, its rank n is given by the number of free generators (rationally independent vectors). The dimension of a Z module is that of the vector space spanned by it. The vectors ai are the images of the vectors di projected onto the physical space Vk . Thus, by definition, the 3D reciprocal space of an ideal aperiodic crystal consists of a countably dense set of Bragg reflections only. Contrary to an ideal crystal, a minimum distance between Bragg reflections does not exist in an aperiodic one. In summary, it may be stressed that the terms aperiodic and periodic refer to properties of crystal structures in dD space. In nD space, as considered here, lattice symmetry is always present and, therefore, the term crystal is used. Besides the aperiodic crystals mentioned above, other classes of aperiodic structures with strictly defined construction rules exist (see Axel & Gratias, 1995). Contrary to the kind of aperiodic crystals dealt with in this chapter, the Fourier spectra of aperiodic structures considered in the latter reference are continuous and contain only in a few cases additional sharp Bragg reflections ( peaks). Experimentally, the borderline between aperiodic crystals and their periodic approximations (crystalline approximants) is not sharply defined. Finite crystal size, static and dynamic disorder, chemical impurities and defects broaden Bragg peaks and cause diffuse diffraction phenomena. Furthermore, the resolution function of the diffraction equipment is limited. However, the concept of describing an aperiodic structure as a dD physical-space section of an nD crystal (see Section 4.6.2) is only useful if it significantly simplifies the description of its structural order. Thus, depending on the shape of the atomic surfaces, which gives information on the atomic ordering, incommensurately modulated structures (IMSs, Sections 4.6.2.2 and 4.6.3.1), composite structures (CSs, Sections 4.6.2.3 and 4.6.3.2), or quasiperiodic structures (QSs, Sections 4.6.2.4 and 4.6.3.3) can be obtained from irrational cuts. The atomic surfaces are continuous n d-dimensional objects for IMSs and CSs, and discrete n d-dimensional objects for QSs. A class of aperiodic crystals with discrete fractal atomic surfaces also exists (Section 4.6.2.5). In this case the Hausdorff dimension (Hausdorff, 1919) of the atomic surface is not an integer number and smaller than n d. The most outstanding characteristic feature of a fractal is its scale invariance: the object appears similar to itself ‘from near as from far, that is, whatever the scale’ (Gouyet, 1996). To overcome the problems connected with experimental resolution, the translational symmetry of periodic crystals is used as a hard constraint in the course of the determination of their structures. Hence, space-group symmetry is taken for granted and only the local atomic configuration in a unit cell (actually, asymmetric unit) remains to be determined. In reciprocal space, this assumption corresponds to a condensation of Bragg reflections with finite full width at half maximum (FWHM) to peaks accurately located at the reciprocal-lattice nodes. Diffuse diffraction phenomena are mostly neglected. This extrapolation to the existence of an ideal crystal is generally out of the question even if samples of very poor quality (high mosaicity, microdomain structure, defects, . . .) are investigated. The same practice is convenient for the determination of real aperiodic structures once the type of idealized aperiodic ordering is ‘known’. Again, the global ordering principle is taken as a hard


T. HAIBACH

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS constraint. For instance, the question of whether a structure is commensurately or incommensurately modulated can only be answered within a given experimental resolution. Experimentally, the ratio of the wavelength of a modulation to the period of the underlying lattice can always be determined as a rational number only. Saying that a structure is incommensurately modulated, with the above ratio being an irrational number, simply means that the experimental results can be better understood, modelled and interpreted assuming an incommensurate modulation. For example, an incommensurate charge-density wave can be moved through an ideal crystal without changing the energy of the crystal. This is not so for a commensurate modulation. In some cases, the modulation period changes with temperature in discrete steps (‘devil’s staircase’), generating a series of commensurate superstructures (‘lockin structures’); in other cases, a continuous variation can be observed within the experimental resolution. The latter case will be described best by an incommensurately modulated structure. However, if only the local structure of an aperiodic crystal is of interest, a structure analysis does not take much more experimental effort than for a regular crystal. In contrast, for the analysis of the global structure, i.e. the characterization of the type of its ‘aperiodicity’, diffraction experiments with the highest possible resolution are essential. Some problems connected with the structure analysis of aperiodic crystals are dealt with in Section 4.6.4. To determine the long-range order – whether a real ‘quasicrystal’ is perfectly quasiperiodic, on average quasiperiodic, a crystalline approximant or a nanodomain structure – requires information from experiments that are sensitive to changes of the global structure. Hence, one needs diffraction experiments that allow the accurate determination of the spatial intensity distribution. Consequently, the limiting factors for such experiments are the maximum spatial and intensity resolution of the diffraction and detection equipment, as well as the size and quality of the sample. Nevertheless, the resolution available on state-of-the-art standard synchrotronbeamline equipment is sufficient to test whether the ordering of atoms in an aperiodic crystal reaches the same degree of perfection as found in high-quality silicon. Of course, the higher the sample quality the more necessary it is to account for dynamical diffraction effects such as reflection broadening and displacement. Otherwise, a misinterpretation may bias the global structure modelling. The following sections present an aid to the characterization of aperiodic crystals based on information from diffraction experiments and give a survey of aperiodic crystals from the viewpoint of the experimentally accessible reciprocal space. Characteristic features of the diffraction patterns of the different types of aperiodic crystals are shown. A standard way of determining the metrics and finding the optimum nD embedding is described. Structure-factor formulae for general and special cases are given. 4.6.2. The n-dimensional description of aperiodic crystals 4.6.2.1. Basic concepts An incommensurate modulation of a lattice-periodic structure destroys its translational symmetry in direct and reciprocal space. In the early seventies, a method was suggested by de Wolff (1974) for restoring the lost lattice symmetry by considering the diffraction pattern of an incommensurately modulated structure (IMS) as a projection of an nD reciprocal lattice upon the physical space. n, the dimension of the superspace, is always larger than or equal to d, the dimension of the physical space. This leads to a simple method for the description and characterization of IMSs as well as a variety of new possibilities in their structure analysis. The nD embedding method is well established today and can be applied to all aperiodic crystals with reciprocal-space structure equivalent to a Z module

with finite rank n (Janssen, 1988). The dimension of the embedding space is determined by the rank of the Z module, i.e. by the number of reciprocal-basis vectors necessary to allow for indexing all Bragg reflections with integer numbers. The point symmetry of the 3D reciprocal space (Fourier spectrum) constrains the point symmetry of the nD reciprocal lattice and restricts the number of possible nD symmetry groups. In the following sections, the nD descriptions of the four main classes of aperiodic crystals are demonstrated on simple 1D examples of incommensurately modulated phases, composite crystals, quasicrystals and structures with fractally shaped atomic surfaces. The main emphasis is placed on quasicrystals that show scaling symmetry, a new and unusual property in structural crystallography. A detailed discussion of the different types of 3D aperiodic crystals follows in Section 4.6.3. 4.6.2.2. 1D incommensurately modulated structures A periodic deviation of atomic parameters from a reference structure (basic structure, BS) is called a modulated structure (MS). In the case of mutual incommensurability of the basic structure and the modulation period, the structure is called incommensurately modulated. Otherwise, it is called commensurately modulated. The modulated atomic parameters may be one or several of the following: (a) coordinates, (b) occupancy factors, (c) thermal displacement parameters, (d) orientation of the magnetic moment. An incommensurately modulated structure can be described in a dual way by its basic structure sr and a modulation function f t. This allows the structure-factor formula to be calculated and a full symmetry characterization employing representation theory to be performed (de Wolff, 1984). A more general method is the nD description: it relates the dD aperiodic incommensurately modulated structure to a periodic structure in nD space. This simplifies the symmetry analysis and structure-factor calculation, and allows more powerful structure-determination techniques. The nD embedding method is demonstrated in the following 1D example of a displacively modulated structure. A basic structure sr sr na, with period a and n 2 Z, is modulated by a function f t f q r f r f r na=, with the satellite vector q a , period 1=q a=, and a rational or irrational number yielding a commensurately or incommensurately modulated structure sm r (Fig. 4.6.2.1). If the 1D IMS and its 1D modulation function are properly combined in a 2D parameter space V Vk , V? , a 2D latticeperiodic structure results (Fig. 4.6.2.2). The actual atoms are generated by the intersection of the 1D physical (external, parallel) space Vk with the continuous hyperatoms. The hyperatoms have the shape of the modulation function along the perpendicular (internal, complementary) space V? . They result from a convolution of the physical-space atoms with their modulation functions. P2A basis d1 , d2 (D basis) of the 2D hyperlattice fr i1 ni di jni 2 Zg is given by a 0 ,d , d1 =c V 2 1=c V where a is the translation period of the BS and c is an arbitrary constant. The components of the basis vectors are given on a 2D orthogonal coordinate system (V basis). The components of the basis vector d1 are simply the parallel-space period a of the BS and times the perpendicular-space component of the basis vector d2 . The vector d2 is always parallel to the perpendicular space and its length is one period of the modulation function in arbitrary units (this is expressed by the arbitrary factor 1=c). An atom at position r

487

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS with a 1=a. The metric tensors for the reciprocal and direct 2D lattices for c 1 are 2 2 a2 a 2 a : and G G a2 1 2 a2 1

Fig. 4.6.2.1. The combination of a basic structure sr, with period a, and a sinusoidal modulation function f t, with amplitude A, period and t q r, gives a modulated structure (MS) sm r. The MS is aperiodic if a and are on incommensurate length scales. The filled circles represent atoms.

of the BS is displaced by an amount given by the modulation function f t, with f t f q r. Hence, the perpendicular-space variable t has to adopt the value q r a ra r for the physical-space variable r. This can be achieved by assigning the slope to the basis vector d1 . The choice of the parameter c has no influence on the actual MS, i.e. the way in which the 2D structure is cut by the parallel space (Fig. 4.6.2.2c). P The basis of the lattice fH 2i1 hi di jhi 2 Zg, reciprocal to , can be obtained from the condition di dj ij : d1

a 0

V

, d2

a c

, V

The choice of an arbitrary number for c has no influence on the metrics of the physical-space components of the IMS in direct or reciprocal space. The Fourier transform of the hypercrystal depicted in Fig. 4.6.2.2 gives the weighted reciprocal latticePshown in Fig. 4.6.2.3. The 1D diffraction pattern M fHk 2i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg in physical space is obtained by a projection of the weighted 2D reciprocal lattice along V? as the Fourier transform of a section in direct space corresponds to a projection in reciprocal space and vice versa: M fHk g

projection k onto Vk

fH Hk , H? g:

Reciprocal-lattice points lying in physical space are referred to as main reflections, all others as satellite reflections. All Bragg reflections can be indexed with integer numbers h1 , h2 in the 2D description H h1 d1 h2 d2 . In the physical-space description, the diffraction vector can be written as Hk ha mq a h1 h2 , with q a for the satellite vector and m 2 Z the order of the satellite reflection. For a detailed discussion of the embedding and symmetry description of IMSs see, for example, Janssen et al. (1999). A commensurately modulated structure with 0 m=n and n=ma, m, n 2 Z, and with c 1, can be generated by

Fig. 4.6.2.2. 2D embedding of the sinusoidally modulated structure illustrated in Fig. 4.6.2.1. The correspondence between the actual displacement of an atom in the 1D structure and the modulation function defined in one additional dimension is illustrated in part (a). Adding to each atom its modulation function in this orthogonal dimension (perpendicular space V? ) yields a periodic arrangement in 2D space V, part (b). The MS results as a special section of the 2D periodic structure along the parallel space Vk . It is obvious from a comparison of (b) and (c) that the actual MS is independent of the perpendicular-space scale.

488

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS

Fig. 4.6.2.3. Schematic representation of the 2D reciprocal-space embedding of the 1D sinusoidally modulated structure depicted in Figs. 4.6.2.1 and 4.6.2.2. Main reflections are marked by filled circles and satellite reflections by open circles. The sizes of the circles are roughly related to the reflection intensities. The actual 1D diffraction pattern of the 1D MS results from a projection of the 2D reciprocal space onto the parallel space. The correspondence between 2D reciprocal-lattice positions and their projected images is indicated by dashed lines.

shearing the 2D lattice with a shear matrix Sm : 2 P 1 x 0 and x 0 , di Smij dj , with Sm 0 1 D j1 a 0 a 0 0 , d1 d1 xd2 V 1 V 0 V 0 0 : d2 d2 1 V The subscript D (V) following the shear matrix indicates that it is acting on the D (V) basis. The shear matrix does not change the distances between the atoms in the basic structure. In reciprocal space, using the inverted and transposed shear matrix, one obtains 2 P 1 0 and x 0 , di 0 Sm 1 Tij dj , with Sm 1 T x 1 j1 D a d1 0 d1 , 0 V 0 a a a 0 0 : d2 xd1 d2 0 V 1 V 1 V 4.6.2.3. 1D composite structures In the simplest case, a composite structure (CS) consists of two intergrown periodic structures with mutually incommensurate lattices. Owing to mutual interactions, each subsystem may be modulated with the period of the other. Consequently, CSs can be considered as coherent intergrowths of two or more incommensurately modulated substructures. The substructures have at least the origin of their reciprocal lattices in common. However, in all known cases, at least one common reciprocal-lattice plane exists. This means that at least one particular projection of the composite structure exhibits full lattice periodicity. The unmodulated (basic) 1D subsystems of a 1D incommensurate intergrowth structure can be related to each other in a 2D parameter space V Vk , V? (Fig. 4.6.2.4). The actual atoms result from the intersection of the physical space Vk with the hypercrystal. The hyperatoms correspond to a convolution of the real atoms with infinite lines parallel P to the basis vectors d1 and d2 of the 2D hyperlattice fr 2i1 ni di jni 2 Zg.

Fig. 4.6.2.4. 2D embedding of a 1D composite structure without mutual interaction of the subsystems. Filled and empty circles represent the atoms of the unmodulated substructures with periods a1 and a2 , respectively. The atoms result from the parallel-space cut of the linear atomic surfaces parallel to d1 and d2 .

An appropriate basis is given by a1 0 d1 ,d , c V 2 ca2 =a1 V where a1 and a2 are the lattice parameters of the two substructures and c is an arbitrary constant. Taking into account the interactions between the subsystems, each one becomes modulated with the period of the other. Consequently, in the 2D description, the shape of the hyperatoms is determined by their modulation functions (Fig. 4.6.2.5). P A basis of the reciprocal lattice fH 2i1 hi di jhi 2 Zg can be obtained from the condition di dj ij : a2 a1 d1 ,d : a2 =ca1 V 0 V 2 The metric tensors for the reciprocal and the direct 2D lattices for c 1 are 2 a1 a1 a2 1 a21 a2 =a1 and G : G 2 a1 a2 1 a2 a2 =a1 a2 =a1 2 1 a2 =a1 The Fourier transforms of the hypercrystals depicted in Figs. 4.6.2.4 and 4.6.2.5 correspond to the weighted reciprocal lattices illustrated in Figs.P4.6.2.6 and 4.6.2.7. The 1D diffraction patterns M fHk 2i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg in physical space are obtained by a projection of the weighted 2D reciprocal lattices upon Vk . All Bragg reflections can be indexed with integer numbers h1 , h2 in both the 2D description H h1 d1 h2 d2 and in the 1D physical-space description with two parallel basis vectors Hk h1 a1 h2 a2 .

489


Fig. 4.6.2.7. Schematic representation of the reciprocal space of the embedded 1D composite structure depicted in Fig. 4.6.2.5. Filled and empty circles represent the main reflections of the two subsystems. The satellite reflections generated by the modulated substructures are shown as grey circles. The diameters of the circles are roughly proportional to the intensities of the reflections. The actual 1D diffraction pattern of the 1D CS results from a projection of the 2D reciprocal space onto the parallel space. The correspondence between 2D reciprocal-lattice positions and their projected images is indicated by dashed lines.

word LS (see e.g. Luck et al., 1993). Applying the substitution matrix 0 1 S 1 1 Fig. 4.6.2.5. 2D embedding of a 1D composite structure with mutual interaction of the subsystems causing modulations. Filled and empty circles represent the modulated substructures with periods a1 and a2 of the basic substructures, respectively. The atoms result from the parallelspace cut of the sinusoidal atomic surfaces running parallel to d1 and d2 .

The reciprocal-lattice points H h1 d1 and H h2 d2 , h1 , h2 2 Z, on the main axes d1 and d2 are the main reflections of the two substructures. All other reflections are referred to as satellite reflections. Their intensities differ from zero only in the case of modulated substructures. Each reflection of one subsystem coincides with exactly one reflection of the other subsystem. 4.6.2.4. 1D quasiperiodic structures The Fibonacci sequence, the best investigated example of a 1D quasiperiodic structure, can be obtained from the substitution rule : S ! L, L ! LS, replacing the letter S by L and the letter L by the

associated with , this rule can be written in the form L S 0 1 S : ! LS L 1 1 L S gives the sum of letters, L S S L, and not their order. Consequently, the same substitution matrix can also be applied, for instance, to the substitution 0 : S ! L, L ! SL. The repeated action of S on the alphabet A fS, Lg yields the words An n S and Bn n L An1 as illustrated in Table 4.6.2.1. The frequencies of letters contained in the words An and Bn can be calculated by applying the nth power of the transposed substitution matrix on the unit vector. From ! ! A A n1 T n S B n1 nB it follows that nA nB

Fig. 4.6.2.6. Schematic representation of the reciprocal space of the embedded 1D composite structure depicted in Fig. 4.6.2.4. Filled and empty circles represent the reflections generated by the substructures with periods a1 and a2 , respectively. The actual 1D diffraction pattern of the 1D CS results from a projection of the 2D reciprocal space onto the parallel space. The correspondence between 2D reciprocal-lattice positions and their projected images is indicated by dashed lines.

! S T n

1 : 1

In the case of the Fibonacci sequence, vBn gives the total number of letters S and L, and vAn the number of letters L. An infinite Fibonacci sequence, i.e. a word Bn with n ! 1, remains invariant under inflation (deflation). Inflation (deflation) means that the number of letters L, S increases (decreases) under the action of the (inverted) substitution matrix S. Inflation and deflation represent self-similarity (scaling) symmetry operations on the infinite Fibonacci sequence. A more detailed discussion of the scaling properties of the Fibonacci chain in direct and reciprocal space will be given later. The Fibonacci numbers Fn Fn 1 Fn 2 form a series with lim Fn1 =Fn = fthe golden mean = 1 51=2 =2 2 cos n!1 =5 1:618 . . .g. The ratio of the frequencies of L and S in the Fibonacci sequence converges to if the sequence goes to infinity. The continued fraction expansion of the golden mean ,

490

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS Table 4.6.2.1. Expansion of the Fibonacci sequence Bn n L by repeated action of the substitution rule : S ! L, L ! LS L , S are the frequencies of the letters L and S in word Bn . L

Bn L LS LSL LSLLS LSLLSLSL LSLLSLSLLSLLS LSLLSLSLLSLLSLSLLSLSL

1 1 2 3 5 8 13 .. . Fn1

1

1 1

1

S

n

0 1 1 2 3 5 8 .. . Fn

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 .. . n

j1

,

1 1 1 ...

contains only the number 1. This means that is the ‘most irrational’ number, i.e. the irrational number with the worst truncated continued fraction approximation to it. This might be one of the reasons for the stability of quasiperiodic systems, where plays a role. The strong irrationality may impede the lock-in into commensurate systems (rational approximants). By associating intervals (e.g. atomic distances) with length ratio to 1 to the letters L and S, a quasiperiodic structure sr (Fibonacci chain) can be obtained. The invariance of the ratio of lengths L/S L S=L is responsible for the invariance of the Fibonacci chain under scaling by a factor n , n 2 Z. Owing to a minimum atomic distance S in real crystal structures, the full set of inverse symmetry operators n does not exist. Consequently, the set of scaling operators s f 0 1, 1 , . . .g forms only a semigroup, i.e. an associative groupoid. Groupoids are the most general algebraic sets satisfying only one of the group axioms: the associative law. The scaling properties of the Fibonacci sequence can be derived from the eigenvalues of the scaling matrix S. For this purpose the equation det jS

Considering periodic lattices, these eigenvalues are integer numbers. For quasiperiodic ‘lattices’ (quasilattices) they always correspond to algebraic numbers (Pisot numbers). A Pisot number is the solution of a polynomial equation with integer coefficients. It is larger than one, whereas the modulus of its conjugate is smaller than unity: 1 > 1 and j2 j < 1 (Luck et al., 1993). The total lengths lnA and lnB of the words An , Bn can be determined from the equations lnA n1 lA and lnB n1 lB with the eigenvalue 1 . The left Perron–Frobenius eigenvector w1 of S, i.e. the left eigenvector associated with 1 , determines the ratio S:L to 1:. The right Perron–Frobenius eigenvector w1 of S associated with 1 gives the relative frequencies, 1 and , for the letters S and L (for a definition of the Perron–Frobenius theorem see Luck et al., 1993, and references therein). The general case of an alphabet A fL1 . . . Lk g with k letters (intervals) Li , of which at least two are on incommensurate length scales and which transform with the substitution matrix S, k P L0i ! Sij Lj , can be treated analogously. S is a k k matrix with non-negative integer coefficients. Its eigenvalues are solutions of a polynomial equation of rank k with integer coefficients (algebraic or Pisot numbers). The dimension n of the embedding space is generically equal to the number of letters (intervals) k involved by the substitution rule. From substitution rules, infinitely many different 1D quasiperiodic sequences can be generated. However, their atomic surfaces in the nD description are generically of fractal shape (see Section 4.6.2.5). The quasiperiodic 1D density distribution r of the Fibonacci chain can be represented by the Fourier series P r 1=V FHk exp 2iHk r, Hk

k

with H 2 R (the set of real numbers). The Fourier P coefficients FHk form a Fourier module M fHk 2i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg equivalent to a Z module of rank 2. Thus a periodic function in 2D space can be defined by P rk , r? 1=V FH exp 2iHk rk H? r? , H

where r r , r 2 and H Hk , H? 2 are, by construction, direct and reciprocal lattice vectors (Figs. 4.6.2.8 and 4.6.2.9): k

?

Ij 0

with eigenvalue and unit matrix I has to be solved. The evaluation of the determinant yields the characteristic polynomial 2

1 0,

yielding in turn the eigenvalues 1 1 51=2 =2 ,2 1 1=2 , 1 5 1= and the eigenvectors w1 =2 1 w2 . Rewriting the eigenvalue equation gives for the 1= first (i.e. the largest) eigenvalue 0 1 1 1 : 2 1 1 1 1 S Identifying the eigenvector with shows that an infinite L Fibonacci sequence sr remains invariant under scaling by a factor . This scaling operation maps each new lattice vector r upon a vector r of the original lattice: sr sr:

Fig. 4.6.2.8. 2D embedding of the Fibonacci chain. The short and long distances S and L, generated by the intersection of the atomic surfaces with the physical space Vk , are indicated. The atomic surfaces are represented by bars parallel to V? . Their lengths correspond to the projection of one unit cell (shaded) upon V? .

491

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS the scaling operations S k and S ? in parallel and in perpendicular space as indicated by the partition lines. The metric tensors for the reciprocal and the direct 2D square lattices read 1 1 0 1 0 2 G ja j 2 and G : 0 1 ja j2 2 0 1 The short distance S of the Fibonacci sequence is related to a by S 1=a 2 k ? min di dj di

dj < AS ^ i, j 2 Z ,

with the projectors k and ? onto Vk and V? . The point density p of the Fibonacci chain, i.e. the number of vertices per unit length, can be calculated using the formula Fig. 4.6.2.9. Schematic representation of the reciprocal space of the embedded Fibonacci chain depicted in Fig. 4.6.2.8. The physical-space reciprocal basis a1 and a2 is marked. The diameters of the filled circles are roughly proportional to the reflection intensities. One 2D reciprocallattice unit cell is shadowed. The actual 1D diffraction pattern of the 1D Fibonacci chain results from a projection of the 2D reciprocal space onto the parallel space. The correspondence between 2D reciprocallattice positions and their projected images is indicated by dashed lines.

where AS and UC are the areas of the atomic surface and of the 2D unit cell, respectively. For an infinite Fibonacci sequence generated from the intervals S and L an average distance d can be calculated: d lim

1 , a 2 V 1 d2 ; a 2 1 V 1 ,d a : H h1 d1 h2 d2 , with d1 a V 2 1 V r n1 d1 n2 d2 , with d1

P 1=d 1=3

1

0 1 1 1

D

1

1

1

0 Sk 0

0

where x n

a 2 :

m=m n:

d0i

2 P

Smij dj ;

j1

1 2 x 1d1 xd2 2 1 1 2 a x V 0 1 1 1 @ 2n m A , 2 a m n V 1 0 2 2 x 1d2 d2 x d1 2 1 2 a x 1 V 0 1 1 @ 2m n A : 2 a m n V

d01

!

1= V ! 0 , S? V

S a 2 =3

An approximant structure of the Fibonacci sequence with a unit cell containing m intervals L and n intervals S can be generated by shearing the 2D lattice by the shear matrix Sm , 2 1 x x 1 , Sm x 2 2 x 1 D 2

one obtains 1

S:

Therefrom, the point density can also be calculated:

The 1D Fibonacci chain results from the cut of the parallel (physical) space with the 2D lattice decorated with line elements for the atomic surfaces (acceptance domains). In this description, the atomic surfaces correspond simply to the projection of one 2D unit cell upon the perpendicular-space coordinate. This satisfies the condition that each unit cell contributes exactly to one point of the Fibonacci chain (primitive unit cell). The physical space Vk is related to the eigenspace of the substitution matrix S associated with its eigenvalue 1 . The perpendicular space V? corresponds to the eigenspace of the substitution matrix S associated with its eigenvalue 2 1=. Thus, the physical space scales to powers of and the perpendicular space to powers of 1=. By block-diagonalization, the reducible substitution (scaling) matrix S can be decomposed into two non-equivalent irreducible representations. These can be assigned to the two 1D orthogonal subspaces Vk and V? forming the 2D embedding space k V Vk V? . Thus, using WSW 1 SV SV SV? , where 1 d1 d2 , W 1

AS 1 =a 2 a 2 , 2

UC 1=ja j 2

Fn S Fn1 L Fn S L S1 2 3 lim n!1 Fn Fn1 n!1 Fn 1 1

1

p

This shear matrix does not change the magnitudes of the intervals L and S. In reciprocal space the inverted and transposed shear matrix is applied on the reciprocal basis,

492

Sm 1 T where x n

1 2

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS x 1 x 2 , x 2 x 1 D

2

m=m n: 0

di

2 P j1

Sm 1 Tij dj ;

1 2 x 1d1 x 2 d2 2 x 1 a V 0 1 2m n a @ m n A , V 1 0 2 d2 xd1 x 1d2 2 x a 1 V 0 2n m 1 a @ m n A : 0

d1

1

Fig. 4.6.2.10. Reciprocal space of the embedded Fibonacci chain as a modulated structure. Several main and satellite reflections are indexed. The square reciprocal lattice of the quasicrystal description illustrated in Fig. 4.6.2.9 is indicated by grey lines. The reflections located on Vk can be considered to be projected either from the 2D square lattice of the embedding as for a QS or from the 2D oblique lattice of the embedding as for an IMS.

V

The point xn t of the nth interval L or S of an infinite Fibonacci sequence is given by xn t fx0 n3

1fracn t

as two other non-equivalent ones (see Janssen, 1995). The eigenvalues i are obtained by calculating

1=2gS,

det jS

where t is the phase of the modulation function yt 1fracn t 1=2 (Janssen, 1986). Thus, the Fibonacci sequence can also be dealt with as an incommensurately modulated structure. This is a consequence of the fact that for 1D structures only the crystallographic point symmetries 1 and 1 allow the existence of a periodic average structure. The embedding of the Fibonacci chain as an incommensurately modulated structure can be performed as follows: (1) select a subset M of strong reflections for main reflections H ha , h 2 Z; (2) define a satellite vector q a pointing from each main reflection to the next satellite reflection. One possible way of indexing based on the same a as defined above is illustrated in Fig. 4.6.2.10. The scattering vector is given by Hk h 1a mq, where q a , or, in the 2D 1 representation, and H h1 d1 h2 d2 , where d1 a 0 V d2 a , with the direct basis 1 v 1 1 0 1 d1 , d2 : V a 1 a 1 V

Ij 0:

The evaluation of the determinant gives the characteristic polynomial 2

3 1 0,

2 and with the solutions 1; 2 3 51=2 =2, with 1 1 , w2 2 1=2 2 , and the same eigenvectors w1 1 as for the Fibonacci sequence. Rewriting the eigenvalue 1= equation gives

The modulation function is saw-tooth-like (Fig. 4.6.2.11). 4.6.2.5. 1D structures with fractal atomic surfaces A 1D structure with a fractal atomic surface (Hausdorff dimension 0.9157. . .) can be derived from the Fibonacci sequence by squaring its substitution matrix S: S 1 1 S SL ! L 1 2 L S 2L 1 1 , with S 2 1 2 corresponding to the substitution rule S ! SL, L ! LLS as well

Fig. 4.6.2.11. 2D direct-space embedding of the Fibonacci chain as a modulated structure. The average period is 3 S. The square lattice in the quasicrystal description shown in Fig. 4.6.2.8 is indicated by grey lines. The rod-like atomic surfaces are now inclined relative to Vk and arranged so as to give a saw-tooth modulation wave.

493


Fig. 4.6.2.12. (a) Three steps in the development of the fractal atomic surface of the squared Fibonacci sequence starting from an initiator and a generator. The action of the generator is to cut a piece from each side of the initiator and to add it where the initiator originally ended. This is repeated, cutting thinner and thinner pieces each time from the generated structures. (b) Magnification sequence of the fractal atomic surface illustrating its self-similarity. Each successive figure represents a magnification of a selected portion of the previous figure (from Zobetz, 1993).

2 1 1 2 1 : 2 1 3 S 1 shows that the infinite with Identifying the eigenvector L 1D sequence sr multiplied by powers of its eigenvalue 2 (scaling operation) remains invariant (each new lattice point coincides with one of the original lattice):

1 1 1 2

s 2 r sr: The fractal sequence can be described on the same reciprocal and direct bases as the Fibonacci sequence. The only difference in the 2D direct-space description is the fractal character of the perpendicular-space component of the hyperatoms (Fig. 4.6.2.12) (see Zobetz, 1993).

Fig. 4.6.3.1. Schematic diffraction patterns for IMSs with (a) 1D, (b) 2D and (c) 3D modulation. The satellite vectors correspond to q 1 a1 in (a), q1 11 a1 1=2a2 and q2 12 a1 1=2a2 , where 11 12 , in (b), and q1 11 a1 31 a3 , q2 12 a1 a2 32 a3 , q3 13 a2 33 a3 , where 11 12 13 and 31 32 33 , in (c). The areas of the circles are proportional to the reflection intensities. Main (filled circles) and satellite (open circles) reflections are indexed (after Janner et al., 1983b).

P3d

i1 hi ai with P hi , mj 2 Z. The d satellite vectors qj a3j 3i1 ij ai , with ij a 3 d matrix . In

4.6.3. Reciprocal-space images 4.6.3.1. Incommensurately modulated structures (IMSs) One-dimensionally modulated structures are the simplest representatives of IMSs. The vast majority of the one hundred or so IMSs known so far belong to this class (Cummins, 1990). However, there is also an increasing number of IMSs with 2D or 3D modulation. The dimension d of the modulation is defined by the number of rationally independent modulation wave vectors (satellite vectors) qi (Fig. 4.6.3.1). The electron-density function of a dD modulated 3D crystal can be represented by the Fourier series P r 1=V FH exp 2iH r: H

The Fourier coefficients (structure factors) PFH differ Pfrom zero only for reciprocal-space vectors H 3i1 hi ai dj1 mj qj

are given by the case of an IMS, at least one entry to has to be irrational. The wavelength of the modulation function is j P 1=qj . The set of vectors H forms a 3d Fourier module M fH i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg of rank n 3 d, which can be decomposed into a rank 3 and a rank d submodule M M1 M2 : M1 fh1 a1 h2 a2 h3 a3 g corresponds to a Z module of rank 3 in a 3D subspace (the physical space), M2 fh4 a4 . . . h3d a3d g corresponds to a Z module of rank d in a dD subspace (perpendicular space). The submodule M1 is identical to the 3D reciprocal lattice of the average structure. M2 results from the projection of the perpendicular-space component of the 3 dD reciprocal lattice upon the physical space. Owing to the coincidence of one subspace with the physical space, the dimension of the embedding space is given as 3 dD and not as nD. This terminology points out the special role of the physical space. Hence the reciprocal-basis vectors ai , i 1, . . . , 3 d, can be considered to be physical-space projections of reciprocal-basis

494

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS vectors :

di , i

1, . . . , 3 d, spanning a 3 dD reciprocal lattice 3d P H hi di hi 2 Z ,

Rai

i1

di ai , 0, i 1, . . . , 3 and d3j a3j , cej , j 1, . . . , d: The first vector component of di refers to the physical space, the second to the perpendicular space spanned by the mutually orthogonal unit vectors ej . c is an arbitrary constant which can be set to 1 without loss of generality. A direct lattice with basis di , i 1, . . . , 3 d and di dj ij , can be constructed according to 3d P r mi di mi 2 Z , i1 ! d P ij 1=cej , i 1, . . . , 3 di ai , j1

and d3j

0, 1=cej

, j 1, . . . , d:

Consequently, the aperiodic structure in physical space Vk is equivalent to a 3D section of the 3 dD hypercrystal. 4.6.3.1.1. Indexing The 3D reciprocal space M of a 3 dD IMS consists of two separable contributions, ( ) 3 d P P M H hi ai mj qj , i1

j1

the set of main reflections mj 0 and the set of satellite reflections mj 6 0 (Fig. 4.6.3.1). In most cases, the modulation is only a weak perturbation of the crystal structure. The main reflections are related to the average structure, the satellites to the difference between average and actual structure. Consequently, the satellite reflections are generally much weaker than the main reflections and can be easily identified. Once the set of main reflections has been separated, a conventional basis ai , i 1, . . . , 3, for is chosen. The only ambiguity is in the assignment of rationally independent satellite vectors qi . They should be chosen inside the reciprocal-space unit cell (Brillouin zone) of in such a way as to give a minimal number d of additional dimensions. If satellite vectors reach the Brillouin-zone boundary, centred 3 dD Bravais lattices are obtained. The star of satellite vectors has to be invariant under the point-symmetry group of the diffraction pattern. There should be no contradiction to a reasonable physical modulation model concerning period or propagation direction of the modulation wave. More detailed information on how to find the optimum basis and the correct setting is given by Janssen et al. (1999) and Janner et al. (1983a,b). 4.6.3.1.2. Diffraction symmetry The Laue symmetry group K L fRg of the Fourier module M , ( ) 3 d 3d 3 P P P P M H hi ai mj qj hi ai , H hi ai , i1

j1

i1

i1

is isomorphous to or a subgroup of one of the 11 3D crystallographic Laue groups leaving invariant. The action of the pointgroup symmetry operators R on the reciprocal basis ai , i 1, . . . , 3 d, can be written as

3d P j1

T ij Raj , i

1, . . . , 3 d:

The 3 d 3 d matrices T R form a finite group of integral matrices which are reducible, since R is already an orthogonal transformation in 3D physical space. Consequently, R can be expressed as pair of orthogonal transformations R k , R ? in 3D physical and dD perpendicular space, respectively. Owing to their mutual orthogonality, no symmetry relationship exists between the set of main reflections and the set of satellite reflections. T R is the transpose of R which acts on vector components in direct space. For the 3 dD direct-space (superspace) symmetry operator R s , ts and its matrix representation R s , ts on , the following decomposition can be performed: k R 0 R s and ts t3 , td : M ? R R k R is a 3 3 matrix, ? R is a d d matrix and M R is a d 3 matrix. The translation operator ts consists of a 3D vector t3 and a dD vector td . According to Janner & Janssen (1979), M R ? R. M R has can be derived from M R k R integer elements only as it contains components of primitive-lattice vectors of , whereas in general consists of a rational and an irrational part: i r . Thus, only the rational part gives rise to nonzero entries in M R. With the order P of the Laue group denoted by N, one obtains i 1=N R ? R k R 1 , where ? M Ri k R 1 i , implying that R r k R ? r i k ? i R and 0 R R . Example: In the case of a 3D IMS with 1D modulation d 1 the 3 d matrix 0 1 1 @ 2 A 3 P has the components of the wavevector q 3i1 i ai qi qr . ? R " 1 because for d P 1, q can only be transformed into q. Corresponding to qi 1=N R "Rq, one obtains R T qi "qi (modulo ). The 3 1 row matrix M R is equivalent to the difference vector between R T q and "q (Janssen et al., 1999). For a monoclinic modulated structure with point group 2=m for M (unique axis a3 ) and satellite vector q 1=2a1 3 a3 , with 3 an irrational number, one obtains P qi 1=N "Rq R 0 10 1 0 1 0 0 1=2 1B B CB C @1 @ 0 1 0 A@ 0 A 4 0 0 1 3 1 0 10 1 0 10 1=2 1=2 1 0 0 1 0 0 C B CB C B CB 1 @ 0 1 0 A@ 0 A 1 @ 0 1 0 A@ 0 A 3 3 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 10 11 1=2 1 0 0 B CB CC 1 @ 0 1 0 A@ 0 AA 3 0 0 1 0 1 0 B C @ 0 A:

3 From the relations R T qi "qi modulo , it can be shown that

495

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS the symmetry operations 1 and 2 are associated with the perpendicular-space transformations " 1, and m and 1 with " 1. The matrix M R is given by M

? 2 r k 2 2r 0 10 1 1 0 0 1=2 B CB C @ 0 A@ 0 1 0 A 0 0 0 1

0

0 1 1 B C B C 1@ 0 A @ 0 A 0 0 1=2

1

for the operation 2, for instance. The matrix representations T R s of the symmetry operators R in reciprocal 3 dD superspace decompose according to kT MT R R T : R s ?T R 0 Phase relationships between modulation functions of symmetryequivalent atoms can give rise to systematic extinctions of different classes of satellite reflections. The extinction rules may include indices of both main and satellite reflections. A full list of systematic absences is given in the table of 3 1D superspace groups (Janssen et al., 1999). Thus, once point symmetry and systematic absences are found, the superspace group can be obtained from the tables in a way analogous to that used for regular 3D crystals. A different approach for the symmetry description of IMSs from the 3D Fourier-space perspective has been given by Dra¨ger & Mermin (1996). 4.6.3.1.3. Structure factor The structure factor of a periodic structure is defined as the Fourier transform of the density distribution r of its unit cell (UC): R FH r exp2iH r dr:

Fig. 4.6.3.2. The relationships between the coordinates x1k , x4k , x1 , x4 and the modulation function u1k in a special section of the 3 dD space.

where nj are the orders of harmonics for the jth modulation wave of the ith component of the kth atom and their amplitudes are u Cikn1 ...nd and u Sikn1 ...nd . Analogous expressions can be derived for a density modulation, i.e., the modulation of the occupation probability pk x4 , . . . , x3d : pk x4 , . . . , x3d 1 1 P P p n1 ...nd ... Ck cos2n1x4 . . . nd x3d n1 1 nd 1 p n1 ...nd Sk sin2n1x4

UC

The same is valid in the case of the 3 dD description of IMSs. The parallel- and perpendicular-space components are orthogonal to each other and can be separated. The Fourier transform of the parallel-space component of the electron-density distribution of a single atom gives the usual atomic scattering factors fk Hk . For the structure-factor calculation, one does not need to use r explicitly. The hyperatoms correspond to the convolution of the electrondensity distribution in 3D physical space with the modulation function in dD perpendicular space. Therefore, the Fourier transform of the 3 dD hyperatoms is simply the product of the Fourier transform fk Hk of the physical-space component with the Fourier transform of the perpendicular-space component, the modulation function. For a general displacive modulation one obtains for the ith coordinate xik of the kth atom in 3D physical space

and for the modulation of the tensor of thermal parameters Bijk x4 , . . . , x3d : Bijk x4 , . . . , x3d 1 1 n P P B n1 ...nd ... Cijk cos2n1x4 . . . nd x3d n1 1

uik x4 , . . . , x3d 1 1 P P u n1 ...nd ... Cik cos2n1x4 . . . nd x3d n1 1 nd 1 u n1 ...nd Sik sin2n1x4

. . . nd x3d ,

nd 1

B n1 ...nd Sijk

o sin2n1x4 . . . nd x3d :

The resulting structure-factor formula is FH

xik xik uik x4 , . . . , x3d , i 1, . . . , 3,

N 0 P R1 P k1 R; t 0

exp

where xik are the basic-structure coordinates and uik x4 , . . . , x3d are the modulation functions with unit periods in their arguments (Fig. 4.6.3.2). The arguments are x3j ijx0ik tj , j 1, . . . , d, where x0ik are the coordinates of the kth atom referred to the origin of its unit cell and tj are the phases of the modulation functions. The modulation functions uik x4 , . . . , x3d themselves can be expressed in terms of a Fourier series as

. . . nd x3d ,

R1 dx4; k . . . dx3d; k fk Hk pk 0 3d P i; j1

hi RB ijk R hj 2i T

3d P

! hj Rx jk hj tj

j1

for summing over the set (R, t) of superspace symmetry operations and the set of N0 atoms in the asymmetric unit of the 3 dD unit cell (Yamamoto, 1982). Different approaches without numerical integration based on analytical expressions including Bessel functions have also been developed. For more information see Paciorek & Chapuis (1994), Petricek, Maly & Cisarova (1991), and references therein. For illustration, some fundamental IMSs will be discussed briefly (see Korekawa, 1967; Bo¨hm, 1977). Harmonic density modulation. A harmonic density modulation can result on average from an ordered distribution of vacancies on atomic positions. For an IMS with N atoms per unit cell one obtains

496

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS satellites around the origin of the reciprocal lattice exists (Fig. 4.6.3.3). Symmetric rectangular density modulation. The box-functionlike modulated occupancy factor can be expanded into a Fourier series, 1 P n1 0 pk pk 4= 1 =2n 1 cos 22n 1x4; k 'k , n1

0 p0k 1,

and the resulting structure factor of the mth order satellite is N 3 P P F0 H 1=2 fk Hk Tk Hk exp 2i hi xik , i1

k1

Fm H 1=m sinm=2

N P

k1

fk Hk Tk Hk p0k

3 P exp 2i hi xik m'k : i1

According to this formula, only odd-order diffraction pattern. Their structure-factor linearly with the order jmj (Fig. 4.6.3.3b) Harmonic displacive modulation. The atomic coordinates is given by the function xik x0ik Aik cos 2x4; k 'k ,

satellites occur in the magnitudes decrease

and the structure factor by F0 H

N P

k

k

k

N P

i 1, . . . , 3,

fk H Tk H J0 2H Ak exp 2i

3 P

hi xik ,

i1

k1

Fm H

displacement of the

fk Hk Tk Hk Jm 2Hk Ak

k1

3 P exp 2i hi xik m'k : i1

Fig. 4.6.3.3. Schematic diffraction patterns for 3D IMSs with (a) 1D harmonic and (b) rectangular density modulation. The modulation direction is parallel to a2 . In (a) only first-order satellites exist; in (b), all odd-order satellites can be present. In (c), the diffraction pattern of a harmonic displacive modulation along a1 with amplitudes parallel to a2 is depicted. Several reflections are indexed. The areas of the circles are proportional to the reflection intensities.

The structure-factor magnitudes of the mth-order satellite reflections are a function of the mth-order Bessel functions. The arguments of the Bessel functions are proportional to the scalar products of the amplitude and the diffraction vector. Consequently, the intensity of the satellites will vary characteristically as a function of the length of the diffraction vector. Each main reflection is accompanied by an infinite number of satellite reflections (Figs. 4.6.3.3c and 4.6.3.4). 4.6.3.2. Composite structures (CSs)

Composite structures consist of N mutually incommensurate substructures with N basic sublattices fa1 , a2 , a3 g, with 1, . . . , N. The reciprocal sublattices fa1 , a2 , a3 g, with for a harmonic modulation of the occupancy factor 1, . . . , N, have either only the origin of the reciprocal lattice or pk p0k =2 1 cos 2 x4; k 'k , 0 p0k 1, one or two reciprocal-lattice directions in common. Thus, one needs 3 d < 3N reciprocal-basis vectors for integer indexing of the structure-factor formula for the mth order satellite 0 m 1 diffraction patterns that show Bragg reflections at positions given by the Fourier module M . The CSs discovered to date have at least N P one lattice direction in common and consist of a maximum number F0 H 1=2 fk Hk Tk Hk exp2iH rk , k1 3 of N 3 substructures. They can be divided in three main classes: N channel structures, columnar packings and layer packings (see van P P Fm H 1=2 fk Hk Tk Hk p0k =2jmj exp 2i hi xik m'k : Smaalen, 1992, 1995). i1 k1 In the following, the approach of Janner & Janssen (1980b) and van Smaalen (1992, 1995, and references therein) for the Thus, a linear correspondence exists between the structure-factor set of diffraction vectors of a CS, magnitudes of the satellite reflections and the amplitude of the description of CSs is used. The P 3d density modulation. Furthermore, only first-order satellites exist, i.e. its Fourier module M f i1 hi ai g, can be split into the contributions of the subsystems by employing P 3 3 d since the modulation wave consists only of one term. An important 3d criterion for the existence of a density modulation is that a pair of matrices Zik with integer coefficients ai k1 Zik ak ,

497

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS linearly independent. Then the remaining d vectors can be described as a linear P combination of the first three, defining the d 3 matrix : a3j 3d i1 ji ai , j 1, . . . , d. This is formally equivalent to the reciprocal basis obtained for an IMS (see Section 4.6.3.1) and one can proceed in an analogous way to that for IMSs. 4.6.3.2.2. Diffraction symmetry The symmetry of CSs can be described with basically the same formalism as used for IMSs. This is a consequence of the formally equivalent applicability of the higher-dimensional approach, in particular of the superspace-group theory developed for IMSs [see Janner & Janssen (1980a,b); van Smaalen (1991, 1992); Yamamoto (1992a)]. 4.6.3.2.3. Structure factor Fig. 4.6.3.4. The relative structure-factor magnitudes of mth-order satellite reflections for a harmonic displacive modulation are proportional to the values of the mth-order Bessel function Jm x.

i 1, . . . , 3. In the general case, each subsystem will be modulated with the periods of the others due to their mutual interactions. Thus, in general, CSs consist of several intergrown incommensurately modulated substructures. The satellite vectors qj , j 1, . . . , d, referred to the th subsystem can be obtained from M P by applying 3d Vjk ak , the d 3 d integer matrices Vjk : qj k1 j 1, . . . , d. The matrices consisting of the components of the satellite vectors qj with regard to the reciprocal sublattices can be calculated by V3 Vd Z3 Zd 1 , where the subscript 3 refers to the 3 3 submatrix of physical space and the subscript d to the d d matrix of the internal space. The juxtaposition of the 3 3 d matrix Z and the d 3 d matrix V defines the non-singular 3 d 3 d matrix W , Z W : V This matrix allows the reinterpretation of the Fourier module M as the Fourier module M M W of a d-dimensionally modulated subsystem . It also describes the coordinate transformation between the superspace basis and . The superspace description is obtained analogously to that for IMSs (see Section 4.6.3.1) by considering the 3D Fourier module M of rank 3 d as the projection of a 3 dD reciprocal lattice upon the physical space. Thus, one obtains for the definition of the direct and reciprocal 3 d lattices (Janner & Janssen, 1980b) ( ai ai , 0 i 1, . . . , 3 : a3j a3j , ej j 1, . . . , d 8 d P > : a3j 0, ej j 1, . . . , d: 4.6.3.2.1. Indexing The indexing of diffraction patterns of composite structures can be performed in the following way: (1) find the minimum number of reciprocal lattices necessary to index the diffraction pattern; (2) find a basis for M , the union of sublattices ; (3) find the appropriate superspace embedding. The 3 d vectors ai forming a basis for the 3D Fourier module P M f 3d i1 hi ai g can be chosen such that a1 , a2 and a3 are

The structure factor FH of a composite structure consists of the weighted contributions of the subsystem structure factors F H : FH F H

P

jJ jF H ;

1 P N 0 R1 P R ; t k1 0

exp

R1 dx4; k . . . dx3d; k fk Hk pk 0 3d P

i; j1

hi R Bijk R T hj

2i

3d P j1

! hj R xjk

hj tj

,

with coefficients similar to those for IMSs. The weights are the Jacobians of the transformations from t to t, and H are the reflection indices with respect to the subsystem Fourier modules M (van Smaalen, 1995, and h references therein). i The relative values of jJ j, where J det Vd Zd 1 , are related to the volume ratios of the contributing subsystems. The subsystem structure factors correspond to those for IMSs (see Section 4.6.3.1). Besides this formula, based on the publications of Yamamoto (1982) and van Smaalen (1995), different structurefactor equations have been discussed (Kato, 1990; Petricek, Maly, Coppens et al., 1991). 4.6.3.3. Quasiperiodic structures (QSs) 4.6.3.3.1. 3D structures with 1D quasiperiodic order Structures with quasiperiodic order in one dimension and lattice symmetry in the other two dimensions are the simplest representatives of quasicrystals. A few phases of this structure type have been identified experimentally (see Steurer, 1990). Since the Fibonacci chain represents the most important model of a 1D quasiperiodic structure, it will be used in this section to represent the quasiperiodic direction of 3D structures with 1D quasiperiodic order. As discussed in Section 4.6.2.4, 1D quasiperiodic structures are on the borderline between quasiperiodic and incommensurately modulated structures. They can be described using either of the two approaches. In the following, the quasiperiodic description will be preferred to take account of the scaling symmetry. The electron-density-distribution function r of a 1D quasiperiodically ordered 3D crystal can be represented by a Fourier series: P r 1=V FH exp 2i H r: H

The Fourier coefficients (structure factors) differ from zero P FH k h a h1 k 2 R, only for reciprocal-space vectors H 3i1 P4 i i with k k h2 , h3 2 Z or with integer indexing H i1 hi ai with hi 2 Z. k The P4 set of all vectors H forms a Fourier module M fH i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg of rank 4 which can be decomposed into two rank 2 submodules M M1 M2 . M1 fh1 a1 h2 a2 g corresponds

498

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS to a Z module of rank 2 in a 1D subspace, M2 fh3 a3 h4 a4 g corresponds to a Z module of rank 2 in a 2D subspace. Consequently, the first submodule can be considered as a projection from a 2D reciprocal lattice, M1 k , while the second submodule is of the form of a reciprocal lattice, M2 . Hence, the reciprocal-basis vectors ai , i 1, . . . , 4, can be considered to be projections of reciprocal-basis vectors a 4D reciprocal lattice, onto the physical di , i 1, . . . , 4, spanning P space fH 4i1 hi di jhi 2 Zg, with 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 B B B B C C C C C B 1 C B 0 C B 0 C d1 a1 B @ 0 A, d2 a1 @ 0 A, d3 a3 @ 1 A, d4 a4 @ 0 A: 0 0 0 1 A direct lattice with basis di , i 1, . . . , 4 and di dj ij , can be constructed according to (compare Fig. 4.6.2.8) P fr 4i1 mi di jmi 2 Zg, with 0 0 1 1 1 B B C C 1 1 B C B1C d1 B B C, C, d2 a1 2 @ 0 A a1 2 @ 0 A 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 B C B 1 B0C 1 B0C C d3 B C, d4 B C: a3 @ 1 A a4 @ 0 A 0

0

1

Consequently, the structure in physical space Vk is equivalent to a 3D section of the 4D hypercrystal. 4.6.3.3.1.1. Indexing The reciprocal space of the Fibonacci chain is densely filled with Bragg reflections (Figs. 4.6.2.9 and 4.6.3.5). According to the nD embedding method, the shorter the parallel-space distance Hk k k H2 H1 between two Bragg reflections, the larger the corresponding perpendicular-space distance H? H? H? 2 1 becomes. Since the structure factor FH decreases rapidly as a function of H? (Fig. 4.6.3.6), ‘neighbouring’ reflections of strong Bragg peaks are extremely weak and, consequently, the reciprocal space appears to be filled with discrete Bragg peaks even for low-resolution experiments. This property allows an unambiguous identification of a correct set of reciprocal-basis vectors. However, infinitely many sets allowing a correct indexing of the diffraction pattern with integer indices exist. Nevertheless, an optimum basis (low indices are assigned to strong reflections) can be derived: the intensity distribution, not the metrics, characterizes the best choice of indexing. Once the minimum distance S in the structure is identified from chemical considerations, the reciprocal basis should be chosen as described in Section 4.6.2.4. It has to be kept in mind, however, that the identification of the metrics is not sufficient to distinguish in the 1D aperiodic case between an incommensurately modulated structure, a quasiperiodic structure or special kinds of structures with fractally shaped atomic surfaces. A correct set of reciprocal-basis vectors can be identified in the following way: (1) Find pairs of strong reflections whose physical-space diffraction vectors are related to each other by the factor . (2) Index these reflections by assigning an appropriate value to a . This value should be derived from the shortest interatomic distance S expected in the structure. (3) The reciprocal basis is correct if all observable Bragg reflections can be indexed with integer numbers.

Fig. 4.6.3.5. The structure factors FH (below) and their magnitudes jFHj (above) of a Fibonacci chain decorated with equal point atoms are shown as a function of the parallel-space component jHk j of the diffraction vector. The short distance in the Fibonacci chain is 1 S 2:5 A , all structure factors within 0 jHj 2:5 A have been calculated and normalized to F00 1.

4.6.3.3.1.2. Diffraction symmetry The possible symmetry group K 3D of the Fourier module PLaue 4 k M fH i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg is any one of the direct product K 3D K 2D K 1D 1. K 2D corresponds to one of the ten crystallographic 2D point groups, K 1D f1g in the general case of a quasiperiodic stacking of periodic layers. Consequently, the nine Laue groups 1, 2=m, mmm, 4/m, 4/mmm, 3, 3m, 6=m and 6=mmm are possible. These are all 3D crystallographic Laue groups except for the two cubic ones. The (unweighted) Fourier module shows only 2D lattice symmetry. In the third dimension, the submodule M1 remains invariant under the scaling symmetry operation S n M1 n M1 with n 2 Z. The scaling symmetry operators S n form an infinite group s f. . . , S 1 , S 0 , S 1 , . . .g of reciprocal-basis transformations S n in superspace, 0

0 1 0 0

1n

0 1 1 1 0 0 B1 0 0 0C B C B C , @0 0 1 0A

B1 1 0 0C B C Sn B C , S 1 @0 0 1 0A 0 0 0 1 D 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 B0 1 0 0C B C S0 B C , @0 0 1 0A 0 0 0 1

D

and act on the reciprocal basis di in superspace.

499

D

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS and H? a1 h1 h2 the integrand can be rewritten as FH f Hk a 2 =1

1=2a R 2

1=2a 2

exp2i h1 h2 x? dx? ,

yielding FH f Hk 2 =2i h1 h2 1 1=2a 2 exp2i h1 h2 x? 1=2a 2 : Using sin x eix

e

ix

=2i gives

k

FH f H 2 = h1 h2 1 sin1 h1 h2 =2 : Thus, the structure factor has the form of the function sinx=x with x a perpendicular reciprocal-space coordinate. The upper and lower limiting curves of this function are given by the hyperbolae 1=x (Fig. 4.6.3.6). The continuous shape of FH as a function of H? allows the estimation of an overall temperature factor and atomic scattering factor for reflection-data normalization (compare Figs. 4.6.3.6 and 4.6.3.7). In the case of a 3D crystal structure which is quasiperiodic in one direction, the structure factor can be written in the form i n h P FH Tk Hfk Hk gk H? exp2iH rk : k1

Fig. 4.6.3.6. The structure factors FH (below) and their magnitudes jFHj (above) of a Fibonacci chain decorated with equal point atoms are shown as a function of the perpendicular-space component jH? j of the diffraction vector. The short distance in the Fibonacci chain is 1 S 2:5 A , all structure factors within 0 jHj 2:5 A have been calculated and normalized to F00 1.

4.6.3.3.1.3. Structure factor The structure factor of a periodic structure is defined as the Fourier transform of the density distribution r of its unit cell (UC): R FH r exp2iH r dr: UC

The same is valid in the case of the nD description of a quasiperiodic structure. The parallel- and perpendicular-space components are orthogonal to each other and can be separated. In the case of the 1D Fibonacci sequence, the Fourier transform of the parallel-space component of the electron-density distribution of a single atom gives the usual atomic scattering factor f Hk . Parallel to x? , r adopts values 6 0 only within the interval 1 = 2a 2 x? 1 =2a 2 and one obtains FH f Hk a 2 =1

1=2a R 2

1=2a 2

exp2iH? x? dx? :

The factor a 2 =1 results from the normalization of the structure factors to F0 f 0. With H h1 d1 h2 d2 h3 d3 h4 d4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 B C B1C B0C B0C B B C B C B C C h1 a1 B C h2 a1 B C h3 a3 B C h4 a4 B C @ 0 A @0A @1A @0A 0

0

0

1

Fig. 4.6.3.7. The structure factors FH of the Fibonacci chain decorated 2 with aluminium atoms Uoverall 0:005 A as a function of the parallel (above) and the perpendicular (below) component of the diffraction vector. The short distance is S 2:5 A, all structure factors within 0 1 jHj 2:5 A have been calculated and normalized to F00 1.

500

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS The sum runs over all n averaged hyperatoms in the 4D unit cell of the structure. The geometric form factor gk H? corresponds to the Fourier transform of the kth atomic surface, R ? ? ? gk H? 1=A? UC exp2iH r dr , Ak

normalized to the area of the 2D unit cell projected upon V? , and Ak , the area of the kth atomic surface. The atomic temperature factor Tk H can also have perpendicular-space components. Assuming only harmonic (static or dynamic) displacements in parallel and perpendicular space one obtains, in analogy to the usual expression (Willis & Pryor, 1975), A? UC ,

Tk H Tk Hk , H? k kT

?T ? exp 22 HkT hui uj iHk exp 22 H?T hu? i uj iH ,

with

0

k2

hu1 i

B k kT k kT hui uj i B @ hu2 u1 i

k

kT

k

kT

hu1 u2 i hu1 u3 i

1

C k kT hu2 u3 i C A k kT k kT k2 hu3 u1 i hu3 u2 i hu3 i k2

hu2 i

?T ? and hu? i uj i hu4 i:

The elements of the type hui uTj i represent the average values of the atomic displacements along the ith axis times the displacement along the jth axis on the V basis. 4.6.3.3.1.4. Intensity statistics In the following, only the properties of the quasiperiodic component of the 3D structure, namely the Fourier module M1 , are discussed. The intensities IH of the Fibonacci chain decorated with point atoms are only a function of the perpendicular-space component of the diffraction vector. jFHj and FH are illustrated in Figs. 4.6.3.5 and 4.6.3.6 as a function of Hk and of H? . The distribution of jFHj as a function of their frequencies clearly resembles a centric distribution, as can be expected from the centrosymmetric 2D sub-unit cell. The shape of the distribution function depends on the radius Hmax of the limiting sphere in reciprocal space. The number of weak reflections increases with the square of Hmax , that of strong reflections only linearly (strong reflections always have small H? components). The weighted reciprocal space of the Fibonacci sequence contains an infinite number of Bragg reflections within a limited region of the physical space. Contrary to the diffraction pattern of a periodic structure consisting of point atoms on the lattice nodes, the Bragg reflections show intensities depending on the perpendicularspace components of their diffraction vectors. The reciprocal space of a sequence generated from hyperatoms with fractally shaped atomic surfaces (squared Fibonacci sequence) is very similar to that of the Fibonacci sequence (Figs. 4.6.3.8 and 4.6.3.9). However, there are significantly more weak reflections in the diffraction pattern of the ‘fractal’ sequence, caused by the geometric form factor. 4.6.3.3.1.5. Relationships between structure factors at symmetry-related points of the Fourier image The two possible point-symmetry groups in the 1D quasiperiodic case, K 1D 1 and K 1D 1, relate the structure factors to 1: FH FH, 1 : FH FH: A 3D structure with 1D quasiperiodicity results from the stacking of atomic layers with distances following a quasiperiodic sequence.

Fig. 4.6.3.8. The structure factors FH (below) and their magnitudes jFHj (above) of the squared Fibonacci chain decorated with equal point atoms are shown as a function of the parallel-space component jHk j of the diffraction vector. The short distance is S 2:5 A , all 1 structure factors within 0 jHj 2:5 A have been calculated and normalized to F00 1.

The point groups K 3D describing the symmetry of such structures result from the direct product K 3D K 2D K 1D : K 2D corresponds to one of the ten crystallographic 2D point groups, K 1D can be f1g or f1, mg. Consequently, 18 3D point groups are possible. Since 1D quasiperiodic sequences can be described generically as incommensurately modulated structures, their possible point and space groups are equivalent to a subset of the 3 1D superspace groups for IMSs with satellite vectors of the type 00 , i.e. q c , for the quasiperiodic direction [001] (Janssen et al., 1999). From the scaling properties of the Fibonacci sequence, some relationships between structure factors can be derived. Scaling the physical-space structure by a factor n , n 2 Z, corresponds to a scaling of the perpendicular space by the inverse factor n . For the scaling of the corresponding reciprocal subspaces, the inverse factors compared to the direct spaces have to be applied. The set of vectors r, defining the vertices of a Fibonacci sequence sr, multiplied by a factor coincides with a subset of the vectors defining the vertices of the original sequence (Fig. 4.6.3.10). The residual vertices correspond to a particular decoration of the scaled sequence, i.e. the sequence 2 sr. The Fourier transform of the sequence sr then can be written as the sum of the Fourier transforms of the sequences sr and 2 sr; P P P exp2iH rk exp2iHrk exp2iH 2 rk : k

k

k

In terms of structure factors, this can be reformulated as FH FH exp2iHF 2 H: Hence, phases of structure factors that are related by scaling symmetry can be determined from each other.

501


Fig. 4.6.3.10. Part . . . LSLLSLSL . . . of a Fibonacci sequence sr before and after scaling by the factor . L is mapped onto L, S onto S L. The vertices of the new sequence are a subset of those of the original sequence (the correspondence is indicated by dashed lines). The residual vertices 2 sr, which give when decorating sr the Fibonacci sequence sr, form a Fibonacci sequence scaled by a factor 2 .

Thus, for scaling n times we obtain ? S n H Fn h1 Fn1 h2 Fn1 h1 Fn2 h2 a h1 Fn Fn1 h2 Fn1 Fn2 a with lim Fn Fn1 0 and lim Fn1 Fn2 0,

n!1

n!1

yielding eventually Fig. 4.6.3.9. The structure factors FH (below) and their magnitudes jFHj (above) of the squared Fibonacci chain decorated with equal point atoms are shown as a function of the perpendicular-space component jH? j of the diffraction vector. The short distance is 1 S 2:5 A , all structure factors within 0 jHj 2:5 A have been calculated and normalized to F00 1.

Further scaling relationships in reciprocal space exist: scaling a 1 diffraction vector H h1 d1 h2 d2 h1 a h 2 a V 1 V 0 1 with the matrix S , 1 1 D Fn Fn1 h1 h1 0 1 Fn1 Fn2 D h2 D 1 1 D h2 D Fn h1 Fn1 h2 , Fn1 h1 Fn2 h2 D

lim ? S n H 0 and lim FS n H F0:

n!1

n!1

The scaling of the diffraction vectors H by S n corresponds to a hyperbolic rotation (Janner, 1992) with angle n', where sinh ' 1=2 (Fig. 4.6.3.11): 0 1 2n cosh 2n' sinh 2n' , 1 1 sinh 2n' cosh 2n' sinh2n 1' cosh2n 1' 0 1 2n1 : cosh2n 1' sinh2n 1' 1 1

increases the magnitudes of structure factors assigned to this particular diffraction vector H, n n 1 FS H > FS H > . . . > FSH > FH : This is due to the shrinking of the perpendicular-space component of the diffraction vector by powers of n while expanding the parallel-space component by n according to the eigenvalues and 1 of S acting in the two eigenspaces Vk and V? : k SH h2 h1 h2 a h1 h2 1a h1 h2 a , ? SH h2 h1 h2 a h1

h2

1a

1= h1 h2 a , n k n 1 k F H > F H > . . . > FHk > FHk :

Fig. 4.6.3.11. Scaling operations of the Fibonacci sequence. The scaling operation S acts six times on the diffraction vector H 42 yielding the sequence 42 ! 22 ! 20 ! 02 ! 22 ! 24 ! 46.

502

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS 0

cos=5 B sin=5 B B B 0 V B B 0 @ 0 k

0

1 B0 B B V B 0 @0 0

0

0

?

0 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0

sin=5 cos=5 0 0 0 !

0 0 0 1 0

1 0 C 0 C C C 0 C sin3=5 C A

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 cos3=5 0 sin3=5

cos3=5

V

, V

1 0 0C C 0C C , 0A 1

V

0 1 B0 B B V B 0 @0 0

0 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0C C 0C C , 0A 1 V

where

0

Fig. 4.6.3.12. Reciprocal basis of the decagonal phase in the 5D description projected upon Vk (above left) and V? (above right). Below, a perspective physical-space view is shown.

4.6.3.3.2. Decagonal phases A structure quasiperiodic in two dimensions, periodic in the third dimension and with decagonal diffraction symmetry is called a decagonal phase. Its holohedral Laue symmetry group is K 10=mmm. All reciprocal-space vectors H 2 M can be represented on a basis (V basis) ai ai cos 2i=5, sin P 2i=5, 0, i 1, . . . , 4 and a5 a5 0, 0, 1 (Fig. 4.6.3.12) as H 5i1 hi ai . The vector components refer to a Cartesian coordinate system in physical (parallel) space. Thus, from the number of independent reciprocal-basis vectors necessary to index the Bragg reflections with integer numbers, the dimension of the embedding space has to be at least five. This can also be shown in a different way (Hermann, 1949). The set M of all vectors H remains invariant under the action of the symmetry operators of the point group 10=mmm. The symmetry-adapted matrix representations for the point-group generators, the tenfold rotation 10, the reflection plane m2 (normal of the reflection plane along the vectors ai ai3 with i 1, . . . , 4 modulo 5) and the inversion operation 1 may be written in the form 0

0 B0 B B 0 @ 1 0

1 1 1 1 0

1 0 0C C 0C 0A 1 D 0 1 0 B 0 1 B B 0 0 @0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0

0

0 0 B0 0 B B 0 1 @1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0C 1 0 0 C C : 0 1 0 A 0 0 1 D

0 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0

1 0 0C C 0C 0A 1 D

By block-diagonalization, these reducible symmetry matrices can be decomposed into non-equivalent irreducible representations. These can be assigned to the two orthogonal subspaces forming the 5D embedding space V Vk V? , the 3D parallel (physical) subspace Vk and the perpendicular 2D subspace V? . Thus, using k W W 1 V V ? V , we obtain

1 a1 cos2=5 a2 cos4=5 a3 cos6=5 a4 cos8=5 0 B a1 sin2=5 a2 sin4=5 a3 sin6=5 a4 sin8=5 0 C B C 0 0 0 0 a5 C: W B B C @ a cos6=5 a cos2=5 a cos8=5 a cos4=5 0 A 1 2 3 4 a1 sin6=5 a2 sin2=5 a3 sin8=5 a4 sin4=5 0

The column vectors of the matrix W give the parallel- (above the partition line) and perpendicular-space components (below the partition line) of a reciprocal basis in V space. Thus, W can be rewritten using the physical-space reciprocal basis defined above as W d1 ,

d2 ,

d3 ,

d4 ,

d5 ,

yielding the reciprocal basis di , i 1, . . . , 5, in the 5D embedding space (D space): 0 1 0 1 cos2i=5 0 B sin2i=5 C B0C B C B C C , i 1, . . . , 4 and d a B 1 C : 0 di ai B 5 5 B C B C @ cos6i=5 A @0A sin6i=5 V 0 V The 5 5 symmetry matrices can each be decomposed into a 3 3 matrix and a 2 2 matrix. The first one, k , acts on the parallelspace component, the second one, ? , on the perpendicular-space component. In the case of , the coupling factor between a rotation in parallel and perpendicular space is 3. Thus, a =5 rotation in physical space is related to a 3=5 rotation in perpendicular space (Fig. 4.6.3.12). With the condition di dj ij , a basis in direct 5D space is obtained: 0 0 1 1 cos2i=5 1 0 B sin2i=5 C B0C B C C 2 B C, i 1, . . . , 4, and d5 1 B 1 C: di B 0 B C C 5ai @ a5 B @0A cos6i=5 1 A sin6i=5 0 The metric tensors G, G are of the type 0 1 A C C C 0 BC A C C 0 C B C BC C A C 0 C B C @C C C A 0 A 0 0 0 0 B 2 2 with A 2a2 1 , B a5 , C 1=2a1 for the reciprocal space 2 2 2 and A 4=5a1 , B 1=a5 , C 2=5a1 for the direct space. Thus, for the lattice parameters in reciprocal space we obtain

503

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS di ai 21=2 , i 1, . . . , 4; d5 i5 90 , i 1, . . . , 4, and di 2=ai 51=2 , i 1, . . . , 4; 1, . . . , 4; i5 90 , i 1, . . . , 4.

ij 104:5 , i, j 1, . . . , 4; for those in direct space d5 1=a5 ; ij 60 , i, j The volume of the 5D unit cell can be calculated from the metric tensor G: V det G1=2

a5 ;

4 551=2 a1 4 a5

51=2 d1 4 d5 : 4

Since decagonal phases are only quasiperiodic in two dimensions, it is sufficient to demonstrate their characteristics on a 2D example, the canonical Penrose tiling (Penrose, 1974). It can be constructed from two unit tiles: a skinny (acute angle s =5) and a fat (acute angle f 2=5) rhomb with equal edge lengths ar and areas AS a2r sin=5, AF a2r sin2=5 (Fig. 4.6.3.13). The areas and frequencies of these two unit tiles in the Penrose tiling are both in a ratio 1 to . By replacing each skinny and fat rhomb according to the inflation rule, a -inflated tiling is obtained. Inflation (deflation) means that the number of tiles is inflated (deflated), their edge lengths are decreased (increased) by a factor . By infinite repetition of this inflation operation, an infinite Penrose

tiling is generated. Consequently, this substitution operation leaves the tiling invariant. From Fig. 4.6.3.13 it can be seen that the sets of vertices of the deflated tilings are subsets of the set of vertices of the original tiling. The -deflated tiling is dual to the original tiling; a further deflation by a factor gives the original tiling again. However, the edge lengths of the tiles are increased by a factor 2 , and the tiling is rotated around 36 . Only the fourth deflation of the original tiling yields the original tiling in its original orientation but with all lengths multiplied by a factor 4 . Contrary to P4 the reciprocal-space scaling behaviour of k M fH i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg, the set of vertices M fr P4 n a jn 2 Zg of the Penrose tiling is not invariant by scaling i1 i i i the length scale simply by a factor using the scaling matrix S: 0 0 1 1 n1 0 1 0 1 B 0 1 1 1 C B n2 C B C C SB @ 1 1 1 0 A acting on vectors r @ n3 A : 1 0 1 0 n4 D D The square of S, however, maps all vertices of upon other ones: 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 B 0 2 1 1 C B1 2 2 C S B S B @ 1 1 2 0 A , @0 1 0 1 1 1 D

the Penrose tiling 1 2 2 1

1 0 1 1

1 1 2 C C 1 A : 0 D

S 2 corresponds to a hyperbolic rotation with cosh 1 3=2 in superspace (Janner, 1992). However, only operations of the type S 4n , n 0, 1, 2 . . ., scale the Penrose tiling in a way which is equivalent to the (4nth) substitutional operations discussed above. The rotoscaling operation S 2 , also a symmetry operation of the Penrose tiling, leaves a pentagram invariant as demonstrated in Fig. 4.6.3.14 (Janner, 1992). Block-diagonalization of the scaling matrix S decomposes it into two non-equivalent irreducible representations which give the scaling properties in the two orthogonal subspaces of the 4D embedding space, V Vk V? , the 2D parallel (physical) subspace Vk and the perpendicular 2D subspace V? . Thus, using k WSW 1 SV SV SV? , we obtain

Fig. 4.6.3.13. A section of a Penrose tiling (thin lines) superposed by its deflated tiling (above, thick lines) and by its 2 -deflated tiling (below, thick lines). In the middle, the inflation rule of the Penrose tiling is illustrated.

Fig. 4.6.3.14. Scaling symmetry of a pentagram superposed on the Penrose tiling. A vector pointing to a corner of a pentagon (star) is mapped by the rotoscaling operation (rotation around =5 and dilatation by a factor 2 ) onto the next largest pentagon (star).

504

0

B0 B SV B @0 0

0 0 0

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS 1 0 0 ! k 0 0 C SV 0 C , 1= 0 C A 0 SV? V 0 1= V

where 0

1 a1 cos2=5 a2 cos4=5 a3 cos6=5 a4 cos8=5 B a1 sin2=5 a2 sin4=5 a3 sin6=5 a4 sin8=5 C C W B @ a cos4=5 a cos8=5 a cos2=5 a cos6=5 A: 1 2 3 4 a1 sin4=5 a2 sin8=5 a3 sin2=5 a4 sin6=5

The 2D Penrose tiling can also be embedded canonically in the 5D space. Canonically means that the 5D lattice is hypercubic and that the projection of one unit cell upon the 3D perpendicular space V? , giving a rhomb-icosahedron, defines the atomic surface. However, the parallel-space image ai , i 1, . . . , 4, with a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 , of the 5D basis di , i 1, . . . , 4 is not linearly independent. Consequently, the atomic surface consists of only a subset of the points contained in the rhomb-icosahedron: five equidistant pentagons (one with diameter zero) resulting as sections of the rhomb-icosahedron with five equidistant parallel planes (Fig. 4.6.3.15). The linear dependence of the 5D basis allows the embedding in the 4D space. The resulting hyper-rhombohedral hyperlattice is spanned by the basis di , i 1, . . . , 4, discussed above. The atomic surfaces occupy the positions p=51111, p 1, . . . , 4, on the body diagonal of the 4D unit cell. Neighbouring pentagons are in an anti position to each other (Fig. 4.6.3.16). Thus the 4D unit cell is decorated centrosymmetrically. The edge length ar of a Penrose rhomb is related to the length of physical-space basis vectors ai by ar S, with the smallest distance S 2=5ai , i 1, . . . , 4. The point density (number of vertices per unit area) of a Penrose tiling with Penrose rhombs of edge length ar can be calculated from the ratio of the relative number of unit tiles in the tiling to their area:

1 5=2a2 i 2 sin2=5

a2r sin=5

2 tan2=5:

This is equivalent to the calculation from the 4D description,

Fig. 4.6.3.15. Atomic surface of the Penrose tiling in the 5D hypercubic description. The projection of the 5D hypercubic unit cell upon V? gives a rhomb-icosahedron (above). The Penrose tiling is generated by four equidistant pentagons (shaded) inscribed in the rhomb-icosahedron. Below is a perpendicular-space projection of the same pentagons, which are located on the 1111D diagonal of the 4D hyperrhombohedral unit cell in the 4D description.

Fig. 4.6.3.16. Projection of the 4D hyper-rhombohedral unit cell of the Penrose tiling in the 4D description upon the perpendicular space. In the upper drawing all edges between the 16 corners are shown. In the lower drawing the corners are indexed and the four pentagonal atomic surfaces of the Penrose tiling are shaded.

P4

i i1 AS

UC

P4

5=2a2 i 2

2 i1 5=2 sin2=5 4=551=2 jai j4 2

tan2=5,

where AS and UC are the area of the atomic surface and the volume of the 4D unit cell, respectively. The pentagon radii are 1; 4 22 =5a and 2; 3 2 1=5a for the atomic surfaces in p=51111 with p 1, 4 and p 2, 3. A detailed discussion of the properties of Penrose tiling is given in the papers of Penrose (1974, 1979), Jaric (1986) and Pavlovitch & Kleman (1987). 4.6.3.3.2.1. Indexing The indexing of the submodule M1 of the diffraction pattern of a decagonal phase is not unique. Since M1 corresponds to a Z module of rank 4 with decagonal point symmetry, it is invariant under scaling by n , n 2 Z: S n M n M . Nevertheless, an optimum basis (low indices are assigned to strong reflections) can be derived: not the metrics, as for regular periodic crystals, but the intensity distribution characterizes the best choice of indexing. A correct set of reciprocal-basis vectors can be identified experimentally in the following way: (1) Find directions of systematic absences or pseudo-absences determining the possible orientations of the reciprocal-basis vectors (see Rabson et al., 1991). (2) Find pairs of strong reflections whose physical-space diffraction vectors are related to each other by the factor . (3) Index these reflections by assigning an appropriate value to a . This value should be derived from the shortest interatomic distance S and the edge length of the unit tiles expected in the structure. (4) The reciprocal basis is correct if all observable Bragg reflections can be indexed with integer numbers. 4.6.3.3.2.2. Diffraction symmetry The diffraction symmetry of decagonal phases can be described by the Laue groups 10=mmm or 10=m. PThe set of all vectors H forms a Fourier module M fHk 5i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg of rank 5 in physical space which can be decomposed into two submodules

505


Fig. 4.6.3.17. Schematic diffraction pattern of the Penrose tiling (edge length of the Penrose unit rhombs ar 4:04 A ). All reflections are shown within 10 2 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 0 jHk j 1 2:5 A .

Fig. 4.6.3.19. The perpendicular-space diffraction pattern of the Penrose tiling (edge length of the Penrose unit rhombs ar 4:04 A ). All reflections are shown within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 1 k 0 jH j 2:5 A .

M M1 M2 . M1 fh1 a1 h2 a2 h3 a3 h4 a4 g corresponds to a Z module of rank 4 in a 2D subspace, M2 fh5 a5 g corresponds to a Z module of rank 1 in a 1D subspace. Consequently, the first submodule can be considered as a projection from a 4D reciprocal lattice, M1 k , while the second submodule is of the form of a regular 1D reciprocal lattice, M2 . The diffraction pattern of the Penrose tiling decorated with equal point scatterers on its vertices is shown in Fig. 4.6.3.17. All Bragg reflections within 10 2 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 are depicted. Without intensity-truncation limit, the diffraction pattern would be densely filled with discrete Bragg reflections. To illustrate their spatial and intensity distribution, an enlarged section of Fig. 4.6.3.17 is shown in Fig. 4.6.3.18. This picture shows all Bragg reflections within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 . The projected 4D reciprocal-lattice unit cell is drawn and several reflections are indexed. All reflections are arranged along lines in five symmetryequivalent orientations. The perpendicular-space diffraction patterns (Figs. 4.6.3.19 and 4.6.3.20) show a characteristic star-like

distribution of the Bragg reflections. This is a consequence of the pentagonal shape of the atomic surfaces: the Fourier transform of a pentagon has a star-like distribution of strong Fourier coefficients. The 5D decagonal space groups that may be of relevance for the description of decagonal phases are listed in Table 4.6.3.1. These space groups are a subset of all 5D decagonal space groups fulfilling the condition that the 5D point groups they are associated with are isomorphous to the 3D point groups describing the diffraction symmetry. Their structures are comparable to 3D hexagonal groups. Hence, only primitive lattices exist. The orientation of the symmetry elements in the 5D space is defined by the isomorphism of the 3D and 5D point groups. However, the action of the tenfold rotation is different in the subspaces Vk and V? : a rotation of =5 in Vk is correlated with a rotation of 3=5 in V? . The reflection and inversion operations are equivalent in both subspaces.

Fig. 4.6.3.18. Enlarged section of Fig. 4.6.3.17. All reflections shown are selected within the given limits from a data set within 10 4 jF0j2 < 1 2 2 k jFHj < jF0j and 0 jH j 2:5 A . The projected 4D reciprocal-lattice unit cell is drawn and several reflections are indexed.

4.6.3.3.2.3. Structure factor The structure factor for the decagonal phase corresponds to the Fourier transform of the 5D unit cell,

Fig. 4.6.3.20. Enlarged section of Fig. 4.6.3.19 showing the projected 4D reciprocal-lattice unit cell.

506

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS Table 4.6.3.1. 3D point groups of order k describing the diffraction symmetry and corresponding 5D decagonal space groups with reflection conditions (see Rabson et al., 1991) 3D point group

k

5D space group

10 2 2 m mm

40

P

10 2 2 m mm

No condition

P

10 2 2 m cc

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P

105 2 2 m mc

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P

105 2 2 m cm

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P

10 m

No condition

P

105 m

0000h5 : h5 2n

10 m

20

1022

20

10mm

10m2

20

20

10

10

FH

N P

2 A? UC 4=25ai 7 sin2=5 2 sin4=5:

Reflection condition

P1022

No condition

P10j 22

0000h5 : jh5 10n

P10mm

No condition

P10cc

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P105 mc

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P105 cm

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P10m2

No condition

P10c2

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P102m

No condition

P102c

h1 h2 h2 h1 h5 : h5 2n

P10

No condition

P10j

0000h5 : jh5 10n

Evaluating the integral by decomposing the pentagons into triangles, one obtains 1 2 ? gk H ? sin 5 AUC 4 X Aj expiAj1 k 1 Aj1 expiAj k 1 Aj Aj1 Aj Aj1 j0 with j 0, . . . , 4 running over the five triangles, where the radii of the pentagons are j , Aj 2H? ej , 0 1 0 B C 0 4 B C P C H? ? H hj aj B 0 B C j0 @ cos6j=5 A sin6j=5 and the vectors

1 0 B C 0 C 1B B C with j 0, . . . , 4: 0 ej B C aj @ cos2j=5 A sin2j=5

0

As shown by Ishihara & Yamamoto (1988), the Penrose tiling can be considered to be a superstructure of a pentagonal tiling with only one type of pentagonal atomic surface in the nD unit cell. Thus, for the Penrose tiling, P three special reflection classes can be distinguished: for j 4i1 hi j m mod 5 and m 0 the class of strong main reflections is obtained, and for m 1, 2 the classes of weaker first- and second-order satellite reflections are obtained (see Fig. 4.6.3.18).

fk Hk Tk Hk , H? gk H? exp2iH rk ,

k1

P with 5D diffraction vectors H 5i1 hi di , N hyperatoms, parallelspace atomic scattering factor fk Hk , temperature factor Tk Hk , H? and perpendicular-space geometric form factor gk H? . Tk Hk , 0 is equivalent to the conventional Debye–Waller factor and Tk 0, H? describes random fluctuations along the perpendicular-space coordinate. These fluctuations cause characteristic jumps of vertices in physical space (phason flips). Even random phason flips map the vertices onto positions whichPcan still 5 be described by physical-space vectors P5 of the type r i1 ni ai . Consequently, the set M fr i1 ni ai jni 2 Zg of all possible vectors forms a Z module. The shape of the atomic surfaces corresponds to a selection rule for the positions actually occupied. The geometric form factor gk H? is equivalent to the Fourier transform of the atomic surface, i.e. the 2D perpendicular-space component of the 5D hyperatoms. For example, the canonical Penrose tiling gk H? corresponds to the Fourier transform of pentagonal atomic surfaces: R ? gk H? 1=A? UC exp2iH r dr, Ak

? where A? UC is the area of the 5D unit cell projected upon V and Ak ? is the area of the kth atomic surface. The area AUC can be calculated using the formula

4.6.3.3.2.4. Intensity statistics This section deals with the reciprocal-space characteristics of the 2D quasiperiodic component of the 3D structure, namely the Fourier module M1 . The radial structure-factor distributions of the Penrose tiling decorated with point scatterers are plotted in Figs. 4.6.3.21 and 4.6.3.22 as a function of parallel and perpendicular space. The distribution of jFHj as a function of their frequencies clearly resembles a centric distribution, as can be expected from the centrosymmetric 4D subunit cell. The shape of the distribution function depends on the radius of the limiting sphere in reciprocal space. The number of weak reflections increases to the power of four, that of strong reflections only quadratically (strong reflections always have small H? components). The radial distribution of the structure-factor amplitudes as a function of perpendicular space clearly P4 shows three branches, corresponding to the reflection classes i1 hi m mod 5 with jmj 0, jmj 1 and jmj 2 (Fig. 4.6.3.23). The weighted reciprocal space of the Penrose tiling contains an infinite number of Bragg reflections within a limited region of the physical space. Contrary to the diffraction pattern of a periodic structure consisting of point atoms on the lattice nodes, the Bragg reflections show intensities depending on the perpendicular-space components of their diffraction vectors (Figs. 4.6.3.19, 4.6.3.20 and 4.6.3.22).

507


Fig. 4.6.3.21. Radial distribution function of the structure factors FH of the Penrose tiling (edge length of the Penrose unit rhombs ar 4:04 A) k decorated with point atoms as a function of H . All structure factors 1 within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 0 jHk j 2:5 A have been used and normalized to F0000 1.

4.6.3.3.2.5. Relationships between structure factors at symmetry-related points of the Fourier image Scaling the Penrose tiling by a factor n by employing the matrix S n scales at the same time its reciprocal space by a factor n: 0 1 0 1 0 1 h1 h2 h4 0 1 0 1 0 B C B C B C B 0 1 1 1 0 C B h2 C B h2 h3 h4 C B C B C B C C B C B C SH B B 1 1 1 0 0 C B h3 C B h1 h2 h3 C: B C B C B C h1 h3 A @ 1 0 1 0 0 A @ h4 A @ h5 0 0 0 0 1 D h5 Since this operation increases the lengths of the diffraction vectors by the factor in parallel space and decreases them by the factor 1= in perpendicular space, the following distribution of structure-

Fig. 4.6.3.23. Radial distribution function of the structure-factor magnitudes jFHj of the Penrose tiling (edge length of the Penrose unit rhombs ar 4:04 A) decorated with point atoms as a function of H? . All structure factors within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 1 and 0 jHk j 2:5 A have been used P and normalized to 4 F0000 1. The branches with (a) i1 hi 0 mod 5, (b) P P 4 4 i1 hi 1 mod 5 and (c) i1 hi 2 mod 5 are shown.

Fig. 4.6.3.22. Radial distribution function of the structure factors FH of the Penrose tiling (edge length of the Penrose unit rhombs ar 4:04 A) ? decorated with point atoms as a function of H . All structure factors 1 within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 0 jHk j 2:5 A have been used and normalized to F0000 1.

factor magnitudes (for point atoms at rest) is obtained: j FS n Hj > FS n 1 H > . . . > FS 1 H > j FHj, F n Hk > F n 1 Hk > . . . > FHk > j FHj: The scaling operations S n , n 2 Z, the rotoscaling operations S 2 n (Fig. 4.6.3.14) and the tenfold rotation n , where

508


Fig. 4.6.3.24. Pentagrammal relationships between scaling symmetryrelated positive structure factors FH of the Penrose tiling (edge length ar 4:04 A) in parallel space. The magnitudes of the structure factors are indicated by the diameters of the filled circles.

0

1 B1 B S 2 n B B0 @ 1 0

1 2 2 1 0

1 0 1 1 0

1 2 1 0 0

1n 0 0C C 0C C , 0A 1 D

connect all structure factors with diffraction vectors pointing to the nodes of an infinite series of pentagrams. The structure factors with positive signs are predominantly on the vertices of the pentagram while the ones with negative signs are arranged on circles around the vertices (Figs. 4.6.3.24 to 4.6.3.27). 4.6.3.3.3. Icosahedral phases A structure that is quasiperiodic in three dimensions and exhibits icosahedral diffraction symmetry is called an icosahedral phase. Its holohedral Laue group is K m35. All reciprocal-space P6symmetry vectors H i1 hi ai 2 M can be represented on a basis

Fig. 4.6.3.26. Pentagrammal relationships between scaling symmetryrelated structure factors FH of the Penrose tiling (edge length ar 4:04 A) in parallel space. Enlarged sections of Figs. 4.6.3.24 (above) and 4.6.3.25 (below) are shown.

a1 a 0, 0, 1, ai a sin cos2i=5, sin sin2i=5, cos , i 2, . . . , 6 where sin 2=51=2 , cos 1=51=2 and ' 63:44 , the angle between two neighbouring fivefold axes (Fig. 4.6.3.28). This can be rewritten as 0 1 a1 0 B sin cos4=5 B a2 C B B C B B a3 C B C a B sin cos6=5 B sin cos8=5 Ba C B B 4 C @ @a A sin 5 a6 sin cos2=5 0

Fig. 4.6.3.25. Pentagrammal relationships between scaling symmetryrelated negative structure factors FH of the Penrose tiling (edge length ar 4:04 A) in parallel space. The magnitudes of the structure factors are indicated by the diameters of the filled circles.

0 sin sin4=5 sin sin6=5 sin sin8=5 0 sin sin2=5

1 1 0 1 cos C C eV1 cos C C CB @ eV2 A, cos C C V cos A e3 cos

where eVi are Cartesian basis vectors. Thus, from the number of independent reciprocal-basis vectors needed to index the Bragg reflections with integer numbers, the dimension of the embedding space has to be six. The vector components refer to a Cartesian coordinate system (V basis) P in the physical (parallel) space. The set M fHk 6i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg of all diffraction vectors remains invariant under the action of the symmetry operators of the icosahedral point group K m35. The symmetry-adapted matrix representations for the point-group generators, one fivefold rotation , a threefold rotation and the inversion operation , can be written in the form

509


Fig. 4.6.3.28. Perspective (a) parallel- and (b) perpendicular-space views of the reciprocal basis of the 3D Penrose tiling. The six rationally independent vectors ai point to the edges of an icosahedron. 0

cos2=5 sin2=5 B sin2=5 cos2=5 B B 0 0 B B B 0 0 B B 0 0 @ 0 0 ! k 0 , ? 0

0 0 1

0 0 0

0 0 0

cos4=5 sin4=5 0

1 0 0C C 0C C C sin4=5 0 C C cos4=5 0 C A 0 1 0 0 0

V

V

where

0 B0 B B B 1 W a B B0 @0 1

Fig. 4.6.3.27. Pentagrammal relationships between scaling symmetryrelated structure factors FH of the Penrose tiling (edge length ar 4:04 A) in perpendicular space. Enlarged sections of positive (above) and negative structure factors (below) are shown.

0

1 B0 B B B0 B B0 B B @0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0

1

0 0 0 1C C C 0 0C C , 0 0C C C 0 0A 1 0 D 0 1 0 B 0 1 B B B0 0 B B0 0 B B @0 0 0 0

0

0 B0 B B B0 B B0 B B @0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0

1

0 1C C C 0C C , 0C C C 0A 0

D

0

sc4 ss4 c sc8 ss8 c

sc6 ss6 c sc2 ss2 c

sc8 ss8 c sc6 ss6 c

s 0 c s 0 c

1 sc2 ss2 C C c C C , sc4 C C ss4 A c V

c cos , s sin , scn sin cosn=5, ssn sin sinn=5. The column vectors of the matrix W give the parallel- (above the partition line) and perpendicular-space components (below the partition line) of a reciprocal basis in V. Thus, W can be rewritten using the physical-space reciprocal basis defined above and an arbitrary constant c, a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 W ca1 ca4 ca6 ca3 ca5 ca2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 ,

0 0C C C 0C C : 0C C C 0A 1 D

Block-diagonalization of these reducible symmetry matrices decomposes them into non-equivalent irreducible representations. These can be assigned to the two orthogonal subspaces forming the 6D embedding space V Vk V? , the 3D parallel (physical) subspace Vk and the perpendicular 3D subspace V? . Thus, using W W 1 red k ? , we obtain

yielding the reciprocal basis di , i 1, . . . , 6, in the 6D embedding space (D space) 0 1 0 1 0 sin cos2i=5 B0C B sin sin2i=5 C B C B C B B C C cos B 1 C B C, i 2, . . . , 6: d1 a B C and di a B C B0C B c sin cos4i=5 C @0A @ c sin sin4i=5 A c c cos The 6 6 symmetry matrices can each be decomposed into two 3 3 matrices. The first one, k , acts on the parallel-space component, the second one, ? , on the perpendicular-space component. In the case of , the coupling factor between a rotation in parallel and perpendicular space is 2. Thus a 2=5

510


Fig. 4.6.3.30. The two unit tiles of the 3D Penrose tiling: a prolate p arc cos5 1=2 ' 63:44 and an oblate o 180 p rhombohedron with equal edge lengths ar .

Fig. 4.6.3.29. Schematic representation of a rotation in 6D space. The point P is rotated to P0 . The component rotations in parallel and perpendicular space are illustrated.

rotation in physical space is related to a 4=5 rotation in perpendicular space (Figs. 4.6.3.28 and 4.6.3.29). With the condition di dj ij , the basis in direct 6D space is obtained: 0 1 0 1 0 sin cos2i=5 B 0 C B C sin sin2i=5 B C B C B C B C B C 1 C cos 1 B 1 C and di B C, d1 B B B C 2a B 0 C 2a B 1=c sin cos4i=5 C C B C B C @ 0 A @ 1=c sin sin4i=5 A 1=c

1=c cos i 2, . . . , 6:

The metric tensors G, G are of the type 0 A B B B B BB A B B B B BB B A B B B BB B B A B B @B B B B A B B B B B

1 B BC C BC C, BC C BA A

with A 1 c2 a2 , B 51=2 =51 c2 a2 for the reciprocal space and A 1 c2 =4ca 2 B 51=2 c2 1=20ca 2 for the direct space. For c 1 we obtain hypercubic direct and reciprocal 6D lattices. The lattice parameters in reciprocal and direct space are di a 21=2 and di 1=21=2 a with i 1, . . . , 6, respectively. The volume of the 6D unit cell can be calculated from the metric tensor G. For c 1 it is simply V det G1=2 f1=21=2 a g6 : The best known example of a 3D quasiperiodic structure is the canonical 3D Penrose tiling (see Janssen, 1986). It can be constructed from two unit tiles: a prolate and an oblate rhombohedron with equal edge lengths ar (Fig. 4.6.3.30). Each face of the rhombohedra is a rhomb with acute angles r arc cos1=51=2 ' 63:44 . Their volumes are Vp 4=5a3r sin2=5, Vo 4=5a3r sin=5 Vp =, and their frequencies p :o :1. The resulting point density (number of vertices per unit volume) is p 1=Vp Vo =a3r sin2=5. Ten prolate and ten oblate rhombohedra can be packed to form a rhombic triacontahedron. The icosahedral symmetry of this zonohedron is broken by the many possible decompositions into the rhombohedra. Removing one zone of the

triacontahedron gives a rhomb-icosahedron consisting of five prolate and five oblate rhombohedra. Again, the singular fivefold axis of the rhomb-icosahedron is broken by the decomposition into rhombohedra. Removing one zone again gives a rhombic dodecahedron consisting of two prolate and two oblate rhombohedra. Removing the last remaining zone leads finally to a single prolate rhombohedron. Using these zonohedra as elementary clusters, a matching rule can be derived for the 3D construction of the 3D Penrose tiling (Levine & Steinhardt, 1986; Socolar & Steinhardt, 1986). The 3D Penrose tiling can be embedded in the 6D space as shown above. The 6D hypercubic lattice is decorated on the lattice nodes with 3D triacontahedra obtained from the projection of a 6D unit cell upon the perpendicular space V? (Fig. 4.6.3.31). Thus the edge length of the rhombs covering the triacontahedron is equivalent to the length ? di 1=2a of the perpendicular-space component of the P vectors spanning the 6D hypercubic lattice fr 6i1 ni di jni 2 Zg. 4.6.3.3.3.1. Indexing There are several indexing schemes in use. The generic one uses a set of six rationally independent reciprocal-basis vectors pointing to the corners of an icosahedron, a1 a 0, 0, 1, ai a sin cos2i=5, sin sin2i=5, cos , i 2, . . . , 6, sin 2=51=2 , cos 1=51=2 , with ' 63:44 , the angle between two neighbouring fivefold axes (setting 1) (Fig. 4.6.3.28). In this case, the physical-space basis corresponds to a simple projection of the 6D reciprocal basis di , i 1, . . . , 6. Sometimes, the same set of six reciprocal-basis vectors is referred to a differently oriented Cartesian reference system (C basis, with

Fig. 4.6.3.31. Atomic surface of the 3D Penrose tiling in the 6D hypercubic description. The projection of the 6D hypercubic unit cell upon V? gives a rhombic triacontahedron.

511

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED 0 1 0 h 0 B h0 C B 0 B C B B k C B1 B 0C B Bk C B0 B C B @ l A @0 l0 C 1

Fig. 4.6.3.32. Perspective parallel-space view of the two alternative reciprocal bases of the 3D Penrose tiling: the cubic and the icosahedral setting, represented by the bases bi , i 1, . . . , 3, and ai , i 1, . . . , 6, respectively.

basis vectors ei along the twofold axes) (Bancel et al., 1985). The reciprocal basis is 0 1 0 1 a1 0 1 B a2 C B 1 0C 0 C 1 B C B C B a3 C B 0 1 C e1C a B C B C @ e A: 2 B a4 C 1=2 B 1 C B C 1 2 B 0 C eC 3 @a A @ A 0 1 5 a6 1 0 C An alternate way of indexing is based on a 3D set of cubic reciprocal-basis vectors bi , i 1, . . . , 3 (setting 2) (Fig. 4.6.3.32): 0 1 a1 B 0 1 B a2 C 0 1 C b1 0 1 0 0 0 1 B C B a 1 B C B C 3C C @ b2 A @ 1 0 0 1 0 0 A B B C 2 a B 4C b3 0 0 1 0 1 0 DB C @ a5 A 0

1 C

0 1 0 0 1 0

10 1 0 1 h 6 h2 h1 1 B C B C 0C C B h 2 C B h 5 h3 C B B C C 0 C B h 3 C B h 1 h4 C C : B C B C 1C C B h 4 C B h 6 h2 C @ @ A A h5 h 5 h3 A 0 h6 D h 1 h4 D 0

4.6.3.3.3.2. Diffraction symmetry The diffraction symmetry of icosahedral phases can be described by the Laue group K m35. The P set of all vectors H forms a Fourier module M fHk 6i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg of rank 6 in physical space. Consequently, it can be considered as a projection from a 6D reciprocal lattice, M k . The parallel and perpendicular reciprocal-space sections of the 3D Penrose tiling decorated with equal point scatterers on its vertices are shown in Figs. 4.6.3.33 and 4.6.3.34. The diffraction pattern in perpendicular space is the Fourier transform of the triacontahedron. All Bragg reflections within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 are depicted. Without intensity-truncation limit, the diffraction pattern would be densely filled with discrete Bragg reflections. The 6D icosahedral space groups that are relevant to the description of icosahedral phases (six symmorphous and five nonsymmorphous groups) are listed in Table 4.6.3.2. These space groups are a subset of all 6D icosahedral space groups fulfilling the condition that the 6D point groups they are associated with are isomorphous to the 3D point groups m2 35 and 235 describing the diffraction symmetry. From 826 6D (analogues to) Bravais groups (Levitov & Rhyner, 1988), only three fulfil the condition that the projection of the 6D hypercubic lattice upon the 3D physical space is compatible with the icosahedral point groups m2 35, 235: the primitive hypercubic Bravais lattice P, the body-centred Bravais lattice I with translation 1/2(111111), and the face-centred Bravais lattice F with translations 1=2110000 14 further cyclic permutations. Hence, the I lattice is twofold primitive (i.e. it contains two vertices per unit cell) and the F lattice is 16-fold primitive. The orientation of the symmetry elements in the 6D space is defined by the isomorphism of the 3D and 6D point groups. The action of the fivefold rotation, however, is different in the subspaces Vk and V? : a rotation of 2=5 in Vk is correlated with a rotation of 4=5 in V? . The reflection and inversion operations are equivalent in both subspaces. 4.6.3.3.3.3. Structure factor The structure factor of the icosahedral phase corresponds to the Fourier transform of the 6D unit cell,

a6

FH

e1 B CC @ e2 A: 1 2 1=2 eC3 a

TOPICS 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

N P k1

fk Hk Tk Hk , H? gk H? exp2iH rk ,

P with 6D diffraction vectors H 6i1 hi di , parallel-space atomic scattering factor fk H k , temperature factor Tk Hk , H? , and perpendicular-space geometric form factor gk H? . Tk Hk , 0 is The Cartesian C basis is related to the V basis by a =2 rotation equivalent to the conventional Debye–Waller factor and T 0, H? k around 100C , yielding 001V , followed by a =10 rotation around describes random fluctuations in perpendicular space. These 001C : fluctuations cause characteristic jumps of vertices (phason flips) 1 0 V1 0 C1 0 in the physical space. Even random phason flips map the vertices cos=10 sin=10 0 e1 e1 C B V C onto positions that can still be described by physical-space vectors B CC B P @ e2 A @ cos=2 sin=10 cos=2 cos=10 sin=2 A @ e2 A: of the type r 6i1 ni ai . Consequently, the set M fr sin=2 sin=10 sin=2 cos=10 cos=2 V eV3 eC3 P 6 i1 ni ai ni 2 Zg of all possible vectors forms a Z module. The Thus, indexing the diffraction pattern of an icosahedral phase with shape of the atomic surfaces corresponds to a selection rule for the P integer indices, one obtains for setting 1 H 6i1 hi ai , hi 2 Z. positions actually occupied. The geometric form factor gk H? is These indices h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 transform into the second setting equivalent to the Fourier transform of the atomic surface, i.e. the 3D to h=h0 k=k 0 l=l0 with the fractional cubic indices perpendicular-space component of the 6D hyperatoms. hc1 h h0 , hc2 k k 0 , hc3 l l0 . The transformation matrix For the example of the canonical 3D Penrose tiling, gk H? is corresponds to the Fourier transform of a triacontahedron:

512


Fig. 4.6.3.33. Physical-space diffraction patterns of the 3D Penrose tiling decorated with point atoms (edge lengths of the Penrose unit rhombohedra ar 5:0 A). Sections with five-, three- and twofold symmetry are shown for the primitive 6D analogue of Bravais type P in (a, b, c), the body-centred 6D analogue to Bravais type I in (d, e, f ) and the face-centred 6D analogue to Bravais type F in (g, h, i). All reflections are shown within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 6 hi 6, i 1, . . . , 6.

R ? gk H? 1=A? UC exp2iH r dr,

gk H? iVr A2 A3 A4 expiA1 A1 A3 A5 expiA2

Ak ? where A? UC is the volume of the 6D unit cell projected upon V and and A are equal in the Ak is the volume of the triacontahedron. A? k UC present case and amount to the volumes of ten prolate and ten oblate 3 rhombohedra: A? UC 8ar sin2=5 sin=5. Evaluating the integral by decomposing the triacontahedron into trigonal pyramids, each one directed from the centre of the triacontahedron to three of its corners given by the vectors ei , i 1, . . . , 3, one obtains P T ? gH? 1=A? UC gk R H , R

with k 1, . . . , 60 running over all site-symmetry operations R of the icosahedral group,

A1 A2 A6 expiA3 A4 A5 A6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 1 , Aj 2H? ej , j 1, . . . , 3, A4 A2 A3 , A5 A3 A1 , A6 A1 A2 and Vr e1 e2 e3 the volume of the parallelepiped defined by the vectors ei , i 1, . . . , 3 (Yamamoto, 1992b). 4.6.3.3.3.4. Intensity statistics The radial structure-factor distributions of the 3D Penrose tiling decorated with point scatterers are plotted in Fig. 4.6.3.35 as a function of parallel and perpendicular space. The distribution of jFHj as a function of their frequencies clearly resembles a centric

513

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS Table 4.6.3.2. 3D point groups of order k describing the diffraction symmetry and corresponding 6D decagonal space groups with reflection conditions (see Levitov & Rhyner, 1988; Rokhsar et al., 1988) 3D point group

5D space group

k

2 35 m

120

235

60

Reflection condition

2 P 35 m

No condition

2 P 35 n

h1 h2 h1 h2 h5 h6 : h5

2 I 35 m

h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 :

2 F 35 m

h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 :

h6 2n

P6

i1 hi

P6

2n

i6j1 hi

hj 2n

2 F 35 n

P h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 : 6i6j1 hi hj 2n h1 h2 h1 h2 h5 h6 : h5 h6 4n

P235

No condition

P2351

h1 h2 h2 h2 h2 h2 : h1 5n P h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 : 6i1 hi 2n P h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 : 6i1 hi 2n h1 h2 h2 h2 h2 h2 : h1 5h2 10n P h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 : 6i6j1 hi hj 2n P h1 h2 h3 h4 h5 h6 : 6i6j1 hi hj 2n h1 h2 h2 h2 h2 h2 : h1 5h2 10n

I235 I2351 F235 F2351

increases as the power 6, that of strong reflections only as the power 3 (strong reflections always have small H? components). The weighted reciprocal space of the 3D Penrose tiling contains an infinite number of Bragg reflections within a limited region of the physical space. Contrary to the diffraction pattern of a periodic structure consisting of point atoms on the lattice nodes, the Bragg reflections show intensities depending on the perpendicular-space components of their diffraction vectors. 4.6.3.3.3.5. Relationships between structure factors at symmetry-related points of the Fourier image P The weighted 3D reciprocal space M fHk 6i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg exhibits the icosahedral point symmetry K m35. It is invariant under the action of the scaling matrix S 3 : 0

Fig. 4.6.3.34. Perpendicular-space diffraction patterns of the 3D Penrose tiling decorated with point atoms (edge lengths of the Penrose unit rhombohedra ar 5:0 A). Sections with (a) five-, (b) three- and (c) twofold symmetry are shown for the primitive 6D analogue of Bravais type P. All reflections are shown within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 6 hi 6, i 1, . . . , 6.

distribution, as can be expected from the centrosymmetric unit cell. The shape of the distribution function depends on the radius of the limiting sphere in reciprocal space. The number of weak reflections

0 2 1 1 1 1 B1 2 C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C B B C 2 1 1 1 1 1 1C 3 B1 1 C ,S B B1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1C B C B C @1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 0 1 1 0 1 a1 a1 2 1 1 1 1 1 B C B a C B1 2 1 1 1 1 C B 2C B C B a2 C B C B C B C Ba C B1 1 2 1 1 1 C B a3 C B C B C 3 B 3 C: B a C B1 C B a C 1 1 2 1 1 B 4C B C B 4C B C B C B C @ a5 A @1 1 1 1 2 1 A @ a5 A

1 1 B1 1 B B 1B1 1 S B 2B 1 B1 B @1 1 1 1 0

1

1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1 1

2

D

a6

1

1

1 C C C 1C C , 1C C C 1 A 2

D

a6

The scaling transformation S 3 T leaves a primitive 6D reciprocal lattice invariant as can easily be seen from its application on the indices:

514

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 h1 2 1 1 1 1 1 h1 B 0 C B B C C 1 2 1 1 1 1 B h2 C B C B h2 C B 0 C B B C B h3 C B 1 1 2 1 1 1 C B h3 C C B 0 CB C B C: Bh C B1 1 1 2 1 1 C B h4 C B 4C B C B C B 0 C @ 1 1 1 1 2 1 A @ h5 A @ h5 A 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 D h6 h6 P The matrix S 1 T leaves M fHk 6i1 hi ai jhi 2 Zg invariant, 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 h1 1 1 1 1 1 1 h1 B 0 C B B C 1 1 1 1 1 C B h2 C B h2 C B1 C B 0 C B B C B h3 C 1 B 1 1 1 1 1 1C C B h3 C B 0 C B C B C, Bh C 2B1 1 1 1 1 1 C B h4 C B 4C B C B C B 0 C @1 1 1 1 1 1 A @ h5 A @h A 5 0

h6

Fig. 4.6.3.35. Radial distribution function of the structure factors FH of the 3D Penrose tiling (edge lengths of the Penrose unit rhombohedra ar 5:0 A) decorated with point atoms as a function of jHk j (above) and jH? j (below). All reflections are shown within 10 6 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 6 hi 6, i 1, . . . , 6.

1

1

1

1 1

1

D

h6

P for any H 6i1 hi di with hi all even or all odd, corresponding P to a 6D face-centred hypercubic lattice. In a second case the sum 6i1 hi is even, corresponding to a 6D body-centred hypercubic lattice. Block-diagonalization of the matrix S decomposes it into two k irreducible representations. With WSW 1 SV SV SV? we obtain 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 B0 0 0 0 0 C ! B C k B0 0 C 0 S 0 0 0 C SV B , B0 0 0 1= 0 0 C 0 S? V B C @0 0 0 0 1= 0 A 0 0 1= V 0 0 0 the scaling properties in the two 3D subspaces: scaling by a factor in parallel space corresponds to a scaling by a factor 1 in perpendicular space. For the intensities of the scaled reflections analogous relationships are valid, as discussed for decagonal phases (Figs. 4.6.3.36 and 4.6.3.37, Section 4.6.3.3.2.5).

Fig. 4.6.3.36. Parallel-space distribution of (a) positive and (b) negative structure factors of the 3D Penrose tiling of the 6D P lattice type decorated with point atoms (edge lengths of the Penrose unit rhombohedra ar 5:0 A). The magnitudes of the structure factors are indicated by the diameters of the filled circles. All reflections are shown within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 6 hi 6, i 1, . . . , 6.

515


Fig. 4.6.3.37. Perpendicular-space distribution of (a) positive and (b) negative structure factors of the 3D Penrose tiling of the 6D P lattice type decorated with point atoms (edge lengths of the Penrose unit rhombohedra ar 5:0 A). The magnitudes of the structure factors are indicated by the diameters of the filled circles. All reflections are shown within 10 4 jF0j2 < jFHj2 < jF0j2 and 6 hi 6, i 1, . . . , 6.

4.6.4. Experimental aspects of the reciprocal-space analysis of aperiodic crystals 4.6.4.1. Data-collection strategies Theoretically, aperiodic crystals show an infinite number of reflections within a given diffraction angle, contrary to periodic crystals. The number of reflections to be included in a structure analysis of a periodic crystal may be very high (one million for virus crystals, for instance) but there is no ambiguity in the selection of reflections to be collected: all Bragg reflections within a limiting 1 sphere in reciprocal space, usually given by 0 sin = 0:7 A , are used. All reflections, observed and unobserved, are included to fit a reliable structure model. However, for aperiodic crystals it is not possible to collect the infinite number of dense Bragg reflections within 1 0 sin = 0:7 A . The number of observable reflections

within this limiting sphere depends only on the spatial and intensity resolution. What happens if not all reflections are included in a structure analysis? How important is the contribution of reflections with large perpendicular-space components of the diffraction vector which are weak but densely distributed? These problems are illustrated using the example of the Fibonacci sequence. An infinite model structure 2 consisting of Al atomswith isotropic thermal parameter B 1 A , and distances S 2:5 A and L S, was used for the calculations (Table 4.6.4.1). It turns out that 92.6% of the total diffracted intensity of 161 322 reflections is included in the 44 strongest reflections and 99.2% in the strongest 425 reflections. It is remarkable, however, that in all the experimental data for icosahedral and decagonal quasicrystals collected so far, rarely more than 20 to 50 reflections along reciprocal-lattice lines corresponding to net planes with Fibonacci-

Table 4.6.4.1. Intensity statistics of the Fibonacci chain for a total of 161 322 reflections with 1 0 sin = 2 A In the upper line, the number of reflections in the respective interval is given; in the lower line the partial sums percentage of the total diffracted intensity. The F(00) reflection is not included in the sums.

0 sin = 0:2 A P IH

0:4 sin = 0:6 A P IH

0:6 sin = 0:8 A P IH

0:8 sin = 2 A P IH Total sum

1

IH of the intensities IH are given as a

FH=FHmax 0:1

0:1 > FH=FHmax 0:01

0:01 > FH=FHmax 0:001

FH=FHmax < 0:001

17 52.53%

148 2.56%

1505 0.27%

14 511 0.03%

1

11 27.03%

107 2.03%

1066 0.19%

14 998 0.02%

1

9 9.84%

64 0.96%

654 0.12%

15 456 0.01%

1

6 2.94%

27 0.34%

326 0.07%

15 823 0.01%

1 0.23%

35 0.79%

338 0.06%

96 720 0.01%

44 92.57%

381 6.67%

3389 0.70%

157 508 0.06%

1

0:2 sin = 0:4 A P IH

P

1000 hi 1000 and

516

4.6. RECIPROCAL-SPACE IMAGES OF APERIODIC CRYSTALS sequence-like distances could be observed. The consequences for structure determinations with such truncated data sets are primarily a lower resolution in perpendicular space than in physical space. This corresponds to a smearing of the hyperatoms in the perpendicular space. For the derivation of the local structurebuilding elements (clusters) of aperiodic crystals this is only a minor problem: the smeared hyperatoms give rise to split atoms and a biased electron-density distribution. The information on the global aperiodic structure, however, which is contained in the detailed shape of the atomic surfaces, is severely reduced when using a lowresolution diffraction data set. A combination of high-resolution electron microscopy, lattice imaging and diffraction techniques allows a good characterization of the local and global order even in these cases. For a more detailed analysis of these problems see Steurer (1995). 4.6.4.2. Commensurability versus incommensurability The question whether an aperiodic crystal is really aperiodic or rather a high-order approximant is of different importance depending on the point of view. As far as real finite crystals are considered, definitions of periodic and aperiodic real crystals and of periodic and aperiodic perfect crystals have to be given first. Real crystals, despite periodicity or aperiodicity, are the actual samples under investigation. Partial information about their actual structure can be obtained today by imaging methods (scanning tunnelling microscopy, atomic force microscopy, high-resolution transmission electron microscopy, . . .). Basically, the real crystal structure can be determined using full diffraction information from Bragg and diffuse scattering. In practice, however, only ‘Bragg reflections’ are included in a structure analysis. ‘Bragg reflections’ result from the integration of diffraction intensities from extended volumes around a limited number of Bragg-reflection positions (Z module). This process of intensity condensation at Bragg points corresponds in direct space to an averaging process. The real crystal structure is projected upon one unit cell in direct space defined by the Z module in reciprocal space. Generally, the identification of appropriate reciprocal-space metrics is not a problem in the case of crystals. It can be problematic, however, in the case of aperiodic crystals, in particular quasicrystals (see Lancon et al., 1994). The metrics, and to some extent the global order in the case of quasicrystals, are fixed by assigning the reciprocal basis. The spatial resolution of a diffraction experiment defines the accuracy of the resulting metrics. The decision whether the rational number obtained for the relative length of a satellite vector indicates a commensurate or an incommensurate modulation can only be made considering temperature- and pressure-dependent chemical and physical properties of the material. The same is valid for other types of aperiodic crystals. 4.6.4.3. Twinning and nanodomain structures

Fig. 4.6.4.1. Simulated diffraction patterns of (a) the ' 52 A singlecrystal approximant of decagonal Al–Co–Ni, (b) the fivefold twinned approximant, and (c) the decagonal phase itself (Estermann et al., 1994).

High-order approximants of quasicrystals often occur in orientationally twinned form or, on a smaller scale, as oriented nanodomain structures. These structures can be identified by electron microscopy, and, in certain cases, also by high-resolution X-ray diffractometry (Kalning et al., 1994). If the intensity and spatial resolution is sufficient, characteristic reflection splitting and diffuse diffraction phenomena can be observed. It has been demonstrated that for the determination of the local structure (structure-building elements) it does not matter greatly whether one uses a data set for a real quasicrystal or one for a twinned approximant (Estermann et al., 1994). Examples of reciprocalspace images of an approximant, a twinned approximant and the related decagonal phase are shown schematically in Fig. 4.6.4.1 and for real samples in Fig. 4.6.4.2.

517


Fig. 4.6.4.2. Zero-layer X-ray diffraction patterns of decaprismatic Al73:5 Co21:7 Ni4:8 crystals taken parallel and perpendicular to the crystal axis on an image-plate scanner (Mar Research) at different temperatures. In (a) and (b), room-temperature (RT) diffraction patterns from a sample quenched after annealing at 1073 K are shown. Reflections from both a crystalline approximant and a decagonal phase are visible. The period along the unique direction in the decagonal phase and the corresponding period in the approximant phase is ' 8 A (b). At 1520 K, a single-phase decagonal quasicrystal is present with ' 4 A fundamental structure (c, d). In (e, f ), the RT diffraction patterns of the slowly cooled sample indicate a single-phase nanodomain structure with ' 8 A periodicity along the unique direction.

518

REFERENCES

References 4.1 Bilz, H. & Kress, W. (1979). Phonon dispersion relations in insulators. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Blackman, M. (1937). On the vibrational spectrum of a threedimensional lattice. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 159, 416–431. ¨ ber die Quantenmechanik der Elektronen in Bloch, F. (1928). U Kristallgittern. Z. Phys. 52, 555–600. Born, M. & Huang, K. (1954). The dynamical theory of crystal lattices. Oxford: Clarendon Press. ¨ ber Schwingungen in Born, M. & von Ka´rmań, T. (1912). U Raumgittern. Phys. Z. 13, 279–309. Born, M. & von Ka´rmań, T. (1913). Zur Theorie der spezifischen Wa¨rme. Phys. Z. 14, 15–19. Boutin, H. & Yip, S. (1968). Molecular spectroscopy with neutrons. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press. Brockhouse, B. N. & Stewart, A. T. (1958). Normal modes of aluminum by neutron spectrometry. Rev. Mod. Phys. 30, 236–249. Buyers, W. J. L., Pirie, J. D. & Smith, T. (1968). X-ray scattering from deformable ions. Phys. Rev. 165, 999–1005. Chaplot, S. L., Mierzejewski, A., Pawley, G. S., Lefebvre, J. & Luty, T. (1983). Phonon dispersion of the external and low-frequency internal vibrations in monoclinic tetracyanoethylene. J. Phys. C, 16, 625–644. Cochran, W. (1971). The relation between phonon frequencies and interatomic force constants. Acta Cryst. A27, 556–559. Cochran, W. (1973). The dynamics of atoms in crystals. London: Edward Arnold. Debye, P. (1912). Zur Theorie der spezifischen Wa¨rme. Ann. Phys. (Leipzig), 39, 789–839. Dolling, C. (1974). Dynamical properties of solids. Vol. 1, edited by G. K. Horton & A. A. Maradudin, pp. 541–629. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Donovan, B. & Angress, J. F. (1971). Lattice vibrations. London: Chapman and Hall. Einstein, A. (1907). Die Plancksche Theorie der Strahlung und die Theorie der spezifisichen Wa¨rme. Ann. Phys. (Leipzig), 22, 180– 190, 800. Fujii, Y., Lurie, N. A., Pynn, R. & Shirane, G. (1974). Inelastic neutron scattering from solid 36Ar. Phys. Rev. B, 10, 3647–3659. Harrison, W. A. (1966). Phonons in perfect lattices, edited by R. W. H. Stevenson, pp. 73–109. Edinburgh: Oliver & Boyd. Hearmon, R. F. S. (1946). The elastic constants of anisotropic materials. Rev. Mod. Phys. 18, 409–440. Hearmon, R. F. S. (1956). The elastic constants of anisotropic materials. II. Adv. Phys. 5, 323–382. Huntingdon, H. B. (1958). The elastic constants of crystals. Solid State Phys. 7, 213–351. International Tables for Crystallography (1999). Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Kitaigorodskii, A. J. (1966). Empilement des molećules dans un cristal, potentiel d’interaction des atomes non lie´s par des liaisons de valence, et calcul du mouvement des molećules. J. Chim. Phys. 63, 8–16. Laval, J. (1939). Etude e´xperimentale de la diffusion des rayons X par les cristaux. Bull. Soc. Fr. Mine´ral. 62, 137–253. Ledermann, W. (1944). Asymptotic formulae relating to the physical theory of crystals. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 82, 362–377. Olmer, P. (1948). Dispersion des vitesses des ondes acoustiques dans l’aluminium. Acta Cryst. 1, 57–63. Popa, N. C. & Willis, B. T. M. (1994). Thermal diffuse scattering in time-of-flight neutron diffractometry. Acta Cryst. A50, 57–63. Raman, C. V. (1941). The quantum theory of X-ray reflection. Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. Sect. A, 14, 317–376; The thermal energy of crystalline solids: basic theory. Proc. Indian Acad. Sci. Sect. A, 14 459–467. Schofield, P. & Willis, B. T. M. (1987). Thermal diffuse scattering in time-of-flight neutron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A43, 803–809.

Schuster, S. L. & Weymouth, J. W. (1971). Study of thermal diffuse X-ray scattering from lead single crystals. Phys. Rev. B, 3, 4143– 4153. Squires, G. L. (1978). Introduction to the theory of thermal neutron scattering. Cambridge University Press. Vacher, R. & Boyer, L. (1972). Brillouin scattering: a tool for the measurement of elastic and photoelastic constants. Phys. Rev. B, 6, 639–673. Van Hove, L. (1954). Correlations in space and time and Born approximation scattering in systems of interacting particles. Phys. Rev. 95, 249–262. Venkataraman, G., Feldkamp, L. A. & Sahni, V. C. (1975). Dynamics of perfect crystals. Cambridge Mass.: MIT Press. Walker, C. B. (1956). X-ray study of lattice vibrations in aluminum. Phys. Rev. 103, 547–557. Williams, D. E. (1967). Non-bonded potential parameters derived from crystalline hydrocarbons. J. Chem. Phys. 47, 4680–4684. Willis, B. T. M. (1986). Determination of the velocity of sound in crystals by time-of-flight neutron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A42, 514–525. Willis, B. T. M. & Pryor, A. W. (1975). Thermal vibrations in crystallography. Cambridge University Press.

4.2 Amoro´s, J. L. & Amoro´s, M. (1968). Molecular crystals: their transforms and diffuse scattering. New York: John Wiley. Arndt, U. W. (1986a). X-ray position sensitive detectors. J. Appl. Cryst. 19, 145–163. Arndt, U. W. (1986b). The collection of single crystal diffraction data with area detectors. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 47(C5), 1–6. Axe, J. D. (1980). Debye–Waller factors for incommensurate structures. Phys. Rev. B, 21, 4181–4190. Bardhan, P. & Cohen, J. B. (1976). X-ray diffraction study of shortrange-order structure in a disordered Au3Cu alloy. Acta Cryst. A32, 597–614. Bauer, G., Seitz, E. & Just, W. (1975). Elastic diffuse scattering of neutrons as a tool for investigation of non-magnetic point defects. J. Appl. Cryst. 8, 162–175. Bauer, G. S. (1979). Diffuse elastic neutron scattering from nonmagnetic materials. In Treatise on materials science and technology, Vol. 15, edited by G. Kostorz, pp. 291–336. New York: Academic Press. Bessie`re, M., Lefebvre, S. & Calvayrac, Y. (1983). X-ray diffraction study of short-range order in a disordered Au3 Cu alloy. Acta Cryst. B39, 145–153. Beyeler, H. U., Pietronero, L. & Stra¨ssler, S. (1980). Configurational model for a one-dimensional ionic conductor. Phys. Rev. B, 22, 2988–3000. Borie, B. & Sparks, C. J. (1971). The interpretation of intensity distributions from disordered binary alloys. Acta Cryst. A27, 198– 201. Bo¨ttger, H. (1983). Principles of the theory of lattice dynamics. Weinheim: Physik Verlag. Boysen, H. (1985). Analysis of diffuse scattering in neutron powder diagrams. Applications to glassy carbon. J. Appl. Cryst. 18, 320– 325. Boysen, H. & Adlhart, W. (1987). Resolution corrections in diffuse scattering experiments. J. Appl. Cryst. 20, 200–209. Bradley, C. J. & Cracknell, A. P. (1972). The mathematical theory of symmetry in solids, pp. 51–76. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Bra¨mer, R. (1975). Statistische Probleme der Theorie des Parakristalls. Acta Cryst. A31, 551–560. Bra¨mer, R. & Ruland, W. (1976). The limitations of the paracrystalline model of disorder. Macromol. Chem. 177, 3601–3617. Bubeck, E. & Gerold, V. (1984). An X-ray investigation in the small and wide angle range from G.P.I. zones in Al–Cu. In Microstructural characterization of materials by non-microsco-

519

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.2 (cont.) pical techniques, edited by N. H. Andersen, M. Eldrup, N. Hansen, R. J. Jensen, T. Leffers, H. Lilholt, O. B. Pedersen & B. N. Singh. Roskilde: Risø National Laboratory. Caglioti, G., Paoletti, A. & Ricci, R. (1958). Choice of collimators for a crystal spectrometer for neutron diffraction. Nucl. Instrum. Methods, 3, 223–226. Cenedese, P., Bley, F. & Lefebvre, S. (1984). Diffuse scattering in disordered ternary alloys: neutron measurements of local order in a stainless steel Fe0:56 Cr0:21 Ni0:23 . Acta Cryst. A40, 228–240. Collongues, R., Fayard, M. & Gautier, F. (1977). Ordre et de´sordre dans les solides. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 38(C7), Suppl. Comes, R. & Shirane, G. (1979). X-ray and neutron scattering from one-dimensional conductors. In Highly conducting one dimensional solids, ch. 2, edited by J. T. Devreese, R. P. Evrard & V. E. Van Doren. New York: Plenum. Conradi, E. & Mu¨ller, U. (1986). Fehlordnung bei Verbindungen mit Schichtstrukturen. II. Analyse der Fehlordnung in Wismuttriiodid. Z. Kristallogr. 176, 263–269. Convert, P. & Forsyth, J. B. (1983). Position-sensitive detectors of thermal neutrons. London: Academic Press. Cooper, M. J. & Nathans, R. (1968). The resolution function in neutron diffractometry. II. The resolution function of a conventional two-crystal neutron diffractometer for elastic scattering. III. Experimental determination and properties of the elastic twocrystal resolution function. Acta Cryst. A24, 481–484 (II), 619– 624 (III). Courville-Brenasin, J. de, Joyez, G. & Tchoubar, D. (1981). Me´thode d’ajustement automatique entre courbes experimeńtale et calculeé dans les diagrammes de diffraction de poudre. Cas des solides a` structure lamellaire. I. De´veloppement de la me´thode. J. Appl. Cryst. 14, 17–23. Cowley, J. M. (1950a). X-ray measurement of order in single crystals of Cu3 Au. J. Appl. Phys. 21, 24–36. Cowley, J. M. (1950b). An approximate theory of order in alloys. Phys. Rev. 77, 664–675. Cowley, J. M. (1976). Diffraction by crystals with planar faults. I. General theory. II. Magnesium fluorogermanate. Acta Cryst. A32, 83–87 (I), 88–91 (II). Cowley, J. M. (1981). Diffraction physics, 2nd ed. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Cowley, J. M. & Au, A. Y. (1978). Diffraction by crystals with planar faults. III. Structure analysis using microtwins. Acta Cryst. A34, 738–743. Cowley, J. M., Cohen, J. B., Salamon, M. B. & Wuensch, B. J. (1979). Modulated structures. AIP Conf. Proc. No. 53. Debye, B. & Menke, H. (1931). Untersuchung der molekularen Ordnung in Flu¨ssigkeiten mit Ro¨ntgenstrahlung. Ergeb. Tech. Roentgenkd. II, 1–22. Dederichs, P. H. (1973). The theory of diffuse X-ray scattering and its application to the study of point defects and their clusters. J. Phys. F, 3, 471–496. Dolling, G., Powell, B. M. & Sears, V. F. (1979). Neutron diffraction study of the plastic phases of polycrystalline SF6 and CBr4 . Mol. Phys. 37, 1859–1883. Dorner, B. & Comes, R. (1977). Phonons and structural phase transformation. In Dynamics of solids and liquids by neutron scattering, ch. 3, edited by S. Lovesey & T. Springer. Topics in current physics, Vol. 3. Berlin: Springer. Dorner, C. & Jagodzinski, H. (1972). Entmischung im System SnO2 ---TiO2 . Krist. Tech. 7, 427–444. Dubernat, J. & Pezerat, H. (1974). Fautes d’empilement dans les oxalates dihydrate´s des me´taux divalents de la se´rie magne´sienne (Mg, Fe, Co, Ni, Zn, Mn). J. Appl. Cryst. 7, 387–393. Edwards, O. S. & Lipson, H. (1942). Imperfections in the structure of cobalt. I. Experimental work and proposed structure. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 180, 268–277. Emery, V. J. & Axe, J. D. (1978). One-dimensional fluctuations and the chain-ordering transformation in Hg3 AsF6 . Phys. Rev. Lett. 40, 1507–1511.

Endres, H., Pouget, J. P. & Comes, R. (1982). Diffuse X-ray scattering and order–disorder effects in the iodine chain compounds N,N0 -diethyl-N,N0 -dihydrophenazinium iodide, E2 PI1:6 and N,N0 -dibenzyl-N,N0 -dihydrophenazinium iodide, B2 PI1:6 : J. Phys. Chem. Solids, 43, 739–748. Epstein, J. & Welberry, T. R. (1983). Least-squares analysis of diffuse scattering from substitutionally disordered crystals: application to 2,3-dichloro-6,7-dimethylanthracene. Acta Cryst. A39, 882–892. Epstein, J., Welberry, T. R. & Jones, R. (1982). Analysis of the diffuse X-ray scattering from substitutionally disordered molecular crystals of monoclinic 9-bromo-10-methylanthracene. Acta Cryst. A38, 611–618. Fender, B. E. F. (1973). Diffuse scattering and the study of defect solids. In Chemical applications of thermal neutron scattering, ch. 11, edited by B. T. M. Willis. Oxford University Press. Flack, H. D. (1970). Short-range order in crystals of anthrone and in mixed crystals of anthrone–anthraquinone. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 266, 583–591. Fontaine, D. de (1972). An analysis of clustering and ordering in multicomponent solid solutions. I. Stability criteria. J. Phys. Chem. Solids, 33, 297–310. Fontaine, D. de (1973). An analysis of clustering and ordering in multicomponent solid solutions. II. Fluctuations and kinetics. J. Phys. Chem. Solids, 34, 1285–1304. Forst, R., Jagodzinski, H., Boysen, H. & Frey, F. (1987). Diffuse scattering and disorder in urea inclusion compounds OC( NH2 )2 Cn H2n2 . Acta Cryst. B43, 187–197. Fouret, P. (1979). Diffuse X-ray scattering by orientationally disordered solids. In The plastically crystalline state, ch. 3, edited by J. N. Sherwood. New York: John Wiley. Frey, F. & Boysen, H. (1981). Disorder in cobalt single crystals. Acta Cryst. A37, 819–826. Frey, F., Jagodzinski, H. & Steger, W. (1986). On the phase transformation zinc blende to wurtzite. Bull. Mine´ral. Crystallogr. 109, 117–129. Gehlen, P. & Cohen, J. B. (1965). Computer simulation of the structure associated with local order in alloys. Phys. Rev. A, 139, 844–855. Georgopoulos, P. & Cohen, J. B. (1977). The determination of short range order and local atomic displacements in disordered binary solid solutions. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 38(C7), 191–196. Gerlach, P., Scha¨rpf, O., Prandl, W. & Dorner, B. (1982). Separation of the coherent and incoherent scattering of C2 Cl6 by polarization analysis. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 43(C7), 151–157. Gerold, V. (1954). Ro¨ntgenographische Untersuchungen u¨ber die Ausha¨rtung einer Aluminium–Kupfer-Legierung mit KleinwinkelSchwenkaufnahmen. Z. Metallkd. 45, 593–607. Grabcev, B. (1974). Instrumental widths and intensities in neutron crystal diffractometry. Acta Cryst. A35, 957–961. Gragg, J. E., Hayakawa, M. & Cohen, J. B. (1973). Errors in qualitative analysis of diffuse scattering from alloys. J. Appl. Cryst. 6, 59–66. Guinier, A. (1942). Le mećanisme de la prećipitation dans un cristal de solution solide me´tallique. Cas des syste´mes aluminum–cuivre et aluminum–argent. J. Phys. Radium, 8, 124–136. Guinier, A. (1963). X-ray diffraction in crystals, imperfect solids and amorphous bodies. San Francisco: Freeman. Halla, F., Jagodzinski, H. & Ruston, W. R. (1953). One-dimensional disorder in dodecahydrotriphenylene, C18 H24 . Acta Cryst. 6, 478– 488. Harada, J., Iwata, H. & Ohshima, K. (1984). A new method for the measurement of X-ray diffuse scattering with a combination of an energy dispersive detector and a source of white radiation. J. Appl. Cryst. 17, 1–6. Harburn, G., Taylor, C. A. & Welberry, T. R. (1975). An atlas of optical transforms. London: Bell. Hashimoto, S. (1974). Correlative microdomain model for short range ordered alloy structures. I. Diffraction theory. Acta Cryst. A30, 792–798.

520

REFERENCES 4.2 (cont.) Hashimoto, S. (1981). Correlative microdomain model for short range ordered alloy structures. II. Application to special cases. Acta Cryst. A37, 511–516. Hashimoto, S. (1983). Correlative microdomain model for short range ordered alloy structures. III. Analysis for diffuse scattering from quenched CuAu alloy. Acta Cryst. A39, 524–530. Hashimoto, S. (1987). Intensity expression for short-range order diffuse scattering with ordering energies in a ternary alloy system. J. Appl. Cryst. 20, 182–186. Haubold, H. G. (1975). Measurement of diffuse X-ray scattering between reciprocal lattice points as a new experimental method in determining interstitial structures. J. Appl. Cryst. 8, 175–183. Hayakawa, M. & Cohen, J. B. (1975). Experimental considerations in measurements of diffuse scattering. Acta Cryst. A31, 635–645. Hendricks, S. B. & Teller, E. (1942). X-ray interference in partially ordered layer lattices. J. Chem. Phys. 10, 147–167. Hohlwein, D., Hoser, A. & Prandl, W. (1986). Orientational disorder in cubic CsNO2 by neutron powder diffraction. Z. Kristallogr. 177, 93–102. Hosemann, R. (1975). Micro paracrystallites and paracrystalline superstructures. Macromol. Chem. Suppl. 1, pp. 559–577. Hosemann, R. & Bagchi, S. N. (1962). Direct analysis of diffraction by matter. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Iizumi, M. (1973). Lorentz factor in single crystal neutron diffraction. Jpn. J. Appl. Phys. 12, 167–172. Ishii, T. (1983). Static structure factor of Frenkel–Kontorovasystems at high temperatures. Application to K-hollandite. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 52, 4066–4073. Jagodzinski, H. (1949a,b,c). Eindimensionale Fehlordnung und ihr Einfluß auf die Ro¨ntgeninterferenzen. I. Berechnung des Fehlordnungsgrades aus den Ro¨ntgeninterferenzen. II. Berechnung der fehlgeordneten dichtesten Kugelpackungen mit Wechselwirkungen der Reichweite 3. III. Vergleich der Berechungen mit experimentellen Ergebnissen. Acta Cryst. 2, 201–208 (I), 208–214 (II), 298–304 (III). Jagodzinski, H. (1954). Der Symmetrieeinfluß auf den allgemeinen Lo¨sungsansatz eindimensionaler Fehlordnungsprobleme. Acta Cryst. 7, 17–25. Jagodzinski, H. (1963). On disorder phenomena in crystals. In Crystallography and crystal perfection, edited by G. N. Ramachandran, pp. 177–188. London: Academic Press. Jagodzinski, H. (1964a). Allgemeine Gesichtspunkte fu¨r die Deutung diffuser Interferenzen von fehlgeordneten Kristallen. In Advances in structure research by diffraction methods, Vol. 1, edited by R. Brill & R. Mason, pp. 167–198. Braunschweig: Vieweg. Jagodzinski, H. (1964b). Diffuse disorder scattering by crystals. In Advanced methods of crystallography, edited by G. N. Ramachandran, pp. 181–219. London: Academic Press. Jagodzinski, H. (1968). Fokussierende Monochromatoren fu¨r Einkristallverfahren? Acta Cryst. B24, 19–23. Jagodzinski, H. (1972). Transformation from cubic to hexagonal silicon carbide as a solid state reaction. Kristallografiya, 16, 1235–1246. [Translated into English in Sov. Phys. Crystallogr. 16, 1081–1090.] Jagodzinski, H. (1987). Diffuse X-ray scattering from crystals. In Progress in crystal growth and characterization, edited by P. Krishna, pp. 47–102. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Jagodzinski, H. & Haefner, K. (1967). On order–disorder in ionic non-stoichiometric crystals. Z. Kristallogr. 125, 188–200. Jagodzinski, H. & Hellner, E. (1956). Die eindimensionale Phasenumwandlung des RhSn 2 . Z. Kristallogr. 107, 124–149. Jagodzinski, H. & Korekawa, M. (1965). Supersatelliten im Beugungsbild des Labradorits ( Ca2 Na)( Si2 Al)2 O8 . Naturwissenschaften, 52, 640–641. Jagodzinski, H. & Korekawa, M. (1973). Diffuse X-ray scattering by lunar minerals. Geochim. Cosmochim. Acta Suppl. 4, 1, 933–951. ¨ ber die Deutung der Jagodzinski, H. & Laves, R. (1947). U Entmischungsvorga¨nge in Mischkristallen unter besonderer Beru¨cksichtigung der Systeme Aluminium–Kupfer und Aluminium–Silber. Z. Metallkd. 40, 296–305.

Jagodzinski, H. & Penzkofer, B. (1981). A new type of satellite in plagioclases. Acta Cryst. A37, 754–762. James, R. W. (1954). The optical principles of diffraction of X-rays, ch. X. London: Bell. Janner, A. & Janssen, T. (1980). Symmetry of incommensurate crystal phases. I. Commensurate basic structures. II. Incommensurate basic structures. Acta Cryst. A36, 399–408 (I), 408–415 (II). Jefferey, J. W. (1953). Unusual X-ray diffraction effects from a crystal of wollastonite. Acta Cryst. 6, 821–826. Jones, R. C. (1949). X-ray diffraction by randomly oriented line gratings. Acta Cryst. 2, 252–257. Kakinoki, J. & Komura, Y. (1954). Intensity of X-ray diffraction by a one-dimensionally disordered crystal. I. General derivation in the cases of ‘Reichweite’ s = 0 and s = 1. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 9, 169– 183. Kakinoki, J. & Komura, Y. (1965). Diffraction by a onedimensionally disordered crystal. I. The intensity equation. Acta Cryst. 19, 137–147. Kitaigorodsky, A. I. (1984). Mixed crystals. Springer series in solid state science, Vol. 33, chs. 6.4, 6.5, 8.4. Berlin: Springer. Klug, H. P. & Alexander, L. E. (1954). X-ray diffraction procedures. New York: John Wiley. Korekawa, M. (1967). Theorie der Satellitenreflexe. Habilitationsschrift der Naturwissenschaftlichen Fakulta¨t der Universita¨t Mu¨nchen, Germany. Korekawa, M. & Jagodzinski, H. (1967). Die Satellitenreflexe des Labradorits. Schweiz. Mineral. Petrogr. Mitt. 47, 269–278. Krivoglaz, M. A. (1969). Theory of X-ray and thermal neutron scattering by real crystals. Part I. New York: Plenum. Kunz, C. (1979). Editor. Synchrotron radiation – techniques and applications. Berlin: Springer. Lechner, R. E. & Riekel, C. (1983). Application of neutron scattering in chemistry. In Neutron scattering and muon spin rotation. Springer tracts in modern physics, Vol. 101, edited by G. Ho¨hler, pp. 1–84. Berlin: Springer. Lefebvre, J., Fouret, R. & Zeyen, C. (1984). Structure determination of sodium nitrate near the order–disorder phase transition. J. Phys. (Paris), 45, 1317–1327. Lovesey, S. W. (1984). Theory of neutron scattering from condensed matter, Vols. 1, 2. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Mardix, S. & Steinberger, I. T. (1970). Tilt and structure transformation in ZnS. J. Appl. Phys. 41, 5339–5341. Martorana, A., Marigo, A., Toniolo, L. & Zenetti, R. (1986). Stacking faults in the -form of magnesium dichloride. Z. Kristallogr. 176, 1–12. Matsubara, E. & Georgopoulos, P. (1985). Diffuse scattering measurements with synchrotron radiation: instrumentation and techniques. J. Appl. Cryst. 18, 377–383. More, M., Lefebvre, J. & Hennion, B. (1984). Quasi-elastic coherent neutron scattering in the disordered phase of CBr4 . Experimental evidence of local order and rotational dynamics of molecules. J. Phys. (Paris), 45, 303–307. More, M., Lefebvre, J., Hennion, B., Powell, B. M. & Zeyen, C. (1980). Neutron diffuse scattering in the disordered phase of CBr4 . I. Experimental. Elastic and quasi-elastic coherent scattering in single crystals. J. Phys. C, 13, 2833–2846. Moss, S. C. (1966). Local order in solid alloys. In Local atomic arrangements studied by X-ray diffraction, ch. 3, edited by J. B. Cohen & J. E. Hilliard, pp. 95–122. New York: Gordon and Breach. Mu¨ller, H. (1952). Die eindimensionale Umwandlung ZinkblendeWurtzit und die dabei auftretenden Anomalien. Neues Jahrb. Mineral. Abh. 84, 43–76. Niimura, N. (1986). Evaluation of data from 1-d PSD used in TOF method. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 47(C5), Suppl., 129–136. Niimura, N., Ishikawa, Y., Arai, M. & Furusaka, M. (1982). Applications of position sensitive detectors to structural analysis using pulsed neutron sources. AIP conference proceedings, Vol. 89. Neutron scattering, edited by J. Faber, pp. 11–22. New York: AIP.

521

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.2 (cont.) Ohshima, K. & Harada, J. (1986). X-ray diffraction study of shortrange ordered structure in a disordered Ag–15 at.% Mg alloy. Acta Cryst. B42, 436–442. Ohshima, K., Harada, J., Morinaga, M., Georgopoulos, P. & Cohen, J. B. (1986). Report on a round-robin study of diffuse X-ray scattering. J. Appl. Cryst. 19, 188–194. Ohshima, K. & Moss, S. C. (1983). X-ray diffraction study of basal(ab)-plane structure and diffuse scattering from silver atoms in disordered stage-2 Ag0:18 TiS2 . Acta Cryst. A39, 298–305. Ohshima, K., Watanabe, D. & Harada, J. (1976). X-ray diffraction study of short-range order diffuse scattering from disordered Cu– 29.8% Pd alloy. Acta Cryst. A32, 883–892. Overhauser, A. W. (1971). Observability of charge-density waves by neutron diffraction. Phys. Rev. B, 3, 3173–3182. Pandey, D., Lele, S. & Krishna, P. (1980). X-ray diffraction from one dimensionally disordered 2H-crystals undergoing solid state transformation to the 6H structure. I. The layer displacement mechanism. II. The deformation mechanism. III. Comparison with experimental observations on SiC. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 369, 435–439 (I), 451–461 (II), 463–477 (III). Patterson, A. L. (1959). Fourier theory. In International tables for X-ray crystallography, Vol. II, ch. 2.5. Birmingham: Kynoch Press. (Present distributor Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.) Peisl, J. (1975). Diffuse X-ray scattering from the displacement field of point defects and defect clusters. J. Appl. Cryst. 8, 143–149. Prandl, W. (1981). The structure factor of orientational disordered crystals: the case of arbitrary space, site, and molecular pointgroup. Acta Cryst. A37, 811–818. Press, W. (1973). Analysis of orientational disordered structures. I. Method. Acta Cryst. A29, 252–256. Press, W., Grimm, H. & Hu¨ller, A. (1979). Analysis of orientational disordered structures. IV. Correlations between orientation and position of a molecule. Acta Cryst. A35, 881–885. Press, W. & Hu¨ller, A. (1973). Analysis of orientational disordered structures. II. Examples: Solid CD4 , p-D2 and ND4 Br. Acta Cryst. A29, 257–263. Radons, W., Keller, J. & Geisel, T. (1983). Dynamical structure factor of a 1-d harmonic liquid: comparison of different approximation methods. Z. Phys. B, 50, 289–296. Rietveld, H. M. (1969). A profile refinement method for nuclear and magnetic structures. J. Appl. Cryst. 2, 65–71. Rosshirt, E., Frey, F., Boysen, H. & Jagodzinski, H. (1985). Chain ordering in E2 PI1:6 (5,10-diethylphenazinium iodide). Acta Cryst. B41, 66–76. Sabine, T. M. & Clarke, P. J. (1977). Powder neutron diffraction – refinement of the total pattern. J. Appl. Cryst. 10, 277–280. Scaringe, P. R. & Ibers, J. A. (1979). Application of the matrix method to the calculation of diffuse scattering in linearly disordered crystals. Acta Cryst. A35, 803–810. Schmatz, W. (1973). X-ray and neutron scattering on disordered crystals. In Treatise on materials science and technology, Vol. 2, ch. 3.1, edited by H. Hermans. New York: Academic Press. Schmatz, W. (1983). Neutron scattering studies of lattice defects: static properties of defects. In Methods of experimental physics, solid state: nuclear physics, Vol. 21, ch. 3.1, edited by J. N. Mundy, S. J. Rothman, M. J. Fluss & L. C. Smedskajew. New York: Academic Press. Schulz, H. (1982). Diffuse X-ray diffraction and its application to materials research. In Current topics in materials science, ch. 4, edited by E. Kaldis. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Schwartz, L. H. & Cohen, J. B. (1977). Diffraction from materials. New York: Academic Press. Sherwood, J. N. (1979). The plastically crystalline state. New York: John Wiley. Sparks, C. J. & Borie, B. (1966). Methods of analysis for diffuse Xray scattering modulated by local order and atomic displacements. In Atomic arrangements studied by X-ray diffraction, ch. 1, edited by J. B. Cohen & J. E. Hilliard, pp. 5–50. New York: Gordon and Breach.

Springer, T. (1972). Quasielastic neutron scattering for the investigation of diffuse motions in solid and liquids. Springer tracts in modern physics, Vol. 64. Berlin: Springer. Takaki, Y. & Sakurai, K. (1976). Intensity of X-ray scattering from one-dimensionally disordered crystal having the multilayer average structure. Acta Cryst. A32, 657–663. Tibbals, J. E. (1975). The separation of displacement and substitutional disorder scattering: a correction for structure factor ratio variation. J. Appl. Cryst. 8, 111–114. Tucciarone, A., Lau, H. Y., Corliss, A. M., Delapalme, A. & Hastings, J. M. (1971). Quantitative analysis of inelastic scattering in two-crystal and three-crystal spectrometry; critical scattering from RbMnF 3 . Phys. Rev. B, 4, 3206–3245. Turberfield, K. C. (1970). Time-of-flight diffractometry. In Thermal neutron diffraction, edited by B. T. M. Willis. Oxford University Press. Vainshtein, B. K. (1966). Diffraction of X-rays by chain molecules. Amsterdam: Elsevier. Warren, B. E. (1941). X-ray diffraction in random layer lattices. Phys. Rev. 59, 693–699. Warren, B. E. (1969). X-ray diffraction. Reading: Addison-Wesley. Warren, B. E. & Gingrich, N. S. (1934). Fourier integral analysis of X-ray powder patterns. Phys. Rev. 46, 368–372. Welberry, T. R. (1983). Routine recording of diffuse scattering from disordered molecular crystals. J. Appl. Phys. 16, 192–197. Welberry, T. R. (1985). Diffuse X-ray scattering and models of disorder. Rep. Prog. Phys. 48, 1543–1593. Welberry, T. R. & Glazer, A. M. (1985). A comparison of Weissenberg and diffractometer methods for the measurement of diffuse scattering from disordered molecular crystals. Acta Cryst. A41, 394–399. Welberry, T. R. & Siripitayananon, J. (1986). Analysis of the diffuse scattering from disordered molecular crystals: application to 1,4dibromo-2,5-diethyl-3,6-dimethylbenzene at 295 K. Acta Cryst. B42, 262–272. Welberry, T. R. & Siripitayananon, J. (1987). Analysis of the diffuse scattering from disordered molecular crystals: application to 1,3dibromo-2,5-diethyl-4,6-dimethylbenzene at 295 K. Acta Cryst. B43, 97–106. Welberry, T. R. & Withers, R. L. (1987). Optical transforms of disordered systems displaying diffuse intensity loci. J. Appl. Cryst. 20, 280–288. Wilke, W. (1983). General lattice factor of the ideal paracrystal. Acta Cryst. A39, 864–867. Wilson, A. J. C. (1942). Imperfections in the structure of cobalt. II. Mathematical treatment of proposed structure. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 180, 277–285. Wilson, A. J. C. (1949). X-ray diffraction by random layers: ideal line profiles and determination of structure amplitudes from observed line profiles. Acta Cryst. 2, 245–251. Wilson, A. J. C. (1962). X-ray optics, 2nd ed., chs. V, VI, VIII. London: Methuen. Windsor, C. G. (1982). Neutron diffraction performance in pulsed and steady sources. In Neutron scattering. AIP conference proceedings, Vol. 89, edited by J. Faber, pp. 1–10. New York: AIP. Wolff, P. M. de (1974). The pseudo-symmetry of modulated crystal structures. Acta Cryst. A30, 777–785. Wolff, P. M. de, Janssen, T. & Janner, A. (1981). The superspace groups for incommensurate crystal structures with a onedimensional modulation. Acta Cryst. A37, 625–636. Wong, S. F., Gillan, B. E. & Lucas, B. W. (1984). Single crystal disorder diffuse X-ray scattering from phase II ammonium nitrate, NH4 NO3 . Acta Cryst. B40, 342–346. Wooster, W. A. (1962). Diffuse X-ray reflections from crystals, chs. IV, V. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Wu, T. B., Matsubara, E. & Cohen, J. B. (1983). New procedures for qualitative studies of diffuse X-ray scattering. J. Appl. Cryst. 16, 407–414. Yessik, M., Werner, S. A. & Sato, H. (1973). The dependence of the intensities of diffuse peaks on scattering angle in neutron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A29, 372–382.

522

REFERENCES 4.2 (cont.) Young, R. A. (1975). Editor. International discussion meeting on studies of lattice distortions and local atomic arrangements by X-ray, neutron and electron diffraction. J. Appl. Cryst. 8, 79–191. Zernike, F. & Prins, J. A. (1927). Die Beugung von Ro¨ntgenstrahlen in Flu¨ssigkeiten als Effekt der Moleku¨lanordnung. Z. Phys. 41, 184–194.

4.3 Allen, L. J., Josefsson, T. W., Lehmpfuhl, G. & Uchida, Y. (1997). Modeling thermal diffuse scattering in electron diffraction involving higher-order Laue zones. Acta Cryst. A53, 421–425. Andersson, B. (1979). Electron diffraction study of diffuse scattering due to atomic displacements in disordered vanadium monoxide. Acta Cryst. A35, 718–727. Andersson, B., Gjønnes, J. & Taftø, J. (1974). Interpretation of short range order scattering of electrons; application to ordering of defects in vanadium monoxide. Acta Cryst. A30, 216–224. Clapp, P. C. & Moss, S. C. (1968). Correlation functions of disordered binary alloys. II. Phys. Rev. 171, 754–763. Cowley, J. M. (1976a). Diffraction by crystals with planar faults. I. General theory. Acta Cryst. A32, 83–87. Cowley, J. M. (1976b). Diffraction by crystals with planar faults. II. Magnesium fluorogermanate. Acta Cryst. A32, 88–91. Cowley, J. M. (1981). Diffraction physics, 2nd ed. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Cowley, J. M. (1988). Electron microscopy of crystals with timedependent perturbations. Acta Cryst. A44, 847–853. Cowley, J. M. (1989). Multislice methods for surface diffraction and inelastic scattering. In Computer simulation of electron microscope diffraction and images, edited by W. Krakow & M. O’Keefe, pp. 1–12. Worrendale, PA: The Minerals, Metals and Materials Society. Cowley, J. M. & Fields, P. M. (1979). Dynamical theory for electron scattering from crystal defects and disorder. Acta Cryst. A35, 28– 37. De Meulenaare, P., Rodewald, M. & Van Tendeloo, G. (1998). Anisotropic cluster model for the short-range order in Cu1 x–Pdxtype alloys. Phys. Rev. B, 57, 11132–11140. De Ridder, R., Van Tendeloo, G. & Amelinckx, S. (1976). A cluster model for the transition from the short-range order to the longrange order state in f.c.c. based binary systems and its study by means of electron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A32, 216–224. Doyle, P. A. (1969). Dynamical calculation of thermal diffuse scattering. Acta Cryst. A25, 569–577. Ferrel, R. A. (1957). Characteristic energy loss of electrons passing through metal foils. Phys. Rev. 107, 450–462. Fields, P. M. & Cowley, J. M. (1978). Computed electron microscope images of atomic defects in f.c.c. metals. Acta Cryst. A34, 103–112. Fisher, P. M. J. (1969). The development and application of an nbeam dynamic methodology in electron diffraction. PhD thesis, University of Melbourne. [See also Cowley (1981), ch. 17.] Freeman, A. J. (1959). Compton scattering of X-rays from nonspherical charge distributions. Phys. Rev. 113, 169–175. Freeman, A. J. (1960). X-ray incoherent scattering functions for nonspherical charge distributions. Acta Cryst. 12, 929–936. Fujimoto, F. & Kainuma, Y. (1963). Inelastic scattering of fast electrons by thin crystals. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 18, 1792–1804. Gjønnes, J. (1962). Inelastic interaction in dynamic electron scattering. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 17, Suppl. BII, 137–139. Gjønnes, J. (1966). The influence of Bragg scattering on inelastic and other forms of diffuse scattering of electrons. Acta Cryst. 20, 240–249. Gjønnes, J. & Høier, R. (1971). Structure information from anomalous absorption effects in diffuse scattering of electrons. Acta Cryst. A27, 166–174. Gjønnes, J. & Taftø, J. (1976). Bloch wave treatment of electron channelling. Nucl. Instrum. Methods, 133, 141–148.

Hashimoto, S. (1974). Correlative microdomain model for short range ordered alloy structures. I. Diffraction theory. Acta Cryst. A30, 792–798. Høier, R. (1973). Multiple scattering and dynamical effects in diffuse electron scattering. Acta Cryst. A29, 663–672. Honjo, G., Kodera, S. & Kitamura, N. (1964). Diffuse streak diffraction patterns from single crystals. I. General discussion and aspects of electron diffraction diffuse streak patterns. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 19, 351–369. Howie, A. (1963). Inelastic scattering of electrons by crystals. I. The theory of small angle inelastic scattering. Proc. Phys. Soc. A, 271, 268–287. Iijima, S. & Cowley, J. M. (1977). Study of ordering using high resolution electron microscopy. J. Phys. (Paris), 38, Suppl. C7, 21–30. International Tables for Crystallography (1999). Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Kainuma, Y. (1955). The theory of Kikuchi patterns. Acta Cryst. 8, 247–257. Krahl, D., Pa¨tzold, H. & Swoboda, M. (1990). An aberrationminimized imaging energy filter of simple design. Proceedings of the 12th international conference on electron microscopy, Vol. 2, pp. 60–61. Krivanek, O. L., Gubbens, A. J., Dellby, N. & Meyer, C. E. (1992). Design and first applications of a post-column imaging filter. Micros. Microanal. Microstruct. (France), 3, 187–199. Krivanek, O. L. & Mooney, P. E. (1993). Applications of slow-scan CCD cameras in transmission electron microscopy. Ultramicroscopy, 49, 95–108. Krivoglaz, M. A. (1969). Theory of X-ray and thermal neutron scattering by real crystals. New York: Plenum. Leapman, R. D., Rez, P. & Mayers, D. F. (1980). L and M shell generalized oscillator strength and ionization cross sections for fast electron collisions. J. Chem. Phys. 72, 1232–1243. Loane, R. F., Xu, P. R. & Silcox, J. (1991). Thermal vibrations in convergent-beam electron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A47, 267–278. Marks, L. D. (1985). Image localization. Ultramicroscopy, 18, 33– 38. Maslen, W. V. & Rossouw, C. J. (1984). Implications of (e, 2e) scattering electron diffraction in crystals: I–II. Philos. Mag. A49, 735–742, 743–757. Moliere, G. (1948). Theory of scattering of fast charged particles: plural and multiple scattering. Z. Naturforsch. Teil A, 3, 78–97. Mori, M., Oikawa, T. & Harada, Y. (1990). Development of the imaging plate for the transmission electron microscope and its characteristics. J. Electron Microsc. (Jpn), 19, 433–436. Ohshima, K. & Watanabe, D. (1973). Electron diffraction study of short-range-order diffuse scattering from disordered Cu–Pd and Cu–Pt alloys. Acta Cryst. A29, 520–525. Ohtsuki, Y. H., Kitagaku, M., Waho, T. & Omura, T. (1976). Dechannelling theory with the Fourier–Planck equation and a modified diffusion coefficient. Nucl. Instrum Methods, 132, 149– 151. Rez, P., Humphreys, C. J. & Whelan, M. J. (1977). The distribution of intensity in electron diffraction patterns due to phonon scattering. Philos. Mag. 35, 81–96. Sauvage, M. & Parthe´, E. (1974). Prediction of diffuse intensity surfaces in short-range-ordered ternary derivative structures based on ZnS, NaCl, CsCl and other structures. Acta Cryst. A30, 239–246. Taftø, J. & Lehmpfuhl, G. (1982). Direction dependence in electron energy loss spectroscopy from single crystals. Ultramicroscopy, 7, 287–294. Taftø, J. & Spence, J. C. H. (1982). Atomic site determination using channelling effect in electron induced X-ray emission. Ultramicroscopy, 9, 243–247. Tanaka, N. & Cowley, J. M. (1985). High resolution electron microscopy of disordered lithium ferrites. Ultramicroscopy, 17, 365–377. Tanaka, N. & Cowley, J. M. (1987). Electron microscope imaging of short range order in disordered alloys. Acta Cryst. A43, 337–346.

523

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.3 (cont.) Uyeda, R. & Nonoyama, M. (1968). The observation of thick specimens by high voltage electron microscopy. Jpn. J. Appl. Phys. 1, 200–208. Van Hove, L. (1954). Correlations in space and time and Born approximation scattering in systems of interacting particles. Phys. Rev. 95, 249–262. Wang, Z. L. (1995). Elastic and inelastic scattering in electron diffraction and imaging. New York: Plenum Press. Whelan, M. (1965). Inelastic scattering of fast electrons by crystals. I. Interband excitations. J. Appl. Phys. 36, 2099–2110. Yoshioka, H. (1957). Effect of inelastic waves on electron diffraction. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 12, 618–628.

4.4 Aeppli, G. & Bruinsma, R. (1984). Hexatic order and liquid crystal density fluctuations. Phys. Rev. Lett. 53, 2133–2136. Aeppli, G., Litster, J. D., Birgeneau, R. J. & Pershan, P. S. (1981). High resolution X-ray study of the smectic A–smectic B phase transition and the smectic B phase in butyloxybenzylidene octylaniline. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 67, 205–214. Aharony, A., Birgeneau, R. J., Brock, J. D. & Litster, J. D. (1986). Multicriticality in hexatic liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 1012–1015. Alben, R. (1973). Phase transitions in a fluid of biaxial particles. Phys. Rev. Lett. 30, 778–781. Als-Nielsen, J., Christensen, F. & Pershan, P. S. (1982). Smectic-A order at the surface of a nematic liquid crystal: synchrotron X-ray diffraction. Phys. Rev. Lett. 48, 1107–1110. Als-Nielsen, J., Litster, J. D., Birgeneau, R. J., Kaplan, M., Safinya, C. R., Lindegaard, A. & Mathiesen, S. (1980). Observation of algebraic decay of positional order in a smectic liquid crystal. Phys. Rev. B, 22, 312–320. Bak, P., Mukamel, D., Villain, J. & Wentowska, K. (1979). Commensurate–incommensurate transitions in rare-gas monolayers adsorbed on graphite and in layered charge-density-wave systems. Phys. Rev. B, 19, 1610–1613. Barois, P., Prost, J. & Lubensky, T. C. (1985). New critical points in frustrated smectics. J. Phys. (Paris), 46, 391–399. Beaglehole, D. (1982). Pretransition order on the surface of a nematic liquid crystal. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 89, 319–325. Benattar, J. J., Doucet, J., Lambert, M. & Levelut, A. M. (1979). Nature of the smectic F phase. Phys. Rev. A, 20, 2505–2509. Benattar, J. J., Levelut, A. M. & Strzelecki, L. (1978). Etude de l’influence de la longueur molećulaire les characte´ristiques des phases smectique ordonneés. J. Phys. (Paris), 39, 1233–1240. Benattar, J. J., Moussa, F. & Lambert, M. (1980). Two-dimensional order in the smectic F phase. J. Phys. (Paris), 40, 1371–1374. Benattar, J. J., Moussa, F. & Lambert, M. (1983). Two dimensional ordering in liquid crystals: the SmF and SmI phases. J. Chim. Phys. 80, 99–107. Benattar, J. J., Moussa, F., Lambert, M. & Germian, C. (1981). Two kinds of two-dimensional order: the SmF and SmI phases. J. Phys. (Paris) Lett. 42, L67–L70. Benguigui, L. (1979). A Landau theory of the NAC point. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3-419–C3-421. Bensimon, D., Domany, E. & Shtrikman, S. (1983). Optical activity of cholesteric liquid crystals in the pretransitional regime and in the blue phase. Phys. Rev. A, 28, 427–433. Billard, J., Dubois, J. C., Vaucher, C. & Levelut, A. M. (1981). Structures of the two discophases of rufigallol hexa-n-octanoate. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 66, 115–122. Birgeneau, R. J., Garland, C. W., Kasting, G. B. & Ocko, B. M. (1981). Critical behavior near the nematic–smectic-A transition in butyloxybenzilidene octylaniline (4O.8). Phys. Rev. A, 24, 2624– 2634. Birgeneau, R. J. & Litster, J. D. (1978). Bond orientational order model for smectic B liquid crystals. J. Phys. (Paris) Lett. 39, L399–L402.

Blinc, R. & Levanyuk, A. P. (1986). Editors. Modern problems in condensed matter sciences, incommensurate phases in dielectrics, 2. Materials. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Brisbin, D., De Hoff, R., Lockhart, T. E. & Johnson, D. L. (1979). Specific heat near the nematic–smectic-A tricritical point. Phys. Rev. Lett. 43, 1171–1174. Brock, J. D., Aharony, A., Birgeneau, R. J., Evans-Lutterodt, K. W., Litster, J. D., Horn, P. M., Stephenson, G. B. & Tajbakhsh, A. R. (1986). Orientational and positional order in a tilted hexatic liquid crystal phase. Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 98–101. Brooks, J. D. & Taylor, G. H. (1968). In Chemistry and physics of carbon, Vol. 3, edited by P. L. Walker Jr, pp. 243–286. New York: Marcel Dekker. Bruinsma, R. & Nelson, D. R. (1981). Bond orientational order in smectic liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. B, 23, 402–410. Caille´, A. (1972). Remarques sur la diffusion des rayons X dans les smectiques A. C. R. Acad. Sci. Se´r. B, 274, 891–893. Carlson, J. M. & Sethna, J. P. (1987). Theory of the ripple phase in hydrated phospholipid bilayers. Phys. Rev. A, 36, 3359–3363. Chan, K. K., Deutsch, M., Ocko, B. M., Pershan, P. S. & Sorensen, L. B. (1985). Integrated X-ray scattering intensity measurement of the order parameter at the nematic to smectic-A phase transition. Phys. Rev. Lett. 54, 920–923. Chan, K. K., Pershan, P. S., Sorensen, L. B. & Hardouin, F. (1985). X-ray scattering study of the smectic-A1 to smectic-A2 transition. Phys. Rev. Lett. 54, 1694–1697. Chan, K. K., Pershan, P. S., Sorensen, L. B. & Hardouin, F. (1986). X-ray studies of transitions between nematic, smectic-A1, -A2, and -Ad phases. Phys. Rev. A, 34, 1420–1433. Chandrasekhar, S. (1982). In Advances in liquid crystals, Vol. 5, edited by G. H. Brown, pp. 47–78. London/New York: Academic Press. Chandrasekhar, S. (1983). Liquid crystals of disk-like molecules. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 309, 93–103. Chandrasekhar, S., Sadashiva, B. K. & Suresh, K. A. (1977). Liquid crystals of disk like molecules. Pramana, 9, 471–480. Chapman, D., Williams, R. M. & Ladbrooke, B. D. (1967). Physical studies of phospholipids. VI. Thermotropic and lyotropic mesomorphism of some 1,2-diacylphosphatidylcholines (lecithins). Chem. Phys. Lipids, 1, 445–475. Chen, J. H. & Lubensky, T. C. (1976). Landau–Ginzberg mean-field theory for the nematic to smectic-C and nematic to smectic-A phase transitions. Phys. Rev. A, 14, 1202–1207. Chu, K. C. & McMillan, W. L. (1977). Unified Landau theory for the nematic, smectic A and smectic C phases of liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. A, 15, 1181–1187. Coates, D. & Gray, G. W. (1975). A correlation of optical features of amorphous liquid–cholesteric liquid crystal transitions. Phys. Lett. A, 51, 335–336. Collett, J. (1983). PhD thesis, Harvard University, USA. Unpublished. Collett, J., Pershan, P. S., Sirota, E. B. & Sorensen, L. B. (1984). Synchrotron X-ray study of the thickness dependence of the phase diagram of thin liquid-crystal films. Phys. Rev. Lett. 52, 356–359. Collett, J., Sorensen, L. B., Pershan, P. S. & Als-Nielsen, J. (1985). X-ray scattering study of restacking transitions in the crystallineB phases of heptyloxybenzylidene heptylaniline 7O.7. Phys. Rev. A, 32, 1036–1043. Collett, J., Sorensen, L. B., Pershan, P. S., Litster, J., Birgeneau, R. J. & Als-Nielsen, J. (1982). Synchrotron X-ray study of novel crystalline-B phases in 7O.7. Phys. Rev. Lett. 49, 553–556. Crooker, P. P. (1983). The cholesteric blue phase: a progress report. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 98, 31–45. Davey, S. C., Budai, J., Goodby, J. W., Pindak, R. & Moncton, D. E. (1984). X-ray study of the hexatic-B to smectic-A phase transition in liquid crystal films. Phys. Rev. Lett. 53, 2129–2132. Davidov, D., Safinya, C. R., Kaplan, M., Dana, S. S., Schaetzing, R., Birgeneau, R. J. & Litster, J. D. (1979). High-resolution X-ray and light-scattering study of critical behavior associated with the nematic–smectic-A transition in 4-cyano-40 -octylbiphenyl. Phys. Rev. B, 19, 1657–1663.

524

REFERENCES 4.4 (cont.) De Gennes, P. G. (1969a). Conjectures sur l’e´tat smectique. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 30, C4-65–C4-71. De Gennes, P. G. (1969b). Phenomenology of short-range-order effects in the isotropic phase of nematic materials. Phys. Lett. A, 30, 454–455. De Gennes, P. G. (1971). Short range order effects in the isotropic phase of nematics and cholesterics. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 12, 193–214. De Gennes, P. G. (1972). An analogy between superconductors and smectics A. Solid State Commun. 10, 753–756. De Gennes, P. G. (1973). Some remarks on the polymorphism of smectics. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 21, 49–76. De Gennes, P. G. (1974). The physics of liquid crystals. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Demus, D., Diele, S., Klapperstu¨ck, M., Link, V. & Zaschke, H. (1971). Investigation of a smectic tetramorphous substance. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 15, 161–169. Destrade, C., Gasparoux, H., Foucher, P., Tinh, N. H., Maltheˆte, J. & Jacques, J. (1983). Molecules discoides et polymorphisme mesomorphe. J. Chim. Phys. 80, 137–148. De Vries, H. L. (1951). Rotary power and other optical properties of liquid crystals. Acta Cryst. 4, 219–226. Diele, S., Brand, P. & Sackmann, H. (1972). X-ray diffraction and polymorphism of smectic liquid crystals. II. D and E modifications. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 17, 163–169. Djurek, D., Baturic-Rubcic, J. & Franulovic, K. (1974). Specific-heat critical exponents near the nematic–smectic-A phase transition. Phys. Rev. Lett. 33, 1126–1129. Doucet, J. (1979). In Molecular physics of liquid crystals, edited by G. W. Gray & G. R. Luckhurst, pp. 317–341. London/New York: Academic Press. Doucet, J. & Levelut, A. M. (1977). X-ray study of the ordered smectic phases in some benzylideneanilines. J. Phys. (Paris), 38, 1163–1170. Doucet, J., Levelut, A. M., Lambert, M., Lievert, L. & Strzelecki, L. (1975). Nature de la phase smectique. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 36, C1-13–C1-19. Etherington, G., Leadbetter, A. J., Wang, X. J., Gray, G. W. & Tajbakhsh, A. (1986). Structure of the smectic D phase. Liq. Cryst. 1, 209–214. Faetti, S., Gatti, M., Palleschi, V. & Sluckin, T. J. (1985). Almost critical behavior of the anchoring energy at the interface between a nematic liquid crystal and a substrate. Phys. Rev. Lett. 55, 1681–1684. Faetti, S. & Palleschi, V. (1984). Nematic isotropic interface of some members of the homologous series of the 4-cyano-40 -(n-alkyl)biphenyl liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. A, 30, 3241–3251. Fan, C. P. & Stephen, M. J. (1970). Isotropic–nematic phase transition in liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 25, 500–503. Farber, A. S. (1985). PhD thesis, Brandeis University, USA. Unpublished. Fleming, R. M., Moncton, D. E., McWhan, D. B. & DiSalvo, F. J. (1980). In Ordering in two dimensions. Proceedings of an International Conference held at Lake Geneva, Wisconsin, edited by S. K. Sinha, pp. 131–134. New York: North-Holland. Fontell, K. (1974). In Liquid crystals and plastic crystals, Vol. II, edited by G. W. Gray & P. A. Winsor, pp. 80–109. Chichester, England: Ellis Horwood. Fontes, E., Heiney, P. A., Haseltine, J. H. & Smith, A. B. III (1986). High resolution X-ray scattering study of the multiply reentrant polar mesogen DB9ONO2 . J. Phys. (Paris), 47, 1533–1539. Frank, F. C. & van der Merwe, J. H. (1949). One-dimensional dislocations. I. Static theory. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 198, 205–216. Freiser, M. J. (1971). Successive transitions in a nematic liquid. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 14, 165–182. Friedel, G. (1922). Les e´tats me´somorphes de la matie`re. Ann. Phys. (Paris), 18, 273–274.

Gane, P. A. C. & Leadbetter, A. J. (1981). The crystal and molecular structure of N-(4-n-octyloxybenzylidene)-4 0 -butylaniline (8O.4) and the crystal–smectic G transition. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 78, 183–200. Gane, P. A. C. & Leadbetter, A. J. (1983). Modulated crystal B phases and the B- to G-phase transition in two types of liquid crystalline compounds. J. Phys. C, 16, 2059–2067. Gane, P. A. C., Leadbetter, A. J., Wrighton, P. G., Goodby, J. W., Gray, G. W. & Tajbakhsh, A. R. (1983). The phase behavior of bis-(40 -n-heptyloxybenzylidene)-1,4-phenylenediamine HEPTOBPD, crystal J and K phases. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 100, 67–74. Gannon, M. G. J. & Faber, T. E. (1978). The surface tension of nematic liquid crystals. Philos. Mag. A37, 117–135. Garland, C. W., Meichle, M., Ocko, B. M., Kortan, A. R., Safinya, C. R., Yu, L. J., Litster, J. D. & Birgeneau, R. J. (1983). Critical behavior at the nematic–smectic-A transition in butyloxybenzylidene heptylaniline (4O.7). Phys. Rev. A, 27, 3234–3240. Gransbergen, E. F., De Jeu, W. H. & Als-Nielsen, J. (1986). Antiferroelectric surface layers in a liquid crystal as observed by synchrotron X-ray scattering. J. Phys. (Paris), 47, 711–718. Gray, G. W. & Goodby, J. W. (1984). Smectic liquid crystals: textures and structures. Glasgow: Leonard Hill. Gray, G. W., Jones, B. & Marson, F. (1957). Mesomorphism and chemical constitution. Part VIII. The effect of 30 -substituents on the mesomorphism of the 40 -n-alkoxydiphenyl-4-carboxylic acids and their alkyl esters. J. Chem. Soc. 1, 393–401. Grinstein, G. & Toner, J. (1983). Dislocation-loop theory of the nematic–smectic A–smectic C multicritical point. Phys. Rev. Lett. 51, 2386–2389. Guillon, D. & Skoulios, A. (1987). Molecular model for the R smectic DS mesophase. Europhys. Lett. 3, 79–85. Guillon, D., Skoulios, A. & Benattar, J. J. (1986). Volume and X-ray diffraction study of terephthal-bis-4-n-decylaniline (TBDA). J. Phys. (Paris), 47, 133–138. Gunther, L., Imry, Y. & Lajzerowicz, J. (1980). X-ray scattering in smectic-A liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. A, 22, 1733–1740. Guyot-Sionnest, P., Hsiung, H. & Shen, Y. R. (1986). Surface polar ordering in a liquid crystal observed by optical second-harmonic generation. Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 2963–2966. Halperin, B. I. & Nelson, D. R. (1978). Theory of two-dimensional melting. Phys. Rev. Lett. 41, 121–124, 519(E). Hardouin, F., Levelut, A. M., Achard, M. F. & Sigaud, G. (1983). Polymorphisme des substances me´sogenes a` molećules polaires. I. Physico-chimie et structure. J. Chim. Phys. 80, 53–64. Hardouin, F., Levelut, A. M., Benattar, J. J. & Sigaud, G. (1980). Xray investigations of the smectic A1–smectic A2 transition. Solid State Commun. 33, 337–340. Hardouin, F., Sigaud, G., Tinh, N. H. & Achard, M. F. (1981). A fluid smectic A antiphase in a pure nitro rod-like compound. J. Phys. (Paris) Lett. 42, L63–L66. Hardouin, F., Tinh, N. H., Achard, M. F. & Levelut, A. M. (1982). A new thermotropic smectic phase made of ribbons. J. Phys. (Paris) Lett. 43, L327–L331. Helfrich, W. (1979). Structure of liquid crystals especially order in two dimensions. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3-105–C3-114. Hendrikx, Y., Charvolin, J. & Rawiso, M. (1986). Uniaxial–biaxial transition in lyotropic nematic solutions: local biaxiality in the uniaxial phase. Phys. Rev. B, 33, 3534–3537. Hirth, J. P., Pershan, P. S., Collett, J., Sirota, E. & Sorensen, L. B. (1984). Dislocation model for restacking phase transitions in crystalline-B liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 53, 473–476. Hornreich, R. M., Luban, M. & Shtrikman, S. (1975). Critical behavior at the onset of k-space instability on the lambda line. Phys. Rev. Lett. 35, 1678–1681. Hornreich, R. M. & Shtrikman, S. (1983). Theory of light scattering in cholesteric blue phases. Phys. Rev. A, 28, 1791–1807. Huang, C. C. & Lien, S. C. (1981). Nature of a nematic–smectic-A– smectic-C multicritical point. Phys. Rev. Lett. 47, 1917–1920.

525

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.4 (cont.) Huang, C. C., Lien, S. C., Dumrongrattana, S. & Chiang, L. Y. (1984). Calorimetric studies near the smectic-A1–smectic-A˜ phase transition of a liquid crystal compound. Phys. Rev. A, 30, 965– 967. Huse, D. A. (1985). Fisher renormalization at the smectic-A1 to smectic-A2 transition in a mixture. Phys. Rev. Lett. 55, 2228. Kasting, G. B., Lushington, K. J. & Garland, C. W. (1980). Critical heat capacity near the nematic–smectic-A transition in octyloxycyanobiphenyl in the range 1–2000 bar. Phys. Rev. B, 22, 321– 331. Kittel, C. (1963). Quantum theory of solids. New York: John Wiley. Kosterlitz, J. M. & Thouless, D. G. (1973). Ordering, metastability and phase transitions in two-dimensions. J. Phys. C, 6, 1181– 1203. Landau, L. D. (1965). In Collected papers of L. D. Landau, edited by D. ter Haar, pp. 193–216. New York: Gordon and Breach. Landau, L. D. & Lifshitz, E. M. (1958). Statistical physics. London: Pergamon Press. Lawson, K. D. & Flautt, T. J. (1967). Magnetically oriented lyotropic liquid crystalline phases. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 89, 5489–5491. Leadbetter, A. J., Durrant, J. L. A. & Rugman, M. (1977). The density of 4-n-octyl-40 -cyano-biphenyl (8CB). Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 34, 231–235. Leadbetter, A. J., Frost, J. C., Gaughan, J. P., Gray, G. W. & Mosley, A. (1979). The structure of smectic A phases of compounds with cyano end groups. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3-375–C3-380. Leadbetter, A. J., Frost, J. C., Gaughan, J. P. & Mazid, M. A. (1979). The structure of the crystal, smectic E and smectic B forms of IBPAC. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3-185–C3-192. Leadbetter, A. J., Frost, J. C. & Mazid, M. A. (1979). Interlayer correlations in smectic B phases. J. Phys. (Paris) Lett. 40, L325– L329. Leadbetter, A. J., Gaughan, J. P., Kelley, B., Gray, G. W. & Goodby, J. J. (1979). Characterisation and structure of some new smectic F phases. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3-178–C3-184. Leadbetter, A. J., Mazid, M. A. & Kelly, B. A. (1979). Structure of the smectic-B phase and the nature of the smectic-B to H transition in the N-(4-n-alkoxybenzylidene)-40 -alkylanilines. Phys. Rev. Lett. 43, 630–633. Leadbetter, A. J., Mazid, M. A. & Malik, K. M. A. (1980). The crystal and molecular structure of isobutyl 4-(40 -phenylbenzylideneamino) cinnamate (IBPBAC) – and the crystal smectic E transition. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 61, 39–60. Leadbetter, A. J., Mazid, M. A. & Richardson, R. M. (1980). In Liquid crystals, edited by S. Chandrasekhar, pp. 65–79. London: Heyden. Leadbetter, A. J., Richardson, R. M. & Carlile, C. J. (1976). The nature of the smectic E phase. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 37, C3-65– C3-68. Lee, S. D. & Meyer, R. B. (1986). Computations of the phase equilibrium, elastic constants, and viscosities of a hard-rod nematic liquid crystal. J. Chem. Phys. 84, 3443–3448. Levelut, A. M. (1976). Etude de l’ordre local lie´ a` la rotation des molećules dans la phase smectique B. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 37, C3-51–C3-54. Levelut, A. M. (1983). Structures des phases me´somorphes formeé de molećules discoides. J. Chim. Phys. 80, 149–161. Levelut, A. M., Doucet, J. & Lambert, M. (1974). Etude par diffusion de rayons X de la nature des phases smectiques B et de la transition de phase solide–smectique B. J. Phys. (Paris), 35, 773– 779. Levelut, A. M. & Lambert, M. (1971). Structure des cristaux liquides smectic B. C. R. Acad Sci. Se´r. B, 272, 1018–1021. Levelut, A. M., Tarento, R. J., Hardouin, F., Achard, M. F. & Sigaud, G. (1981). Number of SA phases. Phys. Rev. A, 24, 2180–2186. Liebert, L. E. (1978). Editor. Liquid crystals. In Solid state physics: advances in research and applications, edited by H. Ehrenreich, F. Seitz & D. Turnbull, Suppl. 14. New York: Academic Press. Litster, J. D., Als-Nielsen, J., Birgeneau, R. J., Dana, S. S., Davidov, D., Garcia-Golding, F., Kaplan, M., Safinya, C. R. & Schaetzing,

R. (1979). High resolution X-ray and light scattering studies of bilayer smectic A compounds. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3339–C3-344. Lubensky, T. C. (1983). The nematic to smectic A transition: a theoretical overview. J. Chim. Phys. 80, 31–43. Lubensky, T. C. (1987). Mean field theory for the biaxial nematic phase and the NNUAC critical point. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 146, 55–69. Lubensky, T. C. & Ingersent, K. (1986). Patterns in systems with competing incommensurate lengths. Preprint. Luzzati, V. & Reiss-Husson, F. (1966). Structure of the cubic phase of lipid–water systems. Nature (London), 210, 1351–1352. Ma, S. K. (1976). Modern theory of critical phenomena. Reading, MA: Benjamin. McMillan, W. L. (1972). X-ray scattering from liquid crystals. I. Cholesteryl nonanoate and myristate. Phys. Rev. A, 6, 936–947. McMillan, W. L. (1973a) Measurement of smectic-A-phase orderparameter fluctuations near a second-order smectic-A–nematicphase transition. Phys. Rev. A, 7, 1419–1422. McMillan, W. L. (1973b). Measurement of smectic-A-phase orderparameter fluctuations in the nematic phase of p-n-octyloxybenzylidene-p0 -toluidine. Phys. Rev. A, 7, 1673–1678. McMillan, W. L. (1973c). Measurement of smectic-phase orderparameter fluctuations in the nematic phase of heptyloxybenzene. Phys. Rev. A, 8, 328–331. Mada, H. & Kobayashi, S. (1981). Surface order parameter of 4-nheptyl-40 -cyanobiphenyl. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 66, 57–60. Maier, W. & Saupe, A. (1958). Eine einfache molekulare Theorie des nematischen kristallinglu¨ssigen Zustandes. Z. Naturforsch. Teil A, 13, 564–566. Maier, W. & Saupe, A. (1959). Eine einfache molekularestatistiche Theorie der nematischen kristallinglu¨ssigen phase. Teil I. Z. Naturforsch. Teil A, 14, 882–889. Maltheˆte, J., Liebert, L., Levelut, A. M. & Galerne, Y. (1986). Ne´matic biaxe thermotrope. C. R. Acad. Sci. 303, 1073–1076. Martin, P. C., Parodi, O. & Pershan, P. S. (1972). Unified hydrodynamic theory for crystals, liquid crystals, and normal fluids. Phys. Rev. A, 6, 2401–2420. Martinez-Miranda, L. J., Kortan, A. R. & Birgeneau, R. J. (1986). Xray study of fluctuations near the nematic–smectic-A–smectic-C multicritical point. Phys. Rev. Lett. 56, 2264–2267. Meiboom, S., Sethna, J. P., Anderson, P. W. & Brinkman, W. F. (1981). Theory of the blue phase of cholesteric liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 1216–1219. Miyano, K. (1979). Wall-induced pretransitional birefringence: a new tool to study boundary aligning forces in liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 43, 51–54. Moncton, D. E. & Pindak, R. (1979). Long-range order in two- and three-dimensional smectic-B liquid crystal films. Phys. Rev. Lett. 43, 701–704. Moncton, D. E., Pindak, R., Davey, S. C. & Brown, G. S. (1982). Melting of variable thickness liquid crystal thin films: a synchrotron X-ray study. Phys. Rev. Lett. 49, 1865–1868. Moncton, D. E., Stephens, P. W., Birgeneau, R. J., Horn, P. M. & Brown, G. S. (1981). Synchrotron X-ray study of the commensurate–incommensurate transition of monolayer krypton on graphite. Phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 1533–1536. Nelson, D. R. & Halperin, B. I. (1979). Dislocation-mediated melting in two dimensions. Phys. Rev. B, 19, 2457–2484. Nelson, D. R. & Halperin, B. I. (1980). Solid and fluid phases in smectic layers with tilted molecules. Phys. Rev. B, 21, 5312–5329. Nelson, D. R. & Toner, J. (1981). Bond-orientational order, dislocation loops and melting of solids and smectic-A liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. B, 24, 363–387. Neto, A. M. F., Galerne, Y., Levelut, A. M. & Liebert, L. (1985). Pseudo lamellar ordering in uniaxial and biaxial lyotropic nematics: a synchrotron X-ray diffraction experiment. J. Phys. (Paris) Lett. 46, L499–L505. Ocko, B. M., Birgeneau, R. J. & Litster, J. D. (1986). Crossover to tricritical behavior at the nematic to smectic A transition: an Xray scattering study. Z. Phys. B62, 487–497.

526

REFERENCES 4.4 (cont.) Ocko, B. M., Birgeneau, R. J., Litster, J. D. & Neubert, M. E. (1984). Critical and tricritical behavior at the nematic to smectic-A transition. Phys. Rev. Lett. 52, 208–211. Ocko, B. M., Braslau, A., Pershan, P. S., Als-Nielsen, J. & Deutsch, M. (1986). Quantized layer growth at liquid crystal surfaces. Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 94–97. Ocko, B. M., Pershan, P. S., Safinya, C. R. & Chiang, L. Y. (1987). Incommensurate smectic order at the free surface in the nematic phase of DB7NO2 . Phys. Rev. A, 35, 1868–1872. Onsager, L. (1949). The effects of shapes on the interaction of colloidal particles. Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 51, 627–659. Peierls, R. E. (1934). Transformation temperatures. Helv. Phys. Acta Suppl. 2, 81–83. Pershan, P. S. (1974). Dislocation effects in smectic-A liquid crystals. J. Appl. Phys. 45, 1590–1604. Pershan, P. S. (1979). Amphiphilic molecules and liquid crystals. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3-423–C3-432. Pershan, P. S. & Als-Nielsen, J. (1984). X-ray reflectivity from the surface of a liquid crystal: surface structure and absolute value of critical fluctuations. Phys. Rev. Lett. 52, 759–762. Pershan, P. S., Braslau, A., Weiss, A. H. & Als-Nielsen, J. (1987). Smectic layering at the free surface of liquid crystals in the nematic phase: X-ray reflectivity. Phys. Rev. A, 35, 4800–4813. Pershan, P. S. & Prost, J. (1975). Dislocation and impurity effects in smectic-A liquid crystals. J. Appl. Phys. 46, 2343–2353. Pindak, R., Moncton, D. E., Davey, S. C. & Goodby, J. W. (1981). Xray observation of a stacked hexatic liquid-crystal B phase. Phys. Rev. Lett. 46, 1135–1138. Pokrovsky, V. L. & Talapov, A. L. (1979). Ground state, spectrum, and phase diagram of two-dimensional incommensurate crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 42, 65–67. Prost, J. (1979). Smectic A to smectic A phase transition. J. Phys. (Paris), 40, 581–587. Prost, J. (1984). The smectic state. Adv. Phys. 33, 1–46. Prost, J. & Barois, P. (1983). Polymorphism in polar mesogens. II. Theoretical aspects. J. Chim. Phys. 80, 65–81. Ratna, B. R., Nagabhushana, C., Raja, V. N., Shashidhar, R. & Chandrasekhar, S. (1986). Density, dielectric and X-ray studies of smectic A–smectic A transitions. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 138, 245– 257. Ratna, B. R., Shashidhar, R. & Raja, V. N. (1985). Smectic-A phase with two collinear incommensurate density modulations. Phys. Rev. Lett. 55, 1476–1478. Richardson, R. M., Leadbetter, A. J. & Frost, J. C. (1978). The structure and dynamics of the smectic B phase. Ann. Phys. 3, 177– 186. Sadoc, J. F. & Charvolin, J. (1986). Frustration in bilayers and topologies of liquid crystals of amphiphilic molecules. J. Phys. (Paris), 47, 683–691. Safinya, C. R., Clark, N. A., Liang, K. S., Varady, W. A. & Chiang, L. Y. (1985). Synchrotron X-ray scattering study of freely suspended discotic strands. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 123, 205–216. Safinya, C. R., Liang, K. S., Varady, W. A., Clark, N. A. & Andersson, G. (1984). Synchrotron X-ray study of the orientational ordering D2–D1 structural phase transition of freely suspended discotic strands in triphenylene hexa-n-dodecanoate. Phys. Rev. Lett. 53, 1172–1175. Safinya, C. R., Roux, D., Smith, G. S., Sinha, S. K., Dimon, P., Clark, N. A. & Bellocq, A. M. (1986). Steric interactions in a model multimembrane system: a synchrotron X-ray study. Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 2718–2721. Safinya, C. R., Varady, W. A., Chiang, L. Y. & Dimon, P. (1986). Xray study of the nematic phase and smectic-A1 to smectic-A˜ phase transition in heptylphenyl nitrobenzoyloxybenzoate (DB7NO2). Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 432–435. Safran, S. A. & Clark, N. A. (1987). Editors. Physics of complex and supermolecular fluids. New York: John Wiley.

Shipley, C. G., Hitchcock, P. B., Mason, R. & Thomas, K. M. (1974). Structural chemistry of 1,2-diauroyl-DL-phosphatidylethanolamine: molecular conformation and intermolecular packing of phospholipids. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 71, 3036–3040. Sigaud, G., Hardouin, F., Achard, M. F. & Gasparoux, H. (1979). Anomalous transitional behaviour in mixtures of liquid crystals: a new transition of SA–SA type? J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 40, C3356–C3-359. Sirota, E. B., Pershan, P. S. & Deutsch, M. (1987). Modulated crystalline-B phases in liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. A, 36, 2902– 2913. Sirota, E. B., Pershan, P. S., Sorensen, L. B. & Collett, J. (1985). Xray studies of tilted hexatic phases in thin liquid-crystal films. Phys. Rev. Lett. 55, 2039–2042. Sirota, E. B., Pershan, P. S., Sorensen, L. B. & Collett, J. (1987). Xray and optical studies of the thickness dependence of the phase diagram of liquid crystal films. Phys. Rev. A, 36, 2890–2901. Small, D. (1967). Phase equilibria and structure of dry and hydrated egg lecithin. J. Lipid Res. 8, 551–557. Smith, G. W. & Garland, Z. G. (1973). Liquid crystalline phases in a doubly homologous series of benzylideneanilines – textures and scanning calorimetry. J. Chem. Phys. 59, 3214–3228. Smith, G. W., Garland, Z. G. & Curtis, R. J. (1973). Phase transitions in mesomorphic benzylideneanilines. Mol. Cryst. Liq. Cryst. 19, 327–330. Solomon, L. & Litster, J. D. (1986). Light scattering measurements in the 7S5-8OCB nematic–smectic-A–smectic-C liquid-crystal system. Phys. Rev. Lett. 56, 2268–2271. Sorensen, L. B. (1987). Private communication. Sorensen, L. B., Amador, S., Sirota, E. B., Stragler, H. & Pershan, P. S. (1987). Unpublished. Springer, T. (1977). In Current physics, Vol. 3. Dynamics of solids and liquids by neutron scattering, edited by S. W. Lovesey & T. Springer, pp. 255–300 (see p. 281). Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Sprokel, G. E. (1980). The physics and chemistry of liquid crystal devices. New York: Plenum. Stegemeyer, H. & Bergmann, K. (1981). In Liquid crystals of oneand two-dimensional order. Springer Series in Chemical Physics 11, edited by W. Helfrich & G. Heppke, pp. 161–175. Berlin/ Heidelberg/New York: Springer-Verlag. Tardieu, A. & Billard, J. (1976). On the structure of the ‘smectic D modification’. J. Phys. (Paris) Colloq. 37, C3-79–C3-81. Tardieu, A. & Luzzati, V. (1970). Polymorphism of lipids: a novel cubic phase – a cage-like network of rods with enclosed spherical micelles. Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 219, 11–17. Thoen, J., Marynissen, H. & Van Dael, W. (1982). Temperature dependence of the enthalpy and the heat capacity of the liquidcrystal octylcyanobiphenyl (8CB). Phys. Rev. A, 26, 2886–2905. Thoen, J., Marynissen, H. & Van Dael, W. (1984). Nematic–smecticA tricritical point in alkylcyanobiphenyl liquid crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 5, 204–207. Villain, J. (1980). In Order in strongly fluctuating condensed matter system, edited by T. Riste, pp. 221–260. New York: Plenum. Wang, J. & Lubensky, T. C. (1984). Theory of the SA1–SA2 phase transition in liquid crystal. Phys. Rev. A, 29, 2210–2217. Warren, B. E. (1968). X-ray diffraction. Reading, MA: AddisonWesley. Winkor, M. J. & Clarke, R. (1986). Long-period stacking transitions in intercalated graphite. Phys. Rev. Lett. 56, 2072–2075. Young, A. P. (1979). Melting and the vector Coulomb gas in two dimensions. Phys. Rev. B, 19, 1855–1866. Young, C. Y., Pindak, R., Clark, N. A. & Meyer, R. B. (1978). Lightscattering study of two-dimensional molecular-orientation fluctuations in a freely suspended ferroelectric liquid crystal film. Phys. Rev. Lett. 40, 773–776. Yu, L. J. & Saupe, A. (1980). Observation of a biaxial nematic phase in potassium laurate–1-decanol–water mixtures. Phys. Rev. Lett. 45, 1000–1003.

527

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.5 Alexeev, D. G., Lipanov, A. A. & Skuratovskii, I. Y. (1992). Patterson methods in fibre diffraction. Int. J. Biol. Macromol. 14, 139–144. Arnott, S. (1980). Twenty years hard labor as a fibre diffractionist. In Fibre diffraction methods, ACS Symposium Series, Vol. 141, edited by A. D. French & K. H. Gardner, pp. 1–30. Washington DC: American Chemical Society. Arnott, S., Chandrasekaran, R., Millane, R. P. & Park, H. (1986). DNA–RNA hybrid secondary structures. J. Mol. Biol. 188, 631– 640. Arnott, S. & Mitra, A. K. (1984). X-ray diffraction analyses of glycosamionoglycans. In Molecular biophysics of the extracellular matrix, edited by S. Arnott, D. A. Rees & E. R. Morris, pp. 41–67. Clifton: Humana Press. Arnott, S., Wilkins, M. H. F., Fuller, W. & Langridge, R. (1967). Molecular and crystal structures of double-helical RNA III. An 11-fold molecular model and comparison of the agreement between the observed and calculated three-dimensional diffraction data for 10- and 11-fold models. J. Mol. Biol. 27, 535–548. Arnott, S. & Wonacott, A. J. (1966). The refinement of the crystal and molecular structures of polymers using X-ray data and stereochemical constraints. Polymer, 7, 157–166. Atkins, E. D. T. (1989). Crystal structure by X-ray diffraction. In Comprehensive polymer science, Vol. 1. Polymer characterization, edited by G. A. Allen, pp. 613–650. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Barham, P. J. (1993). Crystallization and morphology of semicrystalline polymers. In Materials science and technology. A comprehensive treatment, Vol. 12. Structure and properties of polymers, edited by E. L. Thomas, pp. 153–212. Weinheim: VCH. Baskaran, S. & Millane, R. P. (1999a). Bayesian image reconstruction from partial image and aliased spectral intensity data. IEEE Trans. Image Process. 8, 1420–1434. Baskaran, S. & Millane, R. P. (1999b). Model bias in Bayesian image reconstruction from X-ray fiber diffraction data. J. Opt. Soc. Am. A, 16, 236–245. Biswas, A. & Blackwell, J. (1988a). Three-dimensional structure of main-chain liquid-crystalline copolymers. 1. Cylindrically averaged intensity transforms of single chains. Macromolecules, 21, 3146–3151. Biswas, A. & Blackwell, J. (1988b). Three-dimensional structure of main-chain liquid-crystalline copolymers. 2. Interchain interference effects. Macromolecules, 21, 3152–3158. Biswas, A. & Blackwell, J. (1988c). Three-dimensional structure of main-chain liquid-crystalline copolymers. 3. Chain packing in the solid state. Macromolecules, 21, 3158–3164. Blackwell, J., Gutierrez, G. A. & Chivers, R. A. (1984). Diffraction by aperiodic polymer chains: the structure of liquid crystalline copolyesters. Macromolecules, 17, 1219–1224. Blundell, D. J., Keller, A. & Kovacs, A. J. (1966). A new selfnucleation phenomenon and its application to the growing of polymer crystals from solution. J. Polym. Sci. Polym. Lett. Ed. 4, 481–486. Brisse, F. (1989). Electron diffraction of synthetic polymers: the model compound approach to polymer structure. J. Electron Microsc. Tech. 11, 272–279. Brisse, F., Remillard, B. & Chanzy, H. (1984). Poly(1,4-transcyclohexanediyldimethylene succinate). A structural determination using X-ray and electron diffraction. Macromolecules, 17, 1980–1987. Bru¨nger, A. T. (1992). X-PLOR. Version 3.1. New Haven: Yale University Press. Bru¨nger, A. T. (1997). Free R value: cross-validation in crystallography. Methods Enzymol. 277, 366–396. Cael, J. J., Winter, W. T. & Arnott, S. (1978). Calcium chondroitin 4sulfate: molecular conformation and organization of polysaccharide chains in a proteoglycan. J. Mol. Biol. 125, 21–42. Campbell Smith, P. J. & Arnott, S. (1978). LALS: a linked-atom least-squares reciprocal-space refinement system incorporating stereochemical constraints to supplement sparse diffraction data. Acta Cryst. A34, 3–11.

Chandrasekaran, R. & Arnott, S. (1989). The structures of DNA and RNA helices in oriented fibres. In Landolt–Bornstein numerical data and functional relationships in science and technology, Vol. VII/1b, edited by W. Saenger, pp. 31–170. Berlin, Heidelberg: Springer-Verlag. Chandrasekaran, R., Radha, A. & Lee, E. J. (1994). Structural roles of calcium ions and side chains in welan: an X-ray study. Carbohydr. Res. 252, 183–207. Chanzy, H., Perez, S., Miller, D. P., Paradossi, G. & Winter, W. T. (1987). An electron diffraction study of mannan I. Crystal and molecular structure. Macromolecules, 20, 2407–2413. Chivers, R. A. & Blackwell, J. (1985). Three-dimensional structure of copolymers of p-hydroxybenzoic acid and 2-hydroxy-6naphthoic acid: a model for diffraction from a nematic structure. Polymer, 26, 997–1002. Clark, E. S. & Muus, I. T. (1962). The relationship between Bragg reflections and disorder in crystalline polymers. Z. Kristallogr. 117, 108–118. Cochran, W., Crick, F. H. C. & Vand, V. (1952). The structure of synthetic polypeptides. I. The transform of atoms on a helix. Acta Cryst. 5, 581–586. Cowley, J. M. (1961). Diffraction intensities from bent crystals. Acta Cryst. 14, 920–927. Cowley, J. M. (1981). Diffraction physics. Second revised edition. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Cowley, J. M. (1988). Imaging [and] imaging theory. In Highresolution transmission electron microscopy and associated techniques, edited by P. Busek, J. M. Cowley & L. Eyring, pp. 3–57. New York: Oxford University Press. Crowther, R. A., DeRosier, D. J. & Klug, A. (1970). The reconstruction of a three-dimensional structure from projections and its application to electron microscopy. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 317, 319–344. Daubeny, R. de P., Bunn, C. W. & Brown, C. J. (1954). The crystal structure of polyethylene terephthalate. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 226, 531–542. Day, D. & Lando, J. B. (1980). Structure determination of a poly(diacetylene) monolayer. Macromolecules, 13, 1483–1487. De Titta, G. T., Edmonds, J. W., Langs, D. A. & Hauptman, H. (1975). Use of negative quartet cosine invariants as a phasing figure of merit: NQEST. Acta Cryst. A31, 472–479. Dorset, D. L. (1989). Electron diffraction from crystalline polymers. In Comprehensive polymer science, Vol. 1. Polymer characterization, edited by G. A. Allen, pp. 651–668. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Dorset, D. L. (1991a). Is electron crystallography possible? The direct determination of organic crystal structures. Ultramicroscopy, 38, 23–40. Dorset, D. L. (1991b). Electron diffraction structure analysis of polyethylene. A direct phase determination. Macromolecules, 24, 1175–1178. Dorset, D. L. (1991c). Electron crystallography of linear polymers: direct structure analysis of poly("-caprolactone). Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 88, 5499–5502. Dorset, D. L. (1992). Electron crystallography of linear polymers: direct phase determination for zonal data sets. Macromolecules, 25, 4425–4430. Dorset, D. L. (1995a). Comments on the validity of the direct phasing and Fourier methods in electron crystallography. Acta Cryst. A51, 869–879. Dorset, D. L. (1995b). Structural electron crystallography. New York: Plenum. Dorset, D. L. (1995c). Filling the cone – overcoming the goniometric tilt limit in electron crystallography by direct methods. Am. Cryst. Assoc. Abstr. Series 2, 23, p. 89. Dorset, D. L., Kopp, S., Fryer, J. R. & Tivol, W. T. (1995). The Sayre equation in electron crystallography. Ultramicroscopy, 57, 59–89. Dorset, D. L. & McCourt, M. P. (1993). Electron crystallographic analysis of a polysaccharide structure – direct phase determination and model refinement for mannan I. J. Struct. Biol. 111, 118– 124.

528

REFERENCES 4.5 (cont.) Dorset, D. L., McCourt, M. P., Kopp, S., Wittmann, J.-C. & Lotz, B. (1994). Direct determination of polymer crystal structures by electron crystallography – isotactic poly(1-butene), form (III). Acta Cryst. B50, 201–208. Doyle, P. A. & Turner, P. S. (1968). Relativistic Hartree–Fock X-ray and electron scattering factors. Acta Cryst. A24, 390–397. Drenth, J. (1994). Principles of protein X-ray crystallography. New York: Springer-Verlag. Finkenstadt, V. L. & Millane, R. P. (1998). Fiber diffraction patterns for general unit cells: the cylindrically projected reciprocal lattice. Acta Cryst. A54, 240–248. Forsyth, V. T., Mahendrasingam, A., Pigram, W. J., Greenall, R. J., Bellamy, K., Fuller, W. & Mason, S. A. (1989). Neutron fibre diffraction study of DNA hydration. Int. J. Biol. Macromol. 11, 236–240. Franklin, R. E. (1955). Structure of tobacco mosaic virus. Nature (London), 175, 379–381. Franklin, R. E. & Gosling, R. G. (1953). The structure of sodium thymonucleate fibres. II. The cylindrically symmetrical Patterson function. Acta Cryst. 6, 678–685. Franklin, R. E. & Holmes, K. C. (1958). Tobacco mosaic virus: application of the method of isomorphous replacement to the determination of the helical parameters and radial density distribution. Acta Cryst. 11, 213–220. Franklin, R. E. & Klug, A. (1955). The splitting of layer lines in X-ray fibre diagrams of helical structures: application to tobacco mosaic virus. Acta Cryst. 8, 777–780. Fraser, R. D. B. & MacRae, T. P. (1973). Conformations in fibrous proteins. New York: Academic Press. Fraser, R. D. B., MacRae, T. P., Miller, A. & Rowlands, R. J. (1976). Digital processing of fibre diffraction patterns. J. Appl. Cryst. 9, 81–94. Fraser, R. D. B., Suzuki, E. & MacRae, T. P. (1984). Computer analysis of X-ray diffraction patterns. In Structure of crystalline polymers, edited by I. H. Hall, pp. 1–37. New York: Elsevier. French, A. D. & Gardner, K. H. (1980). Editors. Fibre diffraction methods. ACS Symposium Series, Vol. 141. Washington DC: American Chemical Society. Geil, P. H. (1963). Polymer single crystals. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Gilmore, C. J., Shankland, K. & Bricogne, G. (1993). Application of the maximum entropy method to powder diffraction and electron crystallography. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 442, 97–111. Gonzalez, A., Nave, C. & Marvin, D. A. (1995). Pf1 filamentous bacteriophage: refinement of a molecular model by simulated annealing using 3.3 A˚ resolution X-ray fiber diffraction data. Acta Cryst. D51, 792–804. Graaf, H. de (1989). On the calculation of small-angle diffraction patterns from distorted lattices. Acta Cryst. A45, 861–870. Grubb, D. T. (1993). Elastic properties of crystalline polymers. In Materials science and technology. A comprehensive treatment, Vol. 12. Structure and properties of polymers, edited by E. L. Thomas, pp. 301–356. Weinheim: VCH. Hall, I. H. (1984). Editor. Structure of crystalline polymers. New York: Elsevier. Hall, I. H., Neisser, J. Z. & Elder, M. (1987). A computer-based method of measuring the integrated intensities of the reflections on the X-ray diffraction photograph of an oriented crystalline polymer. J. Appl. Cryst. 20, 246–255. Hamilton, W. C. (1965). Significance tests on the crystallographic R factor. Acta Cryst. 18, 502–510. Hauptman, H. A. (1993). A minimal principle in X-ray crystallography: starting in a small way. Proc. R. Soc. London Ser. A, 442, 3–12. Hendricks, S. & Teller, E. (1942). X-ray interference in partially ordered layer lattices. J. Chem. Phys. 10, 147–167. Hirsch, P. B., Howie, A., Nicholson, P. B., Pashley, D. W. & Whelan, M. J. (1965). Electron microscopy of thin crystals. London: Butterworths.

Hofmann, D., Schneider, A. I. & Blackwell, J. (1994). Molecular modelling of the structure of a wholly aromatic thermotropic copolyester. Polymer, 35, 5603–5610. Holmes, K. C. & Barrington Leigh, J. (1974). The effect of disorientation on the intensity distribution of non-crystalline fibres. I. Theory. Acta Cryst. A30, 635–638. Holmes, K. C., Popp, D., Gebhard, W. & Kabsch, W. (1990). Atomic model of the actin filament. Nature (London), 347, 44–49. Holmes, K. C., Stubbs, G. J., Mandelkow, E. & Gallwitz, U. (1975). Structure of tobacco mosaic virus at 6.7 A˚ resolution. Nature (London), 254, 192–196. Hosemann, R. & Bagchi, S. N. (1962). Direct analysis of diffraction by matter. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Hu, H. & Dorset, D. L. (1989). Three-dimensional electron diffraction structure analysis of polyethylene. Acta Cryst. B45, 283–290. Hu, H. & Dorset, D. L. (1990). Crystal structure of poly("caprolactone). Macromolecules, 23, 4604–4607. Hudson, L., Harford, J. J., Denny, R. C. & Squire, J. M. (1997). Myosin head configuration in relaxed fish muscle: resting state myosin heads must swing axially by up to 150 A˚ or turn upside down to reach rigor. J. Mol. Biol. 273, 440–455. Iannelli, P. (1994). FWR: a computer program for refining the molecular structure in the crystalline phase of polymers based on the analysis of the whole X-ray fibre diffraction patterns. J. Appl. Cryst. 27, 1055–1060. Isoda, S., Tsuji, M., Ohara, M., Kawaguchi, A. & Katayama, K. (1983a). Structural analysis of -form poly(p-xylene) starting from a high-resolution image. Polymer, 24, 1155–1161. Isoda, S., Tsuji, M., Ohara, M., Kawaguchi, A. & Katayama, K. (1983b). Direct observation of dislocations in polymer single crystals. Makromol. Chem. Rapid Commun. 4, 141–144. Ivanova, M. I. & Makowski, L. (1998). Iterative low-pass filtering for estimation of the background in fiber diffraction patterns. Acta Cryst. A54, 626–631. Klug, A., Crick, F. H. C. & Wyckoff, H. W. (1958). Diffraction from helical structures. Acta Cryst. 11, 199–213. Kopp, S., Wittmann, J. C. & Lotz, B. (1994). Epitaxial crystallization and crystalline polymorphism of poly(1-butene): form (III) and (II). Polymer, 35, 908–915. Lipson, H. & Cochran, W. (1966). The determination of crystal structures, p. 381. Ithaca: Cornell University Press. Liu, J. & Geil, P. H. (1993). Morphological observations of nascent poly(p-oxabenzoate). Polymer, 34, 1366–1374. Liu, J., Yuan, B.-L., Geil, P. H. & Dorset, D. L. (1997). Chain conformation and molecular packing in poly(p-oxybenzoate) single crystals at ambient temperature. Polymer, 38, 6031–6047. Lobert, S., Heil, P. D., Namba, K. & Stubbs, G. (1987). Preliminary X-ray fibre diffraction studies of cucumber green mottle mosaic virus, watermelon strain. J. Mol. Biol. 196, 935–938. Lobert, S. & Stubbs, G. (1990). Fibre diffraction analysis of cucumber green mottle mosaic virus using limited numbers of heavy-atom derivatives. Acta Cryst. A46, 993–997. Lorenz, M. & Holmes, K. C. (1993). Computer processing and analysis of X-ray fibre diffraction data. J. Appl. Cryst. 26, 82–91. Lorenz, M., Popp, D. & Holmes, K. C. (1993). Refinement of the F-actin model against X-ray fibre diffraction data by the use of a directed mutation algorithm. J. Mol. Biol. 234, 826–836. Lotz, B. & Wittmann, J. C. (1993). Structure of polymer single crystals. In Materials science and technology. A comprehensive treatment, Vol. 12. Structure and properties of polymers, edited by E. L. Thomas, pp. 79–154. Weinheim: VCH. MacGillavry, C. H. & Bruins, E. M. (1948). On the Patterson transforms of fibre diagrams. Acta Cryst. 1, 156–158. Makowski, L. (1978). Processing of X-ray diffraction data from partially oriented specimens. J. Appl. Cryst. 11, 273–283. Makowski, L. (1982). The use of continuous diffraction data as a phase constraint. II. Application to fibre diffraction data. J. Appl. Cryst. 15, 546–557.

529

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.5 (cont.) Makowski, L., Caspar, D. L. D. & Marvin, D. A. (1980). Filamentous bacteriophage Pf1 structure determined at 7 A˚ resolution by refinement of models for the -helical subunit. J. Mol. Biol. 140, 149–181. Mandelkern, L. (1989). Crystallization and melting. In Comprehensive polymer science, Vol. 2. Polymer properties, edited by C. Booth & C. Price, pp. 363–414. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Mandelkow, E. & Holmes, K. C. (1974). The positions of the N-terminus and residue 68 in tobacco mosaic virus. J. Mol. Biol. 87, 265–273. Mandelkow, E., Stubbs, G. & Warren, S. (1981). Structures of the helical aggregates of tobacco mosaic virus protein. J. Mol. Biol. 152, 375–386. Marvin, D. A., Bryan, R. K. & Nave, C. (1987). Pf1 inovirus. Electron density distribution calculated by a maximum entropy algorithm from native fiber diffraction data to 3 A˚ resolution and single isomorphous replacement data to 5 A˚ resolution. J. Mol. Biol. 193, 315–343. Mauritz, K. A., Baer, E. & Hopfinger, A. J. (1978). The epitaxial crystallization of macromolecules. J. Polym. Sci. Macromol. Rev. 13, 1–61. Mazeau, K., Winter, W. T. & Chanzy, H. (1994). Molecular and crystal structure of a high-temperature polymorph of chitosan from electron diffraction data. Macromolecules, 27, 7606–7612. Millane, R. P. (1988). X-ray fibre diffraction. In Crystallographic computing 4. Techniques and new technologies, edited by N. W. Isaacs & M. R. Taylor, pp. 169–186. Oxford University Press. Millane, R. P. (1989a). R factors in X-ray fibre diffraction. I. Largest likely R factors for N overlapping terms. Acta Cryst. A45, 258– 260. Millane, R. P. (1989b). R factors in X-ray fibre diffraction. II. Largest likely R factors. Acta Cryst. A45, 573–576. Millane, R. P. (1989c). Relating reflection boundaries in X-ray fibre diffraction patterns to specimen morphology and their use for intensity measurement. J. Macromol. Sci. Phys. B28, 149–166. Millane, R. P. (1990a). Intensity distributions in fibre diffraction. Acta Cryst. A46, 552–559. Millane, R. P. (1990b). Phase retrieval in crystallography and optics. J. Opt. Soc. Am. A, 7, 394–411. Millane, R. P. (1990c). Polysaccharide structures: X-ray fibre diffraction studies. In Computer modeling of carbohydrate molecules. ACS Symposium Series No. 430, edited by A. D. French & J. W. Brady, pp. 315–331. Washington DC: American Chemical Society. Millane, R. P. (1990d). R factors in X-ray fibre diffraction. III. Asymptotic approximations to largest likely R factors. Acta Cryst. A46, 68–72. Millane, R. P. (1991). An alternative approach to helical diffraction. Acta Cryst. A47, 449–451. Millane, R. P. (1992a). Largest likely R factors for normal distributions. Acta Cryst. A48, 649–650. Millane, R. P. (1992b). R factors in X-ray fibre diffraction. IV. Analytic expressions for largest likely R factors. Acta Cryst. A48, 209–215. Millane, R. P. (1993). Image reconstruction from cylindrically averaged diffraction intensities. In Digital image recovery and synthesis II, Proc. SPIE, Vol. 2029, edited by P. S. Idell, pp. 137– 143. Bellingham, WA: SPIE. Millane, R. P. & Arnott, S. (1985). Background removal in X-ray fibre diffraction patterns. J. Appl. Cryst. 18, 419–423. Millane, R. P. & Arnott, S. (1986). Digital processing of X-ray diffraction patterns from oriented fibres. J. Macromol. Sci. Phys. B24, 193–227. Millane, R. P. & Baskaran, S. (1997). Optimal difference Fourier synthesis in fibre diffraction. Fiber Diffr. Rev. 6, 14–18. Millane, R. P., Byler, M. A. & Arnott, S. (1985). Implementing constrained least squares refinement of helical polymers on a vector pipeline machine. In Supercomputer applications, edited by R. W. Numrich, pp. 137–143, New York: Plenum.

Millane, R. P., Chandrasekaran, R., Arnott, S. & Dea, I. C. M. (1988). The molecular structure of kappa-carrageenan and comparison with iota-carrageenan. Carbohydr. Res. 182, 1–17. Millane, R. P. & Stroud, W. J. (1991). Effects of disorder on fibre diffraction patterns. Int. J. Biol. Macromol. 13, 202–208. Millane, R. P. & Stubbs, G. (1992). The significance of R factors in fibre diffraction. Polym. Prepr. 33(1), 321–322. Miller, R., DeTitta, G. T., Jones, R., Langs, D. A., Weeks, C. M. & Hauptman, H. A. (1993). On the application of the minimal principle to solve unknown structures. Science, 259, 1430–1433. Namba, K., Pattanayek, R. & Stubbs, G. J. (1989). Visualization of protein–nucleic acid interactions in a virus. Refined structure of intact tobacco mosaic virus at 2.9 A˚ resolution by X-ray fibre diffraction. J. Mol. Biol. 208, 307–325. Namba, K. & Stubbs, G. (1985). Solving the phase problem in fibre diffraction. Application to tobacco mosaic virus at 3.6 A˚ resolution. Acta Cryst. A41, 252–262. Namba, K. & Stubbs, G. (1987a). Difference Fourier syntheses in fibre diffraction. Acta Cryst. A43, 533–539. Namba, K. & Stubbs, G. (1987b). Isomorphous replacement in fibre diffraction using limited numbers of heavy-atom derivatives. Acta Cryst. A43, 64–69. Namba, K., Wakabayashi, K. & Mitsui, T. (1980). X-ray structure analysis of the thin filament of crab striated muscle in the rigor state. J. Mol. Biol. 138, 1–26. Namba, K., Yamashita, I. & Vonderviszt, F. (1989). Structure of the core and central channel of bacterial flagella. Nature (London), 342, 648–654. Nambudripad, R., Stark, W. & Makowski, L. (1991). Neutron diffraction studies of the structure of filamentous bacteriophage Pf1. J. Mol. Biol. 220, 359–379. Park, H., Arnott, S., Chandrasekaran, R., Millane, R. P. & Campagnari, F. (1987). Structure of the -form of poly(dA)poly(dT) and related polynucleotide duplexes. J. Mol. Biol. 197, 513–523. Perez, S. & Chanzy, H. (1989). Electron crystallography of linear polysaccharides. J. Electron Microsc. Tech. 11, 280–285. Rickert, S. E., Lando, J. B., Hopfinger, A. J. & Baer, E. (1979). Epitaxial polymerization of (SN)x 1. Structure and morphology of single crystals on alkali halide substrates. Macromolecules, 12, 1053–1057. Rybnikar, F., Liu, J. & Geil, P. H. (1994). Thin film melt-polymerized single crystals of poly(p-oxybenzoate). Makromol. Chem. Phys. 195, 81–104. Sayre, D. (1952). The squaring method: a new method for phase determination. Acta Cryst. 5, 60–65. Schneider, A. I., Blackwell, J., Pielartzik, H. & Karbach, A. (1991). Structure analysis of copoly(ester carbonate). Macromolecules, 24, 5676–5682. Shotton, M. W., Denny, R. C. & Forsyth, V. T. (1998). CCP13 software development. Fiber Diffr. Rev. 7, 40–44. Sim, G. A. (1960). A note on the heavy atom method. Acta Cryst. 13, 511–512. Squire, J. M., Al-Khayat, H. A. & Yagi, N. (1993). Muscle thinfilament structure and regulation. Actin sub-domain movements and the tropomyosin shift modelled from low-angle X-ray diffraction. J. Chem. Soc. Faraday Trans. 89, 2717–2726. Squire, J., Cantino, M., Chew, M., Denny, R., Harford, J., Hudson, L. & Luther, P. (1998). Myosin rod-packing schemes in vertebrate muscle thick filaments. J. Struct. Biol. 122, 128–138. Squire, J. M. & Vibert, P. J. (1987). Editors. Fibrous protein structure. London: Academic Press. Stanley, E. (1986). ‘Peakiness’ test functions. Acta Cryst. A42, 297– 299. Stark, W., Glucksman, M. J. & Makowski, L. (1988). Conformation of the coat protein of filamentous bacteriophage Pf1 determined by neutron diffraction from magnetically oriented gels of specifically deuterated virions. J. Mol. Biol. 199, 171–182. Storks, K. H. (1938). An electron diffraction examination of some linear high polymers. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 60, 1753–1761. Stroud, W. J. & Millane, R. P. (1995a). Analysis of disorder in biopolymer fibres. Acta Cryst. A51, 790–800.

530

REFERENCES 4.5 (cont.) Stroud, W. J. & Millane, R. P. (1995b). Diffraction by disordered polycrystalline fibres. Acta Cryst. A51, 771–790. Stroud, W. J. & Millane, R. P. (1996a). Cylindrically averaged diffraction by distorted lattices. Proc. R. Soc. London, 452, 151– 173. Stroud, W. J. & Millane, R. P. (1996b). Diffraction by polycrystalline fibres with correlated disorder. Acta Cryst. A52, 812–829. Stubbs, G. (1987). The Patterson function in fibre diffraction. In Patterson and Pattersons, edited by J. P. Glusker, B. K. Patterson & M. Rossi, pp. 548–557. Oxford University Press. Stubbs, G. (1989). The probability distributions of X-ray intensities in fibre diffraction: largest likely values for fibre diffraction R factors. Acta Cryst. A45, 254–258. Stubbs, G. (1999). Developments in fiber diffraction. Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 9, 615–619. Stubbs, G., Warren, S. & Holmes, K. (1977). Structure of RNA and RNA binding site in tobacco mosaic virus from a 4 A˚ map calculated from X-ray fibre diagrams. Nature (London), 267, 216– 221. Stubbs, G. J. (1974). The effect of disorientation on the intensity distribution of non-crystalline fibres. II. Applications. Acta Cryst. A30, 639–645. Stubbs, G. J. & Diamond, R. (1975). The phase problem for cylindrically averaged diffraction patterns. Solution by isomorphous replacement and application to tobacco mosaic virus. Acta Cryst. A31, 709–718. Stubbs, G. J. & Makowski, L. (1982). Coordinated use of isomorphous replacement and layer-line splitting in the phasing of fibre diffraction data. Acta Cryst. A38, 417–425. Tadokoro, H. (1979). Structure of crystalline polymers. New York: Wiley. Tanaka, S. & Naya, S. (1969). Theory of X-ray scattering by disordered polymer crystals. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 26, 982–993. Tatarinova, L. I. & Vainshtein, B. K. (1962). Issledovanie poli- metil-L-glutamata v -forme metodom difraktsi elektronov. (Electron diffraction study of poly- -methyl-L-glutamate in the -form.) Visokomol. Soed. 4, 261–269. (In Russian.) Tirion, M., ben Avraham, D., Lorenz, M. & Holmes, K. C. (1995). Normal modes as refinement parameters for the F-actin model. Biophys. J. 68, 5–12. Tsuji, M. (1989). Electron microscopy. In Comprehensive polymer science, Vol. 1. Polymer characterization, edited by G. A. Allen, pp. 785–866. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Vainshtein, B. K. (1964). Structure analysis by electron diffraction. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Vainshtein, B. K. (1966). Diffraction of X-rays by chain molecules. Amsterdam: Elsevier. Vainshtein, B. K. & Tatarinova, L. I. (1967). The -form of poly- methyl-L-glutamate. Sov. Phys. Crystallogr. 11, 494–498. Vibert, P. J. (1987). Fibre diffraction methods. In Fibrous protein structure, edited by J. M. Squire & P. J. Vibert, pp. 23–45. New York: Academic Press. Wang, H., Culver, J. N. & Stubbs, G. (1997). Structure of ribgrass mosaic virus at 2.9 A˚ resolution: evolution and taxonomy of tobamoviruses. J. Mol. Biol. 269, 769–779. Wang, H. & Stubbs, G. (1993). Molecular dynamics refinement against fibre diffraction data. Acta Cryst. A49, 504–513. Wang, H. & Stubbs, G. J. (1994). Structure determination of cucumber green mottle mosaic virus by X-ray fibre diffraction. Significance for the evolution of tobamoviruses. J. Mol. Biol. 239, 371–384. Welberry, T. R., Miller, G. H. & Carroll, C. E. (1980). Paracrystals and growth-disorder models. Acta Cryst. A36, 921–929. Welsh, L. C., Symmons, M. F. & Marvin, D. A. (2000). The molecular structure and structural transition of the -helical capsid in filamentous bacteriophage Pf1. Acta Cryst. D56, 137– 150.

Welsh, L. C., Symmons, M. F., Sturtevant, J. M., Marvin, D. A. & Perham, R. N. (1998). Structure of the capsid of Pf3 filamentous phage determined from X-ray fiber diffraction data at 3.1 A˚ resolution. J. Mol. Biol. 283, 155–177. Wilson, A. J. C. (1950). Largest likely values for the reliability index. Acta Cryst. 3, 397–399. Wittmann, J. C. & Lotz, B. (1985). Polymer decoration: the orientation of polymer folds as revealed by the crystallization of polymer vapor. J. Polym. Sci. Polym. Phys. Ed. 23, 205–226. Wittmann, J. C. & Lotz, B. (1990). Epitaxial crystallization of polymers on organic and polymeric substrates. Prog. Polym. Sci. 15, 909–948. Wunderlich, B. (1973). Macromolecular physics, Vol. 1. Crystal structure, morphology, defects. New York: Academic Press. Yamashita, I., Hasegawa, K., Suzuki, H., Vonderviszt, F., MimoriKiyosue, Y. & Namba, K. (1998). Structure and switching of bacterial flagellar filaments studied by X-ray fiber diffraction. Nature Struct. Biol. 5, 125–132. Zugenmaier, P. & Sarko, A. (1980). The variable virtual bond. In Fibre diffraction methods, ACS Symposium Series Vol. 141, edited by A. D. French & K. H. Gardner, pp. 225–237. Washington DC: American Chemical Society.

4.6 Axel, F. & Gratias, D. (1995). Editors. Beyond quasicrystals. Les Ulis: Les Editions de Physique and Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Bancel, P. A., Heiney, P. A., Stephens, P. W., Goldman, A. I. & Horn, P. M. (1985). Structure of rapidly quenched Al–Mn. Phys. Rev. Lett. 54, 2422–2425. Bo¨hm, H. (1977). Eine erweiterte Theorie der Satellitenreflexe und die Bestimmung der modulierten Struktur des Natriumnitrits. Habilitation thesis, University of Munster. Cummins, H. Z. (1990). Experimental studies of structurally incommensurate crystal phases. Phys. Rep. 185, 211–409. ¨ ber die Verbreiterung der Debyelinien bei Dehlinger, U. (1927). U kaltbearbeiteten Metallen. Z. Kristallogr. 65, 615–631. Dra¨ger, J. & Mermin, N. D. (1996). Superspace groups without the embedding: the link between superspace and Fourier-space crystallography. Phys. Rev. Lett. 76, 1489–1492. Estermann, M., Haibach, T. & Steurer, W. (1994). Quasicrystal versus twinned approximant: a quantitative analysis with decagonal Al70 Co15 Ni15 . Philos. Mag. Lett. 70, 379–384. Goldman, A. I. & Kelton, K. F. (1993). Quasicrystals and crystalline approximants. Rev. Mod. Phys. 65, 213–230. Gouyet, J. F. (1996). Physics and fractal structures. Paris: Masson and Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Hausdorff, F. (1919). Dimension und aüsseres Mass. Math. Ann. 79, 157–179. Hermann, C. (1949). Kristallographie in Raümen beliebiger Dimensionszahl. I. Die Symmetrieoperationen. Acta Cryst. 2, 139–145. Ishihara, K. N. & Yamamoto, A. (1988). Penrose patterns and related structures. I. Superstructure and generalized Penrose patterns. Acta Cryst. A44, 508–516. Janner, A. (1992). Decagrammal symmetry of decagonal Al78 Mn22 quasicrystal. Acta Cryst. A48, 884–901. Janner, A. & Janssen, T. (1979). Superspace groups. Physica A, 99, 47–76. Janner, A. & Janssen, T. (1980a). Symmetry of incommensurate crystal phases. I. Commensurate basic structures. Acta Cryst. A36, 399–408. Janner, A. & Janssen, T. (1980b). Symmetry of incommensurate crystal phases. II. Incommensurate basic structures. Acta Cryst. A36, 408–415. Janner, A., Janssen, T. & de Wolff, P. M. (1983a). Bravais classes for incommensurate crystal phases. Acta Cryst. A39, 658–666. Janner, A., Janssen, T. & de Wolff, P. M. (1983b). Determination of the Bravais class for a number of incommensurate crystals. Acta Cryst. A39, 671–678. Janot, Chr. (1994). Quasicrystals. A primer. Oxford: Clarendon Press.

531

4. DIFFUSE SCATTERING AND RELATED TOPICS 4.6 (cont.) Janssen, T. (1986). Crystallography of quasicrystals. Acta Cryst. A42, 261–271. Janssen, T. (1988). Aperiodic crystals: a contradictio in terminis? Phys. Rep. 168, 55–113. Janssen, T. (1995). From quasiperiodic to more complex systems. In Beyond quasicrystals, edited by F. Axel & D. Gratias, pp. 75–140. Les Ulis: Les Editions de Physique and Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Janssen, T., Janner, A., Looijenga-Vos, A. & de Wolff, P. M. (1999). Incommensurate and commensurate modulated crystal structures. In International tables for crystallography, Vol. C, edited by A. J. C. Wilson and E. Prince, ch. 9.8. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Jaric, M. V. (1986). Diffraction from quasicrystals: geometric structure factor. Phys. Rev. B, 34, 4685–4698. Kalning, M., Kek, S., Burandt, B., Press, W. & Steurer, W. (1994). Examination of a multiple twinned periodic approximant of the decagonal phase Al70 Co15 Ni15 . J. Phys. Condens. Matter, 6, 6177–6187. Kato, K. (1990). Strukturverfeinerung des Kompositkristalls im mehrdimensionalen Raum. Acta Cryst. B46, 39–44. Kelton, K. F. (1995). Quasicrystals and related structures. In Intermetallic compounds. Principles and practice, Vol. 1, edited by J. H. Westbrook & R. L. Fleischer, pp. 453–491. Chichester: John Wiley & Sons. Korekawa, M. (1967). Theorie der Satellitenreflexe. Habilitation thesis, University of Munich. Lancon, F., Billard, L., Burkov, S. & DeBoissieu, M. (1994). On choosing a proper basis for determining structures of quasicrystals. J. Phys. I France, 4, 283–301. Levine, D. & Steinhardt, P. J. (1986). Quasicrystals. I. Definition and structure. Phys. Rev. B, 34, 596–616. Levitov, L. S. & Rhyner, J. (1988). Crystallography of quasicrystals; application to icosahedral symmetry. J. Phys. France, 49, 1835– 1849. Luck, J. M., Godrećhe, C., Janner, A. & Janssen, T. (1993). The nature of the atomic surfaces of quasiperiodic self-similar structures. J. Phys. A Math. Gen. 26, 1951–1999. Paciorek, W. A. & Chapuis, G. (1994). Generalized Bessel functions in incommensurate structure analysis. Acta Cryst. A50, 194–203. Pavlovitch, A. & Kleman, M. (1987). Generalized 2D Penrose tilings: structural properties. J. Phys. A Math. Gen. 20, 687–702. Penrose, R. (1974). The role of aesthetics in pure and applied mathematical research. Bull. Math. Appl. 10, 266–271. Penrose, R. (1979). Pentaplexity. A class of non-periodic tilings of the plane. Math. Intell. 2, 32–37. Petricek, V., Maly, K. & Cisarova, I. (1991). The computing system ‘JANA’. In Methods of structural analysis of modulated structures and quasicrystals, edited by J. M. Pe´rez-Mato, F. J. Zuniga & G. Madriaga, pp. 262–267. Singapore: World Scientific.

Petricek, V., Maly, K., Coppens, P., Bu, X., Cisarova, I. & FrostJensen, A. (1991). The description and analysis of composite crystals. Acta Cryst. A47, 210–216. Rabson, D. A., Mermin, N. D., Rokhsar, D. S. & Wright, D. C. (1991). The space groups of axial crystals and quasicrystals. Rev. Mod. Phys. 63, 699–733. Rokhsar, D. S., Wright, D. C. & Mermin, N. D. (1988). Scale equivalence of quasicrystallographic space groups. Phys. Rev. B, 37, 8145–8149. Senechal, M. (1995). Quasicrystals and geometry. Cambridge University Press. Shechtman, D., Blech, I., Gratias, D. & Cahn, J. W. (1984). Metallic phase with long-range orientational order and no translational symmetry. Phys. Rev. Lett. 53, 1951–1953. Smaalen, S. van (1991). Symmetry of composite crystals. Phys. Rev. B, 43, 11330–11341. Smaalen, S. van (1992). Superspace description of incommensurate intergrowth compounds and the application to inorganic misfit layer compounds. Mater. Sci. Forum, 100 & 101, 173–222. Smaalen, S. van (1995). Incommensurate crystal structures. Crystallogr. Rev. 4, 79–202. Socolar, J. E. S. & Steinhardt, P. J. (1986). Quasicrystals. II. Unitcell configurations. Phys. Rev. B, 34, 617–647. Steurer, W. (1990). The structure of quasicrystals. Z. Kristallogr. 190, 179–234. Steurer, W. (1995). Experimental aspects of the structure analysis of aperiodic materials. In Beyond quasicrystals, edited by F. Axel & D. Gratias, pp. 203–228. Les Ulis: Les Editions de Physique and Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Steurer, W. (1996). The structure of quasicrystals. In Physical metallurgy, Vol. I, edited by R. W. Cahn & P. Haasen, pp. 371– 411. Amsterdam: Elsevier. Willis, B. T. M. & Pryor, A. W. (1975). Thermal vibrations in crystallography. Cambridge University Press. Wolff, P. M. de (1974). The pseudo-symmetry of modulated crystal structures. Acta Cryst. A30, 777–785. Wolff, P. M. de (1977). Symmetry operations for displacively modulated structures. Acta Cryst. A33, 493–497. Wolff, P. M. de (1984). Dualistic interpretation of the symmetry of incommensurate structures. Acta Cryst. A40, 34–42. Wolff, P. M. de, Janssen, T. & Janner, A. (1981). The superspace groups for incommensurate crystal structures with a onedimensional modulation. Acta Cryst. A37, 625–636. Yamamoto, A. (1982). Structure factor of modulated crystal structures. Acta Cryst. A38, 87–92. Yamamoto, A. (1992a). Unified setting and symbols of superspace groups for composite crystals. Acta Cryst. A48, 476–483. Yamamoto, A. (1992b). Ideal structure of icosahedral Al–Cu–Li quasicrystals. Phys. Rev. B, 45, 5217–5227. Zobetz, E. (1993). One-dimensional quasilattices: fractally shaped atomic surfaces and homometry. Acta Cryst. A49, 667–676.

532

references


5.1. Dynamical theory of X-ray diffraction BY A. AUTHIER

5.1.1. Introduction The first experiment on X-ray diffraction by a crystal was performed by W. Friedrich, P. Knipping and M. von Laue in 1912 and Bragg’s law was derived in 1913 (Bragg, 1913). Geometrical and dynamical theories for the intensities of the diffracted X-rays were developed by Darwin (1914a,b). His dynamical theory took into account the interaction of X-rays with matter by solving recurrence equations that describe the balance of partially transmitted and partially reflected amplitudes at each lattice plane. This is the first form of the dynamical theory of X-ray diffraction. It gives correct expressions for the reflected intensities and was extended to the absorbing-crystal case by Prins (1930). A second form of dynamical theory was introduced by Ewald (1917) as a continuation of his previous work on the diffraction of optical waves by crystals. He took into account the interaction of X-rays with matter by considering the crystal to be a periodic distribution of dipoles which were excited by the incident wave. This theory also gives the correct expressions for the reflected and transmitted intensities, and it introduces the fundamental notion of a wavefield, which is necessary to understand the propagation of X-rays in perfect or deformed crystals. Ewald’s theory was later modified by von Laue (1931), who showed that the interaction could be described by solving Maxwell’s equations in a medium with a continuous, triply periodic distribution of dielectric susceptibility. It is this form which is most widely used today and which will be presented in this chapter. The geometrical (or kinematical) theory, on the other hand, considers that each photon is scattered only once and that the interaction of X-rays with matter is so small it can be neglected. It can therefore be assumed that the amplitude incident on every diffraction centre inside the crystal is the same. The total diffracted amplitude is then simply obtained by adding the individual amplitudes diffracted by each diffracting centre, taking into account only the geometrical phase differences between them and neglecting the interaction of the radiation with matter. The result is that the distribution of diffracted amplitudes in reciprocal space is the Fourier transform of the distribution of diffracting centres in physical space. Following von Laue (1960), the expression geometrical theory will be used throughout this chapter when referring to these geometrical phase differences. The first experimentally measured reflected intensities were not in agreement with the theoretical values obtained with the more rigorous dynamical theory, but rather with the simpler geometrical theory. The integrated reflected intensities calculated using geometrical theory are proportional to the square of the structure factor, while the corresponding expressions calculated using dynamical theory for an infinite perfect crystal are proportional to the modulus of the structure factor. The integrated intensity calculated by geometrical theory is also proportional to the volume of the crystal bathed in the incident beam. This is due to the fact that one neglects the decrease of the incident amplitude as it progresses through the crystal and a fraction of it is scattered away. According to geometrical theory, the diffracted intensity would therefore increase to infinity if the volume of the crystal was increased to infinity, which is of course absurd. The theory only works because the strength of the interaction is very weak and if it is applied to very small crystals. How small will be shown quantitatively in Sections 5.1.6.5 and 5.1.7.2. Darwin (1922) showed that it can also be applied to large imperfect crystals. This is done using the model of mosaic crystals (Bragg et al., 1926). For perfect or nearly perfect crystals, dynamical theory should be used. Geometrical theory presents another drawback: it gives no indication as to the phase of

the reflected wave. This is due to the fact that it is based on the Fourier transform of the electron density limited by the external shape of the crystal. This is not important when one is only interested in measuring the reflected intensities. For any problem where the phase is important, as is the case for multiple reflections, interference between coherent blocks, standing waves etc., dynamical theory should be used, even for thin or imperfect crystals. Until the 1940s, the applications of dynamical theory were essentially intensity measurements. From the 1950s to the 1970s, applications were related to the properties (absorption, interference, propagation) of wavefields in perfect or nearly perfect crystals: anomalous transmission, diffraction of spherical waves, interpretation of images on X-ray topographs, accurate measurement of form factors, lattice-parameter mapping. In recent years, they have been concerned mainly with crystal optics, focusing and the design of monochromators for synchrotron radiation [see, for instance, Batterman & Bilderback (1991)], the location of atoms at crystal surfaces and interfaces using the standing-waves method [see, for instance, the reviews by Authier (1989) and Zegenhagen (1993)], attempts to determine phases using multiple reflections [see, for instance, Chang (1987) and Hu¨mmer & Weckert (1995)], characterization of the crystal perfection of epilayers and superlattices by high-resolution diffractometry [see, for instance, Tanner (1990) and Fewster (1993)], etc. For reviews of dynamical theory, see Zachariasen (1945), von Laue (1960), James (1963), Batterman & Cole (1964), Authier (1970), Kato (1974), Bru¨mmer & Stephanik (1976), Pinsker (1978), Authier & Malgrange (1998), and Authier (2001). Topography is described in Chapter 2.7 of IT C (1999), in Tanner (1976) and in Tanner & Bowen (1992). For the use of Bragg-angle measurements for accurate lattice-parameter mapping, see Hart (1981). A reminder of some basic concepts in electrodynamics is given in Section A5.1.1.1 of the Appendix. 5.1.2. Fundamentals of plane-wave dynamical theory 5.1.2.1. Propagation equation The wavefunction associated with an electron or a neutron beam is scalar while an electromagnetic wave is a vector wave. When propagating in a medium, these waves are solutions of a propagation equation. For electrons and neutrons, this is Schro¨dinger’s equation, which can be rewritten as 42 k 2 1 0,

where k 1= is the wavenumber in a vacuum, '=W (' is the potential in the crystal and W is the accelerating voltage) in the case of electron diffraction and 2mV r=h2 k 2 [V r is the Fermi pseudo-potential and h is Planck’s constant] in the case of neutron diffraction. The dynamical theory of electron diffraction is treated in Chapter 5.2 [note that a different convention is used in Chapter 5.2 for the scalar wavenumber: k 2=; compare, for example, equation (5.2.2.1) and its equivalent, equation (5.1.2.1)] and the dynamical theory of neutron diffraction is treated in Chapter 5.3. In the case of X-rays, the propagation equation is deduced from Maxwell’s equations after neglecting the interaction with protons. Following von Laue (1931, 1960), it is assumed that the positive charge of the nuclei is distributed in such a way that the medium is everywhere locally neutral and that there is no current. As a first approximation, magnetic interaction, which is very weak, is not taken into account in this review. The propagation equation is


5:1:2:1

5.1. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF X-RAY DIFFRACTION derived in Section A5.1.1.2 of the Appendix. Expressed in terms of the local electric displacement, Dr, it is given for monochromatic waves by Dr curl curl Dr 42 k 2 Dr 0:

5:1:2:2

The interaction of X-rays with matter is characterized in equation (5.1.2.2) by the parameter , which is the dielectric susceptibility. It is classically related to the electron density r by r R2 r=,

5:1:2:3

where R 2:81794 10 6 nm is the classical radius of the electron [see equation (A5.1.1.2) in Section A5.1.1.2 of the Appendix]. The dielectric susceptibility, being proportional to the electron density, is triply periodic in a crystal. It can therefore be expanded in Fourier series: P h exp2ih r, 5:1:2:4 h

where h is a reciprocal-lattice vector and the summation is extended over all reciprocal-lattice vectors. The sign convention adopted here for Fourier expansions of periodic functions is the standard crystallographic sign convention defined in Section 2.5.2.3. The relative orientations of wavevectors and reciprocal-lattice vectors are defined in Fig. 5.1.2.1, which represents schematically a Bragg reflection in direct and reciprocal space (Figs. 5.1.2.1a and 5.1.2.1b, respectively). The coefficients h of the Fourier expansion of the dielectric susceptibility are related to the usual structure factor Fh by h R2 Fh =V ,

of origin of the unit cell. The Fourier coefficients h are dimensionless. Their order of magnitude varies from 10 5 to 10 7 depending on the wavelength and the structure factor. For example, h is 9:24 10 6 for the 220 reflection of silicon for Cu K radiation. In an absorbing crystal, absorption is taken into account phenomenologically through the imaginary parts of the index of refraction and of the wavevectors. The dielectric susceptibility is written r ii : 5:1:2:7 The real and imaginary parts of the susceptibility are triply periodic in a crystalline medium and can be expanded in a Fourier series, P r rh exp2ih r h 5:1:2:8 P i ih exp2ih r, h

where rh R2 Frh =V , ih R2 Fih =V and Frh

j

5:1:2:6

fj is the form factor of atom j, fj0 and fj00 are the dispersion corrections [see, for instance, IT C, Section 4.2.6] and exp Mj is the Debye– Waller factor. The summation is over all the atoms in the unit cell. The phase 'h of the structure factor depends of course on the choice

2ih rj 5:1:2:10a

2ih rj

j

jFih j expi'ih :

5:1:2:10b

It is important to note that

j

jFh j expi'h :

fj fj0 exp Mj

jFrh j expi'rh , P Fih fj00 exp Mj

5:1:2:5

where V is the volume of the unit cell and the structure factor is given by P Fh fj fj0 ifj00 exp Mj 2ih rj

P

5:1:2:9

Frh Frh and Fih Fih but that Fh 6 Fh ,

5:1:2:11

where f is the imaginary conjugate of f. The index of refraction of the medium for X-rays is n 1 ro =2 1

R2 Fo =2V ,

5:1:2:12

where Fo =V is the number of electrons per unit volume. This index is very slightly smaller than one. It is for this reason that specular reflection of X-rays takes place at grazing angles. From the value of the critical angle, ro 1=2 , the electron density Fo =V of a material can be determined. The linear absorption coefficient is o 2kio 2RFio =V : For example, it is 143:2 cm

1

5:1:2:13

for silicon and Cu K radiation.

5.1.2.2. Wavefields

Fig. 5.1.2.1. Bragg reflection. (a) Direct space. Bragg reflection of a wave of wavevector Ko incident on a set of lattice planes of spacing d. The reflected wavevector is Kh . Bragg’s law 2d sin n can also be written 2dhkl sin , where dhkl d=n 1=OH 1=h is the inverse of the length of the corresponding reciprocal-lattice vector OH h (see part b). (b) Reciprocal space. P is the tie point of the wavefield consisting of the incident wave Ko OP and the reflected wave Kh HP. Note that the wavevectors are oriented towards the tie point.

The notion of a wavefield, introduced by Ewald (1917), is one of the most fundamental concepts in dynamical theory. It results from the fact that since the propagation equation (5.1.2.2) is a secondorder partial differential equation with a periodic interaction coefficient, its solution has the same periodicity, P D exp 2iKo r Dh exp2ih r, 5:1:2:14 h

where the summation is over all reciprocal-lattice vectors h. Equation (5.1.2.14) can also be written P 5:1:2:15 D Dh exp 2iKh r, h

where

535

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS Kh Ko h: 5:1:2:16 Expression (5.1.2.15) shows that the solution of the propagation equation can be interpreted as an infinite sum of plane waves with amplitudes Dh and wavevectors Kh . This sum is a wavefield, or Ewald wave. The same expression is used to describe the propagation of any wave in a periodic medium, such as phonons or electrons in a solid. Expression (5.1.2.14) was later called a Bloch wave by solid-state physicists. The wavevectors in a wavefield are deduced from one another by translations of the reciprocal lattice [expression (5.1.2.16)]. They can be represented geometrically as shown in Fig. 5.1.2.1(b). The wavevectors Ko OP; Kh HP are drawn away from reciprocallattice points. Their common extremity, P, called the tie point by Ewald, characterizes the wavefield. In an absorbing crystal, wavevectors have an imaginary part, Ko Kor iKoi ; Kh Khr iKhi , and (5.1.2.16) shows that all wavevectors have the same imaginary part, Koi Khi ,

5:1:2:17

and therefore undergo the same absorption. This is one of the most important properties of wavefields. 5.1.2.3. Boundary conditions at the entrance surface The choice of the ‘o’ component of expansion (5.1.2.15) is arbitrary in an infinite medium. In a semi-infinite medium where the waves are created at the interface with a vacuum or air by an incident plane wave with wavevector Ka (using von Laue’s o notation), the choice of Ko is determined by the boundary conditions. This condition for wavevectors at an interface demands that their tangential components should be continuous across the boundary, in agreement with Descartes–Snell’s law. This condition is satisfied when the difference between the wavevectors on each side of the interface is parallel to the normal to the interface. This is shown geometrically in Fig. 5.1.2.2 and formally in (5.1.2.18): Ko

Ka o OP

OM MP n,

5:1:2:18

where n is a unit vector normal to the crystal surface, oriented towards the inside of the crystal. There is no absorption in a vacuum and the incident wavevector Ka o is real. Equation (5.1.2.18) shows that it is the component normal to the interface of wavevector Ko which has an imaginary

part, Koi IMP n n=4 o ,

5:1:2:19

where I f is the imaginary part of f, o cosn so and so is a unit vector in the incident direction. When there is more than one wave in the wavefield, the effective absorption coefficient can differ significantly from the normal value, o , given by (5.1.2.13) – see Section 5.1.5. 5.1.2.4. Fundamental equations of dynamical theory In order to obtain the solution of dynamical theory, one inserts expansions (5.1.2.15) and (5.1.2.4) into the propagation equation (5.1.2.2). This leads to an equation with an infinite sum of terms. It is shown to be equivalent to an infinite system of linear equations which are the fundamental equations of dynamical theory. Only those terms in (5.1.2.15) whose wavevector magnitudes Kh are very close to the vacuum value, k, have a non-negligible amplitude. These wavevectors are associated with reciprocal-lattice points that lie very close to the Ewald sphere. Far from any Bragg reflection, their number is equal to 1 and a single plane wave propagates through the medium. In general, for X-rays, there are only two reciprocal-lattice points on the Ewald sphere. This is the so-called two-beam case to which this treatment is limited. There are, however, many instances where several reciprocal-lattice points lie simultaneously on the Ewald sphere. This corresponds to the manybeam case which has interesting applications for the determination of phases of reflections [see, for instance, Chang (1987) and Hu¨mmer & Weckert (1995)]. On the other hand, for electrons, there are in general many reciprocal-lattice points close to the Ewald sphere and many wavefields are excited simultaneously (see Chapter 5.2). In the two-beam case, for reflections that are not highly asymmetric and for Bragg angles that are not close to =2, the fundamental equations of dynamical theory reduce to 2Xo Do

kCh Dh 0

kCh Do 2Xh Dh 0,

5:1:2:20

where C 1 if Dh is normal to the Ko , Kh plane and C cos 2 if Dh lies in the plane; this is due to the fact that the amplitude with which electromagnetic radiation is scattered is proportional to the sine of the angle between the direction of the electric vector of the incident radiation and the direction of scattering (see, for instance, IT C, Section 6.2.2). The polarization of an electromagnetic wave is classically related to the orientation of the electric vector; in dynamical theory it is that of the electric displacement which is considered (see Section A5.1.1.3 of the Appendix). The system (5.1.2.20) is therefore a system of four equations which admits four solutions, two for each direction of polarization. In the non-absorbing case, to a very good approximation, Xo Ko

nk,

Xh Kh

nk:

5:1:2:21

In the case of an absorbing crystal, Xo and Kh are complex. Equation (5.1.5.2) gives the full expression for Xo . 5.1.2.5. Dispersion surface

Fig. 5.1.2.2. Boundary condition for wavevectors at the entrance surface of the crystal.

The fundamental equations (5.1.2.20) of dynamical theory are a set of linear homogeneous equations whose unknowns are the amplitudes of the various waves which make up a wavefield. For the solution to be non-trivial, the determinant of the set must be set equal to zero. This provides a secular equation relating the magnitudes of the wavevectors of a given wavefield. This equation is that of the locus of the tie points of all the wavefields that may

536

5.1. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF X-RAY DIFFRACTION

Fig. 5.1.2.3. Intersection of the dispersion surface with the plane of incidence. The dispersion surface is a connecting surface between the two spheres centred at reciprocal-lattice points O and H and with radius nk. Lo is the Lorentz point.

propagate in the crystal with a given frequency. This locus is called the dispersion surface. It is a constant-energy surface and is the equivalent of the index surface in optics. It is the X-ray analogue of the constant-energy surfaces known as Fermi surfaces in the electron band theory of solids. In the two-beam case, the dispersion surface is a surface of revolution around the diffraction vector OH. It is made from two spheres and a connecting surface between them. The two spheres are centred at O and H and have the same radius, nk. Fig. 5.1.2.3 shows the intersection of the dispersion surface with a plane passing through OH. When the tie point lies on one of the two spheres, far from their intersection, only one wavefield propagates inside the crystal. When it lies on the connecting surface, two waves are excited simultaneously. The equation of this surface is obtained by equating to zero the determinant of system (5.1.2.20): Xo Xh k 2 C 2 h h =4:

5:1:2:22

Equations (5.1.2.21) show that, in the zero-absorption case, Xo and Xh are to be interpreted as the distances of the tie point P from the spheres centred at O and H, respectively. From (5.1.2.20) it can be seen that they are of the order of the vacuum wavenumber times the Fourier coefficient of the dielectric susceptibility, that is five or six orders of magnitude smaller than k. The two spheres can therefore be replaced by their tangential planes. Equation (5.1.2.22) shows that the product of the distances of the tie point from these planes is constant. The intersection of the dispersion surface with the plane passing through OH is therefore a hyperbola (Fig. 5.1.2.4) whose diameter [using (5.1.2.5) and (5.1.2.22)] is Ao2 Ao1 jCjRFh Fh 1=2 =V cos :

5:1:2:23

It can be noted that the larger the diameter of the dispersion surface, the larger the structure factor, that is, the stronger the interaction of the waves with the matter. When the polarization is parallel to the plane of incidence C cos 2, the interaction is weaker. The asymptotes To and Th to the hyperbola are tangents to the circles centred at O and H, respectively. Their intersection, Lo , is called the Lorentz point (Fig. 5.1.2.4). A wavefield propagating in the crystal is characterized by a tie point P on the dispersion surface and two waves with wavevectors Ko OP and Kh HP, respectively. The ratio, , of their amplitudes Dh and Do is given by means of (5.1.2.20):

Dh 2Xo 2VXo : Do kCh RCFh

5:1:2:24

The hyperbola has two branches, 1 and 2, for each direction of polarization, that is, for C 1 or cos 2 (Fig. 5.1.2.5). Branch 2 is

Fig. 5.1.2.4. Intersection of the dispersion surface with the plane of incidence shown in greater detail. The Lorentz point Lo is far away from the nodes O and H of the reciprocal lattice: OLo HLo 1= is about 105 to 106 times larger than the diameter Ao1 Ao2 of the dispersion surface.

the one situated on the same side of the asymptotes as the reciprocal-lattice points O and H. Given the orientation of the wavevectors, which has been chosen away from the reciprocallattice points (Fig. 5.1.2.1b), the coordinates of the tie point, Xo and Xh , are positive for branch 1 and negative for branch 2. The phase of is therefore equal to 'h and to 'h for the two branches, respectively, where 'h is the phase of the structure factor [equation (5.1.2.6)]. This difference of between the two branches has important consequences for the properties of the wavefields. As mentioned above, owing to absorption, wavevectors are actually complex and so is the dispersion surface.

5.1.2.6. Propagation direction The energy of all the waves in a given wavefield propagates in a common direction, which is obtained by calculating either the group velocity or the Poynting vector [see Section A5.1.1.4, equation (A5.1.1.8) of the Appendix]. It can be shown that, averaged over time and the unit cell, the Poynting vector of a wavefield is h i S c="0 exp4Koi r jDo j2 so jDh j2 sh , 5:1:2:25 where so and sh are unit vectors in the Ko and Kh directions, respectively, c is the velocity of light and "0 is the dielectric permittivity of a vacuum. This result was first shown by von Laue (1952) in the two-beam case and was generalized to the n-beam case by Kato (1958). From (5.1.2.25) and equation (5.1.2.22) of the dispersion surface, it can be shown that the propagation direction of the wavefield lies along the normal to the dispersion surface at the tie point (Fig. 5.1.2.5). This result is also obtained by considering the group velocity of the wavefield (Ewald, 1958; Wagner, 1959). The angle

537

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS Bragg’s condition is exactly satisfied according to the geometrical theory of diffraction when M lies at La . The departure from Bragg’s incidence of an incident wave is defined as the angle between the corresponding wavevectors OM and OLa . As is very small compared to the Bragg angle in the general case of X-rays or neutrons, one may write Ka o OM OLa La M, La M=k:

5:1:3:1

The tangent To0 is oriented in such a way that is negative when the angle of incidence is smaller than the Bragg angle.

Fig. 5.1.2.5. Dispersion surface for the two states of polarization. Solid curve: polarization normal to the plane of incidence C 1; broken curve: polarization parallel to the plane of incidence C cos 2. The direction of propagation of the energy of the wavefields is along the Poynting vector, S, normal to the dispersion surface.

between the propagation direction and the lattice planes is given by h i tan 1 jj2 =1 jj2 tan : 5:1:2:26 It should be noted that the propagation direction varies between Ko and Kh for both branches of the dispersion surface.

5.1.3.2. Transmission and reflection geometries The boundary condition for the continuity of the tangential component of the wavevectors is applied by drawing from M a line, Mz, parallel to the normal n to the crystal surface. The tie points of the wavefields excited in the crystal by the incident wave are at the intersections of this line with the dispersion surface. Two different situations may occur: (a) Transmission, or Laue case (Fig. 5.1.3.2). The normal to the crystal surface drawn from M intersects both branches of the dispersion surface (Fig. 5.1.3.2a). The reflected wave is then directed towards the inside of the crystal (Fig. 5.1.3.2b). Let o and

h be the cosines of the angles between the normal to the crystal surface, n, and the incident and reflected directions, respectively:

5.1.3. Solutions of plane-wave dynamical theory 5.1.3.1. Departure from Bragg’s law of the incident wave The wavefields excited in the crystal by the incident wave are determined by applying the boundary condition mentioned above for the continuity of the tangential component of the wavevectors (Section 5.1.2.3). Waves propagating in a vacuum have wavenumber k 1=. Depending on whether they propagate in the incident or in the reflected direction, the common extremity, M, of their wavevectors a

OM Koa and HM Kh

lies on spheres of radius k and centred at O and H, respectively. The intersections of these spheres with the plane of incidence are two circles which can be approximated by their tangents To0 and Th0 at their intersection point, La , or Laue point (Fig. 5.1.3.1).

Fig. 5.1.3.1. Departure from Bragg’s law of an incident wave.

Fig. 5.1.3.2. Transmission, or Laue, geometry. (a) Reciprocal space; (b) direct space.

538


Fig. 5.1.3.4. Boundary conditions at the entrance surface for transmission geometry.

In the Bragg case, the asymmetry ratio is negative and o is never equal to zero. This difference in Bragg angle between the two theories is due to the refraction effect, which is neglected in geometrical theory. In the Laue case, o is equal to zero for symmetric reflections 1. 5.1.3.4. Deviation parameter The solutions of dynamical theory are best described by introducing a reduced parameter called the deviation parameter,

o =,

5:1:3:5

where Fig. 5.1.3.3. Reflection, or Bragg, geometry. (a) Reciprocal space; (b) direct space.

o cosn, so ; h cosn, sh :

5:1:3:2

It will be noted that they are both positive, as is their ratio,

h = o :

5:1:3:3

This is the asymmetry ratio, which is very important since the width of the rocking curve is proportional to its square root [equation (5.1.3.6)]. (b) Reflection, or Bragg case (Fig. 5.1.3.3). In this case there are three possible situations: the normal to the crystal surface drawn from M intersects either branch 1 or branch 2 of the dispersion surface, or the intersection points are imaginary (Fig. 5.1.3.3a). The reflected wave is directed towards the outside of the crystal (Fig. 5.1.3.3b). The cosines defined by (5.1.3.2) are now positive for o and negative for h . The asymmetry factor is therefore also negative.

It will be apparent from the equations given later that the incident wavevector corresponding to the middle of the reflection domain is, in both cases, OI, where I is the intersection of the normal to the crystal surface drawn from the Lorentz point, Lo , with To0 (Figs. 5.1.3.4 and 5.1.3.5), while, according to Bragg’s law, it should be OLa . The angle between the incident wavevectors OLa and OI, corresponding to the middle of the reflecting domain according to the geometrical and dynamical theories, respectively, is

=2V sin 2:

5:1:3:6

whose real part is equal to the half width of the rocking curve (Sections 5.1.6 and 5.1.7). The width 2 of the rocking curve is sometimes called the Darwin width. The definition (5.1.3.5) of the deviation parameter is independent of the geometrical situation (reflection or transmission case); this is not followed by some authors. The present convention has the advantage of being quite general. In an absorbing crystal, , o and are complex, and it is the real part, or , of o which has the geometrical interpretation given in Section 5.1.3.3. One obtains r ii r or =r ; i Ar B A tan n h io B io = jCjjh h j1=2 cos 1

5:1:3:7

=2j j1=2 ,

where is the phase angle of h h 1=2 [or that of Fh Fh 1=2 ]. 5.1.3.5. Pendello¨sung and extinction distances

5.1.3.3. Middle of the reflection domain

o La I=k R2 Fo 1

R2 jCjj jFh Fh 1=2 =V sin 2,

5:1:3:4

Let

o V o j h j1=2 RjCjFh Fh 1=2 :

5:1:3:8

This length plays a very important role in the dynamical theory of diffraction by both perfect and deformed crystals. For example, it is 15.3 mm for the 220 reflection of silicon, with Mo K radiation and a symmetric reflection. In transmission geometry, it gives the period of the interference between the two excited wavefields which constitutes the Pendello¨sung effect first described by Ewald (1917) (see Section

539

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS

Fig. 5.1.3.5. Boundary conditions at the entrance surface for reflection geometry. (a) Reciprocal space; (b) direct space.

5.1.6.3); o in this case is called the Pendello¨sung distance, denoted L hereafter. Its geometrical interpretation, in the zero-absorption case, is the inverse of the diameter A2 A1 of the dispersion surface in a direction defined by the cosines h and o with respect to the reflected and incident directions, respectively (Fig. 5.1.3.4). It reduces to the inverse of Ao2 Ao1 (5.1.2.23) in the symmetric case. In reflection geometry, it gives the absorption distance in the total-reflection domain and is called the extinction distance, denoted B (see Section 5.1.7.1). Its geometrical interpretation in the zeroabsorption case is the inverse of the length Io1 Ih1 Ih2 Io2 , Fig. 5.1.3.5. In a deformed crystal, if distortions are of the order of the width of the rocking curve over a distance o , the crystal is considered to be slightly deformed, and ray theory (Penning & Polder, 1961; Kato, 1963, 1964a,b) can be used to describe the propagation of wavefields. If the distortions are larger, new wavefields may be generated by interbranch scattering (Authier & Balibar, 1970) and generalized dynamical diffraction theory such as that developed by Takagi (1962, 1969) should be used. Using (5.1.3.8), expressions (5.1.3.5) and (5.1.3.6) can be rewritten in the very useful form: o o sin 2=j h j, j h j=o sin 2:

5:1:3:9

The order of magnitude of the Darwin width 2 ranges from a fraction of a second of an arc to ten or more seconds, and increases with increasing wavelength and increasing structure factor. For example, for the 220 reflection of silicon and Cu K radiation, it is 5.2 seconds. 5.1.3.6. Solution of the dynamical theory The coordinates of the tie points excited by the incident wave are obtained by looking for the intersection of the dispersion surface, (5.1.2.22), with the normal Mz to the crystal surface (Figs. 5.1.3.4 and 5.1.3.5). The ratio of the amplitudes of the waves of the

corresponding wavefields is related to these coordinates by (5.1.2.24) and is found to be j Dhj =Doj SCS h Fh Fh 1=2 =Fh n 1=2 o 2 S h =j j1=2 ,

5:1:3:10

where the plus sign corresponds to a tie point on branch 1 j 1 and the minus sign to a tie point on branch 2 j 2, and S h is the sign of h (+1 in transmission geometry, 1 in reflection geometry). 5.1.3.7. Geometrical interpretation of the solution in the zero-absorption case 5.1.3.7.1. Transmission geometry In this case (Fig. 5.1.3.4) S h is +1 and (5.1.3.10) may be written h i 5:1:3:11 j SC 2 11=2 = 1=2 : Let A1 and A2 be the intersections of the normal to the crystal surface drawn from the Lorentz point Lo with the two branches of the dispersion surface (Fig. 5.1.3.4). From Sections 5.1.3.3 and 5.1.3.4, they are the tie points excited for 0 and correspond to the middle of the reflection domain. Let us further consider the tangents to the dispersion surface at A1 and A2 and let Io1 , Io2 and Ih1 , Ih2 be their intersections with To and Th , respectively. It can be shown that Io1 Ih2 and Io2 Ih1 intersect the dispersion surface at the tie points excited for 1 and 1, respectively, and that the Pendello¨sung distance L 1=A2 A1 , the width of the rocking curve 2 Io1 Io2 =k and the deviation parameter Mo Mh =A2 A1 , where Mo and Mh are the intersections of the normal to the crystal surface drawn from the extremity of any incident wavevector OM with To and Th , respectively.

540

5.1. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF X-RAY DIFFRACTION 5.1.3.7.2. Reflection geometry

5.1.5. Anomalous absorption

In this case (Fig. 5.1.3.5) S h is now 1 and (5.1.3.10) may be written h i 5:1:3:12 j SC 2 11=2 =j j1=2 : Now, let I1 and I2 be the points of the dispersion surface where the tangent is parallel to the normal to the crystal surface, and further let Io1 , Ih1 , I 0 and Io2 , Ih2 , I 00 be the intersections of these two tangents with To , Th and To0 , respectively. For an incident wave of wavevector OM where M lies between I0 and I00 , the normal to the crystal surface drawn from M has no real intersection with the dispersion surface and I 0 I 00 defines the total-reflection domain. The tie points I1 and I2 correspond to 1 and 1, respectively, the extinction distance L 1=Io1 Ih1 , the width of the totalreflection domain 2 Io1 Io2 =k I 0 I 00 =k and the deviation parameter Mo Mh =Io1 Ih1 , where Mo and Mh are the intersections with To and Th of the normal to the crystal surface drawn from the extremity of any incident wavevector OM. 5.1.4. Standing waves The various waves in a wavefield are coherent and interfere. In the two-beam case, the intensity of the wavefield, using (5.1.2.14) and (5.1.2.24), is

It was shown in Section 5.1.2.2 that the wavevectors of a given wavefield all have the same imaginary part (5.1.2.17) and therefore the same absorption coefficient (5.1.2.19). Borrmann (1950, 1954) showed that this coefficient is much smaller than the normal one o for wavefields whose tie points lie on branch 1 of the dispersion surface and much larger for wavefields whose tie points lie on branch 2. The former case corresponds to the anomalous transmission effect, or Borrmann effect. As in favourable cases the minimum absorption coefficient may be as low as a few per cent of o , this effect is very important from both a fundamental and a practical point of view. The physical interpretation of the Borrmann effect is to be found in the standing waves described in Section 5.1.4. When the nodes of the electric field lie on the planes corresponding to the maxima of the hkl component of the electron density, the wavefields are absorbed anomalously less than when there is no diffraction. Just the opposite occurs for branch 2 wavefields, whose anti-nodes lie on the maxima of the electron density and which are absorbed more than normal. The effective absorption coefficient is related to the imaginary part of the wavevectors through (5.1.2.19), 4 o Koi , and to the imaginary part of the ratio of the amplitude of the reflected to the incident wave through o

jDj2 jDo j2 exp4Koi r 1 jj2 2Cjj cos 2h r ,

5:1:4:1

5:1:5:1

where Xoi is the imaginary part of Xo , which, using (5.1.2.24) and (5.1.3.10), is given by

where is the phase of , jj expi :

4Xoi ,

Xo RjCjS h Fh Fh 1=2

i h f 2 S h 1=2 g 2V j j1=2 :

5:1:4:2

Equation (5.1.4.1) shows that the interference between the two waves is the origin of standing waves. The corresponding nodes lie on planes such that h r is a constant. These planes are therefore parallel to the diffraction planes and their periodicity is equal to dhkl (defined in the caption for Fig. 5.1.2.1a). Their position within the unit cell is given by the value of the phase . In the Laue case, is equal to 'h for branch 1 and to 'h for branch 2, where 'h is the phase of the structure factor, (5.1.2.6). This means that the nodes of standing waves lie on the maxima of the hkl Fourier component of the electron density for branch 1 while the anti-nodes lie on the maxima for branch 2. In the Bragg case, varies continuously from 'h to 'h as the angle of incidence is varied from the low-angle side to the highangle side of the reflection domain by rocking the crystal. The nodes lie on the maxima of the hkl Fourier components of the electron density on the low-angle side of the rocking curve. As the crystal is rocked, they are progressively shifted by half a lattice spacing until the anti-nodes lie on the maxima of the electron density on the highangle side of the rocking curve. Standing waves are the origin of the phenomenon of anomalous absorption, which is one of the specific properties of wavefields (Section 5.1.5). Anomalous scattering is also used for the location of atoms in the unit cell at the vicinity of the crystal surface: when X-rays are absorbed, fluorescent radiation and photoelectrons are emitted. Detection of this emission for a known angular position of the crystal with respect to the rocking curve and therefore for a known value of the phase enables the emitting atom within the unit cell to be located. The principle of this method is due to Batterman (1964, 1969). For reviews, see Golovchenko et al. (1982), Materlik & Zegenhagen (1984), Kovalchuk & Kohn (1986), Bedzyk (1988), Authier (1989), and Zegenhagen (1993).

5:1:5:2

Taking the upper sign (+) for the term corresponds to tie points on branch 1 and taking the lower sign ( ) corresponds to tie points on branch 2. The calculation of the imaginary part Xoi is different in the Laue and in the Bragg cases. In the former case, the imaginary part of 2 11=2 is small and can be approximated while in the latter, the imaginary part of 2 11=2 is large when the real part of the deviation parameter, r , lies between 1 and 1, and cannot be calculated using the same approximation.

5.1.6. Intensities of plane waves in transmission geometry 5.1.6.1. Absorption coefficient In transmission geometry, the imaginary part of Xo is small and, using a first-order approximation for the expansion of 2 11=2 , (5.1.5.1) and (5.1.5.2), the effective absorption coefficient in the absorption case is j o 121 1 :

r =21

1 jCj 1 1=2 jFih =Fio j cos ' r2 11=2

, 5:1:6:1

where ' 'rh 'ih is the phase difference between Frh and Fih [equation (5.1.2.10)], the upper sign ( ) for the term corresponds to branch 1 and the lower sign (+) corresponds to branch 2 of the dispersion surface. In the symmetric Laue case ( 1, reflecting planes normal to the crystal surface), equation (5.1.6.1) reduces to

541


Fig. 5.1.6.1. Variation of the effective absorption with the deviation parameter in the transmission case for the 400 reflection of GaAs using Cu K radiation. Solid curve: branch 1; broken curve: branch 2.

" j o 1

jCjjFih =Fio j cos ' r2 11=2

# :

Fig. 5.1.6.1 shows the variations of the effective absorption coefficient j with r for wavefields belonging to branches 1 and 2 in the case of the 400 reflection of GaAs with Cu K radiation. It can be seen that for r 0 the absorption coefficient for branch 1 becomes significantly smaller than the normal absorption coefficient, o . The minimum absorption coefficient, o 1 jCFih =Fio j cos ', depends on the nature of the reflection through the structure factor and on the temperature through the Debye–Waller factor included in Fih [equation (5.1.2.10b)] (Ohtsuki, 1964, 1965). For instance, in diamond-type structures, it is smaller for reflections with even indices than for reflections with odd indices. The influence of temperature is very important when jFih =Fio j is close to one; for example, for germanium 220 and Mo K radiation, the minimum absorption coefficient at 5 K is reduced to about 1% of its normal value, o (Ludewig, 1969). 5.1.6.2. Boundary conditions for the amplitudes at the entrance surface – intensities of the reflected and refracted waves

0 Dh1 Dh2 ,

h i2 2 2 1=2 jDoj j2 jDa r o j exp j z= o 1 r 41 r2 1 ,

5:1:6:3

2 1 2 jDhj j2 jDa o j exp j z= o jFh =Fh j4 1 r ;

Let us consider an infinite plane wave incident on a crystal plane surface of infinite lateral extension. As has been shown in Section 5.1.3, two wavefields are excited in the crystal, with tie points P1 and P2 , and amplitudes Do1 , Dh1 and Do2 , Dh2 , respectively. Maxwell’s boundary conditions (see Section A5.1.1.2 of the Appendix) imply continuity of the tangential component of the electric field and of the normal component of the electric displacement across the boundary. Because the index of refraction is so close to unity, one can assume to a very good approximation that there is continuity of the three components of both the electric field and the electric displacement. As a consequence, it can easily be shown that, along the entrance surface, for all components of the electric displacement Da o Do1 Do2

Fig. 5.1.6.2. Variation of the intensities of the reflected and refracted waves in an absorbing crystal for the 220 reflection of Si using Mo K radiation, t 1 mm t 1:42. Solid curve: branch 1; dashed curve: branch 2.

5:1:6:2

where Da o is the amplitude of the incident wave. Using (5.1.3.11), (5.1.5.2) and (5.1.6.2), it can be shown that the intensities of the four waves are

top sign: j 1; bottom sign: j 2. Fig. 5.1.6.2 represents the variations of these four intensities with the deviation parameter. Far from the reflection domain, jDh1 j2 and jDh2 j2 tend toward zero, as is normal, while jDo1 j2 jDo2 j2 for r ) 1, jDo1 j2 jDo2 j2 for r ) 1: This result shows that the wavefield of highest intensity ‘jumps’ from one branch of the dispersion surface to the other across the reflection domain. This is an important property of dynamical theory which also holds in the Bragg case and when a wavefield crosses a highly distorted region in a deformed crystal [the so-called interbranch scattering: see, for instance, Authier & Balibar (1970) and Authier & Malgrange (1998)]. 5.1.6.3. Boundary conditions at the exit surface 5.1.6.3.1. Wavevectors When a wavefield reaches the exit surface, it breaks up into its two constituent waves. Their wavevectors are obtained by applying

542

5.1. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF X-RAY DIFFRACTION again the condition of the continuity of their tangential components along the crystal surface. The extremities, Mj and Nj , of these wavevectors d

OMj Koj

d

HNj Khj

lie at the intersections of the spheres of radius k centred at O and H, respectively, with the normal n0 to the crystal exit surface drawn from Pj j 1 and 2 (Fig. 5.1.6.3). If the crystal is wedge-shaped and the normals n and n0 to the entrance and exit surfaces are not parallel, the wavevectors of the waves generated by the two wavefields are not parallel. This effect is due to the refraction properties associated with the dispersion surface. 5.1.6.3.2. Amplitudes – Pendello¨sung We shall assume from now on that the crystal is plane parallel. Two wavefields arrive at any point of the exit surface. Their constituent waves interfere and generate emerging waves in the refracted and reflected directions (Fig. 5.1.6.4). Their respective

Fig. 5.1.6.4. Decomposition of a wavefield into its two components when it reaches the exit surface. S1 and S2 are the Poynting vectors of the two wavefields propagating in the crystal belonging to branches 1 and 2 of the dispersion surface, respectively, and interfering at the exit surface.

amplitudes are given by the boundary conditions d Dd o exp 2iKo r Do1 exp 2iKo1 r Do2 exp 2iKo2 r d

d

Dh exp 2iKh r Dh1 exp 2iKh1 r

5:1:6:4

Dh2 exp 2iKh2 r, where r is the position vector of a point on the exit surface, the origin of phases being taken at the entrance surface. In a plane-parallel crystal, (5.1.6.4) reduces to Dod Do1 exp 2iMP1 t Do2 exp 2iMP2 t d Dh Dh1 exp 2iMP1 t Dh2 exp 2iMP2 t , where t is the crystal thickness. In a non-absorbing crystal, the amplitudes squared are of the form d 2 D jDo1 j2 jDo2 j2 2Do1 Do2 cos 2P2 P1 t: o This expression shows that the intensities of the refracted and reflected beams are oscillating functions of crystal thickness. The period of the oscillations is called the Pendello¨sung distance and is 1=P2 P1 L =1 r2 1=2 : 5.1.6.4. Reflecting power

Fig. 5.1.6.3. Boundary condition for the wavevectors at the exit surface. (a) Reciprocal space. The wavevectors of the emerging waves are determined by the intersections M1 , M2 , N1 and N2 of the normals n0 to the exit surface, drawn from the tie points P1 and P2 of the wavefields, with the tangents To0 and Th0 to the spheres centred at O and H and of radius k, respectively. (b) Direct space.

For an absorbing crystal, the intensities of the reflected and refracted waves are d 2 a 2 n D D A cosh2v a t: o o h io cos 2t 1 2i 1 r2 1=2 d 2 a 2 Dh Do jFh =Fh j 1 A cosha t cos2t 1 , 5:1:6:5 where

543


A exp o t o 1 h 1 =21 r2 , h a j 1=2 o 1 h 1 r i jCjjFih =Fio j cos '= o h 1=2 1 r2

1=2

,

v arg sinh r and j is given by equation (5.1.6.1). Depending on the absorption coefficient, the cosine terms are more or less important relative to the hyperbolic cosine term and the oscillations due to Pendello¨sung have more or less contrast. For a non-absorbing crystal, these expressions reduce to d 2 a 2 1 22 cos2t 1 D D , o o 21 r2 5:1:6:6 d 2 a 2 1 cos2t 1 : Dh Do 2 1 r2 What is actually measured in a counter receiving the reflected or the refracted beam is the reflecting power, namely the ratio of the energy of the reflected or refracted beam on the one hand and the energy of the incident beam on the other. The energy of a beam is obtained by multiplying its intensity by its cross section. If l is the width of the trace of the beam on the crystal surface, the cross sections of the incident (or refracted) and reflected beams are proportional to (Fig. 5.1.6.5) lo l o and lh l h , respectively. The reflecting powers are therefore: 2 . a 2 . lo D Dd 2 Da 2 , Refracted beam: Io lo Dd o o o o . 2 . 2 d 2 Dd Da 2 : Reflected beam: Ih lh Dh lo Da o o h 5:1:6:7 Using (5.1.6.6), it is easy to check that Io Ih 1 in the nonabsorbing case; that is, that conservation of energy is satisfied. Equations (5.1.6.6) show that there is a periodic exchange of energy between the refracted and the reflected waves as the beam penetrates the crystal; this is why Ewald introduced the expression Pendello¨sung. The oscillations in the rocking curve were first observed by Lefeld-Sosnowska & Malgrange (1968, 1969). Their periodicity can be used for accurate measurements of the form factor [see, for

Fig. 5.1.6.6. Theoretical rocking curves in the transmission case for nonabsorbing crystals and for various values of t=L : (a) t=L 1:25; (b) t=L 1:5; (c) t=L 1:75; (d) t=L 2:0.

instance, Bonse & Teworte (1980)]. Fig. 5.1.6.6 shows the shape of the rocking curve for various values of t=L . The width at half-height of the rocking curve, averaged over the Pendello¨sung oscillations, corresponds in the non-absorbing case to 2, that is, to 2, where is given by (5.1.3.6). 5.1.6.5. Integrated intensity 5.1.6.5.1. Non-absorbing crystals The integrated intensity is the ratio of the total energy recorded in the counter when the crystal is rocked to the intensity of the incident beam. It is proportional to the area under the line profile: 1 R Ihi Ih d: 5:1:6:8 1

The integration was performed by von Laue (1960). Using (5.1.3.5), (5.1.6.6) and (5.1.6.7) gives Ihi A Fig. 5.1.6.5. Cross sections of the incident, reflected, Kh , waves.

Ka o ,

refracted, Ko , and

1 2t RL

J0 z dz,

0

where J0 z is the zeroth-order Bessel function and

544

5.1. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF X-RAY DIFFRACTION thickness smaller than or equal to a third of the Pendello¨sung distance [see Authier & Malgrange (1998)]. 5.1.7. Intensity of plane waves in reflection geometry 5.1.7.1. Thick crystals 5.1.7.1.1. Non-absorbing crystals

Fig. 5.1.6.7. Variations with crystal thickness of the integrated intensity in the transmission case (no absorption) (arbitrary units). The expression for A is given in the text.

R2 jCFh j 1=2 : 2V sin 2 Fig. 5.1.6.7 shows the variations of the integrated intensity with t=L . A

5.1.6.5.2. Absorbing crystals The integration was performed for absorbing crystals by Kato (1955). The integrated intensity in this case is given by Ihi AjFh =Fh j exp 1=2o t o 1 h 1 " # 1 2t RL J0 z dz 1 I0 ,

Rocking curve. The geometrical construction in Fig. 5.1.3.5 shows that, in the Bragg case, the normal to the crystal surface drawn from the extremity of the incident wavevector intersects the dispersion surface either at two points of the same branch, P1 , P01 , for branch 1, P2 , P02 for branch 2, or at imaginary points. It was shown in Section 5.1.2.6 that the propagation of the wavefields inside the crystal is along the normal to the dispersion surface at the corresponding tie points. Fig. 5.1.3.5 shows that this direction is oriented towards the outside of the crystal for tie points P01 and P02 . In a very thick crystal, these wavefields cannot exist because there is always a small amount of absorption. One concludes that in the thick-crystal case and in reflection geometry, only one wavefield is excited inside the crystal. It corresponds to branch 1 on the lowangle side of the rocking curve and to branch 2 on the high-angle side. Using the same approximations as in Section 5.1.6.2, the a amplitude Dh of the wave reflected at the crystal surface is obtained by applying the boundary conditions, which are particularly simple in this case: a

Do Da o , Dh Dh : The reflecting power is given by an expression similar to (5.1.6.7): Ih j jjj j2 ,

0

where o t

nh

jC j2 jFih =Fio j2 cos2 ' h

where the expression for j is given by (5.1.3.12), and j 1 or 2 depending on which wavefield propagates towards the inside of the crystal. When the normal to the entrance surface intersects the dispersion surface at imaginary points, i.e. when 1 < < 1,

i o1=2

o =4 o h = o h

and I0 is a modified Bessel function of zeroth order.

jj2 j j 1 , Ih 1,

5.1.6.6. Thin crystals – comparison with geometrical theory Using (5.1.6.6) and (5.1.6.7), the reflecting power of the reflected beam may also be written Ih 2 t2 o 2 f , where f

5:1:7:1

and there is total reflection. Outside the total-reflection domain, the reflecting power is given by h i2 5:1:7:2 Ih jj 2 11=2 : The rocking curve has the well known top-hat shape (Fig. 5.1.7.1). Far from the total-reflection domain, the curve can be

" #2 sin U1 2 1=2 U1 2 1=2

and U to 1 : When to 1 is very small, f tends asymptotically towards the function sin U 2 f1 U and Ih towards the value given by geometrical theory. The condition for geometrical theory to apply is, therefore, that the crystal thickness be much smaller than the Pendello¨sung distance. In practice, the two theories agree to within a few per cent for a crystal

Fig. 5.1.7.1. Theoretical rocking curve in the reflection case for a nonabsorbing thick crystal in terms of the deviation parameter.

545

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS approximated by the function Ih 1=42 : Width of the total-reflection domain. The width of the totalreflection domain is equal to 2 and its angular width is therefore equal, using (5.1.3.5), to 2, where is given by (5.1.3.6). It is proportional to the structure factor, the polarization factor C and the square root of the asymmetry factor j j. Using an asymmetric reflection, it is therefore possible to decrease the width at wish. This is used in monochromators to produce a pseudo plane wave [see, for instance, Kikuta & Kohra (1970)]. It is possible to deduce the value of the form factor from very accurate measurements of the rocking curve; see, for instance, Kikuta (1971). Integrated intensity. The integrated intensity is defined by (5.1.6.8): Ihi 8=3: 5:1:7:3 Penetration depth. Within the domain of total reflection, there are two wavefields propagating inside the crystal with imaginary wavevectors, one towards the inside of the crystal and the other one in the opposite direction, so that they cancel out and, globally, no energy penetrates the crystal. The absorption coefficient of the waves penetrating the crystal is 4Koi o 2 o 1

2 1=2 =B ,

5:1:7:4

where B is the value taken by o [equation (5.1.3.8)] in the Bragg case. The penetration depth is a minimum at the middle of the reflection domain and at this point it is equal to B =2. This attenuation effect is called extinction, and B is called the extinction length. It is a specific property owing to the existence of wavefields. The resulting propagation direction of energy is parallel to the crystal surface, but with a cross section equal to zero: it is an evanescent wave [see, for instance, Cowan et al. (1986)]. 5.1.7.1.2. Absorbing crystals Rocking curve. Since the sign of is negative, 2 S h1=2 in (5.1.3.10) has a very large imaginary part when jr j 1. It cannot be calculated using the same approximations as in the Laue case. Let us set Z expi 0 2

11=2 :

Fig. 5.1.7.2. Theoretical rocking curve in the reflection case for a thick absorbing crystal. The 400 reflection of GaAs using Cu K radiation is shown.

of the deviation parameter in (5.1.3.7): the smaller this ratio, the more important the asymmetry. Absorption coefficient. The effective absorption coefficient, taking into account both the Borrmann effect and extinction, is given by (Authier, 1986) R o 2jFh Fh j1=2 Z sin 0 , 1=2 V j j where is defined in equation (5.1.3.7) and 0 in equation (5.1.7.5), and where the sign is chosen in such a way that Z converges. Fig. 5.1.7.3 shows the variation of the penetration depth zo o = with the deviation parameter. 5.1.7.2. Thin crystals 5.1.7.2.1. Non-absorbing crystals Boundary conditions. If the crystal is thin, the wavefield created at the reflecting surface at A and penetrating inside can reach the back surface at B (Fig. 5.1.7.4a). The incident direction there points towards the outside of the crystal, while the reflected direction

5:1:7:5

The reflecting power is Ih Fh =Fh 1=2 Z 2 , 1=2 1=2

2

5:1:7:6

where Z L L 1 , L jj and j2 1j is the modulus of expression (5.1.7.5) where the sign is chosen in such a way that Z is smaller than 1. The expression for the reflected intensity in the absorbing Bragg case was first given by Prins (1930). The way of representing it given here was first used by Hirsch & Ramachandran (1950). The properties of the rocking curve have been described by Fingerland (1971). There is no longer a total-reflection domain and energy penetrates the crystal at all incidence angles, although with a very high absorption coefficient within the domain jr j 1. Fig. 5.1.7.2 gives an example of a rocking curve for a thick absorbing crystal. It was first observed by Renninger (1955). The shape is asymmetric and is due to the anomalous-absorption effect: it is lower than normal on the low-angle side, which is associated with wavefields belonging to branch 1 of the dispersion surface, and larger than normal on the high-angle side, which is associated with branch 2 wavefields. The amount of asymmetry depends on the value of the ratio A=B of the coefficients in the expression for the imaginary part 2

2

Fig. 5.1.7.3. Bragg case: thick crystals. Variation of the penetration depth with incidence angle (represented here by the dimensionless deviation parameter ). Thin curve: without absorption; thick curve: with absorption for the 400 reflection of GaAs using Cu K radiation.

546

5.1. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF X-RAY DIFFRACTION (ii) jj > 1: Ih Io

1

cos2 t=B 2

11=2

2

cos2 t=B 2 2 1

11=2

2

cos2 t=B 2

11=2

, 5:1:7:7b :

The cosine terms show that the two wavefields propagating within the crystal interfere, giving rise to Pendello¨sung fringes in the rocking curve. These fringes were observed for the first time by Batterman & Hildebrandt (1967, 1968). The angular positions of the minima of the reflected beam are given by K 2 2B t

2

11=2 ,

where K is an integer. Integrated intensity. The integrated intensity is Ihi tanht=B , Fig. 5.1.7.4. Bragg case: thin crystals. Two wavefields propagate in the crystal. (a) Direct space; (b) reciprocal space.

points towards the inside. The wavefield propagating along AB will therefore generate at B: (i) a partially transmitted wave outside the crystal, d Do exp 2iKd o r; (ii) a partially reflected wavefield inside the crystal. The corresponding tiepoints are obtained by applying the usual condition of the continuity of the tangential components of wavevectors (Fig. 5.1.7.4b). If the crystal is a plane-parallel slab, a these points are M and P2 , respectively, and Kd o Ko . The boundary conditions are then written: (i) entrance surface: a

Do1 Do2 Da o , Dh1 Dh2 Dh ; (ii) back surface: Do1 exp 2iKo1 r Do2 exp 2iKo2 r Da o exp Dh1 exp 2iKh1 r Dh2 exp 2iKh2 r 0:

2iKd o r ,

Rocking curve. Using (5.1.3.10), it can be shown that the expressions for the intensities reflected at the entrance surface and transmitted at the back surface, Ih and Io , respectively, are given by different expressions within total reflection and outside it: (i) jj < 1: a

Ih j j Io

jDh j2

cosh2 t=B 1

2 1=2

1

a 1=2 jDo j2 cosh2 t=B 1 2 2 2 jDd 1 2 o j , a 1=2 jDo j2 cosh2 t=B 1 2 2

5:1:7:7a

where B is the value taken by o [equation (5.1.3.8)] in the Bragg case. There is no longer a total-reflection domain but the extinction effect still exists, as is shown by the hyperbolic cosine term. The maximum height of the rocking curve decreases as the thickness of the crystal decreases.

5:1:7:8

where t is the crystal thickness. When this thickness becomes very large, the integrated intensity tends towards Ihi :

5:1:7:9

This expression differs from (5.1.7.3) by the factor , which appears here in place of 8=3. von Laue (1960) pointed out that because of the differences between the two expressions for the reflecting power, (5.1.7.2) and (5.1.7.7b), perfect agreement could not be expected. Since some absorption is always present, expression (5.1.7.3), which includes the factor 8=3, should be used for very thick crystals. In the presence of absorption, however, expression (5.1.7.8) for the reflected intensity for thin crystals does tend towards that for thick crystals as the crystal thickness increases. Comparison with geometrical theory. When t=B is very small (thin crystals or weak reflections), (5.1.7.8) tends towards 5:1:7:10 Ihi R 2 2 tjFh j2 V 2 o sin 2, which is the expression given by geometrical theory. If we call this intensity Ihi (geom.), comparison of expressions (5.1.7.8) and (5.1.7.10) shows that the integrated intensity for crystals of intermediate thickness can be written Ihi Ihi (geom.)

tanht=B , t=B

5:1:7:11

which is the expression given by Darwin (1922) for primary extinction. 5.1.7.2.2. Absorbing crystals Reflected intensity. The intensity of the reflected wave for a thin absorbing crystal is Da 2 h Ih j j a Do Fh cosh 2b cos 2a , Fh L cosh 2b L2 11=2 sinh 2b cos2a 2 0 5:1:7:12 where

547

2a t=B cos !, 2b t=B sin !

:

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS 0

L, and are defined in (5.1.7.5), is defined in (5.1.3.7) and ! is the phase angle of 2 11=2 . Comparison with geometrical theory. When t=B decreases towards zero, expression (5.1.7.12) tends towards sint=B =2 ; using (5.1.3.5) and (5.1.3.8), it can be shown that expression (5.1.7.12) can be written, in the non-absorbing symmetric case, as R 2 2 C 2 jFh j2 t2 sin2k cost 2 , 5:1:7:13 Ih 2k cost V 2 sin2 where d is the lattice spacing and is the difference between the angle of incidence and the middle of the reflection domain. This expression is the classical expression given by geometrical theory [see, for instance, James (1950)].

5.1.8. Real waves 5.1.8.1. Introduction The preceding sections have dealt with the diffraction of a plane wave by a semi-infinite perfect crystal. This situation is actually never encountered in practice, although with various devices, in particular using synchrotron radiation, it is possible to produce highly collimated monochromated waves which behave like pseudo plane waves. The wave from an X-ray tube is best represented by a spherical wave. The first experimental proof of this fact is due to Kato & Lang (1959) in the transmission case. Kato extended the dynamical theory to spherical waves for non-absorbing (1961a,b) and absorbing crystals (1968a,b). He expanded the incident spherical wave into plane waves by a Fourier transform, applied plane-wave dynamical theory to each of these components and took the Fourier transform of the result again in order to obtain the final solution. Another method for treating the problem was used by Takagi (1962, 1969), who solved the propagation equation in a medium where the lateral extension of the incident wave is limited and where the wave amplitudes depend on the lateral coordinates. He showed that in this case the set of fundamental linear equations (5.1.2.20) should be replaced by a set of partial differential equations. This treatment can be applied equally well to a perfect or to an imperfect crystal. In the case of a perfect crystal, Takagi showed that these equations have an analytical solution that is identical with Kato’s result. Uragami (1969, 1970) observed the spherical wave in the Bragg (reflection) case, interpreting the observed intensity distribution using Takagi’s theory. Saka et al. (1973) subsequently extended Kato’s theory to the Bragg case. Without using any mathematical treatment, it is possible to make some elementary remarks by considering the fact that the divergence of the incident beam falling on the crystal from the source is much larger than the angular width of the reflection domain. Fig. 5.1.8.1(a) shows a spatially collimated beam falling on a crystal in the transmission case and Fig. 5.1.8.1(b) represents the corresponding situation in reciprocal space. Since the divergence of the incident beam is larger than the angular width of the dispersion surface, the plane waves of its Fourier expansion will excite every point of both branches of the dispersion surface. The propagation directions of the corresponding wavefields will cover the angular range between those of the incident and reflected beams (Fig. 5.1.8.1a) and fill what is called the Borrmann triangle. The intensity distribution within this triangle has interesting properties, as described in the next two sections. 5.1.8.2. Borrmann triangle The first property of the Borrmann triangle is that the angular density of the wavefield paths is inversely proportional to the

Fig. 5.1.8.1. Borrmann triangle. When the incident beam is divergent, the whole dispersion surface is excited and the wavefields excited inside the crystal propagate within a triangle filling all the space between the incident direction, AC, and the reflected direction, AB. Along any direction Ap within this triangle two wavefields propagate, having as tie points two conjugate points, P and P0 , at the extremities of a diameter of the dispersion surface. (a) Direct space; (b) reciprocal space.

curvature of the dispersion surface around their tie points. Let us consider an incident wavepacket of angular width . It will generate a packet of wavefields propagating within the Borrmann triangle. The angular width (Fig. 5.1.8.2) between the paths of the corresponding wavefields is related to the radius of curvature R of the dispersion surface by A = k cos R cos ,

5:1:8:1

where is the angle between the wavefield path and the lattice planes [equation (5.1.2.26)] and A is called the amplification ratio. In the middle of the reflecting domain, the radius of curvature of the dispersion surface is very much shorter than its value, k, far from it (about 104 times shorter) and the amplification ratio is therefore very large. As a consequence, the energy of a wavepacket of width in reciprocal space is spread in direct space over an angle given by (5.1.8.1). The intensity distribution on the exit surface BC (Fig. 5.1.8.1a) is therefore proportional to Ih =A. It is represented in Fig. 5.1.8.3 for several values of the absorption coefficient: (i) Small values of o t (less than 2 or 3) (Fig. 5.1.8.3a). The intensity distribution presents a wide minimum in the centre where the density of wavefields is small and increases very sharply at the edges where the density of wavefields is large, although it is the reverse for the reflecting power Ihj . This effect, called the margin effect, was predicted qualitatively by Borrmann (1959) and von Laue (1960), demonstrated experimentally by Kato & Lang (1959), and calculated by Kato (1960).

548


Fig. 5.1.8.2. Packet of wavefields of divergence excited in the crystal by an incident wavepacket of angular width . (a) Direct space; (b) reciprocal space.

(ii) Large values of o t (of the order of 6 or more) (Fig. 5.1.8.3b). The predominant factor is now anomalous absorption. The wavefields propagating along the edges of the Borrmann triangle undergo normal absorption, while those propagating parallel to the lattice planes (or nearly parallel) correspond to tie points in the centre of the dispersion surface and undergo anomalously low absorption. The intensity distribution now has a maximum in the centre. For values of t larger than 10 or so, practically only the wavefields propagating parallel to the lattice planes go through the crystal, which acts as a wave guide: this is the Borrmann effect. 5.1.8.3. Spherical-wave Pendello¨sung Fig. 5.1.8.4 shows that along any path Ap inside the Borrmann triangle two wavefields propagate, one with tie point P1 , on branch 1, the other with the point P02 , on branch 2. These two points lie on the extremities of a diameter of the dispersion surface. The two wavefields interfere, giving rise to Pendello¨sung fringes, which were first observed by Kato & Lang (1959), and calculated by Kato (1961b). These fringes are of course quite different from the planewave Pendello¨sung fringes predicted by Ewald (Section 5.1.6.3) because the tie points of the interfering wavefields are different and their period is also different, but they have in common the fact that they result from interference between wavefields belonging to different branches of the dispersion surface. Kato has shown that the intensity distribution at any point at the base of the Borrmann triangle is proportional to n h io2 Jo Axo xh 1=2 , where A 2 o h 1=2 =L sin and xo and xh are the distances of p from the sides AB and AC of the Borrmann triangle (Fig. 5.1.8.4). The equal-intensity fringes are therefore located along the locus of the points in the triangle for which the product of the distances to the

Fig. 5.1.8.3. Intensity distribution along the base of the Borrmann triangle. y is a normalized coordinate along BC. (a) Small values of t. The interference (spherical-wave Pendello¨sung) between branch 1 and branch 2 is neglected. (b) Large values of t.

sides is constant, that is hyperbolas having AB and AC as asymptotes (Fig. 5.1.8.4b). These fringes can be observed on a section topograph of a wedge-shaped crystal (Fig. 5.1.8.5). The technique of section topography is described in IT C, Section 2.7.2.2. The Pendello¨sung distance L depends on the polarization

549

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS state [see equation (5.1.3.8)]. If the incident wave is unpolarized, one observes the superposition of the Pendello¨sung fringes corresponding to the two states of polarization, parallel and perpendicular to the plane of incidence. This results in a beat effect, which is clearly visible in Fig. 5.1.8.5. Appendix 5.1.1. A5.1.1.1. Dielectric susceptibility – classical derivation Under the influence of the incident electromagnetic radiation, the medium becomes polarized. The dielectric susceptibility, which relates this polarization to the electric field, thus characterizes the interaction of the medium and the electromagnetic wave. The classical derivation of the dielectric susceptibility, , which is summarized here is only valid for a very high frequency which is also far from an absorption edge. Let us consider an electromagnetic wave, E Eo exp 2it

k r,

incident on a bound electron. The electron behaves as if it were held by a spring with a linear restoring force and is an oscillator with a resonant frequency o . The equation of its motion is written in the following way: m d2 a=dt2 42 o ma F, where the driving force F is due to the electric field of the wave and is equal to eE. The magnetic interaction is neglected here. The solution of the equation of motion is a eE=42 mo Fig. 5.1.8.4. Interference at the origin of the Pendello¨sung fringes in the case of an incident spherical wave. (a) Direct space; (b) reciprocal space.

2 :

The resonant frequencies of the electrons in atoms are of the order of the ultraviolet frequencies and are therefore much smaller than X-ray frequencies. They can be neglected and the expression of the amplitude of the electron reduces to a eE=42 2 : The dipolar moment is therefore M ea e2 E=42 2 m: von Laue assumes that the negative charge is distributed continuously all over space and that the charge of a volume element d is e d, where is the electronic density. The electric moment of the volume element is dM e2 E d=42 2 m: The polarization is equal to the moment per unit volume: P dM=d e2 E=42 2 m: It is related to the electric field and electric displacement through D "o E P "o 1 E:

(A5.1.1.1)

We finally obtain the expression of the dielectric susceptibility, e2 =42 "o 2 m R2 =, where R e2 =4"o mc2 2:81794 10 radius of the electron.

15

(A5.1.1.2) m is the classical

A5.1.1.2. Maxwell’s equations

Fig. 5.1.8.5. Spherical-wave Pendello¨sung fringes observed on a wedgeshaped crystal. (a) Computer simulation (solid lines: maxima; dashed lines: minima). (b) X-ray section topograph of a wedge-shaped silicon crystal (444 reflection, Mo K radiation).

The electromagnetic field is represented by two vectors, E and B, which are the electric field and the magnetic induction, respectively. To describe the interaction of the field with matter, three other vectors must be taken into account, the electrical current density, j, the electric displacement, D, and the magnetic field, H. The space and time derivatives of these vectors are related in a continuous

550

5.1. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF X-RAY DIFFRACTION medium by Maxwell’s equations: curl E @B=@t curl H @D=@t j div D

(A5.1.1.3)

div B 0, where is the electric charge density. The electric field and the electric displacement on the one hand, and the magnetic field and the magnetic induction on the other hand, are related by the so-called material relations, which describe the reaction of the medium to the electromagnetic field: D "E B H, where " and are the dielectric constant and the magnetic permeability, respectively. These equations are complemented by the following boundary conditions at the surface between two neighbouring media: ET1

ET2 0 DN1

DN2 0

HT1

HT2 0

BN2 0:

BN1

(A5.1.1.4)

From the second and the third equations of (A5.1.1.3), and using the identity div curl y 0, it follows that div j @=@t 0:

(A5.1.1.5)

The basic properties of the electromagnetic field are described, for instance, in Born & Wolf (1983). The propagation equation of X-rays in a crystalline medium is derived following von Laue (1960). The interaction of X-rays with charged particles is inversely proportional to the mass of the particle and the interaction with the nuclei can be neglected. As a first approximation, it is also assumed that the magnetic interaction of X-rays with matter is neglected, and that the magnetic permeability can be taken as equal to the magnetic permeability of a vacuum, 0 . It is further assumed that the negative and positive charges are both continuously distributed and compensate each other in such a way that there is neutrality and no current everywhere: and j are equal to zero and div D is therefore also equal to zero. The electric displacement is related to the electric field by (A5.1.1.1) and the electric part of the interaction of X-rays with matter is expressed through the dielectric susceptibility , which is given by (A5.1.1.2). This quantity is proportional to the electron density and varies with the space coordinates. It is therefore concluded that div E is different from zero, as opposed to what happens in a vacuum. For this reason, the propagation equation of X-rays in a crystalline medium is expressed in terms of the electric displacement rather than in terms of the electric field. It is obtained by eliminating H, B and E in Maxwell’s equations and taking into account the above assumptions: 1 @2E : (A5.1.1.7) c2 @t2 Only coherent scattering is taken into account here, that is, scattering without frequency change. The solution is therefore a wave of the form D curl curl D

Dr exp 2it: A5.1.1.3. Propagation equation In a vacuum, and j are equal to zero, and the first two equations of (A5.1.1.3) can be written curl E 0 @E=@t curl H "0 @H=@t, where "0 and 0 are the dielectric constant and the magnetic permeability of a vacuum, respectively. By taking the curl of both sides of the second equation, it follows that curl curl E "0 0 @ 2 E=@t2 : Using the identity curl curl E grad div E E, the relation "0 0 1=c2 , where c is the velocity of light, and noting that div E div D 0, one finally obtains the equation of propagation of an electromagnetic wave in a vacuum: E

1 @2E : c2 @t2

By replacing D with this expression in equation (A5.1.1.7), one finally obtains the propagation equation (5.1.2.2) (Section 5.1.2.1). In a crystalline medium, is a triply periodic function of the space coordinates and the solutions of this equation are given in terms of Fourier series which can be interpreted as sums of electromagnetic plane waves. Each of these waves is characterized by its wavevector, Kh , its electric displacement, Dh , its electric field, Eh , and its magnetic field, Hh . It can be shown that, as a consequence of the fact that div D 0 and div E 6 0, Dh is a transverse wave (Dh , Hh and Kh and are mutually orthogonal) while Eh is not. The electric displacement is therefore a more suitable vector for describing the state of the field inside the crystal than the electric field. A5.1.1.4. Poynting vector The propagation direction of the energy of an electromagnetic wave is given by that of the Poynting vector defined by (see Born & Wolf, 1983) S RE ^ H ,

(A5.1.1.6)

(A5.1.1.8)

of which the wavenumber k 1= and the frequency are related by

where R means real part of (). The intensity I of the radiation is equal to the energy crossing unit area per second in the direction normal to that area. It is given by the value of the Poynting vector averaged over a period of time long compared with 1=:

k =c:

I jSj c"jEj2 cjDj2 =":

Its simplest solution is a plane wave: E E0 exp 2it

k r,

551


5.2. Dynamical theory of electron diffraction BY A. F. MOODIE, J. M. COWLEY

AND

P. GOODMAN

5.2.1. Introduction

5.2.3. Forward scattering

Since electrons are charged, they interact strongly with matter, so that the single scattering approximation has a validity restricted to thin crystals composed of atoms of low atomic number. Further, at energies of above a few tens of keV, the wavelength of the electron is so short that the geometry of two-beam diffraction can be approximated in only small unit cells. It is therefore necessary to develop a scattering theory specific to electrons and, preferably, applicable to imaging as well as to diffraction. The development, started by Born (1926) and Bethe (1928), and continuing into the present time, is the subject of an extensive literature, which includes reviews [for instance: Howie (1978), Humphreys (1979)] and historical accounts (Goodman, 1981), and is incorporated in Chapter 5.1. Here, an attempt will be made to present only that outline of the main formulations which, it is hoped, will help the nonspecialist in the use of the tables. No attempt will be made to follow the historical development, which has been tortuous and not always logical, but rather to seek the simplest and most transparent approach that is consistent with brevity. Only key points in proofs will be sketched in an attempt to display the nature, rather than the rigorous foundations of the arguments.

A great deal of geometric detail can arise at this point and, further, there is no generally accepted method for approximation, the various procedures leading to numerically negligible differences and to expressions of precisely the same form. Detailed descriptions of the geometry are given in the references. The entrance surface of the specimen, in the form of a plate, is chosen as the x, y plane, and the direction of the incident beam is taken to be close to the z axis. Components of the wavevector are labelled with suffixes in the conventional way; K0 kx ky is the transverse wavevector, which will be very small compared to kz . In this notation, the excitation error for the reflection is given by h

K02

jK0 2hj2 : 4jkz j

An intuitive method argues that, since '=W 1, then the component of the motion along z is little changed by scattering. Hence, making the substitution b expfikz zg and neglecting @ 2 =@z2 , equation (5.2.2.1) becomes @ 1 2 2 r K0 ' , 5:2:3:1 i @z 2kz x; y where

5.2.2. The defining equations No many-body effects have yet been detected in the diffraction of fast electrons, but the velocities lie well within the relativistic region. The one-body Dirac equation would therefore appear to be the appropriate starting point. Fujiwara (1962), using the scattering matrix, carried through the analysis for forward scattering, and found that, to a very good approximation, the effects of spin are negligible, and that the solution is the same as that obtained from the Schro¨dinger equation provided that the relativistic values for wavelength and mass are used. In effect a Klein–Gordon equation (Messiah, 1965) can be used in electron diffraction (Buxton, 1978) in the form 82 mjej' 82 m0 jejW jejW 2 r b 1 b b 0: h2 h2 2m0 c2 Here, W is the accelerating voltage and ', the potential in the crystal, is defined as being positive. The relativistic values for mass and wavelength are given by m m0 1 v2 =c2 1=2 , and taking ‘e’ now to represent the modulus of the electronic charge, jej, h2m0 eW 1 eW =2m0 c2

1=2

,

and the wavefunction is labelled with the subscript b in order to indicate that it still includes back scattering, of central importance to LEED (low-energy electron diffraction). In more compact notation, r2 k 2 1 '=W

b

r2 k 2 2k'

b

0: 5:2:2:1

Here k jkj is the scalar wavenumber of magnitude 2=, and the interaction constant 2me=h2 . This constant is approximately 10 3 for 100 kV electrons. For fast electrons, '=W is a slowly varying function on a scale of wavelength, and is small compared with unity. The scattering will therefore be peaked about the direction defined by the incident beam, and further simplification is possible, leading to a forwardscattering solution appropriate to HEED (high-energy electron diffraction).

r2x; y

and x, y, 0 expfikx x ky yg. Equation (5.2.3.1) is of the form of a two-dimensional timedependent Schro¨dinger equation, with the z coordinate replacing time. This form has been extensively discussed. For instance, Howie (1966) derived what is essentially this equation using an expansion in Bloch waves, Berry (1971) used a Green function in a detailed and rigorous derivation, and Goodman & Moodie (1974), using methods due to Feynman, derived the equation as the limit of the multislice recurrence relation. A method due to Corones et al. (1982) brings out the relationship between the HEED and LEED equations. Equation (5.2.2.1) is cast in the form of a first-order system, ! ! b b 0 1 @ @ b @ b : r2x; y k 2 2k' 0 @z @z @z A splitting matrix is introduced to separate the wavefunction into the forward and backward components, b , and the fast part of the phase is factored out, so that expfik z zg. In the resulting b matrix differential equation, the off-diagonal terms are seen to be small for fast electrons, and equation (5.2.2.1) reduces to the pair of equations @ 1 2 2 r K0 ' : 5:2:3:2 i @z 2kz x; y The equation for equation.

is the Lontovich & Fock (1946) parabolic

5.2.4. Evolution operator Equation (5.2.3.1) is a standard and much studied form, so that many techniques are available for the construction of solutions. One of the most direct utilizes the causal evolution operator. A recent account is given by Gratias & Portier (1983).


@2 @2 2, 2 @x @y

5.2. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF ELECTRON DIFFRACTION In terms of the ‘Hamiltonian’ of the two-dimensional system, 1 Hz r2 K02 ', 2kz x; y the evolution operator Uz, z0 , defined by satisfies @ i Uz, z0 HzUz, z0 , @z or Rz Uz, z0 1 i Uz, z1 Hz1 dz1 :

z Uz, z0 0 , 5:2:4:1a

5:2:4:1b

z0

The double solution involving M of equation (5.2.6.1b) is of interest in displaying the symmetry of reciprocity, and may be compared with the double solution obtained for the real-space equation [equation (5.2.3.2)]. Normally the M solution will be followed through to give the fast-electron forward-scattering equations appropriate in HEED. M , however, represents the equivalent set of equations corresponding to the z reversed reciprocity configuration. Reciprocity solutions will yield diffraction symmetries in the forward direction when coupled with crystalinverting symmetries (Section 2.5.3). Once again we set out to solve the forward-scattering equation (5.2.6.1a,b) now in semi-reciprocal space, and define an operator Qz [compare with equation (5.2.4.1a)] such that jUz i Qz jU0 i with U0 j0i;

5.2.5. Projection approximation – real-space solution Many of the features of the more general solutions are retained in the practically important projection approximation in which 'x, y, z is replaced by its projected mean value 'p x, y, so that the corresponding Hamiltonian Hp does not depend on z. Equation (5.2.4.1b) can then be solved directly by iteration to give Up z, z0 expf iHp z

z0 g,

i2 2 H z z0 . . . , 2! p followed by the direct evaluation of the differentials. Such expressions can be used, for instance, to explore symmetries in image space. iHp z

Qp expfiMp z

5:2:5:1

and the solution may be verified by substitution into equation (5.2.4.1a). Many of the results of dynamical theory can be obtained by expansion of equation (5.2.5.1) as Up 1

i.e., Qz is an operator that, when acting on the incident wavevector, generates the wavefunction in semi-reciprocal space. Again, the differential equation can be transformed into an integral equation, and once again this can be iterated. In the projection approximation, with M independent of z, the solution can be written as

z0

A typical off-diagonal element is given by Vi j = cos i , where i is the angle through which the beam is scattered. It is usual in the literature to find that cos i has been approximated as unity, since even the most accurate measurements are, so far, in error by much more than this amount. This expression for Qp is Sturkey’s (1957) solution, a most useful relation, written explicitly as jUi expfiMp Tgj0i

S expfiMp Tg

In the derivation of electron-diffraction equations, it is more usual to work in semi-reciprocal space (Tournarie, 1962). This can be achieved by transforming equation (5.2.2.1) with respect to x and y but not with respect to z, to obtain Tournarie’s equation d2 jUi Mb zjUi: 5:2:6:1a dz2 Here jUi is the column vector of scattering amplitudes and Mb z is a matrix, appropriate to LEED, with k vectors as diagonal elements and Fourier coefficients of the potential as nondiagonal elements. This equation is factorized in a manner parallel to that used on the real-space equation [equation (5.2.3.1)] (Lynch & Moodie, 1972) to obtain Tournarie’s forward-scattering equation 5:2:6:1b

where M z K 1=2K 1 V z, Kij ij Ki , and Vij 2kz

5:2:6:2

with T the thickness of the crystal, and j0i, the incident state, a column vector with the first entry unity and the rest zero.

5.2.6. Semi-reciprocal space

djU i iM zjU i, dz

z0 g:

P Vi j expf 2ilzg, l

where Vi vi are the scattering coefficients and vi are the structure amplitudes in volts. In order to simplify the electron-diffraction expression, the third crystallographic index ‘l’ is taken to represent the periodicity along the z direction.

is a unitary matrix, so that in this formulation scattering is described as rotation in Hilbert space. 5.2.7. Two-beam approximation In the two-beam approximation, as an elementary example, equation (5.2.6.2) takes the form 0 V h u0 0 exp i T : 5:2:7:1 uh V h Kh 1 If this expression is expanded directly as a Taylor series, it proves surprisingly difficult to sum. However, the symmetries of Clifford algebra can be exploited by summing in a Pauli basis thus, 0 V h T exp i V h Kh Kh T Kh exp i s3 V Rs1 V I s2 T : E exp i 2 2 Here, the s i are the Pauli matrices 0 1 0 s1 , s2 1 0 i 1 E 0

1 0 , s3 , 0 0 1 0 , 1 i

and V R , V I are the real and imaginary parts of the complex scattering coefficients appropriate to a noncentrosymmetric crystal,

553

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS Fh expiMp z

i.e. Vh V iV . Expanding, Kh R I s3 V s1 V s2 T exp i 2 Kh Ei s3 V Rs1 V I s2 T 2 2 1 Kh s3 V Rs1 V I s2 T2 . . . , 2 2 R

I

P

Pj expfi2 j zg

(Kainuma, 1968; Hurley et al., 1978). Here, the Pj are projection operators, typically of the form Y Mp E n : Pj

j n n6j On changing to a lattice basis, these transform to 0j hj . Alternatively, the semi-reciprocal differential equation can be uncoupled by diagonalizing Mp (Goodman & Moodie, 1974), a process which involves the solution of the characteristic equation

using the anti-commuting properties of s i : s is j s js i 0 s is i 1

jMp

and putting Kh =2 V hV h , M2 Kh =2s 3 V R s 1 V I s 2 , so that M22 E and M32 M2 , the powers of the matrix can easily be evaluated. They fall into odd and even series, corresponding to sine and cosine, and the classical two-beam approximation is obtained in the form sin 1=2 T Q2 expfiKh =2TgE cos 1=2 TE i M2 :

1=2 5:2:7:2

j Ej 0:

5:2:8:2

2

This result was first obtained by Blackman (1939), using Bethe’s dispersion formulation. Ewald and, independently, Darwin, each with different techniques, had, in establishing the theoretical foundations for X-ray diffraction, obtained analogous results (see Section 5.1.3). The two-beam approximation, despite its simplicity, exemplifies some of the characteristics of the full dynamical theory, for instance in the coupling between beams. As Ewald pointed out, a formal analogy can be found in classical mechanics with the motion of coupled pendulums. In addition, the functional form sin ax=x, deriving from the shape function of the crystal emerges, as it does, albeit less obviously, in the N-beam theory. This derivation of equation (5.2.7.2) exhibits two-beam diffraction as a typical two-level system having analogies with, for instance, lasers and nuclear magnetic resonance and exhibiting the symmetries of the special unitary group SU(2) (Gilmore, 1974).

5.2.9. Translational invariance An important result deriving from Bethe’s initial analysis, and not made explicit in the preceding formulations, is that the fundamental symmetry of a crystal, namely translational invariance, by itself imposes a specific form on wavefunctions satisfying Schro¨dinger’s equation. Suppose that, in a one-dimensional description, the potential in a Hamiltonian Ht x is periodic, with period t. Then, 'x t 'x and Ht x E x: Now define a translation operator Gf x f x t, for arbitrary f x. Then, since G'x 'x, and r2 is invariant under translation, GHt x Ht x and GHt x x Ht x t x t Ht xG x: Thus, the translation operator and the Hamiltonian commute, and therefore have the same eigenfunctions (but not of course the same eigenvalues), i.e.

5.2.8. Eigenvalue approach In terms of the eigenvalues and eigenvectors, defined by Hp j ji j j ji,

G x x:

the evolution operator can be written as R Uz, z0 j ji expf j z z0 gh jj dj: This integration becomes a summation over discrete eigen states when an infinitely periodic potential is considered. Despite the early developments by Bethe (1928), an N-beam expression for a transmitted wavefunction in terms of the eigenvalues and eigenvectors of the problem was not obtained until Fujimoto (1959) derived the expression P j j Uh 5:2:8:1 0 h expf i2 j Tg,

This is a simpler equation to deal with than that involving the Hamiltonian, since raising the operator to an arbitrary power simply increments the argument Gm x x mt m x: But x is bounded over the entire range of its argument, positive and negative, so that jj 1, and must be of the form expfi2ktg. Thus, x t G x expfi2ktg x, for which the solution is x expfi2ktgqx

j

where hj is the h component of the j eigenvector with eigenvalue j . This expression can now be related to those obtained in the other formulations. For example, Sylvester’s theorem (Frazer et al., 1963) in the form P f M Aj f j j

when applied to Sturkey’s solution yields

with qx t qx. This is the result derived independently by Bethe and Bloch. Functions of this form constitute bases for the translation group, and are generally known as Bloch functions. When extended in a direct fashion into three dimensions, functions of this form ultimately embody the symmetries of the Bravais lattice; i.e. Bloch functions are the irreducible representations of the translational component of the space group.

554

5.2. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF ELECTRON DIFFRACTION 5.2.10. Bloch-wave formulations In developing the theory from the beginning by eigenvalue techniques, it is usual to invoke the periodicity of the crystal in order to show that the solutions to the wave equation for a given wavevector k are Bloch waves of the form Cr expfik rg, where Cr has the periodicity of the lattice, and hence may be expanded in a Fourier series to give P Ch k expfik 2h rg: 5:2:10:1 h

The Ch k are determined by equations of consistency obtained by substitution of equation (5.2.10.1) into the wave equation. If N terms are selected in equation (5.2.10.1) there will be N Bloch waves where wavevectors differ only in their components normal to the crystal surface, and the total wavefunction will consist of a linear combination of these Bloch waves. The problem is now reduced to the problem of equation (5.2.8.2). The development of solutions for particular geometries follows that for the X-ray case, Chapter 5.1, with the notable differences that: (1) The two-beam solution is not adequate except as a first approximation for particular orientations of crystals having small unit cells and for accelerating voltages not greater than about 100 keV. In general, many-beam solutions must be sought. (2) For transmission HEED, the scattering angles are sufficiently small to allow the use of a small-angle forward-scattering approximation. (3) Polarization effects are negligible except for very low energy electrons. Humphreys (1979) compares the action of the crystal, in the Bloch-wave formalism, with that of an interferometer, the incident beam being partitioned into a set of Bloch waves of different wavevectors. ‘As each Bloch wave propagates it becomes out of phase with its neighbours (due to its different wavevector). Hence interference occurs. For example, if the crystal thickness varies, interference fringes known as thickness fringes are formed.’ For the two-beam case, these are the fringes of the pendulum solution referred to previously. 5.2.11. Dispersion surfaces One of the important constructs of the Bloch-wave formalism is the dispersion surface, a plot of the permitted values of the z component of a Bloch wavevector against the component of the incident wavevector parallel to the crystal surface. The curve for a particular Bloch wave is called a branch. Thus, for fast electrons, the twobeam approximation has two branches, one for each eigenvalue, and the N-beam approximation has N. A detailed treatment of the extensive and powerful theory that has grown from Bethe’s initial paper is to be found, for example, in Hirsch et al. (1965). Apart from its fundamental importance as a theoretical tool, this formulation provides the basis for one of the most commonly used numerical techniques, the essential step being the estimation of the eigenvalues from equation (5.2.8.2) [see IT C (1999, Section 4.3.6.2)].

produced by passage through a slice is given by ( ) z1 z R q exp i 'x, y, z dz , z1

and the phase distribution in the x, y plane resulting from propagation between slices is given by 2 ikx y2 , p exp 2z where the wavefront has been approximated by a paraboloid. Thus, the wavefunction for the n 1th slice is given by 2 ikx y2 expf i'n1 g n1 n exp 2z

n

pq,

where is the convolution operator (Cowley, 1981). This equation can be regarded as the finite difference form of the Schro¨dinger equation derived by Feynman’s (1948) method. The calculation need be correct only to first order in z. Writing the convolution in equation (5.2.12.1) explicitly, and expanding in a Taylor series, the integrals can be evaluated to yield equation (5.2.3.1) (Goodman & Moodie, 1974). If equation (5.2.12.1) is Fourier transformed with respect to x and y, the resulting recurrence relation is of the form Un1 Un P Qn ,

5:2:12:2

where P and Q are obtained by Fourier transforming p and q above. This form is convenient for numerical work since, for a perfect crystal, it is: discrete, as distinct from equation (5.2.12.1) which is continuous in the variables [see IT C (1999, Section 4.3.6.1)]; numerically stable at least up to 5000 beams; fast; and only requires a computer memory proportional to the number of beams (Goodman & Moodie, 1974).

5.2.13. Born series In the impulse limit of equation (5.2.12.2), the integrals can be evaluated to give the Born series (Cowley & Moodie, 1957) P Uh, k Un h, k, n

where Un h, k

P P l h1 k1 l1

...V h

P

...

hn 1 kn 1 ln nP1

hr , k

r1

in V h1 , k1 , l1 1

nP1

kr , l

r1

expf 2iTg=2in expfiTgsin T=

nP1

nPi

lr

r1

1 . . .

expfim Tgsin m T=m m

m1

. . . m

5.2.12. Multislice Multislice derives from a formulation that generates a solution in the form of a Born series (Cowley & Moodie, 1962). The crystal is treated as a series of scattering planes on to which the potential from the slice between z and z z is projected, separated by vacuum gaps z, not necessarily corresponding to any planes or spacings of the material structure. The phase change in the electron beam

5:2:12:1

m 1 m

m1 . . . m

n 1

1

1 1 5:2:13:1a

and where n is the order of interaction. Here is the excitation error of the reflection with index h, k, and i are the excitation errors for the reflections with indices hi , ki , li . Thus each constituent process may be represented by a diagram, starting on the origin of reciprocal

555

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS 1 P space, possibly looped, and ending on the point with coordinates U En h 2iTnr =n r! hr , 1 . . . n 1 , n (h, k). r0 This solution can also be obtained by iteration of the Green5:2:13:1b function integral equation, the integrals being evaluated by means of suitably chosen contours on the complex kz plane (Fujiwara, where h is the complete homogeneous symmetric polynomial 1959), as well as by expansion of the scattering matrix (Fujimoto, function rof n variables of order r. 1959). Upper-layer-line effects can, of course, be calculated in any of Clearly, two or more of the i will, in general, be equal in nearly the formulations. all of the terms in equation (5.2.13.1a). Confluence is, however, readily described, the divided differences of arbitrary order transforming into differentials of the same order (Moodie, 1972). 5.2.14. Approximations The physical picture that emerges from equation (5.2.13.1a) is that of n-fold scattering, the initial wave being turned through n 1 So far, only the familiar first Born and two-beam approximations intermediate states, processes that can be presented by scattering and the projection approximation have been mentioned. Several others, however, have a considerable utility. diagrams in reciprocal space (Gjønnes & Moodie, 1965). A high-voltage limit can be calculated in standard fashion to give For a given scattering vector, constituent functions are evaluated ( ) for all possible paths in three dimensions, and those functions are RT then summed over l. There are therefore two distinct processes by 5:2:14:1 UHVL h, k F exp ic 'x, y, z dz , which upper-layer lines can perturb wavefunctions in the zone, 0 namely: by scattering out of the zone and then back in; and by intrusion of the effective shape function from another zone, the where F is the Fourier transform operator, and c 2m0 ec =h2 latter process being already operative in the first Born, or with c h=m0 c, the Compton wavelength. The phase-grating kinematical approximation. approximation, which finds application in electron microscopy, The constituent functions to be evaluated can be transformed into involves the assumption that equation (5.2.14.1) has some range of many forms. One of the more readily described is that which assigns validity when c is replaced by . This is equivalent to ignoring the to each diagram an effective dynamical shape function. If there are curvature of the Ewald sphere and can therefore apply to thin no loops in the diagram of order n, this effective shape function is crystals [see Section 2.5.2 and IT C (1999, Section 4.3.8)]. the n 1th divided difference of the constituent phase-shifted Approximations that involve curtailing the number of beams kinematical shape transforms. For general diagrams, divided evidently have a range of validity that depends on the size of the differences in loops are replaced by the corresponding differentials. unit cell. The most explored case is that of three-beam interactions. The resulting function is multiplied by the convolution of the Kambe (1957) has demonstrated that phase information can be contributing structure amplitudes and diagrams of all orders obtained from the diffraction data; Gjønnes & Høier (1971) summed (Moodie, 1972). analysed the confluent case, and Hurley & Moodie (1980) have While scattering diagrams have no utility in numerical work, given an explicit inversion for the centrosymmetric case. Analyses they find application in the analysis of symmetries, for instance in of the symmetry of the defining differential equation, and of the the determination of the presence or absence of a centre of inversion geometry of the noncentrosymmetric case, have been given by [for a recent treatment, see Moodie & Whitfield (1995)] and in the Moodie et al. (1996, 1998). detection of screw axes and glide planes (Gjønnes & Moodie, Niehrs and his co-workers (e.g. Blume, 1966) have shown that, at 1965). Methods for the direct determination of all space groups are or near zones, effective two-beam conditions can sometimes obtain, described by Goodman (1975) and by Tanaka et al. (1983) (see in that, for instance, the central beam and six equidistant beams of Section 2.5.3). equal structure amplitude can exhibit two-beam behaviour when the Equation (5.2.13.1a) can be rewritten in a form particularly excitation errors are equal. Group-theoretical treatments have been suited to the classification of approximations, and to describing the given by Fukuhara (1966) and by Kogiso & Takahashi (1977). underlying symmetry of the formulation. The equation is written for Explicit reductions for all admissible noncentrosymmetric space compactness as groups have been obtained by Moodie & Whitfield (1994). Extensions of such results have application in the interpretation of Un h En hZn , lattice images and convergent-beam patterns. The approximations near the classical limit have been extenso that En h depends only on crystal structure and Zn only on diffraction geometry. A transformation (Cowley & Moodie, 1962) sively explored [for instance, see Berry (1971)] but channelling has effectively become a separate subject and cannot be discussed here. involving bialternants leads to

556


5.3. Dynamical theory of neutron diffraction BY M. SCHLENKER 5.3.1. Introduction Neutron and X-ray scattering are quite similar both in the geometry of scattering and in the orders of magnitude of the basic quantities. When the neutron spin is neglected, i.e. when dealing with scattering by perfect non-magnetic crystals, the formalism and the results of the dynamical theory of X-ray scattering can be very simply transferred to the case of neutrons (Section 5.3.2). Additional features of the neutron case are related to the neutron spin and appear in diffraction by magnetic crystals (Section 5.3.3). The low intensities available, coupled with the low absorption of neutrons by most materials, make it both necessary and possible to use large samples in standard diffraction work. The effect of extinction in crystals that are neither small nor bad enough to be amenable to the kinematical approximation is therefore very important in the neutron case, and will be discussed in Section 5.3.4 together with the effect of crystal distortion. Additional possibilities arise in the neutron case because the neutrons can be manipulated from outside through applied fields (Section 5.3.5). Reasonably extensive tests of the predictions of the dynamical theory of neutron diffraction have been performed, with the handicap of the very low intensities of neutron beams as compared with X-rays: these are described in Section 5.3.6. Finally, the applications of the dynamical theory in the neutron case, and in particular neutron interferometry, are reviewed in Section 5.3.7.

5.3.2. Comparison between X-rays and neutrons with spin neglected 5.3.2.1. The neutron and its interactions An excellent introductory presentation of the production, properties and scattering properties of neutrons is available (Scherm & Fa˚k, 1993, and other papers in the same book). A stimulating review on neutron optics, including diffraction by perfect crystals, has been written by Klein & Werner (1983). X-rays and neutrons are compared in terms of the basic quantities in Table 4.1.3.1 of IT C (1999), where Chapter 4.4 is devoted to neutron techniques. The neutron is a massive particle for which the values relevant to diffraction are: no electric charge, rest mass m 1:675 10 27 kg, angular momentum eigenvalues along a given direction h=2 (spin 1 2) and a magnetic moment of 1.913 nuclear magneton, meaning that its component along a quantization direction z can take eigenvalues z 0:996 10 26 A m2 . The de Broglie wavelength is h=p where h is Planck’s constant (h 2h 6:625 10 34 J s) and p is the linear momentum; p mv in the non-relativistic approximation, which always applies in the context of this chapter, v being the neutron’s velocity. The neutron’s wavelength, , and kinetic energy, Ec , are thus related by h=2mEc 1=2 , or, in practical units, A 9:05=Ec meV1=2 . Thus, to be of interest for diffraction by materials, neutrons should have kinetic energies in the range 100 to 102 meV. In terms of the velocity, A 3:956=v km s 1 . Neutron beams are produced by nuclear reactors or by spallation sources, usually pulsed. In either case they initially have an energy in the MeV range, and have to lose most of it before they can be used. The moderation process involves inelastic interactions with materials. It results in statistical distributions of energy, hence of velocity, close to the Maxwell distribution characteristic of the temperature T of the moderator. Frequently used moderators are liquid deuterium (D2 , i.e. 2 H2 ) at 25 K, heavy water D2 O at room temperature and graphite allowed to heat up to 2400 K; the

AND

corresponding neutron distributions are termed cold, thermal and hot, respectively. The interaction of a neutron with an atom is usually described in terms of scattering lengths or of scattering cross sections. The main contribution corresponding to the nuclear interaction is related to the strong force. The interaction with the magnetic field created by atoms with electronic magnetic moments is comparable in magnitude to the nuclear term. 5.3.2.2. Scattering lengths and refractive index The elastic scattering amplitude for scattering vector s, f s, is defined by the wave scattered by an object placed at the origin when the incident plane wave is i A expik0 r !t, written as s A f s=r expikr !t with k jk0 j jk0 sj 2=. In the case of the strong-force interaction with nuclei, the latter can be considered as point scatterers because the interaction range is very small, hence the scattering amplitude is isotropic (independent of the direction of s). It is also independent of except in the vicinity of resonances. It is conventionally written as b so that most values of b, called the scattering length, are positive. A table of experimentally measured values of the scattering lengths b is given in IT C for the elements in their natural form as well as for many individual isotopes. It is apparent that the typical order of magnitude is the fm (femtometer, i.e. 10 15 m, or fermi), that there is no systematic variation with atomic number and that different isotopes have very different scattering lengths, including different signs. The first remark implies that scattering amplitudes of X-rays and of neutrons have comparable magnitudes, because the characteristic length for X-ray scattering (the scattering amplitude for forward scattering by one free electron) is R 2:8 fm, the classical electron radius. The second and third points explain the importance of neutrons in structural crystallography, in diffuse scattering and in small-angle scattering. Scattering of neutrons by condensed matter implies the use of the bound scattering lengths, as tabulated in IT C. The ‘free’ scattering length, used in some presentations, is obtained by multiplying the bound scattering lengths by A=A 1, where A is the mass of the nucleus in atomic units. A description in terms of an interaction potential is possible using the Fermi pseudo-potential, which in the case of the nuclear interaction with a nucleus at r0 can be written as V r h2 =2mbr r0 , where denotes the three-dimensional Dirac distribution. Refraction of neutrons at an interface can be conveniently described by assigning a refractive index to the material, such that the wavenumber in the material, k, is related to that in a vacuum, k0 , by k nk0 . Here !1=2 2 X bi , n 1 V i where the sum is over the nuclei contained in volume V. PWith typical values, n is very close to 1 and 1 n 2 =2V i bi is typically of the order of 10 5 . This small value, in the same range as for X-rays, gives a feeling for the order of magnitude of key quantities of the dynamical theory, in particular the Darwin width 2 as discussed in Chapter 5.1. It also P makes total external reflection possible on materials for which i bi > 0: this is the basis for the neutron guide tubes now installed in most research reactors, as well as for reflectometry. The notations prevailing in X-ray and in neutron crystallography are slightly different, and the correspondence is very simple: X-ray atomic scattering factors and structure factors are numbers. When


J.-P. GUIGAY

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS multiplied by R, the classical electron radius, they become entirely equivalent to the corresponding quantities in neutron usage, which are lengths. It should be noted that the presence of different isotopes and the effect of nuclear spin (disordered except under very special conditions) give rise to incoherent elastic neutron scattering, which has no equivalent in the X-ray case. The scattering length corresponding to R times the atomic scattering factor for X-rays is therefore the coherent scattering length, bcoh , obtained by averaging the scattering length over the nuclear spin state and isotope distribution. 5.3.2.3. Absorption Neutron absorption is related to a nuclear reaction in which the neutron combines with the absorbing nucleus to form a compound nucleus, usually in a metastable state which then decays. The scattering length describing this resonance scattering process depends on the neutron energy and contains an imaginary part associated with absorption in complete analogy with the imaginary part of the dispersion correction for the X-ray atomic scattering factors. The energies of the resonances are usually far above those of interest for crystallography, and the linear absorption coefficient varies approximately as 1=v or . It is important to note that, except for a very few cases (notably 3 He, 6 Li, 10 B, In, Cd, Gd), the absorption of neutrons is very small compared with that of X-rays, and even more so compared with that of electrons, and can be neglected to a first approximation.

Experiments completely different from the X-ray case can thus be performed with perfect crystals and with neutron interferometers (see Sections 5.3.6 and 5.3.7.3). 5.3.2.5. Translating X-ray dynamical theory into the neutron case As shown in Chapter 5.1, the basic equations of dynamical theory, viz Maxwell’s equations for the X-ray case and the timeindependent Schro¨dinger equation in the neutron case, have exactly the same form when the effect of the neutron spin can be neglected, i.e. in situations that do not involve magnetism and when no externally applied potential is taken into account. The translation scheme for the scattering factors and structure factors is described above. The one formal difference is that the wavefunction is scalar in the neutron case, hence there is no equivalent to the parallel and perpendicular polarizations of the X-ray situation: C in equation (5.1.2.20) of Chapter 5.1 should therefore be set to 1. The physics of neutron diffraction by perfect crystals is therefore expected to be very similar to that of X-ray diffraction, with the existence of wavefields, Pendello¨sung effects, anomalous transmission, intrinsic rocking-curve shapes and reflectivity versus thickness behaviour in direct correspondence. All experimental tests of these predictions confirm this view (Section 5.3.6). Basic discussions of dynamical neutron scattering are given by Stassis & Oberteuffer (1974), Sears (1978), Rauch & Petrascheck (1978), and Squires (1978).

5.3.2.4. Differences between neutron and X-ray scattering There are major differences in the experimental aspects of neutron and X-ray scattering. Neutrons are only available in large facilities, where allocation of beam time to users is made on the basis of applications, and where admittance is restricted because of the hazards which nuclear technology can present in the hands of illintentioned users. Because of the radiation shielding necessary, as well as the large size of neutron detectors, neutron-scattering instrumentation is much bulkier than that for X-rays. Neutron beams are in some aspects similar to synchrotron radiation, in particular because in both cases the beams are initially ‘white’ and for most applications have to be monochromated. There is, however, a huge difference in the order of magnitudes of the intensities. Neutron beams are weak in comparison with laboratory X-ray sources, and weaker by many orders of magnitude than synchrotron radiation. Also, the beam sources are large in the case of neutrons, since they are essentially the moderators, whereas the source is very small in the case of synchrotron radiation, and this difference again increases the ratio of the brilliances in favour of X-rays. This encourages the use of large specimens in all neutronscattering work, and makes the extinction problem more important than for X-rays. Furthermore, many experiments that are quick using X-rays become very slow, and give rise to impaired resolution, in the neutron case. There are also at least two additional aspects of neutron scattering in comparison with X-ray scattering, apart from the effect of the magnetic moment associated with the intrinsic (spin) angular momentum of the neutron. On the one hand, the small velocity of neutrons, compared with the velocity of light, makes time-of-flight measurements possible, both in standard neutron diffraction and in investigations of perfect crystals. Because this velocity is of the same order of magnitude as that of ultrasound, the effect of ultrasonic excitation on neutron diffraction is slightly different from that in the X-ray case. On the other hand, the fact that neutrons have mass and a magnetic moment implies that they can be affected by external fields, such as gravity and magnetic fields, both during their propagation in air or in a vacuum and while being diffracted within crystals (Werner, 1980) (see Section 5.3.5).

5.3.3. Neutron spin, and diffraction by perfect magnetic crystals 5.3.3.1. Polarization of a neutron beam and the Larmor precession in a uniform magnetic field A polarized neutron beam is represented by a two-component spinor, 0 1 c , d c j'i 1 0 d which is the coherent superposition of two states, of different amplitudes c and d, polarized in opposite directions along the spinquantization axis. The spinor components c and d are generally space- and time-dependent. We suppose that h'j'i cc dd 1. The polarization vector P is defined as P h'jsj'i, where the vector s represents the set of Pauli matrices x , y and z . The components of P are c 0 1 c c d Px c d x d 1 0 d c d cd Py c

icd P z c cc

d y

c d

c

0 d i

c d 1 c d z c d 0 d

i

c

0

d

0 1

c d

5:3:3:1

dd ,

from which it is clearly seen that, unlike Pz , the polarization components Px and Py depend on the phase difference between the spinor components c and d.

558

5.3. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF NEUTRON DIFFRACTION In a region of a vacuum in which a uniform magnetic field B is present, a neutron beam experiences a magnetic potential energy represented by the matrix n B 0 n s B , 0 n B n being the neutron magnetic moment, if the directions of B and of the spin-quantization axis coincide. Consequently, different indices of refraction n 1 n B=2E, where E is the neutron energy, should be associated with the spinor components c and d; this induces between these spinor components a phase difference which is a linear function of the time (or, equivalently, of the distance travelled by the neutrons), hence, according to (5.3.3.1), a rotation around the magnetic field of the component of the neutron polarization perpendicular to this magnetic field. The time frequency of this so-called Larmor precession is 2n B=h, where h is Planck’s constant. A neutron beam may be partially polarized; such a beam is conveniently represented by a spin-density matrix , which is the statistical average of the spin-density matrices associated to the polarized beams which are mixed incoherently, the density matrix associated to the spinor c j'i d being

c cc cd j'ih'j : c d d c d dd

The polarization vector P is then obtained as P Trs: 5:3:3:2 In the common case of a non-polarized beam, the spin-density matrix is 1 1 0 : 2 0 1 It is easily seen that all components of P are then equal to 0. Equation (5.3.3.2) is therefore applicable to the general case (polarized, partially polarized or non-polarized beam). The inverse relation giving the density matrix as function of P is 1 1 0 1 P s: 5:3:3:3 0 1 2 2 5.3.3.2. Magnetic scattering by a single ion having unpaired electrons The spin and orbital motion of unpaired electrons in an atom or ion give rise to a surrounding magnetic field Br which acts on the neutron via the magnetic potential energy mn Br, where mn is the neutron magnetic moment. Since this is a long-range interaction, in contrast to the nuclear interaction, the magnetic scattering length p, which is proportional to the Fourier transform of the magnetic potential energy distribution mn Br, depends on the angle of scattering. The classical relation div Br 0 shows clearly that the vector Bs, which is the Fourier transform of Br, is perpendicular to the reciprocal-space vector s. If we consider the magnetic field Br as resulting from a point-like magnetic moment m at position r 0, we get 0 mr Br curl 3 , 4 r 1 7 where 0 4 10 H m is the permittivity of a vacuum and

denotes the cross product. Br can be Fourier-transformed into ms Bs 0 s 2 0 m? s, 5:3:3:4 s where m? s is the projection of m on the plane perpendicular to s (reflecting plane). This result can be applied by volume integration to the more general case of a spatially extended magnetization distribution, which for a single magnetic ion corresponds to the atomic shell of the unpaired electrons. It is thus shown that the magnetic scattering length is proportional to mn mi? , where mi? is the projection of the magnetic moment of the ion on the reflecting plane. For a complete description of magnetic scattering, which involves the spin-polarization properties of the scattered beam, it is necessary to represent the neutron wavefunction in the form of a two-component spinor and the ion’s magnetic moment as a spin operator which is a matrix expressed in terms of the Pauli matrices s x , y , z . The magnetic scattering length is therefore itself a 2 2 matrix: p 2m=h2 n s Bs 0 2m=h2 n s mi? sfi sin =, 5:3:3:5

where fi sin = is the dimensionless magnetic form factor of the ion considered and tends towards a maximum value of 1 when the scattering angle tends towards 0 (forward scattering). The value of 0 2m=h2 n i is p1 2:70 10 15 m for i 1 Bohr magneton. According to (5.3.3.4) or (5.3.3.5), there is no magnetic scattering in directions such that the scattering vector s is in the same direction as the ion magnetic moment mi . Magnetic scattering effects are maximum when s and mi are perpendicular. The matrix (p) is diagonal if the direction of mi? s is chosen as the spin-quantization axis. Therefore, there is no spin-flip scattering if the incident beam is polarized parallel or antiparallel to the direction of mi? s. It is more usual to choose the spin-quantization axis (Oz) along mi . Let be the angle between the vectors mi and s; the x, y, z components of mi? s are then i sin cos , 0, i sin2 if the y axis is chosen along mi s. The total scattering length, which is the sum of the nuclear and the magnetic scattering lengths, is then represented by the matrix b p sin2 p sin cos , 5:3:3:6 q p sin cos b p sin2 where b is the nuclear scattering length and 2m sin sin p 0 2 n i fi p1 i fi , h with i expressed in Bohr magnetons. The relations ! 1 b p sin2 q and 0 p sin cos 0 p sin cos q 1 b p sin2 show clearly that the diagonal and the non-diagonal elements of the matrix (q) are, respectively, the spin-flip and the non-spin-flip scattering lengths. It is usual to consider the scattering cross sections, which are the measurable quantities. The cross sections for neutrons polarized parallel or antiparallel to the ion magnetic moment are

559

d=d b2 2bp sin2 p sin 2 :

5:3:3:7

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS These expressions are the sum of the spin-flip and non-spin-flip cross sections, which are equal to b p sin2 2 and p sin cos 2 , respectively. In the case of non-polarized neutrons, the interference term 2bp sin2 between the nuclear and the magnetic scattering disappears; the cross section is then d=d b2 p sin 2 : 5:3:3:8 In the general case of a partially polarized beam we can use the density-matrix representation. Let inc be the density matrix of the incident beam; it can be shown that the density matrix of the diffracted beam is equal to the following product of matrices: qinc q . Using the relations between the density matrix and polarization vector presented in the preceding section, we can obtain a general description of the diffracted beam as a function of the polarization properties of the incident beam. Such a formalism is of interest for dealing with new experimental arrangements, in which a three-dimensional polarization analysis of the diffracted beam is possible, as shown by Tasset (1989). 5.3.3.3. Dynamical theory in the case of perfect ferromagnetic or collinear ferrimagnetic crystals The most direct way to develop this dynamical theory in the twobeam case, which involves a single Bragg-diffracted beam of diffraction vector h, is to consider spinor wavefunctions of the following form: D0 Dh expiK0 hr 5:3:3:9 'r expiK0 r E0 Eh

Fig. 5.3.3.1. Schematic plot of the two-beam dispersion surface in the case of a purely magnetic reflection such that Qh Q h Q0 and that the angle between Q0 and Qh is equal to =4.

two spin states () separate dynamical equations which are similar to the dynamical equations for the scalar case, but with different structure factors, which are either the sum or the difference of the nuclear structure factor FN and of the magnetic structure factor FM :

as approximate solutions of the wave equation inside the crystal, 'r k 2 'r ur

s Qr'r,

where ur and s Qr are, respectively, equal to the nuclear and the magnetic potential energies multiplied by 2m=h2 . In the calculation of 'r in the two-beam case, we need only three terms in the expansions of the functions ur and Qr into Fourier series: ur u0 uh expih r u

h exp

Qr Q0 Qh expih r Q

ih r . . . ,

h exp

F FN FM and F FN

5:3:3:10

ih r . . . :

We suppose that the crystal is magnetically saturated by an externally applied magnetic field Ha . Q0 is then proportional to the macroscopic mean magnetic field B 0 M Ha Hd , where M is the magnetization vector and Hd is the demagnetizing field. The results of Section 5.3.3.2 show that Qh and Q h are proportional to the projection of M on the reflecting plane. The four coefficients D0 , Dh , E0 and Eh of (5.3.3.9) are found to satisfy a system of four homogeneous linear equations. The condition that the associated determinant has to be equal to 0 defines the dispersion surface, which is of order 4 and has four branches. An incident plane wave thus excites a system of four wavefields of the form of (5.3.3.9), generally polarized in various directions. A particular example of a dispersion surface, having an unusual shape, is shown in Fig. 5.3.3.1. This is a much more complicated situation than in the case of non-magnetic crystals, in which one only needs to consider scalar wavefunctions which depend on two coefficients, such as D0 and Dh , and which are related to hyperbolic dispersion surfaces of order 2, as fully described in Chapter 5.1 on X-ray diffraction. In fact, all neutron experiments related to dynamical effects in diffraction by magnetic crystals have been performed under such conditions that the magnetization vector in the crystal is perpendicular to the diffraction vector h. In this case, the vectors Qh and Q h are parallel or antiparallel to the vector Q0 which is chosen as the spin-quantization axis. The matrices s Q0 , s Qh and s Q h are then all diagonal matrices, and we obtain for the

FM :

5:3:3:11

FN and FM are related to the scattering lengths of the ions in the unit cell of volume Vc : P FN Vc uh bi exp ih ri ; i P 0 m sin n s mi? hfi FM Vc jQh j exp ih ri : 2h2 i The dispersion surface of order 4 degenerates into two hyperbolic dispersion surfaces, each of them corresponding to one of the polarization states (). The asymptotes are different; this is related to different values of the refractive indices for neutron polarization parallel or antiparallel to Q0 . In some special cases the magnitudes of FN and FM happen to be equal. Only one polarization state is then reflected. Magnetic crystals with such a property (reflections 111 of the Heusler alloy Cu2 MnAl, or 200 of the alloy Co–8% Fe) are very useful as polarizing monochromators and as analysers of polarization. If the scattering vector h is in the same direction as the magnetization, this reflection is a purely nuclear one (with no magnetic contribution), since FM is then equal to 0. Purely magnetic reflections (without nuclear contribution) also exist if the magnetic structure involves several sublattices. If h is neither perpendicular to the average magnetization nor in the same direction, the presence of non-diagonal matrices in the dynamical equations cannot be avoided. The dynamical theory of diffraction by perfect magnetic crystals then takes the complicated form already mentioned. Theoretical discussions of this complicated case of dynamical diffraction have been given by Stassis & Oberteuffer (1974), Mendiratta & Blume (1976), Sivardie`re (1975), Belyakov & Bokun (1975, 1976), Schmidt et al. (1975), Bokun (1979), Guigay & Schlenker (1979a,b), and Schmidt (1983). However, to our knowledge, only limited experimental work has been carried out

560

5.3. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF NEUTRON DIFFRACTION on this subject. Successful experiments could only be performed for the simpler cases mentioned above. 5.3.3.4. The dynamical theory in the case of perfect collinear antiferromagnetic crystals In this case, there is no average magnetization Q0 0. It is then convenient to choose the quantization axis in the direction of Qh and Q h . The dispersion surface degenerates into two hyperbolic surfaces corresponding to each polarization state along this direction for any orientation of the diffraction vector relative to the direction of the magnetic moments of the sublattices. These two hyperbolic dispersion surfaces have the same asymptotes. Furthermore, in the case of a purely magnetic reflection, they are identical. The possibility of observing a precession of the neutron polarization in the presence of diffraction, in spite of the fact that there is no average magnetization, has been pointed out by Baryshevskii (1976). 5.3.3.5. The flipping ratio In polarized neutron diffraction by a magnetically saturated magnetic sample, it is usual to measure the ratio of the reflected intensities I and I measured when the incident beam is polarized parallel or antiparallel to the magnetization in the sample. This ratio is called the flipping ratio, R I =I ,

5:3:3:12

because its measurement involves flipping the incident-beam polarization to the opposite direction. This is an experimentally well defined quantity, because it is independent of a number of parameters such as the intensity of the incident beam, the temperature factor or the coefficient of absorption. In the case of an ideally imperfect crystal, we obtain from the kinematical expressions of the integrated reflectivities jFN FM j 2 R kin h I =I kin : 5:3:3:13 jFN FM j In the case of an ideally perfect thick crystal, we obtain from the dynamical expressions of the integrated reflectivities R dyn h I =I dyn

jFN FM j : jFN FM j

5:3:3:14

In general, R dyn depends on the wavelength and on the crystal thickness; these dependences disappear, as seen from (5.3.3.14), if the path length in the crystal is much larger than the extinction distances for the two polarization states. It is clear that the determination of R kin or R dyn allows the determination of the ratio FM =FN , hence of FM if FN is known. In fact, because real crystals are neither ideally imperfect nor ideally perfect, one usually introduces an extinction factor y (extinction is discussed below, in Section 5.3.4) in order to distinguish the real crystal reflectivity from the reflectivity of the ideally imperfect crystal. Different extinction coefficients y and y are actually expected for the two polarization states. This obviously complicates the task of the determination of FM =FN . In the kinematical approximation, the flipping ratio does not depend on the wavelength, in contrast to dynamical calculations for hypothetically perfect crystals (especially for the Laue case of diffraction). Therefore, an experimental investigation of the wavelength dependence of the flipping ratio is a convenient test for the presence of extinction. Measurements of the flipping ratio have been used by Bonnet et al. (1976) and by Kulda et al. (1991) in order to test extinction models. Baruchel et al. (1986) have compared nuclear and magnetic extinction in a crystal of MnP.

Instead of considering only the ratio of the integrated reflectivities, it is also possible to record the flipping ratio as a function of the angular position of the crystal as it is rotated across the Bragg position. Extinction is expected to be maximum at the peak and the ratio measured on the tails of the rocking curve may approach the kinematical value. It has been found experimentally that this expectation is not of general validity, as discussed by Chakravarthy & Madhav Rao (1980). It would be valid in the case of a perfect crystal, hence in the case of pure primary extinction. It would also be valid in the case of secondary extinction of type I, but not in the case of secondary extinction of type II [following Zachariasen (1967), type II corresponds to mosaic crystals such that the diffraction pattern from each block is wider than the mosaic statistical distribution].

5.3.4. Extinction in neutron diffraction (non-magnetic case) The kinematical approximation, which corresponds to the first Born approximation in scattering theory, supposes that each incident neutron can be scattered only once and therefore neglects the possibility that the neutrons may be scattered several times. Because this is a simple approximation which overestimates the crystal reflectivity, the actual reduction of reflectivity, as compared to its kinematical value, is termed extinction. This is actually a typical dynamical effect, since it is a multiple-scattering effect. Extinction effects can be safely neglected in the case of scattering by very small crystals; more precisely, this is possible when the path length of the neutron beam in the crystal is much smaller than Vc =F, where is the neutron wavelength and F=Vc is the scattering length per unit volume for the reflection considered. is sometimes called the ‘extinction distance’. A very important fact is that extinction effects also vanish if the crystal is imperfect enough, because each plane-wave component of the incident beam can then be Bragg-reflected in only a small volume of the sample. This is the extinction-free case of ‘ideally imperfect crystals’. Conversely, extinction is maximum (smallest value of y) in the case of ideally perfect non-absorbing crystals. Clearly, no significant extinction effects are expected if the crystal is thick but strongly absorbing, more precisely if the linear absorption coefficient is such that 1. Neutron diffraction usually corresponds to the opposite case 1, in which extinction effects in nearly perfect crystals dominate absorption effects. Extinction effects are usually described in the frame of the mosaic model, in which the crystal is considered as a juxtaposition of perfect blocks with different orientations. The relevance of this model to the case of neutron diffraction was first considered by Bacon & Lowde (1948). If the mosaic blocks are big enough there is extinction within each block; this is called primary extinction. Multiple scattering can also occur in different blocks if their misorientation is small enough. In this case, which is called secondary extinction, there is no phase coherence between the scattering events in the different blocks. The fact that empirical intensity-coupling equations are used in this case is based on this phase incoherence. In the general case, primary and secondary extinction effects coexist. Pure secondary extinction occurs in the case of a mosaic crystal made of very small blocks. Pure primary extinction is observed in diffraction by perfect crystals. The parameters of the mosaic model are the average size of the perfect blocks and the angular width of their misorientation distribution. The extinction theory of the mosaic model provides a relation between these parameters and the extinction coefficient,

561

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS defined as the ratio of the observed reflectivity to the ideal one, which is the kinematical reflectivity in this context. In conventional work, the crystal structure factors of different reflections and the parameters of the mosaic model are fitted together to the experimental data, which are the integrated reflectivities and the angular widths of the rocking curves. In many cases, only the weakest reflections will be free, or nearly free, from extinction. The extinction corrections thus obtained can be considered as satisfactory in cases of moderate extinction. Nevertheless, extinction remains a real problem in cases of strong extinction and in any case if a very precise determination of the crystal structure factors is required. There exist several forms of the mosaic model of extinction. For instance, in the model developed by Kulda (1988a,b, 1991), the mosaic blocks are not considered just as simple perfect blocks but may be deformed perfect blocks. This has the advantage of including the case of macroscopically deformed crystals, such as bent crystals. A basically different approach, free from the distinction between primary and secondary extinction, has been proposed by Kato (1980a,b). This is a wave-optical approach starting from the dynamical equations for diffraction by deformed crystals. These so-called Takagi–Taupin equations (Takagi, 1962; Taupin, 1964) contain a position-dependent phase factor related to the displacement field of the deformed crystal lattice. Kato proposed considering this phase factor as a random function with suitably defined statistical characteristics. The wave amplitudes are then also random functions, the average of which represent the coherent wavefields while their statistical fluctuations represent the incoherent intensity fields. Modifications to the Kato formulation have been introduced by Al Haddad & Becker (1988), by Becker & Al Haddad (1990, 1992), by Guigay (1989) and by Guigay & Chukhovskii (1992, 1995). Presently, it is not easy to apply this ‘statistical dynamical theory’ to real experiments. The widely used methods for extinction corrections are still based on the former mosaic model, according to the formulation of Zachariasen (1967), later improved by Becker & Coppens (1974a,b, 1975). As in the X-ray case, acoustic waves produced by ultrasonic excitation can artificially induce a transition from perfect to ideally imperfect crystal behaviour. The effect of ultrasound on the scattering behaviour of distorted crystals is quite complex. A good discussion with reference to neutron-scattering experiments is given by Zolotoyabko & Sander (1995). The situation of crystals with a simple distortion field is less difficult than the statistical problem of extinction. Klar & Rustichelli (1973) confirmed that the Takagi–Taupin equations, originally devised for X-rays, can be used for neutron diffraction with due account of the very small absorption, and used them for computing the effect of crystal curvature.

5.3.5. Effect of external fields on neutron scattering by perfect crystals The possibility of acting on neutrons through externally applied fields during their propagation in perfect crystals provides possibilities that are totally unknown in the X-ray case. The theory has been given by Werner (1980) using the approaches (migration of tie points, and Takagi–Taupin equations) that are customary in the treatment of imperfect crystals (see above). Zeilinger et al. (1986) pointed out that the effective-mass concept, familiar in describing electrons in solid-state physics, can shed new light on this behaviour: because of the curvature of the dispersion surface at a near-exact Bragg setting, effective masses five orders of

magnitude smaller than the rest mass of the neutron in a vacuum can be obtained. Related experiments are discussed below. An interesting proposal was put forward by Horne et al. (1988) on the coupling between the Larmor precession in a homogeneous magnetic field and the spin–orbit interaction of the neutron with non-magnetic atoms, a term which was dismissed in Section 5.3.2 because its contribution to the scattering length is two orders of magnitude smaller than that of the nuclear term. A resonance is expected to show up as highly enhanced diffracted intensity when a perfect sample is set for Bragg scattering and the magnetic field is adjusted so that the Larmor precession period is equal to the Pendello¨sung period.

5.3.6. Experimental tests of the dynamical theory of neutron scattering These experiments are less extensive for neutron scattering than for X-rays. The two most striking effects of dynamical theory for nonmagnetic nearly perfect crystals, Pendello¨sung behaviour and anomalous absorption, have been demonstrated in the neutron case too. Pendello¨sung measurement is described below (Section 5.3.7.2) because it is useful in the determination of scattering lengths. The anomalous transmission effect occurring when a perfect absorbing crystal is exactly at Bragg setting, i.e. the Borrmann effect, is often referred to in the neutron case as the suppression of the inelastic channel in resonance scattering, after Kagan & Afanas’ev (1966), who worked out the theory. A small decrease in absorption was detected in pioneering experiments on calcite by Knowles (1956) using the corresponding decrease in the emission of -rays and by Sippel et al. (1962), Shil’shtein et al. (1971), and Hastings et al. (1990) directly. Rocking curves of perfect crystals were measured by Sippel et al. (1964) in transmission, and by Kikuta et al. (1975). Integrated intensities were measured by Lambert & Malgrange (1982). The large angular amplification associated with the curvature of the dispersion surfaces near the exact Bragg setting was demonstrated by Kikuta et al. (1975) and by Zeilinger & Shull (1979). In magnetic crystals, the investigations have been restricted to the simpler geometry where the scattering vector is perpendicular to the magnetization, and to few materials. Pendello¨sung behaviour was evidenced through the variation with wavelength of the flipping ratio for polarized neutrons by Baruchel et al. (1982) on an yttrium iron garnet sample, with the geometry selected so that the defects would not affect the Bragg reflection used. The inclination method was used successfully by Zelepukhin et al. (1989), Kvardakov & Somenkov (1990), and Kvardakov et al. (1990a) for the weak ferromagnet FeBO3 , and in the room-temperature weak-ferromagnetic phase of hematite, -Fe2 O3 , by Kvardakov et al. (1990b), and Kvardakov & Somenkov (1992). Experiments on the influence of defects in nearly perfect crystals have been performed by several groups. The effect on the rocking curve was investigated by Eichhorn et al. (1967), the intensities were measured by Lambert & Malgrange (1982) and by Albertini, Boeuf, Cesini et al. (1976), and the influence on the Pendello¨sung behaviour was discussed by Kvardakov & Somenkov (1992). Boeuf & Rustichelli (1974) and Albertini et al. (1977) investigated silicon crystals curved by a thin surface silicon nitride layer. Many experiments have been performed on vibrating crystals; reviews are given by Michalec et al. (1988) and by Kulda et al. (1988). Because the velocity of neutrons is of the same order of magnitude as the velocity of acoustic phonons in crystals, the effect of ultrasonic excitation on dynamical diffraction takes on some original features compared to the X-ray case (Iolin & Entin, 1983); they could to some extent be evidenced experimentally (Iolin et al., 1986; Chalupa et al., 1986). References to experimental work on

562

5.3. DYNAMICAL THEORY OF NEUTRON DIFFRACTION neutron scattering by imperfect crystals under ultrasonic excitation are included in Zolotoyabko & Sander (1995). Some experiments with no equivalent in the X-ray case could be performed. The very strong incoherent scattering of neutrons by protons, very different physically but similar in its effect to absorption, was also shown to lead to anomalous transmission effects by Sippel & Eichhorn (1968). Because the velocity of thermal neutrons in a vacuum is five orders of magnitude smaller than the velocity of light, the flight time for neutrons undergoing Bragg scattering in Laue geometry in a perfect crystal could be measured directly (Shull et al., 1980). The effect of externally applied fields was measured experimentally for magnetic fields by Zeilinger & Shull (1979) and Zeilinger et al. (1986). Slight rotation of the crystal, introducing a Coriolis force, was used by Raum et al. (1995), and gravity was tested recently, with the spectacular result that some states are accelerated upwards (Zeilinger, 1995). 5.3.7. Applications of the dynamical theory of neutron scattering 5.3.7.1. Neutron optics Most experiments in neutron scattering require an intensityeffective use of the available beam at the cost of relatively high divergence and wavelength spread. The monochromators must then be imperfect (‘mosaic’) crystals. In some cases, however, it is important to have a small divergence and wavelength band. One example is the search for small variations in neutron energy in inelastic scattering without the use of the neutron spin-echo principle. Perfect crystals must then be used as monochromators or analysers, and dynamical diffraction is directly involved. As in the X-ray case, special designs can lead to strong decrease in the intensity of harmonics, i.e. of contributions of =2 or =3 (Hart & Rodrigues, 1978). The possibility of focusing neutron beams by the use of perfect crystals with the incident beam spatially modulated in amplitude through an absorber, or in phase through an appropriate patterning of the surface, in analogy with the Bragg–Fresnel lenses developed for X-rays, was suggested by Indenbom (1979). The use of two identical perfect crystals in non-dispersive (+, , k) setting provides a way of measuring the very narrow intrinsic rocking curves expected from the dynamical theory. Any divergence added between the two crystals can be sensitively measured. Thus perfect crystals provide interesting possibilities for measuring very-small-angle neutron scattering. This was performed by Takahashi et al. (1981, 1983) and Tomimitsu et al. (1986) on amorphous materials, and by Kvardakov et al. (1987) for the investigation of ferromagnetic domains in bulk silicon–iron specimens under stress, both through the variations in transmission associated with refraction on the domain walls and through smallangle scattering. Imaging applications are described in Section 5.3.7.4. Badurek et al. (1979) used the different deflection of the two polarization states provided by a magnetic prism placed between two perfect silicon crystals to produce polarized beams. Curved almost-perfect crystals or crystals with a gradient in the lattice spacing can provide focusing (Albertini, Boeuf, Lagomarsino et al., 1976) and vibrating crystals can give the possibility of tailoring the reflectivity of crystals, as well as of modulating beams in time (Michalec et al., 1988). A double-crystal arrangement with bent crystals was shown by Eichhorn (1988) to be a flexible smallangle-neutron-scattering device. 5.3.7.2. Measurement of scattering lengths by Pendello¨sung effects As in X-ray diffraction, Pendello¨sung oscillations provide an accurate way of measuring structure factors, hence coherent neutron

scattering lengths. The equal-thickness fringes expected from a wedge-shaped crystal were observed by Kikuta et al. (1971). Three kinds of measurements were made. Sippel et al. (1965) measured as a function of thickness the integrated reflectivity from a perfect crystal of silicon, the thickness of which they varied by polishing after each measurement, obtaining a curve similar to Fig. 5.1.6.7, corresponding to equation 5.1.6.8. Shull (1968) restricted the measurement to wavefields that propagated along the reflecting planes, hence at exact Bragg incidence, by setting fine slits on the entrance and exit faces of 3 to 10 mm-thick silicon crystals, and measured the oscillation in diffracted intensity as he varied the wavelength of the neutrons used by rotating the crystal. Shull & Oberteuffer (1972) showed that a better interpretation of the data, when the beam is restricted to a fine slit, corresponds to the spherical wave approach (actually cylindrical wave), and the boundary conditions were discussed more generally by Arthur & Horne (1985). Somenkov et al. (1978) developed the inclination method, in which the integrated reflectivity is measured as the effective crystal thickness is varied non-destructively, by rotating the crystal around the diffraction vector, and used it for germanium. Belova et al. (1983) discuss this method in detail. The results obtained by this group for magnetic crystals are mentioned in Section 5.3.6. Structure-factor values for magnetic reflections were obtained by Kvardakov et al. (1995) for the weak ferromagnet FeBO3 . 5.3.7.3. Neutron interferometry Because diffraction by perfect crystals provides a well defined distribution of the intensity and phase of the beam, interferometry with X-rays or neutrons is possible using ingeniously designed and carefully manufactured monolithic devices carved out of single crystals of silicon. The technical and scientific features of this family of techniques are well summarized by Bonse (1979, 1988), as well as other papers in the same volumes, and by Shull (1986). X-ray interferometry started with the Bonse–Hart interferometer (Bonse & Hart, 1965). A typical device is the LLL skew-symmetric interferometer, where the L’s stand for Laue, indicating transmission geometry in all crystal slabs. In these slabs, which can be called the splitter, the mirrors and the recombiner, the same pair of opposite reflections, in symmetrical Laue geometry, is used three times. In the first slab, the incident beam is coherently split into a transmitted and a diffracted beam. Each of these is then diffracted in the two mirrors, and the resulting beams interfere in the recombiner, again yielding a forward-diffracted and a diffracted beam, the intensities of both of which are measured. This version, the analogue of the Mach–Zehnder interferometer in optics, offers a sizeable space (several cm of path length) where two coherent parallel beams can be submitted to various external actions. Shifting the relative phase of these beams (e.g. by , introducing an optical path-length difference of =2) results in the intensities of the outgoing beams changing from a maximum to a minimum. Applications of neutron interferometry range from the very useful to the very exotic. The most useful one is probably the measurement of coherent neutron scattering lengths. Unlike the Pendello¨sung method described in Section 5.3.7.2, this method does not require the measured samples to be perfect single crystals, nor indeed crystals. Placing a slab of material across one of the beams and rotating it will induce an optical path-length difference of 1 nt if t is the effective thickness along the beam, hence a phase shift of 21 nt=. With the expression of the refractive index n as given in Section 5.3.2.2, it is clear that for an isotopically pure material the scattering length bcoh can be deduced from the measurement of intensity versus the rotation angle of the phase shifter. This is a very versatile and much used method. The decrease in oscillation contrast can be used to obtain information of

563

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS relevance to materials science, such as statistical properties of magnetic domain distributions (Korpiun, 1966) or precipitates (Rauch & Seidl, 1987); Rauch (1995) analyses the effect in terms of the neutron coherence function. Many elegant experiments have been performed with neutron interferometers in efforts to set an upper limit to effects than can be considered as nonexistent, or to test expectations of basic quantum physics. Many papers are found in the same volumes as Bonse (1979) and Bonse (1988); excellent reviews have been given by Klein & Werner (1983), Klein (1988), and Werner (1995). Among the topics investigated are the effect of gravity (Colella et al., 1975), the Sagnac effect, i.e. the influence of the Earth’s rotation (Werner et al., 1979), the Fizeau effect, i.e. the effect of the movement of the material through which the neutrons are transmitted (Arif et al., 1988) and the Aharonov–Casher effect, i.e. the dual of the Aharonov–Bohm effect for neutral particles having a magnetic moment (Cimmino et al., 1989). 5.3.7.4. Neutron diffraction topography and other imaging methods These are the neutron form of the ‘topographic’ or diffraction imaging techniques, in which an image of a single crystal is obtained through the local variations in Bragg-diffracted intensity due to inhomogeneities in the sample. It is briefly described in Chapter 2.8 of IT C. It was pioneered by Doi et al. (1971) and by Ando & Hosoya (1972). Like its X-ray counterpart, neutron topography can reveal isolated defects, such as dislocations (Schlenker et al., 1974; Malgrange et al., 1976). Because of the small neutron fluxes available, it is not very convenient for this purpose, since the resolution is poor or the exposure times are very long. On the other hand, the very low absorption of neutrons in most materials makes it quite convenient for observing the gross defect structure in samples that would be too absorbing for X-rays (Tomimitsu & Doi, 1974; Baruchel et al., 1978; Tomimitsu et al., 1983; Kvardakov et al., 1992), or the spatial modulation of distortion due to vibration, for example in quartz (Michalec et al., 1975), and resonant magnetoelastic effects (Kvardakov & Some-

nkov, 1991). In particular, virtual slices of bulky as-grown samples can be investigated without cutting them using neutron section topography or neutron tomography (Schlenker et al., 1975; Davidson & Case, 1976). Neutron topography also shows the salient dynamical interference effect, viz Pendello¨sung, visually, in the form of fringes (Kikuta et al., 1971; Malgrange et al., 1976; Tomimitsu & Zeyen, 1978). Its unique feature, however, is the possibility of observing and directly characterizing inhomogeneities in the magnetic structure, i.e. magnetic domains of all kinds [ferromagnetic domains (Schlenker & Shull, 1973) and antiferromagnetic domains of various sorts (Schlenker & Baruchel, 1978), including spindensity wave domains (Ando & Hosoya, 1972, 1978; Davidson et al., 1974), 180° or time-reversed domains in some materials and helimagnetic or chirality domains (Baruchel et al., 1990)], or coexisting phases at a first-order phase transition (Baruchel, 1989). In such cases, the contrast is primarily due to local variations in the structure factor, a situation very unusual in X-ray topography, and good crystal quality, leading to dynamical scattering behaviour, is essential in the observation process only in a few cases (Schlenker et al., 1978). It is often crucial, however, for making the domain structure simple enough to be resolved, in particular in the case of antiferromagnetic domains. Imaging can also be performed for samples that need be neither crystals nor perfect. Phase-contrast imaging of a specimen through which the neutrons are transmitted can be performed in a neutron interferometer. It has been shown to reveal thickness variations by Bauspiess et al. (1978) and ferromagnetic domains by Schlenker et al. (1980). The same papers showed that phase edges show up as contrast when one of the interferometer paths is blocked, i.e. when the sample is placed effectively between perfect, identical crystals set for diffraction in a non-dispersive setting. Under the name of neutron radiography with refraction contrast, this technique, essentially a form of Schlieren imaging, was further developed by Podurets, Somenkov & Shil’shtein (1989), Podurets, Somenkov, Chistyakov & Shil’shtein (1989), and Podurets et al. (1991), who were able to image internal ferromagnetic domain walls in samples 10 mm thick.

564

REFERENCES

References 5.1 Authier, A. (1970). Ewald waves in theory and experiment. Adv. Struct. Res. Diffr. Methods, 3, 1–51. Authier, A. (1986). Angular dependence of the absorption induced nodal plane shifts of X-ray stationary waves. Acta Cryst. A42, 414–426. Authier, A. (1989). X-ray standing waves. J. Phys. (Paris), 50, C7215, C7-224. Authier, A. (2001). Dynamical theory of X-ray diffraction. IUCr Monographs on Crystallography. Oxford University Press. Authier, A. & Balibar, F. (1970). Creátion de nouveaux champs d’onde geńe´ralise´s dus a` la pre´sence d’un objet diffractant. II. Cas d’un de´faut isole´. Acta Cryst. A26, 647–654. Authier, A. & Malgrange, C. (1998). Diffraction physics. Acta Cryst. A54, 806–819. Batterman, B. W. (1964). Effect of dynamical diffraction in X-ray fluorescence scattering. Phys. Rev. A, 133, 759–764. Batterman, B. W. (1969). Detection of foreign atom sites by their X-ray fluorescence scattering. Phys. Rev. Lett. 22, 703–705. Batterman, B. W. & Bilderback, D. H. (1991). X-ray monochromators and mirrors. In Handbook on synchrotron radiation, Vol. 3, edited by G. Brown & D. E. Moncton, pp. 105–153. Amsterdam: Elsevier Science Publishers BV. Batterman, B. W. & Cole, H. (1964). Dynamical diffraction of X-rays by perfect crystals. Rev. Mod. Phys. 36, 681–717. Batterman, B. W. & Hildebrandt, G. (1967). Observation of X-ray Pendello¨sung fringes in Darwin reflection. Phys. Status Solidi, 23, K147–K149. Batterman, B. W. & Hildebrandt, G. (1968). X-ray Pendello¨sung fringes in Darwin reflection. Acta Cryst. A24, 150–157. Bedzyk, M. J. (1988). New trends in X-ray standing waves. Nucl. Instrum. Methods A, 266, 679–683. Bonse, U. & Teworte, R. (1980). Measurement of X-ray scattering factors of Si from the fine structure of Laue case rocking curves. J. Appl. Cryst. 13, 410–416. Born, M. & Wolf, E. (1983). Principles of optics, 6th ed. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Borrmann, G. (1950). Die Absorption von Ro¨ntgenstrahlen in Fall der Interferenz. Z. Phys. 127, 297–323. Borrmann, G. (1954). Der kleinste Absorption Koeffizient interfierender Ro¨ntgenstrahlung. Z. Kristallogr. 106, 109–121. Borrmann, G. (1959). Ro¨ntgenwellenfelder. Beit. Phys. Chem. 20 Jahrhunderts, pp. 262–282. Braunschweig: Vieweg und Sohn. Bragg, W. L. (1913). The diffraction of short electromagnetic waves by a crystal. Proc. Cambridge Philos. Soc. 17, 43–57. Bragg, W. L., Darwin, C. G. & James, R. W. (1926). The intensity of reflection of X-rays by crystals. Philos. Mag. 1, 897–922. Bru¨mmer, O. & Stephanik, H. (1976). Dynamische Interferenztheorie. Leipzig: Akademische Verlagsgesellshaft. Chang, S.-L. (1987). Solution to the X-ray phase problem using multiple diffraction – a review. Crystallogr. Rev. 1, 87–189. Cowan, P. L., Brennan, S., Jach, T., Bedzyk, M. J. & Materlik, G. (1986). Observations of the diffraction of evanescent X-rays at a crystal surface. Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 2399–2402. Darwin, C. G. (1914a). The theory of X-ray reflection. Philos. Mag. 27, 315–333. Darwin, C. G. (1914b). The theory of X-ray reflection. Part II. Philos. Mag. 27, 675–690. Darwin, C. G. (1922). The reflection of X-rays from imperfect crystals. Philos. Mag. 43, 800–829. Ewald, P. P. (1917). Zur Begru¨ndung der Kristalloptik. III. Ro¨ntgenstrahlen. Ann. Phys. (Leipzig), 54, 519–597. Ewald, P. P. (1958). Group velocity and phase velocity in X-ray crystal optics. Acta Cryst. 11, 888–891. Fewster, P. F. (1993). X-ray diffraction from low-dimensional structures. Semicond. Sci. Technol. 8, 1915–1934. Fingerland, A. (1971). Some properties of the single crystal rocking curve in the Bragg case. Acta Cryst. A27, 280–284.

Golovchenko, J. A., Patel, J. R., Kaplan, D. R., Cowan, P. L. & Bedzyk, M. J. (1982). Solution to the surface registration problem using X-ray standing waves. Phys. Rev. Lett. 49, 560–563. Hart, M. (1981). Bragg angle measurement and mapping. J. Crystal Growth, 55, 409–427. Hirsch, P. B. & Ramachandran, G. N. (1950). Intensity of X-ray reflection from perfect and mosaic absorbing crystals. Acta Cryst. 3, 187–194. Hu¨mmer, K. & Weckert, E. (1995). Enantiomorphism and threebeam X-ray diffraction: determination of the absolute structure. Acta Cryst. A51, 431–438. International Tables for Crystallography (1999). Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. James, R. W. (1950). The optical principles of the diffraction of X-rays. London: G. Bell and Sons Ltd. James, R. W. (1963). The dynamical theory of X-ray diffraction. Solid State Phys. 15, 53. Kato, N. (1955). Integrated intensities of the diffracted and transmitted X-rays due to ideally perfect crystal. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 10, 46–55. Kato, N. (1958). The flow of X-rays and material waves in an ideally perfect single crystal. Acta Cryst. 11, 885–887. Kato, N. (1960). The energy flow of X-rays in an ideally perfect crystal: comparison between theory and experiments. Acta Cryst. 13, 349–356. Kato, N. (1961a). A theoretical study of Pendello¨sung fringes. Part I. General considerations. Acta Cryst. 14, 526–532. Kato, N. (1961b). A theoretical study of Pendello¨sung fringes. Part 2. Detailed discussion based upon a spherical wave theory. Acta Cryst. 14, 627–636. Kato, N. (1963). Pendello¨sung fringes in distorted crystals. I. Fermat’s principle for Bloch waves. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 18, 1785– 1791. Kato, N. (1964a). Pendello¨sung fringes in distorted crystals. II. Application to two-beam cases. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 19, 67–77. Kato, N. (1964b). Pendello¨sung fringes in distorted crystals. III. Application to homogeneously bent crystals. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 19, 971–985. Kato, N. (1968a). Spherical-wave theory of dynamical X-ray diffraction for absorbing perfect crystals. I. The crystal wave fields. J. Appl. Phys. 39, 2225–2230. Kato, N. (1968b). Spherical-wave theory of dynamical X-ray diffraction for absorbing perfect crystals. II. Integrated reflection power. J. Appl. Phys. 39, 2231–2237. Kato, N. (1974). X-ray diffraction. In X-ray diffraction, edited by L. V. Azaroff, R. Kaplow, N. Kato, R. J. Weiss, A. J. C. Wilson & R. A. Young, pp. 176–438. New York: McGraw-Hill. Kato, N. & Lang, A. R. (1959). A study of Pendello¨sung fringes in X-ray diffraction. Acta Cryst. 12, 787–794. Kikuta, S. (1971). Determination of structure factors of X-rays using half-widths of the Bragg diffraction curves from perfect single crystals. Phys. Status Solidi B, 45, 333–341. Kikuta, S. & Kohra, K. (1970). X-ray collimators using successive asymmetric diffractions and their applications to measurements of diffraction curves. I. General considerations on collimators. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 29, 1322–1328. Kovalchuk, M. V. & Kohn, V. G. (1986). X-ray standing waves – a new method of studying the structure of crystals. Sov. Phys. Usp. 29, 426–446. Laue, M. von (1931). Die dynamische Theorie der Ro¨ntgenstrahlinterferenzen in neuer Form. Ergeb. Exakten Naturwiss. 10, 133– 158. Laue, M. von (1952). Die Energie Stro¨mung bei Ro¨ntgenstrahlinterferenzen Kristallen. Acta Cryst. 5, 619–625. Laue, M. von (1960). Ro¨ntgenstrahl-Interferenzen. Frankfurt am Main: Akademische Verlagsgesellschaft.

565

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS 5.1 (cont.) Lefeld-Sosnowska, M. & Malgrange, C. (1968). Observation of oscillations in rocking curves of the Laue reflected and refracted beams from thin Si single crystals. Phys. Status Solidi, 30, K23– K25. Lefeld-Sosnowska, M. & Malgrange, C. (1969). Experimental evidence of plane-wave rocking curve oscillations. Phys. Status Solidi, 34, 635–647. Ludewig, J. (1969). Debye–Waller factor and anomalous absorption (Ge; 293–5 K). Acta Cryst. A25, 116–118. Materlik, G. & Zegenhagen, J. (1984). X-ray standing wave analysis with synchrotron radiation applied for surface and bulk systems. Phys. Lett. A, 104, 47–50. Ohtsuki, Y. H. (1964). Temperature dependence of X-ray absorption by crystals. I. Photo-electric absorption. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 19, 2285–2292. Ohtsuki, Y. H. (1965). Temperature dependence of X-ray absorption by crystals. II. Direct phonon absorption. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 20, 374–380. Penning, P. & Polder, D. (1961). Anomalous transmission of X-rays in elastically deformed crystals. Philips Res. Rep. 16, 419–440. Pinsker, Z. G. (1978). Dynamical scattering of X-rays in crystals. Springer series in solid-state sciences. Berlin: Springer-Verlag. Prins, J. A. (1930). Die Reflexion von Ro¨ntgenstrahlen an absorbierenden idealen Kristallen. Z. Phys. 63, 477–493. Renninger, M. (1955). Messungen zur Ro¨ntgenstrahl-Optik des Idealkristalls. I. Besta¨tigung der Darwin–Ewald–Prins–KohlerKurve. Acta Cryst. 8, 597–606. Saka, T., Katagawa, T. & Kato, N. (1973). The theory of X-ray crystal diffraction for finite polyhedral crystals. III. The Bragg– (Bragg)m cases. Acta Cryst. A29, 192–200. Takagi, S. (1962). Dynamical theory of diffraction applicable to crystals with any kind of small distortion. Acta Cryst. 15, 1311–1312. Takagi, S. (1969). A dynamical theory of diffraction for a distorted crystal. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 26, 1239–1253. Tanner, B. K. (1976). X-ray diffraction topography. Oxford: Pergamon Press. Tanner, B. K. (1990). High resolution X-ray diffraction and topography for crystal characterization. J. Cryst. Growth, 99, 1315–1323. Tanner, B. K. & Bowen, D. K. (1992). Synchrotron X-radiation topography. Mater. Sci. Rep. 8, 369–407. Uragami, T. (1969). Pendello¨sung fringes of X-rays in Bragg case. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 27, 147–154. Uragami, T. (1970). Pendello¨sung fringes in a crystal of finite thickness. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 28, 1508–1527. Wagner, E. H. (1959). Group velocity and energy (or particle) flow density of waves in a periodic medium. Acta Cryst. 12, 345–346. Zachariasen, W. H. (1945). Theory of X-ray diffraction in crystals. New York: John Wiley. Zegenhagen, J. (1993). Surface structure determination with X-ray standing waves. Surf. Sci. Rep. 18, 199–271.

5.2 Berry, M. V. (1971). Diffraction in crystals at high voltages. J. Phys. C, 4, 697–722. Bethe, H. A. (1928). Theorie der Beugung von Elektronen an Kristallen. Ann. Phys. (Leipzig), 87, 55–129. Blackman, M. (1939). Intensities of electron diffraction rings. Proc. Phys. Soc. London Sect. A, 173, 68–72. Blume, J. (1966). Die Kantenstreifung im Elektronen-Mikroskopischen Bild Wurfelformiger MgO Kristalle bei Durchstrahlung im Richtung der Raumdiagonal. Z. Phys. 191, 248–272. Born, M. (1926). Quantenmechanik der Stossvorgange. Z. Phys. 38, 803–826. Buxton, B. (1978). Graduate lecture-course notes: dynamical diffraction theory. Cambridge University, England. Corones, J., De Facio, B. & Kreuger, R. J. (1982). Parabolic approximations to the time-independent elastic wave equation. J. Math. Phys. 23, 577–586.

Cowley, J. M. (1981). Diffraction physics, pp. 26–30. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Cowley, J. M. & Moodie, A. F. (1957). The scattering of electrons by atoms and crystals. I. A new theoretical approach. Acta Cryst. 10, 609–619. Cowley, J. M. & Moodie, A. F. (1962). The scattering of electrons by thin crystals. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 17, Suppl. B11, 86–91. Feynman, R. (1948). Space–time approach to non-relativistic quantum mechanics. Rev. Mod. Phys. 201, 367–387. Frazer, R. A., Duncan, W. J. & Collar, A. R. (1963). Elementary matrices, pp. 78–79. Cambridge University Press. Fujimoto, F. (1959). Dynamical theory of electron diffraction in the Laue case. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 14, 1558–1568. Fujiwara, K. (1959). Application of higher order Born approximation to multiple elastic scattering of electrons by crystals. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 14, 1513–1524. Fujiwara, K. (1962). Relativistic dynamical theory of electron diffraction. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 17, Suppl. B11, 118–123. Fukuhara, A. (1966). Many-ray approximations in the dynamical theory of electron diffraction. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 21, 2645–2662. Gilmore, R. (1974). Lie groups, Lie algebras, and some of their applications. New York: Wiley–Interscience. Gjønnes, J. & Høier, R. (1971). The application of non-systematic many-beam dynamic effects to structure-factor determination. Acta Cryst. A27, 313–316. Gjønnes, J. & Moodie, A. F. (1965). Extinction conditions in the dynamic theory of electron diffraction. Acta Cryst. 19, 65–67. Goodman, P. (1975). A practical method of three-dimensional spacegroup analysis using convergent-beam electron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A31, 804–810. Goodman, P. (1981). Editor. Fifty years of electron diffraction. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Goodman, P. & Moodie, A. F. (1974). Numerical evaluation of Nbeam wave functions in electron scattering by the multislice method. Acta Cryst. A30, 280–290. Gratias, D. & Portier, R. (1983). Time-like perturbation method in high energy electron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A39, 576–584. Hirsch, P. B., Howie, A., Nicholson, R. B., Pashley, D. W. & Whelan, M. J. (1965). Electron microscopy of thin crystals. London: Butterworths. Howie, A. (1966). Diffraction channelling of fast electrons and positrons in crystals. Philos. Mag. 14, 223–237. Howie, A. (1978). In Electron diffraction 1927–1977, edited by P. J. Dobson, J. B. Pendry & C. J. Humphreys, pp. 1–12. Inst. Phys. Conf. Ser. No. 41. Bristol/London: Institute of Physics. Humphreys, C. J. (1979). The scattering of fast electrons by crystals. Rep. Prog. Phys. 42, 1825–1887. Hurley, A. C., Johnson, A. W. S., Moodie, A. F., Rez, P. & Sellar, J. R. (1978). Algebraic approaches to N-beam theory. In Electron diffraction 1927–1977, edited by P. J. Dobson, J. B. Pendry & C. J. Humphreys, pp. 34–40. Inst. Phys. Conf. Ser. No. 41. Bristol/ London: Institute of Physics. Hurley, A. C. & Moodie, A. F. (1980). The inversion of the threebeam intensities for scalar scattering by a general centrosymmetric crystal. Acta Cryst. A36, 737–738. International Tables for Crystallography (1999). Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Kainuma, Y. (1968). Averaged intensities in the many beam dynamical theory of electron diffraction. Part I. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 25, 498–510. Kambe, K. (1957). Study of simultaneous reflection in electron diffraction by crystal. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 12, 13–31. Kogiso, M. & Takahashi, H. (1977). Group-theoretical method in the many-beam theory of electron diffraction. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 42, 223–229. Lontovitch, M. & Fock, R. (1946). Solution of the problem of propagation of electromagnetic waves along the Earth’s surface by the method of parabolic equation. J. Phys. 10, 13–24. (Translated from Russian by J. Smorodinsky.) Lynch, D. F. & Moodie, A. F. (1972). Numerical evaluation of low energy electron diffraction intensities. Surf. Sci. 32, 422–438.

566

REFERENCES 5.2 (cont.) Messiah, A. (1965). Quantum mechanics, Vol. II, pp. 884–888. Amsterdam: North-Holland. Moodie, A. F. (1972). Reciprocity and shape functions in multiple scattering diagrams. Z. Naturforsch. Teil A, 27, 437–440. Moodie, A. F., Etheridge, J. & Humphreys, C. J. (1996). The symmetry of three-beam scattering equations: inversion of threebeam diffraction patterns from centrosymmetric crystals. Acta Cryst. A52, 596–605. Moodie, A. F., Etheridge, J. & Humphreys, C. J. (1998). The Coulomb interaction and the direct measurement of structural phase. In The electron, edited by A. Kirkland & P. Brown, pp. 235–246. IOM Communications Ltd. London: The Institute of Materials. Moodie, A. F. & Whitfield, H. J. (1994). The reduction of N-beam scattering from noncentrosymmetric crystals to two-beam form. Acta Cryst. A50, 730–736. Moodie, A. F. & Whitfield, H. J. (1995). Friedel’s law and noncentrosymmetric space groups. Acta Cryst. A51, 198–201. Sturkey, L. (1957). The use of electron-diffraction intensities in structure determination. Acta Cryst. 10, 858–859. Tanaka, M., Sekii, H. & Nagasawa, T. (1983). Space-group determination by dynamic extinction in convergent-beam electron diffraction. Acta Cryst. A39, 825–837. Tournarie, M. (1962). Recent developments of the matrical and semireciprocal formulation on the field of dynamical theory. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 17, Suppl. B11, 98–100.

5.3 Albertini, G., Boeuf, A., Cesini, G., Mazkedian, S., Melone, S. & Rustichelli, F. (1976). A simple model for dynamical neutron diffraction by deformed crystals. Acta Cryst. A32, 863–868. Albertini, G., Boeuf, A., Klar, B., Lagomarsino, S., Mazkedian, S., Melone, S., Puliti, P. & Rustichelli, F. (1977). Dynamical neutron diffraction by curved crystals in the Laue geometry. Phys. Status Solidi A, 44, 127–136. Albertini, G., Boeuf, A., Lagomarsino, S., Mazkedian, S., Melone, S. & Rustichelli, F. (1976). Neutron properties of curved monochromators. Proceedings of the conference on neutron scattering, Gatlinburg, Tennessee, USERDA CONF 760601-P2, 1151–1158. Oak Ridge, Tennessee: Oak Ridge National Laboratory. Al Haddad, M. & Becker, P. J. (1988). On the statistical dynamical theory of diffraction: application to silicon. Acta Cryst. A44, 262– 270. Ando, M. & Hosoya, S. (1972). Q-switch and polarization domains in antiferromagnetic chromium observed with neutron-diffraction topography. Phys. Rev. Lett. 29, 281–285. Ando, M. & Hosoya, S. (1978). Size and behavior of antiferromagnetic domains in Cr directly observed with X-ray and neutron topography. J. Appl. Phys. 49, 6045–6051. Arif, M., Kaiser, H., Clothier, R., Werner, S. A., Berliner, R., Hamilton, W. A., Cimmino, A. & Klein, A. G. (1988). Fizeau effect for neutrons passing through matter at a nuclear resonance. Physica B, 151, 63–67. Arthur, J. & Horne, M. A. (1985). Boundary conditions in dynamical neutron diffraction. Phys. Rev. B, 32, 5747–5752. Bacon, G. E. & Lowde, R. D. (1948). Secondary extinction and neutron crystallography. Acta Cryst. 1, 303–314. Badurek, G., Rauch, H., Wilfing, A., Bonse, U. & Graeff, W. (1979). A perfect-crystal neutron polarizer as an application of magnetic prism refraction. J. Appl. Cryst. 12, 186–191. Baruchel, J. (1989). The contribution of neutron and synchrotron radiation topography to the investigation of first-order magnetic phase transitions. Phase Transit. 14, 21–29. Baruchel, J., Guigay, J. P., Mazure´-Espejo, C., Schlenker, M. & Schweizer, J. (1982). Observation of Pendello¨sung effect in polarized neutron scattering from a magnetic crystal. J. Phys. 43, C7, 101–106.

Baruchel, J., Patterson, C. & Guigay, J. P. (1986). Neutron diffraction investigation of the nuclear and magnetic extinction in MnP. Acta Cryst. A42, 47–55. Baruchel, J., Schlenker, M. & Palmer, S. B. (1990). Neutron diffraction topographic investigations of “exotic” magnetic domains. Nondestruct. Test. Eval. 5, 349–367. Baruchel, J., Schlenker, M., Zarka, A. & Pe´troff, J. F. (1978). Neutron diffraction topographic investigation of growth defects in natural lead carbonate single crystals. J. Cryst. Growth, 44, 356– 362. Baryshevskii, V. G. (1976). Particle spin precession in antiferromagnets. Sov. Phys. Solid State, 18, 204–208. Bauspiess, W., Bonse, U., Graeff, W., Schlenker, M. & Rauch, H. (1978). Result shown in Bonse (1979). Becker, P. & Al Haddad, M. (1990). Diffraction by a randomly distorted crystal. I. The case of short-range order. Acta Cryst. A46, 123–129. Becker, P. & Al Haddad, M. (1992). Diffraction by a randomly distorted crystal. II. General theory. Acta Cryst. A48, 121–134. Becker, P. J. & Coppens, P. (1974a). Extinction within the limit of validity of the Darwin transfer equations. I. General formalisms for primary and secondary extinction and their application to spherical crystals. Acta Cryst. A30, 129–147. Becker, P. J. & Coppens, P. (1974b). Extinction within the limit of validity of the Darwin transfer equations. II. Refinement of extinction in spherical crystals of SrF2 and LiF. Acta Cryst. A30, 148–153. Becker, P. J. & Coppens, P. (1975). Extinction within the limit of validity of the Darwin transfer equations. III. Non-spherical crystals and anisotropy of extinction. Acta Cryst. A31, 417–425. Belova, N. E., Eichhorn, F., Somenkov, V. A., Utemisov, K. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1983). Analyse der Neigungsmethode zur Untersuchung von Pendello¨sungsinterferenzen von Neutronen und Ro¨ntgenstrahlen. Phys. Status Solidi A, 76, 257–265. Belyakov, V. A. & Bokun, R. Ch. (1975). Dynamical theory of neutron diffraction by perfect antiferromagnetic crystals. Sov. Phys. Solid State, 17, 1142–1145. Belyakov, V. A. & Bokun, R. Ch. (1976). Dynamical theory of neutron diffraction in magnetic crystals. Sov. Phys. Solid State, 18, 1399–1402. Boeuf, A. & Rustichelli, F. (1974). Some neutron diffraction experiments on curved silicon crystals. Acta Cryst. A30, 798–805. Bokun, R. Ch. (1979). Beats in the integrated intensity in neutron diffraction by perfect magnetic crystals. Sov. Phys. Tech. Phys. 24, 723–724. Bonnet, M., Delapalme, A., Becker, P. & Fuess, H. (1976). Polarised neutron diffraction – a tool for testing extinction models: application to yttrium iron garnet. Acta Cryst. A32, 945–953. Bonse, U. (1979). Principles and methods of neutron interferometry. In Neutron interferometry: proceedings of an international workshop, edited by U. Bonse & H. Rauch, pp. 3–33. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Bonse, U. (1988). Recent advances in X-ray and neutron interferometry. Physica B, 151, 7–21. Bonse, U. & Hart, M. (1965). An X-ray interferometer. Appl. Phys. Lett. 6, 155–156. Chakravarthy, R. & Madhav Rao, L. (1980). A simple method to correct for secondary extinction in polarised-neutron diffractometry. Acta Cryst. A36, 139–142. Chalupa, B., Michalec, R., Horalik, L. & Mikula, P. (1986). The study of neutron acoustic effect by neutron diffraction on InSb single crystal. Phys. Status Solidi A, 97, 403–409. Cimmino, A., Opat, G. I., Klein, A. G., Kaiser, H., Werner, S. A., Arif, M. & Clothier, R. (1989). Observation of the topological Aharonov–Casher phase shift by neutron interferometry. Phys. Rev. Lett. 63, 380–383. Colella, R., Overhauser, A. W. & Werner, S. A. (1975). Observation of gravitationally induced quantum interference. Phys. Rev. Lett. 34, 1472–1474. Davidson, J. B. & Case, A. L. (1976). Applications of the fly’s eye neutron camera: diffraction tomography and phase transition

567

5. DYNAMICAL THEORY AND ITS APPLICATIONS 5.3 (cont.) studies. Proceedings of the conference on neutron scattering, Gatlinburg, Tennessee, USERDA CONF 760601-P2, 1124–1135. Oak Ridge, Tennessee: Oat Ridge National Laboratory. Davidson, J. B., Werner, S. A. & Arrott, A. S. (1974). Neutron microscopy of spin density wave domains in chromium. Proceedings of the 19th annual conference on magnetism and magnetic materials, edited by C. D. Graham and J. J. Rhyne. AIP Conf. Proc. 18, 396–400. Doi, K., Minakawa, N., Motohashi, H. & Masaki, N. (1971). A trial of neutron diffraction topography. J. Appl. Cryst. 4, 528–530. Eichhorn, F. (1988). Perfect crystal neutron optics. Physica B, 151, 140–146. Eichhorn, F., Sippel, D. & Kleinstu¨ck, K. (1967). Influence of oxygen segregations in silicon single crystals on the halfwidth of the double-crystal rocking curve of thermal neutrons. Phys. Status Solidi, 23, 237–240. Guigay, J. P. (1989). On integrated intensities in Kato’s statistical diffraction theory. Acta Cryst. A45, 241–244. Guigay, J. P. & Chukhovskii, F. N. (1992). Reformulation of the dynamical theory of coherent wave propagation by randomly distorted crystals. Acta Cryst. A48, 819–826. Guigay, J. P. & Chukhovskii, F. N. (1995). Reformulation of the statistical theory of dynamical diffraction in the case E 0. Acta Cryst. A51, 288–294. Guigay, J. P. & Schlenker, M. (1979a). Integrated intensities and flipping ratios in neutron diffraction by perfect magnetic crystals. In Neutron interferometry, edited by U. Bonse & H. Rauch, pp. 135–148. Oxford: Clarendon Press. Guigay, J. P. & Schlenker, M. (1979b). Spin rotation of the forward diffracted beam in neutron diffraction by perfect magnetic crystals. J. Magn. Magn. Mater. 14, 340–343. Hart, M. & Rodrigues, A. R. D. (1978). Harmonic-free single-crystal monochromators for neutrons and X-rays. J. Appl. Cryst. 11, 248– 253. Hastings, J. B., Siddons, D. P. & Lehmann, M. (1990). Diffraction broadening and suppression of the inelastic channel in resonant neutron scattering. Phys. Rev. Lett. 64, 2030–2033. Horne, M. A., Finkelstein, K. D., Shull, C. G., Zeilinger, A. & Bernstein, H. J. (1988). Neutron spin – Pendello¨sung resonance. Physica B, 151, 189–192. Indenbom, V. L. (1979). Diffraction focusing of neutrons. JETP Lett. 29, 5–8. International Tables for Crystallography (1999). Vol. C. Mathematical, physical and chemical tables, edited by A. J. C. Wilson & E. Prince. Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers. Iolin, E. M. & Entin, I. R. (1983). Dynamic diffraction of neutrons by high-frequency acoustic waves in perfect crystals. Sov. Phys. JETP, 58, 985–989. Iolin, E. M., Zolotoyabko, E. V., Raı¨tman, E. A., Kuvdaldin, B. V. & Gavrilov, V. N. (1986). Interference effects in dynamic neutron diffraction under conditions of ultrasonic excitation. Sov. Phys. JETP, 64, 1267–1271. Kagan, Yu. & Afanas’ev, A. M. (1966). Suppression of inelastic channels in resonance scattering of neutrons in regular crystals. Sov. Phys. JETP, 22, 1032–1040. Kato, N. (1980a). Statistical dynamical theory of crystal diffraction. I. General formulation. Acta Cryst. A36, 763–769. Kato, N. (1980b). Statistical dynamical theory of crystal diffraction. II. Intensity distribution and integrated intensity in the Laue cases. Acta Cryst. A36, 770–778. Kikuta, S., Ishikawa, I., Kohra, K. & Hoshino, S. (1975). Studies on dynamical diffraction phenomena of neutrons using properties of wave fan. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 39, 471–478. Kikuta, S., Kohra, K., Minakawa, N. & Doi, K. (1971). An observation of neutron Pendello¨sung fringes in a wedge-shaped silicon single crystal. J. Phys. Soc. Jpn, 31, 954–955. Klar, B. & Rustichelli, F. (1973). Dynamical neutron diffraction by ideally curved crystals. Nuovo Cimento B, 13, 249–271. Klein, A. G. (1988). Schro¨dinger inviolate: neutron optical searches for violations of quantum mechanics. Physica B, 151, 44–49.

Klein, A. G. & Werner, S. A. (1983). Neutron optics. Rep. Prog. Phys. 46, 259–335. Knowles, J. W. (1956). Anomalous absorption of slow neutrons and X-rays in nearly perfect single crystals. Acta Cryst. 9, 61–69. Korpiun, P. (1966). Untersuchung ferromagnetischer Strukturen mit einem Zweistrahl-Neutroneninterferometer. Z. Phys. 195, 146– 170. Kulda, J. (1988a). The RED extinction model. I. An upgraded formalism. Acta Cryst. A44, 283–285. Kulda, J. (1988b). The RED extinction model. II. Refinement of extinction and thermal vibration parameters for SrF2 crystals. Acta Cryst. A44, 286–290. Kulda, J. (1991). The RED extinction model. III. The case of pure primary extinction. Acta Cryst. A47, 775–779. Kulda, J., Baruchel, J., Guigay, J.-P. & Schlenker, M. (1991). Extinction effects in polarized neutron diffraction from magnetic crystals. I. Highly perfect MnP and YIG samples. Acta Cryst. A47, 770–775. Kulda, J., Vrańa, M. & Mikula, P. (1988). Neutron diffraction by vibrating crystals. Physica B, 151, 122–129. Kvardakov, V. V., Podurets, K. M., Baruchel, J. & Sandonis, J. (1995). Precision determination of the structure factors of magnetic neutron scattering from the Pendello¨sung data. Crystallogr. Rep. 40, 330–331. Kvardakov, V. V., Podurets, K. M., Chistyakov, R. R., Shil’shtein, S. Sh., Elyutin, N. O., Kulidzhanov, F. G., Bradler, J. & Kadecˇkova´, S. (1987). Modification of the domain structure of a silicon–iron single crystal as a result of uniaxial stretching. Sov. Phys. Solid State, 29, 228–232. Kvardakov, V. V. & Somenkov, V. A. (1990). Observation of dynamic oscillations of intensity of magnetic scattering of neutrons with variation of the orientation of magnetic moments of the sublattices. Sov. Phys. Crystallogr. 35, 619–622. Kvardakov, V. V. & Somenkov, V. A. (1991). Neutron diffraction study of nonlinear magnetoacoustic effects in perfect crystals of FeBO3 and -Fe2 O3 . J. Moscow Phys. Soc. 1, 33–57. Kvardakov, V. V. & Somenkov, V. A. (1992). Magnetic Pendello¨sung effects in neutron scattering by perfect magnetic crystals. Acta Cryst. A48, 423–430. Kvardakov, V. V., Somenkov, V. A. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1990a). Observation of dynamic oscillations in the temperature dependence of the intensity of the magnetic scattering of neutrons. Sov. Phys. Solid State, 32, 1097–1098. Kvardakov, V. V., Somenkov, V. A. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1990b). Influence of an orientational magnetic transition in -Fe2 O3 on the Pendello¨sung fringe effect in neutron scattering. Sov. Phys. Solid State, 32, 1250–1251. Kvardakov, V. V., Somenkov, V. A. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1992). Study of defects in cuprate single crystals by the neutron topography and selective etching methods. Superconductivity, 5, 623–629. Lambert, D. & Malgrange, C. (1982). X-ray and neutron integrated intensity diffracted by perfect crystals in transmission. Z. Naturforsch. Teil A, 37, 474–484. Malgrange, C., Pe´troff, J. F., Sauvage, M., Zarka, A. & Englander, M. (1976). Individual dislocation images and Pendello¨sung fringes in neutron topographs. Philos. Mag. 33, 743–751. Mendiratta, S. K. & Blume, M. (1976). Dynamical theory of thermal neutron scattering. I. Diffraction from magnetic crystals. Phys. Rev. 14, 144–154. Michalec, R., Mikula, P., Sedla´kova´, L., Chalupa, B., Zelenka, J., Petrzˇ´ılka, V. & Hrdlicˇka, Z. (1975). Effects of thickness-shear vibrations on neutron diffraction by quartz single crystals. J. Appl. Cryst. 8, 345–351. Michalec, R., Mikula, P., Vrańa, M., Kulda, J., Chalupa, B. & Sedla´kova´, L. (1988). Neutron diffraction by perfect crystals excited into mechanical resonance vibrations. Physica B, 151, 113–121. Podurets, K. M., Sokol’skii, D. V., Chistyakov, R. R. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1991). Reconstruction of the bulk domain structure of silicon iron single crystals from neutron refraction images of internal domain walls. Sov. Phys. Solid State, 33, 1668–1672.

568

REFERENCES 5.3 (cont.) Podurets, K. M., Somenkov, V. A., Chistyakov, R. R. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1989). Visualization of internal domain structure of silicon iron crystals by using neutron radiography with refraction contrast. Physica B, 156–157, 694–697. Podurets, K. M., Somenkov, V. A. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1989). Neutron radiography with refraction contrast. Physica B, 156– 157, 691–693. Rauch, H. (1995). Towards interferometric Fourier spectroscopy. Physica B, 213–214, 830–832. Rauch, H. & Petrascheck, D. (1978). Dynamical neutron diffraction and its application. In Neutron diffraction, edited by H. Dachs, Topics in current physics, Vol. 6 pp. 305–351. Berlin: Springer. Rauch, H. & Seidl, E. (1987). Neutron interferometry as a new tool in condensed matter research. Nucl. Instrum. Methods A, 255, 32– 37. Raum, K., Koellner, M., Zeilinger, A., Arif, M. & Ga¨hler, R. (1995). Effective-mass enhanced deflection of neutrons in noninertial frames. Phys. Rev. Lett. 74, 2859–2862. Scherm, R. & Fa˚k, B. (1993). Neutrons. In Neutron and synchrotron radiation for condensed matter studies (HERCULES course), Vol. 1, edited by J. Baruchel, J. L. Hodeau, M. S. Lehmann, J. R. Regnard & C. Schlenker, pp. 113–143. Les Ulis: Les Editions de Physique and Heidelberg: Springer-Verlag. Schlenker, M. & Baruchel, J. (1978). Neutron techniques for the observation of ferro- and antiferromagnetic domains. J. Appl. Phys. 49, 1996–2001. Schlenker, M., Baruchel, J., Perrier de la Bathie, R. & Wilson, S. A. (1975). Neutron-diffraction section topography: observing crystal slices before cutting them. J. Appl. Phys. 46, 2845–2848. Schlenker, M., Baruchel, J., Pe´troff, J. F. & Yelon, W. B. (1974). Observation of subgrain boundaries and dislocations by neutron diffraction topography. Appl. Phys. Lett. 25, 382–384. Schlenker, M., Bauspiess, W., Graeff, W., Bonse, U. & Rauch, H. (1980). Imaging of ferromagnetic domains by neutron interferometry. J. Magn. Magn. Mater. 15–18, 1507–1509. Schlenker, M., Linares-Galvez, J. & Baruchel, J. (1978). A spinrelated contrast effect: visibility of 180° ferromagnetic domain walls in unpolarized neutron diffraction topography. Philos. Mag. B, 37, 1–11. Schlenker, M. & Shull, C. G. (1973). Polarized neutron techniques for the observation of ferromagnetic domains. J. Appl. Phys. 44, 4181–4184. Schmidt, H. H. (1983). Theoretical investigations of the dynamical neutron diffraction by magnetic single crystals. Acta Cryst. A39, 679–682. Schmidt, H. H., Deimel, P. & Daniel, H. (1975). Dynamical diffraction of thermal neutrons by absorbing magnetic crystals. J. Appl. Cryst. 8, 128–131. Sears, V. F. (1978). Dynamical theory of neutron diffraction. Can. J. Phys. 56, 1261–1288. Shil’shtein, S. Sh., Somenkov, V. A. & Dokashenko, V. P. (1971). Suppression of (n, ) reaction in resonant scattering of neutrons by a perfect CdS crystal. JETP Lett. 13, 214–217. Shull, C. G. (1968). Observation of Pendello¨sung fringe structure in neutron diffraction. Phys. Rev. Lett. 21, 1585–1589. Shull, C. G. (1986). Neutron interferometer systems – types and features. Physica B, 136, 126–130. Shull, C. G. & Oberteuffer, J. A. (1972). Spherical wave neutron propagation and Pendello¨sung fringe structure in silicon. Phys. Rev. Lett. 29, 871–874. Shull, C. G., Zeilinger, A., Squires, G. L., Horne, M. A., Atwood, D. K. & Arthur, J. (1980). Anomalous flight time of neutrons through diffracting crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 44, 1715–1718. Sippel, D. & Eichhorn, F. (1968). Anomale inkoha¨rente Streuung thermicher Neutronen bei Bildung stehender Neutronenwellen in nahezu idealen Kristallen von Kaliumdihydrogenphosphat (KDP). Acta Cryst. A24, 237–239.

Sippel, D., Kleinstu¨ck, K. & Schulze, G. E. R. (1962). Nachweis der anomalen Absorption thermischer Neutronen bei Interferenz am Idealkristall. Phys. Status Solidi, 2, K104–K105. Sippel, D., Kleinstu¨ck, K. & Schulze, G. E. R. (1964). Neutron diffraction of ideal crystals using a double crystal spectrometer. Phys. Lett. 8, 241–242. Sippel, D., Kleinstu¨ck, K. & Schulze, G. E. R. (1965). Pendello¨sungs-Interferenzen mit thermischen Neutronen an SiEinkristallen. Phys. Lett. 14, 174–175. Sivardie`re, J. (1975). Theórie dynamique de la diffraction magne´tique des neutrons. Acta Cryst. A31, 340–344. Somenkov, V. A., Shil’shtein, S. Sh., Belova, N. E. & Utemisov, K. (1978). Observation of dynamical oscillations for neutron scattering by Ge crystals using the inclination method. Solid State Commun. 25, 593–595. Squires, G. L. (1978). Introduction to the theory of thermal neutron scattering. Cambridge University Press. Stassis, C. & Oberteuffer, J. A. (1974). Neutron diffraction by perfect crystals. Phys. Rev. B, 10, 5192–5202. Takagi, S. (1962). Dynamical theory of diffraction applicable to crystals with any kind of small distortion. Acta Cryst. 15, 1311– 1312. Takahashi, T., Tomimitsu, H., Ushigami, Y., Kikuta, S. & Doi, K. (1981). The very-small angle neutron scattering from neutronirradiated amorphous silica. Jpn. J. Appl. Phys. 20, L837–L839. Takahashi, T., Tomimitsu, H., Ushigami, Y., Kikuta, S., Doi, K. & Hoshino, S. (1983). The very-small angle neutron scattering from SiO2 ---PbO glasses. Physica B, 120, 362–366. Tasset, F. (1989). Zero field neutron polarimetry. Physica B, 156– 157, 627–630. Taupin, D. (1964). Theórie dynamique de la diffraction des rayons X par les cristaux de´forme´s. Bull. Soc. Fr. Mine´ral. Cristallogr. 87, 469–511. Tomimitsu, H. & Doi, K. (1974). A neutron diffraction topographic observation of strain field in a hot-pressed germanium crystal. J. Appl. Cryst. 7, 59–64. Tomimitsu, H., Doi, K. & Kamada, K. (1983). Neutron diffraction topographic observation of substructures in Cu-based alloys. Physica B, 120, 96–102. Tomimitsu, H., Takahashi, T., Kikuta, S. & Doi, K. (1986). Very small angle neutron scattering from amorphous Fe78 B12 Si10 . J. Non-Cryst. Solids, 88, 388–394. Tomimitsu, H. & Zeyen, C. (1978). Neutron diffraction topographic observation of twinned silicon crystal. Jpn. J. Appl. Phys. 3, 591– 592. Werner, S. A. (1980). Gravitational and magnetic field effects on the dynamical diffraction of neutrons. Phys. Rev. B, 21, 1774–1789. Werner, S. A. (1995). Neutron interferometry tests of quantum theory. Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 755, 241–262. Werner, S. A., Staudenmann, J. L. & Colella, R. (1979). The effect of the Earth’s rotation on the quantum mechanical phase of the neutron. Phys. Rev. Lett. 42, 1103–1106. Zachariasen, W. H. (1967). A general theory of X-ray diffraction in crystals. Acta Cryst. 23, 558–564. Zeilinger, A. (1995). Private communication. Zeilinger, A. & Shull, C. G. (1979). Magnetic field effects on dynamical diffraction of neutrons by perfect crystals. Phys. Rev. B, 19, 3957–3962. Zeilinger, A., Shull, C. G., Horne, M. A. & Finkelstein, K. D. (1986). Effective mass of neutrons diffracting in crystals. Phys. Rev. Lett. 57, 3089–3092. Zelepukhin, M. V., Kvardakov, V. V., Somenkov, V. A. & Shil’shtein, S. Sh. (1989). Observation of the Pendello¨sung fringe effect in magnetic scattering of neutrons. Sov. Phys. JETP, 68, 883–886. Zolotoyabko, E. & Sander, B. (1995). X-ray diffraction profiles in strained crystals undergoing ultrasonic excitation. The Laue case. Acta Cryst. A51, 163–171.

569

references

Author index Entries refer to chapter number. Abad-Zapatero, C., 2.3, 3.3 Abdel-Meguid, S. S., 2.3, 3.3 Abi-Ezzi, S. S., 3.3 Ablov, A. V., 2.5 Abrahams, S. C., 2.3, 2.4 Abramowitz, M., 2.1 Achard, M. F., 4.4 Acharya, R., 2.3 Adams, M. J., 2.3, 2.4 Addison, A. W., 2.3 Adlhart, W., 4.2 Aeppli, G., 4.4 Afanas’ev, A. M., 5.3 Agard, D. A., 2.4 Agarwal, R. C., 1.3, 2.4 Aharonov, Y., 3.3 Aharony, A., 4.4 Ahlfors, L. V., 1.3 Ahmed, F. R., 1.3 ˚ kervall, K., 2.3 A Akhiezer, N. I., 1.3 Akimoto, T., 2.3 Al Haddad, M., 5.3 Al-Khayat, H. A., 4.5 Alben, R., 4.4 Albertini, G., 5.3 Alden, R. A., 1.3 Alexander, L. E., 4.2 Alexeev, D. G., 4.5 Allegra, G., 2.2 Allen, F. H., 3.3 Allen, L. J., 4.3 Allinger, N. L., 3.3 Als-Nielsen, J., 4.4 Alston, N. A., 1.3 Altermatt, U. D., 1.4 Altmann, S. L., 1.5 Altomare, A., 2.2 Altona, C., 3.3 Amador, S., 4.4 Amelinckx, S., 4.3 Amma, E. L., 3.3 Amoro´s, J. L., 4.2 Amoro´s, M., 4.2 Amos, L. A., 2.5 An, M., 1.3 Anderson, D. C., 3.3 Anderson, P. W., 4.4 Anderson, S., 3.3 Anderson, S. C., 2.5 Andersson, B., 4.3 Andersson, G., 4.4 Ando, M., 5.3 Andreeva, N. S., 2.4 Andrews, J. W., 2.5 Angress, J. F., 4.1 Anzenhofer, K., 2.2 Apostol, T. M., 1.3 Arai, M., 4.2 Ardito, G., 2.2 Arfken, G., 1.2, 3.4 Argos, P., 2.2, 2.3 Arif, M., 5.3 Arley, N., 3.2 Arndt, U. W., 2.4, 4.2 Arnold, D. B., 3.3 Arnold, E., 2.3 Arnold, H., 1.1, 1.3

Arnott, S., 4.5 Aroyo, M. I., 1.5 Arrott, A. S., 5.3 Arthur, J., 5.3 Artin, E., 1.3 Ascher, E., 1.3 Ash, J. M., 1.3 Ashcroft, N. W., 1.1 Ashida, T., 2.4 Atkins, E. D. T., 4.5 Atwood, D. K., 5.3 Au, A. Y., 2.5, 4.2 Auslander, L., 1.3 Authier, A., 1.4, 5.1 Avery, J., 1.2 Avilov, A. S., 2.5 Avraham, D. ben, 4.5 Avrami, M., 2.2 Axe, J. D., 4.2 Axel, F., 4.6 Ayoub, R., 1.3 Bacon, G. E., 5.3 Badurek, G., 5.3 Baer, E., 4.5 Bagchi, S. N., 2.3, 4.2, 4.5 Baggio, R., 2.2 Baird, T., 2.5 Bak, H. J., 2.3 Bak, P., 4.4 Baker, E. N., 1.3, 2.3 Baker, T. S., 2.3 Baldwin, J. M., 2.5 Balibar, F., 5.1 Banaszak, L. J., 2.3 Bancel, P. A., 4.6 Bando, Y., 2.5 Banerjee, K., 2.2 Bannister, C., 2.5 Bansal, M., 1.3 Bantz, D., 1.3 Barakat, R., 1.3, 2.1 Bardhan, P., 4.2 Barham, P. J., 4.5 Barnea, Z., 1.2 Barnes, W. H., 1.3 Barois, P., 4.4 Barrett, A. N., 1.3 Barrington Leigh, J., 4.5 Barry, C. D., 3.3 Bartels, K., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Baruchel, J., 5.3 Barynin, V. V., 2.5 Baryshevskii, V. G., 5.3 Basett-Jones, D. P., 2.5 Bash, P. A., 3.3 Baskaran, S., 4.5 Batterman, B. W., 5.1 Baturic-Rubcic, J., 4.4 Bauer, G., 4.2 Bauspiess, W., 5.3 Beaglehole, D., 4.4 Bean, J. C., 2.5 Becker, P. J., 1.2, 5.3 Beckmann, E., 2.5 Beddell, C., 3.3 Bedzyk, M. J., 5.1 Beevers, C. A., 1.3, 2.3

Beintema, J. J., 2.3 Bellamy, H. D., 3.3 Bellamy, K., 4.5 Bellard, S., 3.3 Bellman, R., 1.3 Bellocq, A. M., 4.4 Belova, N. E., 5.3 Belyakov, V. A., 5.3 Benattar, J. J., 4.4 Bender, R., 2.5 Bengtsson, U., 2.3 Benguigui, L., 4.4 Bennett, J. M., 1.3 Bensimon, D., 4.4 Bentley, J., 1.2 Berberian, S. K., 1.3 Berger, J. E., 2.5 Bergman, G., 3.2 Bergmann, K., 4.4 Berliner, R., 5.3 Berman, H. M., 1.4 Bernstein, F. C., 3.3 Bernstein, H. J., 5.3 Bernstein, S., 2.1 Berry, M. V., 5.2 Bertaut, E. F., 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 3.4 Berthou, J., 2.3 Bessie`re, M., 4.2 Bethe, H. A., 1.2, 2.5, 5.2 Bethge, P. H., 3.3 Beurskens, G., 2.2 Beurskens, P. T., 2.2, 2.3 Beyeler, H. U., 4.2 Bhat, T. N., 2.3, 2.4 Bhattacharya, R. N., 1.3 Bieberbach, L., 1.3 Bienenstock, A., 1.3, 1.4 Bijvoet, J. M., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Bilderback, D. H., 5.1 Bilhorn, D. E., 2.5 Billard, J., 4.4 Billard, L., 4.6 Bilz, H., 4.1 Bing, D. H., 3.3 Birgeneau, R. J., 4.4 Biswas, A., 4.5 Blackman, M., 2.5, 4.1, 5.2 Blackwell, J., 4.5 Blahut, R. E., 1.3 Blech, I., 2.5, 4.6 Bleistein, N., 1.3 Bley, F., 4.2 Blinc, R., 4.4 Bloch, F., 1.1, 4.1 Bloomer, A. C., 1.3, 2.3, 3.3 Blow, D. M., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Bluhm, M. M., 2.3 Blume, J., 5.2 Blume, M., 5.3 Blundell, D. J., 4.5 Blundell, T. L., 2.3, 2.4 Bochner, S., 1.3 Bode, W., 1.3, 2.4 Bodo, G., 2.3 Boege, U., 2.3 Boeuf, A., 5.3 Bo¨hm, H., 4.6 Bo¨hme, R., 2.2

571

Bokhoven, C., 2.4 Bokun, R. Ch., 5.3 Bommel, A. J. van, 2.3, 2.4 Bondot, P., 1.3 Bonnet, M., 5.3 Bono, P. R., 3.3 Bonse, U., 5.1, 5.3 Boon, M., 1.5 Booth, A. D., 1.3 Borell, A., 2.3 Borie, B., 4.2 Born, M., 1.2, 1.3, 4.1, 5.1, 5.2 Borrmann, G., 5.1 Bosman, W. P., 2.2 Bo¨ttger, H., 4.2 Bouckaert, L. P., 1.5 Boulay, D. J. du, 1.4, 2.2 Bouman, J., 2.2 Bourne, P. E., 1.4 Boutin, H., 4.1 Bowen, D. K., 5.1 Boyd, D. B., 3.3 Boyer, L., 4.1 Boyle, L. L., 1.5 Boysen, H., 4.2 Bracewell, B. N., 2.5 Bracewell, R. N., 1.3 Bradler, J., 5.3 Bradley, A. J., 2.4 Bradley, C. J., 1.5, 4.2 Bragg, L., 1.4 Bragg, W. H., 1.3 Bragg, W. L., 1.3, 2.3, 5.1 Bra¨mer, R., 4.2 Brand, P., 4.4 Brandenburg, N. P., 3.3 Braslau, A., 4.4 Braun, H., 3.3 Braun, P. B., 2.3 Bremermann, H., 1.3 Bremmer, H., 1.3 Brennan, S., 5.1 Brice, M. D., 1.3, 3.3 Bricogne, G., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.3, 4.5 Brigham, E. O., 1.3 Brill, R., 1.3 Brinkman, W. F., 4.4 Brisbin, D., 4.4 Brisse, F., 2.5, 4.5 Britten, P. L., 1.3, 2.2 Brock, J. D., 4.4 Brockhouse, B. N., 4.1 Brooks, B. R., 3.3 Brooks, J. D., 4.4 Brown, C. J., 4.5 Brown, F., 2.3 Brown, G. S., 4.4 Brown, H., 1.3 Brown, I. D., 1.4 Brown, M. D., 3.3 Brucolleri, R. E., 3.3 Bruijn, N. G. de, 1.3 Bruins, E. M., 4.5 Bruins Slot, H. J., 2.2 Bruinsma, R., 4.4 Bru¨mmer, O., 5.1 Bru¨nger, A. T., 1.3, 4.5

AUTHOR INDEX Bryan, R. K., 1.3, 4.5 Bu, X., 4.6 Bubeck, E., 4.2 Buch, K. R., 3.2 Budai, J., 4.4 Buehner, M., 2.3 Buerger, M. J., 1.1, 1.4, 2.2, 2.3 Bujosa, A., 1.3 Bullough, R. K., 2.3 Bu¨low, R., 1.3 Bunn, C. W., 4.5 Bunshaft, A. J., 3.3 Burandt, B., 4.6 Burch, S. F., 1.3 Burdina, V. I., 2.3 Burkert, U., 3.3 Burkov, S., 4.6 Burla, M. C., 2.2 Burnett, R. M., 1.3, 2.3 Burnside, W., 1.3 Burrus, C. S., 1.3 Busetta, B., 2.2 Busing, W. R., 1.3, 3.1, 3.4 Bussler, P., 2.5 Buxton, B., 2.5, 5.2 Buxton, B. F., 2.5 Buyers, W. J. L., 4.1 Byerly, W. E., 1.3 Byler, M. A., 4.5 Cael, J. J., 4.5 Caglioti, G., 4.2 Cahn, J. W., 2.5, 4.6 Caille´, A., 4.4 Calabrese, G., 2.2 Calvayrac, Y., 4.2 Camalli, M., 2.2 Cambillau, C., 3.3 Campagnari, F., 4.5 Campbell, G. A., 1.3 Campbell Smith, P. J., 4.5 Cannillo, E., 2.4 Cantino, M., 4.5 Caratheódory, C., 1.3 Carlile, C. J., 4.4 Carlisle, C. H., 2.3 Carlson, J. M., 4.4 Carpenter, R. W., 2.5 Carroll, C. E., 4.5 Carrozzini, B., 2.2 Carslaw, H. S., 1.3 Cartan, H., 1.3 Carter, R. E., 3.3 Cartwright, B. A., 3.3 Cascarano, G., 2.2 Case, A. L., 5.3 Casher, A., 1.5 Caspar, D. L. D., 2.3, 4.5 Castellano, E. E., 2.2 Cavicchi, E., 3.3 Cenedese, P., 4.2 Cesini, G., 5.3 Ceska, T. A., 2.5 Chacko, K. K., 2.4 Chakravarthy, R., 5.3 Challifour, J. L., 1.3 Chalupa, B., 5.3 Champeney, D. C., 1.3 Champness, J. N., 1.3, 2.3, 3.3 Chan, A. S., 2.5 Chan, D. S. K., 1.3 Chan, K. K., 4.4

Chandrasekaran, R., 4.5 Chandrasekhar, S., 4.4 Chang, S.-L., 5.1 Chanzy, H., 2.5, 4.5 Chaplot, S. L., 4.1 Chapman, D., 4.4 Chapuis, G., 4.6 Charvolin, J., 4.4 Chen, J. H., 4.4 Cheng, T. Z., 2.5 Chew, M., 4.5 Chiang, L. Y., 4.4 Chistyakov, R. R., 5.3 Chivers, R. A., 4.5 Choplin, F., 3.3 Chou, C. T., 2.5 Chow, M., 2.3 Christensen, F., 4.4 Chu, K. C., 4.4 Chukhovskii, F. N., 5.3 Church, G. M., 1.3, 2.4 Churchill, R. V., 1.3 Cimmino, A., 5.3 Cisarova, I., 4.6 Clapp, P. C., 4.3 Clark, E. S., 4.5 Clark, N. A., 4.4 Clarke, P. J., 4.2 Clarke, R., 4.4 Clastre, J., 2.3 Clementi, E., 1.2 Clews, C. J. B., 1.3, 3.2 Clothier, R., 5.3 Coates, D., 4.4 Cochran, W., 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.2, 4.1, 4.5 Cockayne, D. J. H., 2.5 Cockrell, P. R., 3.3 Cohen, J. B., 4.2 Cohen, N. C., 3.3 Cohen-Tannoudji, C., 1.2 Cole, H., 5.1 Colella, R., 5.3 Colin, P., 3.3 Collar, A. R., 5.2 Coller, E., 2.2, 2.3 Collett, J., 4.4 Collins, D. M., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3 Collongues, R., 4.2 Colman, P. M., 1.3, 2.3 Comarmond, M. B., 2.3 Comes, R., 4.2 Condon, E. V., 1.2 Connolly, M. L., 3.3 Conradi, E., 4.2 Convert, P., 4.2 Cooley, J. W., 1.3 Cooper, M. J., 4.2 Coppens, P., 1.2, 4.6, 5.3 Cordes, A. W., 3.2 Corey, R. B., 1.3, 2.3 Corfield, P. W. R., 2.3 Cork, J. M., 2.4 Corliss, A. M., 4.2 Corones, J., 5.2 Coster, D., 2.4 Cotton, F. A., 3.3 Coulson, C. A., 1.2 Coulter, C. L., 2.2 Courville-Brenasin, J. de, 4.2 Cowan, P. L., 5.1 Cowan, S. W., 3.3

Cowley, J. M., 2.5, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 5.2 Cox, E. G., 1.3 Cox, J. M., 2.3, 2.4 Coxeter, H. S. M., 1.3 Cracknell, A. P., 1.5, 4.2 Crame´r, H., 1.3, 2.1, 2.5 Cramer, R. III, 3.3 Creek, R. C., 2.5 Crick, F. H. C., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 4.5 Cromer, D. T., 2.3, 2.4 Crooker, P. P., 4.4 Crowfoot, D., 2.3 Crowther, R. A., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 4.5 Crozier, P. A., 2.5 Cruickshank, D. W. J., 1.2, 1.3, 2.4 Cullen, D. L., 3.3 Cullis, A. F., 2.3, 2.4 Culver, J. N., 4.5 Cummins, H. Z., 4.6 Cummins, P. G., 3.4 Curtis, C. W., 1.3 Curtis, R. J., 4.4 Cutfield, J. F., 2.2 Czerwinski, E. W., 2.3 Dale, D., 2.4 Dam, A. van, 3.3 Dana, S. S., 4.4 Daniel, H., 5.3 Daniels, H. E., 1.3 Darwin, C. G., 5.1 Daubeny, R. de P., 4.5 Davey, S. C., 4.4 Davidov, D., 4.4 Davidson, J. B., 5.3 Davies, B. L., 1.5 Davies, D. R., 1.3 Davis, P. J., 3.4 Dawson, B., 1.2, 2.5 Day, D., 4.5 Dayringer, H. E., 3.3 De Facio, B., 5.2 De Gennes, P. G., 4.4 De Hoff, R., 4.4 De Jeu, W. H., 4.4 De Meulenaare, P., 4.3 De Ridder, R., 4.3 De Vries, H. L., 4.4 Dea, I. C. M., 4.5 Deans, S. R., 2.5 Debaerdemaeker, T., 2.2 DeBoissieu, M., 4.6 Debye, B., 4.2 Debye, P., 4.1 Declercq, J.-P., 2.2 Dederichs, P. H., 4.2 Dehlinger, U., 4.6 Deimel, P., 5.3 Deisenhofer, J., 1.3, 2.4 Delapalme, A., 4.2, 5.3 Delaunay, B., 1.5 Dellby, N., 4.3 Deming, W. E., 3.2 Dempsey, S., 3.3 Demus, D., 4.4 Denny, R., 4.5 Denson, A. K., 3.3 DeRosier, D. J., 2.5, 4.5 Destrade, C., 4.4 DeTitta, G. T., 2.2, 2.5, 4.5 Deutsch, M., 4.4

572

Dewar, R. B. K., 2.2 DeWette, F. W., 3.4 Diamond, R., 1.3, 3.3, 4.5 Dickerson, R. E., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Diele, S., 4.4 Dietrich, H., 1.3 Dieudonne´, J., 1.3 Dijkstra, B. W., 3.3 Dimon, P., 4.4 Dintzis, H. M., 2.3 Dirac, P. A. M., 1.3 Dirl, R., 1.5 DiSalvo, F. J., 4.4 Ditchfield, R., 1.2 Diu, B., 1.2 Djurek, D., 4.4 Dobrott, R. D., 2.3 Dodson, E., 2.3, 2.4 Dodson, E. J., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 3.3 Dodson, G. G., 2.2, 2.3, 3.3 Doesburg, H. M., 2.2 Doi, K., 5.3 Dokashenko, V. P., 5.3 Dolata, D. P., 3.3 Dolling, C., 4.1 Dolling, G., 4.2 Domany, E., 4.4 Dong, W., 2.5 Donohue, J., 1.3, 2.3 Donovan, B., 4.1 Dorner, B., 4.2 Dorner, C., 4.2 Dorset, D. L., 2.5, 4.5 Doubleday, A., 3.3 Doucet, J., 4.4 Douglas, A. S., 2.2 Downing, K. H., 2.5 Dowty, E., 1.4 Doyle, P. A., 4.3, 4.5 Dra¨ger, J., 4.6 Drenth, J., 4.5 Drits, V. A., 2.5 Duane, W., 1.3 Dubernat, J., 4.2 Dubois, J. C., 4.4 Duce, D. A., 3.3 Duke, G. M., 2.3 Dumrongrattana, S., 4.4 Duncan, W. J., 5.2 Dunitz, J. D., 1.2 Dunmur, D. A., 3.4 Durrant, J. L. A., 4.4 Dvoryankin, V. F., 2.5 D’yakon, I. A., 2.5 Dym, H., 1.3 Dyott, T. M., 3.3 Eades, J. A., 2.5 Eaker, D., 2.3 Ebel, J. P., 2.3 Edmonds, J. W., 2.2, 2.5, 4.5 Edwards, O. S., 4.2 Egert, E., 2.2, 2.3 Eichhorn, F., 5.3 Eiland, P. F., 1.3 Einstein, A., 4.1 Einstein, J. E., 2.4 Eisenberg, D., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Eklundh, J. O., 1.3 Elder, M., 4.5 Eliopoulos, E. E., 3.3 Eller, G. von, 2.2

AUTHOR INDEX Elyutin, N. O., 5.3 Emery, V. J., 4.2 Enderle, G., 3.3 Endoh, H., 2.5 Endres, H., 4.2 Engel, P., 1.3 Englander, M., 5.3 Entin, I. R., 5.3 Epstein, J., 4.2 Erde´lyi, A., 1.3 Erickson, H. P., 2.5 Erickson, J. W., 2.3 Eschenbacher, P. W., 1.3 Estermann, M., 4.6 Etheridge, J., 5.2 Etherington, G., 4.4 Evans, A. C., 3.3 Evans, N. S., 2.5 Evans, P., 2.4 Evans, P. R., 3.3 Evans-Lutterodt, K. W., 4.4 Evjen, H. M., 3.4 Ewald, P. P., 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 3.4, 5.1 Exelby, D. R., 2.5 Faber, T. E., 4.4 Faetti, S., 4.4 Faggiani, R., 2.1 Fa˚k, B., 5.3 Fan, C. P., 4.4 Fan, H.-F., 2.2, 2.5 Farach, H. A., 3.3 Farber, A. S., 4.4 Farkas, D. R., 1.3 Farrants, G., 1.4, 2.5 Farrants, G. W., 3.3 Favin, D. L., 1.3 Fayard, M., 4.2 Fedotov, A. F., 2.5 Fehlhammer, H., 2.3 Feig, E., 1.3 Feil, D., 1.2 Feiner, S. K., 3.3 Feldkamp, L. A., 4.1 Feldmann, R. J., 3.3 Feltynowski, A., 2.5 Fender, B. E. F., 4.2 Ferraris, G., 2.5 Ferrel, R. A., 4.3 Ferrin, T. E., 3.3 Fewster, P. F., 5.1 Feynman, R., 5.2 Fields, P. M., 4.3 Filman, D. J., 2.3 Finch, J. T., 2.5 Fingerland, A., 5.1 Finkelstein, K. D., 5.3 Finkenstadt, V. L., 4.5 Fischer, J., 2.3 Fischer, K., 1.2 Fischer, W., 1.4 Fisher, J., 2.2 Fisher, P. M. J., 4.3 Fiske, S. J., 2.2 Fitzgerald, P. M. D., 1.4, 2.3 Flack, H. D., 4.2 Flautt, T. J., 4.4 Fleming, R. M., 4.4 Fletterick, R. J., 2.3, 3.3 Flook, R. J., 2.4 Fock, R., 5.2 Foldy, L. L., 2.5

Foley, J. D., 3.3 Folkhard, W., 1.3 Fontaine, D. de, 4.2 Fontell, K., 4.4 Fontes, E., 4.4 Ford, G. C., 2.3 Ford, L. O., 3.3 Forgany, S. K. E., 2.5 Fornberg, A., 1.3 Forst, R., 4.2 Forsyth, J. B., 1.3, 4.2 Forsyth, V. T., 4.5 Fortier, S., 2.2 Fortuin, C. M., 3.4 Foster, R. M., 1.3 Foucher, P., 4.4 Fouret, P., 4.2 Fouret, R., 4.2 Fout, G. S., 2.3 Fowler, R. H., 1.3 Fowweather, F., 1.3 Fox, G., 2.3 Frank, F. C., 4.4 Frank, J., 2.5 Frankenberger, E. A., 2.3 Franklin, R. E., 4.5 Franulovic, K., 4.4 Franx, M., 2.1 Fraser, H. L., 2.5 Fraser, R. D. B., 4.5 Frazer, R. A., 5.2 Freeman, A. J., 1.2, 4.3 Freeman, H. C., 2.4 Freer, A. A., 2.2 Freer, S. T., 1.3, 2.4 Freiser, M. J., 4.4 French, A. D., 4.5 French, S., 2.1, 2.2, 2.4 Frey, F., 4.2 Frey, S., 2.5 Fridborg, K., 2.3 Fridrichsons, J., 2.3 Friedel, G., 1.3, 4.4 Friedlander, F. G., 1.3 Friedlander, P. H., 1.3 Friedman, A., 1.3 Frobenius, G., 1.3 Frost, J. C., 4.4 Frost-Jensen, A., 4.6 Fry, E., 2.3 Fryer, J. R., 2.5, 4.5 Fuess, H., 5.3 Fujii, Y., 4.1 Fujimoto, F., 2.5, 4.3, 5.2 Fujinaga, M., 2.3 Fujiwara, K., 2.5, 5.2 Fujiyoshi, Y., 2.5 Fukuhara, A., 2.5, 5.2 Fukuyama, K., 2.3 Fuller, W., 4.5 Furie, B., 3.3 Furie, B. C., 3.3 Furusaka, M., 4.2 Gabor, D., 2.5 Ga¨hler, R., 5.3 Galerne, Y., 4.4 Gallagher, T. M., 2.3 Gallo, L., 3.3 Gallop, J. R., 3.3 Gallwitz, U., 4.5 Gane, P. A. C., 4.4

Gannon, M. G. J., 4.4 Garcia-Golding, F., 4.4 Garcia-Granda, S., 2.2 Gardner, K. H., 4.5 Garland, C. W., 4.4 Garland, Z. G., 4.4 Garrido, J., 2.3 Gasparoux, H., 4.4 Gassmann, J., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 Gatti, M., 4.4 Gaughan, J. P., 4.4 Gautier, F., 4.2 Gavrilov, V. N., 5.3 Gay, R., 2.3 Gaykema, W. P. J., 2.3 Gebhard, W., 4.5 Geddes, A. J., 3.3 Gehlen, P., 4.2 Gehring, K., 2.5 Geil, P. H., 4.5 Geisel, T., 4.2 Gelder, R. de, 2.2 Gel’fand, I. M., 1.3 Geller, M., 3.3 Gentleman, W. M., 1.3 Georgopoulos, P., 4.2 Gerhard, O. E., 2.1 Gerlach, P., 4.2 Germain, G., 2.2, 2.5 Germian, C., 4.4 Gerold, V., 4.2 Giacovazzo, C., 2.1, 2.2 Giarrusso, F. F., 3.3 Gibbs, J. W., 2.3 Giege´, R., 2.3 Gilbert, P. F. C., 2.5 Gill, P. E., 3.3 Gillan, B. E., 4.2 Gilli, G., 2.4 Gilliland, G. L., 3.3 Gillis, J., 1.3, 2.2 Gilmore, C. J., 2.2, 2.5, 4.5 Gilmore, R., 5.2 Gingrich, N. S., 1.3, 4.2 Girling, R. L., 3.3 Gjønnes, J., 2.5, 4.3, 5.2 Gjønnes, K., 2.5 Glaeser, R. M., 2.5 Glasser, M. L., 3.4 Glatigny, A., 3.3 Glauber, R., 2.5 Glazer, A. M., 4.2 Glu¨ck, M., 1.5 Glucksman, M. J., 4.5 Go, N., 3.3 Godrećhe, C., 4.6 Goedkoop, J. A., 1.3, 2.2 Goldman, A. I., 4.6 Goldstine, H. H., 1.3 Golovchenko, J. A., 5.1 Goncharov, A. B., 2.5 Gonzalez, A., 4.5 Good, I. J., 1.3 Goodby, J. J., 4.4 Goodby, J. W., 4.4 Goodman, P., 2.5, 5.2 Gordon, R., 2.5 Gosling, R. G., 4.5 Gossling, T. H., 3.3 Gould, R. O., 2.2 Gouyet, J. F., 4.6 Graaf, H. de, 4.5

573

Graaff, R. A. G. de, 2.2 Grabcev, B., 4.2 Graeff, W., 5.3 Gragg, J. E., 4.2 Gramlich, V., 2.2 Gransbergen, E. F., 4.4 Grant, D. F., 2.2 Gratias, D., 2.5, 4.6, 5.2 Grau, U. M., 2.3 Gray, G. W., 4.4 Green, D. W., 2.3, 2.4 Green, E. A., 2.2, 2.4 Greenall, R. J., 4.5 Greenhalgh, D. M. S., 1.3 Greer, J., 3.3 Grems, M. D., 1.3 Grenander, U., 1.3 Griffith, J. P., 2.3 Grimm, H., 1.3, 4.2 Grinstein, G., 4.4 Gross, L., 1.3 Grosse-Kunstleve, R. W., 1.4 Grubb, D. T., 4.5 Grzinic, G., 2.5 Gu, Y.-X., 2.2 Guagliardi, A., 2.2 Gubbens, A. J., 4.3 Guessoum, A., 1.3 Guigay, J. P., 5.3 Guillon, D., 4.4 Guinier, A., 4.2 Gull, S. F., 1.3 Gunning, J., 2.5 Gunther, L., 4.4 Gur, Y., 1.5 Gurskaya, G. V., 2.5 Guru Row, T. N., 1.2 Gutierrez, G. A., 4.5 Guyot-Sionnest, P., 4.4 Hadamard, J., 1.3 Haefner, K., 4.2 Haibach, T., 4.6 Hall, I. H., 4.5 Hall, M., 1.3 Hall, S. R., 1.4, 2.2 Halla, F., 4.2 Halperin, B. I., 4.4 Hamilton, W. A., 5.3 Hamilton, W. C., 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 4.5 Hancock, H., 2.2 Handelsman, R. A., 1.3 Hansen, N. K., 1.2 Hao, Q., 2.2 Harada, J., 4.2 Harada, Y., 2.3, 2.5, 4.3 Harburn, G., 4.2 Harding, M. M., 2.2, 2.3 Hardman, K. D., 3.3 Hardouin, F., 4.4 Hardy, G. H., 1.3 Harford, J., 4.5 Harker, D., 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Harrington, M., 2.3 Harris, D. B., 1.3 Harris, M. R., 3.3 Harrison, S. C., 1.3, 2.3 Harrison, W. A., 4.1 Hart, M., 5.1, 5.3 Hart, R. G., 2.4 Hartman, P., 1.3

AUTHOR INDEX Hartree, D. R., 1.2 Hartsuck, J. A., 2.3 Hasegawa, K., 4.5 Haseltine, J. H., 4.4 Hashimoto, H., 2.5 Hashimoto, S., 4.2, 4.3 Hass, B. S., 3.3 Hastings, C. Jr, 3.4 Hastings, J. B., 5.3 Hastings, J. M., 4.2 Hata, Y., 2.4 Hatch, D. M., 1.5 Haubold, H. G., 4.2 Hauptman, H., 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 4.5 Hausdorff, F., 4.6 Havelka, W., 2.5 Havighurst, R. J., 1.3 Hayakawa, M., 4.2 Hazen, E. E., 3.3 Heap, B. R., 3.3 Hearmon, R. F. S., 4.1 Hearn, A. C., 1.4 Hecht, H. J., 2.3 Hecht, H.-J., 2.2 Hehre, W. J., 1.2 Heideman, M. T., 1.3 Heil, P. D., 4.5 Heinermann, J. J. L., 2.2 Heiney, P. A., 4.4, 4.6 Helfrich, W., 4.4 Helliwell, J. R., 2.2, 2.4 Hellner, E., 4.2 Helms, H. D., 1.3 Hende, J. van den, 1.3 Henderson, R., 2.3, 2.5 Hendricks, S., 4.2, 4.5 Hendrickson, W. A., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Hendrikx, Y., 4.4 Hennion, B., 4.2 Herglotz, G., 1.3 Herman, G. T., 2.5 Hermann, C., 1.3, 4.6 Hermans, J., 3.3 Herriot, J. R., 2.4 Herrmann, K. H., 2.5 Hetherington, C. J. D., 2.5 Hewitt, J., 2.5 Heymann, J. A. W., 2.5 Higgs, H., 3.3 High, D. F., 2.3, 2.4 Hildebrandt, G., 5.1 Hills, G. J., 2.5 Hirsch, P. B., 2.5, 4.5, 5.1, 5.2 Hirschman, I. I. Jr, 1.3 Hirshfeld, F. L., 1.2, 2.3 Hirt, A., 2.5 Hirth, J. P., 4.4 Hitchcock, P. B., 4.4 Hjerteń, S., 2.3 Ho, M.-H., 2.5 Ho, M.-S., 2.5 Hodgkin, D. C., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Hodgson, K. O., 2.4 Hodgson, M. L., 1.3 Hofmann, D., 4.5 Hogle, J., 2.3, 3.3 Hohlwein, D., 4.2 Høier, R., 2.5, 4.3, 5.2 Hol, W. G. J., 2.3, 3.3 Holbrook, S. R., 1.3, 2.4

Holmes, K. C., 4.5 Honegger, A., 3.3 Honjo, G., 4.3 Hopfinger, A. J., 3.3, 4.5 Hopgood, F. R. A., 3.3 Hoppe, W., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 Horalik, L., 5.3 Horjales, E., 3.3 Ho¨rmander, L., 1.3 Horn, P. M., 4.4, 4.6 Horne, M. A., 5.3 Hornreich, R. M., 4.4 Hornstra, J., 2.3 Horstmann, M., 2.5 Hosemann, R., 2.3, 4.2, 4.5 Hoser, A., 4.2 Hoshino, S., 5.3 Hosoya, S., 5.3 Hosur, M. V., 2.3 Houston, T. E., 3.3 Hovmo¨ller, S., 1.4, 2.5 Howells, E. R., 2.1 Howells, R. G., 2.2 Howie, A., 2.5, 4.3, 4.5, 5.2 Hrdlicˇka, Z., 5.3 Hsiung, H., 4.4 Hu, H., 4.5 Hu, H. H., 2.5 Huang, C., 3.3 Huang, C. C., 4.4 Huang, K., 1.3, 4.1 Hubbard, R. E., 3.3 Huber, R., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Hudson, L., 4.5 Hudson, P. J., 3.3 Hughes, D. E., 1.3 Hughes, E. W., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3 Hughes, J. F., 3.3 Hughes, J. J., 2.3, 2.4 Hull, S. E., 2.2 Hu¨ller, A., 4.2 Hummelink, T., 3.3 Hummelink-Peters, B. G., 3.3 Hu¨mmer, K., 5.1 Humphreys, C. J., 2.5, 4.3, 5.2 Hunsmann, N., 2.5 Huntingdon, H. B., 4.1 Hurley, A. C., 1.2, 2.5, 5.2 Huse, D. A., 4.4 Iannelli, P., 4.5 Ibers, J. A., 2.4, 4.2 Iijima, S., 4.3 Iizumi, M., 4.2 Imamov, R. M., 2.5 Immirzi, A., 1.3 Imry, Y., 4.4 Indenbom, V. L., 5.3 Ingersent, K., 4.4 Ingram, V. M., 2.3, 2.4 Iolin, E. M., 5.3 Irwin, M. J., 2.2 Isaacs, N. W., 1.3, 2.2, 2.4, 3.3 Ishihara, K. N., 4.6 Ishii, T., 4.2 Ishikawa, I., 5.3 Ishikawa, Y., 4.2 Ishizuka, K., 2.5 Isoda, S., 2.5, 4.5 Israel, R., 2.2 Ito, T., 3.2

Ivanova, M. I., 4.5 Iwata, H., 4.2 Jach, T., 5.1 Jack, A., 1.3, 2.4 Jacobson, R. A., 2.3 Jacques, J., 4.4 Jaeger, J. C., 1.3 Jagodzinski, H., 4.2 James, R. W., 1.2, 1.3, 2.3, 4.2, 5.1 Jan, J.-P., 1.5 Janner, A., 1.3, 2.5, 4.2, 4.6 Janot, Chr., 4.6 Jansen, L., 1.5 Janssen, T., 1.3, 1.5, 2.5, 4.2, 4.6 Jap, B. K., 2.5 Jaric, M. V., 4.6 Jarvis, L., 3.3 Jaynes, E. T., 1.3, 2.2 Jefferey, J. W., 4.2 Jeffery, B. A., 2.3 Jeffrey, G. A., 1.3 Jensen, L. H., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Jih, J. H., 2.3 Johannisen, H., 2.3 Johnson, A. W. S., 2.5, 5.2 Johnson, C. K., 1.2, 3.1, 3.3 Johnson, D. H., 1.3 Johnson, D. L., 4.4 Johnson, H. W., 1.3 Johnson, J. E., 2.3, 3.3 Johnson, L. N., 2.3, 2.4, 3.3 Johnson, R. W., 1.3 Jolles, P., 2.3 Jones, B., 4.4 Jones, P. M., 2.5 Jones, R., 4.2, 4.5 Jones, R. C., 4.2 Jones, T. A., 2.3, 3.3 Josefsson, T. W., 4.3 Joyez, G., 4.2 Ju¨rgensen, H., 1.3 Just, W., 4.2 Kabsch, W., 3.3, 4.5 Kac, M., 1.3 Kadecˇkova´, S., 5.3 Kaenel, R. A., 1.3 Kagan, Yu., 5.3 Kainuma, Y., 4.3, 5.2 Kaiser, H., 5.3 Kakinoki, J., 4.2 Kalantar, A. H., 3.2 Kaldor, U., 2.1 Kalning, M., 4.6 Kam, Z., 2.5 Kamada, K., 5.3 Kambe, K., 2.5, 5.2 Kamer, G., 2.3 Kamper, J., 2.3 Kannan, K. K., 2.3 Kansy, K., 3.3 Kaplan, D. R., 5.1 Kaplan, M., 4.4 Kara, M., 1.2 Karbach, A., 4.5 Karle, I. L., 2.2 Karle, J., 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 Ka´rmań, T. von, 4.1 Karplus, M., 1.3, 3.3 Karrass, A., 1.3 Kartha, G., 2.3, 2.4

574

Kasper, J. S., 1.3, 2.2 Kasting, G. B., 4.4 Katagawa, T., 5.1 Katayama, K., 4.5 Kato, K., 4.6 Kato, N., 5.1, 5.3 Katsube, Y., 2.4 Katz, L., 3.3 Katznelson, Y., 1.3 Kawaguchi, A., 4.5 Kearsley, S. K., 3.3 Kek, S., 4.6 Keller, A., 4.5 Keller, J., 4.2 Kelley, B., 4.4 Kelly, B. A., 4.4 Kelton, K. F., 4.6 Kendall, M., 1.2, 2.1 Kendrew, J. C., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Kennard, O., 3.1, 3.3 Kennedy, J. M., 1.5 Ketelaar, J. A. A., 2.3 Khinchin, A. I., 1.3 Kiefer, J. E., 1.3, 2.1 Kikuta, S., 5.1, 5.3 Kim, S.-H., 1.3, 2.4 Kirichuk, V. S., 2.5 Kirkland, E. J., 2.5 Kiselev, N. A., 2.5 Kitagaku, M., 4.3 Kitagawa, Y., 2.4 Kitaigorodskii, A. J., 4.1 Kitaigorodsky, A. I., 4.2 Kitamura, N., 4.3 Kittel, C., 4.4 Kitz, N., 1.3 Kjeldgaard, M., 3.3 Klapperstu¨ck, M., 4.4 Klar, B., 5.3 Klechkovskaya, V. V., 2.5 Klein, A. G., 5.3 Kleinstu¨ck, K., 5.3 Kleman, M., 4.6 Klimkovich, S., 1.4 Klug, A., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 3.3, 4.5 Klug, H. P., 4.2 Kluyver, J. C., 1.3 Knoell, R. V., 2.5 Knol, K. S., 2.4 Knowles, J. W., 5.3 Kobayashi, S., 4.4 Kobayashi, T., 2.5 Koch, E., 1.1, 1.4 Koch, M. H. J., 2.2 Kodera, S., 4.3 Koellner, M., 5.3 Koetzle, T. F., 2.4, 3.3 Kogiso, M., 2.5, 5.2 Kohn, V. G., 5.1 Kohra, K., 5.1, 5.3 Kolar, H., 2.5 Kolba, D. P., 1.3 Komada, T., 2.5 Komura, Y., 4.2 Konnert, J. H., 1.3, 2.4 Kopka, M. L., 2.3 Kopp, S., 2.5, 4.5 Korekawa, M., 4.2, 4.6 Korn, D. G., 1.3 Korpiun, P., 5.3 Kortan, A. R., 4.4 Kossel, W., 2.5

AUTHOR INDEX Kosterlitz, J. M., 4.4 Kosykh, V. P., 2.5 Kovacs, A. J., 4.5 Kovalchuk, M. V., 5.1 Kovalev, O. V., 1.5 Krabbendam, H., 2.2 Krahl, D., 2.5, 4.3 Kraut, J., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Kress, W., 4.1 Kreuger, R. J., 5.2 Krishna, P., 4.2 Krivanek, O. L., 4.3 Krivoglaz, M. A., 4.2, 4.3 Kroon, J., 2.2 Kruse, F. H., 1.3 Ku¨hlbrandt, W., 2.5 Ku¨hne, T., 2.5 Kuhs, W. F., 1.2 Kukla, D., 2.4 Kulda, J., 5.3 Kulidzhanov, F. G., 5.3 Kuligin, A. K., 2.5 Kulka, D., 1.3 Kuntz, I. D., 3.3 Kunz, C., 4.2 Kuriyan, J., 1.3 Kurki-Suonio, K., 1.2 Kutznetsov, P. I., 1.2 Kuvdaldin, B. V., 5.3 Kuwabara, S., 2.5 Kvardakov, V. V., 5.3 Lacour, T. F. M., 1.3 Ladbrooke, B. D., 4.4 Lagomarsino, S., 5.3 Lajze´rowicz, J., 2.2 Lajzerowicz, J., 4.4 Lakshminarayanan, A. V., 2.5 Laloe, F., 1.2 Lambert, D., 5.3 Lambert, M., 4.4 Lambiotte, J. J. Jr, 1.3 Lancon, F., 4.6 Lanczos, C., 1.3 Landau, H. J., 1.3 Landau, L. D., 4.4 Lando, J. B., 4.5 Lang, A. R., 5.1 Lang, S., 1.3 Lang, W. W., 1.3 Langer, R., 2.5 Langridge, R., 3.3, 4.5 Langs, D. A., 2.2, 2.5, 4.5 Larine, M., 1.4 Larmor, J., 1.3 Lattman, E. E., 2.3, 2.4 Lau, H. Y., 4.2 Laue, M. von, 1.1, 1.3, 2.5, 5.1 Laval, J., 4.1 Laves, R., 4.2 Lavoine, J., 1.3 Lawson, K. D., 4.4 Leadbetter, A. J., 4.4 Leapman, R. D., 4.3 Lechner, R. E., 4.2 Lederer, F., 3.3 Ledermann, W., 1.3, 4.1 Lee, E. J., 4.5 Lee, S. D., 4.4 Leenhouts, J. I., 2.3 Lefebvre, J., 4.1, 4.2 Lefebvre, S., 4.2

Lefeld-Sosnowska, M., 5.1 Legg, M. J., 1.3 Lehmann, M., 5.3 Lehmann, M. S., 1.3, 2.2 Lehmpfuhl, G., 4.3 Lele, S., 4.2 Lemoine, G., 3.3 Lentz, P. J. Jr, 2.3 Lepault, J., 2.5 Lerner, F. Ya., 2.5 Lesk, A. M., 3.3 Leslie, A. G. W., 1.3, 2.3, 3.3 Lessinger, L., 2.2 Leung, P., 1.2 Levanyuk, A. P., 4.4 Levelut, A. M., 4.4 Levens, S. A., 1.3 Levine, D., 4.6 Levinthal, C., 3.3 Levitov, L. S., 4.6 Levitt, M., 1.3, 2.4, 3.3 Levy, H. A., 1.2, 1.3, 3.1 Li, D. X., 2.5 Li, F. H., 2.5 Li, J. Q., 2.5 Liang, K. S., 4.4 Liebert, L., 4.4 Liebert, L. E., 4.4 Liebman, G., 2.5 Lien, S. C., 4.4 Lieth, C. W. van der, 3.3 Lievert, L., 4.4 Lifchitz, A., 1.3, 2.3 Lifshitz, E. M., 4.4 Lifson, S., 3.3 Lighthill, M. J., 1.3 Lijk, L. J., 3.3 Liljas, L., 2.3, 3.3 Liljefors, T., 3.3 Linares-Galvez, J., 5.3 Lindegaard, A., 4.4 Lindsey, J., 2.3 Link, V., 4.4 Linnik, I. Ju., 1.3 Lipanov, A. A., 4.5 Lipkowitz, K. B., 3.3 Lippert, B., 2.1 Lipscomb, W. N., 2.2, 2.3 Lipson, H., 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 2.3, 4.2, 4.5 Litster, J. D., 4.4 Litvin, D. B., 2.3 Liu, J., 4.5 Liu, Y.-W., 2.5 Livanova, N. B., 2.5 Livesey, A. K., 1.3 Loane, R. F., 4.3 Lobachev, A. N., 2.5 Lobanova, G. M., 2.5 Lobert, S., 4.5 Lock, C. J. L., 2.1 Lockhart, T. E., 4.4 Lomer, T. R., 2.1 Lomont, J. S., 1.5 Lonsdale, K., 1.3 Lontovitch, M., 5.2 Looijenga-Vos, A., 4.6 Lorenz, M., 4.5 Lotz, B., 2.5, 4.5 Love, W., 1.3 Love, W. E., 2.2, 2.3 Love, W. F., 1.5

Lovell, F. M., 1.3 Lovesey, S. W., 4.2 Lo¨vgren, S., 2.3 Lowde, R. D., 5.3 Lu, C., 1.3 Luban, M., 4.4 Lubensky, T. C., 4.4 Lucas, B. W., 4.2 Luck, J. M., 4.6 Ludewig, J., 5.1 Luenberger, D. G., 3.3 Luic´, M., 2.2 Lunin, V. Yu., 1.3 Luo, M., 2.3 Lurie, N. A., 4.1 Lushington, K. J., 4.4 Luther, P., 4.5 Luty, T., 4.1 Luzzati, V., 2.3, 4.4 Lybanon, M., 3.2 Lynch, D. F., 2.5, 5.2 Ma, S. K., 4.4 McCall, M. J., 3.3 McClellan, J. H., 1.3 McCourt, M. P., 2.5, 4.5 McDonald, W. S., 2.4 McEwen, B., 2.5 MacGillavry, C. H., 1.3, 4.5 Machin, P. A., 3.3 McIntyre, G. J., 1.2 Mackay, A. L., 2.2, 3.3 MacKay, M., 2.3 McKean, H. P., 1.3 McLachlan, A. D., 3.3 McLachlan, D., 2.3, 2.5 MacLane, S., 1.3 McLean, J. D., 2.5 McMahon, B., 1.4 McMillan, W. L., 4.4 McMullan, R. K., 3.3 MacNicol, D. D., 2.5 McPherson, A., 2.4 McQueen, J. E., 3.3 MacRae, T. P., 4.5 McWhan, D. B., 4.4 Mada, H., 4.4 Madelung, E., 3.4 Madhav Rao, L., 5.3 Magdoff, B. S., 2.3 Magnus, W., 1.3 Mahendrasingam, A., 4.5 Maher, D. M., 2.5 Maier, W., 4.4 Main, P., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5 Makowski, L., 4.5 Malgrange, C., 5.1, 5.3 Malik, K. M. A., 4.4 Maling, G. C., 1.3 Mallikarjunan, M., 3.3 Maltheˆte, J., 4.4 Maly, K., 4.6 Mandelkern, L., 4.5 Mandelkow, E., 4.5 Mani, N. V., 2.4 Manley, R. St. J., 2.5 Mannami, M., 2.5 Mansfield, J., 2.5 Marchington, B., 1.3 Mardix, S., 4.2 Marel, R. P. van der, 2.1 Marigo, A., 4.2

575

Marinder, B. O., 2.5 Mark, H., 2.4 Markham, R., 2.5 Marks, L. D., 4.3 Marsh, R. E., 3.2 Marson, F., 4.4 Martin, P. C., 4.4 Martinez-Miranda, L. J., 4.4 Martorana, A., 4.2 Marumo, F., 1.2 Marvin, D. A., 1.3, 4.5 Marynissen, H., 4.4 Masaki, N., 5.3 Maslen, V. W., 1.2 Maslen, W. V., 4.3 Mason, R., 4.4 Mason, S. A., 4.5 Massidda, V., 3.4 Mastryukov, V. S., 2.5 Materlik, G., 1.2, 5.1 Mathews, F. S., 3.3 Mathiesen, S., 4.4 Mathieson, A. McL., 2.3 Matsubara, E., 4.2 Matsuda, T., 2.5 Matthews, B. W., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Mauguen, Y., 2.2, 2.4 Mauritz, K. A., 4.5 Max, N. L., 3.3 Mayer, S. W., 1.3 Mayers, D. F., 4.3 Mazeau, K., 4.5 Mazid, M. A., 4.4 Mazkedian, S., 5.3 Mazure´-Espejo, C., 5.3 Mazzarella, L., 2.3, 2.4 Meiboom, S., 4.4 Meichle, M., 4.4 Melone, S., 5.3 Mendiratta, S. K., 5.3 Menke, H., 4.2 Menzer, G., 2.3 Mermin, N. D., 1.1, 2.5, 4.6 Mersereau, R. M., 1.3, 2.5 Merwe, J. H. van der, 4.4 Messiah, A., 5.2 Meyer, C. E., 4.3 Meyer, E. F., 3.3 Meyer, G., 2.5 Meyer, R. B., 4.4 Michalec, R., 5.3 Midgley, P. A., 2.5 Mierzejewski, A., 4.1 Mighell, A. D., 2.3 Mikula, P., 5.3 Millane, R. P., 4.5 Miller, A., 4.5 Miller, D. P., 4.5 Miller, G. H., 4.5 Miller, J. R., 3.3 Miller, P., 2.5 Miller, R., 2.2, 4.5 Miller, S. C., 1.5 Mimori-Kiyosue, Y., 4.5 Minakawa, N., 5.3 Minor, I., 2.3 Mitra, A. K., 4.5 Mitsui, T., 4.5 Miyake, S., 2.5 Miyano, K., 4.4 Miyazaki, M., 2.5 Mo, Y. D., 2.5

AUTHOR INDEX Moliere, G., 4.3 Moliterni, A. G. G., 2.2 Mo¨llenstedt, G., 2.5 Moncrief, J. W., 2.2, 2.3 Moncton, D. E., 4.4 Montroll, E. W., 1.3 Moodie, A. F., 2.5, 5.2 Moon, P. B., 2.4 Mooney, P. E., 4.3 Moore, D. H., 1.3 Moore, P. B., 2.5 Moras, D., 2.3 More, M., 4.2 Morffew, A. J., 3.3 Mori, M., 4.3 Moriguchi, S., 2.5 Morimoto, C. N., 3.3 Morinaga, M., 4.2 Moring, I., 2.3 Morris, R. L., 1.3 Moser, W. O. J., 1.3 Mosley, A., 4.4 Moss, B., 2.5 Moss, G., 1.2 Moss, S. C., 4.2, 4.3 Mosser, A. G., 2.3 Motherwell, W. D. S., 3.3 Motohashi, H., 5.3 Moussa, F., 4.4 Muirhead, H., 2.3, 2.4 Mukamel, D., 4.4 Mukherjee, A. K., 2.2 Mu¨ller, H., 4.2 Mu¨ller, U., 4.2 Munn, R. W., 3.4 Murakami, W. T., 2.3 Murdock, W. L., 1.3 Murray, W., 3.3 Murthy, M. R. N., 2.3 Muus, I. T., 4.5 Myller-Lebedeff, W., 2.1 Nagabhushana, C., 4.4 Nagasawa, T., 2.5, 5.2 Naiki, T., 2.5 Nakatsu, K., 2.3 Namba, K., 4.5 Nambudripad, R., 4.5 Narayan, R., 1.3, 2.2, 2.4 Nathans, R., 4.2 Natterer, F., 1.3 Navaza, J., 1.3, 2.2 Nave, C., 1.3, 4.5 Navia, M. A., 2.4 Nawab, H., 1.3 Naya, S., 2.2, 4.5 Neisser, J. Z., 4.5 Nelson, D. E., 1.3 Nelson, D. R., 4.4 Nelson, H. M., 1.5 Neto, A. M. F., 4.4 Neubert, M. E., 4.4 Neubu¨ser, J., 1.3 Newham, R. J., 3.4 Newman, W. M., 3.3 Niall, H. D., 3.3 Nicholson, P. B., 4.5 Nicholson, R. B., 2.5, 5.2 Nigam, G. D., 2.1 Niggli, A., 1.3 Niimura, N., 4.2 Nijboer, B. R. A., 3.4

Nitta, I., 2.2 Nityananda, R., 1.3, 2.2 Nixon, P. E., 2.3 Nonoyama, M., 4.3 Nordman, C. E., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3 North, A. C. T., 2.3, 2.4, 3.3 Norton, D. A., 2.2 Nunzi, A., 2.2 Nussbaumer, H. J., 1.3 ¨ berg, B., 2.3 O Oberhettinger, F., 1.3 Oberteuffer, J. A., 5.3 Oberti, R., 2.4 Ocko, B. M., 4.4 Oda, T., 2.2 O’Donnell, T. J., 3.3 Oesterhelt, D., 2.5 Ogata, C. M., 2.2 Ogawa, T., 2.5 Ohara, M., 4.5 Ohshima, K., 4.2, 4.3 Ohtsuki, Y. H., 4.3, 5.1 Oikawa, T., 4.3 Okaya, J., 2.2 Okaya, Y., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 O’Keefe, M. A., 2.5 Olafson, B. D., 3.3 Olmer, P., 4.1 Olsen, A., 2.5 Olsen, K. W., 2.3 Olson, A. J., 1.3, 2.3, 3.3 Olthof-Hazekamp, R., 1.4, 2.2 Omura, T., 4.3 Ono, A., 2.5 Onsager, L., 1.3, 4.4 Opat, G. I., 5.3 Opdenbosch, N. van, 3.3 Oppenheim, A. V., 2.5 Ord, K., 2.1 Orlov, S. S., 2.5 Orlova, E. V., 2.5 Ørmen, P.-J., 1.2 Ott, H., 2.2 Ottensmeyer, F. P., 2.5 Overhauser, A. W., 4.2, 5.3 Paciorek, W. A., 4.6 Paley, R. E. A. C., 1.3 Palleschi, V., 4.4 Palmenberg, A. C., 2.3 Palmer, R. A., 2.3, 2.4 Palmer, S. B., 5.3 Pan, M., 2.5 Pan, Q., 2.5 Pandey, D., 4.2 Paoletti, A., 4.2 Paradossi, G., 4.5 Park, H., 4.5 Parks, T. W., 1.3 Parmon, V. S., 2.5 Parodi, O., 4.4 Parthasarathy, R., 2.3, 2.4 Parthasarathy, S., 2.1, 2.2, 2.4 Parthe´, E., 4.3 Pashley, D. W., 2.5, 4.5, 5.2 Patel, J. R., 5.1 Pattabiraman, N., 3.3 Pattanayek, R., 4.5 Patterson, A. L., 1.1, 1.3, 2.3, 2.4, 4.2 Patterson, C., 5.3

Paturle, A., 1.2 Pa¨tzold, H., 4.3 Pauling, L., 1.3, 2.3 Pavlovitch, A., 4.6 Pawley, G. S., 4.1 Pearl, L. H., 3.3 Pearson, K., 1.3 Pease, M. C., 1.3 Peerdeman, A. F., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Peierls, R. E., 4.4 Peisl, J., 4.2 Penning, P., 5.1 Penrose, R., 4.6 Penzkofer, B., 4.2 Pepinsky, R., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Perez, S., 2.5, 4.5 Perham, R. N., 4.5 Perrier de la Bathie, R., 5.3 Pershan, P. S., 4.4 Perutz, M. F., 2.3, 2.4 Petef, G., 2.3 Peters, C., 1.3 Petrascheck, D., 5.3 Petricek, V., 4.6 Pe´troff, J. F., 5.3 Petrov, V. V., 1.3 Petrzˇ´ılka, V., 5.3 Petsko, G. A., 1.3, 3.3 Pezerat, H., 4.2 Pfaff, G., 3.3 Phillips, D. C., 2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3 Phillips, J. C., 2.4 Phillips, S. E. V., 3.3 Phizackerley, R. P., 2.4 Phong, B. T., 3.3 Pickworth, J., 2.3 Pielartzik, H., 4.5 Pietila, L.-O., 3.4 Pietronero, L., 4.2 Pietsch, U., 2.5 Pifferi, A., 2.2 Pigram, W. J., 4.5 Pilling, D. E., 1.3 Pindak, R., 4.4 Pink, M. G., 3.3 Pinsker, Z. G., 2.5, 5.1 Pirie, J. D., 4.1 Piro, O. E., 2.2 Platas, J. G., 2.2 Plotnikov, A. P., 2.5 Plotnikov, V. P., 2.5 Podjarny, A. D., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Podurets, K. M., 5.3 Pogany, A. P., 2.5 Pokrovsky, V. L., 4.4 Polder, D., 5.1 Polidori, G., 2.2 Poljak, R. J., 2.3 Pollack, H. O., 1.3 Pond, R. C., 2.5 Poole, C. P., 3.3 Popa, N. C., 4.1 Pople, J. A., 1.2 Popp, D., 4.5 Porter, T. K., 3.3 Portier, R., 2.5, 5.2 Potenzone, R., 3.3 Potterton, E. A., 3.3 Potts, R. B., 1.3 Pouget, J. P., 4.2 Powell, B. M., 4.2 Prandl, W., 4.2

576

Press, W., 4.2, 4.6 Preston, A. R., 2.5 Prick, A. J., 2.2 Prins, J. A., 2.4, 4.2, 5.1 Prosen, R. J., 1.3, 2.3 Prost, J., 4.4 Pryor, A. W., 4.1, 4.6 Puliti, P., 5.3 Purisima, E. O., 3.3 Pustovskikh, A. I., 2.5 Pynn, R., 4.1 Quandalle, P., 1.3 Quiocho, F. A., 3.3 Qurashi, M. M., 1.3 Rabinovich, D., 2.1, 2.3 Rabinovich, S., 2.1 Rabson, D. A., 4.6 Rackham, G. M., 2.5 Rader, C. M., 1.3 Radermacher, M., 2.5 Radha, A., 4.5 Radhakrishnan, R., 3.3 Radi, G., 2.5 Radon, J., 2.5 Radons, W., 4.2 Rae, A. D., 2.2 Raghavacharyulu, I. V. V., 1.5 Raghavan, N. V., 2.4 Raghavan, R. S., 2.4 Raimondi, D. L., 1.2 Raı¨tman, E. A., 5.3 Raiz, V. Sh., 2.4 Raja, V. N., 4.4 Rajagopal, H., 2.4 Ralph, A., 2.2 Ralph, A. C., 2.2 Ramachandran, G. N., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 5.1 Raman, C. V., 4.1 Raman, S., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Ramaseshan, S., 2.3, 2.4 Rango, C. de, 2.2, 2.4 Rao, R. R., 1.3 Rao, S. N., 2.3 Rao, S. T., 3.3 Rasmussen, K., 3.4 Ratna, B. R., 4.4 Rauch, H., 5.3 Raum, K., 5.3 Ravelli, R., 2.2 Rawiso, M., 4.4 Rayleigh (J. W. Strutt), Lord, 1.3, 2.1 Rayment, I., 2.3, 3.3 Read, R. J., 2.3 Rees, A. L. G., 2.5 Reid, T. J. III, 2.3 Reif, F., 1.3 Reijen, L. L. van, 1.3 Reiner, I., 1.3 Reiss-Husson, F., 4.4 Remillard, B., 4.5 Renninger, M., 5.1 Reuber, E., 2.5 Revol, J. F., 2.5 Rez, P., 2.5, 4.3, 5.2 Rhyner, J., 4.6 Ricci, R., 4.2 Rice, S. O., 1.3 Richardson, J. S., 3.3

AUTHOR INDEX Richardson, R. M., 4.4 Rickert, S. E., 4.5 Riekel, C., 4.2 Riesz, M., 1.3 Rietveld, H. M., 4.2 Rimmer, B., 2.3 Rivard, G. E., 1.3 Robertson, J. H., 2.3 Robertson, J. M., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2 Robinson, G., 1.3, 3.2 Rodewald, M., 4.3 Rodgers, J. R., 3.3 Rodgers, J. W., 2.4 Rodrigues, A. R. D., 5.3 Roetti, C., 1.2 Rogers, D., 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 Rokhsar, D. S., 4.6 Rollett, J. S., 1.3, 3.3 Rosen, J., 1.5 Rosenstein, R. D., 2.3 Rosshirt, E., 4.2 Rossmann, M. G., 1.3, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3 Rossouw, C. J., 4.3 Roux, D., 4.4 Rowlands, D., 2.3 Rowlands, R. J., 4.5 Rozenfeld, A., 2.5 Rueckert, R. R., 2.3 Ruedenberg, K., 1.2 Rugman, M., 4.4 Ruland, W., 4.2 Rust, H.-P., 2.5 Rustichelli, F., 5.3 Ruston, W. R., 4.2 Rybnikar, F., 4.5 Rydeń, L., 2.3 Ryskin, A. I., 2.5 Sabine, T. M., 4.2 Sackmann, H., 4.4 Sadashiva, B. K., 4.4 Sadoc, J. F., 4.4 Sadova, N. I., 2.5 Safinya, C. R., 4.4 Safran, S. A., 4.4 Sahni, V. C., 4.1 Saito, P., 2.5 Saito, Y., 2.3 Saka, T., 5.1 Sakabe, K., 2.2 Sakabe, N., 2.2 Sakurai, K., 4.2 Salamon, M. B., 4.2 Sande, G., 1.3 Sander, B., 5.3 Sandonis, J., 5.3 Sands, D. E., 1.1, 3.1 Sarko, A., 4.5 Sasada, Y., 2.3, 3.3 Sato, H., 4.2 Satow, Y., 2.4 Saupe, A., 4.4 Sauvage, M., 4.3, 5.3 Sayre, D., 1.3, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 4.5 Scaringe, P. R., 4.2 Scaringe, R. P., 2.5 Schacher, G. E., 3.4 Schaetzing, R., 4.4 Schapink, F. W., 2.5 Scha¨rpf, O., 4.2

Schenk, H., 2.2 Scheraga, H. A., 3.3 Scheringer, C., 1.2 Scherm, R., 5.3 Scherzer, O., 2.5 Schevitz, R. W., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Schilling, J. W., 2.3 Schiske, P., 2.5 Schlenker, M., 5.3 Schmatz, W., 4.2 Schmid, S., 2.5 Schmidt, H. H., 5.3 Schmidt, T., 2.3 Schmidt, W. C. Jr, 3.3 Schneider, A. I., 4.5 Schoenborn, B. P., 2.4 Schofield, P., 4.1 Schomaker, V., 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.3, 2.5, 3.2 Schoone, J. C., 2.4 Schramm, H. J., 2.5 Schroeder, M. R., 1.3 Schuessler, H. W., 1.3 Schulz, H., 1.2, 4.2 Schulze, G. E. R., 5.3 Schumacker, R. A., 3.3 Schuster, S. L., 4.1 Schutt, C. E., 1.3, 2.3 Schwager, P., 1.3, 2.4 Schwartz, L., 1.3 Schwartz, L. H., 4.2 Schwartzman, A., 2.5 Schwarzenbach, D., 1.2 Schwarzenberger, R. L. E., 1.3 Schweizer, J., 5.3 Scott, W. R., 1.3 Scraba, D. G., 2.3 Scudder, M. L., 2.4 Sears, V. F., 4.2, 5.3 Sedla´kova´, L., 5.3 Seidl, E., 5.3 Seitz, E., 4.2 Seitz, F., 1.4 Sekii, H., 2.5, 5.2 Sellar, J. R., 5.2 Selling, B. H., 2.3 Semiletov, S. A., 2.5 Senechal, M., 4.6 Sethna, J. P., 4.4 Sha, B.-D., 2.5 Shaffer, P. A. Jr, 1.3 Shakked, Z., 2.1, 2.3 Shankland, K., 2.5, 4.5 Shannon, C. E., 1.3 Shannon, M. D., 2.5 Shao-Hui, Z., 2.2 Shappell, M. D., 2.3 Shashidhar, R., 4.4 Shashua, R., 2.1 Sheat, S., 2.3 Shechtman, D., 2.5, 4.6 Sheldrick, G. M., 2.2, 2.3 Shen, Y. R., 4.4 Shenefelt, M., 1.3 Sheriff, S., 2.4 Sherry, B., 2.3 Sherwood, J. N., 4.2 Shilov, G. E., 1.3 Shil’shtein, S. Sh., 5.3 Shimanouchi, T., 3.3 Shipley, C. G., 4.4 Shirane, G., 4.1, 4.2

Shmueli, U., 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2 Shoemaker, C. B., 2.3 Shoemaker, D. P., 1.3, 2.3 Shoemaker, V., 2.5 Shohat, J. A., 1.3 Shore, V. C., 2.4 Shortley, G. H., 1.2 Shotton, M. W., 4.5 Shtrikman, S., 4.4 Shull, C. G., 5.3 Sicignano, A., 2.3 Siddons, D. P., 5.3 Sidorenko, S. V., 2.5 Sieber, W., 3.3 Siegel, B. M., 2.5 Sieker, L. C., 2.4 Sigaud, G., 4.4 Sigler, P. B., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Sikka, S. K., 2.4 Sikorski, A. Z., 2.5 Silcox, J., 4.3 Siliqi, D., 2.2 Silverman, H. F., 1.3 Sim, G. A., 2.2, 2.3, 4.5 Simerska, M., 2.2 Simonov, V. I., 2.2, 2.3 Simpson, P. G., 2.3 Singh, A. K., 2.3, 2.4 Singleton, R. C., 1.3 Sinha, S. K., 4.4 Sint, L., 2.2 Sippel, D., 5.3 Siripitayananon, J., 4.2 Sirota, E. B., 4.4 Sirota, M. I., 2.5 Sivardie`re, J., 5.3 Sjo¨gren, A., 2.5 Skehel, J. J., 2.3 Skilling, J., 1.3 Skoglund, U., 2.3 Skoulios, A., 4.4 Skuratovskii, I. Y., 4.5 Slater, L. S., 1.5 Slepian, D., 1.3 Sluckin, T. J., 4.4 Sly, W. G., 1.3 Smaalen, S. van, 4.6 Small, D., 4.4 Smith, A. B. III, 4.4 Smith, D. J., 2.5 Smith, G., 3.3 Smith, G. S., 4.4 Smith, G. W., 4.4 Smith, J. L., 2.2, 2.3 Smith, T., 4.1 Smits, J. M. M., 2.2 Smoluchowski, R., 1.5 Sneddon, I. N., 1.3 Soboleva, A. F., 2.5 Socolar, J. E. S., 4.6 Soeter, N. M., 2.3 Sokol’skii, D. V., 5.3 Solitar, D., 1.3 Solomon, L., 4.4 Somenkov, V. A., 5.3 Soni, R. P., 1.3 Sorensen, L. B., 4.4 Spagna, R., 2.2 Spargo, A. E. C., 2.5 Sparks, C. J., 1.2, 4.2 Sparks, R. A., 1.3, 3.3

577

Speake, T. C., 1.3 Speakman, J. C., 2.3 Spek, A. L., 2.2 Spence, J. C. H., 2.5, 4.3 Spiegel, M. R., 2.1 Spink, J. A., 2.5 Sprang, S. R., 3.3 Sprecher, D. A., 1.3 Springer, T., 4.2, 4.4 Sprokel, G. E., 4.4 Sproull, R. F., 3.3 Squire, J. M., 4.5 Squires, G. L., 1.2, 4.1, 5.3 Srinivasan, R., 2.1, 2.2, 2.4 Staden, R., 1.3, 2.3, 3.3 Stanley, E., 2.2, 4.5 Stark, W., 4.5 Stassis, C., 5.3 States, D. J., 3.3 Staudenmann, J. L., 5.3 Stauffacher, C. V., 2.3 Steeds, J. W., 2.5 Stegemeyer, H., 4.4 Steger, W., 4.2 Stegun, I. A., 2.1 Steigemann, W., 1.3, 2.4 Stein, Z., 2.1 Steinberger, I. T., 4.2 Steinhardt, P. J., 4.6 Steinkilberg, M., 2.5 Steinrauf, L. K., 2.3 Steitz, T. A., 2.3 Stephanik, H., 5.1 Stephen, M. J., 4.4 Stephens, P. W., 4.4, 4.6 Stephenson, G. B., 4.4 Steurer, W., 4.6 Stevens, E. D., 1.2 Stewart, A. T., 4.1 Stewart, R. F., 1.2 Stokes, H. T., 1.5 Storks, K. H., 4.5 Stout, G. H., 1.3, 2.3 Stragler, H., 4.4 Strahs, G., 2.3 Strandberg, B., 2.3 Strandberg, B. E., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Stra¨ssler, S., 4.2 Stratonovich, R. L., 1.2 Stroud, R. M., 2.4 Stroud, W. J., 4.5 Strzelecki, L., 4.4 Stuart, A., 1.2, 2.1 Stuart, D., 2.3 Stubbs, G., 4.5 Stubbs, G. J., 4.5 Sturkey, L., 5.2 Sturtevant, J. M., 4.5 Su, Z., 1.2 Suck, D., 2.3, 3.3 Sundaralingam, M., 3.3 Sundaram, K., 3.3 Sundberg, M., 2.5 Suresh, K. A., 4.4 Suryan, G., 1.3 Sussman, J. L., 1.3, 2.4 Sutcliffe, D. C., 3.3 Sutherland, I. E., 3.3 Suzuki, E., 4.5 Suzuki, H., 4.5 Swaminathan, S., 3.3 Swanson, S. M., 3.3

AUTHOR INDEX Swartzrauber, P. N., 1.3 Swoboda, M., 4.3 Symmons, M. F., 4.5 Szego¨, G., 1.3 Szillard, L., 2.4 Tadokoro, H., 4.5 Taftø, J., 2.5, 4.3 Taguchi, I., 2.2 Tajbakhsh, A. R., 4.4 Takagi, S., 2.5, 5.1, 5.3 Takahashi, H., 5.2 Takahashi, T., 5.3 Takaki, Y., 4.2 Takano, T., 1.3 Takenaka, A., 3.3 Takeuchi, Y., 2.3, 2.4 Talapov, A. L., 4.4 Tamarkin, J. D., 1.3 Tanaka, K., 1.2 Tanaka, M., 2.5, 5.2 Tanaka, N., 2.3, 2.4, 4.3 Tanaka, S., 4.5 Tanji, T., 2.5 Tanner, B. K., 5.1 Tardieu, A., 4.4 Tarento, R. J., 4.4 Tasset, F., 5.3 Tasumi, M., 3.3 Tatarinova, L. I., 4.5 Tate, C., 2.2 Taupin, D., 5.3 Taylor, C. A., 1.3, 1.4, 4.2 Taylor, D. J., 2.2 Taylor, G. H., 4.4 Taylor, R., 3.1 Taylor, W. J., 2.3 Tchoubar, D., 4.2 Teeter, M. M., 2.3, 2.4 Teller, E., 4.2, 4.5 Temperton, C., 1.3 Templeton, D. H., 2.4 Templeton, L. K., 2.4 Ten Eyck, L. F., 1.3 Terauchi, M., 2.5 Terwilliger, T. C., 2.3, 2.4 Teworte, R., 5.1 Thaler, R. M., 2.5 Thierry, J. C., 2.3 Thoen, J., 4.4 Thomas, D. J., 3.3 Thomas, K. M., 4.4 Thompson, J. G., 2.5 Thomsen, K., 3.3 Thon, F., 2.5 Thouless, D. G., 4.4 Thuman, P., 2.2 Tibbals, J. E., 4.2 Tikhonov, V. I., 1.2 Tinh, N. H., 4.4 Tirion, M., 4.5 Titchmarsh, E. C., 1.3 Tivol, W. F., 2.5 Tivol, W. T., 4.5 Tjian, R., 3.3 Tobacman, W., 2.5 Toeplitz, O., 1.3 Tolimieri, R., 1.3 Tollin, P., 2.3 Tolstov, G. P., 1.3 Tomimitsu, H., 5.3 Toner, J., 4.4

Tong, L., 2.3 Toniolo, L., 4.2 Tonomura, A., 2.5 Toupin, R., 2.2 Tournarie, M., 2.5, 5.2 Tramontano, A., 3.3 Traub, W., 2.2 Tre`ves, F., 1.3 Trommer, W. E., 2.3 Tronrud, D. E., 1.3 Trueblood, K. N., 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.3 Truter, M. R., 1.3 Tsernoglou, D., 3.3 Tsipursky, S. I., 2.5 Tsirelson, V. G., 2.5 Tsoucaris, G., 2.2, 2.4 Tsuda, K., 2.5 Tsuji, M., 2.5, 4.5 Tsukihara, T., 2.3, 3.3 Tsuprun, V. L., 2.5 Tucciarone, A., 4.2 Tucker, R. C., 2.3 Tukey, J. W., 1.3 Tulinsky, A., 2.4 Turberfield, K. C., 4.2 Turner, J., 3.3 Turner, J. N., 2.5 Turner, P. S., 2.5, 4.5 Typke, D., 2.5 Uchida, Y., 4.3 Ueki, T., 2.4 Ueno, K., 2.5 Uhrich, M. L., 1.3 Ungaretti, L., 2.4 Unge, T., 2.3 Unwin, P. N. T., 2.5 Uragami, T., 5.1 Usha, R., 2.3 Ushigami, Y., 5.3 Utemisov, K., 5.3 Uyeda, N., 2.5 Uyeda, R., 2.5, 4.3 Vaara, I., 2.3 Vacher, R., 4.1 Vagin, A. A., 2.5 Vainshtein, B. K., 2.5, 4.2, 4.5 Van Dael, W., 4.4 Van der Pol, B., 1.3 Van der Putten, N., 2.2 Van Heel, M., 2.5 Van Hove, L., 4.1, 4.3 Van Tendeloo, G., 4.3 Vand, V., 1.3, 2.5, 4.5 Varady, W. A., 4.4 Varghese, J. N., 1.3, 2.2 Varnum, J. C., 2.3 Vaucher, C., 4.4 Vaughan, M. R., 2.5 Vaughan, P. A., 2.2 Vedani, A., 3.3 Venkataraman, G., 4.1 Venkatesan, K., 2.4 Vereijken, J. M., 2.3 Vermin, W. J., 2.2 Vibert, P. J., 4.5 Vickovic´, I., 2.2 Vijayan, M., 2.3, 2.4 Vilkov, L. V., 2.5 Villain, J., 4.4 Vincent, R., 2.5

Viterbo, D., 2.2 Vlachavas, D. S., 2.5 Von der Lage, F. C., 1.2 Vonderviszt, F., 4.5 Voronova, A. A., 2.5 Vos, A., 2.4 Vrańa, M., 5.3 Vriend, G., 2.3 Vries, T. A. de, 2.3 Vrublevskaya, Z. V., 2.5 Vulis, M., 1.3 Wagner, E. H., 5.1 Waho, T., 4.3 Wakabayashi, K., 4.5 Walian, P. J., 2.5 Walker, C. B., 4.1 Waller, I., 1.2 Walsh, G. R., 3.3 Wang, B. C., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Wang, D. N., 2.5 Wang, H., 4.5 Wang, J., 4.4 Wang, X. J., 4.4 Wang, Z. L., 4.3 Ward, J. C., 1.3 Ward, K. B., 2.3 Warme, P. K., 3.3 Warren, B., 1.3 Warren, B. E., 1.3, 4.2, 4.4 Warren, S., 4.5 Warshel, A., 3.3 Waser, J., 1.3, 1.4, 3.1, 3.2 Watanabe, D., 2.5, 4.2, 4.3 Watanabe, E., 2.5 Watenpaugh, K. D., 1.4, 2.4 Watson, D. G., 3.3 Watson, G. L., 1.3 Watson, G. N., 1.3 Watson, H. C., 2.3 Watson, K. J., 1.2 Weckert, E., 5.1 Weeks, C. M., 2.2, 4.5 Weintraub, H. J. R., 3.3 Weinzierl, J. E., 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 Weiss, A. H., 4.4 Weiss, G. H., 1.3, 2.1 Weiss, R., 2.3 Weiss, R. J., 1.2 Weissberg, A. M., 2.2 Welberry, T. R., 4.2, 4.5 Welch, P. D., 1.3 Wells, M., 1.3, 1.4 Welsh, L. C., 4.5 Wenk, H.-R., 2.5 Wentowska, K., 4.4 Werner, S. A., 4.2, 5.3 Wesolowski, T., 3.3 West, J., 1.3 Westbrook, J. D., 1.4 Weyl, H., 1.3 Weymouth, J. W., 4.1 Whelan, M., 4.3 Whelan, M. J., 2.5, 4.3, 4.5, 5.2 White, J. G., 2.3 White, P., 2.2 White, T. J., 2.5 Whitfield, H. J., 2.5, 5.2 Whittaker, E. J. W., 1.3 Whittaker, E. T., 1.3, 3.2 Widder, D. V., 3.4 Widom, H., 1.3

578

Wiener, N., 1.3 Wigner, E. P., 1.5 Wiley, D. C., 2.3 Wilfing, A., 5.3 Wilke, W., 4.2 Wilkins, M. H. F., 4.5 Wilkins, S. W., 1.3, 2.2 Williams, D. E., 3.4, 4.1 Williams, G. J. B., 3.3 Williams, R. M., 4.4 Williams, T. V., 3.3 Willis, B. T. M., 1.2, 4.1, 4.6 Willoughby, T. V., 3.3 Wilson, A. J. C., 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 4.2, 4.5 Wilson, E. B., 1.1 Wilson, I. A., 2.3 Wilson, I. J., 2.5 Wilson, K. S., 2.1, 2.2 Wilson, S. A., 5.3 Windsor, C. G., 4.2 Winkler, F. K., 1.3, 2.3 Winkor, M. J., 4.4 Winograd, S., 1.3 Winter, W. T., 4.5 Wintgen, G., 1.5 Wintner, A., 1.3 Wipke, W. T., 3.3 Withers, R. L., 2.5, 4.2 Wittmann, J. C., 2.5, 4.5 Wolf, E., 5.1 Wolf, J. A., 1.3 Wolff, P. M. de, 2.2, 2.5, 4.2, 4.6 Wonacott, A. J., 2.4, 4.5 Wondratschek, H., 1.3, 1.5, 2.2 Wong, S. F., 4.2 Woodward, I., 2.3, 2.4 Woolfson, M. M., 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5 Wooster, W. A., 4.2 Wright, D. C., 4.6 Wright, M. H., 3.3 Wrighton, P. G., 4.4 Wrinch, D. M., 2.3 Wu, T. B., 4.2 Wu, X.-J., 2.5 Wuensch, B. J., 4.2 Wunderlich, B., 4.5 Wunderlich, J. A., 2.3 Wyckoff, H. W., 1.3, 2.3, 4.5 Wynn, A., 3.3 Xiang, S.-B., 2.5 Xiaodong, Z., 1.4 Xu, P. R., 4.3 Yagi, N., 4.5 Yamamoto, A., 4.6 Yamashita, I., 4.5 Yang, Y. W., 1.2 Yao, J.-X., 2.2, 2.5 Yelon, W. B., 5.3 Yessik, M., 4.2 Yip, S., 4.1 Yonath, A., 2.2 York, B., 2.2 Yoshioka, H., 4.3 Yosida, K., 1.3 Young, A. P., 4.4 Young, C. Y., 4.4 Young, R. A., 4.2

AUTHOR INDEX Yu, L. J., 4.4 Yuan, B.-L., 4.5 Zachariasen, W. H., 1.3, 1.4, 2.4, 5.1, 5.3 Zak, J., 1.5 Zalkin, A., 2.4 Zanotti, G., 2.2 Zarka, A., 5.3 Zaschke, H., 4.4

Zassenhaus, H., 1.3 Zechmeister, K., 1.3, 2.5 Zegenhagen, J., 5.1 Zeilinger, A., 5.3 Zeitler, E., 2.5 Zelenka, J., 5.3 Zelepukhin, M. V., 5.3 Zelwer, C., 2.2 Zemanian, A. H., 1.3 Zemlin, F., 2.5

Zenetti, R., 4.2 Zernike, F., 4.2 Zeyen, C., 4.2, 5.3 Zhang, W. P., 2.5 Zhao, Z. X., 2.5 Zheng, C.-D., 2.2, 2.5 Zhong, Z.-Y., 2.5 Zhukhlistov, A. P., 2.5 Ziman, J. M., 1.1 Zobetz, E., 4.6

579

Zolotoyabko, E., 5.3 Zou, J.-Y., 3.3 Zucker, I. J., 3.4 Zucker, U. H., 1.2 Zugenmaier, P., 4.5 Zuo, J. M., 2.5 Zvyagin, B. B., 2.5 Zwick, M., 1.3, 2.3, 2.4 Zygmund, A., 1.3

Subject index A posteriori probability, 423 A priori probability, 415 Ab initio phase determination, 261 for proteins, 231 Abbe theory, 282 Abel summation procedure, 45 Abelian groups, 40, 73 Aberrations, 282 Absolute configuration, 264, 267 Absolutely integrable functions, 27 Absorbing crystals, 536, 545–547 Absorption coefficient, 541, 546 effective, 536 linear, 535 phenomenological, 281 Absorption edge, 266 Absorption function, 445 Absorption in electron diffraction, 312 Accelerated convergence, 385 formula via Patterson function, 389 Acceptance domain, 492 Acentric reflections, 69 Acoustic modes, 402 Action, 64 Additive reindexing, 57 Adiabatic approximation, 400 Adjusted coefficients, 167 Affine change of coordinates, 35 Affine change of variables, 39 Affine space-group type, 163 Affine transformation, 105 Agarwal’s FFT implementation of the Fourier method, 90 Alfalfa mosaic virus, 250 Algebra of functions, 70 Algebraic integers, 73, 76 Algebraic method of reconstruction, 318 Algebraic number theory, 77 Aliasing, 46–47, 86 Allowed origins, 210 ‘Almost everywhere’, 27 Analytical electron microscope, 285 Analytical methods of probability theory, 94 Angle between two vectors, 348 Angles Eulerian, 252, 362 spherical, 252 Anisotropic displacement tensors, 6 Anisotropic fluid, 449 Anisotropic Gaussian atoms, 60 Anisotropic temperature factors, 69 Anisotropic weights, 355 Annular dark-field detector, 283 Anomalous absorption, 541, 562 Anomalous difference, 270, 272 Anomalous dispersion (scattering), 246–247, 264–266 integration with direct methods, 232 Patterson function, 248 Anomalous scatterers, 60–61, 69, 247, 266, 268 Anomalous transmission effect, 541 Anti-nodes of standing waves, 541 Antiferromagnetic domains, 564 Antisymmetric tensor, 6 Aperiodic crystal, 486 ideal, 486 Aperiodic structure, 486 Apparent noncrystallographic symmetry, 255 Approximate helix symmetry, 469

Approximations adiabatic, 400 Bethe, second, 280 Born, first-order, 10, 279 Born, second-order, 11 Born–Oppenheimer, 18 Edgeworth, 23 forward-scattering, 280 harmonic, 400 kinematical, 58, 279–280, 309, 326, 481, 561 phase-grating, 556 phase-object, 280, 445 projected charge-density, 283 projection, 286, 553 saddlepoint, 94–95 seven-beam, 556 small-angle-scattering, 278 three-beam, 556 two-beam, 280, 553 two-beam dynamical, 326 weak-phase-object, 283 Area detector, 275 Argand diagram, 264 Arithmetic classes, 66 of representations, 66 Arithmetic crystal class, 164 Arms of star, 165 Artificial temperature factor, 87, 92 Aspherical-atom form factor, 15 Associated actions in function spaces, 65 Associativity properties of convolution, 92 Assumption of independence, 205 Assumption of uniformity, 199, 205 Asymmetric carbon atom, 267 Asymmetric images, 314 Asymmetric unit, 64, 67, 166 noncrystallographic, 244 Asymmetry ratio, 539 Asymptotic distribution of eigenvalues of Toeplitz forms, 43, 63 Asymptotic expansions and limit theorems, 95 of Gram–Charlier and Edgeworth, 97 Atom-centred spherical harmonic expansion, 14 Atomic characteristic functions, 206 Atomic electron densities, 70 Atomic error matrix, 358 Atomic force-constant matrix, 401 Atomic form factor, 10 X-ray, 275 Atomic scattering factor, 10, 265 spherical, 10 Atomic scattering length, 11 Atomic surface, 486, 492 Atomic temperature factor, 18 Autocorrelation, 61 Autocorrelation function, 320 Automated Patterson-map search, 321 Automorphism, 65–66 Average difference cluster method, 429 Average intensity of general reflections, 190 of zones and rows, 191 Average multiples for point groups, 193 Average periodic structure, 409 Averaged electron density, 261 Axial disorder, 429

580

Back-projection method of reconstruction, 318 Back-shift correction, 89 Back surface, 547 Background diffraction, accurate subtraction of, 473 Backward convolution theorem, 43, 70 Bacterial rhodopsin, 262 Banach spaces, 28 Band-limited function, 47 Base-centred lattices, 83 Bases Cartesian, 7 contravariant, 5 covariant, 5 direct and reciprocal, relationships between, 3 mutually reciprocal, 2–3 primitive, 163 reference, choice of, 7 Basic crystallographic computations, 84 Basic domain, 166 Basic structure, 487 Basis vectors, contravariant, 348 Bayesian statistical approach to the phase problem, 98 Beevers–Lipson factorization, 55, 71 Beevers–Lipson strips, 71, 86 Bessel’s inequality, 45 Best Fourier, 84, 272 Best phase, 272 Best plane, 353 Beta distribution first kind, 197 second kind, 197 Bethe approximation, second, 280 Biaxial nematic order, 452 Bieberbach theorem, 64 Bijvoet differences, 248 Bijvoet equivalents, 268–269 Bijvoet pair, 267–268 Bilder, 382 Binary systems, distortions in, 433 Binding energy, 265 Bloch-wave formulation, 555 Bloch waves, 278, 536 Bloch’s theorem, 9, 401 alternative form of, 9 Blow and Crick formulation, 271 Body-centred lattices, 83 Body-diagonal axes, 113 Bond angles, 379 Bond orientational order, 449 Booth’s differential Fourier syntheses, 88 Booth’s method of steepest descents, 89 Borie–Sparks method, 434 Born approximation first-order, 10, 279 second-order, 11 Born series, 279, 555 expansion, 445 Born–Oppenheimer approximation, 18 Born–von Ka´rmań theory, 400 Borrmann effect, 281, 541 Borrmann triangle, 548 Boundary conditions, 536, 546 at exit surface, 542 Bounded projections, 63, 85 Bounded subset, 26 Bragg case, 539 Bragg condition, symmetric, 287

SUBJECT INDEX Bragg–Lipson charts, 86 Bragg’s law, departure of incident wave from, 538 Branch, 401 Bravais lattices centred, 105 direct and reciprocal, 105 Bright-field disc, 288 Bright-field image intensity, 311 Brillouin zone, 9, 401 first, 165 Bulk plasmon excitation, 278 Burg entropy, 64 Burnside’s theorem, 66 Butterfly loop, 51 Calculus of asymmetric units, 73 operational, 28 Carpet of cross-vectors, 250 Cartesian basis, 7 Cartesian coordinate system, 348 Cartesian frames of reference, 5 Cartesian product, 26, 40 Cartesian system, transformation to, 3 Cauchy kernel, 45 Cauchy sequence, 27 Cauchy–Schwarz inequality, 27, 45 Cauchy’s theorem, 95 CBED (convergent-beam electron diffraction), 285 Cell constants, 475 Central-limit theorem, 95, 194 Lindeberg–Le´vy version, 199 Centre-of-mass translational displacements, 437 Centre of symmetry, 289 false, 100 Centred Bravais lattice, 105 Centred lattices, 68 Centric reflections, 68 Centring effect of, 191 translations, 106 type, 106 Centrosymmetric projections, 242 Centrosymmetry determination of, 292 status of, 108 Cesa`ro sum, 44 Chain rule, 91 Chain trace, 384 Change-of-basis matrix, 107 Change of crystal axes, 104 Channelling pattern, 447 Characteristic functions, 94, 192, 204 atomic, 206 CHARMM, 384 Chem-X, 384 CHEMGRAF, 381 Chemical correctness of polypeptide fold, 261 Chinese remainder theorem (CRT), 51, 57, 76 for polynomials, 54, 77 reconstruction, 52 reconstruction formula, 54 Chirality, 267 Choice of reference bases, 7 Cholesteryl iodide, 240 -Chymotrypsin, 260 Circular harmonic expansions, 93 Classical Thomson scattering, 10 Classification of crystallographic groups, 66 Clebsch–Gordan coefficients, 18

Closed point group, 248 Closed subset, 26 Cluster model, 448 Clustering, 429 Clusters, 411 Cochran’s Fourier method, 89 Cocycle, 79 Coherence, 376 Coherence length, 467 Coherent scattering, 404 Column part, 163 Communication, statistical theory of, 96 Commutative ring, 51 Compact subset, 26 Compact support, 26, 36, 43 distributions with, 31, 39, 41–42, 45 Complement of the incomplete gamma function, 386–387 Complete normed space, 28 Complete vector spaces, 27 Completely reducible matrix group, 163 Complex antisymmetric transforms, 80 Complex scattering factor, 246 Complex symmetric transforms, 80 Components of vector products, 349 Components of vectors, 5 Composite lattice, 385, 388 Composite structure, 489 Compound nucleus, 11 Compound transformations, 371 Compton scattering, 405 Computational and algebraic aspects of mutually reciprocal bases, 4 Computer-adapted space-group symbols, 102, 106, 112 Computer-algebraic languages, 106 Computer architecture, 50, 58 Condensed ring systems, 379 Conditional pair probability, 415 Conforming/non-conforming disorder, 429 Conformons, 374 Conjugacy classes of subgroups, 65 Conjugate and parity-related symmetry, 79 Conjugate distribution, 96–97 Conjugate families of distributions, 98 Conjugate gradient method, 378 Conjugate symmetry, 35, 39 Conjugation, 65 Connectivity drawing, 377 implied, 377 logical, 377 structural, 377 Connectivity tree, 382 Consistency condition, 38 Constant Q mode, 405 Constraints on interpretation of Patterson functions, 248 Continuous diffraction on layer lines, 473 Contragredient, 39 of a matrix, 35 Contravariant bases, 5 Contravariant basis vectors, 348 Contravariant components, 5 Conventional coefficients, 167 Convergence accelerated, 385 accelerated, formula via Patterson function, 389 of distributions, 31 of Fourier series, 44 Convergence method, 227

581

Convergence-accelerated direct sum, 387 Convergent-beam electron diffraction (CBED), 285 principal-axis pattern symmetries, 296 space-group determination by, 285 Conversion of translations to phase shifts, 35 Convolution, 61, 235 associativity properties of, 92 cyclic, 49, 53 of distributions, 33 of Fourier series, 43 of probability densities, 94 of two distributions, 34 Convolution property, 35, 49 Convolution techniques, 324 Convolution theorem, 36–37, 41–42, 44, 63, 94, 98 backward version, 43, 70 forward version, 43, 61, 70 Convolution theorems with crystallographic symmetry, 70 Cooley–Tukey algorithm, 50, 58, 71 vector-radix version, 55 Cooley–Tukey factorization, multidimensional, 55–56, 74 Coordinate systems Cartesian, 348 natural, 348 Coordinates affine change of, 35 fractional, 41, 59, 252 homogeneous, 360, 363 non-standard, 41 screen, 368, 370 spherical polar, 252 standard, 41, 59, 67 transformation of, 5, 7, 33 world, 368 Copolymers, random, 470 Core of discrete Fourier transform matrix, 77 Correction-factor approach, 199, 208 Correlated lattice disorder, 472 Correlation, 61 Correlation functions, 70, 92, 243, 405, 415, 444 short-range-order, 429 Correlation length, 452 pretransitional lengthening of, 453 Correlations intermolecular, 437 librational–librational, 437 vibrational–librational, 437 Coset averaging, 46–47 Coset decomposition, 46, 55 Coset reversal, 56 Cosets, 46, 67 left, 64 right, 64 Cosine strips, 71 Coulombic energy, 385 Coulombic lattice energy, 385, 389 Covariance, 350 interatomic, 354 Covariances, 354 Covariant bases, 5 Covariant components, 5 Cowpea mosaic virus, 250 Critical angle, 456 Critical scattering, 453 Cross correlation, 70 Cross-correlation function, 314 Cross-Patterson vectors, 251 Cross-rotation function, 92

SUBJECT INDEX Cross-vectors, 242 carpet of, 250 CRT (Chinese remainder theorem), 51, 57, 76 for polynomials, 54, 77 reconstruction, 52 reconstruction formula, 54 Cruickshank’s modified Fourier method, 90 Crystal axes, change of, 104 Crystal class, arithmetic, 164 Crystal defects, 292 in thin films, 445 Crystal periodicity, 59 Crystal structure imaging, 284 Crystal symmetry, 64 Crystal systems, 66, 108 Crystal-B phase, 460 Crystal-E phase, 462–463 Crystal-G phase, 462 Crystal-H phase, 463 Crystal-J phase, 462 Crystal-K phase, 463 Crystalline approximant, 486 Crystallographic applications of Fourier transforms, 58 Crystallographic discrete Fourier transform, 72 algorithms, 71 Crystallographic extension of the Rader/ Winograd factorization, 76 Crystallographic Fourier transform theory, 59 Crystallographic group action, 74 in real space, 67 in reciprocal space, 68 Crystallographic groups, 64 classification of, 66 Crystallographic statistics, 199 Crystallographic symmetry, 248 Cubic groups, 83 Cubic space groups, 102 Cumulant expansion, 22 Cumulant-generating functions, 95, 193 Cumulative distribution functions, 196 Cuprous chloride azomethane complex, 238 Cyclic convolution, 49, 53 Cyclic (even) permutation of coordinates, 102– 103, 107 Cyclic groups, 66 Cyclic symmetry, 77 Cyclotomic polynomials, 54 Cylindrically averaged diffraction patterns, 471 Cylindrically averaged Patterson function, 475 Dark-field discs, 287 Data flow, 58 Data handling, Hall symbols in, 107 Data space, 367, 369, 371–372 de la Valleé Poussin kernel, 44 Debye model, 402 Debye theory, 400 Debye–Waller factor, 453, 542 Decagonal phase, 503 Decimation, 26, 47, 51 and subdivision of period lattices, duality between, 46 in frequency, 51, 56, 79 in time, 51, 79 period, 47 Decimation matrix, 55–56, 73 Decomposition, 72 coset, 46, 55 Deconvolution of a Patterson function, 240 Defects, 278, 429

Defocus optimal, 311 Scherzer, 283 Scherzer, conditions, 311 Deformed crystal, 540 Delta functions, 26 Dirac, 29, 386 periodic, 206 transforms of, 39 Density modification, 84, 324 Density modulation, 496 harmonic, 496 symmetric rectangular, 497 Density of nuclear matter, 2 Deoxyhaemoglobin, 261 Depth cueing, 371, 381 Derivatives for model refinement, 88 for variational phasing techniques, 87 Detectors annular dark-field, 283 area, 275 Determinantal formulae, 223 Determinantal inequalities, 63 Deviation parameter, 539–541 Diamond’s real-space refinement method, 92 Dielectric susceptibility, 535, 550 Fourier expansion of, 535 Difference Fourier analysis, 474 Difference Fourier synthesis, 270, 477 Difference Fourier technique, 270 Difference Patterson functions, 244–245 isomorphous, 244 Differential syntheses, 36, 63, 90 Differentiation, 26, 35 and multiplication by a monomial, 39 of distributions, 31 under the duality bracket, 31 Differentiation identities, 49 Differentiation property, 98 Diffraction by helical structures, 93, 467 dynamical, 325 Diffraction beams, intensities of, 308 Diffraction conditions, 59 Diffraction imaging techniques, 564 Diffraction patterns, cylindrically averaged, 471 Diffraction point-group tables, 290 Diffraction relations, 2 Diffraction vector, 2 Diffractometers, optical, 314 Diffuse scattering, 443 elastic, 407 inelastic, 407 measurement of, 438 of X-rays, 407 thermal, 407 Digit reversal, 51, 56, 58 Digital electronic computation of Fourier series, 71 Dihedral symmetry, 77 Dimension of a representation, 163 Dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, 464 Dipole moment, 389 Dirac delta function, 29, 386 Direct and reciprocity symmetries, 286 Direct Bravais lattice, 105 Direct inspection of structure-factor equation, 100 Direct lattice, 2, 5, 41, 106, 164 Direct-lattice sum, 388

582

Direct methods, 94, 102, 270, 320 in macromolecular crystallography, 231 integration with anomalous-dispersion techniques, 232 integration with isomorphous replacement techniques, 232 Direct-methods packages, 230 Direct metric, 4 Direct phase determination, 36 for proteins, ab initio, 231 in electron crystallography, 320 Direct reconstruction, methods of, 317 Direct space, 163 Direct-space crystal lattice, 386 Direct-space sum, 385 Direct-space transformations, 104 Direct unit-cell parameters, 4 Direction cosines of plane normal, 357 Dirichlet kernel, 44 spherical, 60, 84 Disc symmetries, internal, 292 Discotic phases, 463 Discrete Fourier transform matrix, core of, 77 Discrete Fourier transformation, 45 Discrete Fourier transforms, 25, 72 algorithms, 71 matrix representation of, 49 numerical computation of, 49 properties of, 49 Discretization, 317 Dislocations, 457 Disorder, 443 axial, 429 conforming/non-conforming, 429 from turns, twists and torsions of chains, 429 lattice, 471 lattice, correlated, 472 longitudinal, 428 orientational, 436 substitutional, 447, 471 two-dimensional, 425 Disordered fibres, 467 Dispersion corrections, 265, 268, 535 Dispersion effects, 266 Dispersion energy, 385 Dispersion equations, 278 Dispersion surface, 537, 555, 560 Displacement modulations, 418 Displacive modulation, 496 harmonic, 497 Display space, 368, 371–373, 376 Distance function, 28 Distribution function, 420 cumulative, 196 Distributions associated with locally integrable functions, 30 beta, first kind, 197 beta, second kind, 197 conjugate, 96–97 conjugate families of, 98 convergence of, 31 convolution of, 33–34 definition of, 30 differentiation of, 31 division of, 33 electron-magnetization, 11 Fourier transforms of, 38 gamma, 197 Gaussian, 272 hypersymmetric, 196 ideal acentric, 195

SUBJECT INDEX Distributions ideal centric, 196 integration of, 32 lattice, 42, 45–46 maximum-entropy, 36, 97 motif, 59 multiplication of, 32 non-ideal, 199, 203 of finite order, 30 of random atoms, 96 of sums, averages and ratios, 197 operations on, 31 periodic, 41, 43, 59 probability density, 192 probability density, ideal, 195 support of, 31 T on , 30 tempered, 36, 38, 40, 45, 68 tensor products of, 33 theory of, 25, 28 with compact support, 31, 39, 41–42, 45 Divided differences, 556 Division of distributions, 33 Division problem, 33 Docking, 383 Domain basic, 166 minimal, 166 of influence, 165 representation, 166 Domain structure, 383 Double-phased synthesis, 265 Double-sorting technique, 261 Drawing connectivity, 377 Dual, topological, 30–31, 38–39 Dual relationships, 2 Duality between differentiation and multiplication by a monomial, 63 between periodization and sampling, 42 between sections and projections, 40 between subdivision and decimation of period lattices, 46 Duality bracket, 38 Duality product, 31 Dummy indices, 5 Dynamic parallax, 369, 383 Dynamical approximation, two-beam, 326 Dynamical diffraction, 325, 445 theory, 280, 534 two-beam, formulae, 281 Dynamical matrix, 401 Dynamical scattering effects, 321 Dynamical scattering factor, 446 Dynamical shape function, 556 Dynamical theory, 280, 534 fundamental equations, 536 of neutron diffraction, 557 plane-wave, 538 solution of, 540 Dynamics, 9 of three-dimensional crystals, 400 E maps, interpretation of, 228 Edgeworth approximation, 23 Edgeworth series, 95 EDSA (electron-diffraction structure analysis), 306 Effect of centring, 191 Effective absorption coefficient, 536 Effective potential-energy function, 479 Effects of symmetry on the Fourier image, 99

Eigenspace decomposition of L2, 36 Eigenvalue, 554 Eigenvalue decomposition, 378 Einstein model, 402 Elastic component of X-ray scattering, 10 Elastic constants, measurement of, 406 Elastic diffuse scattering, 407 Electromagnetic electron lenses, 278, 282 Electron band theory of solids, 537 Electron crystallography, 320 direct phase determination, 320 of polymers, 481 of proteins, 321 three-dimensional structure determination by, 323 Electron density, 2, 8, 17, 100, 272 averaged, 261 real-space averaging of, 250, 261 Electron-density calculations, 69 Electron-density maps, Fourier synthesis of, 84 Electron diffraction, 443 sign conventions, 279–280 Electron-diffraction data for crystal-structure determination, 481 three-dimensional, 324, 484 Electron-diffraction patterns geometric theory of, 309 polycrystal, 308 single-crystal, 306 texture, 307, 326 Electron-diffraction structure analysis (EDSA), 306 Electron distribution, atomic, radial dependence of, 12 Electron lenses, electromagnetic, 278, 282 Electron-magnetization distribution, 11 Electron micrographs Fourier transform of, 325, 482 phase information from, 322 Electron-microscope image contrast, 445 Electron-microscope imaging, 443 Electronic analogue computer X-RAC, 71 Electronic structure, 9 Electrons, interaction with matter, 277 Electrostatic energy, 385 Electrostatic potential, 2 Electrostatic properties of molecular surfaces, 380 Embedding method, n-dimensional, 487 Enantiomer, 267 Enantiomeric ambiguity, 237 Enantiomorph definition, 227 Enantiomorphic images, weak, 238 Enantiomorphic solutions, 237 Energy minimization, 380, 382, 384 Entire functions, 36 Entrance surface, 547 Entropy, 87 Envelope, 248 Envelope functions, 283 Epitaxic orientation techniques, 482 Equal-amplitude assumption, 479 Equal distribution, 43 Equivalent matrix groups, 163 Equivalent reflections, 267 Error matrix, atomic, 358 Error propagation, 353 Errors, 271 root-mean-square, 273 systematic, 351 Essential bounds, 43 Essentially bounded function, 27

583

Euclidean algorithm, 46, 54, 62 Euclidean norm, 26 Euclidean space, 26 Eulerian angles, 252, 362 Eulerian space, 253 Eulerian space groups, 254 rotation-function, 256 Eulerian symmetry elements, 254 Even (cyclic) permutation of coordinates, 102– 103, 107 Ewald result, 385 Ewald wave, 536 Exchange between differentiation and multiplication by monomials, 94 Exchange between multiplication and convolution, 26 Excitation error, 552 Excitations bulk plasmon, 278 inner-shell, 278 interband, 278 intraband, 278 Explicit-origin space-group notation, 112 Explicit space-group symbols, 107–109 Exploration of parameter space by molecular model building, 474 Exponential coefficient, 14 Exsolution, 416 Extended resolution, 261 External fields, effect on neutron scattering, 562 External modes, 402 Extinction, 546 Extinction conditions, real-space interpretation of, 291 Extinction distance, 539–541 Extinction factors, 561 Extinction rules for symmetry elements, 291 Face-centred lattices, 83 Face-diagonal axes, 113 Factor group, 65, 67 Factorization, 72 False centre of symmetry, 100 Fast Fourier transform (FFT), 71 Fast rotation function, 255 Feedback method, 244 Feje´r kernel, 44 spherical, 60 Fermi pseudo-potential, 557 Fermi surface, 448 FFT (fast Fourier transform), 71 FHLE, 270 FHUE, 270 Fibonacci chain, 491 Fibonacci sequence, 490 Fibre axis, 467 Fibre diffraction, 40, 474 R factor, 480 specimens for, 467 X-ray, 466 Fibres axially periodic, transform of, 93 disordered, 467 macromolecular, 479 noncrystalline, 467, 469, 474 partially crystalline, 471 polycrystalline, 467, 469, 474 Field of a k vector, 171 Field emission gun, 285 Figures of merit, 227, 272 Films freely suspended, 456

SUBJECT INDEX Films smectic, 456 Filtered image, 314 Filtering iterative low-pass, 473 rotational, 314 Finite field, 53 Finite space group, 164 First Brillouin zone, 165 First-order Born approximation, 10, 279 First-order perturbation theory, 353 Flight time, neutron, 563 Flipping ratio, 561 Fluctuations from an average periodic structure, 409 Focusing of neutron beams, 563 Force-constant matrix, atomic, 401 Form factor, 60 aspherical-atom, 15 atomic, 10 atomic, X-ray, 275 geometric, 501 Kikuchi-line, 446 FORTRAN, 106 FORTRAN interface, 106 FORTRAN interpreter, 107 Forward convolution theorem, 43, 61, 70 Forward scattering, 552 Forward-scattering approximation, 280 Four-dimensional vector, 366 Fourier analysis, 59 and filtration in reciprocal space, 313 Fourier approach, 208 Fourier coefficient, 44, 265 Fourier convolution theorem, 10 Fourier cotransform, 34 Fourier cotransformation, 40 Fourier expansion, 2 of dielectric susceptibility, 535 Fourier images, 99, 284 effects of symmetry on, 99 Fourier map, 265 Fourier method, 203 Agarwal’s FFT implementation of, 90 Fourier representation, 274 Fourier series, 25 convergence of, 44 convolution of, 43 digital electronic computation of, 71 electron density and its summation, 60 Fourier space, 101 symmetry in, 105 Fourier summations, 101 space-group-specific, 101 Fourier synthesis, 59, 268, 272 best, 272 of electron-density maps, 84 Fourier transformation discrete, 45 for reconstruction, 318 inverse, 35, 40 mathematical theory of, 25 Fourier transforms, 25, 34, 386 crystallographic applications, 58 crystallographic, discrete, 72 crystallographic, theory of, 59 discrete, 25 discrete, core of matrix, 77 discrete, matrix representation of, 49 discrete, numerical computation of, 49 discrete, properties of, 49 exchange of subdivision and decimation, 47

Fourier transforms in L1, 35 in L2, 36 in polar coordinates, 93 in S , 37 inverse, 8 kernels of, 35 of a distribution, 38 of electron micrographs, 325, 482 of periodic distributions, 41 of tempered distributions, 38–39 tables of, 38 tensor product property of, 71 various writings of, 38 Fourier-transform space, 386 Fourier–Bessel series, 205 Fourier–Bessel structure factors, 468 Fractal atomic surface, 493 Fractal sequence, 494 Fractional coordinates, 41, 59, 252 Frećhet space, 28 Freely suspended films, 456 Fresnel reflection law, 456 Friedel equivalent, 264, 266 Friedel pair, 267 Friedel’s law, 60, 68, 70, 246, 278 Frobenius congruences, 66, 68 Frodo, 383 Fubini’s theorem, 28, 35, 38 Function spaces associated actions in, 65 topology in, 28 Functional derivative, 91 Functions of polynomial growth, 40 Fundamental domain, 64, 66–67 Fundamental equations of dynamical theory, 536 Fundamental region, 165 Fundamental relationships, 3 Fused-ring systems, 384 G-invariant function, 65 Gamma distribution, 197 Gamma function, 386 incomplete, 386, 389–390 Gamma radiation, 274–275 Gaussian atomic densities, 38 Gaussian atoms, 67–68, 86 anisotropic, 60 Gaussian distribution, 272 Gaussian function, 38 standard, 37, 39 Gaussian plane, general, 356 Gaussian weights, 355 Gaussians, 92 General conditions for possible reflections, 100 General Gaussian plane, 356 General k vector, 165 General linear change of variable, 35 General multivariate Gaussians, 37 General reflections, average intensity of, 190 General topology, 28 General translation function, 258 Generalized multiplexing, 82 Generalized Patterson function, 409 Generalized Rader/Winograd algorithms, 83 Generalized structure-factor formalism, 23 Generalized support condition, 34 Geometric form factor, 501 Geometric redundancies, 62 Geometric structure factors, 101, 120

584

Geometric theory of electron-diffraction patterns, 309 Gibbs phenomenon, 44, 60 GKS (Graphical Kernel System), 361 GKS-3D (Graphical Kernel System for Three Dimensions), 361 Glide line, projected, 289 Glide planes, horizontal, 289 Global crystallographic algorithms, 82 Glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, 249, 261–262 Good algorithm, 51 Good factorization, multidimensional, 76 Goodness of fit, 359 Gram–Charlier series, 22, 95 Gram–Schmidt process, 367, 379 GRAMPS, 381 Graphical Kernel System (GKS), 361 Graphical Kernel System for Three Dimensions (GKS-3D), 361 Graphics, 360 Gravity, 563–564 Green’s theorem, 32, 86 GRIP, 382 Group actions, 64, 72 crystallographic, 74 crystallographic, real space, 67 crystallographic, reciprocal space, 68 Group characters, 82 Group cohomology, 74 Group extensions, 66 Group of units, 50 Group ring integral, 74 module over, 25 Group–subgroup relationship, 103 Groups, 64 GS (glide–screw) bands, 286 Guide, 383 Haemoglobin, 242, 264, 269 horse, 243 Half-bake, 231 Hall symbols, 107, 112, 115 in data handling, 107 in software, 107 Hankel transform, 93 Hardy’s theorem, 38 Harker diagram, 248, 265, 271–272 Harker lines, 240 Harker peaks, 71 Harker planes, 240 special, 240 Harker sections, 239–240 Harmonic approximation, 400 Harmonic density modulation, 496 Harmonic displacive modulation, 497 HDD (high-dispersion diffraction), 306 Heavy atoms, 268 Heavy-atom-derivative data sets, scaling of, 246 Heavy-atom derivatives, 269 Heavy-atom distribution, 270 Heavy-atom location, 239 three-dimensional methods, 243 Heavy-atom lower estimate, 248 Heavy-atom parameters, 270 Heavy-atom sites, 242 Heavy-atom substitution, 245 HEED (high-energy electron diffraction), 306 Heisenberg’s inequality, 38, 84 Helical structures, 429 diffraction by, 93, 467

SUBJECT INDEX Helical symmetry, 93, 317, 467, 475 approximate, 469 Helix repeat units, 468 Hermann–Mauguin space-group symbol, 103 Hermite function, 37, 95 multivariate, 37, 92 Hermite polynomials, three-dimensional, 22 Hermitian-antisymmetric transforms, 80 Hermitian form, 43 Hermitian symmetry, 60, 69, 79 Herringbone packing, 462 Hexagonal axes, 103 Hexagonal family, 103 Hexagonal groups, 83 Hexagonal space groups, 103 Hexatic phase, 458 in two dimensions, 457 tilted, 458 Hexatic-B phase, 460 Hexokinase, 261 Hidden-line algorithms, 376 Hidden-surface algorithms, 376 High-dispersion diffraction (HDD), 306 High-energy electron diffraction (HEED), 306 High-resolution electron diffraction (HRED), 306 High-resolution electron microscopy (HREM), 310 High-voltage limit, 556 Higher-order Laue zone (HOLZ), 292 Highlighting, 376 Hilbert space, 27, 34, 45 Hologram, in-line, 285 Holohedral point group, 166 Holosymmetric space group, 166 HOLZ (higher-order Laue zone), 292 Homogeneous coordinates, 360, 363 Homogeneous symmetric polynomial, 556 Homometric pair, 237 Homometric structures, 237 Homomorphism, 163 Horizontal glide plane, 289 Horizontal mirror plane, 289 Horse haemoglobin, 243 HRED (high-resolution electron diffraction), 306 HREM (high-resolution electron microscopy), 310 Hybridization, 384 HYDRA, 383 Hydrogen bonding, 381, 383–384 Hydrophobic properties of molecular surfaces, 380 Hyperatoms, 487 Hypercrystal, 486, 488 Hypersymmetric distributions, 196 Hypothetical atoms, 87 Icosahedral phase, 509 Ideal acentric distributions, 195 Ideal aperiodic crystal, 486 Ideal centric distributions, 196 Ideal crystal, 163, 486 Ideal probability density distributions, 195 Idempotents, 52 Image averaging in real space, 313 Image contrast, electron-microscope, 445 Image detection, 240 Image enhancement, 310, 313 Image intensity, bright-field, 311 Image of a function by a geometric operation, 26

Image processing in transmission electron microscopy, 310 Image reconstruction, 310 Image resolution, 284 Image restoration, 310–311 Images asymmetric, 314 filtered, 314 with point symmetry, 314 Immunoglobulin, 260 Implication theory, 239 Implicit function theorem, 33 Implied connectivity, 377 Improper rotation axes, 248 Improper rotations, 108, 113 In-disc symmetries, 287 In-line hologram, 285 Incident wave, departure from Bragg’s law, 538 Incoherent inelastic scattering, 404 Incoherent scattering, 404 inelastic, 404 Incommensurability, 452 Incommensurate intergrowth structure, 489 Incommensurately modulated structure, 487 Incomplete gamma function, 386, 389 complement of, 386–387 evaluation of, 390 Independence, assumption of, 205 Index, 64 Index of refraction, 535 Indicator functions, 32, 41, 46, 61, 84–85 Individual symmetry elements, observation of, in CBED patterns, 288 Induction formula, 96 Inductive limit, 30 Inelastic component of X-ray scattering, 10 Inelastic diffuse scattering, 407 Inelastic neutron scattering, 404 Inelastic scattering, 278, 443 diffuse, 407 neutron, 404 Inequalities among structure factors, 217 Inner-shell excitations, 278, 444 Insight, 381 Insight II, 384 Instrumental resolution, 285 Integral group ring, 74 Integral representation, 64 theory, 66 Integrals Lebesgue, 27 Riemann, 27 Integrated intensity, 544, 546–547 Integration by parts, 31 Lebesgue’s theory of, 29 of anomalous-dispersion techniques with direct methods, 232 of distributions, 32 of isomorphous replacement techniques with direct methods, 232 Intensities of diffraction beams, 308 Intensities of plane waves in reflection geometry, 545 in transmission geometry, 541 Intensities of reflected and refracted waves, 542 Intensity differences, 266 Intensity statistics, 97 Interaction between symmetry and decomposition, 73 Interaction between symmetry and factorization, 73

585

Interaction matrix, 240 Interaction of electrons with matter, 277 Interaction of X-rays with matter, 534 Interatomic covariance, 354 Interatomic vectors, 61 Interband excitation, 278 Interference function, 62 spherical, 251 Interferometry, neutron, 563 Intermolecular correlations, 437 Internal disc symmetries, 292 Internal modes, 402 Interpolation formula, 46 Interpolation kernel, 85 Interpretation of E maps, 228 Intraband excitation, 278 Intramolecular energy terms, 390 Intrinsic component of translation part of spacegroup operation, 100 Invariance of L2, 36 Inverse Fourier transform, 8 Inverse Fourier transformation, 35, 40 Inverse rotation operator, 99 Ionic crystal, electrostatic energy of, 385 Irreducible matrix group, 163 Irreps, 162 Ising model, 64 Isometry, 36 Isometry property, 36 Isomorphism, 163, 271, 273 lack of, 245 Isomorphous addition, 264 Isomorphous crystals, 265 Isomorphous differences, 270, 273 Isomorphous heavy-atom derivatives, 478 Isomorphous replacement, 242, 264 difference Patterson functions, 242, 244 multiple, 271 single, 244, 265 techniques, integration of direct methods with, 232 Isomorphous synthesis, 265 Isotropic harmonic oscillator, threedimensional, 18 Isotropic temperature factors, 68 Isotropy subgroups, 64, 67 Iteration method of reconstruction, 318 Iterative low-pass filtering, 473 Jacobians, 33, 49 Joint probability distribution of structure factors, 97 Juxtaposition of chains, 476 k vector general, 165 special, 165 uni-arm, 167 Kernels, 55 of Fourier transformations, 35 Kikuchi-line contrast, 446 Kikuchi-line form factor, 446 Kinematical approximation, 58, 279–280, 309, 326, 481, 561 Kinematical diffraction formulae, 281 intensities, 281 Kinematical R factor, 483 Kinematical scattering, 279 Klug peaks, 255 Known structural fragment, use of, 260, 321

SUBJECT INDEX Kronecker symbol, 5 ‘Kubic Harmonics’, 14 LACBED (large-angle convergent-beam electron diffraction), 285 Lagrange multiplier, 87, 97, 356 Lagrange’s theorem, 64 LALS, 476 Lamellar domains with long-range order, 416– 417 Landau–Peierls effect, 453–454 Langmuir troughs, 482 Languages computer-algebraic, 106 numerically and symbolically oriented, 102 Large-angle convergent-beam electron diffraction (LACBED), 285 Large values of ot, 549 Larmor precession, 558 Lattice, 40 base-centred, 83 body-centred, 83 centred, 68 composite, 385, 388 direct, 2, 5, 41, 106, 164, 386 face-centred, 83 non-primitive, 67 non-standard, 40 non-standard period, 42 one-dimensional, 454 period, 41, 59, 64 primitive, 66 reciprocal, 2, 5, 42, 46, 59, 106, 164 residual, 46 rhombohedral, 83 standard, 40 translation, 163 Lattice disorder, 471 correlated, 472 Lattice distributions, 42, 45–46 Lattice-dynamical model, 400 Lattice energy, Coulombic, 385, 389 Lattice mode, 66 Lattice-parameter mapping, 534 Lattice plane, 2, 350 Lattice sum, 43 Lattice transform, 386 Lattice-translation subgroup, 108 Lattice type, 108 Laue case, 538 Laue circle patterns, 291 Laue equations, 2 Laue groups, 100 Laue point, 538 Laue scattering, 432 Laue techniques, monochromatic, 439 Laue zones, higher-order, 292 Layer lines, continuous diffraction on, 473 Lead, 269 Least resolvable distance, 284 Least-squares adjustment of observed positions, 356 Least-squares determination of phases, 229 Least-squares method, multivariate, 88 Least-squares plane, 353 proper, 355 Least-squares refinement, 270 Lebesgue integral, 27 Lebesgue’s theory of integration, 29 LEED (low-energy electron diffraction), 306 Left action, 64–65, 68, 74 Left cosets, 64

Left representation, 68 Leibnitz’s formula, 387 Length of a function, 27 of a vector, 348 Lennard–Jones potential, 406 L’Hospital’s rule, 387 Libration, 19 Libration tensor, 19 Librational–librational correlations, 437 Lifchitz’s reformulation, 91 Lifshitz point, 455 Lindeberg–Le´vy version of the central-limit theorem, 199 Line drawings, 375 Linear absorption coefficient, 535 Linear change of variable, general, 35 Linear forms, 30 Linear functionals, 28 Linear transformation, 7 Linearity, 35, 49 Linearization formulae, 70 Linearly semidependent phases, 212 Linked-atom least-squares (LALS) system, 476 Liouville’s theorem, 36 Liquid crystals, 449 Lissajous curve, 96 Little co-group, 165, 167 Little group, 165 Local ordering, 429 Locally integrable functions, 30 distributions associated with, 30 Locally summable function of polynomial growth, 39 Location-dependent component of translation part of space-group operation, 100 Locked rotation function, 255 Logical connectivity, 377 Lone pairs, 384 Long-range order (LRO), 415, 450 positional, 449 Longitudinal disorder, 428 Lorentz point, 537 Low-angle scattering, 419 Low-energy conformational changes, 480 Low-energy electron diffraction (LEED), 306 Lp spaces, 27 LRO (long-range order), 450 positional, 449 Lyotropic phase, 451 Lysozyme, 243 MACCS, 384 Macromolecular crystallography, 264 direct methods in, 231 Macromolecular fibre structures, 479 Macromolecular refinement techniques, 92 Macromolecular structures, direct determination of, 481 MAD (multiwavelength anomalous diffraction), 233 Madelung constant, 385 Magic-integer methods, 228 Magnetic domains, 564 Magnetic scattering, 11, 559 Main reflections, 488 Manganese, 268 Many-beam case, 536 Mapping, 26 Mathematical theory of Fourier transformation, 25 Matrices of mixed scalar products, 8

586

Matrix algebra, 252 Matrix groups, 163 completely reducible, 163 equivalent, 163 irreducible, 163 reducible, 163 unitary, 163 Matrix part, 163 Matrix representation, 99 of discrete Fourier transform, 49 Maximum determinant rule, 223 Maximum entropy, 97, 325 Maximum-entropy distributions, 36 of atoms, 97 Maximum-entropy methods, 94, 230 Maximum-entropy theory, 97 Maximum function, 241 Maximum likelihood, 325 Maxwell’s equations, 534, 550 MBD (microbeam diffraction), 306 MDIR (multidimensional isomorphous replacement), 478 MDKINO, 381 Mean-field theory, 451 Mean values, 351 Measurement of diffuse scattering, 438 Meijer’s G function, 196 Mercury, 269 Mesomorphic structures, scattering from, 449 Metric direct, 4 reciprocal, 4 Metric space, 26, 28 Metric tensors, 4–5 Metrizability, 26 Metrizable topology, 28 Micelle, 449 Microanalysis, 277–278 Microbeam diffraction (MBD), 306 Microdiffraction, 447–448 MIDAS, 381 Middle of reflection domain, 539 Minimal domain, 166 Minimization function, 271 Minimum function, 241 MIR (multiple isomorphous replacement), 271 phases, 250 MIRAS (multiple isomorphous replacement with anomalous scattering), 233 Mirror image, 267 Mirror plane horizontal, 289 vertical, 289 MM2/MMP2, 384 MMS-X, 382 Modified peaklist optimization, 231 Modified tangent formula, 229 Modulated phases, 452 Modulated smectic-A phase, 455 Modulated smectic-C phase, 455 Modulated structure, 487 Modulation function, 487 Module, 74 over a group ring, 25 Molbuild, 384 Molecular averaging by noncrystallographic symmetry, 85 Molecular axis, 467 Molecular dynamics, 384 Molecular-dynamics refinement, 479 Molecular envelope, 32, 61, 85–86 Molecular mechanics, 379

SUBJECT INDEX Molecular model building, 476 Molecular modelling, 6, 360 Molecular orientational order, 449 Molecular origin, 261 Molecular replacement, 235, 248, 260–261, 274 real-space, 261 Molecular rotation, 460 Molecular structure, position of a known, 259 Molecular surfaces, hydrophobic and electrostatic properties of, 380 Moment-generating functions, 36, 95 Moment-generating properties, 94 of F , 63 Moments of a distribution, 94 Monochromatic Laue techniques, 439 Monochromators, 563 polarizing, 560 Monoclinic family, 103 Monoclinic groups, 82 Monoclinic space groups, 103 Mosaic crystals, 534 Mosaic model, 561 Mosaicity, 306 Motif, 41–43 Motif distribution, 59 Multicritical point, 455 Multidimensional algorithms, 55 Multidimensional Cooley–Tukey factorization, 55–56, 74 Multidimensional factorization, 55 Multidimensional Good factorization, 76 Multidimensional isomorphous replacement (MDIR), 478 Multidimensional prime factor algorithm, 56 Multidimensional structure, 380 Multi-index, 27, 36–37 Multi-index notation, 27 Multiple diffuse scattering, 445 Multiple isomorphous replacement (MIR), 271 phases, 250 Multiple isomorphous replacement with anomalous scattering (MIRAS), 233 Multiple reciprocal cell, 106 Multiple scattering, 443 Multiple-wavelength method, 274 Multiplexing, generalized, 82 Multiplexing–demultiplexing, 79 Multiplication by a monomial, 26 Multiplication of distributions, 32 Multiplicative group of units, 53 Multiplicative reindexing, 57 Multiplicity, 101, 167 Multiplicity corrections, 242 Multiplier functions, 40 Multipliers, 42 Lagrange, 87, 97, 356 Multi-Slater determinant wavefunction, 18 Multislice, 284, 555 calculations, 447 computer programs, 447 Multislice recurrence relation, 555 Multivariate Gaussian, 43 Multivariate Hermite functions, 37, 92 Multivariate least-squares method, 88 Multiwavelength anomalous diffraction (MAD), 233 Mutually reciprocal bases, 2–3 computational and algebraic aspects of, 4 Mutually reciprocal triads, 2 Myoglobin, 242, 264, 269

n-dimensional embedding method, 487 n-shift rule, 90 n-torus non-standard, 41 standard, 40 Natural coordinate system, 348 Negative peaks, 243 Nematic order biaxial, 452 uniaxial, 452 Nematic phase, 449, 451 Nested algorithms, 58 Nested neighbourhood principle, 218 Nesting, 57 of Winograd small FFTs, 56 Net distortions, 429 Neutron absorption, 558 Neutron beams, focusing of, 563 Neutron crystallography, 275 Neutron diffraction, 463 dynamical theory of, 557 Neutron flight time, 563 Neutron interferometry, 563 Neutron refraction, 557 Neutron scattering effect of external fields, 562 inelastic, 404 very-small-angle, 563 Neutron scattering lengths, 275 Neutron spin, 558 Neutron topography, 564 Neutrons, 275 thermal, 275 Nodes of standing waves, 541 Non-absorbing case, 536 Non-absorbing crystals, 544–546 comparison of dynamical and geometrical theory, 547 Nonbonded interatomic distances, 476 Non-classical crystallography, 292 Noncrystalline fibres, 467, 469, 474 Noncrystallographic asymmetric unit, 244 Noncrystallographic rotation elements, translational components of, 248 Noncrystallographic rotational symmetry, 250 Noncrystallographic symmetry, 62, 248–249 apparent, 255 molecular averaging by, 85 phase improvement using, 261 proper, 248 Noncrystallographic symmetry element, position of, 259–260 Non-cyclic (odd) permutation of coordinates, 102–103, 107 Non-ideal distributions, 199, 203 Non-ideal probability density functions, 208 of |E|, 200 Non-independent variables, 195 Non-linear transformations, 254 Non-periodic system, 414 Non-primitive lattice, 66–67 Non-spin-flip scattering lengths, 559 Non-standard coordinates, 41 Non-standard lattice, 40 Non-standard n-torus, 41 Non-standard period lattice, 42 Norm Euclidean, 26 on a vector space, 28 Normal equations, 88 Normal matrix, 90 Normal subgroup, 64–65

587

Normalization constant, 272, 274 Normalized structure factors, 215, 227, 236 Normalizer, 65 Normed space, 28 complete, 28 Notation, multi-index, 27 Nuclear matter, density of, 2 Numerical computation of discrete Fourier transform, 49 Numerically oriented languages, 102 Nussbaumer–Quandalle algorithm, 57 O, 384 Oblique projections, 317 Observation plane, 310 Observational equations, 88 Obverse setting, 106 Occupancy factors, 271 Occupied natural spin orbitals, 18 Odd (non-cyclic) permutation of coordinates, 102–103, 107 Offset, 51 One-centre orbital products, 18 One-centre terms, 18 One-dimensional lattice, 454 One-particle potential (OPP) model, 23 One-phase structure seminvariants, first rank, 224 One-wavelength techniques, 233 Operational calculus, 28 Operations on distributions, 31 OPP (one-particle potential) model, 23 Optic modes, 402 Optical diffractometer, 314 Optical isomers, 267 Optical rotation, 268 Optical transforms, 418 Optimal defocus, 311 Orbit decomposition, 64, 67, 69–70 formula, 64, 68 Orbit exchange, 65, 72–73 Orbit of k, 165 Orbital products, 17 one-centre, 18 two-centre, 18 Orbits, 64, 67–68 Order parameter, 451 Order–disorder, 417 Orientational disorder, 436 Origin-shift vector, 107 Origin-to-plane distance, 353, 356–357 Origin(s) allowed (permissible), 210 definition, 227 molecular, 261 removal from a Patterson function, 236 selection, 238 specification, 210 Ornstein–Zernike correlation function, 425 ORTEP, 380 Orthoaxial projection, 316 Orthogonal matrices, 361 Orthogonalization, 252 Orthographic projection, 369–370 Orthorhombic groups, 82 Orthorhombic space groups, 102 Overlap between two Pattersons, 250 Ps(u) function, 246 Pair probability, 415 conditional, 415 Pairwise sum, 385

SUBJECT INDEX Paley–Wiener theorem, 36, 98 Parabolic equation, 552 Parallel processing, 58 Parity of the hkl subset, 103 Parseval–Plancherel property, 49 Parseval–Plancherel theorem, 36, 45 Parseval’s identity, 61, 63 Parseval’s theorem, 34, 88, 386 with crystallographic symmetry, 69 Partial dislocations, 460 Partial net atomic charges, 385 Partial sum of Fourier series, 44 Partially bicentric arrangement, 208 Partially crystalline fibres, 471 Partially reflected wavefield, 547 Partially transmitted wave, 547 Patterson function(s), 61, 70, 235, 271, 444, 475 anomalous-dispersion, 248 contraints on interpretation of, 248 cylindrically averaged, 475 deconvolution of, 240 difference, 244–245 generalized, 409 interactions in, 235 isomorphous difference, 244 origin removal, 236 overlap between two, 250 second kind, 238 sharpened, 236 superposition, 241 symmetry of, 235 three-dimensional, 476 Patterson map, automated search, 321 Patterson peaks, 235 Patterson search, 245 Patterson synthesis, 265, 268–269 Patterson techniques, 6, 275 Patterson vector interactions, 239 Peaklist optimization, modified, 231 Pendello¨sung, 281, 539, 543–544, 562–563 spherical-wave, 549 Pendello¨sung distance, 540 Penetration depth, 546 Penrose rhomb, 505 Penrose tiling, 504 Period decimation, 47 Period lattice, 41, 59, 64 non-standard, 42 Period matrix, 42 Period subdivision, 46 Periodic boundary conditions, 400 Periodic continuation, 447 Periodic delta functions, 206 Periodic density function, 99 Periodic distributions, 41, 43, 59 and Fourier series, 40 Fourier transforms of, 41 Periodic lamellar domains, 413 Periodic weak phase objects, 313 Periodicity, 163 crystal, 59 Periodicity requirement, 8 Periodization, 26, 42, 51 and sampling, duality between, 42 Permissible origins, 210 Permissible symmetry, 99 Permutation of coordinates cyclic (even), 102–103, 107 non-cyclic (odd), 102–103, 107 Permutation operators, 103 Permutation tensors, 349

Perpendicular (internal, complementary) space, 487 Perspective, 368–370 Perturbation theory, first-order, 353 Phase angles, 264–265 Phase change, 268 Phase circles, 265 Phase determination, 265 ab initio, 261 direct, in electron crystallography, 320 statistical theory of, 96 Phase-determining formulae, 217 Phase evaluation, 264, 272, 275 Phase extension, 261 Phase-grating approximation, 556 Phase improvement, 261 using noncrystallographic symmetry, 261 Phase information, 274 from electron micrographs, 322 Phase invariant sums, 322 Phase-object approximation, 280, 445 Phase problem, 474 Bayesian statistical approach, 98 Phase relationships quartet, 220 quintet, 222 Phase restriction, 68 Phase shift, 26, 51 Phase transformations, polytypic, 425 Phases assignment of one or more, 227 best, 272 from multiple isomorphous replacement, 250 least-squares determination of, 229 linearly semidependent, 212 refinement of, 229 Phason flips, 507 Phenomenological absorption coefficients, 281 PHIGS (Programmers’ Hierarchical Interactive Graphics System), 361 Phonon absorption, 404 Phonon dispersion relations, 405 Phonon emission, 404 Phonon scattering, 446 Phonons, 400 Physical (external, parallel) space, 487 Picture space, 368, 370, 376 Pipelining, 58 Pisot numbers, 491 Pixel, 374 Plancherel’s theorem, 40 Plane of polarization, 268 Plane-wave dynamical theory, 538 Planes, 349 Gaussian, general, 356 least-squares, 353 least-squares, proper, 355 Plasmon scattering, 444 Plasmons bulk, excitation of, 278 surface, 278 PLUTO, 381 Point density, 505 Point groups, 163 average multiples for, 193 closed, 248 holohedral, 166 Point-group determination, 292 Point-group operators, 100, 108 Point-group symmetry of reciprocal lattice, 99 Point-group tables, 290 Poisson kernel, 45

588

Poisson summation formula, 42 Polar space, 253 Polarization, plane of, 268 Polarization vector, 11, 558 Polarizing monochromators, 560 Polycrystal electron-diffraction patterns, 308 Polycrystalline fibres, 467, 469, 474 Polycrystalline materials, diffuse scattering from, 441 Polymer crystallography, 466 Polymer electron crystallography, 466 Polynomial growth functions of, 40 locally summable function of, 39 Polynomial transforms, 57 Polynomials Chinese remainder theorem for, 54, 77 cyclotomic, 54 Polyoma virus, 262 Polypeptide fold, chemical correctness of, 261 Polytype, 295 Polytypic phase transformations, 425 Population parameter, 14 Position of a known molecular structure, 259 Positional order, long-range, 449 Positive peaks, 243 Positivity criterion, 275 Potassium permanganate, 268 Potential energy of a crystal, 401 Potential-energy minima, 379 Poynting vector, 551 Pretransitional lengthening of correlation lengths, 453 Prime factor algorithm, 50–51 multidimensional, 56 Primitive basis, 163 Primitive coefficients, 167 Primitive lattice, 66 Primitive root mod p, 53 Principal axes, 113 Principal-axis convergent-beam electrondiffraction pattern symmetries, 296 Principal central projections and sections, 62 Principal projections, 71 Principal sections and projections, 63 Probability a posteriori, 423 a priori, 415 Probability densities, convolution of, 94 Probability density distributions, 192 ideal, 195 Probability density functions, 199 non-ideal, 208 of |E|, non-ideal, 200 Probability density of samples for images, 315 Probability theory, 94 analytical methods of, 94 Probability trees, 424 Processing X-ray fibre diffraction data, 472 Product function, 241 Programmers’ Hierarchical Interactive Graphics System (PHIGS), 361 Projected charge-density approximation, 283 Projected glide line, 289 Projection approximation, 286, 553 Projection operator, 554 Projection(s), 26 and sections, principal central, 62 bounded, 63, 85 centrosymmetric, 242 oblique, 317 of symmetric objects, 317

SUBJECT INDEX Projection(s) orthoaxial, 316 orthographic, 369–370 tilt, 321 Projector, 65 Prolate spheroidal wavefunctions, 38 Propagation direction, 537 Propagation equation, 534 Proper least-squares plane, 355 Proper noncrystallographic symmetry, 248 Proper rotation, 108, 113 Protein crystallography, 268 Protein crystals, 269 Proteins ab initio direct phasing of, 231 electron crystallography of, 321 PRXBLD, 384 Pseudo-distances, 28 Pseudorotation, 379 Pseudotranslational symmetry, 220 Punched-card machines, 71 Pure imaginary transforms, 80 Quartet phase relationships, 220 Quasilattice, 491 Quasi-long-range order (QLRO), 450 Quasimoments, 22 Quasi-normalized structure factors, 216 Quasiperiodic order, 498 Quintet phase relationships, 222 R factor fibre diffraction, 480 kinematical, 483 Rader algorithm, 50 Rader/Winograd algorithms, generalized, 83 Rader/Winograd factorization, crystallographic extension of, 76 Radial dependence of atomic electron distribution, 12 Radial functions, 14 Radiation damage, 278 Radius of integration, 251 Radon measure, 30 Radon operator, 318 Random copolymers, 470 Random-start method, 229 Random-walk problem, 96 exact solution, 203 Rank of tensor, 5 Rapidly decreasing functions, 37–38 Raster-graphics devices, 374–375 Rational approximant, 491 Real antisymmetric transforms, 82 Real crystal, 163 Real-space averaging, 261–262 of electron density, 250, 261 Real-space interpretation of extinction conditions, 291 Real-space molecular replacement, 261 Real-space translation functions, 260 Real spherical harmonic functions, 14 Real symmetric transforms, 81 Real-valued transforms, 79 Real waves, 548 Reciprocal axes, 348 Reciprocal Bravais lattice, 105 Reciprocal cell, multiple, 106 Reciprocal lattice, 2, 5, 42, 46, 59, 106, 164 point-group symmetry of, 99 weighted, 99–100 weighted, statistical properties of, 190

Reciprocal-lattice sum, 388 Reciprocal-lattice vectors, 386 Reciprocal metric, 4 Reciprocal space, 2, 386 symmetry in, 104 Reciprocal-space group, 162, 165, 176 Reciprocal-space procedures, 242 Reciprocal-space representation of space groups, 99 Reciprocal unit-cell parameters, 4 Reciprocity, 36 property, 35 relationship, 282 theorem, 37, 40, 42, 59, 98 Reconstruction algebraic method, 318 back-projection method, 318 by Fourier transformation, 318 direct, methods of, 317 iteration method, 318 three-dimensional, 315 three-dimensional, general case, 319 REDUCE, 106 Reduced orbit, 69 Reducibility of the representation, 67 Reducible matrix group, 163 Reference bases, choice of, 7 Refinement least-squares, 270 molecular-dynamics, 479 of phases, 229 restrained least-squares, 479 Reflected intensity, 547 Reflecting power, 543–544 Reflection case, 539 Reflection conditions, 68 Reflection domain, middle of, 539 Reflection geometry, 538, 540 Reflection high-energy electron diffraction (RHEED), 306 Reflections main, 488 satellite, 488 substructure, 216 superstructure, 216 Refraction, neutron, 557 Refractive index, 278 Regularization, 34 by convolution, 41 Reindexing additive, 57 multiplicative, 57 Relationship between structure factors of symmetry-related reflections, 100 Relationships between direct and reciprocal bases, 3 Relatively prime integers, 350 Relativistic effects, 279 Representation, irreducible, 163 Representation domain, 166 Representation method, 218 Representation of space groups in reciprocal space, 99 Representation of surfaces by dots, 375 by lines, 375 by shading, 375 Representation operators, 67, 73 Representation property, 64 Representative operators of a space group, 108 Repulsion energy, 385 Residual lattice, 46

589

Resolution image, 284 instrumental, 285 Restacking, 461 Restrained least-squares refinement, 479 RHEED (reflection high-energy electron diffraction), 306 Rhombohedral lattice, 83 Riemann integral, 27 Riemann–Lebesgue lemma, 35 Right action, 64–65 Right cosets, 64 Right representation, 64 Rigid-body motion, 19 Rigid-body superposition, 364 Rigid rotation, 8 Ring systems condensed, 379 fused, 384 Rings, 384 Robertson’s sorting board, 71 Rocking curve, 541, 545, 562 width at half-height, 544 width of, 540 Rocking microbeam diffraction (RMBD), 306 Root-mean-square error, 273 Rotation, 368, 371 improper, 108, 113 molecular, 460 optical, 268 proper, 108, 113 rigid, 8 screw, 19 X-fold, 288 Rotation axes, improper, 248 Rotation functions, 250 fast, 255 locked, 255 Rotation-function Eulerian space groups, 256 Rotation matrix, 255, 361 trace of, 253 Rotation operator, 6 inverse, 99 Rotation part of space-group operation, 100 Rotation vector, 363 Rotational filtering, 314 Rotational structure (form) factor, 437 Rotational symmetry, noncrystallographic, 250 Roto-inversionary axes, 288 Row–column method, 55 Saddlepoint approximation, 94–95 equation, 97 expansion, 96 method, 36, 97 SAED (selected-area electron diffraction), 285, 482 Sampling, 26, 42 and periodization, duality between, 42 considerations, 92 theorems, 61 Satellite reflections, 414, 488 Satellite tobacco necrosis virus, 250 Sayre’s equation, 84, 225 Sayre’s squaring method, 87 Scalar products, 5, 348 mixed, matrices of, 8 Scale, 368 Scale factors, 269 Scaling of heavy-atom-derivative data sets, 246 Scaling symmetry, 498

SUBJECT INDEX Scanning microbeam diffraction (SMBD), 306 Scanning transmission electron microscope (STEM), 282 Scattering classical Thomson, 10 coherent, 404 Compton, 405 critical, 453 diffuse, 443 forward, 552 from mesomorphic structures, 449 incoherent, 404 incoherent inelastic, 404 inelastic, 278, 443 inelastic neutron, 404 kinematical, 279 Laue, 432 low-angle, 419 magnetic, 11, 559 multiple, 443 of neutrons by thermal vibrations, 404 of X-rays by thermal vibrations, 402 phonon, 446 plasmon, 444 thermal diffuse, 278 X-ray, 58 X-ray, elastic component of, 10 X-ray, inelastic component of, 10 Scattering cross sections, 557 Scattering diagrams, 556 Scattering factors atomic, 10, 265 complex, 246 dynamical, 446 spherical atomic, 10 Scattering lengths, 557 atomic, 11 neutron, 275 non-spin-flip, 559 spin-flip, 559 Scattering matrix method, 312 Scattering operator, 15 Scattering power, 267 Scherzer defocus, 283 conditions, 311 Scherzer phase function, 311 Schro¨dinger equation, 278 Schur’s lemma, 67, 73 Scrambling, 51 Screen coordinates, 368, 370 Screw correlations, 21 Screw rotation, 19 Screw shifts, 429 Script, 384 Search directions, 87 Second Bethe approximation, 280 Second-order Born approximation, 11 SECS, 384 Section, 26 Sections and projections, 26, 62 duality between, 40 principal, 63 Selected-area electron diffraction (SAED), 285, 482 Selection rules, 93 Self-energy terms, 385 Self-Patterson, 92 vectors, 251 Self-rotation function, 92 Self-seeding, 482 Self-vectors, 242 Semi-direct product, 65

Semi-norm on a vector space, 28 Semi-reciprocal space, 553 Series-termination errors, 60, 84, 92 Seven-beam approximation, 556 Shadows, 376 Shake and Bake, 231 Shannon interpolation, 26, 48 Shannon interpolation formula, 46, 85 Shannon interpolation theorem, 61 Shannon sampling criterion, 46, 63, 85 Shannon sampling theorem, 45, 61, 262 Sharpened Patterson functions, 236 Shift of space-group origin, 104 Shift property, 49, 61 Short cyclic convolutions, 54 Short-range order (SRO), 415, 450 correlation functions, 429 in multi-component systems, 432 parameters, 444, 447 Warren parameters, 431 Sign conventions for electron diffraction, 279– 280 Simulated annealing, 474 Sine strips, 71 Single-crystal electron-diffraction patterns, 306 Single isomorphous replacement (SIR), 244, 265 difference electron density, 244 phasing, 244 Single isomorphous replacement with anomalous scattering (SIRAS), 233 SIR (single isomorphous replacement), 244 difference electron density, 244 phasing, 244 SIRAS (single isomorphous replacement with anomalous scattering), 233 Site-symmetry group, 167 Site-symmetry restrictions, 14 Size distribution, 415 Size effect, 432 Skew-circulant matrix, 53 Sliding filter, 378 Small-angle scattering approximation, 278 Small values of ot, 548 SMBD (scanning microbeam diffraction), 306 Smectic films, 456 Smectic-A phase, 449, 452–453 modulated, 455 Smectic-B phase, 449 Smectic-C phase, 453 modulated, 455 Smectic-D phase, 464 Smectic-F phase, 458 Smectic-I phase, 458 Sobolev space, 40 Software, Hall symbols in, 107 Solids electron band theory, 537 theory of, 9 Solution of dynamical theory, 540 Solvable space groups, 66 Solvent flattening, 84 Solvent regions, 62 Sound velocities, 406 Southern bean mosaic virus, 250, 262 Space groups, 66, 163, 264 cubic, 102 Eulerian, 254 finite, 164 hexagonal, 103 holosymmetric, 166 in reciprocal space, 150

590

Space groups monoclinic, 103 orthorhombic, 102 reciprocal-space representation of, 99 representative operators of, 108 rotation-function, 254 solvable, 66 symmorphic, 66, 163 tetragonal, 103 triclinic, 102 trigonal, 103 Space-group algorithm, 104 Space-group analyses of single crystals, 291 Space-group determination by convergent-beam electron diffraction, 285 Space-group notation, explicit-origin, 112 Space-group operation, 100 intrinsic and location-dependent components of translation part, 100 rotation part, 100 translation part, 100 Space-group origin, shift of, 104 Space-group-specific Fourier summations, 101 Space-group-specific structure-factor formulae, 101 Space-group-specific symmetry factors, 99 Space-group symbols computer-adapted, 102, 106, 112 explicit, 107–109 Hall, 107, 112, 115 Hermann–Mauguin, 103 Space-group symmetry, 475 Space-group tables, 104 Space-group types, 66 affine, 163 crystallographic, 163 Special Harker planes, 240 Special k vector, 165 Special position, 67 condition, 67 Special reflection, 68 Spectrometer, triple-axis, 405 Specular reflection, 456 Spherical angles, 252 Spherical atomic scattering factor, 10 Spherical atoms, 101 Spherical Dirichlet kernel, 60, 84 Spherical Feje´r kernel, 60 Spherical harmonic expansion, atom-centred, 14 Spherical harmonic functions, real, 14 Spherical harmonics, 258 Spherical interference function, 251 Spherical polar coordinates, 252 Spherical viruses, 317 Spherical-wave Pendello¨sung, 549 Spin-flip scattering lengths, 559 Spin orbitals, occupied natural, 18 Spiro links, 384 Spot boundaries, 474 Squarability criterion, 275 Square-integrable functions, 40 Square-summable sequences, 45 Squaring method equation, 84 SRO (short-range order), 415, 450 correlation functions, 429 in multi-component systems, 432 parameters, 444, 447 Warren parameters, 431 Stacked transformations, 373 Standard basis of Rn, 40 Standard coordinates, 41, 59, 67 Standard Gaussian function, 37, 39

SUBJECT INDEX Standard lattice, 40 Standard n-torus, 40 Standard uncertainty of distance from an atom to a plane, 355 Standing waves, 541 anti-nodes of, 541 nodes of, 541 Star arms of, 165 of k, 165 Starting models, 476 Statistical properties of the weighted reciprocal lattice, 190 Statistical theory of communication, 96 Statistical theory of phase determination, 96 Statistics crystallographic, 199 structure-factor, 102 Status of centrosymmetry, 108 Steepest descents, Booth’s method, 89 STEM (scanning transmission electron microscope), 282 Stereochemical information, 474 Stereoviews, 370 Stirling’s formula, 97 Structural connectivity, 377 Structure amplitude, 10 Structure determination by X-ray fibre diffraction analysis, 474 Structure factors, 6, 8, 10, 59, 264 calculation of, 68 for one-phonon scattering, 403 Fourier–Bessel, 468 from model atomic parameters, 86 geometric, 101, 120 in terms of form factors, 60 inequalities among, 217 joint probability distribution of, 97 normalized, 215, 227, 236 quasi-normalized, 216 tables of, 102, 120 trigonometric, 101, 120 trigonometric, even absolute moments of, 201 trigonometric, moment of, 200 unitary, 216 via model electron-density maps, 86 Structure-factor algebra, 70, 97–98 Structure-factor formalism, generalized, 23 Structure-factor formulae, space-groupspecific, 101 Structure-factor statistics, 102 Structure invariants, 210 Structure seminvariants, 211 algebraic relationships, 224 one-phase, 224, 227 two-phase, 225 Structure theorem, 34 for distributions with compact support, 41, 45 Sturkey’s solution, 553 Subcentric arrangement, 208 Subdivision and decimation of period lattices, duality between, 46 Sublattice, 46 Subspace sectioning, 379, 383 Substitutional disorder, 447, 471 Substitutional order, 446 Substructure reflections, 216 Sum function, 241 Sum of images, 240 Summable functions, 27 Summation convention, 5

Summation problem in crystallography, 45 Superposition methods, 240 Superposition of Patterson functions, 241 Superstructure, 417 Superstructure reflections, 216 Support, 26 compact, 26, 36, 43 of a distribution, 31 of a tensor product, 33 Support condition, 34, 43 generalized, 34 Surface effects, 455 Surface phase, 459 Surface plasmons, 278 Surfaces atomic, 486, 492 dispersion, 537, 555, 560 fractal atomic, 493 representation by dots, 375 representation by lines, 375 representation by shading, 375 van der Waals, 375, 381 Sybyl, 384 Symbolic programming techniques, 99 Symbolically oriented languages, 102 Symmetric Bragg condition, 287 Symmetric objects, projections of, 317 Symmetric rectangular density modulation, 497 Symmetry, 162, 253, 373 conjugate, 35, 39 conjugate and parity-related, 79 crystal, 64 crystallographic, 248 cyclic, 77 dihedral, 77 effects on Fourier image, 99 helical, 93, 317, 467, 475 helical, approximate, 469 Hermitian, 60, 69, 79 in Fourier space, 105 in reciprocal space, 104 noncrystallographic, 62, 248–249 noncrystallographic, molecular averaging by, 85 noncrystallographic, proper, 248 noncrystallographic, rotational, 250 of Patterson function, 235 permissible, 99 pseudotranslational, 220 scaling, 498 Symmetry elements extinction rules for, 291 individual, observation in CBED patterns, 288 Symmetry factors, 101 space-group-specific, 99 tables of, 99 Symmetry-generating algorithm, 107 Symmetry group, 162 Symmetry operation, 162 Symmetry property, 38 Symmetry-related reflections, relationship between structure factors of, 100 Symmorphic space groups, 66, 163 Synchrotron radiation, 264, 274 Systematic absences, 68, 105 Systematic errors, 351 Szego¨’s theorem, 43, 63, 98

591

Tangent formula, 218, 274 application of, 227 modified, 229 weighted, 220 TDS (thermal diffuse scattering), 278, 400, 407, 443 TEM (transmission electron microscope), 282 Temperature factors, 68, 269 anisotropic, 69 artificial, 87, 92 atomic, 18 isotropic, 68 Tempered distributions, 36, 38, 40, 45, 68 definition and examples of, 39 Fourier transforms of, 38–39 Tensor formulation of vector product, 6 Tensor-algebraic formulation, 2, 5 Tensor product, 27, 33, 50 of distributions, 33 of matrices, 49, 55–56 structure of, 72 support of, 33 Tensor product property, 35, 63, 93 of a Fourier transform, 71 Tensors, 5 anisotropic displacement, 6 antisymmetric, 6 libration, 19 metric, 4–5 permutation, 349 rank of, 5 translation, 19 translation, libration and screw-motion, 6 Test-function spaces, 29 Test functions, 38 Tetragonal family, 103 Tetragonal groups, 83 Tetragonal space groups, 103 Text processing, 106 Texture electron-diffraction patterns, 307, 326 THEED (transmission high-energy electron diffraction), 306 Theory of distributions, 25, 28 Theory of solids, 9 Thermal diffuse scattering (TDS), 278, 400, 407, 443 Thermal fluctuations, 452 Thermal neutrons, 275 Thermal streaks, 447 Thermotropic phase, 451 Thick crystals, 312, 545 Thin crystals, 546 comparison of geometrical and dynamical theory, 545 Thin films, 457 crystal defects in, 445 Thomson scattering, classical, 10 Three-beam approximation, 556 Three-beam inversion, 556 Three-dimensional electron-diffraction data, 324 from a single crystal orientation, 484 from two crystal orientations, 484 Three-dimensional Hermite polynomials, 22 Three-dimensional isotropic harmonic oscillator, 18 Three-dimensional Patterson function, 476 Three-dimensional reconstruction, 315 general case, 319 Three-dimensional structure determination by electron crystallography, 323

SUBJECT INDEX Three-generator symbol, 108 Through-focus series method, 312 Tie point, 536 Tilt projections, 321 Tilted hexatic phase, 458 Toeplitz determinants, 43, 63 Toeplitz forms, 43, 63 asymptotic distribution of eigenvalues of, 43, 63 Toeplitz matrices, 44 Toeplitz–Caratheódory–Herglotz theorem, 43 Topography, neutron, 564 Topological dual, 30–31, 38–39 Topological vector spaces, 28 Topology, 28, 38 general, 28 in function spaces, 28 metrizable, 28 not metrizable, 30 on D( ), 30 on Dk( ), 30 on E( ), 29 Torsion angles, 350 Total cross section, 11 Total-reflection domain, 546 width of, 541, 546 Trace of rotation matrix, 253 Transfer function, 49 of lens, 282 Transformation properties of direct and reciprocal base vectors and lattice-point coordinates, 100 Transformations affine, 105 compound, 371 direct-space, 104 linear, 7 non-linear, 254 of coordinates, 5, 7, 33 stacked, 373 to a Cartesian system, 3 viewing, 368–369, 371–372, 374 viewport, 368, 370 windowing, 368 Transformed variance–covariance matrix, 351 Transforms complex antisymmetric, 80 complex symmetric, 80 Hermitian-antisymmetric, 80 of an axially periodic fibre, 93 of delta functions, 39 optical, 418 polynomial, 57 pure imaginary, 80 real antisymmetric, 82 real symmetric, 81 real-valued, 79 Translate, 26 Translation, 19, 26, 368, 371 part of space-group operation, 100 part of space-group operation, intrinsic and location-dependent components of, 100 Translation, libration and screw-motion tensors, 6 Translation functions, 92, 258 general, 258 real-space, 260 Translation lattice, 163 Translation tensor, 19 Translation vector, 249 Translational components of noncrystallographic rotation elements, 248

Translational displacement, 19 Translational invariance, 554 Translations, conversion to phase shifts, 35 Transmission case, 538 Transmission electron microscope (TEM), 282 Transmission geometry, 538–540 intensities of plane waves in, 541 Transmission high-energy electron diffraction (THEED), 306 Transposition formula, 75 for intermediate results, 72 Triads, mutually reciprocal, 2 Triangular inequality, 28 Triclinic groups, 82 Triclinic space groups, 102 Trigonal groups, 83 Trigonal space groups, 103 Trigonometric moment problem, 43 Trigonometric structure factors, 101, 120 even absolute moments of, 201 moment of, 200 Trigonometric structure-factor expressions, vectors of, 96 Triple-axis spectrometer, 405 Triple point, 455 Triplet relationships using structural information, 219 Triplets, search of, 227 Triply periodic, 535 Tunability, 275 Twiddle factors, 51, 55–56, 58, 75 Twins, 292 Two-beam approximation, 280, 553 Two-beam case, 536 Two-beam dynamical approximation, 326 Two-beam dynamical diffraction formulae, 281 Two-centre orbital products, 18 Two-centre terms, 18 Two-dimensional disorder, 425 Two-dimensional hexatic phase, 457 Two-phase structure seminvariants, first rank, 225 Two-wavelength method, 275 Type of rotation (proper or improper), 108 Uni-arm k vector, 167 Uniaxial nematic order, 452 Uniformity, assumption of, 199, 205 Uniformizable space, 28 Unit cell, 165–166 Unit-cell parameters direct, 4 reciprocal, 4 Unit cube, 41 Unitary matrix group, 163 Unitary structure factors, 216 Unitary transformations, 36 Unscrambling, 75 Uranium, 269 Valence density, 13 van der Waals surfaces, 375, 381 Van Hove correlation functions, 405 Variance, 350 Variance–covariance matrix, 350 transformed, 351 Variances, 354 Vector interactions in a Patterson map, 239 Vector lattice, 163

592

Vector machines, 375 Vector map, 235 Vector overlap, 242 Vector processing, 58 Vector product, 349 components of, 349 tensor formulation of, 6 Vector radix Cooley–Tukey algorithm, 55 Vector radix FFT algorithms, 56 Vector relationships, 349 Vector-search procedures, 241 Vector space complete, 27 norm on, 28 semi-norm on, 28 topological, 28 Vectors angle between two, 348 components of, 5 cross-Patterson, 251 four-dimensional, 366 interatomic, 61 length of, 348 of trigonometric structure-factor expressions, 96 origin-shift, 107 polarization, 11, 558 Poynting, 551 rotation, 363 self-Patterson, 251 translation, 249 Vertical mirror plane, 289 Very-small-angle neutron scattering, 563 Vibrating crystals, 562 Vibrational–librational correlations, 437 Viewing transformation, 368–369, 371–372, 374 Viewport, 368, 370 Viewport transformation, 368, 370 Viruses, spherical, 317 Vitamin B12, 268 Waller–Hartree formula, 444, 446 Warren short-range-order parameters, 431 Wavefield, 535, 537 Wavefunctions, prolate spheroidal, 38 Wavelengths, 277 Wavevectors, 542 Weak enantiomorphic images, 238 Weak phase objects, 311, 481 periodic, 313 Weak-phase-object approximation, 283 Weighted difference map, 90–91 Weighted lattice distribution, 42 Weighted reciprocal lattice, 99–100 statistical properties of, 190 Weighted reciprocal-lattice distribution, 59 Weighted tangent formula, 220 Weighting factor, 271 Weights anisotropic, 355 Gaussian, 355 Width of rocking curve, 540 at half-height, 544 Width of total-reflection domain, 541, 546 Wigner–Seitz cell, 165 Wilson plot, 269 Window, 368, 371, 376 Windowing, 368, 370 Windowing transformation, 368 Winograd algorithms, 50, 54

SUBJECT INDEX Winograd small FFT(s) algorithms, 54 nesting of, 56 Wintgen letter, 167 Wintgen position, 167 Wintgen symbol, 167 World coordinates, 368 Wyckoff letter, 167 Wyckoff position, 100, 167 Wyckoff symbols, 67

X-ray analysis, 269 X-ray fibre diffraction analysis, 466 data processing, 472 structure determination by, 474 X-ray scattering, 275 cross section, 452 X-ray topographs, 534 X-rays, 275 diffuse scattering of, 407 interaction with matter, 534

593

z buffer, 376 Zero-absorption case, 540 Zonal data sets view down the chain axis, 483 view onto the chain axes, 483 Zone-axis patterns, 286, 291 Zones and rows, average intensity of, 191

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.B: Reciprocal Space

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.A: Space Group Symmetry

International Tables for Crystallography, Symmetry Relations between Space Groups

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.F: Crystallography of Biological Macromolecules

International Tables for Crystallography: Subperiodic Groups

International Tables for Crystallography, Mathematical, Physical and Chemical Tables

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.C: Mathematical, physical and chemical tables

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.D: Physical properties of crystals(527)

International Tables for Crystallography: Physical properties of crystals

Crystallography

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.G: Definition and Exchange of Crystallographic Data

Crystallography

Reciprocal Constructions

Reciprocal Arcs

Crystallography

Crystallography

Crystallography

The Basics of Crystallography and Diffraction: Third Edition (International Lunion of Crystallography Texts on Crystallography)

Reciprocal Frame Architecture

Crystallography of Modular Materials (International Union of Crystallography Monographs on Crystallography)

Evolving Methods for Macromolecular Crystallography

Macromolecular Crystallography

Practise Tables (for children 7+)

For Space

Space for Capital, Space for States

Macromolecular Crystallography

Electron Crystallography

Incommensurate Crystallography

Real Tables

Fundamentals of Crystallography (International Union of Crystallography Book Series, No. 2)

Crystal Structure Analysis: Principles and Practice (International Union of Crystallography Texts on Crystallography)

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.B: Reciprocal Space

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.A: Space Group Symmetry

International Tables for Crystallography, Symmetry Relations between Space Groups

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.F: Crystallography of Biological Macromolecules

International Tables for Crystallography: Subperiodic Groups

International Tables for Crystallography, Mathematical, Physical and Chemical Tables

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.C: Mathematical, physical and chemical tables

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.D: Physical properties of crystals(527)

International Tables for Crystallography: Physical properties of crystals

Crystallography

International Tables for Crystallography, Vol.G: Definition and Exchange of Crystallographic Data

Crystallography

Reciprocal Constructions

Reciprocal Arcs

Crystallography

Crystallography

Crystallography

The Basics of Crystallography and Diffraction: Third Edition (International Lunion of Crystallography Texts on Crystallography)

Reciprocal Frame Architecture

Crystallography of Modular Materials (International Union of Crystallography Monographs on Crystallography)

Evolving Methods for Macromolecular Crystallography

Macromolecular Crystallography

Practise Tables (for children 7+)

For Space

Space for Capital, Space for States

Macromolecular Crystallography

Electron Crystallography

Incommensurate Crystallography

Real Tables

Fundamentals of Crystallography (International Union of Crystallography Book Series, No. 2)

Crystal Structure Analysis: Principles and Practice (International Union of Crystallography Texts on Crystallography)

Recommend Documents